Dell Poweredge-2500 -> Accéder au site Dell -> Accéder aux CODES PROMO et Bons de réduction Dell -> Voir d'autres manuels Dell Revenir à l'accueil

 

 

 

 
Additional Resources
Support History and Status Support History and Status
Check the status of a service call
Tools and Applications Tools and Applications
Personalized support on your desktop
Find Express Service Code
Dell Connect
Dell Forums (English only) Dell Forums (English only)
Talk with other customers in the Forum
Monitor & Display Monitor & Display
Get Support, Drivers and Manuals
Tools and Applications Juniper Product Support EOL
Juniper Network products - Important Information
 

 

-> Commander sur Dell.com, Cliquez ici

 

Autres manuels :

Dell

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 17-May-2013 20:56  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Ins..> 17-May-2013 20:56  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Product-support..> 17-May-2013 20:53  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Product-support..> 17-May-2013 20:53  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-2-Manuals-for-D..> 17-May-2013 20:52  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Product-support..> 17-May-2013 20:52  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Ins..> 17-May-2013 20:51  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-XPS..> 17-May-2013 20:51  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 17-May-2013 20:50  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 17-May-2013 20:50  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 17-May-2013 20:49  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Product-support..> 17-May-2013 20:49  2.9M 

[TXT]

 Dell-Product-support..> 15-May-2013 07:01  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Product-support..> 15-May-2013 07:01  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 15-May-2013 07:01  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 15-May-2013 07:00  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Ins..> 15-May-2013 07:00  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Pre..> 15-May-2013 07:00  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-XPS..> 15-May-2013 07:00  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Min..> 15-May-2013 06:59  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-W50..> 15-May-2013 06:59  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-XPS..> 15-May-2013 06:59  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 15-May-2013 06:59  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 15-May-2013 06:58  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Stu..> 15-May-2013 06:58  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 15-May-2013 06:57  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Stu..> 15-May-2013 06:57  2.2M

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 13-May-2013 11:57  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Product-support..> 13-May-2013 11:57  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 13-May-2013 11:56  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Product-support..> 13-May-2013 11:56  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Product-support..> 13-May-2013 11:55  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Lat..> 13-May-2013 11:55  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 13-May-2013 11:55  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 13-May-2013 08:04  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Pre..> 13-May-2013 08:02  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-XPS..> 13-May-2013 08:02  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Min..> 13-May-2013 08:01  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Ins..> 13-May-2013 07:43  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-XPS..> 13-May-2013 07:43  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Ins..> 13-May-2013 07:43  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 13-May-2013 07:42  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 13-May-2013 07:42  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Pre..> 13-May-2013 08:02  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-XPS..> 13-May-2013 08:02  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 13-May-2013 08:01  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Min..> 13-May-2013 08:01  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Ins..> 13-May-2013 07:43  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-XPS..> 13-May-2013 07:43  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Ins..> 13-May-2013 07:43  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 13-May-2013 07:42  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 13-May-2013 07:42  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Ins..> 13-May-2013 07:21  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Ins..> 13-May-2013 07:21  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Ins..> 13-May-2013 07:20  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Ins..> 13-May-2013 07:20  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Ins..> 13-May-2013 07:20  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Ins..> 13-May-2013 07:20  1.8M

[TXT]

 Dell-Product-support..> 12-May-2013 19:02  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Ins..> 12-May-2013 19:02  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Ali..> 12-May-2013 19:02  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 12-May-2013 19:01  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 12-May-2013 19:01  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 12-May-2013 19:00  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 12-May-2013 19:00  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Ins..> 12-May-2013 18:58  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Lat..> 12-May-2013 18:58  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Lat..> 12-May-2013 18:28  2.8M

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 12-May-2013 18:19  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 12-May-2013 18:19  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 12-May-2013 18:18  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 12-May-2013 18:18  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-XPS..> 12-May-2013 18:17  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Product-support..> 12-May-2013 18:17  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Lat..> 12-May-2013 18:17  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Product-support..> 12-May-2013 18:16  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 12-May-2013 17:43  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 12-May-2013 17:39  2.1M 

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 12-May-2013 12:35  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 12-May-2013 12:35  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 12-May-2013 12:34  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 12-May-2013 12:34  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 12-May-2013 12:33  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 12-May-2013 12:33  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Lat..> 12-May-2013 12:32  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 12-May-2013 12:32  3.5M 

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 12-May-2013 17:39  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 12-May-2013 17:39  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Lat..> 12-May-2013 17:38  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 12-May-2013 17:38  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Vos..> 12-May-2013 17:38  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 12-May-2013 17:37  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Ins..> 12-May-2013 17:36  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 12-May-2013 17:35  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 12-May-2013 17:35  4.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-XPS..> 12-May-2013 17:35  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Opt..> 12-May-2013 17:34  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 12-May-2013 17:34  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 12-May-2013 17:33  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 12-May-2013 17:33  2.0M 

[TXT]

 Dell-Drivers-for-Del..> 12-May-2013 12:05  4.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Product-support..> 12-May-2013 12:05  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Product-support..> 12-May-2013 12:04  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 12-May-2013 12:04  4.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Product-support..> 12-May-2013 12:02  4.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Drivers-for-Pow..> 12-May-2013 12:02  4.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 12-May-2013 12:01  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Product-support..> 12-May-2013 12:01  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 12-May-2013 12:00  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Product-support..> 12-May-2013 12:00  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Product-support..> 12-May-2013 11:59  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 12-May-2013 11:59  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 12-May-2013 11:59  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Product-support..> 12-May-2013 11:59  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-LCD..> 12-May-2013 11:58  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Product-support..> 12-May-2013 11:58  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 12-May-2013 11:57  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Product-support..> 12-May-2013 11:57  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 12-May-2013 11:56  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 12-May-2013 11:56  2.8M 
 Dell-Latitude-E6530-..> 10-May-2013 15:25  2.4M  
 Dell-Latitude-CPi-A-..> 10-May-2013 15:24  2.7M  
 Dell-Configurer-et-u..> 10-May-2013 15:24  2.7M  
 Dell-Latitude-D410-M..> 10-May-2013 15:24  3.0M  
 Dell-Symantec-Backup..> 10-May-2013 15:23  3.0M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-R510-..> 10-May-2013 15:23  3.4M  
 Dell-Studio-1735-Man..> 10-May-2013 15:22  3.1M  
 Dell-Latitude-D620-E..> 10-May-2013 15:21  3.7M  
 Dell-Latitude-E6430-..> 10-May-2013 15:21  3.4M  
 Dell-Inspiron-9400-M..> 10-May-2013 15:20  4.1M  
 Dell-Latitude-E6410-..> 10-May-2013 15:20  3.8M  
 Dell-Latitude-E6400-..> 10-May-2013 15:19  4.3M  
 Dell-Alienware-Area-..> 10-May-2013 15:19  4.1M
 Dell-PowerEdge-T710-..> 10-May-2013 14:23  2.9M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-T420-..> 10-May-2013 14:23  3.2M  
 Dell-UPS-500T-Manuel..> 10-May-2013 14:22  3.4M  
 Dell-PowerConnect-55..> 10-May-2013 14:22  4.5M  
 Dell-UPS-500- Englis..> 10-May-2013 14:21  4.6M  
 Dell-UPS-500T-Españ..> 10-May-2013 14:20  1.7M  
 Dell-OptiPlex-330-Ma..> 10-May-2013 14:20  2.2M  
 Dell-Inspiron-1520-E..> 10-May-2013 14:20  1.9M  
 Dell-Latitude-E6530-..> 10-May-2013 14:19  2.4M  
 Dell-Latitude-E6530-..> 10-May-2013 14:19  2.3M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-T605-..> 10-May-2013 13:46  2.8M  
 Dell-7330dn-Mono-Las..> 10-May-2013 13:41  2.8M  
 Dell-Alienware-X51-M..> 10-May-2013 13:41  2.7M  
 Dell-Comment-utilise..> 10-May-2013 13:41  2.7M 
 Dell-Latitude-D630-M..> 10-May-2013 11:17  4.7M  
 Dell-Precision-690-M..> 10-May-2013 11:16  3.2M  
 Dell-Latitude-E6400-..> 10-May-2013 11:16  3.9M  
 Dell-Precision-M40-M..> 10-May-2013 11:15  3.9M  
 Dell-Precision-360-M..> 10-May-2013 11:15  4.0M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-R320-..> 10-May-2013 11:14  4.4M  
 Dell-Precision-450-M..> 10-May-2013 11:13  4.6M  
 Dell-Intel-Active-Ma..> 10-May-2013 11:13  4.7M  
 Dell-OptiPlex-755-Ma..> 10-May-2013 11:12  5.5M  
 Dell-PowerVault-NX30..> 10-May-2013 11:12  5.6M  
 Dell-Precision-M4500..> 10-May-2013 11:10  6.1M  
 Dell-OptiPlex-SX280-..> 10-May-2013 11:10  6.0M  
 Dell-Latitude-E6400-..> 10-May-2013 10:30  3.2M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-T100-..> 10-May-2013 10:22  3.0M  
 Dell-Vostro-270s-Man..> 10-May-2013 10:21  3.1M  
 Dell-Precision-T7600..> 10-May-2013 10:21  3.2M  
 Dell-Precision-M4400..> 10-May-2013 10:20  3.3M  
 Dell-Precision-M4700..> 10-May-2013 10:20  3.4M  
 Dell-Precision-M4600..> 10-May-2013 10:19  3.4M  
 Dell-Precision-390-M..> 10-May-2013 10:19  2.0M  
 Dell-Precision-610-M..> 10-May-2013 10:18  2.3M  
 Dell-Manuel-d-utilis..> 10-May-2013 10:18  2.3M  
 Dell-Precision-M20-M..> 10-May-2013 10:17  2.8M  
 Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 10-May-2013 10:17  2.8M  
 Dell-Precision-370-M..> 10-May-2013 10:16  3.2M 
 Dell-PowerEdge-T100-..> 10-May-2013 10:22  3.0M  
 Dell-Vostro-270s-Man..> 10-May-2013 10:21  3.1M  
 Dell-Precision-T7600..> 10-May-2013 10:21  3.2M  
 Dell-Precision-M4400..> 10-May-2013 10:20  3.3M  
 Dell-Precision-M4700..> 10-May-2013 10:20  3.4M  
 Dell-Precision-M4600..> 10-May-2013 10:19  3.4M  
 Dell-Precision-390-M..> 10-May-2013 10:19  2.0M  
 Dell-Precision-610-M..> 10-May-2013 10:18  2.3M  
 Dell-Manuel-d-utilis..> 10-May-2013 10:18  2.3M  
 Dell-Precision-M20-M..> 10-May-2013 10:17  2.8M  
 Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 10-May-2013 10:17  2.8M  
 Dell-Precision-370-M..> 10-May-2013 10:16  3.2M  
 Dell-Latitude-E6400-..> 10-May-2013 10:16  3.2M  
 Dell-XPS-M1210-Owner..> 08-May-2013 10:57  2.9M  
 Dell-Windows-8-Manue..> 08-May-2013 10:54  5.1M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-R815-..> 08-May-2013 10:52  4.3M  
 Dell-Inspiron-1521-M..> 08-May-2013 10:51  2.9M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-R900-..> 08-May-2013 10:50  3.1M  
 Dell-Vostro-270-Manu..> 08-May-2013 10:50  3.2M  
 Dell-XPS-630-Manuels..> 08-May-2013 10:49  3.6M  
 Dell-XPS-M1730-Manue..> 08-May-2013 10:49  3.9M  
 Dell-Vostro-200-Manu..> 08-May-2013 10:48  4.5M  
 Dell-Vostro-410-Manu..> 08-May-2013 10:48  4.1M  
 Dell-Vostro-1700-Man..> 08-May-2013 10:47  4.8M  
 Dell-Inspiron-m301z-..> 08-May-2013 10:47  4.8M  
 Dell-Studio-Slim-Man..> 08-May-2013 10:45  5.1M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-R620-..> 08-May-2013 08:46  4.1M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-R200-..> 08-May-2013 08:46  2.6M  
 Dell-Inspiron-640M-M..> 08-May-2013 08:46  3.7M  
 Dell-Inspiron-600m-M..> 08-May-2013 08:45  2.6M  
 Dell-Studio-Desktop-..> 08-May-2013 08:44  2.7M  
 Dell-Vostro-1000-Man..> 08-May-2013 08:44  2.7M  
 Dell-Inspiron-15-Int..> 08-May-2013 08:44  3.0M  
 Dell-Alienware-Area-..> 08-May-2013 08:43  3.1M  
 Dell-DR4000-Manuels.htm 08-May-2013 08:43  3.4M  
 Dell-Alienware-M15x-..> 08-May-2013 08:42  3.3M  
 Dell-Latitude-XT2-Ma..> 08-May-2013 08:42  3.5M  
 Dell-Latitude-E5520-..> 08-May-2013 08:41  3.5M  
 Dell-OptiPlex-745-Ma..> 08-May-2013 08:40  3.9M  
 Dell-Inspiron-1525-M..> 08-May-2013 08:40  3.9M  
 Dell-Inspiron-One-23..> 08-May-2013 08:39  4.2M  
 Dell-Inspiron-One-23..> 08-May-2013 08:39  2.8M  
 Dell-Inspiron-510m-M..> 08-May-2013 08:38  3.2M  
 Dell-Inspiron-Duo-Ma..> 08-May-2013 08:38  3.0M  
 Dell-Vostro-1550-Man..> 08-May-2013 08:37  3.4M  
 Dell-Precision-T5600..> 08-May-2013 08:37  3.3M  
 Dell-Dimension-8300-..> 07-May-2013 22:03  2.5M  
 Dell-Latitude-Cpi-Ma..> 07-May-2013 22:01  3.2M  
 Dell-Alienware-Area-..> 07-May-2013 22:01  3.2M  
 Dell-Latitude-D620-M..> 07-May-2013 22:00  2.3M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-1950-..> 07-May-2013 22:00  2.2M  
 Dell-Precision-T5600..> 07-May-2013 21:30  3.1M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-R720x..> 07-May-2013 21:26  3.1M  
 Dell-Inspiron-500m-M..> 07-May-2013 21:26  2.8M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-R815-..> 07-May-2013 21:25  2.8M  
 Dell-Alienware-M15x-..> 07-May-2013 21:25  2.8M  
 Dell-Vostro-3450-Man..> 07-May-2013 21:24  2.8M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-R610-..> 07-May-2013 21:24  2.9M  
 Dell-Vostro-3750-Man..> 07-May-2013 21:23  3.0M  
 Dell-Studio-1555-15-..> 07-May-2013 21:23  3.1M  
 Dell-Manuel-de-maint..> 07-May-2013 21:22  3.0M  
 Dell-Latitude-E6420-..> 07-May-2013 21:22  3.1M  
 Dell-Inspiron-1520-M..> 07-May-2013 21:21  2.0M  
 Dell-Aztech-MDP3900-..> 07-May-2013 21:21  2.0M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-M905-..> 07-May-2013 21:21  2.0M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-400SC..> 07-May-2013 21:21  2.1M  
 Dell-Precision-M4500..> 07-May-2013 21:20  2.2M  
 Dell-Vizioncore-Manu..> 07-May-2013 21:20  2.1M  
 Dell-Inspiron-1520-2..> 07-May-2013 21:19  2.5M  
 Dell-Guide-Utilisate..> 07-May-2013 21:19  2.4M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-R510-..> 07-May-2013 21:18  2.7M  
 Dell-Manuel-d-Utilis..> 07-May-2013 21:18  2.4M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-300-M..> 06-May-2013 19:33  4.7M  
 Dell-Lifecycle-Contr..> 06-May-2013 19:32  4.3M  
 Dell-PowerVault-110T..> 06-May-2013 19:31  4.4M  
 Dell-Inspiron-620-Ma..> 06-May-2013 19:10  3.2M  
 Dell-Dimension-5100-..> 06-May-2013 19:10  3.4M  
 Dell-Manuels-et-docu..> 06-May-2013 19:09  3.7M  
 Dell-Manuels-et-docu..> 06-May-2013 19:09  3.5M  
 Dell-1130-Dell-1130n..> 06-May-2013 18:42  3.1M

Dell-Controleurs-RAID-Dell-PowerEdge-PERC-H310-H710-H710P-et-H810-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Laser-MFP-Dell-3333dn-et-3335dn-Guide-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-PowerVault-DL-Backup-to-Disk-Appliance-Powered-by-Symantec-Backup-Exec-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-XPS-015-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerVault-NX3300-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-INSPIRON-GUIDE-DE-REFERENCE

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerVault-Network-Attached-Storage-NAS-Guide-de-depannage

Dell-Commutateur-de-consoles-2161DS-Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-d-OSCAR-et-du-materiel

Dell-PowerEdge-T420-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-PowerEdge-C8000XD-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel

Dell-OptiPlex-755-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3200i-et-MD3220i-Guide-de-deploiement

Dell-Latitude-E5400-et-E5500-Guide-de-configuration-et-de-reference-rapide

Dell-Set-Up-Your-Computer

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-XPS-M1730-Manuel

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-M620-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Manuel

Dell-PowerEdge-C410x-Getting-Started-With-Your-System

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-SUSE-Linux-Enterprise-Server-10-Instructions-d-installation

Dell-Utilitaires-de-gestion-du-Dell-OpenManage-Baseboard-Management-Controller-Version%204.6-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-OpenManage-Server-Administrator-Guide-d-installation-de-la-version-7.1

Dell-Systeme-Dell-DR4000-Guide-de-l-administrateur

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge%20Red-Hat-Enterprise-Linux-6-x86_64-x86-Instructions-d-installation-et-informations-importantes

Dell-Integrated-Dell-Remote-Access-Controller-7-iDRAC7-Version-1.20.20-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Management-Plug-In-pour-VMware-vCenter-Version-1.5-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Projecteur-7700FullHD-Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Projecteur-Dell-1420X-1430X-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-FluidFS-NAS-Solutions-Guide-de-l-administrateur

Dell-PowerEdge-Express-SSD-PCIe-Flash-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Update-Packages-DUP-Version-7.0-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-PowerEdge-R720-et-R720xd-Guide-de-mise-en-route-Manuel

Dell-PowerEdge-R320-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R510-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Precision-M4400-Guide-de-configuration-et-de-reference-rapide

Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-SCSI-Dell-EqualLogic-PS-Series-a-clusters-de-basculement-Microsoft-Windows-Server-Guide-d-installation-et-de-depannage-du-materie

Dell-PowerEdge-C410x-Guide-de-mise-en-route-du-systeme

Dell-Moniteur-a-ecran-plat-Dell-U2713HM-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Moniteur-a-Dell-P1913-P1913S-P2213

Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-du-moniteur-Dell-E1913S-E1913-E2213

Dell-Systems-Service-and-Diagnostics-Tools-Version-7.0-Guide-d-installation-rapide

Dell-Moniteur-a-Dell-S2740L-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-INSPIRON-GUIDE-DE-CONFIGURATION

Dell-Dimension-Serie-8300

Dell-PowerEdge-R820-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-PowerEdge-C8000-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel-manuel

Dell-OpenManage-Server-Administrator-Version-7.1-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-PowerEdge-M1000e-M915-M910-M820-M710HD-M710-M620-M610x-M610-M520-et-M420-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-OpenManage-Server-Administrator-Version-7.0-Guide-d-installation

Dell-Inspiron-15R-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerVault-NX3200-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-PowerEdge-RAID-Controller-PERC-S110-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-FluidFS-NAS-Solutions-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-Micrologiciel-Dell-Chassis-Management-Controller-Version-4-1-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-PowerVault-MD3260-3260i-3660i-3660f-3060e-Storage-Arrays-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-Vostro-470-Manuel-du-proprietaire

/Dell-Systeme-Dell-PowerVault-NX3500-Guide-de-l-administrateur

Dell-Latitude-E6420-XFR-Guide-technique

Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-du-moniteur-S2240M-S2340M

Dell-Systemes-Dell-DR4000-Manuel-du-proprietaire-manuel

Dell-PowerEdge-T320-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-Precision-Workstation-T3600-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-DR4000-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerEdge-R420-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-PowerEdge-C8220-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel-manuel

Dell-Vostro-470-Owner-s-Manual

Dell-Projecteur-Dell-M110-Guide-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Upgrading-to-BackupExec-2012-PowerVault-DL-Backup-to-Disk-Appliance

Dell-PowerVault-NX3300-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerConnect-5500-Series-CLI-Reference-Guide

Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3260-Series-Guide-de-deploiement

Dell-Inspiron-One-2020-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-XPS-14-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-1900-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-M620-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerEdge-R815-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerEdge-R720-and-R720xd-Owner-s-Manual

Dell-Micrologiciel-Dell-Chassis-Management-Controller-Version-4.0-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Inspiron-17R-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Manuel

Dell-Inspiron-One-2020-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-C5220-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel

Dell-Inspiron-660s-Manuel-du-proprietaire-manuel

Dell-PowerEdge-R820-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Vostro-270-Manuel-du-proprietaire-manuel

Dell-Systeme-Dell-PowerEdge-C6220-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-14R-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Guide-de-l-Utilisateur-de-l-Ecran-Large-Dell-IN1940MW

Dell-Moniteur-a-Dell-S2440L-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Alienware-X51-Owner-s-Manual

Dell-ALIENWARE-M17x-MOBILE-MANUAL

Dell-Emplacement-des-cavaliers-de-la-carte-systeme-des-systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R310-Mise-a-jour-des-informations

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-6950-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Alienware-M17x-R4-Owner-s-Manual

Dell-XPS-13-Owner-s-Manual

Dell-HBA-SAS-Dell-PowerEdge-6-Gb-s-et-Internal-Tape-Adapter-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R910-Mise-a-jour-des-informations

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T610-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R420-Manuel-du-proprietaire

/Dell-PowerEdge-R905-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Imprimantes-laser-Dell-2350d-et-Dell-2350dn

Dell-XPS-430-Guide-de-reference-rapide

Dell-PowerEdge-RAID-Controller-PERC-H700-et-H800-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Lifecycle-Controller-2-Version-1.00.00-User-s-Guide

Dell-OpenManage-Server-Administrator-Version-7.0-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Solutions-NAS-Dell-FluidFS-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Manue

Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-Dell-V525w

Dell-XPS-13-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Adaptateurs-Brocade-Manuel-d-installation-et-de-reference

Dell-FluidFS-NAS-Solutions-NX3600-NX3610-Guide-de-deploiement

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T410-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Latitude-ST-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Manuel

Dell-OptiPlex-360-Guide-de-configuration-et-de-reference-rapide

Dell-PowerEdge-R810-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel

Dell-Guide-d-installation-des-systemes-Dell-PowerVault-Modular-Disk-3000

Dell-Imprimante-laser-Dell-2230d-Guide-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-C6105-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel

Dell-Imprimante-personnelle-a-jet-d-encre-Dell-J740-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-2130cn-IMPRIMANTE-LASER-COULEUR

Dell-Guide-d-utilisation-de-la-station-de-travail-Dell-Precision-T3400

Dell-1235cn-Imprimante-Multifonction-Mode-d-emploi

Dell-Vostro-1310-1510-1710-et-2510-Guide-de-configuration-et-de-reference-rapide

Dell-Guide-d-utilisation-APC-Smart-UPS-750VA-1000VA-1500VA-100-120-230-V-CA-2U-Montage-en-baie-Onduleur

Dell-Guide-d-utilisation-Modele-TL24iSCSIxSAS%201Gb-iSCSI-a-SAS

Dell-Imprimantes-laser-Dell-1130-et-Dell-1130n

Dell-Precision-M6400-Guide-de-configuration-et-de-reference-rapide

Dell-M770mm-Color-Monitor-Quick-Set-up

Dell-Carte-de-gestion-reseau-AP9617-AP9618-AP9619-Manuel-d-installation-et-de-demarrage-rapide

Dell-Projecteur-Dell-1410X-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Imprimante-couleur-Dell-1350cnw

Dell-Manuel-d-utilisation-Dell-Inspiron-M5040-15-N5040-15-N5050-Manuel

Dell-Manuel-de-maintenance-Dell-Inspiron-620

Dell-3D-VISION-MANUEL-D-UTILISATION

Dell-Inspiron-600m-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R805-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R900-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-2970-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-C6145-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel

Dell-Inspiron-660s-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-P513w-User-s-Guide-Francais-manuel

Dell-Inspiron-660-manuels

Dell-Serveur-de-sauvegarde-sur-disque-Dell-PowerVault-DL-optimise-par-CommVault-Simpana-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-P513w-User-s-Guide-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-manuel

Dell-Precision-Workstation-T1650-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-ALIENWARE-M17x-MANUEL-DE-L-ORDINATEUR-PORTABLE

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-de-Dell-PowerEdge-M905-M805-M600-et-M605

Dell-Inspiron-One-2330-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Dimension-1100-B110-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Vostro-270-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T320-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Station-de-travail-mobile-Dell-Precision-M4700-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-XPS-8500-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-1230c-Imprimante-laser-couleur-mode-d-emploi-Manuel

Dell-Client-Management-Manuel

Dell-Studio-XPS-Setup-Guide-Manue

Dell-Adaptateur-hote-Dell-PCIe-SCSI-Ultra320-monocanal-Guide-d-utilisation-Manuel

Dell-INSPIRON-DUO-SETUP-GUIDE-Manuel

Dell-INSPIRON-DUO-GUIDE-DE-CONFIGURATION-Manuel

Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-Dell-Inspiron-M4040-14-N4050-Manuel

Dell-Guide-de-l-administrateur-de-Dell-PowerVault-705N-Manuel

Dell-Vostro-420-220-220s-Guide-de-Configuration-et-de-Reference-Rapide-Manuel

Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3660f-Series-Guide-de-deploiement-Manuel

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerVault-Network-Attached-Storage-NAS-Guide-de-l-administrateur-Manuel

Dell-Latitude-D430-Guide-d-utilisation-Manuel

Dell-Studio-XPS-Guide-de-configuration-Manuel

Dell-PowerEdge-C410x-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Precision-Workstation-T1650-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R300-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes%20-Dell%20PowerEdge-T110-II-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Vostro-200-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Mini-Tower

Dell-Inspiron-531-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-ALIENWARE-MANUEL-DE-L-ORDINATEUR-DE-BUREAU-Francais

Dell-PowerEdge-R520-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Projecteur-Dell-1201MP-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-PowerEdge-R910-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Dimension-C521-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T605-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Mobile-Jamz

Dell-Inspiron-530-Series-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Vostro-3460-Manuels

Dell-OPENMANAGE-POWER-CENTER-1.1-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-PowerVault-MD3660f-Storage-Arrays-Manuels

Dell™ Ekran Yöneticisi Kullanıcı Kılavuzu

Dell-PowerEdge-R620-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-PowerEdge-R520-Guide-de-mise-en-route

DELL-POWERVAULT-MD1200-et-MD1220-TECHNICAL-GUIDEBOOK

Console-de-gestion-multi-onduleurs-Dell-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-pour-l-installation-et-la-configuration

DELL-OPTIPLEX580-TECHNICAL-GUIDEBOOK-INSIDE-THE-OPTIPLEX-580

Dell-Inspiron-1720-manuels

Dell-PowerEdge-R720-et-R720xd-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-Vostro-1540-1550-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Latitude-E5430-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell™ S2240L/S2340L Monitör Kullanıcı Kılavuzu

Dell PowerEdge Sistemleri İçin Microsoft Windows Server 2012 Önemli Bilgiler Kılavuzu

Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-du-moniteur-Dell-S2240L-S2340L

Dell™ S320/S320wi Projektör Kullanım Kılavuzu

Dell-%20Vostro-270-Manuels

Dell-Vostro-3460-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Francais

Dell-Inspiron-9200-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Inspiron-2600-et-2650-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Axim-X30-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Vostro-2520-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-1721-Manuel

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T710-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Precision-Workstation-T5600-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Solutions-NAS-Dell-FluidFS-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-C5220-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel

Dell-Dimension-3000-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerEdge-R210-Technical-Guide

Dell-Inspiron-Manuels

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-Vostro-1700

Dell-Clavier-sans-fil-et-souris-Dell-KM713-Manuel-de-l'utilisateur

Dell-Systeme-de-navigation-GPS-Dell-Manuel-de-l'utilisateur

Dell-Logiciel-de-gestion-de-l-onduleur-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-pour-l-installation-et-la-configuration

Dell-Demarrage-rapide-du-moniteur-couleur-M990

Dell-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-de-la-station-de-travail-Dell-Precision-370

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-2800-Guide-d-installation-et-de-depannage

Dell-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-du-systeme-Dell-OptiPlex-SX280

Dell-Vostro-1440-1450-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Photo-Printer-540-Guide-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Streak-7-Francais-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Venue-Pro-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Imprimante-laser-personnelle-Dell-P1500-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerEdge-C5125-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel

Dell-Latitude-D630-Manuels

Dell-Vostro-400-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Mini-Tower

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T100-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-OptiPlex-9010-7010-compact-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerVault%20NX3200-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-1200-et-2200-Manuel-de%20l-utilisateur

Dell-Vostro-1540-1550-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-8600-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerVault-Baie-de-stockage-MD1120-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Dimension-E521-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-9100-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Vostro-3360-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T300-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-XPS-One-2710-manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Inspiron-1150-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Latitude-E5530-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-660-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Acceder-au-site-Dell

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-des-Dell-Latitude-E6420-et-E6420-ATG-Francais

Dell-OptiPlex-9010-Tout-en-un-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Vostro-3560-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T110-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-server-poweredge-m710-tech-guidebook_fr

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R420-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Latitude-5420-E5420-E5420m-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Latitude-E6320-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Systemes-Dell-Inspiron-8200-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-Francais

Dell-server-poweredge-r610-tech-guidebook_fr

Dell-server-poweredge-t710-technical-guide-book_fr

Dell-server-poweredge-m1000e-tech-guidebook_fr

Dell-server-poweredge-m610-tech-guidebook_fr

Dell-poweredge-r210-technical-guidebook-en_fr

Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWARE-M15x-MOBILE-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Axim-X51-X51v-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Beats-By-dr.dre-Manuel-et-Garantie

Dell-Dimension-3100C-Manuel-du-proprietaire

 

Dell-Precision-Workstation-T3600-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Vostro-200-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Slim-Tower

Dell-ALIENWARE-MANUEL-DE-L-ORDINATEUR-DE-BUREAU

Dell-OPENMANAGE-POWER-CENTER-1-1-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Vostro-360-Proprietaire-du-manuel

Dell-Dimension-3100C-Manuel-du-proprietaire

AlienwareArea-51Area-51ALX

Dell-Ordinateurs-de-Bureau-PC-Portables-Netbooks/AlienwareAurora-R3

AlienwareAurora-R4

lienwareAuroraAuroraALXAurora-R2

Chassis-RAID-Dell-PowerVault-MD3000i-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Axim-X50-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Axim-X51-X51v-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Baie-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD1000-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Boîtier-Dell-PowerEdge-M1000e-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Clavier-Axim-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Dimension-3100-E310-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Dimension-9200-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Dimension-E520-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Imprimante-laser-Dell-1100-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Imprimante-laser-de-groupe-de-travail-Dell-M5200-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Imprimante-laser-monochrome-Dell-5330dn-Mode-d-emploi

Dell-Imprimante-laser-multifonction-Dell-1600n-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-13z-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-17R-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-530s-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Inspiron-530s-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-700m-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-1100-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Inspiron-1525-1526-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-5100-et-5150-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Inspiron-9300-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-9400-E1705-Manuel-du-proprietaire

http://www.audentia-gestion.fr/Dell-Ordinateurs-de-Bureau-PC-Portables-Netbooks/Dell-Laser-Printer-1700-1700n-Manuel-du-proprietaire.htm

Dell-Laser-Printer-1710-1710n-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Laser-Printer-3100cn-manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Latitude-ST-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Latitude-XT3-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Liste-des-manuels-et-de-la-documentation-Dell

Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWARE-M11x-MOBILE-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWARE-M15x-MOBILE

Dell-MANUEL-D-ALIENWARE-M17x-MOBILE-francais

Dell-MANUEL-D-ALIENWARE-M17x-MOBILE

Dell-Manuel-d-utilisation-Dell-Inspiron-M5040-15-N5040-15-N5050

Dell-Manuel-d-utilisation-du-Dell-XPS-420

Dell-Manuel-de-l-Utilisateur-Dell-Latitude-E6220

Dell-Manuel-de-l-Utilisateur-Dell-Latitude-E6520

Dell-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-Dell-Latitude-E6320

Dell-Manuel-de-maintenance-Dell-Inspiron-N5110

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Dell-Vostro-1500

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Dell-XPS-M1330

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-des-Dell-Latitude-E6420-et-E6420-ATG

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-Inspiron-1721

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-XPS-M1730

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-XPS-One

Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3260i-Series-Guide-de-deploiement

Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3660i-Series-Guide-de-deploiement

Dell-Photo-All-In-One-Printer-944-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Photo-All-In-One-Printer-964-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Photo-All-In-One-Printer%20942-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Photo-Printer-720-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerEdge-C8220-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerEdge-R620-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerVault-MD3260-3260i-3660i-3660f-3060e-Storage-Arrays-Guide-de-l-administrateur

Dell-PowerVault-MD3260-3260i-3660i-3660f-3060e-Storage-Arrays-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerVault-NX400-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-Precision-Workstation-T7600-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Streak-7-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Streak-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Systemes-Dell-Inspiron-4150-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Systemes-Dell-Inspiron-8200-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-1950-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-M420-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R210-II-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R410-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R710-Manuel-du-proprietaire%20-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T310-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T420-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T620-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerVault-NX400-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Tout-en-un-Dell-Photo-924-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Vostro-360-Proprietaire-du-manuel

Dell-Vostro-3750-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Vostro-V131-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-XP-M1530-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-XPS-630i-Manuel-du-proprietair

Dell-moniteur-D1920-Manuel-du-proprietaire

DellDimension1100Series

Imprimante-Dell-Photo-All-In-One-Printer-922-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Imprimante-laser-de-groupe-de-travail-Dell-S2500-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Imprimante-personnelle-Dell-AIO-A960-Manuel-du-proprietaire

alienwareX51

Dell-Manuel-de-l-Utilisateur-Dell-Latitude-E6220

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T420-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-Inspiron-4150-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Streak-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-XPS-M1730

Dell-Photo-All-In-One-Printer-944-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-XPS-One

Dell-Clavier-Axim-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R410-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Manuel-d-utilisation-Dell-Inspiron-M5040-15-N5040-15-N5050

Dell-Manuel-de-maintenance-Dell-Inspiron-N5110

Dell-Inspiron-1100-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Imprimante-laser-de-groupe-de-travail-Dell-M5200-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Photo-Printer-720-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Imprimante-laser-Dell-1100-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Dell-Vostro-1500

Dell-XP-M1530-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-530s-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R710-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Inspiron-5100-et-5150-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Manuel-de-l-Utilisateur-Dell-Latitude-E6520

Dell-MANUEL-D-ALIENWARE-M17x-MOBILE

Dell-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-Dell-Latitude-E6320

Dell-Laser-Printer-3100cn-manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-530s-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-1950-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-des-Dell-Latitude-E6420-et-E6420-ATG

Dell-Imprimante-laser-monochrome-Dell-5330dn-Mode-d-emploi

Dell-PowerVault-MD3260-3260i-3660i-3660f-3060e-Storage-Arrays-Guide-de-l-administrateur

Dell-PowerVault-NX400-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3260i-Series-Guide-de-deploiement

Dell-PowerEdge-C8220-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWARE-M11x-MOBILE-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-M420-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerVault-NX400-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerVault-MD3260-3260i-3660i-3660f-3060e-Storage-Arrays-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3660i-Series-Guide-de-deploiement

Dell-Laser-Printer-1700-1700n-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-9400-E1705-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Tout-en-un-Dell-Photo-924-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Laser-Printer-1710-1710n-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Dimension-3100-E310-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-1525-1526-Manuel-du-proprietaire

 Dell-PowerEdge-R815-..> 08-May-2013 10:52  4.3M  
 Dell-Inspiron-1521-M..> 08-May-2013 10:51  2.9M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-R900-..> 08-May-2013 10:50  3.1M  
 Dell-Vostro-270-Manu..> 08-May-2013 10:50  3.2M  
 Dell-XPS-630-Manuels..> 08-May-2013 10:49  3.6M  
 Dell-XPS-M1730-Manue..> 08-May-2013 10:49  3.9M  
 Dell-Vostro-200-Manu..> 08-May-2013 10:48  4.5M  
 Dell-Vostro-410-Manu..> 08-May-2013 10:48  4.1M  
 Dell-Vostro-1700-Man..> 08-May-2013 10:47  4.8M  
 Dell-Inspiron-m301z-..> 08-May-2013 10:47  4.8M  
 Dell-Studio-Slim-Man..> 08-May-2013 10:45  5.1M  
 Dell-Windows-8-Manue..> 08-May-2013 10:45  5.1M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-R620-..> 08-May-2013 08:46  4.1M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-R200-..> 08-May-2013 08:46  2.6M  
 Dell-Inspiron-640M-M..> 08-May-2013 08:46  3.7M  
 Dell-Inspiron-600m-M..> 08-May-2013 08:45  2.6M  
 Dell-Studio-Desktop-..> 08-May-2013 08:44  2.7M  
 Dell-Vostro-1000-Man..> 08-May-2013 08:44  2.7M  
 Dell-Inspiron-15-Int..> 08-May-2013 08:44  3.0M  
 Dell-Alienware-Area-..> 08-May-2013 08:43  3.1M  
 Dell-DR4000-Manuels.htm 08-May-2013 08:43  3.4M  
 Dell-Alienware-M15x-..> 08-May-2013 08:42  3.3M  
 Dell-Latitude-XT2-Ma..> 08-May-2013 08:42  3.5M  
 Dell-Latitude-E5520-..> 08-May-2013 08:41  3.5M  
 Dell-OptiPlex-745-Ma..> 08-May-2013 08:40  3.9M  
 Dell-Inspiron-1525-M..> 08-May-2013 08:40  3.9M  
 Dell-Inspiron-One-23..> 08-May-2013 08:39  4.2M  
 Dell-Inspiron-One-23..> 08-May-2013 08:39  2.8M  
 Dell-Inspiron-510m-M..> 08-May-2013 08:38  3.2M  
 Dell-Inspiron-Duo-Ma..> 08-May-2013 08:38  3.0M  
 Dell-Vostro-1550-Man..> 08-May-2013 08:37  3.4M  
 Dell-Precision-T5600..> 08-May-2013 08:37  3.3M  
 Dell-Dimension-8300-..> 07-May-2013 22:03  2.5M  
 Dell-Latitude-Cpi-Ma..> 07-May-2013 22:01  3.2M  
 Dell-Alienware-Area-..> 07-May-2013 22:01  3.2M  
 Dell-Latitude-D620-M..> 07-May-2013 22:00  2.3M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-1950-..> 07-May-2013 22:00  2.2M  
 Dell-Precision-T5600..> 07-May-2013 21:30  3.1M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-R720x..> 07-May-2013 21:26  3.1M  
 Dell-Inspiron-500m-M..> 07-May-2013 21:26  2.8M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-R815-..> 07-May-2013 21:25  2.8M  
 Dell-Alienware-M15x-..> 07-May-2013 21:25  2.8M  
 Dell-Vostro-3450-Man..> 07-May-2013 21:24  2.8M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-R610-..> 07-May-2013 21:24  2.9M  
 Dell-Vostro-3750-Man..> 07-May-2013 21:23  3.0M  
 Dell-Studio-1555-15-..> 07-May-2013 21:23  3.1M  
 Dell-Manuel-de-maint..> 07-May-2013 21:22  3.0M  
 Dell-Latitude-E6420-..> 07-May-2013 21:22  3.1M  
 Dell-Inspiron-1520-M..> 07-May-2013 21:21  2.0M  
 Dell-Aztech-MDP3900-..> 07-May-2013 21:21  2.0M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-M905-..> 07-May-2013 21:21  2.0M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-400SC..> 07-May-2013 21:21  2.1M  
 Dell-Precision-M4500..> 07-May-2013 21:20  2.2M  
 Dell-Vizioncore-Manu..> 07-May-2013 21:20  2.1M  
 Dell-Inspiron-1520-2..> 07-May-2013 21:19  2.5M  
 Dell-Guide-Utilisate..> 07-May-2013 21:19  2.4M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-R510-..> 07-May-2013 21:18  2.7M  
 Dell-Manuel-d-Utilis..> 07-May-2013 21:18  2.4M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-300-M..> 06-May-2013 19:33  4.7M  
 Dell-Lifecycle-Contr..> 06-May-2013 19:32  4.3M  
 Dell-PowerVault-110T..> 06-May-2013 19:31  4.4M  
 Dell-Inspiron-620-Ma..> 06-May-2013 19:10  3.2M  
 Dell-Dimension-5100-..> 06-May-2013 19:10  3.4M  
 Dell-Manuels-et-docu..> 06-May-2013 19:09  3.7M  
 Dell-Manuels-et-docu..> 06-May-2013 19:09  3.5M  
 Dell-1130-Dell-1130n..> 06-May-2013 18:42  3.1M  
 Code-Promo-Dell.htm     04-Feb-2013 09:17  1.0M  
 Sony-NV-U83N-Manuels..> 02-Feb-2013 09:00  5.0M  
 Dell-Sansa-Clip-MP3-..> 27-Nov-2012 09:15  3.0M  
 Dell-TSi-500-TSi-400..> 27-Nov-2012 09:15  1.0M  
 Dell-Vostro-3360-Man..> 27-Nov-2012 09:10  2.6M  
 Dell-Inspiron-5100-e..> 27-Nov-2012 09:09  2.8M  
 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 27-Nov-2012 09:09  3.1M  
 Dell-1815dn-Manuel ..> 27-Nov-2012 09:09  3.5M  
 Dell-PowerVault-MD32..> 27-Nov-2012 09:08  1.7M  
 Dell-Multifunktionsp..> 27-Nov-2012 09:07  2.4M  
 Dell-PowerVault-MD32..> 27-Nov-2012 09:07  2.0M  
 Dell-Inspiron-1150-M..> 27-Nov-2012 09:07  2.8M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-C8220..> 27-Nov-2012 09:07  2.6M  
 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 27-Nov-2012 09:06  2.5M  
 Dell-PowerVault-MD32..> 27-Nov-2012 09:06  1.8M  
 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 27-Nov-2012 07:42  3.0M  
 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 27-Nov-2012 07:40  3.5M  
 Dell-Systemes-Dell-D..> 27-Nov-2012 07:40  3.8M  
 Dell-Console-de-gest..> 27-Nov-2012 07:40  3.9M  
 Dell-Logiciel-de-ges..> 27-Nov-2012 07:26  2.9M  
 Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWAR..> 27-Nov-2012 07:20  2.6M  
 Dell-Axim-X51-X51v-M..> 27-Nov-2012 07:18  2.5M  
 Dell-Dimension-9150-..> 27-Nov-2012 07:07  2.3M  
 Lien-Manuels-Utilisa..> 19-Nov-2012 07:12   92K  
 Dell-XPS-600-francai..> 19-Nov-2012 06:29  2.1M  
 Dell-XPS-430-francai..> 19-Nov-2012 06:24  1.8M  
 Dell-XPS-420-francai..> 18-Nov-2012 21:25  3.8M  
 Dell-XPS-410-Anglais..> 18-Nov-2012 21:25  3.4M  
 Dell-Dimension-9200C..> 18-Nov-2012 21:03  3.1M  
 Dell-Dimension-1000-..> 18-Nov-2012 20:57  2.9M  
 Dell-Alienware-Auror..> 18-Nov-2012 20:49  2.3M  
 Dell-Alienware-Area-..> 18-Nov-2012 20:45  1.8M  
 Dell-Alienware-Area-..> 18-Nov-2012 20:44  1.9M  
 Dell-Alienware-Area-..> 18-Nov-2012 20:44  1.9M  
 Dell-Alienware-Auror..> 18-Nov-2012 20:44  1.9M  
 Dell-Alienware-Auror..> 18-Nov-2012 20:43  2.3M  
 Dell-Alienware-Auror..> 18-Nov-2012 20:43  2.2M  
 Dell-OpenManage-Remo..> 14-Nov-2012 22:12  4.9M  
 Dell-OpenManage-Serv..> 14-Nov-2012 22:12  5.0M  
 Dell-Media-Center-Gu..> 14-Nov-2012 22:11  1.6M  
 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 14-Nov-2012 21:42  3.2M  
 Dell-E-Legacy-Extend..> 14-Nov-2012 21:40  2.8M  
 Dell-Dimension-XPS-M..> 14-Nov-2012 21:39  3.0M  
 Dell-Adaptateurs-Del..> 14-Nov-2012 21:39  3.1M  
 Dell-Axim-X3-Guide-d..> 14-Nov-2012 21:38  3.4M  
 Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 14-Nov-2012 21:38  4.1M  
 Dell-OpenManage-Serv..> 14-Nov-2012 21:38  3.7M  
 Dell-Latitude-D531-G..> 14-Nov-2012 21:36  4.7M  
 Dell-Latitude-D430-G..> 14-Nov-2012 21:36  4.4M  
 Dell-Inspiron-1501-M..> 14-Nov-2012 21:06  5.1M  
 Dell-Systemes-Dell-D..> 14-Nov-2012 21:05  2.6M  
 Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 14-Nov-2012 21:05  3.6M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-T110-..> 14-Nov-2012 21:04  3.6M  
 Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 14-Nov-2012 21:03  4.1M  
 Dell-XPS-M1710-Manue..> 14-Nov-2012 21:03  4.4M  
 Dell-Ordinateurs-por..> 14-Nov-2012 21:02  4.8M  
 Dell-Studio-GUIDE-DE..> 14-Nov-2012 21:01  5.5M  
 Dell-Inspiron-1420-M..> 14-Nov-2012 21:01  5.4M  
 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 14-Nov-2012 21:00  2.4M  
 Dell-Latitude-D830-G..> 14-Nov-2012 20:59  2.2M  
 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 14-Nov-2012 20:59  2.4M  
 Dell-Dimension-1100-..> 14-Nov-2012 12:08  3.6M  
 Dell-Inspiron-One-23..> 14-Nov-2012 12:08  3.7M  
 Dell-Manuel-de-maint..> 14-Nov-2012 12:07  3.8M  
 Dell-Photo-All-in-On..> 14-Nov-2012 12:06  4.0M  
 Dell-Carte-de-gestio..> 14-Nov-2012 12:05  4.0M  
 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 14-Nov-2012 12:05  4.3M  
 Dell-XPS-M1710-Manue..> 13-Nov-2012 09:56  3.4M  
 Dell-Inspiron-6400-E..> 13-Nov-2012 08:20  2.8M  
 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 13-Nov-2012 08:19  3.4M  
 Dell-Inspiron-1300-B..> 13-Nov-2012 08:19  3.1M  
 Dell-OptiPlex-9010-7..> 13-Nov-2012 08:18  1.7M  
 Dell-Laser-Printer-5..> 13-Nov-2012 08:18  1.9M  
 Dell-XPS-710-H2C-Man..> 13-Nov-2012 08:18  2.5M  
 Dell-Inspiron-1520-M..> 13-Nov-2012 08:17  2.9M  
 Dell-Inspiron-1721-M..> 13-Nov-2012 08:17  3.2M  
 Dell-Inspiron-One-23..> 13-Nov-2012 08:16  3.3M  
 Dell-XPS-M2010-Manue..> 13-Nov-2012 08:16  3.7M  
 Dell-Inspiron-1000-M..> 13-Nov-2012 08:15  3.9M  
 Dell-Inspiron-8500-G..> 13-Nov-2012 08:14  4.1M  
 Dell-Inspiron-640M-E..> 13-Nov-2012 08:13  4.5M  
 Dell-Axim-X50-Manuel..> 13-Nov-2012 08:12  4.7M  
 Dell-Inspiron-300m-G..> 13-Nov-2012 08:12  2.0M  
 Dell-Inspiron-XPS-Ge..> 13-Nov-2012 08:11  2.2M  
 Dell-Inspiron-5160-M..> 13-Nov-2012 08:11  2.4M  
 Dell-Inspiron-8600-G..> 13-Nov-2012 08:11  2.7M  
 Dell-PowerVault-DL20..> 13-Nov-2012 08:11  2.9M  
 Dell-Imprimante-pers..> 13-Nov-2012 08:10  3.0M  
 Dell-Vostro-410-Guid..> 12-Nov-2012 17:26  2.4M  
 Dell-Manuel-de-l-Uti..> 12-Nov-2012 17:07  2.6M  
 Dell-Dimension-serie..> 12-Nov-2012 17:07  1.9M  
 Dell-xps-13-l321x_se..> 12-Nov-2012 17:00  1.9M  
 Dell-XPS-13-Manuel-d..> 12-Nov-2012 16:59  1.9M  
 Dell-Manuel-de-maint..> 12-Nov-2012 16:59  2.1M  
 Dell-Inspiron-2600-e..> 12-Nov-2012 16:59  2.3M  
 Dell-PowerVault-NX33..> 12-Nov-2012 16:58  2.6M  
 Dell-Pave-Tactile-Sa..> 12-Nov-2012 16:58  2.6M  
 Dell-poweredge-r520-..> 12-Nov-2012 16:58  2.7M  
 Dell-Inspiron-5423-O..> 12-Nov-2012 16:57  2.7M  
 Dell-Inspiron-3500-P..> 12-Nov-2012 16:57  2.7M  
 Dell-Inspiron-3000-S..> 12-Nov-2012 16:56  2.7M  
 Dell-Vostro-270-Owne..> 12-Nov-2012 16:56  2.8M  
 Dell-server-poweredg..> 12-Nov-2012 16:56  2.9M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-C6220..> 12-Nov-2012 16:55  3.2M  
 Dell-2145cn-Impriman..> 12-Nov-2012 16:55  3.6M  
 Dell-Dimension-Serie..> 12-Nov-2012 16:54  3.8M  
 Dell-PERC-6-i-PERC-6..> 12-Nov-2012 16:53  4.1M  
 Dell-Configuration-d..> 12-Nov-2012 16:53  4.1M  
 Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWAR..> 12-Nov-2012 16:51  2.1M  
 Dell-ALIENWARE-M18x-..> 12-Nov-2012 16:51  2.2M  
 Dell-MANUEL-DE-L-ORD..> 12-Nov-2012 16:51  2.3M  
 Dell-Carte-de-Gestio..> 06-Nov-2012 18:45  2.0M  
 Dell-Studio-XPS-1640..> 06-Nov-2012 18:40  2.7M  
 Dell-Studio-XPS-GUID..> 06-Nov-2012 18:40  2.3M  
 Dell-Storage-Center-..> 06-Nov-2012 11:43  3.7M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-T300-..> 06-Nov-2012 07:33  2.3M  
 Dell-Manual-del-prop..> 06-Nov-2012 07:33  2.4M  
 Dell-Manual-del-prop..> 06-Nov-2012 07:32  2.5M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-Syste..> 06-Nov-2012 07:32  2.7M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-R710-..> 06-Nov-2012 07:31  3.0M  
 Dell-S2440L-Monitor-..> 06-Nov-2012 07:31  3.0M  
 Dell-P1913-P1913S-P2..> 06-Nov-2012 07:31  2.0M  
 Dell-U2713HM-Flat-Pa..> 06-Nov-2012 07:30  2.0M  
 Dell-U2713HM-Flat-Pa..> 06-Nov-2012 07:30  2.0M  
 Dell-E1913S-E1913-E2..> 06-Nov-2012 07:29  2.1M  
 Dell-Latitude-ST-Kul..> 06-Nov-2012 07:29  2.1M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-R310-..> 06-Nov-2012 07:29  2.4M  
 Dell-Storage-Center-..> 06-Nov-2012 07:29  2.7M  
 Dell-Latitude-XT3-Ow..> 06-Nov-2012 07:28  1.7M  
 Dell-Manuel-de-maint..> 06-Nov-2012 07:28  1.8M  
 Dell-Vostro-3450-Man..> 06-Nov-2012 07:27  1.9M  
 Dell-Inspiron-14z-N4..> 06-Nov-2012 07:27  2.0M  
 Dell-Module-de-venti..> 06-Nov-2012 07:27  2.0M  
 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 06-Nov-2012 07:26  2.6M  
 Dell-Points-d-acces-..> 06-Nov-2012 07:26  2.0M  
 Dell-Guide-de-l-util..> 05-Nov-2012 18:31  4.2M  
 Dell-Boitiers-de-sto..> 05-Nov-2012 18:14  1.4M  
 Dell-Studio-One-GUID..> 05-Nov-2012 18:14  1.5M  
 Dell-Vostro-1310-151..> 05-Nov-2012 18:14  1.6M  
 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 05-Nov-2012 18:13  1.9M  
 Dell-Modules-optique..> 05-Nov-2012 18:13  1.9M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-R900-..> 05-Nov-2012 18:13  2.2M  
 Dell-Latitude-E6520-..> 05-Nov-2012 18:13  2.0M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-2900-..> 05-Nov-2012 18:12  2.4M  
 Dell-Point-d-acces-D..> 05-Nov-2012 18:12  2.5M  
 Dell-B1260dn-Mode-d-..> 05-Nov-2012 18:11  2.7M  
 Dell-B1160-Dell-B116..> 05-Nov-2012 18:11  2.9M  
 Dell-OpenManage-Serv..> 05-Nov-2012 18:10  3.3M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-T310-..> 05-Nov-2012 18:10  3.6M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-R410-..> 05-Nov-2012 18:09  3.8M  
 Dell-Inspiron-Guide-..> 05-Nov-2012 18:08  1.3M  
 Dell-Guide-de-soluti..> 05-Nov-2012 17:29  3.8M  
 Adaptateurs-Brocade-..> 05-Nov-2012 15:05  3.6M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-R415-..> 05-Nov-2012 15:01  1.7M  
 Dell-PowerVault-MD-S..> 05-Nov-2012 15:01  1.7M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-2950-..> 05-Nov-2012 15:01  1.9M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-R710-..> 05-Nov-2012 15:00  1.9M  
 Dell-Server-PRO-Mana..> 05-Nov-2012 15:00  2.0M  
 Dell-PowerVault-NX20..> 05-Nov-2012 15:00  2.0M  
 Dell-PowerVault-MD11..> 05-Nov-2012 15:00  2.0M  
 Dell-SAS-RAID-Storag..> 05-Nov-2012 14:59  2.2M  
 Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 05-Nov-2012 14:59  2.2M  
 IOGEAR-Guide-d-insta..> 05-Nov-2012 14:58  2.3M  
 Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWAR..> 05-Nov-2012 14:58  2.4M  
 Dell-Guide-d-install..> 05-Nov-2012 14:58  2.8M  
 Dell-Inspiron-600m-M..> 05-Nov-2012 14:57  2.6M  
 Planification-du-dep..> 05-Nov-2012 14:57  3.1M  
 Dell-Vizioncore-vRep..> 05-Nov-2012 14:57  3.0M  
 Dell-Server-Deployme..> 05-Nov-2012 14:56  3.7M  
 Dell-Latitude-XT2-XF..> 05-Nov-2012 14:54  3.7M  
 Dell-Deploiement-de-..> 05-Nov-2012 12:15  2.6M  
 Dell-Setting-up-Your..> 05-Nov-2012 12:15  2.6M  
 Dell-PowerQuest-Data..> 05-Nov-2012 12:15  2.6M  
 Dell-Controleurs-Del..> 05-Nov-2012 12:14  2.8M  
 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 05-Nov-2012 12:14  2.9M  
 Dell-Guide-de-demarr..> 05-Nov-2012 12:13  2.9M  
 Dell-Guide-de-config..> 05-Nov-2012 12:13  3.0M  
 Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 05-Nov-2012 12:12  3.0M  
 Dell-1250c-Color-Pri..> 05-Nov-2012 12:12  3.0M  
 Dell-XPS-600-Manuel-..> 05-Nov-2012 12:11  3.3M  
 Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 05-Nov-2012 12:11  3.4M  
 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 05-Nov-2012 12:10  3.8M  
 Dell-Photo-All-In-On..> 05-Nov-2012 12:10  3.6M  
 Dell-Studio-XPS-Setu..> 05-Nov-2012 12:09  1.3M  
 Dell-XPS-13-Kullanı..> 05-Nov-2012 12:09  1.4M  
 Dell-XPS-13-Chinois-..> 05-Nov-2012 12:08  1.6M  
 Dell-XPS-13-Arabe-Ma..> 05-Nov-2012 12:08  1.5M  
 Dell-Setting-up-Your..> 05-Nov-2012 10:08  1.9M  
 Dell-Setting-up-Your..> 05-Nov-2012 10:08  1.9M  
 Dell-Vizioncore-vCon..> 05-Nov-2012 10:08  2.4M  
 Dell-Cartes-controle..> 05-Nov-2012 10:08  2.0M  
 Dell-Guide-de-l-util..> 05-Nov-2012 09:06  1.9M  
 Dell-Bandotheques-De..> 05-Nov-2012 09:03  2.1M  
 Dell-S320-S320wi-Pro..> 05-Nov-2012 09:02  1.7M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-RAID-..> 05-Nov-2012 09:02  2.4M  
 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 05-Nov-2012 09:02  2.2M  
 Dell-Vizioncore-vRan..> 05-Nov-2012 09:01  2.6M  
 Dell-Cartes-d-extens..> 05-Nov-2012 09:01  2.6M  
 Dell-Guide-technique..> 05-Nov-2012 09:00  3.2M  
 Dell-Onduleur-en-Bai..> 05-Nov-2012 09:00  2.7M  
 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 05-Nov-2012 08:59  3.7M  
 Dell-Setting-up-Your..> 05-Nov-2012 08:59  3.2M  
 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 05-Nov-2012 08:58  4.2M  
 Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 05-Nov-2012 08:58  4.1M  
 Dell-M5200-Carte-de-..> 05-Nov-2012 07:58  1.6M  
 Dell-XPS-L412z-Manue..> 05-Nov-2012 07:38  2.0M  
 Dell-XPS-GUIDE-DE-CO..> 05-Nov-2012 07:38  2.1M  
 Dell-Studio-XPS-8100..> 05-Nov-2012 07:38  2.1M  
 Dell-XPS-One-GUIDE-D..> 05-Nov-2012 07:37  2.2M  
 Dell-INSPIRON-Setup-..> 05-Nov-2012 07:32  2.3M  
 Dell-Inspiron-14R-M4..> 05-Nov-2012 07:32  2.4M  
 Dell-XPS-M1210-Owner..> 05-Nov-2012 07:32  2.7M  
 Dell-Inspiron-6000-M..> 05-Nov-2012 07:31  2.9M  
 Dell-Guide-de-l-util..> 05-Nov-2012 07:31  3.5M  
 Dell-PERC-6-i-PERC-6..> 05-Nov-2012 07:31  3.8M  
 Dell-Adaptateurs-Del..> 05-Nov-2012 07:30  3.9M  
 Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 05-Nov-2012 07:29  4.2M  
 Dell-DX-Object-Stora..> 04-Nov-2012 11:04  2.8M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-T620-..> 04-Nov-2012 11:04  2.8M  
 Dell-Guide-d-install..> 04-Nov-2012 11:03  2.9M  
 Dell-Dimension-XPS-G..> 04-Nov-2012 11:03  3.1M  
 Dell-Latitude-E6500-..> 04-Nov-2012 11:02  3.3M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-Expan..> 04-Nov-2012 11:02  3.5M  
 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 04-Nov-2012 11:01  3.6M  
 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 04-Nov-2012 11:01  3.7M  
 Dell-PowerVault-Data..> 04-Nov-2012 11:00  2.7M  
 Dell-PowerVault-Encr..> 04-Nov-2012 10:41  2.5M  
 Dell-APC-Smart-UPS-A..> 04-Nov-2012 10:41  2.6M  
 Dell-PowerVault-Data..> 04-Nov-2012 10:41  2.6M  
 Dell-PowerVault-Data..> 03-Nov-2012 21:47  2.0M  
 Dell-EqualLogic-Stor..> 03-Nov-2012 21:47  2.1M  
 Dell-Latitude-E4300-..> 03-Nov-2012 21:46  2.3M  
 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 03-Nov-2012 21:46  2.2M  
 Dell-OptiPlex-755-Gu..> 03-Nov-2012 21:12  5.7M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-C8000..> 03-Nov-2012 18:23  2.1M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-T420-..> 03-Nov-2012 18:19  2.1M  
 Dell-Commutateur-de-..> 03-Nov-2012 18:19  2.3M  
 Dell-INSPIRON-GUIDE-..> 03-Nov-2012 18:16  2.4M  
 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 03-Nov-2012 18:15  2.4M  
 Dell-XPS 15-Manuel-d..> 03-Nov-2012 18:15  2.4M  
 Dell-PowerVault-DL-B..> 03-Nov-2012 18:12  2.6M  
 Dell-Laser-MFP-Dell-..> 03-Nov-2012 18:12  3.2M  
 Dell-Controleurs-RAI..> 03-Nov-2012 18:11  3.4M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-Expre..> 03-Nov-2012 18:11  1.7M  
 Dell-FluidFS-NAS-Sol..> 03-Nov-2012 18:10  2.1M  
 Dell-Projecteur-Dell..> 03-Nov-2012 18:10  1.8M  
 Dell-Projecteur-7700..> 03-Nov-2012 18:09  2.2M  
 Dell-Management-Plug..> 03-Nov-2012 18:09  2.5M  
 Dell-Integrated-Dell..> 03-Nov-2012 18:09  3.1M  
 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 03-Nov-2012 18:08  2.6M  
 Dell-Systeme-Dell-DR..> 03-Nov-2012 18:08  3.6M  
 Dell-OpenManage-Serv..> 03-Nov-2012 18:07  3.3M  
 Dell-Utilitaires-de-..> 03-Nov-2012 18:06  3.8M  
 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 03-Nov-2012 18:06  3.9M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-C410x..> 03-Nov-2012 18:05  4.0M  
 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 03-Nov-2012 18:05  4.3M  
 Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 03-Nov-2012 18:04  4.6M  
 Dell-Set-Up-Your-Com..> 03-Nov-2012 18:04  4.6M  
 Dell-Latitude-E5400-..> 03-Nov-2012 18:02  4.7M  
 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 03-Nov-2012 18:02  4.9M  
 Dell-Dimension-Serie..> 03-Nov-2012 18:01  5.1M  
 Dell-INSPIRON-GUIDE-..> 03-Nov-2012 11:09  3.0M  
 Dell-Moniteur-a-Dell..> 03-Nov-2012 11:09  3.1M  
 Dell-Systems-Service..> 03-Nov-2012 11:08  3.1M  
 Dell-Guide-de-l-util..> 03-Nov-2012 11:07  3.1M  
 Dell-Moniteur-a-Dell..> 03-Nov-2012 11:07  3.2M  
 Dell-Moniteur-a-ecra..> 03-Nov-2012 11:06  3.2M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-C410x..> 03-Nov-2012 11:06  3.3M  
 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 03-Nov-2012 11:05  3.4M  
 Dell-Precision-M4400..> 03-Nov-2012 11:05  1.5M  
 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 03-Nov-2012 11:04  1.9M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-R320-..> 03-Nov-2012 11:04  1.5M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-R720-..> 03-Nov-2012 11:04  2.0M  
 Dell-Update-Packages..> 03-Nov-2012 11:04  1.9M  
 Dell-Micrologiciel-D..> 03-Nov-2012 08:46  2.9M  
 Dell-FluidFS-NAS-Sol..> 03-Nov-2012 08:45  3.0M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-RAID-..> 03-Nov-2012 08:44  3.2M  
 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 03-Nov-2012 08:44  3.0M  
 Dell-Inspiron-15R-Ma..> 03-Nov-2012 08:43  3.5M  
 Dell-OpenManage-Serv..> 03-Nov-2012 08:43  3.4M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-M1000..> 03-Nov-2012 08:42  3.7M  
 Dell-OpenManage-Serv..> 03-Nov-2012 08:42  3.7M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-C8000..> 03-Nov-2012 08:30  2.3M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-R820-..> 03-Nov-2012 08:30  2.0M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-C8220..> 03-Nov-2012 08:29  2.5M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-R420-..> 03-Nov-2012 08:29  2.5M  
 Dell-Systemes-Dell-D..> 03-Nov-2012 08:28  2.8M  
 Dell-Precision-Works..> 03-Nov-2012 08:28  2.6M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-T320-..> 03-Nov-2012 08:27  2.8M  
 Dell-Systemes-Dell-D..> 03-Nov-2012 08:27  2.8M  
 Dell-Guide-de-l-util..> 03-Nov-2012 08:27  3.0M  
 Dell-Latitude-E6420-..> 03-Nov-2012 08:27  3.0M  
 Dell-Systeme-Dell-Po..> 02-Nov-2012 18:07  3.4M  
 Dell-Vostro-470-Manu..> 02-Nov-2012 18:07  3.5M  
 Dell-PowerVault-MD32..> 02-Nov-2012 18:07  3.4M  
 Dell-XPS-14-Manuel-d..> 02-Nov-2012 17:36  3.1M  
 Dell-Inspiron-One-20..> 02-Nov-2012 17:23  3.0M  
 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 02-Nov-2012 17:22  3.0M  
 Dell-PowerConnect-55..> 02-Nov-2012 17:22  3.8M  
 Dell-PowerVault-NX33..> 02-Nov-2012 17:21  1.7M  
 Dell-Upgrading-to-Ba..> 02-Nov-2012 17:21  1.4M  
 Dell-Projecteur-Dell..> 02-Nov-2012 17:20  1.8M  
 Dell-Vostro-470-Owne..> 02-Nov-2012 17:20  1.7M  
 Dell-Inspiron-14R-Ma..> 02-Nov-2012 17:20  2.2M  
 Dell-Systeme-Dell-Po..> 02-Nov-2012 17:20  2.1M  
 Dell-Vostro-270-Manu..> 02-Nov-2012 17:19  2.6M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-R820-..> 02-Nov-2012 17:19  2.5M  
 Dell-Inspiron-660s-M..> 02-Nov-2012 17:18  2.7M  
 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 17:18  2.8M  
 Dell-Inspiron-17R-Ma..> 02-Nov-2012 17:17  2.9M  
 Dell-Micrologiciel-D..> 02-Nov-2012 16:35  2.9M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-R720-..> 02-Nov-2012 16:34  2.8M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-R815-..> 02-Nov-2012 16:34  3.1M  
 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 16:33  3.5M  
 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 16:33  1.9M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-R905-..> 02-Nov-2012 16:32  2.2M  
 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 16:32  2.8M  
 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 16:32  2.5M  
 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 16:31  2.9M  
 Dell-HBA-SAS-Dell-Po..> 02-Nov-2012 16:31  2.9M  
 Dell-XPS-13-Owner-s-..> 02-Nov-2012 16:30  3.0M  
 Dell-Alienware-M17x-..> 02-Nov-2012 16:30  3.1M  
 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 16:29  3.4M  
 Dell-Emplacement-des..> 02-Nov-2012 16:29  3.1M  
 Dell-ALIENWARE-M17x-..> 02-Nov-2012 16:28  3.5M  
 Dell-Alienware-X51-O..> 02-Nov-2012 16:28  3.4M  
 Dell-Moniteur-a-Dell..> 02-Nov-2012 16:27  3.6M  
 Dell-Guide-de-l-Util..> 02-Nov-2012 16:27  3.5M  
 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 11:45  2.0M  
 Dell-FluidFS-NAS-Sol..> 02-Nov-2012 11:24  1.7M  
 Dell-Latitude-ST-Man..> 02-Nov-2012 11:23  3.8M  
 Dell-OptiPlex-360-Gu..> 02-Nov-2012 11:23  3.4M  
 Dell-Adaptateurs-Bro..> 02-Nov-2012 11:22  2.8M  
 Dell-XPS-13-Manuel-d..> 02-Nov-2012 11:22  2.9M  
 Dell-Guide-de-l-util..> 02-Nov-2012 11:21  3.2M  
 Dell-Solutions-NAS-D..> 02-Nov-2012 11:21  3.2M  
 Dell-OpenManage-Serv..> 02-Nov-2012 11:20  3.7M  
 Dell-Lifecycle-Contr..> 02-Nov-2012 11:20  3.5M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-RAID-..> 02-Nov-2012 10:08  2.4M  
 Dell-XPS-430-Guide-d..> 02-Nov-2012 10:08  2.4M  
 Dell-Imprimantes-las..> 02-Nov-2012 10:07  2.4M  
 Dell-Imprimantes-las..> 02-Nov-2012 10:07  2.4M  
 Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 02-Nov-2012 10:06  2.5M  
 Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 02-Nov-2012 10:06  2.4M  
 Dell-Vostro-1310-151..> 02-Nov-2012 10:06  2.6M  
 Dell-1235cn-Impriman..> 02-Nov-2012 10:06  3.0M  
 Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 02-Nov-2012 10:05  3.4M  
 Dell-2130cn-IMPRIMAN..> 02-Nov-2012 10:05  3.0M  
 Dell-Imprimante-pers..> 02-Nov-2012 09:44  2.7M  
 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 09:44  3.1M  
 Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 02-Nov-2012 09:44  2.9M  
 Dell-Guide d-install..> 02-Nov-2012 09:43  2.1M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-R810-..> 02-Nov-2012 09:43  2.0M  
 Dell-Inspiron-660s-M..> 02-Nov-2012 09:42  2.5M  
 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 09:42  2.4M  
 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 09:41  2.8M  
 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 09:41  3.1M  
 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 09:40  3.6M  
 Dell-Inspiron-600m-M..> 02-Nov-2012 09:40  3.3M  
 Dell-3D-VISION-MANUE..> 02-Nov-2012 09:39  1.8M  
 Dell-Manuel-de-maint..> 02-Nov-2012 09:39  1.7M  
 Dell-Manuel-d-utilis..> 02-Nov-2012 09:38  1.9M  
 Dell-Imprimante-coul..> 02-Nov-2012 09:38  1.9M  
 Dell-Projecteur-Dell..> 02-Nov-2012 09:38  2.0M  
 Dell-M770mm-Color-Mo..> 02-Nov-2012 09:37  2.1M  
 Dell-Precision-M6400..> 02-Nov-2012 09:37  2.1M  
 Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 01-Nov-2012 19:14  2.6M  
 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 01-Nov-2012 19:02  2.7M  
 Dell-Vostro-270-Manu..> 01-Nov-2012 19:02  2.7M  
 Dell-ALIENWARE-M17x-..> 01-Nov-2012 19:00  2.3M  
 Dell-Precision-Works..> 01-Nov-2012 18:46  3.3M  
 Dell-P513w-User-s-Gu..> 01-Nov-2012 18:46  2.8M  
 Dell-Serveur-de-sauv..> 01-Nov-2012 18:42  1.9M  
 Dell-Inspiron-660-ma..> 01-Nov-2012 18:42  2.0M  
 Dell-P513w-User-s-Gu..> 01-Nov-2012 18:42  2.3M  
 Dell-Studio-XPS-Guid..> 01-Nov-2012 18:41  2.9M  
 Dell-Latitude-D430-G..> 01-Nov-2012 18:41  3.2M  
 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 01-Nov-2012 18:41  2.7M  
 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 01-Nov-2012 18:40  1.9M  
 Dell-Vostro-420-220-..> 01-Nov-2012 18:40  2.0M  
 Dell-Guide-de-l-admi..> 01-Nov-2012 18:39  2.2M  
 Dell-Guide-de-l-util..> 01-Nov-2012 18:39  2.1M  
 Dell-INSPIRON-DUO-GU..> 01-Nov-2012 18:38  2.2M  
 Dell-INSPIRON-DUO-SE..> 01-Nov-2012 18:38  2.3M  
 Dell-Adaptateur-hote..> 01-Nov-2012 18:38  2.3M  
 Dell-Studio-XPS-Setu..> 01-Nov-2012 18:38  2.4M  
 Dell-Client-Manageme..> 01-Nov-2012 18:37  2.5M  
 Dell-1230c-Imprimant..> 01-Nov-2012 18:37  2.6M  
 Dell-XPS-8500-Manuel..> 01-Nov-2012 18:36  2.7M  
 Dell-Station-de-trav..> 01-Nov-2012 18:36  2.3M  
 Dell-Inspiron-530-Se..> 29-Oct-2012 07:41  1.9M  
 Dell-Mobile-Jamz.htm    29-Oct-2012 07:41  1.6M  
 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 29-Oct-2012 07:41  2.2M  
 Dell-Dimension-C521-..> 29-Oct-2012 07:41  1.9M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-R910-..> 29-Oct-2012 07:40  2.6M  
 Projecteur-Dell-1201..> 29-Oct-2012 07:40  2.3M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-R520-..> 29-Oct-2012 07:39  3.0M  
 Dell-ALIENWARE-MANUE..> 29-Oct-2012 07:39  2.7M  
 Dell-Inspiron-531-Ma..> 29-Oct-2012 07:38  2.7M  
 Dell-Vostro-200-Manu..> 29-Oct-2012 07:38  2.4M  
 Dell-Systemes -Dell ..> 29-Oct-2012 07:37  3.2M  
 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 29-Oct-2012 07:37  3.0M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-C410x..> 29-Oct-2012 07:36  3.2M  
 Dell-Latitude-E5430-..> 26-Oct-2012 17:29  1.6M  
 Console-de-gestion-m..> 26-Oct-2012 14:51  3.3M  
 DELL-POWERVAULT-MD12..> 26-Oct-2012 14:50  3.3M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-R520-..> 26-Oct-2012 14:50  3.3M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-R620-..> 26-Oct-2012 14:49  3.3M  
 Dell-Ekran-Yönetici..> 26-Oct-2012 14:49  3.4M  
 Dell-PowerVault-MD36..> 26-Oct-2012 14:48  2.4M  
 Dell-PowerVault-MD36..> 26-Oct-2012 14:48  2.8M  
 Dell-OPENMANAGE-POWE..> 26-Oct-2012 14:47  2.7M  
 Dell-Vostro-3460-Man..> 26-Oct-2012 14:47  2.7M  
 Dell-Vostro-3460-Man..> 26-Oct-2012 14:46  2.7M  
 Dell- Vostro-270-Man..> 26-Oct-2012 14:46  2.8M  
 Dell-S320-S320wi-Pro..> 26-Oct-2012 14:45  2.9M  
 Dell-Guide-de-l-util..> 26-Oct-2012 14:45  2.0M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-Siste..> 26-Oct-2012 14:44  1.4M  
 Dell-S2240L-S2340L-M..> 26-Oct-2012 14:44  1.5M  
 Dell-Vostro-1540-155..> 26-Oct-2012 14:44  2.2M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-R720-..> 25-Oct-2012 18:33  2.5M  
 Dell-Inspiron-1720-m..> 25-Oct-2012 18:32  2.9M  
 DELL-OPTIPLEX580-TEC..> 25-Oct-2012 18:32  2.9M  
 Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 25-Oct-2012 18:31  3.3M  
 Dell-Inspiron-Manuel..> 25-Oct-2012 18:31  3.3M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-R210-..> 25-Oct-2012 18:30  3.6M  
 Dell-Dimension-3000-..> 25-Oct-2012 18:30  3.5M  
 Systemes-Dell-PowerE..> 25-Oct-2012 18:29  2.8M  
 Dell-Solutions-NAS-D..> 25-Oct-2012 18:29  2.7M  
 Dell-Precision-Works..> 25-Oct-2012 12:10  2.0M  
 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 25-Oct-2012 12:10  2.3M  
 Dell-Inspiron-1721-M..> 25-Oct-2012 12:09  2.7M  
 Dell-Vostro-2520-Man..> 25-Oct-2012 12:09  2.8M  
 Dell-Axim-X30-Manuel..> 25-Oct-2012 12:08  3.0M  
 Dell-Inspiron-2600-e..> 25-Oct-2012 12:08  3.2M  
 Dell-Inspiron-9200-M..> 25-Oct-2012 12:07  3.4M  
 Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 25-Oct-2012 12:07  2.1M  
 Dell-Venue-Pro-Manue..> 25-Oct-2012 12:06  2.4M  
 Dell-Streak-7-Franca..> 25-Oct-2012 12:06  2.3M  
 Dell-Photo-Printer-5..> 25-Oct-2012 12:06  2.6M  
 Dell-Vostro-1440-145..> 25-Oct-2012 12:05  2.5M  
 Dell-Manuel-de-l-uti..> 25-Oct-2012 12:05  2.9M  
 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 25-Oct-2012 12:05  3.1M  
 Dell-Manuel-de-l-uti..> 25-Oct-2012 12:04  2.8M  
 Dell-Demarrage-rapid..> 25-Oct-2012 12:04  2.4M  
 Dellâ„¢ Logiciel-de..> 25-Oct-2012 12:03  2.8M  
 Dell-Systeme-de-navi..> 25-Oct-2012 12:02  3.2M  
 Dell-Clavier-sans-fi..> 25-Oct-2012 12:02  3.0M  
 Dell-Inspiron-1200-e..> 25-Oct-2012 09:48  2.4M  
 Dell-PowerVault NX32..> 25-Oct-2012 09:48  2.7M  
 Dell-OptiPlex-9010-7..> 25-Oct-2012 09:48  2.4M  
 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 25-Oct-2012 09:47  2.0M  
 Dell-Vostro-400-Manu..> 25-Oct-2012 09:47  2.3M  
 Dell-Latitude-D630-M..> 25-Oct-2012 09:46  2.9M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-C5125..> 25-Oct-2012 09:46  2.5M  
 Dell-Inspiron-660-Ma..> 24-Oct-2012 09:15  2.3M  
 Dell-Latitude-E5530-..> 24-Oct-2012 09:15  2.4M  
 Dell-Inspiron-1150-M..> 24-Oct-2012 09:15  2.6M  
 Dell-XPS-One-2710-ma..> 24-Oct-2012 09:14  2.8M  
 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 24-Oct-2012 09:14  3.1M  
 Dell-Inspiron-9100-M..> 24-Oct-2012 09:13  2.6M  
 Dell-Dimension-E521-..> 24-Oct-2012 09:12  2.9M  
 Dell-PowerVault-Baie..> 24-Oct-2012 09:12  3.0M  
 Dell-Inspiron-8600-M..> 24-Oct-2012 09:11  3.2M  
 Dell-OptiPlex-9010-T..> 24-Oct-2012 07:54  2.3M  
 Dell-Dimension-3100C..> 24-Oct-2012 07:42  2.7M  
 Dell-Beats-By-dr.dre..> 24-Oct-2012 07:42  2.7M  
 Dell-Axim-X51-X51v-M..> 24-Oct-2012 07:42  2.9M  
 Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWAR..> 24-Oct-2012 07:41  2.4M  
 Dell-poweredge-r210-..> 24-Oct-2012 07:41  2.5M  
 Dell-server-poweredg..> 24-Oct-2012 07:40  2.5M  
 Dell-server-poweredg..> 24-Oct-2012 07:40  2.6M  
 Dell-server-poweredg..> 24-Oct-2012 07:39  2.3M  
 Dell-server-poweredg..> 24-Oct-2012 07:39  2.4M  
 Dell-Systemes-Dell-I..> 24-Oct-2012 07:39  2.1M  
 Dell-Latitude-E6320-..> 24-Oct-2012 07:38  2.1M  
 Dell-Latitude-5420-E..> 24-Oct-2012 07:38  2.1M  
 Dell-server-poweredg..> 24-Oct-2012 07:37  1.9M  
 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 24-Oct-2012 07:37  2.2M  
 Dell-Vostro-3560-Man..> 24-Oct-2012 07:37  1.9M  
 Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 24-Oct-2012 07:36  2.2M  
 Acceder-au-site-Dell..> 24-Oct-2012 06:36  1.0M  
 Dell-Vostro-360-Prop..> 19-Oct-2012 07:42  1.7M  
 Dell-OPENMANAGE-POWE..> 19-Oct-2012 07:41  1.9M  
 Dell-ALIENWARE-MANUE..> 19-Oct-2012 07:41  2.0M  
 Dell-Vostro-200-Manu..> 19-Oct-2012 07:41  2.4M  
 Dell-Precision-Works..> 19-Oct-2012 07:41  2.1M  
 Dell-Streak-7-Manuel..> 18-Oct-2012 17:13  2.9M  
 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 17:13  3.6M  
 Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 18-Oct-2012 17:13  2.9M  
 Dell-MANUEL-D-ALIENW..> 18-Oct-2012 17:12  3.1M  
 Dell-Inspiron-9300-M..> 18-Oct-2012 17:12  3.3M  
 Dell-Systemes-Dell-I..> 18-Oct-2012 17:11  3.6M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-R620-..> 18-Oct-2012 17:11  3.9M  
 Dell-Manuel-d-utilis..> 18-Oct-2012 17:10  3.1M  
 Dell-Precision-Works..> 18-Oct-2012 17:09  3.2M  
 Dell-Inspiron-13z-Ma..> 18-Oct-2012 17:09  3.3M  
 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 17:08  3.6M  
 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 17:08  2.6M  
 Dell-Boîtier-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 17:07  2.7M  
 Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 18-Oct-2012 17:07  3.1M  
 DELLmanuelsutilisate..> 18-Oct-2012 17:06   12M  
 Dell-Inspiron-5100-e..> 18-Oct-2012 17:05  4.4M  
 Dell-Manuel-de-l-Uti..> 18-Oct-2012 17:04  4.1M  
 Dell-MANUEL-D-ALIENW..> 18-Oct-2012 17:03  4.1M  
 Dell-Manuel-de-l-uti..> 18-Oct-2012 17:02  3.9M  
 Dell-Laser-Printer-3..> 18-Oct-2012 17:02  3.8M  
 Dell-Inspiron-530s-M..> 18-Oct-2012 17:01  3.7M  
 Dell-Liste-des-manue..> 18-Oct-2012 17:01  3.5M  
 Dell-Inspiron-530s-M..> 18-Oct-2012 17:00  3.5M  
 Dell-Vostro-V131-Man..> 18-Oct-2012 16:59  3.4M  
 DellDimension1100Ser..> 18-Oct-2012 16:59  3.4M  
 Dell-Vostro-3750-Man..> 18-Oct-2012 16:58  3.4M  
 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 16:58  3.4M  
 Imprimante-personnel..> 18-Oct-2012 16:57  3.4M  
 Dell-Inspiron-17R-Ma..> 18-Oct-2012 16:56  3.3M  
 Dell-PowerVault-NX40..> 18-Oct-2012 16:56  3.2M  
 Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 18-Oct-2012 16:55  3.3M  
 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 18-Oct-2012 16:55  3.2M  
 Dell-Dimension-9200-..> 18-Oct-2012 16:54  3.2M  
 AlienwareAurora-R3.htm  18-Oct-2012 16:54  3.2M  
 Dell-Axim-X50-Manuel..> 18-Oct-2012 16:53  3.2M  
 Imprimante-laser-de-..> 18-Oct-2012 16:53  3.2M  
 Dell-Axim-X51-X51v-M..> 18-Oct-2012 16:52  3.2M  
 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 16:52  3.2M  
 AlienwareAuroraAuror..> 18-Oct-2012 16:51  3.1M  
 Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWAR..> 18-Oct-2012 16:51  3.1M  
 Dell-PowerEdge-C8220..> 18-Oct-2012 16:50  3.0M  
 Dell-Dimension-E520-..> 18-Oct-2012 16:50  3.0M  
 Chassis-RAID-Dell-Po..> 18-Oct-2012 16:49  3.0M  
 Dell-XPS-630i-Manuel..> 18-Oct-2012 16:49  3.0M  
 AlienwareAurora-R4.htm  18-Oct-2012 16:48  2.9M  
 Dell-Photo-All-In-On..> 18-Oct-2012 16:48  2.9M  
 Dell-Inspiron-700m-M..> 18-Oct-2012 16:47  2.9M  
 Dell-Systemes-Dell-I..> 18-Oct-2012 16:47  2.9M  
 Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 18-Oct-2012 16:46  2.9M  
 Dell-Photo-Printer-7..> 18-Oct-2012 16:46  2.8M  
 Dell-PowerVault-MD32..> 18-Oct-2012 16:45  2.8M  
 Dell-Photo-All-In-On..> 18-Oct-2012 16:45  2.8M  
 Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 18-Oct-2012 16:44  2.8M  
 Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 18-Oct-2012 16:44  2.8M  
 Dell-moniteur-D1920-..> 18-Oct-2012 16:43  2.7M  
 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 16:43  2.8M  
 Dell-Latitude-XT3-Ma..> 18-Oct-2012 16:42  2.7M  
 AlienwareArea-51Area..> 18-Oct-2012 16:42  2.7M  
 Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 18-Oct-2012 16:41  2.7M  
 Dell-Baie-de-stockag..> 18-Oct-2012 16:41  2.7M  
 Dell-Streak-Manuel-d..> 18-Oct-2012 16:40  2.7M  
 Imprimante-Dell-Phot..> 18-Oct-2012 16:39  2.6M  
 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 16:39  2.6M  
 Dell-Clavier-Axim-Ma..> 18-Oct-2012 16:38  2.6M  
 Dell-Latitude-ST-Man..> 18-Oct-2012 16:38  2.6M  
 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 16:38  2.5M  
 alienwareX51.htm        18-Oct-2012 16:37  2.5M  
 Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 18-Oct-2012 16:37  2.5M  
 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 16:36  2.5M  
 Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 18-Oct-2012 16:36  2.5M  
 Dell-Photo-All-In-On..> 18-Oct-2012 16:35  2.3M  
 Dell-Manuel-de-maint..> 18-Oct-2012 16:35  2.2M  
 Dell-Manuel-d-utilis..> 18-Oct-2012 16:35  2.3M  
 Dell-PowerVault-MD32..> 18-Oct-2012 16:34  2.2M  
 Dell-XP-M1530-Manuel..> 18-Oct-2012 16:34  2.2M  
 Dell-Inspiron-1100-M..> 18-Oct-2012 16:33  2.2M  
 Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWAR..> 18-Oct-2012 16:33  2.1M  
 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 18-Oct-2012 16:33  2.1M  
 Dell-Inspiron-9400-E..> 18-Oct-2012 16:32  2.0M  
 Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 18-Oct-2012 16:32  1.9M  
 Dell-Laser-Printer-1..> 18-Oct-2012 16:32  1.6M  
 Dell-Inspiron-1525-1..> 18-Oct-2012 16:31  1.5M  
 Dell-Tout-en-un-Dell..> 18-Oct-2012 16:31  1.2M  
 Dell-Laser-Printer-1..> 18-Oct-2012 16:31  1.0M  
 Dell-Dimension-3100-..> 18-Oct-2012 16:31  906K 
Autres Manuels :

[TXT]

 16-4ppm-Imprimante-l..> 28-Sep-2012 12:42  2.8M  

[TXT]

 16-4ppm-Multifonctio..> 28-Sep-2012 12:43  6.0M  

[TXT]

 16-4ppm-Multifonctio..> 28-Sep-2012 12:43  5.4M  

[TXT]

 16-4ppm-Multifonctio..> 28-Sep-2012 12:45  6.0M  

[TXT]

 16-4ppm-Multifonctio..> 28-Sep-2012 12:45  4.3M  

[TXT]

 17-3-Serie-3-300E7A-..> 28-Sep-2012 12:46  3.9M  

[TXT]

 19-Serie-3-Moniteur-..> 28-Sep-2012 12:47  4.7M  

[TXT]

 20ppm-Multifonction-..> 28-Sep-2012 12:48  6.0M  

[TXT]

 24ppm-Multifonction-..> 28-Sep-2012 12:49  6.5M  

[TXT]

 27-Serie7-Moniteur-s..> 28-Sep-2012 12:50  4.8M  

[TXT]

 32-LE32D450WXZF-seri..> 28-Sep-2012 12:51  5.7M  

[TXT]

 32-UE32D6200WXZF-ser..> 28-Sep-2012 12:51  4.6M  

[TXT]

 35-35ppm-Copieur-cou..> 28-Sep-2012 12:53  6.5M  

[TXT]

 40-UE40D6500WXZF-ser..> 28-Sep-2012 12:53  3.6M  

[TXT]

 46-LE46D550WXZF-seri..> 28-Sep-2012 12:55  6.9M  

[   ]

 AEWG.pdf                26-Jun-2009 07:09  5.4M  

[   ]

 AEWK.pdf                30-Jun-2009 07:41  3.9M  

[TXT]

 APPLEmanuelutilisate..> 28-Sep-2012 12:32  7.0M  

[TXT]

 AcerPowerseriemanuel..> 28-Sep-2012 12:30   34K  

[TXT]

 Apple-Manuel_de_l'ut..> 28-Sep-2012 12:28  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Apple-Manuel_de_l_ut..> 28-Sep-2012 12:29  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Apple-Manuel_de_l_ut..> 28-Sep-2012 12:30  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Apple-Manuel_de_l_ut..> 28-Sep-2012 12:30  3.8M  

[TXT]

 CIELQUANTUM450manuel..> 28-Sep-2012 12:31  733K  

[TXT]

 Dell-1130-Dell-1130n..> 13-May-2013 12:06  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-7330dn-Mono-Las..> 13-May-2013 12:06  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Alienware-Area-..> 13-May-2013 12:07  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Alienware-Area-..> 13-May-2013 12:07  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Alienware-Area-..> 13-May-2013 12:08  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Alienware-M15x-..> 13-May-2013 12:08  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Alienware-M15x-..> 13-May-2013 12:09  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Alienware-X51-M..> 13-May-2013 12:09  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Aztech-MDP3900-..> 13-May-2013 12:09  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Comment-utilise..> 13-May-2013 12:10  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Configurer-et-u..> 13-May-2013 12:10  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-DR4000-Manuels.htm 13-May-2013 12:12  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-5100-..> 13-May-2013 12:11  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-8300-..> 13-May-2013 12:11  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Drivers-for-Del..> 13-May-2013 12:13  4.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Drivers-for-Pow..> 13-May-2013 12:13  4.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-Utilisate..> 13-May-2013 12:14  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 13-May-2013 12:13  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-15-Int..> 13-May-2013 12:14  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-500m-M..> 13-May-2013 12:17  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-510m-M..> 13-May-2013 12:18  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-600m-M..> 13-May-2013 12:18  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-620-Ma..> 13-May-2013 12:19  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-640M-M..> 13-May-2013 12:19  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1520-2..> 13-May-2013 12:15  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1520-E..> 13-May-2013 12:15  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1520-M..> 13-May-2013 12:16  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1521-M..> 13-May-2013 12:16  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1525-M..> 13-May-2013 12:17  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-9400-M..> 13-May-2013 12:20  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-Duo-Ma..> 13-May-2013 12:20  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-One-23..> 13-May-2013 12:21  4.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-One-23..> 13-May-2013 12:22  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-m301z-..> 13-May-2013 12:22  4.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Intel-Active-Ma..> 13-May-2013 12:23  4.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-CPi-A-..> 13-May-2013 12:23  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-Cpi-Ma..> 13-May-2013 12:24  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-D410-M..> 13-May-2013 12:24  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-D620-E..> 13-May-2013 12:25  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-D620-M..> 13-May-2013 12:25  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-D630-M..> 13-May-2013 12:26  4.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-E5520-..> 13-May-2013 12:27  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-E6400-..> 13-May-2013 12:28  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-E6400-..> 13-May-2013 12:29  4.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-E6400-..> 13-May-2013 12:28  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-E6410-..> 13-May-2013 12:29  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-E6420-..> 13-May-2013 12:30  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-E6430-..> 13-May-2013 12:30  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-E6530-..> 13-May-2013 12:31  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-E6530-..> 13-May-2013 12:31  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-XT2-Ma..> 13-May-2013 12:32  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Lifecycle-Contr..> 13-May-2013 12:32  4.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Ali..> 13-May-2013 12:33  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 13-May-2013 12:36  4.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 13-May-2013 12:33  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 13-May-2013 12:34  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 13-May-2013 12:34  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 13-May-2013 12:34  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 13-May-2013 12:35  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 13-May-2013 12:36  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 13-May-2013 12:37  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 13-May-2013 12:37  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 13-May-2013 12:38  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 13-May-2013 12:37  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 13-May-2013 12:38  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 13-May-2013 13:24  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 13-May-2013 13:25  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 13-May-2013 13:25  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 13-May-2013 13:26  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Ins..> 13-May-2013 13:27  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Ins..> 13-May-2013 13:27  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Ins..> 13-May-2013 13:26  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Ins..> 13-May-2013 13:27  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Ins..> 13-May-2013 13:28  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Ins..> 13-May-2013 13:28  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Ins..> 13-May-2013 13:28  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Ins..> 13-May-2013 13:29  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Ins..> 13-May-2013 13:29  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Ins..> 13-May-2013 13:30  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Ins..> 13-May-2013 13:30  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-LCD..> 13-May-2013 13:32  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Lat..> 13-May-2013 13:30  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Lat..> 13-May-2013 13:31  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Lat..> 13-May-2013 13:31  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Lat..> 13-May-2013 13:32  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Min..> 13-May-2013 13:33  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Opt..> 13-May-2013 13:33  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 13-May-2013 13:34  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 13-May-2013 13:33  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 13-May-2013 13:34  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 13-May-2013 13:35  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 13-May-2013 13:35  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 13-May-2013 13:36  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 13-May-2013 13:36  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 13-May-2013 13:37  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 13-May-2013 13:37  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 13-May-2013 13:38  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 13-May-2013 13:38  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 13-May-2013 13:39  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 13-May-2013 13:39  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 13-May-2013 13:38  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 13-May-2013 13:40  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 13-May-2013 13:40  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 13-May-2013 13:41  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 13-May-2013 13:41  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 13-May-2013 13:41  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 13-May-2013 13:42  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 13-May-2013 13:43  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 13-May-2013 13:43  4.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Pre..> 13-May-2013 13:43  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-Vos..> 13-May-2013 13:44  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-XPS..> 13-May-2013 13:44  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-XPS..> 13-May-2013 13:45  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-XPS..> 13-May-2013 13:45  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuals-for-XPS..> 13-May-2013 13:45  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-d-Utilis..> 13-May-2013 13:46  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-d-utilis..> 13-May-2013 13:46  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-de-maint..> 13-May-2013 13:47  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuels-et-docu..> 13-May-2013 13:47  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuels-et-docu..> 13-May-2013 13:48  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OptiPlex-330-Ma..> 13-May-2013 13:48  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OptiPlex-745-Ma..> 13-May-2013 13:49  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OptiPlex-755-Ma..> 13-May-2013 13:50  5.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OptiPlex-SX280-..> 13-May-2013 13:51  6.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerConnect-55..> 13-May-2013 13:51  4.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-300-M..> 13-May-2013 13:53  4.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-400SC..> 13-May-2013 13:53  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-1950-..> 13-May-2013 13:52  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-M905-..> 13-May-2013 13:54  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R200-..> 13-May-2013 13:54  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R320-..> 13-May-2013 13:55  4.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R510-..> 13-May-2013 13:55  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R510-..> 13-May-2013 13:56  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R610-..> 13-May-2013 13:56  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R620-..> 13-May-2013 13:57  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R720x..> 13-May-2013 13:57  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R815-..> 13-May-2013 13:58  4.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R815-..> 13-May-2013 13:58  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R900-..> 13-May-2013 13:59  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-T100-..> 13-May-2013 13:59  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-T420-..> 13-May-2013 14:00  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-T605-..> 13-May-2013 14:00  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-T710-..> 13-May-2013 14:01  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-110T..> 13-May-2013 14:02  4.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-NX30..> 13-May-2013 14:03  5.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-360-M..> 13-May-2013 14:03  4.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-370-M..> 13-May-2013 14:04  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-390-M..> 13-May-2013 14:04  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-450-M..> 13-May-2013 14:05  4.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-610-M..> 13-May-2013 14:05  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-690-M..> 13-May-2013 14:06  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-M20-M..> 13-May-2013 14:06  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-M40-M..> 13-May-2013 14:07  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-M4400..> 13-May-2013 14:07  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-M4500..> 13-May-2013 14:09  6.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-M4500..> 13-May-2013 14:08  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-M4600..> 13-May-2013 14:09  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-M4700..> 13-May-2013 14:10  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-T5600..> 13-May-2013 14:10  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-T5600..> 13-May-2013 14:11  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-T7600..> 13-May-2013 14:11  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Product-support..> 13-May-2013 14:13  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Product-support..> 13-May-2013 14:12  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Product-support..> 13-May-2013 14:13  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Product-support..> 13-May-2013 14:13  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Product-support..> 13-May-2013 14:13  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Product-support..> 13-May-2013 14:14  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Product-support..> 13-May-2013 14:15  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Product-support..> 13-May-2013 14:14  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Product-support..> 13-May-2013 14:15  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Product-support..> 13-May-2013 14:16  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Product-support..> 13-May-2013 14:16  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Product-support..> 13-May-2013 14:17  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Product-support..> 13-May-2013 14:17  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Product-support..> 13-May-2013 14:18  4.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Product-support..> 13-May-2013 14:18  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Studio-1555-15-..> 13-May-2013 14:19  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Studio-1735-Man..> 13-May-2013 14:19  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Studio-Desktop-..> 13-May-2013 14:28  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Studio-Slim-Man..> 13-May-2013 14:28  5.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Symantec-Backup..> 13-May-2013 14:29  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-UPS-500- Englis..> 13-May-2013 14:30  4.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-UPS-500T-Españ..> 13-May-2013 14:29  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-UPS-500T-Manuel..> 13-May-2013 14:30  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vizioncore-Manu..> 13-May-2013 14:31  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-200-Manu..> 13-May-2013 14:33  4.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-270-Manu..> 13-May-2013 14:34  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-270s-Man..> 13-May-2013 14:34  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-410-Manu..> 13-May-2013 14:36  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-1000-Man..> 13-May-2013 14:31  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-1550-Man..> 13-May-2013 14:32  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-1700-Man..> 13-May-2013 14:33  4.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-3450-Man..> 13-May-2013 14:35  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-3750-Man..> 13-May-2013 14:35  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Windows-8-Manue..> 13-May-2013 14:37  5.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-630-Manuels..> 13-May-2013 14:37  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-M1210-Owner..> 13-May-2013 14:38  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-M1730-Manue..> 13-May-2013 14:38  3.9M  

[TXT]

 EBP-Guide_Auto-entre..> 28-Sep-2012 12:31   78K  

[TXT]

 EBPGestionCommercial..> 28-Sep-2012 12:35  1.4M  

[TXT]

 EBPPAYEV14manuelutil..> 28-Sep-2012 12:35  865K  

[TXT]

 EBPPointdeventebacko..> 28-Sep-2012 12:35  736K  

[TXT]

 EBP_Manuel_Utilisate..> 28-Sep-2012 12:31  1.9M  

[TXT]

 EBP_Manuel_Utilisate..> 28-Sep-2012 12:32  1.9M  

[TXT]

 EBP_Manuel_Utilisate..> 28-Sep-2012 12:33  1.6M  

[TXT]

 EBP_Manuel_Utilisate..> 28-Sep-2012 12:33  1.8M  

[TXT]

 EBP_Manuel_Utilisate..> 28-Sep-2012 12:33  1.0M  

[TXT]

 EBP_Manuel_Utilisate..> 28-Sep-2012 12:33  1.1M  

[TXT]

 EBP_Manuel_Utilisate..> 28-Sep-2012 12:33  1.2M  

[TXT]

 EBP_Manuel_Utilisate..> 28-Sep-2012 12:34  1.9M  

[TXT]

 EBP_Manuel_Utilisate..> 28-Sep-2012 12:34  1.3M  

[TXT]

 EBP_Manuel_Utilisate..> 28-Sep-2012 12:34  1.4M  

[TXT]

 EBP_Manuel_Utilisate..> 28-Sep-2012 12:34  1.5M  

[TXT]

 EBPlocationimmobilie..> 28-Sep-2012 12:34  182K  

[   ]

 GENETATS.pdf            26-Jun-2009 07:09  4.8M  

[TXT]

 Galaxy-S-Advance-GT-..> 28-Sep-2012 12:55  5.5M  

[TXT]

 Galaxy-Y-S5360-Andro..> 28-Sep-2012 12:56  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Guide-d-installation..> 28-Sep-2012 12:35  606K  

[TXT]

 Guide-d-installation..> 28-Sep-2012 12:35  606K  

[   ]

 GuideCRC.pdf            30-Jun-2009 07:40  1.0M  

[TXT]

 Guide_Assistants_Jur..> 28-Sep-2012 12:35  132K  

[TXT]

 Guide_Auto-entrepren..> 28-Sep-2012 12:35   81K  

[TXT]

 Guide_CRM_PRO_2013-M..> 28-Sep-2012 12:36  785K  

[TXT]

 Guide_Compta-Classic..> 28-Sep-2012 12:35  204K  

[TXT]

 Guide_Compta-GC_Open..> 28-Sep-2012 12:35  387K  

[TXT]

 Guide_Compta-Gestion..> 28-Sep-2012 12:35  548K  

[TXT]

 Guide_Compta-Open_Li..> 28-Sep-2012 12:35  628K  

[TXT]

 Guide_Compta_Pratic_..> 28-Sep-2012 12:35  684K  

[TXT]

 Guide_Devis_et_Factu..> 28-Sep-2012 12:36  859K  

[TXT]

 Guide_Devis_et_Factu..> 28-Sep-2012 12:36  960K  

[TXT]

 Guide_EBP_Facturatio..> 28-Sep-2012 12:36  1.0M  

[TXT]

 Guide_GC_Open_Line_P..> 28-Sep-2012 12:36  1.2M  

[TXT]

 Guide_GESTION_COMMER..> 28-Sep-2012 12:37  1.3M  

[TXT]

 Guide_Gestion_de_Con..> 28-Sep-2012 12:37  1.4M  

[TXT]

 Guide_Mon_Associatio..> 28-Sep-2012 12:37  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Guide_Paye_Classic_2..> 28-Sep-2012 12:37  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Guide_Paye_Open_Line..> 28-Sep-2012 12:38  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Guide_Report_Designe..> 28-Sep-2012 12:38  1.7M  

[TXT]

 GuidedetelecopieManu..> 28-Sep-2012 12:38  8.4K  

[TXT]

 LE40D503F7W-Samsung-..> 28-Sep-2012 12:57  6.3M  

[TXT]

 LE55C650-LE55C650L1W..> 28-Sep-2012 12:58  6.3M  

[TXT]

 Liste-Manuels-Utilis..> 28-Sep-2012 12:57   17K  

[TXT]

 Liste-Manuels-Utilis..> 29-Sep-2012 21:58   35K  

[   ]

 MEWGE.pdf               26-Jun-2009 07:12   12M  

[   ]

 ME_WKE.pdf              30-Jun-2009 07:43  7.5M  

[TXT]

 Manuels-Utilisateur-..> 28-Sep-2012 13:03  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Manuels-de-l-Utilisa..> 28-Sep-2012 12:58  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Manuels-de-l-Utilisa..> 28-Sep-2012 12:59  4.4M  

[TXT]

 Manuels-de-l-Utilisa..> 28-Sep-2012 13:01  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Manuels-de-l-Utilisa..> 28-Sep-2012 13:01  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Manuels-de-l-Utilisa..> 28-Sep-2012 12:59  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Manuels-de-l-Utilisa..> 28-Sep-2012 13:00  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Manuels-de-l-Utilisa..> 28-Sep-2012 13:00  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Manuels-de-l-Utilisa..> 28-Sep-2012 13:02  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Manuels-de-l-Utilisa..> 28-Sep-2012 13:03  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Micro-chaine-MM-D330..> 28-Sep-2012 13:04  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Microsoftphotopremiu..> 28-Sep-2012 12:41  242K  

[TXT]

 N145Plus-NP-N145P-Ma..> 28-Sep-2012 13:05  3.9M  

[TXT]

 N150-NP-N150-Manuels..> 28-Sep-2012 13:05  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Nexus-S-noir-Open-ma..> 28-Sep-2012 13:06  4.0M  

[TXT]

 OrdinateurportableHP..> 28-Sep-2012 12:38  240K  

[TXT]

 Samsung-32-LE32D450W..> 28-Sep-2012 13:07  4.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-46-UE46D5700..> 28-Sep-2012 13:08  4.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-AQ18UGFN-Man..> 28-Sep-2012 13:08  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-AQV18UGAX-Ma..> 28-Sep-2012 13:09  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-CW21Z503N-Ma..> 28-Sep-2012 13:10  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Congelateur-..> 28-Sep-2012 13:09  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-DA-E550-CN-M..> 28-Sep-2012 13:10  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-E-MANUAL-X9D..> 28-Sep-2012 13:11  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-GALAXY-NEXUS..> 28-Sep-2012 13:11  1.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-GALAXY-Note-..> 28-Sep-2012 13:14  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-GALAXY-S-II-..> 28-Sep-2012 13:15  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-GALAXY-Tab-1..> 28-Sep-2012 13:18  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-GALAXY-Tab-G..> 28-Sep-2012 13:22  5.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-GALAXY-Tab-S..> 28-Sep-2012 13:21  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-GT-B5310-Man..> 28-Sep-2012 13:23  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-GT-N8000-CN-..> 28-Sep-2012 13:23  1.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-GT-S5360-Man..> 28-Sep-2012 13:24  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-GT-S5360_UM_..> 28-Sep-2012 13:24  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Galaxy-Ace-n..> 28-Sep-2012 13:11  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Galaxy-Note-..> 28-Sep-2012 13:13  4.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Galaxy-S-II-..> 28-Sep-2012 13:15  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Galaxy-S-III..> 28-Sep-2012 13:16  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Galaxy-S-Plu..> 28-Sep-2012 13:17  4.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Galaxy-S-noi..> 28-Sep-2012 13:16  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Galaxy-S2-GT..> 28-Sep-2012 13:17  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2..> 28-Sep-2012 13:20  6.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-7..> 28-Sep-2012 13:21  6.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-1..> 28-Sep-2012 13:18  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-1..> 28-Sep-2012 13:18  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Galaxy-Xcove..> 28-Sep-2012 13:23  4.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Galaxy-mini-..> 28-Sep-2012 13:12  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Galaxy-noir-..> 28-Sep-2012 13:12  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-LA46C550J1F-..> 28-Sep-2012 13:25  1.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-LE40S71B-Man..> 28-Sep-2012 13:26  4.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-LE46A676-LE4..> 28-Sep-2012 13:26  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Lecteur-Mult..> 28-Sep-2012 13:27  4.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-NP-R530-NP-R..> 28-Sep-2012 13:28  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Nexus-S-noir..> 28-Sep-2012 13:27  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Omnia-7-noir..> 28-Sep-2012 13:28  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Omnia-II-noi..> 28-Sep-2012 13:29  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Omnia-II-noi..> 28-Sep-2012 13:29  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Omnia-Lite-n..> 28-Sep-2012 13:30  4.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Omnia-Pro-B7..> 28-Sep-2012 13:31  4.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Omnia-W-noir..> 28-Sep-2012 13:32  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Player-Addic..> 28-Sep-2012 13:32  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Player-Duo-n..> 28-Sep-2012 13:33  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Player-HD-no..> 28-Sep-2012 13:33  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-RR92HASX-Man..> 28-Sep-2012 13:34  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Refrigerateu..> 28-Sep-2012 13:34  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-SCH-W999-CN-..> 28-Sep-2012 13:35  1.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Samsung-Gala..> 28-Sep-2012 13:35  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Samsung-Gala..> 28-Sep-2012 13:36  4.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-UA32ES5500-U..> 28-Sep-2012 13:36  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-UE26EH4000-Z..> 28-Sep-2012 13:37  4.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-UE32ES6710-Z..> 28-Sep-2012 13:37  4.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-UE40C6000-UE..> 28-Sep-2012 13:38  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-UE40C6700-UE..> 28-Sep-2012 13:38  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-UE46C7700-UE..> 28-Sep-2012 13:39  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-UE46ES6100W-..> 28-Sep-2012 13:40  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-UE46ES8000-Z..> 28-Sep-2012 13:40  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-UE50EH5300W-..> 28-Sep-2012 13:41  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-UE55ES6300-Z..> 28-Sep-2012 13:42  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-UE55ES6560S-..> 28-Sep-2012 13:42  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-WEP480-CN-Ma..> 28-Sep-2012 13:49  1.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Wave-3-noir-..> 28-Sep-2012 13:43  4.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Wave-533-noi..> 28-Sep-2012 13:43  4.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Wave-575-bla..> 28-Sep-2012 13:45  4.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Wave-578-noi..> 28-Sep-2012 13:45  4.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Wave-723-gri..> 28-Sep-2012 13:47  7.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Wave-M-noir-..> 28-Sep-2012 13:47  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Wave-M-noir-..> 28-Sep-2012 13:49  5.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Wave-noir-Op..> 28-Sep-2012 13:48  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-XE700T1A-HF1..> 28-Sep-2012 13:50  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Serie-3-300E7A-NP300..> 28-Sep-2012 13:50  3.9M  

[TXT]

 UE55ES8000-ZF-Slim-L..> 28-Sep-2012 13:51  3.8M  

[TXT]

 UE55ES8000-ZF-Slim-L..> 28-Sep-2012 13:52  6.6M  

[TXT]

 UE60ES6100WXZF-UE60E..> 28-Sep-2012 13:54  7.3M  

[TXT]

 UE65C8700-UE65C8700X..> 28-Sep-2012 13:54  7.3M  

[TXT]

 bizhub-350-250-User-..> 28-Sep-2012 12:39  2.8M  

[TXT]

 bizhub-423-363-283-2..> 28-Sep-2012 12:40  2.4M  

[TXT]

 bizhub-C35-French-Sh..> 28-Sep-2012 12:41  3.3M  

[TXT]

 bizhub-C252P-User-Ma..> 28-Sep-2012 12:40  3.2M  

[TXT]

 bizhub-pro-c5501_um_..> 28-Sep-2012 12:40  226K  

[TXT]

 bizhub C360-C280-C22..> 28-Sep-2012 12:39  3.8M  

[TXT]

 bizhubPROC5500manuel..> 28-Sep-2012 12:41  709K  

[TXT]

 cielcomptaevolution1..> 28-Sep-2012 12:30  497K  

[   ]

 generateurtableaubor..> 26-Jun-2009 07:07  1.6M  

[TXT]

 guidedereferenceCiel..> 04-Oct-2011 16:15  354K  

[TXT]

 magicolor1600Wmanuel..> 28-Sep-2012 12:41  317K  

[TXT]

 samsung-Wave-II-noir..> 28-Sep-2012 13:46  3.3M 

www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com Dell™ Latitude™ D500 System Information Guide Systeeminformatiehandleiding Guide d'informations du système Systeminformationshandbuch Informazioni di sistema Manual de informações do sistema Guía de información del sistema Model PP05Lwww.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com Dell™ Latitude™ D500 System Information Guide Model PP05LNotes, Notices, and Cautions NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your computer. NOTICE: A NOTICE indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death. Abbreviations and Acronyms For a complete list of abbreviations and acronyms, see the User’s Guide (depending on your operating system, double-click the User’s Guide icon on your desktop, or click the Start button, click Help and Support Center, and then click User and system guides). If you purchased a Dell™ n Series computer, any references in this document to Microsoft® Windows® operating systems are not applicable. ____________________ Information in this document is subject to change without notice. © 2003 Dell Computer Corporation. All rights reserved. Reproduction in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Computer Corporation is strictly forbidden. Trademarks used in this text: Dell, the DELL logo, TrueMobile, Inspiron, Dell Precision, Dimension, OptiPlex, and Latitude are trademarks of Dell Computer Corporation; Intel, Pentium, and Celeron are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation; Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation; EMC is a registered trademark of EMC Corporation. Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell Computer Corporation disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own. Model PP05L February 2003 P/N 1Y369 Rev. A00Contents 3 Contents CAUTION: Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Air Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 EMC Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 When Using Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Ergonomic Computing Habits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 When Working Inside Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Protecting Against Electrostatic Discharge . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Battery Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Finding Information for Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Setting Up Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 About Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Left View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Right View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Back View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Bottom View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Removing a Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Removing and Installing a Reserve Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Installing a Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Running the Dell Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Regulatory Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 ContentsSystem Information Guide 5 CAUTION: Safety Instructions Use the following safety guidelines to help ensure your own personal safety and to help protect your computer and working environment from potential damage. General • Do not attempt to service the computer yourself unless you are a trained service technician. Always follow installation instructions closely. • If you use an extension power cable with your AC adapter, ensure that the total ampere rating of the products plugged in to the extension power cable does not exceed the ampere rating of the extension cable. • Do not push objects into air vents or openings of your computer. Doing so can cause fire or electric shock by shorting out interior components. • Do not store your computer in a low-airflow environment, such as a carrying case or a closed briefcase, while the computer is turned on. Restricting airflow can damage the computer or cause a fire. • Keep your computer away from radiators and heat sources. Also, do not block cooling vents. Avoid placing loose papers underneath your computer; do not place your computer in a closed-in wall unit or on a bed, sofa, or rug. • Place the AC adapter in a ventilated area, such as a desk top or on the floor, when you use it to run the computer or to charge the battery. Do not cover the AC adapter with papers or other items that will reduce cooling; also, do not use the AC adapter inside a carrying case. • The AC adapter may become hot during normal operation of your computer. Use care when handling the adapter during or immediately after operation. • Do not allow your portable computer to operate with the base resting directly on exposed skin for extended periods of time. The surface temperature of the base will rise during normal operation (particularly when AC power is present). Allowing sustained contact with exposed skin can cause discomfort or, eventually, a burn. • Do not use your computer in a wet environment, for example, near a bath tub, sink, or swimming pool or in a wet basement. • If your computer includes an integrated or optional (PC Card) modem, disconnect the modem cable if an electrical storm is approaching to avoid the remote risk of electric shock from lightning via the telephone line.6 System Information Guide www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com • To help avoid the potential hazard of electric shock, do not connect or disconnect any cables or perform maintenance or reconfiguration of this product during an electrical storm. Do not use your computer during an electrical storm unless all cables have been disconnected and the computer is operating on battery power. • If your computer includes a modem, the cable used with the modem should be manufactured with a minimum wire size of 26 American wire gauge (AWG) and an FCC-compliant RJ-11 modular plug. • Before you open the memory module/Mini PCI card/modem cover on the bottom of your computer, disconnect all cables from their electrical outlets and disconnect the telephone cable. • If your computer has both a modem RJ-11 connector and a network RJ-45 connector, which look alike, make sure you insert the telephone cable into the RJ-11 connector, not the RJ-45 connector. • PC Cards may become very warm during normal operation. Use care when removing PC Cards after their continuous operation. • Before you clean your computer, disconnect the computer from the electrical outlet. Clean your computer with a soft cloth dampened with water. Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners, which may contain flammable substances. Power • Use only the Dell-provided AC adapter approved for use with this computer. Use of another AC adapter may cause a fire or explosion. • Before you connect the computer to an electrical outlet, check the AC adapter voltage rating to ensure that the required voltage and frequency match the available power source. • To remove the computer from all power sources, turn the computer off, disconnect the AC adapter from the electrical outlet, and remove any battery installed in the battery bay or module bay. • To help prevent electric shock, plug the AC adapter and device power cables into properly grounded power sources. These power cables may be equipped with 3-prong plugs to provide an earth grounding connection. Do not use adapter plugs or remove the grounding prong from the power cable plug. If you use a power extension cable, use the appropriate type, 2-prong or 3-prong, to mate with the AC adapter power cable. CAUTION: Safety Instructions (continued)System Information Guide 7 • Be sure that nothing rests on your AC adapter’s power cable and that the cable is not located where it can be tripped over or stepped on. • If you are using a multiple-outlet power strip, use caution when plugging the AC adapter’s power cable into the power strip. Some power strips may allow you to insert the plug incorrectly. Incorrect insertion of the power plug could result in permanent damage to your computer, as well as risk of electric shock and/or fire. Ensure that the ground prong of the power plug is inserted into the mating ground contact of the power strip. Battery • Use only Dell™ battery modules that are approved for use with this computer. Use of other types may increase the risk of fire or explosion. • Do not carry a battery pack in your pocket, purse, or other container where metal objects (such as car keys or paper clips) could short-circuit the battery terminals. The resulting excessive current flow can cause extremely high temperatures and may result in damage to the battery pack or cause fire or burns. • The battery poses a burn hazard if you handle it improperly. Do not disassemble it. Handle a damaged or leaking battery pack with extreme care. If the battery is damaged, electrolyte may leak from the cells and may cause personal injury. • Keep the battery away from children. • Do not store or leave your computer or battery pack near a heat source such as a radiator, fireplace, stove, electric heater, or other heat-generating appliance or otherwise expose it to temperatures in excess of 60ºC (140ºF). When heated to excessive temperatures, battery cells could explode or vent, posing a risk of fire. • Do not dispose of your computer’s battery in a fire or with normal household waste. Battery cells may explode. Discard a used battery according to the manufacturer’s instructions or contact your local waste disposal agency for disposal instructions. Dispose of a spent or damaged battery promptly. CAUTION: Safety Instructions (continued)8 System Information Guide www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com Air Travel • Certain Federal Aviation Administration regulations and/or airline-specific restrictions may apply to the operation of your Dell computer while you are on board an aircraft. For example, such regulations/restrictions may prohibit the use of any personal electronic device (PED) that has the capacity for intentional transmission of radio frequency or other electromagnetic signals while on an aircraft. – In order to best comply with all such restrictions, if your Dell portable computer is equipped with Dell TrueMobile™ or some other wireless communication device, please disable this device before you board the aircraft and follow all instructions provided by airline personnel with regard to such device. – Additionally, the use of any PED, such as a portable computer, may be prohibited in aircraft during certain critical phases of flight, for example, takeoff and landing. Some airlines may further define the critical flight phase as any time the aircraft is below 3050 m (10,000 ft). Please follow the airline’s specific instructions as to when the use of a PED is allowed. EMC Instructions Use shielded signal cables to ensure that you maintain the appropriate EMC classification for the intended environment. For parallel printers, a cable is available from Dell. If you prefer, you can order a cable from Dell at its worldwide website at www.dell.com. Static electricity can harm electronic components inside your computer. To prevent static damage, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computer’s electronic components, such as a memory module. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer’s input/output panel. CAUTION: Safety Instructions (continued)System Information Guide 9 When Using Your Computer Observe the following safe-handling guidelines to prevent damage to your computer: • When setting up the computer for work, place it on a level surface. • When traveling, do not check the computer as baggage. You can put your computer through an X-ray security machine, but never put your computer through a metal detector. If you have the computer checked by hand, be sure to have a charged battery available in case you are asked to turn on the computer. • When traveling with the hard drive removed from the computer, wrap the drive in a nonconducting material, such as cloth or paper. If you have the drive checked by hand, be ready to install the drive in the computer. You can put the hard drive through an X-ray security machine, but never put the drive through a metal detector. • When traveling, do not place the computer in overhead storage compartments where it could slide around. Do not drop your computer or subject it to other mechanical shocks. • Protect your computer, battery, and hard drive from environmental hazards such as dirt, dust, food, liquids, temperature extremes, and overexposure to sunlight. • When you move your computer between environments with very different temperature and/or humidity ranges, condensation may form on or within the computer. To avoid damaging the computer, allow sufficient time for the moisture to evaporate before using the computer. NOTICE: When taking the computer from low-temperature conditions into a warmer environment or from high-temperature conditions into a cooler environment, allow the computer to acclimate to room temperature before turning on power. • When you disconnect a cable, pull on its connector or on its strain-relief loop, not on the cable itself. As you pull out the connector, keep it evenly aligned to avoid bending any connector pins. Also, before you connect a cable make sure both connectors are correctly oriented and aligned. • Handle components with care. Hold a component such as a memory module by its edges, not its pins. • When preparing to remove a memory module from the system board or disconnect a device from the computer, turn off the computer, disconnect the AC adapter cable, remove any battery installed in the battery bay or module bay, and then wait 5 seconds before proceeding to help avoid possible damage to the system board.10 System Information Guide www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com • Clean the display with a soft, clean cloth and water. Apply the water to the cloth; then stroke the cloth across the display in one direction, moving from the top of the display to the bottom. Remove moisture from the display quickly and keep the display dry. Long-term exposure to moisture can damage the display. Do not use a commercial window cleaner to clean your display. • If your computer gets wet or is damaged, follow the procedures described in "Solving Problems" in your User’s Guide. If, after following these procedures, you confirm that your computer is not operating properly, contact Dell (see "Getting Help" in your User’s Guide for the appropriate contact information). Ergonomic Computing Habits CAUTION: Improper or prolonged keyboard use may result in injury. CAUTION: Viewing the display or external monitor screen for extended periods of time may result in eye strain. For comfort and efficiency, observe the ergonomic guidelines in the Appendix of your online User’s Guide when setting up and using your computer. This portable computer is not designed for continuous operation as office equipment. For extended use in an office, it is recommended that you connect an external keyboard. When Working Inside Your Computer Before removing or installing memory modules, Mini PCI cards, or modems, perform the following steps in the sequence indicated. NOTICE: The only time you should ever access the inside of your computer is when you are installing memory modules, a Mini PCI card, or a modem. NOTICE: Wait 5 seconds after turning off the computer before disconnecting a device or removing a memory module, Mini PCI card, or modem to help prevent possible damage to the system board. 1 Shut down your computer and turn off any attached devices. 2 Disconnect your computer and devices from electrical outlets to reduce the potential for personal injury or shock. Also, disconnect any telephone or telecommunication lines from the computer. 3 Remove the main battery from the battery bay and, if necessary, the second battery from the module bay. When Using Your Computer (continued)System Information Guide 11 4 Ground yourself by touching any unpainted metal surface on the back of the computer. While you work, periodically touch the unpainted metal surface to dissipate any static electricity that might harm internal components. Protecting Against Electrostatic Discharge Static electricity can harm electronic components inside your computer. To prevent static damage, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computer’s electronic components, such as a memory module. You can do so by touching any unpainted metal surface on the back of the computer. As you continue to work inside the computer, periodically touch any unpainted metal surface on the back of the computer to remove any static charge your body may have accumulated. You can also take the following steps to prevent damage from electrostatic discharge (ESD): • When unpacking a static-sensitive component from its shipping carton, do not remove the component from the antistatic packing material until you are ready to install the component. Just before unwrapping the antistatic packaging, be sure to discharge static electricity from your body. • When transporting a sensitive component, first place it in an antistatic container or packaging. • Handle all sensitive components in a static-safe area. If possible, use antistatic floor pads and workbench pads. Battery Disposal Your computer uses a lithium-ion battery. For instructions about replacing the lithium-ion battery in your computer, see "Removing a Battery" later in this document and "Using a Battery" in your online User’s Guide. Do not dispose of the battery along with household waste. Contact your local waste disposal agency for the address of the nearest battery deposit site. When Using Your Computer (continued)12 System Information Guide www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com Finding Information for Your Computer What are you looking for? Find It Here • A diagnostic program for my computer • Drivers for my computer • My computer documentation • My device documentation Drivers and Utilities CD (also known as the ResourceCD) Documentation and drivers are already installed on your computer when shipped from Dell. You can use the CD to reinstall drivers, run the Dell Diagnostics, or access your documentation. Readme files may be included on your CD to provide last-minute updates about technical changes to your computer or advanced technical-reference material for experienced users or technicians. • How to set up my computer • Warranty Information • Safety Instructions Dell System Information Guide • Express Service Code and Service Tag • Microsoft® Windows® License Label Express Service Code and Product Key Label These labels are located on your computer. • Latest drivers for my computer • Answers to technical service and support questions • Online discussions with other users and technical support • Documentation for my computer Dell Support Website — support.dell.com The Dell Support website provides several online tools, including: • Solutions — Troubleshooting hints and tips, articles from technicians, and online courses • Community Forum — Online discussion with other Dell customers • Upgrades — Upgrade information for components, such as memory, the hard drive, and the operating system • Customer Care — Contact information, order status, warranty, and repair information • Downloads — Drivers, patches, and software updates • Reference — Computer documentation, product specifications, and white papersSystem Information Guide 13 • How to remove and replace parts • How to obtain technical specifications • How to configure system settings • How to troubleshoot and solve problems User’s Guide Windows Help and Support Center 1 Click the Start button and click Help and Support. 2Click User’s and system guides and click User’s guides. Microsoft Windows 2000 Double-click the User’s Guides icon on your desktop. • How to use Windows XP • Documentation for my computer • Documentation for devices (such as a modem) Windows Help and Support Center 1 Click the Start button and click Help and Support. 2Type a word or phrase that describes your problem and click the arrow icon. 3 Click the topic that describes your problem. 4 Follow the instructions on the screen. • How to reinstall my operating system Operating System CD After you reinstall your operating system using the Operating System CD, use the Drivers and Utilities CD to reinstall drivers for the devices that came with your computer. The product key for your operating system is located on your computer. What are you looking for? Find It Here or14 System Information Guide www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com Setting Up Your Computer CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions at the beginning of this document. 1 Unpack the accessories box. 2 Set aside the contents of the accessories box, which you will need to complete the setup of your computer. The accessories box also contains user documentation and any software or additional hardware (such as PC Cards, drives, or batteries) that you have ordered. 3 Connect the AC adapter to the AC adapter connector on the computer and to the electrical outlet.System Information Guide 15 4 Open the computer display and press the power button to turn on the computer. NOTE: Do not connect the computer to the docking device until the computer has been turned on and shut down at least once. power button16 System Information Guide www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com About Your Computer Front View display touch pad power button keyboard keyboard status lights device status lights speakers touch pad buttons display latchSystem Information Guide 17 Left View Right View PC Card slot infrared sensor audio connectors (2) security cable slot air vents (2) security cable slot module bay device latch release18 System Information Guide www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com Back View NOTICE: To avoid damaging the computer, wait 5 seconds after turning off the computer before you disconnect an external device. CAUTION: Do not block, push objects into, or allow dust to accumulate in the air vents. Do not store your computer in a low-airflow environment, such as a closed briefcase, while it is running. Restricting the airflow can damage the computer or cause a fire. USB connectors (2) S-video TV-out connector modem connector (RJ-11) (optional) network connector (RJ-45) video connector parallel connector serial connector AC adapter connector air ventsSystem Information Guide 19 Bottom View fan battery-bay latch release battery charge gauge battery memory module cover hard drive Mini PCI card cover docking device slot device screw slot20 System Information Guide www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com Removing a Battery For more information about removing the second battery, see "Using the Module Bay" in your online User’s Guide. CAUTION: Before performing these procedures, turn off the computer, disconnect it from the electrical outlet, and disconnect the modem from the telephone wall jack. NOTICE: If you choose to replace the battery with the computer in standby mode, you have up to 90 seconds to complete the battery replacement before the computer shuts down and loses any unsaved data. 1 Ensure that the computer is turned off, disconnected from an electrical outlet, and disconnected from the telephone wall jack. 2 If the computer is connected to a docking device (docked), undock it. See the documentation that came with your docking device for instructions. 3 Slide and hold the battery-bay latch release on the bottom of the computer, and then remove the battery from the bay.System Information Guide 21 Removing and Installing a Reserve Battery 1 Remove the battery. 2 Remove the reserve battery cover.22 System Information Guide www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com 3 Pull the reserve battery out of its compartment, and disconnect the cable from the connector. 4 Connect the reserve battery cable to the connector in the reserve battery compartment. reserve battery connector reserve battery cableSystem Information Guide 23 5 Place the reserve battery in the compartment, and replace the reserve battery cover. Installing a Battery Slide the battery into the bay until the latch release clicks. For more information about installing the second battery, see "Using the Module Bay" in your online User’s Guide. Running the Dell Diagnostics The Dell Diagnostics is located on a hidden Diagnostic utility partition on your hard drive. NOTE: If your computer cannot display a screen image, contact Dell (see "Getting Help" in your User’s Guide for the appropriate contact information). 1 Shut down the computer. 2 If the computer is connected to a docking device (docked), undock it. See the documentation that came with your docking device for instructions. 3 Connect the computer to an electrical outlet.24 System Information Guide www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com 4 Turn on the computer. When the DELL™ logo appears, press immediately. NOTE: If you see a message stating that no diagnostics utility partition has been found, run the Dell Diagnostics from your Drivers and Utilities CD. If you wait too long and the Microsoft® Windows® logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Windows desktop. Then shut down your computer and try again. 5 When the boot device list appears, highlight Diagnostics and press . The computer begins to run the Pre-boot System Assessment, a series of embedded diagnostics that perform initial testing on your system board, keyboard, hard drive, and display. • During the assessment, answer any questions that appear. • If a failure is detected, the computer stops and displays an error message. To stop the assessment and reboot to the operating system, press ; to continue to the next test, press ; to retest the component that failed, press . • If failures are detected during the Pre-boot System Assessment, write down the error code(s) and contact Dell (see "Getting Help" in your User’s Guide for the appropriate contact information) before continuing on to the Dell Diagnostics. If the Pre-boot System Assessment completes successfully, you receive the message Booting Dell Diagnostic Utility Partition. Press any key to continue. 6 Press any key to start the Dell Diagnostics from the Diagnostics utility partition on your hard drive. 7 After the Dell Diagnostics loads and the Main Menu screen appears, click the button for the option you want. Option Function Express Test Performs a quick test of devices. The test typically takes 10 to 20 minutes and requires no interaction on your part. Run Express Test first to increase the possibility of tracing the problem quickly. Extended Test Performs a thorough check of devices. This test typically takes 1 hour or more and requires you to answer questions periodically.System Information Guide 25 8 If a problem is encountered during a test, a message appears, displaying the error code and a description of the problem. Write down the error code and problem description and follow the instructions on the screen. If you cannot resolve the error condition, contact Dell (see "Getting Help" in your User’s Guide for the appropriate contact information). NOTE: The Service Tag for your computer is located in the title bar of each screen. 9 If you run a test from the Custom Test or Symptom Tree option, click the applicable tab described in the following table for more information. 10 When the tests are complete, close the test screen to return to the MainMenu screen. To exit the Dell Diagnostics and restart the computer, close the Main Menu screen. Option Function Custom Test Tests a specific device. You can customize the tests you want to run. Symptom Tree Lists the most common symptoms encountered and allows you to select a test based on the symptom of the problem you are experiencing. Tab Function Results Displays the results of the test and any error conditions encountered. Errors Displays error conditions encountered, error codes, and problem description. Help Describes the test and may indicate requirements for running the test. Configuration Displays your hardware configuration for the selected device. The Dell Diagnostics obtains your configuration information for all devices from the system setup program, memory, and various internal tests and displays the information in the device list in the left pane of the screen. The device list may not display the names of all the components installed on your computer or all devices attached to your computer. Parameters Allows you to customize the test by changing the test settings.26 System Information Guide www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com Regulatory Notices Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) is any signal or emission, radiated in free space or conducted along power or signal leads, that endangers the functioning of a radio navigation or other safety service or seriously degrades, obstructs, or repeatedly interrupts a licensed radio communications service. Radio communications services include but are not limited to AM/FM commercial broadcast, television, cellular services, radar, air-traffic control, pager, and Personal Communication Services (PCS). These licensed services, along with unintentional radiators such as digital devices, including computers, contribute to the electromagnetic environment. Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) is the ability of items of electronic equipment to function properly together in the electronic environment. While this computer has been designed and determined to be compliant with regulatory agency limits for EMI, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause interference with radio communications services, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, you are encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: • Reorient the receiving antenna. • Relocate the computer with respect to the receiver. • Move the computer away from the receiver. • Plug the computer into a different outlet so that the computer and the receiver are on different branch circuits. If necessary, consult a Dell Technical Support representative or an experienced radio/television technician for additional suggestions. For additional regulatory information, see "Regulatory Notices" in the Appendix of your online User’s Guide. The sections specific to each regulatory agency provide countryspecific EMC/EMI or product safety information.www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com Dell™ Latitude™ D500 Systeeminformatiehandleiding Model PP05LOpmerkingen, kennisgevingen en waarschuwingen OPMERKING: Een OPMERKING duidt belangrijke informatie aan voor een beter gebruik van de computer. KENNISGEVING: Een KENNISGEVING duidt mogelijke beschadiging van de hardware of gegevensverlies aan en geeft aan hoe u dergelijke problemen kunt voorkomen. WAARSCHUWING: Een WAARSCHUWING duidt het risico van schade aan eigendommen, lichamelijk letsel of overlijden aan. Afkortingen en acroniemen Raadpleeg de handleiding voor een volledige lijst van afkortingen en acroniemen (afhankelijk van het besturingssysteem dubbelklikt u hiervoor op het pictogram Handleiding op het bureaublad of klikt u op de knop Start en vervolgens op Help and Support Center (Help en ondersteuning) en User and system guides (Gebruikers- en systeemhandleidingen)). Als u een Dell™-computer uit de n-serie hebt aangeschaft, zijn de verwijzingen naar de Microsoft® Windows®-besturingssystemen in dit document niet van toepassing. ____________________ De informatie in dit document kan zonder voorafgaande kennisgeving worden gewijzigd. © 2003 Dell Computer Corporation. Alle rechten voorbehouden. Verveelvoudiging van dit materiaal, op welke wijze dan ook,is alleen toegestaan na uitdrukkelijke, schriftelijke toestemming van Dell Computer Corporation. Handelsmerken in dit document: Dell, het DELL-logo, TrueMobile, Inspiron, Dell Precision, Dimension, OptiPlex en Latitude zijn handelsmerken van Dell Computer Corporation; Intel, Pentium en Celeron zijn gedeponeerde handelsmerken van Intel Corporation; Microsoft en Windows zijn gedeponeerde handelsmerken van Microsoft Corporation; EMC is een gedeponeerd handelsmerk van EMC Corporation. Andere handelsmerken en handelsnamen die mogelijk in dit document worden gebruikt, dienen ter aanduiding van de rechthebbenden met betrekking tot de merken en namen of ter aanduiding van hun producten. Dell Computer Corporation claimt op geen enkele wijze enig eigendomsrecht ten aanzien van andere handelsmerken of handelsnamen dan haar eigen handelsmerken en handelsnamen. Model PP05L Februari 2003 P/N 1Y369 Rev. A00Inhoud 29 Inhoud WAARSCHUWING: Veiligheidsinstructies . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Algemeen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Voeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Batterij . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Luchtverkeer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 EMC-instructies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Bij gebruik van de computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Ergonomische overwegingen bij het werken met de computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 De computer openen voor onderhoud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Bescherming tegen elektrostatische ontlading . . . . . . . . . 37 De batterij verwijderen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Informatie over uw computer vinden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 De computer instellen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Over de computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Voorkant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Zijaanzicht, links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Zijaanzicht, rechts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Achterkant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Onderkant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Een batterij verwijderen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Een reservebatterij verwijderen en installeren . . . . . . . . . . 48 Een batterij installeren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Dell-diagnoseprogramma uitvoeren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Internationale kennisgevingen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5430 InhoudSysteeminformatiehandleiding 31 WAARSCHUWING: Veiligheidsinstructies Volg de onderstaande veiligheidsrichtlijnen om uw eigen veiligheid te garanderen en de computer en werkomgeving te beschermen tegen mogelijke schade. Algemeen • Probeer niet zelf onderhoud te plegen aan de computer, tenzij u een opgeleide servicemonteur bent. Volg altijd de installatie-instructies nauwlettend op. • Als u de netadapter gebruikt in combinatie met een verlengsnoer, moet u erop letten dat het totale stroomverbruik van de producten die u op het verlengsnoer aansluit, niet de maximale stroombelasting van het verlengsnoer overschrijdt. • Duw geen voorwerpen in de lucht- of andere openingen van de computer. Als u dat wel doet, loopt u het risico brand of een elektrische schok te veroorzaken door kortsluiting in de interne onderdelen. • Plaats de computer niet in een omgeving waar weinig lucht beschikbaar is, zoals een draagtas of een gesloten koffer, als de computer is ingeschakeld. Als u dat toch doet, loopt u het risico van brand of beschadiging van de computer. • Plaats de computer niet in de buurt van radiatoren en andere warmtebronnen. Blokkeer nooit de ventilatieopeningen. Leg geen losse papieren onder de computer en plaats de computer niet in een ingesloten ruimte in of tegen de muur, noch op een bed, bank of vloerkleed. • Plaats de netadapter bij het werken met de computer of het opladen van de batterij op een plaats waar voldoende luchtcirculatie is, bijvoorbeeld op een bureau of op de vloer. Dek de netadapter niet af met papier of andere voorwerpen die de koeling belemmeren. Gebruik de netadapter niet terwijl deze zich in een draagtas bevindt. • De netadapter kan bij normaal gebruik van de computer heet worden. Ga tijdens of direct na het gebruik voorzichtig met de adapter om. • Als u de draagbare computer gebruikt, moet u deze niet gedurende langere tijd op de blote huid plaatsen. De oppervlaktetemperatuur van het apparaat stijgt bij normaal gebruik (met name bij het gebruik van wisselstroom). Door langdurig contact met de blote huid kunt u huidirritatie of zelfs brandwonden oplopen. • Gebruik de computer niet op een vochtige plaats, bijvoorbeeld bij een bad, gootsteen of zwembad of in een vochtig souterrain.32 Systeeminformatiehandleiding www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com • Als de computer is voorzien van een geïntegreerde of optionele (pc-kaart) modem, moet u de modemkabel tijdens onweer loskoppelen om het (geringe) risico van een elektrische schok door blikseminslag via de telefoonlijn te vermijden. • U kunt het risico van elektrische schokken vermijden door tijdens onweer geen kabels aan te sluiten of los te maken, geen onderhoud aan dit product te plegen en het product niet opnieuw te configureren. Gebruik de computer niet tijdens onweer tenzij alle kabels zijn losgemaakt en de computer uitsluitend op batterijen werkt. • Als de computer is voorzien van een modem, moet de modemkabel een minimumgrootte van 26 AWG (American Wire Gauge) hebben en een FCC-compatibele RJ-11 modulaire stekker. • Voordat u de kap voor de geheugenmodule/mini-PCI-kaart/modem onder aan de computer opent, moet u alle kabels uit het stopcontact halen en de telefoonkabel losmaken. • Als de computer een modem-RJ-11-connector en een netwerk-RJ-45-connector heeft, stopt u de telefoonkabel in de RJ-11-connector en niet in de RJ-45-connector (de connectoren lijken op elkaar). • Pc-kaarten kunnen erg warm worden tijdens normaal gebruik. Wees voorzichtig als u na langdurig gebruik van de computer een pc-kaart verwijdert. • Voordat u de computer schoonmaakt, moet u de stekker van de computer uit het stopcontact halen. Maak de computer schoon met een zachte doek die met water vochtig is gemaakt. Gebruik geen vloeibare schoonmaakmiddelen of middelen in een spuitbus. Deze schoonmaakmiddelen kunnen ontvlambare stoffen bevatten. Voeding • Gebruik alleen de door Dell meegeleverde netadapter die is goedgekeurd voor gebruik met deze computer. Als u een andere netadapter gebruikt, kan dit brand of een explosie veroorzaken. • Voordat u de computer op een elektriciteitsbron aansluit, moet u ervoor zorgen dat het voltage van de netadapter overeenkomt met dat van de beschikbare elektriciteitsbron. • U verwijdert de computer van alle stroombronnen door de computer uit te zetten, de netadapter uit het stopcontact te halen en een eventuele batterij te verwijderen uit de batterijhouder of de modulehouder. WAARSCHUWING: Veiligheidsinstructies (vervolg)Systeeminformatiehandleiding 33 • U kunt een elektrische schok voorkomen door de netadapter en de stroomkabels van eventuele randapparatuur aan te sluiten op een geaard stopcontact. Deze stroomkabels kunnen zijn voorzien van een stekker met drie pennen voor de aarding. Gebruik geen adapterstekkers en verwijder de aardingspool niet uit de stekker. Wanneer u een verlengsnoer gebruikt, moet u het juiste type gebruiken (met twee of drie pinnen), dat past op de stroomkabel van de netadapter. • Zorg dat er niets op de stroomkabel van de netadapter ligt en dat niemand op deze kabel kan stappen of erover kan struikelen. • Als u een stekkerdoos gebruikt, moet u voorzichtig zijn als u de stroomkabel van de netadapter in de stekkerdoos steekt. Bij sommige stekkerdozen bestaat het gevaar dat u de stekker op onjuiste wijze aansluit. Het incorrect aansluiten van de stekker kan blijvende schade aan uw computer veroorzaken en leiden tot gevaar voor elektrische schokken of brand. Zorg ervoor dat u de aardingspool van de stekker aansluit op het bijbehorende contactpunt van de stekkerdoos. Batterij • Gebruik alleen Dell™-batterijen die zijn goedgekeurd voor gebruik met deze computer. Als u een ander type gebruikt, kan dit brand of een ontploffing veroorzaken. • Bewaar de batterij van de computer niet in uw broekzak of jaszak, portemonnee of ergens anders waar zich metalen voorwerpen zoals autosleutels of paperclips bevinden. Deze kunnen kortsluiting veroorzaken. Door overmatige stroomafgifte kunnen extreem hoge temperaturen ontstaan die schade aan de batterij of brand en brandwonden kunnen veroorzaken. • Als u de batterij verkeerd gebruikt, kan deze brandgevaar opleveren. Haal de batterij niet uit elkaar. U moet een beschadigde of lekkende batterij met de grootste voorzichtigheid behandelen. Als de batterij is beschadigd, kan er elektrolyt uit de cellen lekken, wat lichamelijk letsel kan veroorzaken. • Houd de batterij buiten bereik van kinderen. • Laat uw computer of batterij nooit in de buurt van een warmtebron liggen, zoals een radiator, open haard, oven, elektrische kachel of andere warmteproducerende apparaten. Stel de computer of batterij ook op geen enkele andere wijze bloot aan temperaturen van meer dan 60°C (140°F). Als batterijcellen overmatig worden verhit, kunnen ze exploderen of kan inhoud wegstromen, waardoor brand kan ontstaan. • Gooi oude batterijen niet weg met het huisvuil en gooi ze niet in vuur. Batterijcellen kunnen exploderen. Volg bij het weggooien van oude batterijen de richtlijnen van de fabrikant of neem contact op met de plaatselijke afvalverwerking voor instructies. Gooi een gebruikte of beschadigde batterij direct weg. WAARSCHUWING: Veiligheidsinstructies (vervolg)34 Systeeminformatiehandleiding www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com Luchtverkeer • Als u uw Dell-computer meeneemt in het vliegtuig, kunnen bepaalde regels van de luchtvaartmaatschappij van kracht zijn. Het kan bijvoorbeeld verboden zijn in het vliegtuig persoonlijke elektronische apparaten te gebruiken die radiofrequenties of andere elektromagnetische signalen kunnen uitzenden. – Als uw draagbare Dell-computer is voorzien van Dell TrueMobile™ of een ander apparaat voor draadloze communicatie, moet u dit, voordat u aan boord gaat, uitschakelen en alle instructies van het cabinepersoneel omtrent dergelijke apparaten strikt opvolgen. – Bovendien kan het gebruik van dit soort apparaten, zoals een draagbare computer, in vliegtuigen verboden zijn op bepaalde momenten tijdens de vlucht, zoals tijdens de start en de landing. Sommige luchtvaartmaatschappijen bepalen dat op geen enkel moment onder een vlieghoogte van 3.050 m (10.000 voet) gebruik mag worden gemaakt van persoonlijke elektronische apparaten. Volg de instructies van de luchtvaartmaatschappij met betrekking tot het gebruik van elektronische apparaten strikt op. EMC-instructies Wanneer u afgeschermde signaalkabels gebruikt, bent u er zeker van dat de juiste EMC-classificatie voor de bedoelde omgeving wordt gehandhaafd. Voor parallelle printers is een speciale kabel verkrijgbaar bij Dell. U kunt deze kabel bij Dell bestellen via de website op www.dell.com. Door statische elektriciteit kunnen de elektronische onderdelen in de computer beschadigd raken. U kunt beschadiging ten gevolge van statische elektriciteit voorkomen door de statische elektriciteit in uw lichaam te ontladen voordat u elektronische onderdelen van de computer (zoals een geheugenmodule) aanraakt. U doet dit door eerst een ongeverfd metalen oppervlak op het I/Opaneel van de computer aan te raken. WAARSCHUWING: Veiligheidsinstructies (vervolg)Systeeminformatiehandleiding 35 Bij gebruik van de computer Neem de volgende veiligheidsmaatregelen in acht om schade aan de computer te voorkomen. • Als u de computer voorbereidt op gebruik, moet u deze op een effen oppervlak plaatsen. • Check bij een vliegreis de computer niet als bagage in. De computer kan zonder enig bezwaar door de röntgencontrole, maar niet langs de metaaldetector. Als u de computer als handbagage meeneemt, moet u ervoor zorgen dat de batterij is opgeladen voor het geval u wordt gevraagd de computer aan te zetten. • Als u de computer meeneemt op reis en u hebt de vaste schijf uit de computer verwijderd, moet u het schijfstation in niet-geleidend materiaal, zoals een doek of papier, verpakken. Als u het station als handbagage meeneemt, moet u dat op verzoek in de computer kunnen installeren. De vaste schijf kan zonder enig bezwaar door de röntgencontrole, maar niet langs de metaaldetector. • Plaats de computer niet in de bagageruimte boven u. Tijdens de vliegreis kan de computer gaan schuiven. Laat de computer niet vallen en stel het apparaat niet bloot aan mechanische schokken. • Bescherm de computer, batterij en vaste schijf tegen vuil, stof, voedsel, vloeistoffen, bijzonder hoge of lage temperaturen en leg deze niet in de zon. • Als u de computer naar verschillende omgevingen verplaatst met verschillende temperaturen en/of vochtigheidsgraden, kan zich condensatie voordoen op of in de computer. U voorkomt beschadiging van de computer door voldoende tijd te nemen voor het verdampen van het vocht voordat u de computer gebruikt. KENNISGEVING: Als u de computer van een omgeving met een lage temperatuur naar een omgeving met een hogere temperatuur brengt of andersom, moet u de computer aan de kamertemperatuur laten wennen voordat u deze aanzet. • Maak een kabel los door aan de connector of aan het beugeltje voor trekontlasting te trekken en niet aan de kabel zelf. Als u de kabel uit de connector trekt, moet u ervoor zorgen dat u de connector recht uit de aansluiting trekt zodat de pinnen van de connector niet verbuigen. Als u een kabel aansluit, moet u beide connectoren op de juiste manier in de aansluiting steken. • Hanteer alle onderdelen met zorg. Houd onderdelen, zoals een geheugenmodule, vast aan de randen en niet aan de pennen. • Als u een geheugenmodule uit de systeemkaart wilt verwijderen of een apparaat wilt loskoppelen van de computer, moet u de computer uitzetten, de netadapterkabel losmaken, een eventuele batterij verwijderen uit de batterijhouder of de modulehouder en vervolgens 5 seconden wachten voordat u verdergaat, zodat eventuele schade aan de systeemkaart wordt voorkomen.36 Systeeminformatiehandleiding www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com • U kunt het beeldscherm reinigen met een schone, zachte doek en water. Breng water aan op de doek en wrijf vervolgens met de doek in één richting over het scherm, van boven naar beneden. Verwijder vocht zo snel mogelijk van het beeldscherm en houd het beeldscherm droog. Te lange blootstelling aan vocht kan het beeldscherm beschadigen. Gebruik geen reinigingsmiddel voor glas om het beeldscherm te reinigen. • Als de computer nat of beschadigd is, moet u de procedures volgen die staan beschreven in het gedeelte "Problemen met de computer oplossen" in de handleiding. Als u, nadat u deze procedures hebt gevolgd, vaststelt dat uw computer niet correct functioneert, kunt u contact opnemen met Dell (zie "Help opvragen" in de handleiding voor de juiste contactgegevens). Ergonomische overwegingen bij het werken met de computer WAARSCHUWING: Onjuist of langdurig gebruik van het toetsenbord kan leiden tot lichamelijk ongemak en zelfs letsel. WAARSCHUWING: Langdurig naar het beeldscherm of de externe monitor kijken, kan tot vermoeidheid van de ogen leiden. Houd u aan de ergonomische richtlijnen in het appendix van de on line handleiding voor comfortabel en efficiënt werken als u de computer opstelt en gaat gebruiken. Dit is een draagbare computer die niet is ontwikkeld voor continu gebruik als kantoorapparatuur. Bij langdurig gebruik op een kantoor, wordt u aangeraden een extern toetsenbord aan te sluiten. De computer openen voor onderhoud Voordat u geheugenmodules, mini-PCI-kaarten of modems verwijdert of installeert, moet u de volgende stappen in de aangegeven volgorde uitvoeren. KENNISGEVING: U moet de computer alleen openmaken als u een geheugenmodule, een miniPCI-kaart of een modem installeert. Bij gebruik van de computer (vervolg)Systeeminformatiehandleiding 37 KENNISGEVING: Voordat u een apparaat loskoppelt of een geheugenmodule, mini-PCI-kaart of een modem verwijdert, moet u 5 seconden wachten nadat u de computer hebt uitgezet om eventuele schade aan de systeemkaart te voorkomen. 1 Schakel de computer en eventueel aangekoppelde apparaten uit. 2 Haal de stekkers van de computer en apparatuur uit het stopcontact om lichamelijk letsel of schokken te voorkomen. Koppel tevens eventuele telefoon- of telecommunicatielijnen los van de computer. 3 Haal de hoofdbatterij uit de batterijhouder en, indien nodig, de tweede batterij uit de modulaire houder. 4 Zorg dat u bent geaard door het ongeverfde metalen oppervlak aan de achterkant van de computer aan te raken. Raak tijdens het werken zo nu en dan het ongeverfde metalen oppervlak aan om eventuele statische elektriciteit te ontladen die de interne onderdelen zou kunnen beschadigen. Bescherming tegen elektrostatische ontlading Door statische elektriciteit kunnen de elektronische onderdelen in de computer beschadigd raken. U kunt beschadiging ten gevolge van statische elektriciteit voorkomen door de statische elektriciteit in uw lichaam te ontladen voordat u elektronische onderdelen van de computer (zoals een geheugenmodule) aanraakt. U doet dit door een ongeverfd metalen oppervlak aan de achterkant van de computer aan te raken. Als u aan de interne onderdelen van de computer werkt, moet u zo nu en dan een ongeverfd metalen oppervlak aan de achterkant van de computer aanraken om eventuele statische elektriciteit in uw lichaam te ontladen. Bij gebruik van de computer (vervolg)38 Systeeminformatiehandleiding www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com U kunt ook de volgende voorzorgsmaatregelen nemen om beschadiging ten gevolge van elektrostatische ontlading (ESD) te voorkomen: • Als u een voor statische elektriciteit gevoelig onderdeel uit de verpakking haalt, moet u het onderdeel in de antistatische verpakking laten totdat u het onderdeel gaat installeren. Voordat u het onderdeel uit de antistatische verpakking haalt, moet u eerst de statische elektriciteit in uw lichaam ontladen. • Als u een gevoelig onderdeel wilt vervoeren, moet u dat in een antistatische verpakking plaatsen. • Hanteer alle gevoelige onderdelen alleen in een ruimte die vrij is van statische elektriciteit. Gebruik, indien mogelijk, antistatische matten voor vloer en werkbank. De batterij verwijderen De computer maakt gebruik van een lithiumion-batterij. Raadpleeg "Een batterij verwijderen" verderop in dit document en "Een batterij gebruiken" in de on line handleiding voor aanwijzingen bij het vervangen van de lithiumion-batterij. Gooi oude batterijen niet weg met het huisvuil. Lever ze in bij een chemokar of neem contact op met het plaatselijke afvalverwerkingsbedrijf voor het dichtstbijzijnde adres waar u batterijen kunt inleveren. Bij gebruik van de computer (vervolg)Systeeminformatiehandleiding 39 Informatie over uw computer vinden Waar bent u naar op zoek? Hier kunt u het vinden • Een diagnoseprogramma voor de computer • Stuurprogramma's voor de computer • Documentatie voor de computer • Documentatie voor een apparaat De cd Drivers and Utilities (Stuur- en hulpprogramma's) (ook wel de ResourceCD of bron-cd genoemd) Documentatie en stuurprogramma’s zijn al op de computer geïnstalleerd als deze door Dell is geleverd. U kunt deze cd gebruiken voor het opnieuw installeren van stuurprogramma’s, het uitvoeren van diagnostische hulpprogramma’s en het lezen van documentatie. De cd kan readme-bestanden (leesmijbestanden) bevatten met de meest recente updates over technische wijzigingen aan de computer, of geavanceerd technisch referentiemateriaal voor ervaren gebruikers of technici. • De computer instellen • Informatie omtrent garantie • Veiligheidsinstructies Dell-systeeminformatiehandleiding • Express Service Code en servicelabel • Microsoft® Windows®-licentielabel Express Service Code en productcodelabel Deze labels bevinden zich op de computer.40 Systeeminformatiehandleiding www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com • De meest recente stuurprogramma's voor de computer • Antwoorden op vragen op het gebied van technische diensten en ondersteuning • On line discussies met andere gebruikers en technische ondersteuning • Documentatie voor de computer Dell-website voor ondersteuning — support.dell.com De Dell Support-website biedt verschillende on line hulpprogramma's, waaronder: • Solutions (Oplossingen) — hints en tips voor het oplossen van problemen, artikelen van technici en on line cursussen • Community Forum (Community-forum) — on line discussies met andere gebruikers van Dell-producten • Upgrades — upgrade-informatie voor onderdelen zoals het geheugen, de vaste schijf en het besturingssysteem. • Customer Care (Klantenzorg) — contactinformatie, een statusoverzicht van bestellingen, informatie over garantie en reparaties • Downloads — stuurprogramma's, patches en software-updates • Reference (Naslag) — computerdocumentatie, productspecificaties en andere documenten • Onderdelen verwijderen en vervangen • Technische specificaties verkrijgen • Systeeminstellingen configureren • Problemen vaststellen en oplossen Handleiding Help en ondersteuning van Windows 1Klik op de knop Start en klik vervolgens op Help and Support (Help en ondersteuning). 2Klik op User’s and system guides(Gebruikers- en systeemhandleidingen) en op User’s guides (Gebruikershandleidingen). Microsoft Windows 2000 Dubbelklik op het pictogram Handleiding op het bureaublad van de computer. • Met Windows XP werken • Documentatie voor de computer • Documentatie voor apparaten (zoals een modem) Help en ondersteuning van Windows 1Klik op de knop Start en klik vervolgens op Help and Support (Help en ondersteuning). 2 Geef met een of meer woorden een beschrijving van het probleem en klik vervolgens op het pijlpictogram. 3Klik op het onderwerp dat uw probleem beschrijft. 4Volg de instructies op het scherm. Waar bent u naar op zoek? Hier kunt u het vindenSysteeminformatiehandleiding 41 De computer instellen WAARSCHUWING: Volg de veiligheidsinstructies aan het begin van dit document voordat u met een van de procedures in dit gedeelte begint. 1 Haal de onderdelen uit de accessoiredoos. 2 Leg de onderdelen terzijde. U hebt deze nodig om het instellen van de computer te kunnen voltooien. De accessoiredoos bevat tevens gebruikersdocumentatie en eventuele software of extra hardware die u hebt besteld (zoals pc-kaarten, stations of batterijen). • Het besturingssysteem opnieuw installeren Cd Operating System (Besturingssysteem) Nadat u het besturingssysteem opnieuw hebt geïnstalleerd met de cd Operating System (Besturingssysteem), gebruikt u de cd Drivers and Utilities (Stuur- en hulpprogramma’s) om de stuurprogramma’s voor de apparaten die bij de computer zijn geleverd, opnieuw te installeren. De productcode voor uw besturingssysteem bevindt zich op uw computer. Waar bent u naar op zoek? Hier kunt u het vinden of42 Systeeminformatiehandleiding www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com 3 Sluit de netadapter aan op de connector van de computer en de netspanning. 4 Open het display van de computer en druk op de Aan/uit-knop om de computer in te schakelen. OPMERKING: Sluit de computer pas op het dockingstation aan nadat de computer eerst ten minste eenmaal aan en uit is gezet. aan/uit-knopSysteeminformatiehandleiding 43 Over de computer Voorkant beeldscherm touchpad aan/uit-knop toetsenbord statuslampjes toetsenbord statuslampjes apparaat luidsprekers touchpadknoppen schuifje van beeldscherm44 Systeeminformatiehandleiding www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com Zijaanzicht, links Zijaanzicht, rechts pc-kaartsleuf infraroodsensor audioconnectoren (2) sleuf voor beveiligingskabel luchtopeningen (2) sleuf voor beveiligingskabel modulehouder apparaatschuifjeSysteeminformatiehandleiding 45 Achterkant KENNISGEVING: Wacht 5 seconden na het uitschakelen van de computer met het loskoppelen van een extern apparaat. Doet u dat niet, dan loopt u het risico de computer te beschadigen. WAARSCHUWING: Blokkeer de luchtopeningen niet, duw er geen voorwerpen in en zorg dat er zich geen stof in ophoopt. Plaats de computer niet in een omgeving waar weinig lucht beschikbaar is, zoals een gesloten koffer, als de computer is ingeschakeld. Als u dat toch doet, loopt u het risico van brand of beschadiging van de computer. USB-connectoren (2) connector voor S-video tv-uitgang modemconnector (RJ-11) (optioneel) netwerkconnector (RJ-45) videoconnector parallelle connector seriële connector connector voor netadapter luchtopeningen46 Systeeminformatiehandleiding www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com Onderkant ventilator ontgrendelingsschuifje van batterijhouder batterijoplaadmeter batterij geheugenmodulekap vaste schijf mini-PCIkaartkap sleuf voor dockingstation sleuf voor apparaatschroefSysteeminformatiehandleiding 47 Een batterij verwijderen Raadpleeg "Using the Module Bay" (De modulehouder gebruiken) in de on line handleiding voor meer informatie over het verwijderen van de tweede batterij. WAARSCHUWING: Voordat u deze handelingen uitvoert, moet u de computer uitschakelen, de stekkers uit het stopcontact halen en de modem loskoppelen van de telefoonaansluiting. KENNISGEVING: Als u de computer in de modus Stand-by hebt geplaatst, hebt u 90 seconden de tijd om de batterij te vervangen, voordat de computer wordt uitgeschakeld en nietopgeslagen gegevens verloren gaan. 1 Zorg dat de computer is uitgeschakeld, dat de stekkers uit het stopcontact zijn en dat de modem is losgekoppeld van de telefoonaansluiting. 2 Als de computer is aangesloten op een dockingstation, koppelt u het dockingstation los. Raadpleeg de documentatie bij het dockingstation voor instructies over het loskoppelen. 3 Open het ontgrendelingsschuifje van de batterijhouder aan de onderkant van de computer en verwijder de batterij uit de houder.48 Systeeminformatiehandleiding www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com Een reservebatterij verwijderen en installeren 1 Verwijder de batterij. 2 Verwijder het ontgrendelingsschuifje van de reservebatterij.Systeeminformatiehandleiding 49 3 Verwijder de reservebatterij uit het compartiment en haal de kabel uit de connector. 4 Sluit de kabel van de reservebatterij aan op de connector in het compartiment voor de reservebatterij. reservebatterij connector kabel van reservebatterij50 Systeeminformatiehandleiding www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com 5 Plaats de reservebatterij in het compartiment en plaats het ontgrendelingsschuifje voor de reservebatterij terug. Een batterij installeren Schuif de nieuwe batterij in de batterijhouder tot het schuifje vastklikt. Raadpleeg "Using the Module Bay" (De modulehouder gebruiken) in de on line handleiding voor meer informatie over het installeren van de tweede batterij. Dell-diagnoseprogramma uitvoeren Het Dell-diagnoseprogramma bevindt zich op een verborgen partitie op de vaste schijf. OPMERKING: Als op uw computer geen beeld kan worden weergegeven, neemt u contact op met Dell (raadpleeg "Help opvragen" in de handleiding voor de juiste contactinformatie). 1 Sluit de computer af. 2 Als de computer is aangesloten op een dockingstation, koppelt u het dockingstation los. Raadpleeg de documentatie bij het dockingstation voor instructies over het loskoppelen. 3 Steek de stekker van de computer in het stopcontact.Systeeminformatiehandleiding 51 4 Zet de computer aan. Druk zodra het DELL™-logo wordt weergegeven onmiddellijk op . OPMERKING: Als een bericht wordt weergegeven dat geen partitie is aangetroffen met het Dell-diagnoseprogramma, voert u het diagnoseprogramma uit vanaf de cd Drivers and Utilities (Stuur- en hulpprogramma's). Als u te lang hebt gewacht en het Microsoft® Windows®-logo wordt weergegeven, moet u wachten tot u het bureaublad van Windows ziet. Sluit de computer vervolgens af en probeer het opnieuw. 5 Selecteer in de lijst met opstartapparaten Diagnostics (Diagnoseprogramma) en druk op . Op de computer wordt nu de Pre-boot System Assessment (systeemanalyse) uitgevoerd. Dit is een aantal diagnoseprogramma's waarmee controles worden uitgevoerd op het moederbord, het toetsenbord, de vaste schijf en het beeldscherm. • Beantwoord tijdens de analyse eventuele vragen die worden gesteld. • Als er een fout wordt gedetecteerd, stopt de computer en verschijnt een foutbericht. Druk op om de analyse te onderbreken en het besturingssysteem op te starten. Druk op om naar de volgende test te gaan. Druk op om het onderdeel dat niet juist werkt opnieuw te testen. • Als er tijdens de Pre-boot System Assessment fouten worden aangetroffen, kunt u de foutcode(s) opschrijven en contact opnemen met Dell (zie "Help opvragen" in de handleiding voor de juiste contactinformatie) voordat u doorgaat met de Dell Diagnostics (Dell-diagnostiek). Als de Pre-boot System Assessment succesvol wordt voltooid, ziet u de melding Booting Dell Diagnostic Utility Partition (Opstarten vanaf partitie met Dell-diagnoseprogramma). Druk op een willekeurige toets om door te gaan. 6 Druk op een willekeurige toets om de Dell Diagnostics (Dell-diagnostiek) uit te voeren vanaf de partitie van de vaste schijf met het Dell-diagnoseprogramma.52 Systeeminformatiehandleiding www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com 7 Nadat het Dell-diagnoseprogramma is geladen en het scherm met het hoofdmenu wordt weergegeven, klikt u op de knop voor de gewenste optie. 8 Als tijdens het uitvoeren van een test een probleem wordt aangetroffen, wordt een bericht weergegeven met de foutcode en een beschrijving van het probleem. Noteer de foutcode en de beschrijving van het probleem en volg de instructies op het scherm. Als u de foutconditie niet kunt verhelpen, kunt u contact opnemen met Dell (zie "Help opvragen'' in de handleiding voor de juiste contactinformatie). OPMERKING: Op de titelbalk van elk scherm ziet u het servicelabel voor uw computer. Optie Functie Snelle test Hiermee wordt een snelle test uitgevoerd van apparaten. Deze test neemt doorgaans tien tot twintig minuten in beslag. Er is geen interactie vereist. Als u de snelle test eerst uitvoert, vergroot u de kans om het probleem snel op te sporen. Uitgebreide test Hiermee wordt een grondige controle van apparaten uitgevoerd. Deze test neemt doorgaans een uur of langer in beslag. U moet af en toe vragen beantwoorden. Aangepaste test Hiermee kunt u een bepaald apparaat testen. U kunt de uit te voeren tests aanpassen. Symptomenstructuur Hier vindt u de meest voorkomende symptomen. U kunt hier een test kiezen op basis van de symptomen van het aangetroffen probleem.Systeeminformatiehandleiding 53 9 Wanneer u een test uitvoert van de optie Custom Test (Aangepaste test) of Symptom Tree (Symptomenstructuur), kunt u voor meer informatie over de test op een van de tabbladen klikken die in de volgende tabel worden beschreven. 10 Als de tests zijn uitgevoerd, sluit u het testvenster om terug te keren naar het scherm met het hoofdmenu. Als u het Dell-diagnoseprogramma wilt afsluiten en de computer opnieuw wilt opstarten, sluit u het scherm met het hoofdmenu. Tabblad Functie Results (Resultaten) Hier worden de resultaten van de test weergegeven, samen met eventuele foutcondities die zijn aangetroffen. Errors (Fouten) Hier worden aangetroffen foutcondities, foutcodes en probleembeschrijvingen weergegeven. Help Hier wordt de test beschreven en worden eventuele vereisten voor het uitvoeren van de test vermeld. Configuration (Configuratie) Hier wordt de hardwareconfiguratie beschreven voor het geselecteerde apparaat. Het Dell-diagnoseprogramma verkrijgt de configuratiegegevens voor alle apparaten van het Setupprogramma van het systeem, het geheugen en verschillende interne tests. Deze gegevens worden weergegeven in het linkerdeelvenster van het scherm. Mogelijk worden in het apparaatoverzicht niet de namen van alle onderdelen weergegeven die zijn geïnstalleerd in of aangesloten op de computer. Parameters Hiermee kunt u de test aanpassen door de testinstellingen te wijzigen.54 Systeeminformatiehandleiding www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com Internationale kennisgevingen Elektromagnetische storingen (EMI) zijn in de vrije ruimte uitgestraalde of langs elektriciteits- of signaalkabels geleide emissiesignalen die de goede werking van radionavigatiediensten of andere veiligheidsdiensten in gevaar brengen, de kwaliteit van een gemachtigde radiocommunicatiedienst ernstig aantasten of deze dienst hinderen of herhaaldelijk onderbreken. Radiocommunicatiediensten omvatten, maar zijn niet beperkt tot, commerciële uitzendingen via AM/FM-radio, televisie-uitzendingen, mobiele diensten, radar, luchtverkeer, semafoons en persoonlijke communicatiediensten. Deze gemachtigde diensten dragen samen met apparaten die onopzettelijk straling veroorzaken, waaronder digitale apparaten zoals computersystemen, bij aan de elektromagnetische omgeving. Met elektromagnetische compatibiliteit (EMC) wordt het vermogen van elektronische apparatuur aangeduid om probleemloos in een elektronische omgeving te kunnen functioneren. Hoewel deze computer conform de door de overheid voorgeschreven EMI-limieten is ontworpen en goedgekeurd, bestaat er geen zekerheid dat zich geen storingen zullen voordoen in een bepaalde installatie. Als door deze apparatuur radiocommunicatiediensten worden gestoord, hetgeen u kunt vaststellen door de apparatuur uit te schakelen en vervolgens weer in te schakelen, kunt u de storing als volgt proberen op te heffen: • Richt de ontvangstantenne een andere kant op. • Verplaats de computer ten opzichte van de ontvanger. • Zet de computer verder af van de ontvanger. • Sluit het netsnoer van de computer aan op een ander stopcontact, zodat de computer en de ontvanger niet op dezelfde groep zijn aangesloten. Raadpleeg zo nodig een medewerker van de technische ondersteuningsafdeling van Dell of een ervaren radio- of televisiereparateur voor aanvullend advies. Raadpleeg "Internationale kennisgevingen" in de bijlage van de on line handleiding. In de gedeelten die specifiek zijn voor elke regelgevende instantie, vindt u landspecifieke informatie over EMC/EMI en productbeveiliging.www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com Dell™ Latitude™ D500 Guide d'informations du système Modèle PP05LRemarques, avis et précautions REMARQUE : Une REMARQUE fournit des informations importantes qui vous aident à mieux utiliser votre ordinateur. AVIS : Un AVIS vous avertit d'un risque de dommage matériel ou de perte de données et vous indique comment éviter le problème. PRÉCAUTION : Une PRÉCAUTION indique un risque potentiel d'endommagement du matériel, de blessure corporelle ou de mort. Abréviations et acronymes Pour obtenir une liste complète des abréviations et des acronymes, reportez-vous au Guide d'utilisation. En fonction du système d'exploitation installé sur votre ordinateur, double-cliquez sur l'icône User's Guide (Guide d'utilisation) située sur le bureau ou cliquez sur le bouton Start (Démarrer) et cliquez successivement sur Help and Support Center (Aide et support) et User and system guides (Guides de l'utilisateur et du système). Si vous avez acheté un ordinateur Dell™ série n, aucune des références faites dans ce document aux systèmes d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows® n'est applicable. ____________________ Les informations contenues dans ce document sont sujettes à modification sans préavis. © 2003 Dell Computer Corporation. Tous droits réservés. Toute reproduction sous quelque forme que ce soit sans l'autorisation écrite de Dell Computer Corporation est strictement interdite. Marques utilisées dans ce texte : Dell, le logo DELL, TrueMobile, Inspiron, Dell Precision, Dimension, OptiPlex et Latitude sont des marques de Dell Computer Corporation ; Intel, Pentium et Celeron sont des marques déposées de Intel Corporation ; Microsoft et Windows sont des marques déposées de Microsoft Corporation ; EMC est une marque déposée de EMC Corporation. D'autres marques et noms commerciaux peuvent être utilisés dans ce document pour faire référence aux entités se réclamant de ces marques et de ces noms ou à leurs produits. Dell Computer Corporation dénie tout intérêt propriétaire aux marques et aux noms commerciaux autres que les siens. Modèle PP05L Février 2003 P/N 1Y369 Rév. A00Sommaire 57 Sommaire PRÉCAUTION : Instructions de sécurité . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Généralités . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Alimentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Batterie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Voyage en avion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Instructions CEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Lors de l'utilisation de votre ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Précautions ergonomiques. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Manipulation de l'intérieur de votre ordinateur . . . . . . . . . 64 Protection contre les décharges électrostatiques . . . . . . . . . 65 Mise au rebut de la batterie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Trouver des informations relatives à votre ordinateur . . . . . . . 66 Configuration de votre ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 À propos de votre ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Vue avant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Vue du côté gauche . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Vue du côté droit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Vue arrière . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Vue du dessous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Retrait d'une batterie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Retrait et installation d'une batterie de réserve . . . . . . . . . . 75 Installation d'une batterie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Exécution des Diagnostics Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Réglementations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8158 SommaireGuide d'informations du système 59 PRÉCAUTION : Instructions de sécurité Pour votre sécurité et pour protéger votre ordinateur et votre environnement de travail contre d'éventuels dommages, respectez les consignes ci-dessous. Généralités • Ne tentez pas d'assurer vous-même l'entretien de votre ordinateur à moins que vous ne soyez un technicien de maintenance qualifié. Suivez toujours scrupuleusement les instructions d'installation. • Si vous raccordez une rallonge à votre adaptateur CA/CC, assurez-vous que l'intensité totale du courant drainé par tous les appareils raccordés à cette rallonge ne dépasse pas la limite de cette dernière. • N'introduisez pas d'objets dans les orifices de ventilation ou autres ouvertures de votre ordinateur. Cela risquerait de provoquer un incendie ou un choc électrique dû à un court-circuit des composants internes. • Ne placez pas l'ordinateur dans un environnement peu aéré, tel qu'une sacoche de transport, une mallette fermée, lorsque celui-ci fonctionne. Ceci risque d'endommager l'ordinateur ou de provoquer un incendie. • Conservez votre ordinateur à distance des radiateurs et sources de chaleur. De même, ne bloquez pas les orifices d'aération. Évitez de placer des papiers volants sous votre ordinateur ; ne placez pas votre ordinateur dans une unité murale fermée ou sur un lit, un canapé ou un tapis. • Placez l'adaptateur CA/CC dans une zone aérée, comme sur un bureau ou sur le sol, lorsqu'il est utilisé pour alimenter l'ordinateur ou pour charger la batterie. Ne recouvrez pas l'adaptateur CA/CC de papiers ou autres objets susceptibles d'entraver le refroidissement. De même, n'utilisez pas l'adaptateur CA/CC dans une mallette de transport. • L'adaptateur CA/CC risque de chauffer lorsque vous utilisez votre ordinateur. Faites donc très attention lorsque vous manipulez l'adaptateur pendant ou après son fonctionnement. • Ne laissez pas votre ordinateur portable en marche pendant une période prolongée si la base est directement en contact avec la peau. La température augmente sur la surface de la base pendant le fonctionnement normal de l'ordinateur (notamment s'il est alimenté par le secteur). Le contact prolongé avec la peau peut provoquer inconfort ou brûlure. • N'utilisez pas votre ordinateur dans un environnement exposé à l'eau, par exemple près d'une baignoire, d'un évier, d'une piscine ou dans un sous-sol humide. • Si votre ordinateur comprend un modem intégré ou optionnel (carte PC), débranchez le modem de la ligne téléphonique à l'approche d'un orage électrique afin d'éviter le risque très faible de choc électrique causé par un éclair et transmis par la ligne téléphonique.60 Guide d'informations du système www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com • Pour réduire le danger lié à un choc électrique, n'effectuez aucun branchement ou débranchement pendant un orage électrique, ni aucune opération de maintenance ou de reconfiguration de ce produit. N'utilisez jamais l'ordinateur pendant un orage électrique, sauf si tous les câbles ont été déconnectés et si l'ordinateur est alimenté par la batterie. • Si votre ordinateur comprend un modem, le câble utilisé avec le modem doit avoir une taille minimale de 26 AWG (American wire gauge) et une fiche modulaire RJ-11 conforme à la norme FCC. • Avant d'ouvrir le couvercle du module de mémoire, de la carte Mini PCI ou du modem au bas de l'ordinateur, déconnectez tous les câbles de leur source d'alimentation et débranchez le câble téléphonique. • Si votre ordinateur dispose d'un connecteur modem RJ-11 et d'un connecteur réseau RJ-45 (ces deux connecteurs se ressemblent), branchez le câble téléphonique dans le connecteur RJ11 et non pas dans le connecteur RJ45. • Les cartes PC peuvent beaucoup chauffer en fonctionnement normal. Faites donc très attention lorsque vous les retirez après une utilisation prolongée. • Débranchez l'ordinateur de la prise électrique avant de le nettoyer. Nettoyez votre ordinateur avec un tissu doux et humidifié avec de l'eau. N'utilisez pas de liquide ni d'aérosol nettoyants, ceux-ci peuvent contenir des substances inflammables. Alimentation • N'utilisez que l'adaptateur CA/CC agréé pour être utilisé avec cet ordinateur. L'utilisation d'un autre adaptateur CA/CC peut provoquer un incendie ou une explosion. • Avant de raccorder l'ordinateur à une source d'alimentation électrique, assurez-vous que la fréquence et la tension du secteur sont compatibles avec la tension d'entrée de l'adaptateur CA/CC. • Pour mettre l'ordinateur totalement hors tension, éteignez-le, retirez sa batterie, débranchez l'adaptateur CA/CC de la prise de courant et retirez toutes les batteries de la baie de batterie ou de la baie modulaire. • Pour prévenir les risques d'électrocution, branchez les câbles de l'adaptateur CA/CC et des périphériques sur des sources d'alimentation électriques correctement reliées à la terre. Il se peut que ces câbles d'alimentation soient équipés de prises à trois broches afin de fournir une mise à la terre. N'utilisez pas les fiches intermédiaires ou ne retirez pas la broche de masse d'un câble. Si vous utilisez une rallonge électrique, veillez à ce qu'elle comporte des prises à deux ou trois broches, afin de pouvoir la raccorder au câble d'alimentation de l'adaptateur CA/CC. PRÉCAUTION : Instructions de sécurité (suite)Guide d'informations du système 61 • Assurez-vous que rien ne repose sur le câble d'alimentation de l'adaptateur CA/CC et que ce câble n'est pas placé dans un endroit où l'on pourrait marcher ou trébucher dessus. • Si vous utilisez une barrette d'alimentation, soyez prudent lorsque vous raccordez le câble d'alimentation de l'adaptateur CA/CC à la barrette d'alimentation. Certaines barrettes d'alimentation peuvent ne pas empêcher l'insertion d'une prise de façon incorrecte. L'insertion incorrecte de la prise de courant peut provoquer un dommage irréparable sur votre ordinateur, ainsi qu'un risque de choc électrique et/ou d'incendie. Assurez-vous que le contact de mise à la terre de la prise de courant est inséré dans le contact de mise à la terre correspondant de la rampe d'alimentation. Batterie • N'utilisez que le module de batteries Dell™ agréé pour être utilisé avec cet ordinateur. L'utilisation d'autres types de modules peut présenter un risque d'incendie ou d'explosion. • Ne transportez pas de batterie dans votre poche, sac à main ou autre conteneur où des objets métalliques (comme des clés de voiture ou des trombones) pourraient court-circuiter les bornes de la batterie. L'excès de flux de courant qui en résulterait pourrait entraîner des températures extrêmement élevées et provoquer ainsi des dommages sur la conception de la batterie ou provoquer une flamme ou des brûlures. • La batterie représente un danger de brûlure si vous la manipulez de façon incorrecte. Ne démontez pas la batterie. Manipulez les batteries endommagées ou percées avec une extrême précaution. Lorsqu'une batterie est endommagée, des électrolytes peuvent fuir des cellules et provoquer des dommages corporels. • Conservez la batterie hors de portée des enfants. • Ne rangez pas et ne laissez pas votre ordinateur ou votre batterie près d'une source de chaleur telle qu'un radiateur, une cheminée, un poêle, un chauffage électrique, ou tout autre appareil générateur de chaleur et ne l'exposez pas à des températures supérieures à 60 °C (140 °F). Lorsque les batteries atteignent une température excessive, les cellules de la batterie peuvent exploser ou imploser, représentant alors un risque d'incendie. • Ne jetez pas la batterie de votre ordinateur au feu ni avec les ordures ménagères. Les cellules de la batterie risquent d'exploser. Débarrassez-vous de la batterie usagée selon les instructions du fabricant ou contactez votre entreprise locale de ramassage des ordures afin de connaître les instructions de mise au rebut. Débarrassez-vous rapidement d'une batterie usagée ou endommagée. PRÉCAUTION : Instructions de sécurité (suite)62 Guide d'informations du système www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com Voyage en avion • Les réglementations de certaines administrations fédérales d'aviation et/ou les restrictions propres à chaque compagnie aérienne peuvent s'appliquer au fonctionnement de votre ordinateur Dell pendant que vous voyagez à bord d'un avion. Par exemple, ces réglementations/restrictions peuvent interdire l'utilisation de tout appareil électronique personnel ayant la capacité de transmettre intentionnellement des fréquences radio ou d'autres signaux électromagnétiques au cours d'un vol aérien. – Afin de respecter au mieux ces instructions, si votre ordinateur portable Dell est équipé de Dell TrueMobile™ ou d'autres dispositifs de communication sans fil, veuillez désactiver votre appareil avant de monter à bord de l'avion et suivre les instructions qui sont fournies par le personnel à bord concernant l'utilisation de ce type d'appareils. – En outre, l'utilisation d'appareils électroniques personnels, comme un ordinateur portable, peut être interdite pendant certaines phases critiques du vol, par exemple pendant le décollage et l'atterrissage. Certaines compagnies aériennes déterminent parfois la phase critique à n'importe quel moment du vol, dans la mesure où l'avion vole au-dessous de 3 050 m (10 000 pieds). Veuillez suivre les instructions propres à la compagnie aérienne quant à l'autorisation d'utiliser un appareil électronique personnel. Instructions CEM L'utilisation de câbles blindés permet de rester dans la classification EMC pour l'environnement prévu. Dell propose un câble pour les imprimantes utilisant le port parallèle. Si vous le souhaitez, vous pouvez commander un câble sur le site Web de Dell, à l'adresse suivante : www.dell.com. L'électricité statique peut endommager les composants internes de votre ordinateur. Pour prévenir ce genre de dommages, déchargez votre corps de son électricité statique avant de manipuler les composants électroniques de l'ordinateur, par exemple, un module de mémoire. Pour ce faire, vous pouvez toucher une surface métallique non peinte du panneau d'E/S de l'ordinateur. PRÉCAUTION : Instructions de sécurité (suite)Guide d'informations du système 63 Lors de l'utilisation de votre ordinateur Suivez les consignes de sécurité suivantes afin d'éviter d'endommager votre ordinateur : • Lorsque vous installez l'ordinateur pour travailler, placez-le sur une surface plane. • Lors de vos déplacements, ne faites pas enregistrer votre ordinateur en tant que bagage. Vous pouvez soumettre votre ordinateur à la détection d'un dispositif de sécurité à rayons X, mais jamais à un détecteur de métaux. Veillez à toujours disposer d'une batterie chargée, au cas où l'on vous demanderait, lors d'un contrôle manuel, d'allumer l'ordinateur. • Si vous êtes amené à voyager en ayant préalablement retiré l'unité de disque dur de l'ordinateur, veillez à envelopper le disque dur dans un matériau non-conducteur, tissu ou papier, par exemple. Si un contrôle manuel est effectué sur l'unité, soyez prêt à la réinstaller dans l'ordinateur. Vous pouvez soumettre le disque dur à la détection d'un dispositif de sécurité à rayons X, mais jamais à un détecteur de métaux. • Lorsque vous voyagez, ne placez jamais l'ordinateur dans les compartiments situés en hauteur, où il pourrait subir des chocs. Évitez de laisser tomber votre ordinateur et de le soumettre à tout autre choc mécanique. • Protégez l'ordinateur, les batteries et l'unité de disque dur contre les risques liés à l'environnement : poussière, nourriture, liquides, températures extrêmes et exposition prolongée aux rayons du soleil. • Lorsque vous transportez votre ordinateur entre des environnements présentant d'importants écarts de température ou de taux d'humidité, une condensation peut se former sur ou dans l'ordinateur. Dans ce cas, attendez l'évaporation complète de cette humidité avant de réutiliser votre ordinateur, afin de pas l'endommager. AVIS : Lorsque vous faites passer votre ordinateur d'un environnement froid à un environnement plus chaud ou inversement, laissez-lui le temps de s'acclimater à la température ambiante avant de l'allumer. • Lorsque vous débranchez un câble, tirez sur la prise ou sur la boucle prévue à cet effet, jamais sur le câble lui-même. Si vous tirez sur l'extrémité connecteur, maintenez ce dernier correctement aligné, afin d'éviter tout risque de torsion des broches. Pour la même raison, lors du raccordement d'un câble, vérifiez bien l'orientation et l'alignement des deux connecteurs. • Manipulez les composants avec soin. Un composant tel qu'un module de mémoire doit être tenu par les bords, pas par les broches. • Avant de retirer un module de mémoire de la carte système ou de débrancher un périphérique de l'ordinateur, éteignez l'ordinateur, débranchez l'adaptateur CA/CC, retirez toutes les batteries de la baie de batterie ou de la baie modulaire et attendez 5 secondes. Cette précaution permet d'éviter d'endommager la carte système.64 Guide d'informations du système www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com • Nettoyez l'écran avec un tissu propre et doux et de l'eau. Appliquez l'eau sur le chiffon, et non directement sur l'écran, puis passez le chiffon sur l'écran toujours dans le même sens, de haut en bas. Retirez l'humidité de l'écran rapidement et séchez-le. Une exposition prolongée à l'humidité peut endommager l'écran. N'utilisez pas de produit nettoyant pour vitres pour nettoyer votre écran. • Si votre ordinateur est mouillé ou endommagé, suivez les procédures décrites dans la section « Résolution des problèmes » de votre Guide d'utilisation. Si, après avoir effectué ces procédures, vous constatez que votre ordinateur ne fonctionne pas correctement, contactez Dell (consultez la section « Obtenir de l'aide » de votre Guide d'utilisation pour connaître les coordonnées du contact approprié). Précautions ergonomiques PRÉCAUTION : Une mauvaise utilisation ou une utilisation prolongée du clavier peut provoquer des blessures. PRÉCAUTION : Une exposition prolongée devant l'écran intégré ou le moniteur externe peut occasionner des troubles de la vue. Pour travailler efficacement et confortablement, observez les conseils relatifs à l'ergonomie fournis dans l'annexe de votre Guide d'utilisation lorsque vous vous installez à votre poste de travail. Cet ordinateur est un ordinateur portable qui n'est pas conçu pour une utilisation prolongée dans un cadre professionnel. Pour une utilisation prolongée dans un cadre professionnel, il est recommandé de connecter un clavier externe. Manipulation de l'intérieur de votre ordinateur Avant de retirer ou d'installer des modules de mémoire, des cartes Mini PCI ou des modems, suivez les étapes ci-après dans l'ordre indiqué. AVIS : N'accédez à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur que lorsque vous installez des modules de mémoire, une carte Mini PCI ou un modem. AVIS : Avant de débrancher un périphérique ou de retirer un module de mémoire, une Mini carte PCI ou un modem, patientez 5 secondes après la mise hors tension de l'ordinateur pour éviter tout risque d'endommager la carte système. 1 Éteignez l'ordinateur ainsi que tous les périphériques connectés. 2 Éteignez l'ordinateur et tous ses périphériques, puis débranchez-les de leur prise électrique afin de réduire le risque de blessure ou de choc. Déconnectez également les lignes téléphoniques ou de télécommunication de l'ordinateur. 3 Retirez la batterie principale de la baie de batterie et, si nécessaire, la batterie secondaire de la baie modulaire. Lors de l'utilisation de votre ordinateur (suite)Guide d'informations du système 65 4 Mettez-vous à la masse en touchant une surface métallique non peinte à l'arrière de l'ordinateur. Pendant votre travail à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur, touchez régulièrement une surface métallique non peinte pour dissiper toute électricité statique qui pourrait endommager les composants internes. Protection contre les décharges électrostatiques L'électricité statique peut endommager les composants internes de votre ordinateur. Pour prévenir ce genre de dommages, déchargez votre corps de son électricité statique avant de manipuler les composants électroniques de l'ordinateur, par exemple, un module de mémoire. Pour ce faire, vous pouvez toucher une surface métallique non peinte du châssis de l'ordinateur. Tandis que vous continuez à travailler à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur, pensez à toucher de temps à autre une surface métallique non peinte à l'arrière de l'ordinateur pour vous débarrasser de la charge statique accumulée par votre corps. Vous pouvez également prendre les mesures suivantes pour prévenir les dommages dus aux perturbations électrostatiques (ESD) : • Lorsque vous déballez un composant sensible à l'électricité statique de son carton d'emballage, n'enlevez le composant de ce carton d'emballage antistatique uniquement lorsque vous êtes prêt à l'installer sur votre ordinateur. Juste avant d'ôter l'emballage antistatique, veillez à décharger votre corps de son électricité statique. • Quand vous transportez un composant sensible, placez-le d'abord dans un emballage ou dans une boîte antistatique. • Manipulez tous les composants sensibles dans une zone antistatique. Si possible, utilisez des tapis antistatiques sur le sol et sur votre plan de travail. Mise au rebut de la batterie Votre ordinateur utilise une pile bouton au lithium. Pour obtenir des instructions sur le remplacement de la batterie au lithium-ion de votre ordinateur, consultez les sections « Retrait d'une batterie » plus loin dans ce document et « Installation d'une batterie » de votre Guide d'utilisation en ligne. Ne jetez pas la batterie avec les ordures ménagères. Contactez votre service municipal de traitement des déchets pour connaître l'adresse du site de dépôt de batteries le plus proche de votre domicile. Lors de l'utilisation de votre ordinateur (suite)66 Guide d'informations du système www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com Trouver des informations relatives à votre ordinateur Que recherchez-vous ? Consultez les sections suivantes • Programme de diagnostics pour mon ordinateur • Pilotes pour mon ordinateur • Documentation concernant mon ordinateur • Documentation concernant mon périphérique CD Drivers and Utilities (Pilotes et utilitaires, également appelé ResourceCD) La documentation et les pilotes sont déjà installés sur votre ordinateur lorsqu'il est livré par Dell. Ce CD-ROM permet de réinstaller des pilotes, d'exécuter des Diagnostics Dell ou d'accéder à la documentation. Des fichiers « readme » (lisez-moi) peuvent être inclus sur votre CD afin de fournir des mises à jour de dernière minute concernant des modifications techniques apportées à votre système ou des informations de référence destinées aux utilisateurs expérimentés ou aux techniciens. • Comment configurer mon ordinateur • Informations sur la garantie • Instructions de sécurité Guide d'informations du système • Code de service express et numéro de service • Étiquette de licence Microsoft® Windows® Étiquette du code de service express et de la clé du produit Ces étiquettes sont situées sur votre ordinateur.Guide d'informations du système 67 • Pilotes les plus récents pour mon ordinateur • Réponses aux questions posées au service et support technique • Discussions en ligne avec le support technique et d'autres utilisateurs • Documentation sur mon ordinateur Site Web du support Dell — support.dell.com Le site Web du support Dell comporte plusieurs outils en ligne, notamment : • Solutions — Conseils et astuces de dépannage, articles de techniciens et cours en ligne • Forum clients — Discussion en ligne avec d'autres clients Dell • Mises à niveau — Informations de mise à niveau pour les composants tels que la mémoire, le disque dur et le système d'exploitation • Service clientèle — Coordonnées, statut des commandes, garantie et informations sur les réparations • Téléchargements — Pilotes, correctifs et mises à jour logicielles • Référence — Documentation sur l'ordinateur, caractéristiques produit et livres blancs • Comment retirer et remplacer des pièces • Comment obtenir les caractéristiques techniques • Comment configurer les paramètres système • Comment dépanner et résoudre les problèmes Guide d'utilisation Centre d'aide et de support Windows 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Start (Démarrer), puis sur Help and Support (Aide et support). 2Cliquez sur User's and system guides (Guides de l'utilisateur et du système) puis sur User's guides (Guides d'utilisation). Microsoft Windows 2000 Double-cliquez sur l'icône des Guides d'utilisation qui se trouve sur votre bureau. • Comment utiliser Windows XP • Documentation sur mon ordinateur • Documentation pour les périphériques (pour un modem, par exemple) Centre d'aide et de support Windows 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Start (Démarrer), puis sur Help and Support (Aide et support). 2Tapez un mot ou une phrase pour décrire votre problème, puis cliquez sur l'icône représentant une flèche. 3 Cliquez sur la rubrique qui décrit votre problème. 4 Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran. Que recherchez-vous ? Consultez les sections suivantes68 Guide d'informations du système www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com Configuration de votre ordinateur PRÉCAUTION : Avant de lancer n'importe laquelle des procédures de cette section, suivez les instructions de sécurité fournies au début de ce document. 1 Déballez la boîte d'accessoires. 2 Mettez de côté le contenu de la boîte d'accessoires ; vous en aurez besoin ultérieurement pour finir la configuration de votre ordinateur. La boîte d'accessoires contient également la documentation utilisateur et tout autre logiciel ou matériel supplémentaire (cartes PC, lecteurs, batteries, etc.) commandés. • Comment réinstaller mon système d'exploitation CD du système d'exploitation Une fois que vous avez réinstallé votre système d'exploitation, à l'aide du CD Operating System (Système d'exploitation), utilisez le CD Drivers and Utilities (Pilotes et utilitaires) pour réinstaller les pilotes des périphériques fournis avec votre ordinateur. La clé de produit de votre système d'exploitation se trouve sur votre ordinateur. Que recherchez-vous ? Consultez les sections suivantes ouGuide d'informations du système 69 3 Branchez l'adaptateur CA/CC au connecteur correspondant de l'ordinateur et à une prise électrique. 4 Ouvrez l'écran et appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation pour allumer l'ordinateur. REMARQUE : N'amarrez pas l'ordinateur tant qu'il n'a pas été mis sous tension et arrêté au moins une fois. bouton d'alimentation70 Guide d'informations du système www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com À propos de votre ordinateur Vue avant écran touchpad bouton d'alimentation clavier voyants d'état du clavier voyants d'état du périphérique haut-parleurs boutons du touchpad loquet de l'écranGuide d'informations du système 71 Vue du côté gauche Vue du côté droit emplacement pour carte PC capteur infrarouge connecteurs audio (2) emplacement pour câble de sécurité orifices d'aération (2) emplacement pour câble de sécurité baie modulaire loquet de verrouillage du périphérique72 Guide d'informations du système www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com Vue arrière AVIS : Pour éviter d'endommager l'ordinateur, patientez 5 secondes une fois qu'il est hors tension avant de déconnecter un périphérique externe. PRÉCAUTION : Ne bloquez pas et n'insérez pas d'objets dans les orifices d'aération de l'ordinateur et évitez toute accumulation de poussière. Ne placez pas l'ordinateur dans un environnement peu aéré, tel qu'une mallette fermée, lorsque celui-ci fonctionne. Ceci risque d'endommager l'ordinateur ou de provoquer un incendie. connecteurs USB (2) connecteur de sortie TV S-vidéo connecteur modem (RJ-11) (en option) connecteur réseau (RJ-45) connecteur vidéo connecteur parallèle connecteur série connecteur d'adaptateur CA/CC orifices d'aérationGuide d'informations du système 73 Vue du dessous ventilateur loquet de verrouillage de la baie de batterie indicateur de charge de la batterie batterie capot du compartiment des modules de mémoire unité de disque dur capot du compartiment pour carte Mini PCI emplacement du périphérique d'amarrage emplacement de la vis de périphérique74 Guide d'informations du système www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com Retrait d'une batterie Pour plus d'informations sur le retrait de la seconde batterie, consultez la section « Utilisation de la baie modulaire » dans votre Guide d'utilisation en ligne. PRÉCAUTION : Avant d'effectuer ces procédures, éteignez votre ordinateur, débranchez-le de la prise électrique et déconnectez le modem de la prise jack téléphonique murale. AVIS : Si vous souhaitez remplacer la batterie alors que l'ordinateur est en mode veille, vous disposez de 90 secondes pour effectuer cette opération. Une fois ce délai écoulé, l'ordinateur s'arrête et toutes les données non enregistrées sont définitivement perdues. 1 Vérifiez que l'ordinateur est éteint, débranché de la prise électrique et de la prise jack téléphonique murale. 2 Si l'ordinateur est connecté (amarré) à un périphérique d'amarrage, déconnectez-le. Pour obtenir des instructions, consultez la documentation qui accompagne le périphérique d'amarrage. 3 Faites glisser et maintenez le loquet de verrouillage de la baie de batterie, situé en bas de l'ordinateur, puis retirez la batterie de la baie.Guide d'informations du système 75 Retrait et installation d'une batterie de réserve 1 Retirez la batterie. 2 Retirez le capot du compartiment de la batterie de réserve.76 Guide d'informations du système www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com 3 Retirez la batterie de réserve de son compartiment, puis retirez le câble du connecteur. 4 Branchez le câble de la batterie de réserve au connecteur situé dans le compartiment de cette batterie. batterie de réserve connecteur câble de batterie de réserveGuide d'informations du système 77 5 Placez la batterie de réserve dans le compartiment, puis remettez le capot du compartiment en place. Installation d'une batterie Faites glisser la batterie dans la baie jusqu'à ce que le loquet de verrouillage s'enclenche. Pour plus d'informations sur l'installation de la seconde batterie, consultez la section « Utilisation de la baie modulaire » dans votre Guide d'utilisation en ligne.78 Guide d'informations du système www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com Exécution des Diagnostics Dell Les Diagnostics Dell se trouvent dans une partition cachée (utilitaire de diagnostics) de votre unité de disque dur. REMARQUE : Si aucune image ne s'affiche sur l'écran de votre ordinateur, contactez Dell (consultez la section « Obtenir de l'aide » du Guide d'utilisation pour connaître les coordonnées du contact approprié). 1 Éteignez l'ordinateur. 2 Si l'ordinateur est connecté (amarré) à un périphérique d'amarrage, déconnectez-le. Pour obtenir des instructions, consultez la documentation qui accompagne le périphérique d'amarrage. 3 Connectez l'ordinateur à une prise électrique. 4 Allumez l'ordinateur. Lorsque le logo DELL™ s'affiche, appuyez immédiatement sur . REMARQUE : Si un message indique qu'aucune partition des Diagnostics Dell n'a été trouvée, exécutez les Diagnostics Dell à partir du CD Drivers and Utilities (Pilotes et utilitaires). Si vous attendez trop longtemps et que le logo Microsoft® Windows® apparaît, attendez encore jusqu'à ce que le bureau Windows s'affiche. Éteignez alors votre ordinateur et faites une nouvelle tentative. 5 Lorsque la liste des périphériques d'initialisation s'affiche, sélectionnez Diagnostics et appuyez sur . L'ordinateur lance l'évaluation du système avant initialisation, qui consiste en une série de diagnostics intégrés qui testent préalablement la carte mère, le clavier, l'unité de disque dur et l'écran. • Répondez à toutes les questions qui s'affichent pendant l'évaluation. • Si une défaillance est détectée, l'ordinateur s'interrompt et émet un signal sonore. Pour arrêter l'évaluation et redémarrer le système d'exploitation, appuyez sur ; pour passer au test suivant, appuyez sur ; pour retester le composant défectueux, appuyez sur .Guide d'informations du système 79 • Si des défaillances sont détectées lors de l'évaluation système avant initialisation, notez le ou les codes d'erreur et contactez Dell (consultez la section « Obtenir de l'aide » de votre Guide d'utilisation pour connaître les coordonnées du contact approprié) avant de continuer les Diagnostics Dell. Si l'évaluation du système se déroule sans problème, vous recevez le message Booting Dell Diagnostic Utility Partition. Press any key to continue (Initialisation à partir de la partition des Diagnostics Dell. Appuyez sur une touche pour continuer). 6 Appuyez sur n'importe quelle touche pour démarrer les Diagnostics Dell à partir de la partition d'utilitaire des Diagnostics de votre unité de disque dur. 7 Une fois les diagnostics Dell chargés et lorsque l'écran Menu principal s'affiche, cliquez sur le bouton de l'option que vous souhaitez. Option Fonction Express Test (Test rapide) Exécute un test rapide des périphériques. En règle générale, ce test nécessite 10 à 20 minutes et n'exige aucune intervention de votre part. Exécutez le test rapide en premier pour augmenter la possibilité de déterminer le problème rapidement. Extended Test (Test complet) Exécute un test approfondi des périphériques. En règle générale, ce test prend une heure ou plus et nécessite que vous répondiez régulièrement à des questions. Custom Test (Test personnalisé) Teste un périphérique spécifique. Vous pouvez personnaliser les tests que vous souhaitez exécuter. Symptom Tree (Arborescence des symptômes) Répertorie les symptômes rencontrés les plus communs et vous permet de sélectionner un test selon le symptôme du problème auquel vous êtes confronté.80 Guide d'informations du système www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com 8 Si un problème est rencontré lors d'un test, un message indiquant le code d'erreur et une description du problème s'affiche. Notez le code d'erreur et la description du problème et suivez les instructions à l'écran. Si vous ne pouvez pas résoudre le problème, contactez Dell (consultez la section « Obtenir de l'aide » du Guide d'utilisation pour connaître les coordonnées du contact approprié) REMARQUE : Le numéro de service de votre ordinateur se trouve dans la barre de titre de chaque écran. 9 Si vous exécutez un test à partir de l'option Custom Test (test personnalisé) ou Symptom Tree (arborescence des symptômes), cliquez sur l'onglet approprié décrit dans le tableau suivant pour obtenir plus d'informations. 10 Lorsque les tests sont terminés, fermez l'écran de test pour revenir à l'écran Menu principal. Pour quitter les Diagnostics Dell et redémarrer l'ordinateur, fermez l'écran Menu principal. Onglet Fonction Results (Résultats) Affiche les résultats du test et les conditions d'erreur rencontrées. Errors (Erreurs) Affiche les conditions d'erreur rencontrées, les codes d'erreur et la description du problème. Help (Aide) Décrit le test et peut indiquer les conditions requises pour exécuter le test. Configuration Affiche la configuration matérielle du périphérique sélectionné. Les Diagnostics Dell obtiennent vos informations de configuration de tous les périphériques à partir du programme de configuration du système, de la mémoire et de divers tests internes et les affichent dans la liste des périphériques, dans le volet gauche de l'écran. La liste des périphériques risque de ne pas afficher les noms de tous les composants installés sur votre ordinateur ou de tous les périphériques reliés à celui-ci. Parameters (Paramètres) Vous permet de personnaliser le test en modifiant ses paramètres.Guide d'informations du système 81 Réglementations Une interférence électromagnétique (EMI, Electromagnetic Interference) est un signal ou une émission, véhiculé(e) dans l'espace libre ou par des conducteurs électriques ou de signaux, qui peut mettre en danger le fonctionnement d'une radionavigation ou autre service de sécurité, ou sérieusement dégrader, obstruer ou interrompre à maintes reprises un service de communications radio autorisé. Les services de communications radio incluent, de manière non limitative, les services de radiodiffusion commerciale AM/FM, la télévision, les services de téléphonie cellulaire, la radiodétection, le contrôle de la circulation aérienne, les récepteurs de radio messagerie et les services de communications personnelles. Ces services autorisés, ainsi que les éléments rayonnants parasites involontaires tels que les dispositifs numériques, y compris les ordinateurs, contribuent à l'environnement électromagnétique. La compatibilité électromagnétique (EMC, Electromagnetic Compatibility) est la capacité des éléments d'un équipement électronique à interagir correctement dans l'environnement électronique. Bien que cet ordinateur ait été conçu dans le respect de cette compatibilité et soit conforme aux seuils fixés en matière d'interférences électromagnétiques par l'organisme de réglementation, il n'y a aucune garantie concernant les interférences susceptibles de se produire sur une installation particulière. Si l'équipement crée effectivement des interférences avec des services de communications radio (ce qui peut être déterminé en l'éteignant et en l'allumant), l'utilisateur est encouragé à essayer de corriger ce phénomène en prenant l'une ou l'ensemble des mesures suivantes : • Changer l'orientation de l'antenne de réception. • Repositionner l'ordinateur en fonction du récepteur. • Éloigner l'ordinateur du récepteur. • Brancher l'ordinateur sur une autre prise, pour faire en sorte que l'ordinateur et le récepteur se trouvent sur différents circuits de dérivation. Si nécessaire, consulter un membre de l'équipe du support technique de Dell ou un technicien radio/télévision expérimenté pour des suggestions supplémentaires. Pour des informations complémentaires sur les réglementations, consultez la section « Réglementations » dans l'annexe de votre Guide d'utilisation. Les sections spécifiques à chaque organisme de réglementation proposent, de façon spécifique pour tel(le) pays ou zone géographique, des informations EMC/EMI ou relatives à la sécurité des produits.82 Guide d'informations du système www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.comwww.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com Dell™ Latitude™ D500 Systeminformationshandbuch Modell PP05LHinweise, Vorsichtshinweise und Warnungen HINWEIS: Ein HINWEIS macht auf wichtige Informationen aufmerksam, mit denen Sie das System besser einsetzen können. VORSICHT: VORSICHT warnt vor möglichen Beschädigungen der Hardware oder vor Datenverlust und zeigt, wie diese vermieden werden können. WARNUNG: Eine WARNUNG weist auf Gefahrenquellen hin, die materielle Schäden, Verletzungen oder sogar den Tod von Personen zur Folge haben können. Abkürzungen und Akronyme Eine vollständige Liste von Abkürzungen und Akronymen finden Sie im Benutzerhandbuch. (Je nach Betriebssystem doppelklicken Sie auf dem Desktop auf das Symbol User’s Guide [Benutzerhandbuch], oder klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche Start, anschließend auf Help and Support Center [Hilfe- und Supportcenter]. Klicken Sie auf User and system guides [Benutzer- und Systemhandbücher]). Wenn Sie einen Dell™-Computer der N-Serie besitzen, trifft keine der Referenzen in diesem Dokument auf die Microsoft ® Windows®- Betriebssysteme zu. ____________________ Irrtümer und technische Änderungen vorbehalten. © 2003 Dell Computer Corporation. Alle Rechte vorbehalten. Nachdrucke jeglicher Art ohne die vorherige schriftliche Genehmigung der Dell Computer Corporation sind strengstens untersagt. Marken in diesem Text: Dell, das DELL-Logo, TrueMobile, Inspiron, Dell Precision, Dimension, OptiPlex und Latitude sind Marken der Dell Computer Corporation; Intel, Pentium, und Celeron sind eingetragene Marken der Intel Corporation; Microsoft und Windows sind eingetragene Marken der Microsoft Corporation; EMC ist eine eingetragene Marke der EMC Corporation. Alle anderen in dieser Dokumentation genannten Marken und Handelsbezeichnungen sind Eigentum der entsprechenden Hersteller und Firmen. Die Dell Computer Corporation verzichtet auf alle Besitzrechte an Marken und Handelsbezeichnungen, die nicht ihr Eigentum sind. Modell PP05L Februar 2003 P/N 1Y369 Rev. A00Inhaltsverzeichnis 85 Inhaltsverzeichnis WARNUNG: Sicherheitshinweise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Allgemein . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Stromversorgung . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Akku . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Reisen mit dem Flugzeug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 EMV-Richtlinien . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Arbeiten mit dem Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Ergonomische Haltung beim Arbeiten mit dem Computer. . . . 92 Bei der Arbeit an Komponenten im Inneren des Computers . . . 93 Schutz vor elektrostatischen Entladungen . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Entsorgen von Akkus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Informationsquellen für Ihren Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Einrichten des Computers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Wissenswertes über den Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Vorderseite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Linke Seitenansicht . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Rechte Seitenansicht . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Rückseite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Unterseite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Entfernen eines Akkus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Ein- und Ausbauen eines Reserveakkus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Einsetzen eines Akkus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Verwenden des Programms „Dell Diagnostics“ . . . . . . . . . . 106 Betriebsbestimmungen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11086 InhaltsverzeichnisSysteminformationshandbuch 87 WARNUNG: Sicherheitshinweise Die folgenden Sicherheitshinweise schützen den Computer sowie die Arbeitsumgebung vor möglichen Schäden und dienen der persönlichen Sicherheit des Benutzers. Allgemein • Wartungsarbeiten dürfen nur von qualifizierten Servicetechnikern vorgenommen werden. Beachten Sie alle Installationsanweisungen stets genau. • Wenn Sie ein Verlängerungskabel an den Netzadapter anschließen, stellen Sie sicher, dass der Nennstrom aller an das Verlängerungskabel angeschlossenen Geräte nicht größer ist als der zulässige Nennstrom des Verlängerungskabels. • Schieben Sie keine Gegenstände in die Lüftungsschlitze oder Öffnungen des Computers. Dies kann zu einem Kurzschluss der internen Komponenten führen und folglich einen Brand oder einen Stromschlag verursachen. • Bewahren Sie Ihren Computer im eingeschalteten Zustand nicht in einer Umgebung mit schlechter Luftzirkulation, etwa in einer Tragetasche oder einem geschlossenen Aktenkoffer, auf. Andernfalls können Schäden am Computer oder sogar ein Brand verursacht werden. • Stellen Sie den Computer nicht in der Nähe von Heizgeräten und anderen Wärmequellen auf. Achten Sie darauf, die Belüftungsöffnungen nicht zu blockieren. Legen Sie kein Papier unter das System, und stellen Sie das System nicht in einem Schrank oder auf einem Bett, Sofa oder Teppich auf. • Wenn der Netzadapter für die Stromversorgung des Computers oder zum Aufladen des Akkus verwendet wird, sollte er sich in einem gut belüfteten Bereich befinden, z. B. auf einer Schreibtischoberfläche oder auf dem Boden. Achten Sie darauf, dass auf dem Netzadapter weder Papier noch Gegenstände liegen, die die Kühlung beeinträchtigen. Verwenden Sie den Netzadapter auch nicht in einer Tragetasche. • Der Netzadapter kann während des Normalbetriebs des Computers heiß werden. Gehen Sie vorsichtig vor, wenn Sie den Netzadapter während oder direkt nach dem Betrieb berühren. • Legen Sie den tragbaren Computer zum Arbeiten nicht über längere Zeit unmittelbar auf Ihren Beinen ab. Während des normalen Betriebs erhitzt sich die Computerunterseite (vor allem bei Betrieb mit Netzstrom). Ein anhaltender Hautkontakt kann unangenehm werden oder sogar zu Verbrennungen führen. • Verwenden Sie den Computer nicht in einer feuchten Umgebung, z. B. in der Nähe einer Badewanne, eines Waschbeckens, eines Schwimmbeckens oder in einem feuchten Keller.88 Systeminformationshandbuch www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com • Wenn Ihr Computer mit einem integrierten oder optionalen (PC-Karten-)Modem ausgestattet ist, ziehen Sie das Modemkabel bei Herannahen eines Gewitters ab, um die Gefahr eines Blitzeinschlages zu vermeiden. • Um das Risiko eines Stromschlages zu vermeiden, sollten Sie bei einem Gewitter weder Kabel anschließen oder abziehen noch eine Wartung oder Neukonfiguration des Gerätes vornehmen. Verwenden Sie den Computer nicht während eines Gewitters, es sei denn, der Computer wird mit Akkustrom versorgt und ist nicht an das Stromnetz angeschlossen. • Wenn Ihr Computer mit einem Modem ausgestattet ist, sollte das für das Modem verwendete Kabel mindestens einen AWG-Wert (American Wire Gauge [Amerikanisches Eichmaß für Kabel]) von 26 sowie einen FCC-konformen, modularen RJ-11-Stecker aufweisen. • Bevor Sie die Speichermodul-/Mini-PCI-Karten-/Modemabdeckung auf der Unterseite des Computers öffnen, trennen Sie alle Kabel vom Stromnetz, und ziehen Sie das Telefonkabel vom Computer ab. • Wenn der Computer sowohl mit einem RJ-11-Modemanschluss als auch mit einem gleich aussehenden RJ-45-Netzwerkanschluss ausgestattet ist, schließen Sie das Telefonkabel an den RJ-11-Anschluss und nicht an den RJ-45-Anschluss an. • PC-Karten können während des Normalbetriebs sehr warm werden. Gehen Sie vorsichtig vor, wenn Sie PC-Karten nach längerem Betrieb entfernen. • Trennen Sie den Computer vor der Reinigung vom Stromnetz. Reinigen Sie den Computer mit einem weichen Tuch, das mit Wasser befeuchtet wurde. Verwenden Sie keine flüssigen Reinigungsmittel oder Sprühreiniger, die eventuell entflammbare Stoffe enthalten. Stromversorgung • Verwenden Sie nur den von Dell gelieferten Netzadapter, der für diesen Computer zugelassen ist. Andernfalls besteht Brand- oder Explosionsgefahr. • Stellen Sie vor dem Anschluss des Computers an eine Steckdose sicher, dass die Betriebsspannung des Netzadapters mit der Nennspannung und Frequenz der verfügbaren Stromquelle übereinstimmt. • Um den Computer von sämtlichen Stromquellen zu trennen, schalten Sie den Computer aus, trennen den Netzadapter von der Steckdose und entfernen alle Akkus, die im Akkufach oder Modulschacht installiert sind. WARNUNG: Sicherheitshinweise (Fortsetzung)Systeminformationshandbuch 89 • Um Stromschläge zu vermeiden, schließen Sie die Netzkabel von Netzadapter und Geräten immer an ordnungsgemäß geerdete Stromquellen an. Die Kabel sollten mit Schukosteckern ausgestattet sein, um eine einwandfreie Erdung zu gewährleisten. Verwenden Sie keine Adapterstecker. Entfernen Sie nicht den Massekontakt des Netzkabels. Verwenden Sie bei Bedarf nur geeignete Verlängerungskabel mit Schukosteckern, die zum Netzadapterkabel passen. • Stellen Sie sicher, dass nichts auf dem Netzkabel des Netzadapters abgelegt wird und man weder auf das Kabel treten noch darüber stolpern kann. • Gehen Sie beim Anschließen des Netzadapterkabels an eine Steckerleiste vorsichtig vor. In einige Steckerleisten können Stecker auch falsch eingesteckt werden. Dadurch könnte der Computer irreparabel beschädigt werden. Außerdem besteht Stromschlag- sowie Brandgefahr. Stellen Sie sicher, dass der Erdungskontakt am Netzstecker in den entsprechenden Kontakt der Steckerleiste eingesetzt ist. Akku • Verwenden Sie nur von Dell™ gelieferte Akkus, die für diesen Computer zugelassen sind. Bei Verwendung anderer Akkus besteht Brand- oder Explosionsgefahr. • Transportieren Sie den Akku nicht in Ihrer Tasche, Aktentasche oder einem anderen Behälter, da dort befindliche Gegenstände aus Metall (beispielsweise Autoschlüssel oder Büroklammern) die Klemmen des Akkus kurzschließen könnten. Der starke Stromfluss kann äußerst hohe Temperaturen erzeugen und somit Beschädigungen am Akku sowie einen Brand verursachen. • Bei unsachgemäßer Handhabung des Akkus besteht Brandgefahr. Nehmen Sie den Akku nicht auseinander. Behandeln Sie beschädigte oder auslaufende Akkus mit äußerster Vorsicht. Ist der Akku beschädigt, kann Elektrolyt aus den Zellen austreten und zu Verletzungen führen. • Bewahren Sie den Akku außerhalb der Reichweite von Kindern auf. • Bewahren Sie den Computer oder Akku nicht in der Nähe einer Wärmequelle auf, z. B. einer Heizung, einem Kamin, einem Heizlüfter oder ähnlicher Geräte, und setzen Sie ihn nicht Temperaturen von über 60 °C aus. Bei übermäßiger Erhitzung besteht Explosions- und Brandgefahr. • Entsorgen Sie die Akkus des Computers nicht im Hausmüll, und verbrennen Sie sie nicht. Akkus können explodieren. Entsorgen Sie verbrauchte Akkus gemäß den Anweisungen des Herstellers, oder wenden Sie sich an Ihren örtlichen Abfallentsorgungsbetrieb, und fragen Sie nach Informationen zur umweltgerechten Entsorgung. Entsorgen Sie verbrauchte oder beschädigte Akkus umgehend. WARNUNG: Sicherheitshinweise (Fortsetzung)90 Systeminformationshandbuch www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com Reisen mit dem Flugzeug • Für den Betrieb von Dell-Computern an Bord eines Flugzeugs gelten bestimmte gesetzliche Bestimmungen und/oder von der Fluglinie festgelegte Richtlinien. Gemäß solchen Richtlinien ist die Verwendung eines elektronischen Gerätes, das Funkwellen oder andere elektromagnetische Signale aussenden kann, unter Umständen in einem Flugzeug verboten. – Um solche Bestimmungen nach bestem Ermessen einzuhalten, deaktivieren Sie bitte Ihr TrueMobile™-Gerät von Dell oder ein anderes Gerät zur Übertragung von Daten per Funk, wenn Ihr tragbarer Computer von Dell damit ausgestattet ist, bevor Sie in das Flugzeug steigen. Befolgen Sie außerdem die Anweisungen des Flugpersonals. – Darüber hinaus ist die Verwendung von elektronischen Geräten, beispielsweise von tragbaren Computern, in kritischen Flugphasen (wie Start und Landung) möglicherweise nicht gestattet. Einige Fluglinien definieren den Begriff „kritische Flugphase“ noch enger, und zwar als jeden Zeitpunkt, zu dem sich das Flugzeug in einer Höhe von unter 3050 Metern befindet. Befolgen Sie die Richtlinien der Fluglinien in Bezug auf die Verwendung elektronischer Geräte. EMV-Richtlinien Durch abgeschirmte Kabel wird sichergestellt, dass die entsprechende EMV-Klassifikation für die vorgesehene Einsatzumgebung eingehalten wird. Ein Kabel für Drucker, die über die parallele Schnittstelle angeschlossen werden, erhalten Sie bei Dell. Sie können ein solches Kabel auch über die Website von Dell unter der Adresse www.dell.com bestellen. Elektrostatische Entladungen können die elektronischen Bauteile des Computers beschädigen. Um Beschädigungen durch elektrostatische Entladungen zu vermeiden, sollten Sie die statische Elektrizität Ihres Körpers entladen, bevor Sie elektronische Bauteile (z. B. ein Speichermodul) des Computers berühren. Berühren Sie dazu eine nicht lackierte Metallfläche an der E/A-Leiste des Computers. WARNUNG: Sicherheitshinweise (Fortsetzung)Systeminformationshandbuch 91 Arbeiten mit dem Computer Beachten Sie die folgenden Sicherheitshinweise, um Schäden am Computer zu vermeiden. • Wenn Sie den Computer zum Arbeiten aufstellen, platzieren Sie ihn auf einer ebenen Fläche. • Geben Sie den Computer auf Reisen nicht als Gepäckstück auf. Sie können den Computer röntgen lassen, Sie dürfen ihn jedoch niemals durch einen Metalldetektor laufen lassen. Wenn Sie den Computer manuell überprüfen lassen, halten Sie einen geladenen Akku bereit, falls Sie aufgefordert werden, den Computer einzuschalten. • Wenn Sie das Festplattenlaufwerk beim Reisen aus dem Computer ausbauen, wickeln Sie es in ein nicht leitendes Material, z. B. Stoff oder Papier. Wenn Sie das Laufwerk manuell überprüfen lassen, sollten Sie darauf vorbereitet sein, es in den Computer einbauen zu müssen. Sie können das Festplattenlaufwerk röntgen lassen; Sie dürfen es jedoch niemals durch einen Metalldetektor laufen lassen. • Legen Sie den Computer während der Reise nicht in ein Gepäckfach über dem Sitz, wo er umherrutschen könnte. Lassen Sie den Computer nicht fallen, und setzen Sie ihn keinen anderen mechanischen Erschütterungen aus. • Schützen Sie Computer, Akku und Festplattenlaufwerk vor Schmutz, Staub, Lebensmitteln, Flüssigkeiten, extremen Temperaturen und übermäßiger Sonneneinstrahlung. • Wenn Sie Ihren Computer in eine Umgebung mit völlig unterschiedlicher Temperatur und/oder Luftfeuchtigkeit bringen, kann sich auf oder im Computer Kondenswasser bilden. Um eine Beschädigung des Computers zu vermeiden, sollten Sie genügend Zeit verstreichen lassen, damit die Feuchtigkeit verdunsten kann, bevor Sie den Computer benutzen. VORSICHT: Wenn Sie den Computer aus einer kälteren in eine wärmere Umgebung bringen oder umgekehrt, sollten Sie mit dem Einschalten warten, bis er sich an die Raumtemperatur angepasst hat. • Ziehen Sie beim Trennen eines Kabels vom Gerät nur am Stecker oder an der Zugentlastung und nicht am Kabel selbst. Ziehen Sie den Stecker möglichst geradlinig aus der Steckdose heraus, damit die Kontaktstifte nicht verbogen werden. Vor dem Anschließen eines Kabels sollten Sie sicherstellen, dass der Stecker korrekt ausgerichtet ist und nicht verkantet aufgesetzt wird. • Behandeln Sie die Komponenten sorgsam. Halten Sie Bauteile wie Speichermodule an den Kanten und nicht an den Kontaktstiften.92 Systeminformationshandbuch www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com • Wenn Sie ein Speichermodul von der Systemplatine entfernen oder ein Gerät vom Computer trennen möchten, warten Sie nach dem Ausschalten des Computers, dem Trennen des Netzkabels und dem Entfernen der Akkus aus dem Akkufach oder Modulschacht mindestens fünf Sekunden, um Beschädigungen der Systemplatine zu vermeiden. • Reinigen Sie den Bildschirm mit einem weichen, sauberen Tuch und Wasser. Befeuchten Sie das Tuch, und wischen Sie gleichmäßig in eine Richtung von oben nach unten über den Bildschirm. Wischen Sie den Bildschirm sofort trocken. Vermeiden Sie, dass Flüssigkeit auf den Bildschirm gelangt. Durch längeren Kontakt mit Flüssigkeit kann der Bildschirm beschädigt werden. Verwenden Sie keinen handelsüblichen Glasreiniger zum Reinigen des Bildschirms. • Falls der Computer nass oder beschädigt wurde, führen Sie die im Benutzerhandbuch unter „Problemlösung“ beschriebenen Schritte aus. Wenn Sie nach Durchführung dieser Verfahren feststellen, dass der Computer nicht einwandfrei arbeitet, wenden Sie sich an Dell. (Die entsprechenden Kontaktinformationen finden Sie im Benutzerhandbuch unter „Weitere Hilfe“.) Ergonomische Haltung beim Arbeiten mit dem Computer WARNUNG: Falsches oder länger andauerndes Arbeiten mit der Tastatur kann gesundheitsschädlich sein. WARNUNG: Länger andauerndes Arbeiten am integrierten oder externen Bildschirm kann die Augen belasten. Um Arbeitskomfort und Produktivität zu optimieren, beachten Sie beim Aufstellen und Verwenden des Computers die ergonomischen Richtlinien im Anhang des OnlineBenutzerhandbuchs. Dieser tragbare Computer ist nicht für den länger andauernden Gebrauch im Büro bestimmt. Für länger andauernden Gebrauch im Büro wird die Verwendung einer externen Tastatur empfohlen. Arbeiten mit dem Computer(Fortsetzung)Systeminformationshandbuch 93 Bei der Arbeit an Komponenten im Inneren des Computers Führen Sie vor dem Entfernen oder Installieren von Speichermodulen, Mini-PC-Karten bzw. eines Modems folgende Schritte in der angegebenen Reihenfolge aus. VORSICHT: Nur bei der Installation von Speichermodulen, Mini-PC-Karten oder eines Modems dürfte es erforderlich werden, im Inneren des Computers zu arbeiten. VORSICHT: VORSICHT: Um eine mögliche Beschädigung der Systemplatine zu vermeiden, warten Sie nach dem Ausschalten des Computers fünf Sekunden, bevor Sie ein Peripheriegerät vom Computer trennen oder ein Speichermodul, eine Mini-PC-Karte bzw. ein Modem entfernen. 1 Den Computer herunterfahren und alle angeschlossenen Geräte ausschalten. 2 Den Computer und die daran angeschlossenen Geräte vom Stromnetz trennen. So wird die Gefahr von Verletzungen oder elektrischen Schlägen verringert. Außerdem alle Telefon- und Datenübertragungskabel vom System trennen. 3 Den Hauptakku aus dem Akkufach und gegebenenfalls den zweiten Akku aus dem Modulschacht entfernen. 4 Die unlackierte Metallfläche auf der Rückseite des Computers berühren, um sich zu erden. Diese Erdung während der Arbeit am System regelmäßig wiederholen, um statische Elektrizität abzuleiten, die interne Bauteile beschädigen könnte. Schutz vor elektrostatischen Entladungen Elektrostatische Entladungen können die elektronischen Bauteile des Computers beschädigen. Um Beschädigungen durch elektrostatische Entladungen zu vermeiden, sollten Sie die statische Elektrizität Ihres Körpers entladen, bevor Sie elektronische Bauteile (z. B. ein Speichermodul) des Computers berühren. Berühren Sie dazu eine nicht lackierte Metallfläche an der Computerrückseite. Wiederholen Sie während der Arbeit im Inneren des Systems diese Erdung regelmäßig, um statische Aufladungen abzuleiten, die sich mittlerweile im Körper aufgebaut haben könnten. Arbeiten mit dem Computer(Fortsetzung)94 Systeminformationshandbuch www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com Beachten Sie auch folgende Hinweise, um Beschädigungen durch elektrostatische Entladung (ESE) zu vermeiden: • Entfernen Sie beim Auspacken einer elektrostatisch empfindlichen Komponente aus dem Versandkarton erst dann ihre antistatische Verpackung, wenn Sie die Komponente installieren möchten. Vergewissern Sie sich, dass die in Ihrem Körper aufgebaute statische Elektrizität abgeleitet wurde, bevor Sie die antistatische Verpackung der Komponente entfernen. • Verwenden Sie für den Transport einer elektrostatisch empfindlichen Komponente einen antistatischen Behälter oder eine antistatische Verpackung. • Arbeiten Sie mit allen empfindlichen Komponenten in einer elektrostatisch unbedenklichen Umgebung. Verwenden Sie nach Möglichkeit antistatische Fußmatten und Schreibtischauflagen. Entsorgen von Akkus In Ihrem Computer wird ein Lithium-Ionen-Akku verwendet. Anweisungen zum Austauschen des Lithium-Ionen-Akkus finden Sie unter „Entfernen eines Akkus“ weiter hinten in diesem Dokument bzw. im Abschnitt „Verwenden eines Akkus“ im Online-Benutzerhandbuch. Entsorgen Sie Akkus oder Batterien nicht im Hausmüll. Die Adresse der nächstgelegenen Annahmestelle für Altbatterien und Akkus erhalten Sie bei Ihrem örtlichen Abfallentsorgungsbetrieb. Arbeiten mit dem Computer(Fortsetzung)Systeminformationshandbuch 95 Informationsquellen für Ihren Computer Wonach suchen Sie? Hier finden Sie das Gesuchte: • Ein Diagnoseprogramm für den Computer • Treiber für meinen Computer • Die Dokumentation für den Computer • Die Dokumentation für das Gerät Drivers and Utilities-CD (diese wird auch als ResourceCD bezeichnet). Dokumentation und Treiber wurden von Dell vor der Auslieferung bereits auf dem Computer vorinstalliert. Mit Hilfe der CD können Sie Treiber neu installieren, das Programm „Dell Diagnostics“ ausführen oder auf die Dokumentation zugreifen. Möglicherweise finden Sie auf der CD Readme-Dateien. Diese Dateien enthalten Angaben zu den neuesten technischen Änderungen bzw. Detailinformationen zu technischen Fragen für erfahrene Benutzer oder Techniker. • Informationen zum Einrichten des Computers • Garantieinformationen • Sicherheitshinweise Dell-Systeminformationshandbuch • Expressdienst-Codenummer und Service-Kennnummer • Microsoft® Windows®- Lizenzetikett Etikett für Expressdienst-Codenummer und Produktschlüssel Diese Etiketten sind am Computer angebracht.96 Systeminformationshandbuch www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com • Aktuellste Treiber für den Computer • Informationen zum technischen Support und Kundendienst • Onlinediskussionen mit anderen Benutzern und dem technischen Support • Dokumentation zum Computer Dell-Support-Website – support.dell.com Die Dell Support-Website bietet verschiedene Online-Werkzeuge, unter anderem: • Lösungen – Hinweise und Tipps zur Problembehandlung, Artikel von Technikern und Onlinekurse • Kundenforum – Online-Diskussion mit anderen Dell-Kunden • Aktualisierungen – Aktualisierungsinformationen für Komponenten, z. B. für den Speicher, das Festplattenlaufwerk und das Betriebssystem. • Kundenbetreuung – Kontaktinformationen, Bestellstatus, Garantie und Informationen in Notfällen. • Downloads – Treiber, Patches und Software-Updates • Referenz – Computerdokumentation, Produktspezifikationen und Whitepapers • Informationen zum Entfernen und Austauschen von Teilen • Informationen zu technischen Spezifikationen • Informationen zum Konfigurieren von Systemeinstellungen • Informationen zur Fehlerbeseitigung und Problemlösung Benutzerhandbuch Hilfe- und Supportcenter unter Windows 1Auf die Schaltfläche Start und anschließend auf Help and Support (Hilfe und Support) klicken. 2Auf User’s and system guides (Benutzer- und Systemhandbücher) und auf User’s guides (Benutzerhandbücher) klicken. Microsoft Windows 2000 Doppelklicken Sie auf dem Desktop auf das Symbol User's Guides (Benutzerhandbücher) . • Anleitung zum Arbeiten mit Windows XP • Dokumentation für den Computer • Dokumentation für Geräte (z. B. Modems) Hilfe- und Supportcenter unter Windows 1Auf die Schaltfläche Start und anschließend auf Help and Support (Hilfe und Support) klicken. 2Ein Wort oder einen Ausdruck eingeben, das bzw. der Ihr Problem beschreibt, und anschließend auf das Pfeilsymbol klicken. 3Auf das Thema klicken, das Ihr Problem beschreibt. 4 Die Anweisungen auf dem Bildschirm befolgen. Wonach suchen Sie? Hier finden Sie das Gesuchte:Systeminformationshandbuch 97 Einrichten des Computers WARNUNG: Bevor Sie die in diesem Abschnitt beschriebenen Arbeiten ausführen, befolgen Sie zunächst die Sicherheitshinweise am Anfang dieses Dokuments. 1 Das Zubehör auspacken. 2 Die für das Einrichten des Computers erforderlichen Zubehörteile bereitlegen. Der Lieferumfang des Zubehörs umfasst ferner die Benutzerdokumentation sowie die Software oder zusätzliche Hardware (z. B. PC-Karten, Laufwerke oder Akkus), die Sie bestellt haben. • Informationen zum Neuinstallieren des Betriebssystems Betriebssystem-CD Verwenden Sie die Drivers and UtilitiesCD, um neuere Treiber für die mit Ihrem Computer ausgelieferten Geräte zu installieren, wenn Sie das Betriebssystem Ihres Computers mit Hilfe der Betriebssystem-CD neu installiert haben. Der Produktschlüssel für Ihr Betriebssystem befindet sich auf Ihrem Computer. Wonach suchen Sie? Hier finden Sie das Gesuchte: bzw.98 Systeminformationshandbuch www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com 3 Den Netzadapter an den Netzadapteranschluss des Computers und an die Steckdose anschließen. 4 Den integrierten Bildschirm öffnen und den Netzschalter drücken, um den Computer einzuschalten. HINWEIS: Verbinden Sie den Computer erst mit dem Docking-Gerät, wenn er mindestens einmal gestartet und heruntergefahren wurde. NetzschalterSysteminformationshandbuch 99 Wissenswertes über den Computer Vorderseite Bildschirm Touch-Pad Netzschalter Tastatur Tastaturstatusanzeigen Gerätestatusanzeigen Lautsprecher Touch-PadTasten Bildschirmverriegelung100 Systeminformationshandbuch www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com Linke Seitenansicht Rechte Seitenansicht PC-Kartensteckplatz Infrarotsensor Audioanschlüsse (2) Sicherungskabeleinschub Lüftungsschlitze (2) Sicherungskabeleinschub Modulschacht GerätefreigabeklinkeSysteminformationshandbuch 101 Rückseite VORSICHT: Um Schäden am Computer zu vermeiden, sollten Sie nach dem Ausschalten des Computers fünf Sekunden warten, bevor Sie ein externes Gerät davon trennen. WARNUNG: Achten Sie darauf, die Lüftungsschlitze nicht zu blockieren, schieben Sie keine Gegenstände hinein, und halten Sie die Lüftungsschlitze staubfrei. Bewahren Sie den Computer während des Betriebs nicht in schlecht durchlüfteten Behältnissen wie einer geschlossenen Tragetasche auf. Durch schlechte Belüftung können Schäden am Computer oder sogar ein Brand verursacht werden. USB-Anschlüsse (2) Fernseh- und S-Video-Anschluss Modemanschluss (RJ-11) (optional) Netzwerkanschluss (RJ-45) Bildschirmanschluss Paralleler Anschluss Serieller Anschluss Netzadapteranschluss Lüftungsschlitze102 Systeminformationshandbuch www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com Unterseite Lüfter Akkufachfreigabeklinke Akkuladeanzeige Akku Speichermodulabdeckung Festplattenlaufwerk Abdeckung der MiniPCI-Karte Einschub für Docking-Gerät SchraubenbohrungSysteminformationshandbuch 103 Entfernen eines Akkus Weitere Informationen zum Austauschen des zweiten Akkus finden Sie unter „Verwenden des Modulschachts“ im Online-Benutzerhandbuch. WARNUNG: Bevor Sie diese Schritte durchführen, schalten Sie den Computer aus, trennen ihn von der Steckdose und trennen das Modem von der Telefonwanddose. VORSICHT: Wenn Sie den Akkuaustausch im Stand-by-Modus durchführen, haben Sie bis zu 90 Sekunden Zeit, um den Austauschvorgang abzuschließen, bevor das System herunterfährt und nicht gesicherte Daten verloren gehen. 1 Sicherstellen, dass der Computer ausgeschaltet und von der Steckdose und Telefonwanddose getrennt ist. 2 Wenn der Computer an ein Docking-Gerät angeschlossen ist, die Verbindung trennen. Weitere Anweisungen hierzu finden Sie in der Dokumentation zur Docking-Station. 3 Die Freigabeklinke des Akkufachs an der Unterseite des Computers zur Seite schieben und in dieser Position festhalten, während Sie den Akku aus dem Akkufach herausnehmen.104 Systeminformationshandbuch www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com Ein- und Ausbauen eines Reserveakkus 1 Den Akku entfernen. 2 Die Abdeckung des Reserveakkufachs entfernen. 3 Den Reserveakku aus dem Fach herausziehen und das Kabel vom Anschluss abziehen. Reserveakku Anschluss ReserveakkukabelSysteminformationshandbuch 105 4 Das Kabel des Reserveakkus in den Anschluss im Reserveakkufach stecken. 5 Den Reserveakku in das Fach einsetzen und die Abdeckung wieder anbringen. Einsetzen eines Akkus Den Akku so weit in den Schacht schieben, bis die Freigabeklinke hörbar einrastet. Weitere Informationen über die Installation des zweiten Akkus finden Sie unter „Verwenden des Modulschachts“ im Online-Benutzerhandbuch. Verwenden des Programms „Dell Diagnostics“ Das Programm „Dell Diagnostics“ befindet sich auf der Festplatte auf einer verborgenen Partition. HINWEIS: Wenn auf dem Bildschirm nichts angezeigt werden kann, wenden Sie sich an Dell (unter „Weitere Hilfe“ im Benutzerhandbuch finden Sie die entsprechenden Rufnummern und Adressen). 1 Den Computer herunterfahren. 2 Wenn der Computer an ein Docking-Gerät angeschlossen ist, die Verbindung trennen. Weitere Anweisungen hierzu finden Sie in der Dokumentation zur Docking-Station.106 Systeminformationshandbuch www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com 3 Den Computer an eine Steckdose anschließen. 4 Den Computer einschalten. Wenn das DELL™-Logo angezeigt wird, sofort drücken. HINWEIS: Wenn eine Meldung erscheint, dass keine Diagnoseprogrammpartition gefunden wurde, führen Sie das Programm „Dell Diagnostics“ über die Drivers and Utilities-CD aus. Falls so lange gewartet wurde, bis das Microsoft® Windows®-Logo erscheint, warten Sie, bis der Windows-Desktop angezeigt wird. Danach den Computer herunterfahren und erneut starten. 5 In der Liste der Startgeräte Diagnostics (Diagnose) markieren und drücken. Der Computer führt vor dem Starten eine Systemüberprüfung durch. Dabei handelt es sich um eine Reihe von integrierten Diagnosefunktionen, mit denen die Systemplatine, Tastatur, Festplatte und der Bildschirm geprüft werden. • Beantworten Sie alle Fragen, die während der Überprüfung angezeigt werden. • Wird ein Fehler entdeckt, unterbricht der Computer die Prüfung und zeigt eine entsprechende Fehlermeldung an. Um die Überprüfung zu unterbrechen und das Betriebssystem aufzurufen, drücken Sie die Taste . Um mit dem nächsten Schritt fortzufahren, drücken Sie die Taste . Um die Komponente erneut zu testen, bei der die Fehlfunktion festgestellt wurde, drücken Sie . • Werden bei der Überprüfung vor dem Systemstart Fehlfunktionen festgestellt, notieren Sie sich die Fehlercodes, und wenden Sie sich an Dell bevor Sie mit dem Programm „Dell Diagnostics“ fortfahren. (Unter „Weitere Hilfe“ im Benutzerhandbuch finden Sie die entsprechenden Rufnummern und Adressen.) Wurde die Systemüberprüfung vor dem Starten erfolgreich durchgeführt, erscheint folgende Meldung: Booting Dell Diagnostic Utility Partition. Press any key to continue. (Die Dell-Diagnoseprogrammpartition wird gestartet. Drücken Sie eine beliebige Taste, um fortzufahren.) 6 Eine beliebige Taste drücken, um das Programm „Dell Diagnostics“ von der entsprechenden Partition auf der Festplatte zu starten.Systeminformationshandbuch 107 7 Wenn das Dell-Diagnoseprogramm geladen wurde und das Main Menu (Hauptmenü) erscheint, auf die Schaltfläche für die gewünschte Option klicken. 8 Tritt während eines Tests ein Problem auf, werden in einer Meldung der Fehlercode und eine Beschreibung des Problems angezeigt. Den Fehlercode und die Problembeschreibung notieren und den Anweisungen auf dem Bildschirm folgen. Kann das Problem nicht gelöst werden, an Dell wenden. (Unter „Weitere Hilfe“ im Benutzerhandbuch finden Sie die entsprechenden Rufnummern und Adressen.) HINWEIS: Die Service-Kennnummer des Computers befindet sich in der Titelleiste der einzelnen Fenster. Option Funktion Express Test (Schnelltest) Es wird ein Schnelltest der Geräte durchgeführt. Der Test dauert normalerweise etwa zehn bis 20 Minuten. Es ist keine Benutzeraktion erforderlich. Führen Sie zuerst den Schnelltest durch, um die Ursache des Problems möglicherweise schnell zu erkennen. Extended Test (Erweiterter Test) Es wird ein ausführlicher Test der Geräte durchgeführt. Dieser Test nimmt normalerweise mindestens eine Stunde in Anspruch. Dabei muss der Benutzer in regelmäßigen Abständen Informationen eingeben. Custom Test (Benutzerdefinierter Test) Es wird ein bestimmtes Gerät geprüft. Die auszuführenden Tests können vom Benutzer angepasst werden. Symptom Tree (Problemübersicht) Es werden die am häufigsten auftretenden Probleme aufgeführt. Vom Benutzer kann der entsprechende Test für das jeweils aufgetretene Problem ausgewählt werden.108 Systeminformationshandbuch www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com 9 Wird ein Test der Kategorie Custom Test (Benutzerdefinierter Test) oder Symptom Tree (Problemübersicht) ausgeführt, auf die entsprechende, im Folgenden beschriebene Registerkarte klicken, um weitere Informationen zu erhalten. 10 Wenn die Tests vollständig ausgeführt wurden, das Testfenster schließen, um zum Hauptmenü zurückzukehren. Um das Programm „Dell Diagnostics“ zu verlassen und den Computer neu zu starten, das Fenster des Hauptmenüs schließen. Registerkarte Funktion Results (Ergebnisse) Es werden die Testergebnisse und möglicherweise gefundene Probleme angezeigt. Errors (Fehler) Es werden die gefundenen Fehler, die Fehlercodes und eine Beschreibung des Problems angezeigt. Help (Hilfe) Beschreibt den Test und verweist auf mögliche Voraussetzungen für die Durchführung des Tests. Configuration (Konfiguration) Die Hardware-Konfiguration der ausgewählten Geräte wird angezeigt. Das Programm "Dell Diagnostics" sammelt über das SystemSetup-Programm, den Speicher und verschiedene interne Tests Konfigurationsinformationen für alle Geräte. Diese Informationen werden in der Geräteliste auf der linken Seite angezeigt. In der Geräteliste werden möglicherweise nicht alle Namen von Geräten angezeigt, die im Computer installiert oder daran angeschlossen sind. Parameters (Parameter) Der Test kann durch Änderungen an den Einstellungen an Ihre Bedürfnisse angepasst werden.Systeminformationshandbuch 109 Betriebsbestimmungen Elektromagnetische Interferenz (EMI) ist ein Signal oder eine Emission, die in den freien Raum abgegeben bzw. entlang von Strom- oder Signalleitungen geleitet wird und den Betrieb der Funknavigation oder anderer Sicherheitsgeräte beeinträchtigt bzw. deren Qualität extrem verschlechtert, behindert oder wiederholt lizenzierte Funkdienste unterbricht. Funkdienste umfassen kommerziellen AM-/FM-Radio- und Fernsehrundfunk, Funktelefondienste, Radar, Flugsicherung, Anrufmelder und Dienste für personenbezogene Kommunikation (PCS [Personal Communication Services]), sind jedoch nicht nur auf diese beschränkt. Diese lizenzierten Dienste sowie die unbeabsichtigte Abstrahlung durch andere Geräte (z. B. digitale Geräte wie Computeranlagen) tragen zum Aufbau elektromagnetischer Felder bei. Unter elektromagnetischer Verträglichkeit (EMV) versteht man die Fähigkeit elektronischer Bauteile, in einer elektronischen Umgebung störungsfrei zu funktionieren. Dieses Computersystem wurde zwar so konzipiert, dass die seitens der Behörden festgelegten Grenzwerte für EMI nicht überschritten werden; dennoch kann nicht ausgeschlossen werden, dass bei bestimmten Installationen nicht doch Störungen auftreten. Wenn dieses Gerät die Funkkommunikation durch Interferenzen beeinträchtigt, was durch Ein- und Ausschalten des Gerätes festgestellt werden kann, wird der Benutzer aufgefordert, die Störungen durch eine oder mehrere der folgenden Maßnahmen zu beheben: • Die Empfangsantenne neu ausrichten. • Die Position des Computers gegenüber dem Empfänger ändern. • Den Abstand zwischen Computer und Empfänger vergrößern. • Den Computer an eine andere Steckdose anschließen, so dass Computer und Empfänger über verschiedene Stromkreise versorgt werden. Wenden Sie sich gegebenenfalls an einen Mitarbeiter des technischen Supports von Dell oder an einen erfahrenen Radio- und Fernsehtechniker. Weitere Informationen zu Betriebsbestimmungen finden Sie unter „Betriebsbestimmungen“ im Anhang des Online-Benutzerhandbuchs. In den Abschnitten der einzelnen Zulassungsbehörden finden Sie länderspezifische Informationen zu EMV/EMI bzw. zur Produktsicherheit.110 Systeminformationshandbuch www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.comwww.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com Dell™ Latitude™ D500 Informazioni di sistema Modello PP05LNote, avvisi e messaggi di attenzione NOTA: una NOTA evidenzia informazioni importanti per un uso ottimale del computer. AVVISO: un AVVISO può indicare un potenziale danno a livello di hardware o una perdita di dati e consiglia come evitare il problema. ATTENZIONE: un messaggio di ATTENZIONE indica un rischio di danni alla proprietà, lesioni personali o morte. Abbreviazioni ed acronimi Per un elenco completo delle abbreviazioni e degli acronimi, fare riferimento alla Guida dell’utente. A seconda del sistema operativo in uso, per accedere alla Guida fare doppio clic sull’icona Guida dell’utente sul desktop oppure fare clic sul pulsante Start, scegliere Guida in linea e supporto tecnico, quindi fare clic su Guide dell’utente e di sistema. Se il computer acquistato è un Dell n Series, qualsiasi riferimento fatto in questo documento al sistema operativo Microsoft® Windows® non è applicabile. ____________________ Le informazioni contenute nel presente documento sono soggette a modifiche senza preavviso. © 2003 Dell Computer Corporation. Tutti i diritti riservati. È severamente vietata la riproduzione, con qualsiasi strumento, senza l’autorizzazione scritta di DellComputer Corporation. Marchi di fabbrica usati nel presente documento: Dell, il logo DELL, TrueMobile, Inspiron, Dell Precision, Dimension, OptiPlex e Latitude sono marchi di fabbrica di Dell Computer Corporation; Intel, Pentium e Celeron sono marchi depositati di Intel Corporation; Microsoft e Windows sono marchi depositati di Microsoft Corporation; EMC è un marchio depositato di EMC Corporation. Altri marchi di fabbrica e nomi commerciali possono essere utilizzati in questo documento sia in riferimento alle aziende che rivendicano il marchio e i nomi che ai prodotti stessi. Dell Computer Corporation nega qualsiasi partecipazione di proprietà relativa a marchi di fabbrica e nomi commerciali diversi da quelli di sua proprietà. Modello PP05L Febbraio 2003 N/P 1Y369 Rev. A00Sommario 113 Sommario ATTENZIONE: Istruzioni di sicurezza . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Informazioni generali . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Alimentazione . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Batteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Uso in aereo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Istruzioni EMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Uso del computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Abitudini ergonomiche nell’uso del computer . . . . . . . . . . 120 Interventi sui componenti interni del computer . . . . . . . . . 120 Protezione dalle scariche elettrostatiche . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Smaltimento della batteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Ricerca di informazioni relative al computer . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Installazione del computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Informazioni sul computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Vista frontale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Vista sinistra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Vista destra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Retro del computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Vista inferiore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Rimozione della batteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Installazione e rimozione della pila di riserva . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Installazione della batteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Esecuzione del programma Dell Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Avvisi sulle normative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138114 SommarioInformazioni di sistema 115 ATTENZIONE: Istruzioni di sicurezza Per proteggere il computer e l’ambiente di lavoro da eventuali danni e per la sicurezza personale, attenersi alle seguenti indicazioni di sicurezza. Informazioni generali • Non cercare di riparare il computer da soli se non si è un addetto esperto al supporto tecnico. Seguire sempre attentamente le istruzioni di installazione. • Se si usa un cavo di alimentazione di prolunga unitamente all’adattatore c.a., accertarsi che l’assorbimento totale in ampere dei dispositivi collegati non superi il valore nominale di ampere del cavo di prolunga. • Non inserire oggetti nelle prese d’aria o in altre fessure del computer. Ciò potrebbe causare un corto circuito dei componenti interni, con conseguenti incendi o scariche elettriche. • Non riporre il computer in un ambiente con insufficiente aerazione, ad esempio una custodia per il trasporto o una valigetta chiusa, durante il funzionamento, in quanto ciò potrebbe provocare incendi o il danneggiamento del computer. • Mantenere il computer lontano da termosifoni e fonti di calore e non ostruire le prese di raffreddamento. Non appoggiare il computer su pile di carta, non racchiuderlo tra pareti o posarlo su letti, divani o tappeti. • Quando si usa l’adattatore c.a. per alimentare il computer o caricare la batteria, posizionarlo in una zona ventilata, ad esempio il piano di una scrivania o il pavimento. Non coprire l’adattatore c.a. con fogli o altri oggetti che potrebbero rallentarne il raffreddamento. Non usare inoltre l’adattatore c.a. lasciandolo all’interno della custodia per il trasporto. • Durante il normale funzionamento del computer l’adattatore c.a. può raggiungere temperature elevate. Maneggiare con cautela l’adattatore durante o subito dopo il funzionamento. • Non usare il computer portatile appoggiando la base a contatto diretto con la pelle per periodi prolungati. La temperatura superficiale della base aumenta durante il normale funzionamento, specialmente se il computer è alimentato a c.a. Il contatto prolungato con la pelle potrebbe causare fastidio o, in casi estremi, bruciature. • Non usare il computer in un ambiente umido, ad esempio vicino a una vasca da bagno, un lavandino, una piscina o in un seminterrato umido. • Se il computer è dotato di modem integrato o opzionale (scheda PC Card), scollegare il cavo del modem al sopraggiungere di temporali per evitare il rischio, sia pure remoto, di scariche elettriche causate da fulmini e trasmesse attraverso la linea telefonica.116 Informazioni di sistema www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com • Per evitare potenziali rischi di scariche elettriche, non collegare o scollegare cavi, né eseguire operazioni di manutenzione o riconfigurazione del prodotto durante un temporale. Non usare il computer durante un temporale a meno che tutti i cavi siano stati scollegati e il computer sia alimentato esclusivamente a batteria. • Se il computer è dotato di modem, il cavo usato con il modem deve avere dimensioni minime pari a 26 AWG (American Wire Gauge) e un connettore modulare RJ-11 conforme alle normative FCC. • Prima di aprire il coperchio della baia dei moduli di memoria, della scheda miniaturizzata PCI e del modem sotto il computer, scollegare tutti i cavi dalle relative prese elettriche e il cavo telefonico. • Se il computer è dotato di un connettore del modem RJ-11 e di un connettore di rete RJ-45, che sono simili, assicurarsi di collegare il cavo telefonico al connettore RJ-11 e non al connettore RJ-45. • Le schede PC Card possono diventare estremamente calde durante il normale funzionamento. In caso di funzionamento prolungato, rimuovere le schede PC Card con cautela. • Prima di eseguire la pulizia del computer, scollegarlo dalla presa elettrica. Pulire il computer con un panno morbido inumidito con acqua. Non usare detergenti spray o liquidi che potrebbero contenere sostanze infiammabili. Alimentazione • Usare esclusivamente l’adattatore c.a. fornito da Dell approvato per l’uso con questo computer. L’uso di un adattatore c.a. diverso potrebbe provocare incendi o esplosioni. • Prima di collegare il computer a una presa elettrica, controllare il valore della tensione dell’adattatore c.a. per accertarsi che la tensione e la frequenza corrispondano a quelle della fonte di alimentazione. • Per scollegare il computer da tutte le fonti di alimentazione, spegnere il computer, scollegare l’adattatore c.a. dalla presa elettrica e rimuovere l’eventuale batteria installata nell’alloggiamento della batteria o nell’alloggiamento dei moduli. • Per evitare scariche elettriche, collegare l’adattatore c.a. e i cavi di alimentazione delle periferiche a fonti di alimentazione correttamente messe a terra. I cavi di alimentazione potrebbero essere dotati di spine a tre poli per fornire una messa a terra. Non usare adattatori per spine né rimuovere il polo di messa a terra dalla spina del cavo di alimentazione. Se è necessario un cavo di prolunga per l’alimentazione, usare un cavo di tipo appropriato, con spina a due o a tre poli, a cui collegare il cavo di alimentazione dell’adattatore c.a. ATTENZIONE: Istruzioni di sicurezza (cont)Informazioni di sistema 117 • Accertarsi che non vi siano oggetti appoggiati sopra il cavo di alimentazione dell’adattatore c.a. e che il cavo non sia di intralcio o possa essere calpestato. • Se si usa una multipresa, prestare particolare attenzione quando vi si collega il cavo di alimentazione dell’adattatore c.a. Alcune multiprese potrebbero non consentire l’inserimento corretto della spina del cavo di alimentazione, con conseguente possibili danni permanenti al computer e rischio di scariche elettriche e incendi. Accertarsi che il polo di messa a terra della spina sia inserito nel corrispondente foro di contatto di messa a terra della multipresa. Batteria • Usare esclusivamente gruppi batterie Dell™ approvati per l’uso con questo computer. L’uso di altri tipi di batterie potrebbe provocare incendi o esplosioni. • Non trasportare il gruppo batterie in tasca, in borsa o in altri tipi di contenitori dove potrebbero essere presenti oggetti metallici, ad esempio le chiavi dell’auto o graffette metalliche, che potrebbero causare un corto circuito tra i morsetti della batteria. Le temperature estremamente alte, generate dal conseguente eccesso di flusso di corrente, potrebbero danneggiare il gruppo batterie o causare incendi o bruciature. • Se maneggiata non correttamente, la batteria comporta il rischio di incendio o bruciature. Non disassemblarla. Maneggiare con molta attenzione un gruppo batterie danneggiato o dal quale si è verificata una perdita. Se la batteria è danneggiata, è possibile che si verifichi una perdita di elettroliti dalle celle che può provocare lesioni. • Tenere la batteria lontano dalla portata dei bambini. • Non riporre o lasciare il computer o il gruppo batterie in prossimità di fonti di calore, quali caloriferi, caminetti, stufe, stufette elettriche o altre apparecchiature che emettono calore, né esporli a temperature superiori a 60º C (140º F). Se esposti a temperature eccessivamente elevate, gli elementi della batteria potrebbero esplodere o potrebbero verificarsi delle perdite, con conseguente rischio di incendio. • Non gettare la batteria sul fuoco né insieme ai rifiuti domestici, in quanto potrebbe esplodere. Smaltire le batterie usate secondo le istruzioni del produttore o contattare l’autorità locale preposta allo smaltimento dei rifiuti per informazioni. Smaltire immediatamente le batterie esaurite o danneggiate. ATTENZIONE: Istruzioni di sicurezza (cont)118 Informazioni di sistema www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com Uso in aereo • L’uso del computer Dell a bordo di un aereo è subordinato a determinate normative stabilite degli enti amministrativi per il trasporto aereo e/o a restrizioni specifiche delle compagnie aeree. Ad esempio, tali normative e restrizioni in genere vietano l’uso di qualsiasi dispositivo elettronico di comunicazione personale (PED) che consenta la trasmissione in radiofrequenza o mediante altri segnali elettromagnetici a bordo di un aereo. – Per rispettare tutte le restrizioni indicate, se il computer portatile Dell è dotato di Dell TrueMobile™ o di un altro dispositivo per comunicazioni senza fili, disattivarlo prima di salire a bordo dell’aereo e seguire tutte le istruzioni fornite dagli assistenti di volo in relazione all’uso di tale dispositivo. – L’uso di dispositivi elettronici di comunicazione personale, quali i computer portatili, può inoltre essere vietato durante le fasi cruciali del volo, ad esempio in fase di decollo e atterraggio. Alcune linee aeree definiscono fase cruciale di volo qualsiasi momento in cui l’aereo si trova a un’altezza inferiore a 3050 m. Per determinare quando è consentito l’uso di un dispositivo elettronico di comunicazione personale, seguire le istruzioni specifiche della compagnia aerea. Istruzioni EMC Usare cavi schermati per garantire la conformità con la classe EMC prevista per l’ambiente di utilizzo. Dell fornisce un apposito cavo per stampanti parallele. È anche possibile ordinare il cavo da Dell presso il sito Web all’indirizzo www.dell.com. L’elettricità statica può danneggiare i componenti elettronici del computer. Per evitare possibili danni, scaricare l’elettricità statica dal corpo prima di toccare un componente elettronico del computer, ad esempio un modulo di memoria. A tale scopo è sufficiente toccare la superficie metallica non verniciata del pannello di input/output del computer. ATTENZIONE: Istruzioni di sicurezza (cont)Informazioni di sistema 119 Uso del computer Attenersi alle seguenti indicazioni di sicurezza per prevenire danni al computer. • Prima di iniziare a usare il computer, appoggiarlo su una superficie piana. • Se si viaggia in aereo, non spedire il computer come bagaglio. Sebbene il computer non venga danneggiato dai dispositivi di sicurezza a raggi X, non fare mai passare il computer attraverso un metal detector. Se il computer deve essere ispezionato manualmente, accertarsi di avere a disposizione una batteria carica nell’eventualità che venga richiesto di accendere il computer. • Se si viaggia con il disco rigido rimosso dal computer, avvolgere l’unità con materiale non conduttore, ad esempio un panno o della carta. Se l’unità deve essere controllata manualmente, prepararsi a installare l’unità nel computer. Sebbene il disco rigido non venga danneggiato dai dispositivi di sicurezza a raggi X, non fare mai passare il disco rigido attraverso un metal detector. • Durante il viaggio, non collocare il computer negli scomparti portabagagli, dove potrebbe scivolare. Non fare cadere il computer, né sottoporlo ad altri urti meccanici. • Proteggere il computer, la batteria e il disco rigido dagli agenti ambientali, quali sporco, polvere, alimenti, liquidi, temperature eccessivamente basse o elevate e dall’esposizione diretta ai raggi solari. • Se nel passaggio da un ambiente all’altro il computer viene esposto a temperature e tassi di umidità notevolmente diversi, è possibile che sul computer o al suo interno si formi della condensa. Per evitare danni al computer, attendere che la condensa sia evaporata prima di usare il computer. AVVISO: quando il computer passa da condizioni di bassa temperatura a un ambiente più caldo o da condizioni di temperatura elevata a un ambiente più freddo, attendere che il computer raggiunga la temperatura ambiente prima di accenderlo. • Per scollegare un cavo, afferrare il connettore o il serracavo, non il cavo stesso. Mentre si estrae il connettore, mantenerlo correttamente allineato per evitare che i piedini si pieghino. Inoltre, prima di collegare un cavo, accertarsi che entrambi i connettori siano allineati e orientati in modo corretto. • Maneggiare i componenti con attenzione. I componenti quali i moduli di memoria devono essere afferrati dai bordi e non dai piedini. • Per evitare possibili danni alla scheda di sistema, prima di rimuovere un modulo di memoria dalla scheda di sistema o scollegare una periferica dal computer, spegnere il computer, scollegare il cavo dell’adattatore c.a., rimuovere l’eventuale batteria installata nel relativo alloggiamento o nell’alloggiamento dei moduli e attendere 5 secondi dallo spegnimento del computer.120 Informazioni di sistema www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com • Pulire lo schermo con un panno morbido e pulito, inumidito con acqua. Applicare l’acqua sul panno, quindi passare il panno sullo schermo in una sola direzione, dalla parte superiore a quella inferiore. Rimuovere velocemente ogni traccia di liquido dallo schermo e mantenerlo asciutto. Un’esposizione protratta all’umidità potrebbe danneggiare lo schermo. Non usare un comune detergente per vetri per pulire lo schermo. • Se il computer entra in contatto con liquidi o viene danneggiato, seguire le procedure descritte nella sezione “Soluzione di problemi” della Guida dell’utente. Se dopo avere seguito tali procedure il computer continua a non funzionare correttamente, contattare Dell (vedere la sezione “Assistenza” della Guida dell’utente per ottenere i recapiti appropriati). Abitudini ergonomiche nell’uso del computer ATTENZIONE: l’uso prolungato o improprio della tastiera può comportare lesioni. ATTENZIONE: osservare lo schermo o il monitor esterno per periodi prolungati può causare disturbi alla vista. Per migliorare il comfort e l’efficienza, quando si configura e si usa il computer osservare le indicazioni ergonomiche fornite nell’appendice della Guida dell’utente in linea. Il computer portatile non è stato progettato per un uso prolungato in ambiente di ufficio. Si consiglia pertanto di collegare una tastiera esterna se si desidera usare il computer in ambiente di ufficio per un periodo di tempo prolungato. Interventi sui componenti interni del computer Prima di rimuovere o installare moduli di memoria, schede miniaturizzate PCI o modem, seguire la procedura descritta rispettando la sequenza indicata. AVVISO: l’installazione di moduli di memoria, di un modem o di una scheda miniaturizzata PCI è l’unica operazione che richiede l’accesso all’interno del computer. Uso del computer (cont)Informazioni di sistema 121 AVVISO: per evitare possibili danni alla scheda di sistema, attendere 5 secondi dallo spegnimento del computer prima di scollegare una periferica o rimuovere un modulo di memoria, una scheda miniaturizzata PCI o un modem dalla scheda di sistema. 1 Arrestare il sistema e spegnere tutte le periferiche collegate. 2 Scollegare il computer e le periferiche dalle prese elettriche per ridurre i rischi di lesioni personali o scariche elettriche. Scollegare dal computer eventuali linee telefoniche o altre linee di telecomunicazione. 3 Rimuovere la batteria principale dal relativo alloggiamento e, se presente, la batteria aggiuntiva dall’alloggiamento dei moduli. 4 Scaricare a terra l’elettricità statica del corpo toccando qualsiasi superficie metallica non verniciata sul retro del computer. Durante l’intervento toccare periodicamente la superficie metallica non verniciata per scaricare l’elettricità statica eventualmente accumulata che potrebbe danneggiare i componenti interni. Protezione dalle scariche elettrostatiche L’elettricità statica può danneggiare i componenti elettronici del computer. Per evitare possibili danni, scaricare l’elettricità statica dal corpo prima di toccare un componente elettronico del computer, ad esempio un modulo di memoria. A tale scopo è sufficiente toccare una superficie metallica non verniciata sul retro del computer. Mentre si lavora sui componenti interni del computer, toccare periodicamente una superficie metallica non verniciata sul retro del computer per scaricare l’eventuale carica elettrostatica accumulata dal proprio corpo. Per evitare danni causati dalle scariche elettrostatiche è inoltre possibile adottare le seguenti precauzioni: • Quando si estrae dalla confezione un componente sensibile alle cariche elettrostatiche, non rimuoverlo dall’involucro antistatico fino al momento dell’installazione. Prima di aprire l’involucro antistatico, accertarsi di avere scaricato l’elettricità statica dal corpo. • Prima di trasportare un componente sensibile alle cariche elettrostatiche, riporlo in un contenitore o involucro antistatico. • Maneggiare tutti i componenti sensibili in un’area priva di energia elettrostatica. Se possibile, usare tappeti antistatici per il pavimento e il banco di lavoro. Uso del computer (cont)122 Informazioni di sistema www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com Ricerca di informazioni relative al computer Smaltimento della batteria Il computer usa una pila agli ioni di litio. Per informazioni sulla sostituzione della batteria agli ioni di litio del computer, vedere “Rimozione della batteria” di seguito all’interno del presente documento e “Informazioni sull’uso della batteria” nella Guida dell’utente in linea. Non gettare la batteria insieme ai rifiuti domestici. Per informazioni sul più vicino centro di raccolta di batterie esaurite, contattare i responsabili del servizio smaltimento rifiuti di zona. Uso del computer (cont) Tipo di informazioni Dove cercare • Un programma di diagnostica per il computer • Driver per il computer • Documentazione per il computer • Documentazione per le periferiche CD Drivers and Utilities (noto anche come ResourceCD) La documentazione e i driver sono già installati sul computer al momento della consegna. È possibile usare il CD per reinstallare i driver, eseguire Dell Diagnostics o accedere alla documentazione. I file Leggimi inclusi nel CD forniscono gli aggiornamenti più recenti relativi a modifiche tecniche del computer o materiale tecnico di riferimento avanzato destinato agli utenti più esperti. • Procedure di configurazione del computer • Informazioni sulla garanzia • Istruzioni di sicurezza Informazioni di sistema DellInformazioni di sistema 123 • Codice di servizio espresso e numero di servizio • Etichetta della licenza di Microsoft® Windows® Etichetta del codice di servizio espresso e del numero di identificazione del prodotto Queste etichette sono situate sul computer. • Driver più recenti per il computer • Risposte a domande di supporto tecnico e di assistenza • Discussioni in linea con altri utenti ed esperti del supporto tecnico • Documentazione per il computer Sito Web del supporto tecnico di Dell: support.dell.com Il sito Web del supporto tecnico di Dell fornisce diversi strumenti in linea quali: • Soluzioni: consigli e suggerimenti relativi alla risoluzione dei problemi, articoli tecnici e corsi in linea • Forum clienti: discussione in linea con altri clienti Dell • Aggiornamenti: informazioni di aggiornamento per componenti quali memoria, dico rigido e sistema operativo • Servizio clienti: informazioni di contatto, sullo stato dell’ordine, sulla garanzia e sulle riparazioni • Scaricamento di file: driver, patch e aggiornamenti del software • Riferimenti: documentazione per il computer, specifiche dei prodotti e white paper • Procedure di rimozione e sostituzione di componenti • Informazioni sulle specifiche tecniche • Procedure di configurazione delle impostazioni di sistema • Procedure di risoluzione dei problemi Guida dell’utente Guida in linea e supporto tecnico di Windows 1 Fare clic sul pulsante Start, quindi scegliere Guida in linea e supporto tecnico. 2Fare clic su Guide dell’utente e di sistema, quindi fare clic su Guide dell’utente. Microsoft Windows 2000 Fare doppio clic sull’icona Guida dell’utente sul desktop. Tipo di informazioni Dove cercare124 Informazioni di sistema www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com • Uso di Windows XP • Documentazione per il computer • Documentazione per periferiche (ad esempio per modem) Guida in linea e supporto tecnico di Windows 1 Fare clic sul pulsante Start, quindi scegliere Guida in linea e supporto tecnico. 2 Digitare una parola o una frase che descriva il problema, quindi fare clic sull’icona a forma di freccia. 3 Fare clic sull’argomento che descrive il problema. 4 Seguire le istruzioni visualizzate. • Procedure di reinstallazione del sistema operativo CD del sistema operativo Dopo aver reinstallato il sistema operativo mediante il CD del sistema operativo, usare il CD Drivers and Utilities per reinstallare i driver richiesti dalle periferiche fornite con il computer. Il numero di identificazione del prodotto per il sistema operativo è riportato sul computer. Tipo di informazioni Dove cercare oInformazioni di sistema 125 Installazione del computer ATTENZIONE: prima di eseguire le procedure descritte in questa sezione, seguire le istruzioni di sicurezza riportate all’inizio del presente documento. 1 Rimuovere gli accessori dalla scatola. 2 Mettere da parte gli oggetti contenuti nella scatola degli accessori che serviranno per completare la configurazione del computer. La scatola degli accessori contiene inoltre la documentazione per l’utente ed eventuale altro software o dispositivi hardware opzionali ordinati, quali schede PC Card, unità o batterie. 3 Collegare l’adattatore c.a. al relativo connettore sul computer e a una presa elettrica.126 Informazioni di sistema www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com 4 Sollevare lo schermo del computer e premere il pulsante di accensione per accendere il computer. NOTA: non collegare il computer alla periferica di alloggiamento finché il computer non è stato accesso e spento almeno una volta. Pulsante di accensioneInformazioni di sistema 127 Informazioni sul computer Vista frontale Schermo Touchpad Pulsante di accensione Tastiera Indicatori di stato della tastiera Indicatori di stato del computer Altoparlanti Pulsanti del touchpad Fermo di chiusura dello schermo128 Informazioni di sistema www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com Vista sinistra Vista destra Slot per schede PC Card Sensore a infrarossi Connettori audio (2) Slot per cavo di sicurezza Prese d’aria (2) Slot per cavo di sicurezza Alloggiamento dei moduli Fermo di chiusura della perifericaInformazioni di sistema 129 Retro del computer AVVISO: per evitare danni al computer, attendere 5 secondi dallo spegnimento del computer prima di scollegare una periferica esterna. ATTENZIONE: non ostruire le prese d’aria, non introdurvi oggetti e non lasciare che vi si accumuli dentro della polvere. Non riporre il computer in un ambiente con insufficiente aerazione, ad esempio una valigetta chiusa, durante il funzionamento, in quanto ciò potrebbe provocare incendi o il danneggiamento del computer. Connettori USB (2) Connettore S-Video di uscita TV Connettore del modem (RJ-11) (opzionale) Connettore di rete (RJ-45) Connettore video Connettore della porta parallela Connettore della porta seriale Connettore adattatore c.a. Prese d’aria130 Informazioni di sistema www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com Vista inferiore Ventola Fermo di chiusura dell’alloggiamento della batteria Indicatore del livello di carica della batteria Batteria Coperchio della baia dei moduli di memoria Disco rigido Coperchio della scheda miniaturizzata PCI Slot per periferica di alloggiamento Foro della vite della perifericaInformazioni di sistema 131 Rimozione della batteria Per ulteriori informazioni sulla rimozione della batteria aggiuntiva, vedere Uso dell’alloggiamento dei moduli nella Guida dell’utente in linea. ATTENZIONE: prima di eseguire queste procedure, spegnere il computer, scollegarlo dalla presa elettrica e scollegare il modem dallo spinotto a muro della linea telefonica. AVVISO: se si desidera sostituire la batteria con il computer in modalità di attesa, sono disponibili al massimo 90 secondi per completare l’operazione prima che il computer si spenga, perdendo tutti i dati in memoria non salvati. 1 Assicurarsi che il computer sia spento e scollegato dalla presa elettrica e che il modem sia scollegato dallo spinotto a muro della linea telefonica. 2 Se il computer è collegato a (inserito in) una periferica di alloggiamento, è necessario disinserirlo. Per istruzioni, consultare la documentazione fornita con la periferica di alloggiamento. 3 Fare scorrere e trattenere il fermo di chiusura dell’alloggiamento della batteria situato sotto il computer, quindi estrarre la batteria dall’alloggiamento.132 Informazioni di sistema www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com Installazione e rimozione della pila di riserva 1 Rimuovere la batteria. 2 Rimuovere il coperchio della pila di riserva. 3 Estrarre la pila di riserva dall’alloggiamento e scollegare il cavo dal connettore. Pila di riserva Connettore Cavo della pila di riservaInformazioni di sistema 133 4 Collegare il cavo della pila di riserva al connettore nell’alloggiamento della pila di riserva. 5 Sistemare la pila di riserva nell’alloggiamento e riporre il coperchio della pila di riserva. Installazione della batteria Fare scorrere la batteria nell’alloggiamento fino a quando il fermo di chiusura scatta in posizione. Per ulteriori informazioni sull’installazione della batteria aggiuntiva, vedere Uso dell’alloggiamento dei moduli nella Guida dell’utente in linea. Esecuzione del programma Dell Diagnostics Il programma Dell Diagnostics è installato in una partizione nascosta del disco rigido riservata allo strumento di diagnostica. NOTA: se sullo schermo del computer non viene visualizzata alcuna immagine, contattare Dell (vedere la sezione “Assistenza” della Guida dell’utente per ottenere i recapiti appropriati). 1 Arrestare il sistema. 2 Se il computer è collegato a (inserito in) una periferica di alloggiamento, è necessario disinserirlo. Per istruzioni, consultare la documentazione fornita con la periferica di alloggiamento.134 Informazioni di sistema www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com 3 Collegare il computer a una presa elettrica. 4 Accendere il computer. Quando viene visualizzato il logo di DELL™, premere immediatamente. NOTA: se viene visualizzato un messaggio che indica che la partizione dello strumento di diagnostica non è stata trovata, eseguire il programma Dell Diagnostics dal CD Drivers and Utilities. Se si attende troppo a lungo e viene visualizzato il logo di Microsoft® Windows®, attendere la visualizzazione del desktop di Windows. Arrestare quindi il sistema e riprovare. 5 Quando viene visualizzato l’elenco delle unità di avvio, evidenziare Diagnostics e premere . Verrà eseguito il ciclo di verifica del sistema pre-avvio, ovvero una serie di prove diagnostiche incorporate per il controllo iniziale della scheda di sistema, della tastiera, del disco rigido e dello schermo. • Durante il ciclo di verifica, rispondere alle domande visualizzate. • Se viene rilevato un errore, il computer si arresta e viene visualizzato un messaggio di errore. Per interrompere il ciclo di verifica e riavviare il sistema operativo, premere ; per passare alla prova successiva, premere ; per ripetere il controllo del componente che non ha superato la prova, premere . • Se durante il ciclo di verifica del sistema pre-avvio vengono rilevati errori, annotare i codici di errore e contattare Dell (vedere la sezione “Assistenza” della Guida dell’utente per ottenere i recapiti appropriati) prima di procedere all’esecuzione del programma Dell Diagnostics. Se il ciclo di verifica del sistema pre-avvio è stato completato correttamente, verrà visualizzato il messaggio Booting Dell Diagnostic Utility Partition. Press any key to continue (avvio della partizione dello strumento di diagnostica Dell in corso. Premere un tasto per continuare). 6 Premere un tasto per avviare il programma Dell Diagnostics dalla partizione dello strumento di diagnostica sul disco rigido.Informazioni di sistema 135 7 Al termine del caricamento di Dell Diagnostics, quando viene visualizzato lo schermo Main Menu (menu principale) fare clic sull’opzione desiderata. 8 Se viene riscontrato un problema durante la prova, verrà visualizzato un messaggio contenente il codice di errore e la descrizione del problema. Annotare il codice di errore e la descrizione del problema e seguire le istruzioni visualizzate. Se non è possibile risolvere la condizione di errore, contattare Dell (vedere la sezione “Assistenza” della Guida dell’utente per ottenere i recapiti appropriati). NOTA: il numero di servizio del computer viene visualizzato nella barra del titolo di ciascuno schermo. Opzione Funzione Express Test Esegue una prova veloce delle periferiche. L’esecuzione di questa prova richiede in genere da 10 a 20 minuti e non richiede interazione da parte dell’utente. Eseguire Express Test come prima prova per determinare il problema nel più breve tempo possibile. Extended Test Esegue una verifica approfondita delle periferiche. L’esecuzione di questa prova richiede in genere almeno 1 ora e l’utente dovrà rispondere periodicamente a delle domande. Custom Test Esegue la verifica di una periferica specifica. È possibile personalizzare le prove che si desidera eseguire. Symptom Tree Elenca i sintomi più comuni riscontrati e consente di selezionare una prova in base al sintomo del problema riscontrato.136 Informazioni di sistema www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com 9 Se si esegue una prova usando l’opzione Custom Test (test personalizzato) o Symptom Tree (elenco sintomi), selezionare la scheda corrispondente descritta nella seguente tabella per ulteriori informazioni. 10 Al termine della prova, chiudere lo schermo corrente per tornare allo schermo Main Menu. Per uscire da Dell Diagnostics e riavviare il computer, chiudere lo schermo Main Menu. Scheda Funzione Results Visualizza i risultati della prova e le eventuali condizioni di errore riscontrate. Errors Visualizza le condizioni di errore riscontrate, i codici di errore e la descrizione del problema. Help Descrive la prova e può contenere informazioni sui requisiti per l’esecuzione della prova. Configuration Visualizza la configurazione hardware della periferica selezionata. Le informazioni di configurazione di tutte le periferiche visualizzate in Dell Diagnostics sono derivate dal programma di configurazione del sistema, dalla memoria e da varie prove interne e vengono visualizzate nell’elenco delle periferiche disponibile nel riquadro sinistro dello schermo. Nell’elenco delle periferiche potrebbero non essere elencati i nomi di tutti i componenti installati sul computer o di tutte le periferiche collegate al computer. Parameters Consente di personalizzare la prova modificandone le impostazioni.Informazioni di sistema 137 Avvisi sulle normative Con interferenza elettromagnetica (EMI) si indica un qualsiasi segnale o emissione, irradiato nello spazio o trasmesso tramite cavi di alimentazione o di segnale, che può compromettere il funzionamento di dispositivi di navigazione radio o servizi di sicurezza di altro tipo, o che in modo significativo disturba, attenua o interrompe ripetutamente un servizio di radiocomunicazione a norma di legge. I servizi di radiocomunicazione comprendono, in via esemplificativa, trasmissioni commerciali AM/FM, televisione, servizi cellulari, radar, controllo del traffico aereo, cercapersone e servizi personali di comunicazione (PCS). Tali servizi a norma di legge, unitamente alle emissioni involontarie provenienti da dispositivi digitali quali i computer, contribuiscono alla formazione dell’ambiente elettromagnetico. La compatibilità elettromagnetica (EMC) è la capacità dei dispositivi elettronici di operare contemporaneamente in modo corretto nell’ambiente elettromagnetico. Nonostante questo computer sia stato progettato per rispettare i limiti EMI dell’autorità normativa e tale compatibilità sia stata verificata, non vi è alcuna garanzia che non si verifichino interferenze in una particolare situazione. Qualora la presente apparecchiatura provocasse interferenze con servizi di radiocomunicazione, verificabili accendendo e spegnendo l’apparecchiatura, si consiglia di cercare di rimediare all’inconveniente mediante una o più delle seguenti misure. • Cambiare l’orientamento dell’antenna di ricezione. • Cambiare l’orientamento del computer rispetto all’apparecchio ricevente. • Allontanare il computer dall’apparecchio ricevente. • Collegare il computer a una presa di corrente diversa, in modo che il computer e l’apparecchio ricevente si trovino su diverse sezioni del circuito elettrico. Se necessario, per ottenere ulteriori consigli, consultare un rappresentante del supporto tecnico di Dell o un tecnico radio/TV specializzato. Per ulteriori informazioni sulle normative, vedere “Avvisi sulle normative” nell’appendice della Guida dell’utente in linea. Le diverse sezioni per ciascuna autorità normativa fornisce informazioni EMC/EMI o sulla sicurezza del prodotto relative a un paese.138 Informazioni di sistema www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.comwww.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com Dell™ Latitude™ D500 Manual de informações do sistema Modelo PP05LNotas, avisos e cuidados NOTA: indica informações importantes que o ajudam a utilizar melhor o computador. AVISO: indica uma situação que pode provocar danos no hardware ou perda de dados e indica como evitar o problema. CUIDADO: indica uma situação que pode provocar danos materiais, lesões corporais ou mesmo morte. Abreviaturas e acrónimos Para obter uma lista completa de abreviaturas e acrónimos, consulte o Manual do utilizador (dependendo do sistema operativo, faça duplo clique no ícone Manual do utilizador no ambiente de trabalho ou clique no botão Iniciar, clique em Centro de ajuda e suporte e, em seguida, clique em Manuais do utilizador e do sistema). Caso tenha adquirido um computador Dell™ n Series, todas as referências feitas neste documento ao sistema operativo Microsoft® Windows® não serão aplicáveis. ____________________ As informações contidas neste documento estão sujeitas a alterações sem aviso prévio. © 2003 Dell Computer Corporation. Todos os direitos reservados. Qualquer tipo de reprodução sem autorização por escrito da Dell Computer Corporation é expressamente proibida. Marcas comerciais utilizadas neste texto: Dell, o logótipo DELL, TrueMobile, Inspiron, Dell Precision, Dimension, OptiPlex e Latitude são marcas comerciais da Dell Computer Corporation; Intel, Pentium e Celeron são marcas registadas da Intel Corporation; Microsoft e Windows são marcas registadas da Microsoft Corporation; EMC é uma marca registada da EMC Corporation. Podem ser utilizadas neste documento outras marcas comerciais ou nomes de marcas para referir as entidades que reivindicam a titularidade das marcas e dos nomes dos respectivos produtos. A Dell Computer Corporation exclui qualquer responsabilidade relativamente a marcas comerciais e nomes de marcas para além das que possui. Modelo PP05L Fevereiro de 2003 P/N 1Y369 Rev. A00Sumário 141 Sumário CUIDADO: Instruções de segurança . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Geral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Alimentação . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Bateria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Viagens de avião . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Instruções de EMC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Utilização do computador . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Hábitos computacionais ergonómicos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Manusear componentes internos do computador . . . . . . . . 148 Protecção contra descargas electrostáticas . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Eliminação da bateria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Encontrar informações relacionadas com o computador . . . . . 150 Preparar o computador . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Sobre o computador . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Vista frontal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Vista lateral esquerda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Vista lateral direita . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Vista posterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Vista inferior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Remover uma bateria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Remover e instalar uma bateria de reserva . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Instalar uma bateria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Executar o programa Dell Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Avisos regulamentares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165142 SumárioManual de informações do sistema 143 CUIDADO: Instruções de segurança Siga as directrizes gerais de segurança que se seguem para garantir a sua própria segurança e para proteger o computador e o ambiente de trabalho contra possíveis danos. Geral • Não tente fazer a manutenção do computador sozinho, a menos que seja um técnico de assistência experiente. Siga sempre as instruções de instalação cuidadosamente. • Se utilizar uma extensão de cabo de alimentação com o adaptador CA, certifique-se de que a amperagem total dos produtos ligados à extensão não excede a potência nominal em amperes da mesma. • Não introduza objectos nas saídas de ar ou aberturas do computador. Este procedimento pode provocar um incêndio ou choque eléctrico em consequência de curto-circuitos em componentes internos. • Não guarde o computador num ambiente com pouca circulação de ar, tal como uma mala de transporte ou um mala fechada, enquanto o computador estiver ligado. Limitar a circulação de ar pode danificar o computador ou provocar um incêndio. • Mantenha o computador afastado de radiadores e de fontes de calor. Além disso, não bloqueie as saídas de arrefecimento. Evite colocar papéis soltos por baixo do computador; não coloque o computador num compartimento fechado ou sobre uma cama, sofá ou tapete. • Coloque o adaptador CA numa área ventilada, tal como uma mesa ou no chão, quando o utilizar para ligar o computador ou carregar a bateria. Não cubra o adaptador CA com papéis ou outros objectos que diminuam o arrefecimento; além disso, não utilize o adaptador CA numa mala de transporte. • O adaptador CA poderá aquecer durante o funcionamento normal do computador. Tenha cuidado ao manusear o adaptador durante ou imediatamente a seguir ao funcionamento deste. • Não trabalhe com o computador portátil colocado directamente sobre a pele (como, por exemplo, sobre as pernas) por períodos prolongados. A temperatura de superfície da base aumentará durante o funcionamento normal (em particular quando o tipo de alimentação for CA). O contacto directo com a pele por um período prolongado pode provocar mal-estar ou mesmo queimaduras. • Não utilize o computador em ambientes húmidos como, por exemplo, próximo de banheiras, lava-loiças, piscinas ou ainda em caves húmidas.144 Manual de informações do sistema www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com • Se o computador tiver um modem integrado ou opcional (PC Card), desligue o cabo do modem durante tempestades com descargas eléctricas para evitar o risco remoto de choque eléctrico devido à passagem de raios pela linha telefónica. • Para evitar o risco potencial de choque eléctrico, não ligue ou desligue cabos, nem faça a manutenção ou reconfiguração deste produto durante tempestades com descargas eléctricas. Não utilize o computador durante tempestades com descargas eléctricas, a menos que todos os cabos tenham sido desligados e que o computador esteja a funcionar com alimentação fornecida pela bateria. • Se o computador tiver um modem, o cabo utilizado com o modem deve ser fabricado com um tamanho de fio mínimo de 26 AWG (American Wire Gauge) e uma ficha modular RJ-11 compatível com as normas FCC. • Antes de abrir a tampa do módulo de memória/placa Mini PCI/modem na parte inferior do computador, desligue todos os cabos das tomadas eléctricas e o cabo telefónico. • Se o computador tiver um conector RJ-11 de modem e um conector RJ-45 de rede, de aspecto semelhante, certifique-se de que introduz o cabo telefónico no conector RJ-11 e não no conector RJ-45. • As placas PC Card podem ficar muito quentes durante o funcionamento normal. Tenha cuidado ao removê-las após um funcionamento contínuo. • Antes de limpar o computador, desligue-o da tomada eléctrica. Limpe o computador com um pano macio, humedecido com água. Não utilize produtos de limpeza líquidos ou em aerossol, uma vez que esses produtos podem conter substâncias inflamáveis. Alimentação • Utilize apenas o adaptador CA fornecido pela Dell e aprovado para utilização com este computador. A utilização de outro adaptador CA pode provocar um incêndio ou uma explosão. • Antes de ligar o computador a uma tomada eléctrica, verifique a tensão nominal do adaptador CA para se certificar de que a frequência e a tensão solicitadas correspondem à fonte de alimentação disponível. • Para desligar o computador de todas as fontes de alimentação, desligue o computador, desligue o adaptador CA da tomada eléctrica e retire a bateria instalada no compartimento da bateria ou no compartimento de módulos. CUIDADO: Instruções de segurança (continuação)Manual de informações do sistema 145 • Para evitar a possibilidade de choque eléctrico, ligue o adaptador CA e os cabos de alimentação dos dispositivos a fontes de alimentação com ligação à terra. Esses cabos de alimentação podem estar equipados com fichas de três pinos por forma a possibilitar uma ligação à terra. Não utilize adaptadores nem remova o pino de terra da ficha do cabo de alimentação. Se utilizar uma extensão de alimentação, utilize o tipo correcto – dois pinos ou três pinos – correspondente ao cabo de alimentação do adaptador CA. • Certifique-se de que nada se encontra sobre o cabo de alimentação do adaptador CA e de que o cabo não se encontra em locais em que possa ser pisado ou em que provoque quedas. • Se estiver a utilizar uma extensão com várias tomadas, tenha cuidado ao ligar o cabo de alimentação do adaptador CA à extensão. Algumas extensões podem permitir que a ficha seja inserida incorrectamente. Se a ficha de alimentação for inserida incorrectamente, o computador poderá sofrer danos permanentes e haverá o risco de choque eléctrico e/ou incêndio. Certifique-se de que o pino de terra da ficha de alimentação está inserido no contacto de terra correspondente da extensão de alimentação. Bateria • Utilize apenas módulos de bateria Dell™ aprovados para utilização neste computador. A utilização de outros tipos de baterias pode aumentar o risco de incêndio ou explosão. • Não transporte baterias no bolso, na mala ou noutros locais em que objectos metálicos (como as chaves de carro ou clipes) possam provocar um curto-circuito nos terminais das baterias. O fluxo de corrente excessiva resultante pode provocar temperaturas extremamente altas e provocar danos na bateria, incêndio ou queimaduras. • Quando manuseada de forma incorrecta, a bateria representa um risco de queimaduras. Não desmonte a bateria. Manuseie com muito cuidado baterias danificadas ou com fugas. Se a bateria estiver danificada, poderá ocorrer a fuga de electrólitos das células, o que poderá provocar lesões corporais. • Mantenha a bateria longe de crianças. • Não guarde nem deixe o computador ou a bateria perto de uma fonte de calor, como radiadores, lareiras, fornos, aquecedores eléctricos ou quaisquer outros electrodomésticos geradores de calor, nem os exponha de alguma forma a temperaturas superiores a 60°C (140°F). Quando expostas a temperaturas excessivas, as baterias podem explodir ou apresentar fugas, o que representa um risco de incêndio. • Não queime a bateria do computador nem a deite fora com o lixo doméstico. As baterias podem explodir. Elimine as baterias usadas de acordo com as instruções do fabricante ou contacte uma empresa local de recolha de lixo para obter mais instruções sobre como o fazer. Elimine imediatamente baterias gastas ou danificadas. CUIDADO: Instruções de segurança (continuação)146 Manual de informações do sistema www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com Viagens de avião • O funcionamento do computador Dell™ a bordo de aviões pode estar sujeito às leis do país em questão ou a restrições específicas das companhias aéreas. Por exemplo, essas leis ou restrições podem proibir a utilização de qualquer dispositivo electrónico pessoal (PED) que possa transmitir intencionalmente frequências de rádio ou outros sinais electromagnéticos a bordo de um avião. – Para melhor cumprir todas essas restrições, se o computador portátil Dell estiver equipado com o Dell TrueMobile™ ou qualquer outro dispositivo de comunicações sem fios, desactive esse dispositivo antes de embarcar e siga todas as instruções fornecidas pela tripulação em relação a esse dispositivo. – Além disso, a utilização de qualquer PED, tal como um computador portátil, pode ser proibida em aviões durante períodos críticos do voo como, por exemplo, ao levantar voo ou ao aterrar. Algumas companhias aéreas podem definir como período crítico do voo qualquer momento em que o avião esteja abaixo de 3.050 m (10.000 pés). Siga as instruções específicas da companhia aérea para saber em que altura é permitida a utilização de um PED. Instruções de EMC Utilize cabos de sinal blindados para garantir que é mantida a classificação apropriada de EMC para o ambiente específico. Para impressoras paralelas, existe disponível um cabo da Dell. Se preferir, encomende um cabo da Dell no Web site internacional em www.dell.com. A electricidade estática pode danificar os componentes electrónicos no interior do computador. Para evitar danos de estática, descarregue a electricidade estática do seu corpo antes de tocar em qualquer componente electrónico do computador, tal como o módulo de memória. Pode fazê-lo tocando numa superfície de metal não pintada no painel de entrada/saída do computador. CUIDADO: Instruções de segurança (continuação)Manual de informações do sistema 147 Utilização do computador Siga as instruções de manuseamento seguro que se seguem para evitar danos no computador: • Ao preparar o computador para trabalhar, coloque-o sobre uma superfície plana. • Ao viajar, não despache o computador como bagagem. O computador pode passar por uma máquina de raios X, mas nunca por um detector de metais. Se levar o computador como bagagem de mão, certifique-se de que tem uma bateria carregada disponível para o caso de lhe ser pedido que o ligue. • Ao viajar com a unidade de disco rígido separada do computador, embale-a em material não condutor, tal como tecido ou papel. Se transportar a unidade como bagagem de mão, esteja preparado para a instalar no computador. A unidade de disco rígido pode passar por uma máquina de raios X, mas nunca por um detector de metais. • Ao viajar, não coloque o computador em compartimentos de bagagem suspensos, onde possa deslizar. Não deixe o computador cair nem o submeta a outros impactos mecânicos. • Proteja o computador, a bateria e a unidade de disco rígido de riscos ambientais, tais como sujidade, pó, alimentos, líquidos, temperaturas extremas e exposição excessiva a raios solares. • Quando transportar o computador entre ambientes com níveis de temperatura e/ou humidade muito diferentes, é possível que se forme condensação sobre ou dentro do computador. Para não danificar o computador, deixe que a humidade se evapore antes de o utilizar. AVISO: Ao transportar o computador de condições de baixas temperaturas para um ambiente mais quente ou de condições de temperaturas elevadas para um ambiente mais frio, aguarde que o computador se adapte à temperatura ambiente antes de o ligar. • Ao desligar um cabo, puxe pelo respectivo conector ou o anel de alívio de tensão e não pelo próprio cabo. Ao remover o conector, mantenha-o alinhado para não danificar os pinos. Além disso, antes de ligar um cabo, certifique-se de que ambos os conectores estão orientados e alinhados correctamente. • Manuseie os componentes com cuidado. Segure um componente, como um módulo de memória, pelas extremidades e não pelos pinos. • Antes de remover um módulo de memória da placa do sistema ou de desligar um dispositivo do computador, desligue o computador e o cabo do adaptador CA, retire a bateria instalada no compartimento da bateria ou no compartimento de módulos e aguarde 5 segundos antes de prosseguir para evitar possíveis danos na placa do sistema.148 Manual de informações do sistema www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com • Limpe o ecrã com um pano macio e limpo e água. Aplique a água no pano e, depois, passe-o sobre o ecrã numa única direcção, em movimentos de cima para baixo. Remova rapidamente a humidade do ecrã e mantenha-o seco. A exposição prolongada à humidade pode danificar o ecrã. Não utilize um limpa-vidros comercial para limpar o ecrã. • Se molhar ou danificar o computador, siga os procedimentos descritos na secção "Resolução de problemas" do Manual do utilizador. Se depois de efectuar estes procedimentos verificar que o computador não funciona correctamente, contacte a Dell (consulte "Obter ajuda" no Manual do utilizador para obter as informações de contacto adequadas). Hábitos computacionais ergonómicos CUIDADO: A utilização incorrecta ou prolongada do teclado pode provocar lesões. CUIDADO: Olhar para o visor ou para o ecrã do monitor externo por períodos prolongados pode resultar em cansaço visual. Para maior conforto e eficácia, respeite as directrizes de ergonomia do apêndice do Manual do utilizador online quando instalar e utilizar o computador. Este computador portátil não foi concebido para funcionamento contínuo como equipamento de escritório. Para utilização alargada num escritório, recomenda-se a ligação de um teclado externo. Manusear componentes internos do computador Antes de remover ou instalar módulos de memória, placas Mini PCI ou modems, siga estes passos na sequência indicada. AVISO: A única altura em que deverá aceder ao interior do computador será quando instalar módulos de memória, uma placa Mini PCI ou um modem. AVISO: Aguarde 5 segundos depois de desligar o computador para desligar um dispositivo ou remover um módulo de memória, placa Mini PCI ou modem para evitar possíveis danos na placa do sistema. 1 Encerre o computador e desligue os dispositivos ligados. 2 Desligue o computador e os dispositivos das tomadas eléctricas para reduzir a possibilidade de choques ou lesões corporais. Além disso, desligue quaisquer linhas telefónicas ou de telecomunicações do computador. 3 Retire a bateria principal do compartimento da bateria e, caso seja necessário, retire a segunda bateria do compartimento de módulos. Utilização do computador (continuação)Manual de informações do sistema 149 4 Elimine a electricidade estática do seu corpo tocando numa superfície de metal não pintada na parte posterior do computador. Quando estiver a trabalhar, toque periodicamente na superfície não pintada para dissipar electricidade estática que possa danificar os componentes internos. Protecção contra descargas electrostáticas A electricidade estática pode danificar os componentes electrónicos no interior do computador. Para evitar danos de estática, descarregue a electricidade estática do seu corpo antes de tocar em qualquer componente electrónico do computador, tal como o módulo de memória. Pode fazê-lo tocando numa superfície de metal não pintada na parte posterior do computador. Quando estiver a manusear componentes internos do computador, toque periodicamente numa superfície não pintada na parte posterior do computador para dissipar electricidade estática que possa ter acumulado. Também pode efectuar os seguintes passos para evitar danos decorrentes de uma descarga electrostática (ESD): • Ao desembalar um componente sensível a estática, não retire o componente da embalagem antiestática enquanto não estiver preparado para o instalar. Antes de retirar a embalagem antiestática, descarregue a electricidade estática do corpo. • Ao transportar um componente sensível, comece por colocá-lo num recipiente ou numa embalagem antiestática. • Manuseie todos os componentes sensíveis numa área protegida contra estática. Se possível, utilize passadeiras e protecções de secretária antiestática. Eliminação da bateria O computador utiliza uma bateria de iões de lítio. Para obter instruções sobre como substituir a bateria de iões de lítio do computador, consulte a secção "Remover uma bateria" mais adiante neste artigo e a secção "Utilizar uma bateria" no Manual do utilizador online. Não elimine a bateria juntamente com lixo doméstico. Contacte a empresa local de recolha de lixo para obter o endereço do depósito de baterias mais próximo. Utilização do computador (continuação)150 Manual de informações do sistema www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com Encontrar informações relacionadas com o computador O que procura? Encontre aqui • Um programa de diagnóstico para o computador • Controladores para o computador • Documentação do computador • Documentação do dispositivo CD de controladores e utilitários (também conhecido por ResourceCD) A documentação e os controladores já estão instalados no computador quando este é enviado pela Dell. Pode utilizar o CD para reinstalar os controladores, executar o programa Dell Diagnostics ou aceder à documentação. Podem existir ficheiros Readme no CD para fornecer actualizações de última hora relativas a alterações técnicas efectuadas no computador ou documentação técnica de referência avançada para utilizadores ou técnicos experientes. • Como configurar o computador • Informações de garantia • Instruções de segurança Manual de informações do sistema Dell • Código de serviço expresso e etiqueta de serviço • Etiqueta de licença do Microsoft® Windows® Código de serviço expresso e etiqueta da chave do produto Estas etiquetas encontram-se no computador.Manual de informações do sistema 151 • Controladores mais recentes para o computador • Respostas a questões sobre assistência técnica e suporte • Debates online com outros utilizadores e o suporte técnico • Documentação para o computador Website de suporte da Dell — support.dell.com O Web site de suporte da Dell fornece várias ferramentas online, incluindo: • Soluções — Sugestões e truques para a resolução de problemas, artigos de técnicos e cursos online • Fórum da comunidade — Debate online com outros clientes da Dell • Actualizações — Informações de actualização para componentes como, por exemplo, memória, unidade de disco rígido e sistema operativo • Assistência ao cliente — Informações de contacto, estado de encomendas, garantias e informações sobre reparações • Transferências — Controladores, patches e actualizações de software • Referência — Documentação do computador, especificações do produto e documentação técnica • Como remover e substituir peças • Como obter especificações técnicas • Como configurar definições do sistema • Como detectar e resolver problemas Manual do utilizador Centro de ajuda e suporte do Windows 1 Clique no botão Iniciar e clique em Ajuda e suporte. 2 Clique em Manuais do utilizador e do sistema e em Manuais do utilizador. Microsoft Windows 2000 Faça duplo clique no ícone Manuais do utilizador no ambiente de trabalho. • Como utilizar o Windows XP • Documentação para o computador • Documentação para dispositivos (como um modem) Centro de ajuda e suporte do Windows 1 Clique no botão Iniciar e clique em Ajuda e suporte. 2Escreva uma palavra ou frase que descreva o problema e clique no ícone em forma de seta. 3 Clique no tópico que descreve o problema. 4 Siga as instruções apresentadas no ecrã. O que procura? Encontre aqui152 Manual de informações do sistema www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com Preparar o computador CUIDADO: Antes de iniciar os procedimentos desta secção, siga as instruções de segurança constantes no início deste documento. 1 Desembale a caixa de acessórios. 2 Separe o conteúdo da caixa de acessórios, necessário para concluir a instalação do computador. A caixa de acessórios também contém documentação do utilizador e todo o software ou hardware adicional (como placas PC Card, unidades ou baterias) que tenha sido encomendado. • Como reinstalar o sistema operativo CD do sistema operativo Depois de reinstalar o sistema operativo com o CD do sistema operativo, utilize o CD de controladores e utilitários para reinstalar os controladores dos dispositivos fornecidos com o computador. A chave de produto do sistema operativo está localizada no computador. O que procura? Encontre aqui ouManual de informações do sistema 153 3 Ligue o adaptador CA ao respectivo conector no computador e à tomada eléctrica. 4 Abra o ecrã do computador e prima o botão de alimentação para ligar o computador. NOTA: Não ligue o computador ao dispositivo de ancoragem sem que o computador ter sido ligado e encerrado, pelo menos, uma vez. botão de alimentação154 Manual de informações do sistema www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com Sobre o computador Vista frontal ecrã touch pad botão de alimentação teclado luzes de estado do teclado luzes de estado do dispositivo altifalantes botões do touch pad fecho do ecrãManual de informações do sistema 155 Vista lateral esquerda Vista lateral direita ranhura de PC Card sensor de infravermelhos conectores de áudio (2) ranhura do cabo de segurança saídas de ar (2) ranhura do cabo de segurança compartimento de módulos patilha de libertação do dispositivo156 Manual de informações do sistema www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com Vista posterior AVISO: Para evitar danos no computador, aguarde cinco segundos após desligar o computador antes de desligar um dispositivo externo. CUIDADO: Não bloqueie, não introduza objectos nem deixe que se acumule pó nas saídas de ar. Não guarde o computador num ambiente com pouca circulação de ar, tal como uma mala fechada, enquanto estiver em funcionamento. Limitar a circulação de ar pode danificar o computador ou provocar um incêndio. conectores USB (2) conector de saída para TV e S Vídeo conector de modem (RJ-11) (opcional) conector de rede (RJ-45) conector de vídeo conector paralelo conector série conector do adaptador CA saídas de arManual de informações do sistema 157 Vista inferior ventoinha patilha de libertação do compartimento da bateria indicador de carga da bateria bateria tampa do módulo de memória disco rígido tampa da placa Mini PCI ranhura do dispositivo de ancoragem ranhura do parafuso do dispositivo158 Manual de informações do sistema www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com Remover uma bateria Para obter mais informações sobre como remover a segunda bateria, consulte a secção "Utilizar o compartimento de módulos" do Manual do utilizador online. CUIDADO: Antes de efectuar estes procedimentos, desligue o computador, retire a respectiva ficha da tomada eléctrica e desligue o modem da tomada do telefone. AVISO: Se optar por substituir a bateria com o computador no modo de suspensão, dispõe de um máximo de 90 segundos para concluir a substituição antes de o computador ser encerrado e perder dados não guardados. 1 Certifique-se de que o computador está desligado, de que a respectiva ficha foi retirada da tomada eléctrica e de que foi desligado da tomada telefónica. 2 Se o computador estiver ligado a um dispositivo de ancoragem (ancorado), desancore-o. Consulte a documentação fornecida com o dispositivo de ancoragem para obter instruções. 3 Deslize e segure a patilha de libertação do compartimento da bateria, na parte inferior do computador, e remova a bateria do compartimento.Manual de informações do sistema 159 Remover e instalar uma bateria de reserva 1 Remova a bateria. 2 Remova a tampa da bateria de reserva.160 Manual de informações do sistema www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com 3 Retire a bateria de reserva do respectivo compartimento e desligue o cabo do computador. 4 Ligue o cabo da bateria de reserva ao conector no compartimento da bateria de reserva. bateria de reserva conector cabo da bateria de reservaManual de informações do sistema 161 5 Coloque a bateria de reserva no compartimento e volte a colocar a tampa da bateria de reserva. Instalar uma bateria Deslize a bateria para dentro do compartimento até ouvir um clique do fecho. Para obter mais informações sobre como instalar a segunda bateria, consulte a secção "Utilizar o compartimento de módulos" Manual do utilizador online.162 Manual de informações do sistema www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com Executar o programa Dell Diagnostics O programa Dell Diagnostics está localizado numa partição oculta do utilitário Diagnostics da unidade de disco rígido. NOTA: Se o computador não conseguir apresentar uma imagem no ecrã, contacte a Dell (consulte "Obter ajuda" no Manual do utilizador para obter as informações de contacto apropriadas). 1 Encerre o computador. 2 Se o computador estiver ligado a um dispositivo de ancoragem (ancorado), desancore-o. Consulte a documentação fornecida com o dispositivo de ancoragem para obter instruções. 3 Ligue o computador a uma tomada eléctrica. 4 Ligue o computador. Quando o logótipo DELL™ for apresentado, prima imediatamente. NOTA: Se receber uma mensagem que indique que não foi encontrada nenhuma partição do utilitário de diagnóstico, execute o programa Dell Diagnostics a partir do CD de controladores e utilitários. Se esperar demasiado tempo e o logótipo Microsoft® Windows® for apresentado, espere até visualizar o ambiente de trabalho do Windows. Em seguida, encerre o computador e volte a tentar. 5 Quando a lista de arranque de dispositivos for apresentada, realce Diagnostics e prima . O computador começa a executar o Pre-boot System Assessment, uma série de diagnósticos incorporados que efectuam os testes iniciais na placa de sistema, teclado, disco rígido e ecrã. • Durante a avaliação, responda às perguntas que forem apresentadas. • Se for detectada uma falha, o computador pára e será apresentada uma mensagem de erro. Para parar a avaliação e reiniciar o sistema operativo, prima ; para avançar para o teste seguinte, prima ; para voltar a testar o componente que falhou, prima . • Se forem detectadas falhas durante o Pre-boot System Assessment, tome nota do(s) código(s) de erro e contacte a Dell (consulte "Obter ajuda" no Manual do utilizador para obter as informações de contacto apropriadas) antes de avançar para o programa Dell Diagnostics. Se o Pre-boot System Assessment for concluído com êxito, receberá a mensagem Booting Dell Diagnostic Utility Partition. Press any key to continue.Manual de informações do sistema 163 6 Prima qualquer tecla para iniciar o Dell Diagnostics a partir da partição do utilitário Diagnostics do disco rígido. 7 Depois de o programa Dell Diagnostics ser carregado e de o ecrã Main Menu ser apresentado, clique no botão da opção pretendida. 8 Se for encontrado um problema no decorrer de um teste, será apresentada uma mensagem com a indicação do código de erro e uma descrição do problema. Anote o código de erro e a descrição do problema e siga as instruções apresentadas no ecrã. Se não conseguir resolver a condição de erro, contacte a Dell (consulte "Obter ajuda" no Manual do utilizador para obter as informações de contacto apropriadas). NOTA: A etiqueta de serviço do computador está localizada na barra de título de cada ecrã. Opção Função Express Test Efectua um teste rápido dos dispositivos. Normalmente, o teste demora entre 10 e 20 minutos e não necessita da intervenção do utilizador. Execute o Express Test em primeiro lugar para aumentar a probabilidade de detectar o problema rapidamente. Extended Test Efectua uma verificação exaustiva dos dispositivos. Regra geral, este teste demora 1 hora ou mais e requer que o utilizador responda a perguntas periodicamente. Custom Test Testa um dispositivo específico. Pode personalizar os testes a executar. Symptom Tree Apresenta uma lista dos sintomas mais comuns encontrados e permite seleccionar um teste com base no sintoma do problema existente.164 Manual de informações do sistema www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com 9 Se executar um teste da opção Custom Test ou Symptom Tree, clique no separador aplicável descrito na tabela que se segue para mais informações. 10 Quando os testes estiverem concluídos, feche o ecrã de teste para regressar ao ecrã Main Menu. Para sair do programa Dell Diagnostics e reiniciar o computador, feche o ecrã Main Menu. Separador Função Results Apresenta os resultados do teste e as condições de erro encontradas. Errors Apresenta as condições de erro encontradas, os códigos de erro e a descrição dos problemas. Help Descreve o teste e pode indicar requisitos para a execução do mesmo. Configuration Apresenta a configuração de hardware do dispositivo seleccionado. O programa Dell Diagnostics obtém as informações de configuração de todos os dispositivos a partir do programa de configuração do sistema, da memória e de vários testes internos, apresentando as informações na lista de dispositivos, no painel do lado esquerdo do ecrã. A lista de dispositivos poderá não apresentar os nomes de todos os componentes instalados no computador nem de todos os dispositivos ligados ao computador. Parameters Permite personalizar o teste mediante a alteração das definições do mesmo.Manual de informações do sistema 165 Avisos regulamentares Interferência electromagnética (EMI) é qualquer sinal ou emissão, irradiada em espaço livre ou transmitida através de condutores de alimentação ou de sinais, que coloque em risco o funcionamento de um serviço de navegação de rádio ou outro serviço de segurança, ou que prejudique seriamente, obstrua ou interrompa repetidamente um serviço licenciado de comunicação de rádio. Os serviços de comunicação de rádio incluem, mas não se limitam a, difusão comercial de AM/FM, televisão, serviços de telefone celular, radar, controlo de tráfego aéreo, pager e serviços de comunicações pessoais (PCS). Esses serviços licenciados, juntamente com irradiadores involuntários como dispositivos digitais, incluindo computadores, contribuem para o ambiente electromagnético. Compatibilidade electromagnética (EMC) é a capacidade que os componentes de um equipamento electrónico têm de funcionar correctamente em conjunto no ambiente electrónico. Embora este computador tenha sido concebido e considerado em conformidade com os limites estabelecidos pelos órgãos de regulamentação para EMI, não existem garantias de que não ocorrerão interferências numa instalação específica. Se o equipamento provocar interferências nos serviços de comunicações de rádio, o que pode ser determinado ligando e desligando o equipamento, experimente corrigir a interferência através de uma ou mais das seguintes medidas: • Reorientar a antena receptora. • Deslocar o computador em relação ao receptor. • Afastar o computador do receptor. • Ligar o computador a outra tomada, de modo que o computador e o receptor fiquem em circuitos de derivação diferentes. Se necessário, contacte um representante do suporte técnico da Dell ou um técnico experiente de rádio/televisão para obter outras sugestões. Para obter informações regulamentares adicionais, consulte "Avisos regulamentares" no apêndice do Manual do utilizador online. As secções específicas de cada agência reguladora fornecem informações de segurança de produtos ou de EMC/EMI específicas de cada país.166 Manual de informações do sistema www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.comwww.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com Dell™ Latitude™ D500 Guía de información del sistema Modelo PP05LNotas, avisos y precauciones NOTA: Una NOTA proporciona información importante que le ayuda a utilizar su equipo de la mejor manera posible. AVISO: Un AVISO indica un posible daño en el hardware o la pérdida de datos y le explica cómo evitar el problema. PRECAUCIÓN: Una PRECAUCIÓN indica un posible daño material, lesión corporal o muerte. Abreviaturas y acrónimos Para obtener una lista completa de abreviaturas y acrónimos, consulte la Guía del usuario (dependiendo del sistema operativo, haga doble clic en el icono User’s Guide [Guía del usuario] en el escritorio, o haga doble clic en el botón Start [Inicio], en Help and Support Center [Centro de Ayuda y soporte técnico] y, por último, en User and system guides [Guías del usuario y del sistema]). Si ha adquirido un equipo Dell™ de la serie n, las referencias al sistema operativo Microsoft® Windows® que aparezcan en este documento no tendrán aplicación. ____________________ La información contenida en este documento puede modificarse sin aviso previo. © 2003 Dell Computer Corporation. Quedan reservados todos los derechos. Queda estrictamente prohibida la reproducción de este documento por cualquier medio sin la autorización por escrito de Dell Computer Corporation. Marcas comerciales utilizadas en este texto: Dell, el logotipo de DELL, TrueMobile, Inspiron, Dell Precision, Dimension, OptiPlex y Latitude son marcas comerciales de Dell Computer Corporation; Intel, Pentium y Celeron son marcas comerciales registradas de Intel Corporation; Microsoft y Windows son marcas comerciales registradas de Microsoft Corporation; EMC es una marca comercial registrada de EMC Corporation. En este documento se pueden utilizar otras marcas y otros nombres comerciales para hacer referencia a las entidades que los poseen o a sus productos. Dell Computer Corporation renuncia a cualquier interés sobre la propiedad de marcas y nombres comerciales que no sean los suyos. Modelo PP05L Febrero de 2003 N/P 1Y369 Rev. A00Contenido 169 Contenido PRECAUCIÓN: instrucciones de seguridad . . . . . . . . . . . 171 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Alimentación . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Batería . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Viajes en avión . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Instrucciones EMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Cuando utilice el equipo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Hábitos ergonómicos cuando utilice el equipo . . . . . . . . . 176 Al trabajar en el interior de su equipo . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Protección contra descargas electrostáticas . . . . . . . . . . 177 Cómo desechar las baterías . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Búsqueda de información para el equipo . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Configuración del equipo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Acerca del equipo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Vista anterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Vista izquierda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Vista derecha . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Vista posterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Vista inferior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Extracción de una batería . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Extraer e instalar la batería de reserva . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Instalación de la batería . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Ejecución de los Diagnósticos Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Avisos sobre regulación . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193170 ContenidoGuía de información del sistema 171 PRECAUCIÓN: instrucciones de seguridad Utilice las siguientes pautas de seguridad para garantizar su propia seguridad personal así como la protección de su equipo y del entorno de trabajo ante posibles daños. General • No intente reparar el equipo usted mismo a menos que sea un técnico de mantenimiento cualificado. Siga fielmente las instrucciones de instalación en todo momento. • Si utiliza un cable alargador con el adaptador de corriente alterna, asegúrese de que el porcentaje total de amperios de los productos enchufados al alargador no exceden el amperaje de éste. • No inserte ningún objeto en las rejillas o aberturas de ventilación del equipo. Si lo hace y hubiera un cortocircuito en los componentes internos, se podría ocasionar un incendio o una descarga eléctrica. • No guarde el equipo en un entorno con poca circulación de aire, como un maletín o una cartera cerrada, mientras esté encendido. Si se restringe la circulación de aire se puede dañar el equipo o provocar un incendio. • Mantenga alejado el equipo de radiadores u otras fuentes de calor. Asimismo, no bloquee las rejillas de ventilación. Evite poner papeles bajo el equipo; no coloque el equipo en una unidad encastrada en la pared ni sobre una cama, un sofá o una alfombra. • Cuando utilice el adaptador de CA para suministrar alimentación al equipo o cargar la batería, sitúelo en un área ventilada, por ejemplo en un escritorio o en el suelo. No cubra el adaptador de CA con papeles u otros objetos que reduzcan la refrigeración; tampoco utilice el adaptador de CA dentro de un maletín. • Es posible que el adaptador de CA se caliente durante el funcionamiento normal del equipo. Tenga cuidado al tocar el adaptador mientras esté funcionando o inmediatamente después de que haya acabado de funcionar. • No utilice el equipo portátil con la base asentada en contacto directo con la piel durante largos períodos de tiempo. La temperatura de la superficie de la base aumentará durante el funcionamiento normal (sobre todo si se utiliza corriente alterna). El contacto continuado con la piel puede provocar malestar o, en algún caso, quemaduras. • No utilice el equipo en un entorno húmedo, por ejemplo, cerca de un baño, lavabo, fregadero, piscina o en una superficie mojada. • Si el equipo incluye un módem integrado u opcional (de tarjeta PC), desconecte el cable del módem cuando se aproxime una tormenta eléctrica para evitar el riesgo improbable de una descarga eléctrica producida por los rayos a través de la línea telefónica.172 Guía de información del sistema www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com • Si el equipo incluye un módem integrado u opcional (de tarjeta PC), desconecte el cable del módem cuando se aproxime una tormenta eléctrica para evitar el riesgo improbable de una descarga eléctrica producida por los rayos a través de la línea telefónica. • Para evitar el peligro potencial de sufrir una descarga eléctrica, no conecte ni desconecte ningún cable ni realice el mantenimiento o la reconfiguración de este producto en el transcurso de una tormenta eléctrica. No utilice el equipo durante una tormenta eléctrica a menos que todos los cables hayan sido desconectados previamente y el equipo funcione con la alimentación de la batería. • Si el equipo incluye un módem, el cable utilizado con el módem debe poseer un grosor mínimo de 26 AWG (American Wire Gauge, Calibre de cable americano) y un enchufe modular RJ-11 que cumpla el estándar FCC (Federal Communications Comisión, Comisión federal de comunicaciones). • Antes de abrir la cubierta del módulo de memoria, minitarjeta PCI o módem de la parte inferior del equipo, desconecte todos los cables de sus enchufes eléctricos y también el cable del teléfono. • Si el equipo dispone de un conector de módem RJ-11 y de un conector de red RJ-45, que parecen iguales, asegúrese de insertar el cable del teléfono en el conector RJ-11, no en el conector RJ-45. • Las tarjetas PC pueden calentarse mucho durante el funcionamiento normal. Tenga cuidado al quitar las tarjetas PC después de un funcionamiento continuado. • Antes de limpiar el equipo, desconéctelo del enchufe eléctrico. Limpie el equipo con un paño suave humedecido en agua. No utilice ningún líquido limpiador o aerosol que pudiera contener sustancias inflamables. Alimentación • Utilice siempre el adaptador de CA proporcionado por Dell que se ha aprobado para su uso con este equipo. El uso de otro tipo de adaptador de CA podría implicar un riesgo de incendio o explosión. • Antes de conectar el equipo a un enchufe eléctrico, asegúrese de que el tipo de voltaje y la frecuencia del adaptador de CA coinciden con los de la fuente de energía disponible. • Para desconectar el equipo de todas las fuentes de energía, apáguelo, desconecte el adaptador de CA del enchufe eléctrico y extraiga las baterías instaladas en el compartimiento para baterías o en el compartimiento modular. PRECAUCIÓN: instrucciones de seguridad (continuación)Guía de información del sistema 173 • Para evitar descargas eléctricas, enchufe el adaptador de CA y los cables de alimentación de los dispositivos a fuentes de energía con toma de tierra. Estos cables de alimentación pueden incluir enchufes con tres clavijas para proporcionar la conexión de toma de tierra. No utilice adaptadores ni retire la clavija de toma de tierra del enchufe del cable de alimentación. Si usa un cable alargador, elija el tipo apropiado, de 2 o 3 clavijas, compatible con el cable de alimentación del adaptador de CA. • Asegúrese de que no haya nada sobre el cable de alimentación del adaptador de CA y de que éste no esté en un sitio donde se pueda pisar o sea fácil tropezar con él. • Si utiliza una caja de contactos con varios enchufes, proceda con precaución al conectar en ella el cable de alimentación del adaptador de CA. Algunas cajas de contactos permiten realizar conexiones erróneas. La conexión incorrecta del enchufe podría provocar daños irreparables en el equipo, además del riesgo de sufrir una descarga eléctrica u ocasionar un incendio. Asegúrese de que la clavija de toma de tierra del enchufe de alimentación está insertada en la conexión de toma de tierra de la caja de contactos. Batería • Use solamente módulos de batería de Dell™ que estén aprobados para utilizarse con este equipo. El uso de otro tipo de baterías podría aumentar el riesgo de incendio o explosión. • No lleve paquetes de baterías en el bolsillo, bolso u otro contenedor en el que los objetos de metal (como las llaves del coche o clips sujetapapeles) puedan producir un cortocircuito en los terminales de la batería. El flujo excesivo de corriente resultante podría provocar temperaturas extremadamente altas y, como consecuencia, daños a la batería, incendios o quemaduras. • La batería puede causar quemaduras si se utiliza indebidamente. No la desmonte. Tenga mucho cuidado con las baterías dañadas o que goteen. Si la batería está dañada, el electrolito podría filtrarse a través de los acumuladores y causar lesiones. • Manténgala fuera del alcance de los niños. • No almacene ni deje el equipo o la batería cerca de una fuente de calor como un radiador, una chimenea, una estufa, un calentador eléctrico u otro tipo de generador de calor ni los exponga en ningún caso a temperaturas superiores a 60º C (140º F). Al alcanzar una temperatura excesiva, los acumuladores de la batería podrían explotar o incluso quemarse. • No deseche la batería del equipo echándola al fuego o mezclándola con los desperdicios domésticos. Los acumuladores de la batería podrían explotar. Deseche las baterías agotadas de acuerdo con las instrucciones del fabricante o póngase en contacto con el servicio local de eliminación de residuos con el fin de obtener instrucciones de desecho. Deshágase de una batería agotada o dañada lo antes posible. PRECAUCIÓN: instrucciones de seguridad (continuación)174 Guía de información del sistema www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com Viajes en avión • Puede que haya algunas regulaciones de Federal Aviation Administration (Administración federal de aviación) o regulaciones específicas de las líneas aéreas que sean aplicables al funcionamiento de su equipo Dell cuando se encuentre a bordo de una aeronave. Por ejemplo, dichas regulaciones y restricciones podrían prohibir el uso de dispositivos electrónicos personales (PED, Personal Electronic Device) que tengan la capacidad de realizar transmisiones intencionadas mediante radiofrecuencia u otro tipo de señales electromagnéticas dentro de la aeronave. – Para cumplir mejor estas restricciones, si su equipo portátil Dell dispone de Dell TrueMobile™ o algún otro tipo de dispositivo de comunicación inalámbrica, debe desactivar este dispositivo antes de embarcar en la aeronave y seguir todas las instrucciones proporcionadas por el personal de la aerolínea respecto al dispositivo. – Asimismo, el uso de dispositivos electrónicos personales, como son los equipos portátiles, podría restringirse durante ciertas fases críticas del vuelo en una aeronave, por ejemplo, durante el despegue o el aterrizaje. Algunas aerolíneas podrían incluir dentro de las fases críticas del vuelo aquellas en las que la aeronave se encuentre por debajo de los 3.050 m (10.000 pies). Siga las instrucciones específicas de la aerolínea sobre el momento de poder utilizar los dispositivos electrónicos personales. Instrucciones EMC La utilización de cables de señales blindados garantiza que se mantiene la clasificación EMC apropiada para el entorno para el que se han diseñado. En el caso de las impresoras en paralelo, existen cables de Dell disponibles. Si lo prefiere, puede solicitar un cable a Dell en su sitio Web en la dirección www.dell.com. La electricidad estática puede dañar los componentes electrónicos que hay en el interior del equipo. Para evitar daños por descargas electrostáticas, descargue la electricidad estática de su cuerpo antes de tocar cualquiera de los componentes electrónicos del sistema (por ejemplo, un módulo de memoria). Con este fin, toque una superficie metálica no pintada en el panel de entrada/salida del equipo. PRECAUCIÓN: instrucciones de seguridad (continuación)Guía de información del sistema 175 Cuando utilice el equipo Observe las siguientes pautas de seguridad para evitar daños en el equipo: • Cuando prepare el equipo para trabajar, colóquelo en una superficie plana. • Cuando viaje, no facture el equipo como equipaje. Puede pasar el equipo por una máquina de rayos X, pero nunca por un detector de metales. Si le inspeccionan el equipo manualmente, asegúrese de que tiene una batería cargada disponible en caso de que le soliciten que lo encienda. • Cuando viaje con la unidad de disco duro extraída del equipo, envuélvala en un material no conductor, como tela o papel. Si le inspeccionan la unidad manualmente, esté preparado para instalarla en el equipo. Puede pasar la unidad de disco duro por una máquina de rayos X, pero nunca por un detector de metales. • Cuando viaje, no coloque el equipo en los compartimientos superiores, donde podría deslizarse. Procure que el equipo no se caiga ni lo someta a ningún otro tipo de choque mecánico. • Proteja el equipo, la batería y la unidad de disco duro de los peligros medioambientales como suciedad, polvo, comida, líquidos, temperaturas extremas y sobreexposiciones a la luz solar. • Cuando cambie el equipo de un ambiente a otro con temperatura o humedad muy distintos, puede producirse condensación sobre el equipo o dentro de éste. Para evitar daños en el equipo, deje que transcurra el tiempo suficiente para que se evapore el vaho antes de utilizar el equipo. AVISO: Cuando mueva el equipo de temperaturas bajas a medios más cálidos o de temperaturas muy altas a medios más fríos, espere a que el equipo se adapte a la temperatura ambiente antes de encenderlo. • Cuando desconecte un cable, tire del conector o del protector, no tire directamente del cable. Cuando retire el conector, manténgalo alineado para evitar que se doblen las patas. Además, antes de conectar un cable, asegúrese de que los dos conectores estén orientados y alineados correctamente. • Maneje los componentes con cuidado. Sujete los componentes, por ejemplo un módulo de memoria, por los bordes, no por las patillas. • Cuando vaya a retirar un módulo de memoria de la placa base o a desconectar un dispositivo del equipo, apague el equipo, desconecte el cable adaptador de CA, quite cualquier batería instalada en el compartimiento para baterías o en el compartimiento modular y espere 5 segundos antes de continuar para evitar un posible daño en la placa base.176 Guía de información del sistema www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com • Limpie la pantalla con un paño suave humedecido en agua. Aplique el agua al paño y, después, pase éste por la pantalla en una sola dirección, de arriba abajo. Quite el vaho de la pantalla rápidamente y, a continuación, séquela. Una exposición prolongada al vaho puede dañar la pantalla. No use limpiacristales comerciales para limpiar la pantalla. • Si su equipo se moja o queda dañado, siga los procedimientos descritos en la sección “Solución de problemas” de la Guía del usuario. Si después de seguir estos procedimientos, llega a la conclusión de que su equipo no funciona de manera adecuada, póngase en contacto con Dell (consulte “Obtención de ayuda” en la Guía del usuario para conseguir la información de contacto adecuada). Hábitos ergonómicos cuando utilice el equipo PRECAUCIÓN: El uso inadecuado o prolongado del teclado puede ser nocivo. PRECAUCIÓN: La visualización de la pantalla del monitor durante largos periodos de tiempo puede producir fatiga visual. Por comodidad y eficacia, observe las pautas ergonómicas que se indican en el Apéndice de la Guía del usuario en línea cuando configure y use el equipo. Se trata de un equipo portátil y no está diseñado para utilizarse de forma continua como equipo de oficina. Si va a utilizarlo con gran frecuencia en una oficina, se recomienda utilizar un teclado externo. Al trabajar en el interior de su equipo Antes de extraer o instalar módulos de memoria, minitarjetas PCI o módems, realice los siguientes pasos en el mismo orden en que se indican. AVISO: La única ocasión en la que deberá acceder al interior del equipo es cuando instale módulos de memoria, un módem o una minitarjeta PCI. AVISO: Apague el equipo y espere 5 segundos antes de desconectar un dispositivo o de retirar un módulo de memoria, una minitarjeta PCI o un módem para evitar posibles daños en la placa base. 1 Apague el equipo y todos los dispositivos conectados. 2 Desconecte el equipo y los dispositivos de los enchufes eléctricos para reducir el peligro potencial de descarga eléctrica o daños a las personas. Además, desconecte cualquier línea telefónica o de telecomunicación del equipo. 3 Retire la batería principal del compartimiento para baterías y, si es necesario, la segunda batería del compartimiento modular. Cuando utilice el equipo (continuación)Guía de información del sistema 177 4 Conéctese a tierra usted mismo por el procedimiento de tocar cualquier superficie metálica sin pintar situada en la parte posterior del equipo. Mientras trabaja, toque periódicamente la superficie metálica sin pintar para disipar la electricidad estática y evitar que se dañen los componentes internos. Protección contra descargas electrostáticas La electricidad estática puede dañar los componentes electrónicos que hay en el interior del equipo. Para evitar daños por descargas electrostáticas, descargue la electricidad estática de su cuerpo antes de tocar cualquiera de los componentes electrónicos del sistema (por ejemplo, un módulo de memoria). Para ello, toque una superficie metálica sin pintar en la parte posterior del mismo. A medida que continúe trabajando en el interior del equipo, toque periódicamente una superficie metálica sin pintar para descargar la energía estática que se haya podido acumular en su cuerpo. Asimismo, puede observar las siguientes medidas para prevenir los posibles daños por descargas electrostáticas (ESD): • Cuando desembale un componente sensible a la electricidad estática, no lo saque del embalaje antiestático hasta que vaya a instalarlo en el equipo. Justo antes de quitar el embalaje antiestático, descargue la electricidad estática de su cuerpo. • Cuando transporte un componente sensible a la electricidad estática, colóquelo en un contenedor o embalaje antiestático. • Manipule todos los componentes sensibles a la electricidad estática en un área libre de ésta. Si es posible, utilice alfombrillas antiestáticas en el suelo y en el banco de trabajo. Cómo desechar las baterías El equipo utiliza una batería de iones de litio. Para obtener instrucciones sobre cómo sustituir la batería de iones de litio en su equipo, consulte “Extracción de una batería” posteriormente en este documento y “Uso de la batería” en la Guía del usuario en línea. No mezcle las baterías con la basura doméstica. Póngase en contacto con el servicio local de eliminación de residuos para obtener la dirección del contenedor de baterías más cercano. Cuando utilice el equipo (continuación)178 Guía de información del sistema www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com Búsqueda de información para el equipo Si busca Aquí lo encontrará • Un programa de diagnóstico para el equipo • Controladores para el equipo • La documentación del equipo • La documentación del dispositivo El CD Drivers and Utilities (Controladores y utilidades) (también conocido como ResourceCD [CD de recursos]) Dell ya ha instalado la documentación y los controladores en el equipo. Puede utilizar el CD para volver a instalar los controladores, ejecutar los Diagnósticos Dell o acceder a la documentación. Los archivos “readme” (léame) pueden estar incluidos en su CD para disponer de actualizaciones de última hora sobre los cambios técnicos del equipo o material de consulta destinado a los técnicos o usuarios avanzados. • Cómo configurar el equipo • Información sobre la garantía • Instrucciones de seguridad Guía de información del sistema de Dell • Código de servicio rápido y etiqueta de servicio • Etiqueta de licencia de Microsoft® Windows® Código de servicio rápido y etiqueta de clave del producto Estas etiquetas se incluyen en el equipo.Guía de información del sistema 179 • Controladores actualizados para el equipo • Respuesta a preguntas relacionadas con la asistencia y el servicio técnico • Conversaciones en línea con otros usuarios y asistencia técnica • Documentación del equipo Sitio Web Dell | Support: support.dell.com El sitio Web Dell | Support proporciona varias herramientas en línea, incluidas: • Soluciones: consejos y sugerencias de solución de problemas, artículos para técnicos y cursos en línea • Community Forum: conversaciones en línea con otros clientes de Dell • Actualizaciones: información de actualización para componentes, como la memoria, unidad de disco duro y el sistema operativo • Atención al cliente: información de contacto, estado de los pedidos, garantía e información de reparación • Descargas: controladores, revisiones y actualizaciones de software • Consulta: documentación del equipo, especificaciones de productos y documentos oficiales • Cómo quitar y sustituir piezas • Cómo obtener especificaciones técnicas • Cómo configurar los valores del sistema • Cómo solucionar problemas Guía del usuario Centro de Ayuda y soporte técnico de Windows 1 Haga clic en Start (Inicio) y, a continuación, en Help and Support (Ayuda y soporte técnico). 2Haga clic en User and system guides (Guías del usuario y del sistema) y en User’s guides (Guías del usuario). En Microsoft Windows 2000 Haga doble clic en el icono de las Guías del usuario en el escritorio. • Procedimientos para utilizar Windows XP • Documentación del equipo • Documentación de dispositivos (por ejemplo un módem) Centro de Ayuda y soporte técnico de Windows 1 Haga clic en Start (Inicio) y, a continuación, en Help and Support (Ayuda y soporte técnico). 2Escriba una palabra o frase que describa el problema y haga clic en el icono de la flecha. 3 Haga clic en el tema que describa el problema. 4 Siga las instrucciones que aparecen en pantalla. Si busca Aquí lo encontrará180 Guía de información del sistema www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com Configuración del equipo PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procesos de esta sección, siga las instrucciones de seguridad del comienzo de este documento. 1 Desempaquete la caja de accesorios. 2 Saque el contenido de la caja de accesorios, que necesitará para completar la configuración del equipo. La caja de accesorios también contiene la documentación del usuario y el software o hardware adicional (como tarjetas PC, unidades o baterías) que haya pedido. • Cómo volver a instalar el sistema operativo CD Operating System (Sistema operativo) Si vuelve a instalar el sistema operativo mediante el CD Operating System (Sistema operativo), use el CD Drivers and Utilities CD (Controladores y utilidades) para volver a instalar los controladores de los dispositivos incluidos en el equipo. La clave del producto del sistema operativo se encuentra en el equipo. Si busca Aquí lo encontrará o Guía de información del sistema 181 3 Enchufe el adaptador de CA al conector correspondiente del equipo y al enchufe eléctrico. 4 Para encender el equipo, abra la pantalla y pulse el botón de encendido. NOTA: No conecte el equipo al dispositivo de acoplamiento hasta que el equipo se haya encendido y apagado por lo menos una vez. botón de encendido182 Guía de información del sistema www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com Acerca del equipo Vista anterior pantalla almohadilla de contacto botón de encendido teclado indicadores de estado del teclado indicadores de estado del dispositivo altavoces botones de la almohadilla de contacto pestillo de la pantallaGuía de información del sistema 183 Vista izquierda Vista derecha ranura para tarjetas PC sensor de infrarrojos conectores de audio (2) ranura para cable de seguridad rejillas de ventilación (2) ranura para cable de seguridad compartimiento modular pestillo de liberación del dispositivo184 Guía de información del sistema www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com Vista posterior AVISO: Para no dañar el equipo, espere 5 segundos después de apagarlo antes de desconectar un dispositivo externo. PRECAUCIÓN: No introduzca objetos, bloquee ni permita que el polvo se acumule en las rejillas de ventilación. No almacene el equipo en un entorno con poca ventilación, como un maletín cerrado, mientras esté en funcionamiento. Si restringe la ventilación, podría dañar el equipo o provocar un incendio. conectores de puerto USB (2) conector de salida de TV S-vídeo conector de módem (RJ-11) (opcional) conector de red (RJ-45) conector de vídeo conector paralelo conector serie conector del adaptador de CA rejillas de ventilaciónGuía de información del sistema 185 Vista inferior ventilador pestillo de liberación del compartimiento para baterías medidor de carga de la batería batería cubierta del módulo de memoria unidad de disco duro cubierta de la minitarjeta PCI ranura para el dispositivo de acoplamiento ranura para el tornillo del dispositivo186 Guía de información del sistema www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com Extracción de una batería Para obtener más información sobre la extracción de la segunda batería, consulte la sección “Uso del compartimiento modular” de la Guía del usuario en línea. PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de realizar estos procedimientos, apague el equipo, desconéctelo del enchufe eléctrico y desenchufe el módem del enchufe telefónico de la pared. AVISO: Si decide sustituir la batería mientras el equipo se encuentra en el modo de espera, tiene 90 segundos para realizar la sustitución antes de que el sistema se cierre y pierda los datos no guardados. 1 Asegúrese de que el equipo está apagado, desconectado del enchufe eléctrico y desconectado del enchufe telefónico de la pared. 2 Si el equipo está conectado (acoplado) a un dispositivo de acoplamiento, desacóplelo. Consulte la documentación incluida con el dispositivo de acoplamiento para obtener instrucciones. 3 Deslice presionando el pestillo de liberación del compartimiento para baterías que se encuentra en la parte inferior del equipo y, a continuación, extraiga la batería del compartimiento.Guía de información del sistema 187 Extraer e instalar la batería de reserva 1 Extraiga la batería. 2 Retire la cubierta de la batería de reserva.188 Guía de información del sistema www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com 3 Tire de la batería de reserva para extraerla de su compartimiento y desconecte el cable del conector. 4 Enchufe el cable de la batería de reserva al conector del compartimiento de la batería de reserva. batería de reserva conector cable de la batería de reservaGuía de información del sistema 189 5 Coloque la batería de reserva en el compartimiento y vuelva a poner la cubierta de la batería de reserva. Instalación de la batería Deslice la batería en el compartimiento hasta que el pestillo de liberación emita un chasquido. Para obtener más información sobre la instalación de la segunda batería, consulte la sección “Uso del compartimiento modular” de la Guía del usuario en línea.190 Guía de información del sistema www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com Ejecución de los Diagnósticos Dell Los Diagnósticos Dell están situados en una partición oculta para la utilidad de diagnóstico de la unidad de disco duro. NOTA: Si el equipo no puede mostrar una imagen en la pantalla, póngase en contacto con Dell (consulte “Obtención de ayuda” en la Guía del usuario para obtener la información de contacto apropiada). 1 Apague el equipo. 2 Si el equipo está conectado (acoplado) a un dispositivo de acoplamiento, desacóplelo. Consulte la documentación incluida con el dispositivo de acoplamiento para obtener instrucciones. 3 Conecte el equipo a un enchufe eléctrico. 4 Encienda el equipo. Cuando aparezca el logotipo de DELL™, presione inmediatamente. NOTA: Si ve un mensaje indicando que no se ha encontrado ninguna partición para la utilidad de diagnóstico, ejecute los Diagnósticos Dell desde el CD Drivers and Utilities (Controladores y utilidades). Si al cabo de bastante tiempo aparece el logotipo de Microsoft® Windows®, siga esperando hasta que aparezca el escritorio de Windows. Entonces, apague el equipo y vuelva a intentarlo. 5 Cuando aparezca la lista de dispositivos de inicio, resalte Diagnostics (Diagnósticos ) y presione . El equipo comenzará a ejecutar la evaluación del sistema previa al inicio, una serie de diagnósticos incorporados que realizan una comprobación inicial de la placa base, el teclado, la unidad de disco duro y la pantalla. • Durante la evaluación, responda a las preguntas que puedan formularse. • Si se detecta algún fallo, el equipo se detiene y muestra un mensaje de error. Para detener la evaluación y reiniciar el sistema operativo, presione ; para pasar a la prueba siguiente, presione ; para volver a probar el componente que falló, presione .Guía de información del sistema 191 • Si se detectaron fallos durante la evaluación del sistema previa al inicio, anote el código o códigos de error, y póngase en contacto con Dell (consulte “Obtención de ayuda” en la Guía del usuario para obtener la información de contacto apropiada) antes de continuar con los Diagnósticos Dell. Si la evaluación del sistema previa al inicio se realiza correctamente, aparecerá el mensaje Booting Dell Diagnostic Utility Partition (Iniciando la partición para la utilidad de diagnóstico de Dell). Presione cualquier tecla para continuar. 6 Presione cualquier tecla para iniciar los Diagnósticos Dell desde la partición para la utilidad de diagnóstico del disco duro. 7 Después de cargar los Diagnósticos Dell y aparecer la pantalla Main Menu (Menú principal), haga clic en el botón de la opción que desee. 8 Si se encuentra un problema durante una prueba, aparece un mensaje que indica el código de error y una descripción del problema. Anote el código de error y la descripción del problema, y siga las instrucciones de la pantalla. Si no puede resolver la condición del error, póngase en contacto con Dell (consulte “Obtención de ayuda” en la Guía del usuario para obtener la información de contacto apropiada). NOTA: La etiqueta de servicio del equipo se encuentra en la barra de título de cada pantalla. Opción Función Express Test (Prueba rápida) Realiza una prueba rápida de los dispositivos. La prueba dura normalmente de 10 a 20 minutos y no requiere interacción por su parte. Ejecute Express Test (Prueba rápida) primero para aumentar la posibilidad de realizar un seguimiento del problema rápidamente. Extended Test (Prueba extendida) Realiza una prueba completa de los dispositivos. La prueba dura normalmente una hora o más, y requiere que responda a unas preguntas periódicamente. Custom Test (Prueba personalizada) Prueba un dispositivo específico. Puede personalizar las pruebas que desee ejecutar. Symptom Tree (Árbol de síntomas) Enumera los síntomas más comunes encontrados y permite seleccionar una prueba basándose en el síntoma del problema que sufra.192 Guía de información del sistema www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com 9 Si ejecuta una prueba desde la opción Custom Test (Prueba personalizada) o Symptom Tree (Árbol de síntomas), haga clic en la ficha correspondiente que se describe en la siguiente tabla para obtener más información. 10 Cuando hayan terminado las pruebas, cierre la pantalla de la prueba para volver a la pantalla Main Menu (Menú principal). Para salir de los Diagnósticos Dell y reiniciar el equipo, cierre la pantalla Main Menu (Menú principal). Ficha Función Resultados Muestra el resultado de la prueba y las condiciones de error encontradas. Errors (Errores) Muestra las condiciones de error encontradas, los códigos de error y la descripción del problema. Help (Ayuda) Describe la prueba y puede indicar los requisitos para ejecutarla. Configuración Muestra la configuración de hardware del dispositivo seleccionado. Los Diagnósticos Dell obtienen información de la configuración de todos los dispositivos a partir del programa Configuración del sistema, la memoria y varias pruebas internas, y la muestran en la lista de dispositivos del panel izquierdo de la pantalla. La lista de dispositivos puede que no muestre los nombres de todos los componentes instalados en el equipo o de todos los dispositivos conectados al equipo. Parámetros Permite personalizar la prueba cambiando su configuración.Guía de información del sistema 193 Avisos sobre regulación Una interferencia electromagnética (EMI, Electromagnetic Interference) es cualquier señal o emisión, radiada en el espacio o conducida a través de un cable de alimentación o señal, que pone en peligro el funcionamiento de la navegación por radio u otro servicio de seguridad, o degrada seriamente, obstruye o interrumpe de forma repetida un servicio de comunicaciones por radio autorizado. Los servicios de radiocomunicaciones incluyen, entre otros, emisoras comerciales de AM/FM, televisión, servicios de telefonía móvil, radar, control de tráfico aéreo, localizadores y servicios de comunicación personal (PCS, Personal Communication Services). Estos servicios autorizados, junto con emisores no intencionados como dispositivos digitales, incluidos los equipos informáticos, contribuyen al entorno electromagnético. La compatibilidad electromagnética (EMC, Electromagnetic Compatibility) es la capacidad de los componentes del equipo electrónico de funcionar juntos correctamente en el entorno electrónico. Aunque este equipo se ha diseñado y ajustado para cumplir los límites de emisión electromagnética establecidos por la agencia reguladora, no existe ninguna garantía de que no ocurran interferencias en una instalación en particular. Si este equipo provoca interferencias con servicios de comunicaciones por radio, lo que se puede determinar apagándolo y encendiéndolo, intente corregir dichas interferencias adoptando una o varias de las medidas siguientes: • Cambie la orientación de la antena de recepción. • Vuelva a ubicar el equipo con respecto al receptor. • Separe el equipo del receptor. • Conecte el equipo a un enchufe diferente de forma que el equipo y el receptor se encuentren en ramas diferentes del circuito. Si es necesario, consulte a un representante del servicio de asistencia técnica de Dell o a un técnico experimentado de radio o televisión para obtener consejos adicionales. Para obtener información adicional de normativas, consulte “Avisos sobre regulación” en el Apéndice de la Guía del usuario en línea. En las secciones específicas de cada agencia reguladora se proporciona la información de EMC/EMI o de seguridad del producto específica de cada país.194 Guía de información del sistema www.dell.com | support.euro.dell.comwww.dell.com | support.euro.dell.com Printed in Ireland. Gedrukt in Ierland. Imprimé en Irlande. Gedruckt in Irland. Stampato in Irlanda. Impresso na Irlanda. Impreso en Irlanda. 01Y369A00 Dell™ Latitude™ CPx H-Series/J-Series User's Guide Preface Introduction Setup and Operation Powering Your Computer Intel SpeedStep Options Traveling With Your Computer Drivers Customizing Your Computer Removing and Replacing Parts Troubleshooting Your Computer Technical Specifications Getting Help Information in this document is subject to change without notice. © 1999 – 2000 Dell Computer Corporation. All rights reserved. Reproduction in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Computer Corporation is strictly forbidden. Trademarks used in this text: Dell, Latitude, Dimension, Inspiron, Optiplex, ExpressCharge, HyperCool, and DellWare are trademarks of Dell Computer Corporation; Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, and MS-DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation; Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks and SpeedStep is trademark of Intel Corporation. As an ENERGY STAR partner, Dell Computer Corporation has determined that this product meets the ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency. Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell Computer Corporation disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own. This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Model PPX Initial release: 15 Nov 1999 Last revised: 28 Aug 2000Back to Contents Page Preface: Dell™ Latitude™ CPx H-Series/J-Series User's Guide About This Guide Notational Conventions Warranty and Return Policy Information Typographical Conventions Other Documents You May Need About This Guide This guide is intended for anyone who uses the Dell Latitude CPx H-Series/J-Series portable computers. It can be used by both first-time and experienced computer users who want to learn about the features of the computer. This guide also provides basic troubleshooting procedures and instructions for using the Dell Diagnostics to test your computer and its components. The sections are summarized as follows: "Introduction" — overview of the computer features and available upgrades "Setup and Operation" — instructions on operating your computer "Powering Your Computer" — instructions and options on how to power your computer "Traveling With Your Computer" — suggestions on how to travel safely with your computer "Drivers" — instructions on how to install driver software on your computer "Customizing Your Computer" — instructions on accessing the System Setup program, power management software, and the Suspend-to-Disk utility, all of which allow you to change system settings affecting your computer's power conservation features "Removing and Replacing Parts" — instructions on how to remove and install hard-disk drives and memory modules "Troubleshooting Your Computer" — initial checks and procedures that can be used to solve basic computer problems, general guidelines on analyzing software problems, messages, and beep codes "Technical Specifications" — reference material about the details of your computer "Getting Help" — help tools Dell provides to assist you if you have a problem with the computer and explains how and when to call Dell for technical assistance Warranty and Return Policy Information Dell Computer Corporation ("Dell") manufactures its hardware products from parts and components that are new or equivalent to new in accordance with industry-standard practices. For information about the Dell warranty and return policy, see the System Information guide that came with your computer.Other Documents You May Need Besides this User's Guide, the following documentation is included with your computer: NOTE: Documentation updates are sometimes included with your computer to describe changes to your computer or software. Always read these updates before consulting any other documentation because the updates contain the latest information. An operating system Setup Guide, which describes how to set up the operating system installed on your Dell computer. Operating system documentation is included if you ordered your operating system from Dell. This documentation describes how to configure and use your operating system software. Documentation is included with any options you purchase separately from your computer. This documentation includes information that you need to configure and install these options in your Dell computer. "Readme" files may be installed on your hard-disk drive to provide last-minute updates about technical changes to your computer or advanced technical reference material intended for experienced users or technicians. Notational Conventions The following subsections list notational conventions used in this document. Notes, Notices, and Cautions Throughout this guide, blocks of text may be accompanied by an icon and printed in bold type or in italic type. These blocks are notes, notices, and cautions, and they are used as follows: NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your computer. NOTICE: A NOTICE indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. Typographical Conventions The following list defines (where appropriate) and illustrates typographical conventions used as visual cues for specific elements of text throughout this document: Interface components are window titles, button and icon names, menu names and selections, and other options that appear on the monitor screen or display. They are presented in bold.Example: Click OK. Keycaps, the labeling that appears on the keys on a keyboard, are enclosed in angle brackets. Example: Key combinations are series of keys to be pressed simultaneously (unless otherwise indicated) to perform a single function. Example: Commands presented in lowercase bold are for reference purposes only and are not intended to be typed at that particular point in the discussion. Example: "Use the setup command to . . . ." In contrast, commands presented in the Courier New font are intended to be typed as part of an instruction. Example: "Type format to format the diskette in drive A." Filenames and directory names are presented in lowercase bold. Examples: autoexec.bat and c:\windows Syntax lines consist of a command and all its possible parameters. Commands are displayed in lowercase bold; variable parameters (those for which you substitute a value) are displayed in lowercase italics; constant parameters are displayed in lowercase bold. The brackets indicate items that are optional. Example: del [drive:] [[path]filename] [/p] Command lines consist of a command and may include one or more of the command's possible parameters. Command lines are presented in the Courier New font. Example: del c:\myfile.doc Screen text is text that appears on the screen of your display or external monitor. It can be a system message, for example, or it can be text that you are instructed to type as part of a command (referred to as a command line). Screen text is presented in the Courier New font. Example: The following message appears on your screen: No boot device available Variables are symbols for which you substitute a value. They are presented in italics. Example: module n (where n represents the memory module number)Back to Contents PageBack to Contents Page Introduction: Dell™ Latitude™ CPx H-Series/J-Series User's Guide Overview Available Options Features Getting Help Overview The Dell Latitude CPx H-Series/J-Series portable computers are expandable multimedia systems using the latest Intel® Mobile Pentium® technology. In addition, the J-Series supports Intel SpeedStep™ technology. The CPx H-Series/J-Series computers include the Dell DualPoint integrated pointing device, which provides a touch pad and a track stick to control the cursor on the display screen. This section describes the major hardware and software features of your computer. Figure 1 and Figure 2 show the front and back view of the computer, respectively. Figure 1. Front View of the Computer 1 Touch pad 2 Keyboard 3 Track stick 4 Power button 5 Keyboard status LEDs 6 Display 7 Display latch 8 Air intake 9 Internal modem connector (available only on CPt SSeries) 10 S-Video connector 11 Audio jacks (3)12 Integrated microphone 13 Speaker 14 Modular bay 15 DualPoint buttons 16 Battery bay Figure 2. Back View of the Computer 1 Fan 2 Video connector 3 Parallel connector 4 Status indicator panel 5 Docking connector 6 USB connector 7 PS/2 connector 8 Serial connector 9 AC adapter connector 10 Infrared port 11 Security cable slot 12 PC Card slots (2) 13 Hard-disk drive 14 Security cable slot 15 Speaker Features Your Dell computer has the following features: Full multimedia capability through the following standard features: A 14.1-inch extended graphics array (XGA), thin film transistor (TFT) 1024 x 768 active-matrix color display. A CD-ROM drive that can be used in the modular bay. When you unpack your computer, look for the CD-ROM drive in the accessories box of the shipping carton.64-bit hardware-accelerated video support, with 8 megabytes (MB) of video memory. Support for a zoomed video (ZV) PC Card in the lower PC Card connector. For H-Series computers, ESS Maestro 2E audio controller with hardware wavetable support and 3D surround sound. For J-Series computers, ESS Maestro 3I audio controller with software wavetable support and 3D surround sound. Three audio jacks for connecting external speakers or headphones, a microphone, and a record/playback device to your computer. Integrated microphone and two stereo speakers. Accelerated graphics port (AGP) architecture that increases the computer's performance, particularly video performance. An ENERGY STAR® partner, Dell Computer Corporation has determined that this product meets the ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency. A modular bay that supports a DVD-ROM drive, CD-ROM drive, CD-RW drive, diskette drive, second battery, second hard-disk drive, or SuperDisk LS-120 drive module. To make the computer as light as possible when you travel, use the special travel module in the modular bay. NOTE: Your computer was shipped with a diskette drive in the modular bay. For information on removing the diskette drive and installing a different device in the bay, see "Modular Bay." A minimum of 32-MB synchronous dynamic random-access memory (SDRAM) module is standard. You can increase memory up to 512 MB by installing combinations of 32-, 64-, 128-, 192-, or 256-MB SDRAM modules in the two memory module sockets on the system board. NOTE: Your computer is capable of supporting two 256-MB SDRAM modules for a total of 512 MB of memory. Two power conservation modes — suspend mode and suspend-to-disk mode — that help you conserve battery power. If the batteries run out of power, suspend-to-disk mode prevents data loss by copying all system data to the hard-disk drive and turning off the computer. Connectors for two 3.3-volt (V) or 5-V PC Cards. The lower PC Card connector supports ZV PC Cards. NOTE: The PC Card controller supports the CardBus standard for 32-bit data transfer on the PC Card. Hardware and software support for the Dell Latitude C/Port Family Advanced Port Replicator (APR) and the Dell Latitude C/Dock Family Expansion Station. A DualPoint integrated pointing device which includes both a touch pad and a track stick. These pointing devices are positioned for both left- and right-handed users. The track stick is positioned in the keyboard to allow you to move the cursor while keeping your fingers in a typing position. Two sets of left and right buttons, located above and below the touch pad, mimic mouse buttons. You can also perform many pointing functions by tapping the touch pad or the track stick. Click-anddrag buttonless functions are also supported. A lithium ion battery in the battery bay, with support for a second battery in the modular bay. The Dell ExpressCharge™ technology charges a single battery in approximately 1 hour (when the computer is off or in suspend mode). NOTICE: Do not puncture or incinerate the battery. When your battery no longer holds a charge, call your local waste disposal agency or environmental agency for advice on disposing of the computer's lithium ion battery. The lithium ion technology used in the battery is significantly less hazardous to the environment than the lithium metal technology used in some other batteries (such as watch batteries).High-performance parallel and serial ports and a multipurpose Personal System/2 (PS/2) connector for attaching external devices, a monitor connector for attaching an external monitor to your computer, and a Universal Serial Bus (USB) connector that supports stand-alone and hub devices. An infrared port that permits file transfer without the use of cable connections. The port is compatible with the Infrared Data Association (IrDA) Standard 1.1 (Fast IR) and Standard 1.0 (Slow IR) for use with external devices. Dell HyperCool™ an automatic thermal management system that uses a variable-speed fan, microprocessor speed changes, and Intel's Remote Heat Exchanger technology to keep the system running at the optimum temperature. CAUTION: Do not allow your Latitude portable computer to operate with the base resting directly on exposed skin. With extended operation, heat can potentially build up in the base. Allowing sustained contact with the skin could cause discomfort or, eventually, a burn. The following software is included with your Dell computer: The Microsoft® Windows® 95, Windows 98 Second Edition (SE), or Windows NT® 4.0, Windows 2000 or higher operating system is installed on your hard-disk drive. For more information, see your operating system documentation. For Latitude CPx J-Series computers, the Intel SpeedStep technology is installed on your hard-disk drive. The System Setup program lets you view and change the system configuration. For more information, see "Using the System Setup Program." Dell Diagnostics for evaluating the computer's components and devices. NOTE: If Dell did not install an operating system on your hard-disk drive, the drivers, system utilities, and diagnostics are available separately from Dell. To order them, see "Getting Help" for the appropriate telephone number in your location. Available Options As your computing requirements change, you can extend your computer's capabilities with a C/Port Family APR or C/Dock Family Expansion Station. You can also install a hard-disk drive of larger capacity, increase system memory, and add functionality with PC Cards. Dell also offers additional modules that you can install in the modular bay, including a second hard-disk drive, a DVD-ROM drive, a CD-ROM drive, a CD-RW drive, an LS-120 drive module, and a second battery. Dell offers the following devices and upgrade options: C/Port Family APRs and C/Dock Family Expansion Stations Additional batteries External keyboards and a numeric keypad External monitors External pointing devices External speakers, headphones, and microphones Printers Hard-disk drives Second hard-disk drive for the modular bay DVD-ROM drive modules CD-RW drive modules Second CD-ROM drive module SuperDisk LS-120 drive modules AC adapter PC Cards 32-, 64-, 128-, 192-, and 256-MB memory modules Carrying case Instructions for connecting or installing these options are included in the upgrade kit you receive from Dell.Getting Help If at any time you don't understand a procedure described in this guide, or if your computer does not perform as expected, Dell provides a number of tools to help you. For more information on these help tools, see "Getting Help." Back to Contents PageBack to Contents Page Setup and Operation: Dell™ Latitude™ CPx H-Series/J-Series User's Guide AC Adapter PC Cards Batteries Modular Bay CD-ROM, DVD-ROM, and CD-RW Drives DualPoint Integrated Pointing Device Display Securing Your Computer Diskette Drive Connecting External Devices Keyboard I/O Connectors Back to Contents PageBack to Contents Page Powering Your Computer: Dell™ Latitude™ CPx H-Series/J-Series User's Guide AC Adapter Power Management Settings Batteries Back to Contents PageBack to Contents Page Intel® SpeedStep™ Options: Dell™ Latitude™ CPx H-Series/JSeries User's Guide Using Intel SpeedStep Using the Adjust Properties Option Setting the Advanced Options Using Intel SpeedStep The Intel SpeedStep technology, included with the Latitude CPx J-Series, allows you to set the performance level of the processor whether the computer is running on battery or AC power. To access the Intel SpeedStep properties window, perform the following steps: 1. Right click the flag icon in the system tray on the Windows® taskbar to access further performance level options. The following three options appear: Maximum Performance option — switches your computer to the highest possible performance level even if the computer is running on battery Battery Optimized Performance option — lets your computer run on performance level optimized for battery power even if the computer is connected to an electrical outlet Adjust Properties — lets you change the more performance options 2. To change the performance level, click the desired option. To access the Intel SpeedStep options when the flag icon is not visible on the taskbar and if your computer is running under ACPI, perform the following steps: 1. Click the Start button and point to Settings. 2. Click Control Panel. 3. Click Power Management. 4. Select the Intel SpeedStep tab and select the options desired. 5. After you make any changes, click OK to accept the settings and close the Intel SpeedStep window. Using the Adjust Properties Option 1. To access the Intel SpeedStep option window, either right click the flag icon and click the Adjust Properties option or double click the flag icon. The Intel SpeedStep technology options window opens. 2. You can adjust the following performance options: Automatically change performance when the power source changes (the default) — changes the performance level of your computer automatically when it is running on battery or connected to an electrical outlet. Ask me before automatically changing performance — when selected, the computer prompts you for confirmation before the computer changes performance level. Running on batteries and Plugged in pull-down menus — change performance level options. 3. Click Apply to accept the settings. 4. Click OK to close the Intel SpeedStep technology options window. Setting the Advanced Options The Advanced options lets you disable various options. To set Advanced options, perform the following steps: 1. Click the flag icon in the Windows® system tray on the taskbar. 2. Click the Adjust Properties option. The Intel SpeedStep window opens. 3. Click the Advanced button. The Advanced window opens. 4. Click any of the following options: Disable Intel SpeedStep technology control. Remove flag icon. Disable audio notification when performance changes. 5. Click Apply to accept the settings. 6. Click OK to close the Intel SpeedStep technology window. Back to Contents PageBack to Contents Page Traveling With Your Computer: Dell™ Latitude™ CPx H-Series/JSeries User's Guide Identifying Your Computer Preparing Your Computer for Travel Travel Tips Identifying Your Computer As an antitheft measure, assign a primary password and a hard-disk drive password to prohibit unauthorized access to the computer. Dell recommends that you follow these precautions before you travel with your computer: Write down your service tag number, and put it in a safe place separate from the computer or carrying case. If the computer is lost or stolen, use the service tag number when reporting to law enforcement officials and to Dell. Use a text editor (such as Microsoft® Windows® Notepad) to create a file called if_found in your root directory. Place information such as your name, address, and telephone number in this file. (For instructions on using the appropriate text editor, see the documentation that came with your operating system.) Attach your business card or other name tag to the computer. Contact your credit-card company and ask if it offers coded identification tags that allow your property to be returned to you without the risk of revealing your name, address, or telephone number. Use a permanent marking or stenciling device to write your driver’s license number or some other unique identifying mark on the computer. If a lost or stolen computer is recovered, such marking identifies the computer as your property. Service Tag Number The service tag number is an alphanumeric code on a bar code label located on the bottom of the computer. The number is unique to your computer and allows Dell technical assistance personnel to identify the computer and its configuration quickly if you call for assistance. If Your Computer Is Lost or Stolen If your computer is lost or stolen, Dell suggests that you perform the following steps: 1. Call a law enforcement agency to report the lost or stolen computer.Include the service tag number in your description of the computer. Ask that a case number be assigned, and write it down. Also write down the name, address, and telephone number of the law enforcement agency. If possible, obtain the name of the investigating officer. If you know where the computer was lost or stolen, call a law enforcement agency in that area. If you do not know, call a law enforcement agency where you live. 2. If the computer belongs to a company, notify the security office of the firm. 3. Call Dell technical assistance to report the missing computer. Provide the computer’s service tag number, the case number, and the name, address, and telephone number of the law enforcement agency to which you reported the missing computer. If possible, give the name of the investigating officer. The Dell support technician will log your report under the computer’s service tag number and flag the computer as missing or stolen. If someone calls Dell for technical assistance and gives your service tag number, the computer is identified automatically as missing or stolen. The technician will attempt to get the phone number and address of the caller. Dell will then contact the law enforcement agency to which you made the report of the missing or stolen computer. Preparing Your Computer for Travel To prepare your computer for travel, perform the following steps: 1. Remove any external devices attached to the computer, and store them in a safe place. If a diskette is in the diskette drive, remove it. Remove any cables attached to installed PC Cards (you do not have to remove the PC Cards themselves). 2. To make the computer as light as possible, remove the storage drive from the modular bay and install the travel module. 3. To maximize battery life, check the charge on your battery. Then fully charge the battery and any spares you plan to carry with you. 4. Turn off the computer or press to enter suspend-to-disk mode. (On a French keyboard, press .) NOTICE: When you disconnect the AC adapter from the computer, grasp the adapter cable's connector, not the cable itself, and pull gently but firmly to avoid damaging the cable. Disconnect the AC adapter. NOTICE: When the display is closed, items left on the keyboard could damage the display. 6. Make sure that there is nothing on the keyboard and palmrest that can damage the display when you close it. Then close the display. 7. Pack all your computing accessories.With the optional Dell carrying case, you can pack the computer and its accessories together. NOTE: Follow the travel tips and take special precautions if you are planning to travel by air. Accessories You may want to take some of the following accessories with you when you travel: Spare batteries AC adapter and AC power cable Backup diskettes Appropriate printer driver files if you will be using a printer Cables for PC Cards (such as modem and network cards) Power adapters for foreign electrical outlets and modem cable adapters for foreign telephone networks CD-ROM drive DVD-ROM drive LS-120 drive CD-RW drive Diskette drive and parallel cable for using the drive as an external device Travel module Traveling by Air You may want to take the following precautions when you are traveling by air with your computer: Notify airport security in advance that you are bringing a portable computer. Be sure to have a charged battery or the AC adapter and power cable available in case you are asked to turn on the computer. Do not check the computer as baggage. NOTICE: Have airport security personnel check the computer by hand. If the computer passes through a metal detector, data loss may occur. If you must pass the computer through a metal detector, first remove the hard-disk drive. Do not put the computer through a metal detector.The computer can go through an airport X-ray security machine. Before you use the computer on an airplane, check the in-flight magazine or ask the flight crew to verify that such use is permitted. Some airlines forbid the use of electronic devices during the flight. All airlines forbid the use of electronic devices during takeoff and landing. Dell has several carrying cases that protect the computer and accessories during travel. If you pack the computer in a suitcase, do not pack so tightly that the computer display breaks or so loosely that the computer slides around. Avoid packing the computer with items such as shaving cream, colognes, perfumes, or food. Protect the computer, the battery, and the hard-disk drive from hazards such as extreme temperatures; overexposure to sunlight; and exposure to dirt, dust, or liquids. Pack the computer so that it does not slide around in the trunk of your car or in an overhead storage compartment. If you are carrying a second hard-disk drive separately, protect the drive from exposure to static electricity by placing the drive in an antistatic bag or wrapping it in a nonconductive fabric. Travel Tips Consider changing the settings of your power management options to maximize battery life if you will be using battery power for extended periods. If you are traveling internationally, carry proof of ownership to speed your passage through customs. If the computer is provided by your employer, carry documentation of your right to use the computer. Investigate the customs regulations of the countries you plan to visit, and consider acquiring an international carnet from your government if you travel through many different countries. Power interruptions can occur frequently in some countries. Always have a charged battery available if traveling abroad. Credit card holders should check with their credit card companies for information about the kinds of emergency travel assistance they offer to users of portable computers. Many companies provide services that help you solve problems, such as quickly locating 3.5-inch diskettes or providing a directdial telephone line for your modem connection. NOTICE: Do not use removable media drives while the computer is in motion. The vibrations could interrupt the flow of data to and from the storage devices and the hard-disk drive or diskette drive. Carnet A carnet is an international customs document (also known as a merchandise passport) that facilitates temporary imports into foreign countries and is valid for up to 1 year.Back to Contents PageBack to Contents Page Drivers: Dell™ Latitude™ CPx H-Series/J-Series User's Guide Installing Microsoft® Windows® 95 and Windows 98 Drivers Installing Microsoft® Windows NT® Drivers Installing Microsoft® Windows 2000 Drivers NOTE: For more information on using the operating system installed on your computer by Dell, see the operating system user's guide that came with your computer. Back to Contents PageBack to Contents Page Customizing Your Computer: Dell™ Latitude™ CPx H-Series/JSeries User's Guide Using the System Setup Program System Setup Options Power Management Settings Suspend-to-Disk Utility Back to Contents PageBack to Contents Page Removing and Replacing Parts: Dell™ Latitude™ CPx H-Series/JSeries User's Guide Installing a Primary Hard-Disk Drive Preparing to Remove or Install Memory Modules Removing or Installing Memory Modules Installing a Primary Hard-Disk Drive NOTICE: To prevent data loss, turn off your computer before you remove the hard-disk drive. Do not remove the hard-disk drive if the computer is in suspend mode or if the drive access indicator is lit. Removing the drive under these conditions will lead to loss of data. To install a primary hard-disk drive, perform the following steps: 1. Save any open files, turn off the computer, and remove any installed batteries. 2. Remove the hard-disk drive from the drive bay. Close the display and turn the computer over. Using a small Phillips-head screwdriver, remove the screw (see Figure 1) that holds the drive carrier in the drive bay. Save the screw for use later in this procedure. Figure 1. Removing a Hard-Disk Drive 3. Gently pull the drive carrier out of the drive bay. When the hard-disk drive is not in the computer, protect the drive from exposure to static electricity. See "Protecting Against Electrostatic Discharge" in your System Information Guide for more information. 4. Remove the new hard-disk drive from its packaging.Save the original packaging to use when you store or ship the hard-disk drive. 5. Install the new hard-disk drive into the computer (it comes in a drive carrier). NOTICE: If the drive carrier does not slide in easily, pull it out and try again. To avoid damage, do not force the drive carrier into the bay. 6. Gently push the drive carrier into the drive bay until the carrier door is flush with the computer case. 7. Replace the screw you removed in step 2. Be careful not to overtighten the screw. If you have installed a new hard-disk drive, follow the directions that came with the drive to partition and logically format the drive and to create a suspend-to-disk (S2D) partition. NOTICE: Hard-disk drives are extremely fragile and must be handled carefully to avoid damage. Follow these guidelines: The primary hard-disk drive is installed in a metal carrier to protect the drive and make installation easier. When you remove and install hard-disk drives, handle the drive carrier, not the drive itself. Never press down on the top of the drive. Do not drop the drive. Even a slight jar or bump can damage the drive heads and spinning plates, thus rendering the drive inoperable. CAUTION: The primary hard-disk drive may be hot to the touch under extreme environmental conditions. If the drive is hot, allow it to cool before you replace it. Preparing a New Primary Drive Every primary hard-disk drive must be physically formatted, partitioned, and logically formatted before it can be used to store data. Every primary hard-disk drive from Dell is physically formatted before it is sent to you. Use the program(s) provided by your operating system to partition and logically format the hard-disk drive. Preparing to Remove or Install Memory Modules To prepare the computer for the removal or installation of memory modules, perform the following steps. NOTES: If necessary, print these instructions for reference before proceeding. NOTICE: Your portable computer does not support extended-data out (EDO) memory modules. Only synchronous dynamic random-access memory (SDRAM) modules are supported for use in Dell Latitude CPx H-Series/J-Series computers. NOTICE: Do not install memory modules while the computer is in suspend, standby, or suspend-todisk mode. NOTICE: Ground yourself by touching an unpainted metal surface of a connector on the back of thecomputer. While you work, periodically touch the connector to dissipate any static electricity that might harm internal components. 1. Turn off the computer and any attached peripherals, and disconnect them from their electrical outlets to reduce the potential for personal injury or shock. 2. If the computer is docked, undock it. 3. Disconnect the AC adapter and any attached peripherals, including telephone or telecommunication lines, from the computer. 4. Remove the battery from the battery bay or the modular bay. Removing or Installing Memory Modules To remove or install memory modules, perform the following steps: 1. Close the display, and turn the computer upside down. 2. Remove the memory module cover. Locate the small rectangular indentation at one end of the memory module cover. Place the tip of your finger under the cover by the indentation and firmly lift it up. When the door pops up, lift it up to remove it and expose the memory modules underneath it. 3. If you are replacing a memory module, remove the old one. Carefully spread apart the inner metal tabs of the memory module socket just far enough for the memory module to disengage from the socket (it should pop up slightly). Then lift the memory module away from the socket (see Figure 2). Figure 2. Removing a Memory Module1 DIMM A 2 DIMM B 4. Ground yourself and unpack the new memory module from the upgrade kit. 5. Install the new memory module into the appropriate slot. NOTES: If you are installing a 192-MB memory module, be sure that it is inserted with the double-stacked memory chips facing you. A 192-MB memory module inserted with the doublestacked memory chips facing down does not fit properly in the socket. 192-MB memory modules are designed for either the socket labeled DIMM A or the socket labeled DIMM B. They are not interchangeable. The socket labeled DIMM A should be populated before the socket labeled DIMM B. If you only have one memory module, you should install it in the DIMM A socket. (See Figure 2.) Memory modules are keyed, or designed to fit into their sockets in only one direction. The slots on the system board are notched so that the memory module can be firmly seated only one way. a. Align the memory module’s edge connector with the slot in the center of the memory module socket. b. With the module at a 45-degree angle, press the memory module’s edge connector firmly into the memory module socket. c. Pivot the memory module down until it clicks into place. If you do not hear a click as each end of the memory module snaps into the metal tabs, remove the memory module and reinstall it. NOTICE: After installation, if the memory module cover does not fit or is difficult to close, you may have installed the memory module improperly into the wrong slots. Remove the memory modules and reinstall them. Do not force the memory module cover to close because you may damage your computer. 6. Replace the memory module cover as follows: a. Set the memory module cover loosely over the opening, making sure that the tabs on the bottom of the cover catch in the slots on either side of the opening. b. Slide the cover into place and press down on it until you hear it click. 7. Reconnect your computer and peripherals to their electrical outlets and turn them on. As the computer boots, it detects the presence of additional memory and automatically updates the system configuration information. 8. In one of the following ways, verify that the System Memory option reflects the newly installed memory:Click the Start button, point to Settings, click Control Panel, and double-click the System icon. The amount of memory installed in the computer is displayed in the lower-right corner of the General tab window. In the System Setup program, the System Memory option appears in the lower-right corner of pages 1, 2, and 4. To run the System Setup program, press on the computer’s keyboard (or on an external keyboard if the External Hot Key option is enabled). If the total amount of memory shown is incorrect, the memory module(s) may not be installed properly. Repeat preparatory steps 1 through 4 and removal and installation steps 1 through 8 until the memory total is correct. 9. Run the System Memory test of the Dell Diagnostics to confirm that all installed memory modules are operating correctly. 10. Use the Suspend-to-Disk utility to update the S2D partition on your hard-disk drive. The S2D partition stores system data while the computer is in suspend-to-disk mode. Back to Contents PageBack to Contents Page Troubleshooting Your Computer: Dell™ Latitude™ CPx H-Series/JSeries User's Guide Dell Diagnostics Error Messages and Flash Codes Back to Contents PageBack to Contents Page Technical Specifications: Dell™ Latitude™ CPx H-Series/J-Series User's Guide Processor Keyboard Chip Set and Bus Battery PC Cards AC Adapter Memory Physical Connectors Environmental (Computer) Audio Touch Pad Video Track Stick 14.1-Inch Display Processor Latitude CPx H-Series/J-Series Intel® Mobile Pentium® III microprocessor. For J-Series, microprocessor includes Intel SpeedStep™ technology Chip Set and Bus System chip set Intel Mobile 440BX AGPset Microprocessor data bus width 64 bits DRAM bus width 64 bits Address bus width 32 bits Flash EPROM 4 Mb AGP bus 66 MHz PCI bus 33 MHz PC Cards CardBus controller Texas Instruments PCI 1225 CardBus controller PC Card connectors two (supports type I and type II cards in any combination; typeIII cards can be used only in the lower connector; the lower connector supports zoomed video cards on systems using the Microsoft® Windows® 95 or Windows 98 operating system) Cards supported 3.3-V and 5-V PC Card connector size 68 pins Data width (maximum): PCMCIA 16 bits CardBus 32 bits Memory Architecture SDRAM Memory module sockets two Memory module capacities and type 32-, 64-, 128-, 192-, and 256-MB 3.3-V SDRAM1 modules Standard RAM 32-MB memory module Maximum RAM 512 MB Memory clock speed 100 MHz Memory access time CL2 or CL3 (Note: CL3 indicates a CAS latency of 3 clocks) BIOS address F000:0000-F000:FFFF Connectors Serial (DTE) 16,550-compatible, 16-byte buffer connector Parallel unidirectional, bidirectional, or ECP connector Video connector PS/2 mini-DIN connector Infrared port compatible with both IrDA Standard 1.1 (Fast IR) and IrDA Standard 1.0 (Slow IR) Audio microphone-in jack; line-in/audio-in jack; headphones/speakers jack USB USB-compliant connectorDocking connector for the C/Port Family Advanced Port Replicator or C/Dock Family Expansion Station S-Video 7-pin mini-DIN connector (an S-Video to composite video Adapter is also included with the computer) Audio Audio type Sound Blaster (software emulation-capable) Audio controller For the H-Series, ESS Maestro 2E; for the J-Series, ESS Maestro 3I Stereo conversion 16 bit (analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog) Interfaces: Internal PCI bus/AC97 External stereo line-in minijack; microphone-in minijack; headphones/speakers-out minijack Speakers two 8-ohm speakers Internal speaker amplifier 1 W channel into 8 ohms stereo Controls volume can be controlled through key combinations, application program menus, or the Speaker window in the Dell Control Center (Windows 95 only) Video Video type 64-bit hardware-accelerated Data bus 2X AGP Video controller ATI Mobility M1 Video memory 8.0 MB 14.1-Inch Display Type XGA, active-matrix color (TFT) Dimensions (active area): Height 214.3 mm (8.4 inches)Width 285.7 mm (11.3 inches) Diagonal 357.1 mm (14.1 inches) Maximum resolution/colors 1024 x 768; 24-bit color Response time (typical) 20 ms rise (maximum)/50 ms fall (maximum) Operating angle 0° (closed) to 180° Viewing angles: Horizontal ± 45° Vertical +15°/–30° Dot pitch 0.28 mm Power consumption: Panel (typical) 1.0 W Backlight 3.4 W Controls brightness can be controlled through a key combination Keyboard Number of keys 87 (U.S., Canada, Korea, Thailand, and locations that use traditional Chinese); 88 (Europe); 90 (Japan) Key travel 2.8 mm ± 0.4 mm (0.11 inch ± 0.016 inch) Key spacing 19.05 mm ± 0.3 mm (0.75 inch ± 0.012 inch) Battery Type lithium ion Dimensions: Height 21.5 mm (0.83 inch) Depth 88.5 mm (3.48 inches)Width 139.0 mm (5.47 inches) Weight 0.39 kg (0.87 lb) Voltage 14.8 VDC Capacity 53 WH Charge time (approximate)2 : Computer on 2.5 hours Computer off 1 hour Life span (approximate)2 500 discharge/charge cycles Temperature range: Charge 0° to 35°C (32° to 95°F) Storage –40° to 65°C (–40° to 149°F) AC Adapter Input voltage 90 to 135 VAC and 164 to 264 VAC Input current (maximum) 1.5 A Input frequency 47 to 63 Hz Output current 4.5 A (maximum at 4-second pulse); 3.51 A (continuous) Rated output voltage 20.0 VDC Height 27.94 mm (1.1 inches) Width 58.42 mm (2.3 inches) Depth 133.35 mm (5.25 inches) Weight (with cables) 0.4 kg (0.9 lb) Temperature range: Operating 0° to 40°C (32° to 104°F) Storage –40° to 65°C (–40° to 149°F)Physical Height 45.0 mm (1.77 inches) Width 319.0 mm (12.55 inches) Depth 252.5 mm (9.94 inches) Weight3 with 14.1-inch display 2.73 kg (6.02 lb) with travel module installed in modular bay 2.93 kg (6.46 lb) with diskette drive installed in modular bay 3.06 kg (6.74 lb) with CD-ROM drive installed in modular bay Environmental (Computer) Temperature: Operating 0° to 35°C (32° to 95°F) Storage –40° to 65°C (–40° to 149°F) Relative humidity (maximum): Operating 10% to 90% (noncondensing) Storage 5% to 95% (noncondensing) Maximum vibration: Operating 0.9 GRMS using a random-vibration spectrum that simulates user environment Storage 1.3 GRMS using a random-vibration spectrum that simulates air/truck shipment Maximum shock4 : Operating 152.4 cm/sec (60.0 inches/sec) (equal to a half-sine pulse width of 2 ms) Storage 203.2 cm/sec (80 inches/sec) (equal to a half-sine pulse width of 2 ms) Altitude (maximum): Operating –15.2 m to 3048 m (–50 to 10,000 ft) Storage –15.2 m to 10,668 m (–50 to 35,000 ft)Touch Pad Interface PS/2-compatible X/Y position resolution (graphics table mode) 240 cpi Size: Thickness 2.8 mm (0.11 inch) at highest component Width (sensor-active area) 55mm (2.17 inch) Height 39-mm (1.54-inch) rectangle Weight 9.02 g (0.29 oz) Power: Supply voltage 5 V ± .5 VDC Supply current 25 mA (maximum operating for track stick and touch pad combined) ESD In accordance with IEC-801-2 Track Stick Interface PS/2-compatible X/Y position resolution 250 counts/sec.@100gf Size: Protrudes .5 mm higher than surrounding keycaps Power: Supply voltage 5 V ± .5 VDC Supply current 25 mA (maximum operating for track stick and touch pad combined) ESD In accordance with IEC-801-2 NOTES: 1The Dell Latitude CPx H-Series/J-Series does not support some memory modules from older models of Dell portable computers, such as the Latitude CP, XP, XPi CD, or LM. The H-Series only supports SDRAM modules and does not support EDO memory modules. 2 Battery performance features such as charge time and life span can vary according to the conditions under which the computer and battery are used. 3 Weights are shown with a hard-disk drive, a battery in the battery bay, and a travel module, diskette drive, or a CD-ROM drive in the modular bay. Your computer might weigh more or less, depending on its configuration. 4 Measured with the hard-disk drive in head-parked position. Back to Contents PageBack to Contents Page Getting Help: Dell™ Latitude™ CPx H-Series/J-Series User's Guide Help Overview Contacting Dell Back to Contents PageBack to Contents Page Modular Bay: Dell™ Latitude™ CPx H-Series/J-Series User's Guide Using the Modular Bay Installing Devices in the Modular Bay With Softex Docking Services or Softex BayManager Software Installing Devices in the Modular Bay Without Softex Docking Services or Softex BayManager Software Using the Modular Bay Your computer comes with a diskette drive installed in the modular bay. You can also install a battery, a CDROM drive, a CD-RW drive, a DVD-ROM drive, a SuperDisk LS-120 drive module, or second hard-disk drive in the modular bay. To make the computer as light as possible, use the travel module in the modular bay in place of any of the available drives. NOTICE: When the drives are not inside the computer, they are fragile and must be handled carefully to avoid damage. Do not press down on the drives or place heavy objects on top of them. Place the drives in a travel case to keep them free of dust and liquids. Store the drives in a safe place. If your system is running Microsoft® Windows NT® with Softex Docking Services installed or if your system is running Windows® 95 or Windows 98 with Softex BayManager installed, see "Installing Devices in the Modular Bay With Softex Docking Services or Softex BayManager Software." If your system does not have Softex Docking Services or Softex BayManager, see "Installing Devices in the Modular Bay Without Softex Docking Services or Softex BayManager Software." If you are removing a device from the modular bay and installing a battery, see "Batteries." If your system is running Windows 2000, device swapping in the modular bay is supported by the operating system. Although you can physically remove and install devices as described in the following subsections, refer to the information on unplugging or ejecting hardware in your Windows 2000 documentation instead of following the Softex- or System Setup-related steps in the following subsections. NOTE: A new hard-disk drive must be formatted before you can use it. For instructions, see the documentation that came with the drive. Installing Devices in the Modular Bay With Softex Docking Services or BayManager Software Your computer may be using Windows 95 or Windows 98 with Softex BayManager software or Windows NT with Softex Docking Services software. This software allows you to hot-swap devices such as diskette drives, hard-disk drives, SuperDisk LS-120 drives, CD-ROM drives, CD-RW drives, and DVD-ROM drives to and from your computer’s modular bay and the C/Dock Family Expansion Station’s media bay. Hotswapping capability allows you to remove and replace a device while the computer is on. You do not have toshut down or restart the computer for the device to be recognized. To install a device in the modular bay, perform the following steps: 1. Verify that the Diskette Reconfig option in the System Setup program is set to Any Time. 2. Verify that the Display Close option in the System Setup program is set to Active. 3. Save your work and close all open files and application programs. 4. If the computer is docked, undock it. 5. Double-click the Docking Services or BayManager icon in the Windows system tray on the task bar. The Softex BayManager window appears for Windows 95 or Windows 98, and the Docking Services window appears for Windows NT. 6. Click the Remove/Swap button. 7. If the modular bay contains a device, remove the device as follows: a. Close the computer display and turn the computer over. b. Slide the modular bay latch toward the Unlock icon. Keep holding the modular bay latch with one hand while pulling the device out of the bay with the other hand. c. After you remove the device, release the modular bay latch. 8. Slide the new device firmly into the modular bay. You should hear a click when the device is fully seated. NOTE: Softex BayManager and Softex Docking Services do not report a second battery installed in the modular bay on the Storage Devices tab. 9. Click OK. Then click OK again to close the Softex window. For the latest information on Softex Docking Services, see the Softex user’s guides at http://www.dell.com/. Click Small Business Center or Medium & Large Business. Click Notebooks; then, if applicable, click Choose Latitude. Look for Softex Utilities Installation Guide on the left of the screen. If you are removing a device from the modular bay and installing a battery, see "Batteries." Installing Devices in the Modular Bay Without Softex Docking Services or Softex BayManager Software To install a device in the modular bay, perform the following steps: 1. Verify that the Diskette Reconfig option in the System Setup program is set to Any Time.Save your work and close all open files and application programs. 3. Turn your computer off. 4. If the computer is docked, undock it. 5. If the modular bay contains a device, remove the device as follows: a. Close the computer display and turn the computer over. b. Slide the modular bay latch toward the Unlock icon. Keep holding the modular bay latch with one hand while pulling the device out of the bay with the other hand. c. After you remove the device, release the modular bay latch. Slide the new device firmly into the modular bay. You should hear a click when the device is fully seated. 7. Dock the computer if necessary. 8. Turn on the computer. Back to Contents PageBack to Contents Page Using the System Setup Program: Dell™ Latitude™ CPx HSeries/J-Series User's Guide Overview Entering the System Setup Program Using the System Setup Program Overview Each time you turn on your computer, it compares the installed hardware with the system configuration information stored in nonvolatile random-access memory (NVRAM). If the system detects a discrepancy, it generates an error message for each incorrect configuration setting. Power Management Compliance (APM Versus ACPI) The system configuration process differs depending on the type of power management scheme used by the operating system. Microsoft® Windows® 95 and Windows NT use Advanced Power Management (APM). Windows 2000 uses Advanced Configuration and Power Management (ACPI). Windows 98 can be either APM- or ACPI-compliant, depending on the version you are using. If you have Windows 98, you can determine which power scheme you have by accessing the System devices list in the Device Manager. For Windows 98 with APM, click Start—> Settings—> Control Panel—> System—> Device Manager—> System devices. For Windows 98 with ACPI, click Start—> Settings—> Control Panel—> System—> Hardware—> Device Manager—> System devices. Either APM or ACPI options will appear at the top of the System devices list. To adjust the configuration settings for APM operating systems, such as Microsoft Windows 95, Windows 98 with APM, or Windows NT®, you can use the System Setup program. ACPI operating systems, such as Windows 2000 and Windows 98 with ACPI, automatically configure most of the setup options available in the System Setup program. In such cases, the operating system overrides system setup options entered through the System Setup program. One exception is the External Hot Key option, which you can disable or enable only through the System Setup program. For more information on configuring features for these operating systems, see your Microsoft Windows Help. NOTE: For ACPI operating systems, the System Setup program is accessible only during the system boot routine. You can use the System Setup program as follows:To set or change user-selectable features — for example, your password or power management features To verify information about your computer's current configuration, such as the amount of system memory For some setup options, you must reboot the computer before any changes take effect. Changes for other options take effect immediately. NOTE: If you change an option that is activated by rebooting, the System Setup program displays the setting you selected rather than the setting currently in effect. You must reboot for the new setting to take effect. After you set up your computer, run the System Setup program to familiarize yourself with your system configuration information and optional settings. Dell recommends that you write down the information for future reference. NOTE: If the computer uses the Microsoft Windows 95 operating system, you can also use the Dell Control Center to view and change the system configuration. Access the Dell Control Center from the Dell Accessories folder. For more information, see "System Setup Options." Entering the System Setup Program Enter and use the System Setup program as follows: For APM operating systems, such as Windows 95, Windows 98 with APM, and Windows NT, press at any time on the keyboard (or on an external keyboard if the External Hot Key option is enabled). If you press (or on an external keyboard if the External Hot Key option is enabled), the System Setup program opens directly to the Battery Status screen. For ACPI operating systems, such as Windows 2000 and Windows 98 with ACPI, you must enter System Setup before the operating system loads. Enter System Setup by pressing when the F2 message appears during the system boot routine. Press to exit the System Setup program. If you change the setting of an option that requires rebooting to take effect, exit the operating system before rebooting. (The Help text in the upper-right corner of System Setup screens 1, 2, and 4 tells you if the computer must be rebooted.) NOTE: If the System Setup program is running when the computer enters suspend mode, the computer exits the System Setup program and then activates suspend mode. For more information, see "System Setup Options." Using the System Setup ProgramThe System Setup screens display the current setup and configuration information and optional settings for your computer. Information on the screens is organized in five boxed areas: Title The box at the top of all screens lists the page number, system name, and version number of the basic input/output system (BIOS). Options The box on the left half of screens 1, 2, and 4 lists options that define the installed hardware in your computer and the power conservation and security features for your computer. Fields next to the options contain settings or values. You can change those values that appear bright on the screen. Options or values that you cannot change (because they are determined or calculated by the computer) appear less bright. Help The box on the upper-right half of screens 1, 2, and 4 displays help information for the option with a currently highlighted field. Computer data The box in the lower-right corner of screens 1, 2, and 4 displays information about your computer. Key functions The line of boxes across the bottom of all screens lists keys and their functions within the System Setup program. For more information, see "System Setup Options." Back to Contents PageBack to Contents Page Dell™ Diagnostics: Dell Latitude™ CPx H-Series/J-Series User's Guide Overview Dell Diagnostics Main Screen Overview Features of the Dell Diagnostics Confirming the System Configuration Information When to Use the Dell Diagnostics How to Use Dell Diagnostics Starting the Dell Diagnostics Overview Unlike many diagnostic programs, the Dell Diagnostics helps you check your computer's hardware without any additional equipment and without destroying any data. By using the diagnostics, you can have confidence in your computer's operation. And if you find a problem you cannot solve by yourself, the diagnostic tests can provide you with important information you will need when talking to Dell's service and support personnel. NOTICE: Use the Dell Diagnostics to test only your Dell computer. Using this program with other computers may cause incorrect computer responses or result in error messages. Features of the Dell Diagnostics The Dell Diagnostics provides a series of menus and options from which you choose particular test groups or subtests. You can also control the sequence in which the tests are run. The diagnostic test groups or subtests also have these helpful features: Options that let you run tests individually or collectively An option that allows you to choose the number of times a test group or subtest is repeated The ability to display or print out test results, or to save them in a file Options to temporarily suspend testing if an error is detected, or to terminate testing when an adjustable error limit is reached A menu category called Devices that briefly describes each test and its parameters A menu category called Config that describes the configuration of the devices in the selected device group Status messages that inform you whether test groups or subtests were completed successfully Error messages that appear if any problems are detected When to Use the Dell Diagnostics Whenever a major component or device in your computer does not function properly, you may have a component failure. As long as the microprocessor and the input and output components of your computer (the display, keyboard, and diskette drive) are working, you can use the Dell Diagnostics. If you are experienced with computers and know what component(s) you need to test, simply select the appropriate diagnostic test group(s) or subtest(s). If you are unsure about how to begin diagnosing a problem, read the rest of this section.Starting the Dell Diagnostics Perform the following steps to start the diagnostics: 1. Turn off the computer. 2. Undock the computer if you have it docked. 3. Turn on the computer. 4. Press at the Dell BIOS splash screen to access the System Setup menu. 5. Select the following boot sequence: Boot First Device: Diskette Drive Boot Second Device: CDROM / DVDROM Drive Boot Third Device: Internal HDD 6. Insert the Dell System Software CD into the CD-ROM drive. 7. Turn the computer off. 8. Turn the computer on. The system restarts and automatically begins to run the Dell Diagnostics. 9. When you have completed running diagnostics, remove the Dell System Software CD from the CD-ROM drive. To change the boot sequence, repeat steps 1 through 5, customizing the boot sequence to fit your needs. Then restart your system. NOTE: Before you read the rest of this subsection, you may want to start the Dell Diagnostics so that you can see it on your display. When you start the diagnostics, the Dell logo screen appears, followed by a message telling you that the diagnostics is loading. After the diagnostics loads, the Diagnostics Menu appears (see Figure 1). The menu allows you to run all or specific diagnostic tests or to exit to the MS-DOS prompt. For a quick check of your computer, select the Quickly Test All Devices option. This option runs only the subtests that do not require user interaction and that do not take a long time to run. Dell recommends that you choose this option first to increase the odds of tracing the source of the problem quickly. For a thorough check of your computer, select the Fully Test All Devices option. To check a particular area of your computer, select the Select Devices to Test option. To select an option from this menu, highlight the option and press , or press the key that corresponds to the highlighted letter in the option you choose. Figure 1. Diagnostics MenuDell Diagnostics Main Screen Overview When you select Select Devices to Test from the Diagnostics Menu, the main screen of the diagnostics appears (see Figure 2). The main screen lists the diagnostic test device groups, lists the devices of the selected device group, and allows you to select categories from a menu. From this screen, you can enter two other types of screens. Information on the main screen of the diagnostics is presented in the following five areas: Two lines at the top of the screen identify the version number of the Dell Diagnostics. On the left side of the screen, the Device Groups area lists the diagnostic test groups in the order they will run if you select All from the Run tests menu category. Press the up- or down-arrow key to highlight a test device group. On the right side of the screen, the Devices for Highlighted Group area lists the computer's currently detected hardware and some of the relevant settings. The lower-right side of the screen displays information about your integrated drive electronics (IDE) hard-disk and CD-ROM drive(s). Two lines at the bottom of the screen make up the menu area. The first line lists the categories you can select; press the left- or right-arrow key to highlight a menu category. The second line gives information about the category currently highlighted. NOTE: The options displayed on your screen should reflect the hardware configuration of your computer. Figure 2. Dell Diagnostics Main ScreenConfirming the System Configuration Information When you boot your computer from your diagnostics diskette, the diagnostics checks your system configuration information and displays it in the Device Groups area on the main screen. The following sources supply this configuration information for the diagnostics: The system configuration information settings (stored in nonvolatile random-access memory [NVRAM]) that you selected while using the System Setup program Identification tests of the microprocessor, the video controller, the keyboard controller, and other key components Basic input/output system (BIOS) configuration information temporarily saved in RAM Do not be concerned if the Device Groups area does not list the names of all the components or devices you know are part of your computer. For example, you may not see a printer listed, although you know one is attached to your computer. Instead, the printer is listed as a parallel port. The computer recognizes the parallel port as LPT1, which is an address that tells the computer where to send outgoing information and where to look for incoming information. Because your printer is a parallel communications device, the computer recognizes the printer by its LPT1 address and identifies it as a parallel port. You can test your printer connection in the Parallel Ports tests. How to Use Dell Diagnostics Six comprehensive, menu-driven, online Help categories provide instructions on how to use the program and explaineach menu item, test group, subtest, and test and error result. To enter the Help menu, perform the following steps: 1. Highlight Select Devices to Test in the Diagnostics Menu. 2. Press . 3. Press . The six Help menu categories are Menu, Keys, Device Group, Device, Test, and Versions. The online Help also provides detailed descriptions of the devices that you are testing. The Help categories are explained below. Menu Category The Menu Help category provides descriptions of the main menu screen area, the Device Groups, and the different diagnostic menus and commands and instructions on how to use them. Keys Category The Keys Help category explains the functions of the all of the keystrokes that can be used in Dell Diagnostics. Device Group Category The Device Group Help category describes the test group that is presently highlighted in the Device Groups list on the main menu screen. It also provides reasoning for using some tests. Device Category The Device Help category is the educational section of online Help. It describes the function and purpose of the highlighted device in the Device Groups. For example, the following information appears when you select the Device Help category for Diskette in the Device Groups list: Diskette drive A: The diskette disk drive device reads and writes data to and from diskettes. Diskettes are flexible recording media, sometimes contained in hard shells. Diskette recording capacities are small and access times are slow relative to hard disk drives, but they provide a convenient means of storing and transferring data. Test Category The Test Help category provides a thorough explanation of the test procedure of each presently highlighted test group subtest. An example of the Diskette subtest Diskette Drive Seek Test is as follows: Diskette drive A: - Diskette Drive Seek Test This test verifies the drive's ability to position its read/write heads. The test operates in two passes: first, seeking from the beginning to ending cylinders inclusively, and second, seeking alternately from the beginning to ending cylinders with convergence towards the middle. Versions Category The Versions Help category lists the version numbers of the subtests that are used by the Dell Diagnostics. Back to Contents PageBack to Contents Page AC Adapter: Dell™ Latitude™ CPx H-Series/J-Series User's Guide Using the AC Adapter Connecting the AC Adapter Turning the Computer On Using the AC Adapter The AC adapter converts AC power to the DC power required by the computer. The AC adapter kit includes two cables: the AC adapter cable and an AC power cable. You can connect the AC adapter with your computer either turned on or off. The AC adapter works with electrical outlets worldwide. However, power connectors vary among countries. Before you use AC power in a foreign country, you may need to obtain a new power cable adapter designed for use in that country. If the computer is docked to one of Dell's C/Port Family Advanced Port Replicators (APR) or C/Dock Family Expansion Stations, you can run the computer on AC power by connecting the AC adapter to the C/Port APR or C/Dock Expansion Station. NOTE: If you are running your computer on AC power with a battery installed, the AC adapter charges the battery (if needed) and then maintains the battery's charge. NOTICE: To avoid overheating, the AC adapter should be in a ventilated area, such as on a desktop or on the floor, when used to power the computer or charge the battery. Do not use the AC adapter in a poorly ventilated environment, such as inside a carrying case. Connecting the AC Adapter To connect the AC adapter, perform the following steps: 1. Connect the AC adapter power cable to the AC adapter (See Figure 1). 2. Plug the AC adapter power cable into an electrical outlet. 3. Plug the AC adapter cable into the AC adapter connector on the computer. Figure 1. Connecting the AC Adapter1 AC adapter power cable 2 AC adapter 3 AC adapter cable Turning the Computer On To turn on the computer, press the power button. (See Figure 1 in "Introduction.") NOTE: If your computer's operating system is "locked up"— that is, it does not respond to commands — press and hold down the power button for at least five seconds to shut it off. Back to Contents PageBack to Contents Page PC Cards: Dell™ Latitude™ CPx H-Series/J-Series User's Guide About PC Cards Removing PC Cards Installing PC Cards Configuring PC Cards About PC Cards The computer has a slot into which you can install up to two PC Cards if the PC Cards comply with Release 2.01 of the Personal Computer Memory Card International Association (PCMCIA) standard and Release 4.2 of the Japanese Electronic Industry Development Association (JEIDA) standard. The computer supports type I, type II, and type III PC Cards (including memory cards) and advanced technology attachment (ATA) cards that emulate integrated drive electronics (IDE) hard-disk drives. Also supported are input/output (I/O) cards such as modems, local area network (LAN) cards, wireless LAN cards, and small computer system interface (SCSI) cards. If you are using the Microsoft® Windows® 95, Windows 98, or Windows 2000 operating system, you can use a zoomed video (ZV) PC Card only in the lower PC Card connector. (The Microsoft Windows NT® 4.0 operating system does not support ZV.) NOTES: A PC Card is not a boot device. The "type" of a card refers to its thickness, not its functionality. Your computer recognizes most I/O cards and automatically loads the device driver associated with that card. NOTICE: Take extra precautions if you use extended PC Cards in your computer. Extended cards are longer versions of standard PC Cards. They fit into, and operate correctly with, your computer. However, they extend beyond the edge of the computer when installed. If something strikes the exposed end of an installed card, your system board can be damaged. Because of space considerations, you may have trouble using two PC Cards in your computer if one of them is an extended card. It may be easier to use an extended card if you install it in the upper PC Card connector. Always remove an extended PC Card before you pack the computer in its carrying case. Installing PC Cards You can use the following PC Card combinations in the PC Card slots: A single type I or type II card (using either the upper or lower PC Card connector) A single type III card (using the lower PC Card connector only) One type I card and one type II card (using either connector) Two type I cards or two type II cardsNote: Use a ZV PC Card in the lower connector only. PC Cards are generally marked with a symbol, such as a triangle or an arrow, to indicate which end should be inserted into the slot. The cards are keyed to prevent incorrect insertion. If card orientation is not clear, see the documentation that came with the card. You do not need to turn off your computer or exit suspend or standby mode before you install a PC Card. To install a PC Card (see Figure 1), perform the following steps: 1. If necessary, remove the blank from the PC Card connector you intend to use by pressing the eject button and pulling the blank out. 2. Hold the card with its orientation symbol pointing into the slot and the top side of the card facing up. 3. Insert the card into the slot, and press in firmly until the card is completely seated in the internal PC Card connector. 4. If you encounter too much resistance when inserting it, do not force the card. Check the card's orientation and try again. Figure 1. Installing a PC Card PC Card Blanks Save the blank to use whenever you do not have a PC Card installed. The blank protects the PC Card connector from dust and other particles. Removing PC Cards NOTICE: If you are using Windows 95, Windows 98, or Windows 2000, use the PC Card configuration utility on the taskbar to select and stop a card before you remove it. If you do not remove the card in the configuration utility, you could lose data from open application programs. To remove a PC Card (see Figure 2), perform the following steps: 1. Stop the PC Card using the PC Card configurations utility on the taskbar. 2. Press the PC Card eject button. The PC Card or blank protrudes from the slot slightly. It does not come out all the way. 3. Gently remove the card.Figure 2. Removing a PC Card To protect the PC Card connectors, install a blank if you are not going to use the connector. Configuring PC Cards The PC Card configuration utility performs the following functions: Notifies you whenever a PC Card is inserted and tells you how the card is configured Automatically loads the proper device driver if it is available on the hard-disk drive If drivers are not available on the hard-disk drive, prompts you to install them using the device driver diskette that came with the card The operating system automatically detects a PC Card and opens the Add New Hardware menu from the Control Panel. For more information, see the PC Card operating system documentation. Back to Contents PageBack to Contents Page Batteries: Dell™ Latitude™ CPx H-Series/J-Series User's Guide About the Batteries Second Low-Battery Warning Charging a Hot Battery Charging the Battery Battery Usage Detecting Battery Problems Installing a Battery in the Battery Bay Battery Disposal Installing a Second Battery About Battery Power Battery Charge Gauge Turning the Computer On First Low-Battery Warning About the Batteries Your computer’s lithium ion battery provides power when an electrical outlet is not available. A battery in the battery bay is standard with the computer. Lithium ion batteries are longer lived than conventional batteries and do not require replacement as often. To double battery life, install a second battery in the modular bay. Lithium ion batteries do not have the "memory effect" that is exhibited by nickel-metal hydride (NiMH) and nickel-cadmium (NiCD) batteries. You do not need to drain a lithium ion battery completely before recharging it. A lithium ion battery will not "forget" at which point it is fully charged. NiMH and NiCD batteries may not charge fully if they are partially drained then recharged. The lithium ion technology used in your computer’s battery is significantly less hazardous to the environment than the lithium metal technology used in some other batteries (such as watch batteries). Spent batteries should not be placed with common household waste products. Contact local authorities for the location of a chemical waste collection program nearest you. Keep the following information in mind when you are running your computer from the battery: You can expect 2.5 to 5 hours of battery life with a single fully charged battery and 6 to 10 hours of battery life with two fully charged batteries. Actual performance varies, depending on which power management features are enabled and which application programs are being used. When two batteries are installed, the AC adapter first charges the battery in the battery bay. The integrated charge gauge lets you check a battery’s charge before you insert it into the computer. The battery’s self-test capability alerts you to battery conditions such as low charge. There is no battery memory effect with lithium ion batteries—you can charge the battery whenever you like without fear of reducing its charge capacity. A battery has a life span of up to 500 full charges and 2000 partial charges, provided it is charged at normal room temperature. Charging a Hot Battery If your battery is hot from being used in your computer or being in a hot environment, take note of the following precautions:A hot battery will not charge when you connect the AC adapter to the computer. This safety feature is important because charging a hot battery shortens the battery’s life span and may damage the battery and the computer. The battery is too hot to start charging if the battery indicator flashes alternately green and amber. If this occurs, disconnect the computer from its electrical outlet and allow it and the battery to return to room temperature. Reconnect the computer to the electrical outlet and continue charging the battery. If the computer is not allowed to return to room temperature, the battery stops charging before it reaches its full capacity. Battery Usage The battery is partially charged when you receive it. Dell recommends that you charge your battery to full capacity before using it to power the computer. If you are powering the computer from a battery, try to conserve battery power. A number of factors affect battery operating time: Power conservation features that you use Type of display and microprocessor your computer has Use of the optical or storage drive modules Number and type of PC Cards and other external devices you use Kinds of application programs you run Capacity of the memory modules you install (the higher the capacity, the more power used) Use of the infrared port When you activate suspend mode (known as standby in the Microsoft® Windows® 98 operating system), the computer can run on battery power for approximately one week (if the battery was fully charged before activating suspend or standby mode). If you are going to store the computer, disconnect all peripheral devices and turn off the computer. Remove the battery when you store your computer for an extended period of time. A battery will drain when not in use during prolonged storage. After a long storage period, recharge the battery fully before you attempt to run your computer from battery power. Installing a Battery in the Battery Bay NOTICE: To avoid data loss, do not replace a battery while the computer is turned on unless the computer is connected to an electrical outlet or a second battery is installed. To install a battery in the battery bay, perform the following steps (see Figure 1). NOTES: You can also install a battery in the modular bay. If necessary, print these instructions for reference before proceeding. Figure 1. Installing a Battery1. Save your work and close all open files and application programs. 2. If the computer is docked, undock it. 3. If the modular bay contains a battery, go to step 5. 4. If the only battery in the computer is in the battery bay and that is the battery you want to replace, connect the computer to an electrical outlet or preserve your data in one of these ways: Use suspend mode. Place the computer in suspend mode by pressing (or on an external keyboard if the External Hot Key option is enabled in the System Setup program). Then shut down the computer. Use suspend-to-disk mode. Place the computer in suspend-to-disk mode by pressing (or on a French keyboard). When the green power indicator turns off, continue. 5. Remove the battery from the battery bay. a. Close the computer display and turn the computer over. b. Slide the battery bay latch toward the Unlock icon. Hold the latch with one hand while pulling the battery out of the bay with the other hand. c. Release the latch after you remove the battery. 6. Slide the new battery firmly into the battery bay. You should hear a click when the battery is fully seated. 7. If you put the computer into suspend or suspend-to-disk mode, press the power button to resume normal operation. Installing a Second Battery NOTICE: To avoid data loss, do not replace a battery while the computer is turned on unless the computer is connected to an electrical outlet or a second battery is installed. NOTE: The following procedure applies only if you are replacing a storage module that has been operating in the modular bay. If you are installing a battery into an empty modular bay, you can hot-swap the battery (insert the battery while the computer is on). 1. Save your work and close all open files and application programs. 2. If the computer is docked, undock it.3. If your system does not have Softex Docking Services or Softex BayManager, go to step 5. 4. If your system is running Microsoft Windows NT® with Softex Docking Services installed or if your system is running Windows 95 or Windows 98 with Softex BayManager installed, perform the following steps. a. Double-click the Docking Services or BayManager icon in the Windows system tray on the task bar. The Softex BayManager window appears for Windows 95 or Windows 98. The Docking Services window appears for Windows NT. b. Click the Remove/Swap button. 5. If BayManager is not installed, preserve your data in one of these ways and then go to step 6: Use the suspend mode. Place the computer in suspend mode by pressing (or on an external keyboard if the External Hot Key option is enabled in the System Setup program). Use the suspend-to-disk mode. Place the computer in suspend-to-disk mode by pressing (or on a French keyboard). When the green power indicator turns off, continue. 6. Remove any device that may be installed in the modular bay (see Figure 2). a. Close the computer display and turn the computer over. b. Slide the modular bay latch toward the Unlock icon to release the device in the bay. Hold the latch in the unlock position while pulling the device out of the bay. c. Release the latch after you remove the device. Figure 2. Removing a Device from the Modular Bay 7. Slide the new battery firmly into the battery bay. You should hear a click when the battery is fully seated. NOTE: Softex BayManager and Docking Services do not report a second battery installed in the modular bay on the Storage Devices tab. 8. If your system is running Microsoft Windows NT with Softex Docking Services or Windows 95 or Windows 98 with Softex BayManager, click OK. Then click OK to close the Softex window.9. If you put the computer into suspend or suspend-to-disk mode, press the power button to resume normal operation. Battery Charge Gauge The battery charge gauge consists of five indicators. Each indicator represents 20 percent of full charge. If only one indicator lights up, recharge the battery before using it. To check the charge level, press the battery test button that is next to the indicators (see Figure 3). The appropriate number of indicators lights up for a few seconds to indicate the amount of charge remaining in the battery. For example, if three indicators light up, your battery has between 41 percent and 60 percent of its charge left. Figure 3.Battery Charge Gauge NOTES: An indicator that blinks rapidly when you check the battery’s charge level indicates a temporary failure or a potentially recoverable failure like overheating. Allow the battery to cool for several minutes before checking the charge level again. If the battery is experiencing a permanent failure, when you press the battery test button, you will see no indicators. If you install such a battery into the computer, the amber battery indicator on the computer flashes rapidly. To purchase a new battery, call Dell or access the Dell World Wide Web site at http://www.dell.com. Dispose of the old battery properly. Percentage of Charge When you press the battery test button, the number of indicators that light up shows an estimate of the remaining battery charge: If one indicator lights up, the battery has 1 to 20 percent of its charge remaining. If two indicators light up, the battery has 21 to 40 percent of its charge remaining. If three indicators light up, the battery has 41 to 60 percent of its charge remaining. If four indicators light up, the battery has 61 to 80 percent of its charge remaining. If five indicators light up, the battery has 81 to 100 percent of its charge remaining.First Low-Battery Warning The first low-battery warning—a blinking amber battery indicator—occurs when you have about 15 minutes of battery life left under current conditions and the computer is not connected to an electrical outlet. Figure 4 shows the battery indicator status lights. Figure 4. Status Lights 1 Power indicator 2 Drive access indicator 3 Battery indicator NOTICE: When you see a low-battery warning, save your work immediately. Then replace the battery or connect your computer to an electrical outlet. After the first low-battery warning, if no input/output (I/O) activity occurs within 75 seconds, the computer activates suspend-to-disk mode. If the computer has no suspend-to-disk partition, the computer enters suspend mode. The computer can preserve data for several hours in suspend mode. If you have set the computer to enter suspend-to-disk mode after a certain amount of time with no I/O activity, the computer enters suspend-to-disk mode before the final low-battery warning. Once suspend-to-disk mode is activated, no further power is consumed. NOTICE: Never turn off the computer while the drive access indicator is on. Doing so could cause data loss. Instead, close all of your application programs before you turn off the computer. Second Low-Battery Warning The second low-battery warning—a steady amber battery indicator—occurs when you have about 5 minutes of battery life left under current conditions and the computer is not connected to an electrical outlet. After the second low-battery warning, if no further I/O activity occurs within 15 seconds, the computer activates suspend-to-disk mode. If there is no suspend-to-disk partition, the computer enters suspend mode. The computer can preserve data for several hours in suspend mode. If the computer is already in suspend mode when a final low-battery warning occurs, the computer activates suspendto-disk mode immediately. If suspend-to-disk mode has been disabled, the computer reenters suspend mode. NOTICE: To avoid losing data (and possibly corrupting data areas on your hard-disk drive), save your work immediately after a second low-battery warning. Then connect your computer to an electrical outlet, or place the computer in suspend mode. If the battery runs completely out of power, the computer shuts off without properly closing any open files.Charging the Battery Each time you connect the computer to an electrical outlet or install a battery in a computer that is connected to an electrical outlet, the computer checks the battery's charge. The AC adapter charges the battery (if needed) and then maintains the battery's charge. NOTE: For maximum battery performance, charge the battery only at normal room temperature. If two batteries are installed in the computer, the AC adapter first charges the battery in the battery bay, then the battery in the modular bay. When installed in a computer connected to an electrical outlet, the battery immediately starts charging. The green power indicator remains steady while the AC adapter charges the battery. The indicator starts blinking when the express charge cycle is complete. While the indicator is blinking, the AC adapter provides a trickle charge to bring the battery to full capacity. The indicator continues to blink until you remove the battery or disconnect the computer from its electrical outlet. NOTICE: If the battery indicator flashes alternately green and amber while the computer is connected to an electrical outlet, disconnect the computer from the outlet and allow the computer and the battery to return to room temperature. Then reconnect the computer to its electrical outlet and continue charging the battery. If the computer is not allowed to return to room temperature, the battery stops charging before it reaches full capacity. If the computer is turned off and connected to an electrical outlet through the AC adapter, it takes the AC adapter about 1 hour to fully charge a battery that has been completely discharged. If the computer determines that the battery is near full capacity, the AC adapter skips the express-charging process and starts trickle-charging the battery. If the computer is on, it takes up to 2.5 hours to charge a fully discharged battery, depending on which devices you are using and which programs you are running. NOTE: You can leave the battery in the computer as long as you like. The battery's integrated circuitry prevents the battery from overcharging. Detecting Battery Problems A battery problem may prevent the battery from being charged to its full potential and can lead to unpredictable operation. To obtain a new battery, call Dell or access the Dell World Wide Web site at http://www.dell.com. Dell suggests you follow these precautions when using the battery: To avoid installing a defective battery in your computer, first check the battery's charge, indicated by the battery charge indicators on the battery itself, by pressing the battery test button (see Figure 3). NOTE: If the battery has a 0 (zero) percent charge, you cannot use the battery test button to check the battery's capacity. The battery gauge indicator will not light if the battery is completely drained. If, after you insert the battery in the computer, the computer's battery indicator status light (see Figure 4) flashes alternately green and amber, the battery is too hot to charge. Turn off the computer, and let the battery and computer cool to room temperature. If, after you insert the battery in the computer, the computer's battery indicator status light (see Figure 4) flashes amber for 4 seconds when you connect or disconnect the AC adapter or when you press the power button, youneed to replace the battery. If, after you insert the battery in the computer, the computer's battery indicator status light (see Figure 4) flashes rapidly amber, the battery is defective and needs to be replaced. Battery Disposal When your battery no longer holds a charge, call your local waste disposal agency or environmental agency for advice on disposing the computer’s lithium ion battery. CAUTION: Do not puncture or incinerate the battery. NOTES: The lithium ion technology used in your computer’s battery is significantly less hazardous to the environment than the lithium metal technology used in some other batteries (such as watch batteries). This computer is supplied with a lithium ion battery. Lithium ion batteries are longer lived than conventional batteries and do not require replacement as often. Spent batteries should not be placed in common household waste products. Contact local authorities for the location of a chemical waste collection program nearest you. To purchase a new battery, call Dell or access the Dell World Wide Web site at http://www.dell.com. About Battery Power You automatically conserve battery power each time you attach the computer to an electrical outlet. The battery is even being recharged when you use AC power. The battery's life expectancy is largely determined by the number of charges it receives, so use an electrical outlet to run the computer whenever possible. You can customize power management by individually controlling the computer's power conservation features. These features reduce power consumption by monitoring application programs and computer devices for inactivity and slowing down or stopping some of the computer’s internal devices. NOTES: When you use power conservation features, you often trade some of the performance of the computer for increased battery operating time. For example, if you turn off the hard-disk drive, you may experience a delay the next time the computer tries to access the hard-disk drive. Other power conservation features, such as suspend mode, stop almost all system activity. They allow you to maximize power conservation when your work is interrupted. Experiment with power conservation features to achieve the optimum power conservation for your work environment. Turning the Computer On To turn on the computer, press the power button (See Introduction). NOTE: If your computer's operating system is "locked up"— that is, it does not respond to commands— press and hold down the power button for at least five seconds to shut it off. Back to Contents PageBack to Contents Page CD-ROM, DVD-ROM, and CD-RW Drives: Dell™ Latitude™ CPx HSeries/J-Series User's Guide Using the CD-ROM and DVD-ROM Drives Caring for CDs,DVDs, and CD-RW Discs Types of Supported Discs Using the Drives The DVD-ROM and CD-ROM drives are read-only devices that let you play most commercially available 8- or 12-centimeter (cm) sound and video CDs on the computer. In addition to playing most CDs, the DVDROM drive can also play DVDs. CD-rewritable (CD-RW) drives can write to and play CD-RWs and can play CDs. Dell installed the appropriate CD-ROM drive device drivers on your hard-disk drive. Use the DVD-ROM, CD-ROM, or CD-RW drive in the computer’s modular bay or the modular bay in a C/Port Family Advanced Port Replicator (APR) or a C/Dock Family Expansion Station. None of these drives can be used externally without an APR or an Expansion Station. You must turn the computer off before installing the drive in the modular bay. For detailed instructions on installing devices in the modular bay, see "Using the Modular Bay." Figure 1. DVD-ROM, CD-ROM, or CD-RW Drive Installed in Computer NOTICE: Protect the DVD-ROM and CD-ROM drives when they are not in the modular bay. Do not squeeze the drive or place objects on top of it; doing so could damage the drive motor. Keep the drive as clean as possible. NOTICE: Always use compressed air to clean the lens in the drive. Never touch the lens. NOTICE: If the CD or DVD is not seated correctly, the drive can be damaged. To play a CD, press the eject button on the face of the CD-ROM or DVD-ROM drive or press . When the tray slides out, place the CD into the tray label side up. Make sure that the CD is seated correctly on the spindle by pressing down on the disc until it clicks in place. Then gently push in the tray. To play a DVD, press the eject button on the face of the DVD-ROM drive or press . When thetray slides out, place the DVD into the tray label side up. Make sure that the DVD is seated correctly on the spindle by pressing down on the disc until it clicks in place. Then gently push in the tray. NOTICE: Do not use the drive while the computer is in motion. Doing so could interrupt the flow of data between the disc and the hard-disk drive or diskette drive. When the CD-ROM or DVD-ROM drive is in use, the drive access indicator blinks on the computer’s front panel. If you are using the Microsoft® Windows® 95 or Windows 98 operating system, disable the autoplay feature while you use the CD-ROM or DVD-ROM drive. (The autoplay feature can interfere with the computer’s power management functions.) If Dell installed the operating system, the autoplay feature has been disabled. If you reinstall the operating system or if you installed it yourself, be sure to disable the autoplay feature if you want to use the CD-ROM or DVD-ROM drive. For instructions on changing the Auto Insert Notification option, see the operating system user’s guide. Caring for CD, DVD, CD-RW Discs When handling and using the discs, follow these precautions: Never use a damaged or warped disc. Always hold the disc by its edges. Do not touch the surface of the disc. Use a clean, dry cloth to remove dust, smudges, or fingerprints from the surface of the disc. When cleaning, wipe from the center of the disc to the edge. Never use solvents, such as benzene, record cleaners, or antistatic sprays, to clean the disc. Do not write on the surface of the disc. Store disc in its containers, placing them in a cool, dry place. Extreme temperatures may damage discs. Do not bend or drop a disc. Do not place objects on top of a disc. Types of Supported Discs Your computer's CD-ROM, DVD-ROM, and CD-RW drives are able to play the following types of disc formats: CD-ROM red-book audio discs (CD-DA) CD-ROM yellow-book mode-1 and mode-2 data discs CD-ROM XA (mode-2 form 1 and form 2; without Adaptive Differential Pulse Code modulation[ADPCM]) CD-I (mode-2 form 1 and form 2) CD-I Ready CD-Bridge Photo CD, CD-recordable (CD-R) (single and multisession) Video CD CD-rewritable (CD-RW) (the 24x CD-ROM and DVD-ROM drives can read, but not write to, CD-RW discs; only the CD-RWs can write to this type of disc) DVD-5 (the DVD-ROM drive supports the DVD-5 format) Back to Contents PageBack to Contents Page DualPoint Integrated Pointing Device: Dell™ Latitude™ CPx HSeries/J-Series User's Guide Cursor Pointing Devices Customizing the DualPoint Integrated Pointing Device Using the Touch Pad Changing the Track Stick Cap Using the Track Stick Cursor Pointing Devices Your Dell portable computer is equipped with the unique Dell DualPoint integrated pointing device. The DualPoint integrated pointing device supports two types of cursor pointing devices (see Figure 1 and Figure 2) that perform traditional mouse functions: the touch pad and the track stick. You can choose to use the touch pad only, the track stick only, or both at the same time. Two sets of buttons located above and below the touch pad enable you to perform standard mouse functions with you thumb without removing your hands from the keyboard. You can also take advantage of "buttonless" selection by simply clicking or double-clicking on either the touch pad or the track stick. DualPoint integrated pointing device software allows you to set the default for the type of cursor pointing device you want to use, as well as sensitivity, motion, and drag and drop features of both the touch pad and track stick. NOTES: When enabled, the DualPoint integrated pointing device (whether touch pad only, track stick only, or both) uses interrupt request (IRQ) 12. No other device can use IRQ12 while the DualPoint integrated pointing device is enabled. When you attach an external PS/2-mouse to the computer, the DualPoint integrated pointing device is automatically disabled. Using the Touch Pad The Personal System/2 (PS/2) touch pad (see Figure 1) detects the position of your finger over a touchsensitive area to position the cursor within the display screen. The touch pad provides the computer full mouse functionality. The touch pad’s two buttons, located directly below the touch pad, correspond to the left and right buttons on a standard mouse. Figure 1. PS/2 Touch PadTo best use the touch pad, use the following techniques: To move the cursor, lightly slide your finger over the smooth sensor area. To select an object, gently tap once on the surface of the touch pad or use your thumb to press the left touch pad button. The touch pad buttons perform standard mouse functions. To select and move (or drag) an object, position the cursor on the object and tap down-up-down on the touch pad. On the second down motion, leave your finger on the touch pad and move the selected object by sliding your finger across the surface. To double-click an object, position the cursor on the object and then tap the touch pad or the left touch pad button twice. Using the Track Stick The track stick (see Figure 2) detects the pressure and direction that you move your finger when touching the track stick cap located near the center of the keyboard. The two buttons located between the touch pad and the space bar on the keyboard correspond to the left and right buttons on a standard mouse. Figure 2. Track Stick To best use the track stick, use the following techniques: To move the cursor, apply pressure to the track stick with your right or left index finger. Press up or down to move the cursor to the top or bottom of the display screen. Press left or right to move the cursor to the left or right of the display screen.To select an object, tap once on the track stick or use your thumb to press the left track stick button. The track stick buttons perform standard mouse functions. To select and move (or drag) an object, position the cursor on the object. Then press and hold the left track stick button. Leave your thumb on the button and move the selected object by pressing the track stick in the desired direction. To double-click an object, position the cursor on the object and then tap the left track stick button twice or tap the track stick itself twice. The track stick functions much like the touch pad in that it allows you to use buttons for mouse functions or the pointing device itself. Customizing the DualPoint Integrated Pointing Device The DualPoint integrated pointing device software allows you to set the default for the type of cursor pointing device you want to use, as well as sensitivity, motion, and drag and drop features of both the touch pad and track stick.To customize the DualPoint integrated pointing device, perform the following steps: 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and click Control Panel. 2. Double-click the Mouse icon to open the Mouse Properties window and click the Touch tab. 3. Select the settings that work best for you and click Apply. 4. Click OK to save the settings and close the window. You can also click the touch pad icon on the taskbar and click Touch Pad Properties to open the Mouse Properties control panel. Changing the Track Stick Cap Your computer came with four additional track stick caps in assorted colors. You may need to change the track stick cap if it wears down from prolonged use. To change the track stick cap, perform the following: 1. Pull the cap off the track stick (see Figure 3). Figure 3. Removing the Track Stick Cap2. Align a new cap over the square track stick post and gently press the cap down onto the post. 3. Test the track stick to ensure that the cap is seated properly. Back to Contents PageBack to Contents Page Display: Dell™ Latitude™ CPx H-Series/J-Series User's Guide Adjusting the Brightness Customizing Video Resolution Expanded Video Mode Dual-Display Mode Video Drivers and Video Resolution If You Have Display Problems Adjusting the Brightness To accommodate local lighting conditions or video output from the software you are using, you can use the key combinations shown in Table 1. NOTE: When you run the computer on battery power, set your computer's brightness control to the lowest setting that affords comfortable viewing. You can conserve up to 10 percent of battery power by using the minimum brightness setting. Table 1. Brightness Key Combinations and Their Functions Key Combinations Function + down arrow Decreases brightness + up arrow Increases brightness NOTES: You cannot change contrast on an active-matrix (thin film transistor [TFT]) display. To use key combinations on an external keyboard, enable the External Hot Key option in the System Setup program and use instead of . Expanded Video Mode When working in text mode, you can select the font used to display text. Press to toggle between a regular serif font and a serif font with extra leading. Expanded video mode is useful if you are working in 800 x 600 resolution on a 14.1-inch XGA display. NOTE: You may have trouble using the display fonts feature with MS-DOS® programs that use downloaded fonts.Video Drivers and Video Resolution The Dell-installed video drivers work with the operating system to let you customize the video resolution and number of screen colors on your display. NOTE: The Dell-installed video drivers are designed to offer the best performance on your computer. Dell recommends that you use only these drivers with your factory-installed operating system. Table 2 lists the combinations of resolutions and colors that the computer supports. Table 2. Display Resolution, Colors, and Refresh Rates Resolution Color Depth External CRT Display Available Refresh Television as Secondary Display Available Refresh 640 x 480 (VGA) 256 (8-bit) 60, 75, 85 Hz 60 Hz NTSC, 50 Hz PAL 640 x 480 (VGA) 65 k (16-bit) 60, 75, 85 Hz 60 Hz NTSC, 50 Hz PAL 640 x 480 (VGA) 16 M (24-bit) 60, 75, 85 Hz 60 Hz NTSC, 50 Hz PAL 640 x 480 (VGA) 4.2 B (32-bit) 60, 75, 85 Hz 60 Hz NTSC, 50 Hz PAL 800 x 600 (SVGA) 256 (8-bit) 60, 75, 85 Hz 60 Hz NTSC, 50 Hz PAL 800 x 600 (SVGA) 65 k (16-bit) 60, 75, 85 Hz 60 Hz NTSC, 50 Hz PAL 800 x 600 (SVGA) 16 M (24-bit) 60, 75, 85 Hz 60 Hz NTSC, 50 Hz PAL 800 x 600 (SVGA) 4.2 B (32-bit) 60, 75, 85 Hz 60 Hz NTSC, 50 Hz PAL 1024 x 768 (XGA) 256 (8-bit) 60, 70, 75, 85 Hz 60 Hz NTSC, 50 Hz PAL 1024 x 768 (XGA) 65 k (16-bit) 60, 70, 75, 85 Hz 60 Hz NTSC, 50 Hz PAL 1024 x 768 (XGA) 16 M (24-bit) 60, 70, 75, 85 Hz 60 Hz NTSC, 50 Hz PAL 1024 x 768 (XGA) 4.2 B (32-bit) 60, 70, 75, 85 Hz 60 Hz NTSC, 50 Hz PAL 1280 x 1024 (SXGA)* 256 (8-bit) 60, 70, 75, 85 Hz 60 Hz NTSC, 50 Hz PAL 1280 x 1024 (SXGA)* 65 k (16-bit) 60, 70, 75, 85 Hz 60 Hz NTSC, 50 Hz PAL 1280 x 1024 (SXGA)* 16 M (24-bit) 60, 70, 75, 85 Hz 60 Hz NTSC, 50 Hz PAL 1280 x 1024 (SXGA)* 4.2 B (32-bit) 60, 70, 75, 85 Hz 60 Hz NTSC, 50 Hz PAL1600 x 1200 (UGA)* 256 (8-bit) 60 Hz, 85 Hz 60 Hz NTSC, 50 Hz PAL 1600 x 1200 (UGA)* 65 k (16-bit) 60 Hz, 85 Hz 60 Hz NTSC, 50 Hz PAL 1600 x 1200 (UGA)* 16 M (24-bit) 60 Hz, 85 Hz 60 Hz NTSC, 50 Hz PAL 1600 x 1200 (UGA)* 4.2 B (32-bit) 60 Hz, 85 Hz 60 Hz NTSC, 50 Hz PAL *NOTE: Pan mode may be turned on for the 1280 x 1024 (SXGA), 1400 x 1050 (SXGA Plus), and 1600 x 1200 (UGA) computer displays. In pan mode the screen resolution is too high to be completely displayed on the computer display. For example, the taskbar that usually appears at the bottom of the desktop may no longer be visible. To view the rest of the screen, use the touch pad or track stick to pan up and down and left and right. NOTICE: Before adjusting the refresh rate on an external monitor, refer to the monitor's user's guide. You can damage the monitor by using an unsupported refresh rate. To display more colors, select a lower resolution. If you select a resolution and color combination that the system does not support, the system automatically selects the next supported combination. NOTE: Color depth is based on 256 colors for 8 bit, 65,536 colors for 16 bit, 16,842,752 colors for 24 bit, and 4,294,967,296 colors for 32 bit displays. Table 3 lists the maximum color depth possible for various combinations of resolutions without DVD and 3D. Table 3. Display Resolution and Color Depth Without DVD and 3D Running Maximum Color Depth Possible (in bits) Primary/Secondary 640 x 480 800 x 600 1024 x 768 1280 x 1024 640 x 480 (8 bit) 32 32 32 32 800 x 600 (8 bit) 32 32 32 32 1024 x 768 (8 bit) 32 32 32 32 1280 x 1024 (8 bit) 32 32 32 32 1600 x 1200 (8 bit) 32 32 32 32 text text t t t 640 x 480 (16 bit) 32 32 32 32 800 x 600 (16 bit) 32 32 32 32 1024 x 768 (16 bit) 32 32 32 32 1280 x 1024 (16 bit) 32 32 32 32 1600 x 1200 (16 bit) 32 32 24 24 t t t t t 640 x 480 (24 bit) 32 32 32 32800 x 600 (24 bit) 32 32 32 32 1024 x 768 (24 bit) 32 32 32 32 1280 x 1024 (24 bit) 32 32 32 24 1600 x 1200 (24 bit) 24 24 16 8 t t t t t 640 x 480 (32 bit) 32 32 32 32 800 x 600 (32 bit) 32 32 32 32 1024 x 768 (32 bit) 32 32 32 24 1280 x 1024 (32 bit) 32 32 24 16 1600 x 1200 (32 bit) 8 8 -- -- Customizing Video Resolution 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. The Control Panel window appears. 2. Double-click the Display icon. The Display Properties window appears. 3. Click the Settings tab, and then set the resolution by dragging the slider in the Screen Area box. In the Colors box, choose the number of colors from the menu provided. For more information, see your operating system documentation. If you choose a resolution or color palette that is higher than the display supports, the settings adjust automatically to the closest possible setting. Dual-Display Mode With the Microsoft® Windows® 98 operating system, you can use an external monitor as an extension of your display. To set up your computer for dual-display mode, perform the following steps: 1. Connect the external monitor, TV, or projector. 2. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 3. In the Control Panel window, double-click the Display icon. 4. In the Display Properties window, click the Settings tab. 5. Change the Colors option to 256 Color or True Color (24 bit). 6. Change the Screen Area to the appropriate size for your display. 7. Click the Advanced... button. 8. When the RAGE MOBILITY -M1 Properties window appears, select the Displays tab. 9. Click the Monitor button. The dual display option is activated. 10. Click Yes when prompted to restart your system. 11. When the system has restarted, reopen the Display icon in the Control Panel. 12. Click the Settings tab. Two displays now appear in this window. 13. Click the display that is grayed out. When asked if you want to enable this display, click Yes, and then click Apply. NOTE: True Simul-mode (the ability to simultaneously display video of the same content and resolution on both the computer display screen and the external display) is not supported if the system is booted to MS-DOS®, using a full-screen MS-DOS session under a Microsoft Windows operating system, or the ATI Mobility M1 video driver is not loaded. This limitation may also be noted in operating systems other than Microsoft Windows. If You Have Display Problems If your computer is receiving power, but nothing appears on your display (such as light, text, or graphics) or the display image does not appear as you would expect, try the following measures to resolve the problem: 1. If the display is blank, you may be in suspend or standby mode. Press the power button to resume from suspend mode or standby mode. If the display is blank and the power light-emitting diode (LED) is on, the display may have timed out. In this case, press any key on the keyboard or move the mouse to resume normal operation. 2. If the low-battery light is blinking, connect the AC adapter to the computer or replace the battery. 3. Adjust the brightness. 4. If your computer is attached to an external monitor, press to switch the video image to the display. Back to Contents PageBack to Contents Page Securing Your Computer: Dell™ Latitude™ CPx H-Series/J-Series User's Guide About Passwords Using a Hard-Disk Drive Password Using a Primary Password Physically Securing the Computer and the Hard-Disk Drive Using an Administrator Password Asset Tag Utility About Passwords A primary password prevents unauthorized access to the computer at start-up. An administrator password can be used in place of the primary password. A hard-disk drive password helps prevent the unauthorized access of data on the hard-disk drive, even when the device is placed into another computer. NOTES: All three passwords are disabled when you receive your computer. You need to assign those passwords if you require password security for your computer. Some companies may assign any or all of these passwords before distributing the computer. If you are using the Microsoft® Windows NT® operating system, use the System Setup program to assign all passwords. NOTICE: The password features provide a high level of security for the data in your computer or hard-disk drive. However, they are not foolproof. If your data requires more security, you should obtain and use additional forms of protection, such as data encryption programs or PC Cards with encryption features. If you forget any of your passwords, call Dell. For your protection, Dell’s technical support staff will ask you for proof of your identity to make sure that an unauthorized person is not trying to use the computer. Using a Primary Password The primary password allows you to protect the computer from unauthorized access. After assigning a primary password, you must enter it each time you turn on your computer. The following message appears each time you turn on the computer: Please type in the primary or administrator password and press . To continue, type your password and press . NOTE: If no password is entered within 2 minutes, the computer returns to its previous state. If you have assigned an administrator password, you can use it instead of the primary password. The computer does not specifically prompt you for the administrator password.NOTICE: If you disable the administrator password, the primary password is also disabled. Using an Administrator Password The administrator password is designed to give system administrators or service technicians in large companies access to computers for repair or reconfiguration. The administrators or technicians can assign identical administrator passwords to groups of computers as they are unpacked and configured, leaving the primary password free to be assigned by the user. When you set an administrator password, the Configure Setup option becomes available in the System Setup program. The Configure Setup option allows you to restrict access to the System Setup program in the same way a system password restricts access to the system. The administrator password can be used in place of the primary password. Whenever you are prompted to enter the primary password, you can enter the administrator password instead. NOTE: The administrator password provides access to the system, but it does not provide access to the hard-disk drive when it is protected by a password. If you forget the primary password and do not have an administrator password assigned, or if you have both a primary and an administrator password assigned but forget them both, call Dell. NOTICE: If you disable the administrator password, the primary password is also disabled. Using a Hard-Disk Drive Password The hard-disk drive password helps protect the data on your hard-disk drive from unauthorized access. You can also assign a password for the modular hard-disk drive (if one is being used) that can be the same as or different from the password for the primary hard-disk drive. NOTE: Only hard-disk drives purchased from Dell for use with the Latitude C-Family of portable computers support the hard-disk drive password option. After assigning a hard-disk drive password, you must enter it each time you turn on the computer and each time you resume normal operation from suspend mode or standby mode. If the hard-disk drive password is enabled, the following message appears each time you turn on the computer: Please type in the hard-disk drive password and press . To continue, enter the hard-disk drive password. Press to return the computer to its previous state— suspend or standby mode. NOTE: If no password is entered within 2 minutes, the computer returns to its previous state. If you enter the wrong password, the following message appears:Invalid password [Press Enter to retry] If the correct password is not entered in three attempts, the computer tries to boot from another bootable device if the Boot First device option in the System Setup program is set to allow it. If the Boot First device option is not set to allow booting from another device, the computer returns to the state it was in when you turned it on—suspend or standby mode. NOTES: If the hard-disk drive password, the modular hard-disk drive password, and the primary password are the same, you are prompted only for the primary password. If the hard-disk drive password is different from the primary password, you are prompted for both. Two different passwords provide greater security. The administrator password provides access to the system, but it does not provide access to the hard-disk drive when it is protected by a password. Physically Securing the Computer and the Hard-Disk Drive To prevent unauthorized removal of the computer, you can use a security cable to attach the computer to an immovable object. Your computer has two security cable slots: One security cable slot is located between the speaker and the hard-disk drive. (See Figure 1 in "Introduction.") The other security cable slot is located between the S-Video connector and the fan's air intake. (See Figure 2 in "Introduction.") Description of Security Cable Slots The security cable slots allow you to attach a commercially available antitheft device to the computer. Antitheft devices for portable computers usually include a segment of metal-stranded cable with an attached locking device and associated key. When your computer is installed in a Dell Latitude C/Dock Family Expansion Station, use the security cable slot located between the S-Video connector and the fan's air intake to secure your computer. You can use either security cable slot to secure your computer when it is not docked to a Dell Latitude C/Dock Family Expansion Station. However, to lock your computer and prevent unauthorized removal of the hard-disk drive, insert the locking device into the security cable slot located between the hard-disk drive and the speaker, and lock the device with its associated key. Basic Instructions for Using Security Cable Slots To prevent unauthorized removal of your computer, loop the cable around an immovable object, insert the locking device into either of the security cable slots, and lock the device. See Figure 1 for an example of how to secure your computer. Complete instructions for installing this kind of antitheft device are usually included with the device. Figure 1. Securing the ComputerNOTE: Antitheft devices differ in design. Before purchasing such a device, make sure that it will work with the security cable slot in your computer. Asset Tag Utility Dell has installed the Asset Tag utility on your computer. The Asset Tag utility allows you to enter an asset tag number that you or your company assigns to the computer. The default System Setup screens do not show the asset tag number unless you enter one by using this utility. You can also use the Asset Tag utility to enter an owner tag that appears in the system log-on screen and with the primary password prompt. Viewing Existing Asset Tag and Service Numbers To view existing asset tag and service tag numbers, perform the following steps: 1. Click the Start button, point to Programs, and click MS-DOS Prompt. 2. Type cd c:\Dell\Util and press . 3. Type asset and press . Assigning an Asset Tag Number An asset tag number can have up to ten characters; any combination of characters excluding spaces is valid. To assign or change an asset tag number, perform the following steps: 1. Click the Start button, point to Programs, and click MS-DOS Prompt. 2. Type cd c:\Dell\Util and press . 3. Type asset and a space followed by the new number, and press . For example, type the following command line and press : asset 1234$ABCD& 4. When the system prompts you to verify the asset tag number, type y and press . The system displays the new or modified asset tag number and the service tag number. Deleting an Asset Tag Number To delete the asset tag number without assigning a new one, perform the following steps: 1. Click the Start button, point to Programs, and click MS-DOS Prompt. 2. Type cd c:\Dell\Util and press . 3. Type asset /d and press . Assigning an Owner Tag An owner tag can have up to 48 characters; any combination of letters, numbers, and spaces is valid. To assign an owner tag, perform the following steps: 1. Click the Start button, point to Programs, and click MS-DOS Prompt. 2. Type cd c:\Dell\Util and press . 3. Type asset /o and a space followed by the new owner tag, and press . For example, type the following command line and press : asset /o ABC Company 4. When the system prompts you to verify the owner tag, type y and press . The system displays the new owner tag. Deleting an Owner Tag To delete the owner tag without assigning a new one, perform the following steps: 1. Click the Start button, point to Programs, and click MS-DOS Prompt. 2. Type cd c:\Dell\Util and press . 3. Type asset /o /d and press . NOTE: For security, you cannot set, change, or delete the owner tag if the primary or administrator passwords are set. Table 1 lists the command-line options you can use with the Asset Tag utility. To use one of these options, open an MS-DOS® prompt, type asset and a space followed by the option, and then press . Table 1. Asset Tag Utility Command-Line Options Asset Tag Option Description /d Deletes the asset tag number /o Specifies a new owner tag /o /d Deletes the owner tag /? Displays the Asset Tag utility help screen Back to Contents PageBack to Contents Page Diskette Drive: Dell™ Latitude™ CPx H-Series/J-Series User's Guide Your computer was shipped with a 3.5-inch diskette drive (see Figure 1) in the modular bay. To use another device in the modular bay, first remove the diskette drive. For detailed instructions on installing devices in the modular bay, see "Using the Modular Bay." NOTE: If the computer is docked to the C/Port Family Advanced Port Replicator (APR) or the C/Dock Family Expansion Station, turn off the computer and undock it before installing or removing a diskette drive. The diskette drive lets you install programs and transfer data using 3.5-inch diskettes. Figure 1. Diskette Drive Installed in Computer To use the diskette drive, insert a 3.5-inch diskette into the drive (label side up and metal end first). Push the diskette into the drive until the eject button extends outside the drive casing. NOTICE: Do not travel with a diskette in the diskette drive. Doing so could break the eject button and damage the drive. To remove a diskette from the drive, press the eject button to release the diskette, and then pull the diskette out of the drive. When data is being accessed from the diskette drive in the modular bay, the drive access indicator blinks. NOTE: You can use the diskette drive externally by connecting it to the parallel connector on the back of the computer. If you are running either the Microsoft® Windows® 95, Windows 98, or Windows 2000 operating system on your computer and the Diskette Reconfig option is enabled in the System Setup program, you do not have to reboot the computer when you connect the diskette drive to the parallel connector. If you are running the Microsoft Windows NT® operating system on your computer, you do need to reboot the computer after you connect the diskette drive. Back to Contents PageBack to Contents Page Connecting External Devices: Dell™ Latitude™ CPx H-Series/JSeries User's Guide Connectors Mouse Audio Diskette Drive S-Video TV-Out Connecting an External Monitor Keyboard Using an External Monitor Keypad Connectors Use Figure 1 to locate the connectors on the back of the computer. NOTICE: When disconnecting external devices from the back of the computer, wait 5 seconds after turning off the computer before you disconnect a device to avoid possible damage to the system board. Figure 1. I/O Connectors 1 Video connector 2 Parallel connector 3 Docking connector 4 USB connector 5 PS/2 connector 6 Serial connector 7 AC power connector 8 Infrared port Use Figure 2 to locate the connectors on the side of the computer. Figure 2. I/O Connectors on Right Side of Computer1 Internal modem connector (available only on CPt SSeries) 2 S-Video connector 3 Audio jacks (3) Audio You can connect audio devices such as speakers, microphones, headphones, and record/playback devices to your computer. The following information tells you how to connect the cables. Figure 3 shows the locations of the audio jacks and the S-Video connector. Connect the audio cable from a microphone to the microphone jack, also called the MIC IN jack. Connect the audio cable from the speakers to the headphones/speakers jack, also called the lineout/speaker-out jack. Connect the line-out cable from a record/playback device to the line-in/audio-in jack. Cassette players, CD players, radios, stereo systems, and tape players are all record/playback devices. Connect the S-Video input/output (I/O) cable from a record/playback device to the S-Video connector. VCRs and video cameras are record/playback devices. Figure 3. Connecting Audio and S-Video Devices1 Microphone (MIC IN) 2 Speakers and headphones (line-out/speaker-out) 3 Record/Playback (line-in/audio-in) 4 S-Video connector NOTE: The C/Port Family Advanced Port Replicator (APR) also has a headphones/speaker jack. The C/Dock Family Expansion Station has all three jacks. If your computer is running the Microsoft® Windows® 95 operating system, you can control the sound on your computer through the Dell Control Center Speaker window, the System Setup program, and key combinations. S-Video TV-Out You can connect a television with an S-Video connector to your computer. Figure 3 shows the location of the S-Video connector. To connect the cables, follow these guidelines: If your television uses an S-Video cable for video input, connect one end of that cable directly to your computer's S-Video TV-out connector and the other end into your television's S-Video connector. Connecting the S-Video cable that came with your television to the television's S-Video connector and to the S-Video TV-out connector on your computer allows your computer to output video information to your television. If your television uses a composite video cable for video input, you need both the Composite TV-Out Adapter cable that came with your computer and the composite video cable that came with your television. Connecting these cables together, then connecting them to your television composite videoin connector and your computer's S-Video TV-out connector, allows your computer to output video information to your television. To connect a television which has a composite video-in connector to your computer's S-Video TV-out connector, perform the following steps: 1. Connect the Composite TV-Out Adapter cable that came with your computer to your computer's S-Video TV-out connector. 2. Connect the other end of the Composite TV-Out Adapter cable to your television's composite video cable. 3. Connect the composite video cable to your television's composite video connector. Keyboard You can attach a Personal System/2 (PS/2)-compatible external 101- or 102-key keyboard to the computer's mini-Deutsche Industrie Norm (DIN) connector, as shown in Figure 4.Figure 4. Attaching an External Keyboard NOTE: If the computer is in suspend mode or suspend-to-disk mode when you attach an external keyboard, the device is recognized immediately by the computer when it resumes normal operation. You can use the computer's keyboard and an external keyboard at the same time. When you attach a keyboard to the computer, the embedded numeric keypad is automatically disabled. On an external keyboard, the key acts the same way as the key on the computer’s keyboard (if the External Hot Key option is enabled in the System Setup program). You can also connect an external keyboard to the C/Port Family APR or the C/Dock Family Expansion Station. Keypad You can attach a PS/2-compatible external numeric keypad to the computer's mini-DIN keypad connector. NOTE: If the computer is in suspend mode or suspend-to-disk mode when you attach an external keypad, the device is recognized immediately by the computer when it resumes normal operation. When you attach a numeric keypad to the computer, the embedded numeric keypad is automatically disabled. The indicators on the integrated keyboard track the operation of an external numeric keypad. You can also connect an external keypad to the C/Port Family APR or C/Dock Family Expansion Station. Mouse You can attach a PS/2-compatible mouse to the computer's mini-DIN mouse connector, as shown in Figure 5. Figure 5. Connecting an External MouseNOTE: If the computer is in suspend mode or suspend-to-disk mode when you attach an external mouse, the device is recognized immediately by the computer when it resumes normal operation. However, programs that were already running may need to be restarted in order to recognize the mouse. When you attach a PS/2 mouse to the computer, the DualPoint integrated pointing device is automatically disabled. If you disconnect the mouse, you must shut down the computer or enter suspend or standby mode and then resume from it before the DualPoint integrated pointing device is operational. If you do not do this, the DualPoint integrated pointing device resumes operation in standard PS/2 mode, which means that many of the configuration features are disabled. If you are using a PS/2-compatible mouse that is not made by Microsoft and the mouse does not work properly, reboot the computer. If the mouse still does not work, install the drivers from the diskette that came with the mouse and reboot the computer. You can also connect an external mouse to the C/Port Family APR or the C/Dock Family Expansion Station. Diskette Drive The diskette drive can be used as an external device if you have a CD-ROM, DVD-ROM, second hard-disk, or LS-120 drive; battery; or travel module in the modular bay. The external diskette drive letter is A. If there is a diskette drive in the modular bay, the external diskette drive letter is B. Use the parallel diskette drive cable that came with the computer to connect the drive to the parallel connector on the I/O panel, as shown in Figure 6. Figure 6. Using the Diskette Drive As an External DeviceNOTICE: When the diskette drive is not being used externally, remove the parallel diskette drive cable from the parallel connector. NOTICE: Use the parallel diskette drive cable only with the diskette drive. Do not try to connect any other device to the computer with this cable. If the Diskette Reconfig option is set to Any Time in the System Setup program, you do not have to turn the computer off when you connect the diskette drive to the parallel connector. The drive access indicator does not blink when data is being accessed from the diskette drive connected to the parallel connector. NOTICE: Protect the diskette drive when it is not in the modular bay. Do not squeeze the drive or place objects on top of it; doing so could damage the drive motor. Connecting an External Monitor The computer's video connector is used to connect an external monitor to the computer. To attach an external monitor, perform the following steps. NOTICE: Do not place the monitor directly on top of your portable computer, even if it is closed. Doing so can crack the computer case, the display, or both. 1. Make sure that the external monitor is turned off. Set the monitor on a monitor stand, desk top, or other level surface near your computer. 2. Connect the external monitor's video cable to the computer. Plug the video cable connector into the matching video connector on the back of the computer, as shown in Figure 7. If the video cable is not permanently attached to the monitor, connect it to the monitor also. Figure 7. Connecting an External MonitorBe sure to tighten all the screws on the video cable connector(s) to eliminate radio frequency interference (RFI). 3. Connect your external monitor to a grounded electrical outlet. Plug the three-prong connector on one end of the monitor's power cable into a grounded power strip or some other grounded power source. If the cable is not permanently attached to the monitor, connect it to the monitor also. You can also connect an external monitor to the C/Port Family APR or the C/Dock Family Expansion Station. NOTE: If you are using the Microsoft Windows 98 operating system, you can use an external monitor as an extension of your display. For more information, see the Windows 98 documentation or "Dual-Display Mode." Using an External Monitor When an external monitor is connected to the computer, the video image automatically appears on the external monitor's screen when you boot your computer. To toggle the video image between the display, an external monitor, or both simultaneously, press on the keyboard. Press on an external keyboard if the External Hot Key option is enabled in the System Setup program. If the external monitor is turned off when you boot your computer, the computer still sends the video image to the external monitor. In this case, you will not see an image on either the computer's display or the external monitor. To see an image, turn on the external monitor or switch the video image to the computer’s display by pressing on the keyboard or on an external keyboard if the External Hot Key option is enabled in the System Setup program. Back to Contents PageBack to Contents Page Keyboard: Dell™ Latitude™ CPx H-Series/J-Series User's Guide Embedded Numeric Keypad Speaker Key Combinations Display Key Combinations System Function Key Combinations Power Conservation Key Combinations Optical Media Drive Key Combinations Processing Speed Key Combinations Embedded Numeric Keypad As you work, you may want to use the embedded numeric keypad (see Figure 1) to enter numbers in spreadsheet or financial programs. The embedded numeric keypad shares some of the keys on your computer's keyboard. The number and symbol characters are marked to the right on these keys. To activate the embedded numeric keypad, press . The Num Lock indicator lights up. Figure 1. Embedded Numeric Keypad Some key combinations can be used whether the keypad is off or on. NOTE: On an external keyboard, use with the appropriate keys if the External Hot Key option is enabled in the System Setup program. Use the numeric keypad combinations in Table 1 to enable and disable several numeric keypad functions. Table 1. Embedded Numeric Keypad Key Combinations When Keypad Is On Function Toggles the embedded numeric keypad off Temporarily disables the embedded numeric keypad; enables the lowercase characters/functions of the keyboard Temporarily disables the embedded numeric keypad; enables the uppercase characters/functions of the keyboard Temporarily enables a cursor-control key in the embedded numeric keypad When Keypad Is Off Function Toggles the embedded numeric keypad on Temporarily enables a cursor-control key in the embedded numeric keypad Temporarily enables a number or symbol key in the embedded numeric keypad Display Key Combinations NOTE: On an external keyboard, use with the appropriate keys if the External Hot Key option is enabled in the System Setup program. Use the key combinations in Table 2 to adjust the computer's display. Table 2. Display Key Combinations Key Combinations Function + down arrow Incrementally decreases brightness. + up arrow Incrementally increases brightness. + right arrow Decreases contrast, which has no effect on an active-matrix display. (Not supported on DSTN screens.1 ) + left arrow Increases contrast, which has no effect on an active-matrix display. (Not supported on DSTN screens.1 ) (not supported on Dell Latitude CPx H-Series/JSeries) Toggles the computer's display between regular video mode and reverse video mode (white on black). This key combination works only if the computer is in text mode; it has no effect if the computer is running a graphical operating system or application program. (Not supported on the Dell Latitude CPx H-Series/J-Series portable computer with ATI Mobility M1 video controller.) Toggles the computer’s display between expanded mode and regular video mode. Switches the video image to the next display in the following sequence: the display, an external monitor, or both displays simultaneously. This key combination may not be supported under certain conditions.2 Turns off the display. This key combination may not be supported under certain conditions.3 1 Contrast cannot be changed on an active-matrix (thin film transistor [TFT]) display. To use key combinations on an external keyboard, enable the External Hot Key option in the System Setup program and use instead of . 2 True Simul-mode (the ability to simultaneously display video of the same content and resolution on both the computer display screen and the external display) is not supported if the system is booted to MSDOS®, using a full-screen MS-DOS session under a Microsoft® Windows® operating system, or the ATI Mobility M1 video driver is not loaded. This limitation may also be noted in operating systems other than Microsoft Windows. 3 Certain key combinations may not function with the Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI) or may require configuration with the Power Management Properties window in the Control Panel. See Power Management Settings. Power Conservation Key Combinations NOTE: On an external keyboard, use with the appropriate keys if the External Hot Key option is enabled in the System Setup program. Use the key combinations in Table 3 to activate or turn off the computer's power conservation features. Table 3. Power Conservation Key Combinations Key Combinations Function Turns off the display* Turns off the hard-disk drive* Activates suspend, sleep, or standby mode or on French keyboards Activates suspend-to-disk mode* * This key combination does not function with ACPI if the settings have not been configured with the Power Management Properties window in the Control Panel. See Power Management Settings. Processing Speed Key Combinations NOTE: On an external keyboard, use with the appropriate keys if the External Hot Keyoption is enabled in the System Setup program. Use the key combinations in Table 4 to change the computer's processing speed. Table 4. Processing Speed Key Combinations <\> Switches between the microprocessor's maximum speed and a slower compatibility speed <\> In full MS-DOS mode or in a full-screen MS-DOS box, switches between the microprocessor’s maximum speed and a slower compatibility speed Speaker Key Combinations NOTE: On an external keyboard, use with the appropriate keys if the External Hot Key option is enabled in the System Setup program. Use the key combinations in Table 5 to adjust the computer's speaker volume and to enable and disable the speakers. Table 5. Speaker Key Combinations Key Combinations Function Volume Up: Increases the volume of the integrated speakers and the external speakers, if attached Volume Down: Decreases the volume of the integrated speakers and the external speakers, if attached Mute Toggle: Enables and disables the integrated speakers and the external speakers, if attached System Function Key Combinations NOTE: On an external keyboard, use with the appropriate keys if the External Hot Key option is enabled in the System Setup program. Use the key combinations in Table 6 to access MS-DOS, open the System Setup program, and open the Battery Status screen of the System Setup program. Table 6. System Function Key Combinations Key Combinations Function Restarts (reboots) the computer in MS-DOS mode.For Microsoft Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows 2000, and Windows NT® operating systems, click the Start button and click Shut Down. * Opens the System Setup program. * Opens the Battery Status screen of the System Setup program. * This key combination does not function with ACPI. Optical Media Drive Key Combinations NOTE: On an external keyboard, use with the appropriate keys if the External Hot Key option is enabled in the System Setup program. To eject drive, press . Back to Contents PageBack to Contents Page I/O Connectors: Dell™ Latitude™ CPx H-Series/J-Series User's Guide About the I/O Connectors PS/2 Connector Video Connector Serial Connector Parallel Connector AC Power Connector Docking Connector Infrared Port USB Connector About the I/O Connectors You can connect external devices to the input/output (I/O) connectors. The computer's basic input/output system (BIOS) detects the presence of external devices when you boot (start) or reboot your computer. Figure 1 shows the connectors on the back of your computer. NOTE: For more information, see "Connecting External Devices." NOTICE: When disconnecting external devices from the back of the computer, wait 5 seconds after turning off the computer before you disconnect a device to avoid possible damage to the system board. Figure 1. I/O Connectors 1 Video connector 2 Parallel connector 3 Docking connector 4 USB connector 5 PS/2 connector 6 Serial connector 7 AC power connector 8 Infrared portNOTE: Some external devices require you to load software called device drivers into system memory before the devices will work. These device drivers help your computer recognize the external device and direct its operation. Instructions for installing this software are usually included in the upgrade kits. Video Connector Use the 15-hole video connector to attach an external monitor to the computer. See "Connecting an External Monitor" for more information about connecting an external monitor. Parallel Connector Use the 25-hole parallel connector to attach a parallel device to the computer. The parallel connector is used primarily for printers. You can also connect the diskette drive to the parallel connector. The parallel port sends and receives data in parallel format, where eight data bits (one byte) are sent simultaneously over eight separate lines. The port can be configured as a unidirectional (output-only) port for devices such as a printer or as a bidirectional port for devices such as a network adapter. The computer's integrated parallel port is designated as LPT1. The Microsoft® Windows® operating systems automatically recognize the parallel device and configure it correctly. The parallel port can also be configured for compatibility with the PS/2 standard. Docking Connector The docking connector supports Dell's C/Port Family APR and C/Dock Family Expansion Station docking solutions. USB Connector The USB connector supports the use of a USB hub device to attach multiple devices. USB devices are typically low-speed peripherals such as mice, keyboards, printers, and computer speakers. The C/Port APR Family and the C/Dock Expansion Station Family docking solutions have two USB connectors. NOTE: If you are using a USB external keyboard, do not enter the System Setup program by using a keyboard command on the external keyboard. Instead, press on the computer's keyboard. PS/2 Connector Use the mini-Deutsche Industrie Norm (DIN) PS/2 connector to attach PS/2-compatible devices such as a mouse, keyboard, or external numeric keypad. NOTE: If the computer is in suspend mode when you attach a mouse, you can use the mouse when the computer resumes normal operation. Otherwise, you must reboot the computer to use the mouse. While the mouse is attached to the computer, the DualPoint integrated pointing device is disabled.Serial Connector To attach a serial device to the computer, use the 9-pin serial connector. The serial port passes data in serial format (one bit at a time over one line). This port supports a variety of devices that require serial data transmission, including a serial mouse, serial printer, plotter, or external modem. AC Power Connector Use the AC power connector to attach the AC adapter to the computer. The AC adapter converts AC power to the DC power required by the computer. You can connect the AC adapter with your computer either turned on or off. The AC adapter works with electrical outlets worldwide. However, power connectors vary among countries. Before using AC power in a foreign country, you may need to obtain a new power cable designed for use in that country. Infrared Port The computer’s infrared (IR) port is compatible with Infrared Data Association (IrDA) 1.1 (Fast IR) and 1.0 (Slow IR) standards. An infrared port lets you transfer files from your computer to another infraredcompatible device without using cable connections. An infrared data stream is transmitted through a lens in the computer up to a distance of 1 meter (m) (3.3 feet [ft]). This light is received by a compatible computer, printer, mouse, or remote control. The default address of the infrared port is COM3. To avoid resource conflicts with other devices, remap the address of the infrared port. When the computer is being used with the C/Port APR Family or C/Dock Expansion Station Family docking solution, the infrared port on the computer is automatically disabled. Point the computer’s infrared port directly at the compatible device’s infrared port. Infrared devices transmit data in a 30-degree cone of infrared light. Start the data communications software on both devices, and then begin to transfer files. Read the documentation that came with your compatible device to make sure that you operate it correctly. For more information about using an infrared device, see the documentation that came with your operating system. The Microsoft Windows NT® 4.0 operating system does not support the use of infrared devices. NOTES: Make sure that no books, papers, or other objects come between the two infrared devices and that the two devices are within the 30-degree cone. If the infrared device does not work, the computer and device may be misaligned. Move the device and computer to bring them into the 30-degree cone. Back to Contents PageBack to Contents Page Power Management Settings: Dell™ Latitude™ CPx H-Series/JSeries User's Guide Experimenting With Power Conservation Suspend-to-Disk Mode for Windows 95, Windows 98, and Windows NT Using Key Combinations with Windows 95, Windows 98, and Windows NT Hibernate Mode for Windows 98 and Windows 2000 Using Key Combinations with Windows 98 and Windows 2000 Power Management Properties for Microsoft Windows 98 Closing the Display Power Management Properties for Microsoft Windows NT Suspend Mode Power Options Properties for Microsoft Windows 2000 Standby Mode ENERGY STAR Emblem Experimenting With Power Conservation In general, the lower the value you set for each power conservation feature, the longer the battery's charge lasts. On the other hand, setting high values tends to optimize the computer's performance. To evaluate the way that different settings affect how long you can operate the computer on battery power versus the relative efficiency of how the software performs, experiment as follows: Use the computer with all the options set at their default values. Use the computer with all the options disabled or set to Off. Use the computer with all the options set to their minimum or maximum values. NOTE: For Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI) compliant systems, power management settings are controlled by the Power Management or Power Options Properties in the Control Panel. In other systems, power management settings are controlled from the System Setup program. Using Key Combinations with Windows 95, Windows 98, and Windows NT Table 1 identifies the power management key combinations for systems that are APM compliant. NOTE: To use key combinations on an external keyboard, enable the External Hot Key option in the System Setup program, and press instead of . Table 1. Key Combinations to Activate/Deactivate FeaturesFeature Activate/Deactivate Turn off display To activate, press . To deactivate, move the cursor or press a key on the integrated or external keyboard. (If nothing happens, the computer may be in suspend mode. Press the power button to resume normal operation.) Turn off hard-disk drive To activate, press . Automatically deactivates when the hard-disk drive is accessed. NOTE: If a modular hard drive is installed in the C/Dock media bay, you cannot turn off the hard-disk drive by pressing . Suspend mode Standby mode (Windows 98 systems) To activate, press . To deactivate, press the power button. Suspend-to-disk mode To activate, press . (On a French keyboard, press .) To deactivate, press the power button. Using Key Combinations with Windows 98 and Windows 2000 Table 1 identifies the power management key combinations for systems that are ACPI compliant. NOTE: To use key combinations on an external keyboard, enable the External Hot Key option in the System Setup program, and press instead of . NOTE: These key combinations function for Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI) compliant systems. Table 1. Key Combinations to Activate/Deactivate Features Feature Activate/Deactivate Sleep mode (ACPI compliant Windows 98 systems) Standby mode (Windows 2000 systems) To activate, press or the Sleep key on some external keyboards. To deactivate, press the power button. NOTE: With systems running under ACPI, settings for power management features, such as key combinations and standby or hibernate mode are controlled from the Power Management or Power Options Properties window in the Control Panel. See Power Management Properties for Windows98 and Power Options Properties for Windows 2000. Closing the Display One way to conserve power on the computer is to close the display when the computer is not in use. Closing the Display on Windows 95, Windows 98, and Windows NT Systems When you close the display and an external monitor is not connected, the computer's liquid crystal display (LCD) shuts off automatically. If you set the Display Close option, in System Setup, to Suspend, the computer enters the suspend mode when the display is closed. If you set the Display Option to Active, the display shuts off when it is closed and does not enter the suspend mode. NOTE: If an external monitor is connected when you close the display, the computer does not activate suspend mode. You can still use the external monitor. If the computer detects a wakeup alarm or receives a modem call while the display is closed, the computer handles the alarm or answers the call. After such input/output (I/O) activity ceases, the computer waits 1 minute before reactivating suspend mode. To resume work, open the display. (The computer may take several seconds to resume operation.) Closing the Display on Windows 98 and Windows 2000 Systems When you close the display and an external monitor is not connected, the computer's liquid crystal display (LCD) shuts off automatically. You can set the Display Close option, in the Power Management or Power Options Properties window in the Control Panel to several selections, such as Standby, Hibernate, or Power Off. The computer performs the specified operation when the display is closed. NOTE: If an external monitor is connected when you close the display, the computer does not activate a standby or hibernate mode. You can still use the external monitor. If the computer detects a wakeup alarm or receives a modem call while the display is closed, the computer handles the alarm or answers the call. After such input/output (I/O) activity ceases, the computer waits 1 minute before reactivating the standby or hibernate mode. To resume work, open the display. (The computer may take several seconds to resume operation.) Suspend Mode If your computer is running the Microsoft® Windows® 95 or Microsoft Windows NT® operating system, suspend mode stops almost all computer activity, but leaves the computer ready to resume operations immediately in about 20 to 30 seconds. Use suspend mode whenever you leave the computer unattended. NOTE: Systems that are ACPI compliant, such as Windows 2000 and some Windows 98 systems do not support suspend mode. ACPI compliant systems support standby mode and hibernate mode. See Microsoft Windows 2000 system help for information on power management settings.Suspend mode conserves battery power by turning off the microprocessor clock; the display; the hard-disk drive; the CD-ROM, CD-RW, DVD-ROM, or LS-120 drive module (if installed); the external monitor connector; the external keyboard (if attached); the parallel port; the serial port; the touch pad; and the diskette drive. You can activate suspend mode immediately by pressing (or on an external keyboard if the External Hot Key option is enabled in the System Setup program). When your system is in suspend mode, the power indicator is not lit. Resume from suspend mode by pressing the power button. The computer may take several seconds to return to normal operation. NOTE: On resumption from suspend mode, if a password is set, the system displays the password prompt screen. At the password prompt screen, if you do not enter a password within 2 minutes, the system returns to suspend mode. Standby Mode If your computer is running the Microsoft Windows 98 or Windows 2000 operating system, standby mode turns off the display, stops the hard-disk drive, and turns off other internal devices so that the computer uses less battery power. When the computer resumes operation from standby mode, the desktop is restored exactly as it was before entering standby mode. NOTICE: The computer saves data to random-access memory (RAM), not to your hard-disk drive, before entering standby mode. If the computer enters standby mode while running on battery power, data loss from RAM can occur if the battery discharges completely. You can activate standby mode by pressing .To resume operation from standby mode, press the power button. NOTE: With systems running under ACPI, settings for power management features, such as key combinations and standby mode are controlled from the Power Management or Power Options Properties window in the Control Panel. To activate standby mode, make sure that you have made the appropriate selections from the Power Management or Power Options Properties window. Suspend-to-Disk Mode for Windows 95, Windows 98, and Windows NT Suspend-to-disk (S2D) mode copies all system data to a reserved area—the S2D partition—on the harddisk drive and then turns off all power to the computer. When you resume normal operation, the same programs will be running and the same files will be open that were loaded before you activated this mode. NOTE: Systems that are ACPI compliant, such as Windows 2000 and some Windows 98 systems do not support suspend-to-disk mode. ACPI compliant systems support hibernate mode. See Hibernate Mode for Windows 98 and Windows 2000. Place the computer in S2D mode if you intend to store the computer for longer than 40 days. S2D mode preserves the configuration information stored in nonvolatile random-access memory (NVRAM). The reservebattery maintains this information, but it may run out of energy after 40 days. NOTE: S2D mode helps preserve system data by saving it to the hard-disk drive if you are about to run out of battery power. To activate S2D, press (or on an external keyboard if the External Hot Key option is enabled in the System Setup program). On a French keyboard, press or . Resume from S2D mode by pressing the power button. If you connect or remove devices while the computer is in suspend-to-disk mode, the computer automatically recognizes the newly connected devices when it resumes normal operation. Some PC Cards may not operate correctly after resuming from S2D mode. If you encounter problems with a card, remove and reinsert the card. NOTE: Dell creates an appropriately sized S2D partition before shipping the computer to you. Use the Suspend-to-Disk utility to remove the file, to increase the size of the file, or to add the suspend-todisk file if you removed it. For more information about altering or creating an suspend-to-disk file, see the readme.S2D file, which can be found in the Dell Utilities folder on your hard-disk drive or on the S2D diskette that came with your computer. In Windows 95 and Windows 98 operating systems do not use the Add/Remove Devices option while in S2D mode unless Bay Manager is installed. Hibernate Mode for Windows 98 and Windows 2000 Through the Power Options Properties in the Control Panel for ACPI compliant systems, you can enable the computer's hibernate mode. Hibernate mode copies everything in memory to the hard-disk drive and then turns off all power to the computer. When you resume normal operation, the same programs will be running and the same files will be open that were loaded before you activated this mode. Place the computer in hibernate mode if you intend to store the computer for extended periods of time. Hibernate mode preserves the configuration information stored in nonvolatile random-access memory (NVRAM). NOTE: Hibernate mode helps preserve system data by saving it to the hard-disk drive if you are about to run out of battery power. To enable the hibernate mode: 1. Click the Start button. Point to Settings and then Control Panel. 2. Double-click the Power Options icon. The Power Options Properties window appears. 3. Click the Hibernate tab.4. Select Enable Hibernate Support. 5. Click Apply. 6. Click the Advanced tab. Select Hibernate for each of the appropriate options listed under the Advanced tab. 7. Click Apply. When you shut down your computer, you will see a new option in the Start menu called Hibernate. See Microsoft Windows 2000 system help for more information on hibernate mode. Resume from hibernate mode by pressing the power button. NOTE: With systems running ACPI, you cannot remove devices or undock your computer while in the hibernate mode. Some PC Cards may not operate correctly after resuming from hibernate mode. If you encounter problems with a card, remove and reinsert the card. Power Management Properties for Microsoft Windows 98 Windows 98 with Advanced Power Management (APM) provides the Power Management Properties window for setting power conservation features. To access the Power Management Properties window and set the power management features, perform the following steps in Windows 98: 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and click Control Panel. 2. Double-click the Power Management Properties icon. The Power Management Properties window contains the following tabs: Power Scheme — allows you to select one of three power mode settings. NOTE: With systems running ACPI, select the Notebook/Portable setting as the Power Scheme to conserve battery life while the system is in standby mode. If the Always On setting is selected, the battery life may be much shorter when in standby mode. Alarms — allows you to set the Low Battery and Critical Battery alarms to alert you when the computer battery falls below a certain percentage. When you received your computer, the Low Battery and Critical Battery alarms check boxes were not checked. Dell recommends that you do not select these options. Power Meter — allows you to view the percentage of battery life remaining when your computer is operating on battery power. If your computer is operating on AC power, the computer displays a message.Advanced — allows you to display the Power Meter on the Windows 98 taskbar and to display a password prompt when the computer resumes from standby mode. Hibernate (ACPI only) — allows you to enable the hibernate feature. Power Management Properties for Microsoft Windows NT Dell provides Softex software compatible with the Power Management Controller, which allows you to suspend and resume your portable computer without affecting your ability to use the docking station or its media bay. For information about Softex power management software, see the Softex user’s guides at http://www.dell.com/. Select Small Business Center or Medium & Large Business. Select Latitude. Then select Notebooks. Look for the Softex Utilities Installation Guide on the left of the screen. Also, see your Dell-Installed Microsoft Windows NT Workstation Setup Guide. Power Options Properties for Microsoft Windows 2000 Windows 2000 with ACPI provides the Power Options Properties window for setting power conservation features. With the Power Options Properties in the Control Panel, you can adjust the power management options supported by your computer's hardware configuration. By allowing you to create your own power schemes, the power options feature allows you to reduce the power consumption of your computer devices To access the Power Options Properties window and set the power management features, perform the following steps in Windows 2000: 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and click Control Panel. 2. Double-click the Power Options Properties icon. The Power Options Properties window contains the following tabs: Power Scheme — allows you to select one of three power mode settings. NOTE: With systems running ACPI, select the Notebook/Portable setting as the Power Scheme to conserve battery life while the system is in standby mode. If the Always On setting is selected, the battery life may be much shorter when in standby mode. Alarms — allows you to set the Low Battery and Critical Battery alarms to alert you when the computer battery falls below a certain percentage. When you received your computer, the Low Battery and Critical Battery alarms check boxes were not checked. Dell recommends that you do not select these options. Power Meter — allows you to view the percentage of battery life remaining when your computer is operating on battery power. Advanced — allows you to specify the actions (standby, hibernate, or power off) of thepower button, the sleep button, and closing the display. You can enable the hibernate mode through the Advanced tab. Hibernate (ACPI only) — allows you to enable the hibernate feature. See Microsoft Windows 2000 Help for more information on Power Options Properties. ENERGY STAR® Emblem The EPA’s ENERGY STAR® Computers program is a joint effort between the EPA and computer manufacturers to reduce air pollution by promoting energy-efficient computer products. The EPA estimates that use of ENERGY STAR® computer products can save computer users up to two billion dollars annually in electricity costs. Back to Contents PageBack to Contents Page Installing the Microsoft® Windows® 95 and Windows 98 Operating System Drivers: Dell™ Latitude™ CPx H-Series/J-Series User's Guide Overview Installing Softex BayManager Software Installing Operating System Updates Installing MS-DOS CD-ROM Drivers Installing Docking Drivers Enabling Microsoft Infrared Support Installing Video Drivers Installing Infrared Drivers Installing Audio Drivers Installing System Utilities Installing DualPoint Integrated Pointing Device Drivers Installing Intel SpeedStep Utility Overview Dell provides software utilities and drivers that help you control certain features of your computer. This section explains how to use your System Software CD to reinstall utilities and drivers on your Dell computer with the Microsoft Windows 95 or Windows 98 operating system. You may need administrator privileges to perform some of the procedures in this section. Dell recommends that you check with your network administrator before performing the procedures. NOTE: Your System Software CD contains drivers for operating systems that may not be on your computer. Verify that the driver you are loading is under your operating system subdirectory. For example, if you want to install video drivers for a system running Windows 98, look under \drivers\win98\video. Dell recommends that you print these procedures before you begin. NOTE: For more information on using the operating system installed on your computer by Dell, see the operating system user's guide that came with your computer. You can also access system tools and documentation from Dell's technical support page at http://support.dell.com. Click the map that appears to select your country and the Welcome to support.dell.com page opens. Enter your system information to access help tools and information. NOTICE: Do not dock the computer before turning it on the first time. Installing Operating System Updates Dell provides operating system updates that are enhancements to the operating system specific to your Dell portable computer. To install the operating system updates, perform the following steps:1. Save your work in all open application programs, because you will need to restart your computer at the end of this procedure to complete the installation. 2. Insert the System Software CD into the drive. 3. Click the Start button, then click Run.... The Run dialog box appears. 4. Click the Browse button. 5. Select the appropriate drive for your CD-ROM. 6. Locate the setup.exe file for the operating system updates for your specific operating system. For example, if you want to install operating system updates for a system running Windows 98, look under \win98\osupdate\setup. 7. Click OK or press . 8. Follow the instructions on your display. 9. After the files are copied to your hard-disk drive, click Finish to restart your computer. Installing Docking Drivers NOTE: If your computer uses Windows 95 or Windows 98, the computer is already configured to work with the Dell Latitude C/Port Family Advanced Port Replicator (APR) or C/Dock Family Expansion Station. To successfully install docking drivers for your computer, you must run the Dock QuickInstall program before you install the docking drivers. Running Dock QuickInstall To run Dock QuickInstall, perform the following steps: 1. If the computer has never been turned on, turn it on now while it is undocked and complete the operating system setup. Then go to step 2. For setup instructions, see the Dell-supplied operating system setup guide that came with the computer. 2. Save your work in all open application programs, because you will need to restart your computer at the end of this procedure to complete the installation. 3. Insert the System Software CD into the drive.4. Click the Start button, then click Run.... The Run dialog box appears. 5. Click the Browse button. 6. Select the appropriate drive for your CD-ROM. 7. Locate the setup.exe file for the Dock QuickInstall program for your specific operating system. For example, if you want to install Dock QuickInstall for a system running Windows 98, look under \win98\dockquik\setup. 8. Click OK or press . 9. Follow the instructions on your display. 10. After the files are copied to your hard-disk drive, click Finish to restart your computer. Installing Docking Drivers To install the C/Port Family APR or C/Dock Family Expansion Station drivers, perform the following steps: 1. If you have completed the operating system setup, turn on the computer, and then go to step 2. 2. Dock the computer. The operating system creates a hardware profile for the C/Port APR or the C/Dock Expansion Station. 3. To load the appropriate drivers for use with the C/Port APR or C/Dock Expansion Station, follow the instructions on the display. When prompted, restart the computer. 4. Install the appropriate drivers to use with a network expansion card in the C/Dock Expansion Station. Installing Video Drivers Video drivers control features such as screen resolution and the number of screen colors. NOTE: If you need to use extended video modes, check the documentation that came with the application program to determine if the drivers are provided. If not, contact the software manufacturer to get the necessary drivers. To install the video drivers, perform the following steps: 1. Save your work in all open application programs, because you will need to restart your computer at the end of this procedure to complete the installation. 2. Insert the System Software CD into the drive. 3. Click the Start button, then click Run.The Run dialog box appears. 4. Click the Browse button. 5. Select the appropriate drive for your CD-ROM. 6. Locate the setup.exe file for the video driver for your specific operating system. For example, if you want to install video drivers for a system running Windows 98, look under \win98\video\setup. 7. Click OK or press . 8. Follow the instructions on your display. 9. After the files are copied to your hard-disk drive, click Finish to restart your computer. After installing the video drivers and restarting your computer, perform the following steps to set the display parameters: 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. The Control Panel window appears. 2. Double-click the Display icon. The Display Properties window appears. 3. Click the Settings tab. 4. Change the Color Palette or Colors option to True Color (24 bit). 5. Set the Screen area for your display to the appropriate size. 6. Click Apply. Installing Audio Drivers Dell provides audio drivers so you can customize the audio features of your computer. To install the audio drivers, perform the following steps: 1. Save your work in all open application programs, because you will need to restart your computer at the end of this procedure to complete the installation. 2. Insert the System Software CD into the drive. 3. Click the Start button, then click Run.... The Run dialog box appears. 4. Click the Browse button.5. Select the appropriate drive for your CD-ROM. 6. Locate the setup.exe file for the audio driver for your specific operating system. For example, if you want to install audio drivers for a system running Windows 98, look under \win98\audio\setup. 7. Click OK or press . 8. Follow the instructions on your display. 9. After the files are copied to your hard-disk drive, click Finish to restart your computer. Installing DualPoint Integrated Pointing Device Drivers DualPoint integrated pointing device drivers and associated utilities allow you to use and customize the integrated touch pad, track stick, or an external mouse. To install these drivers, perform the following steps: 1. Save your work in all open application programs, because you will need to restart your computer at the end of this procedure to complete the installation. 2. Insert the System Software CD into the drive. 3. Click the Start button, then click Run.... The Run dialog box appears. 4. Click the Browse button. 5. Select the appropriate drive for your CD-ROM. 6. Locate the setup.exe file for the DualPoint integrated pointing device driver for your specific operating system. 7. Click OK or press . 8. Follow the instructions on your display. 9. After the files are copied to your hard-disk drive, click Finish to restart your computer. 10. Restart your computer to activate the DualPoint integrated pointing device drivers. Installing Softex BayManager Software Dell provides Softex BayManager software that contains support for the following features: Hot-swapping devices such as diskette drives, hard-disk drives, large-storage drives, DVD-ROM drives, and CD-ROM drives to and from your portable computer’s modular bay and the C/Dock Family Expansion Station’s media bay Docking services that are available in French, German, Italian, Spanish, and JapaneseTo install the BayManager application program from the System Software CD, perform the following steps: 1. Save your work in all open application programs, because you will need to restart your computer at the end of this procedure to complete the installation. 2. Insert the System Software CD into the drive. 3. Click the Start button, then click Run.... The Run dialog box appears. 4. Type x:\win95\baymgr\setup.exe or x:\win98\baymgr\setup.exe (depending on your operating system, and where x is your CD-ROM drive designator). 5. Click OK or press . 6. Follow the instructions on your display. 7. After the files are copied to your hard-disk drive, click Finish to restart your computer. 8. Restart your computer to activate the BayManager software. Installing MS-DOS® CD-ROM Drivers CD-ROM drivers must be installed in order to use the MS-DOS CD-ROM utility. To install the CD-ROM drivers, perform the following steps: 1. Save your work in all open application programs, because you will need to restart your computer at the end of this procedure to complete the installation. 2. Insert the System Software CD into the drive. 3. Click the Start button, then click Run.... The Run dialog box appears. 4. Click the Browse button. 5. Select the appropriate drive for your CD-ROM. 6. Locate the setup.exe file for the MS-DOS CD-ROM driver for your specific operating system. 7. Click OK or press . 8. Follow the instructions on your display. 9. After the files are copied to your hard-disk drive, click Finish to restart your computer.Enabling Microsoft Infrared Support For Windows 95, you must install the infrared drivers before you can enable them (Windows 98 already includes infrared support). You must enable Microsoft infrared support for both Windows 95 and Windows 98 before you can use it. To enable Microsoft infrared support, perform the following steps: 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click the Add New Hardware icon. The Add New Hardware Wizard appears. 3. Click Next to continue. NOTE: If the infrared device is not listed, click No, then click Next. 4. When the Add New Hardware Wizard asks to search for new hardware, click No and then click Next. 5. When the Hardware Types window appears, click the Infrared tab and then click Next. 6. When the Add Infrared Device Wizard window appears, click Next. If you are using Windows 98, go to Step 8. 7. In Windows 95, when the Manufacturers and Models window appears, select Standard Infrared Devices from the Manufacturers list and Built-In Infrared Port on Laptop or Desktop from the Models list, and then click Next. 8. To complete this portion of the installation, follow the instructions on your display. 9. To enable infrared support, shut down and reboot your computer. 10. If you are using Windows 98, the process is complete. If you are using Windows 95, complete the procedure in "Installing Infrared Drivers." Installing Infrared Drivers The infrared port lets you transfer files from your computer to another infrared-compatible device without using cable connections. NOTE: To use the infrared port, Windows 95 users must install the infrared drivers and then enable them. Windows 98 already includes the necessary drivers; Windows 98 users need only enable the infrared support. If your computer is running the Microsoft Windows 95 operating system, install the infrared drivers by performing the following steps: 1. Save your work in all open application programs, because you will need to restart your computer at the end of this procedure to complete the installation. 2. Insert the System Software CD containing the Infrared Drivers into the drive.3. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 4. Double-click the System icon. The System Properties dialog box appears. 5. Click the Device Manager tab. 6. Click the View Devices by Type button. 7. Click the plus sign to the left of the Ports icon. The names of various device ports appear beneath the Ports icon. 8. Click Infrared Serial (COM) Connections Port, and then click Properties. The Infrared Serial (COM) Connections Port Properties dialog box appears. 9. Click the Driver tab and Update Driver. The Update Device Driver Wizard appears. 10. Click the Yes (Recommended) button, and then click Next. The system searches for the drivers on the CD you inserted in step 2. 11. To complete the installation, follow the instructions on your display . 12. After the driver is updated, close the Device Manager and open Windows Explorer. 13. With the CD still in the drive, click drive X, where X is the CD-ROM drive. 14. Right-click the smcirlap.inf file. A pop-up menu appears. 15. Click Install. The smcirlap.inf file is installed. 16. Restart your computer to activate the infrared drivers. Installing System Utilities System utilities let you configure features such as the asset tag code and suspend-to-disk partition. To copy the system utilities to your hard-disk drive, perform the following steps. NOTE: You can also run the system utilities directly from the System Software CD. 1. Insert the System Software CD into the drive.2. Click the Start button, then click Run.... The Run dialog box appears. 3. Click the Browse button. 4. Select the appropriate drive for your CD-ROM. 5. Locate the setup.exe file for the system utilities for your specific operating system. 6. Click OK or press . 7. Follow the instructions on your display. 8. Copy each of the utilities on the System Software CD to the c:\dell directory on your hard-disk drive. The utilities have filenames, such as: mks2d.exe, rms2d.exe, asset.com, and readme.s2d. 9. After the files are copied to your hard-disk drive, click Finish to restart your computer. For more information on copying files, see the documentation that came with the operating system. After you copy the utilities to your hard-disk drive, you must restart your computer in the MS-DOS mode to use the utilities. See the readme.s2d file for more information on using the suspend-to-disk partition utilities. For more information on using the asset tag utility, see your Dell computer documentation. Installing the Intel® SpeedStep™ Utility Intel SpeedStep technology conserves battery power by automatically adjusting the processor speed when you run your computer from the battery instead of AC power. Intel SpeedStep reduces the processor speed when using the battery and resumes maximum processor speed when plugged into an electrical outlet. NOTE: This utility is available only for CPx J-Series systems. To install Intel SpeedStep, perform the following steps: 1. Insert the System Software CD into the CD-ROM drive. 2. Click the Start button, and then click Run. 3. The Run dialog box appears. 4. Type x:\win98\speedstp\language\setup, where x is the drive letter of your CD-ROM drive and language is English, Japanese, or Other, and then click OK or press . 5. Follow the instructions on the screen.6. After the files are copied to your hard-disk drive, click Finish to restart your computer. Back to Contents PageBack to Contents Page Installing the Microsoft® Windows NT® Operating System Drivers: Dell™ Latitude™ CPx H-Series/J-Series User's Guide Overview Installing Audio Drivers Installing Operating System Updates Installing DualPoint Integrated Pointing Device Drivers Installing Video Drivers Installing MS-DOS CD-ROM Drivers Installing the Power Management Utility Installing System Utilities Installing Softex Docking Services Installing Intel SpeedStep Utility Installing the PC Card Utility Overview Dell provides software utilities and drivers that help you control certain features of your computer. This section explains how to use your System Software CD to reinstall utilities and drivers on your Dell computer with the Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 operating system. You may need administrator privileges to perform some of the procedures in this section. Dell recommends that you check with your network administrator before performing the procedures. NOTE: Your System Software CD contains drivers for operating systems that may not be on your computer. Verify that the driver you are loading is under your operating system subdirectory. For example, if you want to install video drivers for a system running Windows NT, look under \winNT\video. Dell recommends that you print these procedures before you begin. NOTE: For more information on using the operating system installed on your computer by Dell, see the operating system user's guide that came with your computer. You can also access system tools and documentation from Dell's technical support page at http://support.dell.com. Click the map that appears to select your country and the Welcome to support.dell.com page opens. Enter your system information to access help tools and information. Installing Operating System Updates Dell provides operating system updates that are enhancements to the operating system specific to your Dell portable computer. To install the operating system updates, perform the following steps: 1. Save your work in all open application programs, because you will need to restart your computer at the end of this procedure to complete the installation.2. Insert the System Software CD into the drive. 3. Click the Start button, then click Run.... The Run dialog box appears. 4. Click the Browse button. 5. Select the appropriate drive for your CD-ROM. 6. Locate the setup.exe file for the operating system updates for your specific operating system. For example, if you want to install operating system updates for a system running Windows NT, look under \winNT\osupdate\setup. 7. Click OK or press . 8. Follow the instructions on your display. 9. After the files are copied to your hard-disk drive, click Finish to restart your computer. Installing Video Drivers Video drivers control features such as screen resolution and the number of screen colors. NOTE: If you need to use extended video modes, check the documentation that came with the application program to determine if the drivers are provided. If not, contact the software manufacturer to get the necessary drivers. To install the video drivers for Windows NT 4.0, perform the following steps: 1. Save your work in all open application programs, because you will need to restart your computer at the end of this procedure to complete the installation. 2. Insert the System Software CD into the drive. 3. Click the Start button, then click Run. The Run dialog box appears. 4. Click the Browse button. 5. Select the appropriate drive for your CD-ROM. 6. Locate the setup.exe file for the video drivers for your specific operating system. For example, if you want to install video drivers for a system running Windows NT, look under \winNT\video\setup. 7. Click OK or press . 8. Follow the instructions on your display.9. After the files are copied to your hard-disk drive, click Finish to restart your computer. After installing the video drivers and restarting your computer, perform the following steps to set the display parameters. 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. The Control Panel window appears. 2. Double-click the Display icon. The Display Properties window appears. 3. Click the Settings tab. 4. Change the Colors option to True Color (24 bit). 5. Set the Screen area for your display to the appropriate size. 6. Click Apply. Installing the Power Management Utility Dell provides a power management utility that helps you conserve battery power and view available power levels. To install the power management utility, perform the following steps: 1. Save your work in all open application programs, because you will need to restart your computer at the end of this procedure to complete the installation. 2. Insert the Dell System Software CD into the the CD-ROM drive. 3. Click the Start button, and then click Run... The Run dialog box appears. 4. Click the Browse button. 5. Select the appropriate drive for your CD-ROM. 6. Locate the setup.exe file for the power management utility for your specific operating system. For example, if you want to install power management utilities for a system running Windows NT, look under \winNT\powermgt\setup. 7. Follow the instructions on the display. 8. When prompted, restart your computer to activate the utility. Installing Softex Docking ServicesDell provides Softex Docking Services software that contains support for the following features: Hot-docking and warm-undocking a Latitude portable computer from supported docking stations Hot-swapping devices such as diskette drives, hard-disk drives, large-storage drives, DVD-ROM drives, and CD-ROM drives to and from your portable computer’s modular bay and the C/Dock Family Expansion Station’s media bay Compatibility with the Power Management Controller, which allows you to suspend and resume your portable computer without affecting your ability to use the docking station or its media bay Docking or undocking your portable computer while it is in suspend mode Docking services available in French, German, Italian, Spanish, and Japanese For the latest information on Softex Docking Services, see the Softex user’s guides at http://www.dell.com/. Click Small Business Center or Medium & Large Business. Click Notebooks; then, if applicable, click Latitude. Look for the Softex Utilities Installation Guide on the left of the screen. To install Softex Docking Services from the System Software CD, perform the following steps: 1. Save your work in all open application programs, because you will need to restart your computer at the end of this procedure to complete the installation. 2. Insert the Dell System Software CD into the the CD-ROM drive. 3. Click the Start button, and then click Run... The Run dialog box appears. 4. Type x:\winnt4\docking\setup.exe (where x is your CD-ROM drive designator). 5. Click OK or press . 6. Follow the instructions on the display. 7. When prompted, restart your computer to activate the utility. Installing the PC Card Utility Dell provides a PC Card utility that allows you to view and configure settings for your PC Card(s). To install the PC Card utility, perform the following steps: 1. Save your work in all open application programs, because you will need to restart your computer at the end of this procedure to complete the installation. 2. Insert the System Software CD into the CD-ROM drive. 3. Click the Start button, and then click Run... The Run dialog box appears.4. Click the Browse button. 5. Select the appropriate drive for your CD-ROM. 6. Locate the setup.exe file for the PC Card utility for your specific operating system. For example, if you want to install the PC Card utility for a system running Windows NT, look under \winNT\pccard\setup. 7. Follow the instructions on your display. 8. When the computer completes the starting sequence, the Softex PC Card Controller Diagnostics window appears. 9. Follow the instructions on your display, and when prompted, restart your computer to activate the utility. Installing Audio Drivers Dell provides audio drivers so you can customize the sound features of your computer. To install the audio drivers, perform the following steps: 1. Save your work in all open application programs, because you will need to restart your computer at the end of this procedure to complete the installation. 2. Insert the System Software CD into the CD-ROM drive. 3. Click the Start button, then click Run.... The Run dialog box appears. 4. Click the Browse button. 5. Select the appropriate drive for your CD-ROM. 6. Locate the setup.exe file for the audio driver for your specific operating system. For example, if you want to install audio drivers for a system running Windows NT, look under \winNT\audio\setup. 7. Click OK or press . 8. Follow the instructions on your display. 9. After the files are copied to your hard-disk drive, click Finish to restart your computer. Installing DualPoint Integrated Pointing Device Drivers DualPoint integrated pointing device drivers and associated utilities allow you to use and customize the integrated touch pad, track stick, or an external mouse. To install these drivers, perform the following steps: 1. Save your work in all open application programs, because you will need to restart your computer at theend of this procedure to complete the installation. 2. Insert the System Software CD into the CD-ROM drive. 3. Click the Start button, then click Run.... The Run dialog box appears. 4. Click the Browse button. 5. Select the appropriate drive for your CD-ROM. 6. Locate the setup.exe file for the DualPoint integrated pointing device driver for your specific operating system. For example, if you want to install DualPoint integrated pointing device drivers for a system running Windows NT, look under \winNT\touch\setup. 7. Click OK or press . 8. Follow the instructions on your display. 9. After the files are copied to your hard-disk drive, click Finish. 10. Restart your computer to activate the DualPoint integrated pointing device drivers. Installing MS-DOS® CD-ROM Drivers CD-ROM drivers must be installed in order to use the MS-DOS CD-ROM utility. To install the CD-ROM drivers, perform the following steps: 1. Save your work in all open application programs, because you will need to restart your computer at the end of this procedure to complete the installation. 2. Insert the System Software CD into the CD-ROM drive. 3. Click the Start button, then click Run.... The Run dialog box appears. 4. Click the Browse button. 5. Select the appropriate drive for your CD-ROM. 6. Locate the setup.exe file for the MS-DOS CD-ROM driver for your specific operating system. For example, if you want to install MD-DOS CD-ROM drivers for a system running Windows NT, look under \winNT\cdrom\setup. 7. Click OK or press . 8. Follow the instructions on your display.9. After the files are copied to your hard-disk drive, click Finish to restart your computer. Installing System Utilities System utilities let you configure features such as the asset tag code and suspend-to-disk partition. To copy the system utilities to your hard-disk drive, perform the following steps. NOTE: You can also run the system utilities directly from the System Software CD or diskette. 1. Insert the System Software CD into the drive. 2. Click the Start button, then click Run.... The Run dialog box appears. 3. Click the Browse button. 4. Select the appropriate drive for your CD-ROM. 5. Locate the setup.exe file for the system utilities for your specific operating system. 6. Click OK or press . 7. Follow the instructions on your display. 8. Copy each of the utilities on the System Software CD to the c:\dell directory on your hard-disk drive. The utilities have the following filenames: mks2d.exe, rms2d.exe, asset.com, and readme.s2d. 9. After the files are copied to your hard-disk drive, click Finish to restart your computer. For more information on copying files, see the documentation that came with the operating system. After you copy the utilities to your hard-disk drive, you must restart your computer in the MS-DOS® mode to use the utilities. Restart your computer in the MS-DOS mode by booting from the System Software CD. See the readme.s2d file for more information on using the suspend-to-disk partition utilities. For more information on using the asset tag utility, see your Dell computer documentation. Installing the Intel® SpeedStep™ Utility Intel SpeedStep technology conserves battery power by automatically adjusting the processor speed when you run your computer from the battery instead of AC power. Intel SpeedStep reduces the processor speed when using the battery and resumes maximum processor speed when plugged into an electrical outlet. NOTE: This utility is available only for CPx J-Series systems.To install Intel SpeedStep, perform the following steps: 1. Insert the System Software CD into the CD-ROM drive. 2. Click the Start button, and then click Run. 3. The Run dialog box appears. 4. Type x:\winnt4\speedstp\language\setup, where x is the drive letter of your CD-ROM drive and language is English, Japanese, or Other, and then click OK or press . 5. Follow the instructions on the screen. 6. After the files are copied to your hard-disk drive, click Finish to restart your computer. Back to Contents PageBack to Contents Page Installing the Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Operating System Drivers: Dell™ Latitude™ CPx H-Series/J-Series User's Guide Overview Installing MS-DOS CD-ROM Drivers Installing Video Drivers Installing MS-DOS CD-ROM Drivers Installing Audio Drivers Installing Intel SpeedStep Utility Installing DualPoint Integrated Pointing Device Drivers Overview Dell provides software utilities and drivers that help you control certain features of your computer. This section explains how to use your System Software CD to reinstall drivers on your Dell computer with the Microsoft Windows 2000 operating system. You may need administrator privileges to perform some of the procedures in this section. Dell recommends that you check with your network administrator before performing the procedures. NOTE: Your System Software CD contains drivers for operating systems that may not be on your computer. Verify that the driver you are loading is under your operating system subdirectory. For example, if you want to install video drivers for a system running Windows 2000, look under \win2000\video. Dell recommends that you print these procedures before you begin. NOTE: For more information on using the operating system installed on your computer by Dell, see the operating system user's guide that came with your computer. You can also access system tools and documentation from Dell's technical support page at http://support.dell.com. Click the map that appears to select your country and the Welcome to support.dell.com page opens. Enter your system information to access help tools and information. Installing Video Drivers Video drivers control features such as screen resolution and the number of screen colors. NOTE: If you need to use extended video modes, check the documentation that came with the application program to determine if the drivers are provided. If not, contact the software manufacturer to get the necessary drivers. To install the video drivers for Windows 2000, perform the following steps: 1. Save your work in all open application programs, because you will need to restart your computer at theend of this procedure to complete the installation. 2. Insert the System Software CD into the drive. 3. Click the Start button, then click Run. The Run dialog box appears. 4. Type x:\win2000\video\setup.exe (where x is your CD-ROM drive designator). 5. Click OK or press . 6. Follow the instructions on your display. 7. After the files are copied to your hard-disk drive, click Finish to restart your computer. After installing the video drivers and restarting your computer, perform the following steps to set the display parameters. 1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. The Control Panel window appears. 2. Double-click the Display icon. The Display Properties window appears. 3. Click the Settings tab. 4. Change the Colors option to True Color or 24 bit. 5. Set the Screen area for your display to the appropriate size. 6. Click OK. Installing Audio Drivers Dell provides audio drivers so you can customize the sound features of your computer. NOTE: When you install the audio drivers, the drivers for the internal modem (if present) are installed automatically. If no modem is installed in your system, the modem drivers will not be installed. To install the audio drivers, perform the following steps: 1. Save your work in all open application programs, because you will need to restart your computer at the end of this procedure to complete the installation. 2. Insert the System Software CD into the CD-ROM drive. 3. Click the Start button, then click Run....The Run dialog box appears. 4. Type x:\win2000\audio\setup.exe (where x is your CD-ROM drive designator). 5. Click OK or press . 6. Follow the instructions on your display. 7. After the files are copied to your hard-disk drive, click Finish to restart your computer. Installing DualPoint Integrated Pointing Device Drivers DualPoint integrated pointing device drivers and associated utilities allow you to use and customize the integrated touch pad, track stick, or an external mouse. To install these drivers, perform the following steps: 1. Save your work in all open application programs, because you will need to restart your computer at the end of this procedure to complete the installation. 2. Insert the System Software CD into the CD-ROM drive. 3. Click the Start button, then click Run.... The Run dialog box appears. 4. Type x:\win2000\touchpad\setup.exe (where x is your CD-ROM drive designator). 5. Click OK or press . 6. Follow the instructions on your display. 7. After the files are copied to your hard-disk drive, click Finish. 8. Restart your computer to activate the DualPoint integrated pointing device drivers. Installing MS-DOS® CD-ROM Drivers CD-ROM drivers must be installed in order to use the MS-DOS CD-ROM utility. To install the CD-ROM drivers, perform the following steps: 1. Save your work in all open application programs, because you will need to restart your computer at the end of this procedure to complete the installation. 2. Insert the System Software CD into the CD-ROM drive. 3. Click the Start button, then click Run.... The Run dialog box appears. 4. Type x:\win2000\cdrom\setup.exe (where x is your CD-ROM drive designator). 5. Click OK or press . 6. Follow the instructions on your display. 7. After the files are copied to your hard-disk drive, click Finish to restart your computer. Installing the Intel® SpeedStep™ Utility Intel SpeedStep technology conserves battery power by automatically adjusting the processor speed when you run your computer from the battery instead of AC power. Intel SpeedStep reduces the processor speed when using the battery and resumes maximum processor speed when plugged into an electrical outlet. NOTE: This utility is available only for CPx J-Series systems. To install Intel SpeedStep, perform the following steps: 1. Insert the System Software CD into the CD-ROM drive. 2. Click the Start button, and then click Run. 3. The Run dialog box appears. 4. Type x:\win2000\speedstp\language\setup, where x is the drive letter of your CD-ROM drive and language is English, Japanese, or Other, and then click OK or press . 5. Follow the instructions on the screen. 6. After the files are copied to your hard-disk drive, click Finish to restart your computer. Back to Contents PageBack to Contents Page System Setup Options: Dell™ Latitude™ CPx H-Series/J-Series User's Guide AC Configure Setup Hard-disk Drive Password Ring/Event Resume Admin Password CPU Serial Number Infrared Data Port S2D Time-out Alarm Resume Date Infrared Mode Serial Port Asset Tag Disk Time-Out Keyboard Click Service Tag Audio Mode Diskette Drive A Level 2 Cache Smart CPU Mode Battery Diskette Drive B Modular Bay Intel SpeedStep Setup Battery Status Diskette Reconfig Microprocessor Suspend Time-out BIOS Version Display Close Num Lock System Memory Boot First Device Display Time-out Parallel Mode System Primary Boot Second Device Docking Ethernet Pointing Device Time Boot Speed Docking IRQ Power Management Universal Connect Brightness Docking Status Primary Hard Drive Video Memory Click Volume External Hot Key Primary Password Wakeup on LAN NOTE: Your use of the System Setup program depends on the power management scheme (APM or ACPI) used by your operating system. See Power Management Compliance (APM Versus ACPI) for more information. AC AC, an option under Power Management, allows you to set different time-outs for the following options when you operate your computer from AC power: Display Time-out, Disk Time-out, Suspend Time-out, S2D Time-out, Smart CPU Mode, Display Close, and Brightness. A change to the AC option takes effect immediately (rebooting is not required). Admin PasswordAdmin Password displays the current status of your administrator password and allows you to assign or change this password. Settings for this option are: Disabled (the default) — Indicates that no administrator password is assigned. Enabled — Indicates that an administrator password is currently assigned. All system setup functions, except passwords, are locked out. The administrator password is designed for use by system administrators and service technicians in corporate environments. If an administrator password is assigned, you can use it to access the computer even if you do not know the primary password. NOTICE: The password features provide a high level of security for the data in your computer. However, they are not foolproof. If your data requires more security, you should obtain and use additional forms of protection, such as data encryption programs or PC Cards with encryption features. Alarm Resume The Alarm Resume option directs the computer to resume normal operation when it is in suspend mode and detects an alarm from the real-time clock (RTC). Such alarms can be set through various application programs. In order for the alarms in these programs to work, the Alarm Resume option must be set to Enabled. NOTE: With systems running under ACPI, settings for power management features, such as suspend/sleep mode are controlled from the Power Management Properties window in the Control Panel. Settings for this option are: Enabled (the default) — Resumes normal operation when the computer detects an alarm. Disabled — Keeps the computer in suspend mode even if the computer detects an alarm. A change to the Alarm Resume option takes effect immediately (rebooting is not required). Asset Tag The Asset Tag option displays the asset tag code if you or your organization assigned one to your computer. For more information, see "Asset Tag Utility." Audio Mode Audio Mode manages the audio resources of the computer and the external devices you use with it. This mode is set to Full Duplex, which allows the computer's audio system to play and record soundssimultaneously. NOTE: The system does not allow you to select this mode for change. Battery Battery, an option of Power Management, allows you to set different time-outs for the following options when you operate your computer from battery power: Display Time-out, Disk Time-out, Suspend Timeout, S2D Time-out, Smart CPU Mode, Display Close, and Brightness. A change to the Battery option takes effect immediately (rebooting is not required). Battery Status Battery Status (page 3 of the System Setup screens) is a graphical representation of the approximate amount of charge left in the main and secondary batteries. No user-selectable settings are available for this option. If a battery is not installed in the main battery compartment or in the modular bay, the battery gauge illustration indicates Battery Status: Not Installed. If you are not in the System Setup program, you can see the battery gauge illustration at any time by pressing . NOTE: Certain key combinations may not function with the Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI) or may require activation with the Power Management Properties window in the Control Panel. BIOS Version BIOS Version displays the version number and release date of the BIOS in your computer. A service technician may ask you for this version number if you call Dell for technical assistance. NOTE: Dell may periodically offer revisions of the BIOS that add features or solve specific problems. Because the BIOS for your computer is stored on a reprogrammable flash-memory chip, you can use the Flash BIOS Update program to update your computer's BIOS entirely through software. Boot First Device Boot First device determines which disk device your computer uses to find the software needed to start the operating system. The term boot refers to the computer's start-up procedure. When you turn on the computer, it "bootstraps" itself into an operational state by loading into memory a small program, which in turn loads the necessary operating system. Boot First device tells the computer where to look first for the files that it needs to load. Settings for this option are:Diskette Drive (the default) — Causes your computer to attempt first to boot from a bootable diskette loaded in a diskette drive in the system modular bay. This option will also cause your computer to attempt first boot from the media in an LS-120 drive if there is no diskette drive attached to the system and the LS-120 drive is installed in the system modular bay. Internal HDD — Causes your computer to boot from the hard-disk drive CD/DVD/CD-RW Drive — Causes your computer to attempt first to boot from a bootable CD, DVD, or CD-RW when that drive is installed in the system modular bay. Modular Bay HDD — Causes your computer to attempt first to boot from the second hard-disk drive installed in the modular bay None — Causes your computer to skip the boot option PCI Slot NIC — Causes your computer to attempt first to boot from a network source connected to the NIC card installed in the C/Dock or C/Dock II Station (if the feature is supported by the NIC card) Dock II/Port II NIC — Causes your computer to attempt first to boot from a network source connected to the C/Dock II Station or C/Port II Dock via the embedded NIC card. CardBus NIC — Causes your computer to attempt first to boot from a network source connected to the PCMCIA card NIC (if this capability is supported by the PCMCIA card). For a change in the Boot First device option to take effect, you must reboot your computer. Boot Second Device If the computer cannot find the software it needs to start the operating system on the drive identified in Boot First device, it will search the device named in Boot Second device. Settings for the option are: Internal HDD (the default) — Causes your computer to attempt to boot from the hard-disk drive Diskette Drive — Causes your computer to attempt first to boot from a bootable diskette loaded in a diskette drive in the system modular bay. This option will also cause your computer to attempt first boot from the media in an LS-120 drive if there is no diskette drive attached to the system and the LS- 120 drive is installed in the system modular bay. CD/DVD/CD-RW Drive — Causes your computer to attempt first to boot from a bootable CD, DVD, or CD-RW when that drive is installed in the system modular bay. Modular Bay HDD — Causes your computer to boot from the second hard-disk drive installed in the modular bay None — Causes your computer to skip the boot option PCI Slot NIC — Causes your computer to attempt first to boot from a network source connected to the NIC card installed in the C/Dock or C/Dock II Station (if the feature is supported by the NIC card)Dock II/Port II NIC — Causes your computer to attempt first to boot from a network source connected to the C/Dock II Station or C/Port II Dock via the embedded NIC card CardBus NIC — Causes your computer to attempt first to boot from a network source connected to the PCMCIA card NIC (if this capability is supported by the PCMCIA card). For a change in the Boot Second device option to take effect, you must reboot your computer. Boot Third Device If the computer cannot find the software it needs to start the operating system on the drive identified in Boot FIrst Device or Boot Second device, it will search the device named in Boot Third device. Settings for the option are: None (the default) Internal HDD — Causes your computer to attempt to boot from the hard-disk drive Diskette Drive — Causes your computer to attempt first to boot from a bootable diskette loaded in a diskette drive in the system modular bay. This option will also cause your computer to attempt first boot from the media in an LS-120 drive if there is no diskette drive attached to the system and the LS- 120 drive is installed in the system modular bay. CD/DVD/CD-RW Drive — Causes your computer to attempt first to boot from a bootable CD, DVD, or CD-RW when that drive is installed in the system modular bay. Modular Bay HDD — Causes your computer to attempt to boot from the second hard-disk drive installed in the modular bay PCI Slot NIC — Causes your computer to attempt first to boot from a network source connected to the NIC card installed in the C/Dock or C/Dock II Station (if the feature is supported by the NIC card) Dock II/Port II NIC — Causes your computer to attempt first to boot from a network source connected to the C/Dock II Station or C/Port II Dock via the embedded NIC card CardBus NIC — Causes your computer to attempt first to boot from a network source connected to the PCMCIA card NIC (if this capability is supported by the PCMCIA card). For a change in the Boot Third device option to take effect, you must reboot your computer. Boot Speed Boot Speed allows you to choose between the computer's processing speed (the default) and Compatible, a slower compatibility speed. The compatibility speed varies, depending on the configuration of your system. When you change the setting in the Boot Speed option, the System Setup program stores and continues to display the new setting even if you do not reboot your computer when you exit the System Setup program. Ifyou start the System Setup program again during your current work session, the processing speed displayed for the Boot Speed option may not match the actual speed at which your computer is running. For a change in the Boot Speed option to take effect, you must reboot your computer. Brightness Brightness allows you to specify the brightness of the display when the computer is operating on battery power. Use the left- and right-arrow keys to change the brightness of the display. When the computer is powered by a battery, the default is Minimum. If the computer is using AC power, the default is Maximum. A change to the Brightness option takes effect immediately (rebooting is not required). Click Volume Click Volume allows you to disable or adjust the volume of the keyboard clicks if the Keyboard Click option is enabled. The default is Maximum. A change to the Click Volume option takes effect immediately (rebooting is not required). NOTE: This option also controls the volume of the PC Card and error message beep codes. Configure Setup Configure Setup allows you to restrict access to the System Setup program in the same way a system password restricts access to the system. Only available when you set the administrator password. CPU Serial Number CPU Serial Number enables support of the Intel? Mobile Pentium? III processor serial number. This field allows you to enable or disable recognition of the serial number of an Intel Mobile Pentium III processor. Settings for this option are: Disabled (the default) — Indicates that the serial number cannot be read. Enabled — Indicates that the serial number can be read. Date Date resets the date on the computer's internal calendar. Your computer automatically displays the day of the week corresponding to the settings in the three fields that follow (month, day-of-the-month, and year). A change to the Date option takes effect immediately (rebooting is not required). However, you must rebootto make the change apparent to the operating system. To change the date, press the right-arrow key to increase the number in the highlighted field, or press the left-arrow key to decrease the number. If you prefer, you can type in numbers in the month and day-of-themonth fields. Disk Time-out Disk Time-out lets you determine how long your hard-disk drive remains idle before the drive motor turns off to conserve battery power. NOTE: This feature does not function with the Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI). The AC option is set to Disabled. No user-selectable settings are available for this option. Settings for Battery option are: Disabled 15 Seconds 1 Minute 2 Minutes 3 Minutes 4 Minutes 5 Minutes 10 Minutes 15 Minutes 30 Minutes 1 Hour The default is 3 Minutes if the computer is powered by a battery. To increase battery operating time, set Disk Time-out to a lower number. However, if your software requires frequent hard-disk drive accesses, using a higher time-out setting may save battery power and time by minimizing the number of times the hard-disk drive must power up. NOTE: Set Disk Time-out to Disabled if using it causes compatibility problems with your software. A change to the Disk Time-out option takes effect immediately (rebooting is not required). If you are not in the System Setup program, you can turn off the hard-disk drive immediately by pressing . The drive resumes normal operation automatically when it is accessed by the microprocessor. NOTE: Certain key combinations may not function with the Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI) or may require configuration with the Power Management Properties window in the Control Panel. See Power Management Settings. Diskette Drive ADiskette Drive A identifies the location of the 3.5-inch diskette drive: Modular Bay, Parallel Port, or Not Installed. No user-selectable settings are available for this option. Diskette Drive B Diskette Drive B identifies the location of a second 3.5-inch diskette drive: Parallel Port, Modular Bay, or Not Installed. No user-selectable settings are available for this option. Diskette Reconfig Diskette Reconfig allows application programs that access the diskette drive to run at their optimum speed. Settings are At Reboot Only and Any Time. When Diskette Reconfig is set to Any Time (the default), you do not have to reboot after you install a diskette drive in the modular bay or attach a diskette drive to the parallel connector on the back of the computer. However, some application programs such as virus scans that access the diskette drive will run very slowly if the diskette drive is not in the modular bay or connected to the parallel port. When Diskette Reconfig is set to At Reboot Only, such application programs run at normal speed, but you must reboot after installing or attaching a diskette drive. Display Close Display Close lets you determine whether your computer enters suspend mode when the display is closed or whether only the display is turned off. Suspend (the default) — Allows the computer to enter suspend mode when the display is closed. Active — Turns off the display, but does not put the computer into suspend mode. NOTE: With systems running under ACPI, settings for these features are controlled from the Power Management Properties window in the Control Panel. Under ACPI, suspend mode is referred to as sleep mode. Activate the sleep mode by selecting Sleep from the Power Management Properties window. Display Time-out Display Time-out lets you decide how long the computer operates with no input/output (I/O) activity before turning off the display to conserve battery power. Settings for this option in both the AC and Battery categories are: Disabled 1 Minute 5 Minutes 10 Minutes2 Minutes 3 Minutes 4 Minutes 15 Minutes 30 Minutes 1 Hour The Battery default is 4 Minutes. To increase battery operating time, set Display Time-out to a lower number of minutes. NOTE: Set the Display Time-out option to Disabled if using it causes compatibility problems with your software. A change to the Display Time-out option takes effect immediately (rebooting is not required). If you are not in the System Setup program, you can turn off the display immediately by pressing . The display resumes normal operation automatically when you press a key or move the cursor. NOTE: With systems running under ACPI, settings for this feature are controlled from the Power Management Properties window in the Control Panel. Key combinations for power management activities must be configured in the Power Management Properties window. Docking Ethernet Docking Ethernet enables or disables the internal ethernet controller in the a Dell Latitude C/Port Family Advanced Port Replicator (C/Port APR) or C/Dock Family Expansion Station. A change to this option takes effect when you reboot. Docking IRQ Docking IRQ tells the computer which IRQ to assign to the docking station or replicator during the boot sequence. If this option is set to Optimized, the docking station or replicator is assigned a dedicated IRQ during the boot sequence. Select IRQ 11 if a peripheral device requires the use of the dedicated IRQ. Docking Status Docking Status shows whether the computer is attached to a Dell Latitude C/Port Family APR or C/Dock Family Expansion Station. No user-selectable settings are available for this option. External Hot Key External Hot Key lets you use the key on the external keyboard the same way you use the key on the computer's built-in keyboard. Set this option to Scroll Lock (the default) if you are using an external keyboard. Set this option to Not Installed to disable this function on the external keyboard. Hard-disk Drive Password(s) System Primary Password System Modular Bay Password Dock Media Bay Password Hard-disk drive password(s) displays the current status of the primary hard-disk drive password and allows you to assign or change this password. You can set a primary password for the system, the system modular bay, and the dock media bay. Settings for this option are: Disabled (the default) — Indicates that no password is assigned Enabled — Indicates that a password is currently assigned NOTICE: The password features provide a high level of security for the data in your computer. However, they are not foolproof. If your data requires more security, you should obtain and use additional forms of protection, such as data encryption programs or PC Cards with encryption features. Infrared Data Port Infrared Data Port allows you to avoid resource conflicts by remapping the address of the infrared ports or disabling the port. The COM1, COM2, COM3, and COM4 settings allow you to take advantage of the computer's Fast IR support. NOTE: Before you enable infrared driver support, you must enable the Infrared Data Port option by selecting a COM setting (COM3 is recommended). You must also set the Infrared Mode option to either Fast IR or Slow IR. Settings for this option are: Disabled (the default) — Disables the infrared data port and makes the direct memory access (DMA), interrupt request (IRQ), and I/O resources available for another serial device to use COM1 — Maps the infrared data port to COM1 COM2 — Maps the infrared data port to COM2 COM3 — Maps the infrared data port to COM3 COM4 — Maps the infrared data port to COM4 For a change in the Infrared Data Port option to take effect, you must reboot your computer.Infrared Mode Infrared Mode sets the data transfer rates of the infrared transmitter in the system or the dock. NOTE: Before you enable infrared support, you must enable the Infrared Data Port option by selecting a COM setting (COM3 is recommended). You must also set the Infrared Mode option to either Fast IR or Slow IR. Keyboard Click Keyboard Click lets you choose whether the built-in keyboard makes audible clicking sounds. The Click Volume option must be enabled for this option to function. The volume of the simulated key clicks is controlled by the setting in the Click Volume option. Settings for this option are Disabled (the default) and Enabled. A change to the Keyboard Click option takes effect immediately (rebooting is not required). Level 2 Cache Level 2 Cache tells you how much cache memory your computer has. No user-selectable settings are available for this option. Modular Bay Modular Bay identifies the kind of device—Diskette Drive, Battery, HDD (hard-disk drive—indicates the drive's size), LS-120, DVD-ROM, CD-ROM, or CD-RW Drive—that is installed in the modular bay. If the modular bay does not contain a device or if a travel bay is installed, this option reads Not Installed. No userselectable settings are available for this option. Microprocessor Microprocessor displays the type and speed of the microprocessor installed on your computer's system board. No user-selectable settings are available for this option. Num Lock Num Lock determines if the system boots with the Num Lock enabled or disabled when an external keyboard is attached. Settings for this options are Disabled (the default) Enabled.A change to the Num Lock option has no effect when the system is booted unless an external keyboard is attached. Parallel Mode Parallel Mode controls whether the computer's integrated parallel port acts as a Personal System/2 (PS/2)- compatible (Bidirectional) port, Advanced Technology (AT)-compatible (Normal) port, or Extended Capabilities Port (ECP)-compatible port. The default for Parallel Mode is ECP. Windows 95 and 98 use ECP protocol automatically if it detects an ECP-compatible device. Set this option according to the type of peripheral device connected to the parallel port. To determine the correct mode to use, see the documentation that came with the device. NOTE: The ECP setting also works for most software written for the AT and PS/2 modes. Devices that use ECP mode may come with special drivers that need to be installed in order to use these modes. Setting Parallel Mode to Disabled disables the parallel port and its assigned LPT address, freeing its interrupt for another device to use. For a change in the Parallel Mode option to take effect, you must reboot your computer. Pointing Device Pointing Device enables and disables the computer's touch pad and track stick. Settings for this option are: Touch Pad-PS/2 Mouse (the default) Serial Mouse — Disables the touch pad and track stick and allows you to use a mouse connected to the serial connector on the I/O port PS/2 Mouse — Disables the integrated touch pad when a PS/2 mouse is present. If you want to use a serial mouse, you must first set the Pointing Device option to Serial Mouse. For a change in the Pointing Device option to take effect, you must reboot your computer. Power Management Power Management allows you to enable or disable power conservation features when the computer is being powered by a battery or AC power. When this option is disabled, the related power management functions are not visible. If you want to use any of the time-out options while using battery power, set the Battery option to Enabled. If you want to use the time-out options while using AC power, the set the AC option to Enabled.NOTE: With systems running under ACPI, power management settings are controlled from the Power Management Properties window in the Control Panel. A change to the Power Management option takes effect immediately (rebooting is not required). Primary Hard Drive Primary Hard Drive displays the capacity of your computer's hard-disk drive. No user-selectable settings are available for this option. Primary Password Primary Password displays the current status of the primary password and allows you to assign or change this password. Settings for this option are: Disabled (the default) — Indicates that no primary password is assigned Enabled — Indicates that a primary password is currently assigned If you assign a primary password, the computer prompts you for the password each time you boot the computer. NOTICE: The password features provide a high level of security for the data in your computer. However, they are not foolproof. If your data requires more security, you should obtain and use additional forms of protection, such as data encryption programs or PC Cards with encryption features. Ring/Event Resume Ring/Event Resume lets you determine if the computer exits suspend mode when an installed modem card receives an incoming call. This feature is supported if the optional internal modem is installed; to use this feature with a modem PC card, it must be supported by the PC Card and by your operating system. NOTE: With systems running under ACPI, power management settings are controlled from the Power Management Properties window in the Control Panel. Certain features require configuration through the Power Management Properties window and others may not function with ACPI. Settings for this option are: Enabled (the default) — Resumes normal operation when the computer detects a modem ring Disabled — Keeps the computer in suspend mode when the computer detects a modem ring NOTES: Dell recommends that you set Ring/Event Resume to Disabled when an external serial device, other than a modem, is connected to your computer.In order for the Ring/Event Resume option to work properly, this feature must be enabled in the device driver for your modem PC Card. All drivers supplied by Dell with your computer are configured to allow the computer to resume normal operation when a modem receives an incoming call. If you use a PC Card that you did not receive from Dell, check the documentation to make sure this feature is set to Enabled. A change to the Ring/Event Resume option takes effect immediately (rebooting is not required). S2D Time-out S2D Time-out lets you determine how long your computer remains idle (no I/O activity) before activating suspend-to-disk (S2D) mode to conserve battery power. NOTE: With systems running under ACPI, settings for power management features, such as key combinations and suspend-to-disk mode, are controlled from the Power Management Properties window in the Control Panel. The key combinations of or may not function with ACPI if the settings have not been activated from the Power Management Properties window. The suspend-to-disk mode is referred to as the hibernate mode for systems running ACPI. To activate the hibernate mode, make sure that you have configured the appropriate key combinations from the Power Management Properties window. Settings for this option in both the AC and Battery categories are: Disabled 30 Minutes 1 Hour 2 Hours 3 Hours 4 Hours 6 Hours 8 Hours (default) 12 Hours A change to the S2D Time-out option takes effect immediately (rebooting is not required). If you are not in the System Setup program, you can activate S2D Time-out mode at any time by pressing . Press the power switch to resume from S2D mode. Serial Port Serial Port allows you to map the address of the serial port or to disable the serial port. Settings for this option are:COM1 (the default) — Maps the serial port to COM1 COM2 — Maps the serial port to COM2 COM3 — Maps the serial port to COM3 COM4 — Maps the serial port to COM4 Disabled — Disables the serial port and its assigned COM address, freeing that interrupt for another device to use For a change in the Serial Port option to take effect, you must reboot your computer. Service Tag Service Tag displays the computer's service code, which was programmed into NVRAM by Dell during the manufacturing process. Be prepared to supply this identification during technical assistance or service calls. The service tag is also accessed by certain Dell support software, including diagnostics. No user-selectable settings are available for this option. NOTE: Convert the service tag number into an express service code when prompted to do so the first time you turn on the computer (or use the program in the Dell Accessories folder). Keep the code handy in case you call Dell for technical assistance. The code helps Dell's automated support telephone system direct your call more efficiently. Smart CPU Mode Smart CPU Mode allows the computer to slow down the microprocessor automatically if it is not being actively used. This feature is a key component to the thermal control of the system. NOTE: With systems running under ACPI, power management settings are controlled from the Power Management Properties window in the Control Panel. Certain features require configuration through the Power Management Properties window and others may not function with ACPI. Settings for this option are: Enabled (the default) — Saves power, helps to lower system temperatures, and extends battery life by allowing the computer to slow down the microprocessor when it is inactive Disabled — Keeps the microprocessor running at its normal operating speed regardless of microprocessor inactivity (can reduce battery life) NOTES: In rare situations, some communications software may not work properly when Smart CPU Mode is enabled. Dell recommends that you set Smart CPU Mode to Disabled if your computer is experiencing performance degradation. Interactive application programs should function well when Smart CPU Mode is set to Enabled. (Examples of interactive programs include spreadsheet, text editor, graphics design, entertainment,educational, and utility programs.) However, you may experience performance degradation when recalculating a large spreadsheet or during an extensive screen redraw in a graphical program. Benchmark utilities may not perform as intended when doing microprocessor speed tests. If the software you use suffers significant performance degradation, set Smart CPU Mode to Disabled. A change to the Smart CPU Mode option takes effect immediately (rebooting is not required). Intel SpeedStep™ Setup SpeedStep Setup allows you to set the performance level for the microprocessor to maximum performance or minimum performance on battery or AC power. NOTES: This utility is available only for CPx J-Series systems. With systems running under ACPI, power management settings are controlled from the Power Management Properties window in the Control Panel. Certain features require configuration through the Power Management Properties window and others may not function with ACPI. Settings for this option are: Disabled (the default) — Sets the system to operate in the lowest performance mode possible. When this option is selected, the SpeedStep tab of the Power Management Properties window will not be available. Automatic — Allows the BIOS to set the system into either AC performance or Battery performance mode at POST, based on AC availability. Maximum Optimized AC — Allows the BIOS to set the microprocessor to highest performance mode possible, if the AC adapter is inserted. Battery Optimized — Allows the BIOS to set the microprocessor to the lowest performance mode possible, if the AC adapter is inserted. Suspend Time-out Suspend Time-out lets you determine how long your computer remains idle before activating suspend mode to conserve battery power. NOTE: With systems running under ACPI, power management settings are controlled from the Power Management Properties window in the Control Panel. Certain features require configuration through the Power Management Properties window and others may not function with ACPI. Settings for this option in both AC and Battery categories are: Disabled 1 Minute 2 Minutes 5 Minutes 10 Minutes (default) 15 Minutes3 Minutes 4 Minutes 30 Minutes 1 Hour To increase battery operating time, set the Suspend Time-out option to a lower number of minutes. NOTE: Set the Suspend Time-out option to Disabled if using it causes compatibility problems with your software. A change to the Suspend Time-out option takes effect immediately (rebooting is not required). If you are not in the System Setup program, you can activate suspend mode at any time by pressing . The computer resumes normal operation automatically when you press the power button. System Memory System Memory displays the total amount of synchronous dynamic random-access memory (SDRAM) installed in your computer. No user-selectable settings are available for this option. The amount of memory displayed changes if you install or remove a memory module. System Primary System Primary displays the current status of the primary hard-disk drive password and allows you to assign or change this password. Settings for this option are: Disabled (the default) — Indicates that no primary hard-disk drive password is assigned Enabled — Indicates that a primary hard-disk drive password is currently assigned NOTICE: The password features provide a high level of security for the data in your computer. However, they are not foolproof. If your data requires more security, you should obtain and use additional forms of protection, such as data encryption programs or PC Cards with encryption features. Time Time resets the time on the computer's internal clock. Time is kept in a 24-hour format (hours:minutes:seconds). NOTE: If a network server controls the time reflected by the Time option, changing this option has no effect. A change to the Time option takes effect immediately (rebooting is not required). However, you must rebootto make the change apparent to the operating system. Universal Connect The Universal Connect option functions with the Dell Latitude C/Port Family APR if the computer uses Windows 95 or Windows 98. Set this option to Enabled (the default) if you often use more than one C/Port APR and want to minimize the initialization time when you connect the replicator to the computer. When this option is set to Disabled, the operating system generates a new profile each time you connect to a different docking device. Video Memory Video Memory displays the amount of video memory installed on the system board. No user-selectable settings are available for this option. Wakeup on LAN Wakeup on LAN enables the computer to power up when triggered by a special LAN signal. A change to the Wakeup on LAN option takes effect immediately. Back to Contents PageBack to Contents Page Suspend-to-Disk Utility (For Windows 95, Windows 98, and Windows NT Only): Dell™ Latitude™ CPx H-Series/J-Series User's Guide Suspend-to-Disk Utility Removing the S2D Partition Creating the S2D Partition Suspend-to-Disk Utility The Suspend-to-Disk (S2D) utility allows you to manage the S2D partition in your file system as your computing needs change. For instance, you can remove the S2D partition if you need the space on the harddisk drive for other purposes, or you can use the S2D utility to create the partition if you have removed it. Removing the S2D Partition If you want to use the S2D partition on your hard-disk drive for another purpose (for instance, if you are running out of file space), perform the following steps to remove the partition: 1. At an MS-DOS® prompt, type cd c:\dell\util and press to change to the directory on your hard-disk drive that contains the S2D utility files. If you are using an operating system that is not compatible with MS-DOS, see the readme.s2d file for instructions. 2. Type rms2d and press . Status messages appear on the display as the removal process progresses. When the S2D partition has been removed, the following message appears: The S2D partition was successfully removed. NOTE: After you remove the S2D partition, the computer cannot activate suspend-to-disk mode until you recreate the partition. If you try to activate suspend-to-disk mode and receive the message No Suspend-To-Disk partition available, you must create an S2D partition. Creating the S2D Partition The mks2d.exe file creates the S2D partition the computer uses to store the system data that is saved when you put the computer in suspend-to-disk mode. Use the mks2d.exe file to create a new S2D partition in the following cases:If Dell did not install MS-DOS on your hard-disk drive If you increase the amount of system memory by adding a memory module If you used the rms2d.exe file to remove the original S2D partition and now want to recreate the partition If your hard-disk drive becomes corrupted If you install a new hard-disk drive If you received the system utilities separately on diskette or CD or if you deleted the S2D utility from your hard-disk drive To create an S2D partition, perform the following steps. NOTE: If you are creating the partition on a new hard-disk drive, if Dell did not install MS-DOS on your hard-disk drive, or if you are using an operating system that is not compatible with MS-DOS, read the readme.s2d file before performing the following procedure. 1. At an MS-DOS prompt, type cd c:\dell\util and press to change to the directory on your hard-disk drive that contains the S2D utility files. 2. Type mks2d and press . As the utility builds the partition, status messages appear on the display. If an error message appears, it provides information about which steps to take to continue building the partition. When the S2D partition has been built and verified, the following message appears: The S2D partition was successfully created. Back to Contents PageBack to Contents Page Error Messages and Flash Codes: Dell™ Latitude™ CPx H-Series/J-Series User's Guide Error Messages Memory Allocations System Flash Codes I/O Memory Map Avoiding Interrupt Assignment Conflicts Error Messages Your application programs, operating system, and the computer itself can identify problems and alert you to them. When this occurs, a message may appear on the computer's display or on an external monitor (if one is attached), or a flash code may be emitted. If an error message appears on the display or external monitor, make a note of the message. For an explanation of the message and suggestions for correcting any errors, see Table 1. The messages are listed alphabetically. NOTE: If the message is not listed In Table 1, see the documentation for the application program that was running at the time the message appeared and/or the operating system documentation for an explanation of the message and a recommended action. Table 1. System Error Messages Message Cause Action Auxiliary device failure The touch pad, track stick, or external PS/2 mouse may be faulty. If you are using an external mouse only, check the connection for a loose or improperly connected cable. If the problem persists, enable the Pointing Device option. If the problem persists, call Dell for technical assistance. Bad command or file name The command you entered does not exist or is not in the pathname you specified. Make sure that you have typed the command correctly, placed spaces in the proper location, and used the correct pathname. Cache disabled due to failure The primary cache internal to the microprocessor has failed. Call Dell for technical assistance. Data error The diskette or hard-disk drive cannot read the data. Run the appropriate utility to check the file structure of the diskette drive or hard-disk drive. See the documentation that came with your operating system. Decreasing available memory One or more memory modules may be faulty or improperly seated. Reseat the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them. Disk C: failed initialization The hard-disk drive failed initialization. Run the Hard-Disk Drive tests in the Dell Diagnostics. Diskette drive 0 seek failure A cable may be loose, or the system configuration information may not match the hardware configuration. Run the Diskette Drive tests in the Dell Diagnostics. If error is not corrected, have the cables checked by an authorized service technician. Diskette read failure A cable may be loose, or the diskette may be faulty. If the diskette-drive access indicator lights up, try a different diskette. Diskette subsystem reset failed The diskette drive controller may be faulty. Run the Diskette Drive tests in the Dell Diagnostics. Diskette write- Because the diskette is write-protected, Slide the write-protect notch up.protected the operation cannot be completed. Drive not ready No diskette is in the diskette drive, or no hard-disk drive is in the drive bay. The operation requires a diskette in the drive or a hard-disk drive in the bay before it can continue. Put a diskette in the drive, or push the diskette all the way into the drive until the eject button pops out. Or, install a hard-disk drive in the drive bay. Error reading PCMCIA card The computer cannot identify the PC Card. Reseat the card or try another PC Card that you know works. Extended memory size has changed The amount of memory recorded in NVRAM does not match the memory installed in the computer. Reboot the computer. If the error appears on the display again, call Dell for technical assistance. Gate A20 failure An installed memory module may be loose. Reseat the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them. General failure The operating system is unable to carry out the command. This message is usually followed by specific information—for example, Printer out of paper. Respond by taking the appropriate action. Hard-disk drive configuration error The computer cannot identify the drive type. Turn off the computer, remove the drive, and boot the computer from a bootable diskette. Then turn off the computer, reinstall the drive, and reboot the computer. Run the HardDisk Drive tests in the Dell Diagnostics. Hard-disk drive controller failure 0 The hard-disk drive does not respond to commands from the computer. Turn off the computer, remove the drive, and boot the computer from a bootable diskette. Then turn off the computer again, reinstall the drive, and reboot the computer. If the problem persists, try another drive. Then run the Hard-Disk Drive tests in the Dell Diagnostics. CD-ROM drive controller failure 1 The CD-ROM drive does not respond to commands from the computer. Turn off the computer, remove the drive, and boot the computer from a bootable diskette. Then turn off the computer again, reinstall the drive, and reboot the computer. If the problem persists, try another drive. Then run the CD-ROM Drive tests in the Dell Diagnostics. Hard-disk drive failure The hard-disk drive does not respond to commands from the computer. Turn off the computer, remove the drive, and boot the computer from a bootable diskette. Then turn off the computer again, reinstall the drive, and reboot the computer. If the problem persists, try another drive. Then run the Hard-Disk Drive tests in the Dell Diagnostics Hard-disk drive read failure The hard-disk drive may be faulty. Turn off the computer, remove the drive, and boot the computer from a bootable diskette. Then turn off the computer again, reinstall the drive, and reboot the computer. If the problem persists, try another drive. Then run the Hard-Disk Drive tests in the Dell Diagnostics Invalid configuration informationplease run System Setup Program The system configuration information does not match the hardware configuration. This message is most likely to occur after a memory module is installed. Correct the appropriate options in the System Setup program. Keyboard clock line failure A cable or connector may be loose, or the keyboard may be faulty. Run the Keyboard Controller test in the Dell Diagnostics. Keyboard controller failure A cable or connector may be loose, or the keyboard may be faulty. Reboot the computer, and avoid touching the keyboard or the mouse during the boot routine. If the problem persists, run the Keyboard Controller test in the Dell Diagnostics. Keyboard data line failure A cable or connector may be loose, or the Run the Keyboard Controller test in the Dell Diagnostics.keyboard may be faulty. Keyboard stuck key failure If an external keyboard or keypad is being used, a cable or connector may be loose or the keyboard may be faulty. If the integrated keyboard is being used, the keyboard may be faulty. A key on the integrated keyboard or external keyboard may have been pressed while the computer was booting. Run the Stuck Key test in the Dell Diagnostics. Memory address line failure at address, read value expecting value An installed memory module may be faulty or improperly seated. Reseat the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them. Memory allocation error The software you are attempting to run is conflicting with the operating system, another application program, or a utility. Turn off the computer, wait 30 seconds, and then restart it. Try to run the program again. If the problem persists, contact the software company. Memory data line failure at address, read value expecting value An installed memory module may be faulty or improperly seated. Reseat the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them. Memory double word logic failure at address, read value expecting value An installed memory module may be faulty or improperly seated. Reseat the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them. Memory odd/even logic failure at address, read value expecting value An installed memory module may be faulty or improperly seated. Reseat the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them. Memory write/read failure at address, read value expecting value An installed memory module may be faulty or improperly seated. Reseat the memory modules and, if necessary, replace them. No boot device available The computer cannot find the diskette or hard-disk drive. If the diskette drive is your boot device, make sure that there is a bootable diskette in the drive. If the hard-disk drive is your boot device, make sure that the drive is installed, properly seated, and partitioned as a boot device. No boot sector on hard-disk drive The operating system may be corrupted. Reinstall your operating system. See the documentation that came with your operating system. No timer tick interrupt A chip on the system board may be malfunctioning. Run the System Set tests in the Dell Diagnostics. Non-system disk or disk error The diskette in drive A or your hard-disk drive does not have a bootable operating system installed on it. If you are trying to boot from the diskette, replace it with one that has a bootable operating system. Not a boot diskette There is no operating system on the diskette. Boot the computer with a diskette that contains an operating system. Optional ROM bad checksum The optional ROM apparently failed. Call Dell for technical assistance.Sector not found The operating system cannot locate a sector on the diskette or hard-disk drive. You probably have a bad sector or corrupted FAT on the diskette or harddisk drive. Run the appropriate utility to check the file structure on the diskette or hard-disk drive. If a large number of sectors are defective, back up the data (if possible), and then reformat the diskette or hard-disk drive. Seek error The operating system cannot find a specific track on the diskette or hard-disk drive. If the error is on the diskette drive, try another diskette in the drive. Shutdown failure A chip on the system board may be malfunctioning. Run the System Set tests in the Dell Diagnostics. Time-of-day clock lost power Data stored in NVRAM has become corrupted. Connect your computer to an electrical outlet to charge the battery. If the problem persists, try to restore the data. To restore the data, press to enter the System Setup program. Then immediately exit it. If the message reappears, call Dell for technical assistance. Time-of-day clock stopped The reserve battery that supports the data stored in NVRAM may be read. Connect your computer to an electrical outlet to charge the battery. If the problem persists, call Dell for technical assistance. Time-of-day not set-please run the System Setup program The time or date stored in the System Setup program does not watch the system clock. Correct the settings for the Date and Time options. (For instructions, see "System Setup Program.") Timer chip counter 2 failed A chip on the system board may be malfunctioning. Run the System Set tests in the Dell Diagnostics. Unexpected interrupt in protected mode The keyboard controller may be malfunctioning, or an installed memory module may be loose. Run the System Memory tests and the Keyboard Controller test in the Dell Diagnostics. Warning: Battery is critically low. The battery is running out of charge. Replace the battery, or connect the computer to an electrical outlet. Otherwise, activate suspend-to-disk mode or turn off the computer. System Flash Codes When errors that occur during the boot routine cannot be reported on the built-in display or on an external monitor (if attached), the Num Lock, Caps Lock, and Scroll Lock indicators (see Figure 1) may flash together in a pattern of lights (or flash code) that identifies the problem. For example, one flash, followed by a second flash, and then a burst of three flashes (code 1-1-3) means that the computer was unable to read the data in nonvolatile random-access memory (NVRAM). This information is important to the Dell support staff if you need to call for technical assistance. The Num Lock, Caps Lock, and Scroll Lock indicators flash briefly when the computer is turned on. The flash codes, if needed, occur after the boot routine. Figure 1. Flash Code Indicators1 Scroll Lock 2 Caps Lock 3 Num Lock When the computer emits a flash code, write it down on a copy of the Diagnostics Checklist and then look up its cause and meaning in Table 2. If you are unable to resolve the problem, use the Dell Diagnostics to identify a more serious cause. If you are still unable to resolve the problem, call Dell for technical assistance. Table 2. Flash Codes and Corrective Actions Message Cause Action 1-1-3 NVRAM write/read failure. Run the System Set tests in the Dell Diagnostics. If the program does not load, call Dell for technical assistance. 1-1-4 ROM BIOS checksum failure. Run the System Set tests in the Dell Diagnostics. If the program does not load, call Dell for technical assistance. 1-2-1 Programmable interval timer failure. Run the System Set tests in the Dell Diagnostics. If the program does not load, call Dell for technical assistance. 1-2-2 DMA initialization failure. Run the System Set tests in the Dell Diagnostics. If the program does not load, call Dell for technical assistance. 1-2-3 DMA page register write/read failure. Run the System Set tests in the Dell Diagnostics. If the program does not load, call Dell for technical assistance. 1-3-1 through 2-4-4 An installed memory module is not being properly identified or used. Make sure that a memory module is installed in one of the memory module sockets on the system board. The computer will not function unless at least one memory module is installed. 3-1-1 Slave DMA register failure. Run the System Set tests in the Dell Diagnostics. If the program does not load, call Dell for technical assistance. 3-1-2 Master DMA register failure. Run the System Set tests in the Dell Diagnostics. If the program does not load, call Dell for technical assistance. 3-1-3 Master interrupt mask register failure. Call Dell for technical assistance. 3-1-4 Slave interrupt mask register failure. Call Dell for technical assistance. 3-2-4 Keyboard controller test failure. Run the Keyboard Controller test in the Dell Diagnostics. 3-3-4 Display memory test failure. Run the Video Memory test in the Dell Diagnostics. 3-4-1 Display initialization failure. Run the Video tests in the Dell Diagnostics. 3-4-2 Display retrace test failure. Run the Video tests in the Dell Diagnostics. 4-2-1 No timer tick. Call Dell for technical assistance. 4-2-2 Shutdown failure. Call Dell for technical assistance. 4-2-3 Gate A20 failure. Call Dell for technical assistance. 4-2-4 Unexpected interrupt in protected mode. Call Dell for technical assistance. 4-3-1 Memory failure above address 0FFFFh. Run the System Memory tests in the Dell Diagnostics. 4-3-3 Timer chip counter 2 failure. Call Dell for technical assistance. 4-3-4 Time-of-day clock stopped. Call Dell for technical assistance.4-4-1 Serial port failure. Run the Serial/Infrared Ports tests in the Dell Diagnostics. 5-1-2 No usable memory. Run the System Memory tests in the Dell Diagnostics. Avoiding Interrupt Assignment Conflicts Problems can arise if two devices attempt to use the same interrupt request (IRQ) line. To avoid this type of conflict, check the documentation for the default IRQ line setting for each installed device. Then consult Table 3 to configure the device for one of the available IRQ lines. NOTES: Installed devices cannot share the same COM port address. The default address of your computer's serial port is COM1. To view IRQ line assignments in the Microsoft® Windows® 95 and Windows 98 operating systems, click the Start button, point to Settings, and click Control Panel. Double-click the System icon. Select the Device Manager tab, and then doubleclick Computer. Table 3. IRQ Line Assignments IRQ Line Reserved/Available IRQ0 Reserved; generated by the system timer IRQ1 Reserved; generated by the keyboard controller to signal that the keyboard output buffer is full IRQ2 Reserved; generated internally by the interrupt controller to enable IRQ8 through IRQ15 IRQ3 Available for use by a PC Card unless the integrated serial port or infrared port is configured for COM2 or COM4 IRQ4 Available for use by a PC Card unless the integrated serial port or infrared port is configured for COM1 (the default) or COM3 IRQ5 Available for use by the audio controller IRQ6 Generated by the diskette drive controller to indicate that the diskette drive requires the attention of the microprocessor IRQ7 Available for use by a PC Card or audio controller if the parallel port is disabled IRQ8 Reserved; generated by the system I/O controller's RTC IRQ9 Reserved; generated by the video controller IRQ10 Available for use by a PC Card or audio controller unless the C/Port Family APR or C/Dock Family Expansion Station is attached IRQ11 Generated by USB, PC Card, and audio controllers; available for use by a PC Card IRQ12 Reserved; generated by the keyboard controller to indicate that the output buffer of the DualPoint integrated pointing device or the external PS/2 mouse is full IRQ13 Reserved; generated by the math coprocessor IRQ14 Reserved; generated by the hard-disk drive to indicate that the drive requires the attention of the microprocessor IRQ15 Reserved; generated by CD-ROM drive in the modular bay to indicate that the drive requires the attention of the microprocessor Memory Allocations Table 4 provides a map of the conventional memory area. When the microprocessor or a program addresses a location within the conventional memory range, it is physically addressing a location in main memory.NOTE: To view memory allocations in Windows 95 and Windows 98, click the Start button, point to Settings, and click Control Panel. Double-click the System icon. Click the Device Manager tab, and then double-click Computer. Table 4. Conventional Memory Map Address Range Use 0000h-003FFh Interrupt vector table 00400h-00FFFF BIOS data area 00500h-005FFh MS-DOS® and BASIC work area 00600h-9FBFFh User memory Table 5 provides a map of the upper memory area. Some of these addresses are dedicated to various system devices, such as the system/video basic input/output system (BIOS). Others are available for use by expansion cards and/or an expanded memory manager (EMM). When the microprocessor or a program addresses a location within the upper memory area, it is physically addressing a location within one of these devices. Table 5. Upper Memory Map Address Range Use 0009FC00-0009FFFF PS/2-mouse data area 000A0000-000BFFFF Video RAM 000C0000-000CFFFF Video BIOS 000CC000-000CDFFF Reserved for PC Card 000F0000-000FFFFF System BIOS 00100000-03FFFFFF High memory area FD000000-FDFFFFFF Video RAM FF200000-FF2FFFFF Video RAM FFFE0000-FFFFFFFF BIOS ROM I/O Memory Map Table 6 provides a map of memory addresses reserved by the system for peripheral input/output (I/O) devices. Use the information in Table 6 to determine if the memory address of an external peripheral (such as a PC Card) conflicts with a memory address reserved by the system. Check the documentation of the external I/O device to determine its memory address. If there is a conflict with a memory address reserved by the system, change the address of the device. NOTE: To view I/O addresses in Windows 95 and Windows 98, click the Start button, point to Settings, and click Control Panel. Double-click the System icon. Click the Device Manager tab, and then double-click Computer. Table 6. I/O Memory Map Address Device 0000-001F DMA controller #1 0020-003F Interrupt controller #1 0040-005F System timers0060-006F Keyboard controller 0070-007F RTC and NMI enable 0080-009F DMA page registers 00A0-00BF Interrupt controller #2 00C0-00DF DMA controller #2 00F0-00FF Math coprocessor 0170-0177 CD-ROM drive controller 01F0-01F7 Hard-disk drive controller 0210-0217 Audio controller 0220-022F Audio controller 0270-0277 Fast IR 0376-0376 IDE controller 0378-037F LPT1 0388-038B Audio controller 038B-03BB VGA 03C0-03DF VGA 03E0-03E1 PC Card controller 03E8-03EF Fast IR 03F0-03F7 Diskette controller 03F8-03FF COM1 0530-0537 Audio controller 0778-077B ECP registers ECE0-ECFF USB controller FFA0-FFAF PCI-IDE bus registers Back to Contents PageBack to Contents Page Help Overview: Dell™ Latitude™ CPt C-Series Portable Computers User's Guide Technical Assistance Product Information Help Tools Returning Items for Warranty Repair or Credit Problems With Your Order Before You Call Technical Assistance If you need assistance with a technical problem, perform the following steps: 1. Run the Dell Diagnostics. 2. Make a copy of the Diagnostics Checklist and fill it out. 3. Use Dell's extensive suite of online services available at Dell's World Wide Web site (http://www.dell.com) for help with installation and troubleshooting procedures. 4. If the preceding steps have not resolved the problem, call Dell for technical assistance. When prompted by Dell's automated telephone system, enter your Express Service Code to route the call directly to the proper support personnel. If you do not have an Express Service Code, open the Dell Accessories folder, double-click the Express Service Code icon, and follow the directions. NOTE: Dell's Express Service Code system may not be available in all countries. For instructions on using the technical support service, see "Technical Support Service" and "Before You Call." Help Tools Dell provides a number of tools to assist you. These tools are described in the following sections. NOTE: Some of the following tools are not always available in all locations outside the continental U.S. Please call your local Dell representative for information on availability. World Wide Web The Internet is your most powerful tool for obtaining information about your computer and other Dell products. Through the Internet, you can access most of the services described in this section, including AutoTech, TechFax, order status, technical support, and product information.You can access Dell’s support Web site at http://support.dell.com. Click the map that appears to select your country and the Welcome to support.dell.com page opens. Enter your system information to access help tools and information such as: Support Your Dell — From this page you can access a number of tools and information such as system documentation, drivers and BIOS updates, and self-diagnostic tools for resolving many computer-related issues by following interactive flowcharts. Ask Dudley — Enter a question about your computer or about software. This tool searches the Dell Knowledge Base and Dell Support for answers and related topics. Communicate With Dell — Use Dell Talk Forum, a public discussion moderated by Dell technical support specialists, to obtain technical information or submit requests via e-mail to Dell Support. You can contact Dell electronically by using the following addresses: World Wide Web http://www.dell.com/ http://www.dell.com/ap/ (for Asian/Pacific countries only) http://www.euro.dell.com (for Europe only) http://www.dell.com/la/ (for Latin American countries) Anonymous file transfer protocol (FTP) ftp.dell.com/ Log in as user: anonymous, and use your e-mail address as your password. Electronic Support Service mobile_support@us.dell.com apsupport@dell.com (for Asian/Pacific countries only) support.euro.dell.com (for Europe only) Electronic Quote Service sales@dell.com apmarketing@dell.com (for Asian/Pacific countries only) Electronic Information Service info@dell.com AutoTech Service Dell's automated technical support service—AutoTech—provides recorded answers to the questions most frequently asked by Dell customers.When you call AutoTech, you use your touch-tone telephone to select the subjects that correspond to your questions. You can even interrupt an AutoTech session and continue the session later. The code number that the AutoTech service gives you allows you to continue your session where you ended it. The AutoTech service is available 24 hours a day, seven days a week. You can also access this service through the technical support service. For the telephone number to call, see the contact numbers for your region. TechFax Service Dell takes full advantage of fax technology to serve you better. Twenty-four hours a day, seven days a week, you can call the Dell TechFax line toll-free for all kinds of technical information. Using a touch-tone phone, you can select from a full directory of topics. The technical information you request is sent within minutes to the fax number you designate. For the TechFax telephone number to call, see the contact numbers for your region. TechConnect BBS Use your modem to access Dell's TechConnect bulletin board service (BBS) 24 hours a day, seven days a week. The service is menu-driven and fully interactive. The protocol parameters for the BBS are 1200 to 19.2K baud, 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit. Automated Order-Status System You can call this automated service to check on the status of any Dell products that you have ordered. A recording prompts you for the information needed to locate and report on your order. For the telephone number to call, see the contact numbers for your region. Technical Support Service Dell's industry-leading hardware technical support service is available 24 hours a day, seven days a week, to answer your questions about Dell hardware. Our technical support staff pride themselves on their track record: more than 90 percent of all problems and questions are taken care of in just one toll-free call, usually in less than 10 minutes. When you call, our experts can refer to records kept on your Dell system to better understand your particular question. Our technical support staff use computer-based diagnostics to provide fast, accurate answers to questions. To contact Dell's technical support service, see "Before You Call" and then call the number for your country as listed in "Contacting Dell." Problems With Your Order If you have a problem with your order, such as missing parts, wrong parts, or incorrect billing, contact Dell for customer assistance. Have your invoice or packing slip handy when you call. For the telephone number to call, see the contact numbers for your region.Product Information If you need information about additional products available from Dell, or if you would like to place an order, visit Dell's World Wide Web site at http://www.dell.com. For the telephone number to call to speak to a sales specialist, see "Contacting Dell." Returning Items for Warranty Repair or Credit Prepare all items being returned, whether for repair or credit, as follows: 1. Call Dell to obtain an authorization number, and write it clearly and prominently on the outside of the box. For the telephone number to call, see the contact numbers for your region. 2. Include a copy of the invoice and a letter describing the reason for the return. 3. Include a copy of the Diagnostics Checklist indicating the tests you have run and any error messages reported by the Dell Diagnostics. 4. Include any accessories that belong with the item(s) being returned (power cables, software diskettes, guides, and so on) if the return is for credit. 5. Pack the equipment to be returned in the original (or equivalent) packing materials. You are responsible for paying shipping expenses. You are also responsible for insuring any product returned, and you assume the risk of loss during shipment to Dell. Collect On Delivery (C.O.D.) packages are not accepted. Returns that are missing any of the preceding requirements will be refused at our receiving dock and returned to you. Before You Call NOTE: Have your Express Service Code ready when you call. The code helps Dell's automatedsupport telephone system direct your call more efficiently. Remember to fill out the Diagnostics Checklist. If possible, turn on your system before you call Dell for technical assistance and call from a telephone at or near the computer. You may be asked to type some commands at the keyboard, relay detailed information during operations, or try other troubleshooting steps possible only at the computer system itself. Make sure the system documentation is available. CAUTION: If you need to remove the computer covers, be sure to first disconnect the computer system's power and modem cables from all electrical outlets. Diagnostics ChecklistDate: Name: Address: Phone number: Service tag (bar code on the back of the computer): Express Service Code: Return Material Authorization Number (if provided by Dell support technician): Operating system and version: Peripherals: Expansion cards: Are you connected to a network? Yes No Network, version, and network card: Programs and versions: Refer to your operating system documentation to determine the contents of the system’s start-up files. If the computer is connected to a printer, print each file. Otherwise, record the contents of each file before calling Dell. Error message, beep code, or diagnostic code: Description of problem and troubleshooting procedures you performed: Back to Contents PageBack to Contents Page Contacting Dell: Dell™ Latitude™ CPx H-Series/J-Series User's Guide Overview Europe Contact Numbers International Dialing Codes Asia and Other Regions Contact Numbers Americas Contact Numbers Overview When you need to contact Dell, use the telephone numbers, codes, and electronic addresses provided in the following sections. "International Dialing Codes" provides the various codes required to make long-distance and international calls. "Americas Contact Numbers," "Europe Contact Numbers," and "Asia and Other Regions Contact Numbers" provide local telephone numbers, area codes, toll-free numbers, and e-mail addresses, if applicable, for each department or service available in various countries around the world. If you are making a direct-dialed call to a location outside of your local telephone service area, determine which codes to use (if any) in "International Dialing Codes," in addition to the local numbers provided in the other sections. For example, to place an international call from Paris, France to Bracknell, England, dial the international access code for France followed by the country code for the U.K., the city code for Bracknell, and then the local number as shown in the following illustration: To place a long-distance call within your own country, use area codes instead of international access codes, country codes, and city codes. For example, to call Paris, France from Montpellier, France, dial the area code plus the local number as shown in the following illustration: The codes required depend on where you are calling from as well as the destination of your call; in addition, each country has a different dialing protocol. If you need assistance in determining which codes to use, contact a local or an international operator. NOTES: Toll-free numbers are for use only within the country for which they are listed. Area codes are most often used to call long distance within your own country (not internationally)—in other words, when your call originates in the same country you are calling. Have your Express Service Code ready when you call. The code helps Dell's automated-supporttelephone system direct your call more efficiently. International Dialing Codes Click a listed country to obtain the appropriate contact numbers. Country (City) International Access Code Country Code City Code Australia (Sydney) 0011 61 2 Austria (Vienna) 900 43 1 Belgium (Brussels) 00 32 2 Brazil 0021 55 51 Brunei — 673 — Canada (North York, Ontario) 011 — Not required Chile (Santiago) — 56 2 China (Xiamen) — 86 592 Czech Republic (Prague) 00 420 2 Denmark (Horsholm) 009 45 Not required Finland (Helsinki) 990 358 9 France (Paris) (Montpellier) 00 33 (1) (4) Germany (Langen) 00 49 6103 Hong Kong 001 852 Not required Ireland (Bray) 16 353 1 Italy (Milan) 00 39 2 Japan (Kawasaki) 001 81 44 Korea (Seoul) 001 82 2 Luxembourg 00 352 — Macau — 853 Not required Malaysia (Penang) 00 60 4 Mexico (Colonia Granada) 95 52 5 Netherlands (Amsterdam) 00 31 20 New Zealand 00 64 — Norway (Lysaker) 095 47 Not requiredPoland (Warsaw) 011 48 22 Singapore (Singapore) 005 65 Not required South Africa (Johannesburg) 09/091 27 11 Spain (Madrid) 07 34 91 Sweden (Upplands Vasby) 009 46 8 Switzerland (Geneva) 00 41 22 Taiwan 002 886 — Thailand 001 66 — U.K. (Bracknell) 010 44 1344 U.S.A. (Austin, Texas) 011 1 Not required Americas Contact Numbers Country (City) Department Name or Service Area Code Local Number or Toll-Free Number Brazil Sales, Customer Support, Technical Support toll free: 0800 90 3355 Web site: http://www.dell.com.br Canada (North York, Ontario) NOTE: Customers in Canada call the U.S.A. for access to TechConnect BBS. Automated Order-Status System toll free: 1-800-433-9014 AutoTech (Automated technical support) toll free: 1-800-247-9362 Customer Care (From outside Toronto) toll free: 1-800-387-5759 Customer Care (From within Toronto) 416 758-2400 Customer Technical Support toll free: 1-800-847-4096 Sales (Direct Sales—from outside Toronto) toll free: 1-800-387-5752 Sales (Direct Sales—from within Toronto) 416 758-2200 Sales (Federal government, education, and medical) toll free: 1-800-567-7542 Sales (Major Accounts) toll free: 1-800-387-5755 TechConnect BBS (Austin, Texas, U.S.A.) 512 728-8528 TechFax toll free: 1-800-950-1329 Chile (Santiago) Sales, Customer Support, and Technical Support toll free: 1230-020-4823NOTE: Customers in Chile call the U.S.A. for sales, customer, and technical assistance Latin America NOTE: Customers in Latin America call the U.S.A. for sales, customer, and technical assistance. Customer Technical Support (Austin, Texas, U.S.A.) 512 728-4093 Customer Service (Austin, Texas, U.S.A.) 512 728-3619 Fax (Technical Support and Customer Service) (Austin, Texas, U.S.A.) 512 728-3883 Sales (Austin, Texas, U.S.A.) 512 728-4397 SalesFax (Austin, Texas, U.S.A.) 512 728-4600 728-3772 Mexico (Colonia Granada) NOTE: Customers in Mexico call the U.S.A. for access to the Automated Order-Status System and AutoTech. Automated Order-Status System (Austin, Texas, U.S.A.) 512 728-0685 AutoTech (Automated technical support) (Austin, Texas, U.S.A.) 512 728-0686 Customer Technical Support 525 228-7870 Sales 525 228-7811 toll free: 91-800-900-37 toll free: 91-800-904-49 Customer Service 525 228-7878 Main 525 228-7800 U.S.A. (Austin, Texas) Automated Order-Status System toll free: 1-800-433-9014 AutoTech (Automated technical support) toll free: 1-800-247-9362 Dell Home and Small Business Group: Customer Technical Support (Return Material Authorization Numbers) toll free: 1-800-624-9896 Customer Service (Credit Return Authorization Numbers) toll free: 1-800-624-9897 National Accounts (systems purchased by established Dell national accounts [have your account number handy], medical institutions, or value-added resellers [VARs]): Customer Service and Technical Support (Return Material Authorization Numbers) toll free: 1-800-822-8965 Public Americas International (systems purchased by governmental agencies [local,state, or federal] or educational institutions): Customer Service and Technical Support (Return Material Authorization Numbers) toll free: 1-800-234-1490 Dell Sales toll free: 1-800-289-3355 toll free: 1-800-879-3355 Spare Parts Sales toll free: 1-800-357-3355 DellWare™ toll free: 1-800-753-7201 DellWare FaxBack Service 512 728-1681 Fee-Based Technical Support toll free: 1-800-433-9005 Sales (Catalogs) toll free: 1-800-426-5150 Fax toll free: 1-800-727-8320 TechFax toll free: 1-800-950-1329 TechConnect BBS 512 728-8528 Dell Services for the Deaf, Hard-ofHearing, or Speech-Impaired toll free: 1-877-DELLTTY (1-877-335-5889 Switchboard 512 338-4400 Europe Contact Numbers Country (City) Department Name or Service Area Code Local Number or Toll-Free Number Austria (Vienna) NOTE: Customers in Austria call Langen, Germany for Technical Support and Customer Care. Switchboard 01 491 040 Home/Small Business Sales 01 795676-02 Home/Small Business Sales Fax 01 795676-05 Home/Small Business Customer Care 01 795676-03 Preferred Accounts/Corporate Customer Care 0660-8056 Home/Small Business Technical Support 01 795676-04 Preferred Accounts/Corporate Technical Support 0660-8779 Web site: http://support.euro.dell.com/at E-mail: tech_support_germany@dell.com Belgium Technical Support 02 481 92 88(Brussels) Customer Care 02 481 91 19 Home/Small Business Sales toll free: 0800 16884 Corporate Sales 02 481 91 00 Fax 02 481 92 99 Switchboard 02 481 91 00 Web site: http://support.euro.dell.com/be E-mail: tech_be@dell.com Czech Republic (Prague) Technical Support 02 22 83 27 27 Customer Care 02 22 83 27 11 Fax 02 22 83 27 14 TechFax 02 22 83 27 28 Switchboard 02 22 83 27 11 Web site: http://support.euro.dell.com/cz E-mail: czech_dell@dell.com Denmark (Horsholm) NOTE: Customers in Denmark call Sweden for fax technical support. Technical Support 45170182 Relational Customer Care 45170184 Home/Small Business Customer Care 32875505 Switchboard 45170100 Fax Technical Support (Upplands Vasby, Sweden) 859005594 Fax Switchboard 45170117 Web site: http://support.euro.dell.com/dk E-mail: den_support@dell.com Finland (Helsinki) Technical Support 09 253 313 60 Technical Support Fax 09 253 313 81 Relational Customer Care 09 253 313 38 Home/Small Business Customer Care 09 693 791 94 Fax 09 253 313 99 Switchboard 09 253 313 00Web site: http://support.euro.dell.com/fi E-mail: fin_support@dell.com France (Paris/Montpellier) Technical Support 0803 387 270 Customer Care (Paris) 01 47 62 68 92 Customer Care (Montpellier) 04 67 06 61 96 TechConnect BBS (Montpellier) 04 67 22 53 04 Fax (Montpellier) 04 67 06 60 07 Switchboard (Paris) 01 47 62 69 00 Switchboard (Montpellier) 04 67 06 60 00 Web site: http://support.euro.dell.com/fr E-mail: web_fr_tech@dell.com Germany (Langen) Technical Support 06103 766-7200 Technical Support Fax 06103 766-9222 Home/Small Business Customer Care 0180-5-224400 Global Segment Customer Care 06103 766-9570 Preferred Accounts Customer Care 06103 766-9420 Large Accounts Customer Care 06103 766-9560 Public Accounts Customer Care 06103 766-9555 TechConnect BBS 06103 766-9666 Switchboard 06103 766-7000 Web site: http://www.dell.de/support E-mail: tech_support_germany@dell.com Ireland (Bray) Technical Support 1-850-543-543 Customer Care 01 204 4026 Sales 1-850-235-235 SalesFax 01 286 2020 Fax 01 286 6848 TechConnect BBS 01 204 4711 TechFax 01 204 4708Switchboard 01 286 0500 Web site: http://support.euro.dell.com/ie E-mail: dell_direct_support@dell.com Italy (Milan) Technical Support 2 57782.690 Customer Care 2 57782.555 Sales 2 57782.411 Fax 2 57503530 Switchboard 2 57782.1 Web site: http://support.euro.dell.com/it E-mail: support_italy@dell.com Luxembourg NOTE: Customers in Luxembourg call Belgium for sales, customer, and technical assistance. Technical Support (Brussels, Belgium) 02 481 92 88 Home/Small Business Sales (Brussels, Belgium) toll free: 080016884 Corporate Sales (Brussels, Belgium) 02 481 91 00 Customer Care (Brussels, Belgium) 02 481 91 19 Switchboard (Brussels, Belgium) 02 481 91 00 Fax (Brussels, Belgium) 02 481 92 99 Web site: http://support.euro.dell.com/be E-mail: tech_be@dell.com Netherlands (Amsterdam) Technical Support 020 581 8838 Customer Care 020 581 8740 Home/Small Business Sales toll free: 0800-0663 Home/Small Business Sales Fax 020 682 7171 Corporate Sales 020 581 8818 Corporate Sales Fax 020 686 8003 Fax 020 686 8003 Switchboard 020 581 8818 Web site: http://support.euro.dell.com/nlE-mail: tech_nl@dell.com Norway (Lysaker) NOTE: Customers in Norway call Sweden for fax technical support. Technical Support 671 16882 Relational Customer Care 671 17514 Home/Small Business Customer Care 231 62298 Switchboard 671 16800 Fax Technical Support (Upplands Vasby, Sweden) 590 05 594 Fax Switchboard 671 16865 Web site: http://support.euro.dell.com/no E-mail: nor_support@dell.com Poland (Warsaw) Technical Support 22 60 61 999 Customer Care 22 60 61 999 Sales 22 60 61 999 Switchboard 22 60 61 999 Fax 22 60 61 998 Web site: http://support.euro.dell.com/pl E-mail: pl_support@dell.com Spain (Madrid) Technical Support 902 100 130 Corporate Customer Care 902 118 546 Home/Small Business Customer Care 902 118 540 TechConnect BBS 91 329 33 53 Corporate Sales 902 100 185 Home/Small Business Sales 902 118 541 Switchboard 91 722 92 00 Web site: http://support.euro.dell.com/es E-mail: es_support@dell.com Sweden (Upplands Vasby) Technical Support 08 590 05 199 Relational Customer Care 08 590 05 642 Home/Small Business Customer Care 08 587 70 527 Fax Technical Support 08 590 05 594Sales 08 590 05 185 Web site: http://support.euro.dell.com/se E-mail: swe_support@dell.com Switzerland (Geneva) Technical Support 0844 811 411 Customer Care 0848 802 802 Switchboard 022 799 01 01 Fax 022 799 01 90 Web site: http://support.euro.dell.com/ch E-mail: swisstech@dell.com U.K. (Bracknell) Technical Support 0870-908-0800 Corporate Customer Care 01344 720206 Home/Small Business Customer Care 0870-906-0010 TechConnect BBS 0870-908-0610 Sales 01344 720000 AutoFax 0870-908-0510 Web site: http://support.euro.dell.com/uk E-mail: dell_direct_support@dell.com Asia and Other Regions Contact Numbers Country (City) Department Name or Service Area Code Local Number or Toll-Free Number Australia (Sydney) Home and Small Business 1-300-65-55-33 Government and Business toll free: 1-800-633-559 Preferred Accounts Division (PAD) toll free: 1-800-060-889 Customer Care toll free: 1-800-819-339 Corporate Sales toll free: 1-800-808-385 Transaction Sales toll free: 1-800-808-312 Fax toll free: 1-800-818-341 Brunei Customer Technical Support (Penang, Malaysia) 810 4966NOTE: Customers in Brunei call Malaysia for customer assistance. Customer Service (Penang, Malaysia) 810 4949 Transaction Sales (Penang, Malaysia) 810 4955 China (Xiamen) Customer Service toll free: 800 858 2437 Sales toll free: 800 858 2222 Hong Kong NOTE: Customers in Hong Kong call Malaysia for customer assistance. Technical Support toll free: 800 96 4107 Customer Service (Penang, Malaysia) 810 4949 Transaction Sales toll free: 800 96 4109 Corporate Sales toll free: 800 96 4108 Japan (Kawasaki) Technical Support (Server) toll free: 0120-1984-35 Technical Support (Dimension™ and Inspiron™) toll free: 0120-1982-56 or 0088- 25-3355 Technical Support (WorkStation, OptiPlex™, and Latitude™) toll free: 0120-1984-39 or 0088- 22-7890 Y2K Support 044 556-4298 Customer Care 044 556-4240 Home and Small Business Group Sales 044 556-3344 Preferred Accounts Division Sales 044 556-3433 Large Corporate Accounts 044 556-3430 Faxbox Service 03-5972-5840 Switchboard 044 556-4300 Korea (Seoul) Technical Support toll free: 080-200-3800 Sales toll free: 080-200-3777 Customer Service (Penang, Malaysia) 604-810-4949 Customer Service (Seoul, Korea) 2194-6220 Fax 2194-6202 Switchboard 2194-6000 Macau NOTE: Customers in Technical Support toll free: 0800 582 Customer Service (Penang, Malaysia) 810 4949 Transaction Sales toll free: 0800 581Macau call Malaysia for customer assistance. Malaysia (Penang) Technical Support toll free: 1 800 888 298 Customer Service 04 810 4949 Transaction Sales toll free: 1 800 888 202 Corporate Sales toll free: 1 800 888 213 New Zealand Home and Small Business 0800 446 255 Government and Business 0800 444 617 Sales 0800 441 567 Fax 0800 441 566 Singapore (Singapore) NOTE: Customers in Singapore call Malaysia for customer assistance. Technical Support toll free: 800 6011 051 Customer Service (Penang, Malaysia) 04 810 4949 Transaction Sales toll free: 800 6011 054 Corporate Sales toll free: 800 6011 053 South Africa (Johannesburg) Technical Support 011 709 7710 Customer Care 011 709 7710 Sales 011 706 7700 Fax 011 709 0495 Switchboard 011 709 7700 Web site: http://support.euro.dell.com/za E-mail: dell_za_support@dell.com Southeast Asian/Pacific Countries (excluding Australia, Brunei, China, Hong Kong, Japan, Korea, Macau, Malaysia, New Zealand, Customer Technical Support, Customer Service, and Sales (Penang, Malaysia) 60 4 810-4810Singapore, Taiwan, and Thailand—refer to individual listings for these countries) Taiwan Technical Support toll free: 0080 60 1225 Technical Support (Servers) toll free: 0080 60 1256 Customer Service (Penang, Malaysia) 810 4949 Transaction Sales toll free: 0080 651 228/0800 33 556 Corporate Sales toll free: 0080 651 227/0800 33 555 Thailand NOTE: Customers in Thailand call Malaysia for customer assistance. Technical Support toll free: 088 006 007 Customer Service (Penang, Malaysia) 810 4949 Sales toll free: 088 006 009 Back to Contents Page www.dell.com | support.dell.com Dell™ Latitude™ X1 Quick Reference Guide Model PP05SNotes, Notices, and Cautions NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your computer. NOTICE: A NOTICE indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death. Abbreviations and Acronyms For a complete list of abbreviations and acronyms, see the Glossary in your User’s Guide. NOTE: Some features may not be available for your computer or in certain countries. ____________________ Information in this document is subject to change without notice. © 2005 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. Reproduction in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden. Trademarks used in this text: Dell, the DELL logo, and Latitude are trademarks of Dell Inc.; Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation; Intel, Pentium, and Celeron are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own. Model PP05S January 2005 P/N P6419 Rev. A00Contents 3 Contents Finding Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Setting Up Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 About Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Left View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Right View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Back View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Bottom View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Using a Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Battery Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Checking the Battery Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Charging the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Removing a Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Installing a Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Storing a Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Solving Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Notebook System Software (NSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Lockups and Software Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Using the Dell Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 When to Use the Dell Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Starting the Dell Diagnostics From Your Hard Drive . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Starting the Dell Diagnostics From the Optional Drivers and Utilities CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Dell Diagnostics Main Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 ContentsQuick Reference Guide 5 Finding Information NOTE: Some features may not be available for your computer or in certain countries. NOTE: Additional information may ship with your computer. What Are You Looking For? Find It Here • A diagnostic program for my computer • Drivers for my computer • My computer documentation • My device documentation • Notebook System Software (NSS) Drivers and Utilities CD (also known as ResourceCD) Documentation and drivers are already installed on your computer. You can use the CD to reinstall drivers, run the Dell Diagnostics, or access your documentation. Readme files may be included on your CD to provide last-minute updates about technical changes to your computer or advanced technical-reference material for technicians or experienced users. NOTE: Drivers and documentation updates can be found at support.dell.com. NOTE: The Drivers and Utilities CD is optional and may not ship with your computer. • How to set up my computer • Basic troubleshooting information • How to run the Dell Diagnostics • How to remove and install parts Quick Reference Guide NOTE: The Quick Reference Guide is optional and may not ship with your computer. NOTE: This document is available as a PDF at support.dell.com.6 Quick Reference Guide www.dell.com | support.dell.com • Warranty information • Terms and Conditions (U.S. only) • Safety instructions • Regulatory information • Ergonomics information • End User License Agreement Dell™ Product Information Guide • How to remove and replace parts • Specifications • How to configure system settings • How to troubleshoot and solve problems User’s Guide Microsoft® Windows® XP Help and Support Center 1 Click the Start button and click Help and Support. 2 Click User’s and system guides and click User’s guides. The User’s Guide is also available on the optional Drivers and Utilities CD. • Service Tag and Express Service Code • Microsoft Windows License Label Service Tag and Microsoft Windows License These labels are located on the bottom of your computer. • Use the Service Tag to identify your computer when you use support.dell.com or contact technical support. • Enter the Express Service Code to direct your call when contacting technical support. What Are You Looking For? Find It HereQuick Reference Guide 7 • Solutions — Troubleshooting hints and tips, articles from technicians, online courses, frequently asked questions • Community — Online discussion with other Dell customers • Upgrades — Upgrade information for components, such as memory, the hard drive, and the operating system • Customer Care — Contact information, service call and order status, warranty, and repair information • Service and support — Service call status and support history, service contract, online discussions with technical support • Reference — Computer documentation, details on my computer configuration, product specifications, and white papers • Downloads — Certified drivers, patches, and software updates • Notebook System Software (NSS)— If you reinstall the operating system for your computer, you should also reinstall the NSS utility. NSS provides critical updates for your operating system and support for Dell™ 3.5-inch USB floppy drives, Intel® Pentium® M processors, optical drives, and USB devices. NSS is necessary for correct operation of your Dell computer. The software automatically detects your computer and operating system and installs the updates appropriate for your configuration. To download Notebook System Software: 1 Go to support.dell.com and click Downloads. 2 Enter your Service Tag or product model. 3 In the Download Category drop-down menu, click All. 4 Select the operating system and operating system language for your computer, and click Submit. 5 Under Select a Device, scroll to System and Configuration Utilities, and click Dell Notebook System Software. Dell Support Website — support.dell.com NOTE: Select your region to view the appropriate support site. NOTE: Corporate, government, and education customers can also use the customized Dell Premier Support website at premier.support.dell.com. The website may not be available in all regions. What Are You Looking For? Find It Here8 Quick Reference Guide www.dell.com | support.dell.com Setting Up Your Computer CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. 1 Unpack the accessories box. 2 Set aside the contents of the accessories box, which you will need to complete the setup of your computer. The accessories box also contains user documentation and any software or additional hardware (such as PC Cards, drives, or batteries) that you have ordered. • How to use Windows XP • Documentation for my computer • Documentation for devices (such as a modem) Windows Help and Support Center 1 Click the Start button and click Help and Support. 2Type a word or phrase that describes your problem and click the arrow icon. 3 Click the topic that describes your problem. 4 Follow the instructions on the screen. • How to reinstall my operating system Operating System CD The operating system is already installed on your computer. To reinstall your operating system, use the Operating System CD. See your User’s Guide for instructions. After you reinstall your operating system, use the Drivers and Utilities CD to reinstall drivers for the devices that came with your computer. Your operating system product key label is located on your computer. NOTE: The color of your CD varies based on the operating system you ordered. NOTE: The Operating System CD is optional and may not ship with your computer. What Are You Looking For? Find It HereQuick Reference Guide 9 3 Connect the AC adapter to the AC adapter connector on the computer and to the electrical outlet. 4 Open the computer display and press the power button to turn on the computer.10 Quick Reference Guide www.dell.com | support.dell.com About Your Computer Front View display keyboard device and keyboard status lights touch pad touch pad buttons (2) Secure Digital memory slotQuick Reference Guide 11 Left View Right View Back View AC adapter connector video connector powered USB connector 1394 connector audio connectors CompactFlash card slot USB connector network connector power button modem connector security cable slot12 Quick Reference Guide www.dell.com | support.dell.com Bottom View Using a Battery Battery Performance CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions located in the Product Information Guide. NOTE: For information about the Dell warranty for your computer, see the Product Information Guide or separate paper warranty document that shipped with your computer. For optimal computer performance and to help preserve BIOS settings, operate your Dell™ portable computer with the main battery installed at all times. Use a battery to run the computer when it is not connected to an electrical outlet. One battery is supplied as standard equipment in the battery bay. speaker battery-bay latch releases (2) battery charge gauge batteryQuick Reference Guide 13 Battery operating time varies depending on operating conditions. Operating time is significantly reduced when you perform operations including, but not limited to, the following: • Using wireless communications devices or USB devices • Using high-brightness display settings, 3D screen savers, or other power-intensive programs such as 3D games • Running the computer in maximum performance mode NOTE: It is recommended that you connect your computer to an electrical outlet when writing to a CD or DVD. You can check the battery charge before you insert the battery into the computer. You can also set power management options to alert you when the battery charge is low. CAUTION: Using an incompatible battery may increase the risk of fire or explosion. Replace the battery only with a compatible battery purchased from Dell. The lithium-ion battery is designed to work with your Dell computer. Do not use a battery from other computers with your computer. CAUTION: Do not dispose of batteries with household waste. When your battery no longer holds a charge, call your local waste disposal or environmental agency for advice on disposing of a lithium-ion battery. See "Battery Disposal" in the Product Information Guide. CAUTION: Misuse of the battery may increase the risk of fire or chemical burn. Do not puncture, incinerate, disassemble, or expose the battery to temperatures above 65°C (149°F). Keep the battery away from children. Handle damaged or leaking batteries with extreme care. Damaged batteries may leak and cause personal injury or equipment damage. Checking the Battery Charge The Dell QuickSet Battery Meter, the Microsoft® Windows® Power Meter window and icon, the battery charge gauge and health gauge, and the low-battery warning provide information on the battery charge. Dell QuickSet Battery Meter If Dell QuickSet is installed, press to display the QuickSet Battery Meter. The Battery Meter window displays status, charge level, and charge completion time for the battery in your computer.14 Quick Reference Guide www.dell.com | support.dell.com The following icons appear in the Battery Meter window: For more information about QuickSet, right-click the icon in the taskbar, and click Help. Microsoft® Windows® Power Meter The Windows Power Meter indicates the remaining battery charge. To check the Power Meter, double-click the icon on the taskbar. For more information about the Power Meter tab, see "Power Management" in your User’s Guide. If the computer is connected to an electrical outlet, a icon appears. Charge Gauge Before you insert a battery, press the status button on the battery charge gauge to illuminate the charge-level lights. Each light represents approximately 20 percent of the total battery charge. For example, if the battery has 80 percent of its charge remaining, four of the lights are on. If no lights appear, the battery has no charge. The computer or docking device is running on battery power. The computer is connected to AC power and the battery is charging. The computer is connected to AC power and the battery is fully charged.Quick Reference Guide 15 Health Gauge The battery operating time is largely determined by the number of times it is charged. After hundreds of charge and discharge cycles, batteries lose some charge capacity, or battery health. To check the battery health, press and hold the status button on the battery charge gauge for at least 3 seconds. If no lights appear, the battery is in good condition, and more than 80 percent of its original charge capacity remains. Each light represents incremental degradation. If five lights appear, less than 60 percent of the charge capacity remains, and you should consider replacing the battery. See "Specifications" in your User’s Guide for more information about the battery operating time. Low-Battery Warning NOTICE: To avoid losing or corrupting data, save your work immediately after a low-battery warning. Then connect the computer to an electrical outlet. If the battery runs completely out of power, hibernate mode begins automatically. A pop-up window warns you when the battery charge is approximately 90 percent depleted. For more information about low-battery alarms, see "Power Management" in your User’s Guide. Charging the Battery NOTE: The AC adapter charges a completely discharged battery in approximately 1 hour with the computer turned off. Charge time is longer with the computer turned on. You can leave the battery in the computer as long as you like. The battery’s internal circuitry prevents the battery from overcharging. When you connect the computer to an electrical outlet or install a battery while the computer is connected to an electrical outlet, the computer checks the battery charge and temperature. If necessary, the AC adapter then charges the battery and maintains the battery charge. If the battery is hot from being used in your computer or being in a hot environment, the battery may not charge when you connect the computer to an electrical outlet. The battery is too hot to start charging if the light flashes alternately green and orange. Disconnect the computer from the electrical outlet and allow the computer and the battery to cool to room temperature. Then connect the computer to an electrical outlet to continue charging the battery. For more information about resolving problems with a battery, see "Power Problems" in your User’s Guide.16 Quick Reference Guide www.dell.com | support.dell.com Removing a Battery CAUTION: Before performing these procedures, disconnect the modem from the telephone wall jack. 1 Ensure that the computer is turned off or connected to an electrical outlet. 2 Slide and hold the battery-bay latch releases on the bottom of the computer, and then remove the battery from the bay. Installing a Battery Slide the battery into the bay until the latch releases click. latch releases (2)Quick Reference Guide 17 Storing a Battery Remove the battery when you store your computer for an extended period of time. A battery discharges during prolonged storage. After a long storage period, recharge the battery fully before you use it. Solving Problems Notebook System Software (NSS) If you reinstall the operating system for your Dell™ computer, it is also recommended to reinstall the NSS utility. The utility is available on the optional Drivers and Utilities CD and on the Dell Support website at support.dell.com. To download the utility, go to Downloads at support.dell.com and select your computer model from the drop-down menu. Under Select Your Download Category, select System and Configuration Utilities, select your operating system and language, and then follow the instructions. NSS provides critical updates for your operating system and support for Dell™ 3.5-inch USB floppy drives, Intel® Pentium® M processors, Intel Celeron® M processors, optical drives, and USB devices. NSS is necessary for the correct operation of your Dell computer. The software automatically detects your computer and operating system and installs the updates appropriate for your configuration. NOTE: NSS is critical for the correct operation of USB devices. Lockups and Software Problems CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. The computer does not start up The computer stops responding NOTICE: You might lose data if you are unable to perform an operating system shutdown. ENSURE THAT THE AC ADAPTER I S FIRMLY CONNECTED T O THE COMPUTER AND T O THE ELECTRICAL OUTLET. TURN THE COMPUTER OFF — If you are unable to get a response by pressing a key on your keyboard or moving your mouse, press and hold the power button for at least 8 to 10 seconds until the computer turns off. Then restart your computer. 18 Quick Reference Guide www.dell.com | support.dell.com A program stops responding A program crashes repeatedly NOTE: Software usually includes installation instructions in its documentation or on a floppy disk or CD. A program is designed for an earlier Microsoft® Windows® operating system A solid blue screen appears EN D THE PROGRAM — 1 Press simultaneously. 2 Click Applications. 3 Click the program that is no longer responding. 4 Click End Task. CHECK THE SOFTWARE DOCUMENTATION — If necessary, uninstall and then reinstall the program. IF YO U AR E USING WINDOWS XP, RUN THE PROGRAM COMPATIBILITY WIZARD — The Program Compatibility Wizard configures a program so it runs in an environment similar to nonWindows XP operating system environments. 1 Click the Start button, point to All Programs→ Accessories, and then click Program Compatibility Wizard. 2 In the welcome screen, click Next. 3 Follow the instructions on the screen. TURN THE COMPUTER OFF — If you are unable to get a response by pressing a key on your keyboard or moving your mouse, press and hold the power button for at least 8 to 10 seconds until the computer turns off. Then restart your computer. Quick Reference Guide 19 Other software problems Using the Dell Diagnostics When to Use the Dell Diagnostics If you experience a problem with your computer, perform the checks in "Solving Problems" and run the Dell Diagnostics before you contact Dell for technical assistance. It is recommended that you print these procedures before you begin. NOTICE: The Dell Diagnostics works only on Dell™ computers. Start the Dell Diagnostics from either your hard drive orfrom the optional Drivers and Utilities CD (also known as the ResourceCD). CHECK THE SOFTWARE DOCUMENTATION O R CONTACT THE SOFTWARE MANUFACTURER FOR TROUBLESHOOTING INFORMATION — • Ensure that the program is compatible with the operating system installed on your computer. • Ensure that your computer meets the minimum hardware requirements needed to run the software. See the software documentation for information. • Ensure that the program is installed and configured properly. • Verify that the device drivers do not conflict with the program. • If necessary, uninstall and then reinstall the program. BACK U P YOUR FILES IMMEDIATELY. US E A VIRUS-SCANNING PROGRAM T O CHECK THE HARD DRIVE, FLOPPY DISKS, O R CDS. SAVE AND CLOSE ANY OPEN FILES O R PROGRAMS AND SHUT DOWN YOUR COMPUTER THROUGH THE Start MENU. SCAN THE COMPUTER FOR SPYWARE — If you are experiencing slow computer performance, you frequently receive pop-up advertisements, or you are having problems connecting to the Internet, your computer might be infected with spyware. Use an anti-virus program that includes anti-spyware protection (your program may require an upgrade) to scan the computer and remove spyware. For more information, go to support.dell.com and search for the keyword spyware. RUN THE DELL DIAGNOSTICS — If all tests run successfully, the error condition is related to a software problem.20 Quick Reference Guide www.dell.com | support.dell.com Starting the Dell Diagnostics From Your Hard Drive The Dell Diagnostics is located on a hidden diagnostic utility partition on your hard drive. NOTE: If your computer cannot display a screen image, contact Dell. 1 Shut down the computer. 2 Turn on the computer. When the DELL™ logo appears, press immediately. If you wait too long and the operating system logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Microsoft® Windows® desktop. Then shut down your computer and try again. 3 When the boot device list appears, highlight Diagnostics and press . The computer runs the Pre-boot System Assessment, a series of initial tests of your system board, keyboard, hard drive, and display. • During the assessment, answer any questions that appear. • If a failure is detected, the computer stops and beeps. To stop the assessment and restart the computer, press ; to continue to the next test, press ; to retest the component that failed, press . • If failures are detected during the Pre-boot System Assessment, write down the error code(s) and contact Dell before continuing on to the Dell Diagnostics. If the Pre-boot System Assessment completes successfully, you receive the message Booting Dell Diagnostic Utility Partition. Press any key to continue. NOTE: If you see a message stating that no diagnostics utility partition has been found, run the Dell Diagnostics from your Drivers and Utilities CD. 4 Press any key to start the Dell Diagnostics from the diagnostics utility partition on your hard drive. Starting the Dell Diagnostics From the Optional Drivers and Utilities CD 1 Connect a CD drive to the system. 2 Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD. 3 Shut down and restart the computer. When the DELL logo appears, press immediately. If you wait too long and the Windows logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Windows desktop. Then shut down your computer and try again. NOTE: The next steps change the boot sequence for one time only. On the next start-up, the computer boots according to the devices specified in system setup. 4 When the boot device list appears, highlight CD/DVD/CD-RW Drive and press . 5 Select the CD/DVD/CD-RW Drive option from the CD boot menu. 6 Select the Boot from CD-ROM option from the menu that appears.Quick Reference Guide 21 7 Type 1 to start the ResourceCD menu. 8 Type 2 to start the Dell Diagnostics. 9 Select Run the 32 Bit Dell Diagnostics from the numbered list. If multiple versions are listed, select the version appropriate for your computer. 10 When the Dell Diagnostics Main Menu appears, select the test you want to run. Dell Diagnostics Main Menu 1 After the Dell Diagnostics loads and the Main Menu screen appears, click the button for the option you want. 2 If a problem is encountered during a test, a message appears with an error code and a description of the problem. Write down the error code and problem description and follow the instructions on the screen. If you cannot resolve the error condition, contact Dell. NOTE: The Service Tag for your computer is located at the top of each test screen. If you contact Dell, technical support will ask for your Service Tag. 3 If you run a test from the Custom Test or Symptom Tree option, click the applicable tab described in the following table for more information. Option Function Express Test Performs a quick test of devices. This test typically takes 10 to 20 minutes and requires no interaction on your part. Run Express Test first to increase the possibility of tracing the problem quickly. Extended Test Performs a thorough check of devices. This test typically takes 1 hour or more and requires you to answer questions periodically. Custom Test Tests a specific device. You can customize the tests you want to run. Symptom Tree Lists the most common symptoms encountered and allows you to select a test based on the symptom of the problem you are having. Tab Function Results Displays the results of the test and any error conditions encountered. Errors Displays error conditions encountered, error codes, and the problem description.22 Quick Reference Guide www.dell.com | support.dell.com 4 When the tests are completed, if you are running the Dell Diagnostics from the Drivers and Utilities CD, remove the CD. 5 When the tests are complete, close the test screen to return to the MainMenu screen. To exit the Dell Diagnostics and restart the computer, close the Main Menu screen. Help Describes the test and may indicate requirements for running the test. Configuration Displays your hardware configuration for the selected device. The Dell Diagnostics obtains configuration information for all devices from system setup, memory, and various internal tests, and it displays the information in the device list in the left pane of the screen. The device list may not display the names of all the components installed on your computer or all devices attached to your computer. Parameters Allows you to customize the test by changing the test settings. Tab Functionwww.dell.com | support.dell.com Dell™ Latitude™ X1 Hurtig referenceguide Model PP05SBemærkninger, meddelelser og advarsler OBS! En OBS angiver vigtige oplysninger, som du kan bruge for at udnytte computeren optimalt. BEMÆRK: En BEMÆRK angiver enten en mulig beskadigelse af hardware eller tab af data og oplyser dig om, hvordan du kan undgå dette problem. FORSIGTIG: En FORSIGTIG angiver mulig tingskade, legemsbeskadigelse eller død. Forkortelser og akronymer For en fuldstændig fortegnelse over forkortelser og akronymer, seordbogen i Brugervejledning. OBS! Nogle elementer vil måske ikke være tilgængelige på din computer eller i visse lande. ____________________ Oplysningerne i dette dokument kan ændres uden varsel. © 2005 Dell Inc. Alle rettigheder forbeholdt. Enhver form for gengivelse uden skriftlig tilladelse fra Dell Inc. er strengt forbudt. Anvendte varemærker i denne tekst: Dell, DELL -logoet og Latitude ervaremærker tilhørende Dell Inc.; Microsoftog Windows erregistrerede varemærker tilhørende Microsoft Corporation; Intel, Pentium og Celeron er registrerede varemærker tilhørende Intel Corporation. Andre varemærker og firmanavne kan være brugt i dette dokument til at henvise til enten de fysiske eller juridiske personer, som gør krav på mærkerne og navnene, eller til deres produkter. Dell Inc. fraskriver sig enhver tingslig rettighed, for så vidt angår varemærker og firmanavne, som ikke er deres egne. Model PP05S Januar 2005 P/N P6419 Rev. A00Indholdsfortegnelse 25 Indholdsfortegnelse Sådan finder du information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Opsætning af computeren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Om computeren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Visning forfra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Venstre visnig. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 'Højre visning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Visning bagfra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Underside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Anvendelse af batteri . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Batteriydelse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Kontrol af batteriopladning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Opladning af batteriet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Fjernelse af et batteri . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Isætning af et batteri . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Opbevaring af batteri . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Problemløsning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Notebook System Software (NSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Hængnings- og softwareproblemer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Sådan køres Dell Diagnostics (Dell-diagnosticering) . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Hvornår Dell Diagnostics (Dell-diagnosticering) skal anvendes . . . . . 41 Start af Dell Diagnostics (Dell diagnosticering) fra harddisken. . . . . . 42 Start af Dell Diagnostics (Dells diagnosticering) fra ekstra cd'en Drivers and Utilities (Drivere og hjælpeværktøjer). . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Dell Diagnostics Main Menu (Hovedmenu for Dell-diagnoser) . . . . . . 4326 IndholdsfortegnelseHurtig referencevejledning 27 Sådan finder du information OBS! Nogle elementer vil måske ikke være tilgængelige på din computer eller i visse lande. OBS! Yderligere information kan blive sendt med computeren. Hvad søger du efter? Find det her • Et diagnosticeringsprogram til computeren • Drivere til denne computer • Dokumentation til denne computer • Dokumentationen til enheden • Notebook System Software (NSS) Cd'en Drivers and Utilities (Drivere og hjælpeværktøjer) (også kendt som ResourceCD (Resurse-cd'en)) Dokumentationen og driverne er allerede installeret på computeren. Du kan bruge CD'en til geninstallation af drivere, køre Dell Diagnostics (Dell Diagnosticering) eller for at få adgang til din dokumentation. På cd'en kan der være readme-filer (Vigtigtfiler), som indeholder sidste øjebliksopdateringer om tekniske ændringer eller avanceret teknisk referencemateriale til teknikere eller erfarne brugere. BEMÆRK: Opdatering af drivere og dokumentation kan findes på support.dell.com. BEMÆRK: Drivers and Utilities CD (Cd'en drivere og hjælpeværktøjer) er ekstra og vil måske ikke være afsendt sammen med din computer. • Sådan konfigureres denne computer • Grundlæggende fejlfindingsinformation • Sådan køres Dell Diagnostics (Dell diagnosticering) • Sådan afmonteres og monteres dele Hurtig referenceguide BEMÆRK: Hurtig referenceguide er ekstra og sendes muligvis ikke med computeren. BEMÆRK: Dette dokument er tilgængeligt i PDF-format på support.dell.com.28 Hurtig referencevejledning www.dell.com | support.dell.com • Garantioplysninger • Handelsbetingelser (Kun USA) • Sikkerhedsinstruktioner • Kontrolinformation • Ergonomi-information • Licensaftale for slutbrugere Dell™ Produktinformationsvejledning • Afmontering og udskiftning af dele • Specifikationer • Konfiguration af systemindstillinger • Fejlfinding og løsning af problemer User’s Guide (Brugervejledning) Microsoft® Windows® XP Help and Support Center (Hjælpe- og supportcenter) 1Klik på knappen Start og klik på Help and Support (Hjælp og support). 2Klik på User and system guides (Brugervejledning og systeminformation), og klik på User’s guides (Brugerhåndbøger). User's Guide (Brugervejledning) er også tilgængelig på ekstra Drivers and Utilities CD (Cd'en drivere og hjælpeværktøjer). • Servicemærke og ekspresservicekode • Microsoft Windows licensetiket Servicemærke og Microsoft Windows-licens Disse etiketter findes på bunden af din computer. • Anvend servicemærket til at identificere computeren, når du bruger support.dell.com eller kontakter teknisk support. • Indtast ekspressservicekoden for at anvise opkaldet, når du kontakter teknisk support. Hvad søger du efter? Find det herHurtig referencevejledning 29 • Løsninger — fejlfindingsoplysninger og tip, tekniske artikler og onlinekurser, ofte stillede spørgsmål • Kundeforum — onlinediskussion med andre Dellkunder • Opgraderinger — Opgraderingoplysninger om komponenter, f.eks. hukommelse, harddisken og operativsystemet • Kundepleje — Kontaktoplysninger, serviceopkald og ordrestatus, garanti- og reparationsoplysninger • Service og support — Status på serviceopkald og supporthistorie, servicekontrakt, online-diskussioner med teknisk support • Reference — Computer-dokumentation, detaljer om min computer-konfiguration, produktspecifikationer og hvidbøger • Downloads — Godkendte drivere, programrettelser og softwareopdateringer • Notebook System Software (NSS)— Hvis du installerer operativsystemet på computeren igen, bør du også geninstallere NSS hjælpeprogram. NSS giver vigtige opdateringer til operativsystemet og support til Dell™ 3,5--tomme USB diskettedrev, Intel® Pentium® M processorer, optiske drev og USB-enheder. NSS er nødvendig for korrekt drift af Dell-computeren. Softwaren opdager automatisk din computer og dit styresystem og installerer de opdateringer, der passer til din konfiguration. Sådan downloades Notebook System-software: 1 Gå til support.dell.com og klik på Downloads. 2 Indtast servicemærket eller produktmodellen. 3 I rullemenuen Download Category (Downloadkategori) klikkes på All (Alle). 4 Vælg operativsystemet og operativsystemets sprog til computeren og klik på Submit (Send). 5 Under Select a Device (Vælg enhed) rulles ned til System and Configuration Utilities (System- og konfigurations-hjælpeprogrammer) og klik på Dell Notebook System-software: Dell support-webside — support.dell.com BEMÆRK: Vælg dit område for at se den relevante supportside. BEMÆRK: Corporate (virksomheder), offentlige kontorer og undervisningsområder kan også bruge den specielkonstruerede Dell Premier Support website (Dell Premier support-hjemmeside) på premier.support.dell.com. Hjemmesiden er muligvis ikke tilgængelig i alle områder. Hvad søger du efter? Find det her30 Hurtig referencevejledning www.dell.com | support.dell.com Opsætning af computeren FORSIGTIG: Før du foretager af nogle af procedurerne i dette afsnit, skal sikkerhedsinstruktionerne i Produktinformationsvejledning følges. 1 Åbn æsken med tilbehør, og tag delene ud. 2 Tag de dele fra, som du skal bruge til opsætning af din computer. Æsken med tilbehør indeholder også brugerdokumentation, programmer og ekstra hardware (f.eks. PC Cards (Pc-kort), drev eller batterier), som du har bestilt. • Brug af Windows XP • Dokumentation for min computer • Dokumentation for enheder (f.eks. et modem) Windows Help and Support Center (Hjælp og supportcenter) 1Klik på knappen Start og klik på Help and Support (Hjælp og support). 2 Skriv et ord eller en sætning, der beskriver problemet, og klik på pileikonet. 3Klik på det emne, der beskriver problemet. 4 Følg vejledningen på skærmen. • Geninstallation af operativsystemet Operating System CD (Cd'en operativsystem) sguide Operativsystemet er allerede installeret på computeren. For at geninstallere dit operativsystem, skal du bruge cd'en Operating System (Operativsystem). Se Brugervejledning for instruktioner. Når du har geninstalleret dit operativsystem, skal du bruge cd'en Drivers and Utilities(Drivere og hjælpeværktøjer) for at geninstallere de drivere til enhederne, der kom sammen med din computer. Operativsystem produktnøgle- etiketten findes på computeren. BEMÆRK: Farven på din cd kan variere, afhængig af det operativsystem, som du bestilte. BEMÆRK: Cd'en Operating System (Operativsystem) er ekstra og vil måske ikke være fremsendt sammen med din computer. Hvad søger du efter? Find det herHurtig referencevejledning 31 3 Tilslut vekselstrømsadapteren til vekselstrømsadapterstikket på computeren og til stikkontakten. 4 Tænd for computerskærmen, og tryk på tænd/sluk-knappen for at tænde computeren.32 Hurtig referencevejledning www.dell.com | support.dell.com Om computeren Visning forfra skærm tastatur statuslys for enhed og tastatur pegeplade berøringspladeknapper (2) Sikkert digitalt hukommelseskortHurtig referencevejledning 33 Venstre visnig 'Højre visning Visning bagfra Vekselstrøm sadapterstik videostik strømdrevet USB-stik 1394-stik lydstik ( ) CompactFlashkortets kortplads USB-stik netværksstik tænd/sluk-knap modemstik åbning til sikkerhedskabel34 Hurtig referencevejledning www.dell.com | support.dell.com Underside Anvendelse af batteri Batteriydelse FORSIGTIG: Før du foretager nogen af procedurerne i dette afsnit, skal sikkerhedsinstruktionerne, der findes i Produktinformationsvejledningen følges. OBS! For oplysninger om Dell-garanti for computeren, se afsnittet i Produktinformationsvejledningen eller det separate garantidokument, der blev fremsendt sammen med computeren. For optimal computerydelse og hjælp til bevaring af BIOS-opsætning og betjening af din Dell™ bærbare computer, skal du altid bruge den sammen med det installerede batteri. Tilslut et batteri til at køre computeren, når den ikke er sat i en stikkontakt. Der medfølger et batteri som standardudstyr i batterirummet. højttaler udløsere til batteri-bås (2) spændingsmåler til batteri batteriHurtig referencevejledning 35 Batterilevetiden varierer alt afhængig af vilkårene for anvendelsen. Brugstiden reduceres væsentligt, hvis du bruger den til noget, der indebærer og ikke blot begrænses til følgende: • Brug af trådløse kommunikationsenheder eller USB-enheder • Bruger en skærmopsætning med høj lysstyrke, 3-d pauseskærme og andre strømkrævende programmer, som f.eks. 3-d-spil. • Brug af computeren i maksimal ydelsesfunktion OBS! Det anbefales, at du tilslutter din computer til en stikkontakt, når du skriver til en cd eller en dvd. Du kan kontrollere batteriets opladning, før du sætter batteriet i computeren. Du kan også indstille strømstyringsoptionerne for at gøre dig opmærksom, når batteriopladningen er lav. FORSIGTIG: Brug af et inkompatibelt batteri kan øge risikoen for eksplosion. Udskift kun batteriet med et kompatibelt batteri købt af Dell. Lithium-ion-batteriet er beregnet til at fungere sammen med din Dell-computer. Brug ikke at batterier fra andre computere sammen med din computer. FORSIGTIG: Batterier bør ikke bortskaffes sammen med køkkenaffald. Når dit batteri ikke længere holder opladningen, skal du kontakte din lokale renovatør eller genbrugsstation for råd vedrørende bortskaffelse af et Lithium-ion-batteri. Se "Bortskaffelse af batterieri" i Produktionformationsvejledningen. FORSIGTIG: Misbrug af batteriet kan øge risikoen for brand eller kemisk forbrænding. Punktér, brænd eller adskil ikke batteriet eller udsæt det for temperaturer over 65°C (149°F). Batteriet opbevares utilgængeligt for børn. Håndtér beskadigede eller lækkende batterier med ekstrem omhu. Beskadigede batterier kan lække og medføre personskade eller skade på udstyr. Kontrol af batteriopladning Dell QuickSet-batterimåler, Microsoft® Windows® Power Meter-vindue og -ikon, batteriopladningsmåler, tilstandsmåler, og advarsel om lavt batteri giver oplysning om batteriopladning. Dell QuickSet-batterimåler Hvis Dell QuickSet er installeret, trykkes på for at få vist QuickSet-batterimåler. Vinduet Battery Meter (Batterimåler) viser status, opladningsniveau og tid for opladningsafslutning på din computer.36 Hurtig referencevejledning www.dell.com | support.dell.com Følgende ikoner vises i vinduet Battery Meter (Batterimåler): For nærmere oplysninger om QuickSet, højreklikkes på - ikonet på menubjælken og klik på Help (Hjælp). Microsoft® Windows® Power Meter Windows Power Meter viser resterende batteriopladning. For at kontrollere Power Meter, dobbeltklikkes på ikonet på menubjælken. For flere oplysninger om Power Meter fanen, se "Power Management" (Strømstyring) i Brugervejledning. Hvis computeren er tilsluttet en stikkontakt, vises et ikon. Opladningsmåler Før du indsætter et batteri, trykkes på statusknappen på batteriopladningsmåleren for at tænde lysene til niveau for opladning. Hvert lys repræsenterer ca. 20% af total batteriopladning. Hvis batteriet f.eks. har 80% af opladningen tilbage, vil fire lys være tændt. Hvis ingen lys vises, er batteriet ikke opladet. Computeren eller dockingenhedens kører på batteristrøm. Computeren er tilsluttet vekselstrøm, og batteriet er ved at lade op. Computeren er tilsluttet vekselstrøm, og batteriet er fuldt opladet.Hurtig referencevejledning 37 Tilstandsmåler Batteriets funktionstid er stort set bestemt af det antal gange, det oplades. Efter hundredvis af opladnings- og afladnings-cyklusser, mister batteriet noget af opladningskapaciteten eller batterilevetiden. For at kontrollere batteriets tilstand, trykkes og holdes på statusknappen på måleren til batteriopladning i mindst 3 sekunder. Hvis der ikke vises nogen lys, fungerer batteriet fint, og mere end 80% af dens oprindelige opladningskapacitet er tilbage. Hvert lys viser en trinvis forringelse. Hvis fem lys vises, er mindre en 60% af opladningskapaciteten tilbage, og du bør overveje at udskifte batteriet. Se "Specifikationer" i Brugervejledning for flere oplysninger om batterilevetid. Advarsel om lavt batteri BEMÆRK: For at undgå at miste eller ødelægge data, så gem dit arbejde straks efter en advarsel om lavt batteri. Tilslut derefter computeren til en stikkontakt. Hvis batteriet løber helt tør for strøm, så begynder nedluknings- funktionen automatisk. Et pop-up-vindue advarer dig, når batterieladningen er ca. 90% brugt. For mere information om alarmer vedrørende for lavt batteri, se "Power Management" (Strømstyring) i User’s Guide (Brugervejledning). Opladning af batteriet OBS! En vekselstrømsadapter oplader et helt afladet batteri på ca. 1 time, når computeren er slukket. Opladningstiden er længere, når computeren er tændt. Du kan lade batteriet sidde i computeren, så længe du vil. Batteriets interne kredsløb forhindrer, at batteriet bliver overbelastet. Når du tilslutter din computer til en stikkontakt eller isætter et batteri, mens computeren er tilsluttet til en stikkontakt, vil computeren kontrollere batteriopladning og temperatur. Om nødvendigt vil vekselstrømsadapteren oplade batteriet og opretholde batteriopladningen. Hvis batteriet er varmt efter at være brugt i din computer eller anvendes i varme omgivelser, kan det ske, at batteriet ikke oplades, når du tilslutter computeren til en stikkontakt. Batteriet er for varmt til at starte opladning, hvis lyset blinker skiftevis grønt og orange. Fjern computeren fra stikkontakten og lad computer og batteri afkøle til stuetemperatur. Tilslut derefter computeren til en stikkontakt for at fortsætte opladning. For mere information om løsning af batteriproblemer, se "Strømforsyningsproblemer" i User’s Guide (Brugervejledning).38 Hurtig referencevejledning www.dell.com | support.dell.com Fjernelse af et batteri FORSIGTIG: Inden du udfører disse procedurer, skal du tage modemkablet ud af telefonstikket i væggen. 1 Sørg for, at computeren er slukket og afbrudt fra stikkontakten. 2 Drej frigørelseshåndtaget på undersiden af computeren, hold fast i det, og tag derefter batteriet ud af båsen. Isætning af et batteri Skub batteriet ind i båsen, til låsehåndtagene klikker. udløsningsgreb (2)Hurtig referencevejledning 39 Opbevaring af batteri Fjern batteriet, når du skal opbevare din computer i en længere periode. Et batteri aflades under længerevarende opbevaring. Efter en længere opbevaringsperiode skal batteriet oplades helt, før det bruges. Problemløsning Notebook System Software (NSS) Hvis du geninstallerer operativsystemet på din Dell™-computer, skal du også geninstallere NSS hjælpeprogram. Denne funktion er tilgængelig på ekstra-cd'en Drivers and Utilities (Drivere og hjælpeværktøjer) og på Dell-support-website på support.dell.com. For at downloade programmet, gå til Downloads på support.dell.com og vælg din computermodel fra rullemenuen. Under Select Your Download Category (Vælg din downloadkategori), vælges System and Configuration Utilities (System- og konfigurationshjælpeværktøjer), vælg dit operativsystem og sprog og følg instrukserne. NSS giver meget vigtige opdateringer til dit operativsystem og support til Dell™ 3.5-tomme USBdiskettedrev, Intel® Pentium® M-processorer, Intel Celeron ® M processorer, optiske drivere og USB-enheder. NSS er nødvendig til korrekt brug af din Dell-computer. Softwaren opdager automatisk din computer og dit operativsystem og installerer de opdateringer, der passer til din konfiguration. OBS! NSS er vigtig for korrekt brug af USB-enheder. Hængnings- og softwareproblemer FORSIGTIG: Før du foretager af nogle af procedurerne i dette afsnit, skal sikkerhedsinstruktionerne i Produktinformationsvejledningen følges. Computeren starter ikke op Computeren reagerer ikke BEMÆRK: Du kan miste data, hvis du ikke kan udføre en nedlukning af operativsystemet. KONTROLLÉR A T VEKSELSTRØMSADAPTEREN E R KORREKT TILSLUTTET TIL COMPUTEREN O G STIKKONTAKTEN SLUK FOR COMPUTEREN — Hvis du ikke er i stand til at få svar ved at trykke på en tast på tastaturet eller ved at bevæge musen, skal trykke og holde på strømforsyningsknappen i 8-10 sekunder, indtil computeren slukkes. Genstart derefter din computer. 40 Hurtig referencevejledning www.dell.com | support.dell.com Et program reagerer ikke Et program går ned gentagne gange OBS! Software indeholder almindeligvis installationsoplysninger i dokumentationen eller på en diskette eller CD. Et program er beregnet til en tidligere udgave af Microsoft® Windows® operativsystem En hel blå skærm kommer frem AFSLUT PROGRAMMET — 1Tryk samtidigt. 2Klik på Programmer. 3Klik på det program, der ikke længere svarer. 4Klik på Afslut opgave. KONTROLLÉR SOFTWARE-DOKUMENTATION — Om nødvendigt afinstalleres og geninstalleres programmet igen. HVIS D U BRUGER WINDOWS XP, KØ R PROGRAM COMPATIBILITY WIZARD (GUIDE TIL PROGRAMKOMPATIBILITET ) — Programkompatibilitetsguiden konfigurerer et program, så det kører i et miljø, der er lig med ikkeWindows XP operativsystemmiljøer. 1Klik på knappen Start, peg på All Programs (Alle programmer)→ Accessories (Tilbehør), og klik derefter på Program Compatibility Wizard (Programkompatibilitetsguiden). 2 På velkomstskærmen, klikkes på Næste. 3 Følg vejledningen på skærmen. SLUK FOR COMPUTEREN — Hvis du ikke er i stand til at få svar ved at trykke på en tast på tastaturet eller ved at bevæge musen, skal trykke og holde på strømforsyningsknappen i 8-10 sekunder, indtil computeren slukkes. Genstart derefter din computer. Hurtig referencevejledning 41 Andre softwareproblemer Sådan køres Dell Diagnostics (Dell-diagnosticering) Hvornår Dell Diagnostics (Dell-diagnosticering) skal anvendes Hvis du kommer ud for et problem med computeren, skal du udføre procedurerne i "Problemløsning" og køre Dell Diagnostics (Dell-diagnosticering), før du kontakter Dell for teknisk assistance. Det anbefales at udskrive disse procedurer, før du begynder. BEMÆRK: Dell Diagnostics (Dell diagnosticering) fungerer kun på Dell™-computere. Start Dell Diagnostics (Dell diagnosticering), enten fra din harddisk eller fra den ekstra Cd'en Drivers and Utilities (Drivere og hjælpeværktøjer) (også kendt som ResourceCD (Resurse-cd'en)). SE I SOFTWAREDOKUMENTATION ELLER KONTAKT SOFTWAREFABRIKANTEN FOR OPLYSNINGER OM FEJLFINDING — • Kontrollér at programmet er kompatibelt med det styresystem, der er installeret på din computer. • Kontrollér at computeren opfylder de nødvendigie minimumskrav, der behøves til at køre softwaren Se i softwaredokumentationen for oplysninger. • Kontrollér at programmet er installeret og konfigureret rigtigt. • Undersøg at enhedsdriverne ikke er i konflikt med programmet. • Om nødvendigt, afinstalleres og geninstalleres programmet. LA V STRAKS BACK-U P A F DINE FILER BRUG E T VIRUS-SCANNINGSPROGRAM FOR A T KONTROLLERE HARDDISK, DISKETTER O G C D'E R GEM O G LUK ALLE ÅBNE FILER ELLER PROGRAMMER O G LUK NED FOR COMPUTEREN VIA StartMENUEN SCAN COMPUTEREN FOR SPYWARE — Hvis du oplever langsom computerydelse, ofte modtager popup-reklamer, eller hvis du har problemer med at koble dig på internettet, kan din computer være inficeret med spyware. Brug et anti-virus-program, der indeholder beskyttelse mod anti-spyware (det er muligt, at dit program skal opgraderes) for at scanne computeren og fjerne spyware. For flere oplysninger, gå til support.dell.com og søg efter nøgleordet spyware. KØ R DELL DIAGNOSTICS — Hvis alle testerne kører korrekt, skyldes fejltilstanden et softwareproblem.42 Hurtig referencevejledning www.dell.com | support.dell.com Start af Dell Diagnostics (Dell diagnosticering) fra harddisken Dell Diagnostics (Dell-Diagnosticering) findes på en skjult partition med diagnosticeringsværktøjer på harddisken. OBS! Hvis computeren ikke kan vise et skærmbillede, kontakt Dell. 1 Luk computeren. 2 Tænd computeren. Når DELL™-logoet vises, skal du trykke med det samme. Hvis du venter for længe, og operativsystemets logo vises, skal du fortsætte med at vente, indtil du ser Microsoft® Windows® skrivebord. Luk derefter computeren og prøv igen. 3 Når listen med boot-enheder vises, fremhæves Diagnostics (Diagnosticering) og tryk på . Computeren kører en vurdering af systemet før start, dvs. en række tests af systemkort, tastatur, harddisk og skærm. • Besvar eventuelle spørgsmål, der stilles under testen. • Hvis der bliver fundet en fejl, stopper computeren og kommer med en biplyd. For at stoppe vurderingen og genstarte computeren, tryk på . For at fortsætte til den næste test tryk på . For at teste komponenten, som fejlede, igen, tryk på . • Hvis der konstateres fejl under før-starttesten, skal du skrive fejlkode(r) ned, og kontakte Dell. før du fortsætter med Dell Diagnostics (Dell diagnosticering). Hvis før-starttesten afvikles korrekt, modtager du meddelelsen"Booting Dell Diagnostic Utility Partition" (Booter Dells funktionspartition til diagnosticering) "Press any key to continue" (Tryk på en vilkårlig tast for at fortsætte.) OBS! Hvis du ser en meddelelse som angiver, at der ikke er fundet nogen funktionsfartition til diagnosticering, køres Dell Diagnostics (Dell diagnosticering) fra cd'en Drivers and Utilities (Drivere og hjælpeværktøjer). 4 Tryk på en vilkårlig tast for at starte Dell Diagnostics (Dell Diagnosticering) fra partitionen med diagnosticeringsværktøjet på harddisken. Start af Dell Diagnostics (Dells diagnosticering) fra ekstra cd'en Drivers and Utilities (Drivere og hjælpeværktøjer) 1 Tilslut et cd-drev til systemet. 2 Isæt cd'en Drivers and Utilities (Drivere og hjælpeværktøjer). 3 Luk computeren og genstart den. Når DELL-logoet vises, skal du trykke på med det samme. Hvis du venter for længe, og Windows-logoet vises, skal du fortsætte med at vente, indtil du ser skrivebordet i Windows. Luk derefter computeren og prøv igen.Hurtig referencevejledning 43 OBS! De næste trin ændrer kun boot-sekvensen denne ene gang. Ved den næste opstart, starter computeren op i overensstemmelse med enhederne, som er specificeret i systemets opsætning. 4 Når listen med boot-enheder vises, fremhæves CD/DVD/CD-RW-drev og tryk på . 5 Vælg CD/DVD/CD-RW-drev valgt fra CD-boot-menuen. 6 Vælg optionen Boot from CD-ROM (Boot fra cd-rom) fra menuen, som vises. 7 Skriv 1 for at starte menuen for ResourceCD (Resurse-cd). 8 Skriv 2 for at starte Dell Diagnostics (Dell diagnosticering). 9 Vælg Run the 32 Bit Dell Diagnostics (Kør 32-bit Dell diagnosticering) fra den nummererede liste. Hvis der er anført flere versioner, vælges versionen, som er passende for computeren. 10 Når Dell Diagnostics Main Menu (Hovedmenu for Dell diagnosticering) vises, vælges den test, som du vil køre. Dell Diagnostics Main Menu (Hovedmenu for Dell-diagnoser) 1 Når Dell Diagnostics (Dell diagnosticering) er indlæst, og skærmbilledet Main Menu (Hovedmenu) vises, skal du klikke på knappen for den ønskede indstilling. 2 Hvis der opdages et problem under en test, vises der en meddelelse med en fejlkode og en beskrivelse af problemet. Skriv fejlkoden og beskrivelsen af problemet ned, og følg vejledningen på skærmen. Hvis du ikke kan løse problemet, skal du kontakte Dell. OBS! Servicemærket til computeren findes øverst på hver testskærm. Hvis du kontakter Dell, vil teknisk support bede om servicemærket. 3 Hvis du kører en test via indstillingen Custom Test (Brugerdefineret test) eller via Symptom Tree (Liste over symptomer), skal du klikke på den relevante fane, som er beskrevet i nedenstående tabel, for at få yderligere oplysninger. Valgmulighed Funktion Eksprestest Udfører en hurtig test af enhederne. Testen tager typisk 10 til 20 minutter, og du behøver ikke at gøre noget. Kør den hurtige test først for at øge muligheden for hurtigt at identificere problemet. Udvidet test Udfører en grundig test af enhederne. Denne test tager typisk 1 time eller mere og kræver, at du af og til besvarer nogle spørgsmål. Brugerdefineret test Test af en bestemt enhed. Du kan tilpasse den test, der skal køres. Liste over symptomer Viser de mest almindelige symptomer, som oftest forekommer og lader dig vælge en test baseret på symptomet for det problem, du er udsat for.44 Hurtig referencevejledning www.dell.com | support.dell.com 4 Når testerne er færdige, hvis du kører Dell Diagnostics (Dell-diagnosticering) fra cd'en Drivers and Utilities (Drivere og hjælpeværktøjer), fjernes cd'en. 5 Når testerne er færdige, lukkes testskærmen for at vende tilbage til skærmen Main Menu (Hovedmenu). For at forlade Dell Diagnostics (Dell diagnosticering) og genstarte computeren lukkes skærmen Main Menu (Hovedmenu). Fane Funktion Resultater Her vises testresultaterne og eventuelle fejl som opstod. Fejl Her vises, hvilke fejl der opstod, fejlkoder og beskrivelser af problemet. Hjælp Her får du en beskrivelse af testen og evt. hvilke krav, der stilles til udførelse af testen. Konfiguration Her vises hardwarekonfigurationen for den valgte enhed. Dell Diagnostics (Dell-diagnosticering) henter konfigurationsoplysningerne for alle enheder fra systemets installation, hukommelse og forskellige interne tests samt viser oplysningerne i enhedslisten i den venstre rude på skærmen. Det er ikke sikkert, at alle komponenter, som er installeret på computeren eller alle enheder, som er tilsluttet til computeren, vises på listen over enheder. Parametre Giver dig mulighed for at tilpasse testen ved at ændre testindstillingerne.www.dell.com | support.dell.com Dell™ Latitude™ X1 Συνοπτικός οδηγός Μοντέλο PP05SΣηµείωση, ειδοποίηση και προσοχή ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Η ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ υποδεικνύει σηµαντικές πληροφορίες που σας βοηθούν να χρησιµοποιείτε καλύτερα τον υπολογιστή σας. ΕΙ∆ΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ: Η ΕΙ∆ΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ υποδηλώνει είτε δυνητική βλάβη υλικού είτε απώλεια δεδοµένων και υποδεικνύειτον τρόπο µε τον οποίο µπορείτε να αποφύγετε το πρόβληµα. ΠΡΟΣΟΧΗ: Η ΠΡΟΣΟΧΗ επισηµαίνει κίνδυνο βλάβης υλικού, τραυµατισµού ή θανάτου. Συντοµεύσεις και ακρωνύµια Για µια πλήρη λίστα συντοµεύσεων και ακρωνυµίων, ανατρέξτε στο Γλωσσάρι στον Οδηγό χρήσης. ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Ορισµένα χαρακτηριστικά µπορεί να µην είναι διαθέσιµα για τον υπολογιστή σας ή σε ορισµένες χώρες. ____________________ Οι πληροφορίες αυτού του εγγράφου µπορεί να αλλάξουν χωρίς προειδοποίηση. © 2005 Dell Inc. Με επιφύλαξη παντός δικαιώµατος. Απαγορεύεται αυστηρά η αναπαραγωγή µε οποιοδήποτε τρόπο χωρίς τη γραπτή άδεια της Dell Inc. Εµπορικά σήµατα που χρησιµοποιούνται στο παρόν: Η ονοµασία Dell, το λογότυπο DELL και η ονοµασία Latitude είναι εµπορικά σήµατα της Dell Inc. Οι ονοµασίες Microsoft και Windows είναι σήµατα κατατεθέντα της Microsoft Corporation, ενώοι ονοµασίεςIntel, Pentium και Celeron είναι σήµατα κατατεθέντα της Intel Corporation. Άλλα εµπορικά σήµατα και εµπορικές ονοµασίες µπορεί να χρησιµοποιούνται στο παρόν έγγραφο αναφερόµενα είτε στους κατόχους των σηµάτων και των ονοµάτων είτεσταπροϊόντατους. Η Dell Inc. παραιτείταιαπό κάθε δικαίωµασε εµπορικάσήµατακαι εµπορικές ονοµασίες τρίτων. Μοντέλο PP05S Ιανουάριος 2005 P/N P6419 Αναθ. A00Περιεχόµενα 47 Περιεχόµενα Εύρεση πληροφοριών . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Προετοιµασία του υπολογιστή σας . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Πληροφορίες για τον υπολογιστή σας . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Μπροστινή όψη . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Αριστερή όψη . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 ∆εξιά όψη . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Πίσω όψη . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Κάτω όψη . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Χρήση µπαταρίας. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Απόδοση µπαταρίας . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Έλεγχος του φορτίου της µπαταρίας . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Φόρτιση της µπαταρίας . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Αφαίρεση της µπαταρίας . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Τοποθέτηση της µπαταρίας. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Αποθήκευση µπαταρίας . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Επίλυση προβληµάτων . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Λογισµικό συστήµατος φορητού υπολογιστή (NSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Προβλήµατα κλειδώµατος και λογισµικού . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Χρήση του διαγνωστικού προγράµµατος της Dell. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Πότε να χρησιµοποιήσετε το διαγνωστικό πρόγραµµα της Dell . . . . . . 63 Εκκίνηση του διαγνωστικού προγράµµατος της Dell από τον σκληρό δίσκο σας. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Έναρξη του διαγνωστικού πρόγραµµα της Dell από το προαιρετικό DC Προγράµµατα οδήγησης και βοηθητικές εφαρµογές . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Κύριο µενού διαγνωστικού προγράµµατος της Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . 6548 ΠεριεχόµεναΣυνοπτικός οδηγός 49 Εύρεση πληροφοριών ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Ορισµένα χαρακτηριστικά µπορεί να µην είναι διαθέσιµα για τον υπολογιστή σας ή σε ορισµένες χώρες. ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Πρόσθετες πληροφορίες µπορούν να αποσταλούν µαζί µε τον υπολογιστή σας. Τι ψάχνετε; Βρείτε το εδώ • Ένα διαγνωστικό πρόγραµµα για τον υπολογιστή µου • Προγράµµατα οδήγησης για τον υπολογιστή µου • Την τεκµηρίωση του υπολογιστή µου • Την τεκµηρίωση της συσκευής µου • Λογισµικό συστήµατος φορητού υπολογιστή (NSS) CD προγραµµάτων οδήγησης και βοηθητικών προγραµµάτων (επίσης γνωστό ως CD πόρων) Η τεκµηρίωση και τα προγράµµατα οδήγησης είναι ήδη εγκατεστηµένα στον υπολογιστή σας. Μπορείτε να χρησιµοποιήσετε το CD για να εγκαταστήσετε ξανά πρόγραµµα οδήγησης, να εκτελέστε το διαγνωστικό πρόγραµµα της Dell Di ή να έχετε πρόσβαση στην τεκµηρίωσή σας. Τα αρχεία Readme ενδέχεται να περιλαµβάνονται στο CD για να παρέχουν τις πιο πρόσφατες ενηµερώσεις σχετικά µε τεχνικές αλλαγές στον υπολογιστή σας ή εξελιγµένο υλικό αναφοράς τεχνικού περιεχοµένου για έµπειρους χρήστες ή τεχνικούς. ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Προγράµµατα οδήγησης και ενηµερώσεις τεκµηρίωσης θα βρείτε στη διεύθυνση support.dell.com. ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Το CD Προγράµµατα οδήγησης και βοηθητικές εφαρµογές είναι προαιρετικό και µπορεί να µην αποσταλεί µε τον υπολογιστή σας. • Ρύθµιση του υπολογιστή µου • Βασικές πληροφορίες αντιµετώπισης προβληµάτων • Εκτέλεση του διαγνωστικού προγράµµατος της Dell • Αφαίρεση και εγκατάσταση εξαρτηµάτων Συνοπτικός οδηγός ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Ο Συνοπτικός οδηγόςείναι προαιρετικός και µπορεί να µην αποσταλεί µαζί µε τον υπολογιστή σας. ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Αυτό το έγγραφο είναι διαθέσιµο σε µορφή PDF από τη διεύθυνση support.dell.com.50 Συνοπτικός οδηγός www.dell.com | support.dell.com • Πληροφορίες εγγύησης • Όροι και συνθήκες (µόνο για ΗΠΑ) • Οδηγίες ασφαλείας • Πληροφορίες κανονισµών • Πληροφορίες εργονοµίας • Άδεια Χρήσης Τελικού Χρήστη Dell™ Οδηγός πληροφοριών προϊόντος • Αποµάκρυνση και αντικατάσταση τµηµάτων • Προδιαγραφές • ∆ιαµόρφωση των ρυθµίσεων του συστήµατος • Τρόπος αντιµετώπισης και επίλυσης προβληµάτων Οδηγός χρήσης Κέντρο Βοήθειας και υποστήριξης Microsoft® Windows® XP 1 Κάντε κλικ στο κουµπί Start (Έναρξη) και κατόπιν στο κουµπί Help and Support (Βοήθεια και υποστήριξη). 2 Κάντε κλικ στο User’s and system guides (Οδηγοί συστήµατος και χρήσης) και στο User’s guides (Οδηγοί χρήσης). Οι Οδηγοί χρήσης είναι επίσης διαθέσιµοι στο προαιρετικόCD Προγράµµατα οδήγησης και βοηθητικές εφαρµογές. • Ετικέτα εξυπηρέτησης και κωδικός ταχείας εξυπηρέτησης • Ετικέτα Άδειας των Microsoft Windows Ετικέτα εξυπηρέτησης και Άδεια των Microsoft Windows Οι ετικέτες αυτές βρίσκονται στην κάτωπλευρά του υπολογιστή σας. • Χρησιµοποιήστε την ετικέτα εξυπηρέτησης για την αναγνώριση της συσκευής σας όταν χρησιµοποιείτετηδιεύθυνση support.dell.comήέρχεστε σε επαφή µε την τεχνική υποστήριξη. • Χρησιµοποιήστε τον κωδικό ταχείας εξυπηρέτησης όταν έρθετε σε επαφή µε την τεχνική υποστήριξη. Τι ψάχνετε; Βρείτε το εδώΣυνοπτικός οδηγός 51 • Λύσεις — Οδηγίες και συµβουλές αντιµετώπισης προβληµάτων, άρθρα από τεχνικούς, online µαθήµατα, συχνές ερωτήσεις • Φόρουµ επικοινωνίας — Online συζητήσεις µε άλλους πελάτες της Dell • Αναβαθµίσεις — Πληροφορίες αναβάθµισης για συστατικά στοιχεία όπως η µνήµη, η µονάδα σκληρού δίσκου και το λειτουργικό σύστηµα. • Εξυπηρέτηση Πελατών — Πληροφορίες επαφών, κλήση σέρβις και παραγγελίες, εγγύηση και πληροφορίες επισκευών • Σέρβις και υποστήριξη — Κλήση σέρβις και ιστορικό υποστήριξης, online συζητήσεις µε την τεχνική υποστήριξη • Παραποµπές — Εγχειρίδια υπολογιστή, αναλυτικά στοιχεία για τη διαµόρφωση του υπολογιστή µου, προδιαγραφές προϊόντος και επίσηµα έγγραφα • Λήψη αρχείων — Πιστοποιηµένα προγράµµατα οδήγησης, αναβάθµισης και ενηµέρωσης λογισµικού • Λογισµικό συστήµατος φορητού υπολογιστή (NSS) — Αν εγκαταστήσετε ξανά το λειτουργικό σύστηµα του υπολογιστή σας, θα πρέπει επίσης να αντικαταστήσετε ξανά τη βοηθητική εφαρµογή NSS. To NSS παρέχει σηµαντικές ενηµερώσεις για το λειτουργικό σας σύστηµα και υποστήριξη για µονάδες δισκέτας USB Dell™3,5 ιντσών, επεξεργαστές Intel® Pentium® M, µονάδες οπτικών δίσκων και συσκευές USB. Το To NSS είναι απαραίτητο για τη σωστή λειτουργία του υπολογιστή Dell. Το λογισµικό εντοπίζει αυτόµατα τον υπολογιστή σας και το λειτουργικό σύστηµα και εγκαθιστά τις απαραίτητες ενηµερώσεις για τη δική σας διαµόρφωση. Για τη λήψη λογισµικού συστήµατος φορητού υπολογιστή: 1 Επισκεφθείτε τη διεύθυνση support.dell.com και κάντε κλικ στο Downloads. 2 Πληκτρολογήστε τον αριθµό της ετικέτας εξυπηρέτησης ή το µοντέλο του προϊόντος. 3 Στο αναπτυσσόµενο µενού Download Category κάντε κλικ στο All. 4 Επιλέξτε το λειτουργικό σύστηµα και τη γλώσσα του λειτουργικού συστήµατος του υπολογιστή σας και κάντε κλικ στο Submit. 5 Στην περιοχή Select a Device, κάντε κλικ στο System and Configuration Utilities και επιλέξτε Dell Notebook System Software. Ιστοχώρος υποστήριξης της Dell — support.dell.com ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Επιλέξτε την περιοχή σας για να ανοίξει η αντίστοιχη σελίδα. ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Πελάτες εταιρικοί, κυβερνητικοί και ασχολούµενοι µε την εκπαίδευση µπορούν επίσης να χρησιµοποιήσουν τον ειδικό ιστοχώρο Premier υποστήριξης στη διεύθυνση premier.support.dell.com. Ο ιστοχώρος αυτός ενδέχεται να µην είναι διαθέσιµος σε όλες τις περιοχές. Τι ψάχνετε; Βρείτε το εδώ52 Συνοπτικός οδηγός www.dell.com | support.dell.com Προετοιµασία του υπολογιστή σας ΠΡΟΣΟΧΗ: Πριν ξεκινήσετε οποιαδήποτε από τις διαδικασίες που αναφέρονται σε αυτή την ενότητα, ακολουθήστε τις οδηγίες ασφαλείας που βρίσκονται στον Οδηγό πληροφοριών προϊόντος. 1 Αφαιρέστε τη συσκευασία των εξαρτηµάτων. 2 Φυλάξτε τα περιεχόµενα της συσκευασίας των εξαρτηµάτων που διατίθενται ξεχωριστά, τα οποία θα χρειαστείτε για να ολοκληρώσετε την προετοιµασία του υπολογιστή σας. Στη συσκευασία περιλαµβάνεται επίσης η τεκµηρίωση χρήσης και τυχόν λογισµικό ή πρόσθετος υλικός εξοπλισµός (κάρτες PC, µονάδες δίσκου ή µπαταρίες) που παραγγείλατε. • Χρήση των Windows XP • Τεκµηρίωση του υπολογιστή µου • Τεκµηρίωση για συσκευές (όπως το µόντεµ) Κέντρο Βοήθειας και υποστήριξης των Windows 1 Κάντε κλικ στο κουµπί Start (Έναρξη) και κατόπιν στο κουµπί Help and Support (Βοήθεια και υποστήριξη). 2 Πληκτρολογήστε µια λέξη ή φράση που περιγράφει το πρόβληµα και κάντε κλικ στο εικονίδιο του βέλους. 3 Κάντε κλικ στα θέµατα που περιγράφουν το πρόβληµα που αντιµετωπίζετε. 4 Ακολουθήστε τις οδηγίες στην οθόνη. • Επανεγκατάσταση του λειτουργικού συστήµατος CD λειτουργικού συστήµατος Το λειτουργικό σύστηµα είναι ήδη εγκατεστηµένο στον υπολογιστή σας. Για να εγκαταστήσετε ξανά το λειτουργικό σας σύστηµα, χρησιµοποιήστε το CD Λειτουργικό σύστηµα. Ανατρέξτε στον Οδηγό χρήσης για οδηγίες. Αφού εγκαταστήσετε ξανάτο λειτουργικό σας σύστηµα, χρησιµοποιήστε το CD Προγράµµατα οδήγησης και βοηθητικές εφαρµογές για να εγκαταστήσετε ξανά τους οδηγούς για τιςσυσκευές που συµπεριλαµβάνονταν στον υπολογιστή σας. Η ετικέτα για το κλειδί προϊόντος του λειτουργικού σας συστήµατος βρίσκεται επάνω στον υπολογιστή σας. ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Το χρώµα του CD σας ποικίλει ανάλογα µε το λειτουργικό σύστηµα που παραγγείλατε. ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Το CD Λειτουργικόσύστηµα είναιπροαιρετικό και µπορεί να µην αποσταλεί µε τον υπολογιστή σας. Τι ψάχνετε; Βρείτε το εδώΣυνοπτικός οδηγός 53 3 Συνδέστε το µετασχηµατιστή AC µε την αντίστοιχη υποδοχή στον υπολογιστή και σε µια πρίζα. 4 Ανοίξτε την οθόνη και πατήστε το κουµπί λειτουργίας για να ενεργοποιήσετε τον υπολογιστή.54 Συνοπτικός οδηγός www.dell.com | support.dell.com Πληροφορίες για τον υπολογιστή σας Μπροστινή όψη οθόνη πληκτρολόγιο λυχνίες κατάστασης συσκευής και πληκτρολογίου επιφάνεια αφής κουµπιά επιφάνειας αφής (2) Υποδοχή µνήµης Secure DigitalΣυνοπτικός οδηγός 55 Αριστερή όψη ∆εξιά όψη Πίσω όψη θύρα µετασχηµατιστή AC θύρα βίντεο θύρα USB µε ρεύµα θύρα 1394 υποδοχές ήχου Υποδοχήκάρτας CompactFlash θύρα USB θύρα δικτύου κουµπί λειτουργίας θύρα µόντεµ υποδοχή καλωδίου ασφαλείας56 Συνοπτικός οδηγός www.dell.com | support.dell.com Κάτω όψη Χρήση µπαταρίας Απόδοση µπαταρίας ΠΡΟΣΟΧΗ: Πριν ξεκινήσετε οποιαδήποτε από τις διαδικασίες στην παρούσα ενότητα, ακολουθήστε τις οδηγίες ασφαλείας που βρίσκονται στον Οδηγό πληροφοριών προϊόντος. ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Για πληροφορίες σχετικά µε την εγγύηση της Dell για τον υπολογιστή σας, ανατρέξτε στον Οδηγό πληροφοριών προϊόντος ή στο ξεχωριστό έντυπο εγγύησης που αποστέλλεται µαζί µε τον υπολογιστή σας. Για τη βέλτιστη απόδοση του υπολογιστή και για να µπορείτε να διατηρείτε τις ρυθµίσεις BIOS, χρησιµοποιείτε πάντα το φορητό υπολογιστή σας Dell™ µε εγκατεστηµένη την κύρια µπαταρία. Χρησιµοποιήστε µια µπαταρία για τη λειτουργία του υπολογιστή όταν αυτός δεν συνδέεται σε ηλεκτρική πρίζα. Μία µπαταρία παρέχεται ως στάνταρ εξοπλισµός στη θήκη µπαταρίας. ηχείο ασφάλειες θήκης µπαταρίας (2) µετρητής φόρτισης µπαταρίας µπαταρίαΣυνοπτικός οδηγός 57 Ο χρόνος λειτουργίαςτης µπαταρίας ποικίλλει ανάλογα µε τις συνθήκες λειτουργίας. Ο χρόνος λειτουργίας µειώνεται σηµαντικά όταν εκτελείτε εργασίες που, µεταξύ άλλων, συµπεριλαµβάνουν: • Χρήση ασύρµατων συσκευών επικοινωνίας ή συσκευών USB • Χρήση ρυθµίσεων οθόνης µε υψηλήφωτεινότητα, προστασίας οθόνης µε τρισδιάστατα σχέδια ή άλλων προγραµµάτων που απαιτούν µεγάλη ισχύ, όπως παιχνίδια µε τρισδιάστατες εικόνες • Λειτουργία του υπολογιστή σε κατάσταση µέγιστης απόδοσης ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Συνιστάται η σύνδεση του υπολογιστή σας σε µια ηλεκτρική πρίζα, όταν εγγράφετε CD ή DVD. Μπορείτε να ελέγξετε το φορτίο της µπαταρίας πριν τοποθετήσετε την µπαταρία στον υπολογιστή. Μπορείτε επίσης να ρυθµίσετε τις επιλογές διαχείρισης ενέργειας, ώστε να σας ειδοποιούν όταν το φορτίο της µπαταρίας είναι χαµηλό. ΠΡΟΣΟΧΗ: Η χρήση ασύµβατης µπαταρίας µπορεί να δηµιουργήσει κίνδυνο πυρκαγιάς ή έκρηξης. Αντικαταστήστε την µπαταρία µόνο µε µια συµβατή µπαταρία από την Dell. Η µπαταρία ιόντων λιθίου είναι σχεδιασµένη για να χρησιµοποιείται µαζί µε τον υπολογιστή Dell. Μην χρησιµοποιείτε µπαταρία από άλλους υπολογιστές για το δικό σας υπολογιστή. ΠΡΟΣΟΧΗ: Μην απορρίπτετε τις µπαταρίες µε τα οικιακά απορρίµµατα. Όταν η µπαταρία σας δεν έχει πλέον φορτίο, µπορείτε να απευθυνθείτε στον τοπικό φορέα διάθεσης απορριµµάτων ή περιβαλλοντικό φορέα, οι οποίοι θα σας συµβουλεύσουν σχετικά µε τη διάθεση µπαταριών ιόντων λιθίου. Ανατρέξτε στην ενότητα «Απόρριψη µπαταρίας» στον Οδηγό πληροφοριών προϊόντος. ΠΡΟΣΟΧΗ: Η κακή χρήση της µπαταρίας µπορεί να αυξήσει τον κίνδυνο πυρκαγιάς ή χηµικού εγκαύµατος. Αποφύγετε τη διάτρηση, την καύση, την αποσυναρµολόγηση ή την έκθεση της µπαταρίαςσε θερµοκρασίες µεγαλύτερες από 65°C (149°F). Φυλάσσετε την µπαταρία µακριά από τα παιδιά. Ο χειρισµός κατεστραµµένων µπαταριών ή µπαταριών µε διαρροή πρέπει να γίνεται µε ιδιαίτερη προσοχή. Στις κατεστραµµένες µπαταρίες µπορεί να υπάρχει διαρροή και να προκληθεί έτσι τραυµατισµός κάποιου προσώπου ή ζηµιά σε συσκευή. Έλεγχος του φορτίου της µπαταρίας Ο µετρητής µπαταρίας Dell QuickSet, το παράθυρο Microsoft® Windows® Power Meter καιτο εικονίδιο , ο δείκτης φορτίου µπαταρίας και ο δείκτης καλής κατάστασηςκαι η προειδοποίηση για χαµηλή µπαταρία παρέχουν πληροφορίες για το φορτίο της µπαταρίας. Μετρητής µπαταρίας Dell QuickSet Αν ο µετρητής Dell QuickSet είναι εγκατεστηµένος, πιέστε για να εµφανίσετε στην οθόνη το µετρητή µπαταρίας QuickSet. Το παράθυρο µετρητή µπαταρίας εµφανίζειτην κατάσταση, το επίπεδο φόρτισης καιτο χρόνο ολοκλήρωσης φόρτισης για την µπαταρία του υπολογιστή σας.58 Συνοπτικός οδηγός www.dell.com | support.dell.com Εµφανίζονταιτα ακόλουθα εικονίδια στο παράθυρο µετρητή µπαταρίας: Για περισσότερες πληροφορίες σχετικά µε το QuickSet, κάντε δεξί κλικ στο εικονίδιο στη γραµµή εργασιών και κάντε κλικ στηΒοήθεια. Μετρητής ισχύος των Microsoft® Windows® Ο Μετρητήςισχύοςτων Windows δείχνειτο φορτίο που αποµένει στην µπαταρία. Για να ελέγξετε το µετρητή ισχύος, κάντε δεξί κλικ στο εικονίδιο στη γραµµή εργασιών. Για περισσότερες πληροφορίες σχετικά µε την καρτέλα Μετρητής ισχύος, ανατρέξτε στην ενότητα «∆ιαχείριση ισχύος» στον Οδηγό χρήσης. Αν ο υπολογιστής είναι συνδεδεµένος σε ηλεκτρική πρίζα, εµφανίζεται ένα εικονίδιο . ∆είκτης φορτίου Πριν τοποθετήσετε µια µπαταρία, πατήστε το πλήκτρο κατάστασηςτου µετρητή φόρτισης µπαταρίας και θα ανάψουν οι λυχνίες για το επίπεδο φόρτισης. Κάθε λυχνία εκφράζειτο 20 τοις εκατό περίπου του συνολικού φορτίου µπαταρίας. Για παράδειγµα, αν στην µπαταρία αποµένειτο 80 τοις εκατό του φορτίου της, τότε ανάβουν τέσσερις από τις λυχνίες αυτές. Αν δεν ανάβει καµία, αυτό σηµαίνει ότι η µπαταρία έχει εξαντληθείτελείως. Ο υπολογιστής ή η συσκευή βάσης λειτουργεί µε τροφοδοσία από την µπαταρία. Ο υπολογιστής είναι συνδεδεµένος στην τροφοδοσία AC και η µπαταρία φορτίζεται. Ο υπολογιστής είναι συνδεδεµένος στην τροφοδοσία AC και η µπαταρία έχει φορτιστεί πλήρως.Συνοπτικός οδηγός 59 ∆είκτης καλής κατάστασης Ο χρόνος λειτουργίαςτης µπαταρίας εξαρτάται κατά κύριο λόγο από το πόσες φορές έχει γίνει φόρτιση. Μετά από εκατό κύκλους φόρτισης και αποφόρτισης, οι µπαταρίες χάνουν σε κάποιο βαθµό τη χωρητικότητά τους ή την καλή τους κατάσταση. Για να ελέγξετε την καλή κατάσταση της µπαταρίας, πατήστε και κρατήστε πατηµένο το µετρητή φόρτισης µπαταρίας για 3 δευτερόλεπτα τουλάχιστον. Αν δεν ανάψει καµία λυχνία, αυτό σηµαίνει ότι η µπαταρία βρίσκεται σε καλή κατάσταση και ότι διατηρείτη χωρητικότητά της σε ποσοστό µεγαλύτερο από 80 τοις εκατό. Κάθε µία λυχνία εκφράζει µια σταδιακή υποβάθµιση. Αν ανάψουν πέντε λυχνίες, τότε η χωρητικότητα είναι µικρότερη από το 60 τοις εκατό και θα πρέπει να φροντίσετε για την αντικατάσταση της µπαταρίας. Ανατρέξτε στην ενότητα «Προδιαγραφές» στον Οδηγό χρήσης για περισσότερες πληροφορίες σχετικά µε το χρόνο λειτουργίαςτης µπαταρίας. Προειδοποίηση χαµηλής µπαταρίας ΕΙ∆ΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ: Για να αποφευχθείτυχόν απώλεια ή καταστροφή δεδοµένων, αποθηκεύστε την εργασία σας αµέσως µόλις δείτε την προειδοποίηση. Κατόπιν συνδέστε τον υπολογιστή στην πρίζα. Αν η µπαταρία αποφορτιστείτελείως, τότε αρχίζει αυτόµατα η κατάστασης αδρανοποίησης. Ένα αναδυόµενο παράθυρο σας προειδοποιεί όταν το φορτίο της µπαταρίας έχει µειωθεί κατά 90 τοις εκατό. Για περισσότερες πληροφορίες για ειδοποιήσεις σχετικά µε χαµηλή µπαταρία, ανατρέξτε στην ενότητα «∆ιαχείριση ισχύος» στον Οδηγό χρήσης. Φόρτιση της µπαταρίας ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Ο µετασχηµατιστής AC φορτίζει µιαπλήρως αποφορτισµένη µπαταρία σε 1 ώραπερίπου, όταν ο υπολογιστής βρίσκεται εκτός λειτουργίας. Ο χρόνος φόρτισης είναι µεγαλύτερος όταν ο υπολογιστής λειτουργεί. Μπορείτε να αφήσετε την µπαταρία στον υπολογιστή για όσο διάστηµα θέλετε. Τα εσωτερικά κυκλώµατα της µπαταρίας αποτρέπουν τυχόν υπερφόρτιση της µπαταρίας. Όταν συνδέετε τον υπολογιστή σε πρίζα ή όταν εγκαθιστάτε µια µπαταρία ενώο υπολογιστής είναι συνδεδεµένος στην πρίζα, ο υπολογιστής ελέγχειτο φορτίο της µπαταρίας καιτη θερµοκρασία. Αν χρειάζεται, ο µετασχηµατιστήςτότε θα φορτίσειτην µπαταρία και θα διατηρήσειτο φορτίο της. Αν η µπαταρία είναι ζεστή από τη χρήση της στον υπολογιστή σας ή επειδή βρισκόταν σε ζεστό χώρο, µπορεί να µην φορτιστεί όταν συνδέσετε τον υπολογιστή σε µια πρίζα. Η µπαταρία είναι πολύ ζεστή για να αρχίσει η φόρτιση αν η λυχνία αναβοσβήνει αλλάζοντας διαδοχικά από πράσινο σε πορτοκαλί χρώµα. Αποσυνδέστε τον υπολογιστή από την πρίζα και αφήστε τον υπολογιστή καιτην µπαταρία να κρυώσουν σε θερµοκρασία δωµατίου. Έπειτα συνδέστε τον υπολογιστή σε µια πρίζα και συνεχίστε τη φόρτιση της µπαταρίας. Για περισσότερες πληροφορίες σχετικά µε την επίλυση προβληµάτων µε την µπαταρία, ανατρέξτε στην ενότητα «Προβλήµατα ισχύος» στον Οδηγό χρήσης.60 Συνοπτικός οδηγός www.dell.com | support.dell.com Αφαίρεση της µπαταρίας ΠΡΟΣΟΧΗ: Πριν εκτελέσετε αυτές τις διαδικασίες, αποσυνδέστε το µόντεµ από την τηλεφωνική πρίζα. 1 Βεβαιωθείτε ότι ο υπολογιστής είναι σβηστός ή συνδεδεµένος σε µια ηλεκτρική πρίζα. 2 Σύρετε και κρατήστε την ασφάλεια της θήκης µπαταρίας στην κάτωπλευρά του υπολογιστή και στη συνέχεια αφαιρέστε την µπαταρία από τη θέση της. Τοποθέτηση της µπαταρίας Σύρετε την µπαταρία στη θέση της έως ότου οι ασφάλειες κάνουν κλικ. ασφάλειες (2)Συνοπτικός οδηγός 61 Αποθήκευση µπαταρίας Αφαιρέστε την µπαταρία όταν αποθηκεύετε τον υπολογιστή σας για µεγάλο χρονικό διάστηµα. Κατά τη διάρκεια µακρόχρονης αποθήκευσης, η µπαταρία αποφορτίζεται. Μετά από µια µεγάλη περίοδο αποθήκευσης, φορτίστε ξανά την µπαταρία πριν τη χρήση της. Επίλυση προβληµάτων Λογισµικό συστήµατος φορητού υπολογιστή (NSS) Αν εγκαταστήσετε ξανά το λειτουργικό σύστηµα στον υπολογιστή Dell™ σας θα πρέπει να εγκαταστήσετε επίσης ξανά τη βοηθητική εφαρµογή NSS. Η βοηθητική εφαρµογή βρίσκεται στο προαιρετικό CD Προγράµµατα oδήγησης και βοηθητικές εφαρµογές και στον ιστοχώρο υποστήριξηςτης Dell στη διεύθυνση support.dell.com. Για να κάνετε λήψη της βοηθητικής εφαρµογής, µεταβείτε στην περιοχή Downloadsτου ιστοχώρου support.dell.com και επιλέξτε το µοντέλο του υπολογιστή σας από το αναπτυσσόµενο µενού. Στην περιοχή Select Your Download Category, επιλέξτε System and Configuration Utilities, επιλέξτε το λειτουργικό σύστηµα καιτη γλώσσα σας και ακολουθήστε τις οδηγίες. Το NSS παρέχει σηµαντικές ενηµερώσεις για το λειτουργικό σας σύστηµα και υποστήριξη για µονάδες δισκέτας USB Dell™ 3,5 ιντσών, επεξεργαστές Intel® Pentium® M, επεξεργαστές Intel Celeron® M, µονάδες οπτικών δίσκων και συσκευές USB. Το NSS είναι απαραίτητο για τη σωστή λειτουργία του υπολογιστή Dell. Το λογισµικό εντοπίζει αυτόµατα τον υπολογιστή σας καιτο λειτουργικό σύστηµα και εγκαθιστά τις απαραίτητες ενηµερώσεις για τη δική σας διαµόρφωση. ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Το NSS είναι σηµαντικό για τη σωστή λειτουργία των συσκευών USB. Προβλήµατα κλειδώµατος και λογισµικού ΠΡΟΣΟΧΗ: Πριν ξεκινήσετε οποιαδήποτε από τις διαδικασίες που αναφέρονται σε αυτή την ενότητα, ακολουθήστε τις οδηγίες ασφαλείας που βρίσκονται στον Οδηγό πληροφοριών προϊόντος. ∆εν γίνεται εκκίνηση του υπολογιστή Ο υπολογιστής δεν αποκρίνεται πλέον ΕΙ∆ΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ: Ενδέχεται να χάσετε δεδοµένα αν δεν είναι δυνατός ο τερµατισµός του λειτουργικού συστήµατος. Βεβαιωθείτε ότι ο µετασχηµατιστής AC είναι σταθερά συνδεδεµένος στον υπολογιστή και στην πρίζα. Κλείστε τον υπολογιστή σας — Αν ο υπολογιστής δεν αποκριθεί, πιέζοντας ένα πλήκτρο στο πληκτρολόγιο ή κινώντας το ποντίκι, πατήστε και κρατήστε πατηµένο το πλήκτρο λειτουργίας για 8 έως 10 δευτερόλεπτα περίπου, µέχρι ο υπολογιστής να απενεργοποιηθεί. Έπειτα επανεκκινήστε τον. 62 Συνοπτικός οδηγός www.dell.com | support.dell.com Ένα πρόγραµµα δεν αποκρίνεται πλέον Ένα πρόγραµµα εµφανίζει σφάλµα συνεχώς ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Το λογισµικό περιλαµβάνει συνήθως οδηγίες για την εγκατάσταση στην τεκµηρίωσή του ή σε δισκέτα ή σε CD. Ένα πρόγραµµα είναι σχεδιασµένο για µια προηγούµενη έκδοση του λειτουργικού συστήµατος Microsoft® Windows® Εµφανίζεται µια µπλε οθόνη Κλείστε το πρόγραµµα — 1 Πιέστε ταυτόχρονα. 2 Κάντε κλικ στο Applications (Εφαρµογές). 3 Κάντε κλικ στο πρόγραµµα το οποίο δεν αποκρίνεται πλέον. 4 ΠατήστεEnd Task (Τέλος διεργασίας). Ελέγξτε την τεκµηρίωση του λογισµικού — Αν χρειάζεται, απεγκαταστήστε και εγκαταστήστε ξανά το πρόγραµµα. Αν χρησιµοποιείτε Windows XP, Εκτελέστε τον Οδηγό συµβατότητας προγράµµατος — Ο Οδηγός συµβατότητας προγράµµατος ρυθµίζει ένα πρόγραµµα έτσι ώστε να εκτελείται σε περιβάλλον παρόµοιο µε περιβάλλοντα λειτουργικού συστήµατος πέραν των Windows XP. 1 Κάντε κλικ στο πλήκτρο Start (Έναρξη), επιλέξτε All Programs (Όλα τα προγράµµατα)→ Accessories (Βοηθήµατα) και έπειτα Program Compatibility Wizard (Οδηγός συµβατότητας προγράµµατος). 2 Στην οθόνη υποδοχής, κάντε κλικ στο Next (Επόµενο). 3 Ακολουθήστε τις οδηγίες στην οθόνη. Κλείστε τον υπολογιστή σας — Αν ο υπολογιστής δεν αποκριθεί πιέζοντας ένα πλήκτρο στο πληκτρολόγιο ή κινώντας το ποντίκι, πατήστε και κρατήστε πατηµένο το πλήκτρο λειτουργίας για 8 έως 10 δευτερόλεπτα περίπου, µέχρι ο υπολογιστής να απενεργοποιηθεί. Έπειτα επανεκκινήστε τον. Συνοπτικός οδηγός 63 Άλλα προβλήµατα λογισµικού Χρήση του διαγνωστικού προγράµµατος της Dell Πότε να χρησιµοποιήσετε το διαγνωστικό πρόγραµµα της Dell Εάν αντιµετωπίσετε κάποιο πρόβληµα µε τον υπολογιστή σας, πραγµατοποιήστε τους ελέγχους που αναφέρονται στην ενότητα «Επίλυση προβληµάτων» και εκτελέστε το διαγνωστικό πρόγραµµα της Dell πριν επικοινωνήσετε µε την Dell για τεχνική βοήθεια. Καλό θα ήταν να εκτυπώσετε τις παρούσες διαδικασίες πριν ξεκινήσετε. ΕΙ∆ΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ: Το διαγνωστικό πρόγραµµα της Dell λειτουργεί µόνο στους υπολογιστές της Dell™. Ελέγξτε το εγχειρίδιο λογισµικού ή επικοινωνήστε µε τον κατασκευαστή του λογισµικού για πληροφορίες σχετικά µε την αντιµετώπιση προβληµάτων — • Βεβαιωθείτε ότι το πρόγραµµα είναι συµβατό µε το λειτουργικό σύστηµα που έχετε εγκατεστηµένο στον υπολογιστή σας. • Βεβαιωθείτε ότι ο υπολογιστήςικανοποιεί τις ελάχιστες απαιτήσεις υλικού εξοπλισµού για την εκτέλεση του λογισµικού. ∆είτε το εγχειρίδιο του λογισµικού για πληροφορίες. • Βεβαιωθείτε ότι το πρόγραµµα είναι εγκατεστηµένο και ρυθµισµένο σωστά. • Επιβεβαιώστε ότι τα προγράµµατα οδήγησης των συσκευών δεν δηµιουργούν διενέξεις µε το πρόγραµµα. • Αν χρειάζεται, απεγκαταστήστε και εγκαταστήστε ξανά το πρόγραµµα. ∆ηµιουργήστε αµέσως αντίγραφα των αρχείων σας. Χρησιµοποιήστε ένα πρόγραµµα σάρωσης ιών για να ελέγξετε τον σκληρό δίσκο, τις δισκέτες ή τα CD. Αποθηκεύστε και κλείστε όλα τα ανοικτά αρχεία ή προγράµµατα και τερµατίστε τον υπολογιστή σας από το µενού Start (Έναρξη). Ελέγξτε τον υπολογιστή για τυχόν spyware — Αν ο υπολογιστήςσας είναι αργός, λαµβάνετε συχνά αναδυόµενες διαφηµίσεις ή έχετε προβλήµατα µε τη σύνδεση στο Internet, ο υπολογιστής σας µπορεί να έχει προσβληθεί µε spyware. Χρησιµοποιήστε ένα πρόγραµµα που περιλαµβάνει προστασία έναντι spyware (το πρόγραµµά σας µπορεί να απαιτεί αναβάθµιση) για να ελέγξετε τον υπολογιστή και να αφαιρέστε το spyware. Για περισσότερες πληροφορίες επισκεφθείτε τη διεύθυνση support.dell.com και αναζητήστε τη λέξη κλειδίspyware. Εκτελέστε το διαγνωστικό πρόγραµµα της Dell — Αν όλες οι δοκιµές είναι επιτυχηµένες, τότε το σφάλµα σχετίζεται µε πρόβληµα λογισµικού.64 Συνοπτικός οδηγός www.dell.com | support.dell.com Κάντε εκκίνηση του διαγνωστικού προγράµµατος είτε από τη µονάδα του σκληρού δίσκου σας είτε από το προαιρετικό CDΠρογράµµατα προγραµµάτων οδήγησης και βοηθητικών εφαρµογών (επίσης γνωστό ωςτο CD πόρων). Εκκίνηση του διαγνωστικού προγράµµατος της Dell από τον σκληρό δίσκο σας Το διαγνωστικό πρόγραµµα της Dell βρίσκεται σε ένα αθέατο διαµέρισµα βοηθητικής εφαρµογής διαγνωστικών, στη µονάδα σκληρού δίσκου. ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Αν ο υπολογιστής σας δεν µπορεί να εµφανίσει µια εικόνα οθόνης, επικοινωνήστε µε την Dell. 1 Τερµατίστε τη λειτουργία του υπολογιστή. 2 Ενεργοποιήστε τον υπολογιστή. Όταν εµφανιστεί το λογότυπο DELL™, πατήστε αµέσως. Εάν περιµένετε πολλή ώρα και εµφανίζεται το λογότυπο του λειτουργικού συστήµατος, συνεχίστε να περιµένετε µέχρι να δείτε την επιφάνεια εργασίας των Microsoft ® Windows®. Στη συνέχεια, τερµατίστε τη λειτουργία του υπολογιστή και δοκιµάστε ξανά. 3 Όταν εµφανιστεί η λίστα των συσκευών εκκίνησης, επιλέξτε Diagnostics και πατήστε . Ο υπολογιστής εκτελεί µια σειρά αρχικών ελέγχων στην κάρτα του συστήµατός σας, στο πληκτρολόγιο, στον σκληρό δίσκο και στην οθόνη, οι οποίοι ονοµάζονται Pre-boot System Assessment. • Κατά τη διάρκεια της αξιολόγησης, απαντήστε στις ερωτήσεις που εµφανίζονται. • Εάν ανιχνευτεί κάποιο σφάλµα, ο υπολογιστής σταµατά και ακούγεται ένας ήχος µπιπ. Για να σταµατήσετε η διαδικασία των ελέγχων και να κάνετε επανεκκίνηση του υπολογιστή, πατήστε , για να συνεχίσετε στον επόµενο έλεγχο, πατήστε , ενώ για να γίνει επανέλεγχος του εξαρτήµατος στο οποίο βρέθηκε σφάλµα, πατήστε . • Εάν εντοπιστούν σφάλµατα κατά τη διάρκεια της αξιολόγησης του συστήµατος πριν την έναρξη (Pre-boot), σηµειώστε τους κωδικούς σφάλµατος και επικοινωνήστε µε την Dell πριν συνεχίσετε µε το διαγνωστικό πρόγραµµα της Dell. Εάν η λειτουργία αξιολόγησης του συστήµατος πριν την έναρξη (Pre-boot) ολοκληρωθεί µε επιτυχία, θα λάβετε το µήνυµα σχετικά µε την Booting Dell Diagnostic Utility Partition (εκκίνηση του διαµερίσµατος βοηθητικής εφαρµογής διαγνωστικών της Dell.)Press any key to continue (Πατήστε οποιοδήποτε πλήκτρο για να συνεχίσετε.) ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Εάν δείτε ένα µήνυµα που δηλώνει ότι δεν έχει βρεθεί κανένα διαµέρισµα βοηθητικής εφαρµογής διαγνωστικών, εκτελέστε το διαγνωστικό προγράµµατα της Dell από το CD Προγράµµατα οδήγησης και βοηθητικές εφαρµογές. 4 Πατήστε οποιοδήποτε πλήκτρο για να πραγµατοποιηθεί εκκίνηση του διαγνωστικού προγράµµατος της Dell από το διαµέρισµα βοηθητικής εφαρµογής διαγνωστικών στη µονάδα σκληρού δίσκου.Συνοπτικός οδηγός 65 Έναρξη του διαγνωστικού πρόγραµµα της Dell από το προαιρετικό DC Προγράµµατα οδήγησης και βοηθητικές εφαρµογές 1 Συνδέστε µια µονάδα CD στο σύστηµα. 2 Τοποθετήστε το CD Προγράµµατα οδήγησης και βοηθητικές εφαρµογές. 3 Σβήστε και κάντε επανεκκίνηση του υπολογιστή. Όταν εµφανιστεί το λογότυπο της DELL, πατήστε αµέσως. Εάν περιµένετε πολλή ώρα και εµφανιστεί το λογότυπο των Windows, συνεχίστε να περιµένετε µέχρι να δείτε την επιφάνεια εργασίας των Windows. Στη συνέχεια, τερµατίστε τη λειτουργία του υπολογιστή και δοκιµάστε ξανά. ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Τα βήµατα που ακολουθούν αλλάζουν την ακολουθία εκκίνησης µόνο για µία φορά. Στην επόµενη διαδικασία εκκίνησης, η εκκίνηση του υπολογιστή γίνεται σύµφωνα µε τις συσκευές που καθορίζονται στη ρύθµιση του συστήµατος. 4 Όταν εµφανιστεί η λίστα των συσκευών εκκίνησης, επιλέξτε «CD/DVD/CD-RW Drive» και πατήστε . 5 Επιλέξτε CD/DVD/CD-RW Drive από το µενού εκκίνησης του CD. 6 Κάντε την επιλογή Boot from CD-ROM (Εκκίνηση από το CD-ROM) από το µενού που εµφανίζεται. 7 Πληκτρολογήστε 1 για να ξεκινήσει το µενού στο CD πόρων. 8 Πληκτρολογήστε 2 για να ξεκινήσεί το διαγνωστικό πρόγραµµα της Dell. 9 Επιλέξτε Run the 32 Bit Dell Diagnostics (Εκτέλεση του διαγνωστικού προγράµµατος 32 Bit της Dell) από την αριθµηµένη λίστα. Εάν υπάρχουν πολλές εκδόσεις, επιλέξτε την έκδοση που είναι κατάλληλη για τον υπολογιστή σας. 10 Όταν εµφανιστεί το κύριο µενού του διαγνωστικού προγράµµατος της Dell, επιλέξτε τον έλεγχο που θέλετε να εκτελέσετε. Κύριο µενού διαγνωστικού προγράµµατος της Dell 1 Μετά τη φόρτωση του διαγνωστικού προγράµµατος της Dell και την εµφάνιση της οθόνης του κύριου µενού, κάντε κλικ στο κουµπί που αντιστοιχεί στην επιλογή που θέλετε. Επιλογή Λειτουργία Express Test (Γρήγορος έλεγχος) Πραγµατοποιείται γρήγορος έλεγχος των συσκευών. Αυτός ο έλεγχος διαρκεί συνήθως 10 έως 20 λεπτά και δεν απαιτεί τη συµµετοχή σας. Εκτελέστε αρχικά τη λειτουργία «Express Test» για να αυξήσετε την πιθανότητα γρήγορου εντοπισµού του προβλήµατος. Extended Test (Εκτεταµένος έλεγχος) Πραγµατοποιείται λεπτοµερής έλεγχος των συσκευών. Αυτός ο έλεγχος συνήθως διαρκεί 1 ώρα ή περισσότερο και απαιτεί, κατά διαστήµατα, να απαντάτε σε ερωτήσεις.66 Συνοπτικός οδηγός www.dell.com | support.dell.com 2 Εάν αντιµετωπίσετε πρόβληµα κατά τη διάρκεια ελέγχου, εµφανίζεται ένα µήνυµα µε έναν κωδικό σφάλµατος και µια περιγραφή του προβλήµατος. Σηµειώστε τον κωδικό σφάλµατος και την περιγραφή του προβλήµατος και ακολουθήστε τις οδηγίες που εµφανίζονται στην οθόνη. Εάν δεν µπορείτε να επιλύσετε το πρόβληµα, επικοινωνήστε µε την Dell. ΣΗΜΕΙΩΣΗ: Η ετικέτα εξυπηρέτησης για τον υπολογιστή σας βρίσκεται στο επάνω µέρος της κάθε δοκιµαστικής οθόνης. Εάν έρθετε σε επαφή µε την Dell, η τεχνική υποστήριξη θα σας ζητήσειτην ετικέτα εξυπηρέτησης. 3 Εάν εκτελέσετε έλεγχο από την επιλογή Custom Test (Προσαρµοσµένος έλεγχος) ή Symptom Tree (Συµπτώµατα), κάντε κλικ στη σχετική καρτέλα που περιγράφεται στον ακόλουθο πίνακα για περισσότερες πληροφορίες. 4 Όταν ολοκληρωθούν οι έλεγχοι, εάν εκτελείτε το διαγνωστικό πρόγραµµα της Dell από τo Προγράµµατα οδήγησης και βοηθητικές εφαρµογές, αφαιρέστε το CD. 5 Όταν οι έλεγχοι ολοκληρωθούν, κλείστε την οθόνη ελέγχων για να επιστρέψετε στο κύριο µενού. Για έξοδο από το διαγνωστικό πρόγραµµα της Dell και επανεκκίνηση του υπολογιστή, κλείστε το κύριο µενού. Custom Test (Προσαρµοσµένος έλεγχος) Πραγµατοποιείται έλεγχος µιας συγκεκριµένης συσκευής. Μπορείτε να προσαρµόσετε τους ελέγχους που θέλετε να εκτελέσετε. Symptom Tree (Συµπτώµατα) Παραθέτει τα πιο συνηθισµένα συµπτώµατα που παρουσιάζονται και σας επιτρέπει να επιλέξετε κάποιον έλεγχο ανάλογα µε το σύµπτωµα του προβλήµατος που αντιµετωπίζετε. Καρτέλα Λειτουργία Results (Αποτελέσµατα) Εµφανίζει τα αποτελέσµατα του ελέγχου και τυχόν σφάλµατα που εντοπίστηκαν. Errors (Σφάλµατα) Εµφανίζει συνθήκες σφαλµάτων, κωδικούς σφαλµάτων και την περιγραφή του προβλήµατος. Help (Βοήθεια) Περιγράφει τον έλεγχο και ενδέχεται να υποδεικνύει προϋποθέσεις για την εκτέλεσή του. Configuration (∆ιαµόρφωση) Εµφανίζει τις ρυθµίσεις του υλικού που χρησιµοποιείτε για την επιλεγµένη συσκευή. Το διαγνωστικό πρόγραµµα της Dell λαµβάνει πληροφορίες διαµόρφωσης για όλες τις συσκευές από τις ρυθµίσεις του συστήµατος, τη µνήµη και διάφορους εσωτερικούς ελέγχους και εµφανίζει τις πληροφορίες στη λίστα συσκευών στο αριστερό πλαίσιο της οθόνης. Η λίστα συσκευών ενδέχεται να µην εµφανίζει τα ονόµατα όλων των στοιχείων, τα οποία είναι εγκατεστηµένα στον υπολογιστή σας ή όλων των συσκευών, οι οποίες είναι συνδεδεµένες στον υπολογιστή σας. Parameters (Παράµετροι) Σας επιτρέπει να προσαρµόσετε τον έλεγχο αλλάζοντας τις ρυθµίσεις ελέγχου. Επιλογή Λειτουργία (συνεχίζεται)www.dell.com | support.dell.com Dell™ Latitude™ X1 Hurtigreferanse Modell PP05SOBS!, merknader og advarsler OBS! Et OBS!-avsnitt inneholder viktig informasjon som gjør at du kan bruke datamaskinen mer effektivt. MERKNAD: En MERKNAD angir enten potensiell fare for maskinvaren eller tap av data, og forteller hvordan du kan unngå problemet. ADVARSEL: En ADVARSEL angir en potensiell fare for skade på eiendom, personskade eller dødsfall. Forkortelser og akronymer Du finner en fullstendig liste over forkortelser og akronymer i glossaret i Brukerhåndbok. OBS! Noen funksjoner er ikke tilgjengelige for datamaskinen, eller er ikke tilgjengelige i noen land. ____________________ Informasjonen i dette dokumentet kan endres uten varsel. © 2005 Dell Inc. Med ene rett. Reproduksjon i enhver form er strengt forbudt uten skriftlig tillatelse fra Dell Inc. Varemerker i denne teksten: Dell, DELL-logoen ogLatitude er varemerker tilhørende Dell Inc.; Microsoft og Windows erregistrerte varemerker tilhørende Microsoft Corporation; Intel, Pentium og Celeron er registrerte varemerker tilhørende Intel Corporation. Andre varemerker og varenavn kan brukes i dette dokumentet som en henvisning til institusjonene som innehar rettighetene til merkene og navnene, eller til produktene. Dell Inc. fraskriver seg enhver eierinteresse for varemerker og varenavn som ikke er sine egne. Modell PP05S Januar 2005 Delenr. P6419 Utg. A00Innhold 69 Innhold Finne informasjon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Konfigurere datamaskinen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Om datamaskinen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Forside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Sett fra venstre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Sett fra høyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Bakside. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Sett fra undersiden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Bruke et batteri . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Batteriytelse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Kontrollere batteriets strømstatus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Lade batteriet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Ta ut et batteri . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Sette i et batteri. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Lagre et batteri . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Problemløsing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 NSS-system (Notebook System Software) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Problemer med frysing og programvare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Bruke Dell Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Når du skal bruke Dell Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Starte Dell Diagnostics fra harddisken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Starte Dell Diagnostics fra Drivers and Utilities (ekstratilbehør) . . . . . 86 Dell Diagnostics Main Menu (hovedmeny) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8770 InnholdHurtigveiledning 71 Finne informasjon OBS! Noen funksjoner er ikke tilgjengelige for datamaskinen, eller er ikke tilgjengelige i noen land. OBS! Ytterligere informasjon kan være vedlagt sammen med datamaskinen. Hva leter du etter? Finn det her • Et diagnoseprogram for datamaskinen • Drivere til datamaskinen • Dokumentasjon for datamaskinen • Min enhetsdokumentasjon • NSS-system (Notebook System Software) CDen Drivers and Utilities (også kalt ResourceCD) Dokumentasjon og drivere er allerede installert på datamaskinen. Du kan reinstallerestall drivere, kjøre Dell Diagnostics eller få tilgang til dokumentasjonen fra CDen. Viktig-filer kan være inkludert på CDen med de nyeste oppdateringene om tekniske endringer av datamaskinen eller avansert teknisk referansemateriale for teknikere og erfarne brukere. OBS! Oppdateringer for drivere og dokumentasjon kan fås ved å gå til support.dell.com. OBS! CDen Drivers and Utilities er ekstratilbehør, og leveres ikke med alle datamaskiner. • Konfigurere datamaskinen • Grunnleggende feilsøkingsinformasjon • Hvordan du kjører Dell Diagnostikk • Hvordan du tar ut og installerer deler Referansehåndbok OBS! Referansehåndboken er ekstratilbehør og leveres ikke med alle datamaskiner. OBS! Dette dokumentet er tilgjengelig som PDF på support.dell.com.72 Hurtigveiledning www.dell.com | support.dell.com • Garantiinformasjon • Vilkår og betingelser (bare i USA) • Sikkerhetsinstruksjoner • Spesielle bestemmelser • Ergonomisk informasjon • Lisensavtale for sluttbruker Dell™ Produktveiledning • Hvordan du kan fjerne og erstatte deler • Spesifikasjoner • Hvordan du kan konfigurere systeminnstillinger • Hvordan du kan feilsøke og løse problemer Brukerhåndbok Hjelp og støtte for Microsoft® Windows® XP 1Klikk Start og klikk Hjelp og støtte. 2Klikk User’s and system guides (bruker- og systemhåndbøker), og klikk User’s guides (brukerhåndbøker). Brukerhåndbok er også tilgjengelig på CDen Drivers and Utilities som er et ekstratilbehør. • Servicemerke og ekspresservicekode • Lisensmerke for Microsoft Windows Servicemerke og Microsoft Windows-lisens Disse merkene sitter under datamaskinen. • Bruk servicemerket til å identifisere datamaskinen når du bruker support.dell.com eller ved kontakt med teknisk støtte. • Tast ekspresservicekoden for å sette over samtalen ved kontakt med teknisk støtte. Hva leter du etter? Finn det herHurtigveiledning 73 • Løsninger – Tips og råd for feilsøking, artikler fra teknikere, elektroniske kurs, vanlige spørsmål • Gruppe – Onlinediskusjoner med andre Dell-kunder • Oppgraderinger – Oppgradringsinformasjon for komponenter, f.eks. minne, harddisk og operativsystem • Kundestøtte – Kontaktinformasjon, servicehenvendelse og bestillingsstatus, garanti og opplysninger om reparasjon • Service og støtte – Status for servicehenvendelse og støttelogg, servicekontrakt, elektroniske diskusjoner med teknisk støtte • Referanse – Datamaskindokumentasjon, detaljer om datamaskinkonfigurasjon, produktspesifikasjoner og anmeldelser • Nedlastbart materiale – Godkjente drivere, patchprogrammer og programvareoppdateringer • NSS-system (Notebook System Software)– Hvis du skal reinstallere operativsystemet for datamaskinen, bør du også reinstallere NSS -verktøyet. NSS gir nødvendige oppdateringer for operativsystemet og støtte for Dell™ 3.5-tommers USB-diskettstasjoner, og M-prosessorer, optiske drivere og USB-enheter for Intel® Pentium®. NSS er nødvendig for riktig drift av Dell-datamaskinen. Denne programvaren registrerer datamaskinen og operativsystemet automatisk, og installerer de aktuelle oppdateringene for din konfigurasjon. Slik laster du ned Notebook Systemprogramvare: 1 Gå til support.dell.com og klikk Downloads (nedlastbart materiale). 2 Skriv inn servicekoden eller produktmodellen. 3 I rullegardinmenyen Download Category (nedlastingskategori) klikker du All (alle). 4 Velg operativsystemet og språket for operativsystemet til datamaskinen, og klikk Submit (send). 5 Under Select a Device (velg en enhet), blar du til System and Configuration Utilities (system- og konfigurasjonsverktøy) og klikker Dell NotebookSystemprogramvare. Hjemmeside for Dell Support – support.dell.com OBS! Velg ditt område for å vise aktuelt støtteområde. OBS! Bedriftskunder og kunder innen offentlig forvaltning og utdannelse kan også bruke det tilpassede webområdet Dell Premier Support på premier.support.dell.com.Dette webområdet er ikke tilgjengelig på alle steder. Hva leter du etter? Finn det her74 Hurtigveiledning www.dell.com | support.dell.com Konfigurere datamaskinen ADVARSEL: Før du utfører noen av prosedyrene i denne delen, må du følge sikkerhetsanvisningene i Veiledning for produktinformasjon. 1 Pakk ut tilbehørsesken. 2 Sett innholdet i tilbehørsesken til side. Du trenger dette for å fullføre konfigurasjonen av datamaskinen. Tilbehørsesken inneholder også brukerdokumentasjon og eventuell programvare eller ekstra maskinvare (for eksempel PC-kort, stasjoner eller batterier) du har bestilt. • Hvordan du bruker Windows XP • Dokumentasjon for datamaskinen • Dokumentasjon for enheter (f.eks. et modem) Hjelp og støtte i Windows 1Klikk Start og klikk Hjelp og støtte. 2 Skriv inn et ord eller en frase som beskriver problemet, og klikk pilikonet. 3Klikk emnet som beskriver problemet. 4 Følg anvisningene på skjermen. • Hvordan reinstallere operativsystemet Operativsystem-CD Operativsystemet er allerede installert på datamaskinen. Reinstaller operativsystemet fra operativsystem-CDen. Se anvisninger i Brukerhåndbok. Etter at du har reinstallert operativsystemet, reinstallerer du driverne for de enhetene som fulgte med datamaskinen, fra CDen Drivers and Utilities. Merket med produktnøkkelen for operativsystemet produktnøkkelsitter på datamaskinen. OBS! Fargen på CDen varierer, avhengig av hvilket operativsystem du bestilte. OBS! CDen med operativsystemet er ekstratilbehør og leveres ikke med alle datamaskiner. Hva leter du etter? Finn det herHurtigveiledning 75 3 Koble strømadapteren til strømkontakten på datamaskinen og til nettstrøm. 4 Åpne skjermen på datamaskinen, og trykk på av/på-knappen for å slå på datamaskinen.76 Hurtigveiledning www.dell.com | support.dell.com Om datamaskinen Forside skjerm tastatur statuslamper for enhet og tastatur styreplate knapper på berøringsplate (2) Secure Digital-minnesporHurtigveiledning 77 Sett fra venstre Sett fra høyre Bakside kontakt for strømadapter videokontakt strømførende USB-kontakt 1394-tilkobling lydkontakter CompactFlash-kortspor USB-kontakt nettverkskontakt av/på-knapp modemkontakt åpning for sikkerhetskabel78 Hurtigveiledning www.dell.com | support.dell.com Sett fra undersiden Bruke et batteri Batteriytelse ADVARSEL: Før du utfører noen av prosedyrene i denne delen, må du følge sikkerhetsanvisningene i Veiledning for produktinformasjon. OBS! Du finner flere opplysninger om Dells garantidekning for datamaskinen i Veiledning for produktinformasjon eller i separate, trykte garantidokumenter som følger med datamaskinen. Bruk alltid den bærbare Dell™-datamaskinen med hovedbatteriet installert for å oppnå opptimal ytelse fra datamaskinen og hjelp til å bevare BIOS-innstillingene. Bruk et batteri til å kjøre datamaskinen når den ikke er koblet til nettstrøm. Det følger med ett batteri som standardutstyr i batterirommet. høyttaler låsutløsere for batterirom (2) måler for batterilading batteriHurtigveiledning 79 Batteriets driftstid varierer avhengig av driftsforholdene. Driftstiden reduseres betraktelig når du gjør følgende: • Bruke trådløse kommunikasjonsenheter eller USB-enheter • Bruker skjerminnstillingene for høy lysstyrke, 3D-skjermsparere eller andre strømslukende programmer som 3D-spill • Kjører datamaskinen i modusen for maksimal ytelse OBS! Det anbefales at du kobler datamaskinen til nettstrøm når du skriver til en CD eller DVD. Du kan kontrollere batteriets strømstatus før du setter batteriet i datamaskinen. Du kan også innstille alternativer for strømbehandling, slik at du blir varslet når det er lite batteristrøm. ADVARSEL: Bruk av et inkompatibelt batteri kan øke risikoen for brann eller eksplosjon. Skift bare batteriet ut med et kompatibelt batteri fra Dell. Litium-batteriet er laget for å fungere med Delldatamaskinen. Bruk ikke et batteri fra andre datamaskiner i datamaskinen. ADVARSEL: Kast ikke batteriet sammen med husholdsavfallet. Når batteriet er utbrukt, ringer du til det lokale avfallsmottaket eller miljøorganet for å få råd om avhending av litium-batteriet. Se under "Battery Disposal" (kassere batteriet) i Veiledning for produktinformasjon. ADVARSEL: Misbruk av batteriet kan øke risikoen for brann eller kjemisk forbrenning. Batteriet skal ikke punkteres, brennes, demonteres eller utsettes for temperaturer over 65°C (149°F). Oppbevar batteriet utilgjengelig for barn.. Batterier som er skadet eller lekker, skal håndteres forsiktig. Et skadet batteri kan lekke og forårsake personskade eller materielle skader. Kontrollere batteriets strømstatus Dells QuickSet-batterimåler, Microsoft® Windows® Strømmåler-vinduet og -ikonet, batteristrøm- og tilstandsmålerenog advarselen om lite batteristrøm inneholder informasjon om batteriets strømstatus. Dell QuickSet-batterimåler Hvis Dell QuickSet er installert, trykker du for å vise QuickSet-batterimåleren. Batterimåler-vinduet viser status, strømnivå og når batteriet i datamaskinen er helt oppladet.80 Hurtigveiledning www.dell.com | support.dell.com Følgende ikoner vises i vinduet Batterimåler når: Du finner mer informasjon om QuickSet, ved å høyreklikke -ikonet i oppgavelinjen og klikke Help (hjelp). Strømmåler i Microsoft® Windows® Strømmåleren i Windows angir gjenværende batteristrøm. Dobbeltklikk -ikonet på oppgavelinjen hvis du vil kontrollere strømmåleren. Du finner mer informasjon om kategorien Power Meter (stømmåler) under "Power Management" (strømstyring) i Brukerhåndbok. Hvis datamaskinen er koblet til nettstrøm, vises et -ikon. Lademåler Før du setter i et batteri, trykker du på statusknappen på batterilademåleren, slik at lampene for strømnivå lyser. Hver lampe representerer omtrent 20 prosent av batteriets totale strømnivå. Hvis for eksempel batteriet er 80 prosent ladet, vil fire av lampene lyse. Batteriet er helt utladet hvis ingen lamper lyser. Datamaskinen og dokkenheten kjøres på batteristrøm. Datamaskinen er koblet til nettstrøm og batteriet lades. Datamaskinen er koblet til nettstrøm og batteriet er helt ladet.Hurtigveiledning 81 Tilstandsmåler Batteriets driftstid er for en stor del avhengig av hvor mange ganger det er ladet. Etter flere hundre lade- og utladingssykluser, mister batterier noe av ladekapasiteten, eller batteriets tilstand. Du kan kontrollere batteriets tilstand ved å trykke og holde nede statusknappen på batterilademåleren i minst 3 sekunder. Hvis ingen lamper lyser, er batteritilstanden god, og batteriet har over 80 prosent igjen av den opprinnelige ladekapasiteten. Hver lampe representerer trinnvis degradering. Hvis fem lamper lyser, er det mindre enn 60 prosent igjen av ladekapasiteten. Du finner mer informasjon om batteriets driftstid under "Specifications" (spesifikasjoner) i Brukerhåndbok. Advarsel om lite batteristrøm MERKNAD: Etter en advarsel om lite batteristrøm, bør du lagre arbeidet øyeblikkelig for å unngå å miste eller ødelegge data. Koble deretter datamaskinen til nettstrøm. Hvis batteriet kjøres til det er helt utladet, vil hvilemodusen inntre automatisk. En advarselmelding vises i et popup-vindu når batteriet er omtrent 90 prosent utladet. Du finner mer informasjon om alarmer ved lite batteristrøm under "Power Management" (strømstyring) i Brukerhåndbok. Lade batteriet OBS! Strømadapteren lader et fullstendig utladet batteri på omtrent 1 time når datamaskinen er av. Ladetiden er lengre når datamaskinen er på. Du kan la batteriet være i datamaskinen så lenge du vil. Batteriets internkrets hindrer at batteriet lades for mye. Når du kobler datamaskinen til nettstrøm eller setter i et batteri mens datamaskinen er koblet til nettstrøm, sjekker datamaskinen batteriets strømnivå og temperatur. Strømadapteren vil da eventuelt lade opp batteriet og opprettholde batteristrømmen. Hvis batteriet er varmt etter at det er brukt i datamaskinen, eller har ligget på et varmt sted, er det mulig at batteriet ikke begynner å lades opp når datamaskinen kobles til nettstrøm. Batteriet er for varmt til å starte oppladingen hvis -lampen blinker vekselvis grønt og oransje. Koble datamaskinen fra nettstrøm, og la datamaskinen og batteriet avkjøles til romtemperatur. Koble deretter datamaskinen til nettstrøm for å fortsette oppladingen av batteriet. Du finner mer informasjon om hvordan du løser problemer med et batteri under "Power Problems" (problemer med strøm) i Brukerhåndbok.82 Hurtigveiledning www.dell.com | support.dell.com Ta ut et batteri ADVARSEL: Før du utfører disse prosedyrene, må du koble modemet fra telefonkontakten i veggen. 1 Kontroller at datamaskinen er slått av eller koblet til en elektrisk stikkontakt 2 Skyv og hold på låsutløserne for batterirommet nederst på datamaskinen, og ta deretter batteriet ut av rommet. Sette i et batteri Skyv batteriet inn i rommet til låsutløseren klikker på plass. låsutløsere (2)Hurtigveiledning 83 Lagre et batteri Ta ut batteriet når datamaskinen skal lagres i lengre tid. Et batteri utlades under lengre lagringsperioder. Etter en lengre lagringsperiode, skal batteriet lades helt opp før det tas i bruk igjen. Problemløsing NSS-system (Notebook System Software) Hvis du reinstallerer operativsystemet for Dell-datamaskinen, bør du også reinstallere NSS - verktøyet. Dette verktøyet er tilgjengelig på CDen Drivers and Utilities som er ekstratilbehør, og på webområdet for Dell Support på support.dell.com. Hvis du vil laste ned verktøyet, går du til Downloads (materiale for nedlasting) påsupport.dell.com og velger datamaskinmodellen din i rullegardinmenyen. Velg System and Configuration Utilities(system- og konfigurasjonsverktøy), operativsystem og språk og følg deretter anvisningene under Select Your Download Category (velg nedlastingskategori). NSS gir viktige oppdateringer for operativsystemet og støtte for 3.5-tommers USB-diskettstasjoner fra Dell™, M-prosessorer for Intel® Pentium® og M-prosessorer, optiske drivere og USB-enheter for Intel Celeron®. NSS er nødvendig for riktig bruk av Dell-datamaskinen. Denne programvaren registrerer datamaskinen og operativsystemet automatisk, og installerer de aktuelle oppdateringene for din konfigurasjon. OBS! NSS er nødvendig for riktig bruk av USB-enheter. Problemer med frysing og programvare ADVARSEL: Før du utfører noen av prosedyrene i denne delen, må du følge sikkerhetsanvisningene i Veiledning for produktinformasjon. Datamaskinen kan ikke startes Datamaskinen gir ikke respons MERKNAD: Du kan miste data hvis du ikke kan slå av operativsystemet. KONTROLLER A T STRØMADAPTEREN E R ORDENTLIG KOBLET TIL DATAMASKINEN O G TIL NETTSTRØM. SLÅ A V DATAMASKINEN – Hvis datamaskinen ikke gir respons når du trykker på en tast på tastaturet eller beveger musen, trykker og holder du av/på-knappen inne i minst 8 til 10 sekunder til datamaskinen slås av. Start deretter datamaskinen på nytt. 84 Hurtigveiledning www.dell.com | support.dell.com Et program slutter å gi respons Et program krasjer gjentatte ganger OBS! Programvaren omfatter vanligvis installasjonsanvisninger i dokumentasjonen eller på en diskett eller CD. Et program er utviklet for et eldre Windows® Windows®-operativsystem Et ensfarget blått skjermbilde vises AVSLUTT PROGRAMMET – 1Trykk på samtidig. 2Klikk Programmer. 3Klikk det programmet som ikke lenger gir respons. 4Klikk Avslutt oppgave. SL Å OPP I DOKUMENTASJONEN FOR PROGRAMVAREN – Avinstaller og deretter reinstaller programmet hvis det er nødvendig. HVIS D U KJØRER WINDOWS XP, MÅ D U KJØRE VEIVISEREN FOR PROGRAMKOMPATIBILITET – Veiviseren for programkompatibilitet konfigurerer et program, slik at det kan kjøres i et miljø som ligner ikke-Windows XP-operativsystemmiljøer. 1Klikk Start, pek på Alle programmer→ Tilbehør, og klikk deretter veiviseren for programkompatibilitet. 2Klikk Neste i velkomstskjermbildet. 3 Følg anvisningene på skjermen. SL Å A V DATAMASKINEN – Hvis datamaskinen ikke gir respons når du trykker på en tast på tastaturet eller beveger musen, trykker og holder du av/på-knappen inne i minst 8 til 10 sekunder til datamaskinen slås av. Start deretter datamaskinen på nytt. Hurtigveiledning 85 Andre problemer med programvaren Bruke Dell Diagnostics Når du skal bruke Dell Diagnostics Dersom du har problemer med datamaskinen, utfører du kontrollene under "Problemløsing" og kjører Dell Diagnostics før du tar kontakt med Dell for å få teknisk bistand. Det anbefales at du skriver ut disse instruksjonene før du setter i gang. MERKNAD: Dell Diagnostics fungerer bare på Dell™-datamaskiner. Start Dell Diagnostics enten fra harddisken eller fra denvalgfrie Drivers and Utilities CD (også kalt ResourceCD). SLÅ OPP I DOKUMENTASJONEN FOR PROGRAMVAREN ELLER T A KONTAKT MED PROGRAMVAREPRODUSENTEN FOR Å FÅ INFORMASJON OM FEILSØKING – • Kontroller at operativsystemet er kompatibelt med operativsystemet på datamaskinen. • Kontroller at datamaskinen oppfyller minstekravene til maskinvare som er nødvendige for å kunne kjøre programvaren. Du finner informasjon i dokumentasjonen for programvaren. • Kontroller at programmet er riktig installert og konfigurert. • Kontroller at det ikke er konflikt mellom enhetsdriverne og programmet. • Avinstaller og deretter reinstaller programmet hvis det er nødvendig. SIKKERHETSKOPIER FILENE ØYEBLIKKELIG. KJØR E T VIRUSPROGRAM FOR Å KONTROLLERE HARDDISKEN, DISKETTENE ELLER CDENE. LAGRE O G LUKK EVENTUELLE ÅPNE FILER ELLER PROGRAMMER, O G SLÅ A V DATAMASKINEN VIA Start-MENYEN. SKANN DATAMASKINEN FOR SPYWARE – Hvis du merker at datamaskinen er treg, at det ofte dukker opp reklame på skjermen eller at du har problemer med å koble deg til Internett, kan datamaskinen være infisert med spyware. Kjør et virusprogram som inkluderer beskyttelse mot spyware (programmet kan kreve en oppgradering) for å skanne datamaskinen og fjerne spyware. Du finner mer informasjon ved å gå til support.dell.com og søke på nøkkelordet spyware. KJØRE DELL DIAGNOSTICS – Hvis alle tester kjøres OK, skyldes feiltilstanden et problem med programvaren.86 Hurtigveiledning www.dell.com | support.dell.com Starte Dell Diagnostics fra harddisken Dell Diagnostics ligger på en skjult partisjon for diagnostikk på harddisken. OBS! Ta kontakt med Dell hvis datamaskinen ikke kan vise et skjermbilde. 1 Slå av datamaskinen. 2 Slå på datamaskinen. Når DELL™-logoen vises, trykker du umiddelbart på . Hvis du venter for lenge og operativsystemets logo vises, fortsetter du å vente til du ser skrivebordet for Microsoft® Windows®. Slå deretter av datamaskinen og prøv på nytt. 3 Når listen over startstasjoner vises, uthever du Diagnostics og trykker på . Datamaskinen kjører systemkontrollen, en rekke tester for systemkort, tastatur, harddisk og skjerm. • Svar på spørsmålene som vises under denne kontrollen. • Dersom det oppdages feil, stopper maskinen og piper. For å stoppe testen og starte maskinen på nytt, trykk ; for å fortsette til neste test, trykk ; for å teste komponenten som feilet på nytt, trykk . • Hvis det blir registrert feil under systemkontrollen før oppstart, skriver du ned feilkoden(e) og tar kontakt med Dell før du fortsetter videre til Dell Diagnostics. Hvis systemkontrollen før oppstart blir fullført, får du meldingen Booting Dell Diagnostic Utility Partition. Press any key to continue (Starter Dells diagnostikkverktøypartisjon. Trykk en tast for å fortsette.) OBS! Dersom det vises en melding som sier at det ikke finnes en partisjon for diagnostikk, kjører du Dell Diagnostics fra Drivers and Utilities (ekstratilbehør). 4 Trykk en tast for å starte Dell Diagnostikk fra diagnoseverktøypartisjonen på harddisken. Starte Dell Diagnostics fra Drivers and Utilities (ekstratilbehør) 1 Koble en CD-stasjon til systemet. 2 Sett i Drivers and Utilities (ekstratilbehør). 3 Slå av og start datamaskinen på nytt. Når DELL-logoen vises, trykker du umiddelbart. Hvis du venter for lenge og Windows-logoen vises, fortsetter du til du ser Windowsskrivebordet. Slå deretter av datamaskinen og prøv på nytt. OBS! Det neste trinnet endrer startsekvensen for et engangstilfelle. Neste gang starter datamaskinen ifølge stasjonene som er spesifisert i systemoppsettet. 4 Når listen over startstasjoner vises, uthever du CD/DVD/CD-RW Drive (CD/DVD/CD-RWstasjon) og trykker .Hurtigveiledning 87 5 Velg alternativet CD/DVD/CD-RW Drive (CD/DVD/CD-RW-stasjon) fra oppstartmenyen på CDen. 6 Velg alternativet Boot from CD-ROMS (start fra CD-ROM) i menyen som vises. 7 Skriv 1 for å starte ResourceCD-menyen. 8 Skriv 2 for å starte Dell Diagnostics. 9 Velg Run the 32 Bit Dell Diagnostics (kjør 32 Bit Dell Diagnostics) fra den nummererte listen. Hvis det står flere versjoner på listen, velger du den som gjelder for din datamaskin. 10 Når Main Menu (hovedmeny) vises i Dell Diagnostics, velger du den testen du vil kjøre. Dell Diagnostics Main Menu (hovedmeny) 1 Etter at Dell Diagnostics er lastet inn og skjermbildet MainMenu (hovedmeny) vises, klikker du knappen for ønsket alternativ. 2 Dersom den støter på problemer under testen, vises en melding med en feilkode og en beskrivelse av problemet. Noter feilkoden og problembeskrivelsen, og følg instruksjonene på skjermen. Kontakt Dell hvis du ikke kan løse problemet. OBS! Servicemerket for datamaskinen er plassert på toppen av hvert testskjermbilde. Hvis du kontakter Dell, vil teknisk support spørre etter servicemerket. 3 Hvis du kjører en test fra alternativet Custom Test (egendefinert test) eller Symptom Tree (symptomtre), klikker du den aktuelle kategorien som er beskrevet i følgende tabell, hvis du vil ha mer informasjon. Alternativ Funksjon Express Test (ekspresstest) Utfører en rask test av enheter. Denne testen tar vanligvis mellom 10 og 20 minutter og krever ikke interaktivitet fra deg. Kjør Express Test først for å øke sjansen for å finne problemet raskt. Extended Test (utvidet test) Utfører en grundig kontroll av enheter. Denne testen tar vanligvis 1 time og krever at du svarer på spørsmål med jevne mellomrom. Custom test (egendefinert test) Tester en bestemt enhet. Du kan tilpasse testene du vil kjøre. Symptom Tree (symptomtre) Lister de vanligste symptomene og lar deg velge en test basert på symptomet på problemet du opplever.88 Hurtigveiledning www.dell.com | support.dell.com 4 Når testene er fullført, og du kjører Dell Diagnostics fra Drivers and Utilities (ekstratilbehør), løser du ut CDen. 5 Når testene er fullført, lukker du testskjermbildet og går tilbake til skjermbildet Main Menu (hovedmeny). Lukk skjermbildet Main Menu for å avslutte Dell Diagnostics og starte datamaskinen på nytt. Kategori Funksjon Results (resultater) Viser resultatene av testen og eventuelle feiltilstander som oppstod. Errors (feil) Viser feil som er funnet, feilkoder og en problembeskrivelse. Help (hjelp) Beskriver testen og kan angi krav for utføring av testen. Configuration (konfigurasjon) Viser maskinvarekonfigurasjonen for den valgte enheten. Dell Diagnostics innhenter konfigurasjonsinformasjon fra alle enheter fra systemoppsett, minne og forskjellige interne tester og viser informasjonen i enhetslisten på venstre side av skjermen. Enhetslisten viser kanskje ikke navnet på alle komponentene som er installert på datamaskinen, eller alle enhetene som er koblet til datamaskinen. Parameters (parametere) Lar deg tilpasse testen ved å endre testinnstillingene.www.dell.com | support.dell.com Dell™ Latitude™ X1 Szybki informator o systemie Model PP05SUwagi, przypomnienia i przestrogi UWAGA: UWAGA oznacza ważną wiadomość, która pomoże lepiej wykorzystać komputer. OSTRZEŻENIE: OSTRZEŻENIE wskazuje na możliwość uszkodzenia sprzętu lub utraty danych i informuje o sposobie uniknięcia problemu. PRZESTROGA: PRZESTROGA informuje o sytuacjach, w których występuje ryzyko uszkodzenia sprzętu, obrażeń lub śmierci. Skróty i skrótowce Pełną lista skrótów i skrótowców można znaleźć w części Słowniczek w Przewodniku użytkownika. UWAGA: Niektóre funkcje mogą nie być dostępne dla danego komputera lub w pewnych krajach. ____________________ Informacje zawarte w tym dokumencie mogą ulec zmianie bez uprzedzenia. © 2005 Dell Inc. Wszelkie prawa zastrzeżone. Powielanie zawartości niniejszego dokumentu w jakiejkolwiek formie bez pisemnej zgody firmy Dell Inc. jest surowo zabronione. Znaki towarowe użyte w tekście: Dell, logo DELL i Latitude są znakami towarowymi firmy Dell Inc.; Microsoft i Windows są zastrzeżonymi znakami towarowymi firmy Microsoft Corporation; Intel, Pentium i Celeron są zastrzeżonymi znakami towarowymi firmy Intel Corporation. Tekst może zawierać także inne znaki towarowe i nazwy towarowe odnoszące się do podmiotów posiadających prawa do tych znaków i nazw lub do ich produktów. Firma Dell Inc. nie rości sobie praw własności do marek i nazw towarowych innych niż jej własne. Model PP05S Styczeń 2005 Nr ref. P6419 Wersja A00Spis treści 91 Spis treści Wyszukiwanie informacji . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Przygotowywanie komputera do pracy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Informacje o komputerze. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Widok od przodu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Widok od lewej. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Widok z prawej strony . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Widok od tyłu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Widok od spodu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Korzystanie z akumulatora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Wydajność akumulatora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Sprawdzanie stanu naładowania akumulatora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Ładowanie akumulatora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Wyjmowanie akumulatora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Instalowanie akumulatora. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Przechowywanie akumulatora. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Rozwiązywanie problemów . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Oprogramowanie systemowe komputera przenośnego (NSS) . . . . . . . 105 Blokowanie się komputera i problemy z oprogramowaniem . . . . . . . . 105 Korzystanie z programu Dell Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Kiedy należy używać programu Dell Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Uruchamianie programu Dell Diagnostics z dysku twardego . . . . . . . . 108 Uruchamianie programu Dell Diagnostics z opcjonalnego dysku CD Drivers and Utilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Menu główne programu Dell Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10992 Spis treściSzybki informator o systemie 93 Wyszukiwanie informacji UWAGA: Niektóre funkcje mogą nie być dostępne dla danego komputera lub w pewnych krajach. UWAGA: Z komputerem użytkownika mogą być dostarczone dodatkowe informacje. Co chcesz znaleźć? Znajdziesz tutaj • Program diagnostyczny dla komputera • Sterowniki dla komputera • Dokumentacja komputera • Dokumentacja urządzeń • Oprogramowanie systemowe komputera przenośnego (NSS) Dysk CD Drivers and Utilities (nazywany również ResourceCD) Dokumentacja i sterowniki zostały już zainstalowane na komputerze. Tego dysku CD można użyć w celu ponownego zainstalowania sterowników, uruchamiania programu Dell Diagnostics lub uzyskania dostępu do dokumentacji. Na dysku twardym mogą znajdować się pliki Readme, dostarczające najnowszych informacji na temat zmian technicznych, które zostały dokonane w komputerze, lub zaawansowanych materiałów technicznych, przeznaczonych dla pracowników obsługi technicznej lub doświadczonych użytkowników. UWAGA: Aktualizacje sterowników i dokumentacji można znaleźć pod adresem support.euro.dell.com. UWAGA: Dysk CD Drivers and Utilities jest opcjonalny i może nie być wysyłany ze wszystkimi komputerami. • Jak skonfigurować komputer • Podstawowe informacje dotyczące rozwiązywania problemów • Jak uruchomić program Dell Diagnostics • Jak wymieniać i instalować wyposażenie Szybki informator o systemie UWAGA: Szybki informator o systemie jest opcjonalny i może nie być wysyłany ze wszystkimi komputerami. UWAGA: Ten dokument jest dostępny w formacie PDF pod adresem support.euro.dell.com.94 Szybki informator o systemie www.dell.com | support.dell.com • Informacje dotyczące gwarancji • Warunki sprzedaży w Stanach Zjednoczonych • Instrukcje dotyczące bezpieczeństwa • Informacje dotyczące przepisów prawnych • Informacje dotyczące ergonomii • Umowa licencyjna użytkownika końcowego Przewodnik z informacjami o produkcie Dell™ • Wyjmowanie i wymiana podzespołów • Dane techniczne • Konfiguracja ustawień systemowych • Rozwiązywanie problemów Przewodnik użytkownika Centrum pomocy i obsługi technicznej systemu Microsoft® Windows® XP 1Kliknij przycisk Start i pozycję Help and Support (Pomoc i obsługa techniczna). 2Kliknij opcję User’s and system guides (Przewodniki użytkownika i po systemie) i kliknij User’s guides (Przewodniki użytkownika). Przewodnik użytkownika jest dostępny również na opcjonalnym dysku CD Drivers and Utilities. • Znacznik usługi i kod ekspresowej obsługi • Etykieta licencji Microsoft Windows Znacznik usługi i licencja systemu Microsoft Windows Etykiety te znajdują się na spodzie komputera. • Znacznik usługi pozwala zidentyfikować komputer podczas korzystania z witryny support.euro.dell.com lub kontaktu z pomocą techniczną. • Wprowadź kod ekspresowej usługi, aby przekierować połączenie, kontaktując się z pomocą techniczną. Co chcesz znaleźć? Znajdziesz tutajSzybki informator o systemie 95 • Solutions (Rozwiązania) — Wskazówki dotyczące rozwiązywania problemów, porady, artykuły techniczne, kursy online, często zadawane pytania • Community (Społeczność) — Dyskusje online z innymi klientami firmy Dell • Upgrades (Aktualizacje) — Informacje aktualizacyjne dotyczące takich komponentów, jak pamięć, dysk twardy i system operacyjny • Customer Care (Obsługa klienta) — Informacje kontaktowe, o stanie zamówień i zgłoszeń serwisowych, gwarancyjne i dotyczące napraw • Service and support (Serwis i pomoc techniczna) — Informacje o stanie zgłoszenia i historii pomocy, kontrakcie serwisowym oraz możliwość rozmowy online z pracownikiem pomocy technicznej • Reference (Odsyłacze) — Umożliwiają przejście do dokumentacji komputera, szczegółowych informacji o konfiguracji komputera, specyfikacji produktów oraz artykułów • Downloads (Pliki do pobrania) — Certyfikowane sterowniki, poprawki i uaktualnienia oprogramowania • Oprogramowanie systemowe komputera przenośnego (NSS)— W przypadku ponownej instalacji systemu operacyjnego na komputerze, należy również ponownie zainstalować program narzędziowy NSS . Program narzędziowy NSS udostępnia krytyczne aktualizacje systemu operacyjnego oraz obsługę napędów dyskietek USB firmy Dell™, procesorów Intel® Pentium® M, napędów optycznych i urządzeń USB. Program narzędziowy NSS jest niezbędny do prawidłowego działania komputera firmy Dell. Oprogramowanie automatycznie wykrywa komputer i system operacyjny oraz instaluje aktualizacje odpowiednie do danej konfiguracji. Aby pobrać program NSS: 1 Przejdź pod adres support.euro.dell.com i kliknij opcję Downloads (Pliki do pobrania). 2Wpisz znacznik usługi lub model produktu. 3W menu rozwijanym Download Category (Kategoria pobierania) kliknij opcję All (Wszystkie). 4Zaznacz system operacyjny i język systemu operacyjnego danego komputera i kliknij opcję Submit (Wyślij). 5W sekcji Select a Device (Wybierz urządzenie) przejdź do pozycji System and Configuration Utilities (Systemowe i konfiguracyjne programy narzędziowe), a następnie kliknij opcję Dell Notebook System Software (Oprogramowanie systemowe komputera przenośnego firmy Dell). Witryna pomocy firmy Dell — support.euro.dell.com UWAGA: Wybierz swój region, aby zobaczyć odpowiednią witrynę pomocy technicznej. UWAGA: Użytkownicy korporacyjni, rządowi i edukacyjni mogą korzystać również z przystosowanej do ich potrzeb witryny internetowej Dell Premier Support pod adresem premier.support.dell.com. Ta witryna może nie być dostępna we wszystkich regionach. Co chcesz znaleźć? Znajdziesz tutaj96 Szybki informator o systemie www.dell.com | support.dell.com Przygotowywanie komputera do pracy PRZESTROGA: Przed rozpoczęciem dowolnej z procedur opisanych w tej sekcji należy zapoznać się z instrukcjami dotyczącymi bezpieczeństwa zamieszczonymi w Przewodniku z informacjami o produkcie. 1 Rozpakuj pojemnik z akcesoriami. 2 Zawartość pojemnika z akcesoriami należy na razie odłożyć; elementy te będą potrzebne, aby zakończyć przygotowywanie komputera do pracy. Pojemnik z akcesoriami zawiera także dokumentację użytkownika oraz zamówione oprogramowanie lub sprzęt dodatkowy (taki jak karty PC, napędy lub akumulatory). • Jak korzystać z systemu Windows XP • Dokumentacja do komputera • Dokumentacja urządzeń (takich jak modem) Centrum pomocy i obsługi technicznej systemu Windows 1Kliknij przycisk Start i pozycję Help and Support (Pomoc i obsługa techniczna). 2Wpisz słowo lub frazę opisujące problem i kliknij ikonę strzałki. 3Kliknij temat opisujący problem. 4Wykonaj instrukcje pokazane na ekranie. • Jak ponownie zainstalować system operacyjny Dysk CD systemu operacyjnego System operacyjny został już zainstalowany w komputerze. Aby ponownie zainstalować system operacyjny, użyj dysku CD Operating System (System operacyjny). Instrukcje można znaleźć w Przewodniku użytkownika. Po dokonaniu ponownej instalacji systemu operacyjnego należy użyć dysku CD Drivers and Utilities, w celu ponownego zainstalowania sterowników urządzeń dostarczonych wraz z komputerem. Etykieta z kluczem produktu systemu operacyjnego znajduje się na komputerze. UWAGA: Kolor dysku CD różni się w zależności od zamówionego systemu operacyjnego. UWAGA: Nośniki CD z systemem operacyjnym są opcjonalne i mogą nie być wysyłane ze wszystkimi komputerami. Co chcesz znaleźć? Znajdziesz tutajSzybki informator o systemie 97 3 Podłącz zasilacz do złącza zasilacza w komputerze oraz do gniazda elektrycznego. 4 Otwórz wyświetlacz komputera i naciśnij przycisk zasilania, aby włączyć komputer.98 Szybki informator o systemie www.dell.com | support.dell.com Informacje o komputerze Widok od przodu wyświetlacz klawiatura lampki stanu urządzenia i klawiatury panel dotykowy przyciski panelu dotykowego (2) gniazdo karty pamięci Secure DigitalSzybki informator o systemie 99 Widok od lewej Widok z prawej strony Widok od tyłu złącze zasilacza prądu zmiennego złącze wideo zasilane złącze USB złącze 1394 złącza audio Gniazdo karty CompactFlash złącze USB złącze sieciowe przycisk zasilania złącze modemu gniazdo kabla zabezpieczającego100 Szybki informator o systemie www.dell.com | support.dell.com Widok od spodu Korzystanie z akumulatora Wydajność akumulatora PRZESTROGA: Przed rozpoczęciem którejkolwiek z procedur opisanych w tej sekcji należy zastosować się do instrukcji bezpieczeństwa, zawartych w Przewodniku z informacjami o produkcie. UWAGA: Informacje na temat gwarancji firmy Dell dla Twojego komputera można znaleźć się w Przewodniku z informacjami o produkcie lub w oddzielnym papierowym dokumencie, dostarczonym wraz z komputerem. Podczas korzystania z komputera przenośnego Dell™ główny akumulator powinien być w nim zawsze zainstalowany. Pozwala to osiągnąć optymalną wydajność komputera i chroni przed utratą ustawień systemu BIOS. Akumulatora należy używać do zasilania komputera, gdy nie jest on podłączony do gniazda elektrycznego. Standardowe wyposażenie stanowi akumulator umieszczony we wnęce akumulatora. głośnik zatrzaski zwalniające wnęki akumulatora (2) wskaźnik naładowania akumulatora akumulatorSzybki informator o systemie 101 Czas pracy akumulatora jest zmienny w zależności od warunków pracy. Czas pracy zostanie znacząco skrócony, jeśli często wykonywane będą niektóre operacje. Są to między innymi: • Korzystanie z urządzeń komunikacji bezprzewodowej lub urządzeń USB. • Ustawienie wysokiej jaskrawości wyświetlacza, używanie trójwymiarowych wygaszaczy ekranu lub innych programów o dużym zapotrzebowaniu na energię, jak gry trójwymiarowe. • Praca na komputerze w trybie maksymalnej wydajności. UWAGA: Firma Dell zaleca, aby przed wykonaniem zapisu na dysk CD lub DVD podłączyć komputer do gniazda elektrycznego. Przed włożeniem akumulatora do komputera należy sprawdzić poziom jego naładowania. Można również tak ustawić opcje sterujące oszczędzaniem energii, aby użytkownik był ostrzegany, gdy poziom naładowania będzie niski. PRZESTROGA: Użycie nieodpowiedniego akumulatora może zwiększyć zagrożenie pożarem lub wybuchem. Należy stosować tylko zgodne akumulatory zakupione w firmie Dell. Akumulator litowojonowy jest zaprojektowany do pracy z komputerem Dell. W opisywanym urządzeniu nie należy stosować akumulatorów z innych komputerów. PRZESTROGA: Zużytych akumulatorów nie należy wyrzucać razem z innymi odpadkami. Jeżeli akumulator straci pojemność, należy skontaktować się z lokalnym punktem utylizacji odpadów lub wydziałem ochrony środowiska, aby uzyskać informacje dotyczące sposobu utylizacji akumulatorów litowo-jonowych. Więcej informacji można znaleźć w rozdziale „Utylizacja akumulatorów“, w Przewodniku z informacjami o produkcie. PRZESTROGA: Niewłaściwe użycie akumulatora może zwiększyć zagrożenie pożarem lub poparzeniem środkami chemicznymi. Akumulatora nie wolno dziurawić, palić, rozbierać ani poddawa działaniu temperatury powyżej 65°C (149°F). Akumulator należy przechowywać w miejscu niedostępnym dla dzieci. Z akumulatorem zniszczonym lub takim, z którego nastąpił wyciek, należy obchodzić się z wyjątkową ostrożnością. W uszkodzonych akumulatorach może nastąpić wyciek, który może być przyczyną obrażeń lub uszkodzenia sprzętu. Sprawdzanie stanu naładowania akumulatora Miernik akumulatora programu Dell QuickSet Battery Meter, okno miernika energii w systemie Microsoft® Windows® ikona , miernik stanu naładowania akumulatora, miernik zużycia akumulatoraoraz ostrzeżenie o niskim stanie naładowania akumulatora dostarczają informacji o stanie naładowania akumulatora. Miernik akumulatora Dell QuickSet Jeśli program Dell QuickSet został zainstalowany, naciśnij , aby wyœwietliæ miernik akumulatora programu QuickSet. W oknie Battery Meter (Miernik akumulatora) są wyświetlane informacje o stanie, poziomie naładowania oraz czasie pozostałym do pełnego naładowania akumulatora w komputerze.102 Szybki informator o systemie www.dell.com | support.dell.com W oknie Battery Meter (Miernik akumulatora) są widoczne następujące ikony: Aby uzyskać więcej informacji o programie QuickSet, kliknij prawym przyciskiem myszy ikonę na pasku zadań, a następnie kliknij polecenie Help (Pomoc). Miernik energii systemu Microsoft® Windows® Miernik energii w systemie Windows sygnalizuje szacunkowy poziom naładowania akumulatora. Aby sprawdzić stan miernika energii, należy kliknąć dwukrotnie ikonę , znajdującą się na pasku zadań. Więcej informacji na temat zakładki Power Meter (Miernik energii) można znaleźć w części „Zarządzanie energią“ w Przewodniku użytkownika. Jeśli komputer jest podłączony do gniazda elektrycznego, wyświetlana jest ikona . Miernik naładowania Przed włożeniem akumulatora należy nacisnąć przycisk stanu umieszczony na mierniku naładowania akumulatora, aby włączyć lampki poziomu naładowania. Każda lampka oznacza około 20 procent pełnego naładowania akumulatora. Przykładowo, jeśli akumulator jest naładowany w 80%, świecą się cztery lampki. Jeśli nie świeci się żadna lampka, akumulator nie jest naładowany. Komputer lub urządzenie dokujące jest zasilane z akumulatora. Komputer jest podłączony do gniazdka elektrycznego i akumulator jest ładowany. Komputer jest podłączony do gniazdka elektrycznego i akumulator jest w pełni naładowany.Szybki informator o systemie 103 Miernik zużycia Okres eksploatacji akumulatora jest w dużym stopniu zależny od tego, ile razy był on ładowany. Po kilkuset cyklach ładowania i rozładowywania pojemność akumulatora, czyli maksymalny poziom naładowania zaczyna się zmniejszać. Aby sprawdzić stan zużycia akumulatora, należy nacisnąć przycisk stanu na mierniku naładowania akumulatora i przytrzymać go przez co najmniej 3 sekundy. Jeśli nie zaświeci się żadna lampka, oznacza to, że akumulator jest w dobrym stanie, czyli jego maksymalna pojemność wynosi przynajmniej 80% oryginalnej pojemności. Każda lampka oznacza narastający wzrost zużycia. Zapalenie się pięciu lampek oznacza, że maksymalna pojemność spadła poniżej 60% oryginalnej pojemności, a więc akumulator należy wymienić. Więcej informacji o czasie pracy akumulatora można znaleźć w części „Dane techniczne“ w Przewodniku użytkownika. Ostrzeżenie o niskim stanie naładowania akumulatora OSTRZEŻENIE: Aby uniknąć utraty lub uszkodzenia danych, należy zapisać pracę zaraz po otrzymaniu ostrzeżenia dotyczącego rozładowania akumulatora. Następnie należy podłączyć komputer do gniazda elektrycznego. W przypadku całkowitego rozładowania baterii zostaje automatycznie włączony tryb hibernacji. Okno zawierające ostrzeżenie jest wyświetlane, gdy akumulator rozładuje się w około 90%. Więcej informacji na temat alarmów dotyczących niskiego poziomu naładowania akumulatora można znaleźć w sekcji „Zarządzanie energią“ w Przewodniku użytkownika. Ładowanie akumulatora UWAGA: Czas ładowania całkowicie rozładowanego akumulatora z zasilacza wynosi około 1 godziny przy wyłączonym komputerze. Czas ładowania jest dłuższy przy włączonym komputerze. Akumulator można pozostawić w komputerze na dowolny okres czasu. Wewnętrzny zespół obwodów elektrycznych zapobiega przeładowaniu akumulatora. Za każdym razem, gdy komputer podłączany jest do gniazda elektrycznego lub w podłączonym do gniazda elektrycznego komputerze instalowany jest akumulator, komputer sprawdza poziom naładowania akumulatora oraz jego temperaturę. W razie potrzeby zasilacz ładuje akumulator, a następnie podtrzymuje poziom jego naładowania. Jeśli akumulator rozgrzeje się wskutek używania go w komputerze lub poddaniu go działaniu wysokiej temperatury, ładowanie może się nie rozpocząć po podłączeniu komputera do gniazda elektrycznego. Jeśli lampka miga na przemian na zielono i pomarańczowo, oznacza to, że temperatura akumulatora jest zbyt wysoka, aby możliwe było rozpoczęcie jego ładowania. Należy komputer odłączyć od gniazda elektrycznego i pozwolić mu oraz akumulatorowi ostygnąć do temperatury otoczenia. Następnie należy ponownie podłączyć komputer do gniazda elektrycznego i kontynuować ładowanie akumulatora. Więcej informacji na temat rozwiązywania problemów dotyczących akumulatora można znaleźć w sekcji „Problemy z zasilaniem“ w Przewodniku użytkownika.104 Szybki informator o systemie www.dell.com | support.dell.com Wyjmowanie akumulatora PRZESTROGA: Przed wykonaniem tych czynności należy odłączyć modem od gniazda telefonicznego w ścianie. 1 Sprawdź, czy komputer jest wyłączony lub podłączony do gniazdka elektrycznego. 2 Przesuń i przytrzymaj zatrzaski zwalniające wnęki akumulatora na spodzie komputera, a następnie wyjmij akumulator z wnęki. Instalowanie akumulatora Wsuwaj akumulator do wnęki, aż zatrzaski zwalniające zatrzasną się. zatrzaski zwalniające (2)Szybki informator o systemie 105 Przechowywanie akumulatora Jeśli komputer ma być przechowywany przez dłuższy czas, należy wyjąć z niego akumulator. Akumulator może ulec rozładowaniu, jeśli będzie przechowywany przez dłuższy czas. Po okresie długiego przechowywania należy całkowicie naładować akumulator, zanim zostanie on użyty. Rozwiązywanie problemów Oprogramowanie systemowe komputera przenośnego (NSS) W przypadku ponownej instalacji systemu operacyjnego na komputerze, należy również ponownie zainstalować program narzędziowy NSS . Ten program narzędziowy znajduje się na opcjonalnym dysku CD Drivers and Utilities oraz na stronie internetowej pomocy technicznej firmy Dell pod adresem support.euro.dell.com. Aby pobrać ten program narzędziowy, należy przejść do sekcji Downloads (Pliki do pobrania) pod adresem support.euro.dell.com i na rozwijanym menu zaznaczyć model komputera. W sekcji Select Your Download Category (Wybierz kategorię pobierania) należy zaznaczyć opcję System and Configuration Utilities (Systemowe i konfiguracyjne programy narzędziowe), zaznaczyć posiadany system operacyjny i język, a następnie postępować zgodnie z wyświetlanymi instrukcjami. Program narzędziowy NSS udostępnia krytyczne aktualizacje systemu operacyjnego oraz obsługę napędów dyskietek USB 3,5 cala firmy Dell™, procesorów Intel® Pentium® M, procesorów Intel Celeron® M, napędów optycznych i urządzeń USB. Program narzędziowy NSS jest niezbędny do prawidłowego działania komputera firmy Dell. Oprogramowanie automatycznie wykrywa komputer i system operacyjny oraz instaluje aktualizacje odpowiednie do danej konfiguracji. UWAGA: Program narzędziowy NSS ma krytyczne znaczenie dla prawidłowego działania urządzeń USB. Blokowanie się komputera i problemy z oprogramowaniem PRZESTROGA: Przed rozpoczęciem dowolnej z procedur opisanych w tej sekcji należy zapoznać się z instrukcjami dotyczącymi bezpieczeństwa zamieszczonymi w Przewodniku z informacjami o produkcie. Komputer nie chce się uruchomić Komputer przestał reagować OSTRZEŻENIE: Jeśli nie można zamknąć systemu operacyjnego, może nastąpić utrata danych. UPEWNIJ SIĘ, żE ZASILACZ JEST PRAWIDŁOWO PODŁĄCZONY DO KOMPUTERA I GNIAZDA ZASILANIA.106 Szybki informator o systemie www.dell.com | support.dell.com Program przestał reagować Program wielokrotnie się zawiesza UWAGA: Instrukcje dotyczące instalowania są zazwyczaj dołączane do oprogramowania w jego dokumentacji lub na dyskietce (lub dysku CD). Program został napisany dla wcześniejszej wersji systemu operacyjnego Microsoft® Windows® Pojawia się niebieski ekran WYŁĄCZ KOMPUTER — Jeżeli komputer nie reaguje na naciśnięcie klawisza klawiatury lub ruch myszy, naciśnij i przytrzymaj przez co najmniej 8 do 10 sekund przycisk zasilania, aż komputer wyłączy się. Następnie ponownie uruchom komputer. ZAKOŃCZ DZIAŁANIE PROGRAMU — 1 Naciśnij jednocześnie klawisze . 2Kliknij zakładkę Applications (Aplikacje). 3Kliknij nazwę programu, który nie reaguje. 4Kliknij przycisk End Task (Zakończ zadanie). SPRAWDż DOKUMENTACJĘ PROGRAMU — Jeżeli jest to konieczne, odinstaluj i zainstaluj ponownie program. JEŚLI KORZYSTASZ Z SYSTEMU WINDOWS XP, URUCHOM KREATOR ZGODNOŚCI PROGRAMÓW — Kreator zgodności programów konfiguruje program tak by działał w środowisku podobnym do systemu operacyjnego innego niż Windows XP. 1Kliknij przycisk Start, wskaż opcje All Programs (Προγραµψ) → Accessories (Akcesoria), a następnie kliknij opcję Program Compatibility Wizard (Kreator zgodności programów). 2 Na ekranie powitalnym kliknij Next (Dalej). 3Wykonaj instrukcje pokazane na ekranie. WYŁĄCZ KOMPUTER — Jeżeli komputer nie reaguje na naciśnięcie klawisza klawiatury lub ruch myszy, naciśnij i przytrzymaj przez co najmniej 8 do 10 sekund przycisk zasilania, aż komputer wyłączy się. Następnie ponownie uruchom komputer. Szybki informator o systemie 107 Inne problemy z oprogramowaniem Korzystanie z programu Dell Diagnostics Kiedy należy używać programu Dell Diagnostics Jeżeli występuje problem z komputerem, przed skontaktowaniem się z pomocą techniczną firmy Dell należy wykonać testy opisane w sekcji „Rozwiązywanie problemów“ i uruchomić program Dell Diagnostics. Przed rozpoczęciem zalecane jest wydrukowanie tych procedur. OSTRZEŻENIE: Program Dell Diagnostics działa tylko z komputerami firmy Dell™. Program Dell Diagnostics można uruchomić albo z dysku twardego, albo z opcjonalnego dysku CD Drivers and Utilities (nazywanego również ResourceCD). W CELU UZYSKANIA INFORMACJI NA TEMAT ROZWŁĄZYWANIA PROBLEMÓW SPRAWDż DOKUMENTACJĘ DOSTARCZONĄ WRAZ Z OPROGRAMOWANIEM LUB SKONTAKTUJ SIĘ Z JEGO PRODUCENTEM — • Sprawdź, czy program jest zgodny z systemem operacyjnym zainstalowanym w komputerze. • Sprawdź, czy komputer spełnia minimalne wymagania sprzętowe potrzebne do uruchomienia programu. Zapoznaj się z dokumentacją oprogramowania. • Sprawdź, czy program został poprawnie zainstalowany i skonfigurowany. • Sprawdź, czy sterowniki urządzeń nie powodują konfliktów z programem. • Jeżeli jest to konieczne, odinstaluj i zainstaluj ponownie program. NATYCHMIAST UTWÓRZ KOPIE ZAPASOWE PLIKÓW. UżYJ PROGRAMU ANTYWIRUSOWEGO, ABY SPRAWDZIĆ DYSK TWARDY, DYSKIETKI I DYSKI CD. ZAPISZ I ZAMKNIJ OTWARTE PLIKI LUB PROGRAMY I WYŁĄCZ KOMPUTER ZA POMOCĄ MENU Start. SPRAWDż OBECNOŚĆ W KOMPUTERZE PROGRAMÓW TYPU SPYWARE —Jeżeli komputer zwalnia, najczęściej jest to spowodowane odbieraniem reklam wyświetlanych w okienkach podręcznych lub, jeżeli występują problemy z połączeniem z Internetem, komputer mógł zostać zainfekowany programami typu spyware. Należy użyć programu antywirusowego, który zawiera ochronę przeciwko programom typu spyware (używany program może wymagać aktualizacji), aby przeskanować komputer i usunąć programy typu spyware. Więcej informacji można znaleźć pod adresem support.euro.dell.com, gdzie należy odszukać słowo kluczowe spyware. URUCHOM PROGRAM DELL DIAGNOSTICS —Jeśli wszystkie testy zostaną pomyślnie wykonane, błąd może być związany z oprogramowaniem.108 Szybki informator o systemie www.dell.com | support.dell.com Uruchamianie programu Dell Diagnostics z dysku twardego Program Dell Diagnostics znajduje się na ukrytej partycji narzędzi diagnostycznych na dysku twardym komputera. UWAGA: Jeśli komputer nie wyświetla obrazu, skontaktuj się z firmą Dell. 1 Zamknij system operacyjny i wyłącz komputer. 2 Włącz komputer. Po wyświetleniu logo firmy Dell™, naciśnij natychmiast klawisz . Jeżeli będziesz czekać zbyt długo i zostanie wyświetlone logo systemu operacyjnego, poczekaj, aż pojawi się pulpit systemu Microsoft® Windows®. Następnie zamknij system operacyjny i spróbuj ponownie. 3 Po wyświetleniu listy urządzeń startowych, zaznacz pozycję Diagnostics (Diagnostyka) i naciśnij . Komputer uruchomi funkcję Pre-boot System Assessment; serię testów diagnostycznych sprawdzających płytę systemową, klawiaturę, dysk twardy i wyświetlacz. • Podczas przeprowadzania testów odpowiadaj na wszystkie wyświetlane pytania. • Jeśli wykryta zostanie awaria, komputer przestanie działać i wyda sygnał dźwiękowy. Aby zatrzymać ocenianie i ponownie uruchomić komputer, naciśnij ; aby przejść do następnego testu, naciśnij ; aby ponownie przetestować uszkodzone elementy, naciśnij . • W przypadku wykrycia błędów podczas testów Pre-boot System Assessment, należy zapisać kody błądów iskontaktować się z firmą Dell przed uruchomieniem programu Dell Diagnostics. Po pomyślnym zakończeniu testów systemu Pre-boot System Assessment zostanie wyświetlony komunikat Booting Dell Diagnostic Utility Partition. Press any key to continue. (Uruchamianie z partycji narzędzi diagnostycznych. Naciśnij dowolny klawisz, aby kontynuować). UWAGA: Jeżeli zostanie wyświetlony komunikat mówiący, że nie znaleziono partycji narzędzi diagnostycznych, uruchom program Dell Diagnostics z dysku CD Drivers and Utilities. 4 Naciśnij dowolny klawisz, aby uruchomić program Dell Diagnostics z partycji narzędzi diagnostycznych na dysku twardym. Uruchamianie programu Dell Diagnostics z opcjonalnego dysku CD Drivers and Utilities 1 Podłącz napęd CD do komputera. 2 Włóż dysk CD Drivers and Utilities. 3 Wyłącz i ponownie uruchom komputer. Po wyświetleniu logo firmy Dell™ natychmiast naciśnij klawisz .Szybki informator o systemie 109 Jeśli nie zdążysz nacisnąć klawisza i zostanie wyświetlone logo systemu Windows, musisz poczekać do wyświetlenia pulpitu Windows. Następnie zamknij system operacyjny i spróbuj ponownie. UWAGA: Kolejne czynności powodują jednorazową zmianę sekwencji uruchamiania. Przy następnym uruchomieniu komputer wykorzysta sekwencję startową zgodnie z urządzeniami podanymi w konfiguracji komputera. 4 Po wyświetleniu listy urządzeń startowych, zaznacz pozycję CD/DVD/CD-RW Drive (Napęd CD/DVD/CD-RW) i naciśnij . 5 Wybierz opcję CD/DVD/CD-RW Drive (Napęd CD/DVD/CD-RW) z menu rozruchowego dysku CD. 6 Z menu, które się pojawi, wybierz opcję Boot from CD-ROM (Uruchom z płyty CD-ROM). 7 Wpisz 1, aby uruchomić menu płyty ResourceCD. 8 Wpisz 2, aby uruchomić program Dell Diagnostics. 9 Wybierz opcję Run the 32 Bit Dell Diagnostics (Uruchom 32-bitową wersję programu Dell Diagnostics) z listy numerowanej. Jeśli pojawi się kilka wersji, wybierz wersję odpowiadającą danemu komputerowi. 10 Po wyświetleniu menu głównego (Main Menu) programu Dell Diagnostics, wybierz test, który ma zostać wykonany. Menu główne programu Dell Diagnostics 1 Po załadowaniu programu Dell Diagnostics i wyświetleniu ekranu Main Menu (Menu główne) kliknij przycisk wybranej opcji. Opcja Funkcja Express Test (Test szybki) Wykonywany jest przyspieszony test urządzeń. Test tego rodzaju trwa od 10 do 20 minut i nie wymaga żadnych interwencji ze strony użytkownika. Test przyspieszony należy uruchamiać w pierwszej kolejności, gdyż daje on duże prawdopodobieństwo szybkiego zdiagnozowania problemu. Extended Test (Test rozszerzony) Wykonywane jest wnikliwe sprawdzenie urządzeń. Test zajmuje zwykle godzinę lub więcej i okresowo wymaga od użytkownika odpowiedzi na pytania. Custom Test (Test niestandardowy) Wykonywane jest sprawdzenie określonego urządzenia. Sposób przeprowadzania testu można skonfigurować. Symptom Tree (Drzewo objawów) Wyświetla listę najczęściej napotykanych objawów problemów i pozwala wybrać test dostosowany do występujących nieprawidłowości.110 Szybki informator o systemie www.dell.com | support.dell.com 2 Jeśli w trakcie testu wystąpił problem, wyświetlany jest komunikat zawierający kod błędu i opis problemu. Zapisz kod błędu i opis problemu, a następnie postępuj według instrukcji wyświetlanych na ekranie. Jeśli problemu nie można rozwiązać samodzielnie, należy skontaktować się z firmą Dell UWAGA: W górnej części każdego z ekranów testowych umieszczony jest znacznik usługi. Udzielający pomocy pracownik działu obsługi technicznej zapyta o numer Znacznika usługi. 3 Jeśli wybrano test z grupy Custom Test (Test niestandardowy) lub Symptom Tree (Drzewo objawów), dodatkowe informacje można uzyskać, klikając odpowiednią zakładkę, opisaną w poniższej tabeli. 4 Po zakończeniu testów, jeśli program Dell Diagnostics został uruchomiony z dysku CD Drivers and Utilities, wyjmij dysk CD z napędu. 5 Po zakończeniu testów zamknij ekran testów i powróć do ekranu MainMenu (Menu główne). Aby zakończyć działanie programu Dell Diagnostics i uruchomić ponownie komputer, zamknij ekran Main Menu (Menu główne). Zakładka Funkcja Results (Wyniki) Zawiera wyniki testu i wykryte błędy. Errors (Błędy) Wyświetla wykryte błędy, kody błędu i opis problemu. Help (Pomoc) Zawiera opis testu i ewentualne warunki wymagane do jego przeprowadzenia. Configuration (Konfiguracja) Wyświetla konfigurację sprzętową wybranego urządzenia. Program Dell Diagnostics uzyskuje informacje o konfiguracji wszystkich urządzeń z konfiguracji systemu, pamięci i różnych testów wewnętrznych, po czym wyświetla je na liście urządzeń w lewym okienku na ekranie. Lista urządzeń może nie zawierać nazw wszystkich komponentów zamontowanych w komputerze lub przyłączonych do niego urządzeń peryferyjnych. Parameters (Parametry) Pozwala dostosować test do indywidualnych wymagań przez zmianę ustawień.www.dell.com | support.dell.com Dell™ Latitude™ X1 Краткий справочник Модель PP05SПримечания, уведомления и предупреждения ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ. ПРИМЕЧАНИE содержит важную информацию, которая помогает более эффективно работать с компьютером. ЗАМЕЧАНИЕ. ЗАМЕЧАНИЕ указывает на возможность повреждения устройства или потери данных и подсказывает, как избежать этой проблемы. ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ. Указывает на потенциальную опасность повреждения, получения легких травм или угрозу для жизни. Сокращения и аббревиатуры Полный список аббревиатур и сокращений см. в глоссарии в «Руководство пользователя». ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ. Некоторые функции могут быть недоступны для компьютера вообще или доступны только в определенных странах. ____________________ Информация, включенная в состав данного документа, может быть изменена без уведомления. (c) 2005 Dell Inc.Все права защищены. Воспроизведение материалов данного руководства в любой форме без письменного разрешения корпорации Dell Inc. строго запрещено. Товарные знаки, использованные в этомдокументе: Dell, логотип DELL иLatitude являются товарнымизнакамикорпорации Dell Inc.; Microsoft иWindows являются зарегистрированными товарными знаками корпорацииМайкрософт; Intel, PentiumиCeleron являются товарным знаком корпорации Intel Corporation. Остальные товарные знакииназванияпродуктовмогутиспользоваться в этомруководстведляобозначенияфирм, заявляющихправа на товарные знаки и названия, или продуктов этихфирм. Dell Inc. заявляет об отказе от всех прав собственности на любые товарные знаки и названия, кроме своих собственных. Модель PP05S Январь 2005 P/N P6419 Ред. A00Содержание 113 Содержание Источники информации . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Настройка компьютера. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 О компьютере . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Вид спереди . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Вид слева. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Вид справа . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Вид сзади. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Вид снизу. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Использование аккумулятора . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Работа батареи . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Проверка заряда аккумулятора . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Зарядка аккумулятора . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Извлечение аккумулятора . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Установка аккумулятора . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Хранение аккумулятора. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Устранение неисправностей. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Системное программное обеспечение переносного компьютера (NSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Блокировки и неполадки программного обеспечения. . . . . . . . 127 Использование программы Dell Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Когда использовать программу Dell Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Запуск программы Dell Diagnostics с жесткого диска . . . . . . . . 130 Запуск программы Dell Diagnostics с дополнительного компакт;диска Drivers and Utilities (Драйверы и Утилиты) . . . . . . 130 Главное меню Dell Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131114 СодержаниеКраткий справочник 115 Источники информации ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ. Некоторые функции могут быть недоступны для компьютера вообще или доступны только в определенных странах. ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ. Дополнительную информацию можно найти в документации по компьютеру. Что требуется найти? Информация находится здесь • Программа диагностики компьютера • Драйверыдля компьютера • Документация на компьютер • Документация на устройства • Системное программное обеспечение переносного компьютера (NSS) Компакт$диск Drivers and Utilities (Драйверы и утилиты) (иначе называемый ResourceCD (Диск с ресурсами)) Документация и драйверыуже установлены на компьютере. С помощью этого компакт-диска можно получить доступ к документации, переустановить драйверыи запустить программу Dell Diagnostics. Нажестком диске компьютера могут быть записаныфайлы Readme, содержащие самую свежую информацию о технических новшествах компьютера или справочные материалы для опытных пользователей и технических специалистов. ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ. Версии драйверов и обновления документации представлены на веб;узле support.dell.com. ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ. Компакт;диск Drivers and Utilities (Драйверы и утилиты) является дополнительным и может не поставляться с этим компьютером. • Установка компьютера • Основные сведения по поиску и устранению неисправностей • Запуск программыдиагностики Dell Diagnostics • Извлечение и установка компонентов компьютера Краткий справочник ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ. Краткий справочник является дополнительным и может не поставляться с этим компьютером. ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ. Этот документ в формате PDF можно найти на веб;узле support.dell.com.116 Краткий справочник www.dell.com | support.dell.com • Информация о гарантиях • Условия (только дляСША) • Инструкции по технике безопасности • Сведения о соответствии стандартам • Информация об эргономике • Лицензионное соглашение конечного пользователя Информационное руководство по продуктам Dell™ • Удаление и замена компонентов • Технические характеристики • Настройка системы • Устранение неисправностей и решение проблем Руководство пользователя Центр справки и поддержки системы Microsoft® Windows® XP 1 Нажмите кнопку Пуск и выберите Справка и поддержка. 2Выберите Руководство пользователя и системное руководство, а затем Руководство пользователя. Руководство пользователя можно также найти надополнительном компакт-диске Drivers and Utilities (Драйверыи утилиты). • Код экспресс-обслуживания и метка производителя • Лицензионная метка Microsoft Windows Метка производителя и лицензия Microsoft Windows Эти надписи находятся на нижней стороне компьютера. • Метка производителя требуется для идентификации компьютера на веб- узлеsupport.dell.com или при обращении в службу технической поддержки. • Код экспресс-обслуживания вводится, чтобы связаться с службой технической поддержки. Что требуется найти? Информация находится здесьКраткий справочник 117 • Solutions (Разрешение вопросов) — подсказки и советыпо поиску и устранению неисправностей, статьи технических специалистов, интерактивные курсыобучения, часто задаваемые вопросы • Community (Сообщество) — Интерактивная дискуссия с другими пользователями Dell • Upgrades (Обновления) — информация о новых версиях различных компонентов (например, памяти, жесткого диска и операционной системы) • Customer Care (Отдел обслуживания клиентов) — контактная информация, звонок в отдел обслуживания и информация о состоянии исполнения заказа, гарантии и ремонте • Service and support (Обслуживание и поддержка) — состояние звонка в отдел обслуживания и архив с информациейоб оказанииподдержки, контрактна сервисное обслуживание, интерактивная дискуссия с представителями службытехнической поддержки • Reference (Справочная информация) — компьютерная документация, подробные сведения о конфигурации компьютера, технические характеристики изделий и техническая документация • Downloads (Данные для загрузки) — сертифицированные драйверы, исправления и обновления программного обеспечения • Системное программное обеспечение переносного компьютера (NSS) — После переустановки операционной системына компьютере необходимо также переустановить программу NSS. программу обеспечивает критические обновления операционной системыи поддержку 3,5-дюймовых дисководов USB Dell™, а также процессоров Intel® Pentium® M, оптических дисководов и устройств USB.программу необходима для правильной работы компьютера Dell. Программное обеспечение автоматически определяет конфигурацию компьютера и операционную систему и устанавливает подходящие для них обновления. Чтобызагрузить программное обеспечение Notebook System: 1 Посетите веб-узел support.dell.com и щелкните Downloads (Загрузить). 2Введите метку сервисного обслуживания или модель устройства. 3Враскрывающемся меню Download Category (Категория загрузки) выберите All (Все). 4Выберите операционную систему и язык на компьютере и нажмите кнопку Submit (Отправить). 5Вразделе Select a Device (Выбор устройства) выберите System and Configuration Utilities (Системные программыи программыдлянастройки) ивыберитеDell Notebook System Software (Программное обеспечение Dell Notebook System). Веб$узел поддержки Dell — support.dell.com ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ. Выберите свой регион для просмотра соответствующего веб;узла поддержки. ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ. Основной веб;узел поддержки Dell premier.support.dell.com предназначен для корпораций, правительственных и образовательных учреждений. Веб;узел может быть недоступен в отдельных регионах. Что требуется найти? Информация находится здесь118 Краткий справочник www.dell.com | support.dell.com Настройка компьютера ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ. Прежде чем приступить к выполнению операций данного раздела, выполните указания по безопасности, описанные в Информационное руководство по продуктам. 1 Распакуйте коробку с принадлежностями. 2 Отложите в сторону те принадлежности, которые не понадобятся для завершения установки. В коробке с принадлежностями находится документация пользователя, а также все заказанное вами программное обеспечение и дополнительные компоненты (платы PC Card, дисководы, аккумуляторыи т.п.). • Как работать в Windows XP • Документация по компьютеру • Документация по устройствам (например, модему) Центр справки и поддержки Windows 1 Нажмите кнопку Пуск и выберите Справка и поддержка. 2Введите слово илифразу, описывающие проблему, и щелкните значок стрелки. 3Щелкните раздел, соответствующий вашей проблеме. 4Следуйте инструкциям на экране. • Переустановка операционной системы Компакт$диск с операционной системой Операционная система уже установлена на компьютере. Чтобы повторно установить операционную систему, используйте компакт-диск Operating System (Операционная система). Инструкции приведеныв Руководство пользователя. После повторной установки операционной системы воспользуйтесь компакт-диском Drivers and Utilities(Драйверыи утилиты) для установки драйверов устройств, поставляемых вместе с компьютером. Наклейка с ключом продукта для операционной системы находится на компьютере. ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ. Цвет компакт;диска может быть различным в зависимости от заказанной операционной системы. ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ. Компакт;диск Operating System (Операционная система) является дополнительным и может не поставляться с этим компьютером. Что требуется найти? Информация находится здесьКраткий справочник 119 3 Подсоедините адаптер переменного тока к соответствующему разъему на компьютере и к электрической розетке. 4 Откройте крышку дисплея и нажмите кнопку питания, чтобывключить компьютер.120 Краткий справочник www.dell.com | support.dell.com О компьютере Вид спереди дисплей клавиатура индикаторы состояния устройства и клавиатуры сенсорная панель кнопки сенсорной панели гнездо памяти Secure DigitalКраткий справочник 121 Вид слева Вид справа Вид сзади разъем адаптера переменного тока видеоразъем разъем USB с питанием разъем 1394 аудиоразъемы гнездо карты CompactFlash разъем USB сетевой разъем кнопка питания разъем модема гнездо защитного кабеля122 Краткий справочник www.dell.com | support.dell.com Вид снизу Использование аккумулятора Работа батареи ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ. Перед тем как приступить к выполнению операций данного раздела, выполните указания по безопасности, описанные в Информационное руководство по продуктам. ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ. Информацию о гарантии Dell на компьютер см. в Информационное руководство по продуктам или в отдельном гарантийном документе, который прилагается к компьютеру. Чтобыдостичь оптимальной производительности и сохранить настройки BIOS, в портативном компьютере Dell™ всегда должен быть установлен основной аккумулятор. Используйте аккумулятор для питания компьютера, когда компьютер не подключен к электрической розетке. Один аккумулятор в качестве стандартного компонента установлен в аккумуляторный отсек. динамик защелка отсека для аккумулятора (2) индикатор заряда аккумулятора аккумуляторКраткий справочник 123 Срок службыаккумулятора зависит от условий эксплуатации. Время работызначительно снижается при выполнении операций с повышенным энергопотреблением, включая следующие, но не ограничиваясь ими. • Использование устройств беспроводной связи или устройств USB. • Использование дисплея в режиме высокой яркости, трехмерных экранных заставок или других энергоемких программ, например трехмерных игр. • Работа компьютера в режиме максимальной производительности. ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ. Рекомендуется подключать компьютер к электрической розетке во время записи на компакт;диск или диск DVD. Перед установкой аккумулятора в компьютер можно проверить его заряд. Можно также установить параметрыуправления потреблением энергии, чтобыполучать оповещение о снижении заряда аккумулятора. ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ. Использование несовместимого аккумулятора может повысить риск возгорания или взрыва. Заменяйте аккумулятор только на совместимый аккумулятор, приобретенный в Dell. Ионно$литиевые батареи предназначены для работы с компьютерами Dell™. Не используйте аккумулятор от других компьютеров. ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ. Не выбрасывайте аккумуляторы вместе с бытовыми отходами. Если аккумулятор больше не удерживает заряд, свяжитесь с вашим местным агентством по утилизации или учреждением по охране окружающей среды для получения инструкций по утилизации ионно$литиевого аккумулятора. См. раздел «Утилизация аккумулятора» в Информационное руководство по продуктам. ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ. Неправильное обращение с аккумулятором может повысить риск возгорания или химического ожога. Не протыкайте, не сжигайте, не разбирайте и не нагревайте аккумулятор до температуры выше 65°C (149°F). Храните аккумулятор в недоступном для детей месте. Обращайтесь с поврежденным или протекающим аккумулятором крайне осторожно. Поврежденный аккумулятор может протекать и вызвать травмы или повредить оборудование. Проверка заряда аккумулятора Информацию о заряде аккумулятора можно узнать в программе Dell QuickSet Battery Meter, в окне индикатора аккумулятора Microsoft® Windows®, на значке , а также на индикаторе заряда аккумулятора, на шкале работоспособности аккумулятораи с помощью предупреждения о недостаточном заряде аккумулятора. Программа Dell QuickSet Battery Meter Если установлена программа Dell QuickSet, нажмите клавиши , чтобыоткрыть окно программы QuickSet Battery Meter. В окне Battery Meter отображаются состояние, уровень заряда и время окончания зарядки аккумулятора компьютера.124 Краткий справочник www.dell.com | support.dell.com В окне индикатора Battery Meter отображаются следующие значки. Чтобыполучить дополнительную информацию о программе QuickSet, щелкните правой кнопкой мыши на значке на панели задач и выберите пункт Help (Справка). Индикатор питания Microsoft® Windows® Индикатор заряда батареи Windows показывает оставшийся заряд. Чтобы проверить индикатор расхода питания, дважды щелкните значок на панели задач.Описание вкладки Индикатор питания см. в разделе «Управление питанием» в Руководство пользователя. Если компьютер подключен к электросети, появится значок . Индикатор заряда Перед установкой аккумулятора нажмите кнопку состояния на индикаторе заряда аккумулятора, чтобызагорелись индикаторыуровня заряда. Каждый индикатор соответствует примерно 20% полного заряда аккумулятора. Например, если осталось 80% заряда аккумулятора, светятся четыре индикатора. Если ни один индикатор не светится, аккумулятор полностью разряжен. Компьютер или стыковочное устройство работает от аккумулятора. Компьютер подключен к источнику переменного тока и аккумулятор заряжается. Компьютер подключен к источнику переменного тока и аккумулятор полностью заряжен.Краткий справочник 125 Шкала работоспособности Время работыаккумулятора в большой степени зависит от количества проведенных сеансов зарядки. После сотен циклов зарядки и разрядки аккумулятор теряет часть своей емкости, или работоспособности. Чтобы проверить состояние аккумулятора, нажмите и удерживайте нажатой кнопку состояния на индикаторе заряда аккумулятора по крайней мере в течение 3 секунд. Если ни один индикатор не светится, аккумулятор в хорошем состоянии, и осталось более 80% начальной емкости заряда. Загорание каждого индикатора означает инкрементное уменьшение заряда. Если горят пять индикаторов, значит, осталосьменее 60% емкости заряда, и необходимо заменить аккумулятор. Для получения дополнительной информации о времени работы аккумулятора см. раздел «Технические характеристики» в Руководство пользователя. Предупреждение о недостаточном заряде аккумулятора ЗАМЕЧАНИЕ. Во избежание потери или повреждения данных сохраните свою работу сразу после получения предупреждения о недостаточном заряде. Затем соедините компьютер с электрической розеткой. Если аккумулятор полностью разрядился, автоматически запустится спящий режим. Предупреждение о разрядке батареи появляется, когда заряд исчерпан примерно на 90%. Для получения дополнительной информации по предупреждениям о недостаточном заряде аккумулятора см. раздел «Управление питанием» Руководства пользователя. Зарядка аккумулятора ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ. Адаптер переменного тока заряжает полностью разряженную батарею примерно в течение 1 часа, если компьютер выключен. При включенном компьютере время зарядки увеличивается. Можно оставлять аккумулятор в компьютере на неограниченное время. Внутренняя схема аккумулятора предотвращает его избыточную зарядку. При подключении компьютера к электрической розетке или во время установки аккумулятора в компьютер, который уже подключен к электрической розетке, выполняется проверка температурыи заряда аккумулятора. При необходимости адаптер переменного тока производит зарядку аккумулятора и поддерживает его заряд. Если аккумулятор нагрелся при работе в компьютере или пребывании в нагретой среде, то при подключении компьютера к электросети зарядка аккумулятора может не выполняться. Если индикатор мигает попеременно зеленым и оранжевым светом, аккумулятор слишком сильно нагрет для зарядки. Отсоедините компьютер от электрической розетки и дайте компьютеру и батарее остыть до комнатной температуры. Затем подключите компьютер к электросети или установите дополнительный аккумулятор в модульный отсек. Для получения дополнительной информации по устранению неполадок, связанных с аккумулятором, см. раздел «Проблемыс питанием» Руководства пользователя.126 Краткий справочник www.dell.com | support.dell.com Извлечение аккумулятора ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ. Перед выполнением этой процедуры отсоедините модем от настенной телефонной розетки. 1 Убедитесь в том, что компьютер выключен и отключен от электрической розетки. 2 Сдвиньте и удерживайте защелку отсека для аккумулятора на нижней панели компьютера, после чего извлеките аккумулятор из отсека. Установка аккумулятора Вставьте аккумулятор в отсек до щелчка защелки отсека для аккумулятора. защелки (2)Краткий справочник 127 Хранение аккумулятора Если компьютер не используется в течение длительного времени, извлеките аккумулятор. При длительномхранении аккумулятор разряжается. Прежде чемиспользовать аккумулятор после длительного периода хранения, полностью зарядите его. Устранение неисправностей Системное программное обеспечение переносного компьютера (NSS) После переустановки операционной системына компьютере Dell™ рекомендуется также переустановить программу NSS. Утилита также представлена на дополнительном компакт- диске Drivers and Utilities (Драйверыи утилиты) и на веб-узле поддержки Dell support.dell.com. Для загрузки утилитыоткройте страницу Downloads (Файлыдля загрузки) на веб-узле support.dell.com и выберите модель компьютера в раскрывающемся меню. В разделе Select Your Download Category (Выберите категорию загрузки) нажмите System and Configuration Utilities (Системные программыи программыдля настройки), выберите язык, операционную систему и следуйте инструкциям. программу обеспечивает критические обновления операционной системыи поддержку 3,5- дюймовых дисководов USB Dell™, процессоров Intel® Pentium® M, Intel Celeron® M, оптических дисководов и устройств USB. программу необходимо для правильной работы компьютера Dell. Программное обеспечение автоматически определяет конфигурацию компьютера и операционную систему и устанавливает подходящие для них обновления. ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ. Программное обеспечение NSS является критически важным для правильной работы устройств USB. Блокировки и неполадки программного обеспечения ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ. Прежде чем приступить к выполнению операций данного раздела, выполните указания по безопасности, описанные в Информационное руководство по продуктам. Компьютер не запускается Компьютер не отвечает ЗАМЕЧАНИЕ. Если не удастся завершить работу операционной системы с помощью меню кнопки «Пуск», данные могут быть утеряны. Убедитесь, что адаптер переменного тока надежно подключен к компьютеру и электрической розетке. Выключите компьютер — Если компьютер не реагирует на нажатие клавиш на клавиатуре или перемещение мыши, нажмите кнопку питания не менее чем на 8-10 секунд, пока компьютер не выключится. Затем перезагрузите компьютер. 128 Краткий справочник www.dell.com | support.dell.com Программа перестает отвечать на запросы Постоянно возникает сбой программы ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ. Обычно программное обеспечение включает в себя инструкции по установке, находящиеся в документации, либо на дискете или CD;диске. Программа, разработанная для более ранних версий операционной системы Microsoft® Windows® Появляется сплошной синий экран Завершение программы — 1 Нажмите одновременно клавиши . 2 Перейдите на вкладку Приложения. 3Выберите программу, которая не отвечает на запросы. 4 Нажмите кнопку Завершить задачу. Обратитесь к документации по программе — Если необходимо, удалите и заново установите программу. При использовании системы Windows XP запустите мастера совместимости программ — Мастер совместимости программ настраивается программу таким образом, чтобы она работала в операционных системах, отличных от Windows XP. 1 Нажмите кнопку Пуск, выберитеВсе программы→ Стандартные, а затем выберите Мастер совместимости программ. 2Когда появится окно приветствия, нажмите кнопкуДалее. 3Следуйте инструкциям на экране. Выключите компьютер — Если компьютер не реагирует на нажатие клавиш на клавиатуре или перемещение мыши, нажмите кнопку питания не менее чем на 8-10 секунд, пока компьютер не выключится. Затем перезагрузите компьютер. Краткий справочник 129 Другие неполадки программ Использование программы Dell Diagnostics Когда использовать программу Dell Diagnostics Если при работе на компьютере возникают неполадки, выполните тесты, указанные в разделе «Устранение неисправностей», и запустите программу Dell Diagnostics, прежде чем обращаться в службу технической поддержки Dell за консультацией. Перед началом работырекомендуется распечатать процедурыиз этого раздела. ЗАМЕЧАНИЕ. Программа Dell Diagnostics работает только на компьютерах марки Dell™. Запустите программу Dell Diagnostics либо сжесткого диска, либо с дополнительногодиска Drivers and Utilities (Драйверы и утилиты) (иначе называемого Resource (Ресурсы)). Обратитесь к документации по программе или обратитесь к изготовителю программы для получения сведений по устранению неисправностей — • Убедитесь, что программа совместима с операционной системой, установленной на компьютере. • Убедитесь, что компьютер соответствуетминимальнымтребованиямк оборудованию, необходимым для запуска программного обеспечения. Информацию см. в документации по программе. • Убедитесь, что программа была правильно установлена и настроена. • Убедитесь, что драйверыустройств не конфликтуют с программой. • Если необходимо, удалите и заново установите программу. Сразу же создайте резервные копии файлов. Используйте антивирусное программное обеспечение для проверки жестких дисков, дискет или компакт$дисков. Сохраните и закройте все открытые файлы или программы, а затем завершите работу компьютера с помощью меню Пуск. Сканирование компьютера для поиска шпионского программного обеспечения — Если производительность компьютера ухудшилась, на экране часто появляются окна с рекламой или имеются проблемыподключения к Интернету, то, вероятно, компьютер заражен шпионским программным обеспечением. Воспользуйтесь антивирусной программой, в которую входит защита от шпионского программного обеспечения (может потребоваться обновление программы), чтобы выполнить сканирование компьютера и удалить шпионские программы. Для получения дополнительной информации посетите веб-узел support.dell.com и выполните поиск по ключевому слову spyware. Запустите программу Dell Diagnostics — Если все тесты пройдены успешно, ошибка связана с неполадкой программного обеспечения.130 Краткий справочник www.dell.com | support.dell.com Запуск программы Dell Diagnostics с жесткого диска Программа Dell Diagnostics находится в скрытом разделе Diagnostic Utility жесткого диска. ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ. Если на дисплее компьютера отсутствует изображение,обратитесь в корпорацию Dell. 1 Выключите компьютер. 2 Включите компьютер. Когда появится логотип DELL™, немедленно нажмите клавишу . Если эти клавиши нажатыс опозданием и появился экран с логотипом операционной системы, дождитесь появления рабочего стола Microsoft® Windows®. Затем выключите компьютер и повторите попытку. 3 При появлении списка загрузочных устройств выделите пунктДиагностика и нажмите клавишу . Компьютер запускает проверку Pre-boot System Assessment - серию встроенных диагностических тестов, которые проверяют системнуюплату, клавиатуру, жесткий диск и дисплей. • Во время проверки отвечайте на вопросы, отображаемые на экране. • Если обнаружен какой-либо сбой, компьютер останавливается и выдает звуковой сигнал. Чтобыостановить тестирование и перезагрузить компьютер, нажмите клавишу . Чтобыперейти к следующему тесту, нажмите клавишу . Чтобы повторно протестировать неисправный компонент, нажмите клавишу . • Если при проведении теста системыперед загрузкой будут обнаруженынеполадки, запишите кодыошибки и обратитесь в корпорацию Dell, прежде чем продолжать работу программы Dell Diagnostics. Если тест системыперед загрузкой выполнен успешно, появится сообщение Booting Dell Diagnostic Utility Partition (Загрузка раздела Dell Diagnostic Utility). Press any key to continue (Загрузка раздела Dell Diagnostic Utility. Нажмите любуюклавишу для продолжения). ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ. Если будет получено сообщение о том, что разделы утилиты диагностики не найдены, запустите программу Dell Diagnostics с компакт;диска Drivers and Utilities (Драйверы и Утилиты). 4 Нажмите любую клавишу, чтобызапустить программу Dell Diagnostics из раздела средств диагностикижесткого диска. Запуск программы Dell Diagnostics с дополнительного компакт$диска Drivers and Utilities (Драйверы и Утилиты) 1 Подключите дисковод компакт-дисков к системе. 2 Вставьте компакт-диск Drivers and Utilities (Драйверыи Утилиты). 3 Выключите и перезагрузите компьютер. При появлении логотипа DELL™ сразу нажмите .Краткий справочник 131 Если выне успели вовремя нажать эту клавишу и появился экран с логотипом Windows, дождитесь появления рабочего стола Windows. Затем выключите компьютер и повторите попытку. ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ. Последующие шаги изменяют последовательность загрузки только на один раз. В следующий раз загрузка компьютера будет выполняться в соответствии с устройствами, указанными в настройках системы. 4 При появлении списка загрузочных устройств выделите пункт CD/DVD/CD-RW Drive и нажмите клавишу . 5 Выберите CD/DVD/CD-RW Drive (Дисковод CD/DVD/CD-RW) в меню загрузки компакт- диска. 6 Впоявившемся меню выберите параметрBoot from CD-ROM (Загрузка с компакт-диска). 7 Введите 1 чтобы запустить меню компакт-диска Resource (Ресурсы). 8 Введите 2, чтобызапустить программу Dell Diagnostics. 9 Впронумерованном списке выберите пункт Run the 32 Bit Dell Diagnostics (Запуск 32- разрядной программы Dell Diagnostics).Если в списке имеется несколько версий, выберите подходящую для вашего компьютера. 10 Когда появится Main Menu (Главное меню) программы Dell Diagnostics, выберите тест для запуска. Главное меню Dell Diagnostics 1 После загрузки программы Dell Diagnostics и появления экрана Main Menu (Главное меню) нажмите кнопку для выбора нужного параметра. 2 Если во время теста возникла проблема, появится сообщение с кодомошибки и описанием проблемы. Запишите эту информацию и выполните инструкции на экране. Параметр Функция Express Test (Экспресс- тест) Быстрое тестирование устройств. Этот тест обычно продолжается 10-20 минут и не требует вашего участия. Запускайте тест Express Test в первую очередь, чтобы увеличить вероятность быстрого обнаружения проблемы. Extended Test (Расширенный тест) Полная проверка устройств. Обычно занимает один час и периодически требует от вас ответов на вопросы. Custom Test (Настраиваемый тест) Тестирование выбранного устройства. Выможете настроить тесты, которые хотите запустить. Symptom Tree (Дерево симптомов) Список наиболее часто встречающихся признаков, с помощью которого выможете выбрать тест, исходя из особенностей возникшей проблемы.132 Краткий справочник www.dell.com | support.dell.com Если ошибку устранить не удалось, обратитесь в корпорацию Dell. ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ. Метка производителя (Service Tag) компьютера отображается в верхней части экрана каждого теста. При обращении в корпорацию Dell служба технической поддержки потребует от вас указать Метку производителя. 3 Если тест запущен с помощью параметров Custom Test (Настраиваемый тест) или Symptom Tree (Дерево симптомов), подробную информацию можно получить на соответствующей вкладке, описание которых приведено в следующей таблице. 4 По завершении тестов, если программа Dell Diagnostics запущена с компакт-диска Drivers and Utilities (Драйверыи Утилиты) извлеките компакт-диск. 5 По завершении тестов закройте экран теста, чтобывернуться в окно Main Menu (Главное меню). Чтобывыйти из программы Dell Diagnostics и перезагрузить компьютер, закройте окно Main Menu (Главное меню). Вкладка Функция Results (Результаты) Результатытестов и выявленные ошибки. Errors (Ошибки) Выявленные ошибки, их кодыи описание проблемы. Help (Справка) Описание тестов и требования для их запуска. Configuration (Конфигурация) Аппаратная конфигурация выбранного устройства. Программа Dell Diagnostics получает информацию о конфигурациивсех устройствизпрограммынастройки системы, памяти и различных внутренних тестов, а затем отображает ее как список устройств в левой части экрана. В списке устройств могут отсутствовать имена некоторых компонентов компьютера или подключенных к нему устройств. Parameters (Параметры) Позволяет настраивать тест путемизменения настроек теста.www.dell.com | support.dell.com Dell™ Latitude™ X1 Snabbreferensguide Modell PP05SVarningar och upplysningar OBS! Detta meddelande innehåller viktig information som kan hjälpa dig att få ut mer av din dator. ANMÄRKNING: En anmärkning anger antingen risk för skada på maskinvara eller förlust av data och förklarar hur du kan undvika problemet. VARNING! En varning signalerar risk för skada på egendom eller person eller livsfara. Förkortningar och akronymer En fullständig lista över förkortningar och akronymer finns i ordlistan i Användarhandboken. OBS! Vissa funktioner är inte tillgängliga i alla länder. ____________________ Information i dokumentet kan ändras utan föregående meddelande. © 2005 Dell Inc. Med ensamrätt. Återgivning i någon form utan skriftligt tillstånd från Dell Inc. är strängt förbjuden. Varumärken som återfinns i denna text: Dell, DELL-logotypen och Latitude är varumärken som tillhör Dell Inc.; Microsoft och Windows är registrerade varumärken som tillhör Microsoft Corporation; Intel, Pentium och Celeron är registrerade varumärken som tillhör Intel Corporation. Övriga varumärken i dokumentet kan användas som hänvisning till antingen de som gör anspråk på varumärkena eller deras produkter. Dell Inc. frånsäger sig allt ägarintresse av andra varumärken än sina egna. Modell PP05S Januari 2005 P/N P6419 Rev. A00Innehåll 135 Innehåll Söka efter information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Installera din dator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Om datorn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Framsida . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Vänster sida . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Höger sida . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Baksida. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Undersida . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Använda batteriet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Batteriprestanda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Kontrollera batteriladdningen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Ladda batteriet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Ta bort ett batteri . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Installera ett batteri . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Förvaring av ett batteri . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Lösa problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Systemprogram för en bärbar dator (NSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Låsnings- och programproblem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Använda Dell Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 När ska man använda Dell Diagnostics? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Starta Dell Diagnostics från hårddisken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Starta Dell Diagnostics från den extra cd-skivan Drivers and Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Dell Diagnostics huvudmeny. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153136 InnehållSnabbreferensguide 137 Söka efter information OBS! Vissa funktioner är inte tillgängliga i alla länder. OBS! Ytterligare information kan medfölja datorn. Vad söker du efter? Här hittar du det • Ett diagnostikprogram för datorn • Drivrutiner för datorn • Dokumentation om datorn • Dokumentation om enheterna • Systemprogram för en bärbar dator (NSS) Cd-skivan Drivers and Utilities (kallas också ResourceCD) Dokumentationen och drivrutinerna är redan installerade på datorn. Du kan använda den här cd-skivan om du vill installera om drivrutinerna, köraDell Diagnostics eller visa dokumentationen. Readme-filer kan finnas på cd-skivan och används vid sista minutenuppdateringar om det har gjorts tekniska ändringar i datorn, eller har tillkommit avancerat tekniskt referensmaterial som riktar sig till mer erfarna användare och tekniker. OBS! Uppdateringar av drivrutiner och dokumentation finns på support.dell.com OBS! Cd-skivan Drivers and Utilities är ett tillval och medföljer inte alla datorer. • Konfigurera datorn • Information om enkel felsökning • Köra Dell Diagnostics • Ta bort och installera delar Snabbreferensguide OBS! Snabbreferensguiden är ett tillval och medföljer inte alla datorer. OBS! Det här dokumentet finns också i PDF-format på support.dell.com.138 Snabbreferensguide www.dell.com | support.dell.com • Information om garantier • Villkor (Endast USA) • Säkerhetsanvisningar • Information om gällande bestämmelser • Ergonomi • Licensavtal för slutanvändare Dell™ Produktinformationsguide • Ta bort och byta ut delar • Specifikationer • Konfigurera systeminställningar • Felsökning och problemlösning Användarhandbok Microsoft® Windows® XP Hjälp- och supportcenter 1Klicka på Start och sedan på Hjälp och support. 2Klicka på Användarhandbok och systemhandbok och sedan på Användarhandbok. Användarhandboken finns även på den extra Cd-skivan Drivers and Utilities. • Servicenummer och Expresskod • Licensetikett för Microsoft Windows Servicenummer och licens för Microsoft Windows Dessa etiketter finns på datorns undersida. • Med servicenumret kan du identifiera datorn när du använder support.dell.com eller kontaktar teknisk support. • Dirigera om samtalet genom att ange din expresskod när du kontaktar teknisk support. Vad söker du efter? Här hittar du detSnabbreferensguide 139 • Lösningar — Felsökningstips, artiklar från tekniker, onlinekurser, vanliga frågor • Gruppforum — Online-diskussion med andra Dellkunder • Uppgraderingar — Uppgraderingsinformation för olika komponenter, till exempel minnen, hårddiskar och operativsystem • Kundtjänst — Kontaktinformation, servicesamtal och orderstatus, garanti och reparationsinformation • Service och support — Status på servicejobb och supporthistorik, servicekontrakt, onlinediskussioner med teknisk support • Referens — Datordokumentation, detaljer om min datorkonfiguration, produktspecifikationer och vitbok • Nedladdningsbara filer — Certifierade drivrutiner, korrigeringar och programuppdateringar • Systemprogram för en bärbar dator (NSS)— Om du installerar om operativsystemet i datorn bör du även installera om NSS -programmet. NSS tillhandahåller viktiga uppdateringar för operativsystemet och stöd för Dell™ 3.5-tums USB-diskettenheter, Intel® Pentium® M-processorer, optiska enheter och USBenheter. NSS behövs för att Dell-datorn ska fungera korrekt. Datorn och operativsystemet identifieras automatiskt av programmet, som dessutom installerar uppdateringar som är lämpliga för din konfiguration. Ladda ner NSS-programmet: 1 Gå till support.dell.com och klicka på Downloads (Nerladdningsfiler). 2 Ange ditt servicenummer eller produktmodell. 3 I listmenyn Download Category (Hämtningskategori) klickar du på All (Alla). 4 Välj datorns operativsystem och operativsystemspråk och klicka på Submit (Skicka). 5 Under Select a Device (Välj en enhet), bläddrar du till System and Configuration Utilities (System- och konfigurationsverktyg) och klickar på Dell Notebook System Software (Systemprogram för Dells bärbara datorer). Webbplatsen Dell Support — support.dell.com OBS! Välj region för att visa lämpligt supportställe. OBS! Kunder från företag, ämbetsverk och skolor kan också använda den anpassade webbplatsen Dell Premier Support på premier.support.dell.com. Det kan hända att webbplatsen inte är tillgänglig i alla regioner. Vad söker du efter? Här hittar du det140 Snabbreferensguide www.dell.com | support.dell.com Installera din dator VARNING! Innan du utför någon av åtgärderna i det här avsnittet ska du läsa igenom och följa säkerhetsinstruktionerna i Produktinformationsguide. 1 Packa upp tillbehörslådan. 2 Lägg innehållet i tillbehörslådan åt sidan. Det behöver du för att slutföra installationen senare. Tillbehörslådan innehåller även användardokumentation och eventuell programvara eller ytterligare maskinvara (t.ex. PC-kort, drivrutiner och batterier) som du har beställt. • Använda Windows XP • Dokumentation om datorn • Dokumentation om enheter (till exempel ett modem) Windows hjälp- och supportcenter 1Klicka på Start och sedan på Hjälp och support. 2 Skriv ett ord eller en fras som beskriver problemet och klicka på pilen. 3Klicka på ämnet som beskriver problemet. 4 Följ instruktionerna på skärmen. • Installera om operativsystemet Cd-skiva med operativsystemet Operativsystemet är redan installerat på datorn. Använd cd-skivan med operativsystemet när du vill installera om systemet. Instruktioner finns i Användarhandboken. När du har installerat om operativsystemet använder du cd-skivan Drivers and utilitiesför att installera om drivrutiner för de enheter som levererades tillsammans med datorn. Etiketten med operativsystemets produktnyckel sitter på datorn. OBS! Cd-skivans färg varierar beroende på vilket operativsystem du beställde. OBS! Cd-skivan med operativsystemet är ett tillval och medföljer inte alla datorer. Vad söker du efter? Här hittar du detSnabbreferensguide 141 3 Anslut nätadaptern till datorns nätadapterkontakt och till eluttaget. 4 Du startar datorn genom att öppna skärmen och trycka på strömknappen.142 Snabbreferensguide www.dell.com | support.dell.com Om datorn Framsida bildskärm tangentbord lampor för enhets- och tangentbordsstatus styrplatta styrplattans knappar (2) Secure Digital-minneskortplatsSnabbreferensguide 143 Vänster sida Höger sida Baksida nätadapteruttag bildskärmskontakt strömsatt USB-port 1394-port ljudkontakter CompactFlashkortplats USB-port nätverksport strömbrytare modemport säkerhetskabeluttag144 Snabbreferensguide www.dell.com | support.dell.com Undersida Använda batteriet Batteriprestanda VARNING! Innan du börjar bör du följa säkerhetsanvisningarna i produktinformationsguide. OBS! Information om Dell-garantin för din dator finns i produktinformationsguide eller i ett separat garantidokument i pappersformat som medföljde datorn. För att din dator ska fungera så bra som möjligt och för att BIOS-inställningarna ska sparas bör huvudbatteriet alltid sitta i din bärbara Dell™-dator. Utnyttja batteriet om du vill använda datorn när den inte är ansluten till ett eluttag. Ett batteri medföljer som standard och är vid leverans monterat i batterifacket. högtalare spärrhakar till batterifacket (2) batterimätare batteriSnabbreferensguide 145 Batteriets drifttid varierar beroende på hur datorn används. Drifttiden minskar avsevärt i följande och liknande situationer: • Vid användning av trådlösa kommunikationsenheter eller USB-enheter • Vid användning av hög ljusstyrka på bildskärmen, tredimensionella skärmsläckare och andra beräkningsintensiva program, t.ex. 3D-spel • Om datorn körs med högsta möjliga hastighet (Maximum Performance) OBS! Du bör ansluta datorn till ett eluttag när du bränner en cd- eller dvd-skiva. Du kan kontrollera batteriets laddning innan du sätter in batteriet i datorn. Du kan också ställa in energisparfunktionerna så att du får ett varningsmeddelande när batterinivån är låg. VARNING! Om du använder ett inkompatibelt batteri kan risken för brand eller explosion öka. Byt bara till ett kompatibelt batteri som köpts från Dell. Litiumjon-batteriet har utformats att fungera med din Dell-dator. Använd inte ett batteri som är avsett för andra datorer i din dator. VARNING! Släng inte batterier med hushållsavfallet. När det inte längre går att ladda batteriet bör du kassera det på lämpligt sätt. Kontakta kommunen eller en miljövårdsorganisation om du vill veta mer om hur du bör kassera batteriet. Se ”Kassering av batterier” i produktinformationsguide. VARNING! Felaktig användning av batteriet kan öka risken för brand eller kemisk brännskada. Stick inte hål på batteriet, bränn det inte, försök inte ta isär det och exponera det inte för temperaturer över 65°C. Förvara batteriet oåtkomligt för barn. Hantera skadade eller läckande batterier mycket försiktigt. Skadade batterier kan läcka eller orsaka skador på personer eller utrustning. Kontrollera batteriladdningen Information om batteriladdningen erhålls via Batterimätaren i Dell QuickSet, Energimätaren i Microsoft® Windows® och ikonen , batteriladdningsmätaren och tillståndsmätarenoch varning för låg batterinivå. Batterimätaren i Dell QuickSet Om Dell QuickSet är installerat, trycker du på om du vill visa QuickSet Battery Meter (batterimätare). I detta fönster visas status, laddningsnivå och återstående laddningstid för batteriet i datorn.146 Snabbreferensguide www.dell.com | support.dell.com Följande ikoner visas i fönstret Battery Meter (batterimätare): Mer information om QuickSet får du om du högerklickar på ikonen i Aktivitetsfältet och sedan klickar på Hjälp. Energimätaren i Microsoft® Windows® Energimätaren i Windows indikerar batteriets återstående laddning. Du kan kontrollera Energimätaren genom att dubbelklicka på ikonen i Aktivitetsfältet. Mer information om fliken Energimätare finns i ”Energisparfunktioner” i Användarhandboken. Om datorn är ansluten till ett eluttag visas ikonen . Laddningsmätare Om du vill tända batterinivålamporna innan du sätter in ett batteri trycker du på statusknappen i batteriladdningsmätaren. Varje lampa motsvarar cirka 20 procent av full laddning. Om batteriet exempelvis har kvar 80 procent av laddningen tänds fyra av lamporna. Om ingen lampa tänds är batteriet urladdat. Datorn eller dockningsstationen drivs med batteri. Datorn är ansluten till ett eluttag och batteriet laddas. Datorn är ansluten till ett eluttag och batteriet är fulladdat.Snabbreferensguide 147 Tillståndsmätare Batteriets drifttid påverkas av hur många gånger det har laddats. Efter hundratals laddnings- och urladdningscykler kan batterier förlora en del laddnings- eller leveranskapacitet. Om du vill kontrollera batteriets tillstånd håller du ned statusknappen på batteriets laddningsmätare i minst 3 sekunder. Om ingen lampa tänds är batteriet i god kondition och minst 80 procent av den ursprungliga laddningskapaciteten återstår. Varje lampa representerar ytterligare försämring. Om fem lampor tänds återstår mindre än 60 procent av laddningskapaciteten och du bör överväga att byta batteriet. Mer information om batteriets drifttid finns under ”Specifikationer” i Användarhandboken. Varning för låg batterinivå ANMÄRKNING: För att undvika att förlora eller förstöra data bör du spara arbetet så snart en varning om låg batterinivå visas. Anslut sedan datorn till ett eluttag. Om batteriet körs helt slut, sätts datorn automatiskt i viloläge. När batteriet är urladdat till cirka 90 procent visas ett varningsmeddelande. Mer information om varningar för låg batterinivå finns under ”Energisparfunktioner” i Användarhandboken. Ladda batteriet OBS! Nätadaptern laddar ett helt urladdat batteri på ca 1 timme, då datorn är avstängd. Laddningstiden är längre om datorn är på. Du kan låta batteriet sitta i datorn så länge du vill. I batteriet finns speciella kretsar som skyddar mot överladdning. När du ansluter datorn till ett eluttag, eller sätter i ett batteri medan datorn är ansluten till uttaget, kontrolleras batteriladdningen och temperaturen automatiskt. Eventuellt laddar nätadaptern batteriet så att laddningen bibehålls. Om batteriet är varmt på grund av att det har använts eller av att omgivningen är varm kan det hända att det inte laddas trots att du ansluter datorn till ett eluttag. Batteriet är för varmt för att laddas om batteriets indikator blinkar omväxlande grönt och orange. Koppla ur datorn från eluttaget och låt sedan datorn och batteriet svalna i rumstemperatur. Anslut sedan datorn till eluttaget och fortsätt att ladda batteriet. Mer information om hur man löser problem med ett batteri finns under ”Strömproblem” i Användarhandboken.148 Snabbreferensguide www.dell.com | support.dell.com Ta bort ett batteri VARNING! Koppla bort modemet från telefonjacket innan du gör något av nedanstående. 1 Kontrollera att datorn är avstängd eller ansluten till ett eluttag. 2 Skjut undan och håll kvar batterifackets spärrhakar på datorns undersida. Ta sedan ut batteriet ur facket. Installera ett batteri Skjut in batteriet i facket tills spärrhaken klickar till. spärrhakar (2)Snabbreferensguide 149 Förvaring av ett batteri Ta ut batteriet ur datorn om du inte ska använda den under en tid. Om ett batteri förvaras en längre tid utan att användas, laddas det ur. Efter en lång tids förvaring bör du ladda upp batteriet på nytt innan du använder det. Lösa problem Systemprogram för en bärbar dator (NSS) Om du installerar om operativsystemet i datorn bör du även installera om NSS-programmet. Detta program finns på den extra cd-skivan Drivers and Utilities och på Dell:s supportwebbplats på www.support.dell.com. Om du vill ladda ner programmet går du till Downloads (Nerladdningsfiler) på support.dell.com och väljer din datormodell i listmenyn. Under Select Your Download Category (Välj din hämtningskategori), välj System and Configuration Utilities (System- och konfigurationsprogram), välj ditt operativsystem och språk, följ därefter instruktionerna. NSS tillhandahåller viktiga uppdateringar för operativsystemet och stöd för Dell™ 3.5-tums USBdiskettenheter, Intel® Pentium® M-processorer, Intel Celeron® M-processorer, optiska enheter och USB-enheter. NSS behövs för att din Dell-dator ska fungera korrekt. Datorn och operativsystemet identifieras automatiskt av programmet, som dessutom installerar uppdateringar som är lämpliga för din konfiguration. OBS! NSS är viktigt för korrekt funktion hos USB-enheter. Låsnings- och programproblem VARNING! Innan du utför någon av åtgärderna i det här avsnittet ska du läsa igenom och följa säkerhetsinstruktionerna i Produktinformationsguide. Dator startar inte Datorn slutar svara på kommandon ANMÄRKNING: Du kan förlora data om du inte kan stänga av datorn på det vanliga sättet via operativsystemet. KONTROLLERA ATT NÄTADAPTERN SITTER I ORDENTLIGT FAST I DATORN OCH I ELUTTAGET. STÄNG A V DATORN — Om datorn varken svarar på tangentnedtryckning eller musrörelse håller du strömbrytaren intryckt i minst 8-10 sekunder tills datorn stängs av. Starta sedan om datorn. 150 Snabbreferensguide www.dell.com | support.dell.com Ett program låser sig Ett program kraschar ofta OBS! Programvaror innehåller ofta installationsinstruktioner i sin dokumentation eller på en diskett eller cd-skiva. Ett program är utvecklat för en tidigare version av Microsoft® Windows® operativsystem En helt blå skärm visas AVSLUTA PROGRAMMET — 1Tryck ner samtidigt. 2Klicka på Program. 3Klicka på det program som inte längre svarar. 4Klicka på Avsluta aktivitet. KONTROLLERA PROGRAMDOKUMENTATIONEN — Avinstallera och installera om programmet om det behövs. OM D U ANVÄNDER WINDOWS XP, KÖ R GUIDEN FÖR PROGRAMKOMPATIBILITET — Guiden Programkompatibilitet konfigurerar program så att de körs i en miljö som liknar tidigare operativsystem. 1Klicka på Start peka på Alla program→ Tillbehör och klicka därefter på Guiden Programkompatibilitet. 2Klicka på Nästa när välkomstsidan visas. 3 Följ instruktionerna på skärmen. STÄNG A V DATORN — Om datorn varken svarar på tangentnedtryckning eller musrörelse håller du strömbrytaren intryckt i minst 8-10 sekunder tills datorn stängs av. Starta sedan om datorn. Snabbreferensguide 151 Andra programproblem Använda Dell Diagnostics När ska man använda Dell Diagnostics? Om du har problem med datorn utför du kontrollerna i Lösa problem och kör Dell Diagnostics innan du kontaktar Dell för att få hjälp. Skriv gärna ut instruktionerna innan du börjar. ANMÄRKNING: Programmet Dell Diagnostics fungerar bara på datorer från Dell™. Starta Dell Diagnostics antingen från hårddisken eller från den extra cd-skivan Drivers and Utilities (som även kallas ResourceCD). Starta Dell Diagnostics från hårddisken Dell Diagnostics finns på en dold diagnostikpartition på hårddisken. LÄ S DOKUMENTATIONEN FÖR PROGRAMVARAN ELLER KONTAKTA TILLVERKAREN FÖR ATT F Å FELSÖKNINGSINFORMATION — • Se till att programmet är kompatibelt med det operativsystem som är installerat på datorn. • Se till att datorn uppfyller de minimikrav för maskinvara som krävs för att köra programmet. Dokumentationen för programmet innehåller mer information. • Se till att programmet är rätt installerat och konfigurerat. • Kontrollera att drivrutinerna inte står i konflikt med andra program. • Avinstallera och installera om programmet om det behövs. SÄKERHETSKOPIERA FILERNA OMEDELBART. ANVÄND ETT ANTIVIRUSPROGRAM FÖR ATT KONTROLLERA ATT DET INTE FINNS VIRUS P Å HÅRDDISKEN, DISKETTERNA ELLER C D-SKIVORNA. SPARA OCH STÄNG ALLA ÖPPNA FILER OCH PROGRAM OCH STÄNG A V DATORN P Å Start-menyn. SÖ K IGENOM DATORN EFTER SPIONPROGRAM — Om datorn är trög, om du ofta får se popupannonser eller har problem med att ansluta till Internet kan datorn vara infekterad med spionprogram. Sök igenom datorn och ta bort spionprogrammen med ett antivirusprogram som även tar bort spionprogram (du kan behöva uppgradera programmet). Besök support.dell.com och sök på nyckelordet spyware (eller spionprogram) om du vill ha mer information. KÖ R DELL DIAGNOSTICS — Om alla tester lyckas beror felet på ett programvaruproblem.152 Snabbreferensguide www.dell.com | support.dell.com OBS! Kontakta Dell om bildskärmen inte fungerar. 1 Stäng av datorn. 2 Slå på strömmen till datorn. När DELL™-logotypen visas trycker du direkt på . Om du väntar för länge och operativsystemets logotyp visas, fortsätter du att vänta tills Microsoft® Windows® har startats. Stäng sedan av datorn och försök igen. 3 När listan över startenheter visas markerar du Diagnostics och trycker på . Datorn kör då Systemgenomgång före start, en serie grundläggande tester av moderkortet, tangentbordet, hårddisken och bildskärmen. • Svara på de frågor som eventuellt visas under genomgången. • Om ett fel upptäcks stannar datorn och avger en ljudsignal. Vill du avbryta genomgången och starta om datorn trycker du på . Vill du fortsätta med nästa test trycker du på och vill du testa om den komponent som inte fungerade trycker du på . • Om ett fel upptäckts under systemgenomgången, antecknar du felkoden/-koderna och kontaktar Dell innan du fortsätter till Dell Diagnostics. Om systemgenomgången före start har slutförts utan problem visas meddelandet Booting Dell Diagnostic Utility Partition. Press any key to continue (Partition för Dell Diagnostic-verktyget startas. Tryck på valfri tangent och fortsätt). OBS! Får du meddelande om att diagnospartitionen saknas kör du Dell Diagnostics från cd-skivan cdskivan Drivers and Utilities. 4 Tryck på valfri tangent för att starta Dell Diagnostics från hårddiskens diagnospartition. Starta Dell Diagnostics från den extra cd-skivan Drivers and Utilities 1 Ansluta en cd-enhet till datorn. 2 Sätt in cd-skivan Drivers and Utilities. 3 Stäng av och starta om datorn. När DELL-logotypen visas trycker du genast på . Om du väntar för länge och Windows-logotypen visas, fortsätter du att vänta tills skrivbordet i Windows visas. Stäng sedan av datorn och försök igen. OBS! Nästa steg ändrar startsekvensen bara för denna gång. Nästa gång startas datorn enligt systeminställningarna. 4 När listan över startenheter visas markerar du CD-/DVD-/CD-RW Drive (enhet) och trycker på . 5 Välj alternativet CD-/DVD-/CD-RW Drive (enhet) i cd-startmenyn. 6 Välj alternativet Boot from CD-ROM (Starta från cd-skivan) i den meny som visas. 7 Tryck 1 för att öppna menyn för ResourceCD.Snabbreferensguide 153 8 Tryck 2 för att starta Dell Diagnostics. 9 Välj Run the 32 Bit Dell Diagnostics (Kör 32-bitars Dell Diagnostics) i den numrerade listan. Finns det flera versioner väljer du den som gäller din dator. 10 När huvudmenyn för Dell Diagnostics visas väljer du det test som du vill köra. Dell Diagnostics huvudmeny 1 När Dell Diagnostics lästs in och skärmen med huvudmenyn visas klickar du på knappen för det alternativ som du vill använda. 2 Om du stöter på ett problem under ett test visas ett meddelande med en felkod och en beskrivning av problemet. Skriv upp felkoden och problembeskrivningen och följ sedan instruktionerna på skärmen. Kontakta Dell om du inte kan lösa problemet. OBS! Servicenumret för datorn visas överst på varje testskärm. När du kontaktar Dell frågar supportpersonalen efter ditt servicenummer. 3 Om du kör ett test med alternativen Custom Test (anpassat test) eller Symptom Tree (symptomträd) får du mer information när du klickar på någon av flikarna som beskrivs i tabellen nedan. Alternativ Funktion Express Test (snabbtest) Utför ett snabbtest av enheter. Testet tar vanligtvis 10 till 20 minuter och kräver inte att användaren gör något. Kör snabbtestet först för att öka chanserna att hitta problemet snabbt. Extended Test (utökat test) Utför ett utökat test av enheterna. Testet tar normalt en timme eller mer, och användaren måste svara på frågor då och då. Custom Test (anpassat test) Testar en viss enhet. Du kan anpassa de tester som du vill köra. Symptom Tree (symptomträd) Här visas de vanligaste problemsymptomen och här kan du välja ett test utifrån symptomen som datorn uppvisar. Flik Funktion Results (resultat) Visar testresultatet och eventuella feltillstånd som har påträffats. Errors (fel) Visar feltillstånd som har påträffats, felkoder och problembeskrivningar. Help (hjälp) Beskriver testet och kan innehålla information om eventuella testkrav.154 Snabbreferensguide www.dell.com | support.dell.com 4 Ta ut cd-skivan när testen är slutförda, om du kör Dell Diagnostics från cd-skivan Drivers and Utilities. 5 När testen är slutförda stänger du testskärmen för att återgå till huvudmenyn. Stäng huvudmenyn för att avsluta Dell Diagnostics och starta om datorn. Configuration (konfiguration) Visar maskinvarukonfigurationen för den valda enheten. Dell Diagnostics hämtar konfigurationsinformation för alla enheter från systeminställningsprogrammet, minnet och olika interna test och visar sedan informationen i enhetslistan till vänster på skärmen. Enhetslistan kanske inte innehåller namnen på alla komponenter som är installerade på datorn eller alla enheter som är anslutna till datorn. Parameters (parametrar) Med dessa kan du anpassa testet genom att ändra inställningarna. Flik Funktion176 | מדריך מידע מוצר 3 אם אתה מבצע בדיקה מהאפשרות Custom Test או Symptom Tree, לקבלת מידע נוסף לחץ על הכרטיסייה המתאימה המתוארת בטבלה הבאה. כרטיסיה פעולה Results (תוצאות) הצגת תוצאות הבדיקה ומצבי שגיאה שבהם נתקלה המערכת. Errors (שגיאות) הצגת מצבי שגיאה שבהם נתקלה המערכת, קודי שגיאה ותיאורי הבעיות. Help (עזרה) תיאור הבדיקה וציון הדרישות לביצוע הבדיקה. Configuration (הגדרת תצורה) הצגת הגדרת התצורה של המערכת עבור ההתקן שנבחר. תוכנית האבחון של Dell מקבלת את מידע התצורה עבור כל ההתקנים מהגדרת המערכת, מהזיכרון וממספר בדיקות פנימיות, ומציגה את המידע ברשימת ההתקנים בחלונית השמאלית במסך. ייתכן שברשימת ההתקנים לא יוצגו שמותיהם של כל הרכיבים המותקנים במחשב או של כל ההתקנים המחוברים למחשב. Parameters (פרמטרים) בכרטיסיה זו ניתן להתאים אישית את הבדיקה על-ידי שינוי הגדרות הבדיקה. 4 אם הפעלת את תוכנית האבחון של Dell מהתקליטור Drivers and Utilities, לאחר השלמת הבדיקות הוצא את התקליטור. 5 עם סיום הבדיקות, סגור את מסך הבדיקה כדי לחזור אל המסך Main Menu (תפריט ראשי). כדי לצאת מתוכנית האבחון של Dell ולהפעיל מחדש את המחשב, סגור את המסך Main Menu.מדריך מידע מוצר | 175 www.dell.com | support.dell.com 5 בתפריט שמופיע, בחר באפשרות Boot from CD-ROM (אתחל מכונן תקליטורים). 6 הקש 1 כדי להפעיל את התפריט ResourceCD. 7 הקש 2 כדי להפעיל את תוכנית האבחון של Dell. 8 בחר Run the 32 Bit Dell Diagnostics מהרשימה הממוספרת. אם רשומות מספר גרסאות, בחר את הגרסה המתאימה למחשב שברשותך. 9 כשהמסך Main Menu (תפריט ראשי) של תוכנית האבחון של Dell מופיע, בחר את הבדיקה שברצונך להפעיל. מסך Main Menu של תוכנית האבחון של Dell 1 לאחר טעינת תוכנית האבחון של Dell והופעת המסך Main Menu (תפריט ראשי), לחץ על הלחצן של האפשרות הרצויה. אפשרות פעולה Express Test (בדיקה מהירה) ביצוע בדיקה מהירה של התקנים. בדיקה זו נמשכת בדרך כלל בין 10 ל- 20 דקות ואינה דורשת את התערבותך. הפעל את Express Test תחילה כדי לאתר את הבעיה במהירות. Extended Test (בדיקה מורחבת) ביצוע בדיקה מקיפה של התקנים. בדיקה זו נמשכת בדרך כלל שעה או יותר ומחייבת אותך לענות על שאלות מדי פעם. Custom Test (בדיקה מותאמת אישית) בדיקת התקן מסוים. באפשרותך להתאים אישית את הבדיקות שברצונך לבצע. Symptom Tree (עץ תסמינים) אפשרות זו מפרטת את התסמינים הנפוצים ביותר ומאפשרת לבחור בדיקה בהתאם לתסמין של הבעיה שבה נתקלת. 2 אם במהלך בדיקה המערכת נתקלת בבעיה, מופיעה הודעה עם קוד השגיאה ותיאור הבעיה. העתק את קוד השגיאה ואת תיאור הבעיה ופעל לפי ההוראות המופיעות על המסך. אם אין באפשרותך לפתור את מצב הבעיה, פנה אל Dell. הערה: תג השירות של המחשב מוצג בחלק העליון של כל מסך בדיקה. אם תפנה אל Dell, בתמיכה הטכנית יבקשו ממך את תג השירות.174 | מדריך מידע מוצר הפעלת תוכנית האבחון של Dell מהכונן הקשיח תוכנית האבחון של Dell ממוקמת במחיצה נסתרת בכונן הקשיח המיועדת לתוכנית השירות. הערה: אם המחשב אינו מציג תמונת מסך, פנה אל Dell. 1 כבה את המחשב. 2 הפעל את המחשב. כאשר מופיע הלוגו ™DELL, הקש מייד על . אם אתה ממתין זמן רב מדי והלוגו של מערכת ההפעלה מופיע, המשך להמתין עד אשר יופיע שולחן ®Microsoft. לאחר מכן כבה את המחשב ונסה שוב. Windows® העבודה של 3 כאשר רשימת ההתקנים של האתחול מופיעה, בחר Diagnostics והקש . המחשב מפעיל את Pre-boot System Assessment (תוכניות לבדיקת המערכת לפני האתחול) - סדרה של בדיקות ראשוניות של לוח המערכת, המקלדת, הדיסק הקשיח והצג. ● במהלך הבדיקה, ענה על השאלות שמופיעות על המסך. ● אם מזוהה תקלה, המחשב עוצר ומשמיע צפצוף. כדי להפסיק את תהליך הבדיקה ולהפעיל מחדש את המחשב, הקש ; כדי להמשיך לבדיקה הבאה, הקש ; כדי לבדוק שוב את הרכיב שהתגלתה בו תקלה, הקש . ● אם מזוהות תקלות במהלך ה- Pre-boot System Assessment, לפני שתמשיך בתוכנית האבחון של Dell רשום את קודי השגיאה ולאחר מכן פנה אל Dell. אם בדיקת ה- Pre-boot System Assessment מסתיימת בהצלחה, תתקבל ההודעה הבאה: Booting Dell Diagnostic Utility Partition. Press any key to continue. (מאתחל את מחיצת תוכנית האבחון של Dell. הקש על מקש כלשהו כדי להמשיך.) הערה: אם מוצגת הודעה שהמחיצה של תוכנית האבחון לא נמצאה, הפעל את תוכנית האבחון של Dell מהתקליטור Drivers and Utilities (מנהלי התקנים ותוכניות שירות). 4 הקש על מקש כלשהו כדי להפעיל את תוכנית האבחון של Dell ממחיצת תוכנית האבחון בדיסק הקשיח. הפעלת תוכנית האבחון של Dell מהתקליטור Drivers and Utilities 1 חבר כונן תקליטורים למערכת. 2 הכנס את התקליטור Drivers and Utilities (מנהלי התקנים ותוכניות שירות). 3 כבה והפעל מחדש את המחשב. כאשר מופיע הלוגו DELL, הקש מייד על . אם אתה ממתין זמן רב מדי והלוגו של Windows מופיע, המשך להמתין עד אשר יופיע שולחן העבודה של Windows. לאחר מכן כבה את המחשב ונסה שוב הערה:שלבים הבאים משנים את רצף האתחול באופן חד פעמי בלבד. בהפעלה הבאה, המחשב יאתחל בהתאם להתקנים שצוינו בהגדרת המערכת. 3 כאשר רשימת ההתקנים של האתחול מופיעה, בחר CD/DVD/CD-RW Drive והקש . 4 בחר באפשרות CD/DVD/CD-RW Drive מתפריט האתחול של התקליטור.מדריך מידע מוצר | 173 www.dell.com | support.dell.com בעיות תוכנה אחרות עיין בתיעוד התוכנה או פנה ליצרן התוכנה לקבלת מידע לפתרון בעיות — ● ודא שהתוכנית תואמת למערכת ההפעלה המותקנת במחשב. ● ודא שהמחשב עונה על דרישות החומרה המינימליות הדרושות להפעלת התוכנה. לקבלת מידע, עיין בתיעוד התוכנה. ● ודא שהתוכנה הותקנה והוגדרה כהלכה. ● ודא שמנהלי ההתקנים אינם מתנגשים עם התוכנית. ● במידת הצורך, הסר ולאחר מכן התקן מחדש את התוכנית. גבה את הקבצים שלך מיד השתמש בתוכנית לסריקת וירוסים כדי לבדוק את הדיסק הקשיח, התקליטונים או התקליטורים שמור וסגור את כל הקבצים הפתוחים, צא מכל התוכניות הפתוחות וכבה את המחשב דרך התפריט Start (התחל) סרוק את המחשב לחיפוש תוכנות ריגול — אם ביצועי המחשב איטיים, פרסומות מוקפצות מתקבלות לעתים קרו־ בות, או שיש בעיות בהתחברות לאינטרנט, ייתכן שהמחשב נגוע בתוכנת ריגול. השתמש בתוכנת אנטי-וירוס הכוללת הגנה מפני תוכנות ריגול (ייתכן שיהיה עליך לשדרג את התוכנית) כדי לסרוק את המחשב ולהסיר תוכנות ריגול. לקבלת מידע נוסף, עבור אל support.dell.com וחפש את מילת המפתח spyware (תוכנת ריגול). הפעל את תוכנית האבחון של Dell — אם כל הבדיקות עוברות בהצלחה, מצב השגיאה קשור לבעיה בתוכנה. הפעלת תוכנית האבחון של Dell מתי להשתמש בתוכנית האבחון של Dell אם נתקלת בבעיה במחשב, בצע את הבדיקות שבסעיף "פתרון בעיות" והפעל את תוכנית האבחון של Dell, לפני שתפנה אל Dell בבקשה לסיוע טכני. שים לב: תוכנית האבחון של Dell פועלת רק במחשבי ™Dell. הפעל את תוכנית האבחון של Dell מהכונן הקשיח או מהתקליטור Drivers and Utilities (מנהלי התקנים ותוכניות שירות) (מוכר גם כ- ResourceCD).172 | מדריך מידע מוצר תוכנית מפסיקה להגיב סיים את פעולת התוכנית — . זמנית-בו הקש 1 2 לחץ על Applications (יישומים). 3 לחץ על התוכנית שאינה מגיבה. 4 לחץ על End Task (סיים משימה) . תוכנית קורסת שוב ושוב הערה:תוכנות כוללות בדרך כלל הוראות התקנה בתיעוד או בתקליטון/תקליטור המצורפים אליהן. עיין בתיעוד התוכנה — במידת הצורך, הסר ולאחר מכן התקן מחדש את התוכנית. Microsoft® Windows® תוכנית מיועדת לגרסה קודמת של מערכת ההפעלה אם מערכת ההפעלה היא Windows XP, הפעל את ה- Program Compatibility Wizard (אשף תאימות התוכניות) — ה- Program Compatibility Wizard (אשף תאימות התוכניות) מגדיר את התצורה של תוכנית כך שתופעל בסביבה דומה לסביבות שאינן של מערכת ההפעלה Windows XP. 1 לחץ על הלחצן Start (התחל), הצבע על All Programs (כל התוכניות) -> Accessories (עזרים) ולאחר מכן לחץ על Program Compatibility Wizard (אשף תאימות התוכניות). 2 במסך הפתיחה, לחץ על Next (הבא). 3 בצע את ההוראות המופיעות על המסך. מופיע מסך בצבע כחול מלא כבה את המחשב — אם אינך מצליח לקבל תגובה בלחיצה על מקש במקלדת או בהזזה של העכבר, לחץ לחיצה ארוכה על לחצן ההפעלה למשך 8 עד 10 שניות לפחות, עד שהמחשב יכבה. לאחר מכן, הפעל מחדש את המחשב. מדריך מידע מוצר | 171 www.dell.com | support.dell.com אחסון סוללה בעת אחסון המחשב לזמן ממושך, הוצא את הסוללה. הסוללה מתרוקנת בעת אחסון ממושך. לאחר אחסון ממושך, טען את הסוללה לגמרי לפני השימוש בה. פתרון בעיות תוכנת מערכת מחשב מחברת (Notebook System Software - NSS) אם תתקין מחדש את מערכת ההפעלה במחשב, עליך להתקין מחדש גם את תוכנית השירות NSS. תוכנית שירות זו זמינה בתקליטור Drivers and Utilities (מנהלי התקנים ותוכניות שירות) האופציונלי ובאתר האינטרנט של התמיכה של Dell בכתובת www.support.dell.com. כדי להוריד את תוכנית השירות, עבור ל- Downloads (הורדות) באתר support.dell.com ובחר את דגם המחשב שברשותך מהתפריט הנפתח. תחת Select Your Download Category (בחר את קטגוריית ההורדה) בחר System and Configuration Utilities (תוכניות שירות למערכת ולתצורה), בחר את מערכת ההפעלה שברשותך ואת השפה שלה ולאחר מכן בצע את ההוראות. תוכנית השירות NSS מספקת עדכונים קריטיים למערכת ההפעלה ותמיכה בכונני תקליטונים USB בגודל ®Intel, כוננים אופטיים והתקני Celeron® M מעבדי ,Intel® Pentium® M מעבדי ,Dell של 'אינץ 3.5 USB. תוכנית השירות NSS נחוצה לפעולתו התקינה של מחשב Dell שברשותך. התוכנה מזהה אוטומטית את המחשב ומערכת ההפעלה ומתקינה את העדכונים המתאימים לתצורת המחשב. הערה: תוכנית NSS קריטית לפעולתם התקינה של התקני USB. נעילות ובעיות תוכנה התראה: לפני שתתחיל לבצע הליך כלשהו בסעיף זה, בצע את הוראות הבטיחות במדריך מידע המוצר. המחשב אינו עולה ודא שמתאם זרם החילופין מחובר היטב למחשב ולשקע החשמל המחשב מפסיק להגיב שים לב: נתונים עלולים לאבד אם אינך מצליח לבצע כיבוי של מערכת ההפעלה. כבה את המחשב — אם אינך מצליח לקבל תגובה בלחיצה על מקש במקלדת או בהזזה של העכבר, לחץ לחיצה ארוכה על לחצן ההפעלה למשך 8 עד 10 שניות לפחות, עד שהמחשב יכבה. לאחר מכן, הפעל מחדש את המחשב. 170 | מדריך מידע מוצר הוצאת סוללה התראה: לפני ביצוע הליכים אלה, נתק את המודם משקע הטלפון בקיר. 1 ודא שהמחשב כבוי או מחובר לשקע חשמל. 2 הסט והחזק את תפסי תא הסוללה בתחתית המחשב ולאחר מכן הוצא את הסוללה מהתא. התקנת סוללה החלק את הסוללה לתוך התא עד שתשמע את נקישת התפס. תפסי שחרור (2)מדריך מידע מוצר | 169 www.dell.com | support.dell.com מד בריאות משך הפעולה של הסוללה תלוי במידה ניכרת במספר הטעינות שלה. לאחר מאות מחזורים של טעינה ופריקה, סוללות מאבדות חלק מקיבולת הטעינה, או את "בריאות" הסוללה. כדי לבדוק את בריאות הסוללה, לחץ לחיצה ארוכה על מד טעינת הסוללה במשך 3 שניות לפחות. אם לא מופיעות נוריות, הסוללה במצב טוב ונותרו יותר מ- 80 אחוז מקיבולת הטעינה המקורית. כל נורית מייצגת ירידה של מספר אחוזים. אם נדלקות חמש נוריות, נותרו פחות מ- 60 אחוז מקיבולת הטעינה ועליך לשקול להחליף את הסוללה. לקבלת מידע נוסף אודות משך הפעולה של הסוללה, עיין בסעיף ”מפרטים“ במדריך למשתמש. אזהרת סוללה חלשה שים לב: למנוע אובדן נתונים או השחתת נתונים, שמור את עבודתך מיד עם הופעת אזהרת סוללה חלשה. לאחר מכן, חבר את המחשב לשקע חשמל. אם הסוללה מתרוקנת לגמרי, מצב שינה מתחיל באופן אוטומטי. חלון מוקפץ מציג אזהרה לאחר התרוקנות כ- 90 אחוז מטעינת הסוללה. עיין בסעיף ”ניהול צריכת חשמל“ במדריך למשתמש. טעינת הסוללה הערה: מתאם זרם החילופין טוען סוללה ריקה לגמרי תוך 2 שעות לערך, כאשר המחשב כבוי. זמן הטעינה ארוך יותר כאשר המחשב מופעל. באפשרותך להשאיר את הסוללה במחשב ככל שתחפוץ. המעגלים החשמליים הפנימיים של הסוללה מונעים טעינת יתר. בעת חיבור המחשב לשקע חשמל או התקנת סוללה כאשר המחשב מחובר לשקע חשמל, המחשב בודק את הטעינה והטמפרטורה של הסוללה. במקרה הצורך, מתאם זרם החילופין טוען את הסוללה ושומר על הסוללה טעונה. אם הסוללה חמה עקב שימוש במחשב או שהייה בסביבה חמה, הסוללה עשויה שלא להיטען בעת חיבור המחשב לשקע חשמל. הסוללה חמה מכדי להיטען אם הנורית מהבהבת בירוק ובכתום לחילופין. נתק את המחשב משקע החשמל והנח למחשב ולסוללה להתקרר לטמפרטורת החדר. לאחר מכן, חבר את המחשב לשקע חשמל כדי להמשיך בטעינת הסוללה. לקבלת מידע נוסף אודות פתרון בעיות סוללה, עיין בסעיף ”בעיות חשמל“ במדריך למשתמש.168 | מדריך מידע מוצר הסמלים הבאים מוצגים בחלון Battery Meter (מד סוללה): ● המחשב או התקן העגינה מופעלים באמצעות סוללה. ● המחשב או התקן העגינה מחוברים לשקע חשמל ומופעלים בזרם חילופין (AC). ● המחשב או התקן העגינה מחוברים לשקע חשמל ומופעלים בזרם חילופין (AC). לקבלת מידע נוסף אודות QuickSet, לחץ לחיצה ימנית על הסמל באזור ההודעות (נמצא בפינה הימנית התחתונה של שולחן העבודה של Windows) ולאחר מכן לחץ על Help (עזרה). Microsoft® Windows® מד צריכת חשמל של מד צריכת החשמל של Windows מציין את יתרת הטעינה בסוללה. כדי לבדוק את מד צריכת החשמל, לחץ פעמיים על הסמל בסרגל המשימות. לקבלת מידע נוסף אודות הכרטיסייה Power Meter (מד צריכת חשמל), עיין במדריך למשתמש. אם המחשב מחובר לשקע חשמל, מופיע סמל . מד טעינה לפני התקנת סוללה, לחץ על לחצן המצב במד טעינת הסוללה, כדי להדליק את נוריות רמת הטעינה. כל אחת מהנוריות מייצגת כ- 20 אחוזים מכלל טעינת הסוללה. לדוגמה, אם בסוללה נותרו 80 אחוזים מהמטען, ארבע מהנוריות ידלקו. אם אף נורית אינה דולקת, הסוללה אינה טעונה.מדריך מידע מוצר | 167 www.dell.com | support.dell.com משך הפעולה של הסוללה משתנה בהתאם לתנאי ההפעלה. משך הפעולה יורד במידה משמעותית בעת ביצוע הפעולות הבאות, אך לא מוגבל להן: ● שימוש בהתקני תקשורת אלחוטית או בהתקני USB ● שימוש בהגדרות תצוגה בהירות מאוד, שומרי מסך תלת-ממדיים, או תוכניות הצורכות חשמל רב כגון משחקי תלת-ממד ● הפעלת המחשב במצב ביצועים מרביים הערה: מומלץ לחבר את המחשב לשקע חשמל בעת כתיבה לתקליטור או ל- DVD. באפשרותך לבדוק את טעינת הסוללה לפני התקנתה במחשב. באפשרותך גם להגדיר את אפשרויות ניהול צריכת החשמל כדי לקבל התראה כאשר טעינת הסוללה נמוכה. התראה: שימוש בסוללה לא תואמת עלול לגרום לשריפה או להתפוצצות. החלף את הסוללה רק בסוללה תואמת שנרכשה מ - Dell. סוללת הליתיום-יון מתוכננת לעבודה עם מחשב Dell שברשותך. אל תשתמש בסוללה ממחשבים אחרים במחשב שברשותך. התראה: אל תשליך סוללות לאשפה הביתית. כאשר הסוללה אינה נטענת עוד, פנה אל הרשות המקומית לפינוי אשפה לקבלת ייעוץ אודות סילוק סוללות ליתיום-יון. ראה, "סילוק סוללות" במדריך מידע המוצר. התראה: שימוש לא הולם בסוללה עשוי להגביר את הסכנה של שריפה או כוויה כימית. אין לנקב, לשרוף, לפרק, או לחשוף את הסוללה לטמפרטורות גבוהות מ- 149ºF) 65ºC). הרחק את הסוללה מהישג ידם של ילדים. יש לטפל בזהירות בסוללות שניזוקו או שדולפות. סוללות פגומות עשויות לדלוף ולגרום לפציעות או לנזק בציוד. בדיקת רמת הטעינה של הסוללה Microsoft® מד הסוללה Dell QuickSet, החלון Power Meter (מד צריכת חשמל) והסמל של ®Windows, מד טעינת הסוללה ומד הבריאות, ואזהרת הסוללה החלשה, מספקים מידע אודות טעינת הסוללה. מד הסוללה Dell™ QuickSet אם מותקן Dell QuickSet, הקש כדי להציג את מד הסוללה QuickSet. החלון Battery Meter (מד סוללה) מציג מצב, רמת טעינה וזמן השלמת טעינה עבור הסוללה שבמחשב.166 | מדריך מידע מוצר מבט מלמטה שימוש בסוללה ביצועי הסוללה התראה: לפני שתתחיל לבצע הליך כלשהו בסעיף זה, בצע את הוראות הבטיחות המפורטות במדריך מידע המוצר. הערה: לקבלת מידע אודות האחריות של Dell עבור המחשב, עיין במדריך מידע המוצר או במסמך האחריות הנפרד המצורף למחשב. לקבלת ביצועי מחשב מיטביים וכדי לסייע בשמירת הגדרות BIOS, הפעל את מחשב ™Dell הנייד שברשותך כאשר הסוללה הראשית מותקנת תמיד. השתמש בסוללה להפעלת המחשב, כאשר אינו מחובר לשקע חשמל. סוללה אחת מצורפת כציוד סטנדרטי בתא הסוללות. תפסי שחרור תא סוללה מד טעינת סוללה סוללה (2) רמקולמדריך מידע מוצר | 165 www.dell.com | support.dell.com מבט מימין מבט מאחור חריץ כרטיס CompactFlash מחבר רשת מחבר USB מחבר מודם לחצן הפעלה חריץ כבל אבטחה מחבר מתאם זרם חילופין מחבר USB מחבר מסך עם אספקת חשמל מחברי שמע מחבר 1394 מבט משמאל164 | מדריך מידע מוצר צג אודות המחשב מבט מלפנים מקלדת משטח מגע לחצני משטח מגע (2) נוריות מצב התקן ומקלדת חריץ זיכרון Secure Digitalמדריך מידע מוצר | 163 www.dell.com | support.dell.com 4 פתח את צג המחשב ולחץ על לחצן ההפעלה כדי להפעיל את המחשב. 3 חבר את מתאם זרם החילופין למחבר של מתאם זרם החילופין במחשב ולשקע החשמל.162 | מדריך מידע מוצר מה אתה מחפש? אתר זאת כאן ● כיצד להשתמש ב- Windows XP ● תיעוד עבור המחשב ● תיעוד עבור התקנים (כגון מודם) מרכז העזרה והתמיכה של Windows 1 לחץ על הלחצן Start (התחל) ולאחר מכן לחץ על Help and Support (עזרה ותמיכה). 2 הקלד מילה או צירוף מילים המתארים את הבעיה בה נתקלת ולחץ על סמל החץ. 3 לחץ על הנושא המתאר את הבעיה. 4 בצע את ההוראות המופיעות על המסך. ● כיצד להתקין מחדש את מערכת ההפעלה תקליטור מערכת ההפעלה מערכת ההפעלה כבר מותקנת במחשב. כדי להתקין מחדש את מערכת ההפעלה, עליך להשתמש בתקליטור מערכת ההפעלה. לקבלת הוראות, עיין במדריך למשתמש של Dell Precision. לאחר התקנה מחדש של מערכת ההפעלה, השתמש בתקליטור Drivers מנהלי) and Utilities התקנים ותוכניות שירות) כדי להתקין מחדש מנהלי התקנים עבור ההתקנים המצורפים למחשב. מפתח המוצר של מערכת ההפעלה נמצא על המחשב. הערה: צבע התקליטור משתנה בהתאם למערכת ההפעלה שהזמנת. הערה: תקליטור מערכת ההפעלה הוא אופציונלי ועשוי שלא להיות מצורף לכל המחשבים. התקנת המחשב התראה: לפני שתתחיל לבצע הליך כלשהו בסעיף זה, בצע את הוראות הבטיחות במדריך מידע המוצר. 1 הוצא את תיבת העזרים מהאריזה. 2 הוצא מתוך תיבת העזרים את הפריטים שתזדקק להם כדי להשלים את התקנת המחשב. תיבת העזרים מכילה גם תיעוד למשתמש וכל תוכנה או חומרה נוספת (כגון כרטיסי PC, כוננים או סוללות) שהזמנת.מדריך מידע מוצר | 161 www.dell.com | support.dell.com מה אתה מחפש? אתר זאת כאן ● פתרונות — רמזים ועצות לפתרון בעיות, מאמרים של טכנאים, קורסים מקוונים ושאלות נפוצות ● קהילה — דיון מקוון עם לקוחות אחרים של Dell ● שדרוגים — מידע אודות שדרוגים עבור רכיבים, כגון זיכרון, הכונן הקשיח ומערכת ההפעלה ● טיפול בלקוחות — מידע ליצירת קשר, פנייה לשירות ומצב הזמנה, אחריות ומידע אודות תיקונים ● שירות ותמיכה — מצב פנייה לשירות והיסטוריית תמיכה, איש קשר של השירות, דיונים מקוונים ותמיכה טכנית ● חומר עזר — תיעוד מחשב, פרטים על תצורת המחשב, מפרטי מוצרים וסקירות טכניות ● הורדות — מנהלי התקנים מאושרים, תיקונים ועדכוני תוכנה ● תוכנת מערכת מחשב מחברת (NSS) — אם תתקין מחדש את מערכת ההפעלה במחשב, עליך להתקין מחדש גם את תוכנית השירות NSS. תוכנית השירות NSS מספקת עדכונים קריטיים למערכת ההפעלה ותמיכה בכונני תקליטונים ,Dell™ של 'אינץ 3.5 בגודל USB Intel® ®Intel, מעבדי Pentium® מעבדי M ®Celeron, כוננים אופטיים והתקני USB. M תוכנית השירות NSS נחוצה לפעולתו התקינה של מחשב Dell שברשותך. התוכנה מזהה אוטומטית את המחשב ומערכת ההפעלה ומתקינה את העדכונים המתאימים לתצורת המחשב. כדי להוריד את תוכנת מערכת מחשב מחברת: 1 עבור אל support.dell.com ולחץ על Downloads (הורדות). 2 הזן את תג השירות או את דגם המוצר. Download Category הנפתח בתפריט 3 (קטגוריית הורדה), לחץ על All (הכל). 4 בחר את מערכת ההפעלה ואת שפת מערכת ההפעלה של המחשב שברשותך ולחץ על Submit (שלח). 5 תחת Select a Device (בחר התקן), גלול אל System and Configuration Utilities (תוכניות שירות למערכת ולתצורה) ולחץ על .Dell Notebook System Software אתר האינטרנט של התמיכה של support.dell.com — Dell הערה: בחר את האזור שלך, כדי להציג את אתר התמיכה המתאים. הערה: באפשרות לקוחות ארגוניים, ממשלתיים וחינוכיים להשתמש גם באתר התמיכה Dell Premier המותאמם אישית בכתובת לא שהאתר ייתכן .premier.support.dell.com יהיה זמין בכל האזורים. 160 | מדריך מידע מוצר ● מידע אודות אחריות ● תנאים והתניות (ארה“ב בלבד) ● הוראות בטיחות ● מידע תקינה ● מידע ארגונומי ● הסכם רשיון למשתמש קצה מדריך מידע מוצר של ™Dell מה אתה מחפש? אתר זאת כאן ● כיצד להסיר ולהחליף חלקים ● מפרט ● כיצד להגדיר תצורה של הגדרות מערכת ● כיצד לפתור בעיות מדריך למשתמש Latitude Microsoft® Windows® מרכז העזרה והתמיכה של XP 1 לחץ על הלחצן Start (התחל) ולאחר מכן לחץ על Help and Support (עזרה ותמיכה). משתמש מדריכי) User’s and system guides על לחץ 2 ומערכת) ולחץ על User’s guides (מדריכים למשתמש). המדריך למשתמש זמין גם בתקליטור האופציונלי Drivers .and Utilities ● תג שירות וקוד שירות מהיר ● תווית רישוי של Microsoft Windows תג שירות ורישיון Microsoft Windows תוויות אלה נמצאות על המחשב. ● השתמש בתג השירות כדי לזהות את המחשב שלך בזמן השימוש support.dell.com -ב או פנייה לתמיכה טכנית. ● הזן את קוד השירות המהיר כדי לנתב את השיחה בעת פנייה לתמיכה טכנית.מדריך מידע מוצר | 159 www.dell.com | support.dell.com איתור מידע הערה: תכונות אחדות עשויות שלא להיות זמינות במחשב שברשותך או במדינות מסוימות. הערה: ייתכן שמידע נוסף יסופק יחד עם המחשב. מה אתה מחפש? אתר זאת כאן ● תוכנית אבחון עבור המחשב ● מנהלי התקנים עבור המחשב ● תיעוד המחשב ● תיעוד ההתקנים תוכנת מערכת שולחנית (Desktop System (DSS - Software ● תוכנת מערכת מחשב מחברת Notebook System Software) (NSS - התקליטור Drivers and Utilities (מנהלי הת־ קנים ותוכניות שירות) (נקרא גם ResourceCD [תקליטור משאבים]). התיעוד ומנהלי ההתקנים כבר מותקנים במחשב. באפשרותך להשתמש בתקליטור כדי להתקין מחדש מנהלי התקנים, להפעיל את תוכנית האבחון של Dell, או לגשת לתיעוד. התקליטור עשוי לכלול קובצי Readme המספקים מידע של הרגע האחרון לגבי שינוים טכניים במחשב או חומר טכני מתקדם לטכנאים או למשתמשים מנוסים. הערה: עדכונים למנהלי התקנים ותיעוד ניתן למצוא .support.dell.com באתר הערה: התקליטור Drivers and Utilities הוא אופציונלי ועשוי שלא להיות מצורף למחשב שברשותך. ● כיצד להתקין את המחשב שלי ● מידע אודות פתרון בעיות בסיסיות ● הפעלת תוכנית האבחון של Dell ● כיצד להסיר ולהתקין חלקים מדריך עזר מהיר הערה: מדריך העזר המהיר הוא אופציונלי ועשוי שלא להיות מצורף למחשב שברשותך. הערה: מסמך זה זמין גם בתבנית PDF באתר .support.dell.com158 | תוכן עניינים תוכן עניינים | 157 איתור מידע . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 התקנת המחשב . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 אודות המחשב . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 מבט מלפנים . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 מבט משמאל. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 מבט מימין . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 מבט מאחור . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 מבט מלמטה. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 שימוש בסוללה. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 ביצועי הסוללה. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 בדיקת רמת הטעינה של הסוללה . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 טעינת הסוללה . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 הוצאת סוללה . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 התקנת סוללה. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 אחסון סוללה . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 פתרון בעיות. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 תוכנת מערכת מחשב מחברת 171 . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Notebook System Software - NSS) נעילות ובעיות תוכנה . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 הפעלת תוכנית האבחון של 173 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dell מתי להשתמש בתוכנית האבחון של 173 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dell הפעלת תוכנית האבחון של Dell מהכונן הקשיח . . . . . . . . . 174 הפעלת תוכנית האבחון של Dell מהתקליטור 174 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drivers and Utilities מסך Main Menu של תוכנית האבחון של 175 . . . . . . . . . .Dell תוכן ענייניםהערות, הודעות והתראות הערה: "הערה" מציינת מידע חשוב המסייע להשתמש במחשב ביתר יעילות. שים לב: "שים לב" מציין נזק אפשרי לחומרה או אובדן נתונים, ומסביר כיצד ניתן למנוע את הבעיה. התראה: "התראה" מציינת אפשרות של נזק לרכוש, פגיעה גופנית או מוות. קיצורים וראשי תיבות לקבלת רשימה מלאה של קיצורים וראשי תיבות, עיין במדריך למשתמש. הערה: תכונות אחדות עשויות שלא להיות זמינות במחשב שברשותך או במדינות מסוימות. ____________________ המידע במסמך זה עשוי להשתנות ללא הודעה. 2005 Dell Inc ©. כל הזכויות שמורות. חל איסור מוחלט על העתקה מכל סוג ללא הרשאה בכתב מ- Dell Inc. סימנים מסחריים שבשימוש בטקסט זה: Dell, הלוגו DELL ו- Latitude הם סימנים מסחריים של .Pentium ,Intel ;Dell Inc, ו- Celeron הם סימנים מסחריים רשומים של Microsoft ;Intel Corporation ו- Windows הם סימנים מסחריים רשומים של Microsoft Corporation. ייתכן שייעשה שימוש בסימנים מסחריים ובשמות מסחריים אחרים במסמך זה כדי להתייחס לישויות הטוענות לבעלות על הסימנים והשמות, או למוצרים שלהן. Dell Inc מוותרת על כל חלק קנייני בסימנים מסחריים ושמות מסחריים פרט לאלה שבבעלותה. דגמים PP05S Rev. A00 P/N P6419 2005 ינוארwww. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Dell™ Latitude™ X1 מדריך עזר מהיר דגמים PP05S Dell™ Latitude™ X300 et Inspiron™ 300m - Guide d'utilisation du périphérique d'amarrage  Utilisation du périphérique d'amarrage Réglementations Garantie limitée et règle de retour Remarques, avis et précautions Les informations de ce document sont sujettes à modifications sans préavis. © 2003 Dell Computer Corporation. Tous droits réservés. Toute reproduction sous quelque forme que ce soit sans l'autorisation écrite de Dell Computer Corporation est strictement interdite. Marques utilisées dans ce texte : Dell, le logo DELL, Inspiron, Latitude et TrueMobile sont des marques de Dell Computer Corporation ; Microsoft et Windows sont des marques déposées de Microsoft Corporation. ENERGY STAR est une marque déposée de l'agence américaine de protection de l'environnement (U.S. Environmental Protection Agency). En  tant que partenaire du programme ENERGY STAR, Dell Computer Corporation a fait en sorte que ce produit réponde aux normes définies par ce programme en matière  d'optimisation de l'énergie. D'autres marques et noms commerciaux peuvent être utilisés dans ce document pour faire référence aux entités se réclamant de ces marques et de ces noms ou à leurs produits.  Dell Computer Corporation dénie tout intérêt propriétaire aux marques et aux noms commerciaux autres que les siens. Modèle PR04S Mai 2003 Réf. W1500 Rév. A00 REMARQUE : Une REMARQUE indique des informations importantes qui vous aident à mieux utiliser votre ordinateur.  AVIS : Un AVIS vous avertit d'un risque de dommage matériel ou de perte de données et vous indique comment éviter le problème.  PRÉCAUTION : Une PRÉCAUTION indique un risque potentiel d'endommagement du matériel, de blessure corporelle ou de mort. Dell recommande  de ne pas installer la version originale de Windows XP (Gold) sur cette plate-forme.Retour à la page du sommaire Utilisation du périphérique d'amarrage  Dell™ Latitude™ X300 et Inspiron™ 300m - Guide d'utilisation du périphérique d'amarrage  Consignes de sécurité Lors de l'utilisation de votre périphérique d'amarrage Recherche d'informations À propos de votre périphérique d'amarrage Configuration de votre périphérique d'amarrage Fixation du périphérique d'amarrage Installation d'une batterie Connexion de votre ordinateur à une station d'accueil Déconnexion de votre ordinateur de la station d'accueil Installation de lecteurs Retrait des lecteurs Connexion et déconnexion de lecteurs externes Changement de lecteur externe lorsque l'ordinateur fonctionne Caractéristiques  PRÉCAUTION : Consignes de sécurité Pour votre sécurité et pour protéger votre périphérique d'amarrage et votre environnement de travail contre d'éventuels dommages, respectez les  consignes ci-dessous. Généralités  l Ne tentez pas d'assurer vous-même l'entretien de votre périphérique d'amarrage à moins que vous ne soyez un technicien de maintenance qualifié.  Suivez toujours scrupuleusement les instructions d'installation. l Si vous raccordez une rallonge à votre adaptateur CA/CC, assurez-vous que l'intensité totale du courant drainé par tous les appareils raccordés à  cette rallonge ne dépasse pas la limite de cette dernière. l N'introduisez pas d'objets dans les orifices de ventilation ou autres ouvertures de votre périphérique d'amarrage. Cela risquerait de provoquer un  incendie ou un choc électrique dû à un court-circuit des composants internes. l Ne placez pas le périphérique d'amarrage dans un environnement peu aéré, tel qu'une sacoche de transport, une mallette fermée, lorsque celui-ci fonctionne. Ceci risque d'endommager le périphérique d'amarrage ou de provoquer un incendie. l Conservez votre périphérique d'amarrage à distance des radiateurs et sources de chaleur. De même, ne bloquez pas les orifices d'aération. Évitez de  placer des papiers volants sous votre périphérique d'amarrage ; ne le placez pas dans une unité murale fermée ou sur un lit, un canapé ou un tapis. l Placez l'adaptateur CA/CC dans une zone aérée, comme sur un bureau ou sur le sol, lorsqu'il est utilisé pour alimenter le périphérique d'amarrage ou  pour charger la batterie. Ne recouvrez pas l'adaptateur CA/CC de papiers ou autres objets susceptibles d'entraver le refroidissement. De même,  n'utilisez pas l'adaptateur CA/CC dans une mallette de transport. l L'adaptateur CA/CC risque de chauffer en cours d'utilisation de votre périphérique d'amarrage. Faites donc très attention lorsque vous manipulez  l'adaptateur pendant ou après son fonctionnement. l Ne laissez pas votre périphérique d'amarrage portable en marche pendant une période prolongée si la base est directement en contact avec la peau.  La température augmente sur la surface de la base pendant le fonctionnement normal de l'ordinateur (notamment s'il est alimenté par le secteur). Le  contact prolongé avec la peau peut provoquer inconfort ou brûlure. l N'utilisez pas votre ordinateur dans un environnement exposé à l'eau, par exemple près d'une baignoire, d'un évier, d'une piscine ou dans un soussol humide. l Si votre ordinateur comprend un modem intégré ou optionnel (carte PC), débranchez le modem de la ligne téléphonique à l'approche d'un orage  électrique afin d'éviter le risque très faible de choc électrique causé par un éclair et transmis par la ligne téléphonique. l De même, ne branchez ou débranchez aucun câble et n'effectuez aucun entretien ni aucune reconfiguration sur ce produit pendant un orage.  N'utilisez votre ordinateur pendant un orage que si tous les câbles ont été déconnectés et que l'ordinateur fonctionne sur batterie. l Si votre ordinateur comprend un modem, le câble utilisé avec le modem doit avoir une taille minimale de 26 AWG (American wire gauge) et une fiche modulaire RJ-11 conforme à la norme FCC. l Débranchez le périphérique d'amarrage de la prise électrique avant de le nettoyer. Nettoyez votre périphérique d'amarrage avec un tissu doux et  humidifié avec de l'eau. N'utilisez pas de liquide ni d'aérosol nettoyants, ceux-ci peuvent contenir des substances inflammables. Alimentation   l N'utilisez que l'adaptateur CA/CC agréé pour être utilisé avec ce périphérique d'amarrage. L'utilisation d'un autre adaptateur CA peut provoquer un  incendie ou une explosion. l Avant de raccorder le périphérique d'amarrage à une source d'alimentation électrique, assurez-vous que la fréquence et la tension du secteur sont  compatibles avec la tension d'entrée de l'adaptateur CA/CC. l Pour mettre le périphérique d'amarrage totalement hors tension, éteignez-le, retirez sa batterie, débranchez l'adaptateur CA/CC de la prise de courant et retirez toutes les batteries de la baie de batterie. l Pour prévenir les risques d'électrocution, branchez les câbles de l'adaptateur CA/CC et des périphériques sur des sources d'alimentation électriques  correctement reliées à la terre. Il se peut que ces câbles d'alimentation soient équipés de prises à trois broches afin de fournir une mise à la terre.  N'utilisez pas les fiches intermédiaires ou ne retirez pas la broche de masse d'un câble. Si vous utilisez une rallonge électrique, veillez à ce qu'elle  comporte des prises à deux ou trois broches, afin de pouvoir la raccorder au câble d'alimentation de l'adaptateur CA/CC. l Assurez-vous que rien ne repose sur le câble d'alimentation de l'adaptateur CA/CC et que ce câble n'est pas placé dans un endroit où l'on pourrait  marcher ou trébucher dessus. l Si vous utilisez une prise multiple, soyez prudent lorsque vous y raccordez le câble d'alimentation de l'adaptateur CA/CC. Il arrive en effet que  certaines prises de ce type n'empêchent pas l'insertion d'une fiche de façon incorrecte. L'insertion incorrecte de la prise de courant peut provoquer un  dommage irréparable sur votre périphérique d'amarrage, ainsi qu'un risque de choc électrique et/ou d'incendie. Assurez-vous que le contact de mise à  la terre de la prise de courant est inséré dans le contact de mise à la terre correspondant de la rampe d'alimentation. Batterie   l Utilisez uniquement les modules de batteries Dell™ agréés pour être utilisés avec ce périphérique d'amarrage. L'utilisation d'autres types de modules  peut provoquer un risque d'incendie ou d'explosion. l Ne transportez pas de batterie dans votre poche, sac à main ou autre conteneur où des objets métalliques (comme des clés de voiture ou des  trombones) pourraient court-circuiter les bornes de la batterie. L'excès de flux de courant qui en résulterait pourrait entraîner des températures  extrêmement élevées et provoquer ainsi des dommages sur la conception de la batterie ou provoquer une flamme ou des brûlures. l La batterie représente un danger de brûlure si vous la manipulez de façon incorrecte. Ne démontez pas la batterie. Manipulez les batteries  endommagées ou percées avec une extrême précaution. Lorsqu'une batterie est endommagée, les électrolytes peuvent fuir des cellules et entraîner  des dommages corporels. l Conservez la batterie hors de portée des enfants. l Ne rangez pas et ne laissez pas votre périphérique d'amarrage ou votre batterie près d'une source de chaleur telle qu'un radiateur, une cheminée,  un poêle, un chauffage électrique, ou tout autre appareil générateur de chaleur et ne l'exposez pas à des températures supérieures à 60 °C (140 °F).  Lorsque les batteries atteignent une température excessive, les piles de la batterie peuvent exploser ou imploser, représentant alors un risque  d'incendie. l Ne jetez pas la batterie de votre ordinateur au feu ni avec les ordures ménagères. Les cellules de la batterie risquent en effet d'exploser.  Débarrassez-vous de la batterie usagée selon les instructions du fabricant ou contactez votre entreprise locale de ramassage des déchets afin  d'obtenir des instructions de mise au rebut. Débarrassez-vous rapidement d'une batterie usagée ou endommagée. Voyage en avion l Les réglementations de certaines administrations fédérales d'aviation et/ou les restrictions propres à chaque compagnie aérienne peuvent  s'appliquer au fonctionnement de votre ordinateur Dell pendant que vous voyagez à bord d'un avion. Par exemple, ces réglementations/restrictions  peuvent interdire l'utilisation de tout appareil électronique personnel ayant la capacité de transmettre intentionnellement des fréquences radio ou  d'autres signaux électromagnétiques au cours d'un vol aérien. ¡ Afin de respecter au mieux ces instructions, si votre ordinateur portable Dell est équipé de Dell TrueMobile™ ou d'autres dispositifs de  communication sans fil, veuillez désactiver votre appareil avant de monter à bord de l'avion et suivre les instructions qui sont fournies par le  personnel à bord concernant l'utilisation de ce type d'appareils. ¡ En outre, l'utilisation d'appareils électroniques personnels, comme un ordinateur portable, peut être interdite pendant certaines phases  critiques du vol, par exemple pendant le décollage et l'atterrissage. Certaines compagnies aériennes déterminent parfois la phase critique à  n'importe quel moment du vol, dans la mesure où l'avion vole au-dessous de 3 050 m (10 000 pieds). Veuillez suivre les instructions propres à la  compagnie aérienne quant à l'autorisation d'utiliser un appareil électronique personnel. Instructions CEM L'utilisation de câbles blindés permet de rester dans la classification EMC (electromagnetic compatibility) pour l'environnement prévu. Dell propose un câble  pour les imprimantes utilisant le port parallèle. Si vous le souhaitez, vous pouvez commander un câble sur le site Web de Dell, à l'adresse suivante :  www.dell.com. L'électricité statique peut endommager les composants internes de votre périphérique d'amarrage. Pour prévenir ce genre de dommages, déchargez votre  corps de son électricité statique avant de manipuler les composants électroniques du périphérique d'amarrage. Pour ce faire, vous pouvez toucher une  surface métallique non peinte du panneau d'E/S du périphérique d'amarrage. AVERTISSEMENT : Manipuler les câbles de ce produit, ou les câbles des accessoires vendus avec ce produit vous expose à du plomb, un produit chimique  reconnu par l'état de Californie pour provoquer des anomalies congénitales ou des problèmes de fertilité. Lavez-vous les mains après avoir manipulé les  câbles. Lors de l'utilisation de votre périphérique d'amarrage Suivez les consignes de sécurité suivantes afin d'éviter d'endommager votre périphérique d'amarrage :Recherche d'informations l Lorsque vous installez le périphérique d'amarrage pour travailler, placez-le sur une surface plane. l Lors de vos déplacements, ne faites pas enregistrer votre périphérique d'amarrage en tant que bagage. Vous pouvez soumettre votre périphérique  d'amarrage à la détection d'un dispositif de sécurité à rayons X, mais jamais à un détecteur de métaux.  l Lorsque vous voyagez, ne placez jamais le périphérique d'amarrage dans les compartiments situés en hauteur, où il pourrait subir des chocs. Évitez  de laisser tomber votre périphérique d'amarrage et de le soumettre à tout autre choc mécanique. l Protégez le périphérique d'amarrage, les batteries et l'unité de disque dur contre les risques liés à l'environnement : poussière, nourriture, liquides,  températures extrêmes et exposition prolongée aux rayons du soleil. l Lorsque vous transportez votre périphérique d'amarrage entre des environnements présentant d'importants écarts de température ou de taux  d'humidité, une condensation peut se former sur ou dans l'ordinateur. Dans ce cas, attendez l'évaporation complète de cette humidité avant de  réutiliser votre périphérique d'amarrage, afin de ne pas l'endommager. l Lorsque vous débranchez un câble, tirez sur la prise ou sur la boucle prévue à cet effet, jamais sur le câble lui-même. Si vous tirez sur l'extrémité  connecteur, maintenez ce dernier correctement aligné, afin d'éviter tout risque de torsion des broches. Pour la même raison, lors du raccordement  d'un câble, vérifiez bien l'orientation et l'alignement des deux connecteurs. l Manipulez les composants avec soin. Un composant doit être tenu par les bords, pas par les broches. AVIS : Lorsque vous faites passer votre périphérique d'amarrage d'un environnement froid à un environnement plus chaud ou inversement, laissezlui le temps de s'acclimater à la température ambiante avant de l'allumer.  l Si votre périphérique d'amarrage est mouillé ou endommagé, suivez les procédures décrites dans la section « Résolution des problèmes » de la documentation fournie avec votre ordinateur. Si, après avoir effectué ces procédures, vous constatez que votre périphérique d'amarrage ne  fonctionne pas correctement, contactez Dell (reportez-vous à la section « Contacter Dell » dans la documentation fournie avec votre ordinateur pour connaître les coordonnées du contact approprié). Protection contre les décharges électrostatiques  L'électricité statique peut endommager les composants internes de votre ordinateur. Pour prévenir ce genre de dommages, déchargez votre corps de son  électricité statique avant de manipuler les composants électroniques du périphérique d'amarrage. Pour ce faire, vous pouvez toucher une surface métallique  non peinte du châssis du périphérique d'amarrage. Touchez régulièrement la surface métallique non peinte à l'arrière du périphérique d'amarrage pour vous  débarrasser de la charge statique accumulée par votre corps. Vous pouvez également prendre les mesures suivantes pour prévenir les dommages dus aux perturbations électrostatiques (ESD) : l Lorsque vous déballez un composant sensible à l'électricité statique de son carton d'emballage, n'enlevez le composant de ce carton d'emballage  antistatique uniquement lorsque vous êtes prêt à l'installer sur votre ordinateur. Juste avant d'ôter l'emballage antistatique, veillez à décharger votre  corps de son électricité statique. l Quand vous transportez un composant sensible, placez-le d'abord dans un emballage ou dans une boîte antistatique. l Manipulez tous les composants sensibles dans une zone antistatique. Si possible, utilisez un tapis de sol et un banc de montage antistatiques. Que recherchez-vous ? Consultez les sections suivantes l Comment accéder aux didacticiels et autres  informations de procédure  l Comment obtenir une copie de ma facture l Comment étendre ma garantie  l Comment accéder au support de Dell sur mon bureau  Windows (en anglais uniquement) l Suppléments de documentation, d'outils,  d'informations sur la résolution de problèmes, et de  liens vers des ressources de support en ligne Dell Solution Center Sur votre bureau Windows l Comment configurer une imprimante l Informations supplémentaires sur la configuration de  mon ordinateur l Comment dépanner et résoudre les problèmes   Guide du propriétaire de Dell™ Inspiron™l Comment retirer et installer des pièces  l Caractéristiques techniques  l Comment contacter Dell REMARQUE : Ce document est disponible au format pdf à l'adresse support.dell.com. l Comment configurer mon ordinateur l Informations sur la garantie l Consignes de sécurité   Guide d'informations sur le système Dell™ Latitude™ REMARQUE : Ce document est disponible au format pdf à l'adresse support.dell.com. l Conseils pour l'utilisation de Microsoft® Windows®  l Comment lire les CD et les DVD l Comment utiliser le mode veille et le mode de mise en veille prolongée  l Comment changer la résolution d'affichage  l Comment nettoyer mon ordinateur Fichier Dell Inspiron Help 1. Cliquez sur le bouton Start (Démarrer), puis sur Help and Support (Aide et support). 2. Cliquez sur User's and system guides (Guides de l'utilisateur et du système) puis sur User's guides (Guides d'utilisation). 3. Cliquez sur Inspiron Help (Aide Inspiron). l Comment retirer et remplacer des pièces  l Caractéristiques techniques  l Comment configurer les paramètres système  l Comment dépanner et résoudre les problèmes  Guide d'utilisation du Dell Latitude Centre d'aide et de support Windows XP 1. Cliquez sur le bouton Start (Démarrer), puis sur Help and Support (Aide et support). 2. Cliquez sur User's and system guides (Guides de l'utilisateur et du système) puis sur User's guides (Guides d'utilisation). Microsoft Windows 2000 Double-cliquez sur l'icône du Guide d'utilisation qui se trouve sur votre bureau. l Numéro de service et code de service express  l Étiquette de licence Microsoft Windows   Numéro de service et license Microsoft Windows Ces étiquettes sont situées sur votre ordinateur. l Utilisez le numéro de service pour identifier l'ordinateur lorsque vous visitez le site  support.dell.com ou contactez le support technique. l Entrez le code de service express pour faciliter l'acheminement de votre appel lorsque vous contactez le support technique. Le code de service express n'est pas disponible dans tous les pays. l Utilisez le numéro qui figure sur l'étiquette de licence Microsoft si vous réinstallez le  système d'exploitation.  l Les pilotes les plus récents pour mon ordinateur  l Réponses aux questions posées au service et support  technique l Discussions en ligne avec le support technique et d'autres utilisateurs l Documentation sur mon ordinateur Site Web du support Dell - support.dell.com Le site Web du support technique Dell comporte plusieurs outils en ligne, notamment : l Solutions - Des conseils de dépannage, des astuces, des articles rédigés par des  techniciens et des cours en ligne l Forum clients - Discussion en ligne avec d'autres clients Dell l Mises à niveau - Informations de mise à niveau pour les composants tels que la  mémoire, le disque dur et le système d'exploitation  l Service clientèle - Coordonnées, statut des commandes, garantie et informations sur  les réparations  l Téléchargements - Pilotes, correctifs et mises à jour logicielles  l Référence - Documentation sur l'ordinateur, caractéristiques produit et livres blancs À propos de votre périphérique d'amarrage Vue avant boutons de volume - Permet de monter ou de baisser le volume. bouton de déconnexion - Permet de déconnecter votre ordinateur lorsqu'il fonctionne.  bouton d'alimentation - Permet de mettre l'ordinateur sous tension ou hors tension lorsqu'il est amarré.  bouton de mise en sourdine - Permet de désactiver le volume.  Vue du côté gauche  ventilation de l'évent accordé du caisson d'extrêmes graves - Fournit une circulation d'air pour l'évent accordé.  l État des appels au service clients et historique du  support l Principaux problèmes techniques concernant mon  ordinateur l Questions fréquemment posées  l Téléchargements de fichiers  l Détails sur la configuration de mon ordinateur  l Contrat de service pour mon ordinateur Site Web Dell Premier Support - premiersupport.dell.com Le site Web Dell Premier Support est personnalisé pour les clients représentant des  entreprises, des institutions gouvernementales ou des institutions d'enseignement. Ce site n'est pas nécessairement disponible dans toutes les régions. l Comment utiliser Windows XP  l Documentation sur mon ordinateur l Documentation sur les périphériques (par exemple un  modem) Centre d'aide et de support Windows 1. Cliquez sur le bouton Start (Démarrer), puis sur Help and Support (Aide et support). 2. Tapez un mot ou une phrase pour décrire votre problème, puis cliquez sur l'icône  représentant une flèche.  3. Cliquez sur la rubrique qui décrit votre problème.  4. Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran.  1 boutons de volume 2 bouton de déconnexion 3 bouton d'alimentation 4 bouton de mise en sourdine 1 ventilation de l'évent  accordé du caisson  d'extrêmes graves 2 loquet de verrouillage de l'ordinateurloquet de verrouillage de l'ordinateur - Libère l'ordinateur du périphérique d'amarrage si ce dernier n'est pas sécurisé par un dispositif antivol.   Vue du côté droit  lecteur optique de la baie - Permet d'utiliser de nombreux disques tels qu'un DVD, un CD, un CD-RW, une disquette ou un second disque dur.  Vue arrière  1 lecteur optique de la baie 2 bouton de verrouillage du périphérique 1 connecteur parallèle 6 connecteur d'adaptateur CA/CC 2 connecteur vidéo 7 emplacement pour câble de  sécurité 3 connecteur série 8 connecteur IEEE 1394 4 connecteur réseau  RJ-45 9 connecteur PS/2 5 connecteurs USB 2.0 10 connecteur du casque Connecteur Description connecteur parallèle - Permet de connecter un périphérique parallèle, par exemple une imprimante parallèle.  connecteur vidéo - Permet de connecter un moniteur VGA externe. REMARQUE : Lorsque votre ordinateur est amarré, utilisez le connecteur vidéo du périphérique d'amarrage.  connecteur série - Permet de connecter un périphérique série, tel qu'une souris série ou un ordinateur de poche.  connecteur réseau RJ-45 - Permet de connecter le périphérique d'amarrage à un réseau.  Le connecteur réseau dispose de voyants d'état sur les deux côtés. Si le voyant de droite est éteint, le périphérique d'amarrage ne détecte pas de connexion réseau. Essayez de remplacer le câble réseau.  Le voyant de droite clignote jaune lorsque le réseau est actif. Le voyant de gauche indique la vitesse de la liaison :emplacement pour câble de sécurité -Permet d'attacher au périphérique d'amarrage un dispositif antivol disponible dans le commerce. Les instructions  d'installation de ces dispositifs antivol sont généralement fournies avec le dispositif. Pour plus d'informations, consultez la section Fixation du périphérique  d'amarrage. Vue supérieure  Vert fixe - La vitesse de connexion est de 10 Mbps.  Orange - La vitesse de connexion est de 100 Mbps.  Jaune -La vitesse de connexion est de 1 Gbps. Pour plus d'informations sur l'utilisation de la carte réseau, consultez la documentation fournie avec votre ordinateur. AVIS : Ne branchez pas de câble téléphonique au connecteur réseau.  USB 2.0 connectors - Permet de connecter jusqu'à deux périphériques conformes à la norme USB 2.0.  Connecteur de l'adaptateur CA/CC -Permet de connecter l'adaptateur CA/CC à l'ordinateur et à une prise électrique afin de convertir  l'alimentation CA en alimentation CC, qui est celle requise par votre ordinateur. Vous pouvez connecter l'adaptateur CA/CC à votre  périphérique d'amarrage, que ce dernier soit allumé ou éteint. Pour plus d'informations, consultez la section Configuration de votre périphérique d'amarrage. PRÉCAUTION : Si vous utilisez une prise multiple, soyez prudent lorsque vous y raccordez le câble d'alimentation de  l'adaptateur CA/CC. Il arrive en effet que certaines prises de ce type n'empêchent pas l'insertion d'une fiche de façon  incorrecte. L'insertion incorrecte de la prise de courant peut provoquer un dommage irréparable sur votre ordinateur, ainsi  qu'un risque de choc électrique et/ou d'incendie. Veillez à bien insérer le contact de mise à la terre de la prise de courant  dans le contact de mise à la terre correspondant de la rampe d'alimentation. AVIS : Lorsque vous déconnectez l'adaptateur CA/CC du périphérique d'amarrage, prenez le connecteur du câble de l'adaptateur  et non le câble lui-même, puis tirez fermement mais avec précaution pour éviter d'endommager le câble.  Connecteur IEEE 1394 - Permet de relier des périphériques prenant en charge des vitesses de transfert IEEE 1394 ultra-rapides, tels que certains appareils photo numériques et caméras vidéo.  connecteur PS/2 - Permet de connecter des périphériques compatibles PS/2, tels qu'une souris, un clavier ou un pavé numérique  externe. Arrêtez l'ordinateur avant de connecter un périphérique compatible PS/2. Si le périphérique ne fonctionne pas, installez les pilotes de  périphériques à partir de la disquette ou du CD fournis avec le périphérique, puis redémarrez l'ordinateur. Vous pouvez utiliser le clavier intégré et un clavier externe en même temps. Lorsque vous connectez un clavier numérique PS/2, le clavier  intégré est désactivé. connecteur d'écouteurs - Connecte les écouteurs ou les haut-parleurs. Le connecteur est un connecteur à sortie stéréo. baie de batterie - Permet de charger une batterie de 28 WHr.   Vue du dessous Configuration de votre périphérique d'amarrage 1. Reliez l'adaptateur CA/CC au connecteur de l'adaptateur CA/CC et à une prise électrique.  2. Avant la première connexion de l'ordinateur, vous devez avoir terminé la configuration du système d'exploitation. Pour vérifier si le système  d'exploitation a bien terminé le processus de configuration, suivez les étapes ci-après :  a. Vérifiez que l'ordinateur n'est pas connecté (amarré) au périphérique d'amarrage.  b. Allumez l'ordinateur. c. Vérifiez que le bureau Microsoft® Windows® apparaît.  d. Arrêtez l'ordinateur à l'aide du menu Windows Start (Démarrer). Fixation du périphérique d'amarrage 1 baie de batterie 2 connecteur d'amarrage 1 caisson d'extrêmes graves AVIS : Utilisez exclusivement l'adaptateur CA/CC Dell livré avec ce périphérique d'amarrage. En cas d'utilisation de tout autre adaptateur CA/CC  disponible dans le commerce ou de l'adaptateur CA/CC d'un ancien modèle d'ordinateur Dell, vous pouvez endommager le périphérique d'amarrage ou  l'ordinateur. 3. Attachez un dispositif antivol disponible dans le commerce à l'emplacement pour câble de sécurité du périphérique d'amarrage.  Des dispositifs antivol sont généralement composés d'un câble galvanisé avec un dispositif de fermeture et une clé associée. Des instructions détaillées sur  l'installation de ce type de dispositif antivol sont généralement fournies avec le dispositif. Installation d'une batterie Pour insérer une batterie dans la baie de batterie : 1. Tirez le loquet de la baie de batterie et levez le capot de la batterie. 2. Insérez la batterie dans la baie en appuyant jusqu'à entendre un clic. Assurez-vous que les loquets de la batterie sont correctement insérés.  3. Replacez le capot de la batterie. REMARQUE : Si l'ordinateur est connecté au périphérique d'amarrage et qu'un dispositif antivol est attaché à l'emplacement pour câble de sécurité sur  le périphérique, vous ne pouvez pas déconnecter l'ordinateur.  1 emplacement pour câble  de sécurité REMARQUE : Reportez-vous à l'étiquette à l'intérieur de la baie de batterie pour obtenir des instructions sur l'insertion et le retrait d'une batterie de la  baie. 1 loquet de la batterie 2 Capot de la batteriePour retirer la batterie de la baie : 1. Retirez le capot de la batterie. 2. Faites glisser les deux loquets de la batterie dans le sens des flèches et retirez la batterie de la baie.  Connexion de votre ordinateur à une station d'accueil 1. Alignez l'avant de l'ordinateur avec l'avant du périphérique d'amarrage et abaissez l'ordinateur dans le périphérique d'amarrage.  1 Loquet de la batterie (2) 2 Batterie 1 Loquet de verrouillage de la batterie (2) 2 Batterie REMARQUE : Si vous connectez votre ordinateur pour la première fois et que vous n'avez pas suivi la procédure de la section Configuration de votre périphérique d'amarrage, exécutez cette procédure avant de passer à l'étape suivante.  REMARQUE : Après le premier amarrage de votre ordinateur, la batterie de l'ordinateur ou la connexion de l'adaptateur CA/CC de l'ordinateur peuvent  alimenter le périphérique d'amarrage si celui-ci n'est pas connecté à un adaptateur CA/CC. 2. Appuyez doucement sur l'ordinateur pour le faire rentrer dans le périphérique d'amarrage jusqu'à entendre un clic ; l'ordinateur est en place.  3. Allumez l'ordinateur. Le système d'exploitation reconnaît le périphérique d'amarrage. Déconnexion de votre ordinateur de la station d'accueil 1. Avant la déconnexion, enregistrez et fermez tout fichier ouvert et quittez tous les programmes d'application en cours d'utilisation.  2. Pour définir les paramètres de gestion de l'alimentation afin que votre ordinateur ne passe pas en mode veille ou de mise en veille prolongée lorsque  vous fermez (abaissez) l'écran :  Windows® XP a. Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer puis sur Panneau de configuration. b. Sous Pick a category (Choisissez une catégorie), cliquez sur Performance and Maintenance (Performances et gestion). c. Sous ou une icône du Panneau de configuration, cliquez sur Power Options (Options d'alimentation) puis sur l'onglet Advanced (Avancé). d. Dans le menu déroulant When I close the lid of my portable computer (lorsque je ferme le couvercle de mon ordinateur portable), sélectionnez Do nothing (Ne rien faire). Windows 2000 a. Cliquez sur le bouton Start (Démarrer), pointez sur Settings (Paramètres), puis cliquez sur Control Panel (Panneau de configuration). b. Double-cliquez sur l'icône Power Options (Options d'alimentation), puis cliquez sur l'onglet Advanced (Avancé). c. Dans le menu déroulant When I close the lid of my portable computer (lorsque je ferme le couvercle de mon ordinateur portable), cliquez sur None (Aucun). 3. Pour préparer l'ordinateur pour la déconnexion, suivez l'une des procédures ci-dessous :  l Sous Windows XP, cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer puis sur Undock Computer (Poste de travail). Sous Windows 2000, cliquez sur le bouton Start (Démarrer), puis cliquez sur Eject PC (éjecter PC). Le message Undock Complete (Déconnexion terminée) s'affiche et vous indique que vous pouvez maintenant déconnecter votre ordinateur,  cliquez sur OK. 1 Arrière du périphérique  d'amarrage 2 Avant de l'ordinateur REMARQUE : Votre ordinateur doit être hors tension uniquement lorsque vous le connectez pour la première fois.  AVIS : Ne déconnectez jamais l'ordinateur sans l'avoir d'abord préparé à la déconnexion. Si vous déconnectez l'ordinateur sans l'y avoir préalablement  préparé, vous allez perdre des données et l'ordinateur risque de ne pas reprendre un fonctionnement normal pendant plusieurs minutes, voire plus du  tout. OU l Appuyez une seconde sur le bouton de déconnexion situé à l'avant du périphérique d'amarrage. (Voir « Vue avant ».) Le message Undock Complete (Déconnexion terminée) s'affiche et vous indique que vous pouvez maintenant déconnecter votre ordinateur.  Cliquez sur OK. 4. Si votre périphérique d'amarrage est sécurisé, retirez le verrou.  5. Tirez sur le levier de dégagement (consultez la section « Vue du côté gauche ») pour libérer l'ordinateur.  6. Soulevez l'ordinateur pour le retirer du périphérique d'amarrage.  Installation de lecteurs 1. Enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers, et quittez tous les programmes ouverts. 2. Insérez le lecteur dans le lecteur optique de la baie du périphérique d'amarrage. (Voir « Vue du côté droit ».) 3. Le système d'exploitation reconnaît le nouveau lecteur.  Retrait des lecteurs 1. Enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers, et quittez tous les programmes ouverts. 2. Poussez le loquet de verrouillage du lecteur et retirez le lecteur de la baie. (Voir « Vue du côté droit ».) Connexion et déconnexion de lecteurs externes l Pour connecter un lecteur externe tel qu'un lecteur de CD, CD-RW RW ou DVD/CD-RW lorsque l'ordinateur est éteint, connectez le câble du lecteur au  connecteur USB du périphérique d'amarrage. (Voir « Vue avant ».) l Pour déconnecter un lecteur externe pendant que l'ordinateur est éteint, retirez le câble du lecteur du connecteur USB. l Pour connecter et déconnecter un lecteur pendant que l'ordinateur fonctionne, reportezvous à la section « Changement de lecteur externe lorsque l'ordinateur fonctionne ». Changement de lecteur externe lorsque l'ordinateur fonctionne AVIS : Pour éviter d'abîmer les lecteurs externes, rangezles dans un endroit sec et sûr lorsqu'ils ne sont pas connectés à l'ordinateur. Évitez d'exercer  une pression quelconque ou de placer des objets lourds sur ces derniers. Sous Windows XP  1. Double-cliquez sur l'icône Déconnexion ou éjection de matériel située sur la barre des tâches de Windows.  2. Cliquez sur le lecteur que vous voulez éjecter.  3. Retirez le câble du lecteur du connecteur USB.  4. Connectez le nouveau lecteur en raccordant le câble du lecteur au connecteur USB.  Le système d'exploitation reconnaît le nouveau lecteur. Le cas échéant, entrez votre mot de passe pour déverrouiller votre ordinateur. Sous Windows 2000  1. Double-cliquez sur l'icône Déconnexion ou éjection de matériel située sur la barre des tâches de Windows.  2. Cliquez sur le lecteur que vous voulez éjecter, puis cliquez sur Stop (Arrêter). 3. Cliquez sur OK, puis attendez que le lecteur que vous voulez éjecter disparaisse de la liste des périphériques dans la fenêtre Déconnexion ou éjection  de matériel. 4. Cliquez sur OK. 5. Retirez le câble du lecteur du connecteur USB.  6. Connectez le nouveau lecteur en raccordant le câble du lecteur au connecteur USB.  Le système d'exploitation reconnaît le nouveau lecteur. Caractéristiques Caractéristiques physiques  Hauteur 20 mm (0,79 pouce) Largeur 274,80 mm (0,9 pouce) Profondeur 235,70 mm (9,28 pouces) Poids (avec le lecteur optique) 0,84 kg (1,86 livre) Adaptateur CA/CC  Tension d'entrée 90-264 VAC Courant d'entrée (maximal) 1,2 A Fréquence d'entrée 47-63 Hz Intensité de sortie (maximale) 3,34 A Alimentation de sortie 65 W Tension de sortie nominale 19,5 VCC Dimensions : Hauteur 27,94 mm (1,1 pouce) Largeur 58,42 mm (2,3 pouces) Profondeur 133,85 mm (0,9 livre) Poids (câble CC inclus) 0,4 kg (0,9 livre) Plage de températures : Fonctionnement 0° à 35°C (32° à 95°F) Stockage -40° à 65°C (-40° à 149°F) Ports et connecteurs  Série connecteur à 9 broches ; compatible 16550C, connecteur de mémoire tampon de 16 octets Parallèle connecteur unidirectionnel, bidirectionnel ou ECP à  25 trousRetour à la page du sommaire USB Deux connecteurs à 4 broches conformes à la norme  USB Vidéo connecteur à 15 trous Audio Connecteur miniature pour écouteurs/haut-parleurs (sortie ligne) PS/2 Connecteur à 6 broches (mini-DIN) IEEE 1394 Connecteur à 4 broches Amarrage Connecteur à 100 broches Carte réseau Port RJ-45 pour Ethernet Bus Master BaseTX 10/100/1000 Mbits/secondeRetour à la page du sommaire Réglementations  Dell™ Latitude™ X300 et Inspiron™ 300m - Guide d'utilisation du périphérique d'amarrage  Une interférence électromagnétique (EMI, Electromagnetic Interference) est un signal ou une émission, véhiculé(e) dans l'espace libre ou par des conducteurs  électriques ou de signaux, qui peut mettre en danger le fonctionnement d'une radionavigation ou d'un autre service de sécurité, ou sérieusement dégrader,  obstruer ou interrompre à maintes reprises un service de communications radio autorisé. Les services de communications radio incluent, de manière non  limitative, les services de radiodiffusion commerciale AM/FM, la télévision, les services de téléphonie cellulaire, la radiodétection, le contrôle de la circulation  aérienne, les récepteurs de radio messagerie et les services de communications personnelles. Ces services autorisés, ainsi que les éléments rayonnants  parasites involontaires tels que les dispositifs numériques, y compris les périphériques d'amarrage, contribuent à l'environnement électromagnétique. La compatibilité électromagnétique (EMC, Electromagnetic Compatibility) est la capacité des éléments d'un équipement électronique à interagir correctement  dans l'environnement électronique. Bien que ce périphérique d'amarrage ait été conçu dans le respect de cette compatibilité et soit conforme aux seuils fixés  en matière d'interférences électromagnétiques par l'organisme de réglementation, il n'y a aucune garantie concernant les interférences susceptibles de se  produire sur une installation particulière. Si l'équipement crée effectivement des interférences avec des services de communications radio (ce qui peut être  déterminé en allumant et en éteignant cet équipement), vous êtes encouragé à essayer de corriger ces interférences en prenant une ou plusieurs des  mesures suivantes : l Changer l'orientation de l'antenne de réception. l Repositionner le périphérique d'amarrage en fonction du récepteur. l Éloigner le périphérique d'amarrage du récepteur. l Brancher le périphérique d'amarrage sur une autre prise, pour faire en sorte que l'ordinateur et le récepteur se trouvent sur différents circuits de  dérivation. Si nécessaire, consulter un membre de l'équipe du support technique de Dell ou un technicien radio/télévision expérimenté pour des suggestions  supplémentaires.  Les périphériques d'amarrage Dell™ sont conçus, testés et classés pour l'environnement électromagnétique dans lequel il est prévu de les utiliser. Ces  classifications font généralement référence aux définitions harmonisées suivantes : l Classe A : environnements professionnels ou industriels. l Classe B : environnements résidentiels. Les équipements informatiques, y compris les périphériques, cartes d'extension, imprimantes, périphériques d'entrée/sortie (E/S), moniteurs, etc., qui sont  intégrés ou connectés au périphérique d'amarrage doivent appartenir à la même classification d'environnement électromagnétique que le périphérique  d'amarrage. Avis relatif aux câbles de transmission blindés : Utilisez uniquement des câbles blindés pour la connexion de périphériques à tout périphérique Dell, et  ce afin de réduire le risque d'interférences avec des services de communications radio. L'utilisation de câbles blindés permet de rester dans la  classification EMC appropriée pour l'environnement prévu. Dell propose un câble pour les imprimantes utilisant le port parallèle. Si vous le souhaitez,  vous pouvez commander un câble sur le site Web de Dell, à l'adresse suivante : accessories.us.dell.com/sna/category.asp?category_id=4117. La plupart des ordinateurs Dell sont répertoriés pour les environnements de classe B. Cependant, l'inclusion de certaines options peut provoquer le passage  de certaines configurations en classe A. Pour déterminer la classe s'appliquant à votre ordinateur ou périphérique, consultez les sections suivantes, propres à  chaque organisme de réglementation. Chaque section propose, de façon spécifique pour tel(le) pays ou zone géographique, des informations EMC/EMI ou  relatives à la sécurité des produits. Réglementation IC (Canada seulement) La plupart des ordinateurs Dell (et autres appareils numériques Dell) sont classés par la norme Industry Canada (IC) Interference-Causing Equipment Standard (norme sur les équipements produisant des interférences) n°3 (ICES-003) comme appareils numériques de classe B. Pour déterminer la classification  (classe A ou B) applicable à votre ordinateur (ou aux autres appareils numériques Dell), examinez toutes les étiquettes d'homologation situées en dessous,  sur le côté ou sur le panneau arrière de votre ordinateur (ou autre appareil numérique). Une mention de type « IC Class A ICES-003 » ou « IC Class B ICES- 003 » doit figurer sur l'une de ces étiquettes. Notez que la réglementation Industry Canada précise que les changements ou les modifications non  expressément approuvés par Dell peuvent annuler vos droits d'utilisation de cet équipement. Réglementation IC (Canada seulement) Réglementation CE (Union Européenne) Réglementation CE Conformité ENERGY STAR®Réglementation CE (Union Européenne) Le symbole  indique la conformité de cet ordinateur Dell aux directives CEM (compatibilité électromagnétique) de la Communauté Européenne. Un tel  symbole indique que ce système Dell est conforme aux normes techniques suivantes : l EN 55022 - « Appareils de traitement de l'information - Caractéristiques des perturbations radioélectriques - Limites et méthodes de mesure ». l EN 55024 - « Appareils de traitement de l'information - Caractéristiques des perturbations électromagnétiques - Limites et méthodes de mesure ». l EN 61000-3-2 - « Compatibilité électromagnétique (EMC) - Partie 3 : Limites - Section 2 : Limites pour les émissions de courant harmonique (courant  appelé par les appareils inférieur ou égal à 16 A par phase) ». l EN 61000-3-3 - « Compatibilité électromagnétique (EMC) - Partie 3 : Limites - Section 3 : Limitation des fluctuations de tension et du scintillement dans  les systèmes d'alimentation basse tension applicable aux équipements dotés d'un courant nominal allant jusqu'à 16 A ». l EN 60950 - « Sécurité des matériels de traitement de l'information ». REMARQUE : Les exigences de la norme EN 55022 en matière d'émissions mènent à deux classifications :  l La classe A concerne les zones commerciales normales. l La classe B concerne les environnements résidentiels. AVERTISSEMENT RELATIF AU BROUILLAGE : Ce produit est un produit de classe A. Dans un environnement résidentiel, ce produit peut provoquer des  brouillages, auquel cas l'utilisateur peut se voir obligé de prendre les mesures appropriées. Cet appareil Dell est classé pour une utilisation dans un environnement résidentiel (classe B). Une « Déclaration de conformité », conformément aux directives et normes précédemment citées, a été établie et est conservée chez Dell Computer  Corporation Products Europe BV, à Limerick, en Irlande. Réglementation CE Cet équipement répond aux spécifications de la directive européenne 1999/5/EC.Conformité ENERGY STAR® Certaines configurations des ordinateurs Dell sont conformes aux exigences définies par l'agence EPA (Environmental Protection Agency) pour les ordinateurs  à faible consommation d'énergie. Si l'emblème ENERGY STAR® se trouve sur le panneau avant de votre ordinateur, la configuration d'origine est conforme à  ces exigences et toutes les fonctions de gestion de l'alimentation ENERGY STAR® de l'ordinateur sont activées. REMARQUE : Tout ordinateur Dell portant l'emblème ENERGY STAR® est certifié conforme aux exigences EPA ENERGY STAR® tel qu'il est configuré à la livraison  par Dell. Toute modification apportée à cette configuration (telle que l'installation de cartes d'extension ou de pilotes supplémentaires) peut augmenter la  consommation d'énergie de l'ordinateur au-delà des limites définies par le programme Ordinateurs ENERGY STAR® de l'agence EPA. Emblème ENERGY STAR®  Le programme Ordinateurs ENERGY STAR® de l'agence EPA est le fruit de l'effort commun de l'agence EPA et des fabricants d'ordinateurs dans le but de réduire la pollution ambiante par la promotion de produits informatiques à faible consommation d'énergie. L'agence EPA estime que l'utilisation d'ordinateurs  ENERGY STAR® peut permettre aux utilisateurs d'économiser jusqu'à deux milliards de dollars par an en coûts d'électricité. Ainsi, cette réduction de l'utilisation  d'électricité peut réduire les émissions de dioxyde de carbone, gaz responsable de l'effet de serre, de l'anhydride sulfureux et des oxydes d'azote, les  principales causes des pluies acides. Vous pouvez également aider à réduire la consommation d'électricité et ses effets indésirables en éteignant votre ordinateur lorsque vous ne l'utilisez pas  pendant un certain temps, en particulier la nuit et pendant les week-ends. Retour à la page du sommaireRetour à la page du sommaire Garantie limitée et règle de retour  Dell™ Latitude™ X300 et Inspiron™ 300m - Guide d'utilisation du périphérique d'amarrage  Dell Computer Corporation (« Dell ») fabrique ses produits à partir de pièces et de composants neufs ou quasiment neufs conformément aux pratiques  industrielles standard. Pour obtenir des informations sur la garantie limitée Dell pour votre périphérique d'amarrage, consultez la documentation papier fournie  avec votre ordinateur. Retour à la page du sommaire www.dell.com | support.dell.com Dell™ Latitude™ D505 Series System Information Guide Guide des Informations Système Guia de informações do sistema Guía de información del sistema Model PP10Lwww.dell.com | support.dell.com Dell™ Latitude™ D505 Series System Information Guide Model PP10LNotes, Notices, and Cautions NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your computer. NOTICE: A NOTICE indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death. Abbreviations and Acronyms For a complete list of abbreviations and acronyms, see the User’s Guide (depending on your operating system, double-click the User’s Guide icon on your desktop, or click the Start button, click Help and Support Center, and then click User and system guides). If you purchased a Dell™ n Series computer, any references in this document to Microsoft® Windows® operating systems are not applicable. ____________________ Information in this document is subject to change without notice. © 2003 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. Reproduction in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden. Trademarks used in this text: Dell, the DELL logo, TrueMobile, and Latitude are trademarks of Dell Inc.; Intel, Pentium, and Celeron are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation; Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation; Bluetooth is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and is used by Dell Inc. under license. Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own. Model PP10L October 2003 P/N R1189 Rev. A01Contents 3 Contents CAUTION: Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 SAFETY: General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 SAFETY: Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 SAFETY: Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 SAFETY: Air Travel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 SAFETY: EMC Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 When Using Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 SAFETY: Ergonomic Computing Habits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 SAFETY: When Working Inside Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 SAFETY: Protecting Against Electrostatic Discharge . . . . . . . . . . 8 SAFETY: Battery Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Finding Information for Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Setting Up Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 About Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Left View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Right View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Back View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Bottom View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Removing a Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Removing and Installing a Reserve Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Installing a Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Dell Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 When to Use the Dell Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Regulatory Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 NOM Information (Mexico Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Contents Limited Warranties and Return Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Limited Warranty for Dell-Branded Hardware Products (U.S. Only). . . . 25 "Total Satisfaction" Return Policy (U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Limited Warranty Terms for Dell-Branded Hardware Products (Canada Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 "Total Satisfaction" Return Policy (Canada Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Dell Software and Peripherals (Canada Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 1-Year End-User Manufacturer Guarantee (Latin America and the Caribbean Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Intel® Warranty Statement for Pentium® and Celeron® Processors Only (U.S. and Canada Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35System Information Guide 5 CAUTION: Safety Instructions Use the following safety guidelines to help ensure your own personal safety and to help protect your computer and working environment from potential damage. SAFETY: General • Do not attempt to service the computer yourself unless you are a trained service technician. Always follow installation instructions closely. • If you use an extension power cable with your AC adapter, ensure that the total ampere rating of the products plugged in to the extension power cable does not exceed the ampere rating of the extension cable. • Do not push objects into air vents or openings of your computer. Doing so can cause fire or electric shock by shorting out interior components. • Do not store your computer in a low-airflow environment, such as a carrying case or a closed briefcase, while the computer is turned on. Restricting airflow can damage the computer or cause a fire. • Keep your computer away from radiators and heat sources. Also, do not block cooling vents. Avoid placing loose papers underneath your computer; do not place your computer in a closed-in wall unit or on a bed, sofa, or rug. • Place the AC adapter in a ventilated area, such as a desk top or on the floor, when you use it to run the computer or to charge the battery. Do not cover the AC adapter with papers or other items that will reduce cooling; also, do not use the AC adapter inside a carrying case. • The AC adapter may become hot during normal operation of your computer. Use care when handling the adapter during or immediately after operation. • Do not allow your portable computer to operate with the base resting directly on exposed skin for extended periods of time. The surface temperature of the base will rise during normal operation (particularly when AC power is present). Allowing sustained contact with exposed skin can cause discomfort or, eventually, a burn. • Do not use your computer in a wet environment, for example, near a bath tub, sink, or swimming pool or in a wet basement. • If your computer includes an integrated or optional (PC Card) modem, disconnect the modem cable if an electrical storm is approaching to avoid the remote risk of electric shock from lightning via the telephone line. • To help avoid the potential hazard of electric shock, do not connect or disconnect any cables or perform maintenance or reconfiguration of this product during an electrical storm. Do not use your computer during an electrical storm unless all cables have been disconnected and the computer is operating on battery power. • If your computer includes a modem, the cable used with the modem should be manufactured with a minimum wire size of 26 American wire gauge (AWG) and an FCC-compliant RJ-11 modular plug. • Before you open the memory module cover or the Mini PCI card cover on the bottom of your computer, disconnect all cables from their electrical outlets and disconnect the telephone cable. • If your computer has both a modem RJ-11 connector and a network RJ-45 connector, which look alike, make sure you insert the telephone cable into the RJ-11 connector, not the RJ-45 connector. • PC Cards may become very warm during normal operation. Use care when removing PC Cards after their continuous operation. • Before you clean your computer, disconnect the computer from the electrical outlet. Clean your computer with a soft cloth dampened with water. Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners, which may contain flammable substances.6 System Information Guide www.dell.com | support.dell.com SAFETY: Power • Use only the Dell-provided AC adapter approved for use with this computer. Use of another AC adapter may cause a fire or explosion. • Before you connect the computer to an electrical outlet, check the AC adapter voltage rating to ensure that the required voltage and frequency match the available power source. • To remove the computer from all power sources, turn the computer off, disconnect the AC adapter from the electrical outlet, and remove any battery installed in the battery bay or module bay. • To help prevent electric shock, plug the AC adapter and device power cables into properly grounded power sources. These power cables may be equipped with 3-prong plugs to provide an earth grounding connection. Do not use adapter plugs or remove the grounding prong from the power cable plug. If you use a power extension cable, use the appropriate type, 2-prong or 3-prong, to mate with the AC adapter power cable. • Be sure that nothing rests on your AC adapter’s power cable and that the cable is not located where it can be tripped over or stepped on. • If you are using a multiple-outlet power strip, use caution when plugging the AC adapter’s power cable into the power strip. Some power strips may allow you to insert the plug incorrectly. Incorrect insertion of the power plug could result in permanent damage to your computer, as well as risk of electric shock and/or fire. Ensure that the ground prong of the power plug is inserted into the mating ground contact of the power strip. SAFETY: Battery • Use only Dell™ battery modules that are approved for use with this computer. Use of other types may increase the risk of fire or explosion. • Do not carry a battery pack in your pocket, purse, or other container where metal objects (such as car keys or paper clips) could short-circuit the battery terminals. The resulting excessive current flow can cause extremely high temperatures and may result in damage to the battery pack or cause fire or burns. • The battery poses a burn hazard if you handle it improperly. Do not disassemble it. Handle a damaged or leaking battery pack with extreme care. If the battery is damaged, electrolyte may leak from the cells and may cause personal injury. • Keep the battery away from children. • Do not store or leave your computer or battery pack near a heat source such as a radiator, fireplace, stove, electric heater, or other heat-generating appliance or otherwise expose it to temperatures in excess of 60ºC (140ºF). When heated to excessive temperatures, battery cells could explode or vent, posing a risk of fire. • Do not dispose of your computer’s battery in a fire or with normal household waste. Battery cells may explode. Discard a used battery according to the manufacturer’s instructions or contact your local waste disposal agency for disposal instructions. Dispose of a spent or damaged battery promptly. SAFETY: Air Travel • Certain Federal Aviation Administration regulations and/or airline-specific restrictions may apply to the operation of your Dell computer while you are on board an aircraft. For example, such regulations/restrictions may prohibit the use of any personal electronic device (PED) that has the capacity for intentional transmission of radio frequency or other electromagnetic signals while on an aircraft. – In order to best comply with all such restrictions, if your Dell portable computer is equipped with Dell TrueMobile™ or some other wireless communication device, please disable this device before you board the aircraft and follow all instructions provided by airline personnel with regard to such device.System Information Guide 7 – Additionally, the use of any PED, such as a portable computer, may be prohibited in aircraft during certain critical phases of flight, for example, takeoff and landing. Some airlines may further define the critical flight phase as any time the aircraft is below 3050 m (10,000 ft). Please follow the airline’s specific instructions as to when the use of a PED is allowed. SAFETY: EMC Instructions Use shielded signal cables to ensure that you maintain the appropriate electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) classification for the intended environment. For parallel printers, a cable is available from Dell. If you prefer, you can order a cable from Dell at its worldwide website at www.dell.com. Static electricity can harm electronic components inside your computer. To prevent static damage, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computer’s electronic components, such as a memory module. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer’s input/output panel. WARNING: Handling the cord on this product, or cords associated with accessories sold with this product, will expose you to lead, a chemical known to the State of California to cause birth defects or other reproductive harm. Wash your hands after handling the cord. When Using Your Computer Observe the following safe-handling guidelines to prevent damage to your computer: • When setting up the computer for work, place it on a level surface. • When traveling, do not check the computer as baggage. You can put your computer through an X-ray security machine, but never put your computer through a metal detector. If you have the computer checked by hand, be sure to have a charged battery available in case you are asked to turn on the computer. • When traveling with the hard drive removed from the computer, wrap the drive in a nonconducting material, such as cloth or paper. If you have the drive checked by hand, be ready to install the drive in the computer. You can put the hard drive through an X-ray security machine, but never put the drive through a metal detector. • When traveling, do not place the computer in overhead storage compartments where it could slide around. Do not drop your computer or subject it to other mechanical shocks. • Protect your computer, battery, and hard drive from environmental hazards such as dirt, dust, food, liquids, temperature extremes, and overexposure to sunlight. • When you move your computer between environments with very different temperature and/or humidity ranges, condensation may form on or within the computer. To avoid damaging the computer, allow sufficient time for the moisture to evaporate before using the computer. NOTICE: When taking the computer from low-temperature conditions into a warmer environment or from hightemperature conditions into a cooler environment, allow the computer to acclimate to room temperature before turning on power. • When you disconnect a cable, pull on its connector or on its strain-relief loop, not on the cable itself. As you pull out the connector, keep it evenly aligned to avoid bending any connector pins. Also, before you connect a cable make sure both connectors are correctly oriented and aligned. • Handle components with care. Hold a component such as a memory module by its edges, not its pins. • When preparing to remove a memory module from the system board or disconnect a device from the computer, turn off the computer, disconnect the AC adapter cable, remove any battery installed in the battery bay or module bay, and then wait 5 seconds before proceeding to help avoid possible damage to the system board.8 System Information Guide www.dell.com | support.dell.com • Clean the display with a soft, clean cloth and water. Apply the water to the cloth; then stroke the cloth across the display in one direction, moving from the top of the display to the bottom. Remove moisture from the display quickly and keep the display dry. Long-term exposure to moisture can damage the display. Do not use a commercial window cleaner to clean your display. • If your computer gets wet or is damaged, follow the procedures described in "Solving Problems" in your User’s Guide. If, after following these procedures, you confirm that your computer is not operating properly, contact Dell (see "Getting Help" in your User’s Guide for the appropriate contact information). SAFETY: Ergonomic Computing Habits CAUTION: Improper or prolonged keyboard use may result in injury. CAUTION: Viewing the display or external monitor screen for extended periods of time may result in eye strain. For comfort and efficiency, observe the ergonomic guidelines in the "Appendix" of your online User’s Guide when setting up and using your computer. This portable computer is not designed for continuous operation as office equipment. For extended use in an office, it is recommended that you connect an external keyboard. SAFETY: When Working Inside Your Computer Before removing or installing memory modules, Mini PCI cards, or modems, perform the following steps in the sequence indicated. NOTICE: The only time you should ever access the inside of your computer is when you are installing memory modules or a Mini PCI card, modem, Bluetooth™ card, or reserve battery. NOTICE: Wait 5 seconds after turning off the computer before disconnecting a device or removing a memory module, Mini PCI card, modem, Bluetooth card, or reserve battery to help prevent possible damage to the system board. 1 Shut down your computer and turn off any attached devices. 2 Disconnect your computer and devices from electrical outlets to reduce the potential for personal injury or shock. Also, disconnect any telephone or telecommunication lines from the computer. 3 Remove the main battery from the battery bay and, if necessary, the second battery from the module bay. 4 Ground yourself by touching any unpainted metal surface on the back of the computer. 5 While you work, periodically touch the unpainted metal surface to dissipate any static electricity that might harm internal components. SAFETY: Protecting Against Electrostatic Discharge Static electricity can harm electronic components inside your computer. To prevent static damage, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computer’s electronic components, such as a memory module. You can do so by touching any unpainted metal surface on the back of the computer. As you continue to work inside the computer, periodically touch any unpainted metal surface on the back of the computer to remove any static charge your body may have accumulated. You can also take the following steps to prevent damage from electrostatic discharge (ESD): • When unpacking a static-sensitive component from its shipping carton, do not remove the component from the antistatic packing material until you are ready to install the component. Just before unwrapping the antistatic packaging, be sure to discharge static electricity from your body.System Information Guide 9 • When transporting a sensitive component, first place it in an antistatic container or packaging. • Handle all sensitive components in a static-safe area. If possible, use antistatic floor pads and workbench pads. SAFETY: Battery Disposal Your computer uses a lithium-ion battery and a lithium coin-cell battery. For instructions about replacing the lithium-ion battery in your computer, see "Removing a Battery" on page 18. The lithium coin-cell battery is a long-life battery, and it is very possible that you will never need to replace it. However, should you need to replace it, see "Removing and Installing a Reserve Battery" on page 19. Do not dispose of the battery along with household waste. Contact your local waste disposal agency for the address of the nearest battery deposit site.10 System Information Guide www.dell.com | support.dell.com Finding Information for Your Computer What are you looking for? Find It Here • A diagnostic program for my computer • Drivers for my computer • My computer documentation • My device documentation Drivers and Utilities CD (also known as the ResourceCD) Documentation and drivers are already installed on your computer. You can use the CD to reinstall drivers, run the Dell Diagnostics, or access your documentation. Readme files may be included on your CD to provide last-minute updates about technical changes to your computer or advanced technical-reference material for technicians or experienced users. • How to set up my computer • Warranty information • Safety instructions Dell™ System Information Guide NOTE: This document is available as a PDF at support.dell.com. • How to remove and replace parts • Technical specifications • How to configure system settings • How to troubleshoot and solve problems User’s Guide Microsoft® Windows® XP Help and Support Center 1 Click the Start button and click Help and Support. 2 Click User’s and system guides and click User’s guides. Windows 2000 Double-click the User’s Guides icon on your desktop. System Information Guide 11 • Service Tag and Express Service Code • Microsoft Windows License Label Service Tag and Microsoft Windows License These labels are located on your computer. •Use the Service Tag to identify your computer when you use support.dell.com or contact technical support. •Enter the Express Service Code to direct your call when contacting technical support. The Express Service Code is not available in all countries. • Use the number on the Microsoft Windows License Label if you reinstall your operating system. • Latest drivers for my computer • Answers to technical service and support questions • Online discussions with other users and technical support • Documentation for my computer Dell Support Website — support.dell.com The Dell Support website provides several online tools, including: • Solutions — Troubleshooting hints and tips, articles from technicians, and online courses • Community — Online discussion with other Dell customers • Upgrades — Upgrade information for components, such as memory, the hard drive, and the operating system • Customer Care — Contact information, order status, warranty, and repair information • Downloads — Drivers, patches, and software updates • Reference — Computer documentation, product specifications, and white papers • Service call status and support history • Top technical issues for my computer • Frequently asked questions • File downloads • Details on my computer configuration • Service contract for my computer Dell Premier Support Website — premiersupport.dell.com The Dell Premier Support website is customized for corporate, government, and education customers. This website may not be available in all regions. • How to use Windows XP • Documentation for my computer • Documentation for devices (such as a modem) Windows Help and Support Center 1 Click the Start button and click Help and Support. 2Type a word or phrase that describes your problem and click the arrow icon. 3 Click the topic that describes your problem. 4 Follow the instructions on the screen. What are you looking for? Find It Here12 System Information Guide www.dell.com | support.dell.com • How to reinstall my operating system Operating System CD The operating system is already installed on your computer. To reinstall your operating system, use the Operating System CD. See your User’s Guide for operating-system reinstallation instructions. After you reinstall your operating system, use the Drivers and Utilities CD to reinstall drivers for the devices that came with your computer. Your operating system product key label is located on your computer. What are you looking for? Find It HereSystem Information Guide 13 Setting Up Your Computer CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions at the beginning of this document. 1 Unpack the accessories box. 2 Set aside the contents of the accessories box, which you will need to complete the setup of your computer. The accessories box also contains user documentation and any software or additional hardware (such as PC Cards, drives, or batteries) that you have ordered. 3 Connect the AC adapter to the AC adapter connector on the computer and to the electrical outlet.14 System Information Guide www.dell.com | support.dell.com 4 Open the computer display and press the power button to turn on the computer. NOTE: Do not connect the computer to the docking device until the computer has been turned on and shut down at least once. power buttonSystem Information Guide 15 About Your Computer Front View display display latch speakers keyboard keyboard status lights touch pad touch pad buttons power button device status lights16 System Information Guide www.dell.com | support.dell.com Left View Right View IEEE 1394 connector PC Card slot infrared sensor audio connectors (2) security cable slot security cable slot module bay device latch releaseSystem Information Guide 17 Back View CAUTION: Do not block, push objects into, or allow dust to accumulate in the air vents. Do not store your computer in a low-airflow environment, such as a closed briefcase, while it is running. Restricting the airflow can damage the computer or cause a fire. Bottom View USB connectors (2) S-video TV-out connector modem connector (RJ-11) (optional) network connector (RJ-45) parallel connector video connector serial connector AC adapter connector air vents memory module cover battery docking device slot Mini PCI card cover battery-bay latch release hard drive fan battery charge gauge18 System Information Guide www.dell.com | support.dell.com Removing a Battery For more information about removing the second battery, see "Using the Module Bay" in your online User’s Guide. CAUTION: Before performing these procedures, turn off the computer, disconnect it from the electrical outlet, and disconnect the modem from the telephone wall jack. NOTICE: If you choose to replace the battery with the computer in standby mode, you have up to 90 seconds to complete the battery replacement before the computer shuts down and loses any unsaved data. 1 Ensure that the computer is turned off, disconnected from an electrical outlet, and disconnected from the telephone wall jack. 2 If the computer is connected to a docking device (docked), undock it. See the documentation that came with your docking device for instructions. 3 Slide and hold the battery-bay latch release on the bottom of the computer, and then remove the battery from the bay.System Information Guide 19 Removing and Installing a Reserve Battery 1 Remove the battery. 2 Remove the reserve battery cover. 3 Slide the reserve battery toward the connector, and pull the battery out of its compartment. 4 Disconnect the reserve battery cable from the connector. 5 Connect the reserve battery cable to the connector in the reserve battery compartment. reserve battery cable connector reserve battery20 System Information Guide www.dell.com | support.dell.com 6 Place the reserve battery in the compartment, and replace the reserve battery cover. Installing a Battery Slide the battery into the bay until the latch release clicks. For more information about installing the second battery, see "Using the Module Bay" in your online User’s Guide.System Information Guide 21 Dell Diagnostics CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions at the beginning of this document. When to Use the Dell Diagnostics If you experience a problem with your computer, perform the checks in "Solving Problems" in your User’s Guide and run the Dell Diagnostics before you contact Dell for technical assistance. It is recommended that you print these procedures before you begin. NOTICE: The Dell Diagnostics works only on Dell™ computers. The Dell Diagnostics is located on a hidden diagnostic utility partition on your hard drive. NOTE: If your computer cannot display a screen image, contact Dell (see "Getting Help" in your User's Guide for the appropriate contact information). 1 Shut down the computer. 2 If the computer is connected to a docking device (docked), undock it. See the documentation that came with your docking device for instructions. 3 Connect the computer to an electrical outlet. 4 Turn on the computer. When the DELL™ logo appears, press immediately. NOTE: If you cannot see anything on your display, press and hold and the power button for about 5 seconds to start the Dell Diagnostics. The computer automatically runs the Pre-boot System Assessment. NOTE: If you see a message stating that no diagnostics utility partition has been found, run the Dell Diagnostics from your Drivers and Utilities CD. If you wait too long and the Microsoft® Windows® logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Windows desktop. Then shut down your computer through the Start menu and try again. 5 When the boot device list appears, highlight Diagnostics and press . The computer runs the Pre-boot System Assessment, a series of initial tests of your system board, keyboard, hard drive, and display. • During the assessment, answer any questions that appear. • If a failure is detected, the computer stops and beeps. To stop the assessment and restart the computer, press ; to continue to the next test, press ; to retest the component that failed, press . 22 System Information Guide www.dell.com | support.dell.com • If failures are detected during the Pre-boot System Assessment, write down the error code(s) and contact Dell (see "Getting Help" in your User's Guide for the appropriate contact information) before continuing on to the Dell Diagnostics. If the Pre-boot System Assessment completes successfully, you receive the message Booting Dell Diagnostic Utility Partition. Press any key to continue. 6 Press any key to start the Dell Diagnostics from the diagnostics utility partition on your hard drive. 7 When the Dell Diagnostics Main Menu appears, select the test you want to run. Dell Diagnostics Main Menu 1 After the Dell Diagnostics loads and the Main Menu screen appears, click the button for the option you want. 2 If a problem is encountered during a test, a message appears with an error code and a description of the problem. Write down the error code and problem description and follow the instructions on the screen. If you cannot resolve the error condition, contact Dell (see "Getting Help" in your User's Guide for the appropriate contact information). NOTE: The Service Tag for your computer is located at the top of each test screen. If you contact Dell, technical support will ask for your Service Tag. Option Function Express Test Performs a quick test of devices. This test typically takes 10 to 20 minutes and requires no interaction on your part. Run Express Test first to increase the possibility of tracing the problem quickly. Extended Test Performs a thorough check of devices. This test typically takes an hour or more and requires you to answer questions periodically. Custom Test Tests a specific device. You can customize the tests you want to run. Symptom Tree Lists the most common symptoms encountered and allows you to select a test based on the symptom of the problem you are having.System Information Guide 23 3 If you run a test from the Custom Test or Symptom Tree option, click the applicable tab described in the following table for more information. 4 When the tests are complete, close the test screen to return to the MainMenu screen. To exit the Dell Diagnostics and restart the computer, close the Main Menu screen. Tab Function Results Displays the results of the test and any error conditions encountered. Errors Displays error conditions encountered, error codes, and the problem description. Help Describes the test and may indicate requirements for running the test. Configuration Displays your hardware configuration for the selected device. The Dell Diagnostics obtains configuration information for all devices from system setup, memory, and various internal tests, and it displays the information in the device list in the left pane of the screen. The device list may not display the names of all the components installed on your computer or all devices attached to your computer. Parameters Allows you to customize the test by changing the test settings.24 System Information Guide www.dell.com | support.dell.com Regulatory Notices Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) is any signal or emission, radiated in free space or conducted along power or signal leads, that endangers the functioning of a radio navigation or other safety service or seriously degrades, obstructs, or repeatedly interrupts a licensed radio communications service. Radio communications services include but are not limited to AM/FM commercial broadcast, television, cellular services, radar, air-traffic control, pager, and Personal Communication Services (PCS). These licensed services, along with unintentional radiators such as digital devices, including computers, contribute to the electromagnetic environment. Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) is the ability of items of electronic equipment to function properly together in the electronic environment. While this computer has been designed and determined to be compliant with regulatory agency limits for EMI, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause interference with radio communications services, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, you are encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: • Reorient the receiving antenna. • Relocate the computer with respect to the receiver. • Move the computer away from the receiver. • Plug the computer into a different outlet so that the computer and the receiver are on different branch circuits. If necessary, consult a Dell Technical Support representative or an experienced radio/television technician for additional suggestions. For additional regulatory information, see the online User's Guide that accompanied your computer. To access the User's Guide, see page 10.System Information Guide 25 NOM Information (Mexico Only) The following information is provided on the device(s) described in this document in compliance with the requirements of the official Mexican standards (NOM): Limited Warranties and Return Policy Dell-branded hardware products purchased in the U.S. or Canada come with either a 90-day, 1-year, 2-year, 3-year, or 4-year limited warranty. To determine which warranty came with your hardware product(s), see your packing slip or invoice. The following sections describe the limited warranties and return policy for the U.S., the limited warranties and return policy for Canada, the manufacturer guarantee for Latin America and the Caribbean, and the Intel® Pentium® and Celeron® warranty for the U.S. and Canada. Limited Warranty for Dell-Branded Hardware Products (U.S. Only) What is covered by this limited warranty? This limited warranty covers defects in materials and workmanship in your—our end-user customer's—Dell-branded hardware products, including Dell-branded peripheral products. What is not covered by this limited warranty? This limited warranty does not cover: • Software, including the operating system and software added to the Dell-branded hardware products through our factory-integration system, third-party software, or the reloading of software • Non-Dell-branded and Solution Provider Direct products and accessories Exporter: Dell Inc. One Dell Way Round Rock, TX 78682 Importer: Dell Computer de México, S.A. de C.V. Paseo de la Reforma 2620 - 11° Piso Col. Lomas Altas 11950 México, D.F. Ship to: Dell Computer de México, S.A. de C.V. al Cuidado de Kuehne & Nagel de México S. de R.L. Avenida Soles No. 55 Col. Peñon de los Baños 15520 México, D.F. Model number: PP10L Supply voltage: 100–240 VAC Frequency: 50–60 Hz Current Consumption: 1.5 A Output voltage: 19.5 VDC Output current: 4.62 A26 System Information Guide www.dell.com | support.dell.com • Problems that result from: – External causes such as accident, abuse, misuse, or problems with electrical power – Servicing not authorized by Dell – Usage that is not in accordance with product instructions – Failure to follow the product instructions or failure to perform preventive maintenance – Problems caused by using accessories, parts, or components not supplied by Dell • Products with missing or altered Service Tags or serial numbers • Products for which Dell has not received payment THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH VARY FROM STATE TO STATE (OR JURISDICTION TO JURISDICTION). DELL'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR MALFUNCTIONS AND DEFECTS IN HARDWARE IS LIMITED TO REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT AS SET FORTH IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT. ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES FOR THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED IN TIME TO THE TERM OF THE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD REFLECTED ON YOUR PACKING SLIP OR INVOICE. NO WARRANTIES, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WILL APPLY AFTER THE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD HAS EXPIRED. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO THIS LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. WE DO NOT ACCEPT LIABILITY BEYOND THE REMEDIES PROVIDED FOR IN THIS LIMITED WARRANTY OR FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY LIABILITY FOR THIRD-PARTY CLAIMS AGAINST YOU FOR DAMAGES, FOR PRODUCTS NOT BEING AVAILABLE FOR USE, OR FOR LOST DATA OR LOST SOFTWARE. OUR LIABILITY WILL BE NO MORE THAN THE AMOUNT YOU PAID FOR THE PRODUCT THAT IS THE SUBJECT OF A CLAIM. THIS IS THE MAXIMUM AMOUNT FOR WHICH WE ARE RESPONSIBLE. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. How long does this limited warranty last? This limited warranty lasts for the time period indicated on your packing slip or invoice, except that the limited warranty on Dell-branded batteries lasts only 1 year and the limited warranty on the lamps for Dell-branded projectors lasts only 90 days. The limited warranty begins on the date of the packing slip or invoice. The warranty period is not extended if we repair or replace a warranted product or any parts. Dell may change the availability of limited warranties, at its discretion, but any changes will not be retroactive.System Information Guide 27 What do I do if I need warranty service? Before the warranty expires, please call us at the relevant number listed in the following table. Please also have your Dell Service Tag or order number available. What will Dell do? During the 90 days of the 90-day limited warranty and the first year of all other limited warranties: During the 90 days of the 90-day limited warranty and the first year of all other limited warranties, we will repair any Dell-branded hardware products returned to us that prove to be defective in materials or workmanship. If we are not able to repair the product, we will replace it with a comparable product that is new or refurbished. When you contact us, we will issue a Return Material Authorization Number for you to include with your return. You must return the products to us in their original or equivalent packaging, prepay shipping charges, and insure the shipment or accept the risk if the product is lost or damaged in shipment. We will return the repaired or replacement products to you. We will pay to ship the repaired or replaced products to you if you use an address in the United States (excluding Puerto Rico and U.S. possessions and territories). Otherwise, we will ship the product to you freight collect. If we determine that the product is not covered under this warranty, we will notify you and inform you of service alternatives that are available to you on a fee basis. NOTE: Before you ship the product(s) to us, make sure to back up the data on the hard drive(s) and any other storage device(s) in the product(s). Remove any confidential, proprietary, or personal information and removable media such as floppy disks, CDs, or PC Cards. We are not responsible for any of your confidential, proprietary, or personal information; lost or corrupted data; or damaged or lost removable media. During the remaining years: For the remaining period of the limited warranty, we will replace any defective part with new or refurbished parts, if we agree that it needs to be replaced. When you contact us, we will require a valid credit card number at the time you request a replacement part, but we will not charge you for the replacement part as long as you return the original part to us within 30 days after we ship the replacement part to you. If we do not receive the original part within 30 days, we will charge to your credit card the then-current standard price for that part. Individual Home Consumers: U.S. Only Technical Support 1-800-624-9896 Customer Service 1-800-624-9897 Individual Home Consumers who purchased through an Employee Purchase Program: Technical Support and Customer Service 1-800-822-8965 Home and Small Business Commercial Customers: Technical Support and Customer Service 1-800-456-3355 Medium, Large, or Global Commercial Customers, Healthcare Customers, and Value-Added Resellers (VARs): Technical Support and Customer Service 1-800-822-8965 Government and Education Customers: Technical Support and Customer Service 1-800-234-1490 Dell-Branded Memory 1-888-363-515028 System Information Guide www.dell.com | support.dell.com We will pay to ship the part to you if you use an address in the United States (excluding Puerto Rico and U.S. possessions and territories). Otherwise, we will ship the part freight collect. We will also include a prepaid shipping container with each replacement part for your use in returning the replaced part to us. NOTE: Before you replace parts, make sure to back up the data on the hard drive(s) and any other storage device(s) in the product(s). We are not responsible for lost or corrupted data. What if I purchased a service contract? If your service contract is with Dell, service will be provided to you under the terms of the service agreement. Please refer to that contract for details on how to obtain service. If you purchased through us a service contract with one of our third-party service providers, please refer to that contract for details on how to obtain service. How will you fix my product? We use new and refurbished parts made by various manufacturers in performing warranty repairs and in building replacement parts and systems. Refurbished parts and systems are parts or systems that have been returned to Dell, some of which were never used by a customer. All parts and systems are inspected and tested for quality. Replacement parts and systems are covered for the remaining period of the limited warranty for the product you bought. Dell owns all parts removed from repaired products. May I transfer the limited warranty? Limited warranties on systems may be transferred if the current owner transfers ownership of the system and records the transfer with us. The limited warranty on Dell-branded memory may not be transferred. You may record your transfer by going to Dell's website: • If you are an Individual Home Consumer, go to www.dell.com/us/en/dhs/topics/sbtopic_015_ccare.htm • If you are a Home Office, Small, Medium, Large, or Global Commercial Customer, go to www.dell.com/us/en/biz/topics/sbtopic_ccare_nav_015_ccare.htm • If you are a Government, Education, or Healthcare Customer, or an Individual Home Consumer who purchased through an Employee Purchase Program, go to www.dell.com/us/en/pub/topics/sbtopic_015_ccare.htm If you do not have Internet access, call your customer care representative or call 1-800-624-9897. "Total Satisfaction" Return Policy (U.S. Only) We value our relationship with you and want to make sure that you're satisfied with your purchases. That's why we offer a "Total Satisfaction" return policy for most products that you—the end-user customer—purchase directly from Dell. Under this policy, you may return to Dell products that you purchased directly from Dell for a credit or a refund of the purchase price paid, less shipping and handling and applicable restocking fees as follows: • New Hardware Products and Accessories — All new hardware, accessories, parts, and unopened software still in its sealed package, excluding the products listed below, may be returned within 30 days from the date on the packing slip or invoice. To return applications software or an operating system that has been installed by Dell, you must return the entire computer. A different return policy applies to nondefective products purchased through Dell's Software and Peripherals division by customers of our Small and Medium Business divisions. Those products may be returned within 30 days from the date on the packing slip or invoice, but a fifteen percent (15%) restocking fee will be deducted from any refund or credit. The "Total Satisfaction" Return Policy and Software and Peripherals division return policy are not available for Dell | EMC storage products, EMC-branded products, or enterprise software.System Information Guide 29 • Reconditioned or Refurbished Dell-Branded Hardware Products and Parts — All reconditioned or refurbished Dell-branded server and storage products may be returned within 30 days from the date on the packing slip or invoice. All other reconditioned or refurbished Dell-branded hardware products and parts may be returned within 14 days of the date on the packing slip or invoice. To return products, e-mail or call Dell customer service to receive a Credit Return Authorization Number within the return policy period applicable to the product you want to return. You must obtain a Credit Return Authorization Number in order to return the product. See "Contacting Dell" or "Getting Help" in your customer documentation (or www.dell.com/us/en/gen/contact.htm) to find the appropriate contact information for obtaining customer assistance. You must ship the products to Dell within 5 days of the date that Dell issues the Credit Return Authorization Number. You must also return the products to Dell in their original packaging, in as-new condition along with any media, documentation, and all other items that were included in the original shipment, prepay shipping charges, and insure the shipment or accept the risk of loss or damage during shipment. Limited Warranty Terms for Dell-Branded Hardware Products (Canada Only) What is covered by this limited warranty? This limited warranty covers defects in materials and workmanship in your—our end-user customer's—Dell-branded hardware products, including Dell-branded peripheral products. What is not covered by this limited warranty? This limited warranty does not cover: • Software, including the operating system and software added to the Dell-branded hardware products through our factory-integration system, or the reloading of the software • Non-Dell branded and Solution Provider Direct products and accessories • Problems that result from: – External causes such as accident, abuse, misuse, or problems with electrical power – Servicing not authorized by Dell – Usage that is not in accordance with product instructions – Failure to follow the product instructions or failure to perform preventive maintenance – Problems caused by using accessories, parts, or components not supplied by Dell • Products with missing or altered Service Tags or serial numbers • Products for which Dell has not received payment THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH VARY FROM PROVINCE TO PROVINCE. DELL'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR MALFUNCTIONS AND DEFECTS IN PRODUCT IS LIMITED TO REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT AS SET FORTH IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT, FOR THE TERM OF THE WARRANTY PERIOD REFLECTED ON YOUR PACKING SLIP OR INVOICE. EXCEPT FOR THE EXPRESS WARRANTIES CONTAINED IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT, DELL DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE. SOME PROVINCES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF CERTAIN IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS, OR LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY OR CONDITION LASTS. THEREFORE, THE FOREGOING EXCLUSIONS AND LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. 30 System Information Guide www.dell.com | support.dell.com WE DO NOT ACCEPT LIABILITY BEYOND THE REMEDIES PROVIDED FOR IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT OR FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY LIABILITY FOR THIRD-PARTY CLAIMS AGAINST YOU FOR DAMAGES, FOR PRODUCTS NOT BEING AVAILABLE FOR USE, OR FOR LOST DATA OR LOST SOFTWARE. OUR LIABILITY WILL BE NO MORE THAN THE AMOUNT YOU PAID FOR THE PRODUCT THAT IS THE SUBJECT OF A CLAIM. THIS IS THE MAXIMUM AMOUNT FOR WHICH WE ARE RESPONSIBLE. SOME PROVINCES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. How long does this limited warranty last? This limited warranty lasts for the time period indicated on your packing slip or invoice, except that the limited warranty on Dell-branded batteries lasts only 1 year and the limited warranty on the lamps for Dell-branded projectors lasts only 90 days. The limited warranty begins on the date of the packing slip or invoice. The warranty period is not extended if we repair or replace a warranted product or any parts. Dell may change the terms and availability of limited warranties, at its discretion, but any changes will not be retroactive (that is, the warranty terms in place at the time of purchase will apply to your purchase). What do I do if I need warranty service? Before the warranty expires, please call us at the relevant number listed in the following table. Please also have your Dell Service Tag or order number available. What will Dell do? During the 90 days of the 90-day limited warranty and the first year of all other limited warranties: During the 90 days of the 90-day limited warranty and the first year of all other limited warranties, we will repair any Dell-branded hardware products returned to us that prove to be defective in materials or workmanship. If we are not able to repair the product, we will replace it with a comparable product that is new or refurbished. Individual Home Consumers; Home Office and Small Business Customers: Canada Only Technical Support and Customer Service 1-800-847-4096 Medium, Large, and Global Commercial Customers; Government, Education, and Healthcare Customers; and Value-Added Resellers (VARs): Technical Support 1-800-387-5757 Customer Service 1-800-326-9463 Government or Education Customers, or Individual Home Consumers who purchased through an Employee Purchase Program: Technical Support 1-800-387-5757 Customer Service 1-800-326-9463 (Extension 8221 for Individual Consumers) Dell-Branded Memory 1-888-363-5150System Information Guide 31 When you contact us, we will issue a Return Material Authorization Number for you to include with your return. You must return the products to us in their original or equivalent packaging, prepay shipping charges, and insure the shipment or accept the risk if the product is lost or damaged in shipment. We will return the repaired or replacement products to you. We will pay to ship the repaired or replaced products to you if you use an address in Canada. Otherwise, we will ship the product to you freight collect. If we determine that the problem is not covered under this warranty, we will notify you and inform you of service alternatives that are available to you on a fee basis. NOTE: Before you ship the product(s) to us, make sure to back up the data on the hard drive(s) and any other storage device(s) in the product(s). Remove any confidential, proprietary or personal information, removable media, such as floppy disks, CDs, or PC Cards. We are not responsible for any of your confidential, proprietary or personal information; lost or corrupted data; or damaged or lost removable media. During the remaining years following the first year of all limited warranties: We will replace any defective part with new or refurbished parts, if we agree that it needs to be replaced. When you contact us, we will require a valid credit card number at the time you request a replacement part, but we will not charge you for the replacement part as long as you return the original part to us within 30 days after we ship the replacement part to you. If we do not receive the original part within 30 days, we will charge to your credit card the then-current standard price for that part. We will pay to ship the part to you if you use an address in Canada. Otherwise, we will ship the part freight collect. We will also include a prepaid shipping container with each replacement part for your use in returning the replaced part to us. NOTE: Before you replace parts, make sure to back up the data on the hard drive(s) and any other storage device(s) in the product(s). We are not responsible for lost or corrupted data. What if I purchased a service contract? If your service contract is with Dell, service will be provided to you under the terms of the service contract. Please refer to that contract for details on how to obtain service. Dell's service contracts can be found online at www.dell.ca or by calling Customer Care at 1-800-847-4096. If you purchased through us a service contract with one of our third-party service providers, please refer to that contract (mailed to you with your packing slip or invoice) for details on how to obtain service. How will you fix my product? We use new and refurbished parts made by various manufacturers in performing warranty repairs and in building replacement parts and systems. Refurbished parts and systems are parts or systems that have been returned to Dell, some of which were never used by a customer. All parts and systems are inspected and tested for quality. Replacement parts and systems are covered for the remaining period of the limited warranty for the product you bought. Dell owns all parts removed from repaired products. May I transfer the limited warranty? Limited warranties on systems may be transferred if the current owner transfers ownership of the system and records the transfer with us. The limited warranty on Dell-branded memory may not be transferred. You may record your transfer by going to Dell’s website: • For Canada-purchased computers (in-country transfers) and to transfer from one customer to another, go to www.dell.ca/ca/en/gen/topics/segtopic_ccare_nav_013_ccare.htm • For out-of-country transfers (outside of the original country of purchase), go to www.dell.com/us/en/biz/topics/sbtopic_ccare_nav_016_ccare.htm If you do not have Internet access, call Dell at 1-800-847-4096 (Home Consumer customers) or 1-800-326-9463 (Corporate Commercial or Government customers).32 System Information Guide www.dell.com | support.dell.com "Total Satisfaction" Return Policy (Canada Only) If you are an end-user customer who bought new products directly from Dell, you may return them to Dell up to 30 days after you receive them for a refund or credit of the product purchase price. If you are an end-user customer who bought reconditioned or refurbished products from Dell, you may return them to Dell within 14 days after the date on the packing slip or invoice for a refund or credit of the product purchase price. In either case, the refund or credit will not include any shipping and handling charges shown on your packing slip or invoice and will be subject to a fifteen percent (15%) restocking fee, unless otherwise prohibited by law. If you are an organization that bought the products under a written agreement with Dell, the agreement may contain different terms for the return of products than specified by this policy. To return products, you must call Dell Customer Service at 1-800-847-4096 to receive a Credit Return Authorization Number. To expedite the process of your refund or credit, Dell expects you to return the products to Dell in their original packaging within 5 days of the date that Dell issues the Credit Return Authorization Number. You must also prepay shipping charges and insure the shipment or accept the risk of loss or damage during shipment. You may return software for a refund or credit only if the sealed package containing the floppy disk(s) or CD(s) is unopened. Returned products must be in as-new condition, and all of the manuals, floppy disk(s), CD(s), power cables, and other items included with a product must be returned with it. For customers who want to return, for refund or credit only, either application or operating system software that has been installed by Dell, the whole system must be returned, along with any media and documentation that may have been included in the original shipment. The "Total Satisfaction" Return Policy does not apply to Dell | EMC storage products. It also does not apply to products purchased through Dell's Software and Peripherals division. For those products, please instead refer to Dell's Software and Peripheral's then-current return policy (see the following section, "Dell Software and Peripherals (Canada Only)"). Dell Software and Peripherals (Canada Only) Third-Party Software and Peripherals Products Similar to other resellers of software and peripherals, Dell does not warrant third-party products. Third-party software and peripheral products are covered by the warranties provided by the original manufacturer or publisher only. Thirdparty manufacturer warranties vary from product to product. Consult your product documentation for specific warranty information. More information may also be available from the manufacturer or publisher. While Dell offers a wide selection of software and peripheral products, we do not specifically test or guarantee that all of the products we offer work with any or all of the various models of Dell computers, nor do we test or guarantee all of the products we sell on the hundreds of different brands of computers available today. If you have questions about compatibility, we recommend and encourage you to contact the third-party software and peripheral product manufacturer or publisher directly. Dell-Branded Peripheral Products Dell does provide a limited warranty for new Dell-branded peripheral products (products for which Dell is listed as the manufacturer) such as monitors, batteries, memory, docking stations, and projectors. To determine which limited warranty applies to the product you purchased, see the Dell packing slip or invoice and/or the product documentation that accompanied your product. Descriptions of Dell's limited warranties are described in preceding sections. Return Policy If you are an end-user customer who bought Dell Software and Peripherals products directly from a Dell company, you may return Dell Software and Peripherals products that are in as-new condition to Dell up to 30 days from the date on the packing slip or invoice for a refund of the product purchase price if already paid. This refund will not include any shipping and handling charges shown on your packing slip or invoice; you are responsible for those. System Information Guide 33 To return products, you must call Dell Customer Service at 1-800-387-5759 to receive a Credit Return Authorization Number. You must ship the Dell Software and Peripherals products back to Dell in their original manufacturer's packaging (which must be in as-new condition), prepay shipping charges, and insure the shipment or accept the risk of loss or damage during shipment. To qualify for refund or replacement, returned products must be in as-new condition, software products must be unopened, and all of the manuals, floppy disk(s), CD(s), power cables, and other items included with a product must be returned with it. 1-Year End-User Manufacturer Guarantee (Latin America and the Caribbean Only) Guarantee Dell Computer Corporation ("Dell") warrants to the end user in accordance with the following provisions that its branded hardware products, purchased by the end user from a Dell company or an authorized Dell distributor in Latin America or the Caribbean, will be free from defects in materials, workmanship, and design affecting normal use, for a period of 1 year from the original purchase date. Products for which proper claims are made will, at Dell’s option, be repaired or replaced at Dell’s expense. Dell owns all parts removed from repaired products. Dell uses new and reconditioned parts made by various manufacturers in performing repairs and building replacement products. Exclusions This Guarantee does not apply to defects resulting from: improper or inadequate installation, use, or maintenance; actions or modifications by unauthorized third parties or the end user; accidental or willful damage; or normal wear and tear. Making a Claim Claims must be made in Latin America or the Caribbean by contacting the Dell point of sale within the guarantee period. The end user must always supply proof of purchase, indicating name and address of the seller, date of purchase, model and serial number, name and address of the customer, and details of symptoms and configuration at the time of malfunction, including peripherals and software used. Otherwise, Dell may refuse the guarantee claim. Upon diagnosis of a warranted defect, Dell will make arrangements and pay for ground freight and insurance to and from Dell’s repair/replacement center. The end user must ensure that the defective product is available for collection properly packed in original or equally protective packaging together with the details listed above and the return number provided to the end user by Dell. Limitation and Statutory Rights Dell makes no other warranty, guarantee or like statement other than as explicitly stated above, and this Guarantee is given in place of all other guarantees whatsoever, to the fullest extent permitted by law. In the absence of applicable legislation, this Guarantee will be the end user’s sole and exclusive remedy against Dell or any of its affiliates, and neither Dell nor any of its affiliates shall be liable for loss of profit or contracts, or any other indirect or consequential loss arising from negligence, breach of contract, or howsoever. This Guarantee does not impair or affect mandatory statutory rights of the end user against and/or any rights resulting from other contracts concluded by the end user with Dell and/or any other seller. Dell World Trade LP One Dell Way, Round Rock, TX 78682, USA Dell Computadores do Brasil Ltda (CNPJ No. 72.381.189/0001-10)/ Dell Commercial do Brasil Ltda (CNPJ No. 03 405 822/0001-40) Avenida Industrial Belgraf, 400 92990-000 - Eldorado do Sul – RS - Brasil34 System Information Guide www.dell.com | support.dell.com Dell Computer de Chile Ltda Coyancura 2283, Piso 3- Of.302, Providencia, Santiago - Chile Dell Computer de Colombia Corporation Carrera 7 #115-33 Oficina 603 Bogota, Colombia Dell Computer de Mexico SA de CV Paseo de la Reforma 2620 - 11° Piso Col. Lomas Altas 11950 México, D.F.System Information Guide 35 Intel® Warranty Statement for Pentium® and Celeron® Processors Only (U.S. and Canada Only) Intel’s Three Year Limited Warranty Limited Warranty Intel warrants that its family of Pentium® and Celeron® processors, if properly used and installed, will be free from defects in materials and workmanship and will substantially conform to Intel’s publicly available specifications for a period of three (3) years after the date the Pentium or Celeron processor was purchased (whether purchased separately or as part of a computer system). If the Pentium or Celeron processor, which is the subject of this Limited Warranty, fails during the warranty period for reasons covered by this Limited Warranty, Intel, at its option, will: • REPAIR the Pentium or Celeron processor by means of hardware and/or software; OR • REPLACE the Pentium or Celeron processor with another Pentium or Celeron processor; OR if Intel is unable to repair or replace the particular Pentium or Celeron processor, • REFUND the then-current value of the Pentium or Celeron processor. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY, AND ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES THAT MAY EXIST UNDER STATE LAW, APPLY ONLY TO THE ORIGINAL PURCHASER OF THE PENTIUM OR CELERON PROCESSOR, OR PENTIUM OR CELERON PROCESSOR-BASED COMPUTER AND LAST ONLY FOR AS LONG AS SUCH PURCHASER CONTINUES TO OWN THE PROCESSOR. Extent of Limited Warranty Intel does not warrant that your Pentium or Celeron processor will be free from design defects or errors known as "errata." Current characterized errata are available upon request. This limited warranty is for purchasers in the United States and Canada only. The limited warranty does not cover any costs relating to removal or replacement of any Pentium or Celeron processors that are soldered or otherwise permanently affixed to your system’s motherboard. This limited warranty does not cover damages due to external causes, including accident, problems with electrical power, usage not in accordance with product instructions, misuse, neglect, alteration, repair, improper installation, or improper testing. How to Obtain Warranty Service To obtain warranty service for your Pentium or Celeron processor, you may contact your computer system manufacturer in accordance with its instructions, or you may contact Intel. To request warranty service from Intel, you should call Intel at 1-800-628-8686 during the warranty period during normal business hours (Pacific Time), excluding holidays. Please be prepared to provide: (1) your name, address, and telephone numbers; (2) proof of purchase; (3) this Intel warranty card; (4) a description of the computer system including the brand and model; and (5) an explanation of the problem. [Note: The Customer Service Representative may need additional information from you depending on the nature of the problem.] The replacement processor is warranted under this written warranty and is subject to the same limitations and exclusions for the remainder of the original warranty period or one (1) year, whichever is longer. WARRANTY LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS THESE WARRANTIES REPLACE ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. INTEL MAKES NO EXPRESS WARRANTIES BEYOND THOSE STATED HERE. INTEL DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. SOME LAWS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES SO THIS LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IF THESE LAWS APPLY, THEN ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD. NO WARRANTIES APPLY AFTER THAT PERIOD. SOME LAWS DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO THIS LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY INTEL’S RESPONSIBILITY UNDER THIS, OR ANY OTHER WARRANTY, IMPLIED OR EXPRESS, IS LIMITED TO REPAIR, REPLACEMENT OR REFUND, AS SET FORTH ABOVE. THESE REMEDIES ARE THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES FOR ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY. INTEL IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY OR UNDER ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOST PROFITS, DOWNTIME, GOODWILL, DAMAGE TO OR REPLACEMENT OF EQUIPMENT AND PROPERTY, AND ANY COSTS OF RECOVERING, REPROGRAMMING, OR REPRODUCING ANY PROGRAM OR DATA STORED IN OR USED WITH A SYSTEM CONTAINING YOUR PENTIUM PROCESSOR. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. THE LIMITED WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS THAT VARY FROM JURISDICTION TO JURISDICTION.36 System Information Guide www.dell.com | support.dell.com Intel Pentium® and Celeron® Processors are backed by a three-year limited warranty. Please refer to the reverse side of this card for complete warranty details. Intel’s Commitment to Quality Intel is committed to producing the highest quality processors available. That’s why we have hundreds of people dedicated to continuously improve our design, manufacturing, and testing technology. We put every one of our Pentium® and Celeron® processors through a rigorous battery of tests during the design and manufacturing processes. To verify that the new chip will correctly run the software written for Intel Architecture processors, a team of Intel engineers is dedicated to compatibility testing. In a state-of-art lab, this group runs an extensive set of operating systems, applications, network tests and stress tests repeatedly to ensure that the processor is compatible with representative software. Just as importantly, we work with hardware and software companies in the computer industry to ensure that our processors are compatible with their products. Additionally, a sampling of Intel processors are subjected to a rigorous "burn-in" test whereby the chip is operated at higher-than-normal temperatures and voltages. During this burn-in period, the processor experiences the equivalent of weeks of normal usage. These units are monitored for failures as part of our ongoing quality assurance process. As a result, today’s microprocessors from Intel are among the most reliable components in computers. What are "Errata"? Exhaustive product testing can highlight differences between the actual behavior of the microprocessor and its specifications. Sometimes the discrepancies are caused by a design defect or error, which we call errata. Rigorous validation identifies most errata during the development of the processor, but we do detect additional errata during the life cycle of a microprocessor. When an erratum is identified, our engineers work to characterize it and find a solution. We work with system designers and software developers to ensure that the discrepancy does not affect their products. If necessary, special software or hardware solutions (sometimes known as "work arounds") are implemented in the system design to prevent computer users from encountering the problem. Errata may then be corrected in future revisions of the microprocessor. No microprocessor is perfect, and Intel recognizes that some consumers want to know about any errata, whether or not the errata affect them. Intel makes documentation of all characterized Pentium and Celeron processor errata publicly available through our Technical Documentation Service. At Intel, our goal is to make every computer user satisfied with his or her Pentium or Celeron processor. Should you have any questions, comments or concerns about your Intel microprocessor, please call us at 1-800-628-8686. ©1997, 1998 Intel Corporation. All rights reserved.www.dell.com | support.dell.com Dell™ Latitude™ Série D505 Guide des Informations Système Modèle PP10LRemarques, Avis et Précautions REMARQUE : Une REMARQUE indique une information importante qui peut vous aider à mieux utiliser votre ordinateur. AVIS : Un AVIS vous avertit d’un risque de dommage matériel ou de perte de données et vous indique comment éviter le problème. PRÉCAUTION : Une PRÉCAUTION indique un risque potentiel d'endommagement du matériel, de blessure corporelle ou de mort. Abréviations et acronymes Pour obtenir la liste complète des abréviations et des acronymes, reportez-vous au Guide d’utilisation (en fonction de votre système d’exploitation, double-cliquez sur l’icône Guide d’utilisation sur votre bureau ou cliquez sur Démarrer, Centre d’aide et de support, puis sur Guides d’utilisation du système). Si vous avez acheté un ordinateur Dell™ Série n, les références du présent document concernant les systèmes d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows® ne sont pas applicables. ____________________ Les informations contenues dans ce document sont sujettes à modification sans préavis. © 2003 Dell Inc. Tous droits réservés. La reproduction sous quelque forme que ce soit sans l'autorisation écrite de Dell Inc. est strictement interdite. Marques utilisées dans ce document : Dell, le logo DELL, TrueMobile et Latitude sont des marques de Dell Inc. ; Intel, Pentium et Celeron sont des marques déposées de Intel Corporation ; Microsoft et Windows sont des marques déposées de Microsoft Corporation ; Bluetooth est une marque de Bluetooth SIG, Inc. et est utilisée par Dell Inc. sous licence. D'autres marques et noms commerciaux peuvent être utilisés dans ce document pour faire référence aux entités se réclamant de ces marques et de ces noms ou à leurs produits. Dell Inc. rejette tout intérêt propriétaire dans les marques et les noms commerciaux autres que les siens. Modèle PP10L Octobre 2003 Réf. R1189 Rév. A01Sommaire 39 Sommaire PRÉCAUTION : Consignes de sécurité . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 SÉCURITÉ : Généralités . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 SÉCURITÉ : Alimentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 SÉCURITÉ : Batterie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 SÉCURITÉ : Voyage en avion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 SÉCURITÉ : Instructions relatives à la compatibilité électromagnétique (EMC, Electromagnetic Compatibility) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Lors de l'utilisation de votre ordinateur. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 SÉCURITÉ : Conseils en ergonomie. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 SÉCURITÉ : Intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur . . . . . . . . 44 SÉCURITÉ : Protection contre les décharges électrostatiques . . . . . . 44 SÉCURITÉ : Retrait de la batterie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Recherche d'informations concernant l'ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Installation de votre ordinateur. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 À propos de votre ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Vue avant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Vue de gauche . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Vue de droite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Vue arrière . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Vue de dessous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Retrait de la batterie. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Retrait et installation d'une batterie de réserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Installation d'une batterie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Dell Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Quand utiliser Dell Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Réglementations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6040 Sommaire Garantie limitée et règle de retour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Conditions de garantie limitée pour les produits matériels Dell (Canada seulement) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Règle de retour «Satisfait ou remboursé» (Canada seulement). . . . . . 63 Logiciels et périphériques Dell (Canada seulement). . . . . . . . . . . 64 Déclaration de garantie Intel® réservée aux processeurs Pentium® et Celeron® (États-Unis et Canada uniquement) . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Guide des Informations Système 41 PRÉCAUTION : Consignes de sécurité Pour votre sécurité et pour protéger votre ordinateur ainsi que votre environnement de travail contre d'éventuels dommages, respectez les consignes de sécurité ci-dessous. SÉCURITÉ : Généralités • Ne tentez pas d'assurer vous-même l'entretien de votre ordinateur à moins que vous ne soyez un technicien de maintenance qualifié. Suivez toujours scrupuleusement les instructions d'installation. • Si vous raccordez une rallonge à votre adaptateur CA/CC, assurez-vous que l'intensité totale du courant drainé par tous les appareils raccordés à cette rallonge ne dépasse pas la limite de cette dernière. • N'introduisez pas d'objets dans les entrées d'air ou autres ouvertures de votre ordinateur. Cela risquerait de provoquer un incendie ou un choc électrique dû à un court-circuit des composants internes. • Ne placez pas l'ordinateur dans un environnement peu aéré, tel qu'une sacoche de transport ou une mallette fermée, lorsque celui-ci fonctionne. Ceci risque d'endommager l'ordinateur ou de provoquer un incendie. • Conservez votre ordinateur à distance des radiateurs et sources de chaleur. Veillez à ne pas bloquer les grilles de refroidissement. Évitez de placer des papiers volants sous votre ordinateur ; ne placez pas votre ordinateur dans une unité murale fermée ou sur un lit, un canapé ou un tapis. • L'adaptateur secteur doit se trouver dans une zone aérée, par exemple sur un bureau ou sur le sol, lorsqu'il est utilisé pour alimenter l'ordinateur ou pour charger la batterie. Ne recouvrez pas l'adaptateur CA/CC de papiers ou d'autres objets susceptibles d'entraver le refroidissement. De même, n'utilisez pas l'adaptateur CA/CC dans une mallette de transport. • L'adaptateur CA/CC risque de chauffer lorsque vous utilisez votre ordinateur. Faites donc très attention lorsque vous manipulez l'adaptateur pendant ou après son fonctionnement. • Évitez de poser votre ordinateur portable en fonctionnement à même la peau pendant une période prolongée. La température augmente sur la surface de la base pendant le fonctionnement normal de l'ordinateur (notamment s'il est alimenté par le secteur). Le contact prolongé avec la peau peut provoquer inconfort ou brûlure. • N'utilisez pas votre ordinateur dans un environnement humide, par exemple près d'une baignoire, d'un évier, d'une piscine ou dans un sous-sol humide. • Si votre ordinateur comprend un modem intégré ou optionnel (carte PC), débranchez le modem de la ligne téléphonique à l'approche d'un orage électrique afin d'éviter le risque très faible de choc électrique causé par un éclair et transmis par la ligne téléphonique. • Pour réduire le danger lié à un choc électrique, n'effectuez aucun branchement ou débranchement pendant un orage électrique, ni aucune opération de maintenance ou de reconfiguration de ce produit. N'utilisez jamais l'ordinateur pendant un orage électrique, sauf si tous les câbles ont été déconnectés et si l'ordinateur est alimenté par la batterie. • Si votre ordinateur comprend un modem, le câble utilisé avec le modem doit avoir une taille minimale de 26 AWG (American Wire Gauge) et une fiche modulaire RJ-11 conforme à la norme FCC. • Avant d'ouvrir le capot du module de mémoire ou de la carte Mini PCI de la face inférieure de l'ordinateur, débranchez le câble du téléphone et tous les câbles d'alimentation des prises électriques. • Si votre ordinateur dispose d'un connecteur modem RJ-11 et d'un connecteur réseau RJ-45 (ces deux connecteurs se ressemblent), veillez à brancher le câble téléphonique dans le connecteur RJ-11 et non pas dans le connecteur RJ-45. • Les cartes PC peuvent beaucoup chauffer en fonctionnement normal. Faites donc très attention lorsque vous les retirez après une utilisation prolongée. • Débranchez l'ordinateur de la prise électrique avant de le nettoyer. Nettoyez votre ordinateur avec un tissu doux et humidifié avec de l'eau. N'utilisez pas de liquide ni d'aérosol nettoyants, ceux-ci peuvent contenir des substances inflammables.42 Guide des Informations Système www.dell.com | support.dell.com SÉCURITÉ : Alimentation • Utilisez uniquement l'adaptateur CA/CC fourni par Dell et homologué pour cet ordinateur. L'utilisation d'un autre adaptateur CA/CC peut provoquer un incendie ou une explosion. • Avant de raccorder l'ordinateur à une prise électrique, assurez-vous que la tension du secteur est compatible avec la tension d'entrée de l'adaptateur. • Pour mettre l'ordinateur totalement hors tension, éteignez-le, débranchez l'adaptateur CA/CC de la prise électrique et retirez toutes les batteries installées dans la baie des périphériques ou la baie modulaire. • Pour éviter tout risque de décharge électrique, branchez les câbles de l'adaptateur CA/CC et des périphériques sur des sources d'alimentation électriques correctement reliées à la terre. Il se peut que ces câbles d'alimentation soient équipés de prises à trois broches afin de fournir une mise à la terre. N'utilisez pas de fiche intermédiaire et ne retirez pas la broche de masse du câble d'alimentation. Si vous utilisez une rallonge, assurez-vous qu'il s'agit du type approprié, 2 ou 3 broches, avant de la raccorder au câble de l'adaptateur CA/CC. • Assurez-vous que rien ne repose sur le cordon d'alimentation de l'adaptateur CA/CC et que ce cordon n'est pas placé dans un endroit où l'on pourrait marcher ou trébucher dessus. • Si vous utilisez plusieurs rampes d'alimentation, soyez prudent lorsque vous raccordez le câble d'alimentation de l'adaptateur CA/CC à la rampe d'alimentation. Certaines rampes d'alimentation peuvent ne pas empêcher l'insertion d'une prise de façon incorrecte. L'insertion incorrecte de la prise de courant peut provoquer un dommage irréparable sur votre ordinateur ainsi qu'un risque de choc électrique et/ou d'incendie. Assurez-vous que le contact de mise à la terre de la prise de courant est inséré dans le contact de mise à la terre correspondant de la rampe d'alimentation. SÉCURITÉ : Batterie • Utilisez uniquement les modules de batteries Dell™ homologués pour cet ordinateur. L'utilisation d'autres types de modules peut présenter un risque d'incendie ou d'explosion. • Ne transportez pas de batterie dans votre poche, sac à main ou autre conteneur où des objets métalliques (comme des clés de voiture ou des trombones) pourraient court-circuiter les bornes de la batterie. L'excès de flux de courant qui en résulterait pourrait entraîner des températures extrêmement élevées et, par conséquent, des dommages sur la batterie, un incendie ou des brûlures. • La batterie représente un danger de brûlure si vous la manipulez de façon incorrecte. Ne démontez pas la batterie. Manipulez les batteries endommagées ou percées avec une extrême précaution. Lorsqu'une batterie est endommagée, des électrolytes peuvent fuir des cellules et provoquer des dommages corporels. • Conservez la batterie hors de portée des enfants. • Ne rangez pas et ne laissez pas votre ordinateur ou votre batterie près d'une source de chaleur, telle qu'un radiateur, une cheminée, un poêle, un chauffage électrique, ou tout autre appareil générateur de chaleur et ne l'exposez pas à des températures supérieures à 60° C (140° F). Lorsque les batteries atteignent une température excessive, les cellules de la batterie peuvent exploser ou imploser, représentant alors un risque d'incendie. • Ne jetez pas la batterie de votre ordinateur au feu ni avec les ordures ménagères. Les cellules de la batterie risquent d'exploser. Débarrassez-vous de la batterie usagée selon les instructions du fabricant ou contactez le service municipal de traitement des déchets afin de connaître les instructions de mise au rebut. Débarrassez-vous rapidement d'une batterie usagée ou endommagée. SÉCURITÉ : Voyage en avion • Les réglementations de certaines administrations fédérales d'aviation et/ou les restrictions propres à chaque compagnie aérienne peuvent s'appliquer au fonctionnement de votre ordinateur Dell pendant que vous voyagez à bord d'un avion. Par exemple, ces réglementations/restrictions peuvent interdire l'utilisation de tout appareil électronique personnel ayant la capacité de transmettre intentionnellement des fréquences radio ou d'autres signaux électromagnétiques au cours d'un vol aérien.Guide des Informations Système 43 – Afin de respecter au mieux ces instructions, si votre ordinateur portable Dell est équipé de Dell TrueMobile™ ou d'autres dispositifs de communication sans fil, veuillez désactiver cet appareil avant de monter à bord de l'avion et suivre les instructions fournies par le personnel à bord sur l'utilisation de ce type d'appareils. – En outre, l'utilisation d'appareils électroniques personnels, comme un ordinateur portable, peut être interdite pendant certaines phases critiques du vol, par exemple pendant le décollage et l'atterrissage. Certaines compagnies aériennes déterminent parfois la phase critique à n'importe quel moment du vol, dans la mesure où l'avion vole au-dessous de 3050 m. Veuillez suivre les instructions propres à la compagnie aérienne quant à l'autorisation d'utiliser un appareil électronique personnel. SÉCURITÉ : Instructions relatives à la compatibilité électromagnétique (EMC, Electromagnetic Compatibility) Utilisez des câbles blindés afin de vous assurer de conserver la classification EMC adaptée à l'environnement donné. Dell propose un câble pour les imprimantes utilisant le port parallèle. Si vous le souhaitez, vous pouvez commander un câble sur le site Web de Dell, à l'adresse suivante : www.dell.com. L'électricité statique peut endommager les composants électroniques internes de votre ordinateur. Pour éviter de tels dommages, déchargez l’électricité statique de votre corps avant de toucher tout composant électronique de votre ordinateur, comme par exemple, un module de mémoire. Il vous suffit pour cela de toucher une surface métallique non peinte sur le panneau d'entrée/sortie de l'ordinateur. AVERTISSEMENT : les cordons de ce produit et de ses accessoires contiennent des produits chimiques contenant du plomb, considéré par l'état de Californie comme un produit pouvant provoquer des malformations congénitales ou autres anomalies de ce genre. Lavez-vous les mains après avoir manipulé les cordons. Lors de l'utilisation de votre ordinateur Suivez les consignes de sécurité suivantes afin d'éviter d'endommager votre ordinateur : • Lorsque vous installez l'ordinateur pour travailler, placez-le sur une surface plane. • Lors de vos déplacements, ne faites pas enregistrer votre ordinateur en tant que bagage. Vous pouvez faire passer l'ordinateur dans un détecteur à rayons X, mais jamais dans un détecteur de métaux. Dans le cas d'une inspection manuelle, assurez-vous d'avoir une batterie chargée à disposition si vous devez allumer l'ordinateur. • Si vous êtes amené à voyager en ayant préalablement retiré l'unité de disque dur de l'ordinateur, veillez à envelopper l'unité dans un matériau non-conducteur, tel que du tissu ou du papier. Dans le cas d'une inspection manuelle, soyez prêt à installer l'unité de disque dur dans l'ordinateur. Vous pouvez faire passer l'unité de disque dur dans un détecteur à rayons X, mais jamais dans un détecteur de métaux. • Lorsque vous voyagez, ne placez jamais l'ordinateur dans un compartiment à bagages en hauteur, où il pourrait se déplacer. Évitez de laisser tomber votre ordinateur et de le soumettre à tout autre choc mécanique. • Protégez l'ordinateur, la batterie et l'unité de disque dur contre les risques liés à l'environnement, tels que les températures extrêmes, la surexposition à la lumière, la saleté, la poussière, la nourriture et les liquides. • Lorsque vous transportez votre ordinateur entre des environnements présentant d'importants écarts de température ou de taux d'humidité, une condensation peut se former sur ou dans l'ordinateur. Pour ne pas endommager l'ordinateur, patientez suffisamment pour que cette humidité s'évapore avant de l'utiliser. AVIS : Lorsque vous faites passer votre ordinateur d'un environnement froid à un environnement plus chaud ou inversement, laissez-lui le temps de s'acclimater à la température ambiante avant de l'allumer. • Lorsque vous débranchez un câble, tirez sur le connecteur ou sur la boucle prévue à cet effet, mais jamais sur le câble lui-même. Lorsque vous tirez sur le connecteur, maintenez-le correctement aligné afin d'éviter tout risque de torsion des broches. Par ailleurs, lorsque vous connectez un câble, assurez-vous au préalable que les connecteurs sont bien orientés et alignés.44 Guide des Informations Système www.dell.com | support.dell.com • Manipulez les composants avec précaution. Un composant, tel qu'un module de mémoire, doit être tenu par les bords et non par les broches. • Avant de retirer un module de mémoire de la carte système ou de débrancher un périphérique de l'ordinateur, éteignez l'ordinateur, débranchez le câble de l'adaptateur CA/CC, retirez toutes les batteries installées dans la baie de batterie ou la baie modulaire et attendez 5 secondes. Cette précaution permet d'éviter d'endommager la carte système. • Nettoyez l'écran avec un tissu propre et doux et de l'eau. Appliquez l'eau sur le chiffon, puis passez le chiffon sur l'écran toujours dans le même sens, de haut en bas. Retirez rapidement l'humidité de l'écran et séchez-le. Une exposition prolongée à l'humidité peut endommager l'écran. N'utilisez pas de nettoyant pour vitres sur l'écran. • Si l'ordinateur est mouillé ou endommagé, suivez les procédures décrites dans la section «Résolution des problèmes» du Guide d'utilisation. Si, après avoir effectué ces procédures, vous constatez que l'ordinateur ne fonctionne pas correctement, contactez Dell (pour obtenir les coordonnées du contact approprié, reportez-vous à la section «Obtention d'aide» du Guide d'utilisation). SÉCURITÉ : Conseils en ergonomie PRÉCAUTION : Une utilisation incorrecte ou prolongée du clavier peut provoquer des blessures. PRÉCAUTION : Une exposition prolongée devant l'écran peut occasionner des troubles de la vue. Pour un plus grand confort et une plus grande efficacité, observez les consignes ergonomiques de la section «Annexe» du Guide d'utilisation en ligne lors de l'installation et de l'utilisation de votre système informatique. Cet ordinateur portable n'a pas été conçu pour une utilisation prolongée au bureau. Pour une utilisation de ce type, il est recommandé de connecter un clavier externe. SÉCURITÉ : Intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur Avant de retirer ou d'installer des modules de mémoire, des cartes Mini PCI ou des modems, suivez les étapes ci-après dans l'ordre indiqué. AVIS : Vous ne devez intervenir à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur que pour installer des modules de mémoire, une carte Mini PCI, un modem, une carte Bluetooth™ ou une batterie de réserve. AVIS : Avant de déconnecter un périphérique ou de retirer un module de mémoire, une carte Mini PCI, un modem, une carte Bluetooth ou une batterie de réserve, patientez 5 secondes après la mise hors tension de l'ordinateur, pour éviter d'endommager la carte système. 1 Éteignez l'ordinateur ainsi que tous les périphériques connectés. 2 Débranchez l'ordinateur et les périphériques de leur prise électrique afin de réduire le risque de blessure ou de choc. Déconnectez également les lignes téléphoniques ou de télécommunication de l'ordinateur. 3 Retirez la batterie principale de la baie de batterie et, si nécessaire, la batterie secondaire de la baie modulaire. 4 Raccordez-vous à la masse en touchant une surface métallique non peinte à l'arrière de l'ordinateur. 5 Pendant votre travail à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur, touchez régulièrement la surface métallique non peinte de l'ordinateur pour dissiper toute électricité statique qui risquerait d'endommager les composants. SÉCURITÉ : Protection contre les décharges électrostatiques L'électricité statique peut endommager les composants électroniques internes de votre ordinateur. Pour éviter de tels dommages, déchargez l’électricité statique de votre corps avant de toucher tout composant électronique de votre ordinateur, comme par exemple, un module de mémoire. Pour ce faire, vous pouvez toucher une surface métallique non peinte à l'arrière de l'ordinateur.Guide des Informations Système 45 Tandis que vous continuez à travailler à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur, pensez à toucher régulièrement une surface métallique non peinte à l'arrière de l'ordinateur pour vous débarrasser de la charge statique accumulée par votre corps. Vous pouvez également prendre les mesures suivantes pour éviter les dommages dus aux décharges électrostatiques : • Lorsque vous déballez un composant sensible à l'électricité statique de son carton d'emballage, ne le retirez pas de son emballage antistatique avant d'être prêt à l'installer sur votre ordinateur. Juste avant d'ôter l'emballage antistatique, veillez à décharger votre corps de son électricité statique. • Quand vous transportez un composant sensible, placez-le d'abord dans un emballage ou une boîte antistatique. • Manipulez tous les composants sensibles dans une zone antistatique. Si possible, utilisez des tapis antistatiques sur le sol et sur votre plan de travail. SÉCURITÉ : Retrait de la batterie L'ordinateur utilise une batterie au lithium-ion et une pile bouton au lithium. Pour obtenir des instructions sur le remplacement de la batterie au lithium-ion de votre ordinateur, reportez-vous à la section «Retrait d'une batterie» à la page 54. La pile bouton au lithium est une pile longue durée et il est fort possible que vous n'ayez jamais besoin de la remplacer. Si vous êtes toutefois amené à la remplacer, reportez-vous à la section «Retrait et installation d'une batterie de réserve» à la page 55. Ne jetez pas la batterie avec les ordures ménagères. Contactez le service municipal de traitement des déchets pour connaître l'adresse du site de dépôt de batteries le plus proche de votre domicile.46 Guide des Informations Système www.dell.com | support.dell.com Recherche d'informations concernant l'ordinateur Que recherchez-vous ? Cherchez ici • Un programme de diagnostic pour mon ordinateur • Pilotes pour mon ordinateur • Documentation concernant mon ordinateur • Documentation concernant mon appareil CD Drivers and Utilities (Pilotes et utilitaires) (également appelé ResourceCD) La documentation et les pilotes sont déjà installés sur votre ordinateur. Vous pouvez utiliser ce CD pour réinstaller les pilotes, exécuter Dell Diagnostics, ou accéder à la documentation. Des fichiers readme (lisez-moi) peuvent être inclus sur votre CDROM afin de fournir des mises à jour de dernière minute concernant des modifications techniques apportées à votre système ou des informations de référence destinées aux techniciens ou aux utilisateurs expérimentés. • Comment installer mon ordinateur • Informations sur les garanties • Consignes de sécurité Guide des Informations Système Dell™ Site Web «Dell Premier Support» (Support Premier de Dell) REMARQUE : Ce document est disponible sous forme de PDF à l'adresse support.dell.com.Guide des Informations Système 47 • Comment retirer et remplacer des pièces • Spécifications techniques • Comment configurer les paramètres du système • Comment identifier et résoudre des problèmes Guide d'utilisation Centre d'aide et de support Microsoft® Windows® XP 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Aide et support. 2 Cliquez sur Guides d'utilisation du système, puis sur Guides d'utilisation. Windows 2000 Double-cliquez sur l'icône Guide d'utilisation sur le bureau de votre ordinateur. • Numéro de service et code de service express • Étiquette de licence Microsoft Windows Numéro de service et licence Microsoft Windows Ces étiquettes sont situées sur votre ordinateur. •Utilisez le numéro de service pour identifier votre ordinateur lorsque vous accédez au site Web support.dell.com ou lorsque vous appelez le service de support technique. • Entrez le code de service express pour orienter votre appel lorsque vous contactez le service de support technique. Le code de service express n'est pas disponible dans tous les pays. • Utilisez le numéro situé sur l'étiquette de licence Microsoft Windows lorsque que vous réinstallez votre système d'exploitation. • Pilotes les plus récents pour mon ordinateur • Réponses aux questions concernant le service et le support technique • Discussions en ligne avec le support technique et d'autres utilisateurs • Documentation sur mon ordinateur S i t e W e b d e s u p p o r t d e D e l l — support.dell.com Le site Web de support technique de Dell fournit plusieurs outils en ligne, notamment : • Solutions — Conseils et astuces de dépannage, articles de techniciens et formation en ligne • Communauté — Discussion en ligne avec d'autres clients Dell • Mises à niveau — Informations sur les mises à niveau des composants, comme la mémoire, l'unité de disque dur et le système d'exploitation • Service clientèle — Contacts, commandes, garanties et informations de réparation • Téléchargements— Pilotes, correctifs et mises à jour logicielles • Références — Documentation de l'ordinateur, caractéristiques des produits et documents techniques Que recherchez-vous ? Cherchez ici48 Guide des Informations Système www.dell.com | support.dell.com • Historique de l'état et du support de l'appel de service • Les principaux problèmes techniques • Les questions les plus fréquentes • Les téléchargements de fichiers • Informations détaillées sur la configuration de l'ordinateur • Contrat de service de l'ordinateur Site Web Support Premier de Dell — premiersupport.dell.com Le site Web Dell Premier Support est conçu pour les grandes entreprises, les gouvernements et les institutions éducatives. Ce site Web n'est peut-être pas disponible dans toutes les régions. • Comment utiliser Windows XP • Documentation sur mon ordinateur • Documentation pour les périphériques (pour un modem, par exemple) Centre d'aide et de support de Windows 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Aide et support. 2Tapez un mot ou une expression qui décrit votre problème, puis cliquez sur l'icône en forme de flèche. 3 Cliquez sur la rubrique qui décrit votre problème. 4 Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran. • Comment réinstaller mon système d'exploitation CD du système d'exploitation Le système d'exploitation est déjà installé sur votre ordinateur. Pour réinstaller le système d'exploitation, utilisez le CD Système d'exploitation. Reportez-vous au Guide d'utilisation pour connaître la procédure de réinstallation du système d'exploitation. Une fois le système d'exploitation réinstallé, utilisez le CD Pilotes et Utilitaires pour réinstaller les pilotes des périphériques accompagnant votre ordinateur. L'étiquette de la clé du produit se trouve sur l'ordinateur. Que recherchez-vous ? Cherchez iciGuide des Informations Système 49 Installation de votre ordinateur PRÉCAUTION : Avant d'effectuer l'une des procédures de cette section, suivez les consignes de sécurité indiquées au début de ce document. 1 Déballez la boîte d'accessoires. 2 Mettez de côté le contenu de la boîte d'accessoires ; vous en aurez besoin ultérieurement pour réaliser l'installation. Cette boîte contient également la documentation utilisateur et tout autre logiciel ou matériel supplémentaire (cartes PC, lecteurs, batteries, etc.) que vous avez commandés. 3 Reliez l'adaptateur secteur au connecteur de l'adaptateur secteur de l'ordinateur et à la prise secteur.50 Guide des Informations Système www.dell.com | support.dell.com 4 Pour mettre l'ordinateur sous tension, ouvrez le moniteur et appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation. REMARQUE : Ne raccordez pas l'ordinateur à la station d'accueil tant qu'il n'a pas été mis sous tension et arrêté au moins une fois. Bouton d'alimentationGuide des Informations Système 51 À propos de votre ordinateur Vue avant Écran Dispositif de blocage de l'écran Haut-parleurs Clavier Voyants d'état du clavier Tablette tactile Boutons de la tablette tactile Bouton d'alimentation Voyants d'état du périphérique52 Guide des Informations Système www.dell.com | support.dell.com Vue de gauche Vue de droite Connecteur IEEE 1394 Emplacement pour carte PC Capteur infrarouge Connecteurs audio (2) Emplacement pour câble de sécurité Emplacement pour câble de sécurité Baie modulaire Dispositif de verrouillage du périphériqueGuide des Informations Système 53 Vue arrière PRÉCAUTION : Ne bloquez pas et n'insérez pas d'objets dans les entrées d'air de l'ordinateur et évitez toute accumulation de poussière. Ne placez pas l'ordinateur dans un environnement peu aéré, tel qu'une mallette fermée, lorsque celui-ci fonctionne. Le manque de ventilation risquerait de provoquer un incendie ou d'endommager l'ordinateur. Vue de dessous Connecteurs USB (2) Connecteur de sortie Téléviseur S-vidéo Connecteur modem (RJ-11) (en option) Connecteur parallèle Connecteur vidéo Connecteur série Connecteur d'adaptateur CA/CC Entrées d'air Connecteur réseau (RJ-45) Cache du module de mémoire Batterie Connecteur de station d'accueil Capot de carte Mini PCI Dispositif d'extraction de la baie de batterie Unité de disque dur Ventilateur Indicateur de charge de la batterie54 Guide des Informations Système www.dell.com | support.dell.com Retrait de la batterie Pour en savoir plus sur le retrait de la batterie secondaire, reportez-vous à la section «Utilisation de la baie modulaire» du Guide d'utilisation en ligne. PRÉCAUTION : Avant d'effectuer ces procédures, éteignez votre ordinateur, débranchez-le de la prise secteur et déconnectez le modem de la prise jack téléphonique murale. AVIS : Si vous souhaitez remplacer la batterie alors que l'ordinateur est en mode Veille, vous disposez de 90 secondes pour effectuer cette opération. Une fois ce délai écoulé, l'ordinateur s'arrête et toutes les données non enregistrées sont définitivement perdues. 1 Assurez-vous que l'ordinateur est éteint, débranché de la prise secteur et de la prise jack téléphonique murale. 2 Si l'ordinateur est connecté (amarré) à une station d'accueil, déconnectez-le. Pour obtenir des instructions, reportez-vous à la documentation qui accompagne la station d'accueil. 3 Faites glisser et maintenez le dispositif d'extraction de la baie de batterie, situé en bas de l'ordinateur, puis retirez la batterie de la baie.Guide des Informations Système 55 Retrait et installation d'une batterie de réserve 1 Retirez la batterie. 2 Retirez le capot du compartiment de la batterie de réserve. 3 Faites glisser la batterie de réserve vers le connecteur et retirez-la de son compartiment. 4 Débranchez le câble de batterie de réserve du connecteur. Câble de batterie de réserve Connecteur Batterie de réserve56 Guide des Informations Système www.dell.com | support.dell.com 5 Branchez le câble de la batterie de réserve au connecteur situé dans le compartiment de cette batterie. 6 Placez la batterie de réserve dans le compartiment, puis remettez le capot du compartiment en place. Installation d'une batterie Faites glisser la batterie dans la baie jusqu'à ce que le dispositif de verrouillage s'enclenche. Pour en savoir plus sur l'installation de la batterie secondaire, reportez-vous à la section «Utilisation de la baie modulaire» du Guide d'utilisation en ligne.Guide des Informations Système 57 Dell Diagnostics PRÉCAUTION : Avant d'effectuer l'une des procédures de cette section, suivez les consignes de sécurité indiquées au début de ce document. Quand utiliser Dell Diagnostics Si vous rencontrez un problème avec l'ordinateur, effectuez les vérifications indiquées dans la section «Résolution des problèmes» du Guide d'utilisation et exécutez Dell Diagnostics avant de contacter Dell pour obtenir une assistance technique. Nous vous recommandons d'imprimer ces procédures avant de commencer. AVIS : Dell Diagnostics ne fonctionne que sur les ordinateurs Dell™. Dell Diagnostics se trouve dans une partition cachée (utilitaire de diagnostics) de votre unité de disque dur. REMARQUE : Si aucune image ne s'affiche sur l'écran de l'ordinateur, contactez Dell (pour obtenir les coordonnées du contact approprié, reportez-vous à la section «Obtention d'aide» du Guide d'utilisation). 1 Éteignez votre ordinateur. 2 Si l'ordinateur est connecté (amarré) à une station d'accueil, déconnectez-le. Pour obtenir des instructions, reportez-vous à la documentation qui accompagne la station d'accueil. 3 Connectez l'ordinateur à une prise électrique. 4 Allumez l'ordinateur. Lorsque le logo DELL™ apparaît, appuyez immédiatement sur . REMARQUE : Si rien ne s'affiche sur l'écran, maintenez le bouton enfoncé et appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation de l'ordinateur pendant environ 5 secondes pour lancer Dell Diagnostics. L'ordinateur lance automatiquement l'évaluation du système avant initialisation. REMARQUE : Si un message, indiquant qu'aucune partition de l'utilitaire Diagnostics n'a été trouvée, s'affiche, exécutez Dell Diagnostics à partir du CD Pilotes et Utilitaires. Si vous attendez trop longtemps et que le logo Microsoft® Windows® apparaît, patientez jusqu'à ce que le bureau de Windows s'affiche. Arrêtez ensuite l'ordinateur à l'aide du menu Démarrer et faites une autre tentative. 5 Lorsque la liste des périphériques d'amorçage s'affiche, sélectionnez Diagnostics et appuyez sur . L'ordinateur lance l'évaluation du système avant initialisation avec une série de diagnostics intégrés qui effectue un test préalable de la carte mère, du clavier, du disque dur et de l'écran. • Répondez à toutes les questions qui s'affichent pendant l'évaluation. • Si une défaillance de composant est détectée, l'ordinateur s'interrompt et émet un signal sonore. Pour arrêter l'évaluation et redémarrer le système d'exploitation, appuyez sur ; pour passer au test suivant, appuyez sur ; pour retester le composant défectueux, appuyez sur . 58 Guide des Informations Système www.dell.com | support.dell.com • Si des défaillances sont détectées pendant l'évaluation du système de préamorçage, notez le(s) code(s) d'erreur et contactez Dell (pour obtenir les coordonnées du contact approprié, reportez-vous à la section «Obtention d'aide» du Guide d'utilisation) avant de lancer Dell Diagnostics. Si l'évaluation du système se déroule sans problème, le message Booting Dell Diagnostic Utility Partition (Initialisation de la partition de l'utilitaire Dell Diagnostics) s'affiche. Press any key to continue (Appuyez sur une touche pour continuer). 6 Appuyez sur une touche pour démarrer Dell Diagnostics à partir de la partition Diagnostics de votre disque dur. 7 Lorsque le menu principal de Dell Diagnostics apparaît, sélectionnez le test à effectuer. Menu principal de Dell Diagnostics 1 Une fois Dell Diagnostics chargé et l'écran du menu principal affiché, cliquez sur le bouton correspondant à l'option souhaitée. 2 Si un problème survient pendant un test, un message indiquant le code d'erreur et une description du problème s'affiche. Notez le code d'erreur et la description du problème et suivez les instructions à l'écran. Si vous ne parvenez pas à résoudre le problème, contactez Dell (pour obtenir les coordonnées du contact approprié, reportez-vous à la section «Obtention d'aide» du Guide d'utilisation). REMARQUE : Le numéro de service de votre ordinateur s'affiche dans la partie supérieure de chaque écran de test. Lorsque vous contacterez le service technique de Dell, votre numéro de service vous sera demandé. Option Fonction Express Test (Test rapide) Exécute un test rapide des périphériques. Ce test dure généralement entre 10 et 20 minutes et n'exige pas d'action de votre part. Effectuez un test rapide pour améliorer la capacité de suivi du problème. Extended Test (Test approfondi) Exécute un test approfondi des périphériques. Ce test dure généralement une heure ou plus et vous demande de répondre régulièrement à des questions. Custom Test (Test personnalisé) Teste un périphérique spécifique. Vous pouvez personnaliser les tests à effectuer. Symptom Tree (Arborescence des symptômes) Répertorie les symptômes les plus couramment rencontrés et permet de sélectionner un test en fonction du symptôme du problème rencontré.Guide des Informations Système 59 3 Si vous effectuez un test à partir de l'option Test personnalisé ou Arborescence des symptômes, cliquez sur l'onglet approprié décrit dans le tableau suivant pour en savoir plus. 4 Lorsque les tests sont terminés, fermez l'écran test pour revenir à l'écran du menu principal. Pour quitter Dell Diagnostics et redémarrer l'ordinateur, fermez l'écran du menu principal. Onglet Fonction Résultats Affiche les résultats du test et les conditions d'erreur rencontrées. Erreurs Affiche les conditions d'erreur rencontrées, les codes d'erreur et la description du problème. Aide Décrit le test et peut indiquer les conditions requises pour exécuter le test. Configuration Affiche la configuration matérielle du périphérique sélectionné. Dell Diagnostics obtient les informations de configuration de tous les périphériques à partir de l'installation du système, de la mémoire et de divers tests internes, et les affiche dans la liste des périphériques située dans le volet gauche de l'écran. La liste des périphériques peut ne pas afficher les noms de tous les composants installés sur votre ordinateur ou de tous les périphériques reliés à celui-ci. Paramètres Vous permet de personnaliser le test en modifiant ses paramètres.60 Guide des Informations Système www.dell.com | support.dell.com Réglementations Une interférence électromagnétique (EMI - Electromagnetic Interference) est un signal ou une émission, véhiculé(e) dans l'espace libre ou par des conducteurs électriques ou de signaux, qui peut mettre en danger le fonctionnement d'une radionavigation ou autre service de sécurité, ou sérieusement dégrader, obstruer ou interrompre à maintes reprises un service de communications radio autorisé. Les services de communications radio incluent, de manière non limitative, les services de radiodiffusion commerciale AM/FM, la télévision, les services de téléphonie cellulaire, la radiodétection, le contrôle de la circulation aérienne, les récepteurs de radio messagerie et les systèmes GSM. Ces services autorisés, ainsi que les éléments rayonnants parasites involontaires tels que les dispositifs numériques, y compris les ordinateurs, contribuent à l'environnement électromagnétique. La compatibilité électromagnétique (EMC) est la capacité des éléments d'un équipement électronique à interagir correctement dans l'environnement électronique. Bien que cet ordinateur ait été conçu dans le respect de cette compatibilité et soit conforme aux seuils fixés en matière d'interférences électromagnétiques par l'organisme de réglementation, il n'y a aucune garantie concernant les interférences susceptibles de se produire sur une installation particulière. Si l'équipement crée effectivement des interférences avec des services de communications radio (ce qui peut être déterminé en l'éteignant et en l'allumant), l'utilisateur est encouragé à essayer de corriger ce phénomène en prenant l'une ou l'ensemble des mesures suivantes : • Changer l'orientation de l'antenne de réception. • Repositionner l'ordinateur en fonction du récepteur. • Éloigner l'ordinateur du récepteur. • Brancher l'ordinateur sur une autre prise, pour faire en sorte que l'ordinateur et le récepteur se trouvent sur différents circuits de dérivation. Si nécessaire, consultez un membre de l'équipe du support technique de Dell ou un technicien radio/télévision expérimenté pour des suggestions supplémentaires. Pour plus d'informations sur la réglementation, reportez-vous au Guide d'utilisation en ligne fourni avec l'ordinateur. Pour accéder au Guide d'utilisation, reportez-vous à la page 47.Guide des Informations Système 61 Garantie limitée et règle de retour Les produits matériels de marque Dell achetés au Canada sont couverts par une garantie limitée de 90 jours (lampes pour projecteurs Dell uniquement), d'un an, de deux ans, de trois ans ou de quatre ans. Pour savoir quelle garantie s'applique aux produits que vous avez achetés, consultez la facture qui les accompagne. Les sections suivantes décrivent la garantie limitée et la règle de retour en vigueur au Canada. Conditions de garantie limitée pour les produits matériels Dell (Canada seulement) Que couvre cette garantie limitée ? Cette garantie limitée couvre les vices de matériel et de fabrication éventuels pouvant affecter les produits matériels de marque Dell de —tout utilisateur final—, notamment les produits périphériques de marque Dell. Qu'est-ce qui n'est pas couvert par cette garantie limitée ? Cette garantie limitée ne couvre pas les éléments suivants : • Les logiciels, y compris le système d'exploitation et les logiciels ajoutés aux produits matériels Dell par notre système d'intégration d'entreprise ou le rechargement de logiciels. • Les produits et accessoires d'une marque autre que Dell et Provider Direct. • Les problèmes résultant de ce qui suit : – Causes externes : accident, utilisation abusive ou impropre, problèmes liés à l'alimentation électrique – Interventions non autorisées par Dell – Utilisation non conforme aux instructions du produit – Non-respect des instructions du produit ou non-exécution de l'entretien préventif exigé – Problèmes dus à l'utilisation d'accessoires, de pièces et de composants non fournis par Dell • Produits dont les numéros de service ou les numéros de série sont manquants ou incorrects • Produits qui n'ont pas été payés CETTE GARANTIE VOUS DONNE DES DROITS LÉGAUX SPÉCIFIQUES, AUXQUELS PEUVENT S'AJOUTER D'AUTRES DROITS, QUI VARIENT AU CAS PAR CAS (OU SELON LA PROVINCE). LA RESPONSABILITÉ DE DELL POUR LE FONCTIONNEMENT DÉFECTUEUX ET LES DÉFAUTS DU PRODUIT EST LIMITÉE À LA RÉPARATION OU AU REMPLACEMENT COMME INDIQUÉ DANS CE CONTRAT DE GARANTIE, SELON LES CONDITIONS DE LA PÉRIODE DE GARANTIE APPARAISSANT SUR VOTRE FICHE D'EXPÉDITION OU FACTURE. À L'EXCEPTION DES GARANTIES EXPRESSES FIGURANT DANS LE PRÉSENT CONTRAT DE GARANTIE, DELL REJETTE TOUTE AUTRE GARANTIE OU CONDITION EXPRESSE OU IMPLICITE, INCLUANT SANS RESTRICTION LES GARANTIES ET CONDITIONS IMPLICITES DE QUALITÉ OU D'ADAPTABILITÉ À UN USAGE PARTICULIER, STATUTAIRE OU AUTRE. CERTAINES PROVINCES NE RECONNAISSENT PAS D'EXCLUSION SUR DES GARANTIES OU CONDITIONS IMPLICITES, OU DE RESTRICTION EN CE QUI CONCERNE LA DURÉE D'UNE GARANTIE OU CONDITION IMPLICITE. AUQUEL CAS, LES EXCLUSIONS ET RESTRICTIONS PRÉCÉDENTES PEUVENT NE PAS S'APPLIQUER. NOUS DÉCLINONS TOUTE RESPONSABILITÉ, AU-DELÀ DES RECOURS INDIQUÉS DANS CETTE GARANTIE LIMITÉE OU POUR LES DOMMAGES PARTICULIERS, INDIRECTS, ACCIDENTELS OU INDUITS, Y COMPRIS POUR LA RESPONSABILITÉ DE RÉCLAMATIONS DE DOMMAGES D'UNE TIERCE PARTIE À VOTRE ENCONTRE, POUR LA NON-DISPONIBILITÉ D'UN PRODUIT OU POUR LA PERTE DE DONNÉES OU DE LOGICIEL, ET CE SANS RESTRICTION. NOTRE RESPONSABILITÉ SE LIMITE AU MONTANT QUE VOUS AVEZ PAYÉ POUR LE PRODUIT FAISANT L'OBJET D'UNE RÉCLAMATION. IL S'AGIT DU MONTANT MAXIMAL SOUMIS À LA RESPONSABILITÉ DE DELL. CERTAINES PROVINCES NE RECONNAISSENT PAS D'EXCLUSION OU DE RESTRICTION SUR LES DOMMAGES PARTICULIERS, INDIRECTS, SECONDAIRES OU INDUITS, AUQUEL CAS L'EXCLUSION OU LA RESTRICTION PRÉCÉDENTE PEUT NE PAS S'APPLIQUER.62 Guide des Informations Système www.dell.com | support.dell.com Quelle est la durée de cette garantie limitée ? Cette garantie limitée s'applique pendant la période indiquée sur votre fiche d'expédition ou facture, à l'exception de la garantie limitée des batteries Dell qui est valable un an seulement et de la garantie limitée des lampes de projecteurs Dell qui est réduite à 90 jours uniquement. La garantie limitée prend effet à la date inscrite sur la fiche d'expédition ou la facture. La période de garantie n'est pas étendue en cas de réparation ou de remplacement d'un produit ou de composants sous garantie. Dell peut modifier en toute discrétion les conditions et la disponibilité des garanties limitées, mais ces changements ne sont pas rétroactifs (c'est-à-dire que les conditions de la garantie en vigueur au moment de l'achat continueront de s'appliquer à votre achat). Que dois-je faire si j'ai besoin d'un service de garantie ? Avant que la garantie n'expire, appelez-nous au numéro correspondant à votre situation, comme indiqué dans le tableau ci-dessous. En outre, ayez à portée de main votre numéro de service ou numéro de commande Dell. Que fera Dell ? Au cours des 90 premiers jours de la garantie limitée de 90 jours et la première année de toutes les autres garanties limitées : Pour les 90 jours de la garantie limitée de 90 jours et la première année de toutes les autres garanties limitées, Dell effectuera la réparation de tous les produits de marque Dell présentant des défauts matériels ou de fabrication, qui lui seront renvoyés. Si nous ne parvenons pas à réparer le produit, nous le remplaçons par un produit comparable, neuf ou recyclé. Lorsque vous nous contactez, nous vous donnons un numéro d'autorisation de retour de matériel que vous devez joindre à votre retour. Vous devez nous retourner les produits dans leur emballage d'origine ou un équivalent, payer d'avance les frais d'expédition et assurer l'envoi des produits ou accepter les risques de perte ou de dommage pendant l'acheminement. Nous nous chargeons de vous retourner les produits réparés ou remplacés. Nous prenons à notre charge l'expédition des produits réparés ou remplacés si vous avez une adresse au Canada. Sinon, nous vous renverrons le produit contre paiement à réception. Si nous déterminons que le problème n'est pas couvert par la garantie, nous vous en avertissons et vous indiquons les solutions alternatives de service qui vous sont proposées moyennant des frais. REMARQUE : Avant de nous retourner le(s) produit(s), veillez à effectuer une sauvegarde des données présentes sur le(s) disque(s) dur(s) et sur n'importe quel autre périphérique de stockage. Supprimez toutes les informations confidentielles, propriétaires ou personnelles et retirez tous les supports amovibles, tels que les disquettes, CD-ROM ou cartes PC. Nous déclinons toute responsabilité en ce qui concerne vos informations confidentielles, propriétaires ou personnelles, et en cas de perte ou d'endommagement des données ou des supports amovibles. Utilisateurs particuliers, utilisateurs travaillant à domicile et petites entreprises : Canada seulement Support technique et service clientèle 1-800-847-4096 Entreprises de taille moyenne, grands comptes, gouvernement, domaines de l'éducation et de la santé, et revendeurs à valeur ajoutée : Support technique 1-800-387-5757 Service clientèle 1-800-326-9463 Gouvernement ou domaine de l'éducation, ou encore particuliers ayant acheté ce produit par le biais d'un programme d'achat par les employés : Support technique 1-800-387-5757 Service clientèle 1-800-326-9463 (poste 8221 pour les particuliers) Mémoire Dell 1-888-363-5150Guide des Informations Système 63 Au cours des années non écoulées suivant la première année de toutes les garanties limitées : Nous remplacerons toute pièce défectueuse par une pièce neuve ou réusinée, si nous estimons qu'elle a besoin d'être remplacée. Lorsque vous nous contactez, nous vous demandons de nous fournir un numéro de carte de crédit valide au moment où vous demandez le remplacement d'un composant, mais nous ne vous facturons pas le remplacement si vous nous retournez le composant d'origine dans les 30 jours qui suivent l'expédition. Si Dell ne reçoit pas la pièce originale dans les 30 jours, le prix standard courant de la pièce remplacée sera prélevé sur votre carte de crédit. Nous prenons à notre charge l'expédition du composant si vous avez une adresse au Canada. Sinon, nous vous renverrons le composant contre paiement à réception. Dell inclut également un emballage d'expédition préaffranchi avec chaque composant de rechange afin que vous renvoyiez le composant remplacé à Dell. REMARQUE : Avant de remplacer des pièces, veillez à effectuer une sauvegarde des données présentes sur le(s) disque(s) dur(s) et sur n'importe quel autre périphérique de stockage. Nous déclinons toute responsabilité en cas de perte ou d'endommagement des données. Que se passe-t-il si j'ai souscrit un contrat de service ? Si votre contrat de service a été passé avec Dell, le service vous sera proposé selon les conditions du contrat de service. Reportez-vous à ce contrat pour plus d'informations sur la façon de bénéficier du service. Les contrats de service Dell sont disponibles en ligne sur le site www.dell.ca ou en appelant le service clientèle au 1-800-847-4096. Si vous avez souscrit par notre intermédiaire un contrat de service avec l'un de nos fournisseurs de service tiers, reportez-vous à ce contrat (qui vous a été envoyé avec votre fiche d'expédition ou facture) pour plus d'informations sur la façon de bénéficier du service. Comment allez-vous réparer mon produit ? Dell utilise des composants neufs ou remis en état provenant de différents fabricants pour les réparations sous garantie et pour la fabrication de composants et de systèmes de remplacement. Les composants et systèmes recyclés sont des composants ou des systèmes qui ont été retournés à Dell et dont certains n'ont jamais été utilisés par le client. La qualité de tous les composants et systèmes est contrôlée et testée. Les composants et systèmes de remplacement fournis sont couverts par la garantie pour la période restante de la garantie limitée du produit que vous avez acheté. Dell est propriétaire de tous les composants retirés des produits réparés. Puis-je transférer la garantie limitée ? La garantie limitée sur les systèmes peut être transférée si son propriétaire actuel transfère également la propriété du système et enregistre le transfert auprès de Dell. La garantie limitée sur la mémoire Dell ne peut pas être transférée. Vous pouvez enregistrer votre transfert depuis le site Web de Dell : • Dans le cas d'ordinateurs achetés au Canada (transferts à l'intérieur du pays) et pour effectuer un transfert d'un client à un autre, allez à l'adresse www.dell.ca/ca/en/gen/topics/segtopic_ccare_nav_013_ccare.htm • Pour les transferts à l'étranger (en dehors du pays d'achat d'origine), allez à l'adressewww.dell.com/us/en/biz/topics/sbtopic_ccare_nav_016_ccare.htm Si vous ne disposez pas d'accès à Internet, appelez Dell au 1-800-847-4096 (pour les particuliers) ou au 1-800-326-9463 (pour les clients des entreprises et administrations). Règle de retour «Satisfait ou remboursé» (Canada seulement) En qualité de client et utilisateur final ayant acheté de nouveaux produits directement à Dell, vous êtes en droit de les retourner à Dell dans un délai de 30 jours maximum après la date de réception des produits pour un remboursement ou un avoir équivalent au prix d'achat. En qualité de client et utilisateur final ayant acheté des produits reconditionnés ou recyclés à Dell, vous êtes en droit de les retourner dans un délai de 14 jours à compter de la date indiquée sur votre fiche d'expédition ou facture pour un remboursement ou un avoir équivalent au prix d'achat. Dans les deux cas, un montant de 15 %, pour restockage, sera déduit du montant du remboursement ou de l'avoir indiqué sur votre fiche d'expédition ou facture, et les frais d'expédition et de manutention ne vous seront pas remboursés, sauf avis contraire légal Si vous avez acheté nos produits en tant que société liée à Dell par un contrat écrit, les termes stipulés dans ce contrat au sujet du retour des produits peuvent différer de ceux spécifiés par la règle de retour. 64 Guide des Informations Système www.dell.com | support.dell.com Pour retourner les produits, vous devez appeler le Service Clientèle de Dell au 1-800-847-4096 qui vous fournira un numéro d'autorisation de retour pour crédit. Afin d'accélérer la procédure de remboursement ou d'avoir, Dell attend que vous lui renvoyiez les produits dans leur emballage d'origine dans les 5 jours suivant l'attribution d'un numéro d'autorisation de retour pour crédit. Vous devez également payer d'avance les frais d'expédition et assurer l'envoi ou accepter les risques de perte ou de dommage pendant l'acheminement. Vous ne pouvez renvoyer le logiciel pour un remboursement ou un avoir que si l'emballage scellé contenant les disquettes ou les CD-ROM n'a pas été ouvert. Les produits renvoyés doivent être comme neufs, et tous les guides, disquettes, CD-ROM, cordons d'alimentation et autres accessoires compris avec le produit doivent être renvoyés avec celui-ci. Les clients désirant renvoyer pour remboursement ou avoir, des logiciels ou un système d'exploitation installé par Dell, doivent retourner le système dans son intégralité, avec tous les supports et la documentation inclus dans la livraison d'origine. La règle de retour «Satisfait ou remboursé» ne s'applique pas aux produits de stockage de Dell | EMC. Elle ne s'applique pas non plus aux produits achetés par l'intermédiaire du service de vente de logiciels et périphériques Dell. Pour ces produits, reportez-vous plutôt à la règle de retour alors en vigueur des logiciels et périphériques Dell (consultez la section suivante, «Logiciels et périphériques Dell (Canada seulement)»). Logiciels et périphériques Dell (Canada seulement) Produits logiciels et périphériques tiers Tout comme les autres revendeurs de logiciels et périphériques, Dell ne garantit pas les produits tiers. Les produits logiciels et périphériques tiers sont uniquement couverts par les garanties offertes par le fabricant ou le revendeur initial de ces produits. Les garanties de fabricants tiers varient d'un produit à l'autre. Consultez la documentation de votre produit pour obtenir des informations spécifiques à la garantie. Contactez également le fabricant ou le revendeur si vous souhaitez des informations supplémentaires. Comme Dell propose un grand choix de produits logiciels et périphériques, il nous est impossible de vérifier et de garantir de manière spécifique que tous les produits que nous proposons fonctionnent avec tout ou partie des différents modèles d'ordinateurs Dell, mais aussi de vérifier et de garantir que tous les produits que nous vendons fonctionnent correctement sur les centaines de marques d'ordinateurs disponibles aujourd'hui. Si vous avez des questions relatives à la compatibilité d'un produit, nous vous conseillons vivement de contacter directement le fabricant ou le revendeur à qui vous avez acheté le produit logiciel ou périphérique tiers. Périphériques de marque Dell Dell offre une garantie limitée pour ses nouveaux produits périphériques (produits pour lesquels Dell est fabricant), tels que les moniteurs, les batteries, la mémoire, les stations d'accueil et les projecteurs. Pour déterminer quelle garantie limitée s'applique au produit que vous avez acheté, reportez-vous à la fiche d'expédition ou facture Dell et/ou à la documentation qui accompagnait votre produit. Vous trouverez des descriptions des garanties limitées Dell dans les sections précédentes. Règle de retour Si, en qualité de client et utilisateur final, vous avez acheté des produits logiciels et périphériques Dell directement à une société Dell, vous êtes en droit de retourner à Dell ces produits, à l'état neuf, dans un délai de 30 jours à compter de la date figurant sur la fiche d'expédition ou la facture pour un remboursement équivalent au prix d'achat des produits si ceux-ci ont déjà été payés. Ce remboursement ne comprend aucun frais d'expédition et de gestion figurant sur votre fiche d'expédition ou facture ; ces frais sont à votre charge. Pour retourner les produits, vous devez appeler le Service Clientèle de Dell au 1-800-387-5759 qui vous fournira un numéro d'autorisation de retour pour crédit. Vous devez renvoyer les produits logiciels et périphériques à Dell dans leur emballage d'origine (qui doit être comme neuf), payer d'avance les frais d'expédition et assurer l'envoi ou accepter les risques de perte ou de dommage pendant l'acheminement. Pour qu'un remboursement ou un remplacement soit possible, les produits renvoyés doivent être comme neufs, les logiciels ne doivent pas être ouverts et tous les guides, disquettes, CD-ROM, câbles d'alimentation et autres accessoires compris avec le produit doivent être renvoyés avec lui. Guide des Informations Système 65 Déclaration de garantie Intel® réservée aux processeurs Pentium® et Celeron® (États-Unis et Canada uniquement) Intel’s Three Year Limited Warranty Limited Warranty Intel warrants that its family of Pentium® and Celeron® processors, if properly used and installed, will be free from defects in materials and workmanship and will substantially conform to Intel’s publicly available specifications for a period of three (3) years after the date the Pentium or Celeron processor was purchased (whether purchased separately or as part of a computer system). If the Pentium or Celeron processor, which is the subject of this Limited Warranty, fails during the warranty period for reasons covered by this Limited Warranty, Intel, at its option, will: • REPAIR the Pentium or Celeron processor by means of hardware and/or software; OR • REPLACE the Pentium or Celeron processor with another Pentium or Celeron processor; OR if Intel is unable to repair or replace the particular Pentium or Celeron processor, • REFUND the then-current value of the Pentium or Celeron processor. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY, AND ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES THAT MAY EXIST UNDER STATE LAW, APPLY ONLY TO THE ORIGINAL PURCHASER OF THE PENTIUM OR CELERON PROCESSOR, OR PENTIUM OR CELERON PROCESSOR-BASED COMPUTER AND LAST ONLY FOR AS LONG AS SUCH PURCHASER CONTINUES TO OWN THE PROCESSOR. Extent of Limited Warranty Intel does not warrant that your Pentium or Celeron processor will be free from design defects or errors known as "errata." Current characterized errata are available upon request. This limited warranty is for purchasers in the United States and Canada only. The limited warranty does not cover any costs relating to removal or replacement of any Pentium or Celeron processors that are soldered or otherwise permanently affixed to your system’s motherboard. This limited warranty does not cover damages due to external causes, including accident, problems with electrical power, usage not in accordance with product instructions, misuse, neglect, alteration, repair, improper installation, or improper testing. How to Obtain Warranty Service To obtain warranty service for your Pentium or Celeron processor, you may contact your computer system manufacturer in accordance with its instructions, or you may contact Intel. To request warranty service from Intel, you should call Intel at 1-800-628-8686 during the warranty period during normal business hours (Pacific Time), excluding holidays. Please be prepared to provide: (1) your name, address, and telephone numbers; (2) proof of purchase; (3) this Intel warranty card; (4) a description of the computer system including the brand and model; and (5) an explanation of the problem. [Note: The Customer Service Representative may need additional information from you depending on the nature of the problem.] The replacement processor is warranted under this written warranty and is subject to the same limitations and exclusions for the remainder of the original warranty period or one (1) year, whichever is longer. WARRANTY LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS THESE WARRANTIES REPLACE ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. INTEL MAKES NO EXPRESS WARRANTIES BEYOND THOSE STATED HERE. INTEL DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. SOME LAWS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES SO THIS LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IF THESE LAWS APPLY, THEN ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD. NO WARRANTIES APPLY AFTER THAT PERIOD. SOME LAWS DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO THIS LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY INTEL’S RESPONSIBILITY UNDER THIS, OR ANY OTHER WARRANTY, IMPLIED OR EXPRESS, IS LIMITED TO REPAIR, REPLACEMENT OR REFUND, AS SET FORTH ABOVE. THESE REMEDIES ARE THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES FOR ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY. INTEL IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY OR UNDER ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOST PROFITS, DOWNTIME, GOODWILL, DAMAGE TO OR REPLACEMENT OF EQUIPMENT AND PROPERTY, AND ANY COSTS OF RECOVERING, REPROGRAMMING, OR REPRODUCING ANY PROGRAM OR DATA STORED IN OR USED WITH A SYSTEM CONTAINING YOUR PENTIUM PROCESSOR. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. THE LIMITED WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS THAT VARY FROM JURISDICTION TO JURISDICTION.66 Guide des Informations Système www.dell.com | support.dell.com Intel Pentium® and Celeron® Processors are backed by a three-year limited warranty. Please refer to the reverse side of this card for complete warranty details. Intel’s Commitment to Quality Intel is committed to producing the highest quality processors available. That’s why we have hundreds of people dedicated to continuously improve our design, manufacturing, and testing technology. We put every one of our Pentium® and Celeron® processors through a rigorous battery of tests during the design and manufacturing processes. To verify that the new chip will correctly run the software written for Intel Architecture processors, a team of Intel engineers is dedicated to compatibility testing. In a state-of-art lab, this group runs an extensive set of operating systems, applications, network tests and stress tests repeatedly to ensure that the processor is compatible with representative software. Just as importantly, we work with hardware and software companies in the computer industry to ensure that our processors are compatible with their products. Additionally, a sampling of Intel processors are subjected to a rigorous "burn-in" test whereby the chip is operated at higher-than-normal temperatures and voltages. During this burn-in period, the processor experiences the equivalent of weeks of normal usage. These units are monitored for failures as part of our ongoing quality assurance process. As a result, today’s microprocessors from Intel are among the most reliable components in computers. What are "Errata"? Exhaustive product testing can highlight differences between the actual behavior of the microprocessor and its specifications. Sometimes the discrepancies are caused by a design defect or error, which we call errata. Rigorous validation identifies most errata during the development of the processor, but we do detect additional errata during the life cycle of a microprocessor. When an erratum is identified, our engineers work to characterize it and find a solution. We work with system designers and software developers to ensure that the discrepancy does not affect their products. If necessary, special software or hardware solutions (sometimes known as "work arounds") are implemented in the system design to prevent computer users from encountering the problem. Errata may then be corrected in future revisions of the microprocessor. No microprocessor is perfect, and Intel recognizes that some consumers want to know about any errata, whether or not the errata affect them. Intel makes documentation of all characterized Pentium and Celeron processor errata publicly available through our Technical Documentation Service. At Intel, our goal is to make every computer user satisfied with his or her Pentium or Celeron processor. Should you have any questions, comments or concerns about your Intel microprocessor, please call us at 1-800-628-8686. ©1997, 1998 Intel Corporation. All rights reserved.www.dell.com | support.dell.com Dell™ Latitude™ D505 Series Guia de informações do sistema Modelo PP10LNotas, avisos e advertências NOTA: NOTA indica informações importantes para utilizar melhor o computador. AVISO: AVISO indica riscos para o hardware ou riscos de perda de dados e fornece informações sobre como evitar o problema. ADVERTÊNCIA: ADVERTÊNCIA indica um potencial de danos ao equipamento, de lesões corporais ou de morte. Abreviações e acrônimos Para obter uma lista completa de abreviações e acrônimos, consulte o Guia do usuário (dependendo do sistema operacional, clique duas vezes no ícone do Guia do usuário na área de trabalho, ou clique no botão Iniciar, clique em Centro de ajuda e suporte e clique em Guias do usuário e do sistema). Se você adquiriu o computador Dell™ série n, as referências deste documento a sistemas operacionais Microsoft® Windows® não são aplicáveis. ____________________ As informações contidas neste documento estão sujeitas a alterações sem aviso prévio. © 2003 Dell Inc. Todos os direitos reservados. Qualquer forma de reprodução deste produto sem a permissão por escrito da Dell Inc. é estritamente proibida. Marcas comerciais utilizadas no texto: Dell, o logotipo da DELL, Truemobile e Latitude são marcas comerciais da Dell Inc.; Intel, Pentium, e Celeron são marcas registradas da Intel Corporation; Microsoft e Windows são marcas registradas da Microsoft Corporation; Bluetooth é marca comercial da Bluetooth SIG, Inc. e é utilizada pela Dell Inc., sob licença. Outras marcas e nomes comerciais podem ser utilizados neste documento em referência às entidades que reivindicam a posse dessas marcas e nomes ou seus produtos. A Dell Inc. declara que não tem interesse de propriedade sobre marcas e nomes de terceiros. Modelo PP10L Outubro de 2003 N/P R1189 Rev. A01Índice 69 Índice ADVERTÊNCIA: Instruções de segurança . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 SEGURANÇA: Geral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 SEGURANÇA: Alimentação . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 SEGURANÇA: Bateria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 SEGURANÇA: Viagem de avião . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 SEGURANÇA: Instruções de EMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Ao usar o computador . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 SEGURANÇA: Hábitos ergonômicos para o uso do computador . . . . . 74 SEGURANÇA: Ao trabalhar dentro do computador . . . . . . . . . . . 74 SEGURANÇA: Proteção contra descargas eletrostáticas . . . . . . . . 74 SEGURANÇA: Como descartar a bateria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Como encontrar informações para o computador . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Como configurar o computador. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Sobre o seu computador . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Vista frontal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Vista esquerda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Vista direita. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Vista traseira . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Vista inferior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Como remover a bateria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Como remover e instalar a bateria de reserva. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Como instalar a bateria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Dell Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Quando utilizar o Dell Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Avisos de normalização . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Garantia limitada e política de devolução . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Termo de Garantia Contratual – Brasil – Garantia Oferecida pela Dell ao Usuário Final – 1º ano . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9170 ÍndiceManual de informações do sistema 71 ADVERTÊNCIA: Instruções de segurança Use as diretrizes de segurança a seguir para ajudar a garantir sua própria segurança pessoal e para proteger o computador e o ambiente de trabalho contra danos potenciais. SEGURANÇA: Geral • Não tente fazer manutenção no computador por sua própria conta, a menos que você seja um técnico qualificado. Siga sempre as instruções de instalação. • Se você usar uma extensão com o adaptador CA, verifique se a corrente total dos produtos conectados à extensão não excede a corrente nominal da extensão (em Amperes). • Não introduza objetos nas aberturas de ventilação ou em qualquer outra abertura do computador. Esse procedimento pode provocar incêndio ou choque elétrico por curto-circuitos de componentes internos. • Não armazene o computador ligado em ambientes com pouca ventilação, como a bolsa de transporte ou uma pasta fechada. Isso pode danificar o computador ou causar incêndio. • Mantenha o computador afastado de radiadores e fontes de calor. Não obstrua as passagens de ar. Não coloque papéis soltos embaixo do computador; não coloque o computador em armários embutidos fechados, sobre camas, sofás ou tapetes. • Coloque o adaptador CA em uma área ventilada, como em cima de uma mesa ou no chão, quando for utilizá-lo para operar o computador ou carregar a bateria. Não cubra o adaptador CA com papéis ou outros itens que reduzam a ventilação. Além disso, não utilize o adaptador CA dentro da bolsa de transporte. • O adaptador CA pode ficar quente durante a operação normal do computador. Tenha cuidado ao manusear o adaptador durante ou imediatamente depois de sua operação. • Não deixe o computador portátil funcionando com a base apoiada diretamente sobre a pele por longos períodos de tempo. A temperatura superficial da base aumentará durante a operação normal (principalmente quando o computador estiver sendo alimentado por CA). O contato contínuo com a pele exposta pode provocar desconforto ou, eventualmente, queimaduras. • Não utilize o computador em ambientes úmidos, como próximo a banheiras, pias ou piscinas, ou em salas subterrâneas úmidas. • Se o computador tiver um modem integrado ou opcional (placa de PC), desconecte o cabo do modem, se uma tempestade com raios estiver se aproximando, para evitar o risco remoto de choque elétrico causado por raios através da linha telefônica. • Para evitar o risco potencial de choque elétrico, não conecte ou desconecte nenhum cabo nem execute a manutenção ou a reconfiguração deste produto durante tempestades. Não utilize o computador durante tempestades com raios, a menos que todos os cabos tenham sido desconectados e o computador esteja operando com a bateria. • Se o computador tiver um modem, o cabo deste modem deverá ser no mínimo 26 AWG e ter um plugue modular RJ-11 em conformidade com a FCC. • Antes de abrir a tampa do módulo de memória ou a tampa da placa Mini PCI na parte inferior do computador, desconecte todos os cabos das tomadas elétricas e desconecte o cabo do telefone. • Se o computador tiver tanto um conector RJ-11 de modem como um conector RJ-45 de rede, que são parecidos, verifique se o cabo de telefone está no conector RJ-11, não no conector RJ-45. • As placas de PC podem ficar muito quentes durante a operação normal. Tenha cuidado ao remover as placas de PC depois de um período de operação contínua. • Antes de limpar o computador, desconecte-o da tomada. Limpe o computador com um pano macio umedecido em água. Não use limpadores líquidos ou em aerossol que possam conter substâncias inflamáveis.72 Manual de informações do sistema www.dell.com | support.dell.com SEGURANÇA: Alimentação • Utilize somente o adaptador CA fornecido pela Dell e aprovado para ser utilizado com este computador. A utilização de um outro tipo de adaptador CA pode provocar incêndio ou explosão. • Antes de conectar o computador a uma tomada elétrica, verifique a tensão do adaptador CA para garantir que a tensão e a freqüência necessárias correspondam à fonte de energia disponível. • Para remover o computador de todas as fontes de energia, desligue o computador, desconecte o adaptador CA da tomada elétrica e remova todas as baterias instaladas no compartimento de bateria ou no compartimento de módulos. • Para ajudar a evitar choque elétrico, conecte o adaptador CA e os cabos de alimentação do dispositivo a fontes de alimentação adequadamente aterradas. Esses cabos de alimentação podem ser equipados com plugues de três pinos para fornecer uma conexão aterrada. Não use plugues adaptadores nem remova o pino de aterramento do cabo de alimentação. Se utilizar um cabo de alimentação de extensão, utilize o tipo adequado, ou seja o de dois pinos ou o de três pinos, para que ele se adapte ao cabo de alimentação do adaptador CA. • Verifique se não há nada em cima do cabo de alimentação do adaptador CA e se o cabo não se encontra em local onde alguém possa tropeçar ou pisar sobre ele. • Se você estiver utilizando uma régua de energia com várias tomadas, tenha cuidado ao conectar o cabo de alimentação do adaptador CA à régua de energia. Algumas réguas de energia podem permitir a inserção incorreta do plugue. A inserção incorreta do plugue de alimentação pode causar dano permanente ao computador e risco de choque elétrico e/ou de incêndio. Verifique se o pino de aterramento do plugue de força está inserido no contato de aterramento correspondente da régua de energia. SEGURANÇA: Bateria • Utilize somente módulos de bateria Dell™ que sejam aprovados para utilização com este computador. A utilização de outros tipos pode aumentar o risco de incêndio ou explosão. • Não carregue baterias no bolso ou na bolsa, ou em outro local onde objetos de metal (como chaves ou clipes de papel) possam provocar curto-circuitos nos terminais da bateria. O fluxo de corrente excessiva pode provocar temperaturas extremamente altas e pode resultar em danos às baterias ou provocar incêndios ou queimaduras. • A bateria apresenta um risco de queimaduras, se for manuseada inadequadamente. Não a desmonte. Manuseie uma bateria danificada ou com vazamento com o máximo cuidado. Se a bateria estiver danificada, pode haver vazamento de eletrólito das células e isso pode causar ferimentos. • Mantenha a bateria longe de crianças. • Não armazene ou deixe o computador ou as baterias próximos a fontes de calor, como radiadores, lareiras, fogões, aquecedores elétricos ou outros aparelhos geradores de calor. Não os exponha a temperaturas de mais de 60 ºC. Quando aquecida a temperaturas excessivas, as células da bateria podem explodir ou vazar, com risco de incêndio. • Não jogue a bateria do computador no fogo ou no lixo doméstico normal. As células da bateria podem explodir. Descarte a bateria usada de acordo com as instruções do fabricante ou entre em contato com a agência de descarte local para obter instruções de descarte. Descarte as baterias gastas ou danificadas imediatamente. SEGURANÇA: Viagem de avião • Certas regulamentações da Federal Aviation Administration (Administração federal da aviação) e/ou restrições específicas de companhias aéreas podem se aplicar à operação do computador Dell a bordo de aeronaves. Por exemplo, essas regulamentações/restrições podem proibir o uso de qualquer dispositivo eletrônico pessoal (PED) que tenha a capacidade de transmissão intencional de freqüência de rádio ou de outros sinais eletromagnéticos a bordo de aeronaves.Manual de informações do sistema 73 – Para melhor cumprir todas essas restrições, se o seu computador portátil Dell estiver equipado com Dell TrueMobile™ ou com algum outro dispositivo de comunicação sem fio, desative esse dispositivo antes de embarcar na aeronave e siga todas as instruções fornecidas pelo pessoal da companhia aérea com relação a esse dispositivo. – Além disso, o uso de qualquer PED, como computadores portáteis, pode ser proibido em aeronaves, durante certas fases críticas do vôo, como a decolagem e a aterrisagem. Algumas empresas aéreas podem ainda definir a fase crítica do vôo como qualquer momento em que a aeronave esteja abaixo dos 3.050 m. Siga as instruções específicas da companhia aérea sobre os períodos em que o uso de PEDs é permitido. SEGURANÇA: Instruções de EMC O uso de cabos de sinais blindados garante que você atenderá os requisitos de classificação EMC (electromagnetic compatibility, compatibilidade eletromagnética) adequados para o ambiente pretendido. Para impressoras paralelas, há um cabo da Dell disponível. Se preferir, você poderá comprar um cabo da Dell no site www.dell.com. A eletricidade estática pode danificar componentes eletrônicos dentro do computador. Para evitar dano por estática, descarregue a eletricidade estática de seu corpo antes de tocar em qualquer componente eletrônico do computador, como os módulos de memória. Você pode fazer isso tocando uma superfície de metal não-pintada no painel de E/S do computador. ADVERTÊNCIA: O manuseio do cabo deste produto, ou de cabos associados a acessórios vendidos com este produto, o exporá ao chumbo, uma substância química conhecida pelo estado da Califórnia (EUA) por causar malformação ou outros danos reprodutivos. Lave as mãos depois de manusear o cabo. Ao usar o computador Observe as instruções de manuseio seguro a seguir, para evitar danos ao computador: • Durante a configuração do computador, coloque-o em uma superfície nivelada. • Ao viajar, não embarque o computador como bagagem. Você pode passar o computador por máquinas de raios-x, mas nunca o passe por detectores de metal. Se o computador for verificado a mão, tenha uma bateria carregada disponível, para o caso de lhe pedirem para ligar o computador. • Ao viajar com o disco rígido removido do computador, envolva-o em um material não condutor, como tecido ou papel. Se o disco rígido for verificado a mão, esteja pronto para instalá-lo no computador. Você pode passar o disco rígido por máquinas de raios-x, mas nunca o passe por detectores de metal. • Ao viajar, não coloque o computador nos compartimentos elevados, onde ele possa se arrastado de um lado para outro. Não derrube o computador nem o submeta a qualquer outro choque mecânico. • Proteja o computador, a bateria e o disco rígido contra riscos ambientais, como sujeira, poeira, alimentos, líquidos, temperaturas extremas e exposição demasiada à luz do sol. • Quando você passa de um ambiente para outro com temperatura e/ou umidade muito diferentes, pode-se formar condensação dentro do computador. Para evitar danos ao computador, aguarde tempo suficiente para que a umidade evapore antes de usá-lo. AVISO: Ao retirar o computador de condições de baixa temperatura para um ambiente mais quente, ou de condições de alta temperatura para um ambiente mais frio, deixe que o computador se aclimate à nova temperatura ambiente antes de ligá-lo. • Ao desconectar um cabo, puxe-o pelo conector ou pelo laço de alívio de tensão, não pelo cabo em si. Ao puxar o conector, mantenha-o alinhado para evitar o entortamento dos pinos. Além disso, antes de conectar um cabo, verifique se os dois conectores estão corretamente orientados e alinhados. • Manipule cuidadosamente os componentes. Segure componentes, como módulos de memória, pelas bordas e não pelos pinos.74 Manual de informações do sistema www.dell.com | support.dell.com • Antes de remover um módulo de memória da placa de sistema ou desconectar um dispositivo do computador, desligue o computador, desconecte o cabo do adaptador CA, remova qualquer bateria instalada no compartimento de bateria ou no compartimento de módulos e aguarde 5 segundos antes de prosseguir, para ajudar a evitar danos possíveis à placa de sistema. • Limpe o monitor com um pano macio umedecido em água. Umedeça o pano e passe-o pelo monitor em uma única direção, de cima para baixo. Remova a umidade do monitor rapidamente e mantenha-o seco. Uma exposição prolongada à umidade pode danificar o monitor. Não use limpa-vidros comerciais para limpar o monitor. • Se o computador for molhado ou danificado, siga os procedimentos descritos em “Solução de problemas” no Guia do usuário. Se, depois de seguir esses procedimentos, você confirmar que o computador não está funcionando adequadamente, entre em contato com a Dell (consulte “Como obter ajuda” no Guia do usuário para obter as informações de contato). SEGURANÇA: Hábitos ergonômicos para o uso do computador ADVERTÊNCIA: O uso impróprio ou prolongado do teclado pode causar lesões. ADVERTÊNCIA: Olhar para a tela ou para a tela externa do monitor por períodos de tempo extensos pode causar fadiga visual. Para conforto e eficiência, observe as regras ergonômicas no “Apêndice” do Guia do usuário on-line ao configurar e utilizar o computador. Este computador portátil não foi projetado para operação contínua como equipamento de escritório. Para uso intenso em um escritório, recomendamos que você conecte um teclado externo. SEGURANÇA: Ao trabalhar dentro do computador Antes de remover ou instalar módulos de memória, placas mini PCI ou modems, execute o procedimento a seguir, na seqüência indicada. AVISO: A única vez em que você deverá acessar a parte interna do computador será quando estiver instalando módulos de memória ou uma placa mini PCI, um modem, uma placa Bluetooth™ ou uma bateria de reserva. AVISO: Aguarde 5 segundos, depois de desligar o computador, antes de desconectar um dispositivo ou remover um módulo de memória, uma placa Mini PCI, um modem, uma placa Bluetooth ou uma bateria de reserva, para ajudar a evitar possível dano na placa de sistema. 1 Desligue o computador e todos os dispositivos conectados. 2 Desconecte o computador e os dispositivos de tomadas elétricas para reduzir o potencial de lesões pessoais ou choque. Desconecte também quaisquer linhas telefônicas ou de telecomunicação do computador. 3 Remova a bateria principal do compartimento de bateria e, se necessário, a segunda bateria, do compartimento de módulos. 4 Aterre-se tocando em uma superfície de metal não-pintada na parte de trás do computador. 5 Durante o trabalho, toque periodicamente uma superfície de metal sem pintura para dissipar a eletricidade estática que possa provocar danos aos componentes internos. SEGURANÇA: Proteção contra descargas eletrostáticas A eletricidade estática pode danificar componentes eletrônicos dentro do computador. Para evitar danos por estática, descarregue a eletricidade estática de seu corpo antes de tocar em qualquer componente eletrônico do computador, como os módulos de memória. Você pode fazer isso tocando uma superfície de metal não-pintada na parte de trás do computador.Manual de informações do sistema 75 Durante o período em que você trabalhar na parte interna do computador, toque periodicamente uma superfície de metal não-pintada na parte de trás do computador, para remover qualquer carga estática que o seu corpo possa ter acumulado. Você pode também tomar as medidas a seguir para evitar danos provocados por descargas eletrostáticas: • Quando estiver retirando um componente sensível a estática de sua embalagem de envio, não o remova do material de embalagem antiestático até que você esteja pronto para instalá-lo. Imediatamente antes de abrir a embalagem antiestática, descarregue a eletricidade estática do seu corpo. • Ao transportar um componente sensível, primeiro coloque-o em um recipiente ou embalagem antiestática. • Manuseie todos os componentes sensíveis em um local à prova de estática. Se possível, use pisos antiestáticos e esteiras antiestáticas na bancada. SEGURANÇA: Como descartar a bateria O computador utiliza uma bateria tipo moeda de célula de íons de lítio. Para obter instruções sobre como substituir a bateria de íons de lítio do computador, consulte “Como remover a bateria” na página 84. Esta é uma bateria de vida útil longa e é bem provável que você nunca precise substituí-la. No entanto, se você precisar substituí-la, consulte “Como remover e instalar a bateria de reserva” na página 85. Não descarte a bateria com o lixo doméstico. Entre em contato com a empresa de coleta de lixo de sua região para obter o endereço do local mais próximo para depósito da bateria.76 Manual de informações do sistema www.dell.com | support.dell.com Como encontrar informações para o computador O que você está procurando? Encontre aqui • Um programa de diagnóstico para o computador • Drivers para o computador • A documentação do computador • Documentação do dispositivo CD de drivers e utilitários (também chamado de ResourceCD) A documentação e os drivers já estão instalados no computador. Você pode usar o CD para reinstalar drivers, executar o Dell Diagnostics ou acessar a documentação. Alguns arquivos Leia-me podem estar no CD para fornecer as últimas atualizações sobre as alterações técnicas no computador ou no material de referência técnica avançada para técnicos ou usuários experientes. • Como configurar o computador • Informações sobre garantia • Instruções de segurança Guia de informações do sistema da Dell™ NOTA: Este documento está disponível no formato PDF em support.dell.com.Manual de informações do sistema 77 • Como remover e substituir peças • Especificações técnicas • Como configurar os parâmetros do sistema • Como localizar defeitos e solucionar problemas Guia do usuário Centro de ajuda e suporte do Microsoft® Windows® XP 1 Clique no botão Iniciar e em Ajuda e suporte. 2 Clique em Guias do usuário e do sistema e clique em Guias do usuário. Windows 2000 Clique duas vezes no ícone Guias do usuário na área de trabalho. • Código de serviço expresso e etiqueta de serviço • Etiqueta de licença do Microsoft Windows Etiqueta de serviço e licença do Microsoft Windows Essas etiquetas estão localizadas no computador. •Use a etiqueta de serviço para identificar o computador quando acessar o site support.dell.com ou quando entrar em contato com o suporte técnico. • Digite o código de serviço expresso para direcionar sua chamada ao entrar em contato com o suporte técnico. O Código de serviço expresso não está disponível em todos os países. • Use o número mostrado na Etiqueta de licença do Microsoft Windows se precisar reinstalar o sistema operacional. • Drivers mais recentes para o computador • Respostas para perguntas da assistência técnica e de suporte • Discussões on-line com outros usuários e com o suporte técnico • Documentação do computador S i t e d e s u p o r t e d a D e l l — support.dell.com O site de suporte da Dell contém várias ferramentas on-line, como: • Solutions — Dicas e sugestões para a solução de problemas, artigos de técnicos e cursos on-line • Community — Discussões on-line com outros clientes da Dell • Upgrades — Informações sobre atualizações de componentes, como memórias, discos rígidos e sistemas operacionais. • Customer Care — Informações sobre contato, status de pedidos, garantias e reparos. • Downloads — Drivers, patches e atualizações de software. • Reference — Documentação do computador, especificações do produto e informes oficiais. O que você está procurando? Encontre aqui78 Manual de informações do sistema www.dell.com | support.dell.com • Status do serviço de chamadas e histórico de suporte • Questões técnicas importantes do computador • Perguntas mais freqüentes • Downloads de arquivos • Detalhes sobre a configuração do meu computador • Contrato de serviço para o computador S i t e d o D e l l P r e m i e r S u p p o r t — premiersupport.dell.com O site do Dell Premier Support é personalizado para clientes corporativos, do governo e da educação. Esse site pode não estar disponível em todas as regiões. • Como usar o Windows® XP • Documentação do computador • Documentação sobre dispositivos (como modems) Centro de ajuda e suporte do Windows 1 Clique no botão Iniciar e em Ajuda e suporte. 2 Digite uma palavra ou expressão que descreva o seu problema e clique no ícone de seta. 3 Clique no tópico que descreve o problema. 4 Siga as instruções da tela. • Como reinstalar o sistema operacional CD do Sistema operacional O sistema operacional já está instalado no computador. Para reinstalar o sistema operacional, utilize o CD do Sistema operacional. Consulte o Guia do usuário para obter instruções sobre a reinstalação do sistema operacional. Depois de reinstalar o sistema operacional, utilize o CD de drivers e utilitários para reinstalar drivers para os dispositivos que vieram com o computador. A etiqueta da chave do sistema operacional está localizada em seu computador. O que você está procurando? Encontre aquiManual de informações do sistema 79 Como configurar o computador ADVERTÊNCIA: Antes de iniciar qualquer dos procedimentos desta seção, siga as instruções de segurança do início deste documento. 1 Abra a caixa de acessórios. 2 Separe os itens da caixa de acessórios necessários para a configuração do computador. A caixa de acessórios contém também a documentação do usuário e os softwares ou hardwares adicionais (como placas de PC, drivers ou baterias) que você adquiriu. 3 Conecte o adaptador CA no respectivo conector do computador e na tomada elétrica.80 Manual de informações do sistema www.dell.com | support.dell.com 4 Abra o monitor e pressione o botão liga/desliga para ligar o computador. NOTA: Não conecte o computador ao dispositivo de acoplamento, até que o computador tenha sido ligado e desligado pelo menos uma vez. botão liga/desligaManual de informações do sistema 81 Sobre o seu computador Vista frontal tela trava da tela alto-falantes teclado luzes de status do teclado touch pad botões do touch pad botão liga/desliga luzes de status do dispositivo82 Manual de informações do sistema www.dell.com | support.dell.com Vista esquerda Vista direita conector IEEE 1394 slot da placa de PC sensor de infravermelho conectores de áudio (2) encaixe do cabo de segurança encaixe do cabo de segurança compartimento de módulos trava de liberação do dispositivoManual de informações do sistema 83 Vista traseira ADVERTÊNCIA: Não bloqueie, não introduza objetos e nem permita o acúmulo de poeira nas aberturas de ventilação. Não coloque o computador ligado em ambientes com pouca ventilação (como pastas fechadas). O bloqueio do fluxo de ar pode danificar o computador ou causar incêndio. Vista inferior conectores USB (2) conector de saída de TV S-vídeo conector de modem (RJ-11) (opcional) conector de rede (RJ-45) conector paralelo conector de vídeo conector serial conector do adaptador CA aberturas de ventilação tampa do módulo de memória bateria slot do dispositivo de acoplamento tampa da placa Mini PCI trava de liberação do compartimento de bateria disco rígido ventilador indicador de carga da bateria84 Manual de informações do sistema www.dell.com | support.dell.com Como remover a bateria Para obter mais informações sobre como remover a segunda bateria, consulte “Como usar o compartimento de módulos” no Guia do usuário on-line. ADVERTÊNCIA: Antes de executar estes procedimentos, desligue o computador, desconecte-o da tomada elétrica e desconecte o modem da tomada de telefone. AVISO: Se optar por substituir a bateria com o computador no modo de espera, você terá, no máximo, 90 segundos para fazer a substituição antes que o computador se desligue e os dados que não foram salvos sejam perdidos. 1 Verifique se o computador está desligado e desconectado da tomada elétrica e da tomada de telefone. 2 Se o computador estiver conectado a uma estação de acoplamento, desconecte-o. Consulte a documentação fornecida com o dispositivo de acoplamento para obter instruções. 3 Deslize e segure a trava de liberação do compartimento da bateria na parte inferior do computador e remova a bateria do compartimento.Manual de informações do sistema 85 Como remover e instalar a bateria de reserva 1 Remova a bateria. 2 Remova a tampa da bateria reserva. 3 Deslize a bateria de reserva na direção do conector e retire a bateria de seu compartimento. 4 Desconecte o cabo da bateria de reserva. 5 Conecte o cabo da bateria reserva ao conector no compartimento correspondente. cabo da bateria reserva conector bateria reserva86 Manual de informações do sistema www.dell.com | support.dell.com 6 Coloque a bateria de reserva no compartimento e recoloque a tampa da bateria. Como instalar a bateria Deslize a bateria para dentro do compartimento até ouvir um clique na trava de liberação. Para obter mais informações sobre como instalar a segunda bateria, consulte “Como usar o compartimento de módulos” no Guia do usuário on-line.Manual de informações do sistema 87 Dell Diagnostics ADVERTÊNCIA: Antes de iniciar qualquer dos procedimentos desta seção, execute as instruções de segurança no início deste documento. Quando utilizar o Dell Diagnostics Se o computador apresentar um problema, execute as verificações descritas em “Solução de problemas” no Guia do usuário e execute o Dell Diagnostics, antes de entrar em contato com a Dell para obter assistência técnica. É recomendável que você imprima estes procedimentos antes de começar. AVISO: O Dell Diagnostics só funciona em computadores Dell™. O Dell Diagnostics está localizado em uma partição oculta do utilitário de diagnóstico no disco rígido. NOTA: Se o computador não mostrar nenhuma imagem na tela, entre em contato com a Dell (consulte “Como obter ajuda” no Guia do usuário para obter as informações de contato). 1 Desligue o computador. 2 Se o computador estiver conectado a uma estação de acoplamento, desconecte-o. Consulte a documentação fornecida com o dispositivo de acoplamento para obter instruções. 3 Conecte o computador a uma tomada elétrica. 4 Ligue o computador. Quando o logotipo DELL™ aparecer, pressione imediatamente. NOTA: Se a tela permanecer vazia, pressione e mantenha pressionado e o botão liga/desliga por cerca de 5 segundos para iniciar o Dell Diagnostics. O computador executa automaticamente a avaliação de pré-inicialização do sistema. NOTA: Se aparecer uma mensagem informando que a partição do utilitário de diagnóstico não foi encontrada, execute o Dell Diagnostics a partir do CD de drivers e utilitários. Se você esperar demais e o logotipo do Microsoft® Windows® aparecer, continue esperando até que a área de trabalho do Windows apareça. Então, desligue o computador usando o menu Iniciar e tente novamente. 5 Quando a lista de dispositivos de inicialização aparecer, realce Diagnostics e pressione . O computador executará a avaliação de pré-inicialização do sistema, que é uma série de testes iniciais da placa de sistema, do teclado, do disco rígido e da tela. • Durante a avaliação, responda a todas as perguntas que aparecerem. • Se for detectada alguma falha, o computador interromperá o processo e emitirá um bipe. Para interromper a avaliação e reinicializar o computador, pressione ; para passar para o teste seguinte, pressione ; para testar novamente o componente que apresentou defeito, pressione . 88 Manual de informações do sistema www.dell.com | support.dell.com • Se forem detectadas falhas durante a avaliação de pré-inicialização do sistema, anote o código do erro e entre em contato com a Dell (consulte “Como obter ajuda” no Guia do usuário para obter as informações de contato) antes de executar o Dell Diagnostics. Se a avaliação de pré-inicialização do sistema tiver sido concluída com sucesso, você receberá a mensagem Booting Dell Diagnostic Utility Partition. Press any key to continue (Inicializando a partição do Dell Diagnostics. Pressione qualquer tecla para continuar). 6 Pressione qualquer tecla para iniciar o Dell Diagnostics a partir da partição do utilitário de diagnóstico no disco rígido. 7 Quando o menu principal do Dell Diagnostics aparecer, selecione o teste que você quer executar. Menu principal do Dell Diagnostics 1 Depois que o Dell Diagnostics for carregado e a tela MainMenu aparecer, clique no botão da opção desejada. 2 Se for encontrado algum problema durante um teste, aparecerá uma mensagem mostrando o código do erro e uma descrição do problema. Anote esse código e a descrição do problema e siga as instruções da tela. Se você não conseguir resolver o problema, entre em contato com a Dell (consulte “Como obter ajuda” no Guia do usuário para obter as informações de contato). NOTA: A etiqueta de serviço do computador está localizada na parte superior de cada tela de teste. Se você entrar em contato com a Dell, o suporte técnico solicitará o número da etiqueta de serviço. Opção Função Express Test (Teste expresso) Executa um teste rápido dos dispositivos. Esse teste normalmente demora de 10 a 20 minutos e não exige nenhuma ação do usuário. Aumente as possibilidades de detectar o problema rapidamente executando primeiro o Express Test (Teste expresso). Extended Test (Teste completo) Executa uma verificação completa dos dispositivos. Esse teste normalmente demora uma hora ou mais e exige que você responda a perguntas periodicamente. Custom Test (Teste personalizado) Testa um dispositivo específico. Você pode personalizar os testes que quer executar. Symptom Tree (Árvore de sintomas) Mostra uma lista dos sintomas mais comuns encontrados e permite selecionar um teste com base no sintoma do problema que está ocorrendo.Manual de informações do sistema 89 3 Se você executar um teste usando a opção Custom Test ou Symptom Tree, clique na guia apropriada descrita na tabela a seguir para obter mais informações. 4 Quando os testes tiverem sido concluídos, feche a tela de teste para retornar à tela Main Menu (Menu principal). Para sair do Dell Diagnostics e reiniciar o computador, feche a tela Main Menu. Guia Função Results (Resultados) Mostra os resultados do teste e as condições de erro encontradas. Errors (Erros) Mostra as condições de erro encontradas, os códigos de erro e a descrição do problema. Help (Ajuda) Descreve o teste e pode indicar os requisitos para a execução desse teste. Configuration (Configuração) Mostra a configuração de hardware do dispositivo selecionado. O Dell Diagnostics obtém as informações sobre a configuração de todos os dispositivos através do programa de configuração do sistema, da memória e de vários testes internos, e mostra essas informações na lista de dispositivos no painel esquerdo da tela. A lista de dispositivos pode não conter os nomes de todos os componentes instalados no computador ou de todos os dispositivos conectados a ele. Parameters (Parâmetros) Permite alterar as configurações de teste para personalizálo.90 Manual de informações do sistema www.dell.com | support.dell.com Avisos de normalização EMI (Electromagnetic Interference, Interferência eletromagnética) é qualquer sinal ou emissão irradiada no espaço livre ou conduzida por fiação de potência ou de sinal, que compromete o serviço de rádio navegação ou outro serviço de segurança, ou ainda, degrada seriamente, obstrui ou interrompe repetidamente um serviço licenciado de comunicação por rádio. Os serviços de comunicação de rádio incluem (mas não se limitam a) transmissão comercial AM/FM, televisão, serviços de celular, radar, controle de tráfego aéreo, pager e PCS (Personal Communication Services [serviços de comunicações pessoais]). Esses serviços licenciados, juntamente com irradiadores involuntários como dispositivos digitais, incluindo computadores, contribuem para o ambiente eletromagnético. Compatibilidade eletromagnética é a capacidade que os itens de um equipamento eletrônico possuem de funcionar corretamente em conjunto no ambiente eletrônico. Embora este computador tenha sido projetado para estar em conformidade com os limites estabelecidos pelos órgãos de normalização sobre interferência eletromagnética, não há garantias de que não ocorrerá interferência em uma instalação específica. Se o equipamento causar interferência nos serviços de comunicação de rádio, o que pode ser determinado ligando-se e desligando-se o equipamento, experimente corrigir a interferência através de uma ou mais das seguintes medidas: • Mude a orientação da antena receptora. • Mude o computador de lugar em relação ao receptor. • Afaste o computador do receptor. • Ligue o computador em outra tomada, de modo que o computador e o receptor fiquem em circuitos elétricos diferentes. Se necessário, consulte um representante do Suporte técnico da Dell ou um profissional técnico experiente de rádio/televisão para obter outras sugestões. Para obter informações adicionais sobre normalização, consulte o Guia do usuário on-line que acompanha o computador. Para acessar o Guia do usuário, consulte a página 77.Manual de informações do sistema 91 Garantia limitada e política de devolução Termo de Garantia Contratual – Brasil – Garantia Oferecida pela Dell ao Usuário Final – 1º ano Garantia A DELL* garante ao usuário final, em conformidade com as disposições abaixo, que os produtos de hardware com a sua marca, adquiridos pelo usuário final de uma empresa do grupo DELL ou de um distribuidor autorizado DELL situado na América Latina e Caribe, estão livres de defeitos em seus componentes eletrônicos, mecânicos e de montagem, pelo prazo de 1 (um) ano contado da data de aquisição do Produto indicada na Nota Fiscal de Compra, uma vez respeitadas as condições normais de instalação e uso, exceto no que tange aos itens relacionados dentre as excessões adiante indicadas. Já se encontra incluso nesse prazo o período de garantia legal. Produtos contra os quais sejam apresentadas reclamações justas serão, a critério da DELL, consertados ou substituídos às expensas da DELL. Todas as peças removidas dos produtos consertados serão de propriedade da DELL. A DELL utiliza peças novas e recondicionadas de vários fabricantes na execução dos serviços de reparo e na fabricação de produtos de reposição, de qualidade e tecnologia equivalente ou superior, respeitadas as especificações originais dos produtos. Responsabilidades do Cliente Notificar de imediato a Dell sobre o mau funcionamento de seus equipamentos (0-800-903355). Fornecer ao pessoal técnico da Dell acesso total e incondicional à totalidade dos equipamentos e softwares. Caso existam restrições de segurança que se apliquem a alguns ou a todos os sistemas do Cliente que necessitem receber assistência técnica em virtude desta Garantia Contratual, é possível que seja solicitado ao Cliente que este assuma responsabilidades adicionais para a manutenção do equipamento e/ou software. Notificar a Dell sobre qualquer perigo potencial quanto à segurança ou à saúde que possa existir nas instalações do Cliente, assim como proporcionar e/ou recomendar os procedimentos de segurança que devem ser seguidos, caso sejam aplicáveis. Proporcionar, caso seja necessário e sem nenhum encargo para a Dell, um espaço de trabalho adequado e acesso a meios de comunicação que se sejam requeridos à execução dos serviços. Manter atualizada uma cópia de segurança do sistema operacional e de outros programas de software pertinentes, assim como seus dados. Garantir a presença de uma pessoa responsável ou de um funcionário durante a execução do serviço. Fornecer, sem ônus para a Dell, meios de gravação e armazenamento, incluindo fitas e discos magnéticos necessários à execução dos serviços, bem como aparelhos de comunicação de dados (modems) e linhas telefônicas e/ou conexões de rede quando requeridos para execução de serviços à distância por via eletrônica (acessos eletrônicos remotos). Exclusões Os seguintes itens, entre outros compatíveis com o ora exposto, não estão cobertos pela garantia: • Partes consumíveis, tais como baterias não-recarregáveis, bolsas, maletas, etc; • Programas de computador, exceto no tocante a termos e prazos especificados na legislação brasileira aplicável; • Limpeza, reparos cosméticos ou desgaste resultante do uso normal dos produtos; • Danos causados por mau uso, abuso, queda, negligência, imprudência ou imperícia; • Danos causados por armazenamento ou uso em condições fora das especificações; • Danos causados por equipamentos que produzam ou induzam interferências eletromagnéticas ou ainda por problemas de instalação elétrica em desacordo com as normas ABNT; • Danos causados por programas de computador, acessórios ou produtos de terceiros adicionados a um produto comercializado pela Dell após este ter sido enviado ao usuário final pela própria Dell;92 Manual de informações do sistema www.dell.com | support.dell.com • Danos causados por violação do produto, tentativa de reparo ou ajuste por terceiros não autorizados pela Dell; • Danos causados por agentes da natureza como descargas elétricas (raios), inundações, incêndios, desabamentos, terremotos, etc; • Perdas e danos causados pelo produto ou por desempenho do produto, inclusive, mas não limitado a, lucros cessantes, perdas financeiras e limitações de produtividade, resultantes dos atos relacionados a hipóteses de não cobertura desta garantia; e, • Perda total ou parcial de quaisquer programas de computador, dados ou meios magnéticos removíveis. A garantia também não será válida caso a Nota Fiscal de Compra apresente rasuras e/ou alterações ou, ainda, campos incompletos nos itens Data de Aquisição e Número de Série do produto, e/ou que não esteja em conformidade com a legislação fiscal vigente no Brasil. Atendimento ao Consumidor Caso você tenha algum comentário ou sugestões, estas devem ser apresentadas na América Latina e Caribe por meio do ponto de venda da DELL ou através de mensagem eletrônica via Internet (www.dell.com). No caso de reclamação, esta poderá ser encaminhada durante o prazo de validade da garantia e o usuário final deverá fornecer sempre o comprovante de compra, representado pela Nota Fiscal original, indicando o nome e endereço do vendedor, a data da compra, o modelo e o número de série, o nome e o endereço do cliente e informações sobre os sintomas e configuração no momento do defeito, incluindo periféricos e software utilizados. Na falta dessas informações a Dell poderá negar-se a atender a solicitação. Uma vez diagnosticado o problema, a DELL tomará as devidas providências e pagará o frete e o seguro de transporte para a central de conserto/reposição DELL, caso o defeito apresentado qualifique-se para atendimento dentro da garantia. O usuário final deve garantir que o produto defeituoso estará disponível para ser apanhado, devidamente embalado na embalagem original ou em embalagem que ofereça grau equivalente de proteção, incluindo os dados acima e o número de devolução fornecido pela DELL ao usuário final. Limitações e Direitos A DELL não oferece nenhuma outra garantia, aval ou declaração similar, exceto conforme expressamente declarado acima, e esta Garantia substitui quaisquer outras garantias, na extensão máxima permitida por lei. Esta Garantia será o único e exclusivo recurso contra a DELL ou qualquer outra empresa do mesmo grupo econômico, não podendo estas serem responsabilizadas por lucros cessantes ou perdas derivadas de contratos, ou qualquer outra perda indireta ou imprevista decorrente de negligência, violação contratual ou outrosde Esta Garantia não exclui ou afeta os direitos garantidos por lei ao usuário final contra a DELL e/ou quaisquer direitos resultantes de outros contratos celebrados pelo usuário final com a DELL e/ou qualquer outro vendedor autorizado pela Dell. Dell World Trade LP One Dell Way, Round Rock, TX 78682, USA Dell Computadores do Brasil Ltda (CNPJ No. 72.381.189/0001-10)/ Dell Comercial do Brasil Ltda (CNPJ No. 03 405 822/0001-40) Avenida Industrial Belgraf, 400 92990-000 - Eldorado do Sul – RS - Brasil Dell Computer de Chile Ltda Coyancura 2283, Piso 3- Of. 302, Providencia, Santiago - Chile Dell Computer de Colombia Corporation Carrera 7 #115-33 Oficina 603 Bogota, Colombia Dell Computer de Mexico SA de CV Rio Lerma #302- 4 Piso Col. Cuauhtemoc, Mexico, D.F. 06500www.dell.com | support.dell.com Dell™ Latitude™ Serie D505 Guía de información del sistema Modelo PP10LNotas, avisos y precauciones NOTA: Una NOTA indica información importante que le ayuda a hacer un mejor uso del equipo. AVISO: Un AVISO le indica la posibilidad de que el hardware sufra daños potenciales o de pérdida de datos y le explica cómo evitar el problema. PRECAUCIÓN: Un aviso de PRECAUCIÓN indica el riesgo de daños en la propiedad, lesiones personales o incluso la muerte. Abreviaturas y acrónimos Para obtener una lista completa de abreviaturas y acrónimos, consulte la Guía del usuario (según su sistema operativo, haga doble clic en el icono Guía del usuario del escritorio o bien haga clic en el botón Inicio, en Centro de ayuda y soporte técnico y, a continuación, haga clic en Guías del usuario y del sistema). Si ha adquirido un equipo Dell™ Serie n, todas las referencias que aparecen en este documento relativas a los sistemas operativos de Microsoft® Windows® no son aplicables. ____________________ La información contenida en este documento puede modificarse sin previo aviso. © 2003 Dell Inc. Quedan reservados todos los derechos. La reproducción de este documento de cualquier manera sin la autorización por escrito de Dell Inc. queda terminantemente prohibida. Marcas comerciales utilizadas en este texto: Dell, el logotipo de DELL, TrueMobile y Latitude son marcas comerciales de Dell Inc.; Intel, Pentium y Celeron son marcas comerciales registradas de Intel Corporation; Microsoft y Windows son marcas comerciales registradas de Microsoft Corporation; Bluetooth es una marca comercial propiedad de Bluetooth SIG, Inc. y Dell Inc. la utiliza bajo licencia. Este documento puede incluir otras marcas comerciales y nombres comerciales para referirse a las entidades que son propietarias de los mismos o a sus productos. Dell Inc. renuncia a cualquier interés sobre la propiedad de marcas y nombres comerciales que no sean los suyos. Modelo PP10L Octubre de 2003 N/P R1189 Rev. A01Contenido 95 Contenido PRECAUCIÓN: Instrucciones de seguridad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 SEGURIDAD: General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 SEGURIDAD: Alimentación . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 SEGURIDAD: Batería . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 SEGURIDAD: Viajes en avión. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 SEGURIDAD: Instrucciones EMC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Cuando utilice el equipo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 SEGURIDAD: Hábitos de ergonomía con su equipo . . . . . . . . . . 100 SEGURIDAD: Cuando trabaje en el interior del equipo. . . . . . . . . 100 SEGURIDAD: Protección contra descargas electrostáticas . . . . . . 100 SEGURIDAD: Cómo desechar las baterías . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Localización de información de su equipo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Configuración del equipo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Acerca de su equipo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Vista anterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Vista izquierda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Vista derecha. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Vista posterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Vista inferior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Extracción de una batería . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Extracción e instalación de una batería de reserva . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Instalación de una batería . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Diagnósticos Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Cuándo utilizar los Diagnósticos Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Avisos reglamentarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Información para NOM (únicamente para México) . . . . . . . . . . 11796 Contenido Política de devolución y garantía limitada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Términos contractuales - Argentina - Garantía ofrecida por DELL al usuario final - 1º. Año . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Garantía de 1 año del fabricante para el usuario final (sólo para Latinoamérica y el área del Caribe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Declaración de garantía Intel® sólo para procesadores Pentium® y Celeron® (sólo en EE.UU. y Canadá) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Guía de información del sistema 97 PRECAUCIÓN: Instrucciones de seguridad Aplique las siguientes pautas de seguridad para garantizar su seguridad personal y proteger el equipo y el entorno de trabajo frente a posibles daños. SEGURIDAD: General • No intente reparar el equipo usted mismo a menos que sea un técnico experto. Siga siempre las instrucciones de instalación tal y como se indica. • Si utiliza un alargador con el adaptador de CA, compruebe que el valor nominal en amperios de los productos enchufados al alargador no sobrepase el valor nominal en amperios de éste. • No introduzca ningún objeto en las aberturas o rejillas de ventilación del equipo. Si lo hace, podría ocasionar un incendio o una descarga eléctrica producidos por un cortocircuito en los componentes internos. • Mientras el equipo esté encendido, no lo guarde en un entorno con flujo de aire limitado, como por ejemplo, un maletín de transporte o un maletín cerrado. La circulación restringida de aire podría dañar el equipo o provocar un incendio. • Mantenga alejado el equipo de los radiadores u otras fuentes de calor. Asimismo, no bloquee las rejillas de ventilación. Evite colocar papeles bajo el equipo; no coloque el equipo en una unidad empotrada en la pared ni sobre una cama, un sofá o una alfombra. • Cuando utilice el adaptador de CA para suministrar alimentación al equipo o para cargar la batería, sitúelo en un área ventilada, como un escritorio o en el suelo. No cubra el adaptador de CA con papeles u otros objetos que reduzcan la ventilación; no utilice el adaptador de CA dentro de un maletín. • Es posible que el adaptador de CA se caliente durante el funcionamiento normal del equipo. Tenga cuidado al manipular el adaptador durante o inmediatamente después de su funcionamiento. • No utilice el equipo portátil con la base en contacto directo con la piel durante periodos prolongados de tiempo. La temperatura de la superficie de la base aumentará durante el funcionamiento normal (sobre todo si se utiliza alimentación de CA). El contacto continuo con la piel puede provocar malestar o incluso quemaduras. • No utilice el equipo en un entorno húmedo, por ejemplo, cerca de una bañera, un lavabo, un fregadero, una piscina o en un sótano humedecido. • Si el equipo incluye un módem integrado u opcional (tarjeta PC), desconecte el cable del módem cuando se aproxime una tormenta eléctrica para evitar el riesgo potencial de descarga eléctrica producida por un rayo a través de la línea telefónica. • Para evitar el peligro potencial de una descarga eléctrica, no conecte o desconecte ningún cable ni lleve a cabo ningún proceso de mantenimiento o reconfiguración de este producto durante una tormenta eléctrica. No utilice el equipo durante una tormenta eléctrica a menos que previamente se hayan desconectado todos los cables y el equipo funcione con la alimentación proporcionada por la batería. • Si el equipo incluye un módem, el cable utilizado con el módem debe tener un tamaño mínimo de 26 AWG (American wire gauge, calibre de alambre americano) y un enchufe modular RJ-11 que cumpla con el estándar de la FCC (Federal Communications Commission, Comisión federal de comunicaciones). • Antes de abrir la cubierta del módulo de memoria o de la minitarjeta PCI situada en la parte inferior del equipo, desconecte todos los cables de los tomacorriente y desenchufe el cable telefónico. • Si el equipo incluye un conector de módem RJ-11 y un conector de red RJ-45, que son bastante parecidos, asegúrese de introducir el cable telefónico en el conector RJ-11 en lugar de hacerlo en el conector RJ-45. • Las tarjetas PC pueden calentarse mucho durante el funcionamiento normal. Tenga cuidado al extraer las tarjetas PC después de su uso prolongado. • Antes de limpiar el equipo, desconéctelo del tomacorriente. Limpie el equipo con un paño suave humedecido con agua. No utilice limpiadores en aerosol ni líquidos, que podrían contener sustancias inflamables.98 Guía de información del sistema www.dell.com | support.dell.com SEGURIDAD: Alimentación • Utilice únicamente el adaptador de CA proporcionado por Dell que se ha aprobado para su uso con este equipo. El uso de otro tipo de adaptador de CA puede implicar un riesgo de incendio o explosión. • Antes de conectar el equipo a un tomacorriente, asegúrese de que el valor nominal de voltaje y la frecuencia del adaptador de CA coincidan con los de la fuente de alimentación disponible. • Para interrumpir la alimentación del equipo, apáguelo, desconecte el adaptador de CA del tomacorriente y extraiga la batería del compartimento de la batería o del compartimento para módulos. • Para evitar una descarga eléctrica, enchufe el adaptador de CA y los cables de alimentación de los dispositivos a fuentes de alimentación con conexión a tierra. Estos cables pueden estar equipados con enchufes de tres clavijas para garantizar la conexión a tierra. No utilice adaptadores ni retire la clavija de conexión a tierra del enchufe del cable de alimentación. Si utiliza un alargador, use el tipo apropiado, de 2 clavijas o 3 clavijas, para que coincida con el cable de alimentación del adaptador de CA. • Asegúrese de que no haya nada sobre el cable de alimentación del adaptador de CA y de que éste no esté en un sitio donde se pueda pisar o sea fácil tropezar con él. • Si utiliza una regleta de enchufes, proceda con precaución a conectar el cable de alimentación de CA del adaptador a la regleta. En algunas regletas es posible introducir incorrectamente el enchufe. La introducción incorrecta del enchufe puede provocar daños irreparables en el equipo, además del riesgo de descarga eléctrica o incendio. Asegúrese de que la clavija de conexión a tierra del enchufe de alimentación esté insertada en el contacto de acople con conexión a tierra de la regleta. SEGURIDAD: Batería • Utilice sólo las baterías de Dell™ que se han aprobado para uso con este equipo. El uso de otro tipo de baterías puede aumentar el riesgo de incendio o explosión. • No lleve la batería en el bolsillo, bolso u otro contenedor en el que los objetos de metal (como las llaves del coche o clips sujetapapeles) puedan producir un cortocircuito en las terminales de la batería. El flujo de corriente excesivo resultante puede provocar temperaturas extremadamente altas y, como consecuencia, daños en la batería, fuego y quemaduras. • La batería presenta un riesgo de quemaduras si no se manipula correctamente. No la desmonte. Tenga mucho cuidado al manipular baterías dañadas o que gotean. Si la batería está dañada, el electrolito de las celdas puede gotear y causar lesiones corporales. • Mantenga la batería fuera del alcance de los niños. • No almacene ni deje el equipo ni la batería cerca de fuentes de calor, como un radiador, chimenea, estufa, calentador eléctrico u otro tipo de generador de calor, ni los exponga en ningún caso a temperaturas superiores a 60º C (140º F). Si alcanzan una temperatura excesiva, las celdas de la batería pueden explotar. • No arroje la batería del equipo al fuego ni la tire junto con los desperdicios de la casa. Las celdas de la batería pueden explotar. Deseche la batería agotada de acuerdo con las instrucciones del fabricante o póngase en contacto con el organismo local de eliminación de residuos. Deshágase de una batería agotada o dañada lo antes posible. SEGURIDAD: Viajes en avión • Es posible que existan reglamentos de la FAA (Federal Aviation Administration, Administración federal de aviación) o reglamentos específicos de las líneas aéreas que sean aplicables a la utilización del equipo Dell™ cuando se encuentre a bordo de un avión. Por ejemplo, dichos reglamentos y limitaciones pueden prohibir el uso de dispositivos electrónicos personales que puedan realizar transmisiones internacionales mediante radiofrecuencia u otro tipo de señales electromagnéticas desde el interior de la aeronave.Guía de información del sistema 99 – Para cumplir mejor estas restricciones, si su equipo portátil Dell está equipado con Dell TrueMobile™ o algún otro tipo de dispositivo de comunicación inalámbrica, debe desactivar este dispositivo antes de embarcarse en la aeronave y seguir todas las instrucciones proporcionadas por el personal de la aerolínea respecto al dispositivo. – Además, el uso de dispositivos electrónicos personales, como los equipos portátiles, puede estar prohibido en un avión durante ciertas fases críticas del vuelo, por ejemplo, durante el despegue o el aterrizaje. Algunas líneas aéreas pueden considerar como fases críticas de vuelo aquéllas en las que el avión se encuentre por debajo de los 3.000 m. Siga las instrucciones específicas de la compañía aérea relativas a cuándo se pueden utilizar los dispositivos electrónicos personales. SEGURIDAD: Instrucciones EMC La utilización de cables de señal apantallados garantiza el mantenimiento de la clasificación EMC (Compatibilidad electromagnética) apropiada para el entorno de trabajo. Hay cables Dell para las impresoras en paralelo. Si prefiere, puede solicitar un cable de Dell en el sitio web www.dell.com. La electricidad estática puede dañar los componentes electrónicos en el interior del equipo. Para prevenir daños producidos por la electricidad estática, descárguese de la electricidad estática antes de tocar algún componente electrónico del equipo, como por ejemplo un módulo de memoria. Para ello, toque una superficie metálica no pintada en el panel de E/S del equipo. ADVERTENCIA: si manipula el cable de este producto o los cables de los accesorios adquiridos con este producto, estará expuesto al plomo, un producto químico que, en el Estado de California, se ha comprobado que puede ser perjudicial durante el embarazo. Lávese las manos después de manipular el cable. Cuando utilice el equipo Observe las pautas de seguridad siguientes para evitar daños en el equipo: • Cuando prepare el equipo para trabajar, colóquelo en una superficie plana. • Cuando viaje, no envíe el equipo como equipaje. Puede pasar el equipo por una máquina de rayos X, pero nunca por un detector de metales. Asegúrese de tener una batería cargada disponible en caso de que se le solicite que encienda el equipo durante una inspección manual. • Cuando viaje con la unidad de disco duro extraída del equipo, envuélvala en un material no conductor, como tela o papel. Si se realiza una inspección manual de la unidad, esté preparado para instalarla en el equipo. Puede pasar la unidad de disco duro por una máquina de rayos X, pero nunca por un detector de metales. • Cuando viaje, no coloque el equipo en los compartimentos superiores, donde puede deslizarse. Procure que no se le caiga el equipo y no lo someta a ningún otro tipo de golpe o choque mecánico. • Proteja el equipo, la batería y la unidad de disco duro de los factores medioambientales como la suciedad, el polvo, la comida, los líquidos, las temperaturas extremas y las sobreexposiciones a la luz solar. • Si traslada el equipo de un medio a otro donde la temperatura o la humedad sean muy distintas, puede producirse condensación en la superficie del equipo o en su interior. Para evitar daños en el equipo, deje que transcurra el tiempo suficiente para que la humedad se evapore antes de utilizar el equipo. AVISO: Cuando traslade el equipo de un sitio donde la temperatura sea baja a un entorno más cálido o de un sitio donde la temperatura sea muy alta a un entorno más frío, espere a que el equipo se adapte a la temperatura ambiente antes de encenderlo. • Cuando desconecte un cable, tire de su conector o de su lazo liberador de tensión, y no del cable mismo. Al estirar del conector, manténgalo en una posición alineada para evitar que se doblen las patas del conector. Asimismo, asegúrese de que ambos conectores estén alineados y orientados correctamente antes de conectar el cable. • Maneje los componentes con cuidado. Sujete los componentes, como un módulo de memoria, por los bordes, no por las patas.100 Guía de información del sistema www.dell.com | support.dell.com • Para evitar posibles daños en la placa base, antes de extraer un módulo de memoria de la placa base o desconectar un dispositivo del equipo, apague el equipo, desconecte el cable adaptador de CA, extraiga la batería del compartimento de la batería o el compartimento para módulos y, a continuación, espere 5 segundos. • Limpie la pantalla con agua y con un paño suave y limpio. Humedezca el paño con el agua y páselo por la pantalla en una sola dirección, de arriba hacia abajo. Elimine la humedad de la pantalla rápidamente y manténgala seca. La exposición prolongada a la humedad puede dañar la pantalla. No limpie la pantalla con líquido limpiacristales. • Si el equipo se moja o queda dañado, siga los procedimientos que se describen en la sección “Solución de problemas” de la Guía del usuario. Si después de seguir estos procedimientos llega a la conclusión de que su equipo no funciona de manera adecuada, póngase en contacto con Dell (consulte la sección “Obtención de ayuda” en la Guía del usuario para obtener la información de contacto adecuada). SEGURIDAD: Hábitos de ergonomía con su equipo PRECAUCIÓN: el uso inadecuado o prolongado del teclado puede resultar nocivo. PRECAUCIÓN: mirar la pantalla durante un periodo de tiempo prolongado puede producir fatiga visual. Para trabajar con comodidad y eficacia, respete las instrucciones ergonómicas incluidas en el “Apéndice” de la Guía del usuario en línea cuando configure y use el equipo. Este equipo portátil no se ha diseñado para su uso continuo como equipo de oficina. Si debe utilizarlo durante un período de tiempo prolongado, se recomienda conectar un teclado externo. SEGURIDAD: Cuando trabaje en el interior del equipo Antes de extraer o colocar módulos de memoria, minitarjetas PCI o módems, lleve a cabo los siguientes pasos en la secuencia especificada. AVISO: la única ocasión en la que deberá acceder al interior del equipo es cuando instale módulos de memoria, una minitarjeta PCI, un módem, una tarjeta Bluetooth™ o una batería de reserva. AVISO: apague el equipo y espere 5 segundos antes de desconectar un dispositivo o retirar un módulo de memoria, una minitarjeta PCI, un módem, una tarjeta Bluetooth o una batería de reserva para evitar dañar la placa base. 1 Apague el equipo y todos los dispositivos conectados. 2 Desconecte el equipo y los dispositivos de los tomacorriente para reducir el riesgo de lesiones corporales o descarga eléctrica. Desconecte también del equipo las líneas telefónicas o de telecomunicaciones. 3 Extraiga la batería principal del compartimento de la batería y, si es necesario, extraiga la segunda batería del compartimento para módulos. 4 Descargue la electricidad estática de su cuerpo; para ello, toque una superficie metálica sin pintar de la parte posterior del equipo. 5 Mientras trabaja, toque periódicamente una superficie metálica sin pintar para disipar la electricidad estática y evitar que se dañen los componentes internos. SEGURIDAD: Protección contra descargas electrostáticas La electricidad estática puede dañar los componentes electrónicos que hay en el interior del equipo. Para prevenir daños producidos por la electricidad estática, descárguese de la electricidad estática antes de tocar algún componente electrónico del equipo, como por ejemplo un módulo de memoria. Para ello, toque una superficie metálica sin pintar de la parte posterior del equipo. Mientras manipula el interior del equipo, toque regularmente una superficie metálica sin pintar de la parte posterior del equipo para descargar la energía estática que se haya podido acumular en su cuerpo.Guía de información del sistema 101 Asimismo, puede realizar lo siguiente para prevenir los posibles daños por descargas electrostáticas (ESD): • Cuando esté desempaquetando un componente sensible a la electricidad estática, no retire el componente del material de embalaje antiestático hasta que no considere que está preparado para instalar el componente. Justo antes de abrir el embalaje antiestático, asegúrese de descargar la electricidad estática de su cuerpo. • Cuando transporte un componente sensible a la electricidad estática, colóquelo en un contenedor o embalaje antiestático. • Maneje todos los componentes sensibles a la electricidad estática en un área protegida contra la electricidad estática. Si es posible, utilice alfombrillas antiestáticas sobre el piso y sobre la mesa. SEGURIDAD: Cómo desechar las baterías El equipo utiliza una batería de ion de litio y una batería de celda de litio del espesor de una moneda. Para obtener instrucciones sobre cómo reemplazar la batería de ion de litio en su equipo, consulte “Extracción de una batería” en la página 110 La batería de celda de litio del espesor de una moneda es una batería de larga duración y es muy posible que nunca tenga que cambiarla. Sin embargo, si es necesario cambiarla, consulte la sección “Extracción e instalación de una batería de reserva” en la página 111. No mezcle las baterías con la basura doméstica. Póngase en contacto con la agencia local de eliminación de residuos para obtener la dirección del contenedor de baterías más cercano.102 Guía de información del sistema www.dell.com | support.dell.com Localización de información de su equipo ¿Qué busca? Encuéntrelo aquí • Un programa de diagnóstico para mi equipo • Controladores para mi equipo • Ladocumentación de mi equipo • La documentación de mi dispositivo CD de controladores y utilidades (también conocido como ResourceCD) La documentación y los controladores ya están instalados en su equipo. Puede utilizar el CD para volver a instalar los controladores, ejecutar los Diagnósticos Dell o acceder a la documentación. Los archivos “readme” (léame) pueden estar incluidos en su CD para disponer de actualizaciones de última hora sobre los cambios técnicos del equipo o material de consulta destinado a los técnicos o usuarios avanzados. • Cómo instalar mi equipo • Información sobre la garantía • Instrucciones de seguridad Guía de información del sistema Dell™ Sitio web de Asistencia Premier de Dell NOTA: Este documento está disponible en formato pdf en support.dell.com.Guía de información del sistema 103 • Cómo extraer y cambiar piezas • Especificaciones técnicas • Cómo configurar los parámetros del sistema • Cómo detectar y solucionar problemas Guía del usuario Centro de ayuda y soporte técnico de Microsoft® Windows® XP 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y, a continuación, haga clic en Ayuda y soporte técnico. 2 Haga clic en Guías del usuario y del sistema y en Guías del usuario. Windows 2000 Haga doble clic en el icono de su escritorio. • Etiqueta de servicio y código de servicio rápido • Etiqueta de licencia de Microsoft Windows Etiqueta de servicio y licencia de Microsoft Windows Estas etiquetas se encuentran en su equipo. •Utilice la etiqueta de servicio para identificar el equipo cuando utilice support.dell.com o se ponga en contacto con el servicio de asistencia técnica. • Escriba el código de servicio urgente para dirigir su llamada cuando se ponga en contacto con el servicio de asistencia técnica. El código de servicio urgente no está disponible en todos los países. • Utilice el número que aparece en la etiqueta de licencia de Microsoft Windows si vuelve a instalar el sistema operativo. • Los últimos controladores para mi equipo • Respuestas a las preguntas sobre la asistencia y el servicio técnico • Debates en línea con otros usuarios y con el soporte técnico • Documentación del equipo S i t i o w e b D e l l S u p p o r t — support.dell.com El sitio web Dell Support ofrece muchas herramientas en línea, como: • Soluciones — Consejos y sugerencias para la solución de problemas, artículos de técnicos y cursos en línea • Comunidad — Debates en línea con otros clientes de Dell • Actualizaciones — Información de actualización para componentes como, por ejemplo, la memoria, la unidad de disco duro y el sistema operativo • Atención al cliente — Información de contacto, estado del pedido, garantía e información sobre las reparaciones • Descargas — Controladores, revisiones y actualizaciones de software • Referencia — Documentación del equipo, especificaciones del producto y documentación técnica ¿Qué busca? Encuéntrelo aquí104 Guía de información del sistema www.dell.com | support.dell.com • Estado de las llamadas de servicio e historial de asistencia • Cuestiones técnicas importantes para mi equipo • Preguntas frecuentes • Descargas de archivos • Detalles sobre la configuración de mi equipo • Contrato de asistencia para mi equipo Sitio web Dell Premier Support — premiersupport.dell.com El sitio web Dell Premier Support está personalizado para clientes corporativos, gubernamentales y del ámbito educativo. Es posible que este sitio web no esté disponible en todas las regiones. • Cómo utilizar Windows XP • Documentación de mi equipo • Documentación para los dispositivos (como, por ejemplo, un módem) Centro de ayuda y soporte técnico de Windows 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y seleccione Ayuda y soporte técnico. 2 Escriba una palabra o frase que describa el problema y, a continuación, haga clic en el icono de flecha. 3 Haga clic en el tema que describa el problema. 4 Siga las instrucciones que aparecen en pantalla. • Cómo volver a instalar mi sistema operativo CD del sistema operativo El sistema operativo ya está instalado en el equipo. Para volver a instalar el sistema operativo, utilice el CD del sistema operativo. Consulte la Guía del usuario para obtener instrucciones acerca de cómo volver a instalar el sistema operativo. Después de volver a instalar el sistema operativo, utilice el CD de controladores y utilidades para volver a instalar los controladores de los dispositivos suministrados con el equipo. La clave del producto del sistema operativo se encuentra en el equipo. ¿Qué busca? Encuéntrelo aquíGuía de información del sistema 105 Configuración del equipo PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de esta sección, siga las instrucciones de seguridad que aparecen al principio de este documento. 1 Desempaquete la caja de accesorios. 2 Saque el contenido de la caja de accesorios, que necesitará para completar la configuración del ordenador. La caja de accesorios también contiene la documentación del usuario y todo el software o hardware adicional (como tarjetas PC, unidades o baterías) que ha solicitado. 3 Conecte el adaptador de CA al conector del adaptador de CA del equipo y a la toma de corriente.106 Guía de información del sistema www.dell.com | support.dell.com 4 Para encender el equipo, abra la pantalla y oprima el botón de alimentación. NOTA: No conecte el equipo al dispositivo de acoplamiento hasta que el equipo se haya encendido y apagado como mínimo una vez. Botón de alimentaciónGuía de información del sistema 107 Acerca de su equipo Vista anterior Pantalla Seguro de la pantalla Altavoces Teclado Indicadores de estado del teclado Superficie táctil Botones de la superficie táctil Botón de alimentación Indicadores de estado del dispositivo108 Guía de información del sistema www.dell.com | support.dell.com Vista izquierda Vista derecha conector IEEE 1394 Ranura para la tarjeta PC Sensor de infrarrojos Conectores de audio (2) Ranura para cable de seguridad Ranura para cable de seguridad Compartimento para módulos Pasador de liberación del dispositivoGuía de información del sistema 109 Vista posterior PRECAUCIÓN: No introduzca objetos ni permita que el polvo se acumule en las rejillas de ventilación ni las bloquee. No almacene el equipo en un entorno con poca ventilación, como un maletín cerrado, mientras esté en funcionamiento. La circulación restringida de aire podría dañar el equipo o provocar un incendio. Vista inferior Conectores USB (2) Conector para S-vídeo y salida de TV Conector de módem (RJ-11) (opcional) Conector de red (RJ-45) Conector paralelo Conector de vídeo Conector serie Conector del adaptador de CA Rejillas de ventilación Cubierta del módulo de memoria Batería Ranura para el dispositivo de acoplamiento Cubierta de la minitarjeta PCI Pasador de liberación del compartimento de la batería Unidad de disco duro Ventilador Medidor de carga de la batería110 Guía de información del sistema www.dell.com | support.dell.com Extracción de una batería Para obtener más información acerca de cómo extraer la segunda batería, consulte la sección “Uso del compartimento modular” de la Guía del usuario en línea. PRECAUCIÓN: antes de realizar estos procedimientos, apague el equipo, desconéctelo del tomacorriente y desenchufe el módem de la toma de teléfono de la pared. AVISO: si decide sustituir la batería mientras el equipo se encuentra en el modo de espera, tiene hasta 90 segundos para realizar la sustitución antes de que el equipo se cierre y pierda los datos no guardados. 1 Asegúrese de que el equipo esté apagado, desconectado de la toma de corriente y desconectado de la toma de teléfono de la pared. 2 Si el equipo está conectado (acoplado) a un dispositivo de acoplamiento, desacóplelo. Si desea instrucciones, consulte la documentación incluida con el dispositivo de acoplamiento. 3 Deslice y sostenga el pasador de liberación del compartimento de la batería y, a continuación, extraiga la batería del compartimento.Guía de información del sistema 111 Extracción e instalación de una batería de reserva 1 Extraiga la batería. 2 Extraiga la cubierta de la batería de reserva. 3 Deslice la batería de reserva hacia el conector y saque la batería de su compartimento. 4 Desconecte el cable de la batería de reserva del conector. Cable de la batería de reserva Conector Batería de reserva112 Guía de información del sistema www.dell.com | support.dell.com 5 Enchufe el cable de la batería de reserva en el conector del compartimento de la batería de reserva. 6 Introduzca la batería de reserva en su compartimento y vuelva a colocar la cubierta. Instalación de una batería Deslice la batería en el compartimento hasta que el pasador de liberación haga clic. Para obtener más información acerca de cómo instalar la segunda batería, consulte la sección “Uso del compartimento modular” de la Guía del usuario en línea.Guía de información del sistema 113 Diagnósticos Dell PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de esta sección, siga las instrucciones de seguridad que aparecen al principio de este documento. Cuándo utilizar los Diagnósticos Dell Si tiene algún problema con el equipo, realice las comprobaciones que se indican en la sección “Solución de problemas” en la Guía del usuario y ejecute los Diagnósticos Dell antes de ponerse en contacto con Dell para obtener soporte técnico. Se recomienda imprimir estos procesos antes de empezar. AVISO: Los Diagnósticos Dell sólo funcionan en los equipos Dell™. Los Diagnósticos Dell están situados en una partición oculta para la utilidad de diagnóstico (Diagnostic) de la unidad de disco duro. NOTA: Si el equipo no puede mostrar una imagen en la pantalla, póngase en contacto con Dell (consulte la sección “Obtención de ayuda” de la Guía del usuario para obtener la información de contacto adecuada). 1 Apague el equipo. 2 Si el equipo está conectado (acoplado) a un dispositivo de acoplamiento, desacóplelo. Si desea instrucciones, consulte la documentación incluida con el dispositivo de acoplamiento. 3 Conecte el equipo a un enchufe eléctrico. 4 Encienda el equipo. Cuando aparezca el logotipo de DELL™, oprima inmediatamente. NOTA: Si no aparece nada en la pantalla, mantenga oprimida la tecla y el botón de alimentación durante 5 segundos aproximadamente para iniciar los Diagnósticos Dell. El equipo ejecutará automáticamente la evaluación del sistema previa al inicio. NOTA: Si recibe un mensaje que indica que no se ha encontrado ninguna partición para la utilidad de diagnóstico, ejecute los Diagnósticos Dell desde el CD de controladores y utilidades. Si espera demasiado y aparece el logotipo de Microsoft® Windows®, siga esperando hasta que aparezca el escritorio de Windows. A continuación, apague el equipo mediante el menú Inicio y vuelva a intentarlo. 5 Cuando aparezca la lista de dispositivos de inicio, resalte Diagnostics (Diagnósticos) y pulse . El equipo ejecutará la evaluación del sistema previa al inicio, una serie de pruebas iniciales de la tarjeta del sistema, el teclado, la unidad de disco duro y la pantalla. • Durante la evaluación, responda a las preguntas que puedan formularse. • Si se detecta una falla, el equipo se detiene y emite sonidos. Para detener la evaluación y reiniciar el equipo, oprima ; para continuar con la siguiente prueba, oprima ; para volver a probar el componente que falló, oprima . 114 Guía de información del sistema www.dell.com | support.dell.com • Si se detectan fallas durante la evaluación del sistema previa al inicio, anote los códigos de error y póngase en contacto con Dell (consulte la sección “Obtención de ayuda” de la Guía del usuario para obtener la información de contacto adecuada) antes de continuar con los Diagnósticos Dell. Si la evaluación del sistema previa al inicio se realiza correctamente, recibirá el mensaje Booting Dell Diagnostic Utility Partition. Press any key to continue. 6 Oprima cualquier tecla para iniciar los diagnósticos Dell desde la partición para la utilidad de diagnóstico del disco duro. 7 Cuando aparezca el menú Main (Principal) de los diagnósticos Dell, seleccione la prueba que desee ejecutar. Menú principal de los Diagnósticos Dell 1 Una vez que se hayan cargado los Diagnósticos Dell y aparezca la pantalla Main Menu (Menú principal), haga clic en el botón de la opción que desee. 2 Si se produce un problema durante una prueba, aparecerá un mensaje con un código de error y una descripción del problema. Anote el código de error y la descripción del problema, y siga las instrucciones de la pantalla. Si no puede resolver la condición del error, póngase en contacto con Dell (consulte la sección “Obtención de ayuda” de la Guía del usuario para obtener la información de contacto adecuada). NOTA: La etiqueta de servicio para su equipo está situada en la parte superior de cada pantalla de prueba. Si se pone en contacto con Dell, el servicio de asistencia técnica le pedirá su etiqueta de servicio. Opción Función Express Test (Prueba rápida) Realiza una prueba rápida de los dispositivos. Esta prueba suele tardar de 10 a 20 minutos y no requiere ninguna acción por parte del usuario. Ejecute primero Express Test (Prueba rápida) para incrementar la posibilidad de rastrear el problema rápidamente. Extended Test (Prueba extendida) Realiza una prueba completa de los dispositivos. Esta prueba suele tardar una o varias horas y requiere que usted responda de manera periódica a una serie de preguntas. Custom Test (Prueba personalizada) Prueba un dispositivo específico. Puede personalizar las pruebas que desee ejecutar. Symptom Tree (Árbol de síntomas) Hace una lista de los síntomas más habituales que se pueden encontrar y le permite seleccionar una prueba basándose en el síntoma del problema que usted tiene.Guía de información del sistema 115 3 Si ejecuta una prueba desde la opción Custom Test (Prueba personalizada) o Symptom Tree (Árbol de síntomas), haga clic en la pestaña correspondiente que se describe en la tabla siguiente para obtener más información. 4 Cuando las pruebas hayan finalizado, cierre la pantalla de prueba para volver a la pantalla Main Menu (Menú principal). Para salir de Diagnósticos Dell y reiniciar el equipo, cierre la pantalla Main Menu (Menú principal). Ficha Función Results (Resultado) Muestra el resultado de la prueba y las condiciones de error encontradas. Errors (Errores) Muestra las condiciones de error encontradas, los códigos de error y la descripción del problema. Help (Ayuda) Describe la prueba y puede indicar los requisitos para ejecutarla. Configuration (Configuración) Muestra la configuración de hardware del dispositivo seleccionado. Los Diagnósticos Dell obtienen la información de configuración de todos los dispositivos a partir de la configuración del sistema, la memoria y varias pruebas internas, y la muestran en la lista de dispositivos del panel izquierdo de la pantalla. La lista de dispositivos puede que no muestre los nombres de todos los componentes instalados en el equipo o de todos los dispositivos conectados al equipo. Parameters (Parámetros) Permite personalizar la prueba cambiando su configuración.116 Guía de información del sistema www.dell.com | support.dell.com Avisos reglamentarios Una interferencia electromagnética (EMI, del inglés Electromagnetic Interference) es cualquier señal o emisión, radiada en el espacio o conducida a través de un cable de alimentación o señal, que pone en peligro el funcionamiento de una navegación por radio u otro servicio de seguridad o degrada seriamente, obstruye o interrumpe de forma repetida un servicio de comunicaciones por radio autorizado. Los servicios de radiocomunicaciones incluyen, entre otros, emisoras comerciales de AM/FM, televisión, servicios de telefonía móvil, radar, control de tráfico aéreo, buscapersonas y servicios de comunicación personal (PCS, Personal Communication Services). Estos servicios autorizados, junto con emisores no intencionados como dispositivos digitales, incluidos los equipos informáticos, contribuyen al entorno electromagnético. La compatibilidad electromagnética (EMC, Electromagnetic Compatibility) es la capacidad de los componentes del equipo electrónico de funcionar correctamente juntos en el entorno electrónico. Aunque este equipo se ha diseñado y ajustado para cumplir con los límites de emisión electromagnética establecidos por la agencia reglamentaria, no hay ninguna garantía de que no ocurran interferencias en una instalación en particular. Si este equipo provoca interferencias con servicios de comunicaciones por radio, lo que se puede determinar apagando y encendiendo el equipo, intente corregir dichas interferencias adoptando una o varias de las siguientes medidas: • Cambie la orientación de la antena de recepción. • Vuelva a ubicar el equipo con respecto al receptor. • Separe el equipo del receptor. • Conecte el equipo a un enchufe diferente de forma que el equipo y el receptor se encuentren en ramas distintas del circuito. Si es necesario, consulte a un representante del servicio de asistencia técnica de Dell o a un técnico experimentado de radio o televisión para obtener consejos adicionales. Para obtener Información reglamentaria adicional, consulte la Guía del usuario en línea incluida con el equipo. Para acceder a la Guía del usuario, consulte la página 103.Guía de información del sistema 117 Información para NOM (únicamente para México) Se proporciona la siguiente información sobre el/los dispositivo(s) descrito(s) en este documento de acuerdo a los requisitos establecidos por las Normas Oficiales para México (NOM): Exportador: Dell Inc. One Dell Way Round Rock, TX 78682 Importador: Dell Computer de México, S.A. de C.V. Paseo de la Reforma 2620 - 11° Piso Col. Lomas Altas 11950 México, D.F. Enviar a: Dell Computer de México, S.A. de C.V. al Cuidado de Kuehne & Nagel de México S. de R.L. Avenida Soles No. 55 Col. Peñon de los Baños 15520 México, D.F. Número de modelo: PP10L Voltaje de entrada de alimentación: 100–240 VCA Frecuencia: 50 60 Hz Consumo eléctrico: 1,5 A Voltaje de salida: 19,5 V de CC Intensidad de salida: 4,62 A118 Guía de información del sistema www.dell.com | support.dell.com Política de devolución y garantía limitada Términos contractuales - Argentina - Garantía ofrecida por DELL al usuario final - 1º. Año Garantía Dell garantiza al usuario final, de conformidad con las disposiciones abajo indicadas, que los productos de hardware con su marca, adquiridos por el usuario final a una empresa del grupo Dell o a un distribuidor autorizado, en América Latina y el Caribe, estarán libres de defectos en sus componentes electrónicos, mecánicos y de ensamblado y montaje, por el plazo de 1(un) año contado desde la fecha de adquisición del producto indicada en la factura de compra, siempre y cuando se respeten las condiciones de instalación y uso, excepto en lo que atañe a los ítems relacionados con las excepciones indicadas expresamente en el presente, y que se encuentre dentro de ese plazo o en el período de garantía legal. Los productos sobre los que sean presentados reclamos justificados serán, a criterio de DELL, reparados o reemplazados a costo de DELL. Todas las piezas removidas de los productos reparados pasarán a ser propiedad de DELL. DELL podrá utilizar partes nuevas o reacondicionadas, de prestaciones, calidad y tecnología equivalente o superior a la reemplazada, respetando las especificaciones originales de los productos. Responsabilidad del cliente Notificar de inmediato a DELL sobre el mal funcionamiento de sus equipos al Servicio Técnico de DELL. Proporcionar al personal técnico de DELL acceso total e incondicional a la totalidad de los equipos y software. En caso de que existan restricciones de seguridad que se apliquen a alguno o a todos los sistemas del cliente que necesiten recibir asistencia técnica en virtud de esta garantía contractual, es posible que sea solicitado al cliente que este asuma responsabilidades adicionales para el mantenimiento del equipo y/o del software. Notificar a DELL sobre cualquier peligro potencial relativo a la seguridad o salud que pueda existir en las instalaciones del Cliente, así como proporcionar y/o recomendar procedimientos de seguridad a seguir, en caso en que estos fueran aplicables. Proporcionar, en caso que sea necesario y sin ningún cargo para DELL, un lugar de trabajo adecuado y acceso a los medios de comunicación que sean necesarios para la ejecución del servicio. Mantener actualizada una copia de seguridad del sistema operativo y de los programas de software pertinentes, así como de los datos en ellos contenidos. Garantizar la presencia de una persona responsable durante la ejecución del servicio. Proveer, sin costo para DELL, los medios de grabación y almacenaje, incluyendo cintas y discos magnéticos necesarios para la ejecución de los servicios, así como aparatos de comunicación de datos (modems) y líneas telefónicas y/o conexiones de red cuando fueran necesarias para la ejecución del servicio a distancia por vía electrónica (accesos electrónicos remotos). Exclusiones Los siguientes ítems, no están cubiertos por la garantía: • Partes consumibles, tales como baterías no recargables, bolsas, maletines, etc.; • Programas de computación (software) y su reinstalación; • Limpieza y reparaciones cosméticas o de desgaste resultante del uso normal de los productos; • Daños causados por el mal uso, caídas, golpes, abuso, negligencia, impericia, imprudencia o vandalismo; • Daños causados por almacenamiento o uso en condiciones distintas a las contenidas en las especificaciones; • Daños causados por equipos que produzcan o induzcan interferencias electromagnéticas o por problemas en la instalación eléctrica en desacuerdo con las normas de seguridad eléctrica.Guía de información del sistema 119 • Daños causados por programas de computación (software), accesorios o productos de terceros adicionados a un producto comercializado por DELL después de haber sido enviado al usuario final, directamente de DELL; • Daños causados por violación del producto, intento de reparación o ajuste por terceros no autorizados por DELL; • Daños causados por agentes de la naturaleza, como descargas eléctricas (rayos), inundaciones, incendios, derrumbes, terremotos, etc.; • Pérdidas y daños causados por el producto o por el desempeño del producto, incluyendo, pero no limitando al lucro cesante, pérdidas financieras y limitaciones o reducciones de productividad, resultantes de actos relacionados a las hipótesis no cubiertas por la garantía; y, • Pérdida total o parcial de cualquier programa de computación (software), datos o medios magnéticos removibles. La garantía tampoco será válida en caso de que la Factura de Compra presente raspaduras y/o alteraciones, tenga campos incompletos o vacíos en los items correspondientes a Fecha de compra y número de Orden o de serie del producto, y/o que no este confeccionada de acuerdo a la legislación fiscal vigente en la República Argentina. Atención al Consumidor Cuando el Cliente tenga algún comentario o sugerencia, estos deben ser presentados a través de las oficinas de ventas de DELL o a través de correo electrónico vía Internet a www.dell.com.ar. Para realizar un pedido de reparación, dentro del plazo de validez de la garantía, el usuario final deberá contactar al Servicio Técnico de DELL y proveer todas las informaciones que le solicite el personal técnico de DELL referentes a: datos del Cliente, de la maquina y de los síntomas en el momento del defecto. La falta de alguna de estas informaciones imposibilitará a DELL poder registrar el pedido. Una vez diagnosticado el problema, DELL realizara el despacho de la parte y/o de uno técnico necesarios para efectuar la reparación. El usuario final debe garantizar que el producto defectuoso estará disponible para ser atendido. Limitaciones y derechos DELL no ofrece ninguna otra garantía, aval o declaración similar, distinta a lo que expresamente se establece en el presente, y esta garantía substituye cualquier otra garantía, en la extensión máxima permitida por la ley. Esta garantía será el único y exclusivo recurso contra DELL o cualquier otra empresa del mismo grupo económico, no pudiendo ser responsabilizadas por lucro cesante, o pérdidas derivadas de contratos, o cualquier otra pérdida indirecta o imprevista derivada de la negligencia, violación contractual o cualquier otra. Esta garantía no excluye o afecta derechos garantizados por la ley al usuario final de DELL y/o cualquier derecho resultante de otros contratos celebrados por el usuario final con DELL y/o con cualquier otro vendedor autorizado por DELL. Garantía de 1 año del fabricante para el usuario final (sólo para Latinoamérica y el área del Caribe) Garantía Dell Computer Corporation (“Dell”) garantiza al usuario final, de acuerdo con las provisiones siguientes, que los productos de hardware de marca, adquiridos por el usuario final a una empresa de Dell o a un distribuidor de Dell autorizado en Latinoamérica o el área del Caribe están libres de defectos en materiales, mano de obra y diseño que afecten a su utilización normal, por un período de un año desde la fecha original de la compra. Los productos para los cuales se hace un debido reclamo serán, según la decisión de Dell, reparados o reemplazados a cuenta de Dell. Todas las piezas extraídas de los productos reparados pasarán a ser propiedad de Dell. Dell utiliza piezas nuevas y reparadas de diversos fabricantes para efectuar reparaciones y fabricar productos de repuesto.120 Guía de información del sistema www.dell.com | support.dell.com Exclusiones Esta garantía no se aplica a defectos que sean el resultado de: instalación, uso o mantenimiento incorrectos o inadecuados; acciones o modificaciones realizadas por parte de terceros no autorizados o del usuario final; daño accidental o voluntario o deterioro normal por el uso. Cómo hacer una reclamación En Latinoamérica o el área del Caribe, para hacer reclamaciones debe contactarse con un punto de venta de Dell durante el periodo que cubra la garantía. El usuario final siempre debe proporcionar la prueba de compra e indicar el nombre del vendedor, la fecha de la compra, el modelo y el número de serie, el nombre y la dirección del cliente y los detalles de los síntomas y la configuración en el momento del funcionamiento incorrecto, incluidos los periféricos y el software utilizados. De lo contrario, Dell puede rehusar la reclamación de la garantía. Una vez diagnosticado un defecto bajo la garantía, Dell se encargará del problema y pagará el envío por tierra, así como el seguro de ida y venida al centro de reparación y reemplazo Dell. El usuario final deberá asegurarse de que el producto defectuoso esté disponible para su recogida adecuadamente acondicionado en el embalaje original u otro de las mismas características de protección junto con los detalles señalados anteriormente y el número de devolución suministrado por Dell al usuario final. Derechos legales y limitación Dell no ofrece ninguna otra garantía ni realiza ninguna declaración equivalente aparte de las establecidas anteriormente. Esta Garantía sustituye todas las otras garantías, hasta el máximo permitido por la ley. En la ausencia de leyes aplicables esta garantía será el único y exclusivo recurso del usuario en contra de Dell o cualquiera de sus socios, y ni Dell ni cualquiera de sus socios serán responsables por la pérdida de ganancias o contratos, o cualquier otra pérdida indirecta o por consecuencia que resulte del descuido, violación de contrato o cualquier otra evento. Esta garantía no perjudica o afecta los derechos estatutarios obligatorios del usuario en contra o cualesquiera otros derechos que resulten de otros contratos entre el usuario y Dell o cualquier otro vendedor. Dell World Trade LP One Dell Way, Round Rock, TX 78682, EE.UU. Dell Computadores do Brasil Ltda (CNPJ No. 72.381.189/0001-10)/ Dell Commercial do Brasil Ltda (CNPJ No. 03 405 822/0001-40) Avenida Industrial Belgraf, 400 92990-000 - Eldorado do Sul RS - Brasil– Dell Computer de Chile Ltda Coyancura 2283, Piso 3- Of.302, Providencia, Santiago - Chile Dell Computer de Colombia Corporation Carrera 7 #115-33 Oficina 603 Bogotá, Colombia Dell Computer de Mexico SA de CV Paseo de la Reforma 2620 - 11° Piso Col. Lomas Altas 11950 México, D.F.Guía de información del sistema 121 Declaración de garantía Intel® sólo para procesadores Pentium® y Celeron® (sólo en EE.UU. y Canadá) Intel’s Three Year Limited Warranty Limited Warranty Intel warrants that its family of Pentium® and Celeron® processors, if properly used and installed, will be free from defects in materials and workmanship and will substantially conform to Intel’s publicly available specifications for a period of three (3) years after the date the Pentium or Celeron processor was purchased (whether purchased separately or as part of a computer system). If the Pentium or Celeron processor, which is the subject of this Limited Warranty, fails during the warranty period for reasons covered by this Limited Warranty, Intel, at its option, will: • REPAIR the Pentium or Celeron processor by means of hardware and/or software; OR • REPLACE the Pentium or Celeron processor with another Pentium or Celeron processor; OR if Intel is unable to repair or replace the particular Pentium or Celeron processor, • REFUND the then-current value of the Pentium or Celeron processor. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY, AND ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES THAT MAY EXIST UNDER STATE LAW, APPLY ONLY TO THE ORIGINAL PURCHASER OF THE PENTIUM OR CELERON PROCESSOR, OR PENTIUM OR CELERON PROCESSOR-BASED COMPUTER AND LAST ONLY FOR AS LONG AS SUCH PURCHASER CONTINUES TO OWN THE PROCESSOR. Extent of Limited Warranty Intel does not warrant that your Pentium or Celeron processor will be free from design defects or errors known as "errata." Current characterized errata are available upon request. This limited warranty is for purchasers in the United States and Canada only. The limited warranty does not cover any costs relating to removal or replacement of any Pentium or Celeron processors that are soldered or otherwise permanently affixed to your system’s motherboard. This limited warranty does not cover damages due to external causes, including accident, problems with electrical power, usage not in accordance with product instructions, misuse, neglect, alteration, repair, improper installation, or improper testing. How to Obtain Warranty Service To obtain warranty service for your Pentium or Celeron processor, you may contact your computer system manufacturer in accordance with its instructions, or you may contact Intel. To request warranty service from Intel, you should call Intel at 1-800-628-8686 during the warranty period during normal business hours (Pacific Time), excluding holidays. Please be prepared to provide: (1) your name, address, and telephone numbers; (2) proof of purchase; (3) this Intel warranty card; (4) a description of the computer system including the brand and model; and (5) an explanation of the problem. [Note: The Customer Service Representative may need additional information from you depending on the nature of the problem.] The replacement processor is warranted under this written warranty and is subject to the same limitations and exclusions for the remainder of the original warranty period or one (1) year, whichever is longer. WARRANTY LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS THESE WARRANTIES REPLACE ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. INTEL MAKES NO EXPRESS WARRANTIES BEYOND THOSE STATED HERE. INTEL DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. SOME LAWS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES SO THIS LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IF THESE LAWS APPLY, THEN ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD. NO WARRANTIES APPLY AFTER THAT PERIOD. SOME LAWS DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO THIS LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY INTEL’S RESPONSIBILITY UNDER THIS, OR ANY OTHER WARRANTY, IMPLIED OR EXPRESS, IS LIMITED TO REPAIR, REPLACEMENT OR REFUND, AS SET FORTH ABOVE. THESE REMEDIES ARE THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES FOR ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY. INTEL IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY OR UNDER ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOST PROFITS, DOWNTIME, GOODWILL, DAMAGE TO OR REPLACEMENT OF EQUIPMENT AND PROPERTY, AND ANY COSTS OF RECOVERING, REPROGRAMMING, OR REPRODUCING ANY PROGRAM OR DATA STORED IN OR USED WITH A SYSTEM CONTAINING YOUR PENTIUM PROCESSOR. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. THE LIMITED WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS THAT VARY FROM JURISDICTION TO JURISDICTION.122 Guía de información del sistema www.dell.com | support.dell.com Intel Pentium® and Celeron® Processors are backed by a three-year limited warranty. Please refer to the reverse side of this card for complete warranty details. Intel’s Commitment to Quality Intel is committed to producing the highest quality processors available. That’s why we have hundreds of people dedicated to continuously improve our design, manufacturing, and testing technology. We put every one of our Pentium® and Celeron® processors through a rigorous battery of tests during the design and manufacturing processes. To verify that the new chip will correctly run the software written for Intel Architecture processors, a team of Intel engineers is dedicated to compatibility testing. In a state-of-art lab, this group runs an extensive set of operating systems, applications, network tests and stress tests repeatedly to ensure that the processor is compatible with representative software. Just as importantly, we work with hardware and software companies in the computer industry to ensure that our processors are compatible with their products. Additionally, a sampling of Intel processors are subjected to a rigorous "burn-in" test whereby the chip is operated at higher-than-normal temperatures and voltages. During this burn-in period, the processor experiences the equivalent of weeks of normal usage. These units are monitored for failures as part of our ongoing quality assurance process. As a result, today’s microprocessors from Intel are among the most reliable components in computers. What are "Errata"? Exhaustive product testing can highlight differences between the actual behavior of the microprocessor and its specifications. Sometimes the discrepancies are caused by a design defect or error, which we call errata. Rigorous validation identifies most errata during the development of the processor, but we do detect additional errata during the life cycle of a microprocessor. When an erratum is identified, our engineers work to characterize it and find a solution. We work with system designers and software developers to ensure that the discrepancy does not affect their products. If necessary, special software or hardware solutions (sometimes known as "work arounds") are implemented in the system design to prevent computer users from encountering the problem. Errata may then be corrected in future revisions of the microprocessor. No microprocessor is perfect, and Intel recognizes that some consumers want to know about any errata, whether or not the errata affect them. Intel makes documentation of all characterized Pentium and Celeron processor errata publicly available through our Technical Documentation Service. At Intel, our goal is to make every computer user satisfied with his or her Pentium or Celeron processor. Should you have any questions, comments or concerns about your Intel microprocessor, please call us at 1-800-628-8686. ©1997, 1998 Intel Corporation. All rights reserved.www.dell.com | support.dell.com Printed in the U.S.A. Imprimé†aux†États-Unis. Impresso nos EUA. Impreso en EE. UU. 0R1189A01 www.dell.com | support.dell.com Dell™ Latitude™ 100L Manuel du propriétaire Modèle PP08Lwww.dell.com | support.dell.com COMMENT Remarques, avis et précautions REMARQUE : Une REMARQUE indique une information importante qui peut vous aider à mieux utiliser votre ordinateur. AVIS : Un AVIS vous avertit d’un risque de dommage matériel ou de perte de données et vous indique comment éviter le problème. PRÉCAUTION : Une PRÉCAUTION indique un risque potentiel d'endommagement du matériel, de blessure corporelle ou mortelle. Abréviations et acronymes Pour une liste complète des abréviations et des acronymes, reportez-vous au fichier d'aide de Dell Latitude 100L. Pour accéder au fichier d'aide, reportez-vous à la page 16. Si vous avez acheté un ordinateur Dell™ Série n, les références du présent document concernant les systèmes d'application Microsoft® Windows® ne sont pas applicables. ____________________ Les informations contenues dans ce document sont sujettes à modification sans préavis. © 2004 Dell Inc. Tous droits réservés. La reproduction de ce document, de quelque manière que ce soit, sans l'autorisation écrite de Dell Inc. est strictement interdite. Marques utilisées dans ce document : Dell, le logo DELL, AccessDirect, Latitude, Dell Precision, Dimension, OptiPlex, Latitude, PowerApp, PowerEdge, PowerConnect, PowerVault, Axim, TrueMobile et DellNet sont des marques de Dell Inc. ; Intel, Pentium, et Celeron sont des marques déposées de Intel Corporation ; Microsoft et Windows sont des marques déposées de Microsoft Corporation; EMC est une marque déposée de EMC Corporation ; Bluetooth est une marque appartenant à Bluetooth SIG, Inc. et utilisée par Dell Inc. sous licence. D'autres marques et noms commerciaux peuvent être utilisés dans ce document pour faire référence aux personnes morales se réclamant de ces marques et de ces noms ou à leurs produits. Dell Inc. rejette tout intérêt propriétaire dans les marques et les noms commerciaux autres que les siens. Modèle PP08L Mars 2004 Réf. C5188 Rév. A00Table des matières 3 FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188bk0TOC.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/16/04 – FOR PROOF ONLY Table des matières PRÉCAUTION : Consignes de sécurité . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 SÉCURITÉ : Généralités . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 SÉCURITÉ : Alimentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 SÉCURITÉ : Batterie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 SÉCURITÉ : Voyage en avion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 SÉCURITÉ : Instructions relatives à la compatibilité électromagnétique (EMC, Electromagnetic Compatibility) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Lors de l'utilisation de votre ordinateur. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 SÉCURITÉ : Conseils en ergonomie. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 SÉCURITÉ : Intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur . . . . . . . . 12 SÉCURITÉ : Protection contre les décharges électrostatiques . . . . . . 12 SÉCURITÉ : Mise au rebut de la batterie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Trouver des informations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 1 Présentation de votre ordinateur Vue avant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Vue du côté gauche . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Vue du côté droit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Vue arrière . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Vue de dessous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 2 Installation de votre ordinateur Connexion à Internet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Configuration de la connexion Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Problèmes liés au modem et à la connexion Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Problèmes de messagerie électronique. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Transfert d'informations vers un nouvel ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Installation d'une imprimante . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Câble de l'imprimante . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Table des matières FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188bk0TOC.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/16/04 – FOR PROOF ONLY Connexion d'une imprimante USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Problèmes d'imprimante . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Périphériques de protection contre les sautes de tension électrique. . . . . 35 Parasurtenseurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Filtres de ligne . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Onduleurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Mise hors tension de l'ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 3 Utilisation d'une batterie Performances de la batterie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Vérification de la charge de la batterie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Jauge d'alimentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Alerte de batterie faible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Chargement de la batterie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Retrait de la batterie. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Installation de la batterie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Stockage de la batterie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Problèmes de batterie et d'alimentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Si la batterie ne se charge pas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Si la tension de la batterie est basse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 4 Utilisation du clavier et de la tablette tactile Bouton Dell™ AccessDirect™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Reprogrammation du bouton. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Pavé numérique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Raccourcis clavier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Fonctions système . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Plateau du lecteur de CD ou DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Fonctions d'affichage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Gestion de l'alimentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Fonctions des haut-parleurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Fonctions de la touche du logo Microsoft® Windows® . . . . . . . . . 43Table des matières 5 FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188bk0TOC.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/16/04 – FOR PROOF ONLY Tablette tactile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Personnalisation de la tablette tactile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Problèmes liés à la tablette tactile ou à la souris . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Problèmes liés au clavier externe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Caractères inattendus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 5 Utilisation de CD, DVD et autres supports multimédia Utilisation de CD ou de DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Problèmes liés aux CD ou DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Si vous ne parvenez pas à lire un CD, un CD-RW ou un DVD. . . . . . . 47 Si vous ne parvenez pas à éjecter le plateau du lecteur de CD, CD-RW ou DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Si vous entendez un bruit grinçant ou un raclement inhabituel. . . . . . 48 Si le lecteur de CD-RW arrête une gravure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Problèmes de son et de haut-parleurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Si vous avez un problème avec les haut-parleurs intégrés. . . . . . . . 48 Si vous avez un problème avec les haut-parleurs externes . . . . . . . 48 Copie de CD et DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Comment copier un CD ou un DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Utilisation de CD-R, CD-RW, DVD+R et DVD+RW vierges . . . . . . . . 50 Conseils pratiques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 6 Installation d'un réseau domestique et d'un réseau de bureau Connexion à une carte réseau . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Assistant Installation réseau . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Problèmes de réseau . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Connexion à un réseau local sans fil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Identification de votre type de réseau . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Connexion à un réseau sans fil sous Microsoft® Windows® XP . . . . . 53 Configuration des paramètres de sécurité (optionnel) . . . . . . . . . . 556 Table des matières FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188bk0TOC.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/16/04 – FOR PROOF ONLY 7 Résolution des problèmes Dell Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Quand utiliser Dell Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Messages d'erreur. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Problèmes liés à la vidéo et à l'affichage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Si l'écran reste vide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Si l'écran est difficile à lire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Si seule une partie de l'écran est lisible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Problèmes de scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Problèmes de lecteur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Si vous ne pouvez pas enregistrer un fichier sur une disquette . . . . . 65 Si vous rencontrez des problèmes liés à un disque dur . . . . . . . . . 66 Problèmes de carte PC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Problèmes de programmes généraux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Un programme se bloque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Un programme ne répond plus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Des messages d'erreur apparaissent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Résolution d'autres problèmes techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Si l'ordinateur est mouillé . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Si vous avez laissé tomber votre ordinateur ou s'il est endommagé . . . . . 69 Pilotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Qu'est-ce qu'un pilote ? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Identification des pilotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Réinstallation des pilotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Réinstallation manuelle des pilotes pour Windows XP. . . . . . . . . . 71 Résolution des incompatibilités logicielles et matérielles. . . . . . . . . . 72 Utilisation de la fonction Restauration du système . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Création d'un point de restauration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Restauration de l'ordinateur à un état antérieur. . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Annulation de la dernière restauration du système . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Réinstallation de Microsoft® Windows® XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Avant la réinstallation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Réinstallation de Windows XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74Table des matières 7 FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188bk0TOC.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/16/04 – FOR PROOF ONLY 8 Ajout et remplacement de pièces Avant de commencer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Outils recommandés . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Mise hors tension de votre ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Disque dur. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Retour d'un disque dur à Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Mémoire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Modem et carte Mini PCI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Remplacement du modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Ajout d'une carte Mini PCI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Lecteur de CD ou DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Clavier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 9 Annexe Caractéristiques. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Utilisation du programme de configuration du système . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Présentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Affichage des écrans de configuration du système . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Écrans de configuration du système . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Options les plus communément utilisées . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Optimiser les performances du système et de la batterie . . . . . . . . . 100 Présentation des performances du système . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Optimisation de la consommation d'énergie et durée de charge de la batterie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Ventilateur à vitesse variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Obtention d'aide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Assistance technique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Problèmes liés à votre commande . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Informations sur les produits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Renvoi d'articles pour une réparation sous garantie ou un avoir. . . . 103 Avant d'appeler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Contacter Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Réglementations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Accord de licence logicielle Dell. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1238 Table des matières FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188bk0TOC.fm DELL CONFIDENTIAL – PRELIMINARY 3/16/04 – FOR PROOF ONLY Garantie limitée et règle de retour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Conditions de garantie limitée pour les produits matériels Dell (Canada seulement) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Règle de retour «Satisfait ou remboursé» (Canada seulement). . . . . 128 Logiciels et périphériques Dell (Canada seulement). . . . . . . . . . 128 Déclaration de garantie Intel® réservée aux processeurs Pentium® et Celeron® seulement (États-Unis et Canada uniquement) . . . . . . 130 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133PRÉCAUTION : Consignes de sécurité 9 FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188si0.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT PRÉCAUTION : Consignes de sécurité Pour votre sécurité et pour protéger votre ordinateur ainsi que votre environnement de travail contre d'éventuels dommages, respectez les consignes de sécurité ci-dessous. SÉCURITÉ : Généralités • Ne tentez pas d'assurer vous-même l'entretien de votre ordinateur à moins que vous ne soyez un technicien de maintenance qualifié. Suivez toujours scrupuleusement les instructions d'installation. • Si vous raccordez une rallonge à votre adaptateur secteur, assurez-vous que l'intensité totale du courant drainé par tous les appareils raccordés à cette rallonge ne dépasse pas la limite de cette dernière. • N'introduisez pas d'objets dans les entrées d'air ou autres ouvertures de votre ordinateur. Cela risquerait de provoquer un incendie ou un choc électrique dû à un court-circuit des composants internes. • Ne placez pas l'ordinateur dans un environnement peu aéré, tel qu'une sacoche de transport ou une mallette fermée, lorsque celui-ci fonctionne. Ceci risque d'endommager l'ordinateur ou de provoquer un incendie. • Placez votre ordinateur à distance des radiateurs et autres sources de chaleur. Veillez à ne pas bloquer les grilles de refroidissement. Évitez de placer des papiers volants sous votre ordinateur ; ne placez pas votre ordinateur dans une unité murale fermée ou sur un lit, un canapé ou un tapis. • L'adaptateur secteur doit se trouver dans une zone aérée, par exemple sur un bureau ou sur le sol, lorsqu'il est utilisé pour alimenter l'ordinateur ou pour charger la batterie. Ne recouvrez pas l'adaptateur secteur de papiers ou d'autres objets susceptibles d'entraver le refroidissement. De même, n'utilisez pas l'adaptateur secteur dans une mallette de transport. • L'adaptateur secteur peut être chaud lorsque vous utilisez votre ordinateur. Faites donc très attention lorsque vous manipulez l'adaptateur pendant ou après son fonctionnement. • Évitez de poser votre ordinateur portable en fonctionnement sur vos genoux, à même la peau, pendant une période prolongée. La température augmente sur la surface de la base pendant le fonctionnement normal de l'ordinateur (notamment s'il est alimenté par le secteur). Le contact prolongé avec la peau peut causer inconfort ou brûlure. • N'utilisez pas votre ordinateur près de l'eau ou dans un environnement humide, par exemple près d'une baignoire, d'un évier, d'une piscine ou dans un sous-sol humide. • Si votre ordinateur comprend un modem intégré ou optionnel (carte PC), débranchez le modem de la ligne téléphonique à l'approche d'un orage électrique afin d'éviter le risque (très faible) de choc électrique causé par un éclair et transmis par la ligne téléphonique. • Pour réduire le danger lié à un choc électrique, n'effectuez aucun branchement ou débranchement pendant un orage électrique, ni aucune opération de maintenance ou de reconfiguration de ce produit. N'utilisez jamais l'ordinateur pendant un orage électrique, sauf si tous les câbles ont été déconnectés et l'ordinateur est alimenté par la batterie. • Si votre ordinateur comprend un modem, le câble utilisé avec le modem doit avoir une épaisseur minimale de 26 AWG (American Wire Gauge) et une fiche modulaire RJ-11 conforme à la norme FCC. • Avant d'ouvrir le capot du modem/carte Mini PCI/ module de mémoire de la face inférieure de votre ordinateur, débranchez le câble de téléphone et tous les câbles d'alimentation des prises électriques. • Si votre ordinateur dispose d'un connecteur modem RJ-11 et d'un connecteur réseau RJ-45 (ces deux connecteurs se ressemblent), veillez à brancher le câble téléphonique dans le connecteur RJ-11 et non pas dans le connecteur RJ-45. • Les cartes PC peuvent chauffer beaucoup en fonctionnement normal. Faites donc très attention lorsque vous les retirez après une utilisation prolongée. • Débranchez l'ordinateur de la prise électrique avant de le nettoyer. Nettoyez votre ordinateur avec un tissu doux et humidifié avec de l'eau. N'utilisez pas de liquide ni d'aérosol nettoyants, ceux-ci peuvent contenir des substances inflammables.10 PRÉCAUTION : Consignes de sécurité www.dell.com | support.dell.com FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188si0.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT SÉCURITÉ : Alimentation • Utilisez uniquement l'adaptateur secteur fourni par Dell et homologué pour cet ordinateur. L'utilisation d'un autre adaptateur secteur peut provoquer un incendie ou une explosion. • Avant de raccorder l'ordinateur à une prise électrique, assurez-vous que la tension du secteur est compatible avec la tension d'entrée de l'adaptateur. • Pour mettre l'ordinateur totalement hors tension, éteignez-le, débranchez l'adaptateur secteur de la prise électrique et retirez toutes les batteries installées dans la baie des batteries ou la baie modulaire. • Pour éviter tout risque de décharge électrique, branchez les câbles de l'adaptateur secteur et des périphériques sur des sources d'alimentation électriques correctement reliées à la terre. Il se peut que ces câbles d'alimentation soient équipés de prises à trois broches afin de fournir une mise à la terre. N'utilisez pas de fiche intermédiaire ou retirez la broche de mise à la terre du câble d'alimentation. Si vous utilisez une rallonge, assurez-vous qu'il s'agit du type approprié, 2 ou 3 broches, avant de la raccorder au câble de l'adaptateur secteur. • Assurez-vous que rien ne repose sur le cordon d'alimentation de l'adaptateur secteur et que ce cordon n'est pas placé dans un endroit où l'on pourrait marcher ou trébucher dessus. • Si vous utilisez plusieurs rampes d'alimentation, soyez prudent lorsque vous raccordez le câble d'alimentation de l'adaptateur secteur à la rampe d'alimentation. Certaines rampes d'alimentation peuvent ne pas empêcher l'insertion d'une prise de façon incorrecte. L'insertion incorrecte de la prise de courant peut provoquer un dommage irréparable sur votre ordinateur ainsi qu'un risque de choc électrique et/ou d'incendie. Assurez-vous que la broche de mise à la terre de la prise de courant est insérée dans le contact de mise à la terre correspondant de la rampe d'alimentation. SÉCURITÉ : Batterie • Utilisez uniquement les modules de batteries Dell™ homologués pour cet ordinateur. L'utilisation d'autres types de modules peut présenter un risque d'incendie ou d'explosion. • Ne transportez pas les batteries dans votre poche, sac à main ou autre conteneur où des objets métalliques (comme des clés de voiture ou des trombones) pourraient court-circuiter les bornes de la batterie. L'excès de flux de courant qui en résulterait pourrait entraîner des températures extrêmement élevées et, par conséquent, des dommages sur la batterie, un incendie ou des brûlures. • La batterie peut causer des brûlures si vous la manipulez de façon incorrecte. Ne démontez pas la batterie. Manipulez les batteries endommagées ou percées avec une extrême précaution. Lorsqu'une batterie est endommagée, des électrolytes peuvent fuir des cellules et provoquer des dommages corporels. • Rangez la batterie hors de portée des enfants. • Ne rangez pas et ne laissez pas votre ordinateur ou votre batterie près d'une source de chaleur, telle qu'un radiateur, une cheminée, un poêle, un chauffage électrique, ou tout autre appareil générateur de chaleur et ne l'exposez pas à des températures supérieures à 60° C. Lorsque les batteries atteignent une température excessive, les cellules de la batterie peuvent exploser ou imploser, représentant alors un risque d'incendie. • Ne jetez pas la batterie au feu ni avec les ordures ménagères. Les cellules de la batterie risquent d'exploser. Débarrassez-vous de la batterie usagée selon les instructions du fabricant ou contactez le service municipal de traitement des déchets afin de connaître les instructions de mise au rebut. Débarrassez-vous rapidement d'une batterie usagée ou endommagée. SÉCURITÉ : Voyage en avion • Les réglementations de certaines administrations fédérales d'aviation et/ou les restrictions propres à chaque compagnie aérienne peuvent s'appliquer au fonctionnement de votre ordinateur Dell pendant que vous voyagez à bord d'un avion. Par exemple, ces réglementations/restrictions peuvent interdire l'utilisation de tout appareil électronique personnel ayant la capacité de transmettre intentionnellement des fréquences radio ou d'autres signaux électromagnétiques au cours d'un vol aérien.PRÉCAUTION : Consignes de sécurité 11 FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188si0.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT – Afin de respecter au mieux ces instructions, si votre ordinateur portable Dell est équipé de Dell TrueMobile™ ou d'autres dispositifs de communication sans fil, désactivez cet appareil avant de monter à bord de l'avion et veillez à suivre les instructions fournies par le personnel à bord sur l'utilisation de ce type d'appareils. – En outre, l'utilisation d'appareils électroniques personnels, comme un ordinateur portable, peut être interdite pendant certaines phases critiques du vol, par exemple pendant le décollage et l'atterrissage. Certaines compagnies aériennes considèrent la phase critique comme n'importe quel moment du vol où l'avion vole au-dessous de 3050 m. Veuillez suivre les instructions propres à la compagnie aérienne quant à l'utilisation d'un appareil électronique personnel. SÉCURITÉ : Instructions relatives à la compatibilité électromagnétique (EMC, Electromagnetic Compatibility) Utilisez des câbles blindés afin de vous assurer de conserver la classification EMC adaptée à l'environnement donné. Dell offre un câble pour les imprimantes utilisant le port parallèle. Si vous le souhaitez, vous pouvez commander un câble sur le site Web de Dell, à l'adresse suivante : www.dell.com. L'électricité statique peut endommager les composants électroniques internes de votre ordinateur. Pour éviter de tels dommages, déchargez l’électricité statique de votre corps avant de toucher tout composant électronique de votre ordinateur, comme par exemple, un module de mémoire. Pour ce faire, touchez une surface métallique non peinte sur le panneau d'entrée/sortie de l'ordinateur. AVERTISSEMENT : Manipuler les cordons de cet appareil et de ses accessoires vous exposera à des produits chimiques contenant du plomb, considéré par l'état de Californie comme un produit pouvant provoquer des malformations congénitales ou autres anomalies de ce genre. Lavez-vous les mains après avoir manipulé les cordons. Lors de l'utilisation de votre ordinateur Suivez les consignes de sécurité ci-dessous afin d'éviter d'endommager votre ordinateur : • Lorsque vous installez l'ordinateur pour travailler, placez-le sur une surface plane. • Lors de vos déplacements, ne faites pas enregistrer votre ordinateur en tant que bagage. Vous pouvez faire passer l'ordinateur dans un détecteur à rayons X, mais jamais dans un détecteur de métaux. Dans le cas d'une inspection manuelle, assurez-vous d'avoir une batterie chargée à disposition si vous devez allumer l'ordinateur. • Si vous êtes amené à voyager en ayant préalablement retiré l'unité de disque dur de l'ordinateur, veillez à envelopper l'unité dans un matériau non-conducteur, tel que du tissu ou du papier. Dans le cas d'une inspection manuelle, soyez prêt à installer l'unité dans l'ordinateur. Vous pouvez faire passer l'unité de disque dur dans un détecteur à rayons X, mais jamais dans un détecteur de métaux. • Lorsque vous voyagez, ne placez jamais l'ordinateur dans un compartiment à bagages en hauteur, où il pourrait se déplacer. Évitez de laisser tomber votre ordinateur et de le soumettre à tout autre choc mécanique. • Protégez l'ordinateur, la batterie et le disque dur contre les risques liés à l'environnement, tels que les températures extrêmes, la surexposition à la lumière, la saleté, la poussière, la nourriture et les liquides. • Lorsque vous transportez votre ordinateur entre des environnements présentant d'importants écarts de température ou de taux d'humidité, une condensation peut se former sur ou dans l'ordinateur. Pour ne pas l'endommager, patientez suffisamment pour que cette humidité s'évapore avant de l'utiliser. AVIS : Lorsque vous faites passer votre ordinateur d'un environnement froid à un environnement chaud ou inversement, laissez-lui le temps de s'acclimater à la température ambiante avant de l'allumer. • Lorsque vous débranchez un câble, tirez sur le connecteur ou sur la boucle prévue, mais jamais sur le câble luimême. Lorsque vous tirez sur le connecteur, maintenez-le correctement aligné afin d'éviter de tordre les broches. Par ailleurs, lorsque vous connectez un câble, assurez-vous au préalable que les connecteurs sont bien orientés et alignés. • Manipulez les composants avec précaution. Un composant, tel qu'un module de mémoire, doit être tenu par les bords et non par les broches.12 PRÉCAUTION : Consignes de sécurité www.dell.com | support.dell.com FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188si0.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT • Avant de retirer un module de mémoire de la carte système ou de débrancher un périphérique de l'ordinateur, éteignez l'ordinateur, débranchez le câble de l'adaptateur secteur, retirez toutes les batteries installées dans la baie des batteries et attendez 5 secondes. Cette précaution permet d'éviter d'endommager la carte système. • Nettoyez l'écran avec un tissu propre et doux et de l'eau. Humectez le chiffon, puis essuyez l'écran, toujours dans le même sens, de haut en bas. Séchez rapidement l'écran. Une exposition prolongée à l'humidité peut endommager l'écran. N'utilisez pas de nettoyant pour vitres sur l'écran. • Si votre ordinateur est mouillé ou endommagé, suivez les procédures décrites dans la section «Si l'ordinateur est mouillé» à la page 68 ou «Si vous avez laissé tomber votre ordinateur ou s'il est endommagé» à la page 69 Si, après avoir effectué ces procédures, vous constatez que votre ordinateur ne fonctionne pas correctement, contactez Dell (reportez-vous à la page 106 pour obtenir les coordonnées du contact approprié). SÉCURITÉ : Conseils en ergonomie PRÉCAUTION : Une utilisation incorrecte ou prolongée du clavier peut provoquer des troubles physiques. PRÉCAUTION : Une exposition prolongée devant l'écran peut occasionner des troubles de la vue. Pour un plus grand confort et plus d'efficacité, observez les consignes ergonomiques du fichier d'aide de Dell Latitude 100L lors de l'installation et de l'utilisation de votre ordinateur. Pour accéder au fichier d'aide, reportez-vous à la page 16. Cet ordinateur portable n'a pas été conçu pour une utilisation prolongée au bureau. Pour une utilisation de ce type, il est recommandé de connecter un clavier externe. SÉCURITÉ : Intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur Avant de retirer ou d'installer des modules de mémoire, des cartes Mini PCI ou des modems, suivez les étapes ci-après dans l'ordre indiqué. AVIS : Vous ne devez intervenir à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur que pour installer des modules de mémoire, une carte Mini PCI, un modem, un clavier ou un lecteur de CD ou DVD. AVIS : Pour éviter d'endommager la carte système, patientez 5 secondes, après la mise hors tension de l'ordinateur, avant de déconnecter un périphérique ou de retirer un module de mémoire, une carte Mini PCI, un modem, un lecteur de CD ou DVD ou un clavier. 1 Éteignez l'ordinateur ainsi que tous les périphériques connectés. 2 Débranchez l'ordinateur et les périphériques de leur prise électrique afin de réduire le risque de blessure ou de choc. Déconnectez également les lignes téléphoniques ou de télécommunication de l'ordinateur. 3 Retirez la batterie principale de la baie des batteries. 4 Raccordez-vous à la masse en touchant une surface métallique non peinte à l'arrière de l'ordinateur. 5 Pendant votre intervention à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur, touchez régulièrement la surface métallique non peinte de l'ordinateur pour dissiper toute électricité statique qui risquerait d'endommager les composants. SÉCURITÉ : Protection contre les décharges électrostatiques L'électricité statique peut endommager les composants électroniques internes de votre ordinateur. Pour éviter de tels dommages, déchargez l’électricité statique de votre corps avant de toucher tout composant électronique de votre ordinateur, comme par exemple, un module de mémoire. Pour ce faire, vous pouvez toucher une surface métallique non peinte à l'arrière de l'ordinateur. Pendant votre intervention à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur, pensez à toucher régulièrement une surface métallique non peinte à l'arrière de l'ordinateur pour dissiper la charge statique accumulée par votre corps. Vous pouvez également prendre les mesures suivantes pour éviter les dommages dus aux décharges électrostatiques : • Lorsque vous déballez un composant sensible à l'électricité statique de son carton d'emballage, ne le retirez pas de son emballage antistatique avant d'être prêt à l'installer sur votre appareil. Juste avant d'ôter l'emballage antistatique, veillez à décharger votre corps de son électricité statique.PRÉCAUTION : Consignes de sécurité 13 FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188si0.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT • Quand vous transportez un composant sensible, placez-le d'abord dans un emballage ou une boîte antistatique. • Manipulez tous les composants sensibles dans une zone antistatique. Si possible, placez des tapis antistatiques sur le sol et sur votre plan de travail. SÉCURITÉ : Mise au rebut de la batterie Votre ordinateur utilise une batterie au lithium-ion et une batterie de réserve. Pour obtenir des instructions sur le remplacement de la batterie au lithium-ion de votre ordinateur, reportez-vous à la section «Retrait de la batterie» à la page 39. La batterie de réserve est une batterie longue durée et il est fort probable que vous n'ayez jamais besoin de la remplacer. Si vous êtes toutefois amené à la remplacer, adressez-vous à un technicien de maintenance autorisé, qui est le seul habilité à effectuer cette opération. Ne jetez pas la batterie avec les ordures ménagères. Contactez le service municipal de traitement des déchets pour connaître l'adresse du site de dépôt de batteries le plus proche de votre domicile.14 PRÉCAUTION : Consignes de sécurité www.dell.com | support.dell.com FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188si0.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENTTrouver des informations 15 FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188fi0.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Trouver des informations Que recherchez-vous ? Consultez les sections suivantes • Comment accéder aux didacticiels et autres informations de procédure • Comment obtenir une copie de ma facture • Comment étendre ma garantie • Comment accéder au support Dell sur mon bureau Microsoft® Windows® (États-Unis uniquement) • Suppléments de documentation, outils supplémentaires, informations sur la résolution des problèmes et liens vers des ressources de support en ligne Centre de solutions Dell Sur votre bureau Windows • Un programme de diagnostic pour mon ordinateur • Pilotes pour mon ordinateur • Documentation de mon ordinateur • Documentation concernant mon appareil Pilotes et utilitaires (également appelé CD des ressources) La documentation et les pilotes sont déjà installés sur votre ordinateur. Vous pouvez utiliser ce CD pour réinstaller les pilotes, exécuter Dell Diagnostics ou accéder à la documentation. Des fichiers lisez-moi peuvent être inclus sur votre CD ; ces fichiers fournissent des informations sur les modifications techniques de dernière minute apportées à votre système ou des informations de référence destinées aux techniciens ou aux utilisateurs expérimentés. • Comment installer une imprimante • Informations supplémentaires sur l'installation de mon ordinateur • Comment identifier et résoudre des problèmes • Comment retirer et installer des pièces • Caractéristiques techniques • Comment contacter Dell Manuel du propriétaire REMARQUE : Ce manuel est disponible au format PDF à l'adresse support.dell.com.16 Trouver des informations www.dell.com | support.dell.com FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188fi0.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT • Comment configurer mon ordinateur Schéma de configuration • Conseils d'utilisation de Microsoft® Windows® • Comment lire des CD et DVD • Comment utiliser les modes Veille et Mise en veille prolongée • Comment changer la résolution d'affichage • Comment nettoyer l'ordinateur Fichier d'aide de Dell Latitude 100L 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Aide et support. 2 Cliquez sur Guides d'utilisation du système, puis sur Guides d'utilisation. 3 Cliquez sur Aide de Dell Latitude 100L. • Numéro de service et code de service express • Étiquette de licence Microsoft Windows Numéro de service et licence Microsoft Windows Ces étiquettes sont situées sur le dessous de votre ordinateur. • Utilisez le numéro de service pour identifier votre ordinateur lorsque vous accédez au site Web support.dell.com ou lorsque vous appelez le service de support technique. • Entrez le code de service express pour orienter votre appel lorsque vous contactez le service de support technique. Le code de service express n'est pas disponible dans tous les pays. • Utilisez le numéro inscrit sur l'étiquette de licence Microsoft Windows lorsque vous réinstallez votre système d'exploitation. Que recherchez-vous ? Consultez les sections suivantesTrouver des informations 17 FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188fi0.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT • Pilotes les plus récents pour mon ordinateur • Réponses aux questions concernant le service et le support technique • Discussions en ligne avec le support technique et d'autres utilisateurs • Documentation sur mon ordinateur Site Web de support de Dell — support.dell.com REMARQUE : Sélectionnez la région appropriée sur la page d'accueil support.dell.com. Le site Web de support technique de Dell fournit plusieurs outils en ligne, notamment : • Solutions — Conseils et astuce de dépannage, articles de techniciens et cours en ligne • Communauté — Discussion en ligne avec d'autres clients Dell • Mises à niveau — Informations sur les mises à niveau des composants, comme la mémoire, le disque dur et le système d'exploitation • Service clientèle — Contacts, commandes, garanties et informations de réparation • Téléchargements — Mises à jour de pilotes, de correctifs et de logiciels • Références — Documentation de l'ordinateur, caractéristiques des produits et documents techniques • Comment utiliser Windows XP • Documentation sur mon ordinateur • Documentation pour les périphériques (un modem, par exemple) Centre d'aide et de support de Windows. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Aide et support. 2Tapez un mot ou une expression qui décrit votre problème, puis cliquez sur l'icône en forme de flèche. 3 Cliquez sur la rubrique qui décrit votre problème. 4 Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent. • Comment réinstaller mon système d'exploitation Système d'exploitation Le système d'exploitation est déjà installé sur votre ordinateur. Pour réinstaller le système d'exploitation, utilisez le CD Système d'exploitation. Reportez-vous à lapage 74 pour obtenir des instructions de réinstallation. Une fois le système d'exploitation réinstallé, utilisez le CD Pilotes et utilitaires pour réinstaller les pilotes des périphériques accompagnant votre ordinateur. L'étiquette de la clé de produit se trouve sur l'ordinateur. REMARQUE : La couleur du CD varie selon le système d'exploitation que vous avez commandé. Que recherchez-vous ? Consultez les sections suivantes18 Trouver des informations www.dell.com | support.dell.com FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188fi0.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENTFILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c10.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Présentation de votre ordinateur 19 Présentation de votre ordinateur Vue avant LOQUET D E FERMETURE D E L'ÉCRAN — Permet de maintenir l'écran fermé. ÉCRAN — Pour plus d'informations sur l'affichage, reportez-vous à la rubrique «Utilisation de l'écran» du fichier d'aide de Dell Latitude 100L. Pour accéder au fichier d'aide, reportez-vous à la page 16. loquet de fermeture de l'écran écran haut-parleurs (2) voyants d'état du clavier clavier voyants d'état de l'ordinateur tablette tactile boutons de la tablette tactile bouton d'alimentation bouton Dell AccessDirect20 Présentation de votre ordinateur www.dell.com | support.dell.com FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c10.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT VOYANTS D'ÉTAT DU CLAVIER Les voyants verts situés au-dessus du clavier indiquent ce qui suit : CLAVIER — Le clavier comporte un pavé numérique et la touche du logo Microsoft® Windows®. Pour plus d'informations sur les raccourcis clavier pris en charge, reportez-vous à la page 42. HAUT-PARLEURS — Utilisez les raccourcis clavier de contrôle du volume pour régler le volume des hautparleurs intégrés. Pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à la page 43. S'allume lorsque le pavé numérique est activé. S'allume lorsque la fonction Verr Maj est activée. S'allume lorsque la fonction Arrêt défil est activée. 9 APrésentation de votre ordinateur 21 FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c10.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT VOYANTS D'ÉTAT DE L'ORDINATEUR Si l'ordinateur est branché au secteur, le voyant fonctionne comme suit : – Vert fixe : La batterie est en cours de charge. Si l'ordinateur fonctionne sur batterie, le voyant fonctionne comme suit : – Éteint : La batterie est suffisamment chargée (ou l'ordinateur est éteint). – Orange clignotant : Le niveau de charge de la batterie est faible. – Orange fixe : Le niveau de charge de la batterie est critique. BOUTONS D E L A TABLETTE TACTILE — La tablette tactile et ses boutons offrent les mêmes fonctionnalités que la souris. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la page 44. TABLETTE TACTILE — Utilisez la tablette tactile et ses boutons comme s'il s'agissait d'une souris. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la page 44. S'allume lorsque vous mettez l'ordinateur sous tension. Clignote ou s'éteint en mode Économie d'énergie. S'allume lorsque l'ordinateur lit ou écrit des données. AVIS : Pour éviter de perdre des données, n'éteignez jamais l'ordinateur lorsque le voyant clignote. S'allume de façon intermittente pour indiquer l'état de charge de la batterie.22 Présentation de votre ordinateur www.dell.com | support.dell.com FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c10.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT BOUTON D'ALIMENTATION — Appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation pour mettre l'ordinateur sous tension ou quitter le mode Économie d'énergie. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la rubrique «Gestion de l'alimentation» du fichier d'aide de Dell Latitude 100L. Pour accéder au fichier d'aide, reportez-vous à la page 16. AVIS : Afin d'éviter la perte d'informations, enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers et quittez tous les programmes avant d'éteindre l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la page 36). Si l'ordinateur ne répond plus, appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation et maintenez-le enfoncé jusqu'à ce que l'ordinateur s'éteigne complètement (cela peut prendre plusieurs secondes). BOUTON DELL™ ACCESSDIRECT™ — Appuyez sur ce bouton pour lancer un programme utilisé fréquemment, comme un outil de support ou de formation. Vous pouvez reprogrammer le bouton pour qu'il lance le programme de votre choix. Pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à la page 41. Vue du côté gauche EMPLACEMENT POUR CARTE PC — Accepte une carte PC, comme un modem ou une carte réseau. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la rubrique «Utilisation des cartes PC» dans le fichier d'aide de Dell Latitude 100L. Pour accéder au fichier d'aide, reportez-vous à la page 16. emplacement pour carte PC connecteurs audio (2) lecteur de CD ou de DVDPrésentation de votre ordinateur 23 FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c10.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT CONNECTEURS AUDIO LECTEUR D E CD O U DVD — Accepte un lecteur de CD, de DVD ou de CD-RW, ou un lecteur composite CD-RW/DVD. Vue du côté droit BATTERIE/BAIE D E LA BATTERIE — Quand une batterie est installée, vous pouvez utiliser l'ordinateur sans le brancher au secteur. Reportez-vous à la page 37. Raccordez un casque ou des haut-parleurs au connecteur . Raccordez un micro au connecteur . batterie/baie de la batterie connecteur modem entrées d'air fente du câble de sécurité24 Présentation de votre ordinateur www.dell.com | support.dell.com FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c10.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT CONNECTEUR MODEM ENTRÉES D'AIR — Un ventilateur interne fait circuler de l'air à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur, évitant ainsi la surchauffe des composants. REMARQUE : Il est possible que le ventilateur fonctionne continuellement et que sa vitesse de fonctionnement varie selon l'utilisation de l'ordinateur. Il se peut que le ventilateur fasse du bruit, cela est tout à fait normal et ne signifie pas que le ventilateur ou l'ordinateur est défectueux. PRÉCAUTION : Ne bloquez pas les entrées d'air de l'ordinateur et n'insérez pas d'objets dedans ; évitez également toute accumulation de poussière. Ne placez pas l'ordinateur dans un environnement peu aéré, tel qu'une mallette fermée, lorsque celui-ci fonctionne. Le manque de ventilation risquerait de causer un incendie ou d'endommager l'ordinateur. FENTE D U CÂBLE D E SÉCURITÉ — Permet de rattacher à l'ordinateur un dispositif antivol disponible dans le commerce. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous aux instructions fournies avec le dispositif. AVIS : Avant d'acheter un tel dispositif, assurez-vous qu'il tiendra dans la fente du câble de sécurité de votre ordinateur. Connectez la ligne téléphonique au modem. Pour plus d'informations sur l'utilisation du modem, reportez-vous à la documentation en ligne correspondante fournie avec votre ordinateur.Présentation de votre ordinateur 25 FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c10.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Vue arrière ENTRÉES D'AIR — Un ventilateur interne fait circuler de l'air à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur, évitant ainsi la surchauffe des composants. REMARQUE : Il est possible que le ventilateur fonctionne continuellement et que sa vitesse de fonctionnement varie selon l'utilisation de l'ordinateur. Il se peut que le ventilateur fasse du bruit, cela est tout à fait normal et ne signifie pas que le ventilateur ou l'ordinateur est défectueux. PRÉCAUTION : Ne bloquez pas les entrées d'air et n'insérez pas d'objets dedans ; évitez également l'accumulation de la poussière. Ne placez pas l'ordinateur dans un environnement peu aéré, tel qu'une mallette fermée, lorsque celui-ci fonctionne. Le manque de ventilation risquerait de causer un incendie ou d'endommager l'ordinateur. connecteurs USB (2) connecteur réseau connecteur vidéo connecteur d'adaptateur secteur entrées d'air26 Présentation de votre ordinateur www.dell.com | support.dell.com FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c10.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT CONNECTEUR D E L'ADAPTATEUR SECTEUR — Sert à relier l'adaptateur secteur à l'ordinateur. REMARQUE : Utilisez exclusivement l'adaptateur secteur fourni avec l'ordinateur. Cet adaptateur convertit l'alimentation CA en alimentation CC, qui est celle requise par l'ordinateur. Vous pouvez connecter l'adaptateur secteur à votre ordinateur, que ce dernier soit allumé ou éteint. PRÉCAUTION : L'adaptateur secteur fonctionne avec les tensions secteur disponibles dans le monde entier. Cependant, les connecteurs et les rampes d'alimentation varient selon les pays. Le fait d'utiliser un câble incompatible, ou de mal brancher le câble aux prises peut endommager l'équipement ou causer un incendie. PRÉCAUTION : L'adaptateur secteur doit se trouver dans une zone aérée, par exemple sur un bureau ou sur le sol, lorsqu'il est utilisé pour alimenter l'ordinateur ou pour charger la batterie. Ne recouvrez pas l'adaptateur secteur de papiers ou d'autres objets susceptibles d'entraver le refroidissement. De même, n'utilisez pas l'adaptateur secteur dans une mallette de transport. AVIS : Lorsque vous déconnectez l'adaptateur secteur de l'ordinateur, tenez le connecteur du câble de l'adaptateur, pas le câble lui-même, et tirez dessus fermement mais sans forcer, afin d'éviter de l'endommager. CONNECTEURS USB Permet de connecter des périphériques USB, tels qu'une souris, un clavier ou une imprimante. connecteur d'adaptateur secteur adaptateur secteurPrésentation de votre ordinateur 27 FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c10.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT CONNECTEUR VIDÉO CONNECTEUR RÉSEAU AVIS : Le connecteur réseau est légèrement plus grand que le connecteur modem. Pour éviter d'endommager votre ordinateur, ne branchez pas une ligne téléphonique au connecteur réseau. Permet de connecter un moniteur externe. Pour plus d'informations sur l'affichage, consultez la rubrique «Utilisation de l'écran» du fichier d'aide de Dell Latitude 100L. Pour accéder au fichier d'aide, reportez-vous à la page 16. Permet de relier l'ordinateur à un réseau. Les voyants situés près du connecteur indiquent l'activité de communication filaire ou sans fil des réseaux. Pour plus d'informations sur l'utilisation de l'adaptateur réseau, reportez-vous à la documentation en ligne correspondante fournie avec votre ordinateur.28 Présentation de votre ordinateur www.dell.com | support.dell.com FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c10.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Vue de dessous CACHE D E L A CARTE MODEM/MINI PCI — Recouvre le compartiment de la carte modem et Mini PCI. Reportez-vous à la page 82. BATTERIE/BAIE D E LA BATTERIE — Quand une batterie est installée, vous pouvez utiliser l'ordinateur sans le brancher au secteur. Reportez-vous à la page 37. ENTRÉES D'AIR — Un ventilateur interne fait circuler de l'air à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur, évitant ainsi la surchauffe des composants. REMARQUE : Il est possible que le ventilateur fonctionne continuellement et que sa vitesse de fonctionnement varie selon l'utilisation de l'ordinateur. Il se peut que le ventilateur fasse du bruit, cela est tout à fait normal et ne signifie pas que le ventilateur ou l'ordinateur est défectueux. PRÉCAUTION : Ne bloquez pas les entrées d'air de l'ordinateur et n'insérez pas d'objets dedans ; évitez également l'accumulation de la poussière. Ne placez pas l'ordinateur dans un environnement peu aéré, tel qu'une mallette fermée, lorsque celui-ci fonctionne. Le manque de ventilation risquerait de provoquer un incendie ou d'endommager l'ordinateur. LOQUET D E LA BAIE DES BATTERIES — Libère la batterie. Pour plus d'instructions, reportez-vous à la page 39. CACHE D U MODULE D E MÉMOIRE — Cache le logement des modules de mémoire (reportez-vous à la page 80) et le loquet du lecteur de CD ou de DVD (reportez-vous à la page 86). DISQUE DUR — Stocke les logiciels et les données. cache du module de mémoire loquet de la baie des batteries capot de carte Mini PCI batterie/baie des batteries unité de disque dur entrée d'airFILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c20.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Installation de votre ordinateur 29 Installation de votre ordinateur Connexion à Internet REMARQUE : Les fournisseurs d'accès Internet (FAI) et leurs offres varient selon les pays. Pour vous connecter à Internet, vous devez disposer d'un modem ou d'une connexion réseau et d'un fournisseur d'accès Internet (FAI), tel que AOL ou MSN. Votre fournisseur d'accès Internet vous proposera une ou plusieurs des options de connexion Internet suivantes : • Connexions d'accès à distance qui offrent un accès Internet par l'intermédiaire d'une ligne téléphonique. Ces connexions sont beaucoup plus lentes que les connexions DSL ou modem par câble. • Connexions DSL qui offrent un accès Internet à haute vitesse par l'intermédiaire d'une ligne téléphonique existante. Avec une connexion DSL, vous pouvez accéder à Internet et utiliser votre téléphone sur la même ligne simultanément. • Connexions modem par câble qui offrent un accès à Internet à haute vitesse par l'intermédiaire de la ligne Téléviseur câblée locale. Si vous utilisez une connexion d'accès à distance, connectez une ligne téléphonique au connecteur du modem sur votre ordinateur et à la prise téléphonique murale avant de configurer la connexion Internet. Si vous utilisez une connexion DSL ou modem par câble, contactez votre fournisseur d'accès Internet pour obtenir les instructions de configuration. Configuration de la connexion Internet Pour configurer une connexion AOL ou MSN : 1 Enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers et quittez tous les programmes. 2 Double-cliquez sur l'icône MSN Explorer ou AOL sur le bureau Microsoft® Windows®. 3 Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran pour effectuer l'installation. Si vous ne disposez pas de l'icône MSN Explorer ou AOL sur votre bureau ou si vous souhaitez configurer une connexion Internet avec un autre fournisseur d'accès Internet : 1 Enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers et quittez tous les programmes. 2 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Internet Explorer. L'Assistant Nouvelle connexion s'affiche. 3 Cliquez sur Connecter à Internet.30 Installation de votre ordinateur www.dell.com | support.dell.com FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c20.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT 4 Dans la fenêtre suivante, cliquez sur l'option appropriée : • Si vous n'avez pas de fournisseur d'accès Internet et souhaitez en sélectionner un, cliquez sur Choisir dans une liste de fournisseurs de services Internet. • Si vous avez déjà reçu les informations de configuration de votre fournisseur de services Internet, mais pas le CD de configuration, cliquez sur Configurer ma connexion manuellement. • Si vous avez le CD, cliquez sur Utiliser le CD fourni par mon fournisseur de services Internet. 5 Cliquez sur Suivant. Si vous avez sélectionné Configurer ma connexion manuellement, passez à l'étape 6. Sinon, suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran pour terminer la configuration. REMARQUE : Si vous ne savez pas quel type de connexion sélectionner, contactez votre fournisseur d'accès Internet. 6 Cliquez sur l'option appropriée sous Comment souhaitez-vous vous connecter à Internet ?, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 7 Utilisez les informations fournies par votre fournisseur d'accès Internet pour terminer la configuration. En cas de difficultés pour vous connecter à Internet, reportez-vous à la section «Problèmes liés au modem et à la connexion Internet». Si vous ne parvenez pas à vous connecter à Internet alors que vous pouviez le faire précédemment, le service de votre FAI peut être en panne. Contactez-le pour vérifier l'état des services ou essayez de vous connecter ultérieurement. Problèmes liés au modem et à la connexion Internet AVIS : Connectez le modem uniquement à une prise téléphonique murale analogique. Pour ne pas endommager le modem, ne le connectez jamais à un réseau téléphonique numérique. AVIS : Les connecteurs de modem et les connecteurs réseaux se ressemblent. Veillez à ne pas brancher une ligne téléphonique au connecteur réseau. REMARQUE : Si vous pouvez vous connecter à votre fournisseur d'accès Internet, votre modem fonctionne correctement. Si vous êtes sûr que votre modem fonctionne correctement alors que les problèmes persistent, contactez votre fournisseur d'accès Internet. VÉRIFICATION D E L A PRISE TÉLÉPHONIQUE MURALE — Déconnectez la ligne téléphonique du modem et connectez-la à un téléphone. Attendez la tonalité. Assurez-vous de disposer d'un service téléphonique à impulsions. Connectez le modem à une autre prise téléphonique murale. La présence de parasites, l'état de la ligne téléphonique et les conditions du réseau peuvent affecter la vitesse de connexion. Pour plus d'informations, contactez votre opérateur téléphonique ou votre administrateur réseau. CONNEXION DIRECTE D U MODEM À UNE PRISE TÉLÉPHONIQUE MURALE — Si d'autres appareils téléphoniques partagent cette ligne, comme par exemple un répondeur téléphonique, un télécopieur, un parasurtenseur ou un séparateur de ligne, contournez-les et utilisez la ligne téléphonique pour connecter le modem directement à la prise téléphonique murale. VÉRIFICATION D E L A CONNEXION — Vérifiez que la ligne téléphonique est connectée au modem.Installation de votre ordinateur 31 FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c20.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT VÉRIFICATION D E LA LIGNE TÉLÉPHONIQUE — Essayez d'utiliser une autre ligne téléphonique. Si vous utilisez un câble de 3 m (10 pieds) ou plus, essayez-en un plus court. TONALITÉ IRRÉGULIÈRE — Si vous disposez d'un service de messagerie vocale, une tonalité irrégulière peut être émise lorsque vous avez des messages. Contactez votre opérateur téléphonique pour savoir comment rétablir une tonalité. DÉSACTIVATION D E LA MISE EN ATTENTE DES APPELS (CATCH-PHONE) — Consultez l'annuaire téléphonique pour obtenir des instructions sur la désactivation de cette fonctionnalité. Réglez ensuite les propriétés de connexion de l'accès réseau à distance. Windows XP 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration. 2 Cliquez sur Imprimantes et autres périphériques, puis sur Options de modems et de téléphonie, ensuite sur l'onglet Règles de numérotation et finalement sur Modifier. 3 Dans la fenêtre Modifier le site, vérifiez que l'option Pour désactiver l'attente d'appel, composer : est cochée, puis sélectionnez l'indicatif approprié indiqué dans votre annuaire téléphonique. 4 Cliquez sur Appliquer, puis sur OK. 5 Fermez la fenêtre Options de modems et de téléphonie. 6 Fermez la fenêtre Panneau de configuration. Windows 2000 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Paramètres, puis cliquez sur Panneau de configuration. 2 Cliquez sur Options de modem et de téléphonie. 3 Cliquez sur l'onglet Règles de numérotation, puis sur Modifier. 4 Vérifiez que l'option Pour désactiver l'attente d'appel, composez le : est cochée, puis sélectionnez l'indicatif approprié indiqué dans votre annuaire téléphonique. 5 Cliquez sur Appliquer, puis sur OK. 6 Fermez la fenêtre Options de modems et téléphonie. VÉRIFIEZ QUE L E MODEM COMMUNIQUE AVEC WINDOWS — Windows XP 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration. 2 Cliquez sur Imprimantes et autres périphériques, puis sur Options de modems et de téléphonie. 3 Cliquez sur l'onglet Modems. 4 Cliquez sur le port COM de votre modem. 5 Cliquez sur Propriétés, puis sur l'onglet Diagnostics et ensuite sur Interroger le modem pour vérifier que le modem communique avec Windows. Si toutes les commandes reçoivent des réponses, le modem fonctionne correctement. Windows 2000 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Paramètres, puis cliquez sur Panneau de configuration. 2 Double-cliquez sur Options de modem et de téléphonie. 3 Cliquez sur l'onglet Modems. 4 Cliquez sur le port COM de votre modem. 5 Cliquez sur Propriétés, puis sur l'onglet Diagnostics et ensuite sur Interroger le modem pour vérifier que le modem communique avec Windows. Si toutes les commandes reçoivent des réponses, le modem fonctionne correctement.32 Installation de votre ordinateur www.dell.com | support.dell.com FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c20.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Problèmes de messagerie électronique VÉRIFIEZ QUE VOUS ÊTES CONNECTÉ À INTERNET — Une fois le programme de messagerie électronique Outlook Express ouvert, cliquez sur Fichier. Si l'option Travailler hors connexion est cochée, cliquez sur la coche pour la supprimer et vous connecter à Internet. Transfert d'informations vers un nouvel ordinateur Le système d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows® XP fournit un Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres qui permet de transférer des données de l'ordinateur source vers le nouvel ordinateur. Vous pouvez transférer des données, telles que des : • messages électroniques • paramètres de la barre d'outils • tailles de fenêtre • signets Internet Vous pouvez transférer les données vers le nouvel ordinateur par l'intermédiaire d'une connexion réseau ou série, ou en les enregistrant sur un support amovible comme un CD inscriptible ou une disquette. Pour préparer le nouvel ordinateur au transfert de fichiers : 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Tous les programmes→ Accessoires→ Outils système, puis cliquez sur Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres. 2 Lorsque l'écran de bienvenue de l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres s'affiche, cliquez sur Suivant. 3 Dans l'écran De quel ordinateur s'agit-il ?, cliquez sur Nouvel ordinateur, puis sur Suivant. 4 Dans l'écran Avez-vous un CD-ROM de Windows XP ?, cliquez sur J'utiliserai l'Assistant du CD-ROM de Windows XP, puis sur Suivant. 5 Lorsque l'écran Allez maintenant à votre ancien ordinateur s'affiche, allez à l'ancien ordinateur ou ordinateur source. Ne cliquez pas sur Suivant pour l'instant. Pour copier les données à partir de l'ancien ordinateur : 1 Sur l'ancien ordinateur, insérez le CD du système d'exploitation Windows XP. 2 Dans l'écran Bienvenue dans Microsoft Windows XP, cliquez sur Effectuer des tâches supplémentaires. 3 Sous Que voulez-vous faire ?, cliquez sur Transférer des fichiers et des paramètres. 4 Dans l'écran de bienvenue de l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres, cliquez sur Suivant. 5 Dans l'écran De quel ordinateur s'agit-il ?, cliquez sur Ancien ordinateur, puis sur Suivant. 6 Dans l'écran Sélectionner une méthode de transfert, cliquez sur la méthode de transfert de votre choix. 7 Dans l'écran Que voulez-vous transférer ?, sélectionnez les éléments à transférer, puis cliquez sur Suivant.Installation de votre ordinateur 33 FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c20.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Une fois les informations copiées, l'écran Fin de la phase de collecte des données apparaît. 8 Cliquez sur Terminer. Pour transférer les données vers le nouvel ordinateur : 1 Dans l'écran Allez maintenant à votre ancien ordinateur sur le nouvel ordinateur, cliquez sur Suivant. 2 Dans l'écran Où sont les fichiers et les paramètres ?, sélectionnez la méthode de transfert de vos paramètres et fichiers, puis cliquez sur Suivant. L'Assistant lit les paramètres et fichiers collectés, puis les applique à votre nouvel ordinateur. Lorsque tous les paramètres et fichiers ont été appliqués, l'écran Terminé s'affiche. 3 Cliquez sur Terminé et redémarrez le nouvel ordinateur. Installation d'une imprimante AVIS : Effectuez la configuration du système d'exploitation avant de connecter une imprimante à cet ordinateur. Reportez-vous à la documentation fournie avec l'imprimante pour obtenir des informations sur la configuration, notamment : • Obtenir et installer les pilotes mis à jour. • Connecter l'imprimante à l'ordinateur. • Charger le papier et installer la cartouche de toner ou d'encre. • Contacter Dell pour obtenir une assistance technique. Câble de l'imprimante Il est possible que l'imprimante soit livrée sans câble. Par conséquent, si vous achetez un câble séparément, assurez-vous qu'il est compatible avec votre imprimante. Si vous avez acheté un câble d'imprimante en même temps que l'ordinateur, il est possible qu'il vous soit livré avec ce dernier. Connexion d'une imprimante USB REMARQUE : Vous pouvez connecter des périphériques USB pendant que l'ordinateur est sous tension. 1 Effectuez la configuration du système d'exploitation, si vous ne l'avez pas déjà fait. 2 Le cas échéant, installez le pilote d'imprimante. Consultez la documentation de l'imprimante. 3 Branchez le câble USB de l'imprimante aux connecteurs USB de l'ordinateur et de l'imprimante. Les connecteurs USB ne s'insèrent que dans un seul sens.34 Installation de votre ordinateur www.dell.com | support.dell.com FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c20.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Problèmes d'imprimante VÉRIFIER LES CONNEXIONS D U CÂBLE D E L'IMPRIMANTE — Assurez-vous que le câble de l'imprimante est correctement connecté à l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la page 33). TESTER L A PRISE ÉLECTRIQUE — Assurez-vous que la prise électrique fonctionne en la testant à l'aide d'un autre appareil, une lampe par exemple. VÉRIFIER QUE L'IMPRIMANTE EST ALLUMÉE — Consultez la documentation fournie avec l'imprimante. VÉRIFIER QUE L'IMPRIMANTE EST RECONNUE PAR WINDOWS — Windows XP 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration. 2 Cliquez sur Imprimantes et autres périphériques. 3 Cliquez sur Afficher les imprimantes ou les télécopieurs installés. Si le modèle d'imprimante utilisé est répertorié, cliquez avec le bouton droit sur son icône. 4 Cliquez sur Propriétés, puis sur l'onglet Ports. Vérifiez que le paramètre Port d'impression : est défini sur LPT1 (Port de l'imprimante). Windows 2000 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Paramètres, puis cliquez sur Imprimantes. Si le modèle d'imprimante utilisé est répertorié, cliquez avec le bouton droit sur son icône. 2 Cliquez sur Propriétés, puis sur l'onglet Ports. 3 Vérifiez que le paramètre Impression sur les ports suivants : correspond à votre type d'imprimante : • Pour une imprimante parallèle : LPT1 (Port d'imprimante) • Pour une imprimante USB : USB RÉINSTALLER L E PILOTE D E L'IMPRIMANTE — Reportez-vous à la page 70. câble USB de l'imprimante connecteur USB de l'ordinateur connecteur USB de l'imprimanteInstallation de votre ordinateur 35 FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c20.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Périphériques de protection contre les sautes de tension électrique Plusieurs périphériques peuvent vous protéger contre les fluctuations de la tension et les pannes d'alimentation : • Parasurtenseurs • Filtres de ligne • Onduleurs Parasurtenseurs Les parasurtenseurs et les rampes d'alimentation équipées d'une protection contre la surtension réduisent les risques d'endommagement de votre ordinateur provoqués par les pointes de tension pouvant survenir au cours d'un orage électrique ou après une coupure de courant. Le niveau de protection varie souvent en fonction du coût du parasurtenseur. Certains fabricants offrent également une garantie contre certains types de dégâts. Lisez attentivement la garantie du parasurtenseur que vous achetez. Un protecteur doté d'une valeur nominale en joules plus élevée offre une meilleure protection. Comparez les valeurs nominales, en joules, afin de déterminer l'efficacité relative des différents dispositifs. AVIS : La plupart des parasurtenseurs ne protègent pas contre les fluctuations de tension ou les coupures de courant. Lorsqu'un orage est proche, débranchez la ligne téléphonique de la prise murale et déconnectez votre ordinateur de la prise de courant. De nombreux parasurtenseurs sont équipés d'une prise téléphonique pour assurer la protection d'un modem. Consultez la documentation du parasurtenseur pour obtenir des instructions sur la connexion du modem. AVIS : Certains parasurtenseurs n'offrent pas de protection pour les cartes réseau. Déconnectez le câble réseau de la prise murale du réseau pendant les orages. Filtres de ligne AVIS : Les filtres de ligne n'offrent pas de protection contre les coupures de courant. Ils sont conçus pour maintenir la tension CA à un niveau relativement constant. Onduleurs AVIS : Une baisse de tension pendant l'enregistrement des données sur le disque dur peut provoquer une perte de données ou la corruption du fichier. REMARQUE : Pour optimiser le temps de fonctionnement de la batterie, connectez uniquement votre ordinateur au système UPS. Connectez les autres périphériques, tels que l'imprimante, à une rampe d'alimentation différente équipée d'une protection contre les sautes de tension. Un onduleur protège contre les fluctuations de tension et les coupures de courant. Les dispositifs UPS comportent une batterie qui alimente temporairement les périphériques connectés lorsque l'alimentation secteur est coupée. La batterie se charge lorsque l'alimentation secteur est 36 Installation de votre ordinateur www.dell.com | support.dell.com FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c20.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT disponible. Consultez la documentation fournie par le fabricant du système UPS afin d'obtenir des informations sur la durée de fonctionnement de la batterie et vous assurer que le dispositif est approuvé par Underwriters Laboratories (UL). Mise hors tension de l'ordinateur AVIS : Afin d'éviter la perte de données, enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers, puis quittez tous les programmes avant d'éteindre l'ordinateur. REMARQUE : Si vous préférez ne pas éteindre votre ordinateur, configurez-le pour qu'il passe au mode Veille ou Mise en veille prolongée. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous au fichier d'aide de Dell Latitude 100L. Pour accéder au fichier d'aide, reportez-vous à la page 16. 1 Enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers, quittez tous les programmes, cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis cliquez sur Arrêter l'ordinateur. 2 Dans la fenêtre Arrêter l'ordinateur, cliquez sur Arrêter/Éteindre. L'ordinateur s'éteint au terme du processus d'arrêt.FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c30.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Utilisation d'une batterie 37 Utilisation d'une batterie Performances de la batterie REMARQUE : Les batteries des ordinateurs portables ne sont couvertes que pendant la première année de la garantie limitée de votre ordinateur. Pour plus d'informations sur la garantie Dell relative à l'ordinateur, reportez-vous à la page 127 ou au document de garantie qui accompagne votre ordinateur. Utilisez une batterie pour alimenter l'ordinateur lorsqu'il n'est pas branché au secteur. Votre ordinateur est livré avec une batterie, installée dans la baie. L'autonomie de la batterie varie en fonction de l'utilisation. L'autonomie est considérablement réduite par certaines opérations, notamment : REMARQUE : La gravure d'un CD. Il est recommandé de brancher l'ordinateur au secteur lorsque vous gravez un CD. • L'utilisation de lecteurs optiques, en particulier de lecteurs de CD-RW et de DVD. • L'utilisation de périphériques de communication sans fil, de cartes PC ou de périphériques USB. • L'utilisation de paramètres d'affichage haute luminosité. • L'utilisation d'économiseurs d'écran en 3D ou d'autres programmes gourmands en électricité tels que des jeux en 3D. • L'utilisation de l'ordinateur en mode Performances maximales. Pour plus d'informations, consultez la rubrique «Gestion de l'alimentation» du fichier d'aide de Dell Latitude 100L. Pour accéder au fichier d'aide, reportez-vous à la page 16. Vous pouvez également définir des options de gestion de l'alimentation afin que l'ordinateur vous alerte lorsque le niveau de charge de la batterie est faible. PRÉCAUTION : L'utilisation d'une batterie non compatible peut augmenter le risque d'incendie ou d'explosion. Ne remplacez la batterie que par une autre batterie compatible achetée auprès de Dell. La batterie au lithium-ion est conçue pour fonctionner avec les ordinateurs Dell™. N'utilisez pas une batterie provenant d'autres ordinateur. PRÉCAUTION : Ne jetez pas les batteries avec les ordures ménagères. Lorsque votre batterie ne tient plus la charge, contactez votre service municipal de traitement des déchets pour savoir comment vous en débarrasser. Reportez-vous à la section «SÉCURITÉ : Mise au rebut de la batterie» à la page 13. PRÉCAUTION : Une utilisation inadéquate de la batterie peut augmenter le risque d'incendie ou de brûlure chimique. Prenez soin de ne pas la percer, l'incinérer, la démonter ou l'exposer à une température supérieure à 65° C (149° F). Gardez la batterie hors de portée des enfants. Manipulez les batteries endommagées ou percées avec une extrême précaution. Les batteries endommagées peuvent fuir et causer des dommages personnels ou matériels. 38 Utilisation d'une batterie www.dell.com | support.dell.com FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c30.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Vérification de la charge de la batterie L'icône et la fenêtre de la jauge d'alimentation de Microsoft® Windows®, la jauge de charge de la batterie et l'alerte de batterie faible fournissent des informations sur le niveau de charge de la batterie. Jauge d'alimentation La jauge d'alimentation de Windows indique le niveau de charge de la batterie. Pour vérifier la jauge d'alimentation, double-cliquez sur l'icône de la barre des tâches. Pour plus d'informations sur l'onglet Jauge d'alimentation, consultez la rubrique «Gestion de l'alimentation» du fichier d'aide de Dell Latitude 100L. Pour accéder au fichier d'aide, reportez-vous à la page 16. Si l'ordinateur est branché sur le secteur, une icône apparaît. Alerte de batterie faible AVIS : Pour éviter la perte ou la corruption de vos données, enregistrez votre travail immédiatement après avoir reçu une alerte de niveau de batterie faible. Connectez ensuite l'ordinateur à une prise électrique. Si la batterie est complètement déchargée, le mode Mise en veille prolongée est automatiquement activé. Une alerte de batterie déchargée s'affiche lorsque la batterie est déchargée à environ 90 %. Pour plus d'informations sur l'alerte de batterie faible, consultez la rubrique «Gestion de l'alimentation» du fichier d'aide de Dell Latitude 100L. Pour accéder au fichier d'aide, reportez-vous à la page 16. Chargement de la batterie REMARQUE : L'adaptateur secteur charge une batterie complètement déchargée en 3 heures environ, si l'ordinateur est éteint. Le temps nécessaire pour charger la batterie est sensiblement accru lorsque l'ordinateur est sous tension et fonctionne à des vitesses de processeur et des niveaux d'activité élevés. La batterie peut ne pas se charger lorsque l'ordinateur fonctionne à de tels niveaux pendant de longues périodes de temps. Chaque fois que vous connectez l'ordinateur à une prise électrique ou que vous installez une batterie quand l'ordinateur est connecté à une prise électrique, celui-ci vérifie la charge de la batterie et sa température. Si nécessaire, l'adaptateur secteur charge alors la batterie et maintient le niveau de charge. Si la batterie est chaude parce qu'elle se trouvait dans l'ordinateur ou en raison de la température extérieure, il est probable qu'elle ne se chargera pas lorsque vous connectez l'ordinateur à une prise électrique. Si le voyant clignote alternativement vert et orange, la batterie est trop chaude pour être chargée. Débranchez l'ordinateur de la prise électrique et laissez l'ordinateur et la batterie se refroidir jusqu'à ce qu'ils atteignent la température ambiante. Connectez alors l'ordinateur à une prise électrique et continuez à charger la batterie. REMARQUE : Vous pouvez laisser la batterie dans l'ordinateur aussi longtemps que vous le souhaitez. Les circuits internes protègent la batterie contre la surcharge. Pour plus d'informations sur la résolution des problèmes de batterie, consultez la rubrique «Gestion de l'alimentation» dans le fichier d'aide de Dell Latitude 100L. Pour accéder au fichier d'aide, reportez-vous à la page 16.Utilisation d'une batterie 39 FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c30.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Retrait de la batterie PRÉCAUTION : Avant d'effectuer cette procédure, déconnectez le modem de la prise téléphonique murale. 1 Assurez-vous que l'ordinateur est éteint ou connecté à une prise secteur. 2 Faites glisser le loquet de la baie des batteries et maintenez-le. 3 Retirez la batterie. Installation de la batterie Faites glisser la batterie dans la baie jusqu'à ce que le loquet s'enclenche. Stockage de la batterie Retirez la batterie de l'ordinateur lorsque vous stockez ce dernier pendant une période prolongée. Sinon, la batterie finira par se décharger. Après une longue période de stockage, rechargez complètement la batterie avant de l'utiliser. Problèmes de batterie et d'alimentation REMARQUE : Pour obtenir des informations sur le mode Veille, consultez la rubrique correspondante du fichier d'aide de Dell Latitude 100L. Pour accéder au fichier d'aide, reportez-vous à la page 16. loquet de la baie des batteries batterie40 Utilisation d'une batterie www.dell.com | support.dell.com FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c30.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT VÉRIFIEZ L E VOYANT D'ALIMENTATION — Lorsque le voyant d'alimentation est allumé ou lorsqu'il clignote, l'ordinateur est sous tension. Si le voyant clignote, l'ordinateur est en mode Veille — appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation pour revenir au mode Normal. Si le voyant est éteint, appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation pour mettre l'ordinateur sous tension ou sortir du mode Économie d'énergie. Si l'ordinateur ne s'allume pas, appuyez sur le bouton d’alimentation et maintenez-le enfoncé pendant quelques secondes. CHARGEZ L A BATTERIE — Il se peut que la batterie soit déchargée. 1 Réinstallez la batterie. 2 Utilisez l'adaptateur CA/CC pour connecter votre ordinateur à une prise électrique. 3 Allumez l'ordinateur. VÉRIFIEZ L E VOYANT D'ÉTAT D E L A BATTERIE — Si le voyant d'état de la batterie est orange clignotant ou orange fixe, la batterie est peu chargée ou complètement déchargée. Connectez l'ordinateur à une prise électrique. Si le voyant d'état de la batterie est alternativement vert et orange et clignote, la batterie est trop chaude pour se recharger. Éteignez l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la page 36), débranchez l'ordinateur de la prise de courant et laissez la batterie et l'ordinateur revenir à température ambiante. Si le voyant d'état de la batterie est orange et clignote rapidement, il se peut que la batterie soit défectueuse. Contactez Dell (reportez-vous à la page 106). TESTEZ LA PRISE ÉLECTRIQUE — Assurez-vous que la prise électrique fonctionne en la testant à l'aide d'un autre appareil, une lampe par exemple. VÉRIFIEZ L'ADAPTATEUR SECTEUR — Vérifiez les connexions du câble de l'adaptateur secteur. Si l'adaptateur secteur est muni d'un voyant, assurez-vous que ce dernier est allumé. CONNECTEZ VOTRE ORDINATEUR DIRECTEMENT À UNE PRISE ÉLECTRIQUE — Contournez les périphériques de protection contre les surtensions électriques, les multiprises et la rallonge de câble pour vérifier que l'ordinateur est sous tension. ÉLIMINEZ LES SOURCES POTENTIELLES D'INTERFÉRENCES — Éteignez les ventilateurs, les lampes fluorescentes ou halogènes ou tout autre appareil se trouvant à proximité. RÉGLEZ LES PROPRIÉTÉS D E L'ALIMENTATION — Consultez le fichier d'aide de Dell Latitude 100L ou lancez une recherche à l'aide du mot-clé veille dans le Centre d'aide et de support. Pour accéder à l'aide, reportez-vous à la page 16. REMETTEZ EN PLACE LES MODULES D E MÉMOIRE — Si le voyant d'alimentation de votre ordinateur s'allume mais l'écran reste vide, remettez en place les modules de mémoire (reportez-vous à la page 80). Si la batterie ne se charge pas ÉTEIGNEZ VOTRE ORDINATEUR — Le temps nécessaire pour charger la batterie augmente sensiblement lorsque l'ordinateur est sous tension et fonctionne à des vitesses de processeur et des niveaux d'activité élevés. La batterie peut ne pas se charger lorsque l'ordinateur fonctionne à de tels niveaux pendant de longues périodes de temps. Si la tension de la batterie est basse REPORTEZ-VOUS À L A SECTION «PERFORMANCES D E L A BATTERIE» À LA PAGE 37 — La durée de fonctionnement peut être considérablement réduite dans certains cas. OPTIMISEZ LES PERFORMANCES D U PROCESSEUR E T LA CONSOMMATION ÉLECTRIQUE — Reportezvous à la page 100.FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c40.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Utilisation du clavier et de la tablette tactile 41 Utilisation du clavier et de la tablette tactile Bouton Dell™ AccessDirect™ Appuyez sur ce bouton pour lancer un programme utilisé fréquemment, tel que les outils de support et de formation ou votre navigateur Internet par défaut. Reprogrammation du bouton Pour modifier les paramètres du bouton reprogrammable ou pour rechercher des informations sur l'utilisation de ce bouton : 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer→ Panneau de configuration→ Imprimantes et autres périphériques→ icône Clavier. 2 Cliquez sur l'onglet AccessDirect. 3 Cliquez sur le bouton Aide et suivez les instructions à l'écran. Pavé numérique Le pavé numérique fonctionne comme celui d'un clavier externe. Chaque touche du pavé numérique a plusieurs fonctions. Les chiffres et les symboles du pavé numérique figurent en bleu à droite de ces touches. pavé numérique42 Utilisation du clavier et de la tablette tactile www.dell.com | support.dell.com FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c40.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Pour activer le pavé numérique, appuyez sur . Le voyant indique que le pavé numérique est activé. Pour utiliser les fonctions numériques quand le pavé est activé, appuyez sur et sur la touche correspondant à la fonction souhaitée. Pour désactiver le pavé numérique, appuyez de nouveau sur . Raccourcis clavier Fonctions système Plateau du lecteur de CD ou DVD Fonctions d'affichage Gestion de l'alimentation <Échap> Ouvre la fenêtre Gestionnaire des tâches. Active et désactive le pavé numérique. Active et désactive la fonction Arrêt défil. Éjecte le plateau du lecteur. Bascule l'image vidéo vers l'option d'affichage suivante. Les options comprennent l'écran intégré, un moniteur externe et les deux écrans simultanément. Si vous passez un DVD ou si vous regardez un flux vidéo, est désactivé. et la touche flèche haut Augmente la luminosité sur l'écran intégré uniquement (mais pas sur le moniteur externe). et la touche flèche bas Diminue la luminosité sur l'écran intégré uniquement (mais pas sur le moniteur externe). <Échap> Active un mode de gestion de l'alimentation. Vous pouvez reprogrammer ce raccourci clavier pour activer un autre mode de gestion de l'alimentation électrique sous l'onglet Avancé de la fenêtre Propriétés des options d'alimentation. Pour plus d'informations, consultez la rubrique «Gestion de l'alimentation» du fichier d'aide de Dell Latitude 100L. Pour accéder au fichier d'aide, reportez-vous à la page 16. 9Utilisation du clavier et de la tablette tactile 43 FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c40.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Fonctions des haut-parleurs Fonctions de la touche du logo Microsoft® Windows® Pour régler les options du clavier, telles que la vitesse de répétition des caractères, cliquez sur Démarrer→ Panneau de configuration→ Imprimantes et autres périphériques→ Clavier. Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent. Augmente le volume des haut-parleurs intégrés et des haut-parleurs externes, lorsque ces derniers sont branchés. Diminue le volume des haut-parleurs intégrés et des haut-parleurs externes, lorsque ces derniers sont branchés. Active et désactive les haut-parleurs intégrés et les hautparleurs externes, si des haut-parleurs externes sont branchés. Touche du logo Windows et Réduit toutes les fenêtres ouvertes. Touche du logo Windows et Agrandit toutes les fenêtres. Touche du logo Windows et Exécute l'Explorateur Windows. Touche du logo Windows et Ouvre la boîte de dialogue Exécuter. Touche du logo Windows et Ouvre la boîte de dialogue Résultats de la recherche. Touche du logo Windows et Ouvre la boîte de dialogue Résultats de la rechercheordinateur (si vous êtes connecté à un réseau). Touche du logo Windows et Ouvre la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du système.44 Utilisation du clavier et de la tablette tactile www.dell.com | support.dell.com FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c40.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Tablette tactile La tablette tactile détecte la pression et le mouvement de vos doigts pour vous permettre de déplacer le curseur à l'écran. Utilisez la tablette tactile et ses boutons de la même façon que vous utilisez une souris. • Posez et déplacez votre doigt sur la surface de la tablette tactile pour déplacer le curseur. • Pour sélectionner un objet, tapez délicatement une fois sur la surface de la tablette ou appuyez avec le pouce sur le bouton gauche de la tablette tactile. • Pour sélectionner et déplacer (faire glisser) un objet, placez le curseur sur l'objet et tapotez une fois sur la tablette. Ne levez pas votre doigt de la tablette après l'avoir tapotée. Faites ensuite glisser votre doigt sur la surface pour déplacer l'objet sélectionné. • Pour double-cliquer sur un objet, placez le curseur sur l'objet et tapez délicatement deux fois sur la tablette ou appuyez deux fois sur le bouton gauche avec votre pouce. Personnalisation de la tablette tactile Vous pouvez désactiver la tablette tactile ou régler ses paramètres au moyen de la fenêtre de propriétés Souris. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration et ensuite sur Imprimantes et autres périphériques. 2 Cliquez sur Souris. 3 Dans la fenêtre de propriétés Souris, cliquez sur l'onglet Paramètres. Pour désactiver la tablette tactile ou la souris, sélectionnez le périphérique et cliquez sur Désactiver. tablette tactile boutons de la tablette tactileUtilisation du clavier et de la tablette tactile 45 FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c40.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Pour modifier les paramètres de la tablette tactile ou de la souris, sélectionnez le périphérique, cliquez sur Paramètres, sélectionnez les paramètres de votre choix, puis cliquez sur Appliquer. 4 Cliquez sur OK pour enregistrer les paramètres et fermer la fenêtre, puis cliquez de nouveau sur OK pour quitter la fenêtre de propriétés Souris. Problèmes liés à la tablette tactile ou à la souris VÉRIFIEZ LES PARAMÈTRES D E LA TABLETTE TACTILE — Windows XP 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration et ensuite sur Imprimantes et autres périphériques. 2 Cliquez sur Souris. 3Réglez les paramètres. Windows 2000 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Paramètres, puis cliquez sur Panneau de configuration. 2 Double-cliquez sur l'icône Souris. 3Réglez les paramètres. VÉRIFIEZ L E CÂBLE D E LA SOURIS — Éteignez votre ordinateur (reportez-vous à la page 36). Déconnectez le câble de la souris et vérifiez qu'il n'est pas endommagé. Reconnectez fermement le câble. Si vous utilisez un câble d'extension pour la souris, déconnectez-le et branchez la souris directement à l'ordinateur. POUR VOUS ASSURER QUE L E PROBLÈME VIENT D E LA SOURIS, TESTEZ L A TABLETTE TACTILE — 1 Éteignez votre ordinateur (reportez-vous à la page 36). 2 Déconnectez la souris. 3 Allumez l'ordinateur. 4 Lorsque le bureau Windows apparaît, utilisez la tablette tactile pour déplacer le curseur, sélectionner une icône et l'ouvrir. Si la tablette tactile fonctionne correctement, la souris est probablement défectueuse. RÉINSTALLEZ L E PILOTE D E L A TABLETTE TACTILE — Reportez-vous à la page 70. Problèmes liés au clavier externe REMARQUE : Lorsque vous connectez un clavier externe, le clavier intégré reste entièrement opérationnel. VÉRIFIEZ L E CÂBLE D U CLAVIER — Éteignez votre ordinateur (reportez-vous à la page 36). Déconnectez le câble du clavier et vérifiez qu'il n'est pas endommagé. Reconnectez fermement le câble. Si vous utilisez un câble d'extension pour clavier, déconnectez-le et branchez le clavier directement à l'ordinateur. VÉRIFIEZ L E CLAVIER EXTERNE — 1 Éteignez votre ordinateur (reportez-vous à la page 36), patientez une minute, puis rallumez-le. 2 Vérifiez que les voyants des touches Verr num, Verr Maj et Arrêt défil du clavier clignotent pendant le processus d'initialisation.46 Utilisation du clavier et de la tablette tactile www.dell.com | support.dell.com FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c40.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT 3 Depuis le bureau Windows®, cliquez sur Démarrer, pointez sur Tous les programmes (Programmes dans Windows 2000), puis sur Accessoires, et sur Bloc-notes. 4 Entrez quelques caractères à l'aide du clavier externe et vérifiez qu'ils s'affichent correctement. Si vous ne parvenez pas à effectuer ces vérifications, votre clavier externe est probablement défectueux. POUR VOUS ASSURER QUE L E PROBLÈME VIENT BIEN D U CLAVIER EXTERNE, VÉRIFIEZ L E CLAVIER INTÉGRÉ — 1 Éteignez votre ordinateur (reportez-vous à la page 36). 2 Déconnectez le clavier externe. 3 Allumez l'ordinateur. 4 Depuis le bureau Windows, cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Tousles programmes (Programmes dans Windows 2000), puis sur Accessoires et cliquez sur Bloc-notes. 5 Entrez quelques caractères à l'aide du clavier externe et vérifiez qu'ils s'affichent correctement. Si les caractères s'affichent maintenant alors qu'ils ne s'affichaient pas avec le clavier externe, ce dernier est probablement défectueux. Contactez Dell (reportez-vous à la page 106). Caractères inattendus DÉSACTIVEZ L E PAVÉ NUMÉRIQUE — Appuyez sur pour désactiver le pavé numérique si des nombres s'affichent au lieu de lettres. Vérifiez que le voyant de verrouillage numérique n'est pas allumé.FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c50.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Utilisation de CD, DVD et autres supports multimédia 47 Utilisation de CD, DVD et autres supports multimédia Utilisation de CD ou de DVD Pour plus d'informations sur l'utilisation de CD et de DVD sur votre ordinateur, consultez le fichier d'aide de Dell Latitude 100L. Pour accéder au fichier d'aide, reportez-vous à la page 16. Problèmes liés aux CD ou DVD Si vous ne parvenez pas à lire un CD, un CD-RW ou un DVD REMARQUE : Du fait des différents types de fichiers du monde entier, tous les DVD ne fonctionnent pas nécessairement dans tous les lecteurs de DVD. La vibration du lecteur de CD à haute vitesse est normale et peut être bruyante. Ce bruit n'est pas un indicateur de défaut du lecteur ou du CD. VÉRIFIEZ QUE WINDOWS® RECONNAÎT L E LECTEUR — Sous Windows, cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Poste de travail. Pour les autres systèmes d'exploitation, double-cliquez sur Poste de travail. Si le lecteur n'est pas répertorié, effectuez une analyse complète avec votre logiciel antivirus pour rechercher d'éventuels virus et les supprimer. Les virus parfois empêchent Windows de reconnaître le lecteur. Insérez une disquette d'initialisation et redémarrez l'ordinateur. ESSAYEZ AVEC UN AUTRE DISQUE — Insérez un autre disque pour éliminer la possibilité que le premier soit défectueux. ASSUREZ-VOUS QUE LE CD EST BIEN FIXÉ SUR LE PLATEAU DU LECTEUR DE CD RÉGLEZ L E CONTRÔLE D E VOLUME D E WINDOWS — Double-cliquez sur l'icône en forme de haut-parleur, dans le coin inférieur droit de l'écran. Assurez-vous d'avoir monté le volume et que le son n'est pas mis en sourdine. NETTOYEZ L E LECTEUR O U L E DISQUE — Pour obtenir des instructions, consultez la rubrique «Nettoyage de votre ordinateur» du fichier d'aide de Dell Latitude 100L. Pour accéder au fichier d'aide, reportez-vous à la page 16. Si vous ne parvenez pas à éjecter le plateau du lecteur de CD, CD-RW ou DVD 1 Vérifiez que l'ordinateur est éteint et hors tension (reportez-vous à la page 36). 2Redressez un trombone et insérez l'une de ses extrémités dans le trou d'éjection situé à l'avant du lecteur ; poussez ensuite fermement jusqu'à ce que le plateau soit partiellement éjecté. 3Retirez le plateau avec précaution jusqu'à ce qu'il s'arrête.48 Utilisation de CD, DVD et autres supports multimédia www.dell.com | support.dell.com FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c50.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Si vous entendez un bruit grinçant ou un raclement inhabituel • Assurez-vous que ce son n'est pas émis par un programme en cours d'exécution. • Assurez-vous que le disque est correctement inséré. Si le lecteur de CD-RW arrête une gravure AVANT D E GRAVER UN DISQUE CD-RW, DÉSACTIVEZ L E MODE VEILLE DANS WINDOWS — Lancez une recherche à l'aide du mot-clé veille dans le Centre d'aide et de support. Pour accéder à l'aide, reportez-vous à la page 16. RÉDUISEZ L A VITESSE D E GRAVURE — Consultez les fichiers d'aide de votre logiciel de gravure de CD. QUITTEZ TOUS LES PROGRAMMES — La fermeture de tous les autres programmes avant la gravure d'un CD-RW peut également résoudre le problème. Problèmes de son et de haut-parleurs Si vous avez un problème avec les haut-parleurs intégrés RÉGLEZ L E VOLUME D E WINDOWS® — Double-cliquez sur l'icône en forme de haut-parleur, dans le coin inférieur droit de l'écran. Assurez-vous d'avoir monté le volume et que le son n'est pas mis en sourdine. Réglez le volume pour supprimer toute distorsion. RÉGLEZ L E VOLUME À L'AIDE DES RACCOURCIS CLAVIER — Pour désactiver (mettre en sourdine) les haut-parleurs intégrés, appuyez sur . RÉINSTALLEZ L E PILOTE AUDIO — Reportez-vous à la page 70. Si vous avez un problème avec les haut-parleurs externes REMARQUE : Le volume de certains lecteurs MP3 annule l'effet du paramètre de volume de Windows. Si vous avez écouté des musiques MP3, vérifiez que vous n'avez pas baissé ou éteint le volume du lecteur. VÉRIFIEZ LES CONNEXIONS DES CÂBLES DES HAUT-PARLEURS — Consultez le schéma de configuration fourni avec les haut-parleurs. TESTEZ LA PRISE ÉLECTRIQUE — Assurez-vous que la prise électrique fonctionne en la testant à l'aide d'un autre appareil, une lampe par exemple. ASSUREZ-VOUS QUE LES HAUT-PARLEURS SONT SOUS TENSION — Consultez le schéma de configuration fourni avec les haut-parleurs. RÉGLEZ L E CONTRÔLE D U VOLUME D E WINDOWS — Double-cliquez sur l'icône en forme de haut-parleur, dans le coin inférieur droit de l'écran. Assurez-vous d'avoir monté le volume et que le son n'est pas mis en sourdine. Réglez le volume pour supprimer toute distorsion. TESTEZ LES HAUT-PARLEURS — Branchez le câble audio du haut-parleur au connecteur de ligne de sortie de l'ordinateur. Assurez-vous que le volume du casque n'est pas à zéro. Lancez la lecture d'un CD de musique. EXÉCUTEZ L'AUTO-TEST D U HAUT-PARLEUR — Les caissons de basse de certains systèmes de hautparleurs sont équipés d'un bouton d'auto-test. Reportez-vous à la documentation des haut-parleurs pour obtenir des instructions sur l'auto-test. Utilisation de CD, DVD et autres supports multimédia 49 FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c50.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT ÉLIMINEZ LES SOURCES POTENTIELLES D'INTERFÉRENCES — Éteignez les ventilateurs, tubes au néon ou lampes halogènes proches afin de vérifier s'ils produisent des interférences. RÉINSTALLEZ L E PILOTE AUDIO — Reportez-vous à la page 70. Copie de CD et DVD REMARQUE : Assurez-vous de respecter toutes les lois relatives au copyright concernant la création de CD ou de DVD. Les informations de cette section s'appliquent uniquement aux ordinateurs équipés d'un lecteur CD-R, CD-RW, DVD+RW, DVD+R, ou lecteur combiné DVD/CD-RW. Les instructions suivantes décrivent la création d'une copie exacte d'un CD ou DVD. Vous pouvez également utiliser Sonic RecordNow à d'autres fins, notamment pour créer des CD à partir de fichiers audio sur votre ordinateur et pour créer des CD MP3. Pour obtenir des instructions, reportez-vous à la documentation Sonic RecordNow fournie avec votre ordinateur. Ouvrez Sonic RecordNow, cliquez sur l'icône en forme de point d'interrogation située dans le coin droit supérieur de la fenêtre, puis sur Aide de RecordNow ou Didacticiel de RecordNow. Comment copier un CD ou un DVD REMARQUE : Si vous disposez d'un lecteur composite DVD/CD-RW et que vous rencontrez des problèmes lors de l'enregistrement, recherchez des correctifs logiciels sur le site Web de support de Sonic à l'adresse support.sonic.com. À l'heure actuelle, cinq formats de DVD inscriptibles sont sur le marché : DVD+R, DVD+RW, DVD-R, DVD-RW et DVD-RAM. Les lecteurs de DVD inscriptibles installés sur les ordinateurs Dell™ peuvent graver des disques DVD+R ou DVD+RW et lire les disques DVD-R ou DVD-RW, mais ils ne peuvent pas graver des disques DVD-RAM ou, parfois, lire ces disques. Les lecteurs de DVD offerts sur le marché pour les systèmes de cinéma maison ne peuvent parfois pas lire tous ces cinq formats. REMARQUE : La plupart des DVD sur le marché sont protégés par des droits d'auteur et ne peuvent pas être copiés à l'aide de Sonic RecordNow. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Tous les programmes (Programmes sous Windows 2000)→ Sonic→ RecordNow!→ RecordNow! 2 Cliquez sur l'onglet Audio ou sur l'onglet Données, selon le type de CD ou de DVD que vous voulez copier. 3 Cliquez sur Copie exacte. 4 Pour copier le CD ou DVD : • Si vous disposez d'un lecteur de CD ou DVD, assurez-vous que les paramètres sont corrects et cliquez sur Copier. L'ordinateur lit votre CD ou DVD source et copie son contenu dans un dossier temporaire du disque dur de l'ordinateur. Lorsque vous y êtes invité, insérez un CD ou DVD vierge dans le lecteur de CD ou DVD et cliquez sur OK.50 Utilisation de CD, DVD et autres supports multimédia www.dell.com | support.dell.com FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c50.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT • Si vous disposez de deux lecteurs de CD ou DVD, sélectionnez le lecteur dans lequel vous avez inséré votre CD ou DVD source et cliquez sur Copier. L'ordinateur copie les données du CD ou DVD sur le CD ou DVD vierge. Une fois la copie du CD ou DVD source terminée, le CD ou DVD créé est éjecté automatiquement. Utilisation de CD-R, CD-RW, DVD+R et DVD+RW vierges Votre lecteur de CD-RW peut graver deux types différents de disques inscriptibles— CD-R et CDRW (y compris les CD-RW haute vitesse). Utilisez des CD-R vierges pour enregistrer de la musique ou stocker définitivement des fichiers de données. Après avoir créé un CD-R, vous ne pouvez plus écrire sur ce disque sans modifier votre méthode d'enregistrement (reportez-vous à la documentation Sonic pour plus d'informations). Utilisez des CD-RW vierges pour écrire sur des CD ou pour effacer, réécrire ou mettre à jour des données sur des CD. Votre lecteur de DVD inscriptibles peut graver quatre types différents de disques inscriptibles— CD-R, CD-RW (y compris les CD-RW haute vitesse), DVD+R et DVD+RW. Les DVD+R vierges permettent de stocker de grosses quantités d'informations de façon permanente. Après avoir gravé un DVD+R, l'option de récrire ou non sur ce disque dépend de la dernière étape de la création, laquelle «finalise» ou «ferme» le disque. Utilisez un DVD+RW vierge si vous voulez plus tard effacer, récrire ou mettre à jour les données de ce disque. Conseils pratiques • N'utilisez Microsoft® Windows® Explorer pour glisser-déplacer des fichiers sur un CD-R ou CD-RW qu'après avoir lancé Sonic RecordNow et ouvert un projet RecordNow. • Vous devez utiliser des CD-R pour graver des CD audio que vous souhaitez lire sur une chaîne stéréo classique. Les CD-RW ne fonctionnent pas sur la plupart des chaînes stéréo ou de voiture. • Il est impossible de créer des DVD audio à l'aide de Sonic RecordNow. • Les fichiers de musique MP3 ne peuvent s'écouter que sur des lecteurs MP3 ou sur des ordinateurs dotés d'un logiciel MP3. • Évitez de graver sur toute la capacité d'un CD-R ou CD-RW vierge. Par exemple, ne copiez pas un fichier de 650 Mo sur un CD vierge de 650 Mo. Le lecteur CD-RW doit disposer de 1 ou 2 Mo de libre sur le CD pour finaliser l'enregistrement. • Nous vous conseillons d'utiliser un CD-RW jusqu'à ce que les techniques d'enregistrement de CD vous soient familières. En cas d'erreur, vous pouvez effacer le CD-RW, puis recommencer. Vous pouvez aussi utiliser un CD-RW pour tester des projets de fichiers musicaux avant l'enregistrement définitif sur un CD-R vierge. • Pour obtenir d'autres conseils pratiques, rendez-vous sur le site Web de support Sonic à l'adresse support.sonic.com.FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c60.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Installation d'un réseau domestique et d'un réseau de bureau 51 Installation d'un réseau domestique et d'un réseau de bureau Connexion à une carte réseau Pour connecter l'ordinateur à un réseau, une carte réseau doit être installée et un câble réseau connecté à l'ordinateur. Pour connecter un câble réseau : 1 Branchez le câble au connecteur réseau de votre ordinateur. REMARQUE : Insérez le câble jusqu'à ce qu'il s'enclenche et tirez dessus doucement pour vous assurer qu'il est correctement fixé. 2 Connectez l'autre extrémité du câble à un périphérique de connexion réseau, comme une prise murale de réseau. REMARQUE : Ne connectez pas de câble réseau à une prise téléphonique murale. Assistant Installation réseau L'Assistant Installation réseau du système d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows®XP vous guide dans la procédure de partage des fichiers, des imprimantes ou d'une connexion Internet entre les ordinateurs d'un réseau familial ou d'un réseau de petite entreprise. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Tous les programmes→ Accessoires→ Communications et ensuite sur Assistant Installation réseau. 2 Dans l'écran d'accueil, cliquez sur Suivant. 3 Cliquez sur Liste de vérification pour la création d'un réseau.52 Installation d'un réseau domestique et d'un réseau de bureau www.dell.com | support.dell.com FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c60.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT REMARQUE : La sélection de la méthode de connexion Cet ordinateur se connecte directement à Internet active le pare-feu intégré fourni avec Windows XP. 4 Effectuez les étapes et opérations requises, puis revenez à l'Assistant Installation réseau. 5 Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent. Problèmes de réseau REMARQUE : Un voyant vert ou clignotant peut également signaler la présence d'une liaison réseau sans fil active dans les environs. VÉRIFIEZ L E CONNECTEUR D U CÂBLE RÉSEAU — Assurez-vous que le connecteur du câble est bien relié au connecteur de l'ordinateur et à la prise murale du réseau. VÉRIFIEZ LES VOYANTS D U CONNECTEUR RÉSEAU — Si le voyant est vert, la connexion réseau est active. Si le voyant d'état n'est pas vert, essayez de remplacer le câble. Le voyant orange indique que le pilote de carte réseau est chargé et que la carte détecte de l'activité. REMPLACEZ L E CÂBLE D E RÉSEAU — Essayez d'utiliser un autre câble. Si plus d'un connecteur réseau est disponible, branchez le câble dans un autre connecteur. REDÉMARREZ L'ORDINATEUR — Connectez-vous à nouveau au réseau. CONTACTEZ VOTRE ADMINISTRATEUR RÉSEAU — Vérifiez que vos paramètres réseau sont corrects et que le réseau fonctionne. Connexion à un réseau local sans fil REMARQUE : Ces instructions concernant la mise en réseau ne s'appliquent ni à Bluetooth™ ni aux produits cellulaires. Identification de votre type de réseau REMARQUE : La plupart des réseaux sans fil sont de type infrastructurel. Les réseaux sans fil se divisent en deux catégories— les réseaux infrastructurels et les réseaux adhoc. Un réseau infrastructurel utilise des routeurs ou des points d'accès pour connecter plusieurs ordinateurs ensemble. Un réseau ad-hoc n'utilise ni routeurs, ni points d'accès. Il se compose d'ordinateurs qui communiquent entre eux directement. réseau infrastructurel réseau ad-hocInstallation d'un réseau domestique et d'un réseau de bureau 53 FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c60.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Connexion à un réseau sans fil sous Microsoft® Windows® XP Votre carte réseau sans fil doit disposer d'un logiciel et de pilotes spécifiques pour se connecter à un réseau. Le logiciel est déjà installé. S'il a été supprimé ou corrompu, suivez les instructions du Guide d'utilisation de votre carte réseau sans fil. Vous trouverez ce Guide d'utilisation sur le CD Drivers and Utilities (Pilotes et utilitaires) [livré avec l'ordinateur] dans le répertoire «Guides d'utilisation-Guides d'utilisation du réseau». Le Guide d'utilisation est également disponible sur le site Web de support de Dell à l'adresse support.dell.com. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration et ensuite sur Basculer vers l'affichage classique. 2 Double-cliquez sur Connexions réseau. 3 Cliquez sur Connexion réseau sans fil. L'icône Connexion réseau sans fil apparaît en surbrillance. 4 Sous Tâches réseau (côté gauche), cliquez sur Modifier les paramètres de cette connexion. La fenêtre Propriétés de la connexion réseau sans fil apparaît. 5 Cliquez sur l'onglet Réseaux sans fil. REMARQUE : Les noms des réseaux sans fil que votre ordinateur peut détecter sont répertoriés dans la liste Réseaux disponibles.54 Installation d'un réseau domestique et d'un réseau de bureau www.dell.com | support.dell.com FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c60.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT 6 Cliquez sur Ajouter. La fenêtre Propriétés du réseau sans fil apparaît. REMARQUE : Si vous utilisez un réseau protégé par WPA et que l'onglet Association ne vous permet pas de sélectionner WPA, téléchargez la mise à jour de sécurité WPA sans fil à partir du site Web de support de Microsoft. 7 Saisissez le nom de votre réseau dans le champ Nom du réseau (SSID). 8 Si vous n'avez pas besoin de configurer les paramètres de sécurité, passez à l'étape 9. Si vous choisissez de configurer les paramètres de sécurité (optionnel), reportez-vous à la section «Configuration des paramètres de sécurité (optionnel)» à la page 55. 9 Cliquez sur OK. Le nouveau nom de votre réseau apparaît dans le champ Réseaux préférés et l'installation du réseau est terminée.Installation d'un réseau domestique et d'un réseau de bureau 55 FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c60.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Configuration des paramètres de sécurité (optionnel) Choisissez l'une des options de connexion suivantes selon les paramètres de sécurité de votre réseau : • Connexion à un réseau avec exigences de sécurité WEP (Wired Equivalent Protocol) • Connexion à un réseau avec exigences de sécurité WPA (WiFi Protected Access) REMARQUE : Les paramètres de sécurité du réseau sont uniques à votre réseau. Dell ne peut pas vous fournir ces informations. Connexion à un réseau avec exigences de sécurité WEP (Wired Equivalent Protocol) 1 Dans le champ Réseaux préférés, cliquez sur le nom de votre réseau sans fil. 2 Cliquez sur Propriétés. 3 Dans le menu déroulant Authentification réseau, sélectionnez Ouvrir. Ce menu déroulant peut ne pas exister dans les versions antérieures du logiciel de réseau sans fil Dell™. Si vous utilisez une version antérieure, cochez la case Cryptage des données (WEP activé) et passez à l'étape 5.56 Installation d'un réseau domestique et d'un réseau de bureau www.dell.com | support.dell.com FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c60.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT 4 Dans le menu déroulant Cryptage des données, sélectionnez WEP. 5 Si le réseau sans fil n'exige pas de clé de réseau, telle qu'un mot de passe, passez à l'étape 9. 6 Décochez la case La clé m'est fournie automatiquement. 7 Saisissez la clé de réseau WEP dans le champ Clé de réseau. 8 Entrez de nouveau la clé de réseau WEP dans le champ Confirmer la clé de réseau. REMARQUE : La connexion au réseau peut prendre 1 minute. 9 Cliquez sur OK. La configuration de votre connexion réseau est terminée. Connexion à un réseau avec exigences de sécurité WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access) Les instructions suivantes constituent la procédure de base à suivre pour la connexion à un réseau WPA. Si votre réseau exige un nom d'utilisateur, un mot de passe ou des paramètres de domaine, reportez-vous aux instructions de configuration du Guide d'utilisation de votre carte réseau sans fil. REMARQUE : Les protocoles WPA exigent que vous connaissiez les paramètres d'authentification réseau et de cryptage des données de votre réseau sans fil. Par ailleurs, votre réseau protégé par WPA exigera peut-être des paramètres spéciaux, comme une clé de réseau, un nom d'utilisateur, un mot de passe et un nom de domaine. Installation d'un réseau domestique et d'un réseau de bureau 57 FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c60.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT 1 Dans le champ Réseaux préférés, cliquez sur le nom de votre réseau sans fil. 2 Cliquez sur Propriétés. 3 Dans le menu déroulant Authentification réseau, sélectionnez le type d'authentification de votre réseau. Si vous utilisez un réseau protégé par WPA et que l'onglet Association ne vous permet pas de sélectionner WPA, téléchargez la mise à jour de sécurité WPA sans fil à partir du site Web de support de Microsoft. 4 Dans le menu déroulant Cryptage des données, sélectionnez votre type de cryptage des données. 5 Si votre réseau sans fil exige une clé, saisissez-la dans le champ Clé de réseau. REMARQUE : La connexion au réseau peut prendre 1 minute. 6 Cliquez sur OK. La configuration de votre connexion réseau est terminée.58 Installation d'un réseau domestique et d'un réseau de bureau www.dell.com | support.dell.com FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c60.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENTFILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c70.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Résolution des problèmes 59 Résolution des problèmes Dell Diagnostics PRÉCAUTION : Avant de suivre les procédures indiquées dans cette section, appliquez les consignes de sécurité indiquées au début de ce guide (reportez-vous à la page 9). Quand utiliser Dell Diagnostics Si vous rencontrez des difficultés avec votre ordinateur, procédez aux vérifications décrites dans la section «Résolution des problèmes» et exécutez Dell Diagnostics avant de contacter Dell pour obtenir une assistance technique. AVIS : Dell Diagnostics fonctionne seulement avec les ordinateurs Dell™. Dell Diagnostics se trouve dans une partition cachée (utilitaire de diagnostics) de votre disque dur. REMARQUE : Si aucune image ne s'affiche, contactez Dell. 1 Éteignez votre ordinateur. 2 Si l'ordinateur est connecté (amarré) à une station d'accueil, déconnectez-le. Pour obtenir des instructions, reportez-vous à la documentation de la station d'accueil. 3 Connectez l'ordinateur à une prise électrique. 4 Allumez l'ordinateur. Lorsque le logo DELL™ apparaît, appuyez immédiatement sur . REMARQUE : Si rien ne s'affiche à l'écran, maintenez le bouton enfoncé et appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation de l'ordinateur pour démarrer Dell Diagnostics. L'ordinateur lance automatiquement l'évaluation de préamorçage du système. REMARQUE : Si un message indique qu'aucune partition d'utilitaire de diagnostics n'a été détectée, exécutez Dell Diagnostics à partir du CD Pilotes et utilitaires. Si vous attendez trop longtemps et que le logo Microsoft® Windows® apparaît, patientez jusqu'à ce que le bureau de Windows s'affiche. Arrêtez ensuite l'ordinateur à l'aide du menu Démarrer et faites une autre tentative.60 Résolution des problèmes www.dell.com | support.dell.com FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c70.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT 5 Lorsque la liste des périphériques d'amorçage s'affiche, sélectionnez Diagnostics et appuyez sur . L'ordinateur lance l'évaluation du système avant initialisation avec une série de diagnostics intégrés qui effectue un test préalable de la carte système, du clavier, du disque dur et de l'écran. • Répondez à toutes les questions qui s'affichent pendant l'évaluation. • Si une défaillance de composant est détectée, l'ordinateur s'arrête et émet un signal sonore. Pour arrêter l'évaluation et redémarrer l'ordinateur, appuyez sur ; pour passer au test suivant, appuyez sur ; pour retester le composant défectueux, appuyez sur . • Si des défaillances sont détectées lors de l'évaluation de préamorçage du système, notez les codes d'erreur et contactez Dell avant de continuer. Si l'évaluation de préamorçage du système se déroule sans problème, vous recevez le message Booting Dell Diagnostic Utility Partition (Initialisation de la partition de l'utilitaire Dell Diagnostics). Press any key to continue (Appuyez sur une touche pour continuer). 6 Appuyez sur une touche pour démarrer Dell Diagnostics à partir de la partition de diagnostics du disque dur. 7 Lorsque le menu principal de Dell Diagnostics s'affiche, sélectionnez le test à effectuer. Menu principal de Dell Diagnostics 1 Une fois Dell Diagnostics chargé et l'écran du menu principal affiché, cliquez sur le bouton correspondant à l'option souhaitée. 2 Si un problème survient pendant un test, un message indiquant le code d'erreur et une description du problème s'affichent. Notez le code d'erreur et la description du problème et suivez les instructions. Si vous ne pouvez pas résoudre le problème, contactez Dell. Option Fonction Express Test (Test rapide) Exécute un test rapide des périphériques. Ce test dure généralement entre 10 et 20 minutes et n'exige pas d'action de votre part. Effectuez un test rapide pour améliorer la capacité de suivi du problème. Extended Test (Test approfondi) Exécute un test approfondi des périphériques. Ce test dure généralement une heure ou plus et vous demande de répondre régulièrement à des questions. Custom Test (Test personnalisé) Teste un périphérique spécifique. Vous pouvez personnaliser les tests à exécuter. Symptom Tree (Arborescence des symptômes) Répertorie les symptômes couramment rencontrés et permet de sélectionner un test en fonction du symptôme du problème.Résolution des problèmes 61 FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c70.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT REMARQUE : Le numéro de service de votre ordinateur s'affiche dans la partie supérieure de chaque écran de test. Lorsque vous contacterez le service technique de Dell, ce numéro de service vous sera demandé. 3 Si vous effectuez un test à partir de l'option Test personnalisé ou Arborescence des symptômes, cliquez sur l'onglet approprié décrit dans le tableau suivant pour en savoir plus. 4 Une fois les tests terminés, fermez l'écran test pour revenir à l'écran du menu principal. Pour quitter Dell Diagnostics et redémarrer l'ordinateur, fermez l'écran du menu principal. Messages d'erreur Si le message n'est pas répertorié, reportez-vous à la documentation du système d'exploitation ou du programme en cours d'utilisation au moment où le message est apparu. Onglet Fonction Résultats Affiche les résultats du test et les conditions des erreur rencontrées. Erreurs Affiche les conditions des erreur rencontrées, les codes d'erreur et la description du problème. Aide Décrit le test et peut indiquer les conditions requises pour exécuter le test. Configuration Affiche la configuration matérielle du périphérique sélectionné. Dell Diagnostics obtient vos informations de configuration de tous les périphériques à partir du programme d'installation du système, de la mémoire et de divers tests internes, et les affiche dans la liste des périphériques située dans le volet gauche de l'écran. La liste des périphériques risque de ne pas afficher les noms de tous les composants installés sur votre ordinateur ou de tous les périphériques reliés à celui-ci. Paramètres Vous permet de personnaliser le test en modifiant ses paramètres. TH E FILE BEING COPIED I S TOO LARGE FOR THE DESTINATION DRIVE (LE FICHIER EN COURS D E COPIE EST TROP VOLUMINEUX POUR L E LECTEUR D E DESTINATION) — Le fichier que vous essayez de copier est trop volumineux pour le disque ou le disque est plein. Essayez de copier le fichier sur un autre disque ou utilisez un disque de capacité plus élevée. A FILENAME CANNOT CONTAIN ANY O F THE FOLLOWING CHARACTERS: (UN NOM D E FICHIER N E PEUT CONTENIR AUCUN DES CARACTÈRES SUIVANTS :) \ / : * ? “ < > | — N'utilisez pas ces caractères lorsque vous nommez un fichier.62 Résolution des problèmes www.dell.com | support.dell.com FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c70.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Problèmes liés à la vidéo et à l'affichage Si l'écran reste vide REMARQUE : Si vous utilisez un programme qui exige une résolution supérieure à celle dont vous disposez, Dell vous conseille de brancher un écran externe à votre ordinateur. INSERT BOOTABLE MEDIA (INTRODUISEZ UN SUPPORT AMORÇABLE) — Le système d'exploitation tente de démarrer à partir d'une disquette ou d'un CD non amorçable. Introduisez une disquette ou un CD d'initialisation. INVALID CONFIGURATION INFORMATION-PLEASE RUN SYSTEM SETUP PROGRAM (INFORMATIONS D E CONFIGURATION NON VALIDES, EXÉCUTEZ L E PROGRAMME D'INSTALLATION D U SYSTÈME) — Les informations de configuration du système ne correspondent pas à la configuration matérielle. C'est après l'installation d'un module de mémoire que ce message est le plus susceptible d'apparaître. Corrigez les options appropriées dans le programme d'installation du système. Reportez-vous à la section «Utilisation du programme de configuration du système» à la page 98. KEYBOARD CLOCK LINE FAILURE (ÉCHEC D E LA LIGNE D E L'HORLOGE CLAVIER) — Pour les claviers externes, vérifiez la connexion du câble. Exécutez le test du contrôleur de clavier comme indiqué dans la section «Dell Diagnostics. KEYBOARD CONTROLLER FAILURE (ÉCHEC D U CONTRÔLEUR D E CLAVIER) — Pour les claviers externes, vérifiez la connexion du câble. Redémarrez l'ordinateur et évitez de toucher le clavier ou la souris durant la procédure d'initialisation. Exécutez le test du contrôleur de clavier comme indiqué dans la section «Dell Diagnostics» (reportez-vous à la page 59). KEYBOARD DATA LINE FAILURE (ÉCHEC D E L A LIGNE D E DONNÉES D U CLAVIER) — Pour les claviers externes, vérifiez la connexion du câble. Exécutez le test du contrôleur de clavier comme indiqué dans la section «Dell Diagnostics» (reportez-vous à la page 59). KEYBOARD STUCK KEY FAILURE (TOUCHE D U CLAVIER BLOQUÉE) — Pour les pavés numériques et les claviers externes, vérifiez la connexion du câble. Redémarrez l'ordinateur et évitez de toucher le clavier ou les touches durant la procédure d'initialisation. Exécutez le test de touche bloquée comme indiqué dans la section «Dell Diagnostics (reportez-vous à la page 59).Résolution des problèmes 63 FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c70.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Si l'écran est difficile à lire VÉRIFIEZ L E VOYANT — Quand le voyant clignote, l'ordinateur est sous tension. • Si le voyant clignote, l'ordinateur est en mode Veille— appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation pour revenir au mode Normal. • Si le voyant est éteint, appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation. • Si le voyant est allumé, les réglages de gestion de l'alimentation ont peut-être entraîné la mise hors tension de l'écran. Appuyez sur une touche quelconque ou déplacez le curseur pour quitter le mode Veille. VÉRIFIEZ LA BATTERIE — Si vous utilisez une batterie pour alimenter l'ordinateur, la batterie peut être déchargée. Connectez l'ordinateur à une prise secteur à l'aide de l'adaptateur secteur, puis allumez l'ordinateur. TESTEZ L A PRISE ÉLECTRIQUE — Assurez-vous que la prise électrique fonctionne en la testant à l'aide d'un autre appareil, une lampe par exemple. VÉRIFIEZ L'ADAPTATEUR SECTEUR — Vérifiez les connexions du câble de l'adaptateur secteur. Si l'adaptateur est équipé d'un voyant, assurez-vous qu'il est allumé. CONNECTEZ L'ORDINATEUR DIRECTEMENT À UNE PRISE ÉLECTRIQUE — Contournez les périphériques de protection contre les surtensions électriques, les multiprises et la rallonge de câble pour vérifier que l'ordinateur est sous tension. Pour accéder au fichier d'aide, reportez-vous à la page 16. RÉGLEZ LES PROPRIÉTÉS D E L'ALIMENTATION — Lancez une recherche à l'aide du mot-clé veille dans le Centre d'aide et de support. Pour accéder au fichier d'aide, reportez-vous à la page 16. BASCULEZ L'IMAGE VIDÉO — Si votre ordinateur est connecté à un moniteur externe, appuyez sur pour basculer l'affichage de l'image vidéo vers l'écran. REMARQUE : Si vous passez un DVD ou si vous regardez un flux vidéo, le raccourci est désactivé. RÉGLEZ L A LUMINOSITÉ — Reportez-vous au fichier d'aide de Dell Latitude 100L pour obtenir des instructions sur le réglage de la luminosité. Pour accéder au fichier d'aide, reportez-vous à la page 16. ÉLOIGNEZ L E CAISSON D E BASSE D E L'ORDINATEUR O U D E L'ÉCRAN — Si vos haut-parleurs externes comportent un caisson de basse, vérifiez que ce dernier se trouve à au moins 60 cm de l'ordinateur ou du moniteur externe.64 Résolution des problèmes www.dell.com | support.dell.com FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c70.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Si seule une partie de l'écran est lisible Problèmes de scanner ÉLIMINEZ LES SOURCES POTENTIELLES D'INTERFÉRENCES — Éteignez les ventilateurs, les lampes fluorescentes ou halogènes ou tout autre appareil se trouvant à proximité. ORIENTEZ L'ORDINATEUR DANS UNE DIRECTION DIFFÉRENTE — Éliminez les reflets du soleil pouvant altérer la qualité de l'image. RÉGLEZ LES PARAMÈTRES D'AFFICHAGE D E WINDOWS — Windows XP 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration. 2 Cliquez sur Apparence et thèmes. 3 Cliquez sur la zone que vous souhaitez modifier ou cliquez sur l'icône Affichage. 4 Essayez différents paramètres de Qualité couleur et Résolution d'écran. Windows 2000 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer pointez sur Paramètres, puis cliquez sur Panneau de configuration. 2 Double-cliquez sur l'icône Affichage, puis cliquez sur l'onglet Paramètres. 3 Essayez différentes valeurs pour les paramètres Couleurs, Zone d'écran et Paramètres avancés. REPORTEZ-VOUS À L A SECTION «MESSAGES D'ERREUR» — Si un message d'erreur apparaît, reportez-vous à la page 61. CONNECTEZ UN MONITEUR EXTERNE — 1 Éteignez l'ordinateur et connectez un moniteur externe à l'ordinateur. 2 Allumez l'ordinateur et le moniteur, puis réglez la luminosité et le contraste. Si le moniteur externe fonctionne correctement, le moniteur ou le contrôleur vidéo de l'ordinateur est peut-être défectueux. Contactez Dell (reportez-vous à la page 106). VÉRIFIEZ L A CONNEXION D U CÂBLE D'ALIMENTATION — Vérifiez que le câble d'alimentation du scanner est fermement connecté à une source d'alimentation électrique fonctionnelle et que le scanner est sous tension. VÉRIFIEZ L A CONNEXION D U CÂBLE D U SCANNER — Vérifiez que le câble du scanner est fermement connecté à l'ordinateur et au scanner.Résolution des problèmes 65 FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c70.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Problèmes de lecteur REMARQUE : Pour toute information concernant l'enregistrement sur disquettes, consultez le fichier d'aide de Dell Latitude 100L. Pour accéder au fichier d'aide, reportez-vous à la page 16. Si vous ne pouvez pas enregistrer un fichier sur une disquette DÉVERROUILLEZ L E SCANNER — Vérifiez que votre scanner est déverrouillé, s'il comporte un bouton ou une languette de verrouillage. RÉINSTALLEZ L E PILOTE D U SCANNER — Reportez-vous à la documentation du scanner pour obtenir des instructions. ASSUREZ-VOUS QUE L E LECTEUR EST RECONNU PAR WINDOWS — Sous Windows, cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Poste de travail. Pour les autres systèmes d'exploitation, double-cliquez sur Poste de travail. Si le lecteur n'est pas répertorié, effectuez une analyse complète avec votre logiciel antivirus pour rechercher d'éventuels virus et les supprimer. Les virus empêchent parfois Windows de reconnaître le lecteur. Insérez une disquette d'initialisation et redémarrez l'ordinateur. VÉRIFIEZ QUE L A DISQUETTE N'EST PAS PROTÉGÉE EN ÉCRITURE — Vous ne pouvez pas enregistrer des données sur une disquette protégée en écriture. Reportez-vous à la figure suivante. ESSAYEZ UNE AUTRE DISQUETTE — Insérez une autre disquette pour éliminer la possibilité que la première soit défectueuse. protégée en écriture non protégée en écriture dos de la disquette66 Résolution des problèmes www.dell.com | support.dell.com FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c70.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Si vous rencontrez des problèmes liés à un disque dur Problèmes de carte PC RECONNECTEZ L E LECTEUR — 1 Enregistrez et fermez tout fichier ouvert, quittez tous les programmes, puis éteignez l'ordinateur. 2 Déconnectez et reconnectez le lecteur. 3 Allumez l'ordinateur. NETTOYEZ L E LECTEUR — Consultez la rubrique «Nettoyage de votre ordinateur» dans le fichier d'aide de Dell Latitude 100L pour obtenir des instructions. Pour accéder au fichier d'aide, reportez-vous à la page 16. LAISSEZ L'ORDINATEUR REFROIDIR AVANT D E L'ALLUMER — Un disque dur trop chaud peut empêcher le fonctionnement du système d'exploitation. Laissez l'ordinateur s'acclimater à la température ambiante avant de l'allumer. RECHERCHEZ LES ERREURS ÉVENTUELLES A U NIVEAU D U LECTEUR — 1 Sous Windows XP, cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Poste de travail. 2 Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur la lettre du lecteur (disque local) que vous souhaitez scanner pour détecter les erreurs, puis cliquez sur Propriétés. 3 Cliquez sur l'onglet Outils. 4 Sous Détection d'erreurs, cliquez sur Vérifier maintenant. 5 Cliquez sur Démarrer. VÉRIFIEZ L A CARTE PC — Assurez-vous que la carte PC est correctement insérée dans le connecteur. VÉRIFIEZ QUE LA CARTE EST RECONNUE PAR WINDOWS — Double-cliquez sur l'icône Supprimer le périphérique en toute sécurité (Débrancher ou Éjecter le périphérique sous Windows 2000) de la barre des tâches de Windows. Vérifiez que la carte est répertoriée. SI VOUS RENCONTREZ DES PROBLÈMES AVEC UNE CARTE PC FOURNIE PAR DELL — Contactez Dell (reportez-vous à la page 106). SI VOUS RENCONTREZ DES PROBLÈMES AVEC UNE CARTE PC NON FOURNIE PAR DELL — Contactez le fabricant de la carte.Résolution des problèmes 67 FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c70.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Problèmes de programmes généraux REMARQUE : Tout logiciel inclut généralement des instructions d'installation dans la documentation ou sur la disquette ou le CD qui l'accompagne. Un programme se bloque Un programme ne répond plus Des messages d'erreur apparaissent Résolution d'autres problèmes techniques CONSULTEZ LA DOCUMENTATION D U LOGICIEL — De nombreux fabricants de logiciels maintiennent des sites Web avec des informations pouvant vous aider à résoudre les problèmes. Vérifiez que vous avez installé et configuré correctement le programme. Au besoin, réinstallez le programme. QUITTEZ L E PROGRAMME — 1 Appuyez simultanément sur <Échap>. 2 Cliquez sur l'onglet Applications, puis sélectionnez le programme qui ne répond plus. 3 Cliquez sur Fin de tâche. REPORTEZ-VOUS À LA SECTION «MESSAGES D'ERREUR» À L A PAGE 61 — Recherchez le message et effectuez l'action corrective appropriée. Reportez-vous à la documentation du logiciel. VISITEZ L E SITE WE B D E SUPPORT D E DELL — Rendez-vous sur le site support.dell.com pour obtenir de l'aide sur les questions d'utilisation générale, d'installation et de dépannage. CONTACTEZ DELL PAR COURRIER ÉLECTRONIQUE — Visitez le site support.dell.com, puis cliquez sur Contacter Dell par courrier électronique dans la liste Communiquer. Envoyez un message électronique à Dell concernant votre problème ; vous pouvez espérer recevoir un message électronique de Dell au bout de quelques heures. CONTACTEZ DELL — Si vous ne parvenez pas à résoudre votre problème à l'aide du site Web de support de Dell ou du service de messagerie électronique, contactez Dell pour obtenir une assistance technique (reportez-vous à la page 106). 68 Résolution des problèmes www.dell.com | support.dell.com FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c70.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Si l'ordinateur est mouillé PRÉCAUTION : Effectuez la procédure suivante uniquement si vous êtes certain de pouvoir le faire en toute sécurité. Si l'ordinateur est raccordé à une prise électrique, il est recommandé de couper le courant au niveau du disjoncteur ou du coupe-circuit avant de tenter de débrancher le câble d'alimentation de la prise électrique. Soyez extrêmement prudent lorsque vous débranchez des câbles mouillés d'une source électrique alimentée. 1 Éteignez votre ordinateur (reportez-vous à la page 36), débranchez l'adaptateur CA/CC de l'ordinateur, puis de la prise de courant. 2 Éteignez les périphériques externes éventuellement reliés à l'ordinateur et débranchez-les de leur source d'alimentation, puis de l'ordinateur. 3 Raccordez-vous à la masse en touchant l'un des connecteurs en métal situés à l'arrière de l'ordinateur. 4 Enlevez toutes les cartes PC installées, puis mettez-les à sécher dans un endroit sûr. 5 Retirez la batterie. 6 Essuyez la batterie et placez-la dans un endroit où elle pourra sécher en toute sécurité. 7 Essuyez l'écran. 8 Retirez le disque dur (reportez-vous à la page 78). 9 Retirez le(s) module(s) de mémoire (reportez-vous à la page 80). 10 Ouvrez l'écran et positionnez l'ordinateur sur deux livres placés de chaque côté ou sur deux supports de même type afin que l'air puisse circuler tout autour de l'ordinateur. Laissez sécher l'ordinateur pendant au moins 24 heures à température ambiante dans un endroit sec. AVIS : Ne recourez pas à un procédé artificiel, comme un sèche-cheveux ou un ventilateur, pour accélérer le séchage. PRÉCAUTION : Pour éviter un choc électrique, vérifiez que l'ordinateur est bien sec avant de continuer la procédure. 11 Raccordez-vous à la masse en touchant l'un des connecteurs en métal situés à l'arrière de l'ordinateur. 12 Replacez le(s) module(s) de mémoire, le capot et les vis du compartiment des modules de mémoire. 13 Remettez le disque dur en place. 14 Replacez les cartes PC que vous avez retirées. 15 Remettez la batterie en place. 16 Allumez l'ordinateur et vérifiez qu'il fonctionne correctement. REMARQUE : Pour plus d'informations sur votre garantie, reportez-vous à la page 127 ou au document de la garantie qui accompagne l'ordinateur. Si l'ordinateur ne démarre pas ou si vous ne parvenez pas à identifier les composants endommagés, contactez Dell (reportez-vous à la page 106).Résolution des problèmes 69 FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c70.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Si vous avez laissé tomber votre ordinateur ou s'il est endommagé 1 Enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers, quittez tous les programmes, puis arrêtez l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la page 36). 2 Débranchez l'adaptateur secteur de l'ordinateur et de la prise de courant. 3 Éteignez tous les périphériques externes reliés à l'ordinateur et débranchez-les de leur source d'alimentation, puis de l'ordinateur. 4 Enlevez et réinstallez la batterie. 5 Allumez l'ordinateur. REMARQUE : Pour plus d'informations sur votre garantie, reportez-vous à la page 127 ou au document de la garantie qui accompagne l'ordinateur. Si l'ordinateur ne démarre pas ou si vous ne pouvez pas identifier les composants endommagés, contactez Dell (reportez-vous à la page 106). Pilotes Qu'est-ce qu'un pilote ? Un pilote est un programme qui contrôle un périphérique, tel qu'une imprimante, une souris ou un clavier. Tous les périphériques requièrent un pilote. Un pilote sert d'interprète entre le périphérique et le programme qui l'utilise. Chaque périphérique utilise un ensemble de commandes spécialisées que seul son pilote reconnaît. De nombreux pilotes, comme le pilote de clavier, sont livrés avec le système d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows®. Vous pouvez avoir à installer des pilotes si vous : • mettez à jour votre système d'exploitation. • réinstallez votre système d'exploitation. • connectez ou installez un nouveau périphérique. Si vous avez un problème avec un périphérique, suivez les étapes décrites dans la section suivante pour identifier le pilote à l'origine du problème et pour le mettre à jour, le cas échéant. Identification des pilotes 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration. 2 Dans le Panneau de configuration, sous Choisissez une catégorie, cliquez sur Performances et maintenance. 3 Dans la fenêtre Performances et maintenance, cliquez sur Système. 4 Dans l'écran Propriétés du système, cliquez sur l'onglet Matériel. 5 Cliquez sur Gestionnaire de périphériques.70 Résolution des problèmes www.dell.com | support.dell.com FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c70.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT 6 Dans la fenêtre Gestionnaire de périphériques, faites défiler la liste vers le bas pour vérifier qu'il n'y a aucun point d'exclamation (cercle jaune avec un [!]) devant le périphérique, au niveau de son icône. Lorsqu'un point d'exclamation se trouve à côté du nom du périphérique, vous devez réinstaller le pilote ou en installer un nouveau. Réinstallation des pilotes AVIS : Le site Web de support de Dell et le CD Pilotes et utilitaires fournissent les pilotes appropriés pour les ordinateurs Dell™. Si vous installez des pilotes que vous avez obtenus par d'autres moyens, votre ordinateur risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement. Utilisation de la fonction Restauration des pilotes de périphériques de Windows XP Si un problème se produit sur votre ordinateur après l'installation ou la mise à jour d'un pilote, utilisez la fonction de Restauration des pilotes de périphériques de Windows XP pour remplacer le pilote par la version précédente installée. Pour utiliser la fonction Restauration des pilotes de périphériques : 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration. 2 Dans le Panneau de configuration, sous Choisir une catégorie, cliquez sur Performances et maintenance. 3 Dans la fenêtre Performances et maintenance, cliquez sur Système. 4 Dans l'écran Propriétés du système, cliquez sur l'onglet Matériel. 5 Cliquez sur Gestionnaire de périphériques. 6 Dans la fenêtre Gestionnaire de périphériques, cliquez avec le bouton droit sur le périphérique pour lequel le nouveau pilote a été installé, puis cliquez sur Propriétés. 7 Cliquez sur l'onglet Pilotes. 8 Cliquez sur Restauration des pilotes. Si la fonction Restauration des pilotes de périphériques ne résout pas le problème, utilisez la fonction Restauration du système (reportez-vous à la page 72) pour remettre votre système d'exploitation dans un état de fonctionnement antérieur à l'installation du nouveau pilote de périphérique. Utilisation du CD Pilotes et utilitaires Si l'utilisation de la fonction Restauration des pilotes de périphériques ou Restauration du système (reportez-vous à la page 72) ne permet pas de résoudre le problème, réinstallez le pilote à partir du CD Pilotes et Utilitaires. 1 Enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers et quittez tous les programmes. 2 Insérez le CD Pilotes et utilitaires. Dans la plupart des cas, le CD démarre automatiquement. Dans le cas contraire, démarrez Windows Explorer, cliquez sur le répertoire du lecteur de CD pour afficher le contenu du CD, puis double-cliquez sur le fichier autocd.exe. La première fois que vous exécutez le CD, il se Résolution des problèmes 71 FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c70.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT peut qu'il vous invite à installer des fichiers de configuration. Cliquez sur OK, et suivez les instructions pour continuer. 3 Dans le menu déroulant Langue de la barre d'outils, sélectionnez une langue pour le pilote ou l'utilitaire (si disponible). Un écran d'accueil s'affiche. 4 Cliquez sur Suivant. Le CD analyse automatiquement votre matériel et détecte les pilotes et les utilitaires employés par votre ordinateur. Une fois l'analyse du matériel terminée, vous pouvez détecter d'autres pilotes et utilitaires. Sous Critères de recherche, sélectionnez les catégories appropriées dans les menus déroulants Modèle de système, Système d'exploitation et Rubrique. Un ou plusieurs liens apparaissent pour le pilote et l'utilitaire spécifiques utilisés par votre ordinateur. 5 Cliquez sur le lien d'un pilote ou d'un utilitaire spécifique afin d'afficher les informations correspondantes. 6 Cliquez sur le bouton Installer (s'il est disponible) pour lancer l'installation du pilote ou de l'utilitaire. Dans l'écran d'accueil, suivez les invites pour terminer l'installation. Si aucun bouton Installer n'est disponible, une installation automatique n'est pas possible. Pour des instructions d'installation, reportez-vous aux sous-sections appropriées suivantes ou cliquez sur Extraire, suivez les instructions d'extraction et lisez le fichier Lisez-moi. S'il vous est demandé de trouver les fichiers de pilote, cliquez sur le répertoire du CD dans la fenêtre d'information sur le pilote pour afficher les fichiers associés à ce pilote. Réinstallation manuelle des pilotes pour Windows XP 1 Une fois les fichiers de pilote extraits vers votre disque dur, tel que décrit dans la section précédente, cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis cliquez avec le bouton droit sur Poste de travail. 2 Cliquez sur Propriétés. 3 Cliquez sur l'onglet Matériel, puis sur Gestionnaire de périphériques. 4 Double-cliquez sur le type du périphérique pour lequel vous êtes en train d'installer le pilote (par exemple, Modems ou Périphériques infrarouge). 5 Double-cliquez sur le nom du périphérique pour lequel vous installez le pilote. 6 Cliquez sur l'onglet Pilote, puis sur Mettre à jour le pilote. 7 Cliquez sur Installer à partir d'une liste ou d'un emplacement spécifique (Avancé), puis sur Suivant. 8 Cliquez sur Parcourir et allez à l'emplacement cible de l'extraction des fichiers de pilote. 9 Lorsque le nom du pilote approprié apparaît, cliquez sur Suivant. 10 Cliquez sur Terminer et redémarrez l'ordinateur.72 Résolution des problèmes www.dell.com | support.dell.com FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c70.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Résolution des incompatibilités logicielles et matérielles Si un périphérique n'est pas détecté pendant la configuration du système d'exploitation ou est détecté mais n'est pas configuré correctement, utilisez le Dépanneur des conflits matériels pour résoudre cette incompatibilité. Pour résoudre les problèmes d'incompatibilité à l'aide du Dépanneur des conflits matériels : 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Aide et support. 2 Entrez Dépanneur des conflits matériels dans le champ Rechercher, puis cliquez sur la flèche pour lancer la recherche. 3 Cliquez sur Dépanneur des conflits matériels dans la liste Résultats de la recherche. 4 Dans la liste Dépanneur des conflits matériels, cliquez sur Je dois résoudre un conflit matériel sur mon ordinateur, puis sur Suivant. Utilisation de la fonction Restauration du système Le système d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows® XP propose la fonction Restauration du système qui vous permet de restaurer l'ordinateur à un état antérieur (sans affecter les fichiers de données) si les modifications apportées au matériel, aux logiciels ou aux paramètres du système empêchent l'ordinateur de fonctionner correctement. Pour plus d'informations sur la Restauration du système, reportez-vous au Centre d'aide et de support. Pour accéder à l'aide, reportez-vous à la page 17. AVIS : Effectuez des sauvegardes régulières de vos fichiers de données. La fonction Restauration du système ne contrôle pas vos fichiers de données et ne permet pas de les récupérer. Création d'un point de restauration 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Aide et support. 2 Cliquez sur Restauration du système. 3 Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent. Restauration de l'ordinateur à un état antérieur Si des problèmes surviennent après l'installation d'un pilote de périphérique, utilisez la fonction Restauration des pilotes de périphériques (reportez-vous à la page 70) pour résoudre le problème. Si le problème persiste, utilisez la fonction Restauration du système. AVIS : Avant de restaurer l'ordinateur à un état antérieur, enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers et quittez les programmes. Ne modifiez, ouvrez ou supprimez pas des fichiers ou des programmes tant que la restauration du système n'est pas terminée. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Tous les programmes→ Accessoires→ Outils système, puis cliquez sur Restauration du système. 2 Assurez-vous que l'option Remettre mon ordinateur dans un état antérieur est sélectionnée, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 3 Cliquez sur une date du calendrier à laquelle vous souhaitez restaurer votre ordinateur.Résolution des problèmes 73 FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c70.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT L'écran Sélectionner un point de restauration affiche un calendrier vous permettant de sélectionner des points de restauration. Toutes les dates du calendrier comportant des points de restauration apparaissent en gras. 4 Sélectionnez un point de restauration, puis cliquez sur Suivant. Si une date du calendrier contient un seul point de restauration, ce dernier est sélectionné automatiquement. Si plusieurs points de restauration sont disponibles, cliquez sur celui que vous souhaitez utiliser. 5 Cliquez sur Suivant. L'écran Restauration complète apparaît une fois que la fonction Restauration du système termine la collecte de données et l'ordinateur redémarre. 6 Une fois l'ordinateur redémarré, cliquez sur OK. Pour changer de point de restauration, répétez les étapes précédentes en utilisant un autre point de restauration ou annulez la restauration. Annulation de la dernière restauration du système AVIS : Avant de procéder à l'annulation de la dernière restauration système, sauvegardez et fermez tous les fichiers et quittez tous les programmes. Ne modifiez, ouvrez ou supprimez pas des fichiers ou des programmes tant que la restauration du système n'est pas terminée. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Tous les programmes→ Accessoires→ Outils système, puis cliquez sur Restauration système. 2 Cliquez sur Annuler ma dernière restauration puis sur Suivant. 3 Cliquez sur Suivant. L'écran Restauration du système apparaît et l'ordinateur redémarre. 4 Une fois l'ordinateur redémarré, cliquez sur OK. Activation de Restauration du système Si vous réinstallez Windows XP avec moins de 200 Mo d'espace disponible sur le disque dur, la fonction Restauration du système est automatiquement désactivée. Pour vérifier que la Restauration du système est activée : 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration. 2 Cliquez sur Performances et maintenance. 3 Cliquez sur Système. 4 Cliquez sur l'onglet Restauration du système. 5 Assurez-vous que l'option Désactiver la Restauration du système n'est pas cochée.74 Résolution des problèmes www.dell.com | support.dell.com FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c70.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Réinstallation de Microsoft® Windows® XP Avant la réinstallation Si vous réinstallez le système d'exploitation Windows XP pour corriger un problème lié à un pilote nouvellement installé, utilisez la fonction Restauration des pilotes de périphériques de Windows XP (reportez-vous à la page 70) pour remplacer le pilote de périphérique par la version précédemment installée. Si la fonction Restauration des pilotes de périphériques ne résout pas le problème, utilisez la fonction Restauration du système (reportez-vous à la page 72) pour remettre votre système d'exploitation à l'état de fonctionnement antérieur à l'installation du nouveau pilote de périphérique. Réinstallation de Windows XP Pour réinstaller Windows XP, suivez les étapes décrites dans les sections suivantes en respectant l'ordre dans lequel elles sont répertoriées. Le processus de réinstallation peut prendre 1 à 2 heures. Une fois la réinstallation terminée, vous devrez réinstaller les pilotes de périphériques, le programme de protection antivirus et les autres logiciels. AVIS : Le CD du système d'exploitation fournit des options permettant de réinstaller Windows XP. Ces options peuvent remplacer des fichiers installés et affecter les programmes installés sur le disque dur. Par conséquent, ne réinstallez pas Windows XP à moins qu'un membre de l'équipe du support technique de Dell ne vous le demande. AVIS : Pour éviter des conflits avec Windows XP, vous devez désactiver tout logiciel de protection antivirus installé sur l'ordinateur avant de réinstaller Windows XP. Pour obtenir des instructions, consultez la documentation fournie avec le logiciel. Amorçage à partir du CD du système d'exploitation 1 Insérez le CD du système d'exploitation. 2 Quittez tout programme ou utilitaire pouvant être exécuté après l'insertion du CD. 3 Arrêtez (reportez-vous à la page 36) et redémarrez l'ordinateur. 4 Lorsque le logo DELL™ apparaît, appuyez immédiatement sur . Si le logo du système d'exploitation s'affiche, attendez l'apparition du bureau Windows, arrêtez l'ordinateur et recommencez. 5 Utilisez les touches de direction pour sélectionner l'option CD-ROM, puis appuyez sur . 6 Appuyez sur une touche lorsque le message Appuyez sur une touche pour démarrer depuis le CD apparaît. Installation de Windows XP 1 Lorsque l'écran Installation de Windows XP apparaît, appuyez sur pour sélectionner Pour installer Windows maintenant.Résolution des problèmes 75 FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c70.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT 2 Lisez les informations de l'écran Contrat de licence Microsoft Windows, puis appuyez sur la touche pour accepter le contrat de licence. 3 Si Windows XP est déjà installé et que vous voulez récupérer vos données Windows XP actuelles, tapez r pour sélectionner l'option de réparation, puis retirez le CD du lecteur. 4 Si vous souhaitez installer une nouvelle copie de Windows XP, appuyez sur <Échap> pour poursuivre l'installation. 5 Appuyez sur pour sélectionner la partition en surbrillance (recommandé), puis suivez les instructions à l'écran. REMARQUE : Le temps nécessaire pour exécuter le programme d'installation dépend de la taille du disque dur et de la vitesse de votre ordinateur. L'écran Installation de Windows XP s'affiche et le système d'exploitation commence à copier les fichiers et à installer les périphériques. L'ordinateur redémarre plusieurs fois. Achèvement de l'installation de l'interface graphique utilisateur AVIS : Lorsque l'ordinateur redémarre, n'appuyez sur aucune touche quand le message suivant s'affiche : Appuyez sur n'importe quelle touche pour amorcer à partir du CD. 1 Lorsque l'écran Options régionales et linguistiques s'affiche, sélectionnez les paramètres de votre région, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 2 Entrez votre nom et organisme (facultatif) dans l'écran Personnalisez votre logiciel et cliquez sur Suivant. 3 Si vous réinstallez Windows XP Édition Familiale, entrez un nom pour votre ordinateur lorsque la fenêtre Nom de l'ordinateur apparaît (ou acceptez le nom proposé), puis cliquez sur Suivant. Si vous réinstallez Windows XP Professionnel, entrez un nom pour votre ordinateur (ou acceptez le nom proposé) ainsi qu'un mot de passe lorsque la fenêtre Nom de l'ordinateur et mot de passe Administrateur s'affiche, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 4 Si votre ordinateur est équipé d'un modem, entrez les informations demandées et cliquez sur Suivant lorsque l'écran Informations de numérotation pour le modem s'affiche. 5 Entrez la date, l'heure et le fuseau horaire dans la fenêtre Réglage de la date et de l'heure, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 6 Si votre ordinateur est équipé d'une carte réseau, sélectionnez Typique dans l'écran Paramètres de gestion de réseau, puis cliquez sur Suivant. Si votre ordinateur n'a pas de carte réseau, cette option n'apparaît pas. 7 Si vous réinstallez Windows XP Professionnel, vous serez peut-être invité à fournir des informations supplémentaires concernant la configuration réseau, comme le nom du domaine ou le nom du groupe de travail. Si vous n'êtes pas sûr de vos paramètres, acceptez les paramètres par défaut. Windows XP installe les composants du système d'exploitation, configure et redémarre l'ordinateur.76 Résolution des problèmes www.dell.com | support.dell.com FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c70.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Achèvement de l'installation du système d'exploitation AVIS : Lorsque l'ordinateur redémarre, n'appuyez sur aucune touche quand le message suivant s'affiche : Appuyez sur n'importe quelle touche pour amorcer à partir du CD. 1 Lorsque l'écran Bienvenue dans Microsoft s'affiche, cliquez sur Suivant. 2 Lorsque le message Comment cet ordinateur sera-t-il connecté à Internet ? apparaît, cliquez sur Ignorer. 3 Lorsque le message Prêt à vous enregistrer auprès de Microsoft ? apparaît, sélectionnez Non, pas cette fois-ci et cliquez sur Suivant. Lorsque le message Qui va utiliser cet ordinateur ? apparaît, vous pouvez entrer jusqu'à cinq utilisateurs. 4 Cliquez sur Suivant. 5 Cliquez sur Terminer pour achever l'installation et retirez le CD du lecteur. Réinstallation des pilotes et des logiciels 1 Réinstallez les pilotes appropriés (reportez-vous à la page 70). 2 Réinstallez votre logiciel de protection antivirus. Pour obtenir des instructions, consultez la documentation fournie avec le logiciel. 3 Réinstallez vos autres logiciels. Pour obtenir des instructions, consultez la documentation fournie avec le logiciel.FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c80.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Ajout et remplacement de pièces 77 Ajout et remplacement de pièces Avant de commencer Cette section fournit les instructions de retrait et d'installation des composants de votre ordinateur. À moins d'indication contraire, les conditions suivantes doivent être remplies préalablement à chaque procédure : • Vous avez suivi les étapes indiquées dans la section «Mise hors tension de votre ordinateur». • Vous avez lu les consignes de sécurité figurant au début du présent document (reportez-vous à la page 9). Outils recommandés Les procédures mentionnées dans ce guide nécessitent les outils suivants : • un petit tournevis à lame plate • un tournevis cruciforme • une petite pointe en plastique • une disquette ou un CD pour le programme de mise à jour du Flash BIOS Mise hors tension de votre ordinateur Utilisez les consignes de sécurité suivantes pour protéger votre ordinateur contre des défaillances potentielles et pour assurer votre sécurité personnelle. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de suivre les procédures indiquées dans cette section, appliquez les consignes de sécurité indiquées au début de ce guide (reportez-vous à la page 9). AVIS : Seul un technicien de service certifié doit effectuer les réparations sur votre ordinateur. Les dommages causés par une personne non agréée par Dell ne sont pas couverts par votre garantie. PRÉCAUTION : Manipulez les composants et les cartes avec précaution. Ne touchez pas les composants ou les contacts d'une carte. Tenez les cartes par leurs bords ou par leur patte de montage métallique. Tenez les composants, tel que les processeurs, par leurs bords et non par leurs broches. AVIS : Lorsque vous débranchez un câble, tirez sur le connecteur ou sur la boucle prévue, mais jamais sur le câble lui-même. Certains câbles sont munis d'un connecteur à languettes verrouillables ; si vous déconnectez un câble de ce type, appuyez vers l'intérieur sur les languettes verrouillables avant de déconnecter le câble. Quand vous séparez les connecteurs en tirant dessus, veillez à les maintenir alignés pour ne pas plier leurs broches. De même, lorsque vous connectez un câble, assurez-vous que les deux connecteurs sont bien orientés et alignés. AVIS : Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur, suivez les étapes ci-dessous pour éviter de l'endommager. 78 Ajout et remplacement de pièces www.dell.com | support.dell.com FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c80.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT 1 Assurez-vous que la surface de travail est plane et propre afin d'éviter de rayer le capot de l'ordinateur. 2 Éteignez l'ordinateur. 3 Vérifiez que l'ordinateur et ses périphériques sont éteints. Si l'ordinateur et ses périphériques ne se sont pas éteints automatiquement lorsque vous avez arrêté l'ordinateur, appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation et maintenez-le enfoncé pendant 4 secondes. 4 Si l'ordinateur est connecté (amarré) à une station d'accueil, déconnectez-le. Pour obtenir des instructions, reportez-vous à la documentation fournie avec la station d'accueil. AVIS : Pour déconnecter un câble de réseau, débranchez d'abord le câble de votre ordinateur, puis de la prise réseau murale. 5 Débranchez tous les fils de téléphone ou de télécommunication de l'ordinateur. 6 Déconnectez l'ordinateur et tous ses périphériques de leurs prises électriques, puis appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation pour mettre la carte système à la masse. AVIS : Pour connecter un câble de réseau, branchez d'abord le câble sur la prise réseau murale, puis sur l'ordinateur. 7 Retirez toutes les cartes PC installées de leur logement. 8 Fermez l'écran, retournez l'ordinateur et placez-le sur une surface plane. AVIS : Pour éviter d'endommager la carte système, veillez à retirer la batterie principale avant de réparer l'ordinateur. 9 Faites glisser et maintenez le loquet de la baie des batteries, situé sur le dessous de l'ordinateur, puis retirez la batterie. 10 Retirez tous les modules installés. 11 Retirez le disque dur. Disque dur REMARQUE : Le CD Système d'exploitation est requis pour installer le système d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows®. Vous avez également besoin du CD Pilotes et utilitaires pour installer les pilotes et les utilitaires sur le nouveau disque dur. PRÉCAUTION : Si vous enlevez le disque dur lorsqu'il est chaud, ne touchez pas son habitacle en métal. AVIS : Pour éviter de perdre des données, arrêtez l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la page 36) avant de retirer le disque dur. Ne retirez jamais le disque dur lorsque l'ordinateur est allumé, en mode Veille ou Mise en veille prolongée. AVIS : Les disques durs sont très fragiles ; même un léger choc peut les endommager. REMARQUE : Dell ne garantit ni la compatibilité ni la prise en charge des disques durs provenant d'autres sources.Ajout et remplacement de pièces 79 FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c80.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Pour remettre le disque dur dans sa baie : 1 Suivez les instructions de la section «Avant de commencer» à la page 77. 2 Retournez votre ordinateur et retirez les vis du disque dur. AVIS : Lorsque le disque dur n'est pas dans l'ordinateur, conservez-le dans son emballage protecteur antistatique. Voir «SÉCURITÉ : Protection contre les décharges électrostatiques» à la page 12. 3 Faites glisser le disque dur hors de l'ordinateur. 4 Enlevez le nouveau disque de son emballage. Conservez cet emballage d'origine pour l'utiliser à nouveau lors du stockage ou de l'expédition du disque dur. AVIS : Faites glisser le disque dans son logement en exerçant une pression ferme et uniforme. Si vous exercez une pression trop forte sur le disque pour le mettre en place, vous risquez d'endommager le connecteur. 5 Appuyez sur le disque dur pour le placer dans la baie jusqu'à ce qu'il y soit complètement enfoncé. 6 Remettez et serrez les vis. 7 Utilisez le CD Système d'exploitation pour installer le système d'exploitation sur votre ordinateur (reportez-vous à la page 74). 8 Utilisez le CD Pilotes et utilitaires pour installer les pilotes et les utilitaires sur votre ordinateur (reportez-vous à la page 70). vis (2) disque dur80 Ajout et remplacement de pièces www.dell.com | support.dell.com FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c80.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Retour d'un disque dur à Dell Pour retourner votre ancien disque dur à Dell, placez-le dans son emballage d'origine ou dans un emballage similaire. Faute de quoi il risque d'être endommagé en transit. Mémoire Vous pouvez augmenter la mémoire de votre ordinateur en installant des modules de mémoire sur la carte système. Pour plus d'informations sur le type de mémoire pris en charge par votre ordinateur, reportez-vous à la page 92. Veillez à n'ajouter que des modules conçus spécifiquement pour votre ordinateur. 1 Effectuez les étapes indiquées dans la section «Avant de commencer» à la page 77. 2 Retournez l'ordinateur, dévissez les vis imperdables du capot du module de mémoire, puis retirez le capot. unité de disque dur emballage en plastiqueAjout et remplacement de pièces 81 FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c80.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT REMARQUE : Les modules de mémoire achetés auprès de Dell sont couverts par la garantie de votre ordinateur. 3 Si vous remplacez un module de mémoire, retirez le module déjà installé : a Avec précaution, écartez du bout des doigts les pinces de fixation situées à chaque extrémité du connecteur du module mémoire, jusqu'à ce qu'il se dégage. b Retirez le module du connecteur. vis imperdable cache du module de mémoire pinces de fixation module de mémoire82 Ajout et remplacement de pièces www.dell.com | support.dell.com FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c80.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT 4 Mettez-vous à la masse et installez le nouveau module de mémoire: REMARQUE : Si le module de mémoire n'est pas installé correctement, l'ordinateur ne démarre pas. Aucun message d'erreur ne vous avertit de cet échec. a Alignez l'encoche du bord du module avec la languette située au centre du connecteur. b Faites glisser fermement le module dans l'emplacement suivant un angle de 45 degrés, puis faites-le pivoter vers le bas jusqu'à ce que vous entendiez un clic. S'il ne s'enclenche pas, retirez le module et réinstallez-le. 5 Remettez le capot en place. AVIS : Si vous avez des difficultés à fermer le capot, retirez le module et réinstallez-le. Ne forcez pas la fermeture du capot ; vous risqueriez d'endommager votre ordinateur. 6 Insérez la batterie dans sa baie ou connectez l'adaptateur secteur à votre ordinateur et à une prise électrique. 7 Allumez l'ordinateur. Lors du démarrage, l'ordinateur détecte la mémoire supplémentaire et met automatiquement à jour les informations de configuration du système. Pour vérifier la quantité de mémoire installée, cliquez sur Démarrer, puis sur Aide et support et ensuite sur Informations sur l'ordinateur. Modem et carte Mini PCI 1 Suivez les instructions de la section «Avant de commencer» à la page 77. 2 Retournez l'ordinateur, dévissez les vis imperdables du capot du module de mémoire, puis retirez le capot.Ajout et remplacement de pièces 83 FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c80.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT 3 Passez à la section appropriée : • Pour ajouter un modem, consultez la section suivante, «Remplacement du modem». • Pour ajouter une carte Mini PCI, reportez-vous à la page 84. Remplacement du modem 1 Retirez le modem installé : a Retirez les vis de fixation du modem à la carte système et mettez-les de côté. b Tirez verticalement sur la languette rattachée pour soulever le modem hors de son connecteur sur la carte système et déconnectez le câble du modem. vis imperdable capot de carte Mini PCI/modem84 Ajout et remplacement de pièces www.dell.com | support.dell.com FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c80.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT 2 Connectez le câble du modem au nouveau modem. AVIS : Les connecteurs sont conçus pour éviter une mauvaise insertion ; ne les forcez jamais. 3 Alignez le modem par rapport aux trous des vis et, en appuyant dessus, insérez le modem dans le connecteur situé sur la carte système. 4 Installez les vis pour fixer le modem à la carte système. 5 Remettez le capot en place. Ajout d'une carte Mini PCI PRÉCAUTION : La réglementation de la FCC interdit strictement aux utilisateurs d'installer des cartes Mini PCI de réseau local sans fil 5 GHz (802.11a, 802.11a/b, 802.11a/b/g). Les utilisateurs ne doivent en aucun cas installer ces cartes. Seul un technicien Dell est autorisé à les installer. Pour retirer et/ou installer une carte Mini PCI 2,4 GHz (802.11b, 802.11b/g), suivez les instructions cidessous. Seuls les produits approuvés pour une utilisation sur votre portable peuvent être installés. Les cartes Mini PCI homologuées ne peuvent être achetées qu'auprès de Dell. REMARQUE : L'utilisateur peut retirer et installer les cartes PC LAN sans fil 2,4 GHz. connecteur du câble de modem câble du modem languette de retrait vis (2)Ajout et remplacement de pièces 85 FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c80.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Si vous avez commandé une carte Mini PCI avec votre ordinateur, la carte est déjà installée. 1 Si aucune carte Mini PCI n'est installée, passez à l'étape 2. Si vous remplacez une carte Mini PCI, retirez la carte existante : a Déconnectez les câbles reliés à la carte Mini PCI. b Libérez la carte Mini PCI en écartant les pattes de fixation métalliques jusqu'à ce que la carte se soulève légèrement. c Retirez la carte Mini PCI du connecteur. AVIS : Pour éviter d'endommager la carte Mini PCI, ne placez jamais de câbles au-dessus ou en dessous de la carte. AVIS : Les connecteurs sont prévus pour une insertion correcte. Si vous sentez une résistance, vérifiez les connecteurs et réalignez la carte. carte Mini PCI connecteur de carte Mini PCI câbles d'antenne (2) languettes de fixation en métal (2)86 Ajout et remplacement de pièces www.dell.com | support.dell.com FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c80.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT 2 Alignez la nouvelle carte Mini PCI sur le connecteur suivant un angle de 45 degrés et appuyez sur la carte pour l'insérer dans le connecteur. Vous entendrez un déclic. 3 Connectez les câbles d'antenne à la carte Mini PCI. 4 Remettez le capot en place. Lecteur de CD ou DVD 1 Suivez les instructions de la section «Avant de commencer» à la page 77. 2 Retournez l'ordinateur, dévissez les vis imperdables du capot du module de mémoire, puis retirez le capot. carte Mini PCI connecteur de carte Mini PCI câbles d'antenne (2)Ajout et remplacement de pièces 87 FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c80.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT 3 Retirez la vis «O» située à côté du cache du module de mémoire. 4 Pour libérer le lecteur, appuyez dans la direction de la flèche (vers le lecteur), sur le levier situé à côté des connecteurs du module de mémoire. 5 Retirez le lecteur de la baie. vis imperdable cache du module de mémoire vis levier lecteur de CD ou de DVD88 Ajout et remplacement de pièces www.dell.com | support.dell.com FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c80.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT 6 Faites glisser le nouveau lecteur dans la baie jusqu'à ce qu'il y soit complètement enfoncé. 7 Remettez la vis que vous avez enlevée au cours de l'étape 3. 8 Remettez le capot du cache et serrez la vis. Clavier 1 Suivez les instructions de la section «Avant de commencer» à la page 77. 2 Utilisez un tournevis à lame plate ou une pointe en plastique pour soulever le côté droit avec encoches du capot, puis détachez le capot des charnières et du boîtier inférieur. 3 Soulevez soigneusement le capot pour l'écarter des charnières et du compartiment. 4 Retirez les quatre vis du clavier. AVIS : Les couvertures des touches du clavier sont fragiles, facilement délogées et leur remise en place exige beaucoup de temps. Faites particulièrement attention au cours du retrait et de la manipulation du clavier. 5 Soulevez le clavier hors du compartiment et déposez-le sur les charnières de l'écran afin d'exposer le connecteur du clavier. 6 Tirez sur le connecteur du clavier pour le déconnecter du connecteur d'interface sur la carte système. capotAjout et remplacement de pièces 89 FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c80.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT 7 Retirez le clavier du compartiment. AVIS : Pour éviter d'endommager les broches du connecteur, insérez le connecteur de clavier dans le connecteur d'interface en appuyant uniformément sur le connecteur de clavier ; assurez-vous de ne pas inverser le connecteur de clavier. 8 Connectez le connecteur de clavier du clavier de remplacement au connecteur d'interface sur la carte système. connecteur d'interface connecteur de clavier vis du clavier (4) clavier90 Ajout et remplacement de pièces www.dell.com | support.dell.com FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c80.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT 9 Insérez les quatre languettes de fixation du clavier dans leurs emplacements respectifs du repose-mains, puis placez le clavier dans le compartiment. Assurez-vous que les quatre languettes de fixation sont engagées avant de fixer le clavier. 10 Remettez les quatre vis du clavier. 11 Remettez en place le capot. connecteur d'interface connecteur de clavier vis du clavier (4) clavier languettes de fixation (4)FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c90.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Annexe 91 Annexe Caractéristiques REMARQUE : Afin de respecter les exigences de refroidissement du système et/ou d'alimentation, les fonctionnalités de gestion de l'alimentation limitent la vitesse du processeur lorsque l'ordinateur est alimenté par la batterie. Microprocesseur Microprocesseur processeur mobile Intel® Pentium® 4 ou Intel Celeron® Mémoire cache L1 8 Ko (interne) Mémoire cache L2 512 Ko (Intel Pentium 4) ; 128 Ko (Intel Celeron) Fréquence du bus externe 400/533 MHz Informations sur le système Jeu de puces du système Intel 852GMV Largeur du bus de données 64 bits Largeur du bus de la mémoire DRAM 64 bits Largeur du bus d'adresses du microprocesseur 32 bits Carte PC Contrôleur du bus de carte TI PCI1510 Connecteur de carte PC prise en charge d'une carte de Type I ou II Cartes prises en charge 3,3 V et 5 V Taille du connecteur de carte PC 68 broches Largeur de données (maximale) PCMCIA 16 bits CardBus 32 bits92 Annexe www.dell.com | support.dell.com FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c90.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Mémoire Connecteur du module de mémoire supports SODIMM accessibles à 2 utilisateurs Capacités du module de mémoire 64, 128, 256 et 512 Mo Type de mémoire SODIMM 2,5 V Mémoire standard 128 Mo Mémoire maximale 1 Go Temps d'accès à la mémoire : vitesse d'horloge 266 MHz Ports et connecteurs Vidéo connecteur à 15 trous Audio connecteur de microphone, connecteur de casque/haut-parleurs stéréo USB (2) deux connecteurs à 4 broches conformes à la norme USB 2.0 Modem connecteur RJ-11 LAN Ethernet connecteur RJ-45 (en option dans certains pays) Communications Modem : Type v.92 56K MDC Contrôleur softmodem Interface Bus AC ’97 interne Carte réseau Ethernet 10/100 sur la carte systèmeAnnexe 93 FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c90.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Vidéo Type de vidéo graphisme intégré AGP direct Interface hôte graphisme intégré AGP direct Contrôleur vidéo Intel UMA intégré Mémoire vidéo 1 Mo avec Intel DVMT jusqu'à 32 Mo (avec 128 Mo de mémoire système) ou 64 Mo (avec 256 Mo ou plus de mémoire système) Interface LCD SPWG-B Audio Type d'audio AC’97 (soft audio) Contrôleur audio Sigmatel 9750 Conversion stéréo 18 bits (analogique à numérique) et 20 bits (numérique à analogique) Interfaces : Interne PCI bus /AC’97 Externe connecteur de microphone (entrée), connecteur de casque/de haut-parleurs stéréo Haut-parleurs deux haut-parleurs 8 ohm Amplificateur de haut-parleurs internes canal de 1,0 W en 8 ohms Commandes de volume raccourcis clavier ou menus de programme94 Annexe www.dell.com | support.dell.com FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c90.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Écran Type (matrice active TFT) XGA Dimensions : 14,1 pouces ou 15 pouces Hauteur : 14,1 pouces 15 pouces 214,3 mm (8,4 pouces) 228,1 mm (8,99 pouces) Largeur : 14,1 pouces 15 pouces 285,7 mm (11,2 pouces) 304,1 mm (11,97 pouces) Diagonale : 14,1 pouces 15 pouces 359,16 mm (14,1 pouces) 382,4 mm (15,1 pouces) Résolutions maximales 1024 x 768 avec 16,8 millions de couleurs Temps de réponse (standard) en montée 20 ms (maximum) ; en descente 30 ms (maximum) Taux de rafraîchissement 60 Hz Angle de fonctionnement 0° (refermé) à 180° Angles de visualisation : Horizontal ±40° Vertical +10°/–30° Taille du pixel 0,28 x 0,28 mm Consommation électrique : Panneau avec contre-jour (standard) 5,2 W Boutons de réglage possibilité de réglage de la luminosité à l'aide de raccourcis clavierAnnexe 95 FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c90.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Clavier Nombre de touches 85 (États-Unis et Canada) ; 86 (Europe) ; 90 (Japon) Déplacement des touches 2,7 mm ± 0,3 (0,11 pouce ± 0,016 pouce) Espacement des touches 19,05 mm 0,3 mm (0,75 pouce ± 0,012 pouce) Disposition QWERTY/AZERTY/Kanji Tablette tactile Résolution X/Y (mode Tablette graphique) 240 cpi Taille : Largeur zone sensible de 64,88 mm (2,55 pouces) Hauteur rectangle de 48,88 mm (1,92 pouce) Batterie (8 cellules) Type batterie «intelligente» au lithium-ion active de 8 cellules (65WHr) Dimensions : Profondeur 122,5 mm (4,8 pouces) Hauteur 19,2 mm (0,76 pouce) Largeur 147,5 mm (5,8 pouces) Poids 0,470 kg (1,03 livre) Tension 14,8 VCC Capacité 4300 mAH Durée de fonctionnement peut être considérablement réduite en cas d'utilisation intensive Pour plus d'informations sur la vie d'une batterie, reportez-vous à la page 37. Durée de vie approximative 300 cycles de décharge/charge0 Plage de températures : Charge/Décharge 0° à 35° C (32° à 95° F) Stockage –40° à 65° C (–40° à 149° F)96 Annexe www.dell.com | support.dell.com FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c90.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Batterie (12 cellules) Type «Intelligente» au lithium-ion, 12 cellules (96 Wh) Dimensions : Profondeur 122,5 mm (4,8 pouces) Hauteur 19,2 mm (0,76 pouce) Largeur 147,5 mm (5,8 pouces) Poids 0,615 kg (1,35 livre) Tension 14,8 VCC Capacité 6450 mAH Durée de fonctionnement peut être considérablement réduite en cas d'utilisation intensive Pour plus d'informations sur la vie d'une batterie, reportez-vous à la page 37. Durée de vie approximative 300 cycles de décharge/charge0 Plage de températures : Charge/Décharge 0° à 35° C (32° à 95° F) Stockage –40° à 65° C (–40° à 149° F) Adaptateur secteur Tension d'entrée 100 à 240 VCA Courant d'entrée (maximal) 1,5 A Fréquence d'entrée 50 à 60 Hz Courant de sortie 5,62 A (maximum à impulsions de 4 secondes) ; 4,62 A (en continu) Alimentation de sortie 90 W standard Tension de sortie nominale 19,5 VCC Dimensions : Hauteur 34,2 mm (1,35 pouce) Largeur 60,9 mm (2,4 pouces) Profondeur 153,4 mm (6,04 pouces) Poids (avec les câbles) 0,46 kg (1,0 livre)Annexe 97 FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c90.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Plage de températures : Fonctionnement 0° à 35° C (32° à 95° F) Stockage –40° à 65° C (–40° à 149° F) Caractéristiques physiques Hauteur Écran de 14,1 pouces 44,5–47,95 mm (1,75 –1,89 pouce) Écran de 15 pouces 46,5–48,3 mm (1,83 –1,90 pouce) Largeur Écran de 14,1 pouces 329 mm (12,9 pouces) Écran de 15 pouces 335 mm (13,1 pouces) Profondeur Écran de 14,1 pouces 275 mm (10,8 pouces) Écran de 15 pouces 275 mm (10,8 pouces) Poids : Avec lecteur de CD, batterie à 8 cellules et écran de 14,1 pouces 3,3 kg (7,17 livres) Avec lecteur de CD, batterie à 12 cellules et écran de 14,1 pouces 3,4 kg (7,57 livres) Avec lecteur de CD, batterie à 8 cellules et écran de 15 pouces 3,5 kg (7,66 livres) Avec lecteur de CD, batterie à 12 cellules et écran de 15 pouces 3,7 kg (8,07 livres) Environnement Plage de températures : Fonctionnement 0° à 35° C (32° à 95° F) Stockage –40° à 65° C (–40° à 149° F) Humidité relative (maximale) : Fonctionnement 10 % à 90 % (sans condensation) Stockage 5 % à 95 % (sans condensation) Adaptateur secteur98 Annexe www.dell.com | support.dell.com FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c90.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Utilisation du programme de configuration du système Présentation REMARQUE : Il se peut que votre système d'exploitation configure automatiquement la plupart des options disponibles dans le programme de configuration ; les options que vous avez configurées à l'aide de ce programme sont alors ignorées. Reportez-vous au Centre d'aide et de support pour des informations sur les options de configuration du système d'exploitation. Pour accéder à l'aide, reportezvous à la page 17. Les écrans de configuration du système affichent les informations sur l'installation courante et les paramètres de votre ordinateur, par exemple : • Configuration du système • Séquence d'initialisation • Paramètres de configuration de l'initialisation (démarrage) et de la station d'accueil • Paramètres de configuration de base des périphériques • Réglages de sécurité du système et mot de passe de disque dur AVIS : Ne modifiez les paramètres du programme de configuration du système que si vous êtes un utilisateur expérimenté ou si vous êtes assisté par un représentant du support technique de Dell. Certaines modifications risquent d'altérer le fonctionnement de votre ordinateur. Affichage des écrans de configuration du système 1 Allumez (ou redémarrez) l'ordinateur. 2 Lorsque le logo DELL™ apparaît, appuyez immédiatement sur . Si vous attendez trop longtemps et que le logo Windows apparaît, attendez encore jusqu'à ce que le bureau Windows s'affiche. Éteignez alors votre ordinateur (reportez-vous à la page 36) et faites une nouvelle tentative. Vibrations maximales : Fonctionnement 0,6 GRMS Stockage 1,3 GRMS Résistance maximale aux chocs (mesurée avec la tête de lecture du disque dur en position de repos et une demi-impulsion sinusoïdale de 2 ms) : Fonctionnement 122 G Stockage 163 G Altitude (maximale) : Fonctionnement –15,2 à 3048 m (–50 à 10 000 pieds) Stockage –15,2 à 10 668 m (–50 à 35 000 pieds) Environnement (Suite)Annexe 99 FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c90.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Écrans de configuration du système REMARQUE : Pour afficher des informations sur un élément spécifique d'un écran du programme d'installation du système, mettez l'élément en surbrillance et consultez la zone d'Aide à l'écran. Les options de configuration du système sont répertoriées dans la partie gauche de l'écran. À droite de chaque option figure la valeur ou le paramètre sélectionné pour cette option. Vous pouvez modifier les paramètres qui apparaissent en blanc à l'écran. Les options ou les valeurs que vous ne pouvez pas modifier (car elles sont déterminées par l'ordinateur) sont estompées. Dans le coin supérieur droit de l'écran figurent des informations d'aide pour l'option actuellement sélectionnée ; dans le coin inférieur droit figurent des informations relatives à l'ordinateur. Les fonctions des touches de configuration du système apparaissent au bas de l'écran. Options les plus communément utilisées Certaines options nécessitent le redémarrage de l'ordinateur pour que les nouveaux paramètres entrent en vigueur. Modification de la séquence d'initialisation La séquence d'initialisation, ou ordre de démarrage, indique à l'ordinateur où trouver le logiciel requis pour démarrer le système d'exploitation. Vous pouvez contrôler la séquence d'initialisation et activer/désactiver les périphériques à l'aide de la page Séquence d'initialisation du programme d'installation du système. REMARQUE : Pour ne modifier la séquence d'initialisation qu'une seule fois, reportez-vous à la page 100. Cette page affiche la liste des périphériques amorçables pouvant être installés sur l'ordinateur, par exemple : • Lecteur de disquette • Disque dur de la baie modulaire • Unité de disque dur interne • Lecteur CD/DVD/CD-RW Pendant la procédure d'initialisation, l'ordinateur commence par le début de la liste, puis analyse chacun des périphériques activés à la recherche des fichiers de démarrage du système d'exploitation. Une fois les fichiers trouvés, l'ordinateur arrête la recherche et démarre le système d'exploitation. Pour définir les périphériques d'amorçage, sélectionnez (mettez en surbrillance) un périphérique en appuyant sur les touches de direction Haut ou Bas, puis activez ou désactivez le périphérique ou modifiez son ordre dans la liste. • Pour activer ou désactiver un périphérique, sélectionnez-le. Les éléments activés sont affichés en blanc avec un petit triangle à leur gauche ; les éléments désactivés sont affichés en bleu ou estompés et sans triangle. • Appuyez sur la touche fléchée gauche ou droite pour modifier l'option. • Pour modifier la position d'un périphérique dans la liste, mettez-le en surbrillance et appuyez sur () ou ()(pas de différence entre majuscules et minuscules) pour le déplacer vers le haut ou vers le bas.100 Annexe www.dell.com | support.dell.com FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c90.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Les modifications que vous apportez à la séquence d'amorçage sont prises en compte dès que vous les enregistrez et que vous quittez le programme d'installation du système. Exécution d'une initialisation ponctuelle Vous pouvez définir une séquence d'amorçage ponctuelle sans devoir passer par le programme d'installation du système. (Vous pouvez également utiliser cette procédure pour initialiser Dell Diagnostics sur la partition de l'utilitaire de diagnostics de votre disque dur.) 1 Éteignez l'ordinateur. 2 Si l'ordinateur est connecté (amarré) à une station d'accueil, déconnectez-le. Pour obtenir des instructions, reportez-vous à la documentation fournie avec la station d'accueil. 3 Connectez l'ordinateur à une prise électrique. 4 Allumez l'ordinateur. Lorsque le logo DELL apparaît, appuyez immédiatement sur . Si vous attendez trop longtemps et que le logo Windows apparaît, attendez encore jusqu'à ce que le bureau Windows s'affiche. Éteignez alors votre ordinateur et faites une nouvelle tentative. 5 Lorsque la liste des dispositifs d'initialisation apparaît, sélectionnez celui que vous voulez utiliser pour l'initialisation, puis appuyez sur . L'ordinateur démarre à partir du périphérique sélectionné. Lors du prochain redémarrage de l'ordinateur, la séquence d'initialisation précédente sera restaurée. Optimiser les performances du système et de la batterie Présentation des performances du système Pour prévenir la fermeture automatique du système et une éventuelle perte de données, les performances du système peuvent être réduites dans des conditions particulières. Ces conditions comprennent les cas suivants : LE PROCESSEUR DEVIENT TROP CHAUD — Les performances sont réduites lorsque la température du processeur excède les paramètres thermiques établis. Cette réduction des performances régule la température du système et de la surface, ce qui prévient la fermeture de l'ordinateur qu'entraîneraient des températures de processeur excessives. CAPACITÉ D E L'ADAPTATEUR SECTEUR — Les performances sont réduites lorsque l'ordinateur fonctionne sur courant alternatif et que la consommation d'énergie excède les paramètres établis de l'adaptateur secteur. Grâce à cette réduction des performances, le système ne tente pas de consommer plus d'énergie que l'adaptateur secteur ne peut fournir. CAPACITÉ D E L A BATTERIE — Les performances sont réduites lorsque l'ordinateur fonctionne à l'aide de la batterie et que la consommation d'énergie excède la capacité nominale de la batterie ou les niveaux de décharge permis, ou encore lorsque la température de la surface de la batterie excède 60° C. Optimisation de la consommation d'énergie et durée de charge de la batterie L'adaptateur secteur charge une batterie complètement déchargée en 3 heures environ, si l'ordinateur est éteint. Le temps nécessaire pour charger la batterie est sensiblement accru lorsque l'ordinateur est sous tension et fonctionne à des vitesses de processeur et des niveaux d'activité élevés. Si vous utilisez votre ordinateur dans de telles conditions et que la batterie ne se charge pas, faites fonctionner votre ordinateur en mode Faible consommation.Annexe 101 FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c90.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT L'activation de ce mode peut réduire le temps de chargement de la batterie et peut également augmenter sa durée de vie. En fonction des niveaux d'activité du système, il se peut que les performances du système soient réduites. Pour définir le mode Faible consommation : REMARQUE : Vous pouvez également cliquer sur l'icône de la jauge d'alimentation de la barre des tâches. 1 Cliquez sur Démarrer → Panneau de configuration→ Performances et maintenance→ Options d'alimentation. 2 Cliquez sur l'onglet Modes de gestion de l'alimentation. 3 Dans le menu déroulant Modes de gestion de l'alimentation, cliquez sur Mode faible consommation. Pour plus d'informations sur la gestion de l'information, consultez le fichier d'aide de Dell Latitude 100L. Pour accéder au fichier d'aide, reportez-vous à la page 16. Ventilateur à vitesse variable Un ventilateur interne permet d'éviter la surchauffe des composants de l'ordinateur. Le ventilateur fonctionne en permanence et sa vitesse peut varier selon l'utilisation. Il se peut que le ventilateur fasse du bruit cela est tout à fait normal et ne signifie pas que le ventilateur ou l'ordinateur est défectueux. Obtention d'aide Assistance technique Si vous avez besoin d'aide pour un problème technique, Dell se tient à votre disposition pour vous fournir l'assistance adéquate. PRÉCAUTION : Si vous devez retirer les capots de l'ordinateur, déconnectez d'abord de leurs prises les câbles d'alimentation de l'ordinateur et du modem. 1 Exécutez les procédures décrites dans la section «Résolution des problèmes» à la page 59. 2 Exécutez «Dell Diagnostics» à la page 59 3 Effectuez une copie de la Liste de vérification des diagnostics et renseignez-la. 4 Utilisez la gamme complète de services en ligne de Dell disponibles sur le site Web Dell Support (support.dell.com) pour obtenir de l'aide sur les procédures d'installation et de dépannage. 5 Si les étapes précédentes ne vous ont pas permis de résoudre le problème, contactez Dell. REMARQUE : Appelez le support technique à partir d'un téléphone situé à proximité de l'ordinateur afin que le technicien vous guide pendant la procédure de dépannage. REMARQUE : Il se peut que le code de service express des systèmes Dell ne soit pas disponible dans votre pays. Lorsque le système téléphonique automatisé de Dell vous le demande, entrez votre code de service express pour que votre appel soit directement acheminé vers l'équipe de support technique appropriée. Si vous ne disposez pas de code de service express, ouvrez le dossier Accessoires Dell, double-cliquez sur l'icône Code de service Express et suivez les instructions.102 Annexe www.dell.com | support.dell.com FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c90.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Pour obtenir des instructions sur l'utilisation du service de support technique, reportez-vous à la section «Service de support technique». REMARQUE : Certains des services suivants ne sont pas toujours disponibles en dehors des États-Unis. Veuillez contacter votre représentant Dell local pour obtenir des informations sur leur disponibilité. Services en ligne Vous pouvez accéder au site du service de support de Dell à l'adresse support.dell.com. Sélectionnez votre région sur la page WELCOME TO DELL SUPPORT (Bienvenue au service de support de Dell) et entrez les détails requis pour accéder aux outils d'aide et aux informations. Vous pouvez contacter Dell aux adresses suivantes : • World Wide Web www.dell.com/ www.dell.com/ap/ (région Asie/Pacifique uniquement) www.dell.com/jp (Japon uniquement) www.euro.dell.com (Europe uniquement) www.dell.com/la/ (pays d'Amérique Latine) www.dell.ca (Canada uniquement) • Par FTP anonyme ftp.dell.com/ Connectez-vous en tant qu'utilisateur : anonyme, puis utilisez votre adresse électronique comme mot de passe. • Service électronique de support mobile_support@us.dell.com support@us.dell.com apsupport@dell.com (pays d'Asie et du Pacifique uniquement) support.jp.dell.com (Japon uniquement) support.euro.dell.com (Europe uniquement) • Service électronique de devis sales@dell.com apmarketing@dell.com (pays d'Asie et du Pacifique uniquement) sales_canada@dell.com (Canada uniquement) • Service électronique d'informations info@dell.com Service AutoTech Le service de support technique automatisé de Dell — AutoTech — fournit des réponses préenregistrées aux questions les plus fréquentes que les clients de Dell ont au sujet de leurs ordinateurs portables ou de bureau.Annexe 103 FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c90.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Quand vous appelez AutoTech, vous utiliserez les touches de votre téléphone à tonalités pour choisir les sujets qui correspondent à vos questions. Le service AutoTech est disponible 24 heures sur 24, 7 jours sur 7. Vous pouvez aussi accéder à ce service via le service de support technique. Pour obtenir le numéro de téléphone, consultez les numéros de contact pour votre région. Service d'état des commandes automatisé Pour vérifier l'état de vos commandes de produits Dell™, vous pouvez visiter le site Web support.dell.com ou appeler le service d'état des commandes automatisé. Un enregistrement vous demande les informations nécessaires pour repérer votre commande et en faire un rapport. Pour obtenir le numéro de téléphone, consultez les numéros de contact pour votre région. Service de support technique Le service de support technique de Dell est disponible 24 heures sur 24 et 7 jours sur 7, pour répondre à vos questions concernant le matériel Dell. Nos employés de support technique utilisent des diagnostics sur ordinateur pour fournir rapidement des réponses exactes. Pour contacter le service de support technique de Dell, reportez-vous à la section «Assistance technique», puis composez le numéro correspondant à votre pays comme indiqué dans la section «Contacter Dell». Problèmes liés à votre commande Si vous avez un problème avec votre commande, par exemple des pièces manquantes, des pièces qui ne conviennent pas ou une facturation erronée, appelez le service clientèle de Dell. Gardez votre facture ou votre bordereau d'expédition à portée de main lorsque vous appelez. Pour obtenir le numéro de téléphone, consultez les numéros de contact pour votre région. Informations sur les produits Si vous avez besoin d'informations à propos d'autres produits disponibles chez Dell, ou si vous désirez passer une commande, consultez le site Web de Dell à l'adresse www.dell.com. Pour obtenir le numéro à composer afin de consulter un spécialiste des ventes, reportez-vous à la liste des numéros de contact pour votre région. Renvoi d'articles pour une réparation sous garantie ou un avoir Préparez de la manière suivante tous les articles à renvoyer, que ce soit pour une réparation ou un avoir : 1 Appelez Dell pour obtenir un numéro d'autorisation de retour de matériel et écrivez-le lisiblement et bien en vue sur l'extérieur de l'emballage. Pour obtenir le numéro de téléphone, consultez les numéros de contact pour votre région. 2 Joignez une copie de votre facture et une lettre décrivant les raisons du renvoi. 3 Fournissez une copie de la Liste de vérification des diagnostics indiquant les tests que vous avez exécutés et les messages d'erreur affichés par Dell Diagnostics. 4 Joignez tous les accessoires qui doivent accompagner le ou les articles renvoyés (câbles d'alimentation, disquettes de logiciels, guides, etc.) si le retour est à porter en crédit. 5 Renvoyez le matériel dans son emballage d'origine (ou équivalent).104 Annexe www.dell.com | support.dell.com FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c90.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Les frais d'envoi sont à votre charge. Vous devez aussi assurer les produits renvoyés et assumer les risques de perte en cours d'expédition. Les envois en contre-remboursement ne sont pas acceptés. Les retours ne comportant pas les éléments décrits ci-dessus seront refusés à notre quai de réception et vous seront retournés. Avant d'appeler REMARQUE : Ayez votre code de service Express à portée de main quand vous appelez. Ce code permet au système d'assistance téléphonique automatisé de Dell de diriger votre appel plus efficacement. N'oubliez pas de remplir la Liste de vérification des diagnostics. Si possible, allumez votre ordinateur avant de contacter Dell pour obtenir une assistance technique, et appelez d'un téléphone qui se trouve à proximité de votre ordinateur. Il peut vous être demandé de taper certaines commandes au clavier, de donner des informations détaillées sur le fonctionnement de l'ordinateur ou d'essayer d'autres méthodes de dépannage uniquement possibles sur ce dernier. Assurez-vous que la documentation de l'ordinateur est disponible. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de travailler à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur, lisez les instructions de la section concernant la sécurité de votre Manuel du propriétaire.Annexe 105 FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c90.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Liste de vérification des diagnostics Nom : Date : Adresse : Numéro de téléphone : Code de maintenance (code à barres à l'arrière de l'ordinateur) : Code de service express : Numéro d'autorisation de retour du matériel (s'il vous a été fourni par le support technique de Dell) : Système d'exploitation et version : Périphériques : Cartes d'extension : Êtes-vous connecté à un réseau ? Oui Non Réseau, version et carte réseau : Programmes et versions : Reportez-vous à la documentation de votre système d'exploitation pour déterminer le contenu des fichiers de démarrage du système. Si l'ordinateur est relié à une imprimante, imprimez chaque fichier. Sinon, notez le contenu de chaque fichier avant d'appeler Dell. Message d'erreur, code sonore ou code de diagnostic : Description du problème et procédures de dépannage que vous avez réalisées :106 Annexe www.dell.com | support.dell.com FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c90.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Contacter Dell Vous pouvez contacter Dell par des moyens électroniques via les sites Web suivants : • www.dell.com • support.dell.com (support technique) • premiersupport.dell.com (support technique pour les établissements d'enseignement et gouvernementaux, le domaine de la santé et les grands comptes comprenant les clients Premier, Platinum et Gold) Pour les adresses Internet de votre pays, recherchez la section appropriée du pays dans le tableau ci-dessous. REMARQUE : Les numéros verts sont valables dans le pays pour lequel ils sont renseignés. Si vous devez contacter Dell, utilisez les adresses électroniques, les numéros de téléphone et les indicatifs fournis dans le tableau ci-dessous. Si vous avez besoin d'assistance pour connaître les indicatifs à utiliser, contactez un opérateur local ou international. Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse Messagerie électronique Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros verts Afrique du Sud (Johannesburg) Indicatif international : 09/091 Indicatif national : 27 Indicatif de la ville : 11 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Courriel : dell_za_support@dell.com Support technique 011 709 7710 Service clientèle 011 709 7707 Ventes 011 709 7700 Télécopieur 011 706 0495 Standard 011 709 7700 Allemagne (Langen) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 49 Indicatif de la ville : 6103 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Courriel : tech_support_central_europe@dell.com Support technique 06103 766-7200 Service clientèle pour le grand public et les PME 0180-5-224400 Service clientèle segment International 06103 766-9570 Service clientèle comptes privilégiés 06103 766-9420 Service clientèle grands comptes 06103 766-9560 Service clientèle comptes publics 06103 766-9555 Standard 06103 766-7000Annexe 107 FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c90.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Amérique Latine Support technique clients (Austin, Texas, ÉtatsUnis) 512 728-4093 Service clientèle (Austin, Texas, États-Unis) 512 728-3619 Télécopieur (Support technique et Service clientèle) (Austin, Texas, États-Unis) 512 728-3883 Ventes (Austin, Texas, États-Unis) 512 728-4397 Télécopieur pour les ventes (Austin, Texas, ÉtatsUnis) 512 728-4600 ou 512 728-3772 Anguilla Support général numéro vert : 800-335-0031 Antigua-e-Barbuda Support général 1-800-805-5924 Antilles néerlandaises Support général 001-800-882-1519 Argentine (Buenos Aires) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 54 Indicatif de la ville : 11 Site Web : www.dell.com.ar Support technique et Service clientèle numéro vert : 0-800-444-0733 Ventes 0-810-444-3355 Télécopieur pour Support technique 11 4515 7139 Télécopieur pour Service clientèle 11 4515 7138 Aruba Support général numéro vert : 800-1578 Australie (Sydney) Indicatif international : 0011 Indicatif national : 61 Indicatif de la ville : 2 Courriel (Australie) : au_tech_support@dell.com Courriel (Nouvelle-Zélande) : nz_tech_support@dell.com Grand public et PME 1-300-65-55-33 Gouvernement et entreprises numéro vert : 1-800-633-559 Division des comptes privilégiés numéro vert : 1-800-060-889 Service clientèle numéro vert : 1-800-819-339 Ventes aux grandes entreprises numéro vert : 1-800-808-385 Ventes aux particuliers numéro vert : 1-800-808-312 Télécopieur numéro vert : 1-800-818-341 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse Messagerie électronique Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros verts108 Annexe www.dell.com | support.dell.com FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c90.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Autriche (Vienne) Indicatif international : 900 Indicatif national : 43 Indicatif de la ville : 1 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Courriel : tech_support_central_europe@dell.com Ventes aux grand public et PME 0820 240 530 00 Télécopieur pour le grand public et les PME 0820 240 530 49 Service clientèle pour le grand public et les PME 0820 240 530 14 Service clientèle Comptes privilégiés/Entreprises 0820 240 530 16 Support technique pour le grand public et les PME 0820 240 530 14 Support technique Comptes privilégiés/Entreprises 0660 8779 Standard 0820 240 530 00 Bahamas Support général numéro vert : 1-866-278-6818 Belgique (Bruxelles) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 32 Indicatif de la ville : 2 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Courriel : tech_be@dell.com Courriel pour les clients francophones : support.euro.dell.com/be/fr/emaildell/ Support technique 02 481 92 88 Service clientèle 02 481 91 19 Ventes aux grandes entreprises 02 481 91 00 Télécopieur 02 481 92 99 Standard 02 481 91 00 Bermudes Support général 1-800-342-0671 Bolivie Support général numéro vert : 800-10-0238 Brésil Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 55 Indicatif de la ville : 51 Site Web : www.dell.com/br Service clientèle, Support technique 0800 90 3355 Télécopieur pour Support technique 51 481 5470 Télécopieur pour Service clientèle 51 481 5480 Ventes 0800 90 3390 Brunei Indicatif national : 673 Support technique clients (Penang, Malaisie) 604 633 4966 Service clientèle (Penang, Malaisie) 604 633 4949 Ventes aux particuliers (Penang, Malaisie) 604 633 4955 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse Messagerie électronique Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros vertsAnnexe 109 FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c90.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Canada (North York, Ontario) Indicatif international : 011 État des commandes en ligne : www.dell.ca/ostatus AutoTech (Support technique automatisé) numéro vert : 1-800-247-9362 TechFax numéro vert : 1-800-950-1329 Service clientèle (grand public et PME) numéro vert : 1-800-847-4096 Service clientèle (grands comptes et gouvernement) numéro vert : 1-800-326-9463 Support technique (grand public et PME) numéro vert : 1-800-847-4096 Support technique (grands comptes et gouvernement) numéro vert : 1-800-387-5757 Ventes au grand public et aux PME numéro vert : 1-800-387-5752 Ventes (grands comptes et gouvernement) numéro vert : 1-800-387-5755 Vente de pièces et Vente de service étendu 1866 440 3355 Chili (Santiago) Indicatif national : 56 Indicatif de la ville : 2 Ventes, Service clientèle, Support technique numéro vert : 1230-020-4823 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse Messagerie électronique Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros verts110 Annexe www.dell.com | support.dell.com FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c90.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Chine (Xiamen) Indicatif national : 86 Indicatif de la ville : 592 Site Web pour Support technique : support.dell.com.cn Adresse électronique du Support technique : cn_support@dell.com Télécopieur pour Support technique 818 1350 Support technique (Dimension™ et Inspiron™) numéro vert : 800 858 2969 Support technique (OptiPlex™, Latitude™ et Dell Precision™) numéro vert : 800 858 0950 Support technique (serveurs et stockage) numéro vert : 800 858 0960 Support technique (projecteurs, PDA, imprimantes, commutateurs, routeurs, etc.) numéro vert : 800 858 2920 Commentaires clients numéro vert : 800 858 2060 Grand public et PME numéro vert : 800 858 2222 Division des comptes privilégiés numéro vert : 800 858 2557 Comptes grandes entreprises - GCP numéro vert : 800 858 2055 Comptes clés des grandes entreprises numéro vert : 800 858 2628 Comptes grandes entreprises - Nord numéro vert : 800 858 2999 Comptes grandes entreprises Administration et enseignement - Nord numéro vert : 800 858 2955 Comptes grandes entreprises - Est numéro vert : 800 858 2020 Comptes grandes entreprises Administration et enseignement - Est numéro vert : 800 858 2669 Comptes grandes entreprises Queue Team numéro vert : 800 858 2222 Comptes grandes entreprises - Sud numéro vert : 800 858 2355 Comptes grandes entreprises - Ouest numéro vert : 800 858 2811 Comptes grandes entreprises Pièces détachées numéro vert : 800 858 2621 Colombie Support général 980-9-15-3978 Corée (Séoul) Indicatif international : 001 Indicatif national : 82 Indicatif de la ville : 2 Support technique numéro vert : 080-200-3800 Ventes numéro vert : 080-200-3600 Service clientèle (Séoul, Corée) numéro vert : 080-200-3800 Service clientèle (Penang, Malaisie) 604 633 4949 Télécopieur 2194-6202 Standard 2194-6000 Costa Rica Support général 0800-012-0435 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse Messagerie électronique Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros vertsAnnexe 111 FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c90.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Danemark (Copenhague) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 45 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Support Courriel (ordinateurs portables) : den_nbk_support@dell.com Support Courriel (ordinateurs de bureau) : den_support@dell.com Support Courriel (serveurs) : Nordic_server_support@dell.com Support technique 7023 0182 Service clientèle (relations) 7023 0184 Service clientèle pour le grand public et les PME 3287 5505 Standard (relations) 3287 1200 Standard télécopieur (relations) 3287 1201 Standard (grand public et PME) 3287 5000 Télécopieur (grand public et PME) 3287 5001 Dominique Support général numéro vert : 1-866-278-6821 Équateur Support général numéro vert : 999-119 Espagne (Madrid) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 34 Indicatif de la ville : 91 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Courriel : support.euro.dell.com/es/es/emaildell/ Grand public et PME Support technique 902 100 130 Service clientèle 902 118 540 Ventes 902 118 541 Standard 902 118 541 Télécopieur 902 118 539 Grandes entreprises Support technique 902 100 130 Service clientèle 902 118 546 Standard 91 722 92 00 Télécopieur 91 722 95 83 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse Messagerie électronique Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros verts112 Annexe www.dell.com | support.dell.com FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c90.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT États-Unis (Austin, Texas) Indicatif international : 011 Indicatif national : 1 Service d'état des commandes automatisé numéro vert : 1-800-433-9014 AutoTech (ordinateurs portables et de bureau) numéro vert : 1-800-247-9362 Client (domicile et siège social) Support technique numéro vert : 1-800-624-9896 Service clientèle numéro vert : 1-800-624-9897 Support technique Dellnet™ numéro vert : 1-877-Dellnet (1-877-335-5638) Clients du programme d'achats par les employés (EPP) numéro vert : 1-800-695-8133 Site Web des services financiers : www.dellfinancialservices.com Services financiers (leasing/prêts) numéro vert : 1-877-577-3355 Services financiers (Comptes privilégiés Dell [DPA]) numéro vert : 1-800-283-2210 Secteur privé Service clientèle et Support technique numéro vert : 1-800-822-8965 Clients du programme d'achats par les employés (EPP) numéro vert : 1-800-695-8133 Support technique pour les imprimantes et les projecteurs numéro vert : 1-877-459-7298 Public (gouvernement, domaines Éducation et Santé) Service clientèle et Support technique numéro vert : 1-800-456-3355 Clients du programme d'achats par les employés (EPP) numéro vert : 1-800-234-1490 Ventes Dell numéro vert : 1-800-289-3355 ou numéro vert : 1-800-879- 3355 Points de vente Dell (ordinateurs Dell recyclés) numéro vert : 1-888-798-7561 Ventes de logiciels et de périphériques numéro vert : 1-800-671-3355 Ventes de pièces au détail numéro vert : 1-800-357-3355 Service étendu et ventes sous garantie numéro vert : 1-800-247-4618 Télécopieur numéro vert : 1-800-727-8320 Services Dell pour les sourds, les malentendants ou les personnes ayant des problèmes d'élocution numéro vert : 1-877-DELLTTY (1-877-335-5889) Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse Messagerie électronique Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros vertsAnnexe 113 FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c90.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Finlande (Helsinki) Indicatif international : 990 Indicatif national : 358 Indicatif de la ville : 9 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Courriel : fin_support@dell.com Support Courriel (serveurs) : Nordic_support@dell.com Support technique 09 253 313 60 Télécopieur pour Support technique 09 253 313 81 Suivi clientèle 09 253 313 38 Service clientèle pour le grand public et les PME 09 693 791 94 Télécopieur 09 253 313 99 Standard 09 253 313 00 France (Paris) (Montpellier) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 33 Indicatifs de la ville : (1)(4) Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Courriel :support.euro.dell.com/fr/fr/emaildell/ Grand public et PME Support technique 0825 387 270 Service clientèle 0825 823 833 Standard 0825 004 700 Standard (appels extérieurs à la France) 04 99 75 40 00 Ventes 0825 004 700 Télécopieur 0825 004 701 Fax (appels extérieurs à la France) 04 99 75 40 01 Grandes entreprises Support technique 0825 004 719 Service clientèle 0825 338 339 Standard 01 55 94 71 00 Ventes 01 55 94 71 00 Télécopieur 01 55 94 71 01 Grèce Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 30 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Courriel : support.euro.dell.com/gr/en/emaildell/ Support technique 080044149518 Support technique Gold 08844140083 Standard 2108129800 Ventes 2108129800 Télécopieur 2108129812 Grenade Support général numéro vert : 1-866-540-3355 Guatemala Support général 1-800-999-0136 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse Messagerie électronique Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros verts114 Annexe www.dell.com | support.dell.com FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c90.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Guyane Support général numéro vert : 1-877-270-4609 Hong Kong Indicatif international : 001 Indicatif national : 852 Site Web : support.ap.dell.com Courriel : ap_support@dell.com Support technique (Dimension™ et Inspiron™) 2969 3189 Support technique (OptiPlex™, Latitude™ et Dell Precision™) 2969 3191 Support technique (PowerApp™, PowerEdge™, PowerConnect™ et PowerVault™) 2969 3196 Support technique Gold Queue EEC 2969 3187 Défense clients 3416 0910 Comptes des grandes entreprises 3416 0907 Programmes clients internationaux 3416 0908 Division des moyennes entreprises 3416 0912 Division du grand public et des PME 2969 3105 Îles Turks et Caicos Support général numéro vert : 1-866-540-3355 Îles Vierges Britanniques Support général numéro vert : 1-866-278-6820 Îles Vierges (États-Unis) Support général 1-877-673-3355 Inde Support technique 1600 33 8045 Ventes 1600 33 8044 Irlande (Cherrywood) Indicatif international : 16 Indicatif national : 353 Indicatif de la ville : 1 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Courriel : dell_direct_support@dell.com Support technique 1850 543 543 Support technique pour le Royaume-Uni (interne au Royaume-Uni uniquement) 0870 908 0800 Service clientèle pour les particuliers 01 204 4014 Service clientèle pour les petites entreprises 01 204 4014 Service clientèle pour le Royaume-Uni (interne au Royaume-Uni uniquement) 0870 906 0010 Service clientèle pour les grandes entreprises 1850 200 982 Service clientèle pour les grandes entreprises (interne au Royaume-Uni uniquement) 0870 907 4499 Ventes pour l'Irlande 01 204 4444 Ventes pour le Royaume-Uni (interne au RoyaumeUni uniquement) 0870 907 4000 Télécopieur/Télécopieur pour les ventes 01 204 0103 Standard 01 204 4444 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse Messagerie électronique Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros vertsAnnexe 115 FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c90.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Italie (Milan) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 39 Indicatif de la ville : 02 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Courriel :support.euro.dell.com/it/it/emaildell/ Grand public et PME Support technique 02 577 826 90 Service clientèle 02 696 821 14 Télécopieur 02 696 821 13 Standard 02 696 821 12 Grandes entreprises Support technique 02 577 826 90 Service clientèle 02 577 825 55 Télécopieur 02 575 035 30 Standard 02 577 821 Jamaïque Support général (appel à partir de la Jamaïque uniquement) 1-800-682-3639 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse Messagerie électronique Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros verts116 Annexe www.dell.com | support.dell.com FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c90.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Japon (Kawasaki) Indicatif international : 001 Indicatif national : 81 Indicatif de la ville : 44 Site Web : support.jp.dell.com Support technique (serveurs) numéro vert : 0120-198-498 Support technique à l'extérieur du Japon (serveurs) 81-44-556-4162 Support technique (Dimension™ et Inspiron™) numéro vert : 0120-198-226 Support technique à l'extérieur du Japon (Dimension et Inspiron) 81-44-520-1435 Support technique (Dell Precision™, OptiPlex™ et Latitude™) numéro vert : 0120 -198 -433 Support technique à l'extérieur du Japon (Dell Precision, OptiPlex et Latitude) 81-44-556-3894 Support technique (Axim™) numéro vert : 0120-981-690 Support technique à l'extérieur du Japon (Axim) 81-44-556-3468 Service Faxbox 044-556-3490 Service de commandes automatisé 24 sur 24 044-556-3801 Service clientèle 044-556-4240 Division Ventes aux grandes entreprises (jusqu'à 400 salariés) 044-556-1465 Division Ventes aux comptes privilégiés (plus de 400 salariés) 044-556-3433 Ventes aux comptes grandes entreprises (plus de 3500 salariés) 044-556-3430 Ventes secteur public (agences gouvernementales, établissements d'enseignement et institutions médicales) 044-556-1469 Segment international - Japon 044-556-3469 Utilisateur individuel 044-556-1760 Standard 044-556-4300 La Barbade Support général 1-800-534-3066 Les Îles Caïmans Support général 1-800-805-7541 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse Messagerie électronique Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros vertsAnnexe 117 FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c90.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Luxembourg Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 352 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Courriel : tech_be@dell.com Support technique (Bruxelles, Belgique) 3420808075 Ventes au grand public et aux PME (Bruxelles, Belgique) numéro vert : 080016884 Ventes aux grandes entreprises (Bruxelles, Belgique) 02 481 91 00 Service clientèle (Bruxelles, Belgique) 02 481 91 19 Télécopieur (Bruxelles, Belgique) 02 481 92 99 Standard (Bruxelles, Belgique) 02 481 91 00 Macao Indicatif national : 853 Support technique numéro vert : 0800 582 Service clientèle (Penang, Malaisie) 604 633 4949 Ventes aux particuliers numéro vert : 0800 581 Malaisie (Penang) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 60 Indicatif de la ville : 4 Support technique (Dell Precision, OptiPlex et Latitude) numéro vert : 1 800 88 0193 Support technique (Dimension et Inspiron) numéro vert : 1 800 88 1306 Service clientèle 04 633 4949 Ventes aux particuliers numéro vert : 1 800 888 202 Ventes aux grandes entreprises numéro vert : 1 800 888 213 Mexique Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 52 Support technique clients 001-877-384-8979 ou 001-877-269-3383 Ventes 50-81-8800 ou 01-800-888-3355 Service clientèle 001-877-384-8979 ou 001-877-269-3383 Groupe principal 50-81-8800 ou 01-800-888-3355 Montserrat Support général numéro vert : 1-866-278-6822 Nicaragua Support général 001-800-220-1006 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse Messagerie électronique Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros verts118 Annexe www.dell.com | support.dell.com FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c90.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Norvège (Lysaker) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 47 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Support Courriel (ordinateurs portables) : nor_nbk_support@dell.com Support Courriel (ordinateurs de bureau) : nor_support@dell.com Support Courriel (serveurs) : nordic_server_support@dell.com Support technique 671 16882 Suivi clientèle 671 17514 Service clientèle pour le grand public et les PME 23162298 Standard 671 16800 Standard télécopieur 671 16865 Nouvelle-Zélande Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 64 Courriel (Nouvelle-Zélande) : nz_tech_support@dell.com Courriel (Australie) : au_tech_support@dell.com Grand public et PME 0800 446 255 Gouvernement et entreprises 0800 444 617 Ventes 0800 441 567 Télécopieur 0800 441 566 Panama Support général 001-800-507-0962 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse Messagerie électronique Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros vertsAnnexe 119 FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c90.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Pays-Bas (Amsterdam) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 31 Indicatif de la ville : 20 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Courriel (Support technique) : (Entreprise) : nl_server_support@dell.com (Latitude) : nl_latitude_support@dell.com (Inspiron) : nl_inspiron_support@dell.com (Dimension) : nl_dimension_support@dell.com (OptiPlex) : nl_optiplex_support@dell.com (Dell Precision) : nl_workstation_support@dell.com Support technique 020 674 45 00 Télécopieur pour Support technique 020 674 47 66 Service clientèle pour le grand public et les PME 020 674 42 00 Suivi clientèle 020 674 4325 Ventes aux grand public et PME 020 674 55 00 Relations ventes 020 674 50 00 Télécopieur Ventes au grand public et aux PME 020 674 47 75 Télécopieur pour les relations ventes 020 674 47 50 Standard 020 674 50 00 Télécopieur du standard 020 674 47 50 Pays du Pacifique et du Sud-est Asiatique Support technique clients, Service clientèle et Ventes (Penang, Malaisie) 604 633 4810 Pérou Support général 0800-50-669 Pologne (Varsovie) Indicatif international : 011 Indicatif national : 48 Indicatif de la ville : 22 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Courriel : pl_support_tech@dell.com Service clientèle (téléphone) 57 95 700 Service clientèle 57 95 999 Ventes 57 95 999 Service clientèle (télécopieur) 57 95 806 Réception (télécopieur) 57 95 998 Standard 57 95 999 Porto Rico Support général 1-800-805-7545 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse Messagerie électronique Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros verts120 Annexe www.dell.com | support.dell.com FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c90.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Portugal Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 351 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Courriel : support.euro.dell.com/pt/en/emaildell/ Support technique 707200149 Service clientèle 800 300413 Ventes 800 300 410 ou 800 300 411 ou 800 300 412 ou 21 422 07 10 Télécopieur 21 424 01 12 République Dominicaine Support général 1-800-148-0530 République Tchèque (Prague) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 420 Indicatif de la ville : 2 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Courriel : czech_dell@dell.com Support technique 02 2186 27 27 Service clientèle 02 2186 27 11 Télécopieur 02 2186 27 14 TechFax 02 2186 27 28 Standard 02 2186 27 11 Royaume-Uni (Bracknell) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 44 Indicatif de la ville : 1344 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Site Web du Service clientèle : support.euro.dell.com/uk/en/ECare/Form/Home.asp Courriel : dell_direct_support@dell.com Support technique (Entreprises/Comptes privilégiés/Division Comptes privilégiés [plus de 1000 salariés]) 0870 908 0500 Support technique (direct/Division Comptes privilégiés et général) 0870 908 0800 Service clientèle Comptes internationaux 01344 373 186 Service clientèle pour le grand public et les PME 0870 906 0010 Service clientèle pour les grandes entreprises 01344 373 185 Service clientèle pour les comptes privilégiés (500–5000 employés) 0870 906 0010 Service clientèle Gouvernement central 01344 373 193 Service clientèle Gouvernement local et Enseignement 01344 373 199 Service clientèle (Santé) 01344 373 194 Ventes au grand public et aux PME 0870 907 4000 Ventes aux grandes entreprises/secteur public 01344 860 456 Télécopieur pour le grand public et les PME 0870 907 4006 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse Messagerie électronique Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros vertsAnnexe 121 FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c90.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT St- Kitts-et-Nevis Support général numéro vert : 1-877-441-4731 St- Lucie Support général 1-800-882-1521 St- Vincent-et-Grenadines Support général numéro vert : 1-877-270-4609 Salvador Support général 01-899-753-0777 Singapour (Singapour) Indicatif international : 005 Indicatif national : 65 Support technique numéro vert : 800 6011 051 Service clientèle (Penang, Malaisie) 604 633 4949 Ventes aux particuliers numéro vert : 800 6011 054 Ventes aux grandes entreprises numéro vert : 800 6011 053 Suède (Upplands Vasby) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 46 Indicatif de la ville : 8 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Courriel : swe_support@dell.com Support Courriel pour Latitude et Inspiron : Swe-nbk_kats@dell.com Support Courriel pour OptiPlex : Swe_kats@dell.com Support Courriel pour les serveurs : Nordic_server_support@dell.com Support technique 08 590 05 199 Suivi clientèle 08 590 05 642 Service clientèle pour le grand public et les PME 08 587 70 527 Support du programme d'achats par les employés (EPP, Employee Purchase Program) 20 140 14 44 Support technique par télécopieur 08 590 05 594 Ventes 08 590 05 185 Suisse (Genève) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 41 Indicatif de la ville : 22 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Courriel : swisstech@dell.com Courriel pour les clients francophones (grand public et PME, et entreprises) : support.euro.dell.com/ch/fr/emaildell/ Support technique (grand public et PME) 0844 811 411 Support technique (entreprises) 0844 822 844 Service clientèle (grand public et PME) 0848 802 202 Service clientèle (entreprises) 0848 821 721 Télécopieur 022 799 01 90 Standard 022 799 01 01 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse Messagerie électronique Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros verts122 Annexe www.dell.com | support.dell.com FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c90.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Taïwan Indicatif international : 002 Indicatif national : 886 Support technique (ordinateurs portables et de bureau) numéro vert : 00801 86 1011 Support technique (serveurs) numéro vert : 0080 60 1256 Ventes aux particuliers numéro vert : 0080 651 228 Ventes aux grandes entreprises numéro vert : 0080 651 227 Thaïlande Indicatif international : 001 Indicatif national : 66 Support technique numéro vert : 0880 060 07 Service clientèle (Penang, Malaisie) 604 633 4949 Ventes numéro vert : 0880 060 09 Trinité/Tobago Support général 1-800-805-8035 Uruguay Support général numéro vert : 000-413-598-2521 Venezuela Support général 8001-3605 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse Messagerie électronique Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros vertsAnnexe 123 FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c90.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Réglementations Une interférence électromagnétique (EMI, Electromagnetic Interference) est un signal ou une émission, véhiculé dans l'espace libre ou par des conducteurs électriques ou de signaux, qui peut gravement perturber le fonctionnement de la radionavigation ou d'autres services de sécurité, ou sérieusement dégrader, obstruer ou interrompre à maintes reprises un service de communications radio autorisé. Les services de communications radio incluent, de manière non limitative, les services de radiodiffusion commerciale AM/FM, la télévision, les services de téléphonie cellulaire, la radiodétection, le contrôle de la circulation aérienne, les récepteurs de radio messagerie et les systèmes GSM. Ces services autorisés, ainsi que les éléments rayonnants parasites involontaires, tels que les dispositifs numériques, y compris les ordinateurs, contribuent à l'environnement électromagnétique. La compatibilité électromagnétique est la capacité des éléments d'un équipement électronique à interagir correctement dans l'environnement électronique. Bien que cet ordinateur ait été conçu dans le respect de cette compatibilité et respecte les seuils fixés en matière d'interférences électromagnétiques par l'organisme de réglementation, aucune garantie n'est offerte concernant les interférences susceptibles de se produire s'il est utilisé pour une installation particulière. Si l'équipement crée effectivement des interférences entrant en conflit avec des services de communications radio (ce qui peut être déterminé en l'éteignant et en l'allumant), l'utilisateur est encouragé à essayer de corriger ce phénomène en prenant l'une ou l'ensemble des mesures suivantes : • Changer l'orientation de l'antenne de réception. • Repositionner l'ordinateur en fonction du récepteur. • Éloigner l'ordinateur du récepteur. • Brancher l'ordinateur sur une autre prise pour faire en sorte que l'ordinateur et le récepteur se trouvent sur différents circuits de dérivation. Si nécessaire, consulter un membre de l'équipe du support technique de Dell ou un technicien radio/télévision expérimenté pour des suggestions supplémentaires. Pour obtenir des informations supplémentaires sur les réglementations, consultez le fichier d'aide de Dell Latitude 100L qui accompagne votre ordinateur. Pour accéder au fichier d'aide, reportez-vous à la page 16. Accord de licence logicielle Dell Le présent document est un accord légal entre vous, l'utilisateur et Dell Products, L.P («Dell»). Cet accord recouvre tous les logiciels distribués avec le produit Dell, pour lesquels il n'existe aucun accord de licence distinct entre vous et le fabricant ou propriétaire du logiciel (collectivement dénommés le «Logiciel»). Cet accord ne s'applique pas à la vente de Logiciel ou de toute autre propriété intellectuelle. Tous les droits sur les titres et la propriété intellectuelle concernant le Logiciel appartiennent au fabricant ou au propriétaire du Logiciel. Tous les droits non expressément accordés dans le cadre de cet accord sont réservés par le fabricant ou le propriétaire du logiciel. Le fait d'ouvrir ou de desceller le(s) coffret(s) de logiciel, d'installer ou de télécharger le Logiciel, ou d'utiliser le Logiciel qui a été préchargé ou qui est incorporé dans votre produit, témoigne que vous acceptez d'être lié par les termes de cet accord. Si vous n'acceptez pas ces termes, retournez sans délai tous les composants du Logiciel (disques, documents imprimés et emballage) et supprimez tout le Logiciel préchargé ou incorporé. Vous avez le droit d'utiliser une seule copie du Logiciel sur un seul ordinateur à la fois. Si vous disposez de plusieurs licences pour le Logiciel, vous avez le droit d'utiliser simultanément autant de copies que vous détenez de licences. Le terme «Utiliser» signifie charger le Logiciel en mémoire temporaire ou dans le stockage permanent sur l'ordinateur. L'installation sur un serveur de réseau à des fins de distribution à d'autres ordinateurs ne constitue pas une «utilisation», à moins que vous ne déteniez une licence distincte pour chaque ordinateur auquel le logiciel sera distribué (et uniquement dans ce cas). Il vous incombe de vous assurer que le nombre de personnes utilisant le Logiciel installé sur un serveur de réseau n'excède pas le nombre de licences en votre possession. Si le nombre d'utilisateurs du Logiciel installé sur un serveur de réseau excède le nombre de licences, avant même de permettre à des utilisateurs démunis de licence d'utiliser le Logiciel, vous devez acheter assez de licences supplémentaires pour que le nombre de licences soit égal au nombre d'utilisateurs. Si vous êtes un client commercial de Dell ou d'une filiale de Dell, par la présente vous accordez à Dell ou à un agent sélectionné par Dell le droit d'effectuer un audit de votre utilisation du Logiciel au cours 124 Annexe www.dell.com | support.dell.com FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c90.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT des heures de bureau régulières, vous acceptez de coopérer avec Dell au cours d'un tel audit et vous vous engagez à fournir à Dell tous les documents raisonnablement associés à votre utilisation du Logiciel. L'audit sera limité à la vérification du respect des termes de cet accord. Le Logiciel est protégé par les lois sur le copyright en vigueur aux États-Unis et par des traités internationaux. Vous avez le droit de créer une copie du Logiciel uniquement à des fins de sauvegarde ou d'archivage ou de le transférer sur un seul disque dur, à condition que vous ne vous conserviez la copie d'origine qu'à des fins de sauvegarde ou d'archivage. Vous n'avez pas le droit de louer ou de donner en location (leasing) le Logiciel ou de copier le matériel imprimé qui accompagne le Logiciel mais vous avez le droit de transférer de façon permanente le Logiciel et tous les éléments qui l'accompagnent dans le cadre d'une vente ou d'un transfert du produit Dell si vous ne conservez aucune copie et que le bénéficiaire s'engage à respecter les termes du présent accord. Tout transfert doit inclure la mise à jour la plus récente et toutes les versions précédentes. Il est interdit de décompiler ou désassembler le Logiciel ou de procéder à une rétroconception de celui-ci. Si le paquet fourni avec votre ordinateur contient des disques, 3,5 po et/ou 5,25 po, vous ne pouvez utiliser que les disques appropriés à votre ordinateur. Vous n'avez pas le droit d'utiliser les disques sur un autre ordinateur ou réseau. Vous n'avez également pas le droit de les prêter, louer, donner en leasing ou de les transférer à un autre utilisateur, sauf dans la mesure où de telles actions sont autorisées par cet accord. GARANTIE LIMITÉE Dell garantit que, dans le cadre d'une utilisation normale, les disques du Logiciel seront sans défaut ni vice de fabrication pendant quatre-vingt-dix (90) jours à dater de la réception de ceux-ci. Cette garantie n'est valable que pour vous et n'est pas transférable. Toute garantie implicite est limitée à une période de quatre-vingt-dix (90) jours à dater de la réception du Logiciel. Certaines juridictions ne reconnaissent pas de restrictions de durée des garanties implicites ; cette restriction peut donc ne pas s'appliquer à vous. La responsabilité totale de Dell et de ses fournisseurs, et votre seul remède, est limitée au (a) remboursement du prix payé pour le Logiciel ou au (b) remplacement de tout disque non conforme à cette garantie, disque que vous aurez retourné à Dell accompagné d'un numéro d'autorisation, à vos frais et à vos propres risques. Cette garantie limitée ne couvre pas les dommages dus à un accident, un abus, une mauvaise utilisation, une manipulation ou une modification incorrecte effectuée par une personne autre qu'un représentant de Dell. Les disques de remplacement sont couverts par la garantie pour la période restante de la garantie d'origine ou pendant trente (30) jours. Dell ne garantit PAS que les fonctions du Logiciel répondront à vos attentes ni que le fonctionnement du Logiciel sera ininterrompu ou sans erreur. Vous assumez la responsabilité pour avoir choisi le Logiciel afin de parvenir aux résultats souhaités ainsi que la responsabilité pour l'utilisation et les résultats obtenus du Logiciel. AGISSANT POUR SON COMPTE ET POUR CELUI DE SES FOURNISSEURS, DELL REJETTE TOUTE AUTRE GARANTIE OU CONDITION EXPRESSE OU IMPLICITE, INCLUANT SANS RESTRICTION LES GARANTIES ET CONDITIONS IMPLICITES DE QUALITÉ MARCHANDE OU D'ADAPTABILITÉ À UN USAGE PARTICULIER, S'APPLIQUANT AU LOGICIEL ET À TOUS LES DOCUMENTS IMPRIMÉS L'ACCOMPAGNANT. Cette garantie limitée vous donne des droits spécifiques ; vous pouvez également avoir d'autres droits, qui varient de juridiction à juridiction. DELL OU SES FOURNISSEURS NE SERONT EN AUCUN CAS RESPONSABLES DES DOMMAGES QUELS QU'ILS SOIENT (NOTAMMENT, MAIS SANS AUCUNE LIMITATION, DES DOMMAGES CONSISTANT EN UNE PERTE DE BÉNÉFICES, UNE INTERRUPTION DES AFFAIRES, UNE PERTE D'INFORMATIONS OU TOUTE PERTE DE FONDS) ENTRAÎNÉS PAR L'UTILISATION OU L'IMPOSSIBILITÉ D'UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL, MÊME SI DELL A ÉTÉ AVERTIE DE LA POSSIBILITÉ DE TELS DOMMAGES. Certains ressorts n'autorisent pas l'exclusion ou la limitation des dommages accidentels ou induits ; l'exclusion ou la limitation qui précède peut donc ne pas s'appliquer à vous. DROITS LIMITÉS DU GOUVERNEMENT DES ÉTATS-UNIS Le logiciel et la documentation sont des «commercial items (articles commerciaux)» selon la définition de ce terme qui figure dans la section 48 C.F.R. 2.101, composés de «commercial computer software (logiciel informatique commercial)» et de «commercial computer software documentation (documentation informatique commerciale)» selon la définition de ces termes qui figure dans la section 48 C.F.R. 12.212. En conformité avec les sections 48 C.F.R. 12.212 et 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 à 227.7202-4, tous les utilisateurs finals du Gouvernement des États-Unis acquièrent le logiciel et la documentation uniquement avec les droits définis dans ces documents. Le contractant/fabricant est Dell Products, L.P., One Dell Way, Round Rock, Texas 78682.Annexe 125 FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c90.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT GÉNÉRALITÉS Cette licence restera valide tant qu'elle ne sera pas annulée. Elle sera annulée si les conditions définies ci-dessus se concrétisent ou si vous ne respectez pas n'importe lequel de ses termes. Au cas où elle serait annulée, vous vous engagez à détruire le Logiciel et tous les éléments qui l'accompagnent, ainsi que toutes les copies du Logiciel et de ses composants. Cet accord est régi par les lois de l'état du Texas. Chaque disposition de ce contrat est autonome. S'il s'avérait qu'une disposition était impossible à appliquer, les provisions, termes ou conditions restantes de cet accord resteraient en vigueur. Cet accord lie les successeurs et personnes assignées. Dell et vous vous engagez à renoncer, tant que la loi le permet, à tout droit à un procès par jury, concernant le Logiciel ou cet accord. Cette clause n'étant pas valide dans certaines juridictions, elle peut ne pas s'appliquer à vous. Vous reconnaissez que vous avez lu cet accord, que vous le comprenez, que vous vous engagez à être lié par ses termes et que le présent document constitue l'intégralité de l'accord exclusif entre vous et Dell concernant le Logiciel.126 Annexe www.dell.com | support.dell.com FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188c90.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENTAnnexe 127 FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188wr0.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Garantie limitée et règle de retour Les produits Dell achetés aux États-Unis ou au Canada sont couverts par une garantie limitée de 90 jours, d'un an, de deux ans, de trois ans ou de quatre ans. Pour connaître votre garantie, consultez le bordereau de marchandises ou la facture. Les sections suivantes décrivent ces garanties limitées et la règle de retour pour les États-Unis et le Canada, la garantie fabricant pour l'Amérique latine et les Caraïbes et la garantie Intel® Pentium® et Celeron® pour les États-Unis et le Canada. Conditions de garantie limitée pour les produits matériels Dell (Canada seulement) Que couvre cette garantie limitée ? Cette garantie limitée couvre les vices de matériel et de fabrication éventuels pouvant affecter les produits matériels de marque Dell de tout utilisateur final, notamment les produits périphériques de marque Dell. Qu'est-ce qui n'est pas couvert par cette garantie limitée ? Cette garantie limitée ne couvre pas les éléments suivants : • Les logiciels, y compris le système d'exploitation et les logiciels ajoutés aux produits matériels Dell par notre système d'intégration d'entreprise ou le rechargement de logiciels. • Les produits et accessoires d'une marque autre que Dell et Solution Provider Direct. • Les problèmes résultant de ce qui suit : – Causes externes : accident, utilisation abusive ou impropre, problèmes liés à l'alimentation électrique ; – Interventions non autorisées par Dell ; – Utilisation non conforme aux instructions du produit ; – Non-respect des instructions du produit ou non-exécution de l'entretien préventif exigé ; – Problèmes dus à l'utilisation d'accessoires, de pièces et de composants non fournis par Dell. • Les produits dont les numéros de service ou les numéros de série sont manquants ou incorrects. • Les produits qui n'ont pas été payés. CETTE GARANTIE VOUS DONNE DES DROITS LÉGAUX SPÉCIFIQUES, AUXQUELS PEUVENT S'AJOUTER D'AUTRES DROITS, QUI VARIENT AU CAS PAR CAS (OU SELON LA PROVINCE). LA RESPONSABILITÉ DE DELL POUR LE FONCTIONNEMENT DÉFECTUEUX ET LES DÉFAUTS DU PRODUIT EST LIMITÉE À LA RÉPARATION OU AU REMPLACEMENT COMME INDIQUÉ DANS CE CONTRAT DE GARANTIE, SELON LES CONDITIONS DE LA PÉRIODE DE GARANTIE APPARAISSANT SUR VOTRE FICHE D'EXPÉDITION OU FACTURE. À L'EXCEPTION DES GARANTIES EXPRESSES FIGURANT DANS LE PRÉSENT CONTRAT DE GARANTIE, DELL REJETTE TOUTE AUTRE GARANTIE OU CONDITION EXPRESSE OU IMPLICITE, INCLUANT SANS RESTRICTION LES GARANTIES ET CONDITIONS IMPLICITES DE QUALITÉ OU D'ADAPTABILITÉ À UN USAGE PARTICULIER, STATUTAIRE OU AUTRE. CERTAINES PROVINCES NE RECONNAISSENT PAS D'EXCLUSION SUR DES GARANTIES OU CONDITIONS IMPLICITES, OU DE RESTRICTION EN CE QUI CONCERNE LA DURÉE D'UNE GARANTIE OU CONDITION IMPLICITE. AUQUEL CAS, LES EXCLUSIONS ET RESTRICTIONS PRÉCÉDENTES PEUVENT NE PAS S'APPLIQUER. 128 Annexe www.dell.com | support.dell.com FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188wr0.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT NOUS DÉCLINONS TOUTE RESPONSABILITÉ, AU-DELÀ DES RECOURS INDIQUÉS DANS CETTE GARANTIE LIMITÉE OU POUR LES DOMMAGES PARTICULIERS, INDIRECTS, ACCIDENTELS OU INDUITS, Y COMPRIS POUR LA RESPONSABILITÉ DE RÉCLAMATIONS DE DOMMAGES D'UNE TIERCE PARTIE À VOTRE ENCONTRE, POUR LA NON-DISPONIBILITÉ D'UN PRODUIT OU POUR LA PERTE DE DONNÉES OU DE LOGICIEL, ET CE SANS RESTRICTION. NOTRE RESPONSABILITÉ SE LIMITE AU MONTANT QUE VOUS AVEZ PAYÉ POUR LE PRODUIT FAISANT L'OBJET D'UNE RÉCLAMATION. IL S'AGIT DU MONTANT MAXIMAL SOUMIS À LA RESPONSABILITÉ DE DELL. CERTAINES PROVINCES NE RECONNAISSENT PAS D'EXCLUSION OU DE RESTRICTION SUR LES DOMMAGES PARTICULIERS, INDIRECTS, SECONDAIRES OU INDUITS, AUQUEL CAS L'EXCLUSION OU LA RESTRICTION PRÉCÉDENTE PEUT NE PAS S'APPLIQUER. Quelle est la durée de cette garantie limitée ? Cette garantie limitée s'applique pendant la période indiquée sur votre bordereau de marchandises ou votre facture, à l'exception de la garantie limitée des batteries Dell qui est valable un an seulement et de la garantie limitée des lampes de projecteurs Dell qui est réduite à 90 jours uniquement. La garantie limitée prend effet à la date inscrite sur le bordereau de marchandises ou la facture. La période de garantie n'est pas étendue en cas de réparation ou de remplacement d'un produit ou de composants sous garantie. Dell peut modifier en toute discrétion les conditions et la disponibilité des garanties limitées, mais ces changements ne sont pas rétroactifs (c'est-à-dire que les conditions de la garantie en vigueur au moment de l'achat continueront de s'appliquer à votre achat). Que dois-je faire si j'ai besoin d'un service de garantie ? Avant que la garantie n'expire, appelez-nous au numéro correspondant à votre situation, comme indiqué dans le tableau ci-dessous. En outre, ayez à portée de main votre numéro de service ou numéro de commande Dell. Que fera Dell ? Au cours des 90 premiers jours de la garantie limitée de 90 jours et la première année de toutes les autres garanties limitées : Pour les 90 jours de la garantie limitée de 90 jours et la première année de toutes les autres garanties limitées, Dell effectuera la réparation de tous les produits de marque Dell présentant des défauts matériels ou de fabrication, qui lui seront renvoyés. Si nous ne parvenons pas à réparer le produit, nous le remplaçerons par un produit comparable, neuf ou recyclé. Utilisateurs particuliers, utilisateurs travaillant à domicile et petites entreprises : Canada seulement Support technique et Service clientèle 1-800-847-4096 Entreprises de taille moyenne, grands comptes, gouvernement, domaines de l'enseignement et de la santé et revendeurs à valeur ajoutée : Support technique 1-800-387-5757 Service clientèle 1-800-326-9463 Gouvernement ou domaine de l'enseignement, ou encore particuliers ayant acheté ce produit par le biais d'un programme d'achats par les employés : Support technique 1-800-387-5757 Service clientèle 1-800-326-9463 (poste 8221 pour les particuliers) Mémoire Dell 1-888-363-5150Annexe 129 FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188wr0.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Lorsque vous nous contactez, nous vous donnons un numéro d'autorisation de retour de matériel que vous devez joindre à votre retour. Vous devez nous retourner les produits dans leur emballage d'origine ou un équivalent, payer d'avance les frais d'expédition et assurer l'envoi des produits ou accepter les risques de perte ou de dommage pendant l'acheminement. Nous nous chargeons de vous retourner les produits réparés ou remplacés. Nous prenons à notre charge l'expédition des produits réparés ou remplacés si vous avez une adresse au Canada. Sinon, nous vous renverrons le produit contre paiement à réception. Si nous déterminons que le problème n'est pas couvert par la garantie, nous vous en avertissons et vous indiquons les solutions alternatives de service qui vous sont proposées moyennant des frais. REMARQUE : Avant de nous retourner le(s) produit(s), veillez à effectuer une sauvegarde des données présentes sur le(s) disque(s) dur(s) et sur n'importe quel autre périphérique de stockage. Supprimez toutes les informations confidentielles, propriétaires ou personnelles et retirez tous les supports amovibles, tels que les disquettes, CD-ROM ou cartes PC. Nous déclinons toute responsabilité en ce qui concerne vos informations confidentielles, propriétaires ou personnelles, et en cas de perte ou d'endommagement des données ou des supports amovibles. Au cours des années non écoulées suivant la première année de toutes les garanties limitées : Nous remplacerons toute pièce défectueuse par une pièce neuve ou réusinée, si nous estimons qu'elle a besoin d'être remplacée. Lorsque vous nous contacterez, nous vous demanderons de nous fournir un numéro de carte de crédit valide au moment où vous demanderez le remplacement d'un composant, mais nous ne vous facturerons pas le remplacement si vous nous retournez le composant d'origine dans les 30 jours qui suivent l'expédition. Si Dell ne reçoit pas la pièce originale dans les 30 jours, le prix standard courant de la pièce remplacée sera prélevé sur votre carte de crédit. Nous prenons à notre charge l'expédition du composant si vous avez une adresse au Canada. Sinon, nous vous renverrons le composant contre paiement à réception. Dell inclut également un emballage d'expédition préaffranchi avec chaque composant de rechange afin que vous renvoyiez le composant remplacé à Dell. REMARQUE : Avant de remplacer des pièces, veillez à effectuer une sauvegarde des données présentes sur le(s) disque(s) dur(s) et sur n'importe quel autre périphérique de stockage. Nous déclinons toute responsabilité en cas de perte ou d'endommagement des données. Que se passe-t-il si j'ai souscrit un contrat de service ? Si votre contrat de service a été souscrit avec Dell, le service vous sera proposé selon les conditions du contrat de service. Reportez-vous à ce contrat pour plus d'informations sur la façon de bénéficier du service. Vous trouverez les contrats de service Dell en ligne à l'adresse www.dell.ca ou en appelant le Service clientèle au 1-800-847-4096. Si vous passez par Dell pour souscrire un contrat de service auprès d'un de ses fournisseurs tiers, veuillez vous reporter à ce contrat (joint à la facture ou au bordereau d'emballage) pour plus de détails sur la façon de bénéficier de ce service. Comment allez-vous réparer mon produit ? Dell utilise des composants neufs ou remis en état provenant de différents fabricants pour les réparations sous garantie et pour la fabrication de composants et de systèmes de remplacement. Les composants et systèmes recyclés sont des composants ou des systèmes qui ont été retournés à Dell et dont certains n'ont jamais été utilisés par le client. La qualité de tous les composants et systèmes est contrôlée et testée. Les composants et systèmes de remplacement fournis sont couverts par la garantie pour la période restante de la garantie limitée du produit que vous avez acheté. Dell est propriétaire de tous les composants retirés des produits réparés. Puis-je transférer la garantie limitée ? La garantie limitée sur les systèmes peut être transférée si son propriétaire actuel transfère également la propriété du système et enregistre le transfert auprès de Dell. La garantie limitée sur la mémoire Dell ne peut pas être transférée. Vous pouvez enregistrer votre transfert depuis le site Web de Dell : • Dans le cas d'ordinateurs achetés au Canada (transferts à l'intérieur du pays) et pour effectuer un transfert d'un client à un autre, allez à l'adresse www.dell.ca/ca/en/gen/topics/segtopic_ccare_nav_013_ccare.htm.130 Annexe www.dell.com | support.dell.com FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188wr0.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT • Pour les transferts à l'étranger (en dehors du pays d'achat d'origine), allez à l'adresse www.dell.com/us/en/biz/topics/sbtopic_ccare_nav_016_ccare.htm. Si vous ne disposez pas d'accès à Internet, appelez Dell au 1-800-847-4096 (pour les particuliers) ou au 1-800-326-9463 (pour les clients des entreprises et administrations). Règle de retour «Satisfait ou remboursé» (Canada seulement) En qualité de client et utilisateur final ayant acheté de nouveaux produits directement à Dell, vous êtes en droit de les retourner à Dell dans un délai de 30 jours maximum après la date de réception des produits pour un remboursement ou un avoir équivalent au prix d'achat. En qualité de client et utilisateur final ayant acheté des produits reconditionnés ou recyclés à Dell, vous êtes en droit de les retourner dans un délai de 14 jours à compter de la date indiquée sur votre bordereau de marchandises ou votre facture pour un remboursement ou un avoir équivalent au prix d'achat. Dans les deux cas, un montant de 15 %, pour restockage, sera déduit du montant du remboursement ou de l'avoir indiqué sur votre bordereau de marchandises ou votre facture, et les frais d'expédition et de manutention ne vous seront pas remboursés, sauf avis contraire légal Si vous avez acheté nos produits en tant que société liée à Dell par un contrat écrit, les termes stipulés dans ce contrat au sujet du retour des produits peuvent différer de ceux spécifiés par la règle de retour. Pour retourner les produits, vous devez appeler le service clientèle de Dell au 1-800-847-4096 qui vous fournira un numéro d'autorisation de retour pour crédit. Afin d'accélérer la procédure de remboursement ou d'avoir, Dell attend que vous lui renvoyiez les produits dans leur emballage d'origine dans les 5 jours suivant l'attribution d'un numéro d'autorisation de retour pour crédit. Vous devez également payer d'avance les frais d'expédition et assurer l'envoi ou accepter les risques de perte ou de dommage pendant l'acheminement. Vous ne pouvez renvoyer le logiciel pour un remboursement ou un avoir que si l'emballage scellé contenant les disquettes ou les CD-ROM n'a pas été ouvert. Les produits renvoyés doivent être comme neufs, et tous les guides, disquettes, CD-ROM, cordons d'alimentation et autres accessoires compris avec le produit doivent être renvoyés avec celui-ci. Les clients désirant renvoyer pour remboursement ou avoir, des logiciels ou un système d'exploitation installé par Dell, doivent retourner le système dans son intégralité, avec tous les supports et la documentation inclus dans la livraison d'origine. La règle de retour «Satisfait ou remboursé» ne s'applique pas aux produits de stockage de Dell | EMC. Elle ne s'applique pas non plus aux produits achetés par l'intermédiaire du service de vente Logiciels et périphériques Dell. Pour ces produits, reportez-vous plutôt à la règle de retour alors en vigueur des logiciels et périphériques Dell (consultez la section suivante, «Logiciels et périphériques Dell [Canada uniquement]»). Logiciels et périphériques Dell (Canada seulement) Produits logiciels et périphériques tiers Tout comme les autres revendeurs de logiciels et périphériques, Dell ne garantit pas les produits tiers. Les produits logiciels et périphériques tiers sont uniquement couverts par les garanties offertes par le fabricant ou le revendeur initial de ces produits. Les garanties de fabricants tiers varient d'un produit à l'autre. Consultez la documentation de votre produit pour obtenir des informations spécifiques à la garantie. Contactez également le fabricant ou le revendeur si vous souhaitez des informations supplémentaires. Comme Dell propose un grand choix de produits logiciels et périphériques, il nous est impossible de vérifier et de garantir de manière spécifique que tous les produits que nous proposons fonctionnent avec tout ou partie des différents modèles d'ordinateurs Dell, mais aussi de vérifier et de garantir que tous les produits que nous vendons fonctionnent correctement sur les centaines de marques d'ordinateurs disponibles aujourd'hui. Si vous avez des questions relatives à la compatibilité d'un produit, nous vous conseillons vivement de contacter directement le fabricant ou le revendeur à qui vous avez acheté le produit logiciel ou périphérique tiers.Annexe 131 FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188wr0.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Périphériques de marque Dell Dell offre une garantie limitée pour ses nouveaux produits périphériques (produits pour lesquels Dell est fabricant), tels que les moniteurs, les batteries, la mémoire, les stations d'accueil et les projecteurs. Pour déterminer quelle garantie limitée s'applique au produit que vous avez acheté, reportez-vous au bordereau de marchandises ou à la facture Dell et/ou à la documentation qui accompagnait votre produit. Vous trouverez des descriptions des garanties limitées Dell dans les sections précédentes. Règle de retour Si, en qualité de client et utilisateur final, vous avez acheté des produits logiciels et périphériques Dell directement à une société Dell, vous êtes en droit de retourner à Dell ces produits, à l'état neuf, dans un délai de 30 jours à compter de la date figurant sur le bordereau de marchandises ou la facture pour un remboursement équivalent au prix d'achat des produits si ceux-ci ont déjà été payés. Ce remboursement ne comprend aucun frais d'expédition et de gestion figurant sur votre bordereau de marchandises ou votre facture ; ces frais sont à votre charge. Pour retourner les produits, vous devez appeler le service clientèle de Dell au 1-800-387-5759 qui vous fournira un numéro d'autorisation de retour pour crédit. Vous devez renvoyer les produits logiciels et périphériques à Dell dans leur emballage d'origine (qui doit être comme neuf), payer d'avance les frais d'expédition et assurer l'envoi ou accepter les risques de perte ou de dommage pendant l'acheminement. Pour qu'un remboursement ou un remplacement soit possible, les produits renvoyés doivent être comme neufs, les logiciels ne doivent pas être ouverts et tous les guides, disquettes, CD-ROM, câbles d'alimentation et autres accessoires compris avec le produit doivent être renvoyés. 132 Annexe www.dell.com | support.dell.com FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188wr0.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Déclaration de garantie Intel® réservée aux processeurs Pentium® et Celeron® seulement (États-Unis et Canada uniquement) Intel’s Three Year Limited Warranty Limited Warranty Intel warrants that its family of Pentium® and Celeron® processors, if properly used and installed, will be free from defects in materials and workmanship and will substantially conform to Intel’s publicly available specifications for a period of three (3) years after the date the Pentium or Celeron processor was purchased (whether purchased separately or as part of a computer system). If the Pentium or Celeron processor, which is the subject of this Limited Warranty, fails during the warranty period for reasons covered by this Limited Warranty, Intel, at its option, will: • REPAIR the Pentium or Celeron processor by means of hardware and/or software; OR • REPLACE the Pentium or Celeron processor with another Pentium or Celeron processor; OR if Intel is unable to repair or replace the particular Pentium or Celeron processor, • REFUND the then-current value of the Pentium or Celeron processor. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY, AND ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES THAT MAY EXIST UNDER STATE LAW, APPLY ONLY TO THE ORIGINAL PURCHASER OF THE PENTIUM OR CELERON PROCESSOR, OR PENTIUM OR CELERON PROCESSOR-BASED COMPUTER AND LAST ONLY FOR AS LONG AS SUCH PURCHASER CONTINUES TO OWN THE PROCESSOR. Extent of Limited Warranty Intel does not warrant that your Pentium or Celeron processor will be free from design defects or errors known as "errata." Current characterized errata are available upon request. This limited warranty is for purchasers in the United States and Canada only. The limited warranty does not cover any costs relating to removal or replacement of any Pentium or Celeron processors that are soldered or otherwise permanently affixed to your system’s motherboard. This limited warranty does not cover damages due to external causes, including accident, problems with electrical power, usage not in accordance with product instructions, misuse, neglect, alteration, repair, improper installation, or improper testing. How to Obtain Warranty Service To obtain warranty service for your Pentium or Celeron processor, you may contact your computer system manufacturer in accordance with its instructions, or you may contact Intel. To request warranty service from Intel, you should call Intel at 1-800-628-8686 during the warranty period during normal business hours (Pacific Time), excluding holidays. Please be prepared to provide: (1) your name, address, and telephone numbers; (2) proof of purchase; (3) this Intel warranty card; (4) a description of the computer system including the brand and model; and (5) an explanation of the problem. [Note: The Customer Service Representative may need additional information from you depending on the nature of the problem.] The replacement processor is warranted under this written warranty and is subject to the same limitations and exclusions for the remainder of the original warranty period or one (1) year, whichever is longer. WARRANTY LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS THESE WARRANTIES REPLACE ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. INTEL MAKES NO EXPRESS WARRANTIES BEYOND THOSE STATED HERE. INTEL DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. SOME LAWS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES SO THIS LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IF THESE LAWS APPLY, THEN ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD. NO WARRANTIES APPLY AFTER THAT PERIOD. SOME LAWS DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO THIS LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY INTEL’S RESPONSIBILITY UNDER THIS, OR ANY OTHER WARRANTY, IMPLIED OR EXPRESS, IS LIMITED TO REPAIR, REPLACEMENT OR REFUND, AS SET FORTH ABOVE. THESE REMEDIES ARE THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES FOR ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY. INTEL IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY OR UNDER ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOST PROFITS, DOWNTIME, GOODWILL, DAMAGE TO OR REPLACEMENT OF EQUIPMENT AND PROPERTY, AND ANY COSTS OF RECOVERING, REPROGRAMMING, OR REPRODUCING ANY PROGRAM OR DATA STORED IN OR USED WITH A SYSTEM CONTAINING YOUR PENTIUM PROCESSOR. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. THE LIMITED WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS THAT VARY FROM JURISDICTION TO JURISDICTION.Annexe 133 FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188wr0.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENT Intel Pentium® and Celeron® Processors are backed by a three-year limited warranty. Please refer to the reverse side of this card for complete warranty details. Intel’s Commitment to Quality Intel is committed to producing the highest quality processors available. That’s why we have hundreds of people dedicated to continuously improve our design, manufacturing, and testing technology. We put every one of our Pentium® and Celeron® processors through a rigorous battery of tests during the design and manufacturing processes. To verify that the new chip will correctly run the software written for Intel Architecture processors, a team of Intel engineers is dedicated to compatibility testing. In a state-of-art lab, this group runs an extensive set of operating systems, applications, network tests and stress tests repeatedly to ensure that the processor is compatible with representative software. Just as importantly, we work with hardware and software companies in the computer industry to ensure that our processors are compatible with their products. Additionally, a sampling of Intel processors are subjected to a rigorous "burn-in" test whereby the chip is operated at higher-than-normal temperatures and voltages. During this burn-in period, the processor experiences the equivalent of weeks of normal usage. These units are monitored for failures as part of our ongoing quality assurance process. As a result, today’s microprocessors from Intel are among the most reliable components in computers. What are "Errata"? Exhaustive product testing can highlight differences between the actual behavior of the microprocessor and its specifications. Sometimes the discrepancies are caused by a design defect or error, which we call errata. Rigorous validation identifies most errata during the development of the processor, but we do detect additional errata during the life cycle of a microprocessor. When an erratum is identified, our engineers work to characterize it and find a solution. We work with system designers and software developers to ensure that the discrepancy does not affect their products. If necessary, special software or hardware solutions (sometimes known as "work arounds") are implemented in the system design to prevent computer users from encountering the problem. Errata may then be corrected in future revisions of the microprocessor. No microprocessor is perfect, and Intel recognizes that some consumers want to know about any errata, whether or not the errata affect them. Intel makes documentation of all characterized Pentium and Celeron processor errata publicly available through our Technical Documentation Service. At Intel, our goal is to make every computer user satisfied with his or her Pentium or Celeron processor. Should you have any questions, comments or concerns about your Intel microprocessor, please call us at 1-800-628-8686. ©1997, 1998 Intel Corporation. All rights reserved.134 Annexe www.dell.com | support.dell.com FILE LOCATION: J:\DL\DL041049\DTP\FRA_F\C5188wr0.fm DELL CONFIDENTIEL – PRÉLIMINAIRE 3/16/04 – POUR AVANT-PROJET SEULEMENTIndex 135 Index A accord de licence logicielle, 123 alimentation mise hors tension de l'ordinateur, 36 périphériques de protection, 35 résolution des problèmes, 39 arrêt de l'ordinateur, 36 B batterie alerte de batterie faible, 38 chargement, 38 description, 23, 28 installation, 39 jauge d'alimentation, 38 performances, 37 retrait, 39 stockage, 39 vérification de la charge, 38 vue du système, 23, 28 blocages, 67 bouton AccessDirect description, 22 vue du système, 22 bouton d'alimentation description, 22 vue du système, 22 boutons de la tablette tactile description, 21 vue du système, 21 C cache de la carte modem/Mini PCI description, 28 vue du système, 28 cache du module de mémoire description, 28 vue du système, 28 caractères inattendus, 46 caractéristiques, 91 cartes PC résolution des problèmes, 66 CD, 49 système d'exploitation, 17 CD Pilotes et utilitaires, 15 Centre d'aide et de support, 17 clavier caractères inattendus, 46 description, 20 raccourcis, 42 remplacement, 88 résolution des problèmes, 46 vue du système, 20 conflits incompatibilités logicielles et matérielles, 72 conflits d'interruption, 72 connecteur modem description, 24 vue du système, 24 connecteur réseau description, 27 vue du système, 27 connecteur USB description, 26 vue du système, 26 connecteur vidéo description, 27 vue du système, 27 connecteurs audio description, 23 vue du système, 23 connexion Internet à propos de, 29 configuration, 29 options, 29 consignes de sécurité, 9 copie de CD comment copier un CD, 49 conseils pratiques, 50 généralités, 49 D Dell contacter, 106 site de support, 17 Dell Diagnostics, 59 dépannage blocage de programme, 67 caractères inattendus, 46 Centre d'aide et de support, 17136 Index 136 Index conflits, 72 Dell Diagnostics, 59 impossible d'enregistrer sur la disquette, 65 impossible d'enregistrer sur une disquette, 65 ordinateur endommagé, 69 ordinateur mouillé, 68 problèmes d'alimentation, 39 problèmes de carte PC, 66 problèmes de messagerie électronique, 32 problèmes de réseau, 52 problèmes de scanner, 64 réinstallation de Windows XP, 74 restauration du système, 72 un programme ne répond plus, 67 utilitaire de résolution des problè, 72 diagnostics CD Drivers and Utilities, 15 Dell, 59 disque dur description, 28 remplacement lecteurs Voir disque dur retour à Dell, 80 vue du système, 28 disquette résolution des problèmes, 65 documentation en ligne, 17 fichier d'aide, 16 Manuel du propriétaire, 15 périphérique, 15 schéma de configuration, 16 DVD, 49 E écran description, 19 vue du système, 19 emplacement pour carte PC description, 22 vue du système, 22 entrées d'air description, 24-25, 28 vue du système, 24-25, 28 étiquette Microsoft Windows, 16 étiquettes Microsoft Windows, 16 numéro de service, 16 F fente du câble de sécurité description, 24 vue du système, 24 fichier d'aide, 16 filtres de ligne, 35 G garantie, 125 H haut-parleurs description, 20 vue du système, 20 I imprimante câble, 33 connexion, 33 installation, 33 USB, 33 installation de pièces avant de commencer, 77 mise hors tension de votre ordinateur, 77 installation des pièces outils recommandés, 77 L lecteur de CD ou DVD description, 23 remplacement, 86 vue du système, 23 lecteur de disquette résolution des problèmes, 65 lecteur de DVD Voir lecteur de CD ou DVD lecteurs résolution des problèmes, 65 logiciel réinstallation du logiciel, 70 résolution des problèmes, 67 loquet de fermeture de l'écran description, 19 vue du système, 19 loquet de la baie des batteries description, 28 vue du système, 28Index 137 M matériel Dell Diagnostics, 59 mémoire retrait, 81 messagerie électronique résolution des problèmes, 32 mise hors tension de l'ordinateur, 36 modem ajout, 83 N numéro de service, 16 O onduleurs Voir UPS ordinateur blocages, 67 caractéristiques, 91 ordinateur endommagé test, 69 ordinateur mouillé, 68 P parasurtenseurs, 35 pavé numérique, 41 pilotes réinstallation, 70 problèmes Dell Diagnostics, 59 programme d'installation du système affichage, 98 écrans, 98-99 options les plus communément utilisées, 99 programme de configuration du système objectif, 98 programmes blocages, 67 pas de réponse, 67 R réinstallation CD Pilotes et utilitaires, 15 pilotes, 70 Windows XP, 74 réinstallation du système d'exploitation, 74 réseau résolution des problèmes, 52 réseau sans fil connexion, 53 modification des paramètres de sécurité, 55 type, 52 restauration du système, 72 S scanner résolution des problèmes, 64 schéma de configuration, 16 support contacter Dell, 106 système d'exploitation CD, 17 T tablette tactile description, 21 personnalisation, 44 vue du système, 21 U UPS, 35 utilitaire de résolution des problèmes matériels, 72 V voyants d'état de l'ordinateur description, 21 voyants d'état du clavier description, 20 vue du système, 20 vues du système arrière, 25 avant, 19 côté droit, 23 côté gauche, 22 dessous, 28 W Windows XP Centre d'aide et de support, 17 imprimante, 34 réinstallation, 74 restauration des pilotes de périphériques, 70 restauration du système, 72 utilitaire de résolution des problèmes matériels, 72138 Index 138 Index Dell Precision Mobile Workstation M4700/M6700 Configuration et informations sur les fonctions À propos des avertissements AVERTISSEMENT: un AVERTISSEMENT indique un risque d'endommagement du matériel, de blessure corporelle ou même de mort. M4700 — Vues avant et arrière Figure 1. Vue avant 1. loquets de l'écran (2) 2. microphones (2) (en option) 3. caméra (en option) 4. voyant de la caméra (en option) 5. écran 6. haut-parleurs (2) 7. bouton d'alimentation 8. Connecteur d'écran 9. connecteur USB 3.0 10. connecteur PowerShare 3.0 11. disque dur 12. lecteur d'empreinte digitale (en option) 13. commutateur sans fil 14. bouton de libération du loquet de l'écran 15. boutons du pavé numérique (3) 16. pavé numérique 17. boutons track-stick (3) 18. track stick 19. clavier 20. voyants d'état de périphérique Modèle réglementaire: P21F, P22F Type réglementaire: P21F001, P22F001 2012 - 0621. boutons de réglage du volume (3) Figure 2. Vue arrière 1. ouvertures de rerfroidissement (2) 2. connecteur VGA 3. connecteur réseau 4. connecteur eSATA/USB 2.0 5. connecteur HDMI 6. connecteur d'alimentation 7. fente pour câble de sécurité 8. connecteurs USB 2.0 (2) 9. port IEEE 1394 (4 broches) 10. connecteur du microphone 11. connecteur du casque 12. voyant d'état du disque dur 13. voyant d'état de la batterie 14. voyant d'alimentation 15. logement du lecteur de carte 10 en 1 16. bouton d'éjection du lecteur optique 17. lecteur optique 18. emplacement pour lecteur de carte à puce 19. logement ExpressCard 2M4700 — Vue de la base Figure 3. Vue de la base 1. baie de batterie 2. dispositif d'éjection du disque dur HDD 3. logement SIM 4. loquet de fermeture de batterie 5. port E/S de la station d'accueil M6700 — Vues avant et arrière Figure 4. Vue avant 31. loquets de l'écran (2) 2. microphones (2) (en option) 3. caméra (en option) 4. voyant de la caméra (en option) 5. écran 6. haut-parleurs (2) 7. bouton d'alimentation 8. connecteur DisplayPort 9. connecteur USB 3.0 10. connecgteur PowerShare USB 3.0 11. disque dur 12. lecteur d'empreintes digitales (en option) 13. commutateur sans fil 14. bouton d'ouverture de l'écran 15. boutons du pavé tactile (3) 16. pavé tactile 17. boutons du track-stick (3) 18. track stick 19. clavier 20. voyants d'état de périphérique 21. boutons de contrôle du volume sonore (3) Figure 5. Vue arrière 1. ouvertures de refroidissement (2) 2. connecteur réseau 3. connecteur VGA 4. connecteur HDMI 5. connecteur eSATA/USB 2.0 6. connecteur d'alimentation 7. fente pour câble de sécurité 8. connecteurs USB 2.0 (2) 9. port IEEE 1394 (6 broches, alimenté) 10. connecteur du microphone 11. connecteur du casque 12. voyant d'état du disque dur 13. voyant d'état de la batterie 14. voyant d'alimentation 15. lecteur de carte 10 en 1 16. bouton d'éjection du lecteur optique 17. lecteur optique 18. emplacement pour lecteur de carte à puce 19. logement ExpressCard 4M6700 — Vue de la base Figure 6. Vue de la base 1. baie de batterie 2. dispositif d'éjection du disque dur HDD 3. logement SIM 4. loquet de fermeture de batterie 5. port E/S de la station d'accueil Installation et configuration rapides AVERTISSEMENT: Avant de commencer à appliquer toute procédure expliquée dans cette section, prenez connaissance des consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre ordinateur. Pour plus d'informations sur les meilleures pratiques, consultez le site www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance . AVERTISSEMENT: L'adaptateur CA fonctionne dans tous les pays. Toutefois, les connecteurs électriques et les prises-multiples varient en fonction du pays. N'utilisez pas un câble incompatible ou ne connectez pas le câble incorrectement à une prise électrique ou une prise-multiples afin de ne pas provoquer un incendie ou de ne pas endommager l'ordinateur. PRÉCAUTION: Lorsque vous déconnectez le câble de l'adaptateur CA de l'ordinateur, saisissez le connecteur et non pas le câble lui-même et tirez dessus fermement, mais doucement pour éviter d'endommager ce dernier. Lorsque vous enroulez le câble de l'adaptateur CA, veillez à respecter l'angle du connecteur de l'adaptateur CA pour ne pas endommager le câble. REMARQUE: Les périphériques mentionnés ne sont inclus que si vous les avez commandés. 1. Branchez l'adaptateur CA au connecteur correspondant sur l'ordinateur et au secteur. Figure 7. Adaptateur CA 52. Branchez le câble réseau (en option). Figure 8. Connecteur réseau 3. Connectez les périphériques USB, tels que la souris ou le clavier (en option). Figure 9. Connecteur USB 4. Connectez des périphériques IEEE 1394, par exemple un disque dur 1394 (en option). Figure 10. Connecteur IEEE 1394 sur M4700 Figure 11. Connecteur IEEE 1394 sur M6700 5. Ouvrez l'écran de l'ordinateur et appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation pour mettre l'ordinateur sous tension. Figure 12. Bouton d'alimentation REMARQUE: Il est recommandé de mettre sous tension et hors tension l'ordinateur une fois avant d'installer des cartes ou de connecter l'ordinateur à une station d'accueil ou un autre périphérique externe, tel qu'une imprimante. 6Spécifications REMARQUE: Les offres proposées peuvent varier selon les pays. Les caractéristiques suivantes se limitent à celles que la législation impose de fournir avec l'ordinateur. Pour plus d'informations sur la configuration de votre ordinateur, cliquez sur Démarrer → Aide et support et sélectionnez l'option qui permet d'afficher les informations relatives à votre ordinateur. Tableau 1. Alimentation Elément Description Adaptateur CA 180 W et 240 W Tension d'entrée De 90 V CA à 264 V CA Pile bouton 3 V / 210 mA Tableau 2. Caractéristiques physiques Elément M4700 M6700 Hauteur 32,70 mm (1,28 pouces) 33,10 mm (1,30 pouces) Largeur 376 mm (14,80 pouces) 416,70 mm (16,40 pouces) Profondeur 256 mm (10,07 pouces) 270,60 mm (10,65 pouces) Poids (minimum) 2,79 kg (6,15 lb) 3,52 kg (7,76 lb) Tableau 3. Conditions environnementales Elément Description Températures en fonctionnement De 0 °C à 35 °C (de 32 °F à 95 °F) Information para NOM (únicamente para México) Les informations suivantes s'appliquent à l'appareil décrit dans ce document conformément à la réglementation des norme officielles mexicaines (NOM). Voltaje de alimentación 100 V CA – 240 V CA Frecuencia 50 Hz – 60 Hz Consumo eléctrico: M4700 2,34 A /2,5 A M6700 3,5 A Voltaje de salida 19,50 V de CC Intensidad de salida 3,34 A /4,62 A Où trouver des informations et des ressources supplémentaires Consultez les documents réglementaires et de sécurité livrés avec votre ordinateur et la page Regulatory Compliance (Conformité à la réglementation) à l'adresse www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance pour plus d'informations sur : 7• Les meilleures pratiques en matière de sécurité • La certification réglementaire • L'ergonomie Consultez le site www.dell.com pour des informations plus détaillées sur : • La garantie • Les conditions générales (États-Unis seulement), • Le contrat de licence pour utilisateur final Des informations plus détaillées sur votre produit sont disponibles sur support.dell.com/manuals. © 2012 Dell Inc. Marques utilisées dans ce document : Dell™, le logo DELL logo, Dell Precision™, Precision ON™, ExpressCharge™, Latitude™, Latitude ON™, OptiPlex™, Vostro™ et Wi-Fi Catcher™ sont des marques de Dell Inc. Intel®, Pentium®, Xeon®, Core™, Atom™, Centrino® et Celeron® sont des marques ou des marques déposées d'Intel Corporation aux États-Unis et dans d'autres pays. AMD® est une marque déposée et AMD Opteron™, AMD Phenom™, AMD Sempron™, AMD Athlon™, ATI Radeon™ et ATI FirePro™ sont des marques d'Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. Microsoft®, Windows®, MS-DOS®, Windows Vista®, le bouton Démarrer Windows Vista et Office Outlook® sont des marques ou des marques déposées de Microsoft Corporation aux États-Unis et/ou dans d'autres pays. Blu-ray Disc™ est une marque de la Blu-ray Disc Association (BDA) et est sous licence pour une utilisation sur des disques et des lecteurs. La marque Bluetooth® est une marque déposée et appartient à Bluetooth® SIG, Inc. et toute utilisation d'une telle marque par Dell Inc. se fait dans le cadre d'une licence. Wi-Fi® est une marque déposée de Wireless Ethernet Compatibility Alliance, Inc. 8 Dell Latitude 6430u Manuel du propriétaire Modèle réglementaire: P36G Type réglementaire: P36G001Remarques, précautions et avertissements REMARQUE : Une REMARQUE indique des informations importantes qui peuvent vous aider à mieux utiliser l'ordinateur. PRÉCAUTION : Une PRÉCAUTION indique un risque de dommage matériel ou de perte de données et vous indique comment éviter le problème. AVERTISSEMENT : Un AVERTISSEMENT indique un risque d'endommagement du matériel, de blessure corporelle ou de mort. © 2013 Dell Inc. Marques utilisées dans ce document : Dell™, le logo Dell, Dell Boomi™, Dell Precision™ , OptiPlex™, Latitude™, PowerEdge™, PowerVault™, PowerConnect™, OpenManage™, EqualLogic™, Compellent™, KACE™, FlexAddress™, Force10™ et Vostro™ sont des marques de Dell Inc. Intel®, Pentium®, Xeon®, Core® et Celeron® sont des marques déposées d'Intel Corporation aux États-Unis et dans d'autres pays. AMD® est une marque déposée et AMD Opteron™, AMD Phenom™ et AMD Sempron™ sont des marques d'Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows Server®, Internet Explorer®, MS-DOS®, Windows Vista® et Active Directory® sont des marques ou des marques déposées de Microsoft Corporation aux États-Unis et/ou dans d'autres pays. Red Hat® et Red Hat® Enterprise Linux® sont des marques déposées de Red Hat, Inc. aux États-Unis et/ou dans d'autres pays. Novell® et SUSE® sont des marques déposées de Novell Inc. aux États-Unis et dans d'autres pays. Oracle® est une marque déposée d'Oracle Corporation et/ou de ses filiales. Citrix®, Xen®, XenServer® et XenMotion® sont des marques ou des marques déposées de Citrix Systems, Inc. aux États-Unis et/ou dans d'autres pays. VMware®, Virtual SMP®, vMotion®, vCenter® et vSphere® sont des marques ou des marques déposées de VMware, Inc. aux États-Unis ou dans d'autres pays. IBM® est une marque déposée d'International Business Machines Corporation. 2013 - 03 Rev. A01Table des matières Remarques, précautions et avertissements..............................................................................2 Chapitre 1: Intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur........................................................7 Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur.........................................................................................................7 Mise hors tension de l’ordinateur.............................................................................................................................8 Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur.................................................................................................................8 Chapitre 2: Retrait et installation des composants.................................................................11 Outils recommandés...............................................................................................................................................11 Présentation du système........................................................................................................................................11 Retrait de la carte SD (Secure Digital)...................................................................................................................13 Installation de la carte SD (Secure Digital)............................................................................................................13 Retrait de la batterie...............................................................................................................................................14 Installation de la batterie........................................................................................................................................14 Retrait du cache de fond de l'ordinateur................................................................................................................14 Installation du cache de fond de l'ordinateur.........................................................................................................15 Retrait de la carte SSD mSATA..............................................................................................................................15 Installation de la carte SSD mSATA.......................................................................................................................16 Retrait de la mémoire..............................................................................................................................................16 Installation de la mémoire......................................................................................................................................16 Retrait de la carte de réseau local sans fil (WLAN)...............................................................................................16 Installation de la carte de réseau sans fil WLAN...................................................................................................17 Retrait de la carte de réseau étendu sans fil (WWAN)..........................................................................................17 Installation de la carte WWAN...............................................................................................................................17 Retrait de la carte TAA...........................................................................................................................................18 Installation de la carte TAA....................................................................................................................................18 Retrait du ventilateur système................................................................................................................................18 Installation du ventilateur système.........................................................................................................................19 Retrait du clavier.....................................................................................................................................................19 Installation du clavier.............................................................................................................................................21 Retrait de l'ensemble repose-mains.......................................................................................................................21 Installation de l'ensemble repose-mains................................................................................................................23 Retrait de la carte de l’interrupteur d’alimentation................................................................................................24 Installation de la carte du bouton d'alimentation...................................................................................................24 Retrait de la carte du scanner d’empreintes digitales...........................................................................................24 Installation de la carte du scanner d’empreintes digitales....................................................................................25 Retrait du cadre d'écran.........................................................................................................................................25Installation du cadre d'écran..................................................................................................................................26 Retrait du panneau d’écran....................................................................................................................................26 Installation du panneau d’écran.............................................................................................................................27 Retrait de la carte LED de l'alimentation................................................................................................................28 Installation de la carte LED de l'alimentation.........................................................................................................28 Retrait de la caméra...............................................................................................................................................28 Installation de la caméra........................................................................................................................................29 Retrait des haut-parleurs........................................................................................................................................29 Installation des haut-parleurs.................................................................................................................................30 Retrait de la pile bouton..........................................................................................................................................30 Installation de la pile bouton...................................................................................................................................31 Retrait de la carfe à puce.......................................................................................................................................31 Installation de la carte à puce................................................................................................................................32 Retrait de la baie de carte d'extension...................................................................................................................32 Installation de la baie de carte d'extension...........................................................................................................33 Retrait du capteur Hall............................................................................................................................................33 Installation du capteur Hall.....................................................................................................................................34 Retrait de la carte Sniffer Board.............................................................................................................................34 Installation de la carte Sniffer Board.....................................................................................................................35 Retrait de l’ensemble écran....................................................................................................................................35 Installation de l’ensemble écran............................................................................................................................37 Retrait du connecteur d’alimentation.....................................................................................................................37 Installation du connecteur d’alimentation..............................................................................................................37 Retrait de la carte système.....................................................................................................................................38 Installation de la carte système..............................................................................................................................40 Retrait du module thermique..................................................................................................................................40 Installation du module thermique...........................................................................................................................41 Chapitre 3: Configuration du système.......................................................................................43 Présentation de la configuration du système.........................................................................................................43 Séquence de démarrage........................................................................................................................................43 Touches de navigation............................................................................................................................................43 Mise à jour du BIOS ...............................................................................................................................................44 System Setup Option (Option de configuration du système)..................................................................................45 Chapitre 4: Dépannage................................................................................................................55 Diagnostisc ePSA (Enhanced Pre-Boot System Assessment)...............................................................................55 Diagnostics.............................................................................................................................................................55 Codes de bips..........................................................................................................................................................56 Codes d'erreur LED.................................................................................................................................................57 Chapitre 5: Caractéristiques.......................................................................................................59Chapitre 6: Obtention d'aide.......................................................................................................65 Contacter Dell.........................................................................................................................................................6561 Intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur Suivez les recommandations de sécurité ci-dessous pour protéger votre ordinateur et vos données personnelles de toute détérioration. Sauf indication contraire, chaque procédure mentionnée dans ce document suppose que les conditions suivantes sont réunies : • Vous avez pris connaissance des informations de sécurité fournies avec votre ordinateur. • Un composant peut être remplacé ou, si acheté séparément, installé en exécutant la procédure de retrait dans l'ordre inverse. AVERTISSEMENT : Avant d'intervenir dans l'ordinateur, lisez les informations de sécurité fournies avec l'ordinateur. D'autres informations sur les pratiques d'excellence en matière de sécurité sont disponibles sur la page d'accueil Regulatory Compliance (Conformité règlementaire), à l'adresse www.dell.com/ regulatory_compliance . PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. PRÉCAUTION : Pour éviter une décharge électrostatique, raccordez-vous à la terre à l'aide d'un bracelet antistatique ou en touchant une surface métallique non peinte, par exemple un connecteur sur le panneau arrière de l'ordinateur. PRÉCAUTION : Manipulez avec précaution les composants et les cartes. Ne touchez pas les composants ni les contacts des cartes. Saisissez les cartes par les bords ou par le support de montage métallique. Saisissez les composants, processeur par exemple, par les bords et non par les broches. PRÉCAUTION : Lorsque vous déconnectez un câble, tirez sur le connecteur ou sa languette, mais pas sur le câble lui-même. Certains câbles sont dotés de connecteurs avec dispositif de verrouillage. Si vous déconnectez un câble de ce type, appuyez d'abord sur le verrou. Lorsque vous démontez les connecteurs, maintenez-les alignés uniformément pour éviter de tordre les broches. Enfin, avant de connecter un câble, vérifiez que les deux connecteurs sont correctement orientés et alignés. REMARQUE : La couleur de votre ordinateur et de certains composants peut différer de celle de l'ordinateur et des composants illustrés dans ce document. Pour ne pas endommager l'ordinateur, procédez comme suit avant d'intervenir dans l'ordinateur. 1. Assurez-vous que la surface de travail est plane et propre afin d'éviter de rayer le capot de l'ordinateur. 2. Mettez l'ordinateur hors tension (voir la section Mise hors tension de l'ordinateur). PRÉCAUTION : Pour retirer un câble réseau, déconnectez-le d'abord de l'ordinateur, puis du périphérique réseau. 3. Déconnectez tous les câbles externes du système. 74. Débranchez du secteur l'ordinateur et tous les périphériques qui y sont connectés. 5. Appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation et maintenez-le enfoncé lorsque l'ordinateur est débranché afin de mettre à la terre la carte système. 6. Retirez le cache. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de toucher un élément dans l'ordinateur, raccordez-vous à la terre en touchant une surface métallique non peinte, telle que le métal à l'arrière de l'ordinateur. Pendant l'intervention, touchez régulièrement une surface métallique non peinte pour éliminer l'électricité statique qui pourrait endommager les composants. Mise hors tension de l’ordinateur PRÉCAUTION : Pour éviter de perdre de données, enregistrez et refermez tous les fichiers ouverts, puis quittez tous les programmes ouverts avant de mettre hors tension l’ordinateur. 1. Arrêtez le système d’exploitation : – Dans Windows 8 : * À l’aide d’un périphérique tactile : a. Balayez à partir du bord droit de l’écran pour ouvrir le menu Charms et sélectionnez Paramètres. b. Sélectionnez puis sélectionnez Éteindre * À l’aide d’une souris : a. Pointez sur l’angle supérieur droit de l’écran et cliquez sur Paramètres. b. Cliquez sur puis sélectionnez Éteindre. – Dans Windows 7: 1. Cliquez sur Démarrer . 2. Cliquez sur Arrêter. ou 1. Cliquez sur Démarrer . 2. Cliquez sur sur la flèche dans l'angle inférieur droit du menu Démarrer comme indiqué ci-dessous, puis cliquez sur Arrêter. 2. Vérifiez que l'ordinateur et tous les périphériques connectés sont hors tension. Si l'ordinateur et les périphériques ne sont pas mis hors tension automatiquement lorsque vous arrêtez le système d'exploitation, appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation et maintenez-le enfoncé pendant 6 secondes environ pour les mettre hors tension. Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur Après avoir exécuté une procédure de remplacement, veillez à connecter les périphériques externes, les cartes et les câbles avant de mettre sous tension l'ordinateur. 1. Replacez le capot. 8PRÉCAUTION : Pour connecter un câble réseau, connectez le câble au périphérique réseau, puis à l'ordinateur. 2. Connectez le câble téléphonique ou le câble réseau à l'ordinateur. 3. Connectez l'ordinateur et tous les périphériques connectés à leurs prises secteur. 4. Mettez sous tension l'ordinateur. 5. Si nécessaire, vérifiez que l'ordinateur fonctionne correctement en exécutant les diagnostics Dell. 9102 Retrait et installation des composants Cette section fournit des informations détaillées sur le retrait ou l'installation des composants de l'ordinateur. Outils recommandés Les procédures dans ce document peuvent nécessiter les outils suivants : • petit tournevis à tête plate • tournevis cruciforme • petite pointe en plastique Présentation du système Figure 1. Vue arrière 1. carte SD (Secure Digital) 2. batterie 3. loquet de fermeture de batterie 4. cache de fond de l'ordinateur 11Figure 2. Vue interne – arrière 1. carte WLAN (Wireless Local Area Network) 2. ventilateur du système 3. module thermique 4. mémoire 5. baie de carte d'extension 6. carte TAA 7. carte SSD mSATA 8. logement de la carte SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) 9. logement de la carte SD 10. carte WWAN (Wireless Wide Area Network) 12Figure 3. Vue interne – avant 1. carte Sniffer Board 2. capteur Hall 3. carte à puce 4. carte système 5. pile bouton Retrait de la carte SD (Secure Digital) 1. Appliquez les procédures décrites dans Avant d’intervenir sur l’ordinateur. 2. Appuyez sur la carte SD pour l'extraire de l'ordinateur. 3. Faites glisser la carte SD hors de l’ordinateur. Installation de la carte SD (Secure Digital) 1. Faites glisser la carte SD dans son logement jusqu'à ce que vous entendiez un clic. 2. Appliquez les procédures décrites dans Après une intervention à l’intérieur de l’ordinateur. 13Retrait de la batterie 1. Appliquez les procédures décrites dans Avant d’intervenir sur l’ordinateur. 2. Faites glisser le loquet pour déverrouiller la batterie et faites glisser pour retirer cette dernière de l’ordinateur. Installation de la batterie 1. Faites glisser la batterie dans son emplacement jusqu'à ce que vous l'entendiez s'enclencher. 2. Appliquez les procédures décrites dans Après une intervention à l’intérieur de l’ordinateur. Retrait du cache de fond de l'ordinateur 1. Appliquez les procédures décrites dans Avant d’intervenir sur l’ordinateur. 2. Retirez : a) la batterie b) la carte SD 3. Retirez les vis qui fixent le cache de fond à l’ordinateur, faites glisser le cache et retirez-le. 14Installation du cache de fond de l'ordinateur 1. Placez le cache de fond en alignant les orifices des vis sur l'ordinateur. 2. Serrez les vis pour fixer le cache de fond à l'ordinateur. 3. Installez : a) la carte SD b) la batterie 4. Appliquez les procédures décrites dans Après une intervention à l’intérieur de l’ordinateur. Retrait de la carte SSD mSATA 1. Appliquez les procédures décrites dans Avant d’intervenir sur l’ordinateur. 2. Retirez : a) la batterie b) Carte SD c) le cache de fond de l'ordinateur 3. Retirez la vis qui fixe la carte SSD mSATA et retirez celle-ci de l’ordinateur. 15Installation de la carte SSD mSATA 1. Mettez en place la carte SSD mSATA dans son logement dans l’ordinateur. 2. Serrez la vis qui fixe la carte SSD mSATA à l'ordinateur. 3. Installez : a) le cache de fond de l'ordinateur b) la carte SD c) la batterie 4. Appliquez les procédures décrites dans Après une intervention à l’intérieur de l’ordinateur. Retrait de la mémoire 1. Appliquez les procédures décrites dans Avant d’intervenir sur l’ordinateur. 2. Retirez : a) la batterie b) Carte SD c) le cache de fond de l'ordinateur 3. Faites levier sur les agrafes de maintien à l'opposé du module mémoire jusqu'à ce que ce dernier se dégage. Retirez le module de mémoire de son connecteur sur la carte système. Installation de la mémoire 1. Insérez le module de mémoire dans son connecteur. 2. Enfoncez le module de mémoire jusqu’à ce que vous l’entendiez s’enclencher. 3. Installez : a) le cache de fond de l'ordinateur b) la carte SD c) la batterie 4. Appliquez les procédures décrites dans Après une intervention à l’intérieur de l’ordinateur. Retrait de la carte de réseau local sans fil (WLAN) 1. Appliquez les procédures décrites dans Avant d’intervenir sur l’ordinateur. 2. Retirez : a) la batterie b) Carte SD c) le cache de fond de l'ordinateur 3. Débranchez les câbles d'antenne de la carte WLAN puis retirez la vis fixant la carte WLAN à l'ordinateur. Retirez la carte WLAN de l'ordinateur. 16Installation de la carte de réseau sans fil WLAN 1. Insérez la carte WLAN dans son connecteur à 45 degrés dans son logement. 2. Appuyez sur la carte WLAN et serrez la vis qui fixe la carte à l’ordinateur. 3. Branchez les câbles d'antenne sur leurs connecteurs respectifs marqués sur la carte WLAN. 4. Installez : a) le cache de fond de l'ordinateur b) la carte SD c) la batterie 5. Appliquez les procédures décrites dans Après une intervention à l’intérieur de l’ordinateur. Retrait de la carte de réseau étendu sans fil (WWAN) 1. Appliquez les procédures décrites dans Avant d’intervenir sur l’ordinateur. 2. Retirez : a) la batterie b) Carte SD c) le cache de fond de l'ordinateur 3. Débranchez les câbles d’antenne de la carte WWAN. 4. Retirer la vis de fixation de la carte WWAN à l'ordinateur. 5. Débranchez de la carte WWAN les câbles d'antenne. Retirez la vis qui fixe la carte WWAN à l’ordinateur et retirez cen-tête carte. Installation de la carte WWAN 1. Placez la carte WWAN dans son emplacement dans l'ordinateur. 2. Appuyez sur la carte WWAN et serrez la vis qui fixe la carte à l’ordinateur. 3. Raccorder les câbles d'antenne à leurs connecteurs respectifs marqués sur la carte WWAN. 4. Installez : a) le cache de fond de l'ordinateur b) la carte SD 17c) la batterie 5. Appliquez les procédures décrites dans Après une intervention à l’intérieur de l’ordinateur. Retrait de la carte TAA 1. Appliquez les procédures décrites dans Avant d’intervenir sur l’ordinateur. 2. Retirez : a) la batterie b) la carte SD c) le cache de fond de l'ordinateur 3. Retirez la vis qui fixe la carte TAA à l’ordinateur. Retirez la carte de son logement sur la carte système. Installation de la carte TAA 1. Placez la carte TAA dans son emplacement dans l'ordinateur. 2. Serrez la vis qui fixe la carte TAA à l'ordinateur. 3. Installez : a) le cache de fond de l'ordinateur b) la carte SD c) la batterie 4. Appliquez les procédures décrites dans Après une intervention à l’intérieur de l’ordinateur. Retrait du ventilateur système 1. Appliquez les procédures décrites dans Avant d’intervenir sur l’ordinateur. 2. Retirez : a) la batterie b) la carte SD c) le cache de fond de l'ordinateur 3. Débranchez le câble du ventilateur système. Retirez les vis qui fixent le ventilateur à l’ordinateur et retirez le ventilateur de l’ordinateur. 18Installation du ventilateur système 1. Placez le ventilateur dans son emplacement sur l'ordinateur. 2. Serrez les vis qui fixent le ventilateur système à l'ordinateur. 3. Branchez le câble du ventilateur système. 4. Installez : a) le cache de fond de l'ordinateur b) la carte SD c) la batterie 5. Appliquez les procédures décrites dans Après une intervention à l’intérieur de l’ordinateur. Retrait du clavier 1. Appliquez les procédures décrites dans Avant d’intervenir sur l’ordinateur. 2. Retirez : a) la batterie b) Carte SD c) le cache de fond de l'ordinateur 3. Débranchez les câbles du rétro-éclairage du clavier, du trackstick et du clavier. 194. Retirez les vis qui fixent le clavier à l'ordinateur. 5. À l’aide d’un tournevis, libérez les languettes. 206. Retournez l'ordinateur et retirez le clavier de l'ordinateur. Installation du clavier 1. Faites glisser le clavier dans son compartiment et veuillez à ce qu'il s'enclenche. 2. Retournez l'ordinateur et serrez les vis de fixation du clavier. 3. Branchez les câbles du clavier, du rétro-éclairage et du trackstick. 4. Installez : a) le cache de fond de l'ordinateur b) la carte SD c) la batterie 5. Appliquez les procédures décrites dans Après une intervention à l’intérieur de l’ordinateur. Retrait de l'ensemble repose-mains 1. Appliquez les procédures décrites dans Avant d’intervenir sur l’ordinateur. 2. Retirez : a) la batterie b) Carte SD c) le cache de fond de l'ordinateur d) clavier 213. Débranchez les câbles de la carte multimédia, de l’interrupteur d’alimentation, du pavé tactile, du scanner d’empreintes digitales et des haut-parleurs. 4. Retirez les vis qui fixent l'ensemble repose-mains à l'ordinateur. 225. Retournez l’ordinateur, retirez les vis qui fixent l’ensemble repose-mains à la base de la machine et ouvrez l’ensemble du bas. 6. Appuyez sur les sections pour dégager l’ensemble repose-mains et le retirer de l’ordinateur. Installation de l'ensemble repose-mains 1. Alignez l'ensemble repose-mains dans sa position d'origine dans l'ordinateur jusqu’à ce qu’il s’enclenche. 2. Serrez les vis qui fixent l’ensemble repose-mains à l'ordinateur. 3. Retournez l'ordinateur et desserrez les vis qui fixent l'ensemble repose-mains à l'ordinateur. 4. Serrez les vis de fixation de l'ensemble repose-mains à la base de l'ordinateur. 5. Branchez les câbles suivants : a) câble du haut-parleur b) câble du scanner d’empreintes digitales c) câble de la tablette tactile d) câble de l’interrupteur d’alimentation 23e) câble de la carte multimédia 6. Installez : a) le clavier b) le cache de fond de l'ordinateur c) la carte SD d) la batterie Retrait de la carte de l’interrupteur d’alimentation 1. Appliquez les procédures décrites dans Avant d’intervenir sur l’ordinateur. 2. Retirez : a) la batterie b) la carte SD c) le cache de fond de l'ordinateur d) clavier e) l’ensemble repose-mains 3. Retirez les vis qui fixent la carte de l’interrupteur d’alimentation à l’ordinateur et retirez la carte de l’ordinateur. Installation de la carte du bouton d'alimentation 1. Placez la carte de l’interrupteur d’alimentation dans son logement dans l'ordinateur. 2. Serrez les vis qui fixent à l'ordinateur la carte de l’interrupteur d’alimentation. 3. Installez : a) l’ensemble repose-mains b) le clavier c) le cache de fond de l'ordinateur d) la carte SD e) la batterie Retrait de la carte du scanner d’empreintes digitales 1. Appliquez les procédures décrites dans Avant d’intervenir sur l’ordinateur. 2. Retirez : a) la batterie b) la carte SD c) le cache de fond de l'ordinateur d) le clavier 24e) l’ensemble repose-mains 3. Désacheminez le câble du scanner. Retirez la vis qui fixe à l’ordinateur le support du scanner et retirez ce dernier. Retirez la carte de l’ordinateur. Installation de la carte du scanner d’empreintes digitales 1. Placez le scanner d’empreintes digitales dans son emplacement dans l'ordinateur. 2. Placez dessus le support du scanner et serrez la vis qui fixe le support à l’ordinateur. 3. Acheminez le câble du scanner d’empreintes digitales. 4. Installez : a) l’ensemble repose-mains b) le clavier c) le cache de fond de l'ordinateur d) la carte SD e) la batterie 5. Appliquez les procédures décrites dans Après une intervention à l’intérieur de l’ordinateur. Retrait du cadre d'écran 1. Appliquez les procédures décrites dans Avant d’intervenir sur l’ordinateur. 2. Retirez la batterie. 3. Écartez les côtés, travaillez sur les angles du cadre d'écran et retirez ce dernier de l’ensemble écran. 25Installation du cadre d'écran 1. Placez le cadre d'écran sur l’ensemble écran. 2. En partant de l'angle supérieur, appuyez sur tout le cadre d'écran jusqu’à ce qu'il s'enclenche dans l'ensemble écran. 3. Installez la batterie. 4. Appliquez les procédures décrites dans Après une intervention à l’intérieur de l’ordinateur. Retrait du panneau d’écran 1. Appliquez les procédures décrites dans Avant d’intervenir sur l’ordinateur. 2. Retirez : a) la batterie b) le cadre de l'écran 3. Retirez les vis qui fixent le panneau d'écran à l'ensemble écran. Retournez le panneau d'écran. 264. Retirez l'adhésif du connecteur du câble LVDS et débranchez le câble LVDS de l'écran. 5. Retirez l’écran de l’ensemble écran. Installation du panneau d’écran 1. Placez l'écran sur l'ensemble de l'écran. 2. Branchez le câble LVDS, fixez la bande adhésive de son connecteur et renversez le panneau d'écran. 3. Serrez les vis pour fixer le panneau d'écran à l'ensemble écran. 4. Installez : a) le cadre de l'écran b) la batterie 5. Appliquez les procédures décrites dans Après une intervention à l’intérieur de l’ordinateur. 27Retrait de la carte LED de l'alimentation 1. Appliquez les procédures décrites dans Avant d’intervenir sur l’ordinateur. 2. Retirez : a) la batterie b) le cadre de l'écran c) le panneau d'écran 3. Retirez les vis qui fixent à l’ordinateur la carte du voyant d'alimentation et renversez cette carte. 4. Débranchez de la carte système le câble du voyant d'alimentation d'alimentation. Installation de la carte LED de l'alimentation 1. Branchez le câble du voyant d'alimentation à la carte du voyant d'alimentation. 2. Placez la carte du voyant d’alimentation dans son logement dans l'ordinateur. 3. Serrez les vis qui fixent à l'ordinateur la carte du voyant d’alimentation. 4. Installez : a) le panneau d'écran b) le cadre de l'écran c) la batterie 5. Appliquez les procédures décrites dans Après une intervention à l’intérieur de l’ordinateur. Retrait de la caméra 1. Appliquez les procédures décrites dans Avant d’intervenir sur l’ordinateur. 2. Retirez : a) la batterie b) le cadre de l'écran 3. Branchez le câble LVDS et celui de la caméra. 4. Retirez la vis qui fixe le module de caméra et retirez ce dernier. 28Installation de la caméra 1. Branchez les câbles LVDS et de caméra 2. Placez le module de caméra dans son emplacement sur l'ordinateur. 3. Serrez la vis de fixation du module caméra. 4. Installez : a) le cadre de l'écran b) la batterie 5. Appliquez les procédures décrites dans Après une intervention à l’intérieur de l’ordinateur. Retrait des haut-parleurs 1. Appliquez les procédures décrites dans Avant d’intervenir sur l’ordinateur. 2. Retirez : a) la batterie b) la carte SD c) le cache de fond de l'ordinateur d) clavier e) l’ensemble repose-mains 3. Retirez les vis qui fixent les haut-parleurs à l’ordinateur, désacheminez les câbles de haut-parleurs et retirez les haut-parleurs de l’ordinateur. 29Installation des haut-parleurs 1. Alignez les haut-parleurs dans leur position d’origine dans l’ordinateur. 2. Acheminez les câbles des haut-parleurs. 3. Serrez les vis qui fixent les haut-parleurs à l'ordinateur. 4. Installez : a) l’ensemble repose-mains b) le clavier c) le cache de fond de l'ordinateur d) la carte SD e) la batterie 5. Appliquez les procédures décrites dans Après une intervention à l’intérieur de l’ordinateur. Retrait de la pile bouton 1. Appliquez les procédures décrites dans Avant d’intervenir sur l’ordinateur. 2. Retirez : a) la batterie b) la carte SD c) le cache de fond de l'ordinateur d) le clavier e) l’ensemble repose-mains 3. Déconnectez le câble de la pile bouton. Dégagez la pile bouton vers le haut et retirez-la de l'ordinateur. 30Installation de la pile bouton 1. Placez la pile bouton dans son logement. 2. Connectez le câble de la pile bouton. 3. Installez : a) l’ensemble repose-mains b) le clavier c) le cache de fond de l'ordinateur d) la carte SD e) la batterie 4. Appliquez les procédures décrites dans Après une intervention à l’intérieur de l’ordinateur. Retrait de la carfe à puce 1. Appliquez les procédures décrites dans Avant d’intervenir sur l’ordinateur. 2. Retirez : a) la batterie b) la carte SD c) le cache de fond de l'ordinateur d) clavier e) l’ensemble repose-mains 3. Débranchez de l’ordinateur le câble de la carte à puce. 4. Retirez les vis qui fixent la carte à puce. Désacheminez le câble de la carte à puce et retirez cette dernière de l’ordinateur. 31Installation de la carte à puce 1. Acheminez le câble de la carte à puce et placez celle-ci dans son logement dans l’ordinateur. 2. Serrez les vis qui fixent la carte à puce à l'ordinateur. 3. Branchez les câbles de la carte à puce sur l’ordinateur. 4. Installez : a) l’ensemble repose-mains b) le clavier c) le cache de fond de l'ordinateur d) la carte SD e) la batterie 5. Appliquez les procédures décrites dans Après une intervention à l’intérieur de l’ordinateur. Retrait de la baie de carte d'extension 1. Appliquez les procédures décrites dans Avant d’intervenir sur l’ordinateur. 2. Retirez : a) la batterie b) la carte SD c) le cache de fond de l'ordinateur d) clavier e) l’ensemble repose-mains 3. Débranchez le câble de la carte à puce. 324. Retirez les vis qui fixent la baie de carte d'extension à l’ordinateur et retirez la baie. Installation de la baie de carte d'extension 1. Placez la baie de carte d'extension dans son emplacement dans l’ordinateur. 2. Serrez les vis qui fixent la baie à l'ordinateur. 3. Branchez le câble de la carte à puce. 4. Installez : a) l’ensemble repose-mains b) le clavier c) le cache de fond de l'ordinateur d) la carte SD e) la batterie 5. Appliquez les procédures décrites dans Après une intervention à l’intérieur de l’ordinateur. Retrait du capteur Hall 1. Appliquez les procédures décrites dans Avant d’intervenir sur l’ordinateur. 2. Retirez : a) la batterie b) la carte SD 33c) le cache de fond de l'ordinateur d) clavier e) l’ensemble repose-mains 3. Débranchez et désacheminez le câble du capteur Hall. 4. Retirez la vis qui fixe le capteur à l’ordinateur et retirez le capteur. Installation du capteur Hall 1. Mettez le capteur Hall à sa place dans l’ordinateur. 2. Serrez la vis qui fixe le capteur à l’ordinateur. 3. Acheminez et branchez le câble du capteur. 4. Retirez : a) l’ensemble repose-mains b) le clavier c) le cache de fond de l'ordinateur d) la carte SD e) la batterie 5. Appliquez les procédures décrites dans Après une intervention à l’intérieur de l’ordinateur. Retrait de la carte Sniffer Board 1. Appliquez les procédures décrites dans Avant d’intervenir sur l’ordinateur. 2. Retirez : a) la batterie b) la carte SD c) le cache de fond de l'ordinateur d) clavier e) l’ensemble repose-mains 3. Débranchez la carte Sniffer Board, retirez la vis qui fixe la carte à l’ordinateur et retirez la carte. 34Installation de la carte Sniffer Board 1. Placez la carte Sniffer Board dans son logement dans l'ordinateur. 2. Retirez la vis qui fixe la carte Sniffer Board à l’ordinateur. 3. Branchez le câble de la carte Sniffer Board. 4. Retirez : a) l’ensemble repose-mains b) le clavier c) le cache de fond de l'ordinateur d) la carte SD e) la batterie 5. Appliquez les procédures décrites dans Après une intervention à l’intérieur de l’ordinateur. Retrait de l’ensemble écran 1. Appliquez les procédures décrites dans Avant d’intervenir sur l’ordinateur. 2. Retirez : a) la batterie b) la carte SD c) le cache de fond de l'ordinateur d) clavier e) l’ensemble repose-mains 3. Débranchez de la carte système le câble LVDS et celui de la caméra. 354. Débranchez les câbles d'antenne de la solution sans fil. 5. Retirez les vis qui fixent l’ensemble écran à la base de l’ordinateur et faites passer les câbles d'antenne par les trous à l’arrière de l'ordinateur. 6. Retirez les vis qui fixent l’ens écran à l’ordinateur et soulevez ce dernier pour le dégager de l’ordinateur. 36Installation de l’ensemble écran 1. Insérez les câbles LVDS et d'antenne sans fil à travers les orifices de la base du châssis et branchez-les. 2. Mettez en place l'ensemble écran dans l'ordinateur. 3. Serrez les vis situées des deux côtés pour fixer l'ensemble écran. 4. Acheminez les câbles d'antenne et LVDS à travers le chemin d'acheminement. 5. Branchez le câble LVDS et celui de la caméra sur l’ordinateur. 6. Branchez les câbles d’antenne sur la solution sans fil. 7. Installez : a) l’ensemble repose-mains b) le clavier c) le cache de fond de l'ordinateur d) la carte SD e) la batterie 8. Appliquez les procédures décrites dans Après une intervention à l’intérieur de l’ordinateur. Retrait du connecteur d’alimentation 1. Appliquez les procédures décrites dans Avant d’intervenir sur l’ordinateur. 2. Retirez : a) la batterie b) la carte SD c) le cache de fond de l'ordinateur d) le clavier e) l’ensemble repose-mains f) l'ensemble écran g) la carte système 3. Débranchez de l’ordinateur le câble du connecteur d'alimentation. Installation du connecteur d’alimentation 1. Connectez le câble du connecteur d'alimentation à l'ordinateur. 2. Installez : a) la carte système 37b) l'ensemble écran c) l’ensemble repose-mains d) clavier e) le cache de fond de l'ordinateur f) Carte SD g) la batterie 3. Appliquez les procédures décrites dans Après une intervention à l’intérieur de l’ordinateur. Retrait de la carte système 1. Appliquez les procédures décrites dans Avant d’intervenir sur l’ordinateur. 2. Retirez : a) la batterie b) la carte SD c) le cache de fond de l'ordinateur d) clavier e) l’ensemble repose-mains f) la carte Sniffer Board g) l'ensemble écran 3. Débranchez le câble du ventilateur système. 4. Débranchez les câbles de la carte à puce, du capteur Hall et de la pile bouton. 385. Retirez les vis qui fixent le support du connecteur d’alimentation à l’ordinateur et retirez le support de l’ordinateur. 6. Retirez les vis qui fixent la carte système à l’ordinateur et retirez la carte. 39Installation de la carte système 1. Mettez en place la carte système sur le châssis. 2. Serrez les vis pour fixer la carte système à l'ordinateur. 3. Placez le support du connecteur d’alimentation sur la carte système. Serrez les vis qui fixent le support à l’ordinateur. 4. Connectez les câbles suivants à la carte système : a) pile bouton b) câble du capteur Hall c) câble de la carte à puce 5. Installez : a) l'ensemble écran b) la carte Sniffer Board c) l’ensemble repose-mains d) le clavier e) le cache de fond de l'ordinateur f) la carte SD g) la batterie 6. Appliquez les procédures décrites dans Après une intervention à l’intérieur de l’ordinateur. Retrait du module thermique 1. Appliquez les procédures décrites dans Avant d’intervenir sur l’ordinateur. 2. Retirez : a) la batterie 40b) Carte SD c) le cache de fond de l'ordinateur d) clavier e) le repose-mains f) l'ensemble écran g) connecteur d'alimentation h) la carte système 3. 4. Retirez les vis qui fixent le module thermique à la carte système et soulevez le module pour le dégager de la carte système. Installation du module thermique 1. Positionnez le module thermique sur la carte système. 2. Serrez les vis qui fixent le module thermique à la carte système. 3. Installez : a) la carte système b) le connecteur d'alimentation c) l'ensemble écran d) le repose-mains e) le clavier f) le cache de fond de l'ordinateur g) la carte SD h) la batterie 4. Appliquez les procédures décrites dans Après une intervention à l’intérieur de l’ordinateur. 41423 Configuration du système Présentation de la configuration du système La configuration du système vous permet de : • modifier les informations de configuration du système après l'ajout, la modification ou le retrait d'un composant matériel. • modifier ou ajouter une option sélectionnable par l'utilisateur, son mot de passe, par exemple. • connaître la capacité de mémoire du système ou définir le type de disque dur installé. • vérifier l'état de la batterie. Avant d'utiliser le programme de configuration du système, il est recommandé de noter les informations qui y sont affichées pour pouvoir s'en servir ultérieurement. PRÉCAUTION : Si vous n'êtes pas expert en informatique, ne modifiez pas les réglages de ce programme. Certaines modifications peuvent empêcher votre ordinateur de fonctionner correctement. Séquence de démarrage La séquence de démarrage permet d'ignorer l'ordre des périphériques d'amorçage définis par la configuration du système et de démarrer directement depuis un périphérique donné (lecteur optique ou disque dur, par exemple). Lors du test à la mise sous tension (POST), lorsque le logo Dell s'affiche, vous pouvez : • Accéder à la configuration du système en appuyant sur la touche • Afficher le menu de démarrage à affichage unique en appuyant sur la touche Ce menu contient les périphériques depuis lesquels vous pouvez démarrer, y compris l'option des diagnostics. Les options du menu de démarrage sont les suivantes : • Removable Drive (Unité amovible (si disponible)) • STXXXX Drive (Unité STXXXX) REMARQUE : XXX correspond au numéro d'unité SATA. • Optical Drive (Lecteur optique) • Diagnostics REMARQUE : Si vous choisissez Diagnostics, l'écran ePSA diagnostics (Diagnostics ePSA) s'affiche. L'écran de séquence de démarrage affiche également l'option d'accès à l'écran System Setup (Configuration du système). Touches de navigation Le tableau suivant répertorie les touches de navigation dans la configuration du système. 43REMARQUE : Pour la plupart des options de configuration du système, les modifications que vous apportées sont enregistrées, mais elles ne sont appliquées qu'au redémarrage de l'ordinateur. Tableau 1. Touches de navigation Touches Navigation Touche Haut Passe au champ précédent. Touche Bas Passe au champ suivant. Permet de sélectionner une valeur dans le champ sélectionné (si applicable) ou de suivre le lien dans le champ. Barre d'espacement Développe ou réduit une liste déroulante, si applicable. Passe à la zone suivante active. REMARQUE : Pour la navigateur graphique standard uniquement. Passe à la page précédente tant que vous affichez l'écran principal. Si vous appuyez sur dans l'écran principal, un message demande d'enregistrer les modifications non enregistrées et le système redémarre. Affiche le fichier d'aide de la configuration du système. Mise à jour du BIOS Il est recommandé de mettre à jour le BIOS (configuration du système) lors du remplacement de la carte système ou lorsqu'une mise à jour est disponible. Pour les ordinateurs portables, vérifiez que la batterie est complètement chargée et que l'ordinateur est connecté au secteur. 1. Redémarrez l'ordinateur. 2. Accédez au site support.dell.com/support/downloads. 3. Si vous disposez du numéro de service ou du numéro de service express de l'ordinateur : REMARQUE : Pour les ordinateurs de bureau, le numéro de service se trouve sur l'étiquette sur la face avant de l'ordinateur. REMARQUE : Pour les ordinateurs portables, le numéro de service se trouve sur le fond de l'ordinateur. REMARQUE : Sur les PC All-In-One, l’étiquette du numéro de service se trouve à l’arrière de l’ordinateur. a) Entrez le numéro de service ou le numéro de service express et cliquez sur Submit (Envoyer). b) Cliquez sur Submit et passez à l'étape 5. 4. Si vous ne disposez pas de ces numéros, sélectionnez l'unr des options suivantrs : a) Automatically detect my Service Tag for me (Détecter automatiquement le numéro de service) b) Choose from My Products and Services List (Choisir dans la liste Mes produits et services) c) Choose from a list of all Dell products (Choisir dans la liste de tous les produits Dell) 5. Dans l'écran de l'application et des pilotes, sous la liste déroulante Operating System (Système d'exploiration), sélectionnez BIOS. 6. Identifiez le dernier fichier BIOS et cliquez sur Download File (Télécharger le fichier). 7. Sélectionnez le mode de téléchargement préférentiel dans Please select your download method below window (Sélectionner le mode de téléchargement dans la fenêtre ci-dessous) et cliquez sur Download Now (Télécharger maintenant). La fenêtre File Download (Téléchargement de fichier) s'affiche. 448. Cliquez sur Save (Enregistrer) pour enregistrer le fichier sur l'ordinateur. 9. Cliquez sur Run (Exécuter) pour installer les paramètres BIOS actualisés sur l'ordinateur. Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent. System Setup Option (Option de configuration du système) Généralités Tableau 2. Généralités Option Description Informations sur le système Cette section liste les fonctions matérielles principales de votre ordinateur. • System Information (Informations système) : affiche la version du BIOS, le numéro de service, le numéro d'inventaire, l'étiquette de propriété , la date d'achat, la date de fabrication et le code de service express. • Memory Information (Informations mémoire) : affiche la mémoire installée, la mémoire disponible, la vitesse de la mémoire, le mode des canaux mémoire, la technologie de mémoire, la capacité DIMM A et la capacité DIMM B. • Processor Information (informations processeur) : affiche le type de processeur, le nombre de cœurs, l'ID processeur, la vitesse de l'horloge en cours, la vitesse de l'horloge minimale, la vitesse de l'horloge maximale, la mémoire cache L2 du processeur, la mémoire cache L3 du processeur, la capacité HT et la technologie 64 bits. • Device Information (Informations sur les périphériques) : affiche les informations relatives au disque dur principal, au périphérique de baie fixe, au périphérique eSATA du système, au périphérique eSATA d'accueil, à l'adresse MAC LOM, au contrôleur vidéo, à la version BIOS vidéo, à la mémoire vidéo, au type d'écran, à la résolution native, au contrôleur audio, au contrôleur de modem, au périphérique Wi-Fi, au périphérique WiGig, au périphérique cellulaire et au périphérique Bluetooth. Battery Information Affiche l’état de la batterie et le type d’adaptateur secteur raccordé à l’ordinateur Boot Sequence (Séquence d’amorçage) Permet de modifier l’ordre dans lequel l’ordinateur essaie de trouver un système d’exploitation. • Diskette Drive • Internal HDD (Disque dur interne) • USB Storage Device (Périphérique de stockage USB) • CD/DVD/CD-RW Drive (Lecteur de CD/DVD/CD-RW) • Onboard NIC (Carte réseau intégrée) Boot List Option Permet de modifier la Boot List Option (Liste d'amorçage) basée sur les configurations du périphérique d'amorçage Legacy : si le périphérique d'amorçage ne prend pas en charge le démarrage en mode UEFI. Ex : Windows 7 UEFI : si le périphérique d'amorçage prend en charge le démarrage en mode UEFI. Ex : Windows 8 Options de démarrage avancées. Permet de modifier la configuration deEnable Legacy Option ROMs (ROM Activer l'option Hérité). • ROM Activer l'option Hérité Date/Heure Permet de modifier la date et l’heure. System Configuration (Configuration du système) 45Tableau 3. System Configuration (Configuration du système) Option Description Integrated NIC Permet de configurer le contrôleur réseau intégré. Options possibles : • Désactivée • Activée • Enabled w/PXE (w/PXE activé) : cette option est activée par défaut. • Enable UEFI Network Stack (Activer la pile réseau en mode UEFI) : permet d'activer les protocoles de réseau UEFI dans un environnement pré-SE. SATA Operation Permet de configurer le contrôleur SATA interne. Options possibles : • Désactivée • ATA • AHCI • RAID On (Raid activé) : cette option est activée par défaut. Disques Vous permet de configurer les lecteurs SATA intégrés. Tous les lecteurs sont intégrés par défaut. Les options sont : • SATA-0 • SATA-4 SMART Reporting Ce champ indique si les erreurs de disque dur des lecteurs intégrés sont signalées lors du démarrage du système. Cette technologie fait partie de la spécification SMART (Self Monitoring Analysis and Reporting Technology). Cette option est désactivée par défaut. • Enable SMART Reporting (Signaler les erreurs SMART) USB Configuration Ce champ configure le contrôleur USB intégré. Si Boot Support (Activation support d'amorçage) est activé, le système peut démarrer depuis n'importe quels périphériques de stockage de masse USB (HDD, clé de mémoire, disquette). Si le port USB est activé, le périphérique qui y est connecté est activé et disponible pour le SE. S'il ne l'est pas, le SE ne peut pas détecter le périphérique connecté au port. • Enable Boot Support (Activer le support d'amorçage) • Enable External USB Port (Activer le port USB externe) REMARQUE : Le clavier et la souris USB fonctionnent dans la configuration BIOS indépendamment de ces paramètres. USB PowerShare Cette option configure le comportement de la fonction USB PowerShare. Cette fonctionnalité est destinée à permettre aux utilisateurs de recharger des périphériques externes (téléphones, lecteurs portables de musique, etc.) à l’aide de l’alimentation de la batterie système via le port USB PowerShare, même lorsque le système est éteint. Cette option est désactivée par défaut. • Enable USB PowerShare (Activer USB PowerShare) 46Option Description Keyboard Illumination (Eclairage du clavier) Ce champ vous permet de choisir le mode de fonctionnement de la fonction d'éclairage du clavier. Le niveau de luminosité du clavier s'étend de 25% à 100% • Disabled (Désactivé) : cette option est activée par défaut. • Level is 25% (Niveau de 25 %) • Level is 50% (Niveau de 50 %) • Niveau de 75% • Niveau : 100 % Unobtrusive Mode (mode nonintrusif) Cette fonction, lorsqu'activée en pressant Fn+B permet de désactiver toutes les émissions de lumière et de son, y compris pour le ventilateur système et les communications sans-fil. Cette option est désactivée par défaut. • Enable Unobtrusive Mode (Activer le mode non intrusif) Miscellaneous Devices Permet d’activer ou de désactiver les périphériques suivants : • Enable Microphone (Activer le microphone) • Enable Camera (Activer la webcam) • Enable eSATA Ports (Activer les ports eSATA) • Enable Media Card (Activer le lecteur de carte) • Disable Media Card (Désactiver le lecteur de carte) REMARQUE : Tous les périphériques sont activés par défaut. Vous pouvez également activer ou désactiver la carte Média. Vidéo Tableau 4. Vidéo Option Description LCD Brightness Permet de configurer la luminosité de l’écran selon la source d’alimentation (sur batterie et sur courant). REMARQUE : Les paramètres vidéo sont visibles uniquement lorsqu’une carte vidéo est installée dans le système. Dynamic Backlight Control (Contrôle dynamique du rétro- éclairage) Permet d’activer/désactiver le contrôle dynamique du rétro-éclairage. Sécurité Tableau 5. Sécurité Option Description Admin Password Permet de définir, modifier, ou supprimer le mot de passe de l’administrateur (admin). REMARQUE : Vous devez définir le mot de passe admin avant de configurer le mot de passe système ou de disque dur. La suppression du mot de passe admin supprime automatiquement le mot de passe système et le mot de passe du disque dur. 47Option Description REMARQUE : Les changements de mot de passe prennent effet immédiatement. Réglage par défaut : Non configuré System Password Permet de définir, modifier ou supprimer le mot de passe du système. REMARQUE : Les changements de mot de passe prennent effet immédiatement. Réglage par défaut : Non configuré Internal HDD-0 Password Permet de définir ou de modifier le mot de passe du disque dur interne du système. REMARQUE : Les changements de mot de passe prennent effet immédiatement. Réglage par défaut : Non configuré Strong Password Permet d’appliquer l’option de toujours définir des mots de passe renforcés. Paramètre par défaut : Enable Strong Password (Activer les mots de passe sécurisés) n'est pas sélectionné. REMARQUE : Si l'option Strong Password est activée, les mots de passe admin et système doivent contenir au moins 8 caractères dont un caractère en majuscule et un caractère en minuscule. Password Configuration Permet de déterminer la longueur minimale et maximale des mots de passe de l’administrateur et du système. Password Bypass Permet d’activer ou de désactiver la permission d’ignorer le mot de passe du système et du disque dur interne quand ceux-ci sont configurés. Options possibles : • Désactivée • Reboot bypass (Ignorer au redémarrage) Réglage par défaut : Disabled (Désactivé) Password Change Permet d’activer ou de désactiver la permission des mots de passe du système et du disque dur interne quand le mot de passe de l’administrateur est configuré. Paramètre par défaut : Allow Non-Admin Password Changes (Autoriser les modifications de mot de passe non-admin) est sélectionné Non-Admin Setup Changes Permet de déterminer si des modifications des options de configuration sont autorisées lorsqu’un mot de passe de l’administrateur est défini. En cas de désactivation, les options de configuration sont verrouillées par le mot de passe de l’administrateur. TPM Security Permet d’activer ou de désactiver le contrôleur TPM intégré pendant le POST. Réglage par défaut : l’option est désactivée Computrace Permet d’activer ou de désactiver le logiciel optionnel Computrace. Options possibles : • Deactivate (Désactiver définitivement) • Désactiver • Activate (Activer définitivement) 48Option Description REMARQUE : Les options Activate et Disable respectivement activent ou désactivent la fonctionnalité de manière permanente et aucune autre modification n’est autorisée Réglage par défaut : Deactivate (Désactiver définitivement) CPU XD Support Permet d’activer le mode Exécution Désactivation du processeur. Réglage par défaut : Enable CPU XD Support (Activer la prise en charge de CPU XD) OROM Keyboard Access Permet de définir la possibilité d’entrer dans les écrans de configuration de l’option ROM en utilisant des touches de raccourci pendant le démarrage. Options possibles : • Activer • One Time Enable (Activer une seule fois) • Désactiver Réglage par défaut : Enable (Activer) Admin Setup Lockout Permet d’empêcher les utilisateurs d’entrer dans le programme de configuration lorsqu’un mot de passe de l’administrateur est configuré. Réglage par défaut : Enable Admin Setup Lockout (Activer le verrouillage de la configuration admin) n’est pas sélectionné Secure Boot Tableau 6. Secure Boot Option Description Secure Boot Enable (Activer Secure Boot) Permet d’activer ou de désactiver Secure Boot. Pour que vous puissiez activer Secure Boot, le système doit être en mode UEFI Boot et l’option Enable Legacy Option ROMs doit être désactivée. L’option est désactivée par défaut. Expert Key Management Permet d’activer Expert Key Management pour manipuler les bases de données. L’option est : • Enable Custom Mode. L’option est désactivée par défaut. Les options de Custom Mode Key Management sont : • PK • KEK • db • dbx Performances Tableau 7. Performances Option Description Multi Core Support Ce champ indique si le processus a un ou plusieurs cœurs activés. Les performances de certaines applications s’améliorent avec des cœurs supplémentaires. Cette option est activée par défaut. Elle permet d’activer ou de désactiver le support multicœur pour le processeur. Options possibles : • Tous 49Option Description • 1 • 2 Réglage par défaut : All (Tous) Intel® SpeedStep Permet d’activer ou de désactiver la fonctionnalité Intel SpeedStep. Réglage par défaut : Enable Intel SpeedStep (Activer le contrôleur SpeedStep) C States Control Permet d’activer ou de désactiver les états de veille supplémentaires du processeur. Paramètre par défaut : l'option C state est activée. Intel® TurboBoost Permet d’activer ou de désactiver le mode Intel TurboBoost du processeur. Réglage par défaut : Enable Intel TurboBoost (Activer Intel TurboBoost) Hyper-Thread Control Permet d’activer ou de désactiver le mode HyperThreading du processeur. Réglage par défaut : Enabled (Activé) Rapid Start Technology (Technologie Rapid Start) Intel Rapid Start est susceptible d’améliorer la durée de vie de la batterie en plaçant automatiquement le système en état de faible consommation d’energie pendant une mise en veille au bout du délai spécifié par l’utilisateur. L’option est activée par défaut : • Intel Rapid Start • Transition to Rapid Start when using Timer (Transition à Rapid Start lors de l’utilisation d’une horloge) La valeur Rapid Start Timer peut être configurée pour placer le système en Rapid Start. Power Management (Gestion de l’alimentation) Tableau 8. Power Management (Gestion de l’alimentation) Option Description AC Behavior Permet d’activer ou de désactiver l’option de mise sous tension automatique de l’ordinateur lorsque celui-ci est connecté à un adaptateur secteur. Réglage par défaut : Wake on AC (Réveil sur CA) n’est pas sélectionné. Auto On Time Permet de configurer l’heure à laquelle l’ordinateur doit s’allumer automatiquement. Options possibles : • Désactivée • Every Day (Chaque jour) • Weekdays (Jours de semaine) • Select Days (Sélectionner des jours) Réglage par défaut : Disabled (Désactivé) USB Wake Support Permet d’autoriser les périphériques USB à sortir le système de l’état de veille. REMARQUE : Ce champ n’est fonctionnel que lorsque l’adaptateur secteur est raccordé. Si cet adaptateur est retiré pendant la veille, la configuration du système supprime le courant à tous les ports USB afin de préserver l’alimentation de la batterie. • Enable USB Wake Support (Activer la prise en charge du réveil USB) 50Option Description • Paramètre par défaut : Enable USB Wake Support (Activer la prise en charge du réveil USB) n'est pas sélectionné. Wireless Radio Control Permet d’activer ou de désactiver la fonction qui commute automatiquement entre les réseaux filaires et sans fil sans dépendre de la connexion physique. • Control WLAN Radio (Contrôle Radio WLAN) • Control WWAN Radio (Contrôle Radio WWAN) • Paramètre par défaut : Control WLAN radio ou Control WWAN radio n'est pas sélectionné Wake on LAN/WLAN (Activation réseau LAN/WLAN) Permet d’activer ou de désactiver la fonction qui rallume l’ordinateur quand cette fonction est déclenchée par un signal LAN. • Disabled (Désactivé) : cette option est activée par défaut. • LAN Only (LAN uniquement) • WLAN Only (WLAN uniquement) • LAN or WLAN (LAN ou WLAN) Block Sleep (Bloquer la mise en veille) Cette option pemet de bloquer la mise en veille (état S3) de l'environnement du système d'exploitation. Block Sleep (S3 state) (Bloquer mise en veille (état S3) — cette option est désactivée par défaut. Primary Battery Charge Configuration (Configuration de la charge de la batterie principale) Vous permet de sélectionner le mode de charge de la batterie. Les options sont : • Adaptive (Adaptative) : cette option est activée par défaut. • Standard • Express Charge (Charge rapide) • Primarily AC use (Utilisation principalement du CA) • Personnalisé Si l'option Custom Charge est sélectionnée, il vous est possible de configurer le début et la fin de la charge. REMARQUE : Les modes de charge ne sont pas tous disponibles pour tous les types de batteries. Intel Smart Connect Technology Permet de rechercher, à intervalles réguliers, les réseaux Wi-Fi à proximité lorsque l'ordinateur est en veille. Smart Connect synchronise les e-mails et applications de réseaux sociaux ouvertes avant la mise en veille du système. Cette option est désactivée par défaut. POST Behavior (Comportement du POST) Tableau 9. POST Behavior (Comportement du POST) Option Description Adapter Warnings Permet d’autoriser ou d’empêcher les messages d’avertissement de configuration du système (BIOS) lorsqu’on utilise certains adaptateurs d’alimentation. Réglage par défaut : Enable Adapter Warnings (Activer avertissements adaptateur) Pavé numérique (intégré) Vous permet de choisir une ou deux méthodes pour activer le pavé numérique intégré dans le clavier interne. 51Option Description • Fn Key Only (Touche Fn uniquement) : cette option est activée par défaut. • By Numlock (Verr num.) Numlock Enable Permet d’activer le verrouillage numérique au démarrage de l’ordinateur. Réglage par défaut : Enable Network (Activer réseau) Fn Key Emulation Permet de configurer l’option dans laquelle la touche est utilisée pour simuler le fonctionnement de la touche . Réglage par défaut : Enable Fn Key Emulation (Activer l’émulation de la touche Fn) Fast Boot Permet d’accélérer le démarrage en ignorant certaines procédures de vérification de la compatibilité. • Minimal (Minimale) • Thorough (Complète) : cette option est activée par défaut. • Auto Virtualization Support (Prise en charge de la virtualisation) Tableau 10. Virtualization Support (Prise en charge de la virtualisation) Option Description Virtualization Permet d’activer ou de désactiver la technologie Intel Virtualization. Réglage par défaut : Enable Intel Virtualization Technology (Activer la technologie Intel Virtualization) VT for Direct I/O (Technologie de virtualisation pour les E/S directes) Autorise ou empêche le VMM (Virtual Machine Monitor (VMM) d'utiliser les fonctions matérielles supplémentaires fournies par la technologie Intel® Virtualization pour les E/S directes. Enable VT for Direct I/O (Activer la VT pour les E/S directes) : cette option est activée par défaut. Trusted Execution (Exécution de confiance) Cette option indique si un MVMM (Measured Virtual Machine Monitor) peut utiliser les fonctions matérielles supplémentaires fournies par la technologie Intel Trusted Execution. La technologie de virtualisation TPM et la technologie de virtualisation pour les E/S directes doivent être activées pour pouvoir utiliser cette fonction. Trusted Execution (Exécution de confiance) : désactivée par défaut. Sans fil Tableau 11. Sans fil Option Description Wireless Switch Permet de configurer les périphériques sans fil pouvant être contrôlés par le commutateur sans fil. Options possibles : • WWAN • WLAN • WiGig • Bluetooth Toutes les options sont activées par défaut. Wireless Device Enable Permet d'activer ou de désactiver les périphériques internes sans fils. • WWAN 52Option Description • WLAN/WiGig • Bluetooth Toutes les options sont activées par défaut. Maintenance (Maintenance) Tableau 12. Maintenance (Maintenance) Option Description Numéro de service Affiche le numéro de service de l’ordinateur. Numéro d'inventaire Permet de créer un numéro d’inventaire système si aucun numéro d’inventaire n’a été défini. Cette option n’est pas définie par défaut. Journaux système Tableau 13. Journaux système Option Description BIOS Events Permet de voir et d’effacer les événements POST de configuration du système (BIOS). Thermal Events Permet de voir et d’effacer les événements thermiques. Power Events Permet de voir et d’effacer les événements d’alimentation électrique. 53544 Dépannage Diagnostisc ePSA (Enhanced Pre-Boot System Assessment) Les diagnostics ePSA (également appelés diagnostics système) vérifient complètement le matériel. ePSA est intégré au BIOS et il est démarré par le BIOS en interne. Les diagnostics système intégrés fournissent des options pour des périphériques ou des groupes de périphériques spécifiques pour : • Exécuter des tests automatiquement ou dans un mode interactif • Répéter les tests • Afficher ou enregistrer les résultats des tests • Exécuter des tests rigoureux pour présentent des options de tests supplémentaires pour fournir des informations complémentaires sur un ou des périphériques défaillants • Afficher des messages d'état qui indiquent si les tests ont abouti • Afficher des messages d'erreur qui indiquent les problèmes détectés au cours des tests PRÉCAUTION : Utilisez les diagnostics système pour tester l'ordinateur. L'utilisation de ce programme avec d'autres ordinateurs peut générer des résultats non valides ou des messages d'erreur. REMARQUE : Certains tests de périphériques nécessitent l'interaction de l'utilsateur. Veillez à toujours être à côté de l'ordinateur lorsque vous exécutez les tests de diagnostic. 1. Mettez l'ordinateur sous tension. 2. Lorsque l'ordinateur démarre, appuyez sur la touche lorsque le logo Dell apparaît. 3. Dans l'écran du menu de démarrage, sélectionnez l'option Diagnostics. La fenêtre Enhanced Pre-boot System Assessment s'affiche avec la liste de tous les périphériques détectés sur l'ordinateur. Le programme de diagnostics lance les tests sur tous les périphériques détectés. 4. Si vous voulez lancer un test de diagnostic sur un périphérique donné, appuyez sur ; cliquez sur Yes (Oui) pour arrêter le test de diagnostic. 5. Sélectionnez le périphérique dans le panneau de gauche et cliquez sur Run Tests (Exécuter les tests). 6. En cas de problèmes, des codes d'erreur s'affichent. Notez les codes d'erreur et contactez Dell. Diagnostics Tableau 14. Voyants d'état de l'appareil S'allume lorsque vous allumez l'ordinateur et clignote lorsque l'ordinateur est en mode d'économie d'énergie. S'allume lorsque l'ordinateur lit ou écrit des données. 55S'allume ou clignote pour indiquer l'état de charge de la batterie. S'allume lorsque le réseau sans fil est activé. Si l'ordinateur est branché à une prise secteur, le voyant d'état de la batterie fonctionne de la manière suivante : Tableau 15. Voyants d'état de la batterie Un voyant orange et un voyant bleu clignotent alternativement Un adaptateur secteur non pris en charge par Dell ou non authentifié est connecté à votre portable. Alternativement un voyant orange clignotant et un voyant bleu fixe Défaillance de batterie temporaire avec adaptateur secteur présent. Voyant orange clignotant constamment Défaillance de batterie fatale avec adaptateur secteur présent. Voyant éteint Batterie en mode de chargement complet avec adaptateur secteur présent. Voyant blanc fixe allumé Batterie en mode de chargement avec adaptateur secteur présent. Indications données par les voyants situés au-dessus du clavier : Tableau 16. Voyants d'état du clavier S'allume lorsque le pavé numérique est activé. S'allume lorsque la fonction Verr Maj est activée. S'allume lorsque la fonction Arrêt défil est activée. Codes de bips L'ordinateur peut émettre des séries de bips au cours du démarrage si l'écran n'affiche pas d'erreur ou de problème. Ces séries de bips, appelées codes de bips, identifient divers problèmes. Le délai entre chaque bip est de 300 ms et de 3 secondes entre chaque groupe de bips et le bip est émis pendant 300 ms. Après chaque bip et groupe de bips le BIOS doit détecter si l'utilisateur appuie sur le bouton Marche/Arrêt. Dans cas, le BIOS quitte la boucle et exécute l'arrêt normal et le système d'alimentation. Code Cause et dépannage 1 Total de contrôle ROM BIOS en cours ou ayant échoué Défaillance de la carte système. Couvre l'endommagement du BIOS ou une erreur ROM 2 Aucune RAM détectée 56Code Cause et dépannage Aucune mémoire n'est détectée 3 Erreur du jeu de puces (jeu de puces North et South Bridge, erreur DMA/IMR/minuteur), échec du test de l'horloge calendrier, échec Gate A20 , échec puce Super I/O, échec du test du contrôleur du clavier Défaillance de la carte système 4 Défaillance de lecture/écriture en RAM Défaillance de la mémoire 5 Défaillance de l'alimentation de l'horloge temps réel Défaillance de la batterie CMOS 6 Échec du test du BIOS vidéo Défaillance de la carte vidéo 7 UC - Échec du test de la mémoire cache Défaillance du processeur 8 Écran Défaillance de l'écran Codes d'erreur LED Les codes LED de diagnostic sont communiqués via le voyant du bouton Marche/Arrêt. Ce bouton clignote en fonction du code LED correspondant à l'erreur. Par exemple : lorsque la mémoire n'est pas détectée (code LED 2), le voyant du bouton Marche/Arrêt clignote deux fois, marque une pause, clignote deux fois, marque une pause, et ainsi de suite jusqu'à ce que le système soit mis hors tension. Code Cause et dépannage 1 Carte système : défaillance de la ROM du BIOS La défaillance de la carte système. Couvre l'endommagement du BIOS ou une erreur ROM 2 Mémoire Aucune mémoire/RAM détectée 3 Erreur du jeu de puces (jeu de puces North et South Bridge, erreur DMA/IMR/minuteur), échec du test de l'horloge calendrier, échec Gate A20, échec puce Super I/O, échec du test du contrôleur du clavier Défaillance de la carte système 4 Défaillance de lecture/écriture en RAM Défaillance de la mémoire 5 Défaillance de l'alimentation de l'horloge temps réel Défaillance de la batterie CMOS 6 Échec du test du BIOS vidéo 57Code Cause et dépannage Défaillance de la carte vidéo 7 UC - Échec du test de la mémoire cache Défaillance du processeur 8 Écran Défaillance de l'écran 585 Caractéristiques REMARQUE : Les offres proposées peuvent varier selon les pays. Les caractéristiques suivantes se limitent à celles que la législation impose de fournir avec l’ordinateur. Pour plus d’informations sur la configuration de votre ordinateur, cliquez sur Démarrer → Aide et support et sélectionnez l’option qui permet d’afficher les informations relatives à votre ordinateur. Tableau 17. Informations sur le système Fonction Spécification Jeu de puces Jeu de puces Mobile Intel 7 series (Intel QM77) Largeur de bus DRAM 64 bits Flash EPROM SPI 32 Mo, 64 Mo Bus PCIe Gen1 100 MHz Fréquence du bus externe DMI (5 GT/s) Tableau 18. Processeur Fonction Spécification Types • Intel Core i3 série ULV • Intel Core i5 série ULV • Intel Core i7 série ULV Mémoire cache L3 jusqu'à 4 Mo Tableau 19. Mémoire Fonction Spécification Connecteur mémoire Deux emplacements SODIMM Capacité mémoire 1 Go, 2 Go ou 4 Go Type de mémoire SDRAM DDR3 (1600 MHz) Mémoire minimale 2 Go Mémoire maximale 16 Go Tableau 20. Audio Fonction Spécification Type Audio haute définition à quatre canaux Contrôleur IDT92HD93 59Fonction Spécification Conversion stéréo 24 bits (analogique-numérique et numérique-analogique) Interface : Interne audio haute définition Externe connecteur entrée microphone/casque stéréo/haut-parleurs externes Haut-parleurs Deux Amplificatîeur intégré de haut-parleurs 1 W (RMS) par canal Réglages du volume bouton multimédia, menus de programmes Tableau 21. Vidéo Fonction Spécification Type intégrée sur la carte système Contrôleur Intel HD Graphics Tableau 22. Communications Fonctions Spécification Carte réseau Ethernet 10/100/1000 Mb/s (RJ-45) Sans fil • Réseau local sans fil (WLAN) interne • Carte de réseau étendu sans fil (WWAN) Tableau 23. Ports et connecteurs Fonctions Spécification Audio un connecteur de microphone/casque stéréo/haut-parleurs Vidéo • un connecteur VGA 15 broches • connecteur HDMI à 19 broches Carte réseau Connecteur RJ-45 USB 3.0 • un port USB 3.0 conforme à PowerShare • un connecteur eSATA conforme à USB 3.0 • un connecteur conforme à USB 3.0 Lecteur de carte mémoire Un lecteur de carte mémoire 8 en 1 Carte SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) un seul carte à puce (en option) un seul empreintes digitales (en option) un seul 60Tableau 24. Écran Fonction Spécification Type HD antiéblouissant Dimensions : Hauteur 205,60 mm (8,09”) Largeur 320,90 mm (12,63”) Diagonale 355,60 mm (14”) Zone active (X/Y) 309,40 mm x 173,95 mm Résolution maximale 1366 x 768 pixels Luminosité maximale 200 nits Pixels par pouce 112 Ratio de contraste 300:1 Mégapixels 1,05 Angle de fonctionnement 180° Fréquence de rafraîchissement 60 Hz Angles minimum de visualisation : Horizontal +/- 40° Vertical +10/-30° Pas de pixel : 0,22 mm Consommation électrique (maximale) 3,8 W Tableau 25. Clavier Fonction Spécification Nombre de touches 83 (U.S.A. et Canada), 84 (Europe), 85 (Brésil) et 87 (Japon) Configuration QWERTY/AZERTY/Kanji Tableau 26. Pavé tactile Fonction Spécification Zone active : Axe des X 90 mm (3,54”) Axe des Y 44 mm (1,73”) 61Tableau 27. Batterie Fonction Spécification Type lithium ion 3 cellules (36 Wh) ultra mobile Dimensions : Profondeur 110,73 mm (4,36”) Hauteur 9,70 mm (0,38”) Largeur 333,87 mm (13,14”) Poids • 315,00 g (0,69 lb) • 470,00 g (1,03 lb) Tension 11,1 VCC Plage de températures : En fonctionnement Charge : de 0° C à 50° C (de 32° F à 158° F) Décharge : de 0° C à 70° C (de 32° F à 122° F) Hors fonctionnement de -20° C à 65° C (de 4° F à 149° F) Capable de chargement express Oui Pile bouton • lithium-ion 3 cellules • lithium-ion 6 cellules Tableau 28. AC Adapter Fonction Spécification Type 65 W / 90 W Tension d’entrée de 100 VCA à 240 VCA Courant d’entrée (maximal) 1,7 A Fréquence en entrée de 50 Hz à 60 Hz Courant de sortie 3,42 A (65 W) / 4,62 A (90 W) (continu) Tension de sortie nominale 19,5 VCC Poids : 65 W 0,29 kg (0,64 lb) 90 W 0,33 kg (0,73 lb) Dimensions : 65 W 28 mm x 47 mm x 108 mm (1,10” x 1,87” x 4,25”) 90 W 32 mm x 52 mm x 128 mm (1,26” x 2,05” x 5,04”) Plage de températures : En fonctionnement De 0 °C à 40 °C (de 32 °F à 104 °F) 62Fonction Spécification Hors fonctionnement De -40 °C à 70 °C (de -104 °F à 158 °F) Tableau 29. Caractéristiques physiques Fonction Description Hauteur 20,90 mm (0,82”) Largeur 338,20 mm (13,31”) Profondeur 229,70 mm (9,04”) Poids batterie 3 cellules 1,68 kg (3,70 lb) batterie 6 cellules 1,86 kg (4,10 lb) Tableau 30. Conditions environnementales Fonction Spécification Température : En fonctionnement De 5 °C à 35 °C (de 41 à 95 °F) Stockage De -40 °C à 65 °C (de -40 °F à 149 °F) Humidité relative (maximale) : En fonctionnement 31° C 90 % RH Stockage 39° C 95 % RH Altitude (maximale) : En fonctionnement de –16 m à 3048 m (de –50 pieds à 10 000 pieds) de 0° C à 35° C Hors fonctionnement 35 000’ de -40° C à 65° C Niveau de contaminants atmosphériques G1 selon la norme ISA-S71.04-1985 63646 Obtention d'aide Contacter Dell REMARQUE : Si vous ne disposez pas d'une connexion Internet, les informations de contact figurent sur la facture d'achat, le borderau de colisage, la facture le catalogue des produits Dell. Dell propose diverses options d'assistance et de maintenance en ligne et téléphonique. Ces options varient en fonction du pays et du produit et certains services peuvent ne pas être disponibles dans votre région Pour contacter le service commercial, technique ou client de Dell : 1. Rendez-vous sur le site www.dell.com/support. 2. Sélectionnez la catégorie d'assistance. 3. Sélectionnez l'option appropriée dans le menu déroulant Country/Region (Pays/Région) situé en haut de la page. 4. Sélectionnez le lien de service ou d'assistance approprié. 65 Dell Latitude E6430s Manuel du propriétaire Modèle réglementaire: P19S Type réglementaire: P19S002Remarques, précautions et avertissements REMARQUE : Une REMARQUE indique des informations importantes qui peuvent vous aider à mieux utiliser l'ordinateur. PRÉCAUTION : Une PRÉCAUTION indique un risque de dommage matériel ou de perte de données et vous indique comment éviter le problème. AVERTISSEMENT : Un AVERTISSEMENT indique un risque d'endommagement du matériel, de blessure corporelle ou de mort. © 2012 Dell Inc. Marques commerciales utilisées dans ce document : Dell™, le logo Dell, Dell Precision™, OptiPlex™, Latitude™, PowerEdge™, PowerVault™, PowerConnect™, OpenManage™, EqualLogic™, Compellent™, KACE™, FlexAddress™, Force10™ et Vostro™ sont des marques de Dell Inc. Intel®, Pentium®, Xeon®, Core® et Celeron® sont des marques déposées d'Intel Corporation aux États-Unis et dans d'autres pays. AMD® est une marque déposée, et AMD Opteron™, AMD Phenom™ et AMD Sempron™ sont des marques d'Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows Server®, Internet Explorer®, MS-DOS®, Windows Vista® et Active Directory® sont des marques ou des marques déposées de Microsoft Corporation aux États-Unis et/ou dans d'autres pays. Red Hat® et Red Hat® Enterprise Linux® sont des marques déposées de Red Hat, Inc. aux États-Unis et/ou dans d'autres pays. Novell® et SUSE® sont des marques déposées de Novell Inc. aux États-Unis et dans d'autres pays. Oracle® est une marque déposée d'Oracle Corporation et/ou de ses filiales. Citrix®, Xen®, XenServer® et XenMotion® sont des marques ou des marques déposées de Citrix Systems, Inc. aux États-Unis et/ou dans d'autres pays. VMware®, Virtual SMP®, vMotion®, vCenter® et vSphere® sont des marques ou des marques déposées de VMware, Inc. aux États-Unis ou dans d'autres pays. IBM® est une marque déposée d'International Business Machines Corporation. 2012 - 06 Rev. A00Table des matières Remarques, précautions et avertissements..............................................................................2 Chapitre 1: Intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur........................................................7 Avant d'intervenir dans l'ordinateur.........................................................................................................................7 Mise hors tension de l'ordinateur.............................................................................................................................8 Après intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.................................................................................................8 Chapitre 2: Retrait et installation des composants.................................................................11 Outils recommandés...............................................................................................................................................11 Retrait de la carte SD (Secure Digital)...................................................................................................................11 Installation de la carte SD (Secure Digital)............................................................................................................11 Retrait de la carte ExpressCard..............................................................................................................................12 Installation de la carte ExpressCard.......................................................................................................................12 Dépose de la batterie..............................................................................................................................................12 Pose de la batterie..................................................................................................................................................13 Retrait de la carte SIM............................................................................................................................................13 Installation de la carte SIM....................................................................................................................................14 Dépose du disque dur.............................................................................................................................................14 Pose du disque dur.................................................................................................................................................15 Dépose du lecteur optique.....................................................................................................................................16 Pose du lecteur optique..........................................................................................................................................17 Dépose du cache de base......................................................................................................................................18 Pose du cache de base..........................................................................................................................................18 Retrait du cadre du clavier.....................................................................................................................................18 Installation du cadre du clavier..............................................................................................................................19 Dépose du clavier...................................................................................................................................................19 Pose du clavier.......................................................................................................................................................21 Dépose de la carte réseau sans fil WLAN (Wireless Local Area Network)...........................................................22 Pose de la carte de réseau sans fil WLAN.............................................................................................................22 Retrait du module Bluetooth...................................................................................................................................22 Installation du module Bluetooth............................................................................................................................23 Dépose de la mémoire............................................................................................................................................24 Pose de la mémoire................................................................................................................................................24 Dépose de la pile bouton........................................................................................................................................25 Pose de la pile bouton............................................................................................................................................25 Dépose du repose-mains........................................................................................................................................25 Pose du repose-mains............................................................................................................................................27Retrait de la carte multimédia.................................................................................................................................28 Installation de la carte multimédia.........................................................................................................................29 Retrait du bâti de la carte ExpressCard..................................................................................................................29 Installation du bâti de la carte ExpressCard...........................................................................................................30 Dépose des haut-parleurs......................................................................................................................................31 Pose des haut-parleurs..........................................................................................................................................32 Retrait des caches de charnière d'écran...............................................................................................................32 Installation des caches de charnière d'écran........................................................................................................33 Dépose de l'ensemble écran..................................................................................................................................33 Pose de l'ensemble écran......................................................................................................................................36 Dépose de la carte système...................................................................................................................................36 Pose de la carte système.......................................................................................................................................38 Dépose du dissipateur de chaleur..........................................................................................................................39 Pose du dissipateur de chaleur..............................................................................................................................40 Retrait du port du connecteur d'alimentation.........................................................................................................40 Installation du port du connecteur d'alimentation.................................................................................................41 Retrait de la carte d'entrées/sorties (E/S)..............................................................................................................42 Installation de la carte d'E/S...................................................................................................................................43 Dépose du cadre d'écran.......................................................................................................................................43 Pose du cache de l'écran.......................................................................................................................................44 Dépose du panneau d'écran..................................................................................................................................44 Pose du panneau d'écran.......................................................................................................................................45 Retrait du module caméra et microphone..............................................................................................................45 Installation du module caméra et microphone.......................................................................................................46 Retrait de la carte DEL............................................................................................................................................47 Installation du panneau arrière des DEL................................................................................................................48 Retrait des parois de la charnière d'écran.............................................................................................................48 Installation des parois de la charnière d'écran......................................................................................................50 Retrait des charnières d'écran...............................................................................................................................51 Installation des charnières d'écran........................................................................................................................52 Retrait du câble LVDS et de caméra.......................................................................................................................52 Installation des câbles LVDS et de caméra............................................................................................................54 Chapitre 3: Informations sur le port d'accueil.........................................................................55 Chapitre 4: Configuration du système.......................................................................................57 Séquence de démarrage........................................................................................................................................57 Touches de navigation............................................................................................................................................57 Options du programme de configuration du système............................................................................................58 Mise à jour du BIOS ...............................................................................................................................................67 Mots de passe du système et de configuration.....................................................................................................67 Définition d'un mot de passe système et d'un mot de passe de configuration...............................................68Suppression ou modification d'un mot de passe système et/ou de configuration..........................................68 Chapitre 5: Diagnostics...............................................................................................................71 Diagnostisc ePSA (Enhanced Pre-Boot System Assessment)...............................................................................71 Voyants d'état de l'appareil....................................................................................................................................72 Voyants d'état de la batterie...................................................................................................................................72 Chapitre 6: Caractéristiques techniques..................................................................................75 Chapitre 7: Contacter Dell...........................................................................................................8161 Intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur Avant d'intervenir dans l'ordinateur Suivez les recommandations de sécurité ci-dessous pour protéger votre ordinateur et vos données personnelles de toute détérioration. Sauf indication contraire, chaque procédure mentionnée dans ce document suppose que les conditions suivantes sont réunies : • Vous avez exécuté les étapes de la section Intervention sur votre ordinateur. • Vous avez pris connaissance des informations de sécurité fournies avec votre ordinateur. • Un composant peut être remplacé ou, si acheté séparément, installé en exécutant la procédure de retrait dans l'ordre inverse. AVERTISSEMENT : Avant d'intervenir dans l'ordinateur, lisez les informations de sécurité fournies avec l'ordinateur. D'autres informations sur les meilleures pratiques de sécurité sont disponibles sur la page d'accueil Regulatory Compliance (Conformité réglementaire) accessible à l'adresse www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit. PRÉCAUTION : Pour éviter une décharge électrostatique, raccordez-vous à la terre à l'aide d'un bracelet antistatique ou en touchant une surface métallique non peinte, par exemple un connecteur sur le panneau arrière de l'ordinateur. PRÉCAUTION : Manipulez avec précaution les composants et les cartes. Ne touchez pas les composants ni les contacts des cartes. Saisissez les cartes par les bords ou par le support de montage métallique. Saisissez les composants, processeur par exemple, par les bords et non par les broches. PRÉCAUTION : Lorsque vous déconnectez un câble, tirez sur le connecteur ou sa languette, mais pas sur le câble lui-même. Certains câbles sont dotés de connecteurs avec dispositif de verrouillage. Si vous déconnectez un câble de ce type, appuyez d'abord sur le verrou. Lorsque vous démontez les connecteurs, maintenez-les alignés uniformément pour éviter de tordre les broches. Enfin, avant de connecter un câble, vérifiez que les deux connecteurs sont correctement orientés et alignés. REMARQUE : La couleur de votre ordinateur et de certains composants peut différer de celle de l'ordinateur et des composants illustrés dans ce document. Pour ne pas endommager l'ordinateur, procédez comme suit avant d'intervenir dans l'ordinateur. 1. Assurez-vous que la surface de travail est plane et propre afin d'éviter de rayer le capot de l'ordinateur. 2. Mettez l'ordinateur hors tension (voir la section Mise hors tension de l'ordinateur). 3. Si l'ordinateur est connecté à une station d'accueil, telle qu'un périphérique d'accueil ou une extension de batterie en option, déconnectez-le. 7PRÉCAUTION : Pour retirer un câble réseau, déconnectez-le d'abord de l'ordinateur, puis du périphérique réseau. 4. Déconnectez tous les câbles externes du système. 5. Débranchez du secteur l'ordinateur et tous les périphériques qui y sont connectés. 6. Fermez l'écran et retournez l'ordinateur sur une surface plane. REMARQUE : Pour éviter d'endommager la carte système, vous devez retirer la batterie principale avant de dépanner l'ordinateur. 7. Retirez la batterie principale. 8. Remettez l'ordinateur à l'endroit. 9. Ouvrez l'écran. 10. Appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation pour raccorder la carte système à la terre. PRÉCAUTION : Pour prévenir tout risque de choc électrique, débranchez toujours l'ordinateur de la prise électrique avant d'ouvrir l'écran. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de toucher un élément dans l'ordinateur, raccordez-vous à la terre en touchant une surface métallique non peinte, telle que le métal à l'arrière de l'ordinateur. Pendant l'intervention, touchez régulièrement une surface métallique non peinte pour éliminer l'électricité statique qui pourrait endommager les composants. 11. Retirez les ExpressCard ou cartes à puce installées des logements appropriés. Mise hors tension de l'ordinateur PRÉCAUTION : Pour ne pas perdre des données, enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers ouverts et quittez tous les programmes ouverts avant de mettre hors tension l'ordinateur. 1. Arrêtez le système d'exploitation : – Dans Windows 7: Cliquez sur Démarrer , puis cliquez sur Arrêter. – Dans Windows Vista : Cliquez sur Démarrer , puis sur la flèche dans l'angle inférieur gauche du menu Démarrer, comme indiqué ci-dessous, puis sur Arrêter. – Dans Windows XP: Cliquez sur Démarrer→ Arrêter l'ordinateur → Éteindre . L'ordinateur s'éteint à la fin de la procédure d'arrêt du système d'exploitation. 2. Vérifiez que l'ordinateur et tous les périphériques connectés sont hors tension. Si l'ordinateur et les périphériques connectés n'ont pas été mis hors tension automatiquement lorsque vous avez arrêté le système d'exploitation, appuyez sur le bouton Marche/Arrêt et maintenez-le enfoncé pendant quatre secondes environ pour les mettre hors tension. Après intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur Une fois les procédures de réinstallation terminées, n'oubliez pas de brancher les périphériques externes, cartes, câbles, etc. avant de mettre l'ordinateur sous tension. 8PRÉCAUTION : Pour éviter d'endommager l'ordinateur, utilisez uniquement la batterie conçue pour cet ordinateur Dell spécifique. N'employez pas de batteries conçues pour d'autres ordinateurs Dell. 1. Branchez les périphériques externes, par exemple réplicateur de port, extension de batterie ou périphérique d'accueil, et remettez en place les cartes comme l'ExpressCard, le cas échéant. 2. Branchez les câbles téléphoniques ou de réseau sur l'ordinateur. PRÉCAUTION : Pour connecter un câble réseau, branchez-le d'abord le périphérique du réseau et sur l'ordinateur. 3. Réinstallez la batterie. 4. Branchez l'ordinateur et tous ses périphériques sur leur prise secteur. 5. Mettez l'ordinateur sous tension. 9102 Retrait et installation des composants Cette section fournit des informations détaillées sur le retrait ou l'installation des composants de l'ordinateur. Outils recommandés Les procédures dans ce document peuvent nécessiter les outils suivants : • petit tournevis à tête plate • tournevis cruciforme • petite pointe en plastique Retrait de la carte SD (Secure Digital) 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Appuyez sur la carte SD pour l'extraire de l'ordinateur. 3. Sortez la carte SD de l'ordinateur. Installation de la carte SD (Secure Digital) 1. Faites glisser la carte SD dans son logement jusqu'à ce que vous entendiez un clic. 2. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. 11Retrait de la carte ExpressCard 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Appuyez sur la carte ExpressCard pour la dégager de l'ordinateur. 3. Faites glisser la carte ExpressCard hors de l'ordinateur. Installation de la carte ExpressCard 1. Faites glisser la carte ExpressCard dans son emplacement jusqu’à ce que vous l'entendiez s'enclencher. 2. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Dépose de la batterie 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Faites glisser les loquets pour déverrouiller la batterie. 3. Retirez la batterie de l'ordinateur. 12Pose de la batterie 1. Faites glisser la batterie dans son logement jusqu’à ce que vous l'entendiez s'enclencher. 2. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Retrait de la carte SIM 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Déposez la batterie. 3. Appuyez sur la carte SIM pour la dégager de l'ordinateur. 4. Glissez la carte SIM hors de l'ordinateur. 13Installation de la carte SIM 1. Faites coulisser la carte SIM dans son logement. 2. Posez la batterie. 3. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Dépose du disque dur 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Déposez la batterie. 3. Déposez les vis de fixation du disque dur à l'ordinateur. 4. Sortez le disque dur de l'ordinateur en le faisant glisser. 145. Retirez la vis de fixation du support du disque dur au disque dur. 6. Retirez le support de disque dur du disque dur. 7. Retirez l'isolation du disque dur. Pose du disque dur 1. Installez l'isolation du disque dur. 2. Emboîtez le support sur le disque dur. 3. Serrez la vis de fixation du support de disque dur sur le disque dur. 4. Faites glisser et insérez le disque dur dans son logement. 5. Serrez les vis de fixation du disque dur à l'ordinateur. 6. Posez la batterie. 7. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. 15Dépose du lecteur optique 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Déposez la batterie. 3. Poussez la poignée d'éjection du lecteur optique pour la libérer. 4. Faites glisser le disque dur et sortez-le de l'ordinateur. 5. Retirez la vis de fixation du loquet à l'unité optique. 6. Retirez le loquet de l'unité optique. 167. Serrez les vis qui fixent le support du loquet du lecteur optique à ce dernier. 8. Retirez le support du loquet du lecteur optique. 9. Tirez et retirez le chariot du lecteur optique. Pose du lecteur optique 1. Fixez le chariot du lecteur optique au lecteur optique. 2. Fixez le support du loquet du lecteur optique. 173. Serrez la vis pour fixer le loquet du lecteur optique. 4. Fixez le loquet du lecteur optique. 5. Serrez la vis de fixation du loquet du lecteur optique. 6. Faites glisser le lecteur optique dans son logement. 7. Faites pivoter l'ordinateur et poussez la poignée d'éjection pour fixer le lecteur optique. 8. Posez la batterie. 9. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Dépose du cache de base 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Déposez la batterie. 3. Retirez les vis de fixation du cache de fond à l'ordinateur. 4. Soulevez le cache de fond pour le retirer de l'ordinateur. Pose du cache de base 1. Placez le cache de fond en alignant les orifices des vis sur l'ordinateur. 2. Serrez les vis de fixation du cache de fond à l'ordinateur. 3. Posez la batterie. 4. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Retrait du cadre du clavier 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Déposez la batterie. 3. Munissez-vous d'un objet en plastique et sous le cadre du clavier écartez le cadre pour le libérer de l'ordinateur. 184. Ecartez le cadre du clavier des bords et du fond. 5. Soulevez le cadre pour le retirer. Installation du cadre du clavier 1. Alignez le cadre du clavier sur son logement. 2. Appuyez sur les côtés du cadre du clavier jusqu'à ce qu'il s'enclenche. 3. Posez la batterie. 4. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Dépose du clavier 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Déposez la batterie. 3. Retirez le cadre du clavier. 4. Retirez les vis de fixation du clavier à l'ordinateur. 195. Retirez les vis qui fixent le clavier à l'ensemble du repose-mains. 6. Soulevez le clavier et faites-le pour accéder au câble du clavier. 7. Débranchez de la carte système le câble du clavier. 8. Retirez le clavier de l'ordinateur. 209. Débranchez le câble du clavier de ce dernier. 10. Retirez le câble du clavier de ce dernier. Pose du clavier 1. Connectez le câble du clavier et fixez-le au clavier avec la bande. 2. Connectez le câble du clavier à la carte système. 3. Faites glisser le clavier dans son compartiment et veuillez à ce qu'il s'enclenche. 4. Serrez les vis de fixation du clavier au repose-mains. 5. Retournez l'ordinateur et serrez les vis de fixation du clavier. 6. Installez le cadre du clavier. 7. Posez la batterie. 8. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. 21Dépose de la carte réseau sans fil WLAN (Wireless Local Area Network) 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Déposez la batterie. 3. Retirez le cache de fond. 4. Débranchez les câbles d'antenne de la carte WLAN puis retirez la vis fixant la carte WLAN à l'ordinateur. Retirez la carte WLAN de l'ordinateur. Pose de la carte de réseau sans fil WLAN 1. Insérez la carte WLAN dans son connecteur à 45 degrés dans son logement. 2. Branchez les câbles d'antenne sur leurs connecteurs respectifs marqués sur la carte WLAN. 3. Serrez la vis de fixation de la carte WLAN à l'ordinateur. 4. Posez : a) le cache de base b) la batterie 5. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Retrait du module Bluetooth 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Déposez la batterie. 3. Retirez le cache de fond. 4. Débranchez le câble Bluetooth de la carte système. 5. Retirez le câble Bluetooth de son chemin d'acheminement vers l'ordinateur. 226. Retirez la vis qui fixe le module Bluetooth à l'ordinateur. 7. Retirez le module Bluetooth de l'ordinateur. 8. Déconnectez le câble Bluetooth du module Bluetooth. Installation du module Bluetooth 1. Connectez le câble Bluetooth au module Bluetooth. 2. Connectez l'autre extrémité du câble Bluetooth à la carte système. 233. Placez la carte Bluetooth dans son emplacement dans l'ordinateur. 4. Serrez la vis de fixation de la carte Bluetooth à la carte système. 5. Posez : a) le cache de base b) la batterie 6. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Dépose de la mémoire 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Déposez la batterie. 3. Retirez le cache de fond. 4. Dégagez les clips de sécurité du module de mémoire jusqu'à ce qu'ils s'éjectent. 5. Retirez le module de mémoire de son connecteur sur la carte système en inclinant de 45° le module de mémoire pour le tirer hors de la carte système. 6. Répétez les étapes 2 et 3 pour retirer le deuxième module. Pose de la mémoire 1. Insérez le module de mémoire dans son connecteur. 2. Appuyez sur les clips de fixation pour fixer le module de mémoire à la carte système. 3. Posez : a) le cache de base b) la batterie 4. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. 24Dépose de la pile bouton 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Déposez : a) la batterie b) le cache de base 3. Déconnectez le câble de la pile bouton de la carte système. 4. Retirez la pile bouton de l'ordinateur. Pose de la pile bouton 1. Placez la pile bouton dans son logement. 2. Branchez le câble de la pile bouton. 3. Posez : a) le cache de base b) la batterie 4. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Dépose du repose-mains 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Déposez : a) la carte SD b) la carte ExpressCard c) la batterie d) le disque dur 25e) le lecteur optique f) le cache de base g) l'habillage du clavier h) le clavier i) le module Bluetooth 3. Retirez les vis qui fixent l'ensemble du repose-mains à la base de l'ordinateur. 4. Retirez les vis qui fixent l'ensemble du repose-mains à l'avant de l'ordinateur. 5. Débranchez le câble de la carte DEL de la carte système. 6. Déconnectez le câble d'alimentation de la carte système. 267. Déconnectez le câble LED d'alimentation de la carte système. 8. Soulevez le repose-mains et retirez-le de l'ordinateur. Pose du repose-mains 1. Alignez l'ensemble repose-mains dans sa position d'origine dans l'ordinateur et installez-le. 2. Connectez les câbles suivants à la carte système : a) câble du voyant d'alimentation b) câble de la tablette tactile c) câble de la carte LED 3. Serrez les vis de fixation de l'ensemble repose-mains à l'avant de l'ordinateur. 4. Serrez les vis de fixation de l'ensemble repose-mains à la base de l'ordinateur. 5. Posez : a) le module Bluetooth b) le clavier c) l'habillage du clavier d) le cache de base e) le lecteur optique 27f) le disque dur g) la batterie h) la carte ExpressCard i) la carte SD 6. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Retrait de la carte multimédia 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Déposez : a) la carte SD b) la carte ExpressCard c) la batterie d) le disque dur e) le lecteur optique f) le cache de base g) l'habillage du clavier h) le clavier i) le module Bluetooth j) le repose-mains 3. Débranchez le câble de carte média de la carte système. 4. Retirez les vis qui fixent la carte système à l'ordinateur. 5. Retirez la carte multimédia de l'ordinateur. 28Installation de la carte multimédia 1. Placez la carte média dans son compartiment. 2. Serrez les vis pour fixer la carte média. 3. Branchez le câble de carte média sur la carte système. 4. Posez : a) le repose-mains b) le module Bluetooth c) le clavier d) l'habillage du clavier e) le cache de base f) le lecteur optique g) le disque dur h) la batterie i) la carte ExpressCard j) la carte SD 5. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Retrait du bâti de la carte ExpressCard 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Déposez : a) la carte SD b) la carte ExpressCard c) la batterie d) le disque dur e) le lecteur optique f) le cache de base g) l'habillage du clavier h) le clavier i) le module Bluetooth j) le repose-mains 3. Débranchez le câble de la carte ExpressCard de la carte système. 294. Retirez les vis de fixation du bâti de la carte ExpressCard à l'ordinateur. 5. Retirez le bâti de la carte ExpressCard de l'ordinateur. Installation du bâti de la carte ExpressCard 1. Insérez le bâti de la carte ExpressCard dans son compartiment. 2. Serrez les vis de fixation du bâti de la carte ExpressCard sur l'ordinateur. 3. Branchez le câble de la carte ExpressCard à la carte système. 4. Posez : a) le repose-mains b) le module Bluetooth c) le clavier d) l'habillage du clavier e) le cache de base f) le lecteur optique g) le disque dur h) la batterie i) la carte ExpressCard 30j) la carte SD 5. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Dépose des haut-parleurs 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Déposez : a) la carte SD b) la carte ExpressCard c) la batterie d) le disque dur e) le lecteur optique f) le cache de base g) l'habillage du clavier h) le clavier i) le module Bluetooth j) le repose-mains 3. Débranchez le câble du haut-parleur de la carte système. 4. Libérez le câble du haut-parleur de l'ordinateur. 5. Retirez les vis de fixation des haut-parleurs à l'ordinateur. 316. Retirez les haut-parleurs de l'ordinateur. Pose des haut-parleurs 1. Alignez les haut-parleurs sur leur position de base et serrez les vis pour fixer les haut-parleurs à l'ordinateur. 2. Acheminez le câble du haut-parleur vers l'ordinateur puis branchez-le à la carte système. 3. Posez : a) le repose-mains b) le module Bluetooth c) le clavier d) l'habillage du clavier e) le cache de base f) le lecteur optique g) le disque dur h) la batterie i) la carte ExpressCard j) la carte SD 4. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Retrait des caches de charnière d'écran 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Déposez : a) la carte SD b) la carte ExpressCard c) la batterie d) le disque dur e) le lecteur optique 32f) le cache de base g) l'habillage du clavier h) le clavier i) le module Bluetooth j) le repose-mains 3. Retirez les vis de fixation des caches de charnière d'écran à l'ordinateur. 4. Retirez les caches de charnière d'écran de l'ordinateur. Installation des caches de charnière d'écran 1. Serrez les vis pour fixer les caches de charnière à l'ordinateur. 2. Posez : a) le repose-mains b) le module Bluetooth c) le clavier d) l'habillage du clavier e) le cache de base f) le lecteur optique g) le disque dur h) la batterie i) la carte ExpressCard j) la carte SD 3. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Dépose de l'ensemble écran 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Déposez : 33a) la carte SD b) la carte ExpressCard c) la batterie d) le disque dur e) le lecteur optique f) le cache de base g) l'habillage du clavier h) le clavier i) le module Bluetooth j) le repose-mains 3. Dégagez les câbles d'antenne de leur chemin d'acheminement vers l'ordinateur. 4. Retirez les vis qui fixent l'ensemble écran à l'ordinateur. 5. Retirez la vis qui fixe la charnière du panneau gauche à l'ordinateur. 6. Retirez les vis de fixation du support LVDS. 347. Soulevez le support LVDS et retirez-le. 8. Débranchez le câble LVDS de la carte système. 9. Tirez les câbles d'antenne par l'ouverture de la carte système. 10. Retirez l'ensemble d'écran de l'ordinateur. 35Pose de l'ensemble écran 1. Acheminez les câbles d'antenne via l'ouverture de la carte système. 2. Branchez le câble LVDS sur la carte système. 3. Serrez les vis de fixation du support LVDS à la carte système. 4. Serrez la vis de fixation de la charnière d'écran gauche à l'ordinateur. 5. Serrez les vis de fixation de l'ensemble écran sur l'ordinateur. 6. Faites passer les câbles d'antenne dans les rainures d'acheminement. 7. Posez : a) le repose-mains b) le module Bluetooth c) le clavier d) l'habillage du clavier e) le cache de base f) le lecteur optique g) le disque dur h) la batterie i) la carte ExpressCard j) la carte SD 8. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Dépose de la carte système 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Déposez : a) la carte SD b) la carte ExpressCard c) la batterie d) le disque dur e) le lecteur optique f) le cache de base g) l'habillage du clavier h) le clavier i) le module Bluetooth j) le repose-mains k) la carte média l) les caches de charnière d'écran 36m) l'ensemble écran 3. Déconnectez le câble de la pile bouton de la carte système. 4. Débranchez le câble de la carte ExpressCard de la carte système. 5. Débranchez le câble du haut-parleur de la carte système. 6. Déposez les vis qui fixent la carte système à l'ordinateur. 7. Soulevez partiellement le bord gauche de la carte système d'environ 45 degrés. 378. Débranchez le câble du connecteur d'alimentation de la carte système. 9. Retirez la carte système de l'ordinateur. Pose de la carte système 1. Branchez le câble du connecteur d'alimentation à la carte système. 2. Serrez les vis qui fixent la carte système à l'ordinateur. 3. Connectez les câbles suivants à la carte système : a) le haut-parleur b) la carte ExpressCard c) la pile bouton 4. Installez : a) l'ensemble écran b) les caches de charnière d'écran c) la carte média d) le repose-mains e) le module Bluetooth f) le clavier 38g) l'habillage du clavier h) le cache de base i) le lecteur optique j) le disque dur k) la batterie l) la carte ExpressCard m) la carte SD 5. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Dépose du dissipateur de chaleur 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Déposez : a) la carte SD b) la carte ExpressCard c) la batterie d) le disque dur e) le lecteur optique f) le cache de base g) l'habillage du clavier h) le clavier i) le module Bluetooth j) le repose-mains k) la carte média l) les caches de charnière d'écran m) l'ensemble écran n) la carte système 3. Débranchez de la carte système le câble du dissipateur thermique. 4. Retirez les vis qui fixent le dissipateur de chaleur sur la carte système. 395. Retirez le dissipateur de chaleur de la carte système. Pose du dissipateur de chaleur 1. Placez le dissipateur de chaleur vers sa position d'origine dans la carte système. 2. Serrez les vis qui fixent le dissipateur thermique à la carte système. 3. Connectez le câble du dissipateur de chaleur à la carte système. 4. Posez : a) la carte système b) l'ensemble écran c) les caches de charnière d'écran d) la carte média e) le repose-mains f) le module Bluetooth g) le clavier h) l'habillage du clavier i) le cache de base j) le lecteur optique k) le disque dur l) la batterie m) la carte ExpressCard n) la carte SD 5. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Retrait du port du connecteur d'alimentation 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Déposez : a) la carte SD b) la carte ExpressCard c) la batterie d) le disque dur e) le lecteur optique f) le cache de base g) l'habillage du clavier h) le clavier i) le module Bluetooth j) le repose-mains 40k) la carte média l) les caches de charnière d'écran m) l'ensemble écran n) la carte système 3. Retirez la vis de fixation du support du connecteur d'alimentation de l'ordinateur. 4. Retirez le support du connecteur d'alimentation de l'ordinateur. 5. Retirez le port du connecteur d'alimentation de l'ordinateur. Installation du port du connecteur d'alimentation 1. Placez le port du connecteur d'alimentation dans l'ordinateur. 2. Placez le support du connecteur d'alimentation sur le port du connecteur d'alimentation. 3. Serrez la vis de fixation du support du connecteur d'alimentation à l'ordinateur. 4. Posez : a) la carte système b) l'ensemble écran c) les caches de charnière d'écran d) la carte média 41e) le repose-mains f) le module Bluetooth g) le clavier h) l'habillage du clavier i) le cache de base j) le lecteur optique k) le disque dur l) la batterie m) la carte ExpressCard n) la carte SD 5. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Retrait de la carte d'entrées/sorties (E/S) 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Déposez : a) la carte SD b) la carte ExpressCard c) la batterie d) le disque dur e) le lecteur optique f) le cache de base g) l'habillage du clavier h) le clavier i) le module Bluetooth j) le repose-mains k) la carte média l) les caches de charnière d'écran m) l'ensemble écran n) la carte système 3. Retirez la vis de fixation de la carte E/S à l'ordinateur. 4. Retirez la carte d'E/S de l'ordinateur. 42Installation de la carte d'E/S 1. Placez la carte d'E/S dans son compartiment. 2. Serrez les vis de fixation de la carte d'E/S. 3. Posez : a) la carte système b) l'ensemble écran c) les caches de charnière d'écran d) la carte média e) le repose-mains f) le module Bluetooth g) le clavier h) l'habillage du clavier i) le cache de base j) le lecteur optique k) le disque dur l) la batterie m) la carte ExpressCard n) la carte SD 4. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Dépose du cadre d'écran 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Déposez la batterie. 3. Ecartez doucement le bord inférieur du cache d'écran. 4. Ecartez les bords gauche, droit et haut du cadre de l'écran LCD. 435. Retirez le cadre de l'écran de l'ensemble écran. Pose du cache de l'écran 1. Placez le cache d'écran sur le bloc écran. 2. En partant de l'angle supérieur, appuyez sur tout le cadre d'écran jusqu’à ce qu'il s'enclenche dans l'ensemble écran. 3. Appuyez sur les bord gauche et droit du cache d'écran. 4. Posez la batterie. 5. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Dépose du panneau d'écran 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Déposez la batterie. 3. Retirez le cadre d'écran. 4. Retirez les vis qui fixent le panneau d'écran à l'ensemble écran. 445. Retournez et placez le panneau d'écran. 6. Retirez l'adhésif du connecteur du câble LVDS et débranchez le câble LVDS de l'écran. 7. Retirez le panneau de l'écran de l'ensemble écran. Pose du panneau d'écran 1. Branchez le câble de l'écran (câble LVDS) à son connecteur sur le panneau d'écran. 2. Positionnez le panneau d'écran à son emplacement d'origine sur le panneau d'écran. 3. Serrez les vis pour fixer le panneau d'écran à l'ensemble de l'écran. 4. Installez : a) le cadre d'écran b) la batterie 5. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Retrait du module caméra et microphone 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Déposez : 45a) la batterie b) le cadre d'écran 3. Retirez les vis qui fixent le module caméra et microphone à l'ensemble écran. 4. Débranchez le câble du module caméra et microphone du module. 5. Retirez le module caméra et microphone de l'ensemble écran. Installation du module caméra et microphone 1. Installez le module caméra et microphone dans son logement dans le panneau de l'écran. 2. Serrez la vis pour fixer la caméra à l'ensemble d'écran. 3. Branchez le câble de caméra et microphone à la caméra. 4. Posez : a) le cadre d'écran b) la batterie 5. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. 46Retrait de la carte DEL 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Déposez : a) la batterie b) le cadre d'écran c) le panneau d'écran 3. Retirez la vis qui fixe la carte LED à l'ensemble écran. 4. Retirez la plaque du support de la carte LED de l'ensemble écran. 5. Débranchez le câble de carte LED de la carte LED. 6. Retirez la vis qui fixe la carte LED à la plaque de support de la carte LED. 477. Retirez la carte LED de la plaque de support de la carte LED. Installation du panneau arrière des DEL 1. Serrez la vis de fixation de la carte LED de la plaque de support de la carte LED. 2. Placez la plaque de la carte LED dans son compartiment dans l'ensemble écran. 3. Branchez le câble de la carte LED au connecteur de la carte LED. 4. Serrez la vis pour fixer la plaque du support de la carte LED à l'ensemble écran. 5. Posez : a) le panneau d'écran b) le cadre d'écran c) la batterie 6. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Retrait des parois de la charnière d'écran 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Déposez : a) la carte SD b) la carte ExpressCard c) la batterie d) le disque dur e) le lecteur optique f) le cache de base g) l'habillage du clavier h) le clavier i) le module Bluetooth j) le repose-mains 48k) la carte média l) les caches de charnière d'écran m) l'ensemble écran n) le cadre d'écran o) le panneau d'écran p) la carte LED d'alimentation 3. Retirez la vis qui fixe la paroi de la charnière d'écran à l'ensemble écran. 4. Faites glisser puis retirez la paroi de la charnière d'écran gauche de l'ensemble écran. 5. Retirez l'adhésif fixant les câbles d'antenne à l'ensemble écran. 6. Retirez les câbles d'antenne de l'ouverture de la paroi de la charnière d'écran droite. 497. Retirez la vis qui fixe la paroi de la charnière d'écran à l'ensemble écran. 8. Faites glisser puis retirez la paroi de la charnière d'écran droite de l'ensemble écran. Installation des parois de la charnière d'écran 1. Placez les deux parois de la charnière d'écran sur le panneau. 2. Insérez les câbles d'antenne dans leur ouverture sur la paroi de la charnière écran de droite et fixez-les à l'aide de l'adhésif sur l'ensemble écran. 3. Serrez les vis de fixation les parois de la charnière d'écran pour les fixer à l'ensemble écran. 4. Posez : a) la carte LED d'alimentation b) le panneau d'écran c) le cadre d'écran d) l'ensemble écran e) les caches de charnière d'écran f) la carte média g) le repose-mains h) le module Bluetooth 50i) le clavier j) l'habillage du clavier k) le cache de base l) le lecteur optique m) le disque dur n) la batterie o) la carte ExpressCard p) la carte SD 5. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Retrait des charnières d'écran 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Déposez : a) Carte SD b) Carte ExpressCard c) la batterie d) le disque dur e) le lecteur optique f) le cache de base g) l'habillage du clavier h) le clavier i) le module Bluetooth j) le repose-mains k) Carte média l) les caches de charnière d'écran m) l'ensemble écran n) le cadre d'écran o) le panneau d'écran p) la carte LED d'alimentation 3. Retirez la vis qui fixe la paroi de la charnière d'écran gauche à l'ensemble écran. 4. Retirez la paroi de la charnière d'écran gauche de l'ensemble écran. 515. Répétez les étapes 3 et 4 pour retirer la charnière d'écran droite. Installation des charnières d'écran 1. Placez les deux charnières d'écran sur le panneau. 2. Serrez les vis de fixation des charnières de l'écran. 3. Posez : a) la carte LED d'alimentation b) le panneau d'écran c) le cadre d'écran d) l'ensemble écran e) les caches de charnière d'écran f) la carte média g) le repose-mains h) le module Bluetooth i) le clavier j) l'habillage du clavier k) le cache de base l) le lecteur optique m) le disque dur n) la batterie o) la carte ExpressCard p) la carte SD 4. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. Retrait du câble LVDS et de caméra 1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Déposez : a) la carte SD b) la carte ExpressCard c) la batterie d) le disque dur e) le lecteur optique f) le cache de base g) l'habillage du clavier h) le clavier i) le module Bluetooth j) le repose-mains 52k) la carte média l) les caches de charnière d'écran m) l'ensemble écran n) le cadre d'écran o) le panneau d'écran p) la carte LED d'alimentation q) les parois de la charnière d'écran 3. Retirez la bande adhésive qui fixe le câble LVDS et de caméra de l'ensemble écran. 4. Débranchez le câble de la caméra du module caméra et microphone. 5. Retirez les câbles LVDS et de caméra de l'ensemble écran. 6. Retirez les câbles LVDS et de caméra du cache de l'ensemble écran. 53Installation des câbles LVDS et de caméra 1. Acheminez les câbles LVDS et de caméra à l'ensemble écran. 2. Fixez l'adhésif pour fixer le câble. 3. Branchez le câble LVDS et de caméra au module caméra et microphone. 4. Posez : a) les parois de la charnière d'écran b) la carte LED d'alimentation c) le panneau d'écran d) le cadre d'écran e) l'ensemble écran f) les caches de charnière d'écran g) la carte média h) le repose-mains i) le module Bluetooth j) le clavier k) l'habillage du clavier l) le cache de base m) le lecteur optique n) le disque dur o) la batterie p) la carte ExpressCard q) la carte SD 5. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur. 543 Informations sur le port d'accueil Le port d'accueil est utilisé pour connecter l'ordinateur portable à une station d'accueil (en option). 1. Port d'accueil 55564 Configuration du système La configuration du système permet de gérer le matériel de l'ordinateur et de définir les options du BIOS. Dans la configuration du système, vous pouvez : • Changer les paramètres NVRAM après avoir ajouté ou supprimé des matériels. • Afficher la configuration matérielle du système • Activer ou désactiver les périphériques intégrés • Définir les seuils de performance et de gestion de l'alimentation • Gérer la sécurité de l'ordinateur Séquence de démarrage La séquence de démarrage permet d'ignorer l'ordre des périphériques d'amorçage définis par la configuration du système et de démarrer directement depuis un périphérique donné (lecteur optique ou disque dur, par exemple). Lors du test à la mise sous tension (POST), lorsque le logo Dell s'affiche, vous pouvez : • Accéder à la configuration du système en appuyant sur la touche • Afficher le menu de démarrage à affichage unique en appuyant sur la touche Ce menu contient les périphériques depuis lesquels vous pouvez démarrer, y compris l'option des diagnostics. Les options du menu de démarrage sont les suivantes : • Removable Drive (Unité amovible (si disponible)) • STXXXX Drive (Unité STXXXX) REMARQUE : XXX correspond au numéro d'unité SATA. • Optical Drive (Lecteur optique) • Diagnostics REMARQUE : Si vous choisissez Diagnostics, l'écran ePSA diagnostics (Diagnostics ePSA) s'affiche. L'écran de séquence de démarrage affiche également l'option d'accès à l'écran System Setup (Configuration du système). Touches de navigation Le tableau suivant répertorie les touches de navigation dans la configuration du système. REMARQUE : Pour la plupart des options de configuration du système, les modifications que vous apportées sont enregistrées, mais elles ne sont appliquées qu'au redémarrage de l'ordinateur. 57Tableau 1. Touches de navigation Touches Navigation Touche Haut Passe au champ précédent. Touche Bas Passe au champ suivant. Permet de sélectionner une valeur dans le champ sélectionné (si applicable) ou de suivre le lien dans le champ. Barre d'espacement Développe ou réduit une liste déroulante, si applicable. Passe à la zone suivante active. REMARQUE : Pour la navigateur graphique standard uniquement. Passe à la page précédente tant que vous affichez l'écran principal. Si vous appuyez sur dans l'écran principal, un message demande d'enregistrer les modifications non enregistrées et le système redémarre. Affiche le fichier d'aide de la configuration du système. Options du programme de configuration du système REMARQUE : Selon l'ordinateur et les périphériques installés, les éléments énumérés dans cette section peuvent ne pas apparaître. Tableau 2. Généralités Option Description System Information (Informations sur le système) Cette section énumère les principaux éléments matériels de l'ordinateur. • System Information (Informations sur le système) • Memory Information (Informations sur la mémoire) • Processor Information (Informations sur le système) • Device Information (Informations sur les périphériques) Battery Information (Informations sur la batterie) Affiche l'état de charge de la batterie. Boot Sequence (Séquence d'amorçage) Vous permet de modifier l'ordre dans lequel l'ordinateur tente de trouver un système d'exploitation. Toutes les options ci-dessous sont sélectionnées. • Diskette Drive (Lecteur de disquette) • Internal HDD (Disque sur interne) • USB Storage Device (Périphérique de stockage USB) • CD/DVD/CD-RW Drive (Lecteur CD/DVD/CD-RW) • Onboard NIC (Carte réseau intégrée) Vous pouvez également choisir l'option de liste d'amorçage. Les options sont : 58Option Description • Legacy (Default Setting) (Mode hérité [Paramètre par défaut]) • UEFI Date/Time (Date/heure) Vous permet de régler la date et l'heure. Tableau 3. System Configuration (Configuration du système) Option Description Integrated NIC (Carte réseau intégrée) Permet de configurer le contrôleur réseau intégré. Les options sont : • Disabled (Désactivé) • Enabled (Activée) • Enabled w/PXE (Default Setting) (Activé avec PXE [paramètre par défaut]) Port parallèle Vous permet de définir et de régler le port parallèle sur la station d'accueil en fonctionnement. Vous pouvez régler le port parallèle sur : • Disabled (Désactivé) • AT • PS2 • ECP Port série Identifie et définit les paramètres de port série. Vous pouvez définir le port série comme suit : • Disabled (Désactivé) • COM1 (Default Setting) (COM1 (paramètre par défaut)) • COM2 • COM3 • COM4 REMARQUE : Le système d'exploitation peut allouer des ressources, même si le paramètres est désactivé. SATA Operation (Fonctionnement SATA) Permet de configurer le contrôleur de disque dur SATA interne. Les options sont : • Disabled (Désactivé) • ATA • AHCI • RAID On (Default Setting) (RAID activé [Paramètre par défaut]) 59Option Description REMARQUE : SATA est configuré pour prendre en charge le mode RAID. Drives (Lecteurs) Permet de configurer les lecteurs SATA intégrés. Les options sont : • SATA-0 • SATA-1 • SATA-4 • SATA-5 Paramètre par défaut : All drives are enabled (Tous les lecteurs sont activés). Smart Reporting (Rapports SMART) Ce champ indique si les erreurs de disques durs intégrés sont signalées lors du démarrage du système. Cette technologie s'intègre dans la spécification SMART (Self Monitoring Analysis and Reporting Technology) • Enable SMART Reporting (Activer les rapports SMART) - Cette option est désactivée par défaut. USB Configuration (Configuration USB) Permet de définir la configuration USB. Les options sont : • Enable Boot Support (Activation support d'amorçage) • Activation port USB externe Default Setting (Paramètre par défaut) : les deux options sont activées. USB PowerShare Vous permet de configurer le comportement de la fonction USB PowerShare. L'option est, par défaut, désactivée. • Enable USB PowerShare (Activer USB PowerShare) Keyboard Illumination (Eclairage du clavier) Vous permet de choisir le mode de fonctionnement de la fonction d'éclairage du clavier. Ces options sont les suivantes : • Disabled (Default Setting) (Désactivé (Valeur par défaut)) • Level is 25% (Niveau de 25 %) • Level is 50% (Niveau de 50 %) • Niveau de 75% • Niveau : 100 % Stealth Mode Control (Commande du mode furtif) Vous permet de régler le mode qui éteint les lumières et les sons de votre système. Par défaut, cette option est désactivée. 60Option Description • Enable Stealth Mode (Activer le mode furtif) Miscellaneous Devices (Périphériques divers) Vous permet d'activer ou de désactiver les différents périphériques installés. Les options sont les suivantes : • Enable Internal Modem (Activer le modem interne) • Enable Microphone (Activer le microphone) • Enable eSATA Ports (Activer les ports eSATA) • Enable Hard Drive Free Fall Protection (Activer la protection contre la chute du disque dur) • Enable Module Bay (Activer la baie du module) • Enable ExpressCard (Activer ExpressCard) • Enable Camera (Activer la caméra) • Enable Media Card (Activer le lecteur de carte) • Disable Media Card (Désactiver le lecteur de carte) Paramètre par défaut : tous les périphériques sont activés Tableau 4. Vidéo Option Description LCD Brightness (Luminosité LCD) Vous permet de régler la luminosité du panneau lorsque le capteur ambiant est réglé sur Off(Arrêt). Optimus Vous permet d'activer ou de désactiver la technologie NVIDIA Optimus. • Enable Optimus (Activer Optimus)- Paramètre par défaut. Tableau 5. Security (Sécurité) Option Description Intel TXT (LT-SX) Configuration (Configuration Intel TXT (LT-SX)) Cette option est désactivée par défaut. Admin Password (Mot de passe d'administrateur) Permet de définir, changer ou de supprimer le mot de passe administrateur (admin). REMARQUE : Vous devez définir le mot de passe de l'administrateur avant le mot de passe du système ou du disque dur. REMARQUE : Les modifications de mots de passe sont appliquées immédiatement. 61Option Description REMARQUE : La suppression du mot de passe de l'administrateur supprime automatiquement le mot de passe du système et le mot de passe du disque dur. REMARQUE : Les modifications de mots de passe sont appliquées immédiatement. Default Setting: Not set (Paramètre par défaut : Non défini) System Password (Mot de passe du système) Permet de définir, changer ou de supprimer le mot de passe administrateur. REMARQUE : Les modifications de mots de passe sont appliquées immédiatement. Default Setting: Not set (Paramètre par défaut : Non défini) Internal HDD-0 Password (Mot de passe disque dur-0 interne) Vous permet de définir, modifier ou supprimer le mot de passe de l'administrateur Default Setting: Not set (Paramètre par défaut : Non défini) Strong Password (Mot de passe renforcé) Permet d'appliquer l'option de toujours définir les mots de passe. Default Setting: Enable Strong Password (Paramètre par défaut : Activer les mots de passe complexes n'est pas sélectionné). Password Configuration (Configuration de mots de passe) Vous pouvez définir la longueur du mot de passe. Min = 4 , Max = 32 Password Bypass (Ignorer le mot de passe) Permet d'activer ou de désactiver l'autorisation d'ignorer les mots de passe système et HDD Interne lorsqu'ils sont définis. Les options sont : • Disabled (Default Setting) (Désactivé (Paramètre par défaut)) • Reboot bypass (Ignoré redémarrage) Password Change (Changement de mot de passe) Permet d'activer l'autorisation de désactivation des mots de passe Système et Disque dur quand le mot de passe administrateur est défini. Default Setting: Allow Non-Admin Password Changes (Paramètres par défaut : Autoriser les modifications de mot de passe non admin) n'est pas sélectionné Non-Admin Setup Changes (Modifications de configuration non-admin) Vous permet de déterminer si les modifications de réglage des options sont autorisées lorsque le mot de passe administrateur est défini. L'option est désactivée. • Permet les modifications du commutateur sans fil TPM Security (Sécurité TPM) Permet d'activer TPM (Trusted Platform Module) au cours du POST. Default Setting (Paramètre par défaut : L'option est désactivée. CPU XD Support (Prise en charge de CPU XD) Permet d'activer le mode Execute Disable du processeur. Défault Setting: Enable CPU XD Support (Paramètre par défaut : Activer le support CPU XD) Computrace Permet d'activer ou de désactiver le logiciel Computrace en option. Les options sont : • Deactivate (Defaut Setting) (Désactiver) (Paramètres par défaut) • Disable (Désactiver) • Activate (Activer) 62Option Description REMARQUE : Les options Activate et Disable activent ou désactivent la fonction de façon permanente et aucune modification ultérieure n'est autorisée CPU XD Support (Prise en charge de CPU XD) Permet d'activer le mode Execute Disable du processeur. Défault Setting: Enable CPU XD Support (Paramètre par défaut : Activer le support CPU XD) OROM Keyboard Access (Accès au clavier OROM) Vous permet de définir l'accès pour entrer dans les écrans de configuration de l'option ROM en utilisant des touches rapides lors du démarrage. Les options sont : • Enable (Activé [Paramètre par défaut]) • One Time Enable (Activation unique) • Disable (Désactiver) Admin Setup Lockout (Verrouillage de la configuration admin) Permet d'empêcher les utilisateurs d'entrer dans la configuration lorsqu'un mot de passe Administrateur est défini. Default Setting : Disabled (Paramètre par défaut : désactivé) Tableau 6. Performances Option Description Multi Core Support (Prise en charge multicœur) Ce champ indique si le processus aura un ou plusieurs coeurs activés. Certaines applications seront plus performantes avec des coeurs supplémentaires. Cette option est activée par défaut. Permet d'activer ou de désactiver le support multicoeurs pour le processeur. Les options sont : • All (Default Setting) (Tous (paramètre par défaut)) • 1 • 2 Intel SpeedStep Permet d'activer ou de désactiver la fonction Intel SpeedStep. Default Setting: Enable Intel SpeedStep (Paramètre par défaut : Activer Intel SpeedStep) C States Control (Contrôle des états C) Permet d'activer ou de désactiver les états supplémentaires de veille du processeur. Default Setting: The options C states, C3, C6, Enhanced C-states, and C7 options are enabled (Paramètre par défaut : les options des états C, C3, C6, états C améliorés, et C7 sont activées.) Intel TurboBoost Permet d'activer ou de désactiver le mode Intel TurboBoost du processeur. 63Option Description Default Setting: Enable Intel TurboBoost (Paramètre par défaut : Activer Intel TurboBoost) Hyper-Thread Control (Contrôle hyperthread) Permet d'activer ou de désactiver la fonction HyperThreading dans le processeur. Default Setting : Enabled (Paramètre par défaut : Activé) Tableau 7. Power Management (Gestion de l'alimentation) Option Description AC Behavior (Comportement CA) Permet à l'ordinateur de se mettre sous tension automatiquement, lorsque l'adaptateur en CA est branché. L'option est désactivée. • Wake On AC (Réveil sur CA) Auto On Time (Heure de démarrage auto) Permet de définir l'heure de mise sous tension automatique de l'ordinateur. Les options sont : • Disabled (Default Setting) (Désactivé (Paramètre par défaut)) • Every Day (Tous les jours) • Weekdays (Jours de la semaine) USB Wake Support (Prise en charge d'éveil USB) Vous permet d'activer les périphériques USB pour réveiller l'ordinateur du mode veille. L'option est désactivée • Enable USB Wake Support (Activer le support de réveil USB) Wireless Radio Control (Commande radio sans fil) Vous permet de contrôler la radio WLAN et WWAN. Les options sont les suivantes : • Control WLAN radio (Contrôler la radio WLAN) • Control WWAN radio (Contrôler la radio WWAN) Paramètre par défaut : les deux options sont désactivées. Wake on LAN/WLAN (Eveil réseau) Cette option permet d'activer l'ordinateur hors tension avec un signal LAN spécial. L'activation à partir de la veille n'est pas affectée par ce paramètre et elle doit être activée sur le système. Cette fonction fonctionne uniquement lorsque l'ordinateur est connecté à une alimentation CA. • Disabled (Désactivé) - Empêche le système d'être mis sous tension par des signaux spéciaux LAN lorsqu'il reçoit un signal d'activation du LAN ou d'un LAN sans fil. (Paramètre par défaut) • LAN Only (LAN uniquement) - Permet au système d'être mis sous tension par des signaux LAN spéciaux. • WLAN Only (WLAN uniquement) • LAN or WLAN (LAN ou WLAN) Block Sleep (Bloquer mise en veille) Vous permet d'empêcher à l'ordinateur de passer en veille. L'option est désactivée par défaut. • Block Sleep (S3) (Bloquer la veille [S3]) 64Option Description Primary Battery Configuration (Configuration de la batterie principale) Vous permet de définir comment utiliser la charge de la batterie, lorsque le cordon d'alimentation est branché. Les options sont les suivantes : • Standard Charge (Chargement standard) • Express Charge • Predominantly AC use (Utilisation prédominante du CA) • Auto Charge (Chargement automatique) (Paramètre par défaut) • Custom (Chargement personnalisée) : vous pouvez régler le pourcentage auquel la batterie doit se charger. Battery Slice Configuration (Configuration de tranche de batterie) Vous permet de définir le type de chargement de la batterie. Les options sont les suivantes : • Standard Charge (Chargement standard) • Express Charge (Chargement expresse) (Paramètre par défaut) Tableau 8. POST Behavior (Comportement de l'autotest de démarrage) Option Description Adapter Warnings (Avertissements adaptateur) Vous permet d'activer les messages d'avertissement de l'adaptateur lorsque certains adaptateurs lorsque certains adaptateurs d'alimentation sont utilisés? L'option est activée par défaut. • Enable Adapter Warnings (Activer les avertissements relatifs à l'adaptateur) Mouse/Touchpad (Souris/Pavé tactile) Vous permet de définir la façon dont le système gère la souris et le pavé tactile. Les options sont : • Serial Mouse (Souris série) • PS2 Mouse (Souries PS2) • Touchpad/PS-2 Mouse (Pavé tactile/Souris PS-2) (Paramètre par défaut) Numlock Enable (Activer le verrouillage numérique) Spécifie s'il est possible d'activer la fonctionnalité VerrNum lors de l'amorçage du système. Cette option est activée par défaut. • Enable Numlock (Activer VerrNum) Fn Key Emulation (Emulation touche Fn) Vous permet de faire correspondre la fonction de la touche du clavier PS-2 avec la fonction de la touche d'un clavier interne. L'option est activée par défaut. • Enable Fn Key Emulation (Activer l'émulation de la touche Fn) Keyboard Errors (Erreurs clavier) Indique si les erreurs liées au clavier sont signalées à l'amorçage. Cette option est activée par défaut. • Enable Keyboard Error Detection (Activer la détection des erreurs clavier) POST Hotkeys (Touches d'autotest au démarrage) Indique si l'écran d'ouverture affiche un message indiquant la séquence de touches nécessaire pour entrer dans le menu d'option de démarrage du BIOS. • Enable F12 Boot Option menu (Activer le menu d'options d'amorçage F12) : cette option est activée par défaut. 65Option Description Fastboot Vous permet d'accélérer les processus de démarrage. Les options sont les suivantes : • Minimal • Thorough (Complet) (Paramètre par défaut) • Auto Tableau 9. Virtualization Support (Prise en charge de la virtualisation) Option Description Virtualization (Virtualisation) Cette option indique si un moniteur de machine virtuel (VMM) peut utiliser les capacités matérielles supplémentaires offertes par la technologie de virtualisation Intel. • Enable Intel Virtualization Technology (Activer la technologie Intel Vrtualization) : Default Setting (paramètre par défaut). VT for Direct I/O (Technologie de virtualisation pour E/S directes) Autorise ou empêche le moniteur VMM (Virtual Machine Monitor) (VMM) d'utiliser les fonctions métérielles supplémentaires fournies par la technologie de virtualisation Intel pour les E/S directes. • Enable Intel Virtualization Technology for Direct I/O (Activer la technologie Intel Virtualization : paramètres par défaut. Tableau 10. Wireless (Sans fil) Option Description Wireless Switch (Commutateur sans fil) Vous permet de déterminer les périphériques sans fil qui peuvent être commandés par le commutateur sans fil. Les options sont les suivantes : • WWAN • Bluetooth • la carte WLAN Toutes les options sont activées par défaut. Wireless Device Enable (Activer les périphériques sans fil) Vous permet d'activer ou de désactiver les périphériques sans fil. Les options sont les suivantes : • WWAN • Bluetooth • la carte WLAN Toutes les options sont activées par défaut. Tableau 11. Maintenance Option Description Service Tag (Numéro de service) Affiche le numéro de service de l'ordinateur. Asset Tag (Numéro d'inventaire) Permet de créer un numéro d'inventaire système si aucun numéro de service n'est défini. Cette option n'est pas définie par défaut. 66Tableau 12. System Logs (Journaux du système) Option Description BIOS Events (Evénements du BIOS) Affiche le journal d'événements du système et permet de l'effacer. • Clear Log (Effacer le journal) Mise à jour du BIOS Il est recommandé de mettre à jour le BIOS (configuration du système) lors du remplacement de la carte système ou lorsqu'une mise à jour est disponible. Pour les ordinateurs portables, vérifiez que la batterie est complètement chargée et que l'ordinateur est connecté au secteur. 1. Redémarrez l'ordinateur. 2. Accédez au site support.dell.com/support/downloads. 3. Si vous disposez du numéro de service ou du numéro de service express de l'ordinateur : REMARQUE : Pour les ordinateurs de bureau, le numéro de service se trouve sur l'étiquette sur la face avant de l'ordinateur. REMARQUE : Pour les ordinateurs portables, le numéro de service se trouve sur le fond de l'ordinateur. a) Entrez le numéro de service ou le numéro de service express et cliquez sur Submit (Envoyer). b) Cliquez sur Submit et passez à l'étape 5. 4. Si vous ne disposez pas de ces numéros, sélectionnez l'unr des options suivantrs : a) Automatically detect my Service Tag for me (Détecter automatiquement le numéro de service) b) Choose from My Products and Services List (Choisir dans la liste Mes produits et services) c) Choose from a list of all Dell products (Choisir dans la liste de tous les produits Dell) 5. Dans l'écran de l'application et des pilotes, sous la liste déroulante Operating System (Système d'exploiration), sélectionnez BIOS. 6. Identifiez le dernier fichier BIOS et cliquez sur Download File (Télécharger le fichier). 7. Sélectionnez le mode de téléchargement préférentiel dans Please select your download method below window (Sélectionner le mode de téléchargement dans la fenêtre ci-dessous) et cliquez sur Download Now (Télécharger maintenant). La fenêtre File Download (Téléchargement de fichier) s'affiche. 8. Cliquez sur Save (Enregistrer) pour enregistrer le fichier sur l'ordinateur. 9. Cliquez sur Run (Exécuter) pour installer les paramètres BIOS actualisés sur l'ordinateur. Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent. Mots de passe du système et de configuration Vous pouvez définir un mot de passe système et un mot de passe de configuration pour protéger l'ordinateur. Type de mot de passe Description Mot de passe système Mot de passe que vous entrer pour ouvrir un session sur le système. Mot de passe de configuration Mot de passe que vous devez entrer pour accéder aux paramètres du BIOS de l'ordinateur et les changer. 67PRÉCAUTION : Les fonctions de mot de passe fournissent un niveau de sécurité de base pour les données de l'ordinateur. PRÉCAUTION : N'importe quel utilisateur peut accéder aux données de l'ordinateur s'il n'est pas verrouillé et qu'il est laissé sans surveillance. REMARQUE : L'ordinateur est fourni avec la fonction de mot de passe système et de configuration désactivée. Définition d'un mot de passe système et d'un mot de passe de configuration Vous pouvez définir un nouveau mot de passe système et/ou mot de passe de configuration ou changer un mot de passe système et/ou mot de passe de configuration uniquement lorsque l'état de mot de passe est Déverrouillé. Si l'état de mot de passe est Verrouillé, vous ne pouvez pas changer le mot de passe système. REMARQUE : Si le cavalier des mots de passe est désactivé, le mot de passe système et le mot de passe de configuration sont supprimés et vous n'avez pas à fournir de mot de passe système pour ouvrir une session. Pour entrer dans une configuration système, appuyez sur immédiatement après la mise sous tension ou un redémarrage. 1. Dans l'écran System BIOS (BIOS du système) ou System Setup (Configuration du système) sélectionnez System Security (Sécurité du système) et appuyez sur . L'écran System Security s'affiche. 2. Dans l'écran System Security, vérifiez que Password Status est Unlocked. 3. Sélectionnez System Password, entrez le mot de passe du système et appuyez sur ou la touche . Suivez les instructions pour définir le mot de passe système : – Un mot de passe peut contenir jusqu'à 32 caractères. – Le mot de passe peut contenir des nombres de 0 à 9. – Seules les minuscules sont acceptées. – Seuls les caractères spéciaux suivants sont valides : espace, (”), (+), (,), (-), (.), (/), (;), ([), (\), (]), (`). Entrez de nouveau le mot de passe lorsqu'un message le demande. 4. Tapez le mot de passe système que vous avez entré précédemment et cliquez sur OK. 5. Sélectionnez Setup Password, tapez le mot de passe système et appuyez sur ou la touche . Un message demande de retaper le mot de passe de configuration. 6. Tapez le mot de passe de configuration que vous avez entré précédemment et cliquez sur OK. 7. Appuyez sur ; un message demande d'enregistrer les modifications. 8. Appuyez sur pour les enregistrer. L'ordinateur redémarrage. Suppression ou modification d'un mot de passe système et/ou de configuration Vérifiez que l'état de mot de passe est Déverrouillé (dans la configuration du système) avant de supprimer ou de changer un mot de passe système et/ou de configuration. Vous ne pouvez pas supprimer ou changer un mot de passe système et/ou de configuration si l'état de mot de passe est Déverrouillé. Pour entrer dans la configuration du système, appuyez sur immédiatement après la mise sous tension ou un redémarrage. 681. Dans l'écran System BIOS (BIOS du système) ou System Setup (Configuration du système), sélectionnez System Security (Sécurité du système) et appuyez sur . L'écran System Security s'affiche. 2. Dans l'écran System Security, vérifiez que l'état de mot de passe est Déverrouillé. 3. Sélectionnez System Password, modifiez ou supprimez le mot de passe système existant et appuyez sur ou la touche . 4. Sélectionnez Setup Password, modifiez ou supprimez le mot de passe de configuration existant et appuyez sur ou la touche . REMARQUE : Si vous changez le mot de passe système et/ou le mot de passe de configuration, entrez de nouveau le nouveau mot de passe lorsqu'un message le demande. Si vous supprimez l'un ou l'autre des mots de passe ou les deux, confirmez la suppression quand un message le demande. 5. Appuyez sur ; un message demande d'enregistrer les modifications. 6. Appuyez sur pour les enregistrer et quitter la configuration du système. L'ordinateur redémarrage. 69705 Diagnostics En cas de problème avec l'ordinateur, exécutez les diagnostics ePSA avant de contacter l'assistance technique de Dell. Les diagnostics visent à tester le matériel de l'ordinateur sans équipement supplémentaire ou risque de perte de données. Si vous ne parvenez pas à résoudre le problème vous-même, le personnel de maintenance et d'assistance peut utiliser les résultats des diagnostics pour vous aider à le résoudre. Diagnostisc ePSA (Enhanced Pre-Boot System Assessment) Les diagnostics ePSA (également appelés diagnostics système) vérifient complètement le matériel. ePSA est intégré au BIOS et il est démarré par le BIOS en interne. Les diagnostics système intégrés fournissent des options pour des périphériques ou des groupes de périphériques spécifiques pour : • Exécuter des tests automatiquement ou dans un mode interactif • Répéter les tests • Afficher ou enregistrer les résultats des tests • Exécuter des tests rigoureux pour présentent des options de tests supplémentaires pour fournir des informations complémentaires sur un ou des périphériques défaillants • Afficher des messages d'état qui indiquent si les tests ont abouti • Afficher des messages d'erreur qui indiquent les problèmes détectés au cours des tests PRÉCAUTION : Utilisez les diagnostics système pour tester l'ordinateur. L'utilisation de ce programme avec d'autres ordinateurs peut générer des résultats non valides ou des messages d'erreur. REMARQUE : Certains tests de périphériques nécessitent l'interaction de l'utilsateur. Veillez à toujours être à côté de l'ordinateur lorsque vous exécutez les tests de diagnostic. 1. Mettez l'ordinateur sous tension. 2. Lorsque l'ordinateur démarre, appuyez sur la touche lorsque le logo Dell apparaît. 3. Dans l'écran du menu de démarrage, sélectionnez l'option Diagnostics. La fenêtre Enhanced Pre-boot System Assessment s'affiche avec la liste de tous les périphériques détectés sur l'ordinateur. Le programme de diagnostics lance les tests sur tous les périphériques détectés. 4. Si vous voulez lancer un test de diagnostic sur un périphérique donné, appuyez sur ; cliquez sur Yes (Oui) pour arrêter le test de diagnostic. 5. Sélectionnez le périphérique dans le panneau de gauche et cliquez sur Run Tests (Exécuter les tests). 6. En cas de problèmes, des codes d'erreur s'affichent. Notez les codes d'erreur et contactez Dell. 71Voyants d'état de l'appareil Tableau 13. Voyants d'état de l'appareil S'allume lorsque vous allumez l'ordinateur et clignote lorsque l'ordinateur est en mode d'économie d'énergie. S'allume lorsque l'ordinateur lit ou écrit des données. S'allume ou clignote pour indiquer l'état de charge de la batterie. S'allume lorsque le réseau sans fil est activé. Les voyants d'état du périphérique se trouvent généralement sur le dessus ou le côté gauche du clavier. Ils sont utilisés pour afficher la connectivité et l'activité du stockage, de la batterie et des périphériques sans fil. En dehors de cette utilité, ils peuvent servir d'outil de diagnostic lorsqu'il existe une panne dans le système. Le tableau suivant explique comment comprendre les codes des voyants lorsqu'une erreur survient. Tableau 14. Lumière des voyants Voyant de stockage Voyant d'alimentation Voyant sans fil Description de l'erreur Clignotant Uni Uni Possible défaillance du processeur. Uni Clignotant Uni Les modules de mémoire sont détectés mais ont rencontrés une erreur. Clignotant Clignotant Clignotant Défaillance de la carte système. Clignotant Clignotant Uni Défaillance probable de la carte graphique/vidéo. Clignotant Clignotant Éteint Défaillance système de l'initialisation du disque dur OU défaillance du système lors de l'initialisation ROM en option. Clignotant Éteint Clignotant Le contrôleur USB a rencontré un problème pendant l'initialisation. Uni Clignotant Clignotant Aucun module de mémoire n'est installé/détecté. Clignotant Uni Clignotant L'écran a rencontré un problème pendant l'initialisation. Éteint Clignotant Clignotant Le modem empêche le système d'achever l'auto-test de démarrage. Éteint Clignotant Éteint L'initialisation de la mémoire a échoué ou la mémoire n'est pas prise en charge. Voyants d'état de la batterie Si l'ordinateur est branché à une prise secteur, le voyant d'état de la batterie fonctionne de la manière suivante : Alternativement un voyant ambre clignotant et un voyant blanc Un adaptateur secteur non pris en charge par Dell est fixé sur votre portable. 72Alternativement un voyant ambre clignotant avec voyant blanc fixe . Défaillance de batterie temporaire lorsqu'il existe un adaptateur secteur. Voyant ambre clignotant constamment Défaillance de batterie irrémédiable avec adaptateur CA présent. Voyant éteint La batterie est en mode de chargement complet lorsqu'il existe un adaptateur secteur. Voyant blanc allumé La batterie est charge avec adaptateur secteur CA. 73746 Caractéristiques techniques REMARQUE : Les offres proposées peuvent varier selon les pays. Les caractéristiques suivantes se limitent à celles que la législation impose de fournir avec l'ordinateur. Pour plus d'informations sur la configuration de votre ordinateur, cliquez sur Démarrer → Aide et support et sélectionnez l'option qui permet d'afficher les informations relatives à votre ordinateur. System Information (Informations sur le système) Jeu de puces Jeu de puces Mobile Intel 7 Series Largeur de bus DRAM 64 bits Flash EPROM SPI 64 Mbits Bus PCIe Gen1 100 MHz Fréquence du bus externe DMI (5 GT/s) Processeur Types • Intel Core i3 series • Intel Core i5 series • Intel Core i7 series Cache L3 jusqu'à 4 Mo Fréquence du bus externe 1333 MHz Mémoire Connecteur mémoire Deux emplacement SODIMM Capacité de la mémoire 1 Go, 2 Go ou 4 Go Type de mémoire DDR3 SDRAM (1 600 MHz) Mémoire minimale 2 Go Mémoire maximale 16 Go Audio Type audio haute définition quatre canaux Contrôleur IDT92HD93 Conversion stéréo 24 bits (analogique-numérique et numérique-analogique) Interface : Interne audio haute définition 75Audio Externe Entrée microphone/casque stéréo/connecteur haut-parleurs externes Haut-parleurs deux Amplificatîeur intégré de haut-parleurs 1 W (RMS) par canal Réglages du volume touches de fonction du clavier et menus de programmes Vidéo Type Intégrée sur la carte système Contrôleur Intel HD Graphics Communications Adaptateur réseau Ethernet 10/100/1000 Mb/s (RJ-45) Sans fil réseau local sans fil (WLAN) et réseau étendu sans fil (WWAN) Ports et connecteurs Audio un connecteur de microphone/casque stéréo/haut-parleurs Vidéo un mini connecteur HDMI 19 broches et un connecteur VGA Adaptateur réseau Connecteur RJ-45 USB deux connecteurs compatibles USB 3.0 et un connecteur compatible eSATA/USB 2.0 Lecteur de cartes mémoire un lecteur de carte mémoire 8-en-1 Port d'accueil une Carte SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) une Carte à puce sans contact Cartes à puce et technologies prises en charge ISO14443A — 106 kbps, 212 kbps, 424 kbps, and 848 kbps ISO14443B — 106 kbps, 212 kbps, 424 kbps et 848 kbps ISO15693 HID iClass FIPS201 NXP Desfire Écran Type HD, WLED Taille 13,3 pouces Dimensions : Hauteur 314,10 mm (12,36 pouces) Largeur 188,70 mm (7,42 pouces) Diagonale 336,60 mm (13,25 pouces) 76Écran Zone active (X/Y) 293,42 mm x 164,97 mm Résolution maximale 1366 x 768 pixels en 263K couleurs Luminosité maximale 200 nits Angle d'utilisation de 0° (fermé) à 135° Fréquence de rafraîchissement 60 Hz Angle minimal de visualisation : Horizontal +/- 40° Vertical +10°/-30° Pas de pixel 0,2148 mm Clavier Nombre de touches États-Unis : 86 touches ; Royaume-Uni : 87 touches ; Brésil : 87 touches ; Japon : 90 touches Configuration QWERTY/AZERTY/Kanji Pavé tactile Zone active : Axe X 80,00 mm Axe Y 40,70 mm Batterie Type • Batterie Lithium-ion 3 cellules (32 WHr) avec ExpressCharge • Batterie Lithium-ion 6 cellules (65 WHr) avec ExpressCharge • Batterie Lithium-ion 6-cellule (58 WHr) Dimensions : 3 cellules Profondeur 29,97 mm (1,18 pouces) Hauteur 19,80 mm (0,78 pouces) Largeur 208 mm (8,19 pouces) 6 éléments Profondeur 54,10 mm (2,13 pouces) Hauteur 20,85 mm (0,82 pouces) Largeur 214 mm (8,43 pouces) 77Batterie Poids : 3 cellules 172,37 g (0,38 lb) 6 éléments 335,66 g (0,74 lb) Tension 11,10 VCC Plage de températures : En fonctionnement De 0 °C à 35 °C (de 32 °F à 95 °F) À l'arrêt –40 °C à 65 °C (–40 °F à 149 °F) Pile bouton Pile bouton 3 V CR2032 lithium Adaptateur CA Type 65 W et 90 W Tension d'entrée De 100 VAC à 240 VAC Courant d'entrée (maximum) 1,50 A/1,60 A/1,70 A Fréquence d'entrée De 50 Hz à 60 Hz Puissance de sortie 65 W et 90 W Courant de sortie 3,34 A et 4,62 A (continu) Tension de sortie nominale 19,5 +/– 1,0 VCC Plage de températures : En fonctionnement De 0 °C à 40 °C (de 32 °F à 104 °F) À l'arrêt De –40 °C à 70 °C (de –40 °F à 158 °F) Caractéristiques physiques Hauteur de 26,92 mm à 32,26 mm (de 1,06 pouces à 1,27 pouces) Largeur 335,00 mm (13,19 pouces) Profondeur 223,30 mm (8,79 pouces) Poids 1,76 kg (3,87 lb) Conditions environnementales Température : En fonctionnement De 0 °C à 35 °C (de 32 °F à 95 °F) Stockage –40 °C à 65 °C (–40 °F à 149 °F) Humidité relative (maximum) : En fonctionnement De 10 % à 90 % (sans condensation) Stockage De 5 % à 95 % (sans condensation) 78Conditions environnementales Altitude (maximum): En fonctionnement De –15,24 à 3 048 m (–50 à 10 000 pieds) À l'arrêt De –15,24 m à 10 668 m (–50 à 35 000 pieds) Niveau de particules polluantes en suspension G1 tel que défini par ISA-71.04–1985 79807 Contacter Dell REMARQUE : Si vous ne disposez pas d'une connexion Internet, les informations de contact figurent sur la facture d'achat, le borderau de colisage, la facture le catalogue des produits Dell. Dell propose diverses options d'assistance et de maintenance en ligne et téléphonique. Ces options varient en fonction du pays et du produit et certains services peuvent ne pas être disponibles dans votre région Pour contacter le service commercial, technique ou client de Dell : 1. Visitez le site support.dell.com. 2. Sélectionnez la catégorie d'assistance. 3. Si vous ne résidez pas aux Etats-Unis, sélectionnez le code pays au bas de la page support.dell.com ou sélectionnez Tout pour afficher d'autres choix. 4. Sélectionnez le lien de service ou d'assistance approprié. 81 Manuel de maintenance Dell™ Latitude™ 13 Remarques, précautions et avertissements Si vous avez acheté un ordinateur Dell™ de série n, toute référence dans ce document aux systèmes d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows® n'est pas applicable. Les informations contenues dans ce document sont sujettes à modification sans préavis. © 2010 Dell Inc. Tous droits réservés. Toute reproduction de ce document sous quelque forme que ce soit sans l'autorisation écrite de DELL Inc. est strictement interdite. Marques mentionnées dans ce document : Dell, le logo DELL et Latitude sont des marques de Dell Inc. ; Intel, Core et Celeron sont des marques ou des marques déposées de Intel  Corporation ; Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista et le bouton Démarrer de Windows Vista sont des marques déposées ou non de Microsoft Corporation aux États-Unis et/ou d'autres pays ; Bluetooth est une marque déposée détenue par Bluetooth SIG, Inc. Les autres marques et noms de produits pouvant être utilisés dans ce document sont reconnus comme appartenant à leurs propriétaires respectifs. Dell Inc. rejette tout intérêt  propriétaire dans les marques et les noms de marques autres que les siens. Mars 2010        Rév. A00 Intervention sur votre ordinateur Retrait et réinstallation de pièces Caractéristiques Configuration du système Diagnostics REMARQUE : une REMARQUE indique des informations importantes qui peuvent vous aider à mieux utiliser votre ordinateur.  PRÉCAUTION : une PRÉCAUTION indique un risque de dommage matériel ou de perte de données en cas de non-respect des instructions. AVERTISSEMENT : un AVERTISSEMENT vous avertit d’un risque d'endommagement du matériel, de blessure corporelle ou de mort. Retour à la page Contenu Configuration du système Manuel de maintenance Dell™ Latitude™ 13 Accès au programme de configuration du système Menu de démarrage Touches de navigation Options du menu de configuration du système Votre système offre les options de configuration du BIOS et du système : l Accédez au menu de configuration en pressant   l Affichez un menu amorçage rapide en pressant   l Accédez aux options de configuration de Intel® AMT en pressant +

Accès au programme de configuration du système Pressez  pour entrer dans la configuration système et changer les paramètres modifiables par l'utilisateur. Si vous avez des problèmes pour entrer dans  la configuration système en utilisant cette touche, pressez  dès que les voyants du clavier s'allument. Menu de démarrage Appuyez sur  lorsque le logo Dell apparaît pour lancer un menu de démarrage ponctuel avec une liste de périphériques d'amorçage valides pour le  système. Les options Diagnostics et Enter Setup (entrer dans le menu) sont aussi comprises dans ce menu. Les périphériques listés dans le menu de  démarrage dépendent des périphériques amorçables installés sur votre ordinateur. Ce menu est utile lorsque vous désirez démarrer à partir d'un périphérique  précis ou pour afficher les diagnostics pour l'ordinateur. Utiliser ce menu ne fera pas de changements à l'ordre de périphériques de démarrage dans le BIOS.  Touches de navigation Utilisez les touches suivantes pour naviguer dans les écrans du programme de configuration du système. Options du menu de configuration du système Les tableaux suivants décrivent les options de menu du programme de configuration système. Navigation Action Touche(s) Agrandire et réduire un champ , flèche gauche ou droite, ou +/– Développer ou réduire tous les champs < > Quitter le BIOS <Échap>—Rester dans le menu de configuration, Enregistrer/Quitter, Annuler/Quitter Modifier un paramètre Flèches gauche ou droite Sélectionner un champ à modifier Annuler les modifications <Échap> Réinitialiser les paramètres par défaut ou l'option Load Defaults (Charger les paramètres par défaut) General (Général) Option Description Informations système Cette section liste les fonctions matérielles principales de votre ordinateur. Il n'y a pas d'options configurables  dans cette section. l Informations système ¡ BIOS Version (Version du BIOS) ¡ Service Tag (Numéro de service)  ¡ Asset Tag (Numéro d'inventaire)  ¡ Ownership Tag (Numéro de propriétaire)  l Memory Information (Informations sur la mémoire) ¡ Memory Installed (Mémoire installée)  ¡ Memory Available (Mémoire disponible)  ¡ Memory Speed (Vitesse de la mémoire)  ¡ Memory Channel Mode (Mode de canal mémoire)  ¡ Memory Technology (Technologie de mémoire)  ¡ DIMM A Size (Taille DIMM A)  ¡ DIMM B Size (Taille DIMM B)  l Processor Information (Informations sur le processeur) ¡ Processor Type (Type de processeur) ¡ Core Count (Nombre de cœurs) ¡ Processor ID (ID du processeur) ¡ Current Clock Speed (Vitesse d'horloge actuelle) ¡ Minimum Clock Speed (Vitesse d'horloge minimum) ¡ Maximum Clock Speed (Vitesse d'horloge maximum) l Device Information (Informations sur les périphériques) ¡ Primary Hard Drive (Disque dur principal) ¡ System eSATA Device (Périphérique système eSATA)  ¡ Video Controller (Contrôleur vidéo)  ¡ Video BIOS Version (Version du BIOS vidéo) ¡ Video Memory (Mémoire vidéo)  ¡ Panel Type (Type d'écran)  ¡ Native Resolution (Résolution native)  ¡ Audio Controller (Contrôleur audio)  ¡ Wi-Fi Device (Périphérique WIFI)  ¡ Cellular Device (Périphérique cellulaire)  ¡ Bluetooth Device (périphérique Bluetooth)  ¡ Integrated NIC MAC (Carte réseau MAC intégrée)  Battery Information (Informations sur la batterie) Affiche l'état de la batterie et le type d'adaptateur secteur connecté au système. Boot Sequence (Séquence de démarrage) Spécifie l'ordre des tentatives de localisation du système d'exploitation effectuées par l'ordinateur. l Diskette drive (Lecteur de disquettes) l USB Storage Device (Périphérique de stockage USB)  l CD/DVD/CD-RW Drive (Lecteur de CD/DVD/CD-RW) l eSATA HDD l Onboard NIC (Carte réseau intégrée)  Date/Time (Date/heure) Affiche les paramètres de date et heure actuels. NOTE: la configuration du système comprend les options et paramètres portant aux périphériques du système intégrés. Selon votre ordinateur et les  périphériques installés, les objets de cette liste pourraient ne pas apparaître. System Configuration (Configuration du système) Option Description Integrated NIC (Carte réseau  intégrée) Vous permet de configurer le contrôleur de réseau intégré. Les options sont : Disabled (Désactivé), Enabled (Activé),  Enabled w/PXE (Activé avec PXE) et Enabled w/RPL (Activé avec RPL) System Management (Administration de système) Vous permet de configurer les options de gestion du système. Les options sont : Disabled (Désactivé), Alert Only (Alertes uniquement), ASF 2.0, et DASH/ASF 2.0 SATA Operation (Fonctionnement du SATA) Permet de configurer le mode d'exploitation du contrôleur de disque dur SATA intégré. Les options sont : Disabled (Désactivé), ATA et AHCI. Miscellaneous Devices (Périphériques divers) Permet d'activer ou de désactiver les périphériques suivants : l eSATA Ports (Ports eSATA) l External USB Port (Port USB externe) l Microphone Paramètre par défaut : All enabled (tout activé). Vidéo Option Description LCD Brightness (Luminosité  LCD) Permet de configurer la luminosité selon la source d'alimentation électrique  (On Battery (sur pile) et On AC (sur alimentation secteur). Security (Sécurité) Option Description Admin Password (Mot de passe administrateur) Permet de définir, modifier, ou supprimer le mot de passe d'administrateur (admin). Le mot de passe admin active plusieurs  fonctionnalités lorsque mis en place, parmi lesquelles : l interdire les modifications aux paramètres de configuration  l restreindre les périphériques d'amorçage listés dans le menu de démarrage  à ceux activés dans le champ «  Boot Sequence » (séquence de démarrage)  l interdire des modifications aux numéros de propriétaire et d'inventaire  l servir de substitut aux mots de passe système et du disque dur  REMARQUE : vous devez définir le mot de passe admin avant de définir celui du système ou du disque dur. REMARQUE : les modifications de mot de passe réussies prennent effet immédiat. REMARQUE : supprimer le mot de passe admin entraîne la suppression automatique du mot de passe système.   System Password (Mot de passe système) Permet de définir, modifier, ou supprimer le mot de passe système. Une fois le mot de passe système définit, il sera requis  à chaque mise sous tension ou redémarrage de l'ordinateur. REMARQUE : les modifications de mot de passe réussies prennent effet immédiat. Internal HDD Password (Mot de passe du disque dur interne) Ce champ vous permet de mettre en place, de modifier ou de supprimer le mot de passe du disque dur interne (HDD). Les modifications réussies prennent effet immédiat et nécessitent un redémarrage du système. Le mot de passe HDD est lié au  disque dur, donc même si le disque dur est installé dans un autre système, il reste protégé.  Password Bypass (Contournement de mot de passe) Vous permet de contourner les invitations de saisie de mots de passe du système et du disque dur interne au redémarrage  ou réveil de l'ordinateur. Vous pouvez définir le Password Bypass (Contournement de mot de passe) sur : Disabled (Désactivé), Reboot Bypass (Ignorer sur redémarrage), Resume Bypass (Ignorer sur reprise) et Reboot & Resume Bypass (Ignorer sur redémarrage  et reprise). REMARQUE : vous ne pouvez pas contourner le mot de passe du système ou celui du disque dur si l'ordinateur est mis  sous tension après avoir été éteint. Password Change (Modification de mot de passe) Permet d'activer ou désactiver les modifications apportées aux mots de passe du système et du disque dur une fois le mot  de passe admin défini. Permet d'activer ou désactiver le TPM (module de plate-forme approuvée) sur le système. AVIS : désactiver cette option ne modifie aucune option que vous avez paramétré dans le TPM, ni ne supprime quelque clé  ou information que vous avez stocké dedans. TPM Security (Sécurité TPM) Les options suivantes sont disponibles lorsque le TPM est activé :  l Désactiver : désactive le TPM. Le TPM restreint l'accès aux données de l'utilisateur stockées dedans et n'exécute  aucune commande nécessitant l'usage des ressources TPM.  l Activer : active le TPM. l Effacer : efface les informations de l'utilisateur stockées dans le TPM.  Computrace® Permet d'activer ou désactiver le logiciel optionnel Computrace. Les options sont : Deactivate (Éteindre), Disable (Désactiver) et Activate (Activer). REMARQUE : les options Activate (Activer) et Disable (Désactiver) activeront ou désactiveront la fonctionnalité de manière  permanente et aucune modifications ultérieure se sera permis.  CPU XD Support (Prise en charge CPU XD) Permet d'activer ou désactiver le mode de Désactivation d'exécution du processeur.  Paramètre par défaut : Enabled (Activé) Performance (Performances) Option Description Multi Core Support (Support multicœur) Active ou désactive le support multicœur du processeur. Intel® SpeedStep™ Active ou désactive le mode Intel SpeedStep. Power Management (Gestion de l'alimentation) Option Description Wake on AC (Éveil sur secteur) Permet d'activer ou désactiver l'option de mise sous tension automatique de l'ordinateur lorsque celui-ci est connecté à un  adaptateur ordinateur secteur. Auto On Time (Allumage auto selon temps) Permet de choisir l'heure de mise sous tension automatique de l'ordinateur. Vous pouvez choisir les jours pour lesquels vous désirez activer l'option de mise sous tension automatique (le cas  échéant). Les paramètres sont : Disabled (Désactivé), Everyday (Tous les jours) ou Weekdays (Jours de la semaine). Paramètre par défaut : Off (Désactivé) USB Wake Support (Prise en charge de l'éveil par USB) Permet d'activer ou désactiver la capacité des périphériques USB à éveiller l'ordinateur lorsque celui-ci est en mode veille. Cette fonctionnalité est uniquement fonctionnelle lorsque l'adaptateur secteur est connecté. Si l'adaptateur secteur est  débranché durant la veille, le BIOS coupera toute alimentation aux ports USB pour économiser l'énergie.  Wake on LAN/WLAN (Éveil sur  LAN/WLAN) Permet d'allumer l'ordinateur à l'aide d'un signal spécial LAN, ou de l'éveiller quand celui-ci est en mode de mise en veille prolongé à l'aide d'un signal sans-fil spécial LAN. La sortie de l'état de veille n'est pas affectée par ce paramètre et doit  être activée dans le système d'exploitation. l Disabled (Désactivé) : ne permet pas au système de s'allumer lors de la réception d'un signal LAN ou WLAN.  l LAN Only (LAN seulement) : permet au système d'être allumé par des signaux LAN spéciaux.  l WLAN Only (WLAN seulement) : permet au système d'être allumé par des signaux WLAN spéciaux.  l LAN or WLAN (LAN ou WLAN) : Permet au système d'être allumé par des signaux WLAN ou LAN spéciaux.  Le paramètre d'usine par défaut est Off (Désactivé). ExpressCharge Permet d'activer ou de désactiver la fonctionnalité ExpressCharge REMARQUE : ExpressCharge n'est pas disponible pour toutes les batteries. Charger Behavior (Comportement du chargeur) Permet d'activer ou de désactiver le chargeur : Si cette option est désactivée, la batterie ne perdra pas d'énergie lorsqu'un  adaptateur secteur est branché, mais ne se chargera pas non plus. Paramètre par défaut  : Charger Enabled (chargeur activé) POST Behavior (Comportement de l'auto-test de démarrage) Option Description Adapter Warnings (Avertissements d'adaptateur) Permet d'activer ou de désactiver les messages d'avertissements du BIOS selon l'adaptateur d'alimentation utilisé. Le BIOS  affiche ces messages lorsque l'adaptateur n'a pas une capacité suffisante pour votre configuration. Le paramètre d'usine par défaut est Enabled (activé). Keypad (Embedded) (Pavé  numérique [intégré]) Permet de sélectionner l'un des deux procédés d'activation du pavé numérique intégré dans le clavier interne. l Fn Key Only (Touche Fn seulement) : le pavé numérique n'est activé que lorsque vous maintenez la touche   enfoncée.  l By Num Lk (Avec VerrNum) : le pavé numérique est activé lorsque (1) le voyant VerrNum est allumé et (2)  lorsqu'aucun clavier externe n'est connecté. Veuillez noter que le système peut ne pas remarquer immédiatement  qu'un clavier externe est débranché.  REMARQUE : lorsque le menu de configuration est lancé, ce champ n'a aucun effet. Le menu ne fonctionne que dans le mode  Fn Key Only (touche Fn seulement). Paramètre par défaut : Fn Key Only (Touche Fn seulement) Numlock LED (Voyant VerrNum) Permet d'activer ou désactiver le voyant VerrNum au démarrage de l'ordinateur. Paramètre par défaut : Enabled (Activé) USB Emulation (Émulation  USB) Définit comment le BIOS gère les périphériques USB. L'émulation USB est activée en permanence pendant l'auto-test de démarrage.  Le paramètre d'usine par défaut est Enabled (activé). Permet d'utiliser la touche  sur un clavier PS/2 externe de la même manière que la touche  sur le clavier Retour à la page Contenu Fn Key Emulation (Émulation  de touche Fn) interne de l'ordinateur. REMARQUE : les claviers USB ne peuvent émuler la touche  si vous utilisez un système d'exploitation ACPI tel que  Microsoft® Windows® XP. Les claviers USB émuleront la touche  uniquement dans un mode non-ACPI (par ex. DOS). Paramètre par défaut : Enabled (Activé) Fast Boot (Démarrage  rapide) Permet d'activer ou de désactiver la fonctionnalité Démarrage rapide. Les options suivantes sont disponibles :  l Minimal (Minimal) : démarre rapidement à moins que le BIOS n'ait été mis à jour, la mémoire modifiée ou que l'autotest de démarrage précédent ne se soit pas terminé avec succès.  l Thorough (Approfondi) : n'ignore aucune étape du processus de démarrage.  l Auto : permet au système d'exploitation de contrôler ce paramètre (ne fonctionne que si le système d'exploitation  prend en charge l'indicateur de démarrage simple [Simple Boot Flag]).  Paramètre par défaut : Minimal (Minimal) Intel Fast Call for Help (appel pour aide rapide Intel) Utilisé en conjonction avec iAMT 4,0. Permet aux utilisateurs d'initier le contact avec la console de gestion tout en se trouvant  à l'extérieur de l'infrastructure des bureaux (par ex. un emplacement à distance, derrière un pare feu ou NAT, etc.). Utilisez la  case à cocher pour activer/désactiver cette fonctionnalité. Virtualization Support (Prise en charge de la virtualisation) Option Description VT for Direct I/O (VT pour E/S directe) Ce champ spécifie si un Virtual Machine Monitor (VMM) peut utiliser ou non les capacités matérielles additionnelles permises  fournies par Intel® Virtualization Technology pour E/S directe. Paramètre par défaut : Disabled (Désactivé). Sans fil Option Description Wireless Devices (Périphériques sans  fil) Permet d'activer ou désactiver les périphériques sans-fil suivants : Internal WWAN (WWAN Interne), Internal WLAN (WLAN interne) et Internal Bluetooth (Bluetooth interne). Maintenance Option Description Service Tag (Numéro de  service) Affiche le numéro de service de l'ordinateur. Si, pour une raison quelconque, le numéro de service n'est pas déjà défini, vous  devriez pouvoir utiliser ce champ pour le créer. Si un numéro de service n'a pas été défini pour ce système, alors l'ordinateur affichera automatiquement cet écran lorsque  l'utilisateur entre dans le BIOS. Il vous sera demandé d'entrer le numéro de service.  Asset Tag (Numéro  d'inventaire) Ce champ vous permet de créer un numéro d'inventaire pour le système. Ce champ ne peut être mis à jour que si le numéro  d'inventaire n'a pas déjà été défini. System Logs (Journaux système) Option Description BIOS Events (Événements  BIOS) Ce champ permet de consulter et supprimer les événements BIOS de l'auto-test de démarrage. Sont inclus les dates et  heures des événements, ainsi que le code de voyants. DellDiag Events (Événements  DellDiag) Ce champ vous permet de consulter les résultats de diagnostics de Dell Diagnostics et PSA. Sont inclus les dates, heures,  le diagnostic et la version qui était exécutée ainsi que le code résultant. Thermal Events (Événements  thermiques) Ce champ permet de consulter et de supprimer les événements thermiques. Sont inclus les dates, heures ainsi que le nom  de l'événement. Power Events (Événements  d'alimentation) Ce champ permet de consulter et de supprimer les événements d'alimentation. Sont inclus les dates et heures des  événements, ainsi que l'état de l'alimentation et la raison.Retour à la page Contenu Diagnostics Manuel de maintenance Dell™ Latitude™ 13  Voyants d'état de l'appareil Voyants d'état de la batterie Niveau de charge et état de fonctionnement de la batterie  Voyants d'état du clavier Codes d'erreur des voyants Voyants d'état de l'appareil Voyants d'état de la batterie Si l'ordinateur est branché à une prise secteur, le voyant d'état de la batterie fonctionne comme suit : l Alternativement orange et bleu clignotant : un adaptateur secteur incompatible ou non pris en charge par Dell est relié à votre ordinateur portable.  l Orange clignotant et bleu fixe alternativement : panne temporaire de la batterie lorsqu'un adaptateur secteur est branché.  l Orange clignotant sans interruption : défaillance fatale de la batterie lorsqu'un adaptateur secteur est branché.  l Voyant éteint : batterie en mode recharge complète lorsqu'un adaptateur secteur est branché.  l Voyant bleu allumé : batterie en mode charge lorsqu'un adaptateur secteur est branché.  Niveau de charge et état de fonctionnement de la batterie Pour vérifier le niveau de charge de la batterie, appuyez sur le bouton d'état de l'indicateur de la charge de batterie et relâchez-le pour allumer les voyants de niveau de charge. Chaque voyant représente environ 20 % de la charge totale de la batterie. Si, par exemple, quatre voyants s'allument, la batterie a encore  80 % de charge restante. Si aucun voyant ne s'allume, cela signifie que la batterie est complètement déchargée.  Pour vérifier l'usure de la batterie par l'indicateur de charge, maintenez enfoncé le bouton d'état sur l'indicateur de la charge de batterie pendant au moins  3 secondes. Si aucun voyant ne s'allume, la batterie est en bon état et elle dispose encore de plus de 80 % de sa capacité de charge d'origine. Chaque voyant  représente une dégradation incrémentielle. Si cinq voyants s'allument, la batterie dispose de moins de 60 % de sa capacité de charge et vous devez  envisager son remplacement. Voyants d'état du clavier Les voyants verts situés au-dessus du clavier indiquent ce qui suit : Codes d'erreur des voyants Le tableau suivant répertorie les codes de voyant pouvant s'afficher en l'absence d'un auto-test de démarrage. S'allume lorsque vous allumez l'ordinateur et clignote lorsque l'ordinateur est en mode de gestion de l'alimentation. S'allume lorsque l'ordinateur lit ou écrit des données. S'allume fixe ou clignote pour indiquer l'état de charge de la batterie. S'allume lorsque le réseau sans fil est activé. S'allume lorsqu'une carte dotée de la technologie sans fil Bluetooth® est activée. Pour désactiver uniquement la  fonction de technologie sans fil Bluetooth, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône de la barre d'état  système, puis sélectionnez Disable Bluetooth Radio (Désactiver Radio Bluetooth). S'allument lorsque le pavé numérique est activé. S'allument lorsque la fonction Verrouillage majuscule est activée. S'allument lorsque la fonction Arrêt défil. est activée. Apparence Description Étape suivante ALLUMÉ-CLIGNOTANT-CLIGNOTANT Aucun module SODIMM installé 1. Installez des barrettes de mémoire compatibles.  2. Si des barrettes sont déjà installées, réinstallez-les une par une dans chaque logement. 3. Essayez une barrette de mémoire, dont le fonctionnement a  été vérifié, d'un autre ordinateur ou remplacez la barrette de  mémoire.  4. Remplacez la carte système.  CLIGNOTANT-ALLUMÉ-ALLUMÉRetour à la page Contenu Erreur de la carte système 1. Réinstallez le processeur.  2. Remplacez la carte système.  3. Remplacez le processeur. CLIGNOTANT-ALLUMÉ-CLIGNOTANT erreur du panneau d'écran 1. Réinstallez le câble de l'écran.  2. Remplacez le panneau d'écran.  3. Remplacez la carte vidéo/système.  ÉTEINT-CLIGNOTANT-ÉTEINT Erreur de compatibilité de la  mémoire 1. Installez des barrettes de mémoire compatibles.  2. Si deux barrettes sont installées, retirez-en une et effectuez un test. Essayez l'autre barrette sur le même logement et  effectuez un test. Testez l'autre logement avec les deux barrettes. 3. Remplacez la barrette de mémoire.  4. Remplacez la carte système.  ALLUMÉ-CLIGNOTANT-ALLUMÉ Une barrette de mémoire est  détectée, mais elle comporte  des erreurs 1. Réinstallez la barrette de mémoire.  2. Si deux barrettes sont installées, retirez-en une et effectuez un test. Essayez l'autre barrette sur le même logement et  effectuez un test. Testez l'autre logement avec les deux barrettes. 3. Remplacez la barrette de mémoire.  4. Remplacez la carte système.  ÉTEINT-CLIGNOTANT-CLIGNOTANT Erreur du modem 1. Réinstallez le modem.  2. Remplacez le modem. 3. Remplacez la carte système.  CLIGNOTANT-CLIGNOTANT-CLIGNOTANT Erreur de la carte système 1. Remplacez la carte système.  CLIGNOTANT-CLIGNOTANT-ÉTEINT Erreur de la mémoire morte  en option 1. Réinstallez le périphérique.  2. Remplacez le périphérique.  3. Remplacez la carte système.  ÉTEINT-ALLUMÉ-ÉTEINT Erreur du périphérique de  stockage 1. Réinstallez le disque dur et le lecteur optique.  2. Testez l'ordinateur avec le disque dur et le lecteur optique seulement. 3. Remplacez le périphérique à l'origine de la panne.  4. Remplacez la carte système.  CLIGNOTANT-CLIGNOTANT-ALLUMÉ Erreur de la carte vidéo 1. Remplacez la carte système. Retour à la page Contenu Retrait et réinstallation de pièces  Manuel de maintenance Dell™ Latitude™ 13 Retour à la page Contenu ExpressCard Cache de fond Carte de réseau local sans fil (WLAN) Disque duret carte audio Haut-parleur Mémoire Carte SIM (module d'identité d'abonné) Pile bouton Ensemble du dissipateur de chaleur et du ventilateur Panneau d'écran Repose-mains et ensemble LCD Carte SD (Secure Digital) Batterie Capteur de fermeture de l'écran Cache des voyants Clavier Lecteur de carte ExpressCard/SD Lecteur de carte SIM Carte système Carte intégrée avec technologie sans fil Bluetooth® Cadre de l'écran CaméraRetour à la page Contenu Caractéristiques Manuel de maintenance Dell™ Latitude™ 13  Informations système Mémoire Audio ExpressCard Écran Pavé tactile Adaptateur secteur Caractéristiques environnementales Processeur Vidéo Communications Ports et connecteurs Clavier Batterie Caractéristiques physiques REMARQUE : les configurations peuvent varier d'une région à l'autre. Pour plus d'informations concernant la configuration de votre ordinateur, cliquez  sur le bouton Démarrer® Aide et support et sélectionnez l'option permettant d'afficher des informations relatives à votre ordinateur. Informations système  Jeu de puces Jeu de puces Mobile Intel GS45 Express Largeur du bus de la mémoire DRAM Bus 64 bits Largeur du bus d'adresses du processeur 36 bits Flash EPROM SPI 16 Mbits Processeur  Types Intel® Celeron® Ultra Low Voltage (ULV) Intel Core™2 Solo ULV Intel Core2 Duo ULV Cache L2 Intel Celeron ULV–1 Mo Intel Core2 Solo ULV–3 Mo Intel Core2 Duo ULV–3 Mo Fréquence du bus externe 800 MHz Mémoire  Type DDR3 Vitesse pris en charge : 1067 MHz fonctionnalité : 800 MHz dû à des limitations du bus  avant (FSB) Connecteur un support SODIMM Capacités de la barrette 1 Go, 2 Go et 4 Go Mémoire minimale 1 Go Mémoire maximale 4 Go Vidéo  Type carte intégrée sur la carte système Contrôleur Intel GMA 4500MHD Sortie connecteur VGA à 15 broches Audio  Type son haute définition bicanal Contrôleur Realtek ALC269 Conversion stéréo 24 bits (analogique-numérique et numériqueanalogique) Interface : Interne audio haute définition Externe Connecteur de microphone Connecteur d'écouteurs et haut-parleurs externes stéréosHaut-parleurs un de 1,5 W Amplificateur intégré pour haut-parleurs 1,5 W Contrôles du volume touches fonctionnelles du clavier (Fn+F3/F4/F5) et menus des programmes Communications  Carte réseau Ethernet LAN Broadcom NetXtreme de 10/100/1000 Mb/s Sans fil prise en charge des technologies internes WLAN, WWAN et Bluetooth® sans fil (en cas d'achat de cartes en option) ExpressCard REMARQUE : le logement pour carte ExpressCard ne prend pas en charge les cartes PC. Connecteur ExpressCard Logement ExpressCard Cartes prises en charge Cartes ExpressCard 34 mm Ports et connecteurs  Audio Connecteur de microphone Connecteur d'écouteurs et haut-parleurs stéréos Vidéo connecteur VGA à 15 broches Carte réseau Connecteur RJ-45 USB un connecteur à 4 broches conforme à la norme  USB 2.0 un connecteur conforme à la norme eSATA/USB 2.0 Logement de carte mémoire Logement de carte mémoire 5 en 1 prenant en  charge les cartes MS, MS Pro, SD, SDHC, et MMC Carte Mini Prise en charge des mini-cartes demi-hauteur WLAN PCI-E Prise en charge des mini-cartes pleine-hauteur WLAN PCI-E Écran  Type écran LCD antiéblouissant avec diode blanche  électro-luminescente (LED). Dimension Haute définition (HD) 13,3 pouces Zone active (X/Y) 293,40 mm x 165,00 mm Dimensions : Hauteur 188,80 mm (7,43 pouces) Largeur 314,10 mm (12,37 pouces) Diagonale 337,80 mm (13,30 pouces) Résolution maximale 1 366 x 768 avec 262 K couleurs Luminosité typique 200 nits Angle de fonctionnement 0 degré (fermé) à 135 degrés Intervalle de rafraîchissement 40 Hz et 60 Hz Angles de visualisation : Horizontal 40/40 degrés Vertical 15/30 degrés Taille du pixel 0,2148 mm Clavier  Nombre de touches États-Unis et Canada : 83 touches International : 87 touches Japon : 90 touchesDisposition QWERTY/AZERTY/Kanji Pavé tactile  Zone active : Axe des abscisses 81,00 mm (3,19 pouces) Axe des ordonnées 42,00 mm (1,65 pouces) Batterie  Type « Smart » au lithium ion à 6 cellules (30 Wh) Durée de la charge lorsque l'ordinateur est éteint environ 4 heures (pour une batterie intégralement  déchargée) Durée d'utilisation L'autonomie de la batterie varie en fonction de l'utilisation et peut être considérablement réduite en  cas d'utilisation intensive. Durée de vie environ 300 cycles de charge/décharge Dimensions : Profondeur 155,20 mm (6,11 pouces) Hauteur 5,35 mm (0,21 pouces) Largeur 177,60 mm (6,99 pouces) Tension 11,10 VCC Plage de températures : Fonctionnement 0 à 35 °C (32 à 95 °F) Stockage –40 à 60 °C (–40 à 140 °F) Pile bouton 3 V CR2025 au lithium Adaptateur secteur  Type Tension d'entrée 100–240 VCA Courant d'entrée (maximal) 1,5 A Fréquence d'entrée 50 Hz–60 Hz Courant de sortie 4,34 A (maximum à 4 impulsions/seconde) 3,34 A (en continu) Tension de sortie 19,5 +/–1 VCC Dimensions : Hauteur 16 mm (0,63 pouce) Largeur 66 mm (2,60 pouces) Profondeur 127 mm (5,00 pouces) Poids (approximatif) 0,29 kg (0,64 livre) Plage de températures : Fonctionnement 0 à 40 °C (32 à 95 °F) En stockage –40 à 70 °C (de –40 à 149 °F) Caractéristiques physiques  Hauteur (avant-arrière) 16,50 mm à 19,70 mm (0,65 pouce à 0,78 pouce) Largeur 330 mm (12,99 pouces) Profondeur 230 mm (9,05 pouces) Poids (approximatif) 1,60 kg (3,53 livre) Caractéristiques environnementales  Plage de températures : Fonctionnement 0 à 35 °C (32 à 95 °F)Retour à la page Contenu Stockage –40 à 65 °C (de –40 à 149 °F) Humidité relative (maximale) : Fonctionnement 10 % à 90 % (sans condensation) Stockage 5 % à 95 % (sans condensation) Tolérance maximale aux vibrations : Fonctionnement 0,66 Grms (2-600 Hz) À l'arrêt 1,30 Grms (2-600 Hz) REMARQUE : la vibration se mesure à l'aide d'un spectre de vibration aléatoire simulant l'environnement  utilisateur. Choc maximal : Fonctionnement 142 G (2 ms) À l'arrêt 162 G (2 ms) REMARQUE : la résistance maximale aux chocs est mesurée avec la tête de l'unité de disque dur en position  de repos et une demi-impulsion sinusoïdale de 2 ms.Retour à la page Contenu Disque dur et carte audio Manuel de maintenance Dell™ Latitude™ 13 Retrait du disque dur et de la carte audio 1. Suivez les instructions de la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Retirez la carte ExpressCard (le cas échéant).  3. Retirez la carte SD (le cas échéant).  4. Retirez le cache de fond. 5. Retirez la batterie. 6. Débranchez le câble des haut-parleurs de la carte audio. 7. Déconnectez le câble de données du disque dur de la carte audio.  8. Retirez les vis qui fixent la carte audio et le disque dur à l'ordinateur.  9. Soulevez l'ensemble disque dur et la carte audio et retirez-les de l'ordinateur. 10. Désengagez la carte audio du disque dur.  11. Retirez les vis qui fixent le support au disque dur. 12. Retirez le disque dur de son support. Réinstallation du disque dur et de la carte audio Pour réinstaller le disque dur et la carte audio, suivez cette procédure dans l'ordre inverse.  Retour à la page Contenu AVERTISSEMENT : avant toute intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur, consultez les consignes de sécurité livrées avec celui-ci. Pour des informations complémentaires sur les consignes de sécurité, voir la page d'accueil Regulatory Compliance (Conformité à la réglementation) à  l'adresse : www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance.  REMARQUE : vous devrez peut-être installer Adobe® Flash® Player depuis le site Adobe.com pour voir les illustrations ci-dessous.Retour à la page Contenu Batterie Manuel de maintenance Dell™ Latitude™ 13 Retrait de la batterie 1. Suivez les instructions de la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Retirez la carte ExpressCard (le cas échéant).  3. Retirez la carte SD (le cas échéant).  4. Retirez le cache de fond. 5. Soulevez le clip qui maintient le câble noir pour libérer le câble de la batterie de son connecteur sur la carte système, puis déconnectez-le. 6. Retirez les vis qui fixent la batterie à l'ordinateur.  7. Soulevez la batterie et retirez-la de l'ordinateur. Réinstallation de la batterie Pour réinstaller la batterie, suivez cette procédure dans l'ordre inverse. Retour à la page Contenu AVERTISSEMENT : avant toute intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur, consultez les consignes de sécurité livrées avec celui-ci. Pour des informations complémentaires sur les consignes de sécurité, voir la page d'accueil Regulatory Compliance (Conformité à la réglementation) à  l'adresse : www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance.  REMARQUE : vous devrez peut-être installer Adobe® Flash® Player depuis le site Adobe.com pour voir les illustrations ci-dessous.Retour à la page Contenu Carte intégrée avec technologie sans fil Bluetooth Manuel de maintenance Dell™ Latitude™ 13 ® Retrait de la carte Bluetooth 1. Suivez les instructions de la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Retirez la carte ExpressCard (le cas échéant).  3. Retirez la carte SD (le cas échéant).  4. Retirez le cache de fond. 5. Retirez la batterie. 6. Retirez le disque dur et la carte audio. 7. Retirez la carte WLAN. 8. Retirez le cache des voyants. 9. Retirez la mémoire. 10. Retirez le clavier. 11. Retirez le lecteur de carte. 12. Retirez la pile bouton. 13. Retirez la carte système. 14. Retirez la vis qui fixe la carte Bluetooth à la carte système.  15. Soulevez la carte Bluetooth et retirez-la de la carte système.  Réinstallation de la carte Bluetooth Pour réinstaller la carte Bluetooth, suivez cette procédure dans l'ordre inverse.  Retour à la page Contenu AVERTISSEMENT : avant toute intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur, consultez les consignes de sécurité livrées avec celui-ci. Pour des informations complémentaires sur les consignes de sécurité, voir la page d'accueil Regulatory Compliance (Conformité à la réglementation) à  l'adresse : www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance.  REMARQUE : vous devrez peut-être installer Adobe® Flash® Player depuis le site Adobe.com pour voir les illustrations ci-dessous.Retour à la page Contenu Cache de fond Manuel de maintenance Dell™ Latitude™ 13 Retrait du cache de fond 1. Suivez les instructions de la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Retirez la carte ExpressCard (le cas échéant).  3. Retirez la carte SD (le cas échéant).  4. Retirez les vis qui fixent le cache de fond à l'ordinateur.  5. Retirez les vis qui fixent le cache de fond à l'arrière du châssis. 6. Glissez le cache de fond vers l'avant de l'ordinateur. 7. Soulevez le cache de fond à la verticale et retirez-le de l'ordinateur. Réinstallation du cache de fond Pour réinstaller le cache de fond, suivez cette procédure dans l'ordre inverse.  Retour à la page Contenu AVERTISSEMENT : avant toute intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur, consultez les consignes de sécurité livrées avec celui-ci. Pour des informations complémentaires sur les consignes de sécurité, voir la page d'accueil Regulatory Compliance (Conformité à la réglementation) à  l'adresse : www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance.  REMARQUE : vous devrez peut-être installer Adobe® Flash® Player depuis le site Adobe.com pour voir les illustrations ci-dessous.Retour à la page Contenu Caméra Manuel de maintenance Dell™ Latitude™ 13 Retrait de la caméra 1. Suivez les instructions de la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Retirez la carte ExpressCard (le cas échéant).  3. Retirez la carte SD (le cas échéant).  4. Retirez le cache de fond. 5. Retirez la batterie. 6. Retirez le cadre de l'écran. 7. Retirez l'écran. 8. À l'aide d'une pointe en plastique, exercez une légère pression sur la caméra pour la retirer du capot de l'écran.  9. Débranchez le câble de la caméra pour retirer cette dernière de l'ordinateur.  Réinstallation de la caméra Pour réinstaller la caméra, suivez cette procédure dans l'ordre inverse.  Retour à la page Contenu AVERTISSEMENT : avant toute intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur, consultez les consignes de sécurité livrées avec celui-ci. Pour des informations complémentaires sur les consignes de sécurité, voir la page d'accueil Regulatory Compliance (Conformité à la réglementation) à  l'adresse : www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance.  REMARQUE : vous devrez peut-être installer Adobe® Flash® Player depuis le site Adobe.com pour voir les illustrations ci-dessous.Retour à la page Contenu Lecteur de carte ExpressCard/SD Manuel de maintenance Dell™ Latitude™ 13 Retrait du lecteur de carte ExpressCard/SD 1. Suivez les instructions de la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Retirez la carte ExpressCard (le cas échéant).  3. Retirez la carte SD (le cas échéant).  4. Retirez le cache de fond. 5. Retirez la batterie. 6. Retirez le disque dur et la carte audio. 7. Retirez la carte WLAN. 8. Retirez le cache des voyants. 9. Retirez la mémoire. 10. Retirez le clavier. 11. Retirez les vis qui fixent le lecteur de carte à l'ordinateur.  12. Retournez délicatement l'ordinateur.  13. Soulevez le clip qui fixe le câble de données du disque dur à la carte système et déconnectez-le de son connecteur sur la carte système. 14. Soulevez le lecteur de carte à la verticale et retirez-le de l'ordinateur. Réinstallation du lecteur de carte Pour réinstaller le lecteur de carte, suivez cette procédure dans l'ordre inverse.  Retour à la page Contenu AVERTISSEMENT : avant toute intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur, consultez les consignes de sécurité livrées avec celui-ci. Pour des informations complémentaires sur les consignes de sécurité, voir la page d'accueil Regulatory Compliance (Conformité à la réglementation) à  l'adresse : www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance.  REMARQUE : vous devrez peut-être installer Adobe® Flash® Player depuis le site Adobe.com pour voir les illustrations ci-dessous.Retour à la page Contenu Pile bouton Manuel de maintenance Dell™ Latitude™ 13 Retrait de la pile bouton 1. Suivez les instructions de la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Retirez la carte ExpressCard (le cas échéant).  3. Retirez la carte SD (le cas échéant).  4. Retirez le cache de fond. 5. Retirez la batterie. 6. Retirez le disque dur et la carte audio. 7. Retirez le cache des voyants. 8. Retirez le clavier. 9. Retirez le lecteur de carte. 10. Retirez la bande qui fixe le câble de la pile bouton à l'ordinateur.  11. Débranchez le câble de la pile bouton de la carte système.  12. Retirez la pile bouton et le câble de l'ordinateur.  Réinstallation de la pile bouton Pour réinstaller la pile bouton, suivez cette procédure dans l'ordre inverse.  Retour à la page Contenu AVERTISSEMENT : avant toute intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur, consultez les consignes de sécurité livrées avec celui-ci. Pour des informations complémentaires sur les consignes de sécurité, voir la page d'accueil Regulatory Compliance (Conformité à la réglementation) à  l'adresse : www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance.  REMARQUE : vous devrez peut-être installer Adobe® Flash® Player depuis le site Adobe.com pour voir les illustrations ci-dessous.Retour à la page Contenu Carte ExpressCard Manuel de maintenance Dell™ Latitude™ 13 Retrait de la carte ExpressCard 1. Suivez les instructions de la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Appuyez sur la carte ExpressCard pour la retirer de l'ordinateur. 3. Faites glisser la carte ExpressCard hors de l'ordinateur. Réinstallation de la carte ExpressCard Pour réinstaller la carte ExpressCard, suivez cette procédure dans l'ordre inverse. Retour à la page Contenu AVERTISSEMENT : avant toute intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur, consultez les consignes de sécurité livrées avec celui-ci. Pour des informations complémentaires sur les consignes de sécurité, voir la page d'accueil Regulatory Compliance (Conformité à la réglementation) à  l'adresse : www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance.  REMARQUE : vous devrez peut-être installer Adobe® Flash® Player depuis le site Adobe.com pour voir les illustrations ci-dessous.Retour à la page Contenu Capteur de fermeture de l'écran  Manuel de maintenance Dell™ Latitude™ 13 Retrait du capteur de fermeture de l'écran 1. Suivez les instructions de la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Retirez la carte ExpressCard (le cas échéant).  3. Retirez la carte SD (le cas échéant).  4. Retirez le cache de fond. 5. Retirez la batterie. 6. Retirez la vis qui fixe le capteur de fermeture de l'écran à l'ordinateur.  7. Faites délicatement glisser le loquet blanc pour débrancher le câble flexible qui relie le capteur de fermeture de l'écran à l'ordinateur.  8. Retirez le capteur de fermeture de l'écran de l'ordinateur.  Réinstallation du capteur de fermeture de l'écran Pour réinstaller le capteur de fermeture de l'écran, suivez les étapes ci-dessus dans l'ordre inverse. Retour à la page Contenu AVERTISSEMENT : avant toute intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur, consultez les consignes de sécurité livrées avec celui-ci. Pour des informations complémentaires sur les consignes de sécurité, voir la page d'accueil Regulatory Compliance (Conformité à la réglementation) à  l'adresse : www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance.  REMARQUE : vous devrez peut-être installer Adobe® Flash® Player depuis le site Adobe.com pour voir les illustrations ci-dessous.Retour à la page Contenu Ensemble du dissipateur de chaleur et du ventilateur Guide de maintenance Dell™ Latitude™ 13 Retrait de l'ensemble du dissipateur de chaleur et du ventilateur 1. Suivez les instructions de la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Retirez la carte ExpressCard (le cas échéant).  3. Retirez la carte SD (le cas échéant).  4. Retirez le cache de la base. 5. Retirez la batterie. 6. Retirez le disque dur et la carte audio. 7. Retirez la carte WLAN. 8. Retirez le cache des voyants. 9. Retirez la mémoire. 10. Retirez le clavier. 11. Retirez le lecteur de carte. 12. Retirez la pile bouton. 13. Retirez la carte système. 14. Débranchez le câble du ventilateur de la carte système.  15. Retirez les vis qui fixent l'ensemble de refroidissement à la carte système.  16. Soulevez l'ensemble de refroidissement et retirez-le de la carte système.  Réinstallation de l'ensemble du dissipateur de chaleur et du ventilateur Pour réinstaller l'ensemble du dissipateur de chaleur et du ventilateur, suivez les étapes ci-dessus dans l'ordre inverse. Retour à la page Contenu AVERTISSEMENT : avant toute intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur, consultez les consignes de sécurité livrées avec celui-ci. Pour des informations complémentaires sur les consignes de sécurité, voir la page d'accueil Regulatory Compliance (Conformité à la réglementation) à  l'adresse : www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance.  REMARQUE : vous devrez peut-être installer Adobe® Flash® Player depuis le site Adobe.com pour voir les illustrations ci-dessous.Retour à la page Contenu Clavier Guide de maintenance Dell™ Latitude™ 13 Retrait du clavier 1. Suivez les instructions de la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Retirez la carte ExpressCard (le cas échéant).  3. Retirez la carte SD (le cas échéant).  4. Retirez le cache de la base. 5. Retirez la batterie. 6. Retirez le cache des voyants. 7. Retirez les vis qui fixent le clavier à l'ordinateur.  8. Retournez le clavier et posez-le sur le repose-mains. 9. Soulevez délicatement le clip blanc pour retirer le câble du clavier.  10. Déconnectez le câble du clavier de son connecteur sur la carte système. 11. Soulevez le clavier et retirez-le de l'ordinateur. Réinstallation du clavier Pour réinstaller le clavier, suivez cette procédure dans l'ordre inverse.  Retour à la page Contenu AVERTISSEMENT : avant toute intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur, consultez les consignes de sécurité livrées avec celui-ci. Pour des informations complémentaires sur les consignes de sécurité, voir la page d'accueil Regulatory Compliance (Conformité à la réglementation) à  l'adresse : www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance.  REMARQUE : vous devrez peut-être installer Adobe® Flash® Player depuis le site Adobe.com pour voir les illustrations ci-dessous.Retour à la page Contenu Panneau d'écran Guide de maintenance Dell™ Latitude™ 13 Retrait de l'écran 1. Suivez les instructions de la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Retirez la carte ExpressCard (le cas échéant).  3. Retirez la carte SD (le cas échéant).  4. Retirez le cache de la base. 5. Retirez le cadre de l'écran. 6. Retirez les vis qui fixent le panneau d'écran au capot de l'écran.  7. Retournez délicatement le panneau d'écran et posez-le sur le clavier. 8. Retirez le ruban adhésif qui fixe le câble du panneau d'écran sur le capot de l'écran.  9. Retirez soigneusement le panneau d'écran de l'ordinateur.  Réinstallation du panneau d'écran Pour réinstaller le panneau d'écran, suivez cette procédure dans l'ordre inverse.  Retour à la page Contenu AVERTISSEMENT : avant toute intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur, consultez les consignes de sécurité livrées avec celui-ci. Pour des informations complémentaires sur les consignes de sécurité, voir la page d'accueil Regulatory Compliance (Conformité à la réglementation) à  l'adresse : www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance.  REMARQUE : vous devrez peut-être installer Adobe® Flash® Player depuis le site Adobe.com pour voir les illustrations ci-dessous.Retour à la page Contenu Cadre de l'écran Manuel de maintenance Dell™ Latitude™ 13 Retrait du cadre de l'écran 1. Suivez les instructions de la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Retirez les caches de vis du cadre de l'écran.  3. Retirez les vis qui fixent le cadre de l'écran à l'ensemble de l'écran.  4. À l'aide d'une pointe en plastique, exercez une légère pression sur le cadre de l'écran pour le retirer de l'écran.  5. Soulevez le cadre de l'écran et retirez de ce dernier.  Réinstallation du cadre de l'écran Pour réinstaller le cadre de l'écran, suivez cette procédure dans l'ordre inverse.  Retour à la page Contenu AVERTISSEMENT : avant toute intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur, consultez les consignes de sécurité livrées avec celui-ci. Pour des informations complémentaires sur les consignes de sécurité, voir la page d'accueil Regulatory Compliance (Conformité à la réglementation) à  l'adresse : www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance.  REMARQUE : vous devrez peut-être installer Adobe® Flash® Player depuis le site Adobe.com pour voir les illustrations ci-dessous.Retour à la page Contenu Mémoire Manuel de maintenance Dell™ Latitude™ 13 Retrait de la barrette de mémoire 1. Suivez les instructions de la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Retirez la carte ExpressCard (le cas échéant).  3. Retirez la carte SD (le cas échéant).  4. Retirez le cache de fond. 5. Retirez la batterie. 6. Retirez le cache des voyants. 7. Du bout des doigts, écartez avec précaution les clips de fixation situés à chaque extrémité du connecteur de la barrette de mémoire jusqu'à ce que la  barrette s'éjecte.  8. Retirez la barrette de mémoire de son connecteur sur la carte système, en inclinant la barrette à un angle de 45 degrés par rapport à la carte système.  Réinstallation de la barrette de mémoire 1. Placez la barrette de mémoire à un angle de 45 degrés au niveau du connecteur de la carte système et alignez l'encoche de la barrette avec languette  du connecteur. 2. Appuyez pour enclencher la barrette. Si elle ne se met pas en place correctement, retirez-la et réinstallez-la. Retour à la page Contenu AVERTISSEMENT : avant toute intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur, consultez les consignes de sécurité livrées avec celui-ci. Pour des informations complémentaires sur les consignes de sécurité, voir la page d'accueil Regulatory Compliance (Conformité à la réglementation) à  l'adresse : www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance.  REMARQUE : vous devrez peut-être installer Adobe® Flash® Player depuis le site Adobe.com pour voir les illustrations ci-dessous.Retour à la page Contenu Repose Manuel de maintenance Dell™ Latitude™ 13 -mains et ensemble LCD Retrait du repose-mains et de l'ensemble écran 1. Suivez les instructions de la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Retirez la carte ExpressCard (le cas échéant).  3. Retirez la carte SD (le cas échéant).  4. Retirez le cache de fond. 5. Retirez la batterie. 6. Retirez le disque dur et la carte audio. 7. Retirez la carte WLAN. 8. Retirez le cache des voyants. 9. Retirez la mémoire. 10. Retirez le clavier. 11. Retirez le lecteur de carte. 12. Retirez la pile bouton. 13. Retirez la carte système. 14. Retirez les vis à droite de la charnière de l'écran.  15. Retirez les vis à gauche de la charnière de l'écran pour ôter l'ensemble écran du repose-mains. 16. Retirez les antennes, la caméra et les câbles de l'écran du repose-mains. 17. Retirez le repose-mains de l'ensemble écran.  Réinstallation du repose-mains et de l'ensemble écran Pour réinstaller le repose-mains et l'ensemble écran, suivez cette procédure dans l'ordre inverse.  Retour à la page Contenu AVERTISSEMENT : avant toute intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur, consultez les consignes de sécurité livrées avec celui-ci. Pour des informations complémentaires sur les consignes de sécurité, voir la page d'accueil Regulatory Compliance (Conformité à la réglementation) à  l'adresse : www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance.  REMARQUE : vous devrez peut-être installer Adobe® Flash® Player depuis le site Adobe.com pour voir les illustrations ci-dessous.Retour à la page Contenu Cache des voyants Manuel de maintenance Dell™ Latitude™ 13 Retrait du cache des voyants 1. Suivez les instructions de la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. En commençant par la partie droite de l'ordinateur, utilisez une pointe en plastique pour soulever délicatement le cache des voyants du châssis de  l'ordinateur. 3. Soulevez délicatement le cache des voyants en le penchant vers le clavier, puis retournez-le vers l'écran.  4. Déconnectez le câble de la carte DEL de son connecteur sur le cache des voyants.  5. Soulevez et retirez le cache des voyants de l'ordinateur. Réinstallation du cache des voyants Pour réinstaller le cache des voyants, suivez cette procédure dans l'ordre inverse.  Retour à la page Contenu AVERTISSEMENT : avant toute intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur, consultez les consignes de sécurité livrées avec celui-ci. Pour des informations complémentaires sur les consignes de sécurité, voir la page d'accueil Regulatory Compliance (Conformité à la réglementation) à  l'adresse : www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance.  REMARQUE : vous devrez peut-être installer Adobe® Flash® Player depuis le site Adobe.com pour voir les illustrations ci-dessous.Retour à la page Contenu Carte SD (Secure Digital) Manuel de maintenance Dell™ Latitude™ 13 Retrait de la carte SD 1. Suivez les instructions de la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Appuyez sur la carte SD pour l'extraire de l'ordinateur. 3. Faites glisser la carte SD hors de l'ordinateur. Réinstallation de la carte SD Pour réinsérer la carte SD, suivez cette procédure dans l'ordre inverse.  Retour à la page Contenu AVERTISSEMENT : avant toute intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur, consultez les consignes de sécurité livrées avec celui-ci. Pour des informations complémentaires sur les consignes de sécurité, voir la page d'accueil Regulatory Compliance (Conformité à la réglementation) à  l'adresse : www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance.  REMARQUE : vous devrez peut-être installer Adobe® Flash® Player depuis le site Adobe.com pour voir les illustrations ci-dessous.Retour à la page Contenu Lecteur de carte SIM Manuel de maintenance Dell™ Latitude™ 13 Retrait du lecteur de carte SIM 1. Suivez les instructions de la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Retirez la carte ExpressCard (le cas échéant).  3. Retirez la carte SD (le cas échéant).  4. Retirez le cache de fond. 5. Retirez la batterie. 6. Faites glisser le loquet blanc afin de déconnecter le câble flexible du lecteur de carte SIM.  7. Retirez la vis qui fixe le lecteur de carte SIM à l'ordinateur.  8. Retirez le lecteur de carte SIM de l'ordinateur. Réinstallation du lecteur de carte SIM Pour réinstaller le lecteur de carte SIM, suivez cette procédure dans l'ordre inverse.  Retour à la page Contenu AVERTISSEMENT : avant toute intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur, consultez les consignes de sécurité livrées avec celui-ci. Pour des informations complémentaires sur les consignes de sécurité, voir la page d'accueil Regulatory Compliance (Conformité à la réglementation) à  l'adresse : www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance.  REMARQUE : vous devrez peut-être installer Adobe® Flash® Player depuis le site Adobe.com pour voir les illustrations ci-dessous.Retour à la page Contenu Carte SIM (module d'identité d'abonné) Manuel de maintenance Dell™ Latitude™ 13 Retrait de la carte SIM 1. Suivez les instructions de la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Retirez la batterie. 3. Retirez le cache des voyants. 4. Retirez le clavier. 5. Faites glisser le lecteur de carte SIM et soulevez-le pour en extraire la carte SIM. 6. Retirez la carte SIM de son lecteur. Réinstallation de la carte SIM Pour réinstaller la carte SIM, suivez cette procédure dans l'ordre inverse.  Retour à la page Contenu AVERTISSEMENT : avant toute intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur, consultez les consignes de sécurité livrées avec celui-ci. Pour des informations complémentaires sur les consignes de sécurité, voir la page d'accueil Regulatory Compliance (Conformité à la réglementation) à  l'adresse : www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance.  REMARQUE : vous devrez peut-être installer Adobe® Flash® Player depuis le site Adobe.com pour voir les illustrations ci-dessous.Retour à la page Contenu Haut-parleur Manuel de maintenance Dell™ Latitude™ 13 Retrait du haut-parleur 1. Suivez les instructions de la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Retirez la carte ExpressCard (le cas échéant).  3. Retirez la carte SD (le cas échéant).  4. Retirez le cache de fond. 5. Retirez la batterie. 6. Retirez le capteur de fermeture de l'écran. 7. Déconnectez le câble du pavé tactile de son connecteur sur la carte système.  8. Retirez la bande pour libérer le câble du haut-parleur de son guide d'acheminement dans l'ordinateur. 9. Déconnectez le câble du haut-parleur de la carte audio et retirez-le de son guide d'acheminement dans l'ordinateur. 10. Tirez doucement sur le câble flexible et retirez-le du haut-parleur. 11. Retirez les vis qui fixent le haut-parleur à l'ordinateur.  12. Soulevez le haut-parleur et retirez-le de l'ordinateur. Réinstallation du haut-parleur Pour réinstaller le haut-parleur, suivez cette procédure dans l'ordre inverse.  Retour à la page Contenu AVERTISSEMENT : avant toute intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur, consultez les consignes de sécurité livrées avec celui-ci. Pour des informations complémentaires sur les consignes de sécurité, voir la page d'accueil Regulatory Compliance (Conformité à la réglementation) à  l'adresse : www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance.  REMARQUE : vous devrez peut-être installer Adobe® Flash® Player depuis le site Adobe.com pour voir les illustrations ci-dessous.Retour à la page Contenu Carte système Manuel de maintenance Dell™ Latitude™ 13 Retrait de la carte système 1. Suivez les instructions de la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Retirez la carte ExpressCard (le cas échéant).  3. Retirez la carte SD (le cas échéant).  4. Retirez le cache de fond. 5. Retirez la batterie. 6. Retirez le disque dur et la carte audio. 7. Retirez la carte WLAN. 8. Retirez le cache des voyants. 9. Retirez la mémoire. 10. Retirez le clavier. 11. Retirez le lecteur de carte. 12. Retirez la pile bouton. 13. Tirez sur la languette bleue pour déconnecter le câble d'écran de la carte système.  14. Retournez soigneusement l'ordinateur et retirez la bande pour libérer les câbles des antennes de la carte système.  15. Débranchez le câble de la caméra de la carte système.  16. Déconnectez le capteur d'état de l'écran et les câbles flexibles du pavé tactile de la carte système.  17. Retirez les vis qui fixent la carte système et le ventilateur à l'ordinateur.  18. Retirez la carte système de l'ordinateur. Réinstallation de la carte système Pour réinstaller la carte système, suivez cette procédure dans l'ordre inverse.  Retour à la page Contenu AVERTISSEMENT : avant toute intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur, consultez les consignes de sécurité livrées avec celui-ci. Pour des informations complémentaires sur les consignes de sécurité, voir la page d'accueil Regulatory Compliance (Conformité à la réglementation) à  l'adresse : www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance.  REMARQUE : vous devrez peut-être installer Adobe® Flash® Player depuis le site Adobe.com pour voir les illustrations ci-dessous.Retour à la page Contenu Carte de réseau local sans fil (WLAN) Manuel de maintenance Dell™ Latitude™ 13 Retrait de la carte WLAN 1. Suivez les instructions de la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. 2. Retirez la carte ExpressCard (le cas échéant).  3. Retirez la carte SD (le cas échéant).  4. Retirez le cache de fond. 5. Retirez la batterie. 6. Débranchez les câbles d'antenne de la carte de WLAN.  7. Retirez la vis qui fixe la carte WLAN à la carte système.  8. Écartez délicatement la carte WLAN de la carte système.  9. Déconnectez la carte WLAN de son connecteur sur la carte système et retirez-la de l'ordinateur. Réinstallation de la carte WLAN Pour réinstaller la carte WLAN, suivez cette procédure dans l'ordre inverse.  Retour à la page Contenu AVERTISSEMENT : avant toute intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur, consultez les consignes de sécurité livrées avec celui-ci. Pour des informations complémentaires sur les consignes de sécurité, voir la page d'accueil Regulatory Compliance (Conformité à la réglementation) à  l'adresse : www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance.  REMARQUE : vous devrez peut-être installer Adobe® Flash® Player depuis le site Adobe.com pour voir les illustrations ci-dessous.Intervention sur votre ordinateur Manuel de maintenance Dell™ Latitude™ 13  Avant toute intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur Respectez les consignes de sécurité suivantes pour vous aider à protéger votre ordinateur de dommages éventuels et pour garantir votre sécurité  personnelle. Sauf indication contraire, chaque procédure décrite dans ce document suppose que les conditions suivantes sont remplies : l Vous avez suivi les étapes de la section Intervention sur votre ordinateur. l Vous avez lu les consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre ordinateur. l Un composant peut être réinstallé ou, s'il a été acheté séparément, installé en appliquant la procédure de retrait en ordre inverse. Pour éviter tout dommage à votre ordinateur, suivez les étapes suivantes avant de commencer à intervenir à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur.  1. Assurez-vous que la surface de travail est plane et propre afin d'éviter de rayer le capot de l'ordinateur.  2. Éteignez votre ordinateur (voir Éteindre votre ordinateur). 3. Si l'ordinateur est connecté à une station d'accueil (amarré), déconnectez-le. 4. Débranchez tous les câbles réseau de l'ordinateur.  5. Débranchez l'ordinateur et tous les périphériques connectés de leurs prises secteur.  6. Fermez l'écran, retournez l'ordinateur et placez-le sur une surface de travail plane. 7. Retirez la batterie principale (voir Batterie). 8. Retournez l'ordinateur (dessus orienté vers le haut).  9. Ouvrez l'écran.  10. Appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation pour mettre la carte système à la terre.  11. Retirez toute carte ExpressCard ou carte à puce de leurs emplacements appropriés.  12. Retirez le disque dur (voir Disque dur). Outils recommandés Les procédures mentionnées dans ce document pourraient nécessiter les outils suivants : l petit tournevis à lame plate l tournevis cruciforme n° 0 l tournevis cruciforme n° 1 l petite pointe en plastique l CD de mise à jour Flash BIOS update program Éteindre votre ordinateur Avant intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur Outils recommandés Éteindre votre ordinateur Après intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur AVERTISSEMENT : avant toute intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur, consultez les consignes de sécurité livrées avec celui-ci. Pour des informations complémentaires sur les consignes de sécurité, voir la page d'accueil Regulatory Compliance (Conformité à la réglementation) à  l'adresse : www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance. PRÉCAUTION : la plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations  de dépannage et les petites réparations autorisées par la documentation de votre produit, ou selon les instructions fournies en ligne ou par  téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Les dommages causés par des interventions de maintenance non autorisées par  Dell ne sont pas couverts par votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité livrées avec le produit. PRÉCAUTION : pour éviter une décharge électrostatique, mettez-vous à la terre à l'aide d'un bracelet antistatique ou en touchant régulièrement  une surface métallique non peinte, par exemple un connecteur sur le panneau arrière de l'ordinateur. PRÉCAUTION : manipulez les composants et les cartes avec soin. Ne touchez pas les composants ni les contacts d'une carte. Tenez une carte par les bords ou par la languette de fixation métallique. Tenez un composant, tel qu'un processeur, par les bords et non par les broches. PRÉCAUTION : lorsque vous débranchez un câble, tirez sur son connecteur ou sur sa languette de retrait, jamais sur le câble lui-même. Si les  connecteurs de câble ont des languettes de verrouillage, appuyez sur ces languettes avant de débrancher le câble. Lorsque vous déconnectez des  connecteurs, veillez à les maintenir alignés pour ne pas tordre leurs broches. Pour la même raison, avant de brancher un câble, vérifiez bien  l'orientation et l'alignement des deux connecteurs. REMARQUE : il se peut que la couleur de votre ordinateur et certains composants soient différents de ceux représentés ici.  PRÉCAUTION : pour déconnecter un câble réseau, débranchez d'abord le câble de votre ordinateur, puis débranchez le câble du périphérique  réseau. PRÉCAUTION : pour éviter tout dommage à la carte système, retirez la batterie avant l'opération de maintenance. PRÉCAUTION : pour éviter les chocs électriques, débranchez toujours votre ordinateur avant d'ouvrir l'écran. PRÉCAUTION : avant de toucher quoi que ce soit à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur, mettez-vous à la terre en touchant une surface métallique non  peinte comme le métal à l'arrière de l'ordinateur. Répétez cette opération régulièrement pendant votre intervention pour dissiper toute électricité  statique qui pourrait endommager les composants.1. Éteindre le système d'exploitation :  l Sous Windows Vista® : Cliquez sur Démarrer , puis sur la flèche située dans le coin inférieur droit du menu Démarrer (voir l'illustration ci-dessous) et sur Arrêter. l Sous Windows® XP :  Cliquez sur Démarrer® Arrêter l'ordinateur® Arrêter. L'ordinateur s'éteint après l'arrêt du système d'exploitation. 2. Vérifiez que l'ordinateur et les périphériques qui y sont connectés sont éteints. S'ils ne s'éteignent pas automatiquement après l'arrêt du système  d'exploitation, maintenez enfoncé le bouton d'alimentation pendant environ 6 secondes.  Après intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur Après toute procédure de réinstallation, reconnectez tout périphérique, carte et câble avant d'allumer l'ordinateur. 1. Branchez les périphériques externes (réplicateur de port, accumulateur ou base média par exemple) et réinstallez les cartes (ExpressCard par exemple). 2. Branchez les câbles téléphoniques ou réseau sur l'ordinateur.  3. Réinstallez la batterie. 4. Branchez l'ordinateur et tous les périphériques connectés sur leurs prises secteur.  5. Allumez l'ordinateur. Retour à la page Contenu PRÉCAUTION : pour éviter toute perte de donnée, enregistrez et fermez tout fichier ouvert et fermez tout programme ouvert avant d'éteindre  votre ordinateur. PRÉCAUTION : pour éviter d'endommager l'ordinateur, n'utilisez que la batterie conçue pour cet ordinateur Dell spécifique. N'utilisez pas une  batterie destinée à un autre modèle Dell.  PRÉCAUTION : pour connecter un câble réseau, branchez-le d'abord au périphérique réseau puis à l'ordinateur. www.dell.com | support.dell.com Manual del propietario del Dell™ Inspiron™ 1521 Modelo PP22LNotas, avisos y precauciones NOTA: Una NOTA proporciona información importante que le ayuda a utilizar su equipo de la mejor manera posible. AVISO: Un AVISO indica la posibilidad de daños al hardware o pérdida de datos y le explica cómo evitar el problema. PRECAUCIÓN: Una PRECAUCIÓN indica un posible daño material, lesión corporal o muerte. ____________________ La información contenida en este documento puede modificarse sin previo aviso. © 2007 Dell Inc. Todos los derechos reservados. Queda estrictamente prohibido realizar cualquier tipo de reproducción sin el consentimiento por escrito de Dell Inc. Marcas comerciales utilizadas en este texto: Dell, el logotipo de DELL, Inspiron, Wi-Fi Catcher y Dell MediaDirect son marcas comerciales de Dell Inc.; AMD, AMD Turion, HyperMemory, ATI Radeon y las combinaciones de los mismos son marcas comerciales de Advanced Micro Devices, Inc.; Microsoft, Windows y Windows Vista son marcas comerciales o marcas comerciales registradas de Microsoft Corporation en Estados Unidos y otros países; Bluetooth es una marca comercial registrada propiedad de Bluetooth SIG, Inc. y Dell la usa con licencia. Este documento puede incluir otras marcas y nombres comerciales para referirse a las entidades que son propietarias de los mismos o a sus productos. Dell Inc. renuncia a cualquier interés sobre la propiedad de marcas y nombres comerciales que no sean los suyos. Modelo PP22L Marzo 2007 P/N GU055 Rev. A00Contenido 3 Contenido Localización de información . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 1 Acerca de su equipo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Determinación de la configuración del equipo . . . . 21 Vista frontal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Vista lateral izquierda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Vista lateral derecha . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Vista posterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Vista inferior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 2 Configuración de su equipo . . . . . . . . . . 35 Conexión a Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Configuración de la conexión a Internet . . . . . . 36 Transferencia de la información a un equipo nuevo . . 37 Transferencia fácil de Windows . . . . . . . . . . 37 Configuración de una impresora . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Cable de la impresora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Conexión de una impresora USB . . . . . . . . . 384 Contenido Dispositivos de protección de la alimentación . . . . . 40 Protectores contra sobretensión . . . . . . . . . 40 Acondicionadores de línea . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Sistemas de alimentación ininterrumpida . . . . . 41 3 Uso de la pantalla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Ajuste del brillo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Cambio de la imagen de vídeo de la pantalla del equipo a un proyector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Configuración de la resolución de pantalla y frecuencia de actualización . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 4 Uso del teclado y el ratón táctil . . . . . . . 45 Teclado numérico . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Método abreviado del teclado . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Funciones del sistema . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Funciones de la pantalla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Batería . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Administración de energía . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Funciones de la tecla con el logotipo de Microsoft® Windows® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Método abreviado de teclado QuickSet . . . . . . 47 Ajustar las configuraciones del teclado . . . . . . 47 Ratón táctil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Personalización del ratón táctil . . . . . . . . . . 49Contenido 5 5 Uso de la batería . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Rendimiento de la batería . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Comprobación de la carga de la batería . . . . . . . . 52 Medidor de batería QuickSet de Dell . . . . . . . 53 Medidor de batería de Microsoft® Windows® . . 53 Medidor de carga . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Advertencia de bajo nivel de carga de la batería . 54 Conservación de la energía de la batería . . . . . . . 55 Configuración de los valores de administración de energía . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Uso del estado de Suspensión . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Carga de la batería . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Sustitución de la batería . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Almacenamiento de una batería . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 6 Uso de soportes multimedia . . . . . . . . . . 59 Reproducción de medios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Cómo copiar medios CD y DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Cómo copiar un CD o DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Cómo utilizar un soporte CD y DVD en blanco . . . 62 Sugerencias útiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Ajuste del volumen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Ajuste de la imagen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Uso de Dell MediaDirect™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646 Contenido Conexión del equipo a un dispositivo de audio o televisión. . . . 65 S-vídeo y audio estándar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 S-vídeo y audio digital S/PDIF . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Vídeo compuesto y audio estándar . . . . . . . . 71 Vídeo compuesto y audio digital S/PDIF . . . . . . 73 Vídeo componente y audio estándar . . . . . . . . 75 Vídeo componente y audio digital S/PDIF . . . . . 78 Activación de la configuración de la pantalla de una televisión . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 7 Uso de ExpressCards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Paneles protectores de las ExpressCard . . . . . . . . 84 Instalación de una ExpressCard . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Extracción de una ExpressCard o de un panel protector . . . . . 85 8 Uso del lector de tarjetas de memoria . . 87 Paneles protectores de tarjetas de memoria . . . . . . 87 Instalación de una tarjeta de memoria . . . . . . . . . 88 Cómo retirar una tarjeta de memoria o panel protector. . . . . . . 89 9 Configuración y uso de redes . . . . . . . . . 91 Conexión a una red o cable de módem de banda ancha. . . . . . 91 Configuración de una red . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92Contenido 7 Red de área local inalámbrica . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Qué necesita para establecer una conexión WLAN. . . . . 93 Comprobación de la tarjeta de red inalámbrica . . 93 Configurar una nueva WLAN usando un enrutador inalámbrico y un módem de banda ancha . . . . . 94 Conexión a una WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Banda ancha móvil (o Red inalámbrica de área amplia). . . . . . 97 Qué necesita para establecer una conexión a la red de banda ancha móvil . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Comprobación de la tarjeta de banda ancha móvil de Dell. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Conexión a una red de banda ancha móvil . . . . 99 Activación/desactivación de la tarjeta de banda ancha móvil de Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Localizador de redes Dell Wi-Fi Catcher™ . . . . . . . 100 10 Seguridad de su equipo . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Cable de seguridad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Contraseñas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 En caso de pérdida o robo del equipo . . . . . . . . . 103 11 Solución de problemas . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Dell Technical Update Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Dell Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Utilidad de soporte técnico de Dell . . . . . . . . . . . 1108 Contenido Problemas con la unidad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Problemas de la unidad óptica . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Problemas con la unidad de disco duro . . . . . . 112 Problemas con el correo electrónico, el módem e Internet . . . 113 Mensajes de error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Problemas con las ExpressCard . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Problemas con un dispositivo IEEE 1394 . . . . . . . . 122 Problemas con el teclado . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Problemas con el teclado externo . . . . . . . . . 123 Caracteres no esperados . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Bloqueos y problemas con el software . . . . . . . . . 124 El equipo no se inicia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 El equipo no responde . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Un programa no responde o falla repetidamente . . . . . 125 Se ha diseñado un programa para un sistema operativo anterior de Microsoft® Windows® . . . 125 Aparece una pantalla azul fija . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Problemas con Dell MediaDirect . . . . . . . . . 125 Otros problemas con el software . . . . . . . . . 126 Problemas con la memoria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Problemas de red . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Banda ancha móvil (Red inalámbrica de área amplia [WWAN]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Problemas de alimentación . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Problemas con la impresora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Problemas con el escáner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Contenido 9 Problemas con el sonido y los altavoces . . . . . . . . 132 Los altavoces integrados no emiten ningún sonido. . . 133 Los altavoces externos no emiten ningún sonido . . . . . 133 Los auriculares no emiten ningún sonido . . . . . 134 Problemas con la superficie táctil o el ratón . . . . . . 134 Problemas con el vídeo y la pantalla . . . . . . . . . . 135 Si la pantalla aparece en blanco . . . . . . . . . 135 Si resulta difícil leer la pantalla . . . . . . . . . . 135 Si sólo se puede leer parte de la pantalla . . . . . 136 Controladores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 ¿Qué es un controlador? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Cómo identificar los controladores . . . . . . . . 137 Reinstalación de controladores y utilidades . . . . 137 Solución de problemas de software y hardware . . . . 140 Restauración del sistema operativo . . . . . . . . . . 140 Uso de Restaurar el sistema de MicrosoftWindows . . . . 141 Uso de Restaurar PC de Dell por Symantec . . . . 142 Uso del soporte del Sistema operativo . . . . . . 144 12 Adición y sustitución de piezas . . . . . . 147 Antes de comenzar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Herramientas recomendadas . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Apagar el equipo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Antes de trabajar en el interior de su equipo . . . 148 Unidad de disco duro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Extracción de la unidad de disco duro . . . . . . . 150 Colocación de la unidad de disco disco duro . . . 151 Devolución de una unidad de disco duro a Dell . . 15210 Contenido Unidad óptica . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Extracción de la unidad óptica . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Volver a colocar la unidad óptica. . . . . . . . . . 153 Cubierta de las bisagras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Extracción de la cubierta de la bisagra. . . . . . . 154 Vuelva a colocar la cubierta de la bisagra. . . . . 155 Teclado . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Extracción del teclado . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Volver a colocar el teclado . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Memoria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Extracción del módulo de memoria DIMM A . . . 157 Volver a colocar el módulo de memoria DIMM A . . . . . . 159 Extracción del módulo de memoria DIMM B . . . 160 Volver a colocar el módulo de memoria DIMM B . . . . . . . 161 Módulo de identificación de suscriptor . . . . . . . . 162 Mini-Cards (minitarjetas) inalámbricas . . . . . . . . 163 Extraer una tarjeta WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Vuelva a colocar la tarjeta WLAN . . . . . . . . . 166 Extracción de una tarjeta de banda ancha móvil o WWAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Vuelva a colocar la tarjeta WWAN . . . . . . . . 169 Extraer una tarjeta WPAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Vuelva a colocar la tarjeta WPAN . . . . . . . . . 171 Tarjeta interna con tecnología inalámbrica Bluetooth®. . . . . 171 Extraer la tarjeta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Volver a colocar la tarjeta . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Batería de tipo botón . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Extracción de la batería de tipo botón . . . . . . . 173 Vuelva a colocar la batería . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173Contenido 11 13 Funciones de Dell™ QuickSet . . . . . . . . 175 14 Viajes con el equipo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Identificación del equipo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Embalaje del equipo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Consejos para el viaje . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Viajes en avión . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 15 Obtención de ayuda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Obtención de ayuda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Servicio al cliente y asistencia técnica . . . . . . 182 DellConnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Servicios en línea . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Servicio AutoTech . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Servicio automatizado para averiguar el estado de un pedido . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Problemas con su pedido . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Información sobre productos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Devolución de artículos para su reparación en garantía o para la devolución de su importe . . . . . . 184 Antes de llamar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Cómo ponerse en contacto con Dell . . . . . . . . . . 18712 Contenido 16 Especificaciones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 17 Apéndice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Uso del programa Configuración del sistema . . . . . 197 Visualización de la pantalla del programa Configuración del sistema . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Pantalla del programa Configuración del sistema. . . . . . . 198 Opciones más utilizadas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Limpieza del equipo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Equipo, teclado y pantalla . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Ratón táctil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Ratón . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Soporte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Política de soporte técnico de Dell (Sólo en EE.UU.) . . . . . . 202 Definición de software y dispositivos periféricos "instalados por Dell" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Definición de software y dispositivos periféricos "de terceros" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Aviso FCC (Sólo EE.UU.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 FCC Clase B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Aviso de productos de Macrovision . . . . . . . . . . 205 Glosario . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Índice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225Localización de información 13 Localización de información NOTA: Es posible que algunas funciones sean opcionales y no se suministren con el equipo. Algunas funciones pueden no estar disponibles en determinados países. NOTA: Su equipo puede incluir información adicional. ¿Qué busca? Aquí lo encontrará • Un programa de diagnóstico para mi equipo • Controladores para mi equipo • Documentación del dispositivo • Notebook System Software (NSS) Soporte Drivers and Utilities (Controladores y utilidades) La documentación y los controladores ya están instalados en su equipo. Puede emplear el soporte Drivers and Utilities (Controladores y utilidades) para volver a instalar los controladores (consulte el apartado "Reinstalación de controladores y utilidades" en la página 137) o ejecute los Dell Diagnostics (consulte el apartado "Dell Diagnostics" en la página 105). Los archivos Readme (léame) pueden estar incluidos en su soporte Drivers and Utilities (Controladores y utilidades) para disponer de actualizaciones de última hora sobre los cambios técnicos de su ordenador o material de consulta destinado a los técnicos o usuarios avanzados. NOTA: Los controladores y las actualizaciones de la documentación pueden encontrarse en support.dell.com.14 Localización de información • Información sobre la garantía • Términos y condiciones (sólo en EE.UU.) • Instrucciones de seguridad • Información reglamentaria • Información ergonómica • Contrato de licencia de usuario final Guía de información del producto Dell™ • Cómo instalar mi equipo Esquema de configuración • Etiqueta de servicio y código de servicio rápido • Clave de producto Microsoft® Windows® Etiqueta de servicio y licencia de producto de Microsoft Windows Estas etiquetas se encuentran en su equipo. • Utilice la etiqueta de servicio para identificar su equipo cuando utilice support.dell.com o se ponga en contacto con el servicio de soporte técnico. • Introduzca el código de servicio rápido para dirigir su llamada cuando se ponga en contacto con el servicio de soporte técnico. NOTA: Como medida de refuerzo de la seguridad, la recientemente diseñada etiqueta de la licencia de Microsoft Windows incorpora un "portal de seguridad" que aparenta ser una parte que falta de la etiqueta para evitar que se quite ésta. ¿Qué busca? Aquí lo encontraráLocalización de información 15 • Soluciones: consejos y sugerencias para la solución de problemas, artículos de técnicos, cursos en línea y preguntas más frecuentes. • Comunidad: conversaciones en línea con otros clientes de Dell. • Actualizaciones: información de actualización para componentes como, por ejemplo, la memoria, el disco duro y el sistema operativo. • Atención al cliente: información de contacto, llamada de servicio y estado de los pedidos, garantía e información de reparación. Sitio Web de soporte técnico de Dell: support.dell.com NOTA: Seleccione su región o segmento de negocios para ver el sitio de asistencia técnica apropiado. ¿Qué busca? Aquí lo encontrará16 Localización de información • Servicio y soporte: historial de soporte técnico y estado de las llamadas de servicio, contrato de servicio y debates en línea con el personal de soporte técnico. • Dell Technical Update Service (Servicio de actualizaciones técnicas de Dell): ofrece una notificación interactiva por correo electrónico de las actualizaciones de software y hardware de su equipo. • Referencia: documentación del equipo, detalles en la configuración de mi equipo, especificaciones del producto y documentación técnica. • Descargas: controladores certificados, revisiones y actualizaciones de software. • Notebook System Software (NSS): si vuelve a instalar el sistema operativo en el equipo, también debe volver a instalar la utilidad NSS. NSS detecta automáticamente el equipo y el sistema operativo e instala las actualizaciones adecuadas para su configuración, proporcionando actualizaciones importantes para el sistema operativo y soporte para las unidades de disquete USB de 3,5 pulgadas de Dell, procesadores Intel®, unidades ópticas y dispositivos USB. La utilidad NSS es necesaria para el correcto funcionamiento de su equipo Dell. Para descargar Notebook System Software: 1 Vaya a support.dell.com, seleccione su país o región y, a continuación, haga clic en Drivers & Downloads (Controladores y descargas). 2 Introduzca su Etiqueta de servicio o modelo de producto y haga clic en Ir. 3 Seleccione su sistema operativo e idioma y, a continuación, haga clic en Encontrar descargas o en Búsqueda de descargas, busque la palabra clave Notebook System Software. NOTA: La interfaz para el usuario de support.dell.com puede variar dependiendo de las selecciones que efectúe. ¿Qué busca? Aquí lo encontraráLocalización de información 17 • Actualizaciones de software y sugerencias para la solución de problemas. Preguntas más frecuentes, temas candentes y estado general del entorno del equipo Utilidad Dell Support La utilidad de soporte técnico de Dell es una actualización automatizada y un sistema de notificación instalado en su equipo. Este soporte proporciona comprobaciones de estado en tiempo real de su entorno informático, actualizaciones de software, e información importante de soporte propio. Acceda a la utilidad de soporte técnico de Dell mediante el icono de la barra de tareas. Para obtener más información, consulte el apartado "Utilidad de soporte técnico de Dell" en la página 110. • Cómo usar Microsoft Windows Vista™ • Cómo trabajar con programas y archivos • Cómo personalizar mi escritorio Ayuda y soporte técnico de Windows 1 Haga clic en el botón de inicio de Windows Vista y, a continuación, en Ayuda y soporte técnico. 2 En Search Help (Buscar ayuda), escriba una palabra o frase que describa el problema y, a continuación, pulse o haga clic en la lupa. 3 Haga clic en el tema que describa el problema. 4 Siga las instrucciones que aparecen en pantalla. • Información sobre la actividad de la red, asistente de administración de energía y otros puntos controlados por Dell QuickSet. Ayuda de Dell QuickSet Para ver Ayuda de Dell QuickSet, haga clic con el botón derecho del ratón en el icono Dell QuickSet del área de notificación de Windows. Para obtener más información acerca de Dell QuickSet, consulte el apartado "Funciones de Dell™ QuickSet" en la página 175. ¿Qué busca? Aquí lo encontrará18 Localización de información • Cómo volver a instalar mi sistema operativo Soporte del sistema operativo El sistema operativo ya está instalado en el equipo. Para volver a instalar el sistema operativo, use uno de los siguientes métodos: • Restaurar sistema de Microsoft Windows: la función Restaurar sistema de Microsoft Windows devuelve el equipo a un estado operativo anterior sin que esto afecte a los archivos de datos. • Restaurar PC de Dell: la función Restaurar PC de Dell devuelve su ordenador a su estado operativo original. Es posible que la función Restaurar PC de Dell no se entregue con su equipo. • Soporte de instalación del sistema operativo: si ha recibido un soporte del Sistema operativo con el equipo, puede utilizarlo para restaurar el sistema operativo. Para obtener más información, consulte el apartado "Restauración del sistema operativo" en la página 140. ¿Qué busca? Aquí lo encontraráLocalización de información 19 Después de volver a instalar el sistema operativo, utilice el soporte Drivers and Utilities (Controladores y utilidades) para volver a instalar los controladores de los dispositivos que se incluían con su equipo. La clave del producto del sistema operativo se encuentra en el equipo. NOTA: El color del soporte de instalación del sistema operativo varía en función del sistema que haya pedido. ¿Qué busca? Aquí lo encontrará20 Localización de informaciónAcerca de su equipo 21 Acerca de su equipo Determinación de la configuración del equipo En función de las selecciones que realizó cuando adquirió el equipo, éste tendrá una de las diferentes configuraciones de la controladora de vídeo. Para determinar la configuración de la controladora de vídeo del equipo: 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y, a continuación, en Ayuda y soporte técnico. 2 En Pick a Task (Elija una tarea), haga clic en Use Tools to view your computer information and diagnose problems (Usar herramientas para visualizar la información de su ordenador y problemas de diagnóstico). 3 En My Computer Information (Información de mi PC), seleccione Hardware. En la pantalla My Computer Information - Hardware (Información de Mi PC – Hardware), puede ver el tipo de controladora de vídeo instalada en el equipo, además de otros componentes de hardware.22 Acerca de su equipo Vista frontal 1 Indicador de la cámara (opcional) 2 Cámara (opcional) 3 Seguro de la pantalla 4 Pantalla 5 Botón de alimentación 6 Teclado 7 Indicadores luminosos de estado del dispositivo 8 Ratón táctil 9 IR de consumo 10 Botones de control de medios 11 Botones del ratón táctil 12 Botón Dell™ MediaDirect™ 13 Indicadores luminosos de estado del teclado 14 Micrófonos en línea digitales 4 5 13 3 6 12 8 7 14 1 2 11 10 9Acerca de su equipo 23 INDICADOR D E L A CÁMARA: Indica que la cámara está encendida. Basándose en las selecciones de configuración hechas al realizar el pedido, puede que el equipo no incluya una cámara. CÁMARA: Cámara incorporada para la captura de vídeo, conferencias y charlas. Basándose en las selecciones de configuración hechas al realizar el pedido, puede que el equipo no incluya una cámara. SEGURO D E L A PANTALLA: Mantiene la pantalla cerrada. PANTALLA: Para obtener más información acerca de la pantalla, consulte el apartado "Uso de la pantalla" en la página 43. BOTÓN D E ALIMENTACIÓN: Pulse el botón de alimentación para encender el equipo o para salir de un modo de administración de energía (consulte el apartado "Configuración de los valores de administración de energía" en la página 55). AVISO: Para evitar la pérdida de datos, apague el equipo realizando el procedimiento de cierre del sistema operativo Microsoft® Windows® en vez de pulsar el botón de alimentación. Si el equipo deja de responder, mantenga pulsado el botón de alimentación hasta que el equipo se apague totalmente (puede tardar unos segundos). TECLADO: Para obtener más información acerca de la batería, consulte el apartado "Uso del teclado y el ratón táctil" en la página 45. 24 Acerca de su equipo INDICADORES LUMINOSOS D E ESTADO DEL DISPOSITIVO Los indicadores luminosos azules situados a la derecha del teclado indican lo siguiente: Indicador de alimentación: se ilumina cuando se enciende el equipo y parpadea cuando éste se encuentra en el modo de administración de energía. Indicador de actividad del disco duro: se ilumina cuando el equipo lee o escribe datos. AVISO: Para evitar que se produzcan pérdidas de datos, no apague nunca el equipo si el indicador está parpadeando. Indicador de estado de la batería: se ilumina o parpadea para indicar un cambio en el estado de carga de la batería.Acerca de su equipo 25 Si el equipo está conectado a una toma de alimentación eléctrica, el indicador funciona de la siguiente manera: – Azul fijo: la batería se está cargando. – Azul parpadeante: la batería está casi cargada por completo. – Apagado: la batería se está cargando correctamente. Si el equipo utiliza alimentación de la batería, el indicador funciona de la siguiente manera: – Apagado: la batería está cargada de forma correcta (o el equipo está apagado). – Luz ámbar parpadeante: la carga de la batería está baja. – Ámbar fijo: la carga de la batería está demasiado baja. RATÓN TÁCTIL: Realiza la misma función que un ratón normal (consulte el apartado "Ratón táctil" en la página 48). BOTONES DEL RATÓN TÁCTIL: Utilice estos botones exactamente igual que los de un ratón normal cuando use la superficie táctil para mover el cursor por la pantalla (consulte el apartado "Ratón táctil" en la página 48). BOTONES D E CONTROL D E MEDIOS: Controlan la reproducción del CD, del DVD y del reproductor multimedia. Indicador de estado WiFi: se enciende cuando la conexión de red inalámbrica está activada. Para activar o desactivar la conexión de red inalámbrica, utilice el conmutador inalámbrico (consulte el apartado "Conmutador inalámbrico" en la página 27). Indicador de estado Bluetooth®: se enciende cuando se activa una tarjeta con tecnología inalámbrica Bluetooth. NOTA: La tarjeta con tecnología inalámbrica Bluetooth es una característica opcional. El indicador se enciende solo si ha pedido la tarjeta con el equipo. Para obtener más información, consulte la documentación incluida con la tarjeta. Para desactivar sólo la funcionalidad de la tecnología inalámbrica Bluetooth, haga clic con el botón derecho del ratón en el icono en el área de notificación y, a continuación, haga clic en Disable Bluetooth Radio (Desactivar radio Bluetooth). Para activar o desactivar rápidamente todos los dispositivos inalámbricos, utilice el conmutador inalámbrico (consulte el apartado "Conmutador inalámbrico" en la página 27).26 Acerca de su equipo BOTÓN DELL™ MEDIADIRECT™: Pulse el botón Dell MediaDirect para iniciar Dell MediaDirect (consulte el apartado "Uso de Dell MediaDirect™" en la página 64). INDICADORES LUMINOSOS D E ESTADO DEL TECLADO Silenciar el sonido. Reproducir la pista anterior. Bajar el volumen. Reproducir la pista siguiente. Subir el volumen. Detener. Reproducir o hacer una pausa. Acerca de su equipo 27 Los indicadores luminosos azules situados sobre el teclado indican lo siguiente: MICRÓFONOS E N LÍNEA DIGITALES: Micrófono incorporado para conferencias y charla. Vista lateral izquierda RANURA PARA CABLE D E SEGURIDAD: Sirve para conectar al equipo un dispositivo antirrobo disponible en el mercado (consulte el apartado "Cable de seguridad" en la página 101). CONMUTADOR INALÁMBRICO: Cuando se habilita mediante Dell QuickSet, este conmutador puede buscar una red de área local inalámbrica WLAN en las cercanías. También puede usarlo para apagar rápidamente cualquier dispositivo inalámbrico, como tarjetas WLAN y tarjetas internas con tecnología inalámbrica Bluetooth (consulte el apartado "Localizador de redes Dell Wi-Fi Catcher™" en la página 100). Se ilumina cuando el teclado numérico está activado. Se ilumina cuando la función de letras mayúsculas (Bloq Mayús) está activada. Se ilumina cuando el bloqueo de desplazamiento está activado. 1 Ranura para cable de seguridad 2 Conmutador inalámbrico 3 Indicador de Wi-Fi Catcher 4 Rejillas de ventilación 5 Conectores de audio 6 Ranura para ExpressCard 9 A 1 2 56 3 428 Acerca de su equipo PRECAUCIÓN: No introduzca objetos ni permita que el polvo se acumule en las rejillas de ventilación ni las bloquee. No almacene el equipo en un entorno -con poca ventilación, como un maletín cerrado, mientras esté en funcionamiento. La circulación restringida de aire podría dañar el equipo o provocar un incendio. REJILLAS D E VENTILACIÓN: El equipo utiliza un ventilador interno para permitir que el aire circule a través de las rejillas y evitar así un sobrecalentamiento. El equipo pone en marcha el ventilador cuando alcanza cierta temperatura. El ruido de los ventiladores es normal y no indica ningún problema del equipo o de los ventiladores. 1 off Desactiva los dispositivos inalámbricos. 2 on Activa los dispositivos inalámbricos. 3 momentáneo Busca redes WLAN (consulte el apartado "Localizador de redes Dell Wi-Fi Catcher™" en la página 100). 4 Indicador de Wi-Fi Catcher • Luz verde parpadeante: buscando redes. • Luz verde continua: se encontró una red con buena señal. • Luz amarilla continua: se encontró una red con señal débil. • Amarillo parpadeante: error • Apagado: no se encontró señal. 1 2 3 4Acerca de su equipo 29 CONECTORES D E AUDIO RANURA PARA EXPRESSCARD: Admite una ExpressCard. El equipo se envía con un panel protector de plástico instalado en la ranura. Para obtener más información, consulte el apartado "Uso de ExpressCards" en la página 83. Enchufe los auriculares al conector . Enchufe un micrófono al conector .30 Acerca de su equipo Vista lateral derecha UNIDAD ÓPTICA: Para obtener más información acerca la unidad óptica, consulte el apartado "Uso de soportes multimedia" en la página 59. BOTÓN D E EXPULSIÓN: Pulse el botón de expulsión para abrir la unidad óptica. LECTOR D E TARJETAS D E MEMORIA 8 E N 1: Proporciona una manera rápida y cómoda de ver y compartir fotos digitales, música y vídeos almacenados en una tarjeta de memoria multimedia. El equipo se envía con un panel protector de plástico instalado en la ranura. El lector de tarjetas de memoria 8 en 1 puede leer las siguientes tarjetas de memoria de medios digitales: • Tarjeta de memoria Secure Digital (SD) • Tarjeta SDIO • Tarjeta MultiMedia (MMC) • Memory Stick • Memory Stick PRO • Tarjeta xD-Picture • SD de alta velocidad • SD de alta densidad CONECTOR IEEE 1394: Conecta los dispositivos compatibles con IEEE 1394 con altas velocidades de transferencia, como algunas cámaras digitales de vídeo. 1 Indicador de estado de la batería 2 Indicador de actividad del disco duro 3 Indicador de alimentación 4 Unidad óptica 5 Botón de expulsión 6 Lector de tarjetas de memoria 8 en 1 7 Conector IEEE 1394 8 Conector de vídeo (VGA) 9 Conector de red (RJ-45) 10 Conectores USB (2) 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3Acerca de su equipo 31 CONECTOR D E VÍDEO CONECTOR D E RED (RJ-45) CONECTORES USB Vista posterior Conecta dispositivos de vídeo, como un monitor. Conecta el equipo a una red. Las dos luces que se encuentran junto al conector indican el estado de la conexión y la actividad de las conexiones red por cable. Para obtener más información sobre el uso del adaptador de red, consulte la guía del usuario del dispositivo proporcionada con el equipo. Conectan dispositivos USB, como un ratón, un teclado o una impresora. 1 Conector para S-vídeo y salida de TV 2 Conectores USB (2) 3 Conector del adaptador de AC 4 Batería 5 Conector del módem (RJ-11) 1 2 3 4 532 Acerca de su equipo CONECTOR PARA S-VÍDEO Y SALIDA D E TV CONECTORES USB CONECTOR DEL ADAPTADOR D E AC: Conecta un adaptador de CA al equipo. El adaptador de CA convierte la corriente alterna en la corriente continua que necesita el equipo. Puede conectar el adaptador de CA al equipo independientemente de que esté encendido o apagado. PRECAUCIÓN: El adaptador de CA funciona con tomas de alimentación eléctrica de todo el mundo. No obstante, los conectores de alimentación y los enchufes múltiples varían de un país a otro. El uso de un cable incompatible o la conexión incorrecta del cable al enchufe múltiple o a la toma de alimentación eléctrica puede dañar el equipo o provocar un incendio. AVISO: Cuando desconecte el cable del adaptador de CA del equipo, sujete el conector (no el cable) y tire de él firmemente pero con cuidado, procurando no dañar el cable. Conecta el equipo a un TV. También conecta dispositivos capaces de reproducir audio digital mediante el cable adaptador para TV/audio digital. Conectan dispositivos USB, como un ratón, un teclado o una impresora. Acerca de su equipo 33 CONECTOR DEL MÓDEM (RJ-11) Vista inferior Conecte la línea telefónica al enchufe del módem. Para obtener más información sobre el uso del módem, consulte la documentación en línea del mismo incluida con el equipo. 1 Altavoz izquierdo 2 Compartimento del módulo de memoria/batería de tipo botón 3 IR de consumo 4 Altavoz derecho 5 Compartimento de minitarjetas inalámbricas 6 Batería 7 Medidor de carga de la batería 8 Pasadores de liberación del compartimento de la batería (2) 9 Ventilador 10 Unidad de disco duro 2 3 4 10 7 1 6 8 9 534 Acerca de su equipo ALTAVOZ IZQUIERDO: Para ajustar el volumen del altavoz integrado, pulse los botones de control de volumen o el botón de silencio. COMPARTIMENTO DEL MÓDULO D E MEMORIA/BATERÍA D E TIPO BOTÓN: Compartimento que contiene el módulo de memoria DIMM B y la batería de tipo botón. Para obtener más información, consulte el apartado "Adición y sustitución de piezas" en la página 147. IR D E CONSUMO: Permite transferir archivos desde el equipo a otro dispositivo compatible con infrarrojos sin utilizar conexiones de cables. Cuando recibe el equipo, el sensor está desactivado. Para activar el sensor puede usar el programa de configuración del sistema (consulte el apartado "Uso del programa Configuración del sistema" en la página 197). Para obtener información sobre la transferencia de datos, consulte el Centro de ayuda y soporte técnico de Windows (haga clic en Inicio y, a continuación, en Ayuda y soporte técnico) o la documentación incluida con el dispositivo compatible con infrarrojos. ALTAVOZ DERECHO: Para ajustar el volumen del altavoz integrado, pulse los botones de control de volumen o el botón de silencio. COMPARTIMENTO DE MINITARJETAS INALÁMBRICAS: Compartimento para minitarjetas WLAN, WWAN o WPAN (consulte el apartado "Mini-Cards (minitarjetas) inalámbricas" en la página 163). BATERÍA: Si tiene instalada una batería, puede utilizar el equipo sin conectarlo a una toma de alimentación eléctrica (consulte el apartado "Uso de la batería" en la página 51). MEDIDOR D E CARGA D E L A BATERÍA: Proporciona información sobre la carga de la batería (consulte el apartado "Comprobación de la carga de la batería" en la página 52). PASADORES DE LIBERACIÓN DEL COMPARTIMENTO D E L A BATERÍA: Libera la batería (consulte el apartado "Sustitución de la batería" en la página 57 para ver instrucciones). VENTILADOR: El equipo utiliza un ventilador para permitir que el aire circule a través de las rejillas y evitar así un sobrecalentamiento. El equipo pone en marcha el ventilador cuando alcanza cierta temperatura. El ruido de los ventiladores es normal y no indica ningún problema del equipo o de los ventiladores. UNIDAD D E DISCO DURO: Almacena software y datos.Configuración de su equipo 35 Configuración de su equipo Conexión a Internet NOTA: Los ISP y sus ofertas varían según el país. Para conectarse a Internet, se necesita un módem o una conexión de red y un proveedor de servicios de Internet (ISP). El ISP ofrecerá una o varias de las siguientes opciones de conexión a Internet: • Conexiones ADSL que proporcionan acceso a Internet de alta velocidad a través de la línea telefónica existente o un servicio de telefonía móvil. Con una conexión ADSL, se puede acceder a Internet y utilizar el teléfono en una sola línea simultáneamente. • Conexiones de módem por cable que proporcionan acceso a Internet de alta velocidad a través de la línea de TV por cable local. • Conexiones de módem por satélite que proporcionan acceso a Internet de alta velocidad a través de un sistema de televisión por satélite. • Conexiones telefónicas que proporcionan acceso a Internet a través de una línea telefónica. Las conexiones telefónicas son considerablemente más lentas que las conexiones ADSL, cable y módem por satélite. • La tecnología de Red Inalámbrica de Área Amplia (WWAM) o banda ancha móvil proporciona una conexión a Internet usando las tecnologías de telefonía móvil con velocidades de banda ancha. • Las conexiones de Red Inalámbrica de Área Local (WLAN) utilizan ondas de radio de alta frencuencia para realizar la comunicación. Normalmente los enrutadores inalámbricos se conectan a módems de cable o ADSL de banda ancha que transmiten la señal de Internet al equipo. Si utiliza una conexión telefónica, enchufe una línea telefónica al conector de módem del equipo y a la toma de teléfono de la pared antes de configurar la conexión a Internet. Si utiliza una conexión ADSL o de módem por cable o satélite, póngase en contacto con su ISP o el servicio de telefonía móvil para obtener instrucciones de configuración.36 Configuración de su equipo Configuración de la conexión a Internet Para configurar una conexión a Internet con un acceso directo al ISP en el escritorio: 1 Guarde y cierre los archivos abiertos y salga de todos los programas activos. 2 Haga doble clic en el icono ISP en el escritorio de Microsoft® Windows®. 3 Siga las instrucciones de la pantalla para realizar la configuración. NOTA: Si tiene problemas para conectarse a Internet, consulte el apartado "Problemas con el correo electrónico, el módem e Internet" en la página113. Si no puede conectarse a Internet pero anteriormente sí podía conectarse, es posible que el ISP haya interrumpido el servicio. Póngase en contacto con el ISP para comprobar el estado del servicio o intente conectar más tarde. NOTA: Tenga preparada la información del ISP. Si no tiene un ISP, el asistente Conectarse a Internet puede servirle de ayuda para conseguir uno. Si no tiene un icono ISP en el escritorio o si desea configurar una conexión a Internet con un ISP diferente: 1 Guarde y cierre los archivos abiertos y salga de todos los programas activos. 2 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y, a continuación, en Panel de control. 3 En Network and Internet (Red e Internet), haga clic en Connect to the Internet (Conectarse a Internet). Aparecerá la ventana Connect to the Internet (Conectarse a Internet). 4 Haga clic en Broadband (PPPoE) (Banda ancha [PPPoE]), Wireless (Inalámbrico) o Dial-up (Acceso telefónico) dependiendo de cómo desee conectarse: • Elija Banda ancha si va a usar un módem ADSL, un módem de TV por cable o un módem por satélite. • Elija Inalámbrico si va a usar una conexión inalámbrica mediante tarjeta WLAN. • Elija Acceso telefónico si va a usar un módem de acceso telefónico o RDSI. NOTA: Si no sabe qué tipo de conexión seleccionar, haga clic en Help me choose (Ayuda para elegir) o póngase en contacto con su ISP. 5 Siga las instrucciones de la pantalla y utilice la información de configuración facilitada por el ISP para completar el proceso de configuración.Configuración de su equipo 37 Transferencia de la información a un equipo nuevo Puede transferir los siguientes tipos de datos de un equipo a otro: • Mensajes de correo electrónico • Configuraciones de barras de herramientas • Tamaños de ventana • Marcadores de Internet Utilice uno de los siguientes métodos para transferir datos: • El asistente para Transferencia fácil de Windows, un cable de transferencia fácil y un puerto USB • Por una red • Medio extraíble, como un CD de escritura Transferencia fácil de Windows 1 Haga clic en Inicio →Todos los programas→Accesorios→Herramientas del sistema→ Asistente para transferencia fácil de Windows. 2 En el cuadro de diálogo Control de cuentas de usuario, haga clic en Continue (Continuar). 3 Haga clic en Siguiente. 4 Haga clic en Start a new transfer (Iniciar una nueva transferencia) o en Continue a transfer in progress (Continuar una transferencia en curso). 5 Siga las instrucciones del asistente para Transferencia fácil de Windows.38 Configuración de su equipo Configuración de una impresora AVISO: Complete la configuración del sistema operativo antes de conectar una impresora al equipo. Consulte la información de configuración en la documentación proporcionada con la impresora, en la que se describe cómo realizar las siguientes operaciones: • Obtener e instalar controladores actualizados. • Conectar la impresora al equipo. • Cargar el papel e instalar el cartucho de tóner o de tinta. Consulte el Manual del propietario de la impresora para obtener asistencia técnica o comuníquese con el fabricante de la impresora. Cable de la impresora La impresora se conecta al equipo con un cable USB. Es posible que la impresora se entregue sin un cable para impresora, por lo que si adquiere uno por separado, asegúrese de que sea compatible con su impresora y con su equipo. Si ha adquirido un cable de la impresora al mismo tiempo que el equipo, es posible que el cable se incluya en la caja del ordenador. Conexión de una impresora USB NOTA: Puede conectar dispositivos USB con el equipo encendido. 1 Finalice la configuración del sistema operativo, en el caso de que todavía no lo haya hecho. 2 Conecte el cable de la impresora USB a los conectores USB del equipo y de la impresora. Los conectores USB admiten sólo una posición de encaje.Configuración de su equipo 39 3 Encienda la impresora y después el equipo. Si aparece la ventana Asistente para agregar nuevo hardware, haga clic en Cancelar. 4 Haga clic en Inicio y, a continuación, en Red. 5 Haga clic en Agregar una impresora para iniciar el Asistente para agregar impresora. NOTA: Para instalar el controlador de la impresora, consulte el apartado "Reinstalación de controladores y utilidades" en la página 137 y la documentación que se incluye con ella. 6 Haga clic en Agregar una impresora local o Agregar una impresora de red, inalámbrica o Bluetooth. 7 Siga las instrucciones del Asistente para agregar impresora. 1 Conector USB del equipo 2 Conector USB de la impresora 3 Cable de la impresora USB 3 2 140 Configuración de su equipo Dispositivos de protección de la alimentación Existen varios dispositivos que protegen contra las interrupciones y las fluctuaciones de la alimentación eléctrica: • Supresores de sobretensión • Acondicionadores de línea • Sistemas de alimentación ininterrumpida (SAI) Protectores contra sobretensión Los supresores de picos de tensión y los enchufes múltiples equipados con protección contra picos de tensión ayudan a evitar los daños en el equipo ocasionados por sobretensiones que pueden producirse durante las tormentas eléctricas o después de interrupciones en la alimentación eléctrica. Algunos fabricantes de supresores de sobretensiones proporcionan cobertura de garantía para cierto tipo de daños. Lea con atención la garantía del dispositivo al elegir un supresor de sobretensiones. Un dispositivo con una clasificación en julios más alta ofrece más protección. Compare las clasificaciones en julios para determinar la efectividad relativa de los diferentes dispositivos. AVISO: La mayoría de los supresores de sobretensiones no protegen contra las fluctuaciones e interrupciones de la alimentación eléctrica causadas por rayos. Cuando se produzca una tormenta con aparato eléctrico, desconecte la línea telefónica de la toma de teléfono de pared y desenchufe el ordenador de la toma de alimentación eléctrica. Muchos supresores de sobretensión disponen de una toma de teléfono para proteger el módem. Consulte la documentación del supresor de sobretensiones para obtener instrucciones sobre la conexión del módem. AVISO: No todos los supresores de sobretensiones ofrecen protección para el adaptador de red. Desconecte el cable de red de la toma de red de pared durante las tormentas con aparato eléctrico. Acondicionadores de línea AVISO: Los acondicionadores de línea no protegen contra las interrupciones de la alimentación eléctrica. Los acondicionadores de línea están diseñados para mantener la tensión de CA a un nivel bastante constante.Configuración de su equipo 41 Sistemas de alimentación ininterrumpida AVISO: La interrupción de la alimentación eléctrica mientras se están guardando datos en la unidad de disco duro puede provocar que se pierdan datos o que el archivo resulte dañado. NOTA: Para prolongar al máximo el tiempo de funcionamiento de la batería, conecte únicamente el equipo al SAI. Los demás dispositivos, como la impresora, pueden ser conectados a un enchufe múltiple independiente que proporcione protección contra sobretensiones. Los sistemas SAI protegen contra fluctuaciones e interrupciones de la alimentación eléctrica. Los dispositivos SAI contienen una batería que proporciona alimentación eléctrica temporal a los dispositivos conectados cuando se interrumpe la alimentación eléctrica. La batería se carga siempre que haya alimentación de CA disponible. Consulte la documentación del fabricante del SAI para obtener información sobre el tiempo de funcionamiento de la batería y asegurarse de que el dispositivo está aprobado por Underwriters Laboratories (UL).42 Configuración de su equipoUso de la pantalla 43 Uso de la pantalla Ajuste del brillo Cuando el equipo Dell™ funcione con la batería, podrá ahorrar energía ajustando el brillo de la pantalla para el nivel más bajo que le resulte cómodo. • Pulse y la tecla de flecha hacia arriba para aumentar el brillo únicamente en la pantalla integrada (no en un monitor externo). • Pulse y la tecla de flecha hacia abajo para reducir el brillo únicamente en la pantalla integrada (no en un monitor externo). NOTA: Las combinaciones de tecla para control del brillo sólo afectan a la pantalla del ordenador portátil, no a los monitores o proyectores que conecte al mismo o al dispositivo de acoplamiento. Si el equipo está conectado a un monitor externo y usted intenta cambiar el nivel de brillo, puede aparecer el Medidor de brillo, pero esto no modificará el nivel de brillo del dispositivo externo. Cambio de la imagen de vídeo de la pantalla del equipo a un proyector Cuando encienda el equipo con un dispositivo externo (como un monitor externo o proyector) conectado y encendido, la imagen puede aparecer en la pantalla del ordenador o en el dispositivo externo. Pulse para alternar la imagen de vídeo sólo en la pantalla, sólo en el dispositivo externo, o en la pantalla y el dispositivo externo simultáneamente. Configuración de la resolución de pantalla y frecuencia de actualización NOTA: Si cambia la resolución de la pantalla de los valores actuales, la imagen puede aparecer borrosa o el texto puede ser difícil de leer si cambia la resolución a una que no admita el ordenador o la pantalla. Antes de cambiar la configuración de la pantalla, tome nota de los valores actuales para poder volver a ellos si fuera preciso.44 Uso de la pantalla Puede mejorar la legibilidad del texto y cambiar la apariencia de las imágenes en la pantalla ajustando la resolución de ésta. A medida que aumente la resolución, los objetos aparecerán más pequeños en la pantalla. Por contra, una menor resolución hace que el texto y las imágenes aparezcan mayores, lo cual beneficiará a las personas con alguna deficiencia en la visión. Para mostrar un programa a una resolución específica, tanto la tarjeta de vídeo como la pantalla deben ser compatibles con el programa y los controladores de vídeo necesarios deben estar instalados. NOTA: Use únicamente los controladores de vídeo instalados por Dell, que han sido diseñados para ofrecer el mejor rendimiento con el sistema operativo instalado por Dell. Si selecciona una resolución o una gama de colores mayor que la admitida por la pantalla, la configuración se ajusta automáticamente al valor más cercano posible. Para ajustar la resolución y la frecuencia de actualización de la pantalla: 1 Haga clic en Inicio → Panel de control. 2 En Appearance and Personalization (Apariencia y personalización) haga clic en Adjust screen resolution (Ajustar resolución de pantalla). 3 En la ventana Display Settings (Configuración de pantalla), en Resolution (Resolución), mueva la barra deslizante a la izquierda o la derecha para disminuir o aumentar la resolución de pantalla. NOTA: Para ver instrucciones adicionales, haga clic en How do I get the best display? (¿Cómo consigo la mejor pantalla?).Uso del teclado y el ratón táctil 45 Uso del teclado y el ratón táctil Teclado numérico El teclado numérico funciona como el teclado numérico de un teclado externo. Cada tecla del teclado numérico tiene varias funciones. Los números y símbolos del teclado numérico están marcados en azul en la parte derecha de las teclas. Para escribir un número o un símbolo, mantenga presionada la tecla y pulse la tecla que desee. • Para activar el teclado, pulse . El indicador indica que el teclado está activo. • Para desactivar el teclado, pulse de nuevo . teclado numérico 946 Uso del teclado y el ratón táctil Método abreviado del teclado Funciones del sistema Funciones de la pantalla Batería Administración de energía Abre la ventana Administrador de tareas. Muestra en pantalla iconos que representan todas las opciones de pantalla disponibles actualmente (sólo pantalla, monitor externo o sólo proyector, pantalla y proyector, etc.). Resalte el icono que desee para poner la pantalla en esa opción. y tecla de flecha hacia arriba Aumenta el brillo únicamente en la pantalla integrada (no en un monitor externo). y tecla de flecha hacia abajo Reduce el brillo únicamente en la pantalla integrada (no en un monitor externo). Muestra el Medidor de batería Dell™ QuickSet (consulte el apartado "Medidor de batería QuickSet de Dell" en la página 53). Activa un modo de administración de energía. Puede reprogramar este método abreviado del teclado para activar otro modo de administración de energía utilizando la ficha Opciones avanzadas de la ventana Propiedades de opciones de energía (consulte el apartado "Configuración de los valores de administración de energía" en la página 55).Uso del teclado y el ratón táctil 47 Funciones de la tecla con el logotipo de Microsoft® Windows® Método abreviado de teclado QuickSet Si QuickSet está instalado, puede utilizar otras teclas de acceso directo para activar funciones como el Medidor de batería o modos de administración de energía. Para obtener más información acerca de los métodos abreviados de QuickSet, haga clic con el botón derecho del ratón en el icono QuickSet del área de notificación y, a continuación, haga clic en Ayuda. Ajustar las configuraciones del teclado Para ajustar el funcionamiento del teclado, como la velocidad de repetición de caracteres: 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio , y en Panel de control. 2 Haga clic en Hardware y sonido. 3 Haga clic en Teclado. Tecla con el logotipo de Windows y Minimiza todas las ventanas abiertas. Tecla con el logotipo de Windows y Maximiza todas las ventanas minimizadas. Esta combinación de teclas funciona como opción para restaurar ventanas minimizadas siguiendo el uso de la combinación de la tecla con el logo de Windows y la tecla . Tecla con el logotipo de Windows y Inicia el Explorador de Windows. Tecla con el logotipo de Windows y Abre el cuadro de diálogo Ejecutar. Tecla con el logotipo de Windows y Abre el cuadro de diálogo Resultados de la búsqueda. Tecla con el logotipo de Windows y Abre el cuadro de diálogo Resultados de la búsqueda - PC (si el equipo está conectado a una red). Tecla con el logotipo de Windows y Abre el cuadro de diálogo Propiedades del sistema.48 Uso del teclado y el ratón táctil Ratón táctil El ratón táctil detecta la presión y el movimiento de su dedo para permitirle desplazar el cursor por la pantalla. Utilícelo junto con sus botones del mismo modo que un ratón normal. • Para mover el cursor, deslice ligeramente el dedo por la superficie táctil. • Para seleccionar un objeto, toque suavemente la superficie táctil o utilice el pulgar para pulsar el botón izquierdo de la misma. • Para seleccionar y mover (o arrastrar) un objeto, sitúe el cursor sobre él y toque dos veces en la superficie táctil. En el segundo toque, deje el dedo sobre la superficie y deslícelo para mover el objeto seleccionado. • Para hacer doble clic en un objeto, sitúe el cursor sobre éste y, a continuación, toque dos veces la superficie táctil o pulse el botón izquierdo de la misma dos veces. 1 Ratón táctil 2 Marcas impresas que indican las direcciones de desplazamiento 1 2Uso del teclado y el ratón táctil 49 Personalización del ratón táctil Puede utilizar la ventana Propiedades de Mouse para desactivar la superficie táctil o ajustar su configuración. 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio , y en Panel de control. 2 Haga clic en Hardware y sonido. 3 Haga clic en Teclado. 4 En la ventana Propiedades de Mouse: • Haga clic en la ficha Selección de dispositivo para deshabilitar el ratón táctil. • Haga clic en la ficha Ratón táctil para ajustar la configuración de la superficie táctil. 5 Haga clic en Aceptar para guardar la configuración y cerrar la ventana.50 Uso del teclado y el ratón táctilUso de la batería 51 Uso de la batería Rendimiento de la batería NOTA: Para obtener información acerca de la garantía Dell para su equipo, consulte la Guía de información del producto o el documento aparte de garantía que se envía junto con el ordenador. Para el rendimiento óptimo del equipo y para facilitar la conservación de la configuración del BIOS, utilice su equipo portátil Dell™ con la batería principal instalada en todo momento. Se proporciona una batería en su compartimento correspondiente como equipamiento estándar. NOTA: Debido a que la batería puede no estar totalmente cargada, use el adaptador de CA para conectar su nuevo equipo a una toma de alimentación eléctrica la primera vez que lo utilice. Para obtener mejores resultados, utilice el ordenador con el adaptador de CA hasta que la batería esté totalmente cargada. Para ver el estado de carga de la batería, coloque el cursor del ratón sobre el icono de la batería en el área de notificación de Windows. NOTA: El tiempo de funcionamiento de la batería (el tiempo que la batería puede mantener una carga) disminuye con el tiempo. En función de la frecuencia y las condiciones de uso de la batería, es posible que deba comprar una nueva batería durante la vida útil del equipo. NOTA: Se recomienda conectar el equipo a una toma de alimentación eléctrica mientras se graba en un medio. El tiempo de funcionamiento de la batería depende de las condiciones de funcionamiento. La duración de la batería se reduce en gran medida si realiza, entre otras, las operaciones que se indican a continuación: • Uso de unidades ópticas. • Usar dispositivos de comunicaciones inalámbricas, ExpressCards, tarjetas de memoria de datos o dispositivos USB. • Usar una configuración de pantalla con mucho brillo, protectores de pantalla en 3D u otros programas que consuman mucha energía como aplicaciones gráficas complejas en 3D.52 Uso de la batería • Hacer funcionar el equipo en modo de máximo rendimiento (consulte el apartado "Configuración de los valores de administración de energía" en la página 55 para obtener más información acerca del acceso a Dell QuickSet o Propiedades de las opciones de energía de Windows, que puede usarse para configurar los valores de administración de energía en el equipo). Es posible comprobar la carga de la batería antes de insertar dicha batería en el equipo. También se pueden establecer las opciones de administración de energía de modo que avisen cuando la carga de la batería esté baja. PRECAUCIÓN: El uso de baterías incompatibles puede aumentar el riesgo de incendio o explosión. Sustituya la batería únicamente por baterías de Dell. La batería está diseñada para funcionar con equipos Dell. No utilice baterías de otros equipos. PRECAUCIÓN: No deseche las baterías en la basura doméstica. Cuando la batería ya no pueda cargarse, solicite información a una empresa local de gestión de residuos o al departamento responsable en materia de medio ambiente sobre el modo de desechar las baterías de iones de litio (consulte el apartado "Cómo desechar las baterías" en la Guía de información del producto). PRECAUCIÓN: El uso incorrecto de la batería puede aumentar el riesgo de incendio o quemadura química. No perfore, incinere, desmonte o exponga la batería a temperaturas superiores a 65°C (149°F). Mantenga la batería fuera del alcance de los niños. Tenga mucho cuidado con las baterías dañadas o que goteen. Las baterías dañadas pueden gotear y causar lesiones personales o daños en el equipo. Comprobación de la carga de la batería Puede comprobar la carga de la batería del equipo usando uno de los siguientes métodos. • Medidor de batería QuickSet de Dell. • Icono del medidor de la batería de Microsoft Windows situado en el área de notificación. • Medidor de carga de la batería y la advertencia de batería baja situados en la batería. • Ventana emergente de advertencia de batería baja.Uso de la batería 53 Medidor de batería QuickSet de Dell Para ver el Medidor de batería QuickSet: • Haga doble clic en el icono Dell QuickSet de la barra de tareas y, a continuación, haga clic en Medidor de batería o bien • Pulse El medidor de batería muestra el estado, el estado de consumo de la batería, el nivel y el tiempo total de carga de la batería del equipo. Para obtener más información sobre QuickSet, haga clic con el botón derecho del ratón en el icono de QuickSet y haga clic en Ayuda. Medidor de batería de Microsoft® Windows® El medidor de batería indica la carga que queda de batería. Para consultar el medidor de batería, haga doble clic en el icono del área de notificación. Medidor de carga Pulsando una vez o manteniendo pulsado el botón de estado del medidor de carga de la batería, podrá comprobar: • la carga de la batería (compruébela pulsando y soltando el botón de estado) • el estado de la batería (compruébelo manteniendo pulsado el botón de estado) El tiempo de funcionamiento de la batería está fijado en gran medida por el número de veces que se realiza su carga. Tras cientos de ciclos de carga y descarga, las baterías pierden una cierta capacidad de carga o buen estado de la batería. Por tanto, una batería puede mostrar el estado de cargada pero mantener una capacidad de carga reducida (estado). Comprobación de la carga de la batería Para comprobar la carga de la batería, pulse y suelte el botón de estado del medidor de carga de la batería para encender las luces indicadoras de carga. Cada indicador luminoso representa aproximadamente un 20% de la carga total de la batería. Por ejemplo, si la batería tiene un 80% de carga restante, habrá cuatro indicadores luminosos encendidos. Si no hay ningún indicador encendido, entonces la batería está descargada.54 Uso de la batería Comprobación del estado de la batería NOTA: Puede comprobar el estado de consumo de la batería de dos maneras: utilizando el medidor de carga de la batería según se describe a continuación y utilizando el medidor de batería en Dell QuickSet. Para obtener más información acerca de QuickSet, haga clic con el botón derecho del ratón en el icono QuickSet del área de notificación y, a continuación, haga clic en Ayuda. Para comprobar el estado de la batería utilizando el medidor de carga, mantenga pulsado el botón de estado del medidor de carga de la batería durante al menos 3 segundos para iluminar las luces indicadoras de estado. Cada indicador luminoso representa una degradación gradual. Si no se ilumina ningún indicador, significa que la batería está en buenas condiciones y que mantiene más del 80 por ciento de su capacidad de carga original. Si hay cinco luces encendidas, la batería retiene menos del 60% de la capacidad de carga, y debe considerar sustituir la batería (para obtener más información acerca del tiempo de funcionamiento de la batería, consulte el apartado "Batería" en la página 194). Advertencia de bajo nivel de carga de la batería AVISO: Para evitar la pérdida de datos o que éstos resulten dañados, tras una advertencia de batería baja guarde inmediatamente el trabajo y, a continuación, conecte el equipo a una toma de alimentación eléctrica. Si la carga de la batería se agota por completo, el estado de Suspensión se activa automáticamente. Una ventana emergente le avisa cuando se ha agotado aproximadamente un 90 por ciento de la carga de la batería. El estado de Suspensión se activa automáticamente cuando la carga de la batería alcanza un nivel extremadamente bajo. Puede cambiar las configuraciones de las alarmas de la batería en Dell QuickSet o en la ventana Opciones de energía (consulte el apartado "Configuración de los valores de administración de energía" en la página 55).Uso de la batería 55 Conservación de la energía de la batería Para ahorrar la energía de la batería del equipo, proceda del siguiente modo: • Conecte el equipo a una toma de alimentación eléctrica cuando sea posible; la duración de la batería depende en gran medida del número de veces que se use y se recargue. • Configure los valores de administración de energía usando bien Dell QuickSet o las Opciones de energía de Microsoft Windows para optimizar el uso de la energía del equipo (consulte el apartado "Configuración de los valores de administración de energía" en la página 55). • Utilice el estado de Suspensión cuando deje el equipo sin usar durante períodos de tiempo largos (consulte el apartado "Uso del estado de Suspensión" en la página 55). Configuración de los valores de administración de energía Puede utilizar QuickSet o las Opciones de energía de Windows para configurar los valores de administración de energía en el equipo. • Para obtener información sobre cómo usar el asistente de Administración de energía de Dell QuickSet, haga clic con el botón derecho en el icono QuickSet del área de notificación, haga clic en Ayuda y, a continuación, seleccione Administración de energía. • Para usar las Opciones de energía de Windows, use uno de los siguientes métodos: • Haga clic en Inicio → Panel de control→ Hardware y sonido→ Opciones de energía y seleccione un plan de energía en la ventana Seleccionar un plan de energía. o bien • Haga clic en el icono del área de notificación, seleccione Opciones de energía y, a continuación, seleccione un plan en la ventana Seleccionar un plan de energía. Uso del estado de Suspensión En lugar de apagar el equipo portátil, utilice el estado de Suspensión para ahorrar energía. En este estado, el trabajo se guarda automáticamente en el disco duro y posteriormente se vuelve a la sesión anterior sin tener que reiniciar el equipo. 56 Uso de la batería AVISO: Si el equipo pierde la corriente alterna y la alimentación de la batería mientras permanece en el estado de Suspensión, podrían perderse datos. Para entrar en el estado de Suspensión: • Haga clic en Inicio , en y a continuación en Suspensión. o bien • Dependiendo de cómo estén configuradas las opciones de administración de energía en Opciones de energía de Windows o Dell QuickSet, utilice uno de los siguientes métodos: • Pulse el botón de encendido. • Cierre la pantalla. • Pulse . Para salir del estado de Suspensión, pulse el botón de alimentación. Carga de la batería NOTA: El tiempo de carga aumenta con el ordenador encendido. Puede dejar la batería en el ordenador todo el tiempo que desee. Los circuitos internos de la batería impiden que se sobrecargue. Cuando conecte el equipo a una toma de alimentación eléctrica o instale una batería mientras está conectado a una toma de alimentación eléctrica, comprobará la carga y la temperatura de la batería. Si es necesario, el adaptador de CA cargará la batería y mantendrá la carga. Si la batería está caliente porque se ha estado usando en el equipo o porque ha permanecido en un ambiente donde la temperatura es elevada, puede ser que no se cargue cuando se conecte el ordenador a una toma de alimentación eléctrica. Si el indicador parpadea alternando entre el azul y el ámbar, la batería está demasiado caliente para iniciar la carga. Desconecte el equipo de la toma eléctrica y deje que enfríe a la temperatura ambiente. A continuación, vuelva a conectarlo a la corriente para continuar con la carga de la batería. Para obtener más información sobre resolución de problemas de la batería, consulte el apartado "Problemas de alimentación" en la página 129.Uso de la batería 57 Sustitución de la batería PRECAUCIÓN: El uso de baterías incompatibles puede aumentar el riesgo de incendio o explosión. Sustituya la batería únicamente por baterías de Dell. La batería está diseñada para funcionar con equipos Dell. No utilice baterías de otros equipos. PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de llevar a cabo estos procedimientos, apague el equipo, desconecte el adaptador de CA de la toma de alimentación eléctrica y del propio equipo, desconecte el módem del conector de pared y del ordenador y retire cualquier otro cable externo que tenga conectado. AVISO: Debe retirar todos los cables externos para evitar posibles daños en el conector. AVISO: Si decide sustituir la batería mientras el ordenador se encuentra en el estado de Suspensión, tiene hasta 1 minuto para completar la sustitución de la batería antes de que el ordenador se apague y pierda los datos que no haya guardado. Para extraer la batería: 1 Si el equipo está conectado (acoplado) a un dispositivo de acoplamiento, desacóplelo. Si desea más instrucciones, consulte la documentación incluida con el dispositivo de acoplamiento. 2 Asegúrese de que el equipo está apagado. 3 Dé la vuelta al ordenador. 4 Deslice y haga clic con los pasadores de liberación de la batería para abrirlos. 5 Saque la batería del compartimento deslizándola. Para volver a colocar la batería, siga el procedimiento de extracción en orden inverso. 1 Batería 2 Pasadores de liberación de la batería (2) 1 258 Uso de la batería Almacenamiento de una batería Extraiga la batería cuando vaya a guardar el equipo durante un período largo. Las baterías se descargan durante los almacenamientos prolongados. Tras un largo período de almacenamiento, recargue la batería completamente (consulte el apartado "Carga de la batería" en la página 56) antes de utilizarla.Uso de soportes multimedia 59 Uso de soportes multimedia Reproducción de medios AVISO: No ejerza presión sobre la bandeja de la unidad óptica al abrirla y cerrarla. Mantenga la bandeja cerrada cuando no utilice la unidad. AVISO: No mueva el equipo mientras se está reproduciendo un medio. 1 Pulse el botón de expulsión de la parte frontal de la unidad. 2 Coloque el disco, con la etiqueta hacia arriba, en el centro de la bandeja y presione hasta que se produzca un chasquido en el pivote central. 3 Vuelva a introducir la bandeja en la unidad. Para formatear medios para el almacenamiento o copia de datos, consulte el software de medios que se incluye con el equipo. NOTA: Asegúrese de acatar la legislación sobre copyright al copiar medios.60 Uso de soportes multimedia Un reproductor de CD incluye los siguientes botones básicos: Un reproductor de DVD incluye los siguientes botones básicos: Para obtener más información sobre la reproducción de medios, haga clic en Ayuda en el reproductor multimedia (si se encuentra disponible). Reproducir. Retrocede dentro de la pista actual. Pausa. Adelanta dentro de la pista actual. Detener. Retrocede a la pista anterior. Expulsar. Adelanta a la pista siguiente. Detener. Reinicia el segmento actual. Reproducir. Adelanta rápido. Pausa. Retrocede rápido. Adelanta una sola imagen en el modo de pausa. Adelanta al siguiente título o segmento. Reproduce de forma continua el título o segmento actual. Retrocede al título o segmento anterior. Expulsar.Uso de soportes multimedia 61 Cómo copiar medios CD y DVD Esta sección se aplica solamente a equipos que tengan una unidad DVD+/-RW. NOTA: Asegúrese de no incumplir la legislación sobre copyright al copiar medios. NOTA: Los tipos de unidades ópticas ofrecidos por Dell pueden variar en función del país. Las siguientes instrucciones explican cómo realizar una copia exacta de un CD o DVD usando Roxio Creator. También puede utilizar Roxio Creator con otros fines, incluida la creación de CD a partir de archivos de audio del equipo o copias de seguridad de datos importantes. Para obtener ayuda, abra Roxio Creator y pulse . La unidad de DVD instalada en los equipos Dell no admite el soporte HD-DVD. Para ver una lista de los formatos de medios compatibles, consulte el apartado "Cómo utilizar un soporte CD y DVD en blanco" en la página 62. Cómo copiar un CD o DVD NOTA: La mayoría de los DVD comerciales están protegidos por las leyes de copyright y no pueden copiarse con Roxio Creator Plus. 1 Haga clic en Inicio → Todos los programas→ Roxio Creator DE→ Proyectos→ Copiar. 2 En la ficha Copiar, haga clic en Copiar un disco. 3 Para copiar un CD o DVD: • Si tiene una unidad óptica, inserte el disco de origen en la unidad, asegúrese de que la configuración es la correcta y, a continuación, haga clic en el botón Copiar un disco para continuar. El ordenador lee el disco de origen y copia los datos en una carpeta temporal de la unidad de disco duro del equipo. Cuando se le solicite, inserte un disco en blanco en la unidad y haga clic en Aceptar. • Si dispone de dos unidades ópticas, seleccione la unidad en la que ha insertado el disco de origen y haga clic en el botón Copiar un disco para continuar. El equipo copiará los datos del disco de origen en el que está en blanco. Una vez que haya terminado de copiar el disco de origen, se expulsará automáticamente el que se ha creado.62 Uso de soportes multimedia Cómo utilizar un soporte CD y DVD en blanco Las unidades de escritura DVD pueden escribir tanto soportes de grabación CD como DVD. Utilice CD-R en blanco para grabar música o almacenar permanentemente archivos de datos. Después de crear un CD-R, no se puede volver a grabar en ese CD-R (consulte la documentación de Sonic para obtener más información). Utilice un CD-RW en blanco si desea borrar, regrabar o actualizar información de ese disco más adelante. Los soportes DVD+/-R en blanco se pueden utilizar para almacenar de forma permanente grandes cantidades de información. Después de crear un disco DVD+/-R, es posible que no pueda volver a grabar en él si se finalizó o cerró durante la fase final del proceso de creación del disco. Utilice soportes DVD+/-RW en blanco si desea borrar, regrabar o actualizar información de ese disco más adelante. Unidades de CD grabables Unidades de DVD grabables Tipo de medios Lectura Escritura Regrabable CD-R Sí Sí No CD-RW Sí Sí Sí Tipo de medios Lectura Escritura Regrabable CD-R Sí Sí No CD-RW Sí Sí Sí DVD+R Sí Sí No DVD-R Sí Sí No DVD+RW Sí Sí Sí DVD-RW Sí Sí Sí DVD+R DL Sí Sí No DVD-R DL Sí No NoUso de soportes multimedia 63 Sugerencias útiles • Utilice el Explorador de Microsoft® Windows® para arrastrar y soltar archivos en un CD-R o CD-RW únicamente después de haber iniciado Roxio Creator y haber abierto un proyecto de Creator. • No ocupe toda la capacidad de un CD-R o CD-RW en blanco al grabar; por ejemplo, no copie un archivo de 650 MB en un CD en blanco de 650 MB. La unidad de CD-RW necesita contar con 1 ó 2 MB del espacio en blanco para finalizar la grabación. • Utilice discos CD-R para grabar CD de música que desee reproducir en equipos estéreo normales. Los discos CD-RW no se reproducen en la mayoría de los equipos estéreo domésticos o para automóvil. • Los archivos MP3 de música sólo se pueden reproducir en reproductores de MP3 o en ordenadores en los que se haya instalado el software de MP3. • Utilice un CD-RW en blanco para practicar la grabación en CD hasta familiarizarse con las técnicas de grabación en CD. Si comete un error, puede borrar los datos del CD-RW e intentarlo de nuevo. También puede utilizar discos CD-RW en blanco para probar un proyecto de archivos de música antes de grabarlos de forma permanente en un CD-R en blanco. • No se puede crear un DVD de audio con Roxio Creator. • Los reproductores de DVD, de venta en establecimientos comerciales, utilizados en sistemas "Home Theater" pueden no admitir todos los formatos disponibles de DVD. Para obtener una lista de los formatos admitidos por su reproductor de DVD, consulte la documentación incluida con el mismo o póngase en contacto con el fabricante. • Consulte el sitio Web de Roxio en www.sonic.com.64 Uso de soportes multimedia Ajuste del volumen NOTA: Cuando los altavoces estén silenciados, no oirá la reproducción del medio. 1 Haga clic con el botón derecho en el icono de volumen del área de notificación. 2 Haga clic en Abrir meclador de volumen. 3 Haga clic y arrastre la barra para delizarla hacia arriba o hacia abajo para aumentar o disminuir el volumen. Para obtener más información sobre las opciones de control de volumen, haga clic en Ayuda en la ventana Mezclador de volumen. El Medidor de volumen muestra el nivel de volumen actual, incluido el silencio, en su equipo. Haga clic en el icono QuickSet del área de notificación y seleccione o cancele la selección de Desactivar el medidor de volumen en la pantalla o pulse los botones de control de volumen para habilitar o deshabilitar el Medidor de volumen en la pantalla. Ajuste de la imagen Si un mensaje de error le indica que la resolución y la intensidad de color actuales ocupan demasiada memoria y no permiten la reproducción del soporte, ajuste las propiedades de la pantalla: 1 Haga clic en Inicio →Panel de control→ Apariencia y personalización. 2 En Personalización haga clic en Ajustar resolución de pantalla. 3 En Configuración de pantalla, haga clic y arrastre la barra para reducir la configuración de resolución. 4 En Calidad del color del menú desplegable haga clic en Media (16 bit). 5 Haga clic en Aceptar. Uso de Dell MediaDirect™ Dell MediaDirect es un modo de reproducción multimedia de encendido instantáneo para soportes digitales. Pulse el botón Dell MediaDirect, situado en la cubierta con bisagra, para iniciar Dell MediaDirect. Cuando el equipo esté apagado o en estado de Suspensión, puede pulsar el botón Dell MediaDirect para iniciar el ordenador y ejecutar automáticamente la aplicación de Dell MediaDirect. Uso de soportes multimedia 65 NOTA: No se puede volver a instalar Dell MediaDirect si ha reformateado de manera voluntaria la unidad de disco duro. El software de instalación es imprescindible para volver a instalar Dell MediaDirect. Póngase en contacto con Dell para recibir asistencia técnica (consulte el apartado "Cómo ponerse en contacto con Dell" en la página 187). Para obtener más información sobre el uso de Dell MediaDirect, utilice el menú Ayuda de la aplicación Dell MediaDirect. Conexión del equipo a un dispositivo de audio o televisión NOTA: Es posible que no se proporcionen con el ordenador los cables de audio y vídeo para conectar el equipo a una televisión u otro dispositivo de audio. Los cables y el adaptador para televisión/audio digital se encuentran a la venta en Dell. El equipo dispone de un conector para S-vídeo y salida de TV que, junto con un cable estándar de S-vídeo, un cable adaptador de vídeo compuesto o un cable adaptador de vídeo componente (disponibles en Dell), le permiten conectar el ordenador a una televisión. 1 Botón Dell MediaDirect 166 Uso de soportes multimedia Su televisión tiene un conector de entrada de S-vídeo, un conector de entrada de vídeo compuesto o un conector de entrada de vídeo componente. Según el tipo de conector disponible en su televisión, puede utilizar un cable de S-vídeo, un cable de vídeo compuesto o un cabe de vídeo componente, de venta en establecimientos comerciales, para conectar su ordenador a la televisión. 1 Conector para S-vídeo y salida de TV 2 Conector de S-vídeo 1 Conector para S-vídeo y salida de TV 2 Adaptador de vídeo compuesto 3 Conector de audio digital S/PDIF 4 Conector de salida para vídeo compuesto 5 Conector de S-vídeo 1 2 5 4 3 1 2Uso de soportes multimedia 67 Si desea conectar el equipo a una televisión o dispositivo de audio, se recomienda conectar los cables de vídeo y audio al ordenador con una de las siguientes combinaciones: • S-vídeo y audio estándar • Vídeo compuesto y audio estándar • Salida de vídeo compuesto y audio estándar NOTA: Consulte los diagramas que encontrará al principio de cada subapartado para ayudarle a determinar qué método de conexión debe utilizar. Cuando acabe de conectar el vídeo y los cables de audio entre el ordenador y el TV, debe activar el equipo para trabajar con el TV. Consulte el apartado "Activación de la configuración de la pantalla de una televisión" en la página 81 para asegurarse de que el ordenador reconoce la televisión y funciona correctamente con ella. Además, si utiliza audio digital S/PDIF, consulte el apartado "Activación de audio digital S/PDIF" en la página 81. 1 Conector para S-vídeo y salida de TV 2 Adaptador de vídeo componente 3 Conector de audio digital S/PDIF 4 Conector de salida de vídeo componente Pb (rojo) 5 Conector de salida de vídeo componente Pb (azul) 6 Conector de salida de vídeo componente Y (verde) 5 4 3 1 2 668 Uso de soportes multimedia S-vídeo y audio estándar 1 Apague el equipo y la televisión o el dispositivo de audio que desea conectar. NOTA: Si su TV o dispositivo de audio admite S-vídeo pero no audio digital S/PDIF, puede conectar un cable de S-vídeo directamente al conector de salida de TV de S-vídeo del equipo (sin el cable del adaptador de TV/audio digital). 2 Enchufe un extremo del cable de S-vídeo en el conector de salida de S-vídeo del ordenador. 3 Conecte el otro extremo del cable de S-vídeo al conector de entrada de S-vídeo de la televisión. 1 Conector de audio 2 Conector para S-vídeo y salida de TV 1 Cable de S-vídeo estándar 2 Cable de audio estándar 1 2 1 2Uso de soportes multimedia 69 4 Conecte el extremo del conector del cable de audio al conector de auriculares del equipo. 5 Conecte los dos conectores RCA situados en el otro extremo del cable de audio a los conectores de entrada de audio de la televisión o de otro dispositivo de audio. 6 Encienda la televisión y los dispositivos de audio que haya conectado (si ha conectado alguno) y, a continuación, encienda el ordenador. 7 Consulte el apartado "Activación de la configuración de la pantalla de una televisión" en la página 81 para asegurarse de que el ordenador reconoce la televisión y funciona correctamente con ella. S-vídeo y audio digital S/PDIF 1 Conector para S-vídeo y salida de TV 2 Adaptador de vídeo compuesto 1 270 Uso de soportes multimedia 1 Apague el ordenador y la televisión o el dispositivo de audio que desea conectar. 2 Conecte el adaptador de vídeo compuesto al conector de S-vídeo y salida de TV del equipo. 3 Enchufe un extremo del cable de S-vídeo en el conector de salida de S-vídeo del adaptador de vídeo compuesto. 4 Enchufe el otro extremo del cable de S-vídeo al conector de entrada de S-vídeo de la televisión. 5 Enchufe un extremo del cable de audio digital S/PDIF al conector de audio digital en el cable del adaptador de vídeo compuesto. 1 Adaptador de vídeo compuesto 2 Cable de S-vídeo 3 Cable de audio digital S/PDIF 1 Adaptador de vídeo compuesto 2 Cable de S-vídeo 1 2 3 1 2Uso de soportes multimedia 71 6 Enchufe el otro extremo del cable de audio digital S/PDIF al conector de entrada de audio de la televisión o dispositivo de audio. 7 Encienda la televisión y los dispositivos de audio que haya conectado (si ha conectado alguno) y, a continuación, encienda el ordenador. 8 Consulte el apartado "Activación de la configuración de la pantalla de una televisión" en la página 81 para asegurarse de que el ordenador reconoce la televisión y funciona correctamente con ella. Vídeo compuesto y audio estándar 1 Adaptador de vídeo compuesto 2 Cable de audio digital S/PDIF 1 Conector de entrada de audio 2 Conector para S-vídeo y salida de TV 3 Adaptador de vídeo compuesto 1 2 2 1 372 Uso de soportes multimedia 1 Apague el equipo y la televisión o el dispositivo de audio que desea conectar. 2 Conecte el adaptador de vídeo compuesto al conector de S-vídeo y salida de TV del equipo. 3 Enchufe un extremo del cable de vídeo compuesto en el conector de salida de vídeo compuesto en el adaptador de vídeo compuesto. 4 Enchufe el otro extremo del cable de vídeo compuesto al conector de entrada de vídeo compuesto de la televisión. 5 Enchufe el extremo del conector del cable de audio al conector de auriculares del equipo. 1 Adaptador de vídeo compuesto 2 Cable de vídeo compuesto 3 Cable de audio estándar 1 Adaptador de vídeo compuesto 2 Cable de vídeo compuesto 1 2 3 2 1Uso de soportes multimedia 73 6 Conecte los dos conectores RCA situados en el otro extremo del cable de audio a los conectores de entrada de audio de la televisión o de otro dispositivo de audio. 7 Encienda la televisión y los dispositivos de audio que haya conectado (si ha conectado alguno) y, a continuación, encienda el ordenador. 8 Consulte el apartado "Activación de la configuración de la pantalla de una televisión" en la página 81 para asegurarse de que el ordenador reconoce la televisión y funciona correctamente con ella. Vídeo compuesto y audio digital S/PDIF 1 Conector para S-vídeo y salida de TV 2 Adaptador de vídeo compuesto 1 274 Uso de soportes multimedia 1 Apague el equipo y la televisión o el dispositivo de audio que desea conectar. 2 Conecte el adaptador de vídeo compuesto al conector de S-vídeo y salida de TV del equipo. 3 Enchufe un extremo del cable de vídeo compuesto en el conector de entrada de vídeo compuesto en el adaptador de vídeo compuesto. 4 Enchufe el otro extremo del cable de vídeo compuesto al conector de entrada de vídeo compuesto de la televisión. 5 Enchufe un extremo del cable de audio digital S/PDIF al conector de audio S/PDIF en el adaptador de vídeo compuesto. 1 Adaptador de vídeo compuesto 2 Cable de vídeo compuesto 3 Cable de audio estándar 1 Adaptador de vídeo compuesto 2 Cable de vídeo compuesto 1 2 3 2 1Uso de soportes multimedia 75 6 Conecte el otro extremo del cable de audio digital al conector de entrada S/PDIF de la televisión u otro dispositivo de audio. 7 Encienda la televisión y los dispositivos de audio que haya conectado (si ha conectado alguno) y, a continuación, encienda el ordenador. 8 Consulte el apartado "Activación de la configuración de la pantalla de una televisión" en la página 81 para asegurarse de que el ordenador reconoce la televisión y funciona correctamente con ella. Vídeo componente y audio estándar 1 Adaptador de vídeo compuesto 2 Cable de audio digital S/PDIF 1 Conector para S-vídeo y salida de TV 2 Adaptador de vídeo componente 1 2 1 276 Uso de soportes multimedia 1 Apague el equipo y la televisión o el dispositivo de audio que desea conectar. 2 Conecte el adaptador de vídeo componente al conector de S-vídeo y salida de TV del ordenador. 3 Enchufe los tres extremos del cable de vídeo componente en los conectores de salida de vídeo componente en el adaptador de vídeo componente. Asegúrese de que los cables de color rojo, verde y azul coinciden con los puertos del adaptador correspondientes. 1 Adaptador de vídeo componente 2 Cable de vídeo componente 3 Cable de audio estándar 1 2 3Uso de soportes multimedia 77 4 Enchufe los tres conectores del otro extremo del cable de vídeo componente a los conectores de entrada de vídeo componente de la televisión. Asegúrese de que los cables de color rojo, verde y azul coinciden con los colores de los conectores de entrada de la televisión. 5 Enchufe el extremo del conector del cable de audio al conector de auriculares del equipo. 6 Conecte los dos conectores RCA situados en el otro extremo del cable de audio a los conectores de entrada de audio de la televisión o dispositivo de audio. 7 Encienda la televisión y los dispositivos de audio que haya conectado (si ha conectado alguno) y, a continuación, encienda el ordenador. 8 Consulte el apartado "Activación de la configuración de la pantalla de una televisión" en la página 81 para asegurarse de que el ordenador reconoce la televisión y funciona correctamente con ella. 1 Adaptador de vídeo componente 2 Cable de vídeo componente 1 278 Uso de soportes multimedia Vídeo componente y audio digital S/PDIF 1 Conector para S-vídeo y salida de TV 2 Adaptador de vídeo componente 1 2Uso de soportes multimedia 79 1 Apague el equipo y la televisión o el dispositivo de audio que desea conectar. 2 Conecte el adaptador de vídeo componente al conector de S-vídeo y salida de TV del ordenador. 3 Enchufe los tres extremos del cable de vídeo componente en los conectores de salida de vídeo componente en el adaptador de vídeo componente. Asegúrese de que los cables de color rojo, verde y azul coinciden con los puertos del adaptador correspondientes. 1 Adaptador de vídeo componente 2 Cable de vídeo componente 3 Cable de audio estándar 1 2 380 Uso de soportes multimedia 4 Enchufe los tres conectores del otro extremo del cable de vídeo componente a los conectores de entrada de vídeo componente de la televisión. Asegúrese de que los cables de color rojo, verde y azul coinciden con los colores de los conectores de entrada de la televisión. 5 Enchufe un extremo del cable de audio digital S/PDIF al conector de audio S/PDIF en el adaptador de vídeo componente. 6 Conecte el otro extremo del cable de audio digital al conector de entrada S/PDIF de la televisión u otro dispositivo de audio. 7 Encienda la televisión y los dispositivos de audio que haya conectado (si ha conectado alguno) y, a continuación, encienda el ordenador. 8 Consulte el apartado "Activación de la configuración de la pantalla de una televisión" en la página 81 para asegurarse de que el ordenador reconoce la televisión y funciona correctamente con ella. 1 Adaptador de vídeo componente 2 Conectores de salida de vídeo componente 3 Cable de vídeo componente 1 Adaptador de vídeo componente 2 Cable de audio digital S/PDIF 1 3 2 2 1Uso de soportes multimedia 81 Activación de audio digital S/PDIF 1 Haga doble clic en el icono del altavoz del área de notificación de Windows. 2 Haga clic en el menú Opciones y, a continuación, en Controles avanzados. 3 Haga clic en Advanced (Opciones avanzadas). 4 Haga clic en Interfaz S/PDIF. 5 Haga clic en Cerrar. 6 Haga clic en Aceptar. Activación de la configuración de la pantalla de una televisión NOTA: Para asegurar que las opciones de la pantalla aparecen correctamente, conecte la televisión al equipo antes de activar la configuración de la pantalla. 1 Haga clic en Inicio , Panel de control y, a continuación, en Apariencia y personalización. 2 En Personalización haga clic en Ajustar resolución de pantalla. Aparecerá la ventana Propiedades de pantalla. 3 Haga clic en Opciones avanzadas. 4 Haga clic en la ficha de su tarjeta de vídeo. NOTA: Para conocer el tipo de tarjeta de vídeo instalada en el equipo, consulte Windows Help and Support (Centro de ayuda y soporte técnico de Windows). Para acceder al Centro de ayuda y soporte técnico de Windows, haga clic en Inicio → Ayuda y soporte técnico. En Pick a Task (Elija una tarea), haga clic en Use Tools to view your computer information and diagnose problems (Usar herramientas para visualizar la información de su ordenador y problemas de diagnóstico). A continuación, en My Computer Information (Información de mi ordenador), seleccione Hardware. 5 En la sección de dispositivos de la pantalla, seleccione la opción adecuada para utilizar una sola pantalla o varias, asegurándose de que la configuración de la pantalla sea correcta para su selección.82 Uso de soportes multimediaUso de ExpressCards 83 Uso de ExpressCards Las ExpressCards proporcionan memoria adicional, comunicaciones por cable e inalámbricas y funciones multimedia y de seguridad. Por ejemplo, puede añadir una ExpressCard para disponer de la conectividad de una red de área local inalámbrica (WWAN) en el equipo. Las ExpressCards admiten dos factores de forma: • ExpressCard/34 (34 mm de ancho) • ExpressCard/54 (54 mm de ancho en forma de L con un conector de 34 mm) La tarjeta de 34 mm se adapta tanto a las ranuras para tarjetas de 34 mm como las de 54 mm. La de 54 mm solo se adapta a la ranura de 54 mm. Consulte el apartado "Especificaciones" en la página 189 para obtener información sobre las ExpressCards admitidas. NOTA: Una ExpressCard no es un dispositivo de arranque. 1 ExpressCard/34 2 ExpressCard/54 1 284 Uso de ExpressCards Paneles protectores de las ExpressCard El equipo se envía con un panel protector de plástico instalado en la ranura para tarjetas ExpressCard. Los paneles protectores protegen las ranuras no utilizadas del polvo y otras partículas. Guarde el panel protector de la ExpressCard para utilizarlo cuando no haya instalada una ExpressCard en la ranura; los paneles protectores de otros equipos pueden no ajustarse al suyo. Retire el panel protector antes de instalar una ExpressCard. Para retirar el panel protector, consulte el apartado "Extracción de una ExpressCard o de un panel protector" en la página 85. Instalación de una ExpressCard Se puede instalar una ExpressCard mientras el equipo se encuentra en funcionamiento. El ordenador la detectará automáticamente. Las tarjetas ExpressCard suelen estar marcadas con un símbolo (como puede ser un triángulo o una flecha) o con una etiqueta para indicar el extremo que debe insertarse en la ranura. Las tarjetas están marcadas para impedir que se inserten de forma incorrecta. Si la orientación de la tarjeta no está clara, consulte la documentación incluida con ésta. PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de esta sección, siga las instrucciones de seguridad incluidas en la Guía de información del producto. Para instalar una ExpressCard: 1 Sujete la tarjeta con la parte superior orientada hacia arriba. 2 Inserte la tarjeta en la ranura hasta que esté completamente asentada en el conector. Si encuentra demasiada resistencia, no la fuerce. Compruebe la orientación de la tarjeta e inténtelo de nuevo.Uso de ExpressCards 85 El equipo reconoce la ExpressCard y carga el controlador del dispositivo adecuado de forma automática. Si el programa de configuración le pide que cargue los controladores del fabricante, utilice el soporte incluido con ExpressCard. Extracción de una ExpressCard o de un panel protector PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de esta sección, siga las instrucciones de seguridad incluidas en la Guía de información del producto. Presione el seguro y retire la tarjeta o el protector. Con algunos pasadores deberá presionarlos dos veces, una vez para soltar el pasador y la otra para extraer la tarjeta. Reserve un panel protector para utilizarlo cuando no haya ninguna ExpressCard instalada en una ranura. Los paneles protectores protegen las ranuras no utilizadas del polvo y otras partículas. 1 Ranura 2 ExpressCard 1 286 Uso de ExpressCards 1 Botón de apertura 1Uso del lector de tarjetas de memoria 87 Uso del lector de tarjetas de memoria El lector de tarjetas de memoria proporciona una manera rápida y cómoda de ver y compartir fotos digitales, música y vídeos almacenados en una tarjeta de memoria. NOTA: Una tarjeta de memoria no es un dispositivo de arranque. El lector de tarjetas de memoria 8 en 1 puede leer las siguientes tarjetas de memoria: • Secure Digital (SD) • SDIO • Tarjeta MultiMedia (MMC) • Memory Stick • Memory Stick PRO • Tarjeta xD-Picture • SD de alta velocidad • SD de alta densidad Paneles protectores de tarjetas de memoria El equipo se envía con un panel protector de plástico instalado en el lector de tarjetas de memoria. Los paneles protectores protegen las ranuras no utilizadas del polvo y otras partículas. Guarde el panel protector para utilizarlo cuando no haya ninguna tarjeta de memoria instalada en la ranura; puede que los paneles protectores de otros equipos no sirvan para el suyo. Retire el panel protector antes de instalar la tarjeta de memoria de medios. Para retirar el panel protector, consulte el apartado "Cómo retirar una tarjeta de memoria o panel protector" en la página 89.88 Uso del lector de tarjetas de memoria Instalación de una tarjeta de memoria Puede instalar una tarjeta de memoria multimedia en el equipo mientras éste funciona. El ordenador la detectará automáticamente. Habitualmente, las tarjetas de memoria están marcadas con un símbolo (como, por ejemplo, un triángulo o una flecha) o una etiqueta para indicar qué extremo debe insertarse en la ranura. Las tarjetas están marcadas para impedir que se inserten de forma incorrecta. Si la orientación de la tarjeta no está clara, consulte la documentación incluida con ésta. PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de esta sección, siga las instrucciones de seguridad incluidas en la Guía de información del producto. Para instalar una tarjeta de memoria: 1 Sujete la tarjeta con la parte superior orientada hacia arriba. 2 Inserte la tarjeta en la ranura hasta que esté completamente asentada en el conector. Si encuentra demasiada resistencia, no la fuerce. Compruebe la orientación de la tarjeta e inténtelo de nuevo. El equipo reconoce la tarjeta de memoria y carga automáticamente el controlador de dispositivo adecuado. Si el programa de configuración le pide que cargue los controladores del fabricante, utilice el soporte incluido con la tarjeta de memoria. Uso del lector de tarjetas de memoria 89 Cómo retirar una tarjeta de memoria o panel protector PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de esta sección, siga las instrucciones de seguridad incluidas en la Guía de información del producto. AVISO: Utilice la utilidad de configuración de la tarjeta de memoria (haga clic en el icono del área de notificación) para seleccionar una tarjeta y detener su funcionamiento antes de retirarla del equipo. Si no hace que la tarjeta deje de funcionar con la utilidad de configuración, podría perder datos. Presione la tarjeta en la ranura para sacarla del lector de tarjetas. Cuando haya quedado parcialmente expulsada, extráigala. 90 Uso del lector de tarjetas de memoriaConfiguración y uso de redes 91 Configuración y uso de redes Configurar una red informática ofrece conectividad entre su equipo e Internet, otro equipo o una red. Por ejemplo, con una red configurada en su casa o una pequeña oficina, podrá imprimir en una impresora común, acceder a unidades y archivos de otro equipo, navegar por otras redes o acceder a Internet. Puede configurar una Red de área local (LAN) usando una red o cable de módem de banda ancha o configurar una LAN inalámbrica (WLAN). El sistema operativo Microsoft® Windows Vista™ dispone de un asistente que le servirá de guía durante el proceso de poner en red los equipos. Para obtener más información acerca de las Redes, acceda al Centro de ayuda y soporte técnico de Windows (haga clic en Inicio y, a continuación, haga clic en Ayuda y soporte técnico). Conexión a una red o cable de módem de banda ancha Antes de conectar el ordenador a una red, el ordenador debe tener un adaptador de red instalado y un cable de red conectado. 1 Conecte el cable de red al conector del adaptador de red, que está situado en la parte posterior del equipo. NOTA: Inserte el conector del cable hasta que encaje en su sitio y, a continuación, tire de él suavemente para comprobar que está bien conectado. 2 Conecte el otro extremo del cable de red a un dispositivo de conexión de red, como un conector de red de pared. NOTA: No utilice un cable de red con un conector telefónico de la pared.92 Configuración y uso de redes Configuración de una red 1 Haga clic en Inicio y, a continución, en Conectarse a. 2 Haga clic en Configurar una conexión o red. 3 Seleccione una opción en Elija una opción de conexión. 4 Haga clic en Siguiente y siga las instrucciones del asistente. Red de área local inalámbrica Una red de área local inalámbrica (WLAN) está formada por una serie de equipos interconectados que se comunican entre sí a través de ondas aéreas, en lugar de mediante un cable de red conectado a cada ordenador. En una WLAN, un dispositivo de comunicaciones de radio denominado punto de acceso o enrutador inalámbrico conecta los ordenadores en red y proporciona acceso a Internet o a la red. El de acceso o enrutador inalámbrico y la tarjeta de red inalámbrica del equipo se comunican emitiendo datos con sus antenas a través de las ondas aéreas.Configuración y uso de redes 93 Qué necesita para establecer una conexión WLAN Antes de poder configurar una WLAN, necesita los siguientes elementos: • Acceso a Internet de alta velocidad (banda ancha) (como por cable o ADSL) • Un módem de banda ancha conectado y en funcionamiento • Un enrutador inalámbrico o punto de acceso • Una tarjeta de red inalámbrica en cada equipo que desee conectar a la WLAN • Un cable de red con un conector de red (RJ-45) Comprobación de la tarjeta de red inalámbrica En función de las selecciones realizadas al adquirir el equipo, éste tendrá una variedad distinta de configuraciones. Para confirmar que el suyo tiene una tarjeta de red inalámbrica y para determinar el tipo de tarjeta: • Use el Administrador de dispositivos • Compruebe la confirmación del pedido de su equipo Administrador de dispositivos 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y, a continuación, en Panel de control. 2 Haga clic en Vista clásica en el menú de la parte izquierda del Panel de control. 3 Haga doble clic en Administrador de dispositivos. NOTA: Es posible que se abra la ventana Control de cuentas de usuario. 4 Haga clic en Continuar en la ventana Control de cuentas de usuario si se abre. 5 Haga clic en + al lado de Adaptadores de red para mostrar la utilidad que administra la tarjeta de red inalámbrica. Si no aparece un adaptador de red, es posible que no disponga de una tarjeta de red inalámbrica. Si aparece, es que tiene una tarjeta de red inalámbrica. Para visualizar información detallada acerca de la tarjeta de red inalámbrica: 1 Haga clic con el botón derecho en el nombre del adaptador de red. 2 Haga clic en Propiedades.94 Configuración y uso de redes Confirmación de orden para su equipo La confirmación del pedido recibida al encargar el equipo enumera el hardware y el software entregado. Configurar una nueva WLAN usando un enrutador inalámbrico y un módem de banda ancha 1 Póngase en contacto con el proveedor de servicios de Internet (ISP) para obtener información específica acerca de los requisitos de la conexión del módem de banda ancha. 2 Asegúrese de que dispone de acceso alámbrico a Internet mediante el módem de banda ancha antes de intentar configurar una conexión inalámbrica a Internet (consulte el apartado "Conexión a una red o cable de módem de banda ancha" en la página 91). 3 Instale el software requerido por su enrutador inalámbrico. El enrutador puede incluir un soporte de instalación. El soporte de instalación contiene normalmente información sobre la instalación y la solución de problemas. Instale el software requerido conforme a las instrucciones entregadas por el fabricante del enrutador. 4 Apague el equipo y todos los equipos cercanos habilitados para la conexión inalámbrica a través del botón de inicio de Windows Vista, . 5 Desconecte el cable de alimentación del módem de banda ancha del enchufe eléctrico. 6 Desconecte el cable de de red del equipo y del módem. 7 Desconecte el cable del adaptador de CA del enrutador inalámbrico para asegurar que no exista ninguna fuente de alimentación conectada al mismo. NOTA: Espere como mínimo 5 minutos después de desconectar el módem de banda ancha antes de continuar con la configuración de red. 8 Inserte un cable de red en el conector de red (RJ-45) del módem de banda ancha sin alimentación eléctrica. 9 Conecte el otro extremo del cable de red en el conector de red (RJ-45) de Internet del enrutador inalámbrico sin alimentación eléctrica. 10 Asegúrese de que ningún cable de red o cable USB, excepto el cable de red que conecta el módem y el enrutador inalámbrico, está conectado al módem de banda ancha.Configuración y uso de redes 95 NOTA: Reinicie el equipo inalámbrico en el orden descrito a continuación para evitar que se produzca un posible fallo de conexión. 11 Encienda únicamente el módem de banda ancha y espere al menos 2 minutos para que se estabilice. Después de 2 minutos, siga en el paso 12. 12 Encienda el enrutador inalámbrico y espere al menos 2 minutos para que se estabilice. Después de 2minutos, siga en el paso 13. 13 Arranque el equipo y espere a que finalice el proceso de inicio. 14 Consulte la documentación incluida con el enrutador inalámbrico para llevar a cabo las siguientes acciones y configurar así el enrutador inalámbrico: • Establezca la comunicación entre el equipo y el enrutador inalámbrico. • Configure el enrutador inalámbrico para comunicarse con el enrutador de banda ancha. • Averigüe el nombre del servidor de emisión del enrutador inalámbrico. El término técnico para el nombre del nombre del servidor de emisión del enrutador inalámbrico es Identificador de conjunto de servicio (SSID) o nombre de red. 15 Si es necesario, configure la tarjeta de red inalámbrica para conectarse a la red inalámbrica (consulte el apartado "Conexión a una WLAN" en la página 95). Conexión a una WLAN NOTA: Antes de establecer la conexión a una WLAN, asegúrese de que ha seguido fielmente las instrucciones de "Red de área local inalámbrica" en la página 92. NOTA: Las siguientes instrucciones sobre el sistema de red no son aplicables a las tarjetas internas con tecnología inalámbrica Bluetooth® ni a los productos de telefonía móvil. Esta sección proporciona los procedimientos generales para realizar la conexión a una red mediante tecnología inalámbrica. Los nombres específicos de red y los detalles de configuración pueden variar. Consulte el apartado "Red de área local inalámbrica" en la página 92 para obtener más información acerca de cómo prepararse para la conexión del equipo a una WLAN. La tarjeta de red inalámbrica requiere un software y unos controladores específicos para conectarse a una red. El software ya está instalado. 96 Configuración y uso de redes NOTA: Si el software se extrae o se daña, siga las instrucciones que se incluyen en la documentación del usuario de su tarjeta de red inalámbrica. Compruebe el tipo de tarjeta de red inalámbrica instalada en el ordenador y, a continuación, busque ese nombre en el sitio Web de soporte técnico de Dell™ en support.dell.com. Para obtener más información acerca de tipo de tarjeta de red inalámbrica instalada en el equipo, consulte el apartado "Comprobación de la tarjeta de red inalámbrica" en la página 93. Al encender el ordenador y cuando se detecta en el área una red (para la que el ordenador no está configurado), aparece una ventana emergente cerca del icono de red en el área de notificación de Windows. Para conectarse a la red: 1 Haga clic en Inicio y, a continuación, en Red. 2 Haga clic en Network and Sharing (Red y uso compartido) en la barra de navegación de la parte superior de la carpeta Red. 3 Haga clic en Connect to a network (Conectarse a una red) en Tareas. 4 Seleccione su red de la lista y haga clic en Conectar. Una vez configurado el equipo para una red inalámbrica que haya seleccionado, otro mensaje emergente le notificará que el equipo está conectado a dicha red. En lo sucesivo, siempre que se conecte al equipo dentro del área de alcance de la red inalámbrica seleccionada, el mismo mensaje emergente le informará acerca de la conexión de red inalámbrica. NOTA: Si selecciona una red segura, debe especificar una clave WEP o WPA cuando se le pida. La configuración de seguridad de la red es exclusiva de su red. Dell no puede proporcionar esta información. NOTA: Es posible que el equipo tarde hasta un minuto en conectarse a la red. Seguimiento del estado de la tarjeta de red inalámbrica mediante Dell QuickSet El indicador de actividad inalámbrica le ofrece una manera sencilla de supervisar el estado de los dispositivos inalámbricos del equipo. Para activar o desactivar el indicador de actividad inalámbrica, haga clic en el icono QuickSet de la barra de tareas y seleccione Hotkey Popups. Si no está habilitado Indicador de actividad inalámbrica apagado, el indicador está activado. Si está habilitado Indicador de actividad inalámbrica apagado, el indicador está desactivado.Configuración y uso de redes 97 El indicador de actividad inalámbrica muestra si los dispositivos inalámbricos integrados del equipo están activados o desactivados. Cuando encienda o apague la función de conexión a la red inalámbrica, el indicador de actividad inalámbrica cambia para mostrar el estado. Para obtener más información acerca del indicador de actividad inalámbrica, haga clic en el icono QuickSet de la barra de tareas y seleccione Ayuda. Banda ancha móvil (o Red inalámbrica de área amplia) Una red de banda ancha móvil, también conocida como Red Inalámbrica de Área Amplia (WWAM), es una red inalámbrica digital de alta velocidad que ofrece acceso a Internet en una zona geográfica mucho más amplia que una Red Inalámbrica de Área Local (WLAN), que normalmente cubre de 30 a 300 metros. El equipo puede mantener el acceso a la red de banda ancha móvil siempre que se encuentre en una zona de cobertura. Póngase en contacto con su proveedor de servicios para obtener información sobre la cobertura de las redes inalámbricas digitales de alta velocidad. NOTA: Incluso aunque pueda realizar una llamada con el teléfono móvil en un área geográfica específica, esto no quiere decir necesariamente que se encuentre dentro de una zona de cobertura de datos por telefonía móvil. Qué necesita para establecer una conexión a la red de banda ancha móvil NOTA: En función del equipo, puede utilizarse una ExpressCard o una minitarjeta de banda ancha móvil, pero no ambas, para establecer una conexión a la red de banda ancha móvil Para configurar una conexión a la red de banda ancha móvil, necesita: • Una ExpressCard o una minitarjeta de banda ancha móvil (en función de la configuración del equipo) NOTA: Para obtener instrucciones de uso de ExpressCards, consulte el apartado "Uso de ExpressCards" en la página 83. • ExpressCard de banda ancha móvil activada o Módulo de identificación de suscriptor (SIM) activado para el proveedor de servicio98 Configuración y uso de redes • La utilidad de la tarjeta Dell de banda ancha móvil (ya instalada en el equipo si adquirió la tarjeta al mismo tiempo que éste, o en el soporte incluido con la tarjeta si la adquirió por separado) Si la utilidad está estropeada o se ha borrado del equipo, consulte la guía del usuario de la Utilidad de la tarjeta de banda ancha móvil de Dell en el Centro de ayuda y soporte técnico de Windows (haga clic en Inicio y, a continuación, en Ayuda y soporte técnico) o el soporte que se incluye con la tarjeta si la ha comprado aparte del equipo. Comprobación de la tarjeta de banda ancha móvil de Dell En función de las selecciones realizadas al adquirir el equipo, éste tendrá una variedad distinta de configuraciones. Para determinar la configuración del equipo, consulte uno de los siguientes apartados: • La confirmación del pedido • Ayuda y soporte técnico de Windows Para comprobar la tarjeta de banda ancha móvil en el Centro de ayuda y soporte técnico de Windows: 1 Haga clic en Inicio → Ayuda y soporte técnico→ Usar herramientas para visualizar la información de su equipo y problemas de diagnóstico. 2 En Herramientas, haga clic en Información de mi PC→ Obtener más información acerca del hardware instalado en este ordenador. En la pantalla Información de Mi PC - Hardware, puede ver el tipo de tarjeta de banda ancha móvil instalada en el equipo, además de otros componentes de hardware. NOTA: La tarjeta aparece en Módems.Configuración y uso de redes 99 Conexión a una red de banda ancha móvil NOTA: Estas instrucciones sólo son aplicables a ExpressCards o minitarjetas de banda ancha móvil. No se aplican a las tarjetas internas con tecnología inalámbrica. NOTA: Antes de conectarse a Internet, debe activar el servicio de banda ancha móvil a través del proveedor de servicio de telefonía móvil. Consulte la Guía del usuario, disponible a través del Centro de ayuda y soporte técnico de Windows (haga clic en Inicio y, a continuación, haga clic en Ayuda y soporte técnico), para obtener instrucciones y más información acerca del uso de la utilidad de tarjeta de banda ancha móvil de Dell. La Guía del usuario también está disponible en la página Web de Dell en support.dell.com y en el soporte incluido con su tarjeta de banda ancha móvil si la adquirió por separado. Utilice la utilidad de tarjeta de banda ancha móvil de Dell para establecer y administrar una conexión de red de banda ancha móvil a Internet: 1 Haga clic en el icono de la utilidad de tarjeta de banda ancha móvil de Dell en el área de notificación de Windows para ejecutar la utilidad. 2 Haga clic en Conexión. NOTA: El botón Conexión cambia al botón Desconexión. 3 Siga las instrucciones en la pantalla para administrar la conexión de red con la utilidad. o bien 1 Haga clic en Inicio → Todos los programas→ Inalámbrica de Dell. 2 Haga clic en Banda ancha inalámbrica de Dell y siga las instrucciones de la pantalla. Activación/desactivación de la tarjeta de banda ancha móvil de Dell NOTA: Si no puede conectarse a una red de banda ancha móvil, asegúrese de tener todos los componentes necesarios para establecer este tipo de conexión (consulte el apartado "Qué necesita para establecer una conexión a la red de banda ancha móvil" en la página 97) y, a continuación, compruebe que la tarjeta de banda ancha móvil está activada verificando la configuración del indicador de actividad inalámbrica. Puede activar o desactivar la tarjeta de banda ancha móvil usando el conmutador inalámbrico del equipo. 100 Configuración y uso de redes Puede encender y apagar los dispositivos inalámbricos del equipo con el indicador de actividad inalámbrica situado en el lado izquierdo del ordenador (consulte el apartado "Vista lateral izquierda" en la página 27). Si el conmutador está en la posición on, muévalo a la posición off para desactivar el conmutador y la tarjeta de banda ancha móvil. Si el conmutador está en la posición off, muévalo a la posición on para activar el conmutador y la tarjeta de banda ancha móvil de Dell. Para obtener más información sobre el uso del conmutador inalámbrico, consulte el apartado "Conmutador inalámbrico" en la página 27. Para supervisar el estado de un dispositivo inalámbrico, consulte el apartado "Seguimiento del estado de la tarjeta de red inalámbrica mediante Dell QuickSet" en la página 96. Localizador de redes Dell Wi-Fi Catcher™ El indicador de actividad inalámbrica del equipo Dell utiliza el localizador de redes Dell Wi-Fi Catcher para buscar de un modo específico las redes inalámbricas que se encuentren próximas. Para buscar una red inalámbrica, deslice y mantenga el conmutador en la posición "momentáneo" durante unos segundos (consulte el apartado "Conmutador inalámbrico" en la página 27) El localizador de redes Wi-Fi Catcher funciona independientemente de si el equipo está encendido o apagado, o en el estado de Suspensión, siempre y cuando esté configurado a través de Dell QuickSet o el BIOS (programa de configuración del sistema) para controlar las conexiones de red WiFi. Al estar desactivado y sin configurar el localizador de redes Wi-Fi Catcher cuando se le envía el equipo, deberá en primer lugar usar Dell QuickSet para habilitar y configurar el conmutador y poder controlar las conexión de red WiFi. Para obtener más información sobre el localizador de redes Wi-Fi Catcher y habilitar sus funciones a través de Dell QuickSet, haga clic con el botón derecho en el icono QuickSet del área de notificación y seleccione Ayuda.Seguridad de su equipo 101 Seguridad de su equipo Cable de seguridad NOTA: El equipo no se entrega con un cable de seguridad. Un cable de seguridad es un dispositivo antirrobo de venta en establecimientos comerciales. Para asegurar el equipo, utilice la ranura para el cable de seguridad de su ordenador Dell. Para obtener más información, consulte las instrucciones incluidas con el dispositivo. AVISO: Antes de adquirir un dispositivo antirrobo, asegúrese de que encajará en la ranura del cable de seguridad del equipo.102 Seguridad de su equipo Contraseñas Las contraseñas impiden el acceso no autorizado a su equipo. Después de iniciar el equipo, asigne una contraseña primaria ante la petición del sistema. Si no introduce una contraseña en 2 minutos, el equipo regresará a su estado operativo anterior. Cuando utilice contraseñas, siga las siguientes instrucciones: • Seleccione una contraseña que pueda recordar, pero que no sea fácil de adivinar. Por ejemplo, no utilice como contraseñas los nombres de los miembros de su familia o mascotas. • Se recomienda encarecidamente no anotar sus contraseñas; memorícelas. Sin embargo, si decide anotarla, asegúrese de guardarla en un lugar seguro. • No comunique su contraseña a otras personas. • Asegúrese de que nadie le observa antes de introducir su contraseña. AVISO: Las funciones de contraseña proporcionan un alto nivel de seguridad para los datos almacenados en el equipo o en la unidad de disco duro. Sin embargo, no son infalibles. Si necesita más seguridad, busque y utilice formas adicionales de protección, como programas de cifrado de datos. Usa la opción de Cuentas de usuario en el Panel de control en el sistema operativo Microsoft® Windows® para crear cuentas de usuario o cambiar contraseñas. Una vez que ha creado una contraseña de usuario, deberá ingresarla cada vez que quiera desbloquear su equipo. Si no introduce una contraseña en 2 minutos, el equipo regresará a su estado operativo anterior. Para más información, vea su documentación de Windows. Si olvida alguna de las contraseñas, póngase en contacto con Dell (consulte el apartado "Cómo ponerse en contacto con Dell" en la página 187). Por su propia protección, el personal de soporte técnico de Dell le pedirá alguna prueba de su identidad para asegurarse de que sólo una persona autorizada pueda utilizar el equipo.Seguridad de su equipo 103 En caso de pérdida o robo del equipo • Póngase en contacto con cualquier comisaría para informar de la pérdida o el robo del equipo. Incluya el número de la etiqueta de servicio en su descripción del aparato. Pida que se asigne un número de caso y anótelo junto con el nombre, dirección y el número de teléfono de la comisaría de policía encargada del caso. Si es posible, averigüe el nombre del oficial de investigación. NOTA: Si sabe en qué lugar ha perdido o le han robado el equipo, póngase en contacto con la comisaría de dicha zona. Si desconoce el lugar concreto, póngase en contacto con la comisaría de policía más cerca a su domicilio. • Si el equipo pertenece a una empresa, indique cuál es la compañía de seguros de dicha empresa. • Póngase en contacto con el servicio de asistencia al cliente de Dell para informar de la pérdida del equipo. Proporcione el número de la etiqueta de servicio, el número del caso y el nombre, la dirección y el número de teléfono de la comisaría de policía donde denunció la pérdida o robo. Si es posible, indique el nombre del oficial de investigación. El representante de atención al cliente de Dell registrará su informe bajo el número de la etiqueta de servicio y lo marcará como un ordenador perdido o robado. Si alguien llama a Dell para obtener asistencia técnica y proporciona el número de su etiqueta de servicio, el equipo será identificado automáticamente como un ordenador perdido o robado. El representante intentará obtener el número de teléfono y la dirección del interlocutor. A continuación, Dell se pondrá en contacto con la comisaría de policía donde usted denunció la pérdida o el robo del equipo.104 Seguridad de su equipoSolución de problemas 105 Solución de problemas Dell Technical Update Service El Dell Technical Update Service (Servicio de actualizaciones técnicas de Dell) ofrece una notificación interactiva por correo electrónico de las actualizaciones de software y hardware de su equipo. El servicio es gratuito y se puede personalizar el contenido, el formato y la frecuencia con que se reciben las notificaciones. Para inscribirse en el Dell Technical Update Service vaya a support.dell.com/technicalupdate. Dell Diagnostics PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de esta sección, siga las instrucciones de seguridad incluidas en la Guía de información del producto. Cuándo usar los Dell Diagnostics Si tiene problemas con el equipo, realice las pruebas del apartado "Bloqueos y problemas con el software" en la página 124 y ejecute Dell Diagnostics antes de ponerse en contacto con Dell para solicitar asistencia técnica. Se recomienda imprimir estos procesos antes de empezar. NOTA: Los Dell Diagnostics (Diagnósticos Dell) funcionan sólo en equipos Dell. Introduzca la configuración del sistema, revise la información de configuración del equipo y asegúrese de que el dispositivo que desea probar aparece en la configuración del sistema y está activo (consulte el apartado "Uso del programa Configuración del sistema" en la página 197). Inicie los Dell Diagnostics (Diagnósticos de Dell) desde el disco duro o desde el soporte Drivers and Utilities (Controladores y utilidades) (consulte el apartado "Soporte Drivers and Utilities (Controladores y utilidades)" en la página 13).106 Solución de problemas Iniciar Dell Diagnostics desde la unidad de disco duro Los Dell Diagnostics están situados en una partición oculta para la utilidad de diagnóstico (Diagnostic) de la unidad de disco duro. NOTA: Si el equipo no muestra ninguna imagen en la pantalla, póngase en contacto con Dell (consulte el apartado "Cómo ponerse en contacto con Dell" en la página 187). NOTA: Si el equipo está conectado (acoplado) a un dispositivo de acoplamiento, desacóplelo. Si desea más instrucciones, consulte la documentación incluida con el dispositivo de acoplamiento. 1 Asegúrese de que el equipo está conectado a una toma eléctrica que se sepa funciona correctamente. 2 Encienda (o reinicie) el equipo. 3 Inicie los Dell Diagnostics de una de las dos formas siguientes: a Cuando aparezca el logotipo de DELL™, pulse inmediatamente. Seleccione Diagnostics del menú de inicio y, a continuación, pulse . NOTA: Si espera demasiado y aparece el logotipo del sistema operativo, siga esperando hasta que aparezca el escritorio de Microsoft® Windows®; a continuación, apague el equipo e inténtelo de nuevo. NOTA: Antes de intentar la opción B, es preciso apagar por completo el equipo. b Mantenga pulsada la tecla mientras se enciende el equipo. NOTA: Si aparece un mensaje indicando que no se ha encontrado ninguna partición para la utilidad de diagnóstico, ejecute Dell Diagnostics desde el soporte Drivers and Utilities. El equipo ejecutará la evaluación del sistema previa al inicio, una serie de pruebas iniciales de la tarjeta del sistema, el teclado, la unidad de disco duro y la pantalla. • Durante la evaluación, responda a las preguntas que puedan formularse. • Si se detecta un fallo, el equipo se detiene y emite pitidos. Para detener la evaluación y reiniciar el equipo, pulse ; para continuar con la siguiente prueba, pulse ; para volver a probar el componente que falló, pulse . • Si se detectan fallas durante la evaluación del sistema antes de la inicialización, anote los códigos de error y póngase en contacto con Dell.Solución de problemas 107 Si la evaluación del sistema previa al inicio se realiza correctamente, recibirá el mensaje Booting Dell Diagnostic Utility Partition. Press any key to continue (Iniciando la partición de la utilidad Dell Diagnostics. Pulse cualquier tecla para continuar). 4 Pulse cualquier tecla para iniciar los Dell Diagnostics desde la partición para la utilidad de diagnóstico del disco duro. Iniciar Dell Diagnostics desde el soporte Drivers and Utilities 1 Inserte el soporte Drivers and Utilities (Controladores y utilidades). 2 Apague y reinicie el equipo. 3 Cuando aparezca el logotipo de DELL, pulse inmediatamente. NOTA: Si se mantiene pulsada una tecla del teclado durante largos períodos de tiempo de pueden producir fallos en el teclado. Para evitar posibles fallos, pulse y suelte a intervalos regulares hasta que aparezca el menú del dispositivo de incio. 4 En el menú del dispositivo de inicio, utilice las teclas de las flechas arriba y abajo para seleccionar CD/DVD/CD-RW y, a continuación, pulse . NOTA: La función Quickboot cambia la secuencia de inicio solo del inicio actual. Al reiniciarse, el equipo se inicia de acuerdo con la secuencia especificada en la configuración del sistema. 5 Seleccione la opción Iniciar desde CD-ROM del menú que aparece y pulse . 6 Escriba 1 para iniciar el menú de Drivers and Utilities y pulse . 7 Seleccione Run the 32 Bit Dell Diagnostics (Ejecutar los Dell Diagnostics de 32 bits) en la lista numerada. Si se enumeran varias versiones, seleccione la más adecuada para su equipo. 8 En el Menú principal de Dell Diagnostics, seleccione la prueba que desea ejecutar. NOTA: Anote el código de error y la descripción del problema exactamente como aparezca y siga las instrucciones de la pantalla. 9 Después de que se hayan completado todas las pruebas, cierre la ventana de pruebas para volver al Menú principal de los Dell Diagnostics. 10 Extraiga el soporte Drivers and Utilities, cierre la ventana del Menú principal para salir de los Dell Diagnostics y reinicie el equipo.108 Solución de problemas Menú principal de Dell Diagnostics (Diagnósticos Dell) Una vez se hayan cargado los Dell Diagnostics y aparezca la pantalla Menú principal, haga clic en el botón de la opción que desea. NOTA: Se recomienda seleccionar Probar sistema para ejecutar una prueba completa del equipo. Después de haber seleccionado la opción Probar sistema del menú principal, aparecerá el siguiente menú. NOTA: Se recomienda seleccionar Prueba extendida del menú de a continuación para ejecutar una comprobación más completa de los dispositivos del equipo. Opción Función Probar memoria Ejecutar la prueba independiente de memoria Probar sistema Ejecutar los diagnósticos del sistema Salir Salir de los diagnósticos Opción Función Express Test (prueba rápida) Realiza una prueba rápida de los dispositivos del sistema. La prueba suele tardar de 10 a 20 minutos y no requiere ninguna acción por parte del usuario. Ejecute primero Express Test (prueba rápida) para incrementar la posibilidad de rastrear el problema rápidamente. Extended Test (prueba extendida) Realiza una comprobación completa de los dispositivos del sistema. La prueba suele durar una hora o más, y requiere que el usuario responda a preguntas periódicamente. Custom Test (prueba personalizada) Prueba un dispositivo específico del sistema y se puede usar para personalizar las pruebas que se deseen ejecutar. Symptom Tree (Árbol de síntomas) Hace una lista de los síntomas habituales que se pueden encontrar y le permite seleccionar una prueba basándose en el síntoma del problema que usted tiene.Solución de problemas 109 Si se produce un problema durante una prueba, aparecerá un mensaje con un código de error y una descripción del problema. Anote el código de error y la descripción del problema exactamente como aparezca y siga las instrucciones de la pantalla. Si no puede resolver el problema, póngase en contacto con Dell (consulte el apartado "Cómo ponerse en contacto con Dell" en la página 187). NOTA: La etiqueta de servicio del equipo está situada en la parte superior de cada pantalla de prueba. Cuando se ponga en contacto con la asistencia de Dell, tenga la Etiqueta de servicio preparada. Las siguientes fichas proporcionan información adicional para ejecutar las pruebas desde la opción Custom Test (Prueba personalizada) o Symptom Tree (Árbol de síntomas): Ficha Función Resultados Muestra los resultados de la prueba y las condiciones de error encontradas. Errores Muestra las condiciones de error encontradas, los códigos de error y la descripción del problema. Ayuda Describe la prueba y los requisitos para ejecutarla. Configuración Muestra la configuración de hardware del dispositivo seleccionado. Dell Diagnostics obtiene la información de configuración de todos los dispositivos a partir de la configuración del sistema, la memoria y varias pruebas internas, y la muestra en la lista de dispositivos del panel izquierdo de la pantalla. La lista de dispositivos puede que no muestre los nombres de todos los componentes instalados en el equipo o de todos los dispositivos conectados a él. Parámetros Permite personalizar la prueba cambiando su configuración.110 Solución de problemas Utilidad de soporte técnico de Dell La utilidad de soporte técnico de Dell está personalizada conforme al entorno informático. Esta utilidad ofrece información para la solución personal de los problemas, actualizaciones de software y pruebas de estado del equipo. Utilícela para los siguientes casos: • Comprobar el entorno informático • Visualizar la configuración de la utilidad Dell Support • Acceder al archivo de ayuda para la utilidad Dell Support • Visualizar las preguntas más frecuentes • Obtener más información acerca de la utilidad Dell Support • Apagar la utilidad Dell Support Para obtener más información acerca de la utilidad de soporte técnico de Dell, haga clic en el signo de interrogación (?) en la parte superior de la pantalla de soporte técnico de Dell. Acceso a la utilidad de soporte técnico de Dell • Haga clic en el icono de Dell Support del área de notificación. NOTA: Las funciones del icono varían cuando se hace clic, doble clic o clic con el botón derecho. O • Haga clic en Inicio → Todos los programas→ Dell Support→ Configuración de Dell Support. Asegúrese de que la opción Mostrar el icono en la barra de tareas está seleccionada. NOTA: Si la utilidad de soporte técnico de Dell no está disponible en el menú Inicio, vaya a support.dell.com y descargue el software. Solución de problemas 111 Problemas con la unidad PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de esta sección, siga las instrucciones de seguridad incluidas en la Guía de información del producto. Rellene la "Lista de verificación de diagnósticos" en la página 186 a medida que realiza estas comprobaciones. ASEGÚRESE D E QUE MICROSOFT® WINDOWS® RECONOCE L A UNIDAD: • Haga clic en Inicio → PC. Si la unidad no está en la lista, realice una exploración completa con el software antivirus para comprobar si hay virus y eliminarlos. A veces los virus pueden impedir que Windows reconozca la unidad. PRUEBE L A UNIDAD: • Inserte otro disquete, CD o DVD para descartar la posibilidad de que el soporte original estuviera defectuoso. • Inserte un disquete de inicio y reinicie el equipo. LIMPIE L A UNIDAD O E L DISCO: Consulte el apartado "Limpieza del equipo" en la página 200. ASEGÚRESE D E QUE E L CD O DVD ESTÉ ENCAJADO E N E L PIVOTE CENTRAL COMPRUEBE LAS CONEXIONES D E CABLE COMPRUEBE S I HAY INCOMPATIBILIDADES CON E L HARDWARE: Consulte el apartado "Solución de problemas de software y hardware" en la página 140. EJECUTE LOS DELL DIAGNOSTICS (DIAGNÓSTICOS DELL): Consulte el apartado "Dell Diagnostics" en la página 105. Problemas de la unidad óptica NOTA: La vibración de la unidad óptica a alta velocidad es normal y puede provocar ruido, pero dicho ruido no indica un error en la unidad. NOTA: Debido a las diferentes regiones del mundo y los distintos formatos de disco, no todos los títulos en DVD funcionan en todas las unidades de DVD. Problemas al grabar en una unidad de CD-RW o DVD+/-RW CIERRE LOS OTROS PROGRAMAS: Las unidades de CD-RW y DVD+/-RW deben recibir un flujo de datos continuo al grabar. Si el flujo se interrumpe, se producirá un error. Intente cerrar todos los programas antes de grabar en la unidad.112 Solución de problemas APAGUE E L ESTADO D E SUSPENSIÓN D E WINDOWS ANTES D E GRABAR E N U N DISCO CD/DVD: Consulte el apartado "Uso del estado de Suspensión" en la página 55 para obtener información sobre el estado de Suspensión. CAMBIE L A VELOCIDAD D E GRABACIÓN A UNA VELOCIDAD INFERIOR: Consulte los archivos de ayuda relativos al software de creación de DVD o CD. La bandeja de la unidad no se puede expulsar 1 Asegúrese de que el equipo está apagado. 2 Enderece un clip sujetapapeles e introduzca un extremo en el orificio de expulsión situado en la parte frontal de la unidad; a continuación, empuje firmemente hasta que se expulse parcialmente la bandeja. 3 Tire de la bandeja hacia afuera suavemente hasta que se detenga. La unidad hace un sonido de roce o chirrido inusual • Asegúrese de que el sonido no se debe al programa que se está ejecutando. • Asegúrese de que el disco esté insertado correctamente. Problemas con la unidad de disco duro DEJE QUE EL EQUIPO SE ENFRÍE ANTES DE ENCENDERLO: Una unidad de disco duro recalentada puede impedir que se inicie el sistema operativo. Deje que el equipo vuelva a adoptar la temperatura ambiente antes de encenderlo. EJECUTE UNA COMPROBACIÓN DEL DISCO: 1 Haga clic en Inicio → PC. 2 Haga clic con el botón derecho del ratón en Local Disk (C:) (Disco local C:). 3 Haga clic en Properties (Propiedades)→ Tools (Herramientas)→ Check now (Comprobar ahora). NOTA: Es posible que aparezca la ventana Control de cuentas de usuario. Si es usted un administrador del equipo, haga clic en Continue (Continuar); en caso contrario, póngase en contacto con su administrador para continuar con la acción que desee. 4 Haga clic en Examinar e intentar recuperar los sectores defectuosos y, a continuación, haga clic en Inicio.Solución de problemas 113 Problemas con el correo electrónico, el módem e Internet PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de esta sección, siga las instrucciones de seguridad incluidas en la Guía de información del producto. NOTA: Conecte el módem únicamente a un enchufe de teléfono analógico. El módem no funciona si está conectado a una red telefónica digital. COMPRUEBE LA CONFIGURACIÓN DE SEGURIDAD DE MICROSOFT OUTLOOK® EXPRESS : Si no puede abrir los archivos adjuntos de su correo electrónico: 1 En Outlook Express, haga clic en Herramientas, en Opciones y, a continuación, haga clic en Seguridad. 2 Haga clic en Do not allow attachments (No permitir archivos adjuntos) para eliminar la marca de comprobación. COMPRUEBE L A CONEXIÓN D E L A LÍNEA TELEFÓNICA COMPRUEBE E L CONECTOR D E TELÉFONO CONECTE E L MÓDEM DIRECTAMENTE A L A TOMA D E TELÉFONO D E L A PARED UTILICE UNA LÍNEA TELEFÓNICA DIFERENTE • Verifique que la línea de teléfono está conectada a la clavija del módem (la clavija tiene una etiqueta verde o un icono con forma de conector al lado). • Asegúrese de que se oiga un clic cuando inserte el conector de la línea telefónica en el módem. • Desconecte la línea telefónica del módem y conéctela a un teléfono. Después escuche el tono de marcar. • Si hay otros dispositivos telefónicos que comparten la línea, como un contestador, un fax, un protector contra sobretensiones o un repartidor de línea, omítalos y conecte el módem directamente al enchufe telefónico de la pared. Si utiliza una línea con una longitud de 3 metros (10 pies) o más, pruebe con una más corta. EJECUTE E L DIAGNÓSTICO DEL ASISTENTE DEL MÓDEM: Haga clic en Inicio → Programas→ Herramienta de diagnóstico del módem→ Herramienta de diagnóstico del módem. Siga las instrucciones de la pantalla para identificar y resolver los problemas del módem (el Asistente del módem no se encuentra disponible en determinados equipos).114 Solución de problemas COMPRUEBE QUE E L MÓDEM S E COMUNICA CON WINDOWS: 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio , y, a continuación, en Panel de control. 2 Haga clic en Hardware y sonido. 3 Haga clic en Opciones de teléfono y módem. 4 Haga clic en la pestaña Módems. 5 Haga clic en el puerto COM para el módem. 6 Haga clic en Propiedades, en la pestaña Diagnósticos y, a continuación, en Consultar módem para comprobar que éste se comunica con Windows. Si todos los comandos reciben respuestas, significa que el módem funciona correctamente. COMPRUEBE QUE ESTÁ CONECTADO A INTERNET: Asegúrese de que está abonado a un proveedor de servicio de Internet. Con el programa de correo electrónico Outlook Express abierto, haga clic en Archivo. Si se ha seleccionado Trabajar sin conexión, haga clic en la marca de comprobación para eliminarla y, a continuación, conectarse a Internet. Si necesita ayuda, póngase en contacto con el proveedor de servicios de Internet. COMPRUEBE S I E L EQUIPO TIENE SOFTWARE ESPÍA: Si el equipo tiene un bajo rendimiento, recibe frecuentemente anuncios emergentes, o tiene problemas para conectarse a Internet, es posible que esté infectado con software espía. Utilice un programa antivirus que incluya protección contra software espía (es posible que el programa necesite una actualización) para explorar el equipo y eliminar el software espía. Para obtener más información, vaya a support.dell.com y busque las palabras clave software espía. Mensajes de error Rellene la "Lista de verificación de diagnósticos" en la página 186 a medida que realiza estas comprobaciones. PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de esta sección, siga las instrucciones de seguridad incluidas en la Guía de información del producto. Si el mensaje que aparece no figura en la lista siguiente, consulte la documentación del sistema operativo o la del programa que se estaba ejecutando cuando apareció el mensaje.Solución de problemas 115 AUXILIARY DEVICE FAILURE (FALLO DE DISPOSITIVO AUXILIAR): El ratón táctil o el ratón externo pueden estar defectuosos. Si el ratón es externo, compruebe la conexión del cable. Active la opción Dispositivo señalador en el programa de configuración del sistema (consulte el apartado "Uso del programa Configuración del sistema" en la página 197). Si el problema persiste, póngase en contacto con Dell (consulte el apartado "Cómo ponerse en contacto con Dell" en la página 187). BA D COMMAND O R FILE NAME (COMANDO O NOMBRE D E ARCHIVO ERRÓNEO): Asegúrese de que ha escrito el comando correctamente, ha colocado los espacios en la posición correcta y ha utilizado el nombre de trayectoria correcto. CACHE DISABLED DUE TO FAILURE (CACHÉ DESACTIVADA DEBIDO A FALLO): Error de la memoria caché primaria interna del microprocesador. Póngase en contacto con Dell (consulte el apartado "Cómo ponerse en contacto con Dell" en la página 187). CD DRIVE CONTROLLER FAILURE (FALLO DE LA CONTROLADORA DE LA UNIDAD DE CD): La unidad de CD no responde a los comandos del equipo (consulte el apartado "Problemas con la unidad" en la página 111). DATA ERROR (ERROR DE DATOS): La unidad de disco duro no puede leer los datos (consulte el apartado "Problemas con la unidad" en la página 111). DECREASING AVAILABLE MEMORY (LA MEMORIA DISPONIBLE DISMINUYE): Uno o más módulos de memoria pueden ser defectuosos o estar asentados incorrectamente. Vuelva a instalar los módulos de memoria y, si es necesario, sustitúyalos (consulte el apartado "Memoria" en la página 157). DISK C: FAILED INITIALIZATION (NO S E PUDO INICIALIZAR E L DISCO C:): Falló el inicio de la unidad de disco duro. Ejecute el grupo de pruebas de la unidad de disco duro de los Dell Diagnostics (consulte el apartado "Dell Diagnostics" en la página 105). DRIVE NOT READY (LA UNIDAD NO ESTÁ LISTA): Para que se lleve a cabo la operación, es necesario que haya una unidad de disco duro en el compartimento antes de que pueda continuar. Instale una unidad de disco duro en el compartimento de la unidad de disco duro (consulte el apartado "Unidad de disco duro" en la página 150). ERROR READING PCMCIA CARD (ERROR AL LEER LA TARJETA PCMCIA): El equipo no puede identificar la tarjeta ExpressCard. Vuelva a instalar la tarjeta o pruebe otra (consulte el apartado "Uso de ExpressCards" en la página 83). 116 Solución de problemas EXTENDED MEMORY SIZE HAS CHANGED (HA CAMBIADO E L TAMAÑO D E L A MEMORIA EXTENDIDA): La cantidad de memoria registrada en NVRAM no coincide con la memoria instalada en el equipo. Reinicie el equipo. Si vuelve a aparecer un error, póngase en contacto con Dell (consulte el apartado "Cómo ponerse en contacto con Dell" en la página 187). TH E FILE BEING COPIED I S TOO LARGE FOR THE DESTINATION DRIVE (EL ARCHIVO QUE S E ESTÁ COPIANDO E S DEMASIADO GRANDE PARA L A UNIDAD D E DESTINO): El archivo que está intentando copiar es demasiado grande y no cabe en el disco, o el disco está lleno. Pruebe a copiar el archivo en otro disco o en un disco con mayor capacidad. A FILENAME CANNOT CONTAIN ANY OF THE FOLLOWING CHARACTERS: / : * ? " | (UN NOMBRE DE ARCHIVO NO PUEDE CONTENER NINGUNO DE LOS CARACTERES SIGUIENTES: \ / : * ? " < > |: No utilice estos caracteres en los nombres de archivo. GATE A20 FAILURE (ERROR GATE A20): Puede que uno de los módulos de memoria esté suelto. Vuelva a instalar los módulos de memoria y, si es necesario, sustitúyalos (consulte el apartado "Memoria" en la página 157). GENERAL FAILURE (ERROR GENERAL): El sistema operativo no puede ejecutar el comando. Este mensaje suele aparecer acompañado de información específica, por ejemplo, Printer out of paper (Impresora sin papel). Haga lo que proceda. HARD-DISK DRIVE CONFIGURATION ERROR (ERROR D E CONFIGURACIÓN D E L A UNIDAD D E DISCO DURO): El equipo no puede identificar el tipo de unidad. Apague el equipo, retire la unidad de disco duro (consulte el apartado "Unidad de disco duro" en la página 150), e inícielo desde un CD. Después apague el equipo, vuelva a instalar la unidad de disco duro y reinícielo. Ejecute las pruebas de la unidad de disco duro en los Dell Diagnostics (consulte el apartado "Dell Diagnostics" en la página 105). HARD-DISK DRIVE CONTROLLER FAILURE 0 (FALLO DE LA CONTROLADORA DE LA UNIDAD D E DISCO DURO 0): La unidad de disco duro no responde a los comandos del equipo. Apague el equipo, retire la unidad de disco duro (consulte el apartado "Unidad de disco duro" en la página 150), e inícielo desde un CD. Después apague el equipo, vuelva a instalar la unidad de disco duro y reinícielo. Si el problema persiste, utilice otra unidad. Ejecute las pruebas de la unidad de disco duro en los Dell Diagnostics (consulte el apartado "Dell Diagnostics" en la página 105).Solución de problemas 117 HARD-DISK DRIVE FAILURE (ERROR DE LA UNIDAD DE DISCO DURO): La unidad de disco duro no responde a los comandos del equipo. Apague el equipo, retire la unidad de disco duro (consulte el apartado "Unidad de disco duro" en la página 150), e inícielo desde un CD. Después apague el equipo, vuelva a instalar la unidad de disco duro y reinícielo. Si el problema persiste, utilice otra unidad. Ejecute las pruebas de la unidad de disco duro en los Dell Diagnostics (consulte el apartado "Dell Diagnostics" en la página 105). HARD-DISK DRIVE READ FAILURE (ERROR DE LECTURA DE LA UNIDAD DE DISCO DURO): La unidad de disco duro puede estar defectuosa. Apague el equipo, retire la unidad de disco duro (consulte el apartado "Unidad de disco duro" en la página 150), e inícielo desde un CD. Después apague el equipo, vuelva a instalar la unidad de disco duro y reinícielo. Si el problema persiste, utilice otra unidad. Ejecute las pruebas de la unidad de disco duro en los Dell Diagnostics (consulte el apartado "Dell Diagnostics" en la página 105). INSERT BOOTABLE MEDIA (INSERTE UN MEDIO DE ARRANQUE): El sistema operativo está tratando de iniciar un medio que no es de inicio, como un disquete o CD. Insert bootable media (Inserte un medio de arranque) INVALID CONFIGURATION INFORMATION-PLEASE RUN SYSTEM SETUP PROGRAM (INFORMACIÓN D E CONFIGURACIÓN N O VÁLIDA; EJECUTE E L PROGRAMA D E CONFIGURACIÓN DEL SISTEMA): La información de configuración del sistema no coincide con la configuración de hardware. Es más probable que el mensaje aparezca tras instalar un módulo de memoria. Corrija las opciones apropiadas del programa de configuración del sistema (consulte el apartado "Uso del programa Configuración del sistema" en la página 197). KEYBOARD CLOCK LINE FAILURE (FALLO D E L A LÍNEA D E RELOJ DEL TECLADO): Para teclados externos, compruebe la conexión del cable. Ejecute las pruebas del Controlador del teclado en los Dell Diagnostics (consulte el apartado "Dell Diagnostics" en la página 105). KEYBOARD CONTROLLER FAILURE (FALLO D E L A CONTROLADORA DEL TECLADO): Para teclados externos, compruebe la conexión del cable. Reinicie el ordenador y evite tocar el teclado o el ratón durante la rutina de inicio. Ejecute las pruebas del Controlador del teclado en los Dell Diagnostics (consulte el apartado "Dell Diagnostics" en la página 105).118 Solución de problemas KEYBOARD DATA LINE FAILURE (FALLO D E L A LÍNEA D E DATOS DEL TECLADO): Para teclados externos, compruebe la conexión del cable. Ejecute las pruebas del Controlador del teclado en los Dell Diagnostics (consulte el apartado "Dell Diagnostics" en la página 105). KEYBOARD STUCK KEY FAILURE (FALLO D E TECLA BLOQUEADA DEL TECLADO): Para teclados externos, compruebe la conexión del cable. Reinicie el ordenador y evite tocar el teclado o las teclas durante la rutina de inicio. Ejecute las pruebas del Tecla bloqueada en los Dell Diagnostics (consulte el apartado "Dell Diagnostics" en la página 105). NO S E PUEDE ACCEDER A L CONTENIDO BAJO LICENCIA D E MEDIADIRECT: Dell MediaDirect™ no puede comprobar las restricciones de la Gestión de derechos digitales (DRM por sus siglas en inglés) en el archivo, por lo que el archivo no puede reproducirse (consulte el apartado "Problemas con Dell MediaDirect" en la página 125). MEMORY ADDRESS LINE FAILURE AT ADDRESS, READ VALUE EXPECTING VALUE (FALLO D E LÍNEA D E DIRECCIÓN D E MEMORIA E N L A DIRECCIÓN, E L VALOR D E LECTURA ESPERA VALOR): Puede que haya un módulo de memoria dañado o insertado incorrectamente. Vuelva a instalar los módulos de memoria y, si es necesario, sustitúyalos (consulte el apartado "Memoria" en la página 157). MEMORY ALLOCATION ERROR (ERROR DE ASIGNACIÓN DE MEMORIA): El software que intenta ejecutar está en conflicto con el sistema operativo, con otro programa de aplicación o con una utilidad. Apague el equipo, espere 30 segundos y reinícielo. Intente ejecutar el programa nuevamente. Si sigue apareciendo el mensaje de error, consulte la documentación del software. MEMORY DATA LINE FAILURE A T ADDRESS, READ VALUE EXPECTING VALUE (FALLO D E LÍNEA D E DATOS D E MEMORIA, E L VALOR D E LECTURA ESPERA VALOR): Puede que haya un módulo de memoria dañado o insertado incorrectamente. Vuelva a instalar los módulos de memoria y, si es necesario, sustitúyalos (consulte el apartado "Memoria" en la página 157). MEMORY DOUBLE WORD LOGIC FAILURE AT ADDRESS, READ VALUE EXPECTING VALUE (FALLO DE LA LÓGICA DE DOBLE PALABRA DE MEMORIA, EL VALOR DE LECTURA ESPERA U N VALOR): Puede que haya un módulo de memoria dañado o insertado incorrectamente. Vuelva a instalar los módulos de memoria y, si es necesario, sustitúyalos (consulte el apartado "Memoria" en la página 157).Solución de problemas 119 MEMORY ODD/EVEN LOGIC FAILURE A T ADDRESS, READ VALUE EXPECTING VALUE (FALLO D E L A LÓGICA PAR/IMPAR D E MEMORIA E N L A DIRECCIÓN, E L VALOR D E LECTURA ESPERA VALOR): Puede que haya un módulo de memoria dañado o insertado incorrectamente. Vuelva a instalar los módulos de memoria y, si es necesario, sustitúyalos (consulte el apartado "Memoria" en la página 157). MEMORY WRITE/READ FAILURE AT ADDRESS, READ VALUE EXPECTING VALUE (FALLO D E LECTURA/ESCRITURA D E MEMORIA E N L A DIRECCIÓN, E L VALOR D E LECTURA ESPERA VALOR): Puede que haya un módulo de memoria dañado o insertado incorrectamente. Vuelva a instalar los módulos de memoria y, si es necesario, sustitúyalos (consulte el apartado "Memoria" en la página 157). NO BOOT DEVICE AVAILABLE (NO HAY NINGÚN DISPOSITIVO D E INICIALIZACIÓN DISPONIBLE): El equipo no puede encontrar la unidad de disco duro. Si el dispositivo de inicio es la unidad de disco duro, asegúrese de que la unidad está instalada, insertada correctamente y dividida en particiones como dispositivo de inicio. NO BOOT SECTOR O N HARD DRIVE (NO HAY U N SECTOR D E INICIALIZACIÓN E N L A UNIDAD D E DISCO DURO): El sistema operativo puede estar dañado. Póngase en contacto con Dell (consulte el apartado "Cómo ponerse en contacto con Dell" en la página 187). NO TIMER TICK INTERRUPT (NO HAY INTERRUPCIÓN D E TIC D E TEMPORIZADOR): Un chip de la placa base puede estar defectuoso. Ejecute las pruebas de Ajustes del sistema en los Dell Diagnostics (consulte el apartado "Dell Diagnostics" en la página 105). NO T ENOUGH MEMORY O R RESOURCES. EXIT SOME PROGRAMS AND TRY AGAIN (NO HAY RECURSOS O MEMORIA SUFICIENTES. SALGA DE ALGUNOS PROGRAMAS E INTÉNTELO D E NUEVO): Tiene demasiados programas abiertos. Cierre todas las ventanas y abra el programa que desee utilizar. OPERATING SYSTEM NOT FOUND (NO S E ENCUENTRA E L SISTEMA OPERATIVO): Vuelva a instalar la unidad de disco duro (consulte el apartado "Unidad de disco duro" en la página 150). Si el problema persiste, póngase en contacto con Dell (consulte el apartado "Cómo ponerse en contacto con Dell" en la página 187). OPTIONAL ROM BAD CHECKSUM (SUMA D E COMPROBACIÓN D E ROM OPCIONAL E N MAL ESTADO): La ROM opcional ha fallado. Póngase en contacto con Dell (consulte el apartado "Cómo ponerse en contacto con Dell" en la página 187).120 Solución de problemas A REQUIRED .DLL FILE WAS NOT FOUND (NO SE ENCONTRÓ EL ARCHIVO .DLL REQUERID): Falta un archivo fundamental en el programa que intenta abrir. Quite el programa y vuelva a instalarlo. 1 Haga clic en Inicio → Panel de control. 2 En Programas, haga clic en Desinstalar un programa. 3 Seleccione el programa que desee quitar. 4 Haga clic en Desinstalar y siga las restantes indicaciones de la pantalla. 5 Consulte la documentación del programa para ver las instrucciones de instalación. SECTOR NOT FOUND (NO S E ENCUENTRA SECTOR): El sistema operativo no puede encontrar un sector de la unidad de disco duro. Probablemente la unidad de disco duro tenga una tabla de asignación de archivos (FAT) o un sector dañado. Ejecute la utilidad de comprobación de errores de Windows para comprobar la estructura de archivos de la unidad de disco duro. Consulte el Centro de ayuda y soporte técnico de Windows para obtener instrucciones (haga clic en Inicio → Ayuda y soporte técnico). Si hay un gran número de sectores defectuosos, haga una copia de seguridad de los datos (si es posible) y después vuelva a formatear la unidad de disco duro. SEEK ERROR (ERROR D E BÚSQUEDA): El sistema operativo no puede encontrar una pista específica en la unidad de disco duro. SHUTDOWN FAILURE (FALLO D E SUSPENSIÓN DEL TRABAJO): Un chip de la placa base puede estar defectuoso. Ejecute las pruebas de Ajustes del sistema en los Dell Diagnostics (consulte el apartado "Dell Diagnostics" en la página 105). TIME-O F-DAY CLOCK LOST POWER (EL RELOJ D E HORA PERDIÓ L A ALIMENTACIÓN): Los valores de configuración del sistema están dañados. Conecte el equipo a un enchufe eléctrico para cargar la batería. Si el problema continúa, intente restaurar los datos con el programa de configuración del sistema y, a continuación, salga inmediatamente del programa (consulte el apartado "Uso del programa Configuración del sistema" en la página 197). Si el mensaje reaparece, póngase en contacto con Dell (consulte el apartado "Cómo ponerse en contacto con Dell" en la página 187).Solución de problemas 121 TIME-OF-DAY CLOCK STOPPED (EL RELOJ DE HORA SE HA PARADO): Puede que haya que recargar la batería de reserva que resguarda los valores de configuración del sistema. Conecte el equipo a un enchufe eléctrico para cargar la batería. Si el problema persiste, póngase en contacto con Dell (consulte el apartado "Cómo ponerse en contacto con Dell" en la página 187). TIME-O F-DAY NOT SET-PLEASE RUN THE SYSTEM SETUP PROGRAM (LA HORA N O ESTÁ ESTABLECIDA; EJECUTE E L PROGRAMA D E CONFIGURACIÓN DEL SISTEMA): La hora o la fecha en la información de configuración del sistema no coinciden con el reloj del sistema. Corrija los valores de las opciones Fecha y Hora (consulte el apartado "Uso del programa Configuración del sistema" en la página 197). TIMER CHIP COUNTER 2 FAILED (FALLÓ EL CONTADOR 2 DEL CHIP DEL TEMPORIZADOR): Un chip de la placa base puede estar defectuoso. Ejecute las pruebas de Ajustes del sistema en los Dell Diagnostics (consulte el apartado "Dell Diagnostics" en la página 105). UNEXPECTED INTERRUPT IN PROTECTED MODE (INTERRUPCIÓN INESPERADA EN MODO PROTEGIDO): El controlador del teclado puede ser defectuoso o el módulo de memoria puede estar suelto. Ejecute las pruebas de la Memoria del sistema y del Controlador del teclado en los Dell Diagnostics (consulte el apartado "Dell Diagnostics" en la página 105). X:\ I S NOT ACCESSIBLE. TH E DEVICE I S NOT READY (NO S E PUEDE ACCEDER A X: EL DISPOSITIVO N O ESTÁ LISTO): Inserte un disco en la unidad y vuelva a intentarlo. WARNING: BATTERY I S CRITICALLY LOW (ADVERTENCIA: L A CARGA D E L A BATERÍA E S EXTREMADAMENTE BAJA). La batería se está agotando. Sustituya la batería o conecte el equipo a una toma eléctrica; en caso contrario, active el modo de hibernación o apague el equipo. Problemas con las ExpressCard PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de esta sección, siga las instrucciones de seguridad incluidas en la Guía de información del producto. COMPRUEBE L A EXPRESSCARD: Asegúrese de que la ExpressCard se insertó correctamente en el conector. COMPRUEBE QUE WINDOWS RECONOCE L A TARJETA: Haga doble clic en el icono Quitar hardware de forma segura de la barra de tareas de Windows. Algunas tarjetas no admiten esta función. Si la tarjeta admite esta función de Windows, se mostrará.122 Solución de problemas SI TIENE PROBLEMAS CON UNA EXPRESSCARD PROPORCIONADA POR DELL: Póngase en contacto con Dell (consulte el apartado "Cómo ponerse en contacto con Dell" en la página 187). Consulte también el apartado "Banda ancha móvil (Red inalámbrica de área amplia [WWAN])" en la página 128 para obtener información acerca de las tarjetas ExpressCards de la banda ancha móvil (WWAN). SI TIENE PROBLEMAS CON UNA EXPRESSCARD N O PROPORCIONADA POR DELL: Póngase en contacto con el fabricante de la tarjeta. Problemas con un dispositivo IEEE 1394 PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de esta sección, siga las instrucciones de seguridad incluidas en la Guía de información del producto. ASEGÚRESE D E QUE WINDOWS RECONOCE E L DISPOSITIVO IEEE 1394: 1 Haga clic en Inicio →Panel de control→ Sistema y mantenimiento→ Administrador de dispositivos. NOTA: Es posible que aparezca la ventana Control de cuentas de usuario. Si es usted un administrador del equipo, haga clic en Continue (Continuar); en caso contrario, póngase en contacto con su administrador para continuar con la acción que desee. Si el dispositivo IEEE 1394 figura en la lista, Windows lo reconocerá. SI TIENE PROBLEMAS CON ALGÚN DISPOSITIVO IEEE 1394 PROPORCIONADO POR DELL: Póngase en contacto con Dell o con el fabricante del dispositivo IEEE 1394 (consulte el apartado "Cómo ponerse en contacto con Dell" en la página 187). SI TIENE PROBLEMAS CON UN DISPOSITIVO IEEE 1394 NO PROPORCIONADO POR DELL: Póngase en contacto con Dell o con el fabricante del dispositivo IEEE(consulte el apartado "Cómo ponerse en contacto con Dell" en la página 187). Asegúrese de que el dispositivo IEEE 1394 esté insertado correctamente en el conector.Solución de problemas 123 Problemas con el teclado PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de esta sección, siga las instrucciones de seguridad incluidas en la Guía de información del producto. Rellene la "Lista de verificación de diagnósticos" en la página 186 a medida que realiza estas comprobaciones. NOTA: Utilice el teclado integrado cuando ejecute Dell Diagnostics (Diagnósticos Dell) o el programa Configuración del sistema. Cuando se conecta un teclado externo, el teclado integrado sigue conservando toda su funcionalidad. Problemas con el teclado externo NOTA: Cuando se conecta un teclado externo, el teclado integrado sigue conservando toda su funcionalidad. COMPRUEBE E L CABLE DEL TECLADO: Apague el equipo, desconecte el cable del teclado y compruebe si está dañado. A continuación vuelva a conectarlo firmemente. Si utiliza un cable alargador para el teclado, desconéctelo y conecte el teclado directamente al equipo. COMPRUEBE E L TECLADO EXTERNO: 1 Apague el equipo, espere un minuto y vuelva a encenderlo. 2 Compruebe que los indicadores de números, mayúsculas y bloqueo de desplazamiento del teclado parpadean durante la rutina de arranque. 3 Desde el escritorio de Windows, haga clic en Inicio → Todos los programas→ Accesorios→ Bloc de notas. 4 Escriba algunos caracteres con el teclado externo y compruebe que aparecen en pantalla. Si no puede seguir estos pasos, puede que tenga un teclado externo defectuoso. PARA COMPROBAR QUE S E TRATA D E U N PROBLEMA CON E L TECLADO EXTERNO, EXAMINE E L TECLADO INTEGRADO: 1 Apague el equipo. 2 Desconecte el teclado externo. 3 Enciéndalo. 124 Solución de problemas 4 Desde el escritorio de Windows, haga clic en Inicio → Todos los programas→ Accesorios→ Bloc de notas. 5 Escriba algunos caracteres en el teclado interno y compruebe que aparecen en pantalla. Si los caracteres aparecen ahora, pero no con el teclado externo, puede que tenga un teclado externo defectuoso. Póngase en contacto con Dell (consulte el apartado "Cómo ponerse en contacto con Dell" en la página 187). EJECUTE LAS PRUEBAS D E DIAGNÓSTICO DEL TECLADO: Ejecute las pruebas de teclados compatibles con PC-AT en los Dell Diagnostics (consulte el apartado "Dell Diagnostics" en la página 105). Si las pruebas indican un teclado externo defectuoso, póngase en contacto con Dell (consulte el apartado "Cómo ponerse en contacto con Dell" en la página 187). Caracteres no esperados DESACTIVE EL TECLADO NUMÉRICO: Pulse para desactivar el teclado numérico si se muestran números en lugar de letras. Compruebe que el indicador luminoso del bloqueo numérico no esté encendido. Bloqueos y problemas con el software PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de esta sección, siga las instrucciones de seguridad incluidas en la Guía de información del producto. El equipo no se inicia COMPRUEBE E L ADAPTADOR D E CA: Asegúrese de que el adaptador de CA esté bien conectado al ordenador y a la toma de alimentación eléctrica. El equipo no responde AVISO: Es posible que se pierdan datos si no puede apagar el sistema operativo. APAGUE E L EQUIPO: Si no puede conseguir que responda pulsando una tecla o moviendo el ratón, pulse el botón de alimentación durante unos 8 ó 10 segundos como mínimo hasta que se apague el equipo. A continuación, reinicie el equipo. Solución de problemas 125 Un programa no responde o falla repetidamente FINALICE E L PROGRAMA: 1 Pulse al mismo tiempo. 2 Haga clic en la ficha Aplicaciones y seleccione el programa que no responde. 3 Haga clic en Finalizar tarea. NOTA: Se puede ejecutar el programa chkdsk al reiniciar el equipo. Siga las instrucciones que aparecen en pantalla. COMPRUEBE L A DOCUMENTACIÓN DEL SOFTWARE: Si es necesario, desinstale el programa y, a continuación, vuelva a instalarlo. Normalmente el software incluye instrucciones de instalación en su documentación o en un disquete o CD. Se ha diseñado un programa para un sistema operativo anterior de Microsoft® Windows® EJECUTE EL ASISTENTE PARA COMPATIBILIDAD DE PROGRAMAS: La compatibilidad de programas es un modo de Windows que permite ejecutar programas escritos en versiones anteriores de Windows. Para obtener más información, busque la palabra clave asistente para compatibilidad de programas en el Centro de ayuda y soporte técnico de Windows. Aparece una pantalla azul fija APAGUE E L EQUIPO: Si no puede conseguir que responda pulsando una tecla o moviendo el ratón, pulse el botón de alimentación durante unos 8 ó 10 segundos como mínimo hasta que se apague el equipo. A continuación, reinicie el equipo. Problemas con Dell MediaDirect REVISE EL ARCHIVO DE AYUDA DE DELL MEDIADIRECT PARA OBTENER INFORMACIÓN: Utilice el menú Ayuda para acceder a la ayuda de Dell MediaDirect. PARA REPRODUCIR PELÍCULAS CON DELL MEDIADIRECT, DEBE TENER UNA UNIDAD DE DVD Y EL REPRODUCTOR DE DVD DE DELL: Si el equipo que ha adquirido incluye una unidad de DVD, este software ya debería estar instalado. PROBLEMAS CON LA CALIDAD DEL VÍDEO: Desactive la opción Usar la aceleración del hardware. Esta función aprovecha el procesamiento especial de algunas tarjetas gráficas para reducir los requisitos del procesador cuando se reproducen DVD y determinados tipos de archivos de vídeo. 126 Solución de problemas ALGUNOS ARCHIVOS MULTIMEDIA N O S E PUEDEN REPRODUCIR: Puesto que Dell MediaDirect proporciona acceso a archivos multimedia fuera del entorno del sistema operativo de Windows, el acceso a contenido bajo licencia está restringido. El contenido bajo licencia es contenido digital al que se le ha aplicado DRM (Digital Rights Management). El entorno de Dell MediaDirect no puede comprobar las restricciones de DRM, por lo que los archivos bajo licencia no se pueden reproducir. Los archivos de música y vídeo bajo licencia tienen un icono de bloqueo junto a ellos. Puede acceder a los archivos bajo licencia en el entorno del sistema operativo de Windows. AJUSTE D E L A CONFIGURACIÓN DE COLOR PARA PELÍCULAS QUE CONTIENEN ESCENAS QUE SON DEMASIADO OSCURAS O BRILLANTES: Haga clic en EagleVision para utilizar la tecnología de mejora de vídeo, que detecta el contenido del vídeo y ajusta dinámicamente las relaciones de brillo/contraste/saturación. AVISO: No se puede volver a instalar el componente Dell MediaDirect si ha reformateado de manera voluntaria la unidad de disco duro. Póngase en contacto con Dell para recibir asistencia técnica (consulte el apartado "Cómo ponerse en contacto con Dell" en la página 187). Otros problemas con el software COMPRUEBE L A DOCUMENTACIÓN DEL SOFTWARE O PÓNGASE E N CONTACTO CON E L FABRICANTE D E SOFTWARE PARA OBTENER INFORMACIÓN SOBRE L A SOLUCIÓN D E PROBLEMAS: • Asegúrese de que el programa sea compatible con el sistema operativo instalado en el equipo. • Asegúrese de que el equipo cumple los requisitos mínimos de hardware necesarios para ejecutar el software. Consulte la documentación del software para obtener más información. • Asegúrese de el programa esté instalado y configurado correctamente. • Compruebe que los controladores de dispositivo no sean incompatibles con el programa. • si es necesario, desinstale el programa y, a continuación, vuelva a instalarlo. HAGA COPIAS D E SEGURIDAD D E SUS ARCHIVOS INMEDIATAMENTE UTILICE U N PROGRAMA D E DETECCIÓN D E VIRUS PARA COMPROBAR L A UNIDAD D E DISCO DURO, LOS DISQUETES O LOS CD GUARDE Y CIERRE TODOS LOS ARCHIVOS O PROGRAMAS ABIERTOS Y APAGUE E L EQUIPO A TRAVÉS DEL MENÚ INICIOSolución de problemas 127 COMPRUEBE S I E L EQUIPO TIENE SOFTWARE ESPÍA: Si el equipo tiene un bajo rendimiento, recibe frecuentemente anuncios emergentes, o tiene problemas para conectarse a Internet, es posible que esté infectado con software espía. Utilice un programa antivirus que incluya protección contra software espía (es posible que el programa necesite una actualización) para explorar el equipo y eliminar el software espía. Para obtener más información, vaya a support.dell.com y busque las palabras clave software espía. EJECUTE LOS DELL DIAGNOSTICS (DIAGNÓSTICOS DELL): Si todas las pruebas se ejecutan satisfactoriamente, el error puede estar relacionado con un problema de software (consulte el apartado "Dell Diagnostics" en la página 105). Problemas con la memoria Rellene la "Lista de verificación de diagnósticos" en la página 186 a medida que realiza estas comprobaciones. PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de esta sección, siga las instrucciones de seguridad incluidas en la Guía de información del producto. SI RECIBE U N MENSAJE QUE INDICA QUE L A MEMORIA E S INSUFICIENTE: • Guarde y cierre todos los archivos abiertos y salga de todos los programas que estén abiertos y no utilice para ver si así se resuelve el problema. • Consulte la documentación del software para ver los requisitos mínimos de memoria. Si es necesario, instale memoria adicional (consulte el apartado "Memoria" en la página 157). • Vuelva a colocar los módulos de memoria para asegurarse de que el equipo se comunica correctamente con la memoria (consulte el apartado "Memoria" en la página 157). • Ejecute los Dell Diagnostics (Diagnósticos Dell) (consulte el apartado "Dell Diagnostics" en la página 105). SI TIENE OTROS PROBLEMAS CON L A MEMORIA: • Vuelva a colocar los módulos de memoria para asegurarse de que el equipo se comunica correctamente con la memoria (consulte el apartado "Memoria" en la página 157). • Asegúrese de que sigue las pautas de instalación de la memoria (consulte el apartado "Memoria" en la página 157). • Ejecute los Dell Diagnostics (Diagnósticos Dell) (consulte el apartado "Dell Diagnostics" en la página 105). 128 Solución de problemas Problemas de red Rellene la "Lista de verificación de diagnósticos" en la página 186 a medida que realiza estas comprobaciones. PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de esta sección, siga las instrucciones de seguridad incluidas en la Guía de información del producto. COMPRUEBE E L CONECTOR DEL CABLE D E RED: Asegúrese de que el cable de red se encuentra firmemente insertado en el conector de red en la parte posterior del equipo y en el enchufe de red. COMPRUEBE LOS INDICADORES D E RED DEL CONECTOR D E RED: Si no hay ningún indicador no hay comunicación de red. Sustituya el cable de red. REINICIE E L EQUIPO Y CONÉCTESE D E NUEVO A L A RED COMPRUEBE L A CONFIGURACIÓN D E L A RED: Póngase en contacto con el administrador de red o con la persona que instaló la red para comprobar que la configuración de la red sea correcta y que funcione. Banda ancha móvil (Red inalámbrica de área amplia [WWAN]) NOTA: La Guía del usuario de la utilidad de la tarjeta de banda ancha móvil de Dell y la Guía del usuario de la ExpressCard de banda ancha móvil están disponibles a través del Centro de ayuda y soporte técnico de Windows (haga clic en Inicio →Ayuda y soporte técnico). También puede descargar la Guía del usuario de la utilidad de la tarjeta de banda ancha móvil de Dell en support.dell.com. NOTA: Si el ordenador tiene un dispositivo WWAN de Dell instalado, el icono aparece en el área de notificación. Haga doble clic en el icono para activar la utilidad. ACTIVAR L A EXPRESSCARD D E BANDA ANCHA MÓVIL: Primero debe activar la ExpressCard de banda ancha móvil para poder conectarse a la red. Sitúe el ratón sobre el icono en el área de notificación para comprobar el estado de la conexión. Si la tarjeta no está activada, sida las instrucciones de activación de la tarjeta incluidas dentro de la utilidad de la tarjeta de banda ancha móvil de Dell. Para acceder a la utilidad, haga doble clic en el icono de la barra de tareas, en la esquina inferior derecha de la pantalla. Si la ExpressCard no pertenece a la marca Dell, consulte las instrucciones del fabricante de la tarjeta.Solución de problemas 129 COMPRUEBE E L ESTADO D E CONEXIÓN D E L A RED E N L A UTILIDAD D E L A TARJETA D E BANDA ANCHA MÓVIL D E DELL: Haga doble clic en el icono para activar la utilidad de la tarjeta de banda ancha móvil de Dell. Compruebe el estado en la pantalla principal: • No se ha detectado ninguna tarjeta. Reinicie el equipo y active de nuevo la Utilidad de la tarjeta de banda ancha móvil de Dell. • Compruebe el servicio de WWAN. Póngase en contacto con el proveedor de servicio de telefonía móvil para comprobar su plan de cobertura y servicios admitidos. Problemas de alimentación Rellene la "Lista de verificación de diagnósticos" en la página 186 a medida que realiza estas comprobaciones. PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de esta sección, siga las instrucciones de seguridad incluidas en la Guía de información del producto. COMPRUEBE E L INDICADOR D E ALIMENTACIÓN: Si el indicador de alimentación está encendido o parpadea, significa que el equipo recibe alimentación. Si el indicador de alimentación parpadea, el equipo está en el estado de Suspensión: pulse el botón de alimentación para salir del estado de Suspensión. Si el indicador luminoso está apagado, pulse el botón de alimentación para encender el equipo. NOTA: Para obtener información sobre el estado Suspensión, consulte el apartado "Uso del estado de Suspensión" en la página 55. CARGUE L A BATERÍA: Puede que la carga de batería se haya agotado. 1 Vuelva a instalar la batería. 2 Utilice el adaptador de CA para conectar el equipo a una toma de alimentación eléctrica. 3 Enciéndalo. NOTA: El tiempo de funcionamiento de la batería (el tiempo que la batería puede mantener una carga) disminuye con el tiempo. En función de la frecuencia y las condiciones de uso de la batería, es posible que deba comprar una nueva batería durante la vida útil del equipo.130 Solución de problemas COMPRUEBE EL INDICADOR DE ESTADO DE LA BATERÍA: Si el indicador parpadea en color ámbar o muestra un color ámbar continuo, significa que la carga de la batería está baja o agotada. Conecte el equipo a una toma de alimentación eléctrica. Si el indicador parpadea en colores azul y ámbar, significa que la batería está demasiado caliente para cargarla. Apague el equipo, desconéctelo de la toma de alimentación eléctrica y, a continuación, deje que la batería se enfríe a temperatura ambiente. Si el indicador de estado de la batería parpadea rápidamente en color ámbar, puede que la batería esté defectuosa. Póngase en contacto con Dell(consulte el apartado "Cómo ponerse en contacto con Dell" en la página 187). COMPRUEBE L A TEMPERATURA D E L A BATERÍA: Si está por debajo de los 0 °C (32 °F), el equipo no se iniciará. PRUEBE L A TOMA D E ALIMENTACIÓN ELÉCTRICA: Asegúrese de que la toma de alimentación eléctrica funciona; para ello, pruébela con otro dispositivo, por ejemplo, una lámpara. COMPRUEBE E L ADAPTADOR D E CA: Compruebe las conexiones de cable del adaptador de CA. Si el adaptador de CA tiene una luz, asegúrese de que esté encendida. CONECTE E L EQUIPO DIRECTAMENTE A UNA TOMA D E ALIMENTACIÓN ELÉCTRICA: Omita los dispositivos protectores de la alimentación, regletas de enchufes y cables alargadores para comprobar que el equipo se enciende. ELIMINE LAS POSIBLES INTERFERENCIAS: Apague los ventiladores, luces fluorescentes, lámparas halógenas u otros aparatos cercanos. AJUSTE LAS PROPIEDADES D E L A ALIMENTACIÓN: Consulte el apartado "Configuración de los valores de administración de energía" en la página 55. VUELVA A COLOCAR LOS MÓDULOS D E MEMORIA: Si el indicador de alimentación del equipo se enciende pero la pantalla continúa en blanco, vuelva a instalar los módulos de memoria (consulte el apartado "Memoria" en la página 157).Solución de problemas 131 Problemas con la impresora Rellene la "Lista de verificación de diagnósticos" en la página 186 a medida que realiza estas comprobaciones. PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de esta sección, siga las instrucciones de seguridad incluidas en la Guía de información del producto. NOTA: Si necesita asistencia técnica para su impresora, póngase en contacto con el fabricante de la misma. COMPRUEBE L A DOCUMENTACIÓN DE L A IMPRESORA: Consulte la documentación de la impresora para obtener información acerca de la configuración y la solución de problemas. COMPRUEBE QUE L A IMPRESORA ESTÁ ENCENDIDA COMPRUEBE LAS CONEXIONES D E LOS CABLES D E L A IMPRESORA: • Consulte la documentación de la impresora para obtener información acerca de la conexión de cables. • Asegúrese de que los cables de la impresora estén conectados de manera segura a la impresora y al equipo. PRUEBE L A TOMA D E ALIMENTACIÓN ELÉCTRICA: Asegúrese de que la toma de alimentación eléctrica funciona; para ello, pruébela con otro dispositivo, por ejemplo, una lámpara. COMPRUEBE QUE WINDOWS RECONOCE L A IMPRESORA: 1 Haga clic en Inicio →Panel de control→Hardware y sonido→Impresoras. 2 Haga clic con el botón derecho en el icono de la impresora. 3 Haga clic en Propiedades y, a continuación, en la ficha Puertos. En una impresora en paralelo, asegúrese de que la configuración Imprimir en los siguientes puertos: está definida como LPT1 (Puerto de impresora). En una impresora USB, asegúrese de que la configuración Imprimir en los siguientes puertos: está definida como USB. VUELVA A INSTALAR EL CONTROLADOR DE LA IMPRESORA: Consulte la documentación de la impresora para obtener instrucciones.132 Solución de problemas Problemas con el escáner PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de esta sección, siga las instrucciones de seguridad incluidas en la Guía de información del producto. NOTA: Si necesita asistencia técnica con su escáner, póngase en contacto con el fabricante del mismo. COMPRUEBE L A DOCUMENTACIÓN DEL ESCÁNER: Consulte la documentación del escáner para obtener información acerca de la configuración y la solución de problemas. DESBLOQUEE E L ESCÁNER: Asegúrese de que el escáner está desbloqueado. REINICIE E L EQUIPO Y VUELVA A PROBAR E L ESCÁNER COMPRUEBE LAS CONEXIONES D E CABLE: • Consulte la documentación del escáner para obtener información acerca de la conexión de cables. • Asegúrese de que los cables del escáner estén conectados de manera segura al escáner y al equipo. COMPRUEBE QUE MICROSOFT WINDOWS RECONOCE E L ESCÁNER. Haga clic Inicio → Panel de control→ Hardware y sonido→ Escáneres y cámaras. Si el escáner aparece en la lista, significa que Windows reconoce el escáner. VUELVA A INSTALAR EL CONTROLADOR DEL ESCÁNER: Consulte la documentación incluida con el escáner para obtener instrucciones. Problemas con el sonido y los altavoces Rellene la "Lista de verificación de diagnósticos" en la página 186 a medida que realiza estas comprobaciones. PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de esta sección, siga las instrucciones de seguridad incluidas en la Guía de información del producto.Solución de problemas 133 Los altavoces integrados no emiten ningún sonido. AJUSTE E L CONTROL D E VOLUMEN D E WINDOWS: Haga doble clic en el icono de altavoz que se encuentra en la esquina inferior derecha de la pantalla. Asegúrese de que ha subido el volumen y no ha silenciado el sonido. Ajuste los controles de volumen, graves o agudos para eliminar la distorsión. AJUSTE E L VOLUMEN UTILIZANDO MÉTODOS ABREVIADOS D E TECLADO: Pulse para desactivar (quitar el sonido) o volver a activar los altavoces integrados. VUELVA A INSTALAR E L CONTROLADOR D E SONIDO (AUDIO): Consulte el apartado "Reinstalación de controladores y utilidades" en la página 137. Los altavoces externos no emiten ningún sonido COMPRUEBE QUE LOS ALTAVOCES Y LOS ALTAVOCES DE TONOS BAJOS ESTÁN ENCENDIDOS: Consulte el diagrama de instalación proporcionado con los altavoces. Si los altavoces tienen control de volumen, ajuste el volumen, los agudos o los graves para eliminar la distorsión. AJUSTE E L CONTROL D E VOLUMEN D E WINDOWS: Haga clic o doble clic en el icono en forma de altavoz que aparece en el margen inferior derecho de la pantalla. Asegúrese de que ha subido el volumen y no ha silenciado el sonido. DESCONECTE LOS AURICULARES DEL CONECTOR PARA AURICULARES: El sonido de los altavoces se desactiva automáticamente cuando se conectan los auriculares al conector para auriculares. PRUEBE L A TOMA D E ALIMENTACIÓN ELÉCTRICA: Asegúrese de que la toma de alimentación eléctrica funciona; para ello, pruébela con otro dispositivo, por ejemplo, una lámpara. ELIMINE LAS POSIBLES INTERFERENCIAS: Apague las luces fluorescentes, lámparas halógenas o ventiladores cercanos para comprobar si se producen interferencias. VUELVA A INSTALAR EL CONTROLADOR DE AUDIO: Consulte el apartado "Reinstalación de controladores y utilidades" en la página 137. EJECUTE LOS DELL DIAGNOSTICS (DIAGNÓSTICOS DELL): Consulte el apartado "Dell Diagnostics" en la página 105. NOTA: El control de volumen de ciertos reproductores de MP3 anula la configuración de volumen de Windows. Si ha estado escuchando canciones en formato MP3, asegúrese de que el control de volumen del reproductor no está puesto al mínimo ni se ha desactivado.134 Solución de problemas Los auriculares no emiten ningún sonido COMPRUEBE L A CONEXIÓN DEL CABLE DEL AURICULAR: Asegúrese de que el cable del auricular está bien insertado en el conector del auricular (consulte la "Conectores de audio" en la página 29). AJUSTE EL CONTROL DE VOLUMEN DE WINDOWS: Haga clic o doble clic en el icono en forma de altavoz que aparece en el margen inferior derecho de la pantalla. Asegúrese de que ha subido el volumen y no ha silenciado el sonido. Problemas con la superficie táctil o el ratón COMPRUEBE L A CONFIGURACIÓN DEL RATÓN TÁCTIL: 1 Haga clic en Inicio →Panel de control→Hardware y sonido→ Mouse. 2 Ajuste los valores según precise. COMPRUEBE E L CABLE DEL RATÓN: Apague el equipo, desconecte el cable del ratón y compruebe si está dañado. A continuación vuelva a conectarlo firmemente. Si utiliza un cable alargador para el ratón, desconéctelo y conéctelo directamente al equipo. PARA COMPROBAR QUE S E TRATA D E U N PROBLEMA CON E L RATÓN, EXAMINE L A SUPERFICIE TÁCTIL: 1 Apague el equipo. 2 Desconecte el ratón. 3 Enciéndalo. 4 En el escritorio de Windows, use la superficie táctil para mover el cursor, seleccione un icono y ábralo. Si la superficie táctil funciona correctamente, esto quiere decir que el ratón debe estar defectuoso. COMPRUEBE LOS VALORES DEL PROGRAMA DE CONFIGURACIÓN DEL SISTEMA: Verifique que el programa de configuración muestra el dispositivo correcto para la opción de dispositivo señalador (el equipo reconoce automáticamente un ratón USB sin tener que realizar ningún ajuste). PRUEBE LA CONTROLADORA DEL RATÓN: para probar la controladora del ratón (que afecta al movimiento del apuntador) y el funcionamiento de la superficie táctil o de los botones del ratón, ejecute la prueba del ratón en el grupo de pruebas Pointing Devices (Dispositivos apuntadores) en "Dell Diagnostics" en la página 105. REINSTALE EL CONTROLADOR DEL RATÓN TÁCTIL: Consulte el apartado "Reinstalación de controladores y utilidades" en la página 137.Solución de problemas 135 Problemas con el vídeo y la pantalla Rellene la "Lista de verificación de diagnósticos" en la página 186 a medida que realiza estas comprobaciones. PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de esta sección, siga las instrucciones de seguridad incluidas en la Guía de información del producto. Si la pantalla aparece en blanco NOTA: Si utiliza un programa que requiere una resolución superior a la que admite el equipo, se recomienda conectar un monitor externo. COMPRUEBE L A BATERÍA: Si utiliza una batería para la alimentación del equipo, puede que se haya agotado. Conecte el equipo a una toma de alimentación eléctrica con el adaptador de CA y, a continuación, enciéndalo. PRUEBE L A TOMA D E ALIMENTACIÓN ELÉCTRICA: Asegúrese de que la toma de alimentación eléctrica funciona; para ello, pruébela con otro dispositivo, por ejemplo, una lámpara. COMPRUEBE EL ADAPTADOR DE CA: Compruebe las conexiones de cable del adaptador de CA. Si el adaptador de CA tiene una luz, asegúrese de que esté encendida. CONECTE E L EQUIPO DIRECTAMENTE A UNA TOMA D E ALIMENTACIÓN ELÉCTRICA: Omita los dispositivos protectores de la alimentación, regletas de enchufes y cables alargadores para comprobar que el equipo se enciende. AJUSTE LAS PROPIEDADES D E L A ALIMENTACIÓN: Busque la palabra clave suspensión en el Centro de ayuda y soporte técnico de Windows. CAMBIE LA IMAGEN DE VÍDEO: Si el equipo está conectado a un monitor externo, pulse para cambiar la imagen de vídeo a la pantalla. Si resulta difícil leer la pantalla AJUSTE E L BRILLO: Pulse y la tecla de flecha hacia arriba o hacia abajo. ALEJE EL ALTAVOZ EXTERNO DE TONOS BAJOS DEL EQUIPO O DEL MONITOR: Si el sistema de altavoces externos incluye un altavoz para bajas frecuencias, asegúrese de que dicho altavoz se encuentra como mínimo a 60 cm (2 pies) del equipo o del monitor externo. ELIMINE LAS POSIBLES INTERFERENCIAS: Apague los ventiladores, luces fluorescentes, lámparas halógenas u otros aparatos cercanos. ORIENTE E L EQUIPO HACIA OTRA DIRECCIÓN: Evite los reflejos de la luz solar, que pueden causar una calidad baja de la imagen.136 Solución de problemas AJUSTE L A CONFIGURACIÓN D E PANTALLA D E WINDOWS: 1 Haga clic en Inicio →Panel de control→Apariencia y personalización→ Personalización→ Configuración de pantalla. 2 Haga clic sobre la zona que desea cambiar o en el icono Pantalla. Pruebe valores diferentes en Resolución y Colores. EJECUTE LAS PRUEBAS DE DIAGNÓSTICO DE VÍDEO: Si no aparece ningún mensaje de error y sigue teniendo un problema de pantalla, pero ésta no aparece completamente en blanco, ejecute el grupo de dispositivos de Vídeo de los "Dell Diagnostics" en la página 105 y póngase en contacto con Dell (consulte el apartado "Cómo ponerse en contacto con Dell" en la página 187). CONSULTE E L APARTADO "MENSAJES D E ERROR": Si aparece un mensaje de error, consulte el apartado "Mensajes de error" en la página 114. Si sólo se puede leer parte de la pantalla CONECTE U N MONITOR EXTERNO: 1 Apague el equipo y conecte un monitor externo. 2 Encienda el equipo y el monitor y ajuste los controles de brillo y contraste del monitor. Si el monitor externo funciona, es posible que el controlador de vídeo o la pantalla del equipo estén defectuosas. Póngase en contacto con Dell (consulte el apartado "Cómo ponerse en contacto con Dell" en la página 187). Controladores ¿Qué es un controlador? Un controlador es un programa que controla un dispositivo, como por ejemplo una impresora, un ratón o un teclado. Todos los dispositivos necesitan un controlador. Un controlador funciona como traductor entre el dispositivo y los programas que lo utilizan. Cada dispositivo posee un conjunto propio de comandos especializados que sólo su controlador puede reconocer. Dell le suministra el equipo con todos los controladores necesarios instalados, no necesita realizar más labores de instalación ni configuración.Solución de problemas 137 AVISO: El soporte Drivers and Utilities (Controladores y utilidades) puede contener controladores para sistemas operativos no instalados en el equipo. Asegúrese de instalar el software adecuado para el sistema operativo instalado. Un gran número de controladores, como los de teclado, vienen incluidos en el sistema operativo de Microsoft® Windows®. Deberá instalar controladores en los casos siguientes: • Si desea actualizar el sistema operativo. • Vuelva a instalar el sistema operativo. • Si desea conectar o instalar un nuevo dispositivo. Cómo identificar los controladores Si experimenta problemas con algún dispositivo, determine si el origen del problema es el controlador y, en caso necesario, actualícelo. 1 Haga clic en Inicio y con el botón derecho en PC. 2 Haga clic en Propiedades y, a continuación, en Administrador de dispositivos. NOTA: Es posible que aparezca la ventana Control de cuentas de usuario. Si es usted un administrador del equipo, haga clic en Continuar; en caso contrario, póngase en contacto con su administrador para continuar. Desplácese por la lista de dispositivos y compruebe si hay algún signo de exclamación (un círculo con una [!]) al lado del nombre del dispositivo. Si hay un signo de admiración junto al nombre del dispositivo, posiblemente tendrá que reinstalar el controlador o instalar uno nuevo (consulte el apartado "Reinstalación de controladores y utilidades" en la página 137). Reinstalación de controladores y utilidades AVISO: El sitio Web de soporte técnico de Dell en support.dell.com y el soporte Drivers and Utilities proporcionan controladores aprobados para los equipos Dell. Si instala controladores obtenidos de otras fuentes, puede que el ordenador no funcione correctamente. Cómo usar la desinstalación del controlador de dispositivo de Windows Si se produce un problema en el ordenador después de instalar o actualizar un controlador, utilice la función Desinstalación del controlador de dispositivo de Windows para restaurar la versión previamente instalada del controlador. 1 Haga clic en Inicio y con el botón derecho en Mi PC.138 Solución de problemas 2 Haga clic en Propiedades y, a continuación, en Administrador de dispositivos. NOTA: Es posible que aparezca la ventana Control de cuentas de usuario. Si es usted un administrador del equipo, haga clic en Continuar; en caso contrario, póngase en contacto con su administrador para entrar en el Administrador de dispositivos. 3 Haga clic con el botón derecho del ratón en el dispositivo para el que se ha instalado el nuevo controlador y haga clic en Properties (Propiedades). 4 Haga clic en la ficha Drivers (Controladores) y, a continuación, en Roll Back Driver (Desinstalar controlador). Si la función Volver al controlador anterior de dispositivos no soluciona el problema, utilice la función Restaurar el sistema (consulte el apartado "Restauración del sistema operativo" en la página 140) para volver al estado operativo existente en el equipo antes de la instalación del nuevo controlador. Uso del soporte Drivers and Utilities (Controladores y utilidades) Si usandoVolver al controlador anterior o Restaurar sistema (consulte el apartado "Restauración del sistema operativo" en la página 140) no se resuelve el problema, vuelva a instalar el controlador desde el soporte Drivers and Utilities. 1 Con el escritorio de Windows en pantalla, inserte el soporte Drivers and Utilities. Si ésta es la primera vez que usa el soporte Drivers and Utilities, continúe en el paso 2. En caso contrario, vaya al paso 5. 2 Cuando se inicie el programa de instalación de Drivers and Utilities, siga las indicaciones de la pantalla. NOTA: En la mayoría de casos, el programa de Drivers and Utilities se empieza a ejecutar automáticamente. En caso contrario, inicie Windows Explorer, haga clic en el directorio de la unidad del soporte para mostrar el contenido del mismo y, a continuación, haga doble clic en el archivo autorcd.exe. 3 Cuando aparezca la ventana Asistente InstallShield completo, retire el disco Drivers and Utilities y haga clic en Terminar para reiniciar el equipo. 4 Cuando vea el escritorio de Windows, vuelva a introducir el disco Drivers and Utilities. 5 En la pantalla Bienvenida del propietario del sistema Dell, haga clic en Siguiente.Solución de problemas 139 NOTA: El programa Drivers and Utilities muestra solamente los controladores del hardware que tiene instalado el equipo. Si instala software adicional, es posible que no se muestren los controladores del nuevo hardware. Si es así, salga del programa del programa Drivers and Utilities. Para obtener información sobre los controladores, consulte la documentación incluida con el dispositivo. Aparecerá un mensaje indicando que el programa Drivers and Utilities está detectando el hardware del equipo. Los controladores que usa el equipo se muestran automáticamente en la ventana Mis controladores: el ResourceCD ha identificado estos componentes en el sistema. 6 Haga clic en el controlador que desee volver a instalar y siga las instrucciones de la pantalla. Si no aparece un controlador en particular, el sistema operativo no lo necesita. Reinstalación manual de controladores NOTA: Si el equipo tiene un IR de consumo y se vuelve a instalar un controlador de éste, primero debe activar el puerto del IR de consumo en el programa de configuración del sistema (consulte el apartado "Uso del programa Configuración del sistema" en la página 197) antes de continuar con la instalación del controlador (consulte el apartado "Reinstalación de controladores y utilidades" en la página 137). Para obtener información acerca de los componentes instalados en el ordenador, consulte el apartado "Determinación de la configuración del equipo" en la página 21. 1 Después de extraer los archivos del controlador en la unidad de disco duro como describe la sección anterior, haga clic en el botón Inicio y, a continuación, haga clic con el botón derecho en PC. 2 Haga clic en Propiedades y, a continuación, en Administrador de dispositivos. 3 Haga doble clic en el tipo de dispositivo para el que va a instalar el controlador (por ejemplo, Módems o Dispositivos de infrarrojos). 4 Haga doble clic en el nombre del dispositivo para el que está instalando el controlador. 5 Haga clic en la ficha Driver (Controlador) y, a continuación, haga clic en Update Driver (Actualizar controlador). 6 Haga clic en Instalar desde una lista o ubicación específica (avanzado) y, a continuación, haga clic en Siguiente.140 Solución de problemas 7 Haga clic en Examinar y vaya al sitio en el que previamente se copiaron los archivos de los controladores. 8 Cuando aparezca el nombre del controlador adecuado, haga clic en Siguiente. 9 Haga clic en Terminar y, a continuación, reinicie el equipo. Solución de problemas de software y hardware Si un dispositivo no se detecta durante la configuración del sistema operativo o se detecta pero no está configurado correctamente, puede utilizar Windows Vista Help and Support (Ayuda y soporte técnico de Windows Vista) para solucionar la incompatibilidad: 1 Haga clic en Inicio → Ayuda y soporte técnico. 2 Escriba hardware troubleshooter (solucionador de problemas de hardware) en el campo de búsqueda y, a continuación, pulse (Entrar). 3 En los resultados de la búsqueda seleccione la opción que mejor describa el problema y sigua el resto de pasos para solucionarlo. Restauración del sistema operativo Puede restaurar su sistema operativo de la siguiente manera: • La función System Restore (Restaurar el sistema) de Microsoft Windows Vista devuelve el equipo a un estado operativo anterior sin que esto afecte a los archivos de datos. Utilice Restaurar Sistema como la primera solución para recuperar su sistema operativo y conservar los archivos de datos. Para obtener instrucciones, consulte "Uso de Restaurar el sistema de Microsoft Windows" en la página 141. • La función Restaurar PC de Dell por Symantec restaura su unidad de disco duro al estado operativo en el que estaba cuando adquirió el equipo. La función PC Restore (Restaurar PC) de Dell borra permanentemente todos los datos de la unidad de disco duro y quita cualquier aplicación que se instaló después de haber recibido el equipo. Use PC Restore (Restaurar PC) únicamente si Restaurar sistema no soluciona su problema en el sistema operativo. Para obtener instrucciones, consulte "Uso de Restaurar PC de Dell por Symantec" en la página 142.Solución de problemas 141 • Si ha recibido un soporte del Sistema operativo con el equipo, puede utilizarlo para restaurar el sistema operativo. Sin embargo, utilizar el soporte del sistema operativo también provoca la eliminación de todos los datos de la unidad de disco duro. Utilice el soporte sólo si la función Restaurar el sistema no resolvió el problema del sistema operativo. Para obtener instrucciones, consulte "Uso del soporte del Sistema operativo" en la página 144. Uso de Restaurar el sistema de MicrosoftWindows El sistema operativo Windows proporciona la función Restaurar el sistema, que permite volver a un estado operativo anterior del equipo (sin que ello afecte a los archivos de datos) si, al realizar cambios en el hardware, en el software o en otros valores del sistema, el ordenador se encuentra en un estado operativo no deseado. Cualquier cambio que haga Restaurar el sistema en el equipo será totalmente reversible. AVISO: Realice copias de seguridad periódicas de los archivos de datos. La función Restaurar sistema no supervisa ni recupera los archivos de datos. NOTA: Los procedimientos en este documento fueron escritos para la vista predeterminada de Windows, por lo que podrían no funcionar si cambia el ordenador Dell a la vista clásica de Windows. 1 Haga clic en Inicio → Ayuda y soporte técnico. 2 Escriba Restaurar sistema en el campo de búsqueda y, a continuación, pulse . NOTA: Es posible que aparezca la ventana Control de cuentas de usuario. Si es usted un administrador del equipo, haga clic en Continue (Continuar); en caso contrario, póngase en contacto con su administrador para continuar con la acción que desee. 3 Haga clic en Siguiente y siga las restantes indicaciones de la pantalla. En el caso de que Restaurar el sistema no resuelva el problema, puede deshacer la última restauración del sistema. Cómo deshacer la última operación de Restaurar el sistema AVISO: Antes de deshacer la última restauración del sistema, guarde y cierre todos los archivos abiertos y cierre todos los programas. No modifique, abra ni suprima ningún archivo ni programa hasta que la restauración del sistema haya finalizado. 1 Haga clic en Inicio → Ayuda y soporte técnico.142 Solución de problemas 2 Escriba Restaurar sistema en el campo de búsqueda y pulse . 3 Haga clic en Deshacer la última restauración y, a continuación, haga clic en Siguiente. Uso de Restaurar PC de Dell por Symantec AVISO: Al utilizar la función Restaurar PC de Dell se borrarán permanentemente todos los datos de la unidad de disco duro y se eliminarán los programas de aplicación o controladores instalados después de haber recibido el equipo. Si es posible, cree una copia de seguridad de todos los datos antes de utilizar la función Restaurar PC. Use Restaurar PC únicamente si Restaurar sistema (consulte el apartado "Uso de Restaurar el sistema de MicrosoftWindows" en la página 141) no soluciona su problema en el sistema operativo. NOTA: Es posible que Restaurar PC de Dell por Symantec no esté disponible en determinados países o determinados equipos. Utilícela solamente como último recurso para restaurar su sistema operativo. La función Restaurar PC restaura su unidad de disco duro al estado operativo en el que estaba cuando adquirió el equipo. Todos los programas o archivos que se hayan agregado desde que recibió el equipo, incluidos los archivos de datos, se borrarán permanentemente de la unidad de disco duro. Los archivos de datos incluyen documentos, hojas de cálculo, mensajes de correo electrónico, fotos digitales, archivos de música, etc. Si es posible, haga copia de seguridad de los datos antes de usar Restaurar PC. Para utilizar la función Restaurar PC: 1 Enciéndalo. Durante el proceso de inicio, aparecerá una barra azul con www.dell.com en la parte superior de la pantalla. 2 Pulse inmediatamente después de ver la barra azul. Si no logra pulsar a tiempo, deje que el equipo termine el reinicio y vuelva a reiniciarlo de nuevo. AVISO: Si no desea continuar con la función Restaurar PC, haga clic en Reiniciar en el siguiente paso. 3 En la siguiente pantalla que aparezca, haga clic en Restaurar. 4 Haga clic en Confirmar. El proceso de restauración tardará aproximadamente 6 – 10 minutos en finalizar.Solución de problemas 143 5 Cuando se le indique, haga clic en Finalizar para reiniciar el equipo. NOTA: No apague el equipo manualmente. Haga clic en Finalizar y deje que el equipo se reinicie completamente. 6 Cuando se le indique, haga clic en Sí. El equipo se reiniciará. Puesto que el equipo se restaura a su estado operativo original, las pantallas que aparecen, como, por ejemplo, la pantalla Contrato de licencia del usuario final, son las mismas que aparecen cuando se enciende por primera vez. 7 Haga clic en Siguiente. Aparece la pantalla Restaurar sistema y, a continuación, el equipo se reinicia. 8 Cuando se reinicie, haga clic en Aceptar. Eliminación de la función Restaurar PC de Dell AVISO: Al eliminar la función Restaurar PC de Dell de la unidad de disco duro, se eliminará de manera permanente del ordenador la utilidad Restaurar PC. Después de eliminar la función Restaurar PC de Dell, no podrá utilizarla para restaurar el sistema operativo del equipo. La función Restaurar PC de Dell le permite restaurar la unidad de disco duro al estado operativo en el que estaba cuando compró el equipo. Se recomienda no eliminar la función Restaurar PC del equipo, incluso si es para obtener espacio adicional en el disco duro. Si elimina la función Restaurar PC de la unidad de disco duro, nunca podrá volver a recuperarla ni tampoco utilizarla para devolver el sistema operativo del ordenador a su estado original. Para eliminar la función Restaurar PC: 1 Inicie el equipo como administrador local. 2 En el Explorador de Windows, vaya a c:\dell\utilities\DSR. 3 Haga doble clic en el nombre de archivo DSRIRRemv2.exe. NOTA: Si no inicia el equipo como administrador local, aparecerá un mensaje indicándole que debe hacerlo. Haga clic en Salir e inicie el equipo como administrador local. NOTA: Si la partición para la función Restaurar PC no existe en la unidad de disco duro, aparecerá un mensaje indicando que no se ha encontrado la partición. Haga clic en Salir; no hay partición que suprimir.144 Solución de problemas 4 Haga clic en Aceptar para retirar la partición para la función Restaurar PC de la unidad de disco duro. 5 Haga clic en Sí para confirmar. La partición PC Restore (Restaurar PC) se suprime y el espacio de disco que se acaba de liberar se añade a la asignación de espacio libre de la unidad de disco duro. 6 Haga clic con el botón derecho del ratón en Local Disk (C:) (Disco local C:) en Windows Explorer y en Propidades y compruebe que el espacio adicional del disco está disponible como indica el valor aumentado de Espacio disponible. 7 Haga clic en Finalizar para cerrar la ventana Eliminación de la función Restaurar PC. 8 Reinicie el equipo. Uso del soporte del Sistema operativo Antes de comenzar Si está considerando volver a instalar el sistema operativo de Windows para corregir un problema con un controlador instalado recientemente, inténtelo primero utilizando Volver al controlador anterior de dispositivos Windows (consulte el apartado "Cómo usar la desinstalación del controlador de dispositivo de Windows" en la página 137). Si la función Device Driver Rollback (Desinstalación del controlador de dispositivos) no resuelve el problema, use la función Restaurar sistema para que el sistema operativo vuelva al estado anterior a la instalación del nuevo controlador de dispositivos (consulte el apartado "Uso de Restaurar el sistema de MicrosoftWindows" en la página 141). AVISO: Antes de llevar a cabo la instalación, haga una copia de seguridad de todos los archivos de datos en el disco duro principal. En las configuraciones convencionales de disco duro, la unidad de disco duro es la primera que detecta el equipo. Para volver a instalar Windows, necesitará los elementos siguientes: • Soporte del Sistema operativo de Dell • Soporte Drivers and Utilities de Dell NOTA: El soporte Drivers and Utilities contiene controladores que fueron instalados durante el montaje del equipo. Use el soporte Drivers and Utilities para cargar cualquier controlador que necesite, incluyeno los que necesite si su equipo tiene un controlador RAID. Solución de problemas 145 Reinstalación de Windows El proceso de reinstalación puede durar entre una y dos horas. Una vez finalizada la reinstalación del sistema operativo, deberá reinstalar los controladores de dispositivo, el antivirus y los demás programas de software. AVISO: El soporte del sistema operativo proporciona opciones para volver a instalar Windows. Estas opciones pueden llegar a sobrescribir archivos y pueden afectar a las aplicaciones instaladas en la unidad de disco duro. Por lo tanto, se recomienda no reinstalar Windows a menos que se lo indique un representante de asistencia técnica de Dell. 1 Guarde y cierre los archivos que tenga abiertos y salga de todos los programas. 2 Inserte el soporte del sistema operativo. 3 Haga clic en Salir si aparece el mensaje Instalar Windows. 4 Reinicie el equipo. Cuando aparezca el logotipo de DELL, pulse inmediatamente. NOTA: Si espera demasiado y aparece el logotipo del sistema operativo, siga esperando hasta que aparezca el escritorio de Microsoft Windows; a continuación, apague el equipo e inténtelo de nuevo. NOTA: Los pasos a continuación cambian la secuencia de inicio sólo una vez. En la siguiente rutina de inicio, el equipo se iniciará conforme a los dispositivos especificados en el programa de configuración del sistema. 5 Cuando aparezca la lista de dispositivos de inicio, resalte Unidad de CD/DVD/CD-RW y, a continuación, pulse . 6 Pulse cualquier tecla para Iniciar desde CD-ROM. 7 Siga las instrucciones que aparecen en la pantalla para completar la instalación.146 Solución de problemasAdición y sustitución de piezas 147 Adición y sustitución de piezas Antes de comenzar En este capítulo se describen los procedimientos para extraer e instalar los componentes del equipo. A menos que se señale lo contrario, cada procedimiento asume que existen las siguientes condiciones: • Ha llevado a cabo los pasos de los apartados "Apagar el equipo" en la página 147 y "Antes de trabajar en el interior de su equipo" en la página 148. • Ha leído la información de seguridad en su Guía de información del producto de Dell. • Se puede sustituir un componente o, si se ha adquirido por separado, instalarlo realizando el procedimiento de extracción en orden inverso. Herramientas recomendadas Los procedimientos incluidos en este documento podrían requerir el uso de las siguientes herramientas: • Un destornillador pequeño de paletas planas • Un destornillador Phillips • Una punta trazadora de plástico pequeña • Actualización del BIOS flash (consulte el sitio Web de soporte técnico de Dell en support.dell.com) Apagar el equipo AVISO: Para evitar la pérdida de datos, guarde y cierre todos los archivos abiertos y salga de todos los programas abiertos antes de apagar el equipo. 1 Guarde y cierre los archivos que tenga abiertos y salga de todos los programas. 2 Haga clic en Inicio , en la flecha y, a continuación, en Apagar. El equipo se apaga una vez finalizado el proceso de cierre del sistema operativo.148 Adición y sustitución de piezas 3 Asegúrese de que tanto el equipo como los dispositivos conectados estén apagados. Si no se apagan automáticamente al cerrar el sistema operativo, mantenga presionado el botón de alimentación durante al menos 8 a 10 segundos hasta apagar el equipo. Antes de trabajar en el interior de su equipo Aplique las siguientes pautas de seguridad para proteger el ordenador contra posibles daños y garantizar su propia seguridad personal. PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de esta sección, siga las instrucciones de seguridad incluidas en la Guía de información del producto. PRECAUCIÓN: Manipule los componentes y las tarjetas con precaución. No toque los componentes o contactos ubicados en una tarjeta. Sostenga las tarjetas por sus bordes o por su soporte metálico de montaje. Sujete los componentes, como el procesador, por sus bordes y no por sus patas. AVISO: Sólo un técnico certificado debe realizar reparaciones en el equipo. La garantía no cubre los daños por reparaciones no autorizadas por Dell. AVISO: Cuando desconecte un cable, tire de su conector o del lazo liberador de tensión, no tire directamente del cable. Algunos cables cuentan con un conector que tiene lengüetas de sujeción; si está desconectando un cable de este tipo, presione las lengüetas de sujeción antes de desconectar el cable. Cuando separe conectores, manténgalos alineados para evitar doblar las patas de conexión. Además, antes de conectar un cable, asegúrese de que los dos conectores estén orientados y alineados correctamente. AVISO: Para evitar descargas electrostáticas, toque tierra mediante el uso de una muñequera de conexión a tierra o toque periódicamente una superficie metálica no pintada (por ejemplo, un conector de la parte posterior del equipo). AVISO: Para evitar daños en el equipo, realice los pasos siguientes antes de comenzar a trabajar dentro de él. 1 Asegúrese de que la superficie de trabajo sea llana y esté limpia para evitar que la cubierta del equipo se raye. 2 Apague el equipo (consulte el apartado "Apagar el equipo" en la página 147). AVISO: Para desconectar un cable de red, desconecte primero el cable del ordenador y, a continuación, del enchufe de red de la pared. 3 Desconecte cualquier teléfono o cable de red del equipo.Adición y sustitución de piezas 149 4 Desconecte el equipo y todos los dispositivos conectados de sus tomas de alimentación eléctrica. AVISO: Para evitar daños en la placa base, debe retirar la batería de su compartimento antes de realizar reparaciones. NOTA: Para evitar daños en el ordenador, utilice únicamente la batería diseñada específicamente para este ordenador Dell. No utilice baterías diseñadas para otros equipos Dell. 5 Dé la vuelta al ordenador. 6 Deslice y haga clic con los pasadores de liberación de la batería. 7 Deslice la batería fuera del compartimento. 8 Dé la vuelta al equipo, abra la pantalla y pulse el botón de alimentación para conectar a tierra la placa base. 9 Extraiga todas las tarjetas instaladas de la ranura ExpressCard (consulte el apartado "Extracción de una ExpressCard o de un panel protector" en la página 85) y del lector de tarjetas de memoria de medios 8 en 1 (consulte el apartado "Cómo retirar una tarjeta de memoria o panel protector" en la página 89). 1 Batería 2 Pasadores de liberación de la batería (2) 1 2150 Adición y sustitución de piezas Unidad de disco duro PRECAUCIÓN: Si extrae la unidad de disco duro del equipo cuando la unidad está caliente, no toque la caja metálica de dicha unidad. PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de esta sección, siga las instrucciones de seguridad incluidas en la Guía de información del producto. AVISO: Para evitar la pérdida de datos, apague el equipo (consulte el apartado "Apagar el equipo" en la página 147) antes de extraer la unidad de disco duro. No extraiga la unidad de disco duro mientras el equipo esté encendido o en el estado de Suspensión. AVISO: Los discos duros son extremadamente frágiles. Actúe con cuidado cuando los manipule. NOTA: Dell no garantiza la compatibilidad ni proporciona soporte técnico para las unidades de disco duro de fabricantes que no sean Dell. NOTA: Si va a instalar una unidad de disco duro desde un recurso que no sea Dell, tendrá que instalar un sistema operativo, controladores y utilidades en la nueva unidad de disco duro (consulte los apartados "Restauración del sistema operativo" en la página 140 y "Reinstalación de controladores y utilidades" en la página 137). Extracción de la unidad de disco duro 1 Siga los procedimientos del apartado "Antes de comenzar" en la página 147. 2 Dé la vuelta al ordenador y retire los tornillos de la unidad de disco duro.Adición y sustitución de piezas 151 AVISO: Cuando la unidad de disco duro no se encuentre en el equipo, guárdela en un embalaje protector antiestático (consulte el apartado "Protección contra descargas electrostáticas" de la Guía de información del producto). 3 Deslice la unidad de disco duro para extraerla del equipo. Colocación de la unidad de disco disco duro 1 Saque la nueva unidad de su embalaje. Conserve el embalaje original para almacenar o transportar la unidad de disco duro. AVISO: Ejerza una presión firme y constante para deslizar la unidad hasta que encaje en su sitio. Si ejerce una fuerza excesiva, puede dañar el conector. 2 Deslice la unidad de disco duro hasta que esté completamente asentada en el compartimiento. 3 Vuelva a colocar los tornillos y apriételos. 1 Unidad de disco duro 2 Tornillos (4) 1 2152 Adición y sustitución de piezas 4 Instale el sistema operativo del equipo según precise (consulte el apartado "Restauración del sistema operativo" en la página 140). 5 Instale los controladores y utilidades del equipo que precise (consulte el apartado "Reinstalación de controladores y utilidades" en la página 137). Devolución de una unidad de disco duro a Dell Cuando devuelva la unidad de disco duro a Dell, utilice el embalaje de espuma original o un embalaje similar. De lo contrario, la unidad de disco duro puede resultar dañada durante el transporte. Unidad óptica PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de esta sección, siga las instrucciones de seguridad incluidas en la Guía de información del producto. Extracción de la unidad óptica 1 Siga los procedimientos del apartado "Antes de comenzar" en la página 147. 2 Dé la vuelta al ordenador. 3 Extraiga el tornillo de sujeción de la unidad óptica. 1 Embalaje de espuma 2 Unidad de disco duro 2 1Adición y sustitución de piezas 153 4 Con una punta trazadora de plástico, presione la muesca para sacar la unidad óptica de su compartimento. 5 Saque la unidad óptica del compartimento deslizándola. Volver a colocar la unidad óptica. 1 Deslice la unidad óptica en el compartimento. 2 Vuelva a colocar el tornillo de bloqueo y apriételo. 1 Unidad óptica 2 Muesca 3 Tornillo de bloqueo 2 1 3154 Adición y sustitución de piezas Cubierta de las bisagras PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de esta sección, siga las instrucciones de seguridad incluidas en la Guía de información del producto. AVISO: Para evitar descargas electrostáticas, toque tierra mediante el uso de una muñequera de conexión a tierra o toque periódicamente una superficie metálica no pintada (por ejemplo, un conector de la parte posterior del equipo). AVISO: Para evitar daños en la placa base, debe retirar la batería de su compartimento antes de realizar reparaciones en el interior del equipo. Extracción de la cubierta de la bisagra 1 Siga los procedimientos del apartado "Antes de comenzar" en la página 147. 2 Abra la pantalla hasta el tope. AVISO: Para evitar dañar la cubierta de las bisagras, no la levante por los dos lados a la vez. 3 Inserte una punta trazadora de plástico en la muesca para levantar la cubierta con bisagra de la parte derecha. 4 Afloje la cubierta con bisagra, moviéndola de derecha a izquierda, y retírela.Adición y sustitución de piezas 155 Vuelva a colocar la cubierta de la bisagra 1 Inserte el borde izquierdo de la cubierta de la bisagra. 2 Presione de izquierda a derecha hasta que quede perfectamente encajada. Teclado Para obtener más información acerca de la batería, consulte el apartado "Uso del teclado y el ratón táctil" en la página 45. PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de esta sección, siga las instrucciones de seguridad incluidas en la Guía de información del producto. AVISO: Para evitar descargas electrostáticas, toque tierra mediante el uso de una muñequera de conexión a tierra o toque periódicamente una superficie metálica no pintada (por ejemplo, un conector de la parte posterior del equipo). AVISO: Para evitar daños en la placa base, debe retirar la batería de su compartimento antes de realizar reparaciones en el interior del equipo. 1 Cubierta de las bisagras 2 Punta trazadora 1 2156 Adición y sustitución de piezas Extracción del teclado 1 Siga los procedimientos del apartado "Antes de comenzar" en la página 147. 2 Extraiga la cubierta de las bisagras (consulte el apartado "Cubierta de las bisagras" en la página 154). 3 Retire los dos tornillos de la parte superior del teclado. AVISO: Las teclas del teclado son frágiles, se desencajan fácilmente y se pierde mucho tiempo en volver a colocarlas. Tenga cuidado cuando extraiga y manipule el teclado. 4 Levante el teclado manteniéndolo elevado y ligeramente hacia adelante para poder acceder al conector del teclado. 5 Para desconectar el cable del teclado de su conector en la placa base, gire el pasador del conector hacia la parte delantera del equipo. 6 Saque el cable del teclado del conector de éste en la cubierta del módulo de memoria DIMM A. 1 Tornillos (2) 2 Teclado 3 Lengüetas (5) 4 Cable del teclado 5 Palanca de liberación del cable 1 2 4 5 3Adición y sustitución de piezas 157 Volver a colocar el teclado 1 Deslice el cable del teclado en el conector de éste en la cubierta del módulo de memoria DIMM A. 2 Gire el pasador del conector del teclado para fijar el cable. 3 Enganche las lengüetas a lo largo del borde delantero del teclado en el apoyamanos. 4 Presione el borde derecho junto a la parte superior para encajar el teclado en su sitio. 5 Vuelva a colocar los dos tornillos en la parte superior del teclado. Memoria PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de esta sección, siga las instrucciones de seguridad incluidas en la Guía de información del producto . Puede aumentar la memoria del equipo mediante la instalación de módulos de memoria en la placa base. Consulte el apartado "Especificaciones" en la página 189 para obtener información sobre la memoria admitida por el equipo. Instale únicamente módulos de memoria adecuados para él. NOTA: Los módulos de memoria comprados a Dell están incluidos en la garantía del equipo. Su equipo tiene dos zócalos SODIMM accesibles al usuario, uno debajo del teclado (DIMM A), y el otro en la parte inferior del equipo (DIMM B). AVISO: Si su equipo tiene sólo un módulo de memoria, instale el módulo de memoria en el conector con la etiqueta "DIMMA". AVISO: Si necesita instalar módulos de memoria en dos conectores, instale un módulo en el conector con la etiqueta "DIMMA" antes de instalar un módulo en el conector con la etiqueta "DIMMB". Extracción del módulo de memoria DIMM A AVISO: Para evitar descargas electrostáticas, toque tierra mediante el uso de una muñequera de conexión a tierra o toque periódicamente una superficie metálica no pintada (por ejemplo, un conector de la parte posterior del equipo).158 Adición y sustitución de piezas El módulo de memoria DIMM A está situado debajo del teclado. 1 Siga los procedimientos del apartado "Antes de comenzar" en la página 147. 2 Extraiga la cubierta de las bisagras (consulte el apartado "Cubierta de las bisagras" en la página 154). 3 Saque el teclado (consulte el apartado "Teclado" en la página 155). NOTA: No es necesario desconectar el cable del teclado de la cubierta del módulo de memoria. 4 Levante la cubierta del módulo de memoria, pero no la quite. AVISO: Para evitar dañar el conector del módulo de memoria, no utilice herramientas con el fin de separar los ganchos de fijación del módulo. 5 Separe cuidadosamente con la punta de los dedos los ganchos de fijación que se encuentran en los extremos del conector del módulo de memoria hasta que salte el módulo. 6 Extraiga el módulo del conector. 1 Cubierta del módulo de memoria 2 Módulo de memoria (DIMM A) 3 Ganchos (2) 1 2 3Adición y sustitución de piezas 159 Volver a colocar el módulo de memoria DIMM A AVISO: Para evitar descargas electrostáticas, toque tierra mediante el uso de una muñequera de conexión a tierra o toque periódicamente una superficie metálica no pintada (por ejemplo, un conector de la parte posterior del equipo). 1 Alinee la muesca del conector del extremo del módulo con la lengüeta de la ranura del conector. 2 Deslice el módulo firmemente en la ranura formando un ángulo de 45 grados y gírelo hasta que encaje en su sitio con un chasquido. Si no lo nota, retire el módulo y vuelva a instalarlo. NOTA: Si el módulo de memoria no está instalado correctamente, es posible que el equipo no se inicie. Este fallo no se indicará mediante un mensaje de error. 3 Vuelva a colocar la cubierta del módulo de memoria. 4 Vuelva a colocar el teclado y la cubierta de las bisagras. 5 Inserte la batería en el compartimento correspondiente o conecte el adaptador de CA al equipo y a una toma de alimentación eléctrica. 6 Enciéndalo. Al reiniciarse, detectará la memoria adicional y actualizará automáticamente la información de configuración del sistema. Para confirmar la cantidad de memoria instalada en el equipo, haga clic en Inicio → Ayuda y soporte técnico→ Información del sistema Dell. 1 Lengüeta 2 Muesca 1 2160 Adición y sustitución de piezas Extracción del módulo de memoria DIMM B El módulo de memoria DIMM B está situado debajo de la cubierta del módulo de memoria en la parte inferior del equipo. 1 Siga los procedimientos del apartado "Antes de comenzar" en la página 147. 2 Dé la vuelta al equipo, afloje el tornillo cautivo de la cubierta del módulo de memoria (consulte el apartado "Vista inferior" en la página 33) y, a continuación, retire la cubierta. AVISO: Para evitar dañar el conector del módulo de memoria, no utilice herramientas con el fin de separar los ganchos de fijación del módulo. AVISO: Para evitar descargas electrostáticas, toque tierra mediante el uso de una muñequera de conexión a tierra o toque periódicamente una superficie metálica no pintada (por ejemplo, un conector de la parte posterior del equipo). 3 Separe cuidadosamente con la punta de los dedos los ganchos de fijación que se encuentran en los extremos del conector del módulo de memoria hasta que salte el módulo. 1 Compartimento del módulo de memoria/batería de tipo botón 2 Tornillo cautivo 1 2Adición y sustitución de piezas 161 4 Extraiga el módulo del conector. Volver a colocar el módulo de memoria DIMM B AVISO: Para evitar descargas electrostáticas, toque tierra mediante el uso de una muñequera de conexión a tierra o toque periódicamente una superficie metálica no pintada (por ejemplo, un conector de la parte posterior del equipo). 1 Alinee la muesca del conector del extremo del módulo con la lengüeta de la ranura del conector. 2 Deslice el módulo firmemente en la ranura formando un ángulo de 45 grados y gírelo hasta que encaje en su sitio con un chasquido. Si no lo nota, retire el módulo y vuelva a instalarlo. NOTA: Si el módulo de memoria no está instalado correctamente, es posible que el equipo no se inicie. Este fallo no se indicará mediante un mensaje de error. 1 Ganchos (2) 2 Módulo de memoria 1 2162 Adición y sustitución de piezas AVISO: Si resulta difícil cerrar la cubierta, retire el módulo y vuelva a instalarlo. Si fuerza la cubierta para cerrarla, puede dañar el equipo. 3 Vuelva a colocar la cubierta del módulo de memoria. 4 Inserte la batería en el compartimento correspondiente o conecte el adaptador de CA al equipo y a una toma de alimentación eléctrica. 5 Enciéndalo. Al reiniciarse, detectará la memoria adicional y actualizará automáticamente la información de configuración del sistema. Para confirmar la cantidad de memoria instalada en el equipo, haga clic en Inicio → Ayuda y soporte técnico→ Información del sistema Dell. Módulo de identificación de suscriptor Los Módulos de identificación de suscriptor (SIM) identifican a los usuarios de forma única a través de la Identificación de suscriptor móvil internacional. PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de esta sección, siga las instrucciones de seguridad incluidas en la Guía de información del producto. NOTA: Solamente Cingular y Vodafone necesitan un SIM. Verizon, Sprint y Telus no usan SIM. 1 Siga los procedimientos del apartado "Antes de comenzar" en la página 147. 1 Lengüeta 2 Muesca 1 2Adición y sustitución de piezas 163 2 En el compartimento de la batería, deslice la tarjeta SIM con la esquina cortada en dirección contraria al compartimento. Mini-Cards (minitarjetas) inalámbricas PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de esta sección, siga las instrucciones de seguridad incluidas en la Guía de información del producto . AVISO: Para evitar daños en la placa base, debe retirar la batería de su compartimento antes de realizar reparaciones en el interior del equipo. Si solicita una minitarjeta inalámbrica con el equipo, la tarjeta ya estará instalada. El equipo admite tres tipos de minitarjetas inalámbricas: • Red de área local inalámbrica (WLAN) • Banda ancha móvil o Red inalámbrica de área amplia (WWAN) • Red de área personal inalámbrica (WPAN) 1 Compartimento de la batería 2 SIM 1 2164 Adición y sustitución de piezas Extraer una tarjeta WLAN 1 Siga los procedimientos del apartado "Antes de comenzar" en la página 147. 2 Dé la vuelta al ordenador. 3 Afloje los tornillos de fijación de la cubierta del compartimento de minitarjetas y retírela. 1 Tornillos cautivos (2) 2 Cubierta 1 2Adición y sustitución de piezas 165 4 Desconecte los cables de antena de la tarjeta WLAN . 5 Libere la tarjeta WLAN presionando las lengüetas metálicas de sujeción hacia la parte posterior del equipo, hasta que la tarjeta emerja ligeramente. 6 Extraiga la tarjeta WLAN de su conector de la placa base. 1 Conectores del cable de antena (2) 2 Tarjeta WLAN 1 2166 Adición y sustitución de piezas Vuelva a colocar la tarjeta WLAN AVISO: Los conectores tienen la forma adecuada para garantizar que la inserción es correcta. Si nota resistencia, compruebe los conectores de la tarjeta y la placa base, y vuelva a alinear la tarjeta. AVISO: Para evitar dañar la tarjeta WLAN, no coloque nunca cables debajo de la tarjeta. 1 Inserte el conector de la tarjeta WLAN en el conector de la placa base etiquetado con "WLAN" en un ángulo de 45 grados. 2 Presione el otro extremo de la tarjeta WLAN hacia abajo en las lengüetas de sujeción hasta que encaje con un clic. 1 Lengüetas metálicas de sujeción (2) 2 Tarjeta WLAN 1 2Adición y sustitución de piezas 167 3 Conecte los cables de antena adecuados en la tarjeta WLAN que instale: Si la tarjeta WLAN tiene dos triángulos en la etiqueta (blanco y negro), conecte el cable de antena blanco en el conector etiquetado con "main" (triángulo blanco) y el cable de antena negro en el conector etiquetado con "aux" (triángulo negro). Si la tarjeta WLAN tiene tres triángulos en la etiqueta (blanco, negro y gris), conecte el cable de antena blanco en el triángulo blanco, el cable negro en el triángulo negro y el gris en el triángulo gris. 4 Fije los cables de antena que no se usen en el manguito protector de mylar. 5 Vuelva a colocar la cubierta y apriete los tornillos de sujeción. Extracción de una tarjeta de banda ancha móvil o WWAN NOTA: Las WWAN también se encuentran disponibles en una ExpressCard (consulte el apartado "Uso de ExpressCards" en la página 83). 1 Siga los procedimientos del apartado "Antes de comenzar" en la página 147. 2 Dé la vuelta al ordenador. 3 Afloje los tornillos de fijación de la cubierta del compartimento de minitarjetas y retírela. 1 Tornillos cautivos (2) 2 Cubierta 1 2168 Adición y sustitución de piezas 4 Desconecte los dos cables de antena de la tarjeta WWAN. 5 Libere la tarjeta WWAN presionando las lengüetas metálicas de sujeción hacia la parte posterior del equipo, hasta que la tarjeta emerja ligeramente. 6 Extraiga la tarjeta WWAN de su conector de la placa base. 1 Conectores del cable de antena (2) 2 Tarjeta WWAN 1 2Adición y sustitución de piezas 169 Vuelva a colocar la tarjeta WWAN AVISO: Los conectores tienen la forma adecuada para garantizar que la inserción es correcta. Si nota resistencia, compruebe los conectores de la tarjeta y la placa base, y vuelva a alinear la tarjeta. AVISO: Para evitar dañar la tarjeta WWAN, no coloque nunca cables debajo de la tarjeta. 1 Inserte el conector de la tarjeta WWAN en el conector de la placa base etiquetado con "WWAN" en un ángulo de 45 grados. 2 Presione el otro extremo de la tarjeta WWAN hacia abajo en las lengüetas de sujeción hasta que encaje con un clic. 1 Lengüetas metálicas de sujeción (2) 2 Tarjeta WWAN 1 2170 Adición y sustitución de piezas 3 Conecte el cable de antena negro con una banda gris en el conector etiquetado con "aux" (triángulo negro) y conecte el cable blanco con una banda gris en el conector etiquetado con "main" (triángulo blanco). 4 Fije los cables de antena que no se usen en el manguito protector de mylar. 5 Vuelva a colocar la cubierta y apriete los tornillos de sujeción. Extraer una tarjeta WPAN 1 Siga los procedimientos del apartado "Antes de comenzar" en la página 147. 2 Dé la vuelta al ordenador. 3 Afloje los tornillos de fijación de la cubierta del compartimento de minitarjetas y retírela. 4 Desconecte el cable de antena azul de la tarjeta WPAN . 5 Libere la tarjeta WPAN presionando las lengüetas metálicas de sujeción hacia la parte posterior del equipo, hasta que la tarjeta emerja ligeramente. 6 Extraiga la tarjeta WPAN de su conector de la placa base. 1 Tornillos cautivos (2) 2 Cubierta 1 2Adición y sustitución de piezas 171 Vuelva a colocar la tarjeta WPAN AVISO: Los conectores tienen la forma adecuada para garantizar que la inserción es correcta. Si nota resistencia, compruebe los conectores de la tarjeta y la placa base, y vuelva a alinear la tarjeta. AVISO: Para evitar dañar la tarjeta WPAN, no coloque nunca cables debajo de la tarjeta. 1 Inserte el conector de la tarjeta WPAN en el conector de la placa base etiquetado con "WPAN" en un ángulo de 45 grados. 2 Presione el otro extremo de la tarjeta WPAN hacia abajo en las lengüetas de sujeción hasta que encaje con un clic. 3 Conecte el cable de antena azul en la tarjeta WPAN . 4 Fije los cables de antena que no se usen en el manguito protector de mylar. 5 Vuelva a colocar la cubierta y apriete los tornillos de sujeción. Tarjeta interna con tecnología inalámbrica Bluetooth® PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de esta sección, siga las instrucciones de seguridad incluidas en la Guía de información del producto. AVISO: Para evitar descargas electrostáticas, toque tierra mediante el uso de una muñequera de conexión a tierra o toque periódicamente una superficie metálica no pintada (por ejemplo, un conector de la parte posterior del equipo). AVISO: Para evitar daños en la placa base, debe retirar la batería de su compartimento antes de realizar reparaciones en el interior del equipo. Si con el equipo ha solicitado una tarjeta con tecnología inalámbrica Bluetooth, ésta ya estará instalada. Extraer la tarjeta 1 Siga los procedimientos del apartado "Antes de comenzar" en la página 147. 2 Extraiga la cubierta de las bisagras (consulte el apartado "Cubierta de las bisagras" en la página 154). 3 Desconecte el cable de la tarjeta. 172 Adición y sustitución de piezas 4 Sujete el extremo del conector de la tarjeta y deslícelo fuera por debajo de las lengüetas de sujeción. Volver a colocar la tarjeta 1 Vuelva a colocar la tarjeta en el ángulo correcto para deslizarla debajo de las lengüetas de sujeción en su compartimento. 2 Conecte el cable a la tarjeta. Batería de tipo botón PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de esta sección, siga las instrucciones de seguridad incluidas en la Guía de información del producto. AVISO: Para evitar descargas electrostáticas, toque tierra mediante el uso de una muñequera de conexión a tierra o toque periódicamente una superficie metálica no pintada (por ejemplo, un conector de la parte posterior del equipo). AVISO: Para evitar daños en la placa base, debe retirar la batería de su compartimento antes de realizar reparaciones en el interior del equipo. 1 Lengüeta de sujeción 2 Tarjeta 3 Lengüeta de sujeción 4 Cable 1 4 2 3Adición y sustitución de piezas 173 Extracción de la batería de tipo botón 1 Siga los procedimientos del apartado "Antes de comenzar" en la página 147. 2 Dé la vuelta al ordenador. 3 Afloje los tornillos de sujeción de la cubierta del módulo de memoria/batería de tipo botón (consulte el apartado "Vista inferior" en la página 33) y quítela. 4 Desconecte la batería de la placa base. 5 Saque la batería del manguito de mylar deslizándola. Vuelva a colocar la batería 1 Conecte la batería a la placa base. 2 Deslice la batería en el manguito de mylar. 3 Vuelva a colocar la cubierta y apriete el tornillo de sujeción. 1 Batería de tipo botón 2 Manguito de mylar 3 Conector del cable de la batería 1 2 3174 Adición y sustitución de piezasFunciones de Dell™ QuickSet 175 Funciones de Dell™ QuickSet NOTA: Es posible que esta función no esté disponible en su equipo. Dell QuickSet le proporciona un fácil acceso para configurar o visualizar los siguientes tipos de valores: • Conectividad de red • Administración de energía • Pantalla • Información del sistema Dependiendo de las acciones que desee realizar en Dell™ QuickSet, puede iniciarlo haciendo clic, doble clic o clic con el botón derecho en el icono QuickSet en el área de notificación de Microsoft® Windows®. El área de notificación está ubicada en el extremo inferior derecho de la pantalla. Para obtener más información sobre QuickSet, haga clic con el botón derecho del ratón en el icono de QuickSet y seleccione Ayuda.176 Funciones de Dell™ QuickSetViajes con el equipo 177 Viajes con el equipo Identificación del equipo • Adjunte una etiqueta de identidad o una tarjeta de presentación al equipo. • Anote el número de su etiqueta de servicio y guárdelo en un lugar seguro separado del equipo o del maletín de transporte. Utilice la Etiqueta de servicio para informar de una pérdida o robo a la policía y a Dell. • Cree un archivo en el escritorio de Microsoft® Windows® llamado si_lo_ encuentra. Escriba sus datos personales (nombre, dirección y número de teléfono) en este archivo. • Póngase en contacto con la compañía de su tarjeta de crédito para preguntar si ofrece etiquetas de identificación codificadas. Embalaje del equipo • Extraiga los dispositivos externos conectados al equipo y almacénelos en un lugar seguro. • A continuación, cargue totalmente la batería y las baterías de reserva que piense llevar consigo. • Apague el equipo. • Desconecte el adaptador de CA. AVISO: Cuando la pantalla está cerrada, cualquier objeto extraño que quede en el teclado o en el reposamanos podría dañarla. • Retire del teclado y del reposamanos cualquier objeto extraño, como clips sujetapapeles, bolígrafos y papel, y cierre la pantalla. • Utilice el maletín de transporte opcional de Dell para poder viajar con el equipo y sus accesorios de manera segura. • Evite empaquetar el equipo con objetos como espuma de afeitar, colonias, perfumes o comida. AVISO: Si el equipo ha sido expuesto a altas temperaturas, espere a que se adapte a la temperatura de la habitación durante una hora antes de encenderlo.178 Viajes con el equipo • Proteja el equipo, las baterías y el disco duro de situaciones que pudieran dañarlo, como temperaturas extremas o una exposición excesiva a la luz del sol, suciedad, polvo o elementos líquidos. • Embale el equipo de forma que no se deslice por el maletero o la baca del coche. Consejos para el viaje AVISO: No mueva el equipo mientras usa la unidad óptica para evitar la pérdida de datos. AVISO: No facture el equipo como equipaje. • Tenga en cuenta la posibilidad de desactivar la actividad inalámbrica del equipo para maximizar el tiempo de funcionamiento de la batería. Para deshabilitar la actividad inalámbrica, utilice el conmutador inalámbrico (consulte el apartado "Conmutador inalámbrico" en la página 27). • Tenga en cuenta la posibilidad de cambiar los valores de las opciones de administración de energía para maximizar el tiempo de funcionamiento de la batería (consulte el apartado "Configuración de los valores de administración de energía" en la página 55). • Si está realizando un viaje internacional, lleve consigo una prueba de propiedad del equipo, o de su derecho a utilizarlo, para facilitar su paso por la aduana. Investigue sobre los reglamentos de aduanas de los países que piense visitar, y considere la adquisición de un carné internacional (también conocido como pasaporte para mercancías) expedido por el gobierno de su país. • Averigüe qué tipo de tomas de alimentación eléctrica se usan en los países que va a visitar y adquiera los adaptadores adecuados. • Póngase en contacto con la compañía de su tarjeta de crédito para obtener información acerca de la asistencia que ofrece a los usuarios de equipos portátiles de viaje en casos de emergencia.Viajes con el equipo 179 Viajes en avión AVISO: No pase el equipo por el detector de metales. Puede dejar pasar el equipo a través de un detector de rayos X o permita que sea inspeccionado manualmente. • Asegúrese de llevar siempre consigo una batería cargada, por si le solicitan que encienda el equipo. • Antes de entrar en el avión, compruebe si está permitido el uso de este tipo de aparatos. Algunas líneas aéreas prohíben el uso de aparatos electrónicos durante el vuelo. Todas las líneas aéreas prohíben el uso de aparatos electrónicos al despegar y al aterrizar.180 Viajes con el equipoObtención de ayuda 181 Obtención de ayuda Obtención de ayuda PRECAUCIÓN: Si necesita quitar la cubierta del equipo, compruebe primero que están desenchufados los cables de alimentación del equipo y del módem. Si tiene problemas con su equipo, puede realizar los siguientes pasos para diagnosticar y solucionar el problema: 1 Consulte el apartado "Solución de problemas" en la página 105 para obtener información y ver los procedimientos relacionados con el problema que está experimentando con el equipo. 2 Consulte el apartado "Dell Diagnostics" en la página 105 para ver los procedimientos relativos a cómo ejecutar Dell Diagnostics. 3 Rellene la "Lista de verificación de diagnósticos" en la página 186. 4 Utilice la amplia gama de servicios en línea de Dell disponibles en el sitio web Dell | Support (support.dell.com) para obtener ayuda sobre la instalación y los procedimientos de solución de problemas. Consulte el apartado "Servicios en línea" en la página 182 para ver una lista más amplia del soporte en línea de Dell. 5 Si los pasos descritos anteriormente no han resuelto el problema, consulte el apartado "Cómo ponerse en contacto con Dell" en la página 187. NOTA: Llame al servicio de asistencia técnica desde un teléfono situado al lado del equipo o en éste para que puedan guiarle en los procedimientos necesarios. NOTA: Es posible que el sistema de código de servicio urgente de Dell no esté disponible en todos los países. Cuando el sistema telefónico automatizado de Dell lo solicite, marque el código de servicio rápido para dirigir su llamada directamente al personal de servicio que corresponda. Si no tiene un código de servicio urgente, abra la carpeta Dell Accessories (Accesorios Dell), haga doble clic en el icono Express Service Code (Código de servicio rápido) y siga las instrucciones. Para obtener instrucciones acerca del uso del servicio de asistencia de Dell, consulte el apartado "Servicio al cliente y asistencia técnica" en la página 182.182 Obtención de ayuda NOTA: Algunos de los servicios que se describen a continuación no siempre están disponibles en todos los lugares fuera de la parte continental de EE.UU. Póngase en contacto con su representante local de Dell para obtener información sobre su disponibilidad. Servicio al cliente y asistencia técnica El servicio de asistencia de Dell está disponible para responder sus preguntas sobre el hardware Dell™. Nuestro personal de asistencia utiliza diagnósticos basados en los equipos para proporcionar respuestas rápidas y precisas. Para ponerse en contacto con el servicio de asistencia de Dell, consulte el apartado "Antes de llamar" en la página 185 y, a continuación, vea la información de contacto de su región o visite support.dell.com. DellConnect DellConnect es una sencilla herramienta de acceso en línea que permite al asociado de servicio y asistencia de Dell acceder a su equipo a través de una conexión de banda ancha, diagnosticar su problema y repararlo bajo su supervisión. Para más información, visite el sitio Web support.dell.com y haga clic en DellConnect. Servicios en línea Puede aprender de productos y servicios Dell en los sitios web siguientes: www.dell.com www.dell.com/ap (únicamente para países asiáticos y del Pacífico) www.dell.com/jp (únicamente para Japón) www.euro.dell.com (únicamente para Europa) www.dell.com/la (únicamente para países de Latinoamérica y Caribe) www.dell.ca (únicamente para Canadá) Puede acceder al servicio de asistencia de Dell a través de los siguientes sitios Web y direcciones de correo electrónico: • Sitios web de soporte técnico de Dell support.dell.com support.jp.dell.com (únicamente para Japón) support.euro.dell.com (únicamente para Europa)Obtención de ayuda 183 • Direcciones de correo electrónico de soporte técnico de Dell mobile_support@us.dell.com support@us.dell.com la-techsupport@dell.com (únicamente para países de Latinoamérica y Caribe) apsupport@dell.com (únicamente para países asiáticos y del Pacífico) • Direcciones de correo electrónico de mercadeo y ventas de Dell apmarketing@dell.com (sólo para países asiáticos y del Pacífico) sales_canada@dell.com (únicamente para Canadá) • FTP (File Transfer Protocol, Protocolo de transferencia de archivos) anónimo ftp.dell.com Regístrese como usuario: anonymous (anónimo) y utilice su dirección de correo electrónico como contraseña. Servicio AutoTech El servicio de asistencia técnica automatizada de Dell —AutoTech— proporciona respuestas grabadas a las preguntas más frecuentes formuladas por los clientes de Dell acerca de sus equipos portátiles y de sobremesa. Cuando llame a AutoTech, utilice un teléfono de tonos para seleccionar los temas correspondientes a sus preguntas. Para conocer el número de teléfono al que llamar en su región, consulte el apartado "Cómo ponerse en contacto con Dell" en la página 187. Servicio automatizado para averiguar el estado de un pedido Para comprobar el estado de un pedido de cualquier producto Dell que haya solicitado, puede dirigirse a support.dell.com o llamar al servicio automatizado de comprobación de estado de los pedidos. Un contestador automático le pedirá los datos necesarios para buscar el pedido e informarle sobre su estado. Para conocer el número de teléfono al que llamar en su región, consulte el apartado "Cómo ponerse en contacto con Dell" en la página 187.184 Obtención de ayuda Problemas con su pedido Si tiene algún problema con un pedido (por ejemplo, falta algún componente, hay componentes equivocados o la factura es incorrecta), póngase en contacto con el departamento de atención al cliente de Dell. Tenga a mano la factura o el albarán cuando haga la llamada. Para conocer el número de teléfono al que llamar en su región, consulte el apartado "Cómo ponerse en contacto con Dell" en la página 187. Información sobre productos Si necesita información sobre otros productos de Dell disponibles o si desea hacer un pedido, visite el sitio web de Dell en la dirección www.dell.com. Para saber el número de teléfono al que debe llamar para hablar con un especialista en ventas, consulte el apartado "Cómo ponerse en contacto con Dell" en la página 187. Devolución de artículos para su reparación en garantía o para la devolución de su importe Prepare todos los artículos que vaya a devolver, ya sea para su reparación bajo garantía o para que le devuelvan el importe, de la manera siguiente: 1 Llame a Dell para obtener un RMA (número de autorización para devolución de material) y anótelo de forma clara y evidente en la parte exterior de la caja. Para conocer el número de teléfono al que llamar en su región, consulte el apartado "Cómo ponerse en contacto con Dell" en la página 187. 2 Incluya una copia de la factura y una carta que describa la razón de la devolución. 3 Incluya una copia de la Lista de verificación de diagnósticos (consulte el apartado "Lista de verificación de diagnósticos" en la página 186) indicando las pruebas que ha ejecutado y todos los mensajes de error mostrados por los Dell Diagnostics (consulte el apartado "Dell Diagnostics" en la página 105). 4 Si la devolución es para obtener un crédito a cambio, incluya todos los accesorios correspondientes al artículo en devolución (cables de alimentación, disquetes de software, guías, etc.).Obtención de ayuda 185 5 Empaquete el equipo que vaya a devolver en el embalaje original (o uno equivalente). Usted será responsable del pago de los gastos de envío. Asimismo, tiene la obligación de asegurar el producto devuelto y asumir el riesgo en caso de pérdida durante el envío a Dell. No se aceptará el envío de paquetes a portes debidos. Cualquier devolución que no satisfaga los requisitos indicados no será aceptada por el departamento de recepción de Dell y le será devuelta. Antes de llamar NOTA: Tenga a mano el código de servicio rápido cuando llame. El código contribuirá a que el sistema telefónico automatizado de asistencia de Dell gestione con mayor eficacia su llamada. Se le podría pedir la etiqueta de servicio (situada en la parte inferior del equipo). Recuerde rellenar la Lista de verificación de diagnósticos (consulte el apartado "Lista de verificación de diagnósticos" en la página 186). Si es posible, encienda el equipo antes de llamar a Dell para obtener asistencia y haga la llamada desde un teléfono situado cerca. Es posible que se le pida que escriba algunos comandos con el teclado, que proporcione información detallada durante las operaciones o que intente otros procedimientos para solucionar problemas que únicamente pueden realizarse con el equipo. Asegúrese de tener a mano la documentación del equipo. PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de trabajar en el interior de su equipo, siga las instrucciones de seguridad que se encuentran en la Guía de información del producto .186 Obtención de ayuda Lista de verificación de diagnósticos Nombre: Fecha: Dirección: Teléfono: Etiqueta de servicio (código de barras en la parte posterior o inferior del equipo): Código de servicio urgente: Número de autorización para devolución de material (si le fue proporcionado por un técnico de asistencia de Dell): Sistema operativo y versión: Dispositivos: Tarjetas de expansión: ¿Está el equipo conectado a una red? Sí No Red, versión y adaptador de red: Programas y versiones: Consulte la documentación del sistema operativo para determinar el contenido de los archivos de inicio del sistema. Si el equipo está conectado a una impresora, imprima cada archivo. Si no, anote el contenido de cada uno antes de llamar a Dell. Mensaje de error, código de sonido o código de diagnóstico: Descripción del problema y procedimientos de solución de problemas que haya realizado:Obtención de ayuda 187 Cómo ponerse en contacto con Dell NOTA: Si no tiene una conexión a Internet activa, puede encontrar información en la factura de compra, el albarán o el catálogo de productos de Dell. Dell facilita diversas opciones de soporte y servicio en línea y por teléfono. La disponibilidad varía en función del país y el producto. Es posible que algunos de los servicios no se encuentren disponibles en su área. Para ponerse en contacto con Dell por problemas de ventas, soporte técnico o del servicio de atención al cliente: 1 Visite la página support.dell.com. 2 Verifique su país o región en el menú desplegable Elija un país/región de la parte inferior de la página. 3 Haga clic en Contacte con nosotros de la parte izquierda de la página. 4 Seleccione el enlace del servicio o soporte que necesite. 5 Elija el método para ponerse en contacto con Dell que le resulte más conveniente.188 Obtención de ayudaEspecificaciones 189 Especificaciones NOTA: Las ofertas pueden variar según la región. Para obtener más información sobre la configuración del equipo, haga clic en Inicio , en Ayuda y soporte técnico y seleccione la opción para ver la información acerca de su equipo. Procesador Tipo de procesador AMD® Turion™64 X2 Dual-Core Mobile Technology Caché L1 256 KB (2 x 128 KB) Caché L2 512 KB o 1 MB por núcleo dependiendo del modelo Frecuencia de bus externa 1600 MHz y HyperTransport Información del sistema Conjunto de chips del sistema Chipset AMD M690T con gráficos ATI™ Radeon® X1270 Amplitud del bus de datos 64 bits Amplitud del bus de DRAM buses de 64 bits de doble canal (2) Amplitud del bus de direcciones del procesador 32 bits EPROM rápida 1 MB Bus de gráficos PCI-E X16 Bus PCI 32 bits ExpressCard NOTA: La ranura para ExpressCard está diseñada solamente para este tipo de tarjetas. NO admite PC Cards. NOTA: En algunas regiones es posible que las PCMCIA no se encuentren disponibles. Controlador de ExpressCard ATI RS690T Conector de la ExpressCard una ranura de ExpressCard (54 mm)190 Especificaciones Tarjetas admitidas ExpressCard/34 (34 mm) ExpressCard/54 (54 mm) 1,5 V y 3,3 V Tamaño del conector de la ExpressCard De 26 patas Lector de tarjetas de memoria 8 en 1 Controladora de tarjetas de memoria 8 en 1 Ricoh R5C833 Conector de tarjetas de memoria 8 en 1 Conector de tarjeta combinada 8 en 1 Tarjetas admitidas • Secure Digital (SD) • SDIO • Tarjeta MultiMedia (MMC) • Memory Stick • Memory Stick PRO • Tarjeta xD-Picture • SD de alta velocidad • SD de alta densidad Memoria Conector del módulo de memoria dos conectores SODIMM a los que puede acceder el usuario Capacidades del módulo de memoria 512 MB, 1 GB, 2 GB Tipo de memoria 667 MHz SoDIMM DDR2 Mínimo de memoria 1 GB Memoria máxima 4 GB NOTA: Con el fin de sacar provecho de la capacidad de doble canal, es necesario rellenar las dos ranuras de memoria y que ambas tengan el mismo tamaño. NOTA: La memoria disponible mostrada no refleja la memoria máxima completa instalada puesto que se reserva parte para los archivos de sistema. ExpressCard (continuación)Especificaciones 191 Puertos y conectores Audio Conector de entrada de micrófono, conector de auriculares o altavoces estéreo IEEE 1394 Conector serie de cuatro patillas IR de consumo sensor compatible con Philips RC6 (solo recepción) Mini-Card (minitarjeta) tres ranuras para minitarjeta de tipo IIIA Módem Puerto RJ-11 Adaptador de red Puerto RJ-45 S-vídeo y salida de TV Miniconector DIN de 7 patas (cable adaptador S-vídeo a vídeo compuesto opcional) USB cuatro conectores de 4 patas compatibles con USB 2.0 Vídeo Conector de 15 orificios Comunicaciones Módem: Tipo v.92 56K MDC Controlador softmodem Interfaz Audio de alta definición Intel Adaptador de red Tarjeta de sistema LAN Ethernet 10/100 Inalámbrico Minitarjetas internas WLAN, WWAN, WPAN ExpressCard WWAN Tecnología inalámbrica Bluetooth® Vídeo Tipo de vídeo: gráficos ATI integrados con frame búfer local de 64 MB Controladora de vídeo Controladora de gráficos ATI Radeon® X1270 Memoria de vídeo Hasta 256 MB de memoria compartida (frame búfer local de 64 MB con HyperMemory™)192 Especificaciones Interfaz LCD LVDS Compatibilidad con TV NTSC o PAL en modos S-vídeo, vídeo compuesto y vídeo componente Audio Tipo de audio Códec de audio de alta definición de dos canales Controladora de audio Códec Sigmatel STAC9205 Conversión estereofónica 24 bits (de analógico a digital y de digital a analógico) Interfaces: Interna Audio Intel de alta definición Externa Conector de entrada de micrófono, conector de auriculares o altavoces estéreo Altavoz Dos altavoces de 4 ohmios Amplificador de altavoz interno 2 vatios por canal a 4 ohmios Controles de volumen Menús de programa, botones de control multimedia Pantalla Tipo (TFT matriz activa) WXGA de 15,4 pulgadas WXGA de 15,4 pulgadas con True Life WXGA+ de 15,4 pulgadas con True Life WSXGA+ de 15,4 pulgadas con True Life Dimensiones: Altura 222,5 mm (8,8 pulgadas) Anchura 344,5 mm (13,6 pulgadas) Diagonal 391,2 mm (15,4 pulgadas) Resoluciones máximas: WXGA 1280 x 800 a 262 K colores Vídeo (continuación)Especificaciones 193 WXGA con TrueLife 1280 x 800 a 262 K colores WXGA+ con TrueLife 1440 x 900 a 262 K colores WSXGA+ con TrueLife 1680 x 1050 a 262 K colores Frecuencia de actualización 60 Hz Ángulo de funcionamiento 0° (cerrado) a 155° Ángulos de vista: Horizontal ±40° (WXGA) ±40° (WXGA con TrueLife) ±55° (WXGA+ con TrueLife) ±60° (WSXGA+ con TrueLife) Vertical +15°/–30° (WXGA) +15°/–30° (WXGA con TrueLife) ±45° (WXGA+ con TrueLife) +40°/–50° (WSXGA+ con TrueLife) Separación entre píxeles: WXGA 0,258 mm WXGA con TrueLife 0,258 mm WXGA+ con TrueLife 0,2304 mm WSXGA+ con TrueLife 0,197 mm Controles el brillo se puede controlar mediante métodos abreviados de teclado (consulte el apartado "Funciones de la pantalla" en la página 46) Teclado Número de teclas 87 (EE.UU. y Canadá), 88 (Europa); 91 (Japón) Diseño QWERTY/AZERTY/Kanji Ratón táctil Resolución de posición X/Y (modo de tabla de gráficos) 240 cpi Tamaño: Pantalla (continuación)194 Especificaciones Anchura Área activa del sensor de 71,7 mm (2,8 pulgadas) Altura Rectángulo de 34 mm (1,3 pulgadas) Batería Tipo "inteligente" de iones de litio de 9 celdas "inteligente" de iones de litio de 6 celdas Dimensiones: Profundidad 67,6 mm (2,66 pulgadas) (9 celdas) 47,5 mm (1,87 pulgadas) (6 celdas) Altura 20,4 mm (0,8 pulgadas) Anchura 209,9 mm (8,26 pulgadas) Peso 0,48 kg (1,06 lb) (9 celdas) 0,33 kg (0,7 lb) (6 celdas) Tensión 11,1 V de CC Tiempo de carga (aproximado): Equipo apagado 4 horas Tiempo de funcionamiento El tiempo de funcionamiento de la batería depende de las condiciones de funcionamiento y puede disminuir de manera significativa en determinadas condiciones de consumo intensivo (consulte el apartado "Problemas de alimentación" en la página 129). Consulte el apartado "Uso de la batería" en la página 51 para obtener más información acerca de la duración de la batería. Duración (aproximada) 300 ciclos de carga y descarga Intervalo de temperatura: En funcionamiento 0° a 35°C (32° a 95°F) En almacenamiento –40° a 65°C (-40° a 149°F) Batería de tipo botón CR-2032 Ratón táctilEspecificaciones 195 Adaptador de CA Tensión de entrada 90-264 V CA Intensidad de entrada (máxima) 1,5 A Frecuencia de entrada 47–63 Hz Intensidad de salida (65 W) 4,34 A (máximo a un pulso de 4 segundos) 3,34 A (65 W) (continua) Intensidad de salida (90 W) 5,62 A (máximo a un pulso de 4 segundos) 4,62 A (90 W) (continua) Potencia de salida 65 W y 90 W Tensión nominal de salida 19,5 +/– 1 V CC Dimensiones (65 W): Altura 28,2 mm (1,1 pulgadas) Anchura 57,9 mm (2,28 pulgadas) Profundidad 137,2 mm (5,4 pulgadas) Peso (con cables) 0,4 kg (0,9 lb) Dimensiones (90 W): Altura 34,2 mm (1,34 pulgadas) Anchura 60,8 mm (2,39 pulgadas) Profundidad 153,4 mm (6 pulgadas) Peso (con cables) 0,46 kg (1,01 lb) Intervalo de temperatura: En funcionamiento 0° a 35°C (32° a 95°F) En almacenamiento -40° a 65°C (-40° a 149°F) Aspectos físicos Altura 42 mm (1,65 pulgadas) Anchura 358,7 mm (14,12 pulgadas) Profundidad 269 mm (10,59 pulgadas) Peso (con batería de 6 celdas): Configurable a menos de 3 kg (6,61 lb)196 Especificaciones Aspectos ambientales Intervalo de temperatura: En funcionamiento 0° a 35°C (32° a 95°F) En almacenamiento –40° a 65°C (-40° a 149°F) Humedad relativa (máxima): En funcionamiento Del 10% al 90% (sin condensación) En almacenamiento Del 5% al 95% (sin condensación) Vibración máxima (utilizando un espectro de vibración aleatoria que simula el entorno del usuario): En funcionamiento 0,66 GRMS En almacenamiento 1,3 GRMS Impacto máximo (medido con la unidad de disco duro en funcionamiento y un pulso de media onda sinusoidal durante 2 ms. Medido también con la unidad de disco duro en posición con cabezales aparcados y un pulso de media onda sinusoidal durante 2ms en almacenamiento): En funcionamiento 142 G En almacenamiento 163 G Altitud (máxima): En funcionamiento –15,2 a 3 048 m (–50 a 10 000 pies) En almacenamiento –15,2 a 10 668 m (–50 a 35 000 pies)Apéndice 197 Apéndice Uso del programa Configuración del sistema NOTA: El sistema operativo puede configurar automáticamente la mayoría de las opciones disponibles en el programa de configuración del sistema, reemplazando así las opciones establecidas por el usuario a través de éste. La opción External Hot Key (Tecla aceleradora externa) es una excepción, que sólo se puede activar o desactivar mediante la configuración del sistema. Para obtener más información sobre la configuración de funciones en el sistema operativo, consulte el Centro de ayuda y soporte técnico de Windows (haga clic en Inicio y, a continuación, en Ayuda y soporte técnico). Puede usar la configuración del sistema del siguiente modo: • Para definir o cambiar características que puede seleccionar el usuario, como, por ejemplo, la contraseña • Para verificar información acerca de la configuración actual del equipo, como la cantidad de memoria del sistema Después de configurar su equipo, ejecute la configuración del sistema para familiarizarse con la información de la configuración del sistema y las configuraciones opcionales. Es recomendable anotar la información para consultarla en el futuro. Las pantallas de configuración del sistema muestran la información y las selecciones de la configuración actual del equipo, como: • Configuración del sistema • Secuencia de arranque • Configuración de inicio (arranque) • Valores de configuración básica de dispositivos • Valores de seguridad del sistema y de la contraseña de la unidad de disco duro NOTA: A menos que sea un usuario experto en informática o que el servicio de asistencia técnica de Dell le pida que lo haga, no cambie los valores de configuración del sistema. Determinados cambios pueden hacer que el equipo no funcione correctamente. 198 Apéndice Visualización de la pantalla del programa Configuración del sistema 1 Encienda (o reinicie) el equipo. 2 Cuando aparezca el logotipo de DELL, pulse inmediatamente. Si espera demasiado y aparece el logotipo de Microsoft Windows, siga esperando hasta que aparezca el escritorio de Windows; a continuación, apague el equipo e inténtelo de nuevo. Pantalla del programa Configuración del sistema NOTA: Para obtener información sobre un elemento específico de la pantalla de configuración del sistema, resalte el elemento y consulte el área de Ayuda de la pantalla. En cada pantalla, a la izquierda aparecen las opciones de configuración del sistema. A la derecha de cada opción aparece la configuración o valor para dicha opción. Puede cambiar las selecciones que aparecen en blanco en la pantalla. Las opciones o valores que no se pueden cambiar (porque los determina o calcula el equipo) aparecen con menos brillo. En la esquina superior derecha de la pantalla se muestra información de ayuda para la opción resaltada; en la esquina inferior derecha de la pantalla se muestra información sobre el equipo. Las funciones clave del programa de configuración del sistema aparecen en la parte inferior de la pantalla. Opciones más utilizadas Ciertas opciones requieren que reinicie el equipo para que la nueva configuración sea efectiva. Cambiar la secuencia de inicio La secuencia de inicio, u orden de inicio, indica al equipo dónde buscar para localizar el software necesario para iniciar el sistema operativo. Puede controlar la secuencia de inicio y activar o desactivar los dispositivos mediante la página Boot Order (Secuencia de arranque) del programa de configuración del sistema. NOTA: Para cambiar la secuencia de arranque para una sola vez, consulte el apartado "Arranque para una sola vez" en la página 199. La página Boot Order (Orden de inicio) muestra una lista general de los dispositivos de inicio que se pueden instalar en el equipo, que incluyen, entre otros, los siguientes:Apéndice 199 • Unidad de discos flexibles • Unidad de disco duro interna • Dispositivo de almacenamiento USB • Unidad de CD/DVD/CD-RW • Unidad de disco duro del compartimento para módulos NOTA: Sólo los dispositivos que van precedidos de un número son de inicio. Durante la rutina de inicio, el equipo comienza por la parte superior de la lista y examina los archivos de inicio del sistema operativo. Cuando encuentra los archivos, deja de buscar e inicia el sistema operativo. Para controlar los dispositivos de inicio, seleccione (resalte) un dispositivo pulsando la tecla de flecha hacia abajo o hacia arriba y, a continuación, active o desactive el dispositivo o cambie su orden en la lista. • Para activar o desactivar un dispositivo, resalte el elemento y pulse la barra espaciadora. Los elementos activados van precedidos de un número; los elementos desactivados no. • Para volver a ordenar un dispositivo de la lista, resalte el dispositivo y bien pulse la tecla para desplazarlo hacia arriba en la lista o para moverlo hacia abajo. Los cambios de la secuencia de inicio tendrán efecto tan pronto como guarde los cambios y salga del programa de configuración del sistema. Arranque para una sola vez Puede establecer una secuencia de inicio para una sola vez sin introducir el programa de configuración del sistema (también usar este procedimiento para iniciar los Dell Diagnostics en la partición de las utilidades de diagnósticos del disco duro). 1 Apague el equipo mediante el menú Inicio. 2 Conecte el equipo a una toma de alimentación eléctrica. 3 Enciéndalo. Cuando aparezca el logotipo de DELL, pulse inmediatamente. Si espera demasiado y aparece el logotipo de Windows, siga esperando hasta que aparezca el escritorio de Windows; a continuación, apague el equipo e inténtelo de nuevo.200 Apéndice 4 Cuando aparezca la lista de dispositivos de inicio, resalte el dispositivo desde el que desea arrancar y pulse . El equipo se iniciará desde el dispositivo seleccionado. La próxima vez que reinicie el equipo, se restaurará el orden de inicio normal. Limpieza del equipo PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de esta sección, siga las instrucciones de seguridad que se encuentran en la Guía de información del producto. Equipo, teclado y pantalla PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de limpiar el equipo, desenchúfelo de la toma de alimentación eléctrica y retire cualquier batería instalada. Limpie el equipo con un paño suave humedecido con agua. No utilice limpiadores en aerosol o líquidos, que podrían contener sustancias inflamables. • Use aire comprimido para eliminar el polvo entre las teclas del teclado y para eliminar polvo o pelusa de la pantalla. AVISO: Para evitar daños en el equipo, no rocíe ninguna solución limpiadora directamente sobre la pantalla. Utilice sólo productos diseñados específicamente para limpiar pantallas y siga las instrucciones que se incluyen con el producto. • Humedezca una tela suave y sin pelusa con agua o con limpiador para pantallas. No utilice alcohol o limpiadores con base de amoníaco. Limpie suavemente la pantalla desde el centro hacia los bordes hasta que quede libre de manchas y sin huellas dactilares. No presione excesivamente. AVISO: Para evitar que se dañe el recubrimiento antideslumbrante, no limpie la pantalla con jabón o alcohol. • Humedezca un paño suave y sin pelusa con agua y limpie el ordenador y el teclado. No permita que el agua contenida en el paño se filtre entre la almohadilla de contacto y el apoyamanos que la rodea. • Para limpiar la pantalla, humedezca ligeramente con agua un paño suave y limpio. También se puede usar una toallita especial para limpiar pantallas o una solución apropiada para el revestimiento antiestático del monitor.Apéndice 201 • Limpie el plástico del teclado, equipo y monitor con un paño suave humedecido con una solución de tres partes de agua y una parte de detergente para limpiar los platos. No escurra el paño ni deje que caiga agua dentro de su equipo o teclado. Ratón táctil 1 Apague y cierre el equipo (consulte el apartado "Apagar el equipo" en la página 147). 2 Desconecte los dispositivos que tenga conectados. 3 Extraiga las baterías instaladas (consulte el apartado "Rendimiento de la batería" en la página 51). 4 Humedezca un paño suave y sin pelusa con agua y páselo suavemente por la superficie del ratón táctil. No permita que el agua contenida en el paño se filtre entre la almohadilla de contacto y el apoyamanos que la rodea. Ratón AVISO: Desconecte el ratón del equipo antes de limpiarlo. Si el cursor salta en la pantalla o se mueve de un modo anómalo, limpie el ratón. Limpieza de ratones no ópticos. 1 Limpie la carcasa exterior del ratón con un paño humedecido con una solución limpiadora suave. 2 Quite la tapita de la parte inferior del ratón en sentido contrario a las agujas del reloj y extraiga la bola. 3 Limpie la bola con un paño limpio y sin pelusa. 4 Sople con cuidado en el compartimento de la bola o use una lata de aire comprimido para quitar el polvo y la pelusa. 5 Si los cojinetes dentro del compartimento de la bola están sucios, límpielos con un bastoncillo de algodón ligeramente humedecido en alcohol isopropílico. 6 Coloque de nuevo los cojinetes en su lugar si se han movido. Asegúrese de que la pelusa del bastoncillo no se quede en los cojinetes. 7 Coloque la bola y la tapita en sentido de las agujas del reloj hasta que encaje en su sitio.202 Apéndice Limpieza de un ratón óptico Limpie la carcasa exterior del ratón con un paño humedecido con una solución limpiadora suave. Soporte AVISO: Utilice siempre aire comprimido para limpiar la lente de la unidad óptica y siga las instrucciones que se incluyen con el producto de aire comprimido. No toque nunca la lente de la unidad. Si observa algún problema, como saltos, en la calidad de reproducción de los medios, límpielos. 1 Sujete el disco por su borde exterior. También puede tocar el borde interior del orificio central. AVISO: Para evitar daños en la superficie, no limpie el disco con movimientos circulares. 2 Con un paño suave y sin pelusa, frote suavemente la parte inferior del disco (la cara sin etiqueta) en línea recta, desde el centro al borde exterior. Para la suciedad difícil de eliminar, pruebe con agua o una solución diluida de agua y jabón suave. También puede adquirir productos comerciales para la limpieza de discos, que proporcionan cierta protección contra el polvo, las huellas dactilares y los arañazos. Los productos limpiadores para los CD también pueden utilizarse con seguridad en los DVD. Política de soporte técnico de Dell (Sólo en EE.UU.) El soporte técnico asistido por personal técnico requiere la cooperación y la participación del cliente en el proceso de solución de problemas y permite restaurar el sistema operativo, los programas de software y los controladores de hardware a la configuración predeterminada original de Dell, así como comprobar el funcionamiento correcto del equipo y del hardware instalado por Dell. Además de esta asistencia del personal técnico, encontrará soporte técnico en línea en support.dell.com. Puede que haya opciones de soporte técnico adicionales con cargo.Apéndice 203 Dell proporciona soporte técnico limitado para el equipo y el software y los periféricos instalados por Dell1 . La asistencia para software y periféricos de terceros corresponde al fabricante original e incluye los artículos adquiridos o instalados a través de Dell Software and Peripherals, Readyware y Custom Factory Integration2 . 1 Se ofrecen servicios de reparación conforme a los términos y condiciones de la garantía limitada y el servicio de asistencia opcional contratado al comprar el equipo. 2 Todos los componentes estándar de Dell incluidos en un proyecto Custom Factory Integration (CFI) están cubiertos por la garantía limitada estándar de Dell para el equipo. No obstante, Dell también amplía el programa de sustitución de piezas para incluir todos los componentes de hardware no estándar de terceros integrados a través de CFI durante todo el período de vigencia del contrato de asistencia del equipo. Definición de software y dispositivos periféricos "instalados por Dell" El software instalado por Dell incluye el sistema operativo y parte de los programas de software instalados en el equipo durante el proceso de fabricación (Microsoft Microsoft Office, Norton Antivirus, etc.) Los periféricos instalados por Dell incluyen cualesquiera tarjetas de expansión internas o accesorios para el compartimento de módulos o tarjeta ExpressCard de la marca Dell. Además, se incluyen todos los monitores, teclados, ratones, altavoces, micrófonos para módems telefónicos, estaciones de acoplamiento/ replicadores de puerto, productos de red y todos los cables correspondientes de la marca Dell. Definición de software y dispositivos periféricos "de terceros" El software y los periféricos de terceros incluyen los periféricos, accesorios y programas de software vendidos por Dell pero que no son de la marca Dell (impresoras, escáneres, cámaras, juegos, etc.). El soporte para el software y los dispositivos periféricos de terceros lo proporciona el fabricante original del producto.204 Apéndice Aviso FCC (Sólo EE.UU.) FCC Clase B Este equipo genera, utiliza y puede emitir energía de radiofrecuencia y, si no se le instala y utiliza de acuerdo con el manual de instrucciones del fabricante, puede causar interferencias con la recepción de radio y televisión. Este equipo se ha probado y cumple con los límites establecidos para los dispositivos digitales de clase B, de conformidad con lo dispuesto en la Sección 15 de la Normativa de la FCC. Este dispositivo cumple con el Apartado 15 de la Normativa de la FCC. El funcionamiento depende de las dos condiciones siguientes: • Este dispositivo no debe provocar interferencias perjudiciales. • Este dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia recibida, incluidas las que puedan provocar un funcionamiento no deseado. AVISO: Las normas de la FCC indican que los cambios o modificaciones que no estén expresamente aprobados por Dell Inc. podrían invalidar su autoridad para utilizar este equipo. Estos límites se han diseñado para ofrecer una protección razonable frente a interferencias perjudiciales en instalaciones residenciales. Sin embargo, no hay garantías de que no se puedan producir interferencias en un tipo de instalación determinado. Si este equipo ocasiona interferencias perjudiciales con la recepción de radio o televisión, lo cual se puede determinar apagando y encendiendo el equipo, se aconseja intentar corregir la interfaz en una o más de las medidas siguientes: • Cambie la orientación de la antena de recepción. • Vuelva a colocar el sistema con respecto al receptor. • Separe el sistema del receptor. • Conecte el sistema a una toma de alimentación eléctrica diferente, de modo que el sistema y el receptor se encuentren en diferentes ramas del circuito. Si es necesario, consulte a un representante de Dell Inc. o a un técnico con experiencia en radio/televisión para obtener consejos adicionales. Apéndice 205 La información siguiente se proporciona en el dispositivo o dispositivos cubiertos en este documento de conformidad con las normas de la FCC: Aviso de productos de Macrovision Este producto incorpora una tecnología de protección del copyright que está protegida por patentes de Estados Unidos y otros derechos de propiedad intelectual. La utilización de la tecnología de protección de copyright debe estar autorizada por Macrovision y su finalidad es el uso doméstico y otros tipos de visualización con carácter limitado, a menos que Macrovision lo autorice expresamente. Se prohíbe la ingeniería inversa y el desensamblaje. Nombre del producto: Dell™ Inspiron™ 1521 Número de modelo: PP22L Nombre de la organización: Dell Inc. Worldwide Regulatory Compliance & Environmental Affairs One Dell Way Round Rock, TX 78682 EE.UU. 512-338-4400206 ApéndiceGlosario 207 Glosario Los términos de este glosario se proporcionan sólo con fines informativos y pueden o no describir las funciones incluidas con su equipo en particular. A acceso directo. Icono que proporciona un acceso rápido a programas, archivos, carpetas y unidades que se utilizan con frecuencia. Cuando sitúa un acceso directo en el escritorio de Windows y pulsa dos veces sobre el icono, puede abrir la carpeta o el archivo correspondiente sin necesidad de buscarlo. Los iconos de acceso directo no cambian la ubicación de los archivos. Si se elimina un acceso directo, el archivo original no se ve afectado. Además, también se puede cambiar el nombre de un icono de acceso directo. ACPI (interfaz avanzada de configuración y energía). Especificación de administración de energía que permite a los sistemas operativos de Microsoft® Windows® colocar un equipo en modo de espera o modo de hibernación con el fin de reducir el consumo de la energía eléctrica asignada a cada dispositivo conectado. adaptador de red. Chip que proporciona capacidades de red. Un equipo puede incluir un adaptador de red en la placa base o una tarjeta PC que contenga dicho adaptador. A un adaptador de red también se le conoce como NIC (controlador de interfaz de red). AGP (puerto para gráficos acelerados). Puerto dedicado para gráficos que permite utilizar la memoria del sistema para tareas relacionadas con vídeo. El AGP produce una imagen de vídeo uniforme y de color verdadero gracias a una interfaz más rápida entre los circuitos de vídeo y la memoria del ordenador. AHCI (Interfaz avanzada de controlador host). Interfaz para controlador de host de unidad de disco duro SATA que permite al controlador de almacenamiento habilitar tecnologías como Native Command Queuing (NCQ) y conexión en caliente. ALS (sensor de luz ambiente). Característica que ayuda a controlar el brillo de la pantalla. archivo "readme". Archivo de texto incluido con un paquete de software o con un producto de hardware. Normalmente, los archivos "readme" proporcionan información sobre la instalación y describen mejoras o correcciones de un producto que aún no se han incluido en la documentación. área de notificación. Sección de la barra de tareas de Windows que contiene los iconos que proporcionan acceso rápido a los programas y a las utilidades del equipo, como el reloj, el control de volumen y el estado de la impresora. También se conoce como bandeja del sistema.208 Glosario ASF (formato de estándares de alerta). Estándar para definir un mecanismo de notificación de alertas de hardware y software a una consola de administración. ASF está diseñado para ser independiente de la plataforma y del sistema operativo. asignación de memoria. Proceso por el cual el equipo asigna direcciones de memoria a ubicaciones físicas durante el inicio. Los dispositivos y el software pueden identificar entonces la información a la que accede el microprocesador. B BIOS (basic input/output system [sistema básico de entrada/salida]). Programa (o utilidad) que sirve de interfaz entre el hardware del equipo y el sistema operativo. Si no sabe cómo afectan los valores de configuración al equipo, no los modifique. También se conoce como configuración del sistema. bit. La unidad de datos más pequeña que puede interpretar un equipo. Bluetooth®, tecnología inalámbrica. Estándar de tecnología inalámbrica para dispositivos interconectados de corto alcance (9 metros [29 pies]) que permite a los dispositivos activados reconocerse entre sí automáticamente. bps (bits por segundo). Unidad estándar para medir la velocidad de transmisión de datos. BTU (unidad térmica británica). Medición de generación de calor. bus local. Bus de datos que proporciona un rápido flujo de información entre los dispositivos y el microprocesador. bus. Vía de comunicación entre los componentes de un equipo. byte. Unidad básica de almacenamiento de datos utilizada por el equipo. Generalmente, un byte es igual a 8 bits. C C (Centígrados). Sistema de medición de temperatura según el cual 0 °C es el punto de congelación y 100 °C el de ebullición del agua. CA (corriente alterna). Forma de electricidad que suministra alimentación al equipo cuando el adaptador de CA del cable de alimentación está enchufado a una toma de alimentación eléctrica. caché L1. Memoria caché primaria almacenada dentro del microprocesador. caché L2. Memoria caché secundaria que puede ser externa respecto al microprocesador o incorporada dentro de su arquitectura.Glosario 209 caché. Mecanismo especial de almacenamiento de alta velocidad que puede ser una sección reservada de la memoria principal o un dispositivo independiente de almacenamiento de alta velocidad. La memoria caché aumenta la eficacia de muchas operaciones del microprocesador. carné. Documento internacional para aduanas que facilita las importaciones temporales a países extranjeros. También conocido como pasaporte para mercancías. carpeta. Término empleado para describir el espacio de una unidad o disco en el que se organizan y agrupan los archivos. Los archivos de una carpeta se pueden ver y ordenar de varias formas, por ejemplo, alfabéticamente, por fecha y por tamaño. CD de inicio. CD que puede utilizarse para iniciar un equipo. Asegúrese de tener siempre un CD o disquete de inicio disponible por si se daña la unidad de disco duro o por si el equipo tiene un virus. El soporte Drivers and Utilities (Controladores y utilidades) es un CD de inicio. CD-R (disco compacto grabable). Tipo de CD que se puede grabar. Los datos sólo pueden grabarse una vez en un CD-R. Una vez grabados, no se pueden borrar ni sobrescribir. CD-RW (disco compacto reescribible). Tipo de CD que se puede grabar muchas veces. En un disco CD-RW se pueden escribir datos y después se pueden borrar y volver a escribir otros. CMOS. Tipo de circuito electrónico. Los equipos utilizan una pequeña cantidad de memoria CMOS alimentada por pila para conservar la fecha, hora y las opciones de configuración del sistema. COA (certificado de autenticidad). Código alfanumérico de Windows impreso en una etiqueta adherida al equipo. También se denomina Clave de producto o ID de producto. Código de servicio rápido. Código numérico impreso en una etiqueta adherida al equipo Dell™. Use el código de servicio rápido cuando llame a Dell para solicitar asistencia. Es posible que el código de servicio rápido no esté disponible en determinados países. compartimento de medios. Compartimento que admite dispositivos como unidades ópticas, una segunda batería o un módulo Dell TravelLite™. compartimento para módulos. Consulte compartimento para medios. conector DIN. Conector redondo de seis patas que cumple los estándares DIN (Deutsche Industrie-Norm); normalmente se utiliza para conectar cables PS/2 de teclado o de ratón. conector paralelo. Puerto de E/S que se suele utilizar para conectar una impresora en paralelo al equipo. También se conoce como puerto LPT. conector serie. Puerto de E/S que se utiliza con frecuencia para conectar dispositivos al equipo, por ejemplo, un dispositivo digital portátil o una cámara digital.210 Glosario configuración del sistema. Utilidad que sirve de interfaz entre el hardware del equipo y el sistema operativo. Permite establecer las opciones que pueden seleccionar el usuario en el BIOS, como la fecha y la hora o la contraseña del sistema. Si no sabe cómo afectan los valores de configuración al ordenador, no cambie los de este programa. controlador de dispositivos. Consulte controlador. controlador. Chip que controla la transferencia de datos entre el microprocesador y la memoria, o entre el microprocesador y los dispositivos. controlador. Software que permite al sistema operativo controlar un dispositivo, por ejemplo, una impresora. Muchos dispositivos no funcionan correctamente si no se ha instalado el controlador adecuado en el ordenador. controladora de vídeo. Circuitos de una tarjeta de vídeo o de la tarjeta del sistema (en equipos con controladora de vídeo integrada) que proporcionan al equipo las capacidades de vídeo, junto con el monitor. creación de bandas de disco. Técnica que permite extender los datos en varias unidades de disco duro. Esta técnica puede acelerar las operaciones que recuperan datos del almacenamiento en disco. Normalmente, los equipos que utilizan las bandas de disco permiten al usuario seleccionar el tamaño de la unidad de datos o la anchura de la banda. CRIMM (módulo de continuidad de memoria en línea Rambus). Módulo especial que no dispone de chips de memoria y que se usa para rellenar ranuras RIMM que no estén ocupadas. cursor. Marcador en pantalla que indica dónde tendrá lugar la siguiente acción que se ejecute con el teclado, el ratón táctil o el ratón normal. Suele ser una línea continua parpadeante, un carácter de subrayado o una pequeña flecha. D DDR SDRAM (memoria SDRAM de velocidad de transferencia de datos doble). Tipo de memoria SDRAM que dobla el ciclo de ráfaga de datos, mejorando el rendimiento del sistema. DDR2 SDRAM (memoria 2 SDRAM de velocidad de transferencia de datos doble). Tipo de memoria DDR SDRAM que utiliza un sistema de carga de 4 bits y otros cambios en la arquitectura para estimular la velocidad de la memoria a más de 400 MHz. de sólo lectura. Datos o archivos que se pueden ver, pero no se pueden modificar ni eliminar. Un archivo puede tener el tipo de acceso sólo lectura si: • Reside en un disco CD o DVD protegido físicamente contra escritura. • Se encuentra en un directorio de una red y el administrador del sistema ha asignado derechos de sólo lectura a usuarios específicos. DIMM (módulo de memoria de doble línea). Tarjeta de circuito impreso con chips de memoria que la conectan a un módulo de memoria de la placa base.Glosario 211 dirección de E/S. Dirección de la memoria RAM asociada a un dispositivo específico (como un conector serie, un conector paralelo o una ranura de expansión) y que permite al microprocesador comunicarse con dicho dispositivo. dirección de memoria. Ubicación específica de la RAM en la que se almacenan datos temporalmente. disco de inicio. Disco que puede utilizarse para iniciar un equipo. Asegúrese de tener siempre un CD o disquete de inicio disponible por si se daña la unidad de disco duro o por si el equipo tiene un virus. disipador de calor. Placa de metal existente sobre algunos microprocesadores que ayuda a disipar el calor. dispositivo. Hardware como una unidad de disco, una impresora o un teclado instalado o conectado al equipo. DMA (acceso directo a memoria). Canal que permite que se realicen ciertos tipos de transferencia de datos entre la memoria RAM y un dispositivo sin la intervención del microprocesador. DMTF (Grupo de trabajo de administración distribuida). Consorcio de compañías de hardware y software que desarrollan estándares de administración para entornos de escritorio, red, empresa e Internet distribuidos. doble núcleo. Tecnología de Intel® en la que hay dos unidades informáticas físicas dentro de un único paquete de procesador, aumentando así el rendimiento del equipo y la capacidad multitarea. dominio. Grupo de equipos, programas y dispositivos de una red que se administran como una unidad con reglas y procedimientos comunes y para que lo utilice un grupo específico de usuarios. Los usuarios inician una sesión en el dominio para acceder a sus recursos. DRAM (memoria dinámica de acceso aleatorio). Memoria que almacena información en circuitos integrados que contienen condensadores. DSL (línea de suscriptor digital). Tecnología que proporciona una conexión a Internet constante y de alta velocidad a través de una línea telefónica analógica. duración de la batería. Período de tiempo (en años) durante el que la batería de un equipo portátil se puede agotar y recargar. DVD+RW (DVD regrabables). Tipo de DVD regrabable. En un disco DVD-RW se pueden escribir datos y después se pueden borrar y volver a escribir otros (La tecnología DVD+RW es diferente a la tecnología DVD-RW.) DVD-R ( DVD grabable). Tipo de DVD que se puede grabar. Los datos sólo pueden grabarse una vez en un DVD-R. Una vez grabados, no se pueden borrar ni sobrescribir. DVI (interfaz de vídeo digital). Estándar para la transmisión digital entre un equipo y una pantalla de vídeo digital.212 Glosario E E/S (entrada/salida). Operación o dispositivo que introduce y extrae datos del equipo. Los teclados e impresoras son dispositivos de E/S. ECC (verificación y corrección de errores). Tipo de memoria que incluye circuitos especiales para comprobar la exactitud de los datos a medida que entran en la memoria y salen de la misma. ECP (puerto de capacidades extendidas). Diseño de puerto paralelo que proporciona una mejor transmisión bidireccional de datos. Similar a EPP, ECP utiliza el acceso directo a la memoria para transferir datos y, con frecuencia, mejorar el rendimiento. editor de texto. Programa que se utiliza para crear y modificar archivos que sólo contienen texto; por ejemplo, el Bloc de notas de Windows utiliza un editor de texto. Los editores de texto no suelen ofrecer la funcionalidad de ajuste de palabra o de formato (la opción para subrayar, cambiar fuentes, etc.). EIDE (electrónica mejorada de dispositivos integrados). Versión mejorada de la interfaz IDE para unidades de disco duro y de CD. EMI (interferencia electromagnética). Interferencia eléctrica causada por la radiación electromagnética. ENERGY STAR®. Requisitos de la Agencia de protección medioambiental que disminuyen el consumo general de electricidad. EPP (puerto paralelo mejorado). Diseño de conexión en paralelo que permite la transmisión bidireccional de datos. ESD (descarga electrostática). Descarga brusca de electricidad estática. La ESD puede dañar los circuitos integrados del ordenador y del equipo de comunicaciones. Etiqueta de servicio. Etiqueta de código de barras del equipo que lo identifica cuando se accede al sitio Web de soporte técnico de Dell support.dell.com o cuando se llama a Dell para solicitar soporte técnico o atención al cliente. ExpressCard. Tarjeta de E/S extraíble que cumple el estándar PCMCIA. Algunos de los tipos más habituales de tarjetas ExpressCards son los módems y los adaptadores de red. Las ExpressCards soportan ambos estándares PCI Express y USB 2.0. F Fahrenheit. Escala de medición de temperatura según la cual 32 °F es el punto de congelación y 212 °F el de ebullición del agua. FBD (fully-buffered DIMM). DIMM con chips DDR2 DRAM y un búfer de memoria avanzado (AMB) que acelera la comunicación entre los chips DDR2 SDRAM y el sistema.Glosario 213 FCC (Comisión federal de comunicaciones). Agencia de Estados Unidos responsable de hacer cumplir las normativas en materia de comunicaciones que determinan la cantidad de radiación que pueden emitir los PC y otros equipos electrónicos. fondo de pantalla. Diseño o imagen de fondo en el escritorio de Windows. El fondo de pantalla se puede cambiar mediante el Panel de control de Windows. También puede digitalizar su fotografía favorita y utilizarla como fondo. formato. Proceso de preparación de una unidad o disco para el almacenamiento de archivos. Al formatear una unidad o disco, se perderá toda la información existente. frecuencia de actualización. Frecuencia, medida en Hz, con la cual se recargan las líneas horizontales de la pantalla (a veces también se denomina frecuencia vertical). Cuanto más alta sea la frecuencia de actualización, menor será el parpadeo de vídeo perceptible por el ojo humano. FSB (bus frontal). Vía de datos e interfaz física entre el microprocesador y la memoria RAM. FTP (protocolo de transferencia de archivos). Protocolo estándar de Internet utilizado para intercambiar archivos entre equipos conectados a Internet. G G (gravedad). Medida de peso y fuerza. GB (gigabyte). Medida de almacenamiento de datos equivalente a 1 024 megabytes (1 073 741 824 bytes). Cuando se refiere al almacenamiento en la unidad de disco duro, el término a menudo se redondea a 1 000 000 000 de bytes. GHz (gigahercio). Medida de frecuencia equivalente a mil millones de Hz, o a mil MHz. Las velocidades de los microprocesadores, buses e interfaces del ordenador se miden generalmente en GHz. GUI (interfaz gráfica de usuario). Software que interactúa con el usuario por medio de menús, ventanas e iconos. La mayoría de los programas que funcionan en los sistemas operativos Windows son GUI. H HTTP (protocolo de transferencia de hipertexto). Protocolo utilizado para intercambiar archivos entre equipos conectados a Internet. Hyper-Threading. Hyper-Threading es una tecnología de Intel que puede mejorar el rendimiento global del equipo permitiendo funcionar a un procesador físico como dos procesadores lógicos, capaces de realizar ciertas tareas simultáneamente. Hz (hercio). Unidad de medida de frecuencia que equivale a 1 ciclo por segundo. Los equipos y dispositivos electrónicos suelen medirse en kilohercios (KHz), megahercios (MHz), gigahercios (GHz) o terahercios (THz).214 Glosario I IC (circuito integrado). Mina semiconductora o chip, en el que se fabrican miles o millones de pequeños componentes electrónicos para su uso en equipos informáticos, de audio y de vídeo. IDE (electrónica de dispositivos integrados). Interfaz para dispositivos de almacenamiento en masa en los que el controlador está integrado en la unidad de disco duro o en la unidad de CD. IEEE 1394 (Instituto de Ingenieros Electrónicos y Eléctricos, Inc.). Bus serie de alto rendimiento utilizado para conectar al equipo dispositivos compatibles con IEEE 1394, como cámaras digitales y reproductores de DVD. integrado. Generalmente se refiere a componentes ubicados físicamente en la placa base del equipo. También se conoce como incorporado. IR de consumo. Puerto que permite la transmisión de datos entre el equipo y los dispositivos compatibles con infrarrojos sin utilizar una conexión de cable. IrDA (asociación de datos de infrarrojos). Organización que crea estándares internacionales para las comunicaciones por infrarrojos. IRQ (solicitud de interrupción). Vía electrónica asignada a un dispositivo específico de modo que éste pueda comunicarse con el microprocesador. Cada conexión de un dispositivo debe tener asignado un número de IRQ. Aunque dos dispositivos pueden compartir la misma asignación de IRQ, no pueden utilizarse simultáneamente. ISP (proveedor de servicios Internet). Compañía que proporciona acceso a su servidor host para conectarse directamente a Internet, enviar y recibir mensajes de correo electrónico y visitar sitios Web. Normalmente el ISP proporciona un paquete de software, un nombre de usuario y números de teléfono de acceso por una cuota determinada. lector de huellas dactilares. Sensor de bandas que usa la huella dactilar única para autentificar la identidad de los usuarios con el fin de asegurar el equipo. K Kb (kilobit). Unidad de datos igual a 1024 bits. Medida de la capacidad de los circuitos integrados de memoria. KB (kilobyte). Unidad de datos equivalente a 1024 bytes; con frecuencia se habla de 1 000 bytes para hacer referencia a un kilobyte. kHz (kilohercio). Medida de frecuencia equivalente a 1 000 Hz.Glosario 215 L LAN (red de área local). Red de equipos que abarca una pequeña área. Generalmente, una LAN se limita a un edificio o a un pequeño grupo de edificios cercanos. Una LAN puede conectarse a otra situada a cualquier distancia a través de líneas telefónicas y ondas de radio para formar una WAN (Wide Area Network [red de área ancha]). LCD (pantalla de cristal líquido). La tecnología utilizada en las pantallas de los equipos portátiles y en las televisiones planas. LED (diodo emisor de luz). Componente electrónico que emite luz para indicar el estado del equipo. LPT (terminal de impresión de línea). Nombre que recibe una conexión en paralelo a una impresora o a otro dispositivo paralelo. M Mb (megabit). Medida de la capacidad de los chips de memoria equivalente a 1 024 Kb. MB (megabyte). Medida de almacenamiento de datos equivalente a 1 048 576 bytes. 1 MB es igual a 1 024 KB. Cuando se refiere al almacenamiento en la unidad de disco duro, el término a menudo se redondea a 1.000.000 de bytes. MB/seg (megabytes por segundo). Un millón de bytes por segundo. Esta medida se utiliza normalmente para la tasa de transferencia de datos. Mbps (megabits por segundo). Un millón de bits por segundo. Esta medida suele utilizarse para velocidades de transmisión de módems y redes. memoria de vídeo. Memoria formada por chips de memoria dedicados a funciones de vídeo. Generalmente, la memoria de vídeo es más rápida que la del sistema. La cantidad de memoria de vídeo instalada afecta principalmente al número de colores que un programa puede mostrar. memoria. Área de almacenamiento temporal de datos del interior del equipo. Puesto que los datos de la memoria no son permanentes, es recomendable guardar con frecuencia los archivos mientras se trabaja con ellos y guardarlos siempre antes de apagar el equipo. El ordenador puede contener diferentes formas de memoria. Por ejemplo, RAM, ROM y memoria de vídeo. Con frecuencia, la palabra memoria se utiliza como sinónimo de RAM. método abreviado de teclado. Comando que requiere que se pulsen varias teclas simultáneamente. MHz (megahercio). Medida de frecuencia equivalente a 1 millón de ciclos por segundo. Las velocidades de los procesadores, buses e interfaces del ordenador se miden a menudo en MHz.216 Glosario microprocesador. Chip del equipo que interpreta y ejecuta instrucciones de un programa. A veces, al procesador se le llama CPU (Central Processing Unit [unidad central de proceso]). Mini PCI. Estándar para dispositivos periféricos integrados con énfasis en las comunicaciones, como módems y NIC. Las Minitarjetas PCI son unas tarjetas pequeñas que tienen una funcionalidad equivalente a una tarjeta de expansión PCI estándar. minitarjeta. Tarjeta pequeña diseñada para dispositivos periféricos integrados, como controladoras de interfaces de red (NIC) de comunicaciones. La minitarjeta tiene una funcionalidad equivalente a una tarjeta de expansión PCI estándar. módem. Dispositivo que permite que el equipo se comunique con otros mediante líneas telefónicas analógicas. Existen tres tipos de módem: externo, tarjeta PC e interno. Generalmente, el módem se utiliza para conectarse a Internet e intercambiar correo-electrónico. modo de espera. Modo de administración de energía que cierra todas las operaciones innecesarias del equipo para ahorrar energía. modo de gráficos. Modo de vídeo que puede definirse en términos de x píxeles horizontales por y píxeles verticales por z colores. Los modos de gráficos pueden mostrar una variedad ilimitada de formas y fuentes. modo de hibernación. Modo de administración de energía que guarda todo el contenido de la memoria en un espacio reservado del disco duro y apaga el equipo. Cuando se reinicia, se recupera automáticamente la información de la memoria que se guardó en el disco duro. modo de pantalla dual. Configuración de la pantalla que permite utilizar un segundo monitor como extensión de la pantalla. También se conoce como modo de pantalla extendida. modo de pantalla extendida. Configuración de la pantalla que permite utilizar un segundo monitor como extensión de la misma. También se conoce como modo de pantalla dual. modo de vídeo. Modo que describe la forma en que se muestran el texto y los gráficos en un monitor. El software con gráficos, como los sistemas operativos Windows, funciona en modos de vídeo que pueden definirse en términos de x píxeles horizontales por y píxeles verticales por z colores. El software de caracteres, como los editores de texto, funciona en modos de vídeo que pueden definirse en términos de x columnas por y filas de caracteres. módulo de memoria. Pequeña tarjeta de circuito impreso que contiene chips de memoria y se conecta a la placa base. módulo de viaje. Dispositivo de plástico diseñado para acoplarse en el interior del compartimento modular y reducir el peso del equipo. MP (megapíxel). Medida de resolución de imagen que se utiliza para las cámaras digitales. ms (milisegundo). Medida de tiempo que equivale a una milésima de segundo. Los tiempos de acceso de los dispositivos de almacenamiento suelen medirse en milisegundos.Glosario 217 N NIC. Consulte adaptador de red. ns (nanosegundo). Medida de tiempo que equivale a una milmillonésima de segundo. NVRAM (memoria de acceso aleatorio no volátil). Tipo de memoria que almacena datos cuando el equipo está apagado o pierde su suministro de energía externo. La memoria NVRAM se usa para mantener la información de configuración del equipo, por ejemplo la fecha, la hora y otras opciones de configuración del sistema que se pueden definir. P panel de control. Utilidad de Windows que permite modificar los valores de configuración del sistema operativo y del hardware, por ejemplo, valores de configuración de la pantalla. partición. Área física de almacenamiento en la unidad de disco duro que está asignada a una o a varias áreas lógicas de almacenamiento conocidas como unidades lógicas. Cada partición puede contener varias unidades lógicas. PCI (interconexión de componentes periféricos). PCI es un bus local que admite rutas de datos de 32 y 64 bits, lo que proporciona una ruta de datos de alta velocidad entre el microprocesador y dispositivos como el vídeo, las unidades y las redes. PCI Express. Modificación en la interfaz PCI que aumenta la tasa de transferencia de datos entre el procesador y los dispositivos conectados al mismo. PCI Express puede transferir datos a velocidades desde 250 megabytes por segundo a 4 por segundos por segundo. Si el conjunto de chips PCI Express y el dispositivo alcanzan velocidades distintas, ambas funcionarán a la velocidad más reducida. PCMCIA (Asociación internacional de tarjetas de memoria para ordenadores personales). Organización que establece los estándares para las tarjetas PC Card. PIO (entrada/salida programada). Método de transferencia de datos entre dos dispositivos a través del microprocesador como parte de la ruta de datos. píxel. Punto en la pantalla del monitor. Los píxeles están ordenados en hileras y columnas para crear una imagen. Una resolución de vídeo, como de 800 x 600, se expresa como el número de píxeles en dirección horizontal por el número de píxeles en dirección vertical. placa base. Tarjeta principal de circuito del equipo. También conocida como tarjeta del sistema. Plug-and-Play. Capacidad del equipo de configurar dispositivos automáticamente. La característica Plug and Play permite la instalación y configuración automáticas, y proporciona compatibilidad con el hardware existente si el BIOS, el sistema operativo y todos los dispositivos también son compatibles con Plug and Play.218 Glosario POST (autoprueba de encendido). Programas de diagnóstico, cargados automáticamente por la BIOS, que llevan a cabo pruebas básicas en los principales componentes del equipo, como la memoria, los discos duros y el vídeo. Si no se detecta ningún problema durante la POST, el equipo continúa el inicio. programa de configuración. Programa utilizado para instalar y configurar hardware y software. El programa setup.exe o install.exe está incluido en la mayoría de paquetes de software de Windows. El Programa de instalación es distinto a la Configuración del sistema. protector contra sobretensiones. Evita que los picos de tensión, como los que ocurren durante una tormenta eléctrica, entren en el equipo a través del enchufe eléctrico. Los protectores contra sobretensiones no protegen de rayos o disminuciones excesivas de tensión mayores del 20 por ciento por debajo del nivel normal de tensión en la línea de CA. Las conexiones de red no están protegidas por los protectores contra sobretensión. Desconecte siempre el cable del conector de red durante una tormenta con aparato eléctrico. protegido contra escritura. Archivos o dispositivos que no se pueden modificar. Utilice la protección contra escritura si desea impedir que se cambien o se destruyan los datos. Para proteger contra escritura un disquete de 3,5 pulgadas, deslice su lengüeta de protección hacia la posición abierta. PS/2 (personal system/2). Tipo de conector al que se conecta un teclado, ratón o teclado numérico compatibles con PS/2. PXE (entorno de ejecución previo al inicio). Estándar WfM (Wired for Management) que permite configurar e iniciar remotamente equipos en red sin sistema operativo. R RAID (matriz redundante de discos independientes). Método para proporcionar la redundancia de datos. Algunas implementaciones comunes de RAID incluyen el tipo RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, RAID 10 y RAID 50. RAM (memoria de acceso aleatorio). Área primaria de almacenamiento temporal para instrucciones de programas y datos. La información almacenada en la RAM se pierde cuando se apaga el ordenador. ranura de expansión. Conector de la placa base (en algunos equipos) en el que se inserta una tarjeta de expansión que la conecta al bus del sistema. Red de banda ancha móvil. Ttambién conocida como WWAN, está formada por una serie de equipos interconectados que se comunican entre sí a través de tecnología inalámbrica y proporciona acceso a Internet en las mismas y variadas áreas en las que está disponible el servicio para un teléfono móvil. El equipo puede mantener la conexión a la red de banda ancha móvil independientemente de su ubicación física, siempre que permanezca dentro del área de servicio de su proveedor de servicio de telefonía móvil.Glosario 219 resolución de vídeo. Consulte resolución. resolución. Nitidez y claridad de imagen que proporciona una impresora o que presenta un monitor. Cuanto mayor es la resolución, más nítida es la imagen. RFI (interferencia de radiofrecuencia). Interferencia que se genera en radiofrecuencias comunes, de 10 kHz a 100 000 MHz. Las radiofrecuencias están en el extremo más bajo del espectro de frecuencia electromagnética y tienen más posibilidades de ser objeto de interferencias que las radiaciones de frecuencia más alta, como las de infrarrojos y luz. ROM (memoria de sólo lectura). Memoria que almacena datos y programas que el equipo no puede eliminar y en los que no puede escribir. La memoria ROM, a diferencia de la RAM, conserva su contenido incluso después de que se apague el equipo. Algunos programas esenciales para el funcionamiento del ordenador residen en la memoria ROM. RPM (revoluciones por minuto). El número de revoluciones que se producen por minuto. La velocidad de la unidad de disco duro a menudo se mide en rpm. RTC (reloj de tiempo real). Reloj alimentado a batería de la placa base que conserva la fecha y la hora después de apagar el equipo. RTCRST (restablecimiento del reloj de tiempo real). Puente de placa base de algunos equipos que se puede utilizar a menudo para solucionar problemas. S S/PDIF (interfaz digital de Sony/Philips). Formato de archivo de transferencia de sonido que permite la transferencia de sonido de un archivo a otro sin necesidad de conversión a un formato análogo, lo que podría ir en detrimento de la calidad del archivo. salida TV y de S-vídeo. Conector utilizado para conectar una TV o un dispositivo de sonido digital al equipo. SAS (serial attached SCSI ). Versión serie más rápida de la interfaz SCSI (en contraposición a la arquitectura en paralelo SCSI original). SATA (ATA serie). Versión serie más rápida de la interfaz ATA (IDE). ScanDisk. Utilidad de Microsoft que comprueba los archivos, las carpetas y la superficie del disco duro en busca de errores. La comprobación de discos a menudo se ejecuta cuando se reinicia el equipo después de haber dejado de responder. SCSI (interfaz de sistemas informáticos pequeños). Interfaz de alta velocidad para conectar dispositivos a un equipo, como unidades de disco duro, unidades CD, impresoras y escáneres. La SCSI puede conectar varios dispositivos usando un único controlador. Se accede a cada dispositivo mediante un número de identificación individual del bus del controlador SCSI.220 Glosario SDRAM (memoria dinámica sincrónica de acceso aleatorio). Tipo de DRAM sincronizada con la velocidad de reloj adecuada del microprocesador. secuencia de inicio. Especifica el orden de los dispositivos desde los que el equipo intenta iniciarse. sensor de infrarrojos. Puerto que permite la transmisión de datos entre el equipo y los dispositivos compatibles con infrarrojos sin utilizar una conexión de cable. SIM (Módulo de identificación de suscriptor). Una tarjeta SIM contiene un microchip que cifra las transmisiones de voz y de datos. Las tarjetas SIM se pueden usar en teléfonos o en equipos portátiles. smart card. Tarjeta que se incorpora con un microprocesador y un chip de memoria. Las smart cards se pueden usar para autenticar un usuario en equipos que las admiten. software antivirus. Programa diseñado para identificar, aislar o eliminar virus del equipo. Strike Zone™. Área reforzada de la base de la plataforma que protege la unidad de disco duro como un dispositivo de amortiguación cuando un equipo sufre un impacto fuerte o una caída (tanto si el equipo está encendido como si está apagado). SVGA (matriz de gráficos de súper vídeo). Estándar de vídeo para tarjetas y controladores. Las resoluciones SVGA comunes son 800 x 600 y 1024 x 768. El número de colores y la resolución que puede mostrar un programa depende de las capacidades del monitor, del dispositivo de vídeo y de sus controladores, además de la cantidad de memoria de vídeo instalada en el equipo. SXGA (supermatriz de gráficos ampliados). Estándar de vídeo para tarjetas y controladores que admite resoluciones de hasta 1280 x 1024. SXGA+ (supermatriz de gráficos ampliados plus). Estándar de vídeo para tarjetas y controladores que admite resoluciones de hasta 1400 x 1050. T TAPI (interfaz de programación de aplicaciones de telefonía). Permite a los programas de Windows funcionar con una gran variedad de dispositivos de telefonía, incluidos los de voz, datos, fax y vídeo. tarjeta de expansión. Tarjeta de circuito impreso que se instala en una ranura de expansión en la placa base de algunos equipos para ampliar su capacidad. Pueden ser, entre otras, tarjetas de vídeo, de módem o de sonido. tarjeta PC Card extendida. Tarjeta PC Card que sobresale de la ranura para tarjetas PC Card cuando se instala. tarjeta PC Card. Tarjeta de E/S extraíble que cumple el estándar PCMCIA. Los módems y adaptadores de red son tipos comunes de tarjetas PC Card.Glosario 221 tiempo de funcionamiento de la batería. Período de tiempo (en minutos u horas) que la batería de un equipo portátil conserva su carga mientras lo alimenta. TPM (módulo de plataforma seguro). Característica de seguridad basada en hardware que al combinarse con el software de seguridad refuerza la seguridad de la red y los equipos habilitando funciones como la protección de archivos y correos electrónicos. U UAC (control de cuentas de usuario). Función de seguridad de Microsoft Windows® Vista™ que, cuando está habilitada, ofrece una capa de seguridad adicional entre las cuentas de usuario y el acceso a la configuración del sistema operativo. UMA (asignación de memoria unificada). Memoria del sistema asignada dinámicamente al vídeo. unidad de CD-RW. Unidad que puede leer discos compactos y grabar en discos CD-RW (regrabables) y en discos CD-R (grabables). Puede grabar varias veces en discos CD-RW, pero sólo una en discos CD-R. unidad de CD-RW/DVD. Unidad, a veces denominada unidad combinada, que puede leer discos compactos y discos DVD, y grabar en discos CD-RW (regrabables) y en discos CD-R (grabables). Puede grabar varias veces en discos CD-RW, pero sólo una en discos CD-R. unidad de disco duro. Unidad que lee y escribe datos en un disco duro. Los términos "unidad de disco duro" y "disco duro" suelen utilizarse indistintamente. Unidad DVD+RW. Unidad que puede leer los DVD y la mayoría de discos compactos, así como escribir en discos DVD+RW (DVD regrabables). unidad óptica. Unidad que utiliza tecnología óptica para leer y escribir datos de discos CD, DVD o DVD+RW. Son unidades ópticas las unidades de CD, DVD, CD-RW y combinadas CD-RW/DVD, por ejemplo. unidad Zip. Unidad de disco de alta capacidad desarrollada por Iomega Corporation que utiliza discos extraíbles de 3,5 pulgadas denominados discos Zip. Los discos Zip son ligeramente más grandes que los normales, aproximadamente el doble de gruesos y almacenan hasta 100 MB de datos. UPS (alimentación ininterrumpible). Fuente de alimentación de seguridad que se utiliza cuando se produce una interrupción de la alimentación o una caída a un nivel de tensión inaceptable. Un UPS mantiene funcionando al equipo durante un periodo limitado cuando no hay energía eléctrica. Los sistemas UPS generalmente proporcionan supresión de sobretensión y también pueden ofrecer regulación de tensión. Los sistemas UPS pequeños proporcionan alimentación de batería durante varios minutos, a fin de permitir apagar correctamente el equipo.222 Glosario USB (bus serie universal). Interfaz de hardware para dispositivos de baja velocidad, por ejemplo un teclado, ratón, palanca de mando, escáner, juego de altavoces o impresora, dispositivos de banda ancha (módems ADSL y de cable), dispositivos de imágenes o de almacenamiento compatibles con USB. Los dispositivos se enchufan directamente en un zócalo de 4 patillas existente en el equipo o en un concentrador de varios puertos que se conecta al ordenador. Los dispositivos USB pueden conectarse y desconectarse mientras el ordenador está encendido y también pueden conectarse entre sí formando una cadena tipo margarita. UTP (par trenzado sin blindaje). Describe un tipo de cable usado en la mayoría de las redes telefónicas y en algunas redes informáticas. Los pares de cables sin blindaje están trenzados para proteger frente a las interferencias electromagnéticas, en lugar de usar una funda metálica alrededor de cada par de cables para evitarlas. UXGA (ultramatriz de gráficos ampliados). Estándar de vídeo para tarjetas y controladores que admite resoluciones de hasta 1600 x 1200. V V (voltio). Medida del potencial eléctrico o de la fuerza electromotriz. Se produce 1 V en una resistencia de 1 ohmio cuando pasa por ella una intensidad de 1 amperio. velocidad de bus. Velocidad en MHz, que indica la rapidez de transferencia de información del bus. velocidad de reloj. Velocidad, en MHz, que indica la rapidez con la que pueden funcionar los componentes del equipo conectados al bus del sistema. virus. Programa diseñado para ocasionar problemas o destruir datos almacenados en un equipo. Un programa de virus pasa de un ordenador a otro a través de un disco infectado, de software descargado de Internet o de archivos que se adjuntan al correo electrónico. Cuando se inicia un programa infectado, también se inicia el virus integrado. Un tipo común de virus es el de inicio, que se almacena en los sectores de inicio de un disquete. Si se deja el disquete en la unidad al cerrar y apagar el equipo, éste se infecta cuando lee los sectores de inicialización del disquete en busca del sistema operativo. Una vez que el equipo está infectado, el virus de inicio puede reproducirse en todos los discos en los que se lea o escriba en ese ordenador hasta que se erradique el virus.Glosario 223 W W (vatio). Medida de potencia eléctrica. Un vatio es 1 amperio de corriente que fluye a 1 voltio. WHr (vatio-hora). Unidad de medida usada normalmente para indicar la capacidad aproximada de una batería. Por ejemplo, una batería de 66 WHr puede proporcionar 66 W de potencia para 1 hora o 33 W para 2 horas. WLAN. Red de área local inalámbrica. Conjunto de equipos interconectados que se comunican a través de las ondas usando puntos de acceso o enrutadores inalámbricos para tener acceso a Internet. WPAN. Red de área personal inalámbrica. Red de equipos usada para la comunicación entre dispositivos informáticos (incluyendo teléfonos y PDA) propios de una persona. WWAN. Red inalámbrica de área amplia. Red inalámbrica de datos de alta velocidad que usa tecnología celular y cubre un área geográfica mucho más grande que las WLAN. WXGA (arreglo amplio de gráficos ampliados). Estándar de vídeo para tarjetas de vídeo y controladores que admite resoluciones de hasta 1 280 x 800. X XGA (matriz de gráficos ampliados). Estándar de vídeo para tarjetas y controladores que admite resoluciones de hasta 1024 x 768. Z ZIF (zero insertion force). Tipo de zócalo o conector que permite instalar o quitar un chip informático sin aplicar ninguna presión al chip o al zócalo correspondiente. Zip. Formato común de compresión de datos. Los archivos que han sido comprimidos con el formato Zip se denominan archivos Zip y suelen tener la extensión de nombre de archivo .zip. Una clase especial de archivo comprimido zip es el archivo autoextraíble, que tiene una extensión de nombre de archivo .exe. Puede descomprimir un archivo autoextraíble presionando dos veces en él.224 GlosarioÍndice 225 Índice A administración de energía ajuste de configuración, 175 QuickSet, 175 alimentación acondicionadores de línea, 40 dispositivos de protección, 40 problemas, 129 supresores de sobretensión, 40 UPS, 40 altavoces descripción, 34 problemas, 132 volumen, 132 asistente para Transferencia fácil de Windows, 37 asistentes Asistente para compatibilidad de programas, 125 Transferencia fácil de Windows, 37 Audio digital S/PDIF activación, 81 audio. Consulte el apartado sonido Auriculares Dolby, configuración, 81 Ayuda de QuickSet, 17 B Banda ancha móvil conexiones de red, 97 Consulte también conmutador inalámbrico Banda ancha móvil (WWAN) problemas, 128 barra de tareas icono QuickSet, 175 indicador de actividad inalámbrica, 96 Quitar hardware de forma segura, 121 Utilidad de tarjeta de banda ancha móvil de Dell, 128 Utilidad Dell Support, 17 barras de herramientas ajuste del tamaño, 175 Batería almacenamiento, 58 carga, 56 comprobación de la carga, 52 de las bisagras, 57 medidor de carga, 53 medidor de energía, 53 rendimiento, 51 sustituir la batería de tipo botón, 172 Batería de tipo botón sustituir, 172226 Índice Botón de alimentación descripción, 23 botones de control de medios Botón Dell MediaDirect, 64 descripción, 25 Botones del ratón táctil descripción, 25 botones del ratón táctil/palanca de seguimiento descripción, 25 brillo ajustar, 43 C Cámara, 23 carné, 178 CD acerca de, 61 blanco, 62 problemas con la unidad, 111 problemas con la unidad de CD-RW, 111 CD Drivers and Utilities (Controladores y utilidades) Dell Diagnostics, 105 cómo ponerse en contacto con Dell, 187 Comprobación del disco, 112 Conector de red descripción, 31 Conector del módem descripción, 32 Conector IEEE 1394 descripción, 30 problemas, 122 Conector para S-vídeo y salida de TV descripción, 32 Conector USB descripción, 32 conexión dispositivo de audio, 65 Red de banda ancha móvil, 97 televisión, 65 conexión a Internet acerca de, 35 configuración, 36 opciones, 35 configuración de la controladora de vídeo determinando la controladora que está instalada, 21 Contrato de licencia de usuario final, 14 controladora de vídeo establecimiento de la configuración, 21 controladores acerca de, 136 identificar, 137 volver a instalar, 137 copiar un CD cómo, 61 información general, 61 sugerencias útiles, 63Índice 227 copiar un DVD cómo, 61 información general, 61 sugerencias útiles, 63 Cubierta de las bisagras de las bisagras, 154 Cubierta del módulo de memoria descripción, 34 D Dell cómo ponerse en contacto, 187 Dell Diagnostics acerca de, 105 iniciar desde la unidad de disco duro, 106 inicio desde el soporte Drivers and Utilities, 107 Dell MediaDirect acerca de, 26 problemas, 125 DellConnect, 182 diagnósticos Dell, 105 dispositivo de audio activación, 81 conexión, 65 documentación Contrato de licencia de usuario final, 14 en línea, 15 ergonómica, 14 garantía, 14 Guía de información del producto, 14 reglamentaria, 14 seguridad, 14 DVD acerca de, 61 blanco, 62 problemas con la unidad, 111 E equipo bajo rendimiento, 114, 127 especificaciones, 189 fallo, 124-125 no responde, 124 restaurar a un estado operativo anterior, 141 escáner problemas, 132 especificaciones, 189 Etiqueta de servicio, 15 etiquetas Etiqueta de servicio, 15 Microsoft Windows, 15 ExpressCards, 83 de las bisagras, 85 instalar, 84 paneles protectores, 84-85228 Índice G Guía de información del producto, 14 H hardware Dell Diagnostics, 105 I icono de Quitar hardware de forma segura, 121 iconos ajuste del tamaño, 175 impresora Cable, 38 conexión, 38 configuración, 38 problemas, 131 USB, 38 inalámbrico encender y apagar actividad, 175 incompatibilidades de software y hardware, 140 Indicador de alimentación condiciones, 129 Indicadores luminosos de estado del dispositivo descripción, 24 Indicadores luminosos de estado del teclado descripción, 26 información ergonómica, 14 información reglamentaria, 14 información sobre la garantía, 14 instalar, 164 instrucciones de seguridad, 14 L Lector de tarjetas de memoria 8 en 1, 87 limpieza Ratón táctil, 201 M memoria de las bisagras, 158, 160 DIMM A, 159 DIMM B, 160 instalar, 157 mensajes error, 114 mensajes de error, 114 Micrófonos en línea digitales, 27 Mini-Card (minitarjeta) instalar, 163 WLAN, 163 WPAN, 163 WWAN, 163 modos de problemas, 132 volumen, 132Índice 229 Módulo de identificación de suscriptor, 162 monitor. Consulte pantalla N números de teléfono, 187 P paneles protectores de tarjetas de las bisagras, 85, 89 ExpressCards, 84 tarjeta de memoria, 87 Pantalla ajustar el tamaño de las barras de herramientas, 175 ajustar el tamaño de los iconos, 175 ajuste de brillo, 43 cambio de la imagen de vídeo, 43 descripción, 23 resolución, 43 pantalla. Consulte pantalla pasador de liberación del dispositivo descripción, 34 pérdida del equipo, 103 problemas alimentación, 129 altavoces, 132 bajo rendimiento del equipo, 114, 127 bloqueos, 124 condiciones del indicador de alimentación, 129 Conector IEEE 1394, 122 Dell Diagnostics, 105 Dell MediaDirect, 125 el equipo no responde, 124 el ordenador no se inicia, 124 el programa falla repetidamente, 125 el programa no responde, 125 escáner, 132 fallo del equipo, 124-125 impresora, 131 mensajes de error, 114 pantalla azul, 125 programas y compatibilidad con Windows, 125 red, 128 restaurar el PC a un estado operativo anterior, 141 restaurar el sistema operativo a un estado anterior, 140 software, 124-126 software espía, 114, 127 sonido y altavoces, 132 Teclado, 123 unidad de CD, 111 unidad de CD-RW, 111 Unidad de disco duro, 112 unidad de DVD, 111 unidades, 111230 Índice programa de configuración del sistema opciones más utilizadas, 198 pantallas, 198 visualización, 198 Q QuickSet, 175 R RAM. Consulte el apartado memoria Ranura para cable de seguridad descripción, 27 Ranura para ExpressCard descripción, 29 ranura para tarjeta de memoria, 87 Ratón táctil, 48 limpieza, 201 personalización, 49 red Banda ancha móvil (WWAN), 128 instalar una Mini-Card (minitarjeta) WLAN, 163 problemas, 128 QuickSet, 175 resolución configuración, 43 Restaurar el sistema, 140-141 Restaurar PC, 142 robo del equipo, 103 S secuencia de inicio, 198 sensor de infrarrojos descripción, 34 SIM. Consulte el apartado Módulo de identificación de suscriptor sistema de alimentación ininterrumpida. Consulte el apartado UPS sistema operativo reinstalación de Windows Vista, 141 sitio de soporte técnico de Dell, 15 sitio Web de soporte técnico, 15 software problemas, 125-126 software espía, 114, 127 solución de problemas Dell Diagnostics, 105 restaurar el PC a un estado operativo anterior, 140-141 Solucionador de problemas de hardware, 140 Solucionador de problemas de hardware, 140 soporte reproducción, 59 Soporte Drivers and Utilities, 13 acerca de, 138 soporte técnico cómo ponerse en contacto con Dell, 187Índice 231 T tarjeta con tecnología inalámbrica Bluetooth indicador luminoso de estado del dispositivo, 25 instalar, 171 tarjeta de memoria paneles protectores, 87 tarjetas de memoria de las bisagras, 89 paneles protectores, 89 Tarjetas de memoria de medios, 87 instalar, 88 lector, 30 tipos, 87 Teclado accesos directos, 46 de las bisagras, 155 problemas, 123 teclado numérico, 45 teclado numérico, 45 televisión conexión, 65 transferencia de la información a un equipo nuevo, 37 U Unidad de disco duro descripción, 34 devolución a Dell, 152 problemas, 112 sustituir, 150 unidades Consulte también el apartado unidad de disco duro Consulte también el apartado unidad óptica problemas, 111 UPS, 40 V Ventilador descripción, 34 viajes con el equipo consejos, 178 embalaje, 177 en avión, 179 etiqueta de identificación, 177 vídeo problemas, 135 volumen ajustar, 133 volver a instalar Windows Vista, 141 Volver al controlador anterior de dispositivos, 137 W Windows Vista Asistente para compatibilidad de programas, 125 asistente para Transferencia fácil de Windows, 37232 Índice Windows Vista (Continuación) Restaurar el sistema, 140-141 volver a instalar, 141 Volver al controlador anterior de dispositivos, 137 WLAN, 164 instalar una Mini-Card (minitarjeta), 163 WPAN instalar, 170 WWAN Consulte también Banda ancha móvil instalar, 167 Dell Inspiron One 2020 Manuel du propriétaire Modèle d'ordinateur : Inspiron One 2020 Modèle réglementaire : W06B Type réglementaire : W06B001Remarques, précautions et avertissements REMARQUE : Une REMARQUE indique des informations importantes qui peuvent vous aider à mieux utiliser votre ordinateur. PRÉCAUTION : Une PRÉCAUTION indique un risque d'endommagement potentiel du matériel ou de perte de données en cas de non-respect des instructions fournies. AVERTISSEMENT : Un AVERTISSEMENT signale un risque d'endommagement potentiel du matériel, de blessure corporelle ou de mort. ____________________ © 2012 Dell Inc. Tous droits réservés. Marques mentionnées dans ce document : Dell™, le logo DELL et Inspiron™ sont des marques de Dell Inc. ; Microsoft®, Windows® et le logo du bouton Démarrer Windows sont des marques comerciales ou déposées de Microsoft Corporation aux États-UNis et/ou dans d'autres pays. Intel® et Intel SpeedStep® sont des marques déposées d'Intel Corporation aux États-Unis et dans d'autres pays. Bluetooth® est une marque déposée de Bluetooth SIG, Inc. et elle est utilisé par Dell sous licence. 2012 - 10 Rév. A01Table des matières | 3 Table des matières 1 Présentation technique. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Vue interne de l'ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Composants de la carte système . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 2 Avant de commencer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Éteignez l'ordinateur et les périphériques connectées. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Consignes de sécurité . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Outils recommandés . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 3 Après une intervention à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 4 Cache du socle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Retrait du cache du socle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Réinstallation du cache du socle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 5 Socle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Retrait du socle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Réinstallation du socle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 6 Capot arrière. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Retrait du cache arrière. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Réinstallation du capot arrière . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 7 Disque dur. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Retrait du disque dur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Réinstallation du disque dur. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 8 Lecteur optique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Retrait du lecteur optique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Remise en place du lecteur optique . . . . . . . . . . . 26 9 Carte B-CAS (Japon uniquement) . . . . . . . . . 27 Retrait de la carte B-CAS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Réinstallation de la carte B-CAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 | Table des matières 10 Carte convertisseur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Retrait de la carte convertisseur. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Réinstallation de la carte convertisseur . . . . . . . . . 30 11 Module(s) de mémoire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Retrait du ou des modules de mémoire. . . . . . . . . 31 Remise en place du ou des modules de mémoire. . . . 33 12 Protection de la carte système . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Retrait de la protection de la carte système . . . . . . 35 Réinstallation de la protection de la carte système. . . . 36 13 Connecteur d'entrée d'antenne . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Retrait du connecteur d'entrée d'antenne . . . . . . . 37 Réinstallation du connecteur d'entrée d'antenne . . . . 38 14 Modules d'antenne. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Retrait des modules d'antenne. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Réinstallation des modules d'antenne . . . . . . . . . . 40 15 Carte du tuner TV (en option). . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Retrait de la carte du tuner TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Réinstallation de la carte du tuner TV . . . . . . . . . . 43 16 Mini carte sans fil (en option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Retrait de la mini carte sans fil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Réinstallation de la mini carte sans fil . . . . . . . . . . 47 17 Pile bouton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Retrait de la pile bouton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Remise en place de la pile bouton . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 18 Haut-parleurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Retrait des haut-parleurs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Réinstallation des haut-parleurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 19 Ventilateur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Retrait du ventilateur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Réinstallation du ventilateur. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Table des matières | 5 20 Ensemble bouton d'alimentation . . . . . . . . . . 57 Retrait de l'ensemble bouton d'alimentation. . . . . . 57 Réinstallation de l'ensemble bouton d'alimentation . . . 59 21 Dissipateur de chaleur du processeur . . . . . . 61 Retrait du dissipateur de chaleur du processeur . . . 61 Réinstallation du dissipateur de chaleur du processeur. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 22 Processeur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Retrait du processeur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Remplacement du processeur. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 23 Carte système. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Retrait de la carte système . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Réinstallation de la carte système. . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Entrez le numéro de service dans le BIOS . . . . . . . 71 24 Panneau de l'écran. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Retrait du panneau de l'écran . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Remise en place du panneau de l'écran. . . . . . . . . 77 25 Récepteur infrarouge (IR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Retrait du récepteur infrarouge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Réinstallation du récepteur infrarouge. . . . . . . . . . 82 26 Cadre central . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Retrait du cadre central . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Réinstallation du cadre central. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 27 Module caméra. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Retrait du module caméra. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Réinstallation du module caméra . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 28 Cadre de l'écran . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Retrait du cadre de l'écran. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Remise en place du cadre d'écran . . . . . . . . . . . . 936 | Table des matières 29 Configuration du système. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Présentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Effacement des mots de passe oubliés . . . . . . . . 106 Effacement des paramètres CMOS . . . . . . . . . . . 107 30 Flashage du BIOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Présentation technique | 7 1 Présentation technique AVERTISSEMENT : Avant d'ouvrir votre ordinateur, prenez connaissance des consignes de sécurité fournies avec l'ordinateur et suivez les instructions de la section « Avant de commencer », page 11. Pour plus d'informations sur les pratiques d'excellence en matière de sécurité, consultez la page Regulatory Compliance (Conformité à la réglementation) à l'adresse dell.com/regulatory_compliance. Vue interne de l'ordinateur 1 carte du bouton d'alimentation 2 châssis 3 ensemble lecteur optique 4 carte convertisseur 5 ventilateur 6 dissipateur de chaleur du processeur 7 module(s) de mémoire 8 pile bouton 9 carte système 10 carte du tuner TV (en option) 11 mini carte sans fil 12 carte B-CAS (Japon uniquement) 13 ensemble disque dur 14 haut-parleurs (2) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 13 14 98 | Présentation technique Composants de la carte système 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 15 17 18 14 16Présentation technique | 9 1 support du processeur 2 connecteur du câble du ventilateur (FANC1) 3 connecteur du câble de la caméra (WEBCAM) 4 connecteur du câble de la carte du convertisseur (CONVERTISSEUR) 5 disque dur et lecteur optique connecteur du câble d'alimentation (SATAP1) 6 connecteur du câble du lecteur optique (SATA_ODD) 7 connecteur du câble du disque dur (SATA_HDD) 8 câble du bouton d'alimentation et du voyant d'activité du disque dur (PWRCN1) 9 connecteur du câble IR (IR_IN) 10 connecteur du câble de l'écran 11 connecteur de la mini carte sans fil (MINICARD WIFI) 12 carte du connecteur du tuner TV (MINICARD TV) 13 connecteur du câble des haut-parleurs (SPEAKER) 14 cavalier du mot de passe (PWCLR1) 15 support de batterie (BT1) 16 cavalier CMOS (CMOCL1) 17 connecteur du module de mémoire (DIMMB1) 18 connecteur du module de mémoire (DIMMA1)10 | Présentation techniqueAvant de commencer | 11 2 Avant de commencer Éteignez l'ordinateur et les périphériques connectées PRÉCAUTION : Pour ne pas perdre de données, enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers et tous les programmes ouverts avant d'éteindre l'ordinateur. 1 Enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers et les programmes ouverts. 2 Pour éteindre votre ordinateur, conformez-vous aux instructions correspondant au système d’exploitation installé sur votre machine. • Windows 8 : Déplacez le pointeur de la souris vers l’angle supérieur ou inférieur droit de l’écran pour ouvrir la barre latérale Charms, puis cliquez sur Paramètres→ Marche/Arrêt→ Éteindre. • Windows 7 : Cliquez sur Démarrer et cliquez sur Fermer. Microsoft Windows s'arrête, puis l'ordinateur s'éteint. REMARQUE : Si vous utilisez un autre système d'exploitation, consultez la documentation correspondante pour connaître les instructions d'arrêt. 3 Déconnectez du secteur l'ordinateur et tous les périphériques connectés. 4 Débranchez tous les câbles téléphoniques, câbles réseau et périphériques connectés à l'ordinateur. 5 Une fois l'ordinateur débranché, appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation et maintenez-le enfoncé pendant 5 secondes pour mettre à la terre la carte système. Consignes de sécurité Suivez les consignes de sécurité suivantes pour protéger votre ordinateur des dommages potentiels et pour assurer votre sécurité. AVERTISSEMENT : Avant toute intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur, consultez les consignes de sécurité fournies avec celui-ci. Pour plus d'informations sur les pratiques d'excellence en matière de sécurité, consultez la page Regulatory Compliance (Conformité à la réglementation) à l'adresse dell.com/regulatory_compliance. AVERTISSEMENT : Débranchez toutes les sources d'alimentation avant d'ouvrir le capot ou les panneaux de l'ordinateur. Lorsque vous avez terminé, remettez en place tous les capots, panneaux et vis avant de reconnecter l'ordinateur au secteur. PRÉCAUTION : Pour éviter d'endommager l'ordinateur, assurez-vous que la surface de travail est plane et propre.12 | Avant de commencer PRÉCAUTION : Pour éviter d'endommager les composants et les cartes, tenez-les par les bords en évitant de toucher les broches et les contacts. PRÉCAUTION : Seul un technicien de maintenance agréé est habilité à retirer le capot de l'ordinateur et à accéder aux composants internes de l'ordinateur. Veuillez consulter les consignes de sécurité pour des informations complètes sur les précautions à prendre, les interventions à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur et la protection contre les décharges électrostatiques. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de toucher quoi ce soit à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur, reliez-vous à la masse en touchant une partie métallique non peinte du châssis, par exemple, à l'arrière de l'ordinateur. Répétez cette opération régulièrement pendant votre intervention pour dissiper toute électricité statique qui pourrait endommager les composants. PRÉCAUTION : Lorsque vous débranchez un câble, tirez sur le connecteur ou sur la languette de retrait, mais jamais sur le câble lui-même. Certains câbles sont équipés de connecteurs à pattes de verrouillage ou à vis moletées que vous devez libérer avant de débrancher le câble. Lorsque vous débranchez les câbles, gardez-les alignés pour éviter de tordre les broches des connecteurs. Lorsque vous branchez les câbles, vérifiez que les connecteurs et ports sont orientés et alignés correctement. PRÉCAUTION : Pour retirer un câble réseau, déconnectez-le d'abord de l'ordinateur, puis du périphérique réseau. Outils recommandés Les procédures mentionnées dans ce document nécessitent les outils suivants : • Tournevis cruciforme • Clé hexagonale • Pointe en plastiqueAprès une intervention à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur | 13 3 Après une intervention à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur Lorsque vous avez terminé les procédures de réinstallation, assurez-vous de respecter les points suivants : • Remettez toutes les vis et assurez-vous de n'avoir laissé aucune vis non fixée à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur. • Placez l'ordinateur en position verticale. • Connectez tous les câbles, cartes, périphériques externes et autre(s) composant(s) que vous avez retirés avant d'effectuer votre intervention. • Branchez l'ordinateur ainsi que tous les périphériques connectés à leur source d'alimentation. PRÉCAUTION : Avant d'allumer l'ordinateur, remettez toutes les vis et assurezvous de n'avoir laissé aucune vis non fixée à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur. Dans le cas contraire, vous risquez d'endommager votre ordinateur.14 | Après une intervention à l'intérieur de l'ordinateurCache du socle | 15 4 Cache du socle AVERTISSEMENT : Avant d'ouvrir votre ordinateur, prenez connaissance des consignes de sécurité fournies avec l'ordinateur et suivez les instructions de la section « Avant de commencer », page 11. Pour plus d'informations sur les pratiques d'excellence en matière de sécurité, consultez la page Regulatory Compliance (Conformité à la réglementation) à l'adresse dell.com/regulatory_compliance. Retrait du cache du socle Procédure PRÉCAUTION : Avant d'ouvrir votre ordinateur, veillez à le poser sur un chiffon doux ou une surface propre pour éviter de rayer l'écran. 1 Retournez l'ordinateur sur une surface plane. 2 Appuyez sur la languette du cache du socle et soulevez le cache. 3 Faites glisser le cache du socle pour le retirer de l'ordinateur. 1 languette 2 cache du socle 3 cache arrière 1 2 316 | Cache du socle Réinstallation du cache du socle Procédure 1 Insérez les languettes du cache du socle dans les fentes du cache arrière. 2 Installez le cache du socle en l'enclenchant. 3 Suivez les instructions dans « Après une intervention à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur », page 13.Socle | 17 5 Socle AVERTISSEMENT : Avant d'ouvrir votre ordinateur, prenez connaissance des consignes de sécurité fournies avec l'ordinateur et suivez les instructions de la section « Avant de commencer », page 11. Pour plus d'informations sur les pratiques d'excellence en matière de sécurité, consultez la page Regulatory Compliance (Conformité à la réglementation) à l'adresse dell.com/regulatory_compliance. Retrait du socle Démontage Retirez le cache du socle. Voir « Retrait du cache du socle », page 15. Procédure 1 Enlevez les vis de fixation du socle au châssis. 2 Faites pivoter le socle vers le haut et retirez-le de l'ordinateur. 1 socle 2 vis (4) 2 118 | Socle Réinstallation du socle Procédure 1 Insérez les languettes dans les fentes du cache arrière. 2 Réinstallez les vis de fixation du socle au châssis. Remontage 1 Réinstallez le cache du socle. Voir « Réinstallation du cache du socle », page 16. 2 Suivez les instructions dans « Après une intervention à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur », page 13.Capot arrière | 19 6 Capot arrière AVERTISSEMENT : Avant d'ouvrir votre ordinateur, prenez connaissance des consignes de sécurité fournies avec l'ordinateur et suivez les instructions de section « Avant de commencer », page 11. Pour plus d'informations sur les pratiques d'excellence en matière de sécurité, consultez la page Regulatory Compliance (Conformité à la réglementation) à l'adresse dell.com/regulatory_compliance. Retrait du cache arrière Démontage 1 Retirez le cache du socle. Voir « Retrait du cache du socle », page 15. 2 Retirez le socle. Voir « Retrait du socle », page 17. Procédure 1 En commençant au-dessus du lecteur optique, soulevez le capot arrière pour le retirer du cadre central. 2 Retirez le capot arrière de l'ordinateur. 1 cadre central 2 capot arrière 2 120 | Capot arrière Réinstallation du capot arrière Procédure Alignez les onglets du cache arrière sur ceux du cadre central et enclenchez le cache arrière. Remontage 1 Réinstallez le socle. Voir « Réinstallation du socle », page 18. 2 Réinstallez le cache du socle. Voir « Réinstallation du cache du socle », page 16. 3 Suivez les instructions dans « Après une intervention à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur », page 13.Disque dur | 21 7 Disque dur AVERTISSEMENT : Avant d'ouvrir votre ordinateur, prenez connaissance des consignes de sécurité fournies avec l'ordinateur et suivez les instructions de la section « Avant de commencer », page 11. Pour plus d'informations sur les pratiques d'excellence en matière de sécurité, consultez la page Regulatory Compliance (Conformité à la réglementation) à l'adresse dell.com/regulatory_compliance. PRÉCAUTION : Pour éviter toute perte de données, évitez de retirer le disque dur lorsque l'ordinateur est sous tension ou en veille. PRÉCAUTION : Les disques durs sont très fragiles. Manipulez le disque dur avec précaution. Retrait du disque dur Démontage 1 Retirez le cache du socle. Voir « Retrait du cache du socle », page 15. 2 Retirez le socle. Voir « Retrait du socle », page 17. 3 Retirez le cache arrière. Voir « Retrait du cache arrière », page 19.22 | Disque dur Procédure 1 Retirez les vis de fixation de l'ensemble disque dur au châssis. 2 Faites glisser et soulevez l'ensemble disque dur, puis déconnectez les câbles d'alimentation et de données du connecteur sur le disque dur. 3 Retirez les vis de fixation du bâti du disque dur au disque dur. 4 Soulevez le bâti du disque dur pour dégager le disque dur. 1 châssis 2 vis (3) 3 ensemble disque dur 4 câbles d'alimentation et des données 1 bâti de disque dur 2 Disque dur 3 vis (4) 2 3 4 1 1 2 3Disque dur | 23 Réinstallation du disque dur Procédure 1 Alignez les trous de fixation du bâti du disque dur sur ceux du disque dur 2 Remettez en place les vis de fixation du bâti du disque dur au disque dur. 3 Connectez les câbles d'alimentation et des données au connecteur de l'ensemble disque dur. 4 Placez l'ensemble disque dur sur le châssis et faites glisser l'ensemble disque dur pour le mettre en place. Vérifiez que les logements sur le bâti du disque dur sont bien en dessous des languettes sur le châssis. 5 Replacez les vis de fixation l'ensemble disque dur au châssis. Remontage 1 Remettez en place le cache arrière. Voir « Réinstallation du capot arrière », page 20. 2 Réinstallez le socle. Voir « Réinstallation du socle », page 18. 3 Réinstallez le cache du socle. Voir « Réinstallation du cache du socle », page 16. 4 Suivez les instructions dans « Après une intervention à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur », page 13.24 | Disque durLecteur optique | 25 8 Lecteur optique AVERTISSEMENT : Avant d'ouvrir votre ordinateur, prenez connaissance des consignes de sécurité fournies avec l'ordinarteur et suivez les instructions de la section « Avant de commencer », page 11. Pour plus d'informations sur les pratiques d'excellence en matière de sécurité, consultez la page Regulatory Compliance (Conformité à la réglementation) à l'adresse dell.com/regulatory_compliance. Retrait du lecteur optique Démontage 1 Retirez le cache du socle. Voir « Retrait du cache du socle », page 15. 2 Retirez le socle. Voir « Retrait du socle », page 17. 3 Retirez le cache arrière. Voir « Retrait du cache arrière », page 19. Procédure 1 Débranchez le câble d'alimentation et des données du connecteur situé sur l'ensemble lecteur optique. 2 Retirez la vis de fixation de l'ensemble lecteur optique au châssis. 3 Faites glisser l'ensemble lecteur optique pour le sortir de son bâti. 1 câbles d'alimentation et des données 2 ensemble lecteur optique. 3 vis 1 3 226 | Lecteur optique 4 Soulevez doucement le cadre du lecteur optique et retirez-le de l'ensemble lecteur optique. 5 Retirez les vis de fixation du support du lecteur optique au lecteur optique. 6 Retirez le support du lecteur optique. Remise en place du lecteur optique Procédure 1 Alignez les trous des vis du support du lecteur optique sur ceux du lecteur optique. 2 Réinstallez les vis de fixation du support du lecteur optique au lecteur optique. 3 Alignez les languettes du cadre du lecteur optique sur les fentes sur l'ensemble lecteur optique, puis enclenchez le cadre du lecteur optique. 4 Insérez l'ensemble lecteur optique dans son bâti jusqu'à ce qu'il soit complètement installé. 5 Réinstallez la vis de fixation de l'ensemble lecteur optique au châssis. 6 Branchez le câble d'alimentation et des données dans le connecteur de l'ensemble lecteur optique. Remontage 1 Remettez en place le cache arrière. Voir « Réinstallation du capot arrière », page 20. 2 Réinstallez le socle. Voir « Réinstallation du socle », page 18. 3 Réinstallez le cache du socle. Voir « Réinstallation du cache du socle », page 16. 4 Suivez les instructions dans « Après une intervention à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur », page 13. 1 cadre du lecteur optique 2 lecteur optique 3 support du lecteur optique 4 vis (2) 1 2 3 4Carte B-CAS (Japon uniquement) | 27 9 Carte B-CAS (Japon uniquement) AVERTISSEMENT : Avant d'ouvrir votre ordinateur, prenez connaissance des consignes de sécurité fournies avec l'ordinateur et suivez les instructions de la section « Avant de commencer », page 11. Pour plus d'informations sur les pratiques d'excellence en matière de sécurité, consultez la page Regulatory Compliance (Conformité à la réglementation) à l'adresse dell.com/regulatory_compliance. Retrait de la carte B-CAS Démontage 1 Retirez le cache du socle. Voir « Retrait du cache du socle », page 15. 2 Retirez le socle. Voir « Retrait du socle », page 17. 3 Retirez le cache arrière. Voir « Retrait du cache arrière », page 19. Procédure 1 Retirez la vis de fixation de la carte B-CAS au cadre central. 2 Retournez la carte B-CAS. 3 Déconnectez le câble de la carte B-CAS du connecteur sur la carte B-CAS. 4 Soulevez la carte B-CAS pour la retirer de l'ordinateur. 1 cadre central 2 carte B-CAS 3 vis 4 câble de la carte B-CAS 2 3 4 128 | Carte B-CAS (Japon uniquement) Réinstallation de la carte B-CAS Procédure 1 Connectez le câble de la carte B-CAS au connecteur sur la carte B-CAS. 2 Retournez la carte B-CAS. 3 Alignez le trou de la vis de la carte B-CAS sur celui du cadre central. 4 Réinstallez la vis de fixation de la carte B-CAS au cadre central. Remontage 1 Remettez en place le cache arrière. Voir « Réinstallation du capot arrière », page 20. 2 Réinstallez le socle. Voir « Réinstallation du socle », page 18. 3 Réinstallez le cache du socle. Voir « Réinstallation du cache du socle », page 16. 4 Suivez les instructions dans « Après une intervention à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur », page 13.Carte convertisseur | 29 10 Carte convertisseur AVERTISSEMENT : Avant d'ouvrir votre ordinateur, prenez connaissance des consignes de sécurité fournies avec l'ordinateur et suivez les instructions de la section « Avant de commencer », page 11. Pour plus d'informations sur les pratiques d'excellence en matière de sécurité, consultez la page Regulatory Compliance (Conformité à la réglementation) à l'adresse dell.com/regulatory_compliance. Retrait de la carte convertisseur Démontage 1 Retirez le cache du socle. Voir « Retrait du cache du socle », page 15. 2 Retirez le socle. Voir « Retrait du socle », page 17. 3 Retirez le cache arrière. Voir « Retrait du cache arrière », page 19. Procédure 1 Déconnectez les câbles des connecteurs sur la carte convertisseur. 2 Retirez les vis de fixation de la carte convertisseur au châssis. 3 Soulevez la carte convertisseur pour la retirer du châssis. 1 vis (2) 2 carte convertisseur 3 câbles (2) 1 2 330 | Carte convertisseur Réinstallation de la carte convertisseur Procédure 1 Alignez les trous de vis de la carte convertisseur sur ceux du châssis. 2 Réinstallez les vis de fixation de la carte convertisseur au châssis. 3 Connectez les câbles aux connecteurs sur la carte convertisseur. Remontage 1 Remettez en place le cache arrière. Voir « Réinstallation du capot arrière », page 20. 2 Réinstallez le socle. Voir « Réinstallation du socle », page 18. 3 Réinstallez le cache du socle. Voir « Réinstallation du cache du socle », page 16. 4 Suivez les instructions dans « Après une intervention à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur », page 13.Module(s) de mémoire | 31 11 Module(s) de mémoire AVERTISSEMENT : Avant d'ouvrir votre ordinateur, prenez connaissance des consignes de sécurité fournies avec l'ordinateur de a section « Avant de commencer », page 11. Pour plus d'informations sur les pratiques d'excellence en matière de sécurité, consultez la page Regulatory Compliance (Conformité à la réglementation) à l'adresse dell.com/regulatory_compliance. Retrait du ou des modules de mémoire Démontage 1 Retirez le cache du socle. Voir « Retrait du cache du socle », page 15. 2 Retirez le socle. Voir « Retrait du socle », page 17. 3 Retirez le cache arrière. Voir « Retrait du cache arrière », page 19. Procédure 1 Retirez la vis de fixation du cache du module de mémoire à le protection de la carte système. 2 Faites glisser le cache du module de mémoire vers le haut de l'ordinateur et soulevez-le pour le retirer de la protection de la carte système. 1 protection de la carte système. 2 vis 3 cache du module de mémoire 2 3 132 | Module(s) de mémoire 3 Avec les doigts, écartez délicatement les clips de fixation situés à chaque extrémité du connecteur du module de mémoire jusqu'à ce que celui-ci ressorte. 4 Retirez le module mémoire de son connecteur. 1 connecteur du module mémoire 2 clips de fixation (2) 3 module de mémoire 1 2 3Module(s) de mémoire | 33 Remise en place du ou des modules de mémoire Procédure 1 Alignez l'encoche du module de mémoire sur la languette du connecteur du module mémoire 2 Insérez fermement le module de mémoire dans son logement à un angle de 45 degrés, puis appuyez dessus jusqu'à ce qu'il s'enclenche. Si vous n'entendez pas de clic, retirez le module mémoire et recommencez. REMARQUE : Si le module de mémoire n'est pas correctement installé, l'ordinateur risque de ne pas démarrer. 3 Insérez les languettes du cache du module de mémoire dans les fentes sur la protection de la carte mère et faites glisser la protection vers le bas de l'ordinateur. Alignez le trou de la vis du cache du module de mémoire sur celui de la protection de la carte système. 4 Remettez en place la vis de fixation du cache du module de mémoire à la protection de la carte système. Remontage 1 Remettez en place le cache arrière. Voir « Réinstallation du capot arrière », page 20. 2 Réinstallez le socle. Voir « Réinstallation du socle », page 18. 3 Réinstallez le cache du socle. Voir « Réinstallation du cache du socle », page 16. 4 Suivez les instructions dans « Après une intervention à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur », page 13. 1 languette 2 encoche 1 234 | Module(s) de mémoireProtection de la carte système | 35 12 Protection de la carte système AVERTISSEMENT : Avant d'ouvrir votre ordinateur, prenez connaissance des consignes de sécurité fournies avec l'ordinateur et suivez les instructions de la « Avant de commencer », page 11. Pour plus d'informations sur les pratiques d'excellence en matière de sécurité, consultez la page Regulatory Compliance (Conformité à la réglementation) à l'adresse dell.com/regulatory_compliance. Retrait de la protection de la carte système Démontage 1 Retirez le cache du socle. Voir « Retrait du cache du socle », page 15. 2 Retirez le socle. Voir « Retrait du socle », page 17. 3 Retirez le cache arrière. Voir « Retrait du cache arrière », page 19. Procédure 1 Retirez les vis de fixation de la protection de la carte système au châssis. 2 Soulevez avec précaution la protection de la carte système et retournez-la. 1 vis (5) 2 protection de la carte système 2 136 | Protection de la carte système 3 Déconnectez le câble d'entrée d'antenne du connecteur de la carte du tuner TV. 4 Retirez le connecteur d'entrée d'antenne Voir « Retrait du connecteur d'entrée d'antenne », page 37. Réinstallation de la protection de la carte système Procédure 1 Réinstallez le connecteur d'entrée d'antenne Voir « Réinstallation du connecteur d'entrée d'antenne », page 38. 2 Connectez le câble du connecteur d'entrée d'antenne au connecteur sur la carte du tuner TV. 3 Retournez la protection de la carte système et alignez les trous de vis de la protection de la carte système sur ceux du châssis. 4 Réinstallez les vis de fixation de la protection de la carte système au châssis. Remontage 1 Remettez en place le cache arrière. Voir « Réinstallation du capot arrière », page 20. 2 Réinstallez le socle. Voir « Réinstallation du socle », page 18. 3 Réinstallez le cache du socle. Voir « Réinstallation du cache du socle », page 16. 4 Suivez les instructions dans « Après une intervention à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur », page 13. 1 protection de la carte système 2 câble du connecteur d'entrée d'antenne 3 carte du tuner TV. 3 2 1Connecteur d'entrée d'antenne | 37 13 Connecteur d'entrée d'antenne AVERTISSEMENT : Avant d'ouvrir votre ordinateur, prenez connaissance des consignes de sécurité fournies avec l'ordinateur et suivez les instructions de la section « Avant de commencer », page 11. Pour plus d'informations sur les pratiques d'excellence en matière de sécurité, consultez la page Regulatory Compliance (Conformité à la réglementation) à l'adresse dell.com/regulatory_compliance. Retrait du connecteur d'entrée d'antenne Démontage 1 Retirez le cache du socle. Voir « Retrait du cache du socle », page 15. 2 Retirez le socle. Voir « Retrait du socle », page 17. 3 Retirez le cache arrière. Voir « Retrait du cache arrière », page 19. 4 Retirez la protection de la carte système. Voir « Retrait de la protection de la carte système », page 35. Procédure 1 Retirez l'écrou hexagonal de fixation du connecteur d'entrée d'antenne à la protection de la carte système. 2 Faites passer le connecteur d'entrée d'antenne par la fente sur la protection de la carte système. 3 Enlevez le connecteur d'entrée d'antenne et son câble de la protection de la carte système. 1 connecteur d'entrée d'antenne 2 écrou hexagonal 2 138 | Connecteur d'entrée d'antenne Réinstallation du connecteur d'entrée d'antenne Procédure 1 Faites passer le connecteur d'entrée d'antenne par la fente sur la protection de la carte système. 2 Réinstallez l'écrou hexagonal de fixation du connecteur d'entrée d'antenne à la protection de la carte système. Remontage 1 Réinstallez la protection de la carte système. Voir « Réinstallation de la protection de la carte système », page 36. 2 Remettez en place le cache arrière. Voir « Réinstallation du capot arrière », page 20. 3 Réinstallez le socle. Voir « Réinstallation du socle », page 18. 4 Réinstallez le cache du socle. Voir « Réinstallation du cache du socle », page 16. 5 Suivez les instructions dans « Après une intervention à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur », page 13.Modules d'antenne | 39 14 Modules d'antenne AVERTISSEMENT : Avant d'ouvrir votre ordinateur, prenez connaissance des consignes de sécurité fournies avec l'ordinateur et suivez les instructions indiquées de la section « Avant de commencer », page 11. Pour plus d'informations sur les pratiques d'excellence en matière de sécurité, consultez la page Regulatory Compliance (Conformité à la réglementation) à l'adresse dell.com/regulatory_compliance. Retrait des modules d'antenne Démontage 1 Retirez le cache du socle. Voir « Retrait du cache du socle », page 15. 2 Retirez le socle. Voir « Retrait du socle », page 17. 3 Retirez le cache arrière. Voir « Retrait du cache arrière », page 19. 4 Retirez la protection de la carte système. Voir « Retrait de la protection de la carte système », page 35. Procédure 1 Déconnectez les câbles d'antenne des connecteurs sur la mini carte sans fil. 2 Notez le chemin des câbles d'antennne et retirez-les des guides. 3 Décollez les modules d'antenne du châssis. 1 câbles d'antenne (2) 2 modules d'antenne (2) 3 mini carte sans fil 2 1 340 | Modules d'antenne Réinstallation des modules d'antenne Procédure 1 Collez les modules d'antenne au châssis. 2 Faites passer les câbles d'antenne dans les guides. 3 Connectez les câbles d'antenne aux connecteurs sur la mini carte sans fil. Remontage 1 Repositionnez la protection de la carte système. Voir « Réinstallation de la protection de la carte système », page 36. 2 Remettez en place le cache arrière. Voir « Réinstallation du capot arrière », page 20. 3 Réinstallez le socle. Voir « Réinstallation du socle », page 18. 4 Réinstallez le cache du socle. Voir « Réinstallation du cache du socle », page 16. 5 Suivez les instructions dans « Après une intervention à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur », page 13.Carte du tuner TV (en option) | 41 15 Carte du tuner TV (en option) AVERTISSEMENT : Avant d'ouvrir votre ordinateur, prenez connaissance des consignes de sécurité fournies avec l'ordinateur et suivez les instructions de la section « Avant de commencer », page 11. Pour plus d'informations sur les pratiques d'excellence en matière de sécurité, consultez la page Regulatory Compliance (Conformité à la réglementation) à l'adresse dell.com/regulatory_compliance. REMARQUE : Dell ne garantit ni la compatibilité ni la prise en charge des cartes de tuner TV non fournies par Dell. Si vous avez commandé une carte de tuner TV avec votre ordinateur, celle-ci est déjà installée. L'ordinateur prend en charge une mini carte standard pour une carte de tuner TV. Retrait de la carte du tuner TV Démontage 1 Retirez le cache du socle. Voir « Retrait du cache du socle », page 15. 2 Retirez le socle. Voir « Retrait du socle », page 17. 3 Retirez le cache arrière. Voir « Retrait du cache arrière », page 19. 4 Retirez la protection de la carte système. Voir « Retrait de la protection de la carte système », page 35.42 | Carte du tuner TV (en option) Procédure 1 Déconnectez le câble de la carte du tuner TV du connecteur sur la carte du tuner TV. 2 Retirez la vis de fixation de la carte du tuner TV au connecteur de la carte système. 3 Enlevez la carte du tuner TV de la carte système. PRÉCAUTION : Lorsque la carte du tuner TV n'est pas dans l'ordinateur, conservez-la dans son emballage antistatique. Reportez-vous à la section « Protection contre les décharges électrostatiques » dans les consignes de sécurité fournies avec l'ordinateur. 1 câble de la carte du tuner TV 2 vis 3 carte du tuner TV 1 2 3Carte du tuner TV (en option) | 43 Réinstallation de la carte du tuner TV Procédure PRÉCAUTION : Pour ne pas endommager la carte du tuner TV, veillez à ne pas placer câble sous la carte. 1 Alignez l'encoche de la carte du tuner TV sur la languette du connecteur de la carte système. 2 Insérez la carte du tuner TV à 45 degrés dans le connecteur de la carte mère. 3 Appuyez sur l'autre extrémité de la carte du tuner TV et remettez en place la vis de fixation de la carte au connecteur de la carte système. 4 Connectez le câble de la carte du tuner TV au connecteur sur la carte du tuner TV. Remontage 1 Réinstallez la protection de la carte système. Voir « Réinstallation de la protection de la carte système », page 36. 2 Remettez en place le cache arrière. Voir « Réinstallation du capot arrière », page 20. 3 Réinstallez le socle. Voir « Réinstallation du socle », page 18. 4 Réinstallez le cache du socle. Voir « Réinstallation du cache du socle », page 16. 5 Suivez les instructions dans « Après une intervention à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur », page 13.44 | Carte du tuner TV (en option)Mini carte sans fil (en option) | 45 16 Mini carte sans fil (en option) AVERTISSEMENT : Avant d'ouvrir votre ordinateur, prenez connaissance des consignes de sécurité fournies avec l'ordinateur et suivez les instructions de la section « Avant de commencer », page 11. Pour plus d'informations sur les pratiques d'excellence en matière de sécurité, consultez la page Regulatory Compliance (Conformité à la réglementation) à l'adresse dell.com/regulatory_compliance. REMARQUE : Dell ne garantit pas la compatibilité ni n'offre de support pour les mini cartes provenant d'autres fournisseurs que Dell. Si vous avez commandé une mini carte avec votre ordinateur, la carte est déjà installée. L'ordinateur prend en charge une mini carte demi-hauteur pour WLAN (Wireless Local Area Network), une carte combo Bluetooth et le Wi-Fi. Retrait de la mini carte sans fil Démontage 1 Retirez le cache du socle. Voir « Retrait du cache du socle », page 15. 2 Retirez le socle. Voir « Retrait du socle », page 17. 3 Retirez le cache arrière. Voir « Retrait du cache arrière », page 19. 4 Retirez la protection de la carte système. Voir « Retrait de la protection de la carte système », page 35.46 | Mini carte sans fil (en option) Procédure 1 Débranchez de la mini carte les câbles d'antenne de cette dernière. 2 Retirez la vis qui fixe la mini carte au connecteur de la carte système. 3 Sortez la mini carte du connecteur de la carte système en la soulevant. PRÉCAUTION : Lorsque la mini carte est hors de l'ordinateur, conservez-la dans un sachet antistatique. Reportez-vous à la section « Protection contre les décharges électrostatiques » dans les consignes de sécurité fournies avec l'ordinateur. 1 vis 2 mini carte 3 câbles d'antenne (2) 1 2 3Mini carte sans fil (en option) | 47 Réinstallation de la mini carte sans fil Procédure PRÉCAUTION : Les connecteurs sont conçus pour garantir une bonne insertion. Une pression excessive risque de les endommager. PRÉCAUTION : Pour éviter d'endommager la mini carte, assurez-vous qu'aucun câble ne se trouve sous celle-ci. 1 Alignez l'encoche de la mini carte et la languette située dans le connecteur de la carte système. 2 Insérez la mini carte dans le connecteur de la carte système en l'inclinant à 45°. 3 Appuyez sur l'autre extrémité de la mini carte et remettez en place sa vis de fixation au connecteur de la carte système. 4 Connectez les câbles d'antenne appropriés à la mini carte que vous installez. L'étiquette de la mini carte comporte deux triangles (noir et blanc) : • Branchez le câble noir sur le connecteur marqué d'un triangle noir. • Branchez le câble blanc sur le connecteur marqué d'un triangle blanc. Remontage 1 Repostionnez la protection de la carte système Voir « Réinstallation de la protection de la carte système », page 36. 2 Remettez en place le cache arrière. Voir « Réinstallation du capot arrière », page 20. 3 Réinstallez le socle. Voir « Réinstallation du socle », page 18. 4 Réinstallez le cache du socle. Voir « Réinstallation du cache du socle », page 16. 5 Suivez les instructions dans « Après une intervention à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur », page 13.48 | Mini carte sans fil (en option)Pile bouton | 49 17 Pile bouton AVERTISSEMENT : Avant d'ouvrir votre ordinateur, prenez connaissance des consignes de sécurité fournies avec l'ordinateur et suivez les instructions de la section « Avant de commencer », page 11. Pour plus d'informations sur les pratiques d'excellence en matière de sécurité, consultez la page Regulatory Compliance (Conformité à la réglementation) à l'adresse dell.com/regulatory_compliance. AVERTISSEMENT : Une batterie neuve peut exploser si elle est mal installée. Remplacez la pile uniquement par une pile de type identique ou équivalent à celui recommandé par le fabricant. Mettez au rebut les piles en respectant les instructions du fabricant. Retrait de la pile bouton Démontage 1 Retirez le cache du socle. Voir « Retrait du cache du socle », page 15. 2 Retirez le socle. Voir « Retrait du socle », page 17. 3 Retirez le cache arrière. Voir « Retrait du cache arrière », page 19. 4 Retirez la protection de la carte système. Voir « Retrait de la protection de la carte système », page 35. Procédure 1 Repérez le support de la pile sur la carte système. Voir « Composants de la carte système », page 8. 2 Appuyez sur le levier de libération de la pile jusqu'à ce que la pile sorte. 3 Retirez la pile du support. 1 pile bouton 2 levier d'éjection de la pile 3 pôle + de la pile bouton 1 2 350 | Pile bouton Remise en place de la pile bouton Procédure Insérez la nouvelle pile (CR2032) dans le support en orientant le pôle + vers le haut et appuyez dessus pour l'installer. Remontage 1 Repositionnez la protection de la carte système. Voir « Réinstallation de la protection de la carte système », page 36. 2 Remettez en place le cache arrière. Voir « Réinstallation du capot arrière », page 20. 3 Réinstallez le socle. Voir « Réinstallation du socle », page 18. 4 Réinstallez le cache du socle. Voir « Réinstallation du cache du socle », page 16. 5 Suivez les instructions dans « Après une intervention à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur », page 13.Haut-parleurs | 51 18 Haut-parleurs AVERTISSEMENT : Avant d'ouvrir votre ordinateur, prenez connaissance des consignes de sécurité fournies avec l'ordinateur et suivez les instructions de la section « Avant de commencer », page 11. Pour plus d'informations sur les pratiques d'excellence en matière de sécurité, consultez la page Regulatory Compliance (Conformité à la réglementation) à l'adresse dell.com/regulatory_compliance. Retrait des haut-parleurs Démontage 1 Retirez le cache du socle. Voir « Retrait du cache du socle », page 15. 2 Retirez le socle. Voir « Retrait du socle », page 17. 3 Retirez le cache arrière. Voir « Retrait du cache arrière », page 19. 4 Retirez la carte B-CAS. Voir « Retrait de la carte B-CAS », page 27. 5 Retirez la protection de la carte système. Voir « Retrait de la protection de la carte système », page 35.52 | Haut-parleurs Procédure 1 Déconnectez le câble des haut-parleurs du connecteur (SPEAKER) sur la carte système. 2 Notez le chemin du câble des haut-parleurs et retirez le câble des guides. 3 Retirez les deux vis de fixation des haut-parleurs au cadre central. 4 Soulevez les haut-parleurs avec le câble pour les dégager du cadre central. 1 vis (4) 2 haut-parleurs (2) 3 cadre central 4 câble des haut-parleurs 1 2 4 3Haut-parleurs | 53 Réinstallation des haut-parleurs Procédure 1 Alignez les trous de vis sur les haut-parleurs sur ceux du cadre central. 2 Retirez les vis de fixation des haut-parleurs au cadre central. 3 Passez le câble des haut-parleurs dans les guides. 4 Connectez le câble des haut-parleurs au connecteur (SPEAKER) sur la carte système. Remontage 1 Réinstallez la protection de la carte système. Voir « Réinstallation de la protection de la carte système », page 36. 2 Réinstallez la carte B-CAS. Voir « Réinstallation de la carte B-CAS », page 28. 3 Remettez en place le cache arrière. Voir « Réinstallation du capot arrière », page 20. 4 Réinstallez le socle. Voir « Réinstallation du socle », page 18. 5 Réinstallez le cache du socle. Voir « Réinstallation du cache du socle », page 16. 6 Suivez les instructions dans « Après une intervention à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur », page 13.54 | Haut-parleursVentilateur | 55 19 Ventilateur AVERTISSEMENT : Avant d'ouvrir votre ordinateur, prenez connaissance des consignes de sécurité fournies avec l'ordinateur et suivez les instructions de la section « Avant de commencer », page 11. Pour plus d'informations sur les pratiques d'excellence en matière de sécurité, consultez la page Regulatory Compliance (Conformité à la réglementation) à l'adresse dell.com/regulatory_compliance. Retrait du ventilateur Démontage 1 Retirez le cache du socle. Voir « Retrait du cache du socle », page 15. 2 Retirez le socle. Voir « Retrait du socle », page 17. 3 Retirez le cache arrière. Voir « Retrait du cache arrière », page 19. 4 Retirez la protection de la carte système. Voir « Retrait de la protection de la carte système », page 35.56 | Ventilateur Procédure 1 Déconnectez le câble du ventilateur du connecteur (FANC1) sur la carte système. 2 Retirez le câble du ventilateur du guide sur le ventilateur. 3 Retirez les vis de fixation du ventilateur au châssis. 4 Soulevez le ventilateur et son câble pour les retirer du châssis. Réinstallation du ventilateur Procédure 1 Alignez les trous des vis du ventilateur sur ceux du châssis. 2 Replacez les vis de fixation du ventilateur au châssis. 3 Faites passer le câble du ventilateur dans le guide sur le ventilateur. 4 Connectez le câble du ventitateur au connecteur (FANC1) sur la carte système. Remontage 1 Repositionnez la protection de la carte système. Voir « Réinstallation de la protection de la carte système », page 36. 2 Replacez le cache arrière. Voir « Réinstallation du capot arrière », page 20. 3 Réinstallez le socle. Voir « Réinstallation du socle », page 18. 4 Réinstallez le cache du socle. Voir « Réinstallation du cache du socle », page 16. 5 Suivez les instructions dans « Après une intervention à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur », page 13. 1 vis (2) 2 ventilateur 3 câble de ventilateur 1 2 3Ensemble bouton d'alimentation | 57 20 Ensemble bouton d'alimentation AVERTISSEMENT : Avant d'ouvrir votre ordinateur, prenez connaissance des consignes de sécurité fournies et suivez les instructions de la section « Avant de commencer », page 11. Pour plus d'informations sur les pratiques d'excellence en matière de sécurité, consultez la page Regulatory Compliance (Conformité à la réglementation) à l'adresse dell.com/regulatory_compliance. Retrait de l'ensemble bouton d'alimentation Démontage 1 Retirez le cache du socle. Voir « Retrait du cache du socle », page 15. 2 Retirez le socle. Voir « Retrait du socle », page 17. 3 Retirez le cache arrière. Voir « Retrait du cache arrière », page 19. 4 Retirez la protection de la carte système. Voir « Retrait de la protection de la carte système », page 35.58 | Ensemble bouton d'alimentation Procédure 1 Déconnectez le bouton d'alimentation et le câble d'activité du disque dur du connecteur (PWRCN1) sur la carte système. 2 Notez le chemin du câble du bouton d'alimentation et du voyant d'activité du disque dur et retirez le câble des guides. 3 Retirez les vis de fixation de l'ensemble du bouton d'alimentation au cadre central. 4 Faites glisser l'ensemble bouton d'alimentation vers le haut de l'ordinateur et retirez-le du cadre en le soulevant. 1 vis 2 ensemble bouton d'alimentation 3 câble du bouton d'alimentation et du voyant d'activité du disque dur 1 2 3Ensemble bouton d'alimentation | 59 Réinstallation de l'ensemble bouton d'alimentation Procédure 1 Placez l'ensemble bouton d'alimentation sur le cadre central et faites glisser vers le bas de l'ordinateur. Vérifiez que le logement de l'ensemble bouton d'alimentation est fixé sous la languette sur le cadre central. 2 Alignez le trou de vis de l'ensemble bouton d'alimentation sur celui du cadre central. 3 Réinstallez les vis de fixation de l'ensemble bouton d'alimentation au cadre central. 4 Faites passer le câble du bouton d'alimentation et du voyant du disque dur dans les guides. 5 Connectez le bouton d'alimentation et le câble d'activité du disque dur au connecteur (PWRCN1) sur la carte système. Remontage 1 Réinstallez la protection de la carte système. Voir « Réinstallation de la protection de la carte système », page 36. 2 Remettez en place le cache arrière. Voir « Réinstallation du capot arrière », page 20. 3 Réinstallez le socle. Voir « Réinstallation du socle », page 18. 4 Réinstallez le cache du socle. Voir « Réinstallation du cache du socle », page 16. 5 Suivez les instructions dans « Après une intervention à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur », page 13.60 | Ensemble bouton d'alimentationDissipateur de chaleur du processeur | 61 21 Dissipateur de chaleur du processeur AVERTISSEMENT : Avant d'ouvrir votre ordinateur, prenez connaissance des consignes de sécurité fournies avec l'ordinateur et suivez les instructions de la section « Avant de commencer », page 11. Pour plus d'informations sur les pratiques d'excellence en matière de sécurité, consultez la page Regulatory Compliance (Conformité à la réglementation) à l'adresse dell.com/regulatory_compliance. AVERTISSEMENT : Le dissipateur de chaleur peut être très chaud (situation normale). Pour éviter tout risque de brûlure, laissez-le refroidir suffisamment avant de le manipuler. Retrait du dissipateur de chaleur du processeur PRÉCAUTION : Pour assurer le refroidissement maximal du processeur, ne touchez pas les zones de transfert de chaleur sur le dissipateur de chaleur du processeur. La graisse sur les doigts peut réduire les capacités de transfert de chaleur de la graisse thermoconductible. Démontage 1 Retirez le cache du socle. Voir « Retrait du cache du socle », page 15. 2 Retirez le socle. Voir « Retrait du socle », page 17. 3 Retirez le cache arrière. Voir « Retrait du cache arrière », page 19. 4 Retirez la protection de la carte système. Voir « Retrait de la protection de la carte système », page 35.62 | Dissipateur de chaleur du processeur Procédure 1 Dans l'ordre chronologique (indiqué sur le dissipateur de chaleur du processeur), desserrez les vis imperdables de fixation du dissipateur de chaleur du processeur à la carte système. 2 Dégagez le dissipateur de chaleur du processeur de la carte système en le soulevant. REMARQUE : L'apparence du dissipateur de chaleur du processeur peut varier en fonction du modèle de l'ordinateur. 1 dissipateur de chaleur du processeur 2 vis imperdables (7) 1 2Dissipateur de chaleur du processeur | 63 Réinstallation du dissipateur de chaleur du processeur PRÉCAUTION : Si vous n'alignez pas correctement le dissipateur de chaleur du processeur, vous risquez d'endommager la carte système et le processeur. Procédure 1 Enlevez la graisse thermoconductible qui se trouve sous le dissipateur de chaleur et réappliquez-la. REMARQUE : Vous pouvez réutiliser la graisse thermoconductible d'origine si vous réinstallez le processeur d'origine et le dissipateur de chaleur ensemble. Si vous remplacez le processeur ou le dissipateur de chaleur du processeur, utilisez la graisse thermoconductible fournie dans le kit pour garantir une conductivité thermique correcte. 2 Alignez les vis imperdables du dissipateur de chaleur du processeur sur les trous situés sur la carte système. 3 Dans l'ordre chronologique (indiqué sur le dissipateur de chaleur du processeur), resserrez les vis imperdables de fixation du dissipateur de chaleur du processeur à la carte système. Remontage 1 Replacez la protection de la carte système. Voir « Réinstallation de la protection de la carte système », page 36. 2 Remettez en place le cache arrière. Voir « Réinstallation du capot arrière », page 20. 3 Réinstallez le socle. Voir « Réinstallation du socle », page 18. 4 Réinstallez le cache du socle. Voir « Réinstallation du cache du socle », page 16. 5 Suivez les instructions dans « Après une intervention à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur », page 13.64 | Dissipateur de chaleur du processeurProcesseur | 65 22 Processeur AVERTISSEMENT : Avant d'ouvrir votre ordinateur, prenez connaissance des consignes de sécurité fournies avec l'ordinateur et suivez les instructions de la section « Avant de commencer », page 11. Pour plus d'informations sur les pratiques d'excellence en matière de sécurité, consultez la page Regulatory Compliance (Conformité à la réglementation) à l'adresse dell.com/regulatory_compliance. Retrait du processeur Démontage 1 Retirez le cache du socle. Voir « Retrait du cache du socle », page 15. 2 Retirez le socle. Voir « Retrait du socle », page 17. 3 Retirez le cache arrière. Voir « Retrait du cache arrière », page 19. 4 Retirez la protection de la carte système. Voir « Retrait de la protection de la carte système », page 35. 5 Retirez le dissipateur de chaleur du processeur. Voir « Retrait du dissipateur de chaleur du processeur », page 61.66 | Processeur Procédure 1 Appuyez sur le levier de dégagement du cache du processeur, puis tirez pour le dégager de sa languette de fixation. 2 Levez complètement le levier de dégagement pour ouvrir le cache du processeur. Laissez le levier de dégagement ouvert afin que le support soit prêt à accueillir le nouveau processeur. 3 Extrayez délicatement du support. 1 levier de dégagement 2 languette 3 cache du processeur 4 support 5 processeur 1 2 3 5 4Processeur | 67 Remplacement du processeur Procédure 1 Déballez le nouveau processeur en prenant garde à ne pas toucher sa face inférieure. PRÉCAUTION : Reliez-vous à la terre en touchant une surface métallique non peinte. 2 Si le levier de dégagement du support n'est pas entièrement ouvert, ouvrez-le complètement. PRÉCAUTION : Le processeur doit être correctement positionné sur le socket afin d'éviter d'endommager irrémédiablement le processeur. 3 Alignez les encoches d'alignement sur le processeur sur les languettes d'alignement du support. 4 Alignez les coins de la broche 1 du processeur et du support. PRÉCAUTION : Assurez-vous que l'encoche du cache du processeur est bien positionnée sous l'embout d'alignement. 5 Une fois le processeur installé sur son support, fermez son cache. 6 Faites pivoter le levier de dégagement vers le bas et positionnez-le sous la languette sur le cache du processeur. 1 indicateur de broche 1 du processeur 2 processeur 3 encoches d'alignement (2) 4 encoche du capot du processeur 5 embout d'alignement 6 cache du processeur 7 levier de dégagement 1 2 3 5 6 7 468 | Processeur 7 Enlevez la graisse thermoconductible qui se trouve sous le dissipateur de chaleur. 8 Appliquez la graisse thermique neuve sur la partie supérieure du processeur. PRÉCAUTION : Veillez à appliquer la nouvelle graisse thermique. La nouvelle graisse est essentielle pour assurer une liaison thermique correcte et obtenir un fonctionnement optimal du processeur. Remontage 1 Réinstallez le dissipateur de chaleur du processeur. Voir « Réinstallation du dissipateur de chaleur du processeur », page 63. 2 Replacez la protection de la carte système. Voir « Réinstallation de la protection de la carte système », page 36. 3 Remettez en place le cache arrière. Voir « Réinstallation du capot arrière », page 20. 4 Réinstallez le socle. Voir « Réinstallation du socle », page 18. 5 Réinstallez le cache du socle. Voir « Réinstallation du cache du socle », page 16. 6 Suivez les intructions dans « Après une intervention à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur », page 13.Carte système | 69 23 Carte système AVERTISSEMENT : Avant d'ouvrir votre ordinateur, prenez connaissance des consignes de sécurité fournies avec l'ordinateur et suivez les instructions de la section « Avant de commencer », page 11. Pour plus d'informations sur les pratiques d'excellence en matière de sécurité, consultez la page Regulatory Compliance (Conformité à la réglementation) à l'adresse dell.com/regulatory_compliance. Retrait de la carte système Démontage 1 Retirez le cache du socle. Voir « Retrait du cache du socle », page 15. 2 Retirez le socle. Voir « Retrait du socle », page 17. 3 Retirez le cache arrière. Voir « Retrait du cache arrière », page 19. 4 Retirez la protection de la carte système. Voir « Retrait de la protection de la carte système », page 35. 5 Retirez le(s) module(s) de mémoire. Voir « Retrait du ou des modules de mémoire », page 31. 6 Retirez la mini carte sans fil. Voir « Retrait de la mini carte sans fil », page 45. 7 Retirez la carte du tuner TV, le cas échéant. Voir « Retrait de la carte du tuner TV », page 41. 8 Retirez le dissipateur de chaleur du processeur. Voir « Retrait du dissipateur de chaleur du processeur », page 61. 9 Retirez le processeur. Voir « Retrait du processeur », page 65.70 | Carte système Procédure REMARQUE : Notez le chemin des câbles avant de les déconnecter du système. REMARQUE : Le numéro de service de l'ordinateur se trouve sur la carte système. Vous devez entrer le numéro de service dans le BIOS après avoir remplacé la carte système. 1 Débranchez tous les câbles de leur connecteur sur la carte système. 2 Retirez les vis de fixation de la carte système au châssis. 3 Soulevez la carte système selon un angle et faites-la glisser pour dégager ses connecteurs sur la carte système de leurs logements sur le châssis. 4 Retirez la carte système du châssis. 1 carte système 2 vis (5) 1 2Carte système | 71 Réinstallation de la carte système Procédure 1 Insérez les connecteurs de la carte système dans les logements sur le châssis et alignez les trous des vis sur la carte système ceux du châssis. 2 Réinstallez les vis de fixation de la carte système au châssis. 3 Connectez tous les câbles requis à leur connecteur sur la carte système : Remontage 1 Remettez en place le processeur. « Remplacement du processeur », page 67. 2 Réinstallez le dissipateur de chaleur du processeur. Voir « Réinstallation du dissipateur de chaleur du processeur », page 63. 3 Réinstallez la carte du tuner TV, le cas échéant. Voir « Réinstallation de la carte du tuner TV », page 43. 4 Réinstallez la mini carte sans fil. Voir « Réinstallation de la mini carte sans fil », page 47. 5 Réinstallez le(s) module(s) de mémoire. Voir « Remise en place du ou des modules de mémoire », page 33. 6 Réinstallez la protection de la carte système. Voir « Réinstallation de la protection de la carte système », page 36. 7 Réinstallez le cache arrière. Voir « Réinstallation du capot arrière », page 20. 8 Réinstallez le socle. Voir « Réinstallation du socle », page 18. 9 Réinstallez le cache du socle. Voir « Réinstallation du cache du socle », page 16. 10 Suivez les instructions dans « Après une intervention à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur », page 13. Entrez le numéro de service dans le BIOS 1 Allumez l'ordinateur. 2 Appuyez sur pendant l'auto-test à la mise sous tension (POST) pour accéder au programme de configuration du système. 3 Accédez à l'onglet principal et entrez le numéro de service dans le champ Service Tag Input (Numéro de service).72 | Carte systèmePanneau de l'écran | 73 24 Panneau de l'écran AVERTISSEMENT : Avant d'ouvrir votre ordinateur, prenez connaissance des consignes de sécurité fournies avec l'ordinateur et suivez les instructions de la section « Avant de commencer », page 11. Pour plus d'informations sur les pratiques d'excellence en matière de sécurité, consultez la page Regulatory Compliance (Conformité à la réglementation) à l'adresse dell.com/regulatory_compliance. Retrait du panneau de l'écran Démontage 1 Retirez le cache du socle. Voir « Retrait du cache du socle », page 15. 2 Retirez le socle. Voir « Retrait du socle », page 17. 3 Retirez le cache arrière. Voir « Retrait du cache arrière », page 19. 4 Suivez les instructions de l'étape 1 à l'étape 3 dans « Retrait du lecteur optique », page 25. 5 Suivez les instructions de l'étape 1 à l'étape 2 dans « Retrait du disque dur », page 21. 6 Retirez la carte convertisseur. Voir « Retrait de la carte convertisseur », page 29. 7 Retirez le ventilateur. Voir « Retrait du ventilateur », page 55. 8 Retirez la protection de la carte système. Voir « Retrait de la protection de la carte système », page 35. 9 Retirez la carte système. Voir « Retrait de la carte système », page 69.74 | Panneau de l'écran Procédure 1 Notez le chemin de tous les câbles (sauf celui de la carte convertisseur et les câbles d'antenne) et retirez-les des guides sur le châssis. 2 Retirez les vis de fixation du châssis au cadre central. 3 Soulevez le châssis et le panneau de l'écran pour les retirer du cadre central et placez-le sur une surface propre. 4 Débranchez le câble de la carte convertisseur du connecteur situé sur le panneau de l'écran. 5 Retirez les vis de fixation du panneau de l'écran au châssis. 1 cadre central 2 châssis 3 vis (13) 1 câble de la carte convertisseur 2 vis (4) 3 2 1 2 1Panneau de l'écran | 75 6 Retirez le châssis du panneau d'écran. 1 châssis 2 panneau de l'écran 1 276 | Panneau de l'écran 7 Décollez la bande de fixation du câble de l'écran au connecteur du câble de l'écran. 8 Appuyez sur le loquet de chaque coté du câble de l'écran puis tirez le câble pour le déconnecter de son connecteur. 1 câble de l'écran 2 panneau de l'écran 3 loquets (2) 4 connecteur du câble de l'écran. 5 bande 1 2 3 4 5Panneau de l'écran | 77 Remise en place du panneau de l'écran Procédure 1 Connectez le câble de l'écran au connecteur du panneau de l'écran, puis fixez-le à l'aide de la bande. 2 Alignez les trous des vis du panneau de l'écran sur ceux du châssis. 3 Réinstallez les vis de fixation du panneau de l'écran au châssis. 4 Branchez le câble de la carte convertisseur dans le connecteur situé sur le panneau de l'écran. 5 Alignez les trous des vis du châssis sur ceux du cadre central. 6 Remettez en place les vis de fixation du châssis au cadre central. 7 Faites passer tous les câbles par les guides sur le châssis. Remontage 1 Réinstallez la carte système. Voir « Réinstallation de la carte système », page 71. 2 Repositionnez la protection de la carte système. Voir « Réinstallation de la protection de la carte système », page 36. 3 Réinstallez le ventilateur. Voir « Réinstallation du ventilateur », page 56. 4 Réinstallez la carte convertisseur. Voir « Réinstallation de la carte convertisseur », page 30. 5 Suivez les instructions de l'étape 3 à l'étape 5 dans « Réinstallation du disque dur », page 23. 6 Suivez les instructions de l'étape 4 à l'étape 6 dans « Remise en place du lecteur optique », page 26. 7 Remettez en place le cache arrière. Voir « Réinstallation du capot arrière », page 20. 8 Réinstallez le socle. Voir « Réinstallation du socle », page 18. 9 Réinstallez le cache du socle. Voir « Réinstallation du cache du socle », page 16. 10 Suivez les instructions dans « Après une intervention à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur », page 13.78 | Panneau de l'écranRécepteur infrarouge (IR) | 79 25 Récepteur infrarouge (IR) AVERTISSEMENT : Avant d'ouvrir votre ordinateur, prenez connaissance des consignes de sécurité fournies avec l'ordinateur et suivez les instructions de la section « Avant de commencer », page 11. Pour plus d'informations sur les pratiques d'excellence en matière de sécurité, consultez la page Regulatory Compliance (Conformité à la réglementation) à l'adresse dell.com/regulatory_compliance. Retrait du récepteur infrarouge Démontage 1 Retirez le cache du socle. Voir « Retrait du cache du socle », page 15. 2 Retirez le socle. Voir « Retrait du socle », page 17. 3 Retirez le cache arrière. Voir « Retrait du cache arrière », page 19. 4 Suivez les instructions de l'étape 1 à l'étape 3 dans « Retrait du lecteur optique », page 25. 5 Suivez les instructions de l'étape 1 à l'étape 2 dans « Retrait du disque dur », page 21. 6 Retirez la carte convertisseur. Voir « Retrait de la carte convertisseur », page 29. 7 Retirez le ventilateur. Voir « Retrait du ventilateur », page 55. 8 Retirez la protection de la carte système. Voir « Retrait de la protection de la carte système », page 35. 9 Retirez la carte système. Voir « Retrait de la carte système », page 69.80 | Récepteur infrarouge (IR) Procédure 1 Notez le chemin de tous les câbles (sauf celui de la carte convertisseur et les câbles d'antenne) et retirez-les des guides sur le châssis. 2 Retirez les vis de fixation du châssis au cadre central. 3 Soulevez le châssis avec le panneau d'écran pour les retirer du cadre central et placez-les sur une surface propre. 1 cadre central 2 châssis 3 vis (13) 3 2 1Récepteur infrarouge (IR) | 81 4 Poussez vers l'extérieur les languettes de fixation du récepteur IR et retirez ce dernier du cadre de l'écran. 1 languettes (2) 2 récepteur IR 3 cadre de l'écran 1 2 382 | Récepteur infrarouge (IR) Réinstallation du récepteur infrarouge Procédure 1 Placez le récepteur IR sur le cadre de l'écran et enclenchez-le. 2 Alignez les trous des vis du châssis sur ceux du cadre central. 3 Remettez en place les vis de fixation du châssis au cadre central. 4 Faites passer tous les câbles par les guides sur le châssis. Remontage 1 Réinstallez la carte système. Voir « Réinstallation de la carte système », page 71. 2 Replacez la protection de la carte système. Voir « Réinstallation de la protection de la carte système », page 36. 3 Réinstallez le ventilateur. Voir « Réinstallation du ventilateur », page 56. 4 Réinstallez la carte convertisseur. Voir « Réinstallation de la carte convertisseur », page 30. 5 Suivez les instructions de l'étape 3 à l'étape 5 dans « Réinstallation du disque dur », page 23. 6 Suivez les instructions de l'étape 4 à l'étape 6 dans « Remise en place du lecteur optique », page 26. 7 Remettez en place le cache arrière. Voir « Réinstallation du capot arrière », page 20. 8 Réinstallez le socle. Voir « Réinstallation du socle », page 18. 9 Réinstallez le cache du socle. Voir « Réinstallation du cache du socle », page 16. 10 Suivez les instructions de la section « Après une intervention à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur », page 13.Cadre central | 83 26 Cadre central AVERTISSEMENT : Avant d'ouvrir votre ordinateur, prenez connaissance des consignes de sécurité fournies avec l'ordinateur et suivez les instructions de la section « Avant de commencer », page 11. Pour plus d'informations sur les pratiques d'excellence en matière de sécurité, consultez la page Regulatory Compliance (Conformité à la réglementation) à l'adresse dell.com/regulatory_compliance. Retrait du cadre central Démontage 1 Retirez le cache du socle. Voir « Retrait du cache du socle », page 15. 2 Retirez le socle Voir « Retrait du socle », page 17. 3 Retirez le cache arrière. Voir « Retrait du cache arrière », page 19. 4 Retirez la carte B-CAS. Voir « Retrait de la carte B-CAS », page 27. 5 Retirez les haut-parleurs. Voir « Retrait des haut-parleurs », page 51. 6 Suivez les instructions de l'étape 1 à l'étape 3 dans « Retrait du lecteur optique », page 25. 7 Suivez les instructions de l'étape 1 à l'étape 2 dans « Retrait du disque dur », page 21. 8 Retirez la carte convertisseur. Voir « Retrait de la carte convertisseur », page 29. 9 Retirez le ventilateur. Voir « Retrait du ventilateur », page 55. 10 Retirez la protection de la carte système. Voir « Retrait de la protection de la carte système », page 35. 11 Retirez la carte système. Voir « Retrait de la carte système », page 69. 12 Retirez le panneau de l'écran. Voir « Retrait du panneau de l'écran », page 73. 13 Retirez le récepteur infrarouge. « Retrait du récepteur infrarouge », page 79.84 | Cadre central Procédure 1 Libérez les languettes de fixation du cadre central au cadre de l'écran. 2 Soulevez le cadre central pour le retirer du cadre de l'écran. 1 cadre central 2 onglet 2 1Cadre central | 85 Réinstallation du cadre central Procédure Alignez les languette du cadre central sur les logements sur le cadre de l'écran et enclenchez le cadre central. Remontage 1 Réinstallez le récepteur infrarouge. « Réinstallation du récepteur infrarouge », page 82. 2 Remettez en place le panneau de l'écran. Voir « Remise en place du panneau de l'écran », page 77. 3 Réinstallez la carte système. Voir « Réinstallation de la carte système », page 71. 4 Réinstallez la protection de la carte système. Voir « Réinstallation de la protection de la carte système », page 36. 5 Réinstallez le ventilateur. Voir « Réinstallation du ventilateur », page 56. 6 Réinstallez la carte convertisseur. Voir « Réinstallation de la carte convertisseur », page 30. 7 Suivez les instructions de l'étape 3 à l'étape 5 dans « Réinstallation du disque dur », page 23. 8 Suivez les instructions de l'étape 4 à l'étape 6 dans « Remise en place du lecteur optique », page 26. 9 Réinstallez les haut-parleurs. Voir « Réinstallation des haut-parleurs », page 53. 10 Réinstallez la carte B-CAS. Voir « Réinstallation de la carte B-CAS », page 28. 11 Remettez en place le cache arrière. Voir « Réinstallation du capot arrière », page 20. 12 Réinstallez le socle. Voir « Réinstallation du socle », page 18. 13 Réinstallez le cache du socle. Voir « Réinstallation du cache du socle », page 16. 14 Suivez les instructions dans « Après une intervention à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur », page 13.86 | Cadre centralModule caméra | 87 27 Module caméra AVERTISSEMENT : Avant d'ouvrir votre ordinateur, prenez connaissance des consignes de sécurité fournies avec l'ordinateur et suivez les instructions de la section « Avant de commencer », page 11. Pour plus d'informations sur les pratiques d'excellence en matière de sécurité, consultez la page Regulatory Compliance (Conformité à la réglementation) à l'adresse dell.com/regulatory_compliance. Retrait du module caméra Démontage 1 Retirez le cache du socle. Voir « Retrait du cache du socle », page 15. 2 Retirez le socle. Voir « Retrait du socle », page 17. 3 Retirez le cache arrière. Voir « Retrait du cache arrière », page 19. 4 Suivez les instructions de l'étape 1 à l'étape 3 dans « Retrait du lecteur optique », page 25. 5 Suivez les instructions de l'étape 1 à l'étape 2 dans « Retrait du disque dur », page 21. 6 Retirez la carte convertisseur. Voir « Retrait de la carte convertisseur », page 29. 7 Retirez le ventilateur. Voir « Retrait du ventilateur », page 55. 8 Retirez la protection de la carte système. Voir « Retrait de la protection de la carte système », page 35. 9 Retirez la carte système. Voir « Retrait de la carte système », page 69. 10 Retirez le panneau d'écran. Voir « Retrait du panneau de l'écran », page 73. 11 Retirez le cadre central. Voir « Retrait du cadre central », page 83.88 | Module caméra Procédure 1 Retirez les deux vis de fixation du module caméra au cadre de l'écran. 2 Soulevez le module caméra et son câble pour les retirer du cadre de l'écran. 3 Retirez la vis de fixation du module caméra au support du module caméra. 4 Faites glisser le module caméra pour l'éloigner du support du module caméra. 1 cadre de l'écran 2 module caméra 3 vis (2) 1 support du module caméra 2 module caméra 3 vis 1 2 3 3 1 2Module caméra | 89 Réinstallation du module caméra Procédure 1 Faites glisser le module caméra dans son support et alignez le trou de la vis sur le module caméra sur celui du support du module caméra. 2 Réinstallez la vis de fixation du module caméra au support du module caméra. 3 Alignez les trous de vis du module caméra sur ceux du cadre de l'écran 4 Retirez deux vis de fixation du module caméra du cadre de l'écran. Remontage 1 Réinstallez le cadre central. Voir « Réinstallation du cadre central », page 85. 2 Remettez en place le panneau de l'écran. Voir « Remise en place du panneau de l'écran », page 77. 3 Réinstallez la carte système. Voir « Réinstallation de la carte système », page 71. 4 Repositionnez la protection de la carte système. Voir « Réinstallation de la protection de la carte système », page 36. 5 Réinstallez le ventilateur. Voir « Réinstallation du ventilateur », page 56. 6 Réinstallez la carte convertisseur. Voir « Réinstallation de la carte convertisseur », page 30. 7 Suivez les instructions de l'étape 3 à l'étape 5 dans « Réinstallation du disque dur », page 23. 8 Suivez les instructions de l'étape 4 à l'étape 6 dans « Remise en place du lecteur optique », page 26. 9 Remettez en place le cache arrière. Voir « Réinstallation du capot arrière », page 20. 10 Réinstallez le socle. Voir « Réinstallation du socle », page 18. 11 Réinstallez le cache du socle. Voir « Réinstallation du cache du socle », page 16. 12 Suivez les instructions dans « Après une intervention à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur », page 13.90 | Module caméraCadre de l'écran | 91 28 Cadre de l'écran AVERTISSEMENT : Avant d'ouvrir votre ordinateur, prenez connaissance des consignes de sécurité fournies avec l'ordinateur et suivez les instructions de la section « Avant de commencer », page 11. Pour plus d'informations sur les pratiques d'excellence en matière de sécurité, consultez la page Regulatory Compliance (Conformité à la réglementation) à l'adresse dell.com/regulatory_compliance. Retrait du cadre de l'écran Démontage 1 Retirez le cache du socle. Voir « Retrait du cache du socle », page 15. 2 Retirez le socle. Voir « Retrait du socle », page 17. 3 Retirez le cache arrière. Voir « Retrait du cache arrière », page 19. 4 Suivez les instructions de l'étape 1 à l'étape 3 dans « Retrait du lecteur optique », page 25. 5 Suivez les instructions de l'étape 1 à l'étape 2 dans « Retrait du disque dur », page 21. 6 Retirez la carte convertisseur. Voir « Retrait de la carte convertisseur », page 29. 7 Retirez le ventilateur. Voir « Retrait du ventilateur », page 55. 8 Retirez la protection de la carte système. Voir « Retrait de la protection de la carte système », page 35. 9 Retirez la carte système. Voir « Retrait de la carte système », page 69. 10 Retirez le panneau d'écran. Voir « Retrait du panneau de l'écran », page 73. 11 Retirez le cadre central. Voir « Retrait du cadre central », page 83. 12 Retirez le récepteur infrarouge. Voir « Retrait du récepteur infrarouge », page 79. 13 Retirez le module caméra. Voir « Retrait du module caméra », page 87.92 | Cadre de l'écran Procédure Retirez le cadre d'écran. 1 cadre de l'écran 1Cadre de l'écran | 93 Remise en place du cadre d'écran Procédure Placez le cadre de l'écran sur une surface propre. Remontage 1 Réinstallez le module caméra. Voir « Réinstallation du module caméra », page 89. 2 Réinstallez le récepteur infrarouge. Voir « Réinstallation du récepteur infrarouge », page 82. 3 Réinstallez le cadre central. Voir « Réinstallation du cadre central », page 85. 4 Remettez en place le panneau d'écran. Voir « Remise en place du panneau de l'écran », page 77. 5 Réinstallez la carte système. Voir « Réinstallation de la carte système », page 71. 6 Réinstallez la protection de la carte système. Voir « Réinstallation de la protection de la carte système », page 36. 7 Réinstallez le ventilateur. Voir « Réinstallation du ventilateur », page 56. 8 Réinstallez la carte convertisseur. Voir « Réinstallation de la carte convertisseur », page 30. 9 Suivez les instructions de l'étape 3 à l'étape 5 dans « Réinstallation du disque dur », page 23. 10 Suivez les instructions de l'étape 4 à l'étape 6 dans « Remise en place du lecteur optique », page 26. 11 Remettez en place le cache arrière. Voir « Réinstallation du capot arrière », page 20. 12 Réinstallez le socle. Voir « Réinstallation du socle », page 18. 13 Réinstallez le cache du socle. Voir « Réinstallation du cache du socle », page 16. 14 Suivez les instructions dans « Après une intervention à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur », page 13.94 | Cadre de l'écranConfiguration du système | 95 29 Configuration du système Présentation Utilisez l'utilitaire de configuration du système pour : • Obtenir des informations sur le matériel installé sur l'ordinateur (quantité de RAM, taille du disque dur, etc.) • Changer les informations de configuration du système • Modifier ou définir des options définissables par l'utilisateur, telles que le mot de passe, le type de disque dur installé, l'activation ou la désactivation des périphériques de base, etc. PRÉCAUTION : Si vous n'êtes pas un utilisateur expérimenté, ne modifiez pas les valeurs définies dans ce programme. Certaines modifications peuvent empêcher l'ordinateur de fonctionner correctement. REMARQUE : Avant de modifier la configuration du système, notez les informations affichées sur l'écran de configuration du système afin de pouvoir vous y référer ultérieurement. Accès au programme de configuration du système 1 Mettez l'ordinateur sous tension (ou redémarrez-le). 2 Au cours du POST, lorsque le logo DELL s'affiche, guettez l'invite F2 et appuyez immédiatement sur . REMARQUE : L'invite F2 indique que le clavier a été initialisé. Cette invite peut s'afficher très brièvement. Vous devez donc être attentif et vous tenir prêt à appuyer sur . Si vous appuyez sur avant d'y être invité, aucune action n'est exécutée. Si vous n'avez pas appuyé sur la touche assez vite et que le logo du système d'exploitation apparaît, attendez que le bureau Microsoft Windows s'affiche. Ensuite, éteignez votre ordinateur et réessayez. Voir « Éteignez l'ordinateur et les périphériques connectées », page 11.96 | Configuration du système Écrans de configuration du système L'écran de configuration du système affiche les informations de configuration en cours ou modifiables. Les informations à l'écran s'affichent dans trois zones : setup item (Élément de configuration), help screen (Écran d'aide) actif et key functions (Touches de fonction). Setup Item — Ce champ apparaît dans la partie gauche de la fenêtre de configuration du système. Il s'agit d'une liste déroulante qui contient les fonctions qui définissent la configuration de votre ordinateur, y compris le matériel installé et les fonctions d'économie d'énergie et de sécurité. Utilisez les touches fléchées Haut et Bas pour faire défiler cette liste. Lorsqu'une option est en surbrillance, l'écran Help Screen (Écran d'aide) affiche d'autres informations concernant cette option et les réglages possibles. Help Screen — Ce champ apparaît dans la partie droite de la fenêtre de configuration du système. Il contient des informations relatives à chaque option figurant dans la zone Setup Item. Il permet de visualiser des informations concernant l'ordinateur et de modifier les paramètres en cours. Appuyez sur les touches Haut et Bas pour mettre en surbrillance une option. Appuyez sur pour activer la sélection et revenir à Setup Item. REMARQUE : Les réglages figurant dans Setup Item ne sont pas tous modifiables. Key Functions — Ce champ apparaît sous le champ Help Screen. Il répertorie les touches disponibles et leur fonction dans le champ actif de configuration du système.Configuration du système | 97 Options du programme de configuration du système REMARQUE : Selon l'ordinateur et les périphériques installés, les éléments qui apparaissent dans cette section peuvent être différents. Main — System Information (Menu principal — Informations système) BIOS Revision (Révision du BIOS) Affiche le numéro de révision du BIOS. BIOS Build Date (Date de version du BIOS) Affiche la date de version du BIOS dans le format mm/jj/aaaa. System Name (Nom du système) Affiche le numéro de modèle du système. System Time (Heure système) Affiche l'heure en cours dans le format hh:mm:ss. System Date (Date système) Affiche la date en cours dans le format. mm/jj/aaaa Service Tag (Numéro de service) Affiche le numéro de service de l'ordinateur. Service Tag Input (saisie du numéro de service) Permet d'entrer le numéro de service de l'ordinateur si le champ correspondant est vide. Asset Tag (Numéro d'inventaire) Affiche le numéro d'inventaire de l'ordinateur lorsque ce numéro est présent. Main — Processor Information (Menu principal — Informations sur le processeur) Processor Type (Type de processeur) Indique le type de processeur. Processor ID (ID du processeur) Affiche l'ID du processeur. Processor Core Count (Nombre de cœurs du processeur) Indique le nombre de cœurs du processeur. Processor L1 Cache (Mémoire cache de niveau 1 par processeur) Affiche la taille de la mémoire cache L1 du processeur. Processor L2 Cache (Mémoire cache de niveau 2 par processeur) Affiche la taille de la mémoire cache L2 du processeur. Processor L3 Cache (Mémoire cache de niveau 3 par processeur) Affiche la taille de la mémoire cache L3 du processeur.98 | Configuration du système Main — Memory Information (Menu principal — Informations sur la mémoire) Memory Installed (Mémoire installée) Indique en Mo la quantité de mémoire installée. Memory Running Speed (Vitesse de la mémoire) Indique en MHz la vitesse de la mémoire. Memory Technology (Technologie de mémoire) Indique le type de mémoire installée. Main — SATA Information (Menu principal — Informations SATA) SATA 1 Device Type (Type de périphérique) Indique le lecteur SATA connecté au connecteur SATA 1 Device ID (ID du périphérique) Numéro de série du commutateur. SATA 1 device (Périhérique SATA 1) Device Size (Taille du périphérique) Affiche la taille en Go du périphérique SATA 1, s'il s'agit d'un disque dur. SATA 2 Device Type (Type de périphérique) Indique le lecteur SATA connecté au connecteur SATA 2 Device ID (ID du périphérique) Affiche le numéro de série du périhérique SATA 2. Device Size (Taille du périphérique) Affiche la taille en Go du périphérique SATA 2, s'il s'agit d'un disque dur.Configuration du système | 99 Advanced — Processor Configuration (Avancé — Configuration du processeur) Intel Hyper-Threading Technology Permet d'activer ou de désactiver la fonction Intel Hyper-Threading Technology du processeur — Activée ou désactivée (activée par défaut) Intel(R) SpeedStep Technology Permet d'activer ou de désactiver la fonction Intel SpeedStep Technology du processeur — Activée ou désactivée (activée par défaut) Intel(R) Virtualization Technology Permet d'activer ou de désactiver la fonction Intel Virtualization Technology du processeur — Activée ou désactivée (activée par défaut) CPU XD Support (Support CPU XD) Permet d'activer ou de désactiver le mode de désactivation d'exécution du processeur — Activé ou désactivé (activé par défaut) Limit CPUID Value (Limiter la valeur CPUID) Permet de limiter la valeur maximale de la fonction CPUID standard du processeur — Activé ou désactivé (Désactivée par défaut) Multi Core Support (Prise en charge du traitement multicœur) Permet d'activer ou de désactiver le processeur multicoeur — Activé ou désactivé (activé par défaut) Intel(R) Turbo Boost Technology Permet d'activer ou de désactiver le mode Intel Turbo Boost Technology du processeur — Activé ou désactivé (activé par défaut) REMARQUE : L'option Intel Turbo Boost Technology est affichée si cette fonction est prise en charge par le processeur. 100 | Configuration du système Advanced — USB Configuration (Avancé — Configuration USB) Rear USB Ports (Ports USB arrière) Permet d'activer ou de désactiver les ports USB arrière — Activés ou désactivés (activés par défaut) Side USB Ports (Ports USB latéraux) Permet d'activer ou de désactiver les ports USB latéraux — Activés ou désactivés (activés par défaut) Advanced — Onboard Device Configuration (Avancé — Configuration du périphérique intégré) Onboard Audio Controller (Contrôleur audio intégré) Permet d'activer ou de désactiver le contrôleur audio intégré. Activé ou désactivé (activé par défaut) SATA Mode (Mode SATA) Affiche le mode SATA sur l'ordinateur (ATA par défaut) Onboard LAN Controller (Contrôleur LAN intégré) Permet d'activer ou de désactiver le contrôleur LAN intégré. Activé ou désactivé (activé par défaut) Onboard LAN Boot ROM (ROM de démarrage du réseau local intégré) Permet de démarrer l'ordinateur à partir du réseau. Activée ou désactivée (désactivée par défaut)Configuration du système | 101 Boot (Démarrage) Numlock Key (Touche de verrouillage numérique) Permet de définir l'état de la touche de verrouillage numérique au cours du démarrage. Activée ou désactivée (activée par défaut) Keyboard Errors (Erreurs clavier) Permet d'activer ou de désactiver l'affichage des erreurs de clavier au cours du démarrage. Report or Do Not Report (Signaler ou Ne pas signaler) (Signaler par défaut) USB Boot Support (Prise en charge de l'amorçage USB) Permet d'activer ou de désactiver le démarrage des périphériques de stockage de masse USB, tels qu'un disque dur, un lecteur optique, une clé USB, etc. Activé ou désactivé (activé par défaut) Boot Mode (Mode de démarrage) Permet de choisir un mode de démarrage de l'ordinateur. Legacy or UEFI (Legacy by default) (Existant ou UEFI (Existant par défaut) 1st Boot Device (1er périhériqued'amorçage) Affiche le premier périphérique d'amorçage. 2nd Boot Device (2ème périphérique d'amorçage) Affiche le deuxième périphérique d'amorçage. 3rd Boot Device (3ème périphérique d'amorçage) Affiche le troisième périphérique d'amorçage. 4th Boot Device (4ème périphérique d'amorçage) Affiche le quatrième périphérique d'amorçage. 5th Boot Device (5ème périphérique d'amorçage) Affiche le cinquième périphérique d'amorçage. Hard Disk Drivers (Pilotes de disque dur) Affiche la séquence d'amorçage du disque dur. USB Storage Drivers (Pilotes de stockage USB) Affiche la séquence d'amorçage du disque de stockage USB. CD/DVD ROM Drivers (pilotes CD/DVD ROM) Affiche la séquence d'amorçage du lecteur optique.102 | Configuration du système Power (Alimentation) Wake Up by Integrated LAN/WLAN (Réveil par LAN/WLAN intégré) Permet d'activer l'ordinateur avec des signaux LAN ou LAN sans fil spéciaux. Activé ou désactivé (désactivé par défaut) AC Recovery (Rétablissement de l'alimentation CA) Permet de configurer le comportement de l'ordinateur suite à une panne électrique. Power Off, Power On, or Last Power State (Power Off by default) (Eteint, Allumé ou dernier état d'alimentation (désactivé par défaut) Auto Power On (Mise en route automatique) Permet d'activer ou de désactiver la fonction de mise sous tension de l'ordinateur. Activé ou désactivé (désactivé par défaut) Auto Power On Mode (Mode de mise sous tension automatique) Permet de mettre sous tension automatiquement l'ordinateur chaque jour ou le jour de votre choix. Cette option peut être configurée seulement si le mode Auto Power On est activé. Everyday or Selected Day (Tous les jours ou un jour donné) (Sélectionné par défaut) Auto Power On Date (Date de mise sous tension automatique) Permet de définir la date à laquelle l'ordinateur doit être mis sous tension automatiquement. Cette option peut être configurée seulement si le mode Auto Power On est activé. 1 to 31 (15 by default) (1 à 31 secondes, par défaut : 15) Auto Power On Time (Heure de mise sous tension automatique) Permet de définir l'heure à laquelle l'ordinateur doit être hors tension automatiquement. Cette option peut être configurée seulement si le mode Auto Power On est activé. hh:mm:ss (12:30:30 par défaut)Configuration du système | 103 Security (Sécurité) Supervisor Password (Mot de passe de superviseur) Affiche le mot de passe du superviseur. User Password (Mot de passe d'utilisateur) Affiche le mot de passe d'utilisateur. Set User Password (Définir le mot de passe d'utilisateur) Permet de définir, modifier ou supprimer le mot de passe de l'utilisateur. Password Check (Vérification du mot de passe) Permet d'activer la vérification du mot de passe lorsque vous accédez à la configuration du système ou au cours du démarrage de l'ordinateur. Setup (Configurer) ; Always (Toujours) (par défaut : Configurer) REMARQUE : L'option de vérification du mot de passe est visible uniquement lorsque le mot de passe d'utilisateur est défini. Set Superviseur Password (Définir le mot de passe du superviseur) Permet de définir, modifier ou supprimer le mot de passe du superviseur. Le mot de passe du superviseur contrôle l'accès à l'utilitaire de configuration du système. REMARQUE : La suppression du mot de passe du superviseur supprime le mot de passe de l'utilisateur. Définissez le mot de passe du superviseur avant celui de l'utlisateur. User Access Level (Droits d'accès des utilisateurs) Permet de limiter ou de fournir l'accès à l'utilitaire de configuration du système. No Access (Aucun accès), View Only (Affichage uniquement) ou Full Access (Full Access by default) (Accès complet) (Accès complet par défaut) • No Access : empêche les utilisateurs de modifier les options de configuration du système • View Only : permet aux utilisateurs uniquement d'afficher les options de configuration du système • Limited : permet aux utilisateurs de modifier certaines options de configuration du système • Full Access: permet aux utilisateurs de modifier toutes les options de configuration du système, sauf le mot de passe du superviseur104 | Configuration du système Boot Sequence (Séquence de démarrage) Cette fonction permet de modifier la séquence de démarrage des périphériques. Boot Options (Options d'amorçage) • USB Floppy Device (Disquette USB) — L'ordinateur tente de démarrer à partir du lecteur de disquette USB. Si aucun système d'exploitation n'est installé sur le disque dur, l'ordinateur génère un message d'erreur. • Internal HDD Devices (Disque dur IDE intégré) — L'ordinateur tente de démarrer à partir du disque dur principal. Si aucun système d'exploitation n'est installé sur le disque dur, l'ordinateur génère un message. d'erreur. • USB Storage Device (Périphérique de stockage USB) — Insérez le périphérique mémoire dans un port USB et redémarrez l'ordinateur. Lorsque le message F12 Boot Options (F12 Options d'amorçage) s'affiche en bas à droite de l'écran, appuyez sur . Le BIOS détecte le périphérique et ajoute l'option Flash USB au menu d'amorçage. • Internal ODD Devices (Disque dur IDE intégré) — L'ordinateur tente de démarrer à partir du disque dur principal. Si aucun disque ne figure dans le lecteur ou si le disque n'est pas amorçable, l'ordinateur génère un message d'erreur. REMARQUE : Pour démarrer sur un phériphhérique USB, celui-ci doit être amorçable. Pour vérifier que tel est bien le cas, consultez la documentation du périphérique. • Onboard NIC Device (Périphérique NIC intégré) — L'ordinateur tente de démarrer depuis le réseau. Si aucun système d'exploitation n'est installé sur le disque dur, l'ordinateur génère un message d'erreur. REMARQUE : Pour démarrer à partir du réseau, l'option Onboard LAN boot ROM (ROM de démarrage réseau) doit être activée dans la configuration du système. Voir « Options du programme de configuration du système », page 97. Exit (Quitter) Save Changes and Reset (Enregistrer les modifications et redéfinir) Permet de quitter la configuration du système et d'enregistrer les modifications Discard Changes and Reset (Annuler les modifications et redéfinir) Permet de quitter la configuration du système et de charger les valeurs précédentes de toutes les options de configuration du système Load Defaults (Charger les paramètres par défaut) Permet de charger les valeurs par défaut de toutes les options de configuration du systèmeConfiguration du système | 105 Modification de la séquence d'amorçage pour le démarrage en cours Vous pouvez utiliser cette fonction pour modifier la séquence d'amorçage actuelle, par exemple, pour amorcer à partir du lecteur de optique et exécuter Dell Diagnostics sur le disque Drivers and Utilities (Pilotes et utilitires). Lorsque les tests sont terminés, la séquence d'amorçage précédente est restaurée. 1 Si vous démarrez à partir d'un périphérique USB, branchez ce dernier sur un connecteur USB. 2 Mettez l'ordinateur sous tension (ou redémarrez-le). 3 Lorsque le message F2 Setup, F12 Boot Options (F2 Configuration, F12 Options d'amorçage) s'affiche dans l'angle inférieur droit de l'écran, appuyez sur . REMARQUE : Si vous n'avez pas appuyé sur la touche assez vite et que le logo du système d'exploitation apparaît, attendez que le bureau Microsoft Windows s'affiche. Éteignez l'ordinateur et faites une nouvelle tentative. Le menu Boot Device (Périphérique d'amorçage) s'affiche. Il répertorie tous les périphériques d'amorçage disponibles. 4 Dans ce menu, choisissez le périphérique à partir duquel vous voulez démarrer. Si vous voulez démarrez à partir d'une clé USB, mettez en surbrillance USB Storage Device et appuyez sur . REMARQUE : Pour démarrer sur un phériphhérique USB, celui-ci doit être amorçable. Pour vérifier que c'est bien le cas, consultez la documentation du périphérique. Modification de la séquence d'amorçage pour tous les redémarrages suivants 1 Ouvrez le programme de configuration du système. Voir « Accès au programme de configuration du système », page 95. 2 Avec les touches fléchées, mettez en surbrillance l'option de menu Boot (Démarrage) et appuyez sur pour accéder au menu. REMARQUE : Notez la séquence d'amorçage utilisée dans le cas où vous auriez besoin de la restaurer. 3 Appuyez sur les touches fléchées Haut et Bas pour faire défiler la liste de périphériques. 4 Appuyez sur les touches Plus (+) ou Moins (–) pour modifier la priorité d'amorçage des périphériques.106 | Configuration du système Effacement des mots de passe oubliés AVERTISSEMENT : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, prenez connaissance des informations de sécurité fournies avec l'ordinateur et suivez les étapes dans « Avant de commencer », page 11. Pour plus d'informations sur les pratiques d'excellence en matière de sécurité, consultez la page Regulatory Compliance (Conformité à la réglementation) à l'adresse dell.com/regulatory_compliance. AVERTISSEMENT : Avant toute suppression des paramètres du mot de passe, l'ordinateur doit être déconnecté du secteur. 1 Retirez le cache du socle. Voir « Retrait du cache du socle », page 15. 2 Retirez le socle. Voir « Retrait du socle », page 17. 3 Retirez le cache arrière. Voir « Retrait du cache arrière », page 19. 4 Retirez la protection de la carte système. Voir « Retrait de la protection de la carte système », page 35. 5 Repérez le cavalier de réinitialisation du mot de passe à 3 broches (PWCLR1) sur la carte système. Voir « Composants de la carte système », page 8. 6 Retirez le cavalier à 2 broches des broches 2 et 3, puis insérez-la dans les broches 1 et 2. 7 Attendez environ cinq secondes que le mot de passe s'efface. 8 Retirez le cavalier à 2 broches des broches 1 et 2, puis insérez-le dans les broches 2 et 3. 9 Réinstallez la protection de la carte système. Voir « Réinstallation de la protection de la carte système », page 36. 10 Remettez en place le cache arrière. Voir « Réinstallation du capot arrière », page 20. 11 Réinstallez le socle. Voir « Réinstallation du socle », page 18. 12 Réinstallez le cache du socle. Voir « Réinstallation du cache du socle », page 16. 13 Suivez les instructions dans « Après une intervention à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur », page 13.Configuration du système | 107 Effacement des paramètres CMOS AVERTISSEMENT : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, prenez connaissance des informations de sécurité fournies avec l'ordinateur et suivez les étapes dans « Avant de commencer », page 11. Pour plus d'informations sur les pratiques d'excellence en matière de sécurité, consultez la page Regulatory Compliance (Conformité à la réglementation) à l'adresse dell.com/regulatory_compliance. AVERTISSEMENT : Avant toute suppression du paramètre CMOS, l'ordinateur doit être déconnecté du secteur. 1 Retirez le cache du socle. Voir « Retrait du cache du socle », page 15. 2 Retirez le socle. Voir « Retrait du socle », page 17. 3 Retirez le cache arrière. Voir « Retrait du cache arrière », page 19. 4 Retirez la protection de la carte système. Voir « Retrait de la protection de la carte système », page 35. 5 Repérez le cavalier de réinitialisation CMOS à 3 broches (CMOCL1) sur la carte système. Voir « Composants de la carte système », page 8. 6 Retirez le cavalier à 2 broches des broches 2 et 3, puis insérez-le dans les broches 1 et 2. 7 Attendez environ cinq secondes que le mot de passe CMOS s'efface. 8 Retirez le cavalier à 2 broches des broches 1 et 2, puis insérez-le dans les broches 2 et 3. 9 Réinstallez la protection de la carte système. Voir « Réinstallation de la protection de la carte système », page 36. 10 Remettez en place le cache arrière. Voir « Réinstallation du capot arrière », page 20. 11 Réinstallez le socle. Voir « Réinstallation du socle », page 18. 12 Réinstallez le cache du socle. Voir « Réinstallation du cache du socle », page 16. 13 Suivez les instructions dans « Après une intervention à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur », page 13.108 | Configuration du systèmeFlashage du BIOS | 109 30 Flashage du BIOS Une mise à jour flash du BIOS peut être nécessaire si une nouvelle version est disponible ou lors du remplacement de la carte système. Pour flasher le BIOS : 1 Allumez l'ordinateur. 2 Accédez à support.dell.com/support/downloads. 3 Repérez le fichier de mise à jour du BIOS qui correspond à votre ordinateur : REMARQUE : le numéro de service de votre ordinateur se trouve sur l'étiquette apposée au dos de celui-ci. Pour plus d'informations, consultez le guide de démarrage rapide fourni avec l'ordinateur. Si vous connaissez le numéro de service ou le code de service express de l'ordinateur : a Entrez le numéro de service ou le code de service express dans le champ Service Tag or Express Service Code (Numéro de service ou COde de service express). b Cliquez sur Submit (Envoyer) pour accéder à étape 4. Si vous connaissez le numéro de service ou le code de service express de l'ordinateur : a Sélectionnez l'une des options suivantes : • Automatically detect my Service Tag for me (Détecter automatiquement mon Numéro de service à ma place) • Choose from My Products and Services List (Choisir dans Ma liste de produits et de services) • Choose from a list of all Dell products (Choisir dans une liste de tous les produits Dell) b Cliquez sur Continue (Continuer) et suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran. 4 La liste de résultats s’affiche. Cliquez sur BIOS. 5 Cliquez sur Download File (Télécharger le fichier) pour télécharger la dernière version du BIOS. 6 Dans la fenêtre Please select your download method below (Sélectionner le mode de téléchargement ci-dessous) cliquez sur Download Now (Télécharger maintenant). 7 Dans la fenêtre Save As (Enregistrer sous), sélectionnez le dossier dans lequel vous voulez télécharger le fichier sur l'ordinateur. 8 Si la fenêtre Download Complete (Téléchargemet terminé) cliquez sur Close (Fermer). 9 Accédez au dossier où vous avez téléchargé le fichier de mise à jour du BIOS. L'icône du fichier apparaît dans le dossier ; elle porte le même nom que le fichier de mise à jour du BIOS téléchargé. 10 Cliquez deux fois sur l'icône du fichier de mise à jour du BIOS et suivez les instructions qui s'affichent.110 | Flashage du BIOS Dell™ Dimension™ XPS Service Manual Before You Begin Opening the Computer Cover Technical Overview Technical Specifications Advanced Troubleshooting System Setup Removing and Installing Parts Closing the Computer Cover Notes, Notices, and Cautions Abbreviations and Acronyms For a complete list of abbreviations and acronyms, see the Dell Dimension Help file. Information in this document is subject to change without notice. © 2003–2004 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. Reproduction in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden. Trademarks used in this text: Dell, the DELL logo, and Dimension are trademarks of Dell Inc.; Intel, Pentium, and Celeron are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation; Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own. January 2004     Rev. A02 NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your computer. NOTICE: A NOTICE indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death.Back to Contents Page Advanced Troubleshooting Dell™ Dimension™ XPS Service Manual Diagnostic Lights Beep Codes System Messages Diagnostic Lights To help you troubleshoot a problem, your computer has four lights labeled "A," "B," "C," and "D" on the back panel. The lights can be yellow or green. When the computer starts normally, the lights flash. After the computer starts, all four lights display solid green. If the computer malfunctions, the color and sequence of the lights identify the problem. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions. Light Pattern Problem Description Suggested Resolution The computer is in a normal off condition or a possible pre-BIOS failure has occurred. Verify that the computer is plugged into a working electrical outlet and that you have pressed the power button. A possible processor failure has occurred. Reinstall the processor and restart the computer. Memory modules are detected, but a memory failure has occurred. 1. Reinstall all memory modules. 2. Ensure that all the connector tabs are locked. 3. Restart the computer. 4. If the problem persists, contact Dell. A possible expansion card failure has occurred. 1. Determine if a conflict exists by removing a card (not a video card) and then restarting the computer. 2. If the problem persists, reinstall the card that you removed, remove a different card, and then restart the computer. 3. Repeat this process for each card. If the computer starts normally, troubleshoot the last card removed from the computer for resource conflicts (If the problem persists, contact Dell). A possible video card failure has occurred. l If the computer has a video card, remove the card, reinstall it, and then restart the computer. l If the problem still exists, install a video card that you know works and restart the computer. l If the problem persists or the computer has integrated video, contact Dell. A possible floppy or hard drive failure has occurred. Reseat all power and data cables and restart the computer. A possible USB failure has occurred. Reinstall all USB devices, check cable connections, and then restart the computer. No memory modules are detected. 1. Reinstall all memory modules. 2. Ensure that all the connector tabs are locked. Beep Codes Your computer might emit a series of beeps during start-up if the monitor cannot display errors or problems. This series of beeps, called a beep code, identifies a problem. One possible beep code (code 1-3-1) consists of one beep, a burst of three beeps, and then one beep. This beep code tells you that the computer encountered a memory problem. Reseating the memory modules may fix the beep code errors in the following table. If the problem persists, see "Contacting Dell" in your Owner's Manual for instructions on obtaining technical assistance. If you hear one of the following beep codes, see "Contacting Dell" in your Owner's Manual for instructions on obtaining technical assistance. 3. Restart the computer. 4. If the problem persists, contact Dell. Memory modules are detected, but a memory configuration or compatibility error exists. l Ensure that no special memory module/memory connector placement requirements exist. l Verify that the memory modules that you are installing are compatible with your computer. l If the problem persists, contact Dell. A possible system board resource and/or hardware failure has occurred. If the problem persists, contact Dell. A possible expansion card failure has occurred. 1. Determine if a conflict exists by removing a card (not a video card) and restarting the computer. 2. If the problem persists, reinstall the card that you removed, remove a different card, and then restart the computer. 3. Repeat this process for each card. If the computer starts normally, troubleshoot the last card removed from the computer for resource conflicts. 4. If the problem persists, contact Dell. Another failure has occurred. l Ensure that the cables are properly connected to the system board from the hard drive, CD drive, and DVD drive. l If the problem persists, contact Dell. The computer is in a normal operating condition after POST. None. Code Cause 1-3-1 through 2-4-4 Memory not being properly identified or used 4-3-1 Memory failure above address 0FFFFh Code Cause 1-1-2 Processor register failure 1-1-3 NVRAM 1-1-4 ROM BIOS checksum failure 1-2-1 Programmable interval timer 1-2-2 DMA initialization failureSystem Messages 1-2-3 DMA page register read/write failure 3-1-1 Slave DMA register failure 3-1-2 Master DMA register failure 3-1-3 Master interrupt mask register failure 3-1-4 Slave interrupt mask register failure 3-2-2 Interrupt vector loading failure 3-2-4 Keyboard Controller Test failure 3-3-1 NVRAM power loss 3-3-2 NVRAM configuration 3-3-4 Video Memory Test failure 3-4-1 Screen initialization failure 3-4-2 Screen retrace failure 3-4-3 Search for video ROM failure 4-2-1 No time tick 4-2-2 Shutdown failure 4-2-3 Gate A20 failure 4-2-4 Unexpected interrupt in protected mode 4-3-3 Timer-chip counter 2 failure 4-3-4 Time-of-day clock stopped 4-4-1 Serial or parallel port test failure 4-4-4 Cache test failure NOTE: If the message you received is not listed in the following table, see the documentation for either the operating system or the program that was running when the message appeared. Message Possible Cause Corrective Action 8042 Gate-A20 error The keyboard controller failed its test. If you receive this message after you make changes in system setup, enter system setup and restore the original value(s). Address Line Short! An error in the address decoding circuitry in the memory has occurred. Reseat the memory modules. C: Drive Error C: Drive Failure The hard drive is not working or is not configured correctly. Ensure that the drive is installed correctly in the computer and defined correctly in system setup. Cache Memory Bad, Do Not Enable Cache The cache memory is not operating. See "Contacting Dell" in your Owner's Manual for instructions on obtaining technical assistance. CH-2 Timer Error An error is occurring on the timer on the system board. See "Contacting Dell" in your Owner's Manual for instructions on obtaining technical assistance. CMOS Battery State Low CMOS Checksum Failure CMOS System Options Not Set CMOS Display Type Mismatch CMOS Memory Size Mismatch CMOS Time and Date Not Set The system configuration information in system setup is incorrect or the battery charge may be low. Enter system setup, verify the system configuration, and then restart the computer. Diskette Boot Failure Drive A or B is present but has failed the BIOS POST. Ensure that the drive is installed correctly in the computer and defined correctly in system setup. Check the interface cable at both ends. DMA Error DMA 1 Error DMA 2 Error Error in the DMA controller on the system board. The keyboard or system board may need to be replaced. FDD Controller Failure HDD Controller Failure The BIOS cannot communicate with the floppy drive or hard drive controller. Ensure that the floppy drive or the hard drive is installed correctly in the computer and defined correctly in system setup. Check the interface cable at both ends. INTR1 Error An interrupt channel on the system board failed to POST. The keyboard or system board may need to be replaced.Back to Contents Page INTR2 Error Invalid Boot Diskette The operating system cannot be located on drive A or drive C. Enter system setup and confirm that drive A or drive C is properly identified. Keyboard Error The BIOS has detected a stuck key. Ensure that nothing is resting on the keyboard; if a key appears to be stuck, carefully pry it up. If the problem persists, you may need to replace the keyboard. KB/Interface Error An error occurred with the keyboard connector. Ensure that nothing is resting on the keyboard; if a key appears to be stuck, carefully pry it up. If the problem persists, you may need to replace the keyboard. No ROM Basic The operating system cannot be located on drive A or drive C. Enter system setup and confirm that drive A or drive C is properly identified.Back to Contents Page Before You Begin Dell™ Dimension™ XPS Service Manual Getting Started Recommended Tools Shutting Down Your Computer Getting Started This section provides procedures for removing and installing the components in your computer. Unless otherwise noted, each procedure assumes that the following conditions exist: l You have performed the steps in "Shutting Down Your Computer." l You have read the safety information in your Owner's Manual. Recommended Tools The procedures in this document may require the following tools: l Small flat-blade screwdriver l Phillips screwdriver l Flash BIOS update program floppy disk or CD Shutting Down Your Computer Use the following safety guidelines to help protect your computer from potential damage and to ensure your own personal safety. 1. Shut down the computer. 2. Ensure that the computer and any attached devices are turned off. If your computer and attached devices did not automatically turn off when you shut down your computer, press and hold the power button for 4 seconds. 3. Disconnect any telephone or telecommunication lines from the computer. 4. Disconnect your computer and all attached devices from their electrical outlets, and then press the power button to ground the system board. 5. Remove the computer stand, if it is attached. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Owner's Manual. NOTICE: Only a certified service technician should perform repairs on your computer. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered by your warranty. CAUTION: Handle components and cards with care. Do not touch the components or contacts on a card. Hold a card by its edges or by its metal mounting bracket. Hold a component such as a processor by its edges, not by its pins. NOTICE: When you disconnect a cable, pull on its connector or on its strain-relief loop, not on the cable itself. Some cables have a connector with locking tabs; if you are disconnecting this type of cable, press in on the locking tabs before you disconnect the cable. As you pull connectors apart, keep them evenly aligned to avoid bending any connector pins. Also, before you connect a cable, ensure that both connectors are correctly oriented and aligned. NOTICE: To avoid damaging the computer, perform the following steps before you begin working inside the computer. NOTICE: To disconnect a network cable, first unplug the cable from your computer and then unplug it from the network wall jack. 6. Open the computer cover. Back to Contents Page CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before opening the cover. NOTICE: Before touching anything inside your computer, ground yourself by touching an unpainted metal surface, such as the metal at the back of the computer. While you work, periodically touch an unpainted metal surface to dissipate any static electricity that could harm internal components. Back to Contents Page Closing the Computer Cover Dell™ Dimension™ XPS Service Manual  1. Ensure that all cables are connected, and fold cables out of the way. 2. Ensure that no tools or extra parts are left inside the computer. 3. Close the computer cover: a. Pivot the cover down and into position. b. Press down on the cover to close it. c. Once the cover is closed, slide the cover latch release to the right until the latch clicks into place. 4. If you are using a padlock to secure your computer, install the padlock. 5. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. Back to Contents Page NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network wall jack and then plug it into the computer. Back to Contents Page Opening the Computer Cover Dell™ Dimension™ XPS Service Manual 1. Follow the instructions in "Before You Begin." 2. If you have installed a padlock through the padlock ring on the back panel, remove the padlock. 3. Lay the computer on its side with the cover latch release on the top as shown in the following figure. 4. Open the computer cover: a. Slide the cover latch release toward the top of the computer. b. Raise the cover, and pivot it toward the front of the computer. Back to Contents Page CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in your Owner's Manual. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before opening the cover. NOTICE: Ensure that sufficient space exists to accommodate the open cover—at least 30 cm (1 ft) of desk top space. NOTICE: Be careful when opening the computer cover to ensure that you do not accidentally disconnect cables from the system board. Back to Contents Page Removing and Installing Parts Dell™ Dimension™ XPS Service Manual Memory You can increase your computer memory by installing memory modules on the system board. For information on the type of memory supported by your computer, see "Memory." DDR Memory Overview DDR memory modules should be installed in pairs of matched memory size. This means that if you purchased your computer with 256 MB of memory installed and you want to add another 256 MB of memory, you must install it in the appropriate connector. If the DDR memory modules are not installed in matched pairs, the computer will continue to operate, but with a slight reduction in performance. The recommended memory configurations are: l A pair of matched memory modules installed in connectors DIMM1 and DIMM2 or l A pair of matched memory modules installed in connectors DIMM1 and DIMM2 and another matched pair installed in connectors DIMM3 and DIMM4 Additional memory recommendations include: l Do not install ECC memory modules. l Be sure to install a single memory module in DIMM 1 or the connector closest to the processor before you install modules in the other connectors. Memory Installation Guidelines Memory PCI Cards AGP Cards Drives Processor Airflow Shroud Processor System Board Power Supply Front Panel Drive Door Battery NOTE: DDR 333 memory operates at 320-MHz when used with an 800-MHz front-side bus processor. NOTE: Always install DDR memory modules in the order indicated on the system board. Installing Memory 1. Follow the instructions in "Before You Begin." 2. Open the computer cover. 3. Lay the computer on its side so that the system board is on the bottom of the inside of the computer. 4. If necessary, remove a memory module: a. Press out the securing clip at each end of the memory module connector. b. Grasp the module and pull up. If the module is difficult to remove, gently ease the module back and forth to remove it from the connector. 5. To insert a module, press out the securing clip at each end of the memory module connector. 6. Align the notch on the bottom of the module with the crossbar in the connector. 7. Insert the module straight down into the connector, ensuring that it fits into the vertical guides at each end of the connector. Press firmly on the ends of the module until it snaps into place. If you insert the module correctly, the securing clips snap into the cutouts at each end of the module. NOTICE: If you remove your original memory modules from the computer during a memory upgrade, keep them separate from any new modules that you may have, even if you purchased the new modules from Dell. You should install your original memory modules in pairs either in connectors DIMM1 and DIMM2 or connectors DIMM3 and DIMM4. If possible, do not pair an original memory module with a new memory module. Otherwise, your computer may not function at optimal performance. NOTE: Memory purchased from Dell is covered under your computer warranty. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in your Owner's Manual. NOTICE: To avoid breaking the memory module, do not press near the middle of the module. 8. Close the computer cover. 9. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and then turn them on. 10. Click the Start button, right-click My Computer, and then click Properties. 11. Click the General tab. 12. To verify that the memory is installed correctly, check the amount of memory (RAM) listed. PCI Cards Your Dell™ computer provides slots for up to four 32-bit, 33-MHz cards. For more information, see "Specifications." Installing a PCI Card 1. If you are replacing a card, remove the current driver for the card from the operating system. 2. Follow the instructions in "Before You Begin." 3. Open the computer cover. 4. Press the lever on the card retention arm and raise the retention arm. 5. If you are installing a new card, remove the filler bracket to create a card-slot opening. Then continue with step 7. 6. If you are replacing a card that is already installed in the computer, remove the card. If necessary, disconnect any cables connected to the card. Grasp the card by its top corners, and ease it out of its connector. 7. Prepare the card for installation. See the documentation that came with the card for information on configuring the card, making internal connections, or otherwise customizing it for your computer. NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network wall jack and then plug it into the computer. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in your Owner's Manual. NOTE: For optimum performance, install a PCI sound card only in PCI slot 3 or 4 and a modem card only in PCI slot 2, 3, or 4. 8. Place the card in the connector and press down firmly. Ensure that the card is fully seated in the slot. If the card is full-length, insert the end of the card into the card guide bracket as you lower the card toward its connector on the system board. Insert the card firmly into the card connector on the system board. 9. Before you lower the retention arm, ensure that: l The tops of all cards and filler brackets are flush with the alignment bar. l The notch in the top of the card or filler bracket fits around the alignment guide. 10. Press the retention arm into place, securing the card(s) in the computer. 11. Connect any cables that should be attached to the card. See the documentation for the card for information about the card's cable connections. 12. Close the computer cover. 13. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and then turn them on. 14. Install any drivers required for the card as described in the card documentation. CAUTION: Some network adapters automatically start the computer when they are connected to a network. To guard against electrical shock, be sure to unplug your computer from its electrical outlet before installing any cards. NOTICE: Do not route card cables over or behind the cards. Cables routed over the cards can prevent the computer cover from closing properly or cause damage to the equipment. NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network wall jack and then plug it into the computer. Removing a PCI Card 1. Follow the instructions in "Before You Begin." 2. Open the computer cover. 3. Press the lever on the card retention arm and raise the retention arm. 4. If necessary, disconnect any cables connected to the card. 5. Grasp the card by its top corners, and ease it out of its connector. 6. If you are removing the card permanently, install a filler bracket in the empty card-slot opening. If you need a filler bracket, contact Dell. 7. Lower the retention arm and press it into place, securing the card(s) in the computer. 8. Close the computer cover. 9. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and then turn them on. 10. Remove the card's driver from the operating system. AGP Cards Your Dell™ computer provides a connector for an AGP card. Removing an AGP Card 1. Follow the instructions in "Before You Begin." 2. Open the computer cover. 3. Press the lever on the card retention arm and raise the retention arm. 4. Pull the card up and out of the card clip. Installing an AGP Card 1. Follow the instructions in "Before You Begin." 2. Open the computer cover. NOTE: You must install filler brackets over empty card-slot openings to maintain FCC certification of the computer. The brackets also keep dust and dirt out of your computer. NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network wall jack and then plug it into the computer. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in your Owner's Manual.3. Press the lever on the card retention arm and raise the retention arm. 4. Gently press the card into the AGP connector until it clicks into place, ensuring that the tab fits into the notch on the front end of the card. 5. Lower the retention arm and press it into place, securing the card(s) in the computer. 6. Close the computer cover. 7. Connect the monitor cable to the card's video connector. 8. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. Drives Overview Your computer supports one floppy drive and a combination of up to four of the following: l Either two IDE hard drives or two Serial ATA hard drives l Two CD or DVD drives Your computer also supports this drive combination: l Two Serial ATA drives in either a RAID level 0 configuration or a RAID level 1 configuration l One IDE hard drive l Two CD or DVD drives NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network wall jack and then plug it into the computer. Hard Drive Removing a Hard Drive 1. Follow the instructions in "Before You Begin." 2. Open the computer cover. 3. Disconnect the power and hard-drive cables from the drive. 4. Press in on the tabs on each side of the drive and slide the drive up and out. Installing a Hard Drive 1. Unpack the replacement hard drive, and prepare it for installation. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in your Owner's Manual.2. Check the documentation for the drive to verify that it is configured for your computer. 3. Follow the instructions in "Before You Begin." 4. Open the computer cover. 5. If your replacement hard drive does not have the bracket rails attached, remove the rails from the old drive by removing the two screws that secure each rail to the drive. Attach the bracket rails to the new drive by aligning the screw holes on the drive with the screw holes on the bracket rails and then inserting and tightening all four screws (two screws on each rail). 6. Install the hard drive into the computer by gently sliding the drive into place until you hear it click securely. 7. Connect the power and hard-drive cables to the drive. 8. Check all connectors to be certain that they are properly cabled and firmly seated. 9. Close the computer cover. 10. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. See the documentation that came with the drive for instructions on installing any software required for drive operation. Floppy Drive Removing a Floppy Drive NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network wall jack and then plug it into the computer. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in your Owner's Manual.1. Follow the instructions in "Before You Begin." 2. Open the computer cover. 3. Disconnect the power and floppy-drive cables from the back of the floppy drive. 4. Press inward on the two tabs on the sides of the drive, slide the drive upward, and remove it from the floppy-drive bay. Installing a Floppy Drive 1. Follow the instructions in "Before You Begin." 2. Open the computer cover. 3. If you are replacing a drive and the new drive does not have the bracket rails attached, remove the rails from the old drive by removing the two screws that secure each rail to the drive. Attach the bracket to the new drive by aligning the screw holes on the drive with the screw holes on the bracket rails and then inserting and tightening all four screws (two screws on each rail). See the diagram. 4. Gently slide the drive into place until the tabs securely click into position. 5. Attach the power and floppy-drive cables to the floppy drive. 6. If you are installing a new floppy drive rather than replacing a drive, remove the front- panel inserts. From inside the drive bay, gently press on each side of the insert until it pops out. 7. Check all cable connections, and fold cables out of the way to provide airflow for the fan and cooling vents. 8. Close the computer cover. 9. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. See the documentation that came with the drive for instructions on installing any software required for drive operation. CD/DVD Drive Removing a CD/DVD Drive 1. Follow the instructions in "Before You Begin." 2. Open the computer cover. 3. Disconnect the power and CD/DVD drive cables from the back of the drive. 4. Press inward on the two tabs on the sides of the drive, and then slide the drive upward and remove it from the drive bay. Installing a CD/DVD Drive 1. Follow the instructions in "Before You Begin." 2. Open the computer cover. 3. If you are installing a new drive, unpack the drive and prepare it for installation. NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network wall jack and then plug it into the computer. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in your Owner's Manual. Check the documentation that accompanied the drive to verify that the drive is configured for your computer. If you are installing an IDE drive, configure the drive for the cable select setting. 4. Connect the new drive to the set of rails that are attached to the inside of the cover. If a set of rails is not attached inside the computer cover, contact Dell. 5. If you are installing a replacement drive and the new drive does not have the bracket rails attached, remove the rails from the old drive by removing the two screws that secure each rail to the drive. Attach the bracket to the new drive by aligning the screw holes on the drive with the screw holes on the bracket rails and then inserting and tightening all four screws (two screws on each rail). See the diagram. 6. Gently slide the drive into place until the tabs securely click into position. 7. Connect the power and CD/DVD drive cables to the drive. If you are adding a drive that has an audio cable, connect the audio cable to the audio connector on the audio card. 8. If you are installing a new CD/DVD drive rather than replacing a drive, remove the front-panel inserts. From inside the drive bay, gently press on each side of the insert until it pops out. 9. If you are installing a drive that has its own controller card, install the controller card in an expansion slot. See the documentation that accompanied the drive and controller card to verify that the configuration is correct for your computer. 10. Check all cable connections, and fold cables out of the way to provide airflow for the fan and cooling vents. 11. Close the computer cover. 12. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. See the documentation that came with the drive for instructions on installing any software required for drive operation. Processor Airflow Shroud NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network wall jack and then plug it into the computer. CAUTION: Before you perform this procedure, follow the safety instructions in your Owner's Manual.Removing the Processor Airflow Shroud 1. Follow the instructions in "Before You Begin." 2. Open the computer cover. 3. Press down and back on the indentations at the top corners of the shroud. The top anchor tabs disengage from the anchor slots. 4. Lift the airflow shroud out of the chassis. Installing the Processor Airflow Shroud 1. Follow the instructions in "Before You Begin." 2. Open the computer cover. 3. Insert the bottom anchor tabs into the anchor slots. 4. Align and insert the side anchor tabs into the anchor slots. 5. Press the indentations until the top anchor tabs on the shroud snap securely into place. 6. Close the computer cover. 7. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. Processor Installing the Processor 1. Follow the instructions in "Before You Begin." NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network wall jack and then plug it into the computer. CAUTION: Before you perform this procedure, follow the safety instructions in your Owner's Manual. NOTE: It is recommended that only a technically knowledgeable person perform this procedure. CAUTION: The processor can get very hot during normal operation. Ensure that the processor has had sufficient time to cool before you touch it.2. Open the computer cover. 3. Remove the processor airflow shroud. If you are replacing a processor, follow steps 4, 5, and 6 in "Removing the Processor." 4. If the release lever is not extended to the release position, move it to that position. 5. Align pin-1 (the imprinted corner) of the processor and pin-1 of the socket. 6. Carefully set the processor in the socket and press it down lightly to seat it. 7. Rotate the release lever back toward the system board until it snaps into place, securing the processor. 8. Install the heat sink: a. Insert the notched end of the heat sink onto the end of the retention base that is opposite the hinge. b. Lower the heat sink until it fits securely in the base. c. When the heat sink is secured, pivot the retention module clip back until the tab snaps into place to secure the heat sink. 9. If you installed a processor replacement kit from Dell, return the original heat sink assembly and processor to Dell in the same package in which your replacement kit was sent. 10. Replace the airflow shroud. 11. Close the computer cover. 12. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. Removing the Processor 1. Follow the instructions in "Before You Begin." 2. Open the computer cover. 3. Remove the processor airflow shroud. 4. Remove the processor heat sink: NOTICE: You must position the processor correctly in the socket to avoid permanent damage to the processor and the computer. NOTICE: Processor pins are delicate. To avoid damage, ensure that the processor aligns properly with the socket, and do not use excessive force when you install the processor. NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network wall jack and then plug it into the computer. NOTE: It is recommended that only a technically knowledgeable person perform this procedure. CAUTION: The processor can get very hot during normal operation. Ensure that the processor has had sufficient time to cool before you touch it.a. Remove the retention module clip by pressing in on the tab and lifting the retention module clip up. b. Pull the release lever out until the heat sink is released. c. Lift the heat sink away from the processor. 5. Pull the release lever straight up until the processor is released. 6. Remove the processor from the socket. If you are replacing the processor, leave the release lever extended in the release position so that the socket is ready for the new processor and go to "Installing the Processor." 7. Replace the airflow shroud. 8. Close the computer cover. 9. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. NOTICE: Lay the heat sink down with the thermal grease facing upward. NOTICE: If you are installing a processor upgrade kit from Dell, discard the original heat sink. If you are not installing a processor upgrade kit from Dell, reuse the original heat sink when you install your new processor. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend any of the pins when you remove the processor from the socket. Bending the pins can permanently damage the processor. NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network wall jack and then plug it into the computer. System Board Removing the System Board 1. Follow the instructions in "Before You Begin." 2. Open the computer cover. 3. Remove any components that restrict access to the system board. 4. Disconnect all cables from the system board. 5. Before you remove the existing system board assembly, visually compare the replacement system board to the existing system board to make sure that you have the correct part. 6. Remove the system board screw. 7. Pull up on the two tabs, slide the system board assembly toward the front of the computer, and then lift the assembly up and away. 8. Place the system board assembly that you just removed next to the replacement system board. Replacing the System Board 1. Transfer components from the existing system board to the replacement system board: a. Remove the memory modules and install them on the replacement board. b. Remove the heat-sink assembly and processor from the existing system board and transfer them to the replacement system board. 2. Configure the settings of the replacement system board. 3. Set the jumpers on the replacement system board so they are identical to the ones on the existing board. 4. Orient the replacement board by aligning the notches on the bottom of the board with the tabs on the computer. 5. Slide the system board assembly toward the back of the computer until the assembly clicks into position. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in your Owner's Manual. NOTICE: The system board and metal tray are connected and are removed as one piece. CAUTION: The processor package and heat-sink assembly can get hot. To avoid burns, ensure that the package and assembly have had sufficient time to cool before you touch them. NOTE: Some components and connectors on the replacement system board may be in different locations than the corresponding connectors on the existing system board. 6. Replace any components and cables that you removed from the system board. Reconnect all cables to their connectors at the back of the computer. 7. Close the computer cover. 8. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. Power Supply Removing the Power Supply 1. Follow the instructions in "Before You Begin." 2. Open the computer cover. 3. Remove the card and the card fan. 4. Disconnect the power supply cables and the card fan cable. 5. Remove the card fan guide: a. Pull up on the fan-guide release button. b. Slide the card fan guide to the right. c. Lift the card fan guide out of the four securing slots in the computer. 6. While pressing the power-supply release button, slide the power supply toward the back of the computer. NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network wall jack and then plug it into the computer. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in your Owner's Manual. NOTICE: Before disconnecting a device from the computer, wait 10 to 20 seconds after disconnecting the computer from its electrical outlet. Before removing a component from the system board, verify that the standby power light on the system board has turned off. To locate this light, see "System Board Components." 7. Lift the power supply away from the computer. 8. Slide the power supply cables out of the computer (through the hole). Replacing the Power Supply 1. Slide the power supply cables through the hole into the computer. 2. Insert the power-supply securing tabs into the power-supply securing slots on the computer, ensuring that each securing tab is connected to its slot on the computer. 3. Slide the power supply toward the front of the computer. 4. Install the card fan guide: a. Place the card fan guide into the four securing slots in the computer. b. Slide the card fan guide to the left until it locks into position. 5. Connect the power supply cables and the card fan cable. 6. Replace the card fan. 7. Install the card. 8. Close the computer cover and restart the computer. Front Panel Removing the Front Panel 1. Follow the instructions in "Before You Begin." 2. Open the computer cover. 3. Disconnect and remove all disk drives (see "Drives"). 4. Release the front panel by pressing each of the front-panel release tabs. There are seven release tabs. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in your Owner's Manual.5. Close the computer cover halfway and pull the front panel away from the computer. Replacing the Front Panel To replace the front panel, perform the removal procedure in reverse. Drive Door Removing the Drive Door 1. Open the drive door. 2. Unsnap the top bracket hinge and pull the top of the drive door outward, away from the computer. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in your Owner's Manual.3. Lift the bottom bracket hinge away from the computer. Replacing the Drive Door To prevent damage to your computer, the drive door is designed to "break away" from the computer if it is opened too far. If the drive door detaches from the computer without disassembling, perform the removal procedure in reverse. If the drive door is open and it is opened too far, instead of breaking away from the computer in one piece, the drive door may disassemble into several smaller pieces. If the drive door disassembles: 1. If necessary, reattach the door hinges to the door bracket. Ensure that the hinge tabs are away from the door bracket. 2. Attach the door bracket/door hinge assembly to the door, starting with the lower part of each door hinge. 3. Attach the drive door to the computer, starting with the bottom bracket hinge. Battery A coin-cell battery maintains computer configuration, date, and time information. The battery can last several years. If you have to repeatedly reset time and date information after turning on the computer, replace the battery. To replace the battery: 1. Record all the screens in system setup so that you can restore the correct settings in step 9. 2. Follow the instructions in"Before You Begin." 3. Open the computer cover. 4. Locate the battery socket. 5. Remove the battery by carefully prying it out of its socket with your fingers or with a blunt, nonconducting object such as a plastic screwdriver. 6. Insert the new battery into the socket with the side labeled "+" facing up, and snap the battery into place. 7. Close the computer cover. CAUTION: Before you begin this procedure, follow the safety instructions in your Owner's Manual. CAUTION: A new battery can explode if it is incorrectly installed. Replace the battery only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Discard used batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions. NOTICE: If you pry the battery out of its socket with a blunt object, be careful not to touch the system board with the object. Ensure that the object is inserted between the battery and the socket before you attempt to pry out the battery. Otherwise, you may damage the system board by prying off the socket or by breaking circuit traces on the system board. 8. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. 9. Enter system setup and restore the settings you recorded in step 1. 10. Properly dispose of the old battery. Back to Contents Page NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network wall jack and then plug it into the computer. Back to Contents Page Technical Specifications Dell™ Dimension™ XPS Service Manual Processor Memory Computer Information Video Audio Expansion Bus Drives Connectors Controls and Lights  Power Physical Environmental Processor Processor type Intel® Pentium® 4 that runs at 2.4, 2.6, 2.8, 3.0, 3.2, and 3.4 GHz Level 1 (L1) cache 8 KB Level 2 (L2) cache 512-KB or 1-MB pipelined-burst, eight-way set associative, write-back SRAM Level 3 (L3) cache 2 MB NOTE: L3 cache is available only with the Intel Pentium 4 processor Extreme Edition 3.20 GHz supporting Hyper-Threading technology. Memory Type 400-MHz DDR SDRAM Memory connectors four Memory capacities 128 MB, 256 MB, 512 MB, or 1 GB non–ECC Minimum memory 256 MB Maximum memory 4 GB BIOS address F0000h Computer Information Chip set Intel 875P DMA channels eight Interrupt levels 24 BIOS chip 4-Mb NIC integrated PCI network interface System clock 800-MHz data rate Video Type AGP 8X Audio Type Sound Blaster Audigy 2 sound card Connectors five connectors for line-in, line-out, microphone, surround, and center/Low Frequency Effects (LFE) channel Expansion Bus Bus type PCI and AGP Bus speed PCI: 33-MHz AGP: 133-MHz AGP: connector one connector size 172 pins connector data width (maximum) 32 bitsbus protocols 8x/4x/2x modes at 1.5 V PCI: connector four connector size 120 pins connector data width (maximum) 32 bits Drives Externally accessible one 3.5-inch drive bay three 5.25-inch drive bays Available devices ATA-100 Ultra DMA hard drive, serial ATA drive, CD drive, DVD drive, RAID Internally accessible three 3.5-inch drive bays Connectors External connectors: Serial two 9-pin connectors; 16550C-compatible Parallel 25-hole connector (bidirectional) Network adapter 10/100/1000 Ethernet connector PS/2 (keyboard and mouse) 6-pin mini-DIN USB two front-panel and six back-panel USB 2.0– compliant connectors IEEE 1394 one front-panel connector Audio one front-panel connector for microphone; one frontpanel connector for headphones System board connectors: Primary IDE drive 40-pin connector Secondary IDE drive 40-pin connector Floppy drive 34-pin connector Fans (3) 3-pin connector I/O Panel 34-pin connector Serial ATA (2) 7-pin connector Sound Blaster Audigy 2 sound card connectors:  Audio five connectors for line-in, line-out, microphone, surround, and center/Low Frequency Effects (LFE) channel IEEE 1394 one front-panel 6-pin serial connector; one backpanel 6-pin serial connector Controls and Lights  Power control push button Power light green light on power button—blinking green in sleep state; solid green for power-on state Hard-drive access light green Link integrity light (on integrated network adapter) green light for 10-Mb operation; orange light for 100- Mb operation; yellow light for 1000-Mbps (or 1-Gbps) operation Activity light (on integrated network adapter) yellow blinking light Diagnostic lights four lights on the back panel Power DC power supply: Wattage 460 W Heat dissipation 1000 BTU/hr Voltage fixed-voltage power supply—110 V at 50/60 Hz manual selection and auto-sensing power supplies— 90 to 135 V at 50/60 Hz; 180 to 265 V at 50/60 Hz;  100 V at 50/60 Hz for Japanese computers Backup battery 3-V CR2032 lithium coin cell Physical Height 49.1 cm (19.3 inches)Back to Contents Page Width 22.2 cm (8.7 inches) Depth 48.8 cm (19.2 inches) Weight 19 kg (42 lbs) Environmental Temperature: Operating 10° to 35°C (50° to 95°F) NOTE: At 35°C (95°F), the maximum operating  altitude is 914 m (3000 ft). Storage –40° to 65°C (–40° to 149°F) Relative humidity 20% to 80% (noncondensing) Maximum vibration: Operating 0.25 G at 3 to 200 Hz at 0.5 octave/min Storage 0.5 G at 3 to 200 Hz at 1 octave/min Maximum shock: Operating bottom half-sine pulse with a change in velocity of 20 inches/sec (50.8 cm/sec) Storage nonoperating (half-sine pulse) 105 G, 2 ms nonoperating (faired-square wave) 27 G with a velocity change of 508 cm/sec (200 inches/sec) Altitude: Operating –15.2 to 3048 m (–50 to 10,000 ft) Storage –15.2 to 10,668 m (–50 to 35,000 ft)Back to Contents Page System Setup Dell™ Dimension™ XPS Service Manual Overview Entering System Setup Clearing Forgotten Passwords Clearing CMOS Settings Overview Use system setup as follows: l To change the system configuration information after you add, change, or remove any hardware in your computer l To set or change a user-selectable option such as the user password l To read the current amount of memory or set the type of hard drive installed Before you use system setup, you must know the kind of floppy drive(s) and hard drive(s) installed in your computer. It is recommended that you write down the system setup screen information for future reference. Entering System Setup Viewing Settings 1. Turn on (or restart) your computer. 2. When the blue DELL™ logo appears, press  immediately.  If you wait too long and the operating system logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Microsoft® Windows® desktop. Then shut down your computer and try again. System Setup Screens System setup screens display the current configuration information for your computer. Information on the screen is divided into five areas: l Title — The box at the top of all screens that lists the computer name. l Computer data — Two boxes below the title box that display your computer processor, L2 cache, Service Tag, and the version number of the BIOS. l Options — A scrollable box listing options that define the configuration of your computer, including installed hardware, power conservation, and security features. Fields to the right of the option titles contain settings or values. When appears to the right of an option title, press to access a pop-up menu of additional options. l Help — A feature that gives you information on the option that is selected (highlighted) when you press . l Key functions — A line of boxes across the bottom of all screens that lists keys and their functions within system setup. NOTICE: Unless you are an expert computer user, do not change the settings for this program. Certain changes can make your computer work incorrectly. Keys Action or down arrow Moves to the next field. , , or up arrow Moves to the previous field. System Setup Options back arrow or forward arrow Cycles through the options in a field. In many fields, you can also type the appropriate value. or Scrolls through help information. Enters the selected field's pop-up options menu. spacebar, <=>, or <-> In the selected field's pop-up options menu, cycles through the options in a field. Exits system setup without restarting the computer and returns the computer to the boot routine. Exits system setup and restarts the computer, implementing any changes you have made. Resets the selected option to the default setting. Restores all system settings to the default configuration. NOTE: Depending on your computer and installed devices, the items listed in this section may or may not appear. Drive Configuration Diskette Drive A Identifies the floppy drive attached to the DSKT connector on the system board. With the standard cabling configuration, Diskette Drive A (the boot floppy drive) is the 3.5-inch floppy drive installed in the top externally accessible drive bay. The two options are 3.5 Inch, 1.44 MB and Not Installed. Tape drives are not reflected in the Diskette Drive A option. For example, if a single floppy drive and a tape drive are attached to the floppy drive interface cable, set Diskette Drive A to 3.5 Inch, 1.44 MB. SATA Primary Drive Identifies the serial ATA hard drive attached to the SATA1 connector on the system board. SATA Secondary Drive Identifies the serial ATA hard drive attached to the SATA2 connector on the system board (not available on the small form-factor computer). Primary Drive 0 Identifies the IDE hard drive attached to the IDE1 connector on the system board. Primary Drive 1 Identifies the IDE device attached to the IDE2 connector on the system board. Secondary Drive 0 Identifies the device that is cabled with the drive on the IDE1 data cable. Secondary Drive 1 Identifies the device that is cabled with the device on the IDE2 data cable. IDE Drive UDMA Sets the mode for all installed hard drives. NOTE: You must have an IDE device connected to the primary IDE interface if you have an IDE device connected to the secondary IDE interface. Hard-Disk Drive Sequence If you insert a boot device and restart, this option appears in the system setup menu. System BIOS boot device USB Device To boot from a USB memory device, select the USB device and move it so it becomes the first device in the list. Boot Sequence Normal (This option is available only for the current boot process.) The computer attempts to boot from the sequence of devices specified in system setup. Diskette Drive The computer attempts to boot from the floppy drive. If the floppy disk in the drive is not bootable, or if no floppy disk is in the drive, the computer generates an error message. Hard Drive The computer attempts to boot from the primary hard drive. If no operating system is on the drive, the computer generates an error message. CD Drive The computer attempts to boot from the CD drive. If no CD is in the drive, or if no operating system is on the CD, the computer generates an error message. PXE (This option is available only for the future boot process.) As the computer boots, it prompts the user to press . Pressing this key combination causes a menu to display that allows you to select a method for booting from a network server. If a boot routine is not available from the network server, the computer attempts to boot from the next device in the boot sequence list. USB Flash Device Insert the memory device into a USB port and restart the computer. When F12 = Boot Menu appears in the upper-right corner of the screen, press . The BIOS detects the device and adds the USB flash option to the boot menu. NOTE: To boot to a USB device, the device must be bootable. To ensure that your device is bootable, check the device documentation. Memory Information Indicates amount of installed memory, computer memory speed, amount of video memory, size of the display cache, and channel mode (dual or single). Installed System Memory Displays the amount of installed system memory. System Memory Speed Displays the speed of your system memory.System Memory Channel Mode Displays the mode of your system memory. AGP Aperture Displays the amount of aperture memory. The default setting is 128 MB. CPU Information  CPU Speed The processor speed at which the computer boots. Press the left- or right-arrow key to toggle the CPU Speed option between the resident processor's rated speed (the default speed) and a lower-compatibility speed. A change to this option takes effect immediately and no restart is necessary. To toggle between the rated processor speed and the compatibility speed while the computer is running in real mode, press <\>. (For keyboards that do not use American English, press <#>.) Bus Speed The speed of the processor's system bus. Processor ID The manufacturer's identification code(s) for the installed processor. Clock Speed The core speed at which the processor(s) can operate. Cache Size The size of the processor's L2 cache. HyperThreading The setting that allows you to enables or disable Hyper-Threading technology for operating systems that support Hyper-Threading. The default setting is Disabled. NOTE: If your computer has a processor capable of supporting Hyper-Threading, the Hyper-Threading option is the first selection in the list. Integrated Devices (Legacy Select Options) Configures the following devices integrated with the system board: Network Interface Controller The settings are On (default), Off, or On w/ PXE. Mouse Port The settings are On or Off. USB Emulation The settings are On (default) and Off. USB Controller The settings are On (default) or Off. Serial Port 1 and Serial Port 2 The settings are Off and Auto (default). (Serial Port 2 appears as an option if you have a serial port card installed.) Auto automatically configures a connector to a particular designation (COM1 or COM3 for Serial Port 1; COM2 or COM4 for Serial Port 2). If you set a serial connector to Auto and then add a card that is also set to Auto, the computer automatically remaps the integrated port to the next available connector designation that shares the same IRQ setting as follows: l COM1 (I/O address 3F8h), which shares IRQ4 with COM3, is remapped to COM3 (I/O address 3E8h). l COM2 (I/O address 2F8h), which shares IRQ3 with COM4, is remapped to COM4 (I/O address 2E8h). NOTE: When two COM connectors share an IRQ setting, you can use either connector as necessary, but you may not be able to use both connectors at the same time. Parallel Port The settings are Mode, I/O Address, and DMA Channel: l Mode settings are PS/2 (default), EPP, ECP, AT, or Off. Set the Mode option according to the type of device connected to the parallel connector. To determine the correct mode to use, see the documentation that came with the device. l I/O Address settings are 378h (default), 278h, or 3BCh. The settings are not available when Mode is set to Off. NOTE: You cannot set the parallel connector to 3BCh if Mode is set to EPP. l DMA Channel appears only when Mode is set to ECP. Settings are DMA 1, DMA 3, or Off. Diskette Interface The settings are Auto (default), Read Only, and Off. l Auto turns off the integrated floppy drive controller when necessary to accommodate a controller card installed in an expansion slot. l Read Only prevents the computer's integrated floppy drive controller from writing to floppy drives and also activates the Auto setting. PC Speaker The settings are On (default) and Off. Primary Video Controller The settings are Auto (default) and Onboard. l Auto (default) — If only an AGP card is installed, the computer uses the AGP card; if only a PCI card is installed, the computer uses the PCI card; if both AGP and PCI cards are installed, the computer uses both cards. l Onboard — The computer uses the AGP card. Power Management Suspend Mode The options are S1 or S3. AC Power Recovery Determines what happens when AC power is restored to the computer. l Off (default) — The computer remains off when AC power is restored. l On — The computer starts when AC power is restored. l Last — The computer returns to the AC power state existing at the time that AC power was lost. Low Power Mode The settings are Enabled and Disabled.Boot Sequence This feature allows you to change the boot sequence for devices. Option Settings l Normal — (Available only for the current boot process) The computer attempts to boot from the sequence of devices specified in system setup. l Diskette Drive — The computer attempts to boot from the floppy drive. If the floppy disk in the drive is not bootable, or if no floppy disk is in the drive, the computer generates an error message. l Hard Drive — The computer attempts to boot from the primary hard drive. If no operating system is on the drive, the computer generates an error message. System Security Display system security options when you press . Keyboard NumLock The settings are On and Off (these settings do not apply to 84-key keyboards). On (default) Activates the rightmost bank of keys so that they provide the mathematical and numeric functions shown at the top of each key. Off Activates the rightmost bank of keys so that they provide the cursor-control functions shown by the label on the bottom of each key. Report Keyboard Errors Displays keyboard errors when set to Report. The default setting is Report. Auto Power On Sets time and days of week to automatically turn on the computer. Choices are every day or every Monday through Friday. Time is kept in a 24-hour format (hours:minutes). Change the start-up time by pressing the right- or left-arrow key to increase or decrease the numbers, or type numbers in both the date and time fields. The default setting is Disabled. This feature does not work if you turn off your computer using a power strip or surge protector. Fastboot On (default) Your computer starts more quickly, skipping certain configurations and tests. Off Your computer does not skip certain configurations and tests during the boot process. OS Install mode Turns the OS Install mode on and off. The default setting is Off. IDE Hard Drive Acoustics Mode The acoustics mode field may contain the following options: Quiet (default) The hard drive operates in its quietest setting. Performance The hard drive operates at its maximum speed. NOTE: Switching to performance mode may cause the drive to be noisier, but its performance is not affected. Bypass Your computer does not test or change the current acoustics mode setting. Suggested The hard drive operates at the level suggested by the hard drive manufacturer. NOTE: Changing the acoustics setting does not alter your hard drive image. System Event Log Displays the system event log when you press . Asset Tag Displays the customer-programmable asset tag number for the computer if an asset tag number is assigned.l CD Drive — The computer attempts to boot from the CD drive. If no CD is in the drive, or if the CD has no operating system, the computer generates an error message. l PXE — (Available only for the future boot process) As the computer boots, it prompts the user to press . Pressing this key combination causes a menu to display that allows you to select a method for booting from a network server. If a boot routine is not available from the network server, the system attempts to boot from the next device in the boot sequence list. l USB Flash Device — Insert the memory device into a USB port and restart the computer. When F12 = Boot Menu appears in the upper-right corner of the screen, press . The BIOS detects the device and adds the USB flash option to the boot menu. Changing Boot Sequence for the Current Boot You can use this feature, for example, to tell the computer to boot from the CD drive so that you can run the Dell Diagnostics on the Dell Dimension Resource CD, but you must set the computer to boot from the hard drive when the diagnostic tests are complete. 1. Turn on (or restart) your computer. 2. When F2 = Setup, F12 = Boot Menu appears in the upper-right corner of the screen, press . If you wait too long and the operating system logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Microsoft Windows desktop. Then shut down your computer and try again. The Boot Device Menu appears, listing all available boot devices. Each device has a number next to it. 3. At the bottom of the menu, enter the number of the device that is to be used for the current boot only. Changing Boot Sequence for Future Boots 1. Enter system setup. 2. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Boot Sequence menu option and press to access the pop-up menu. 3. Press the up- and down-arrow keys to move through the list of devices. 4. Press the spacebar to enable or disable a device (enabled devices have a checkmark). 5. Press plus (+) or minus (–) to move a selected device up or down the list. Clearing Forgotten Passwords 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Locate the 3-pin password jumper (PASS) on the system board, and attach the jumper plug to pins 2 and 3 to clear the password. The white arrow indicator indicates pin1. 3. Close the computer cover. 4. Connect your computer and monitor to electrical outlets, and turn them on. 5. After the Microsoft® Windows® desktop appears on your computer, shut down the computer. 6. Turn off the monitor and disconnect it from the electrical outlet. 7. Disconnect the computer power cable from the electrical outlet, and press the power button to ground the system board. 8. Open the computer cover. 9. Locate the 3-pin password jumper on the system board, attach the jumper to pins 1 and 2 to reenable the password feature. 10. Replace the computer cover. NOTE: To boot to a USB device, the device must be bootable. To make sure your device is bootable, check the device documentation. NOTE: Write down your current boot sequence in case you want to restore it. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in your Owner's Manual. NOTE: When you receive your computer, the jumper plug is attached to pins 1 and 2. 11. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. Clearing CMOS Settings 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Reset the current CMOS settings: a. Locate the CMOS jumper (CMOS) on the system board. b. Remove the jumper plug from its pins. c. Place the password jumper plug on the RTC_RDY1 pins and wait approximately 5 seconds. d. Remove the jumper plug RTC_RDY1 from both jumper pins and place it on one pin for safe-keeping. 3. Close the computer cover. 4. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. Back to Contents Page NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network wall jack and then plug it into the computer. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in your Owner's Manual. NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network wall jack and then plug it into the computer. Back to Contents Page Technical Overview Dell™ Dimension™ XPS Service Manual Inside View of Your Computer System Board Components Power Supply DC Connector Pin Assignments Inside View of Your Computer System Board ComponentsPower Supply DC Connector Pin Assignments DC Power Connector P1 Pin Number Signal name 18-AWG Wire 1 +5 VDC RedDC Power Connector P2 DC Power Connector P3 2 COM Black 3 +5 VDC Red 4 COM Black 5 PWR GOOD White 6 +5 VSB Purple 7 +12 VA Yellow 8 -12 V Blue 9 COM Black 10 COM Black 11 +3.3 VDC Blue and white 12 +3.3 VDC Blue and white 13 PS-ON Gray 14 COM Black 15 COM Black 16 COM Black 17 N/C 18 +5 VDC Red 19 N/C 20 +5 VDC Red 21 TSFC (1) Brown 22 +5 VDC Red 23 +3.3 VDC Blue and white 24 COM Black Pin Number Signal Name 18-AWG Wire 1 +3.3 VDC Blue and white 2 +3.3 VDC Blue and white 3 +3.3 VDC Blue and white 4 +3.3 VDC Blue and white 5 COM Black 6 COM Black 7 N/C 8 COM Black 9 +12 VA Yellow 10 COM Black 11 N/C 12 +12 VB Orange 13 +12 VB Orange 14 +12 VB Orange 15 COM Black 16 N/C 17 COM Black 18 COM Black 19 TSFC (2) Pink 20 +5 VDC RedDC Power Connector P4 Back to Contents Page Pin Number Signal Name 18-AWG Wire 1 COM Black 2 +12 VA Yellow 3 +12 VA Yellow 4 COM Black 5 COM Black 6 +5 VDC Red 7 +5 VDC Red 8 N/C 9 +12 VB Orange 10 COM Black 11 COM Black 12 +5 VDC Red Pin Number Signal Name 18-AWG Wire 1 N/C 2 COM Black 3 COM Black 4 +3.3 VDC Orange 5 +5 VDC Red 6 +12 VDC YellowBack to Contents Page Dell™ Dimension™ XPS Service Manual For a complete list of abbreviations and acronyms, see the Dell Dimension Help file. Information in this document is subject to change without notice. © 2003 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. Reproduction in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden. Trademarks used in this text: Dell, the DELL logo, and Dimension are trademarks of Dell Inc.; Intel, Pentium, and Celeron are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation; Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own. December 2003     Rev. A01 Back to Contents Page NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your computer. NOTICE: A NOTICE indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death. www.dell.com | support.dell.com Dell™ Dimension™ XPS Gen 3 connecteur pour casque connecteur de microphone connecteurs USB 2.0 (2) connecteur IEEE 1394 logements de carte PCI (4), de carte PCI Express x1 (1), de carte PCI Express x16 (1) port série port parallèle voyants de diagnostic connecteur de clavier connecteurs USB 2.0 (6) connecteur vidéo VGA loquet d'ouverture du capot ventilateurs (2) connecteur de carte réseau fente pour câble de sécurité ventilateurs (2) connecteurs de carte son anneau pour cadenas connecteur modem connecteur d'alimentation connecteur vidéo DVI connecteur de souris connecteur de sortie Téléviseur Modèle WHLwww.dell.com | support.dell.com Remarques, avis et précautions REMARQUE : Une REMARQUE indique une information importante qui peut vous aider à mieux utiliser votre ordinateur. AVIS : Un AVIS vous avertit d’un risque de dommage matériel ou de perte de données et vous indique comment éviter le problème. PRÉCAUTION : Une PRÉCAUTION indique un risque potentiel de dommage matériel ou corporel, ou même de mort. Abréviations et acronymes Pour une liste complète des abréviations et des acronymes, reportez-vous au fichier d'aide de Dell Dimension. Pour accéder au fichier d'aide, reportez-vous à la page 11. Si vous avez acheté un ordinateur Dell™ Série n, les références du présent document concernant les systèmes d'application Microsoft® Windows® ne sont pas applicables. ____________________ Les informations de ce document sont sujettes à modifications sans préavis. © 2004 Dell Inc. Tous droits réservés. La reproduction de ce document, de quelque manière que ce soit, sans l'autorisation écrite de Dell Inc. est strictement interdite. Marques utilisées dans ce document : Dell, le logo DELL, Inspiron, Dell Precision, Dimension, OptiPlex, Latitude, PowerEdge, PowerVault, PowerApp, DellNet, PowerConnect et Axim sont des marques de Dell Inc. ; Intel et Pentium sont des marques déposées de Intel Corporation ; Microsoft, Windows et Outlook sont des marques déposées de Microsoft Corporation. D'autres marques et noms commerciaux peuvent être utilisés dans ce document pour faire référence aux entités se réclamant de ces marques et de ces noms ou à leurs produits. Dell Inc. rejette tout intérêt propriétaire dans les marques et les noms commerciaux autres que les siens. Modèle WHL Octobre 2004 Réf. H3177 Rév. A01Table des matières 3 Table des matières Recherche d'informations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 1 Installation et utilisation de votre ordinateur Ouverture de la porte du lecteur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Changement de la couleur du rétroéclairage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Connexion de deux moniteurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Connexion de deux moniteurs dotés de connecteurs VGA. . . . . . . . 15 Connexion d'un moniteur doté d'un connecteur VGA et d'un moniteur doté d'un connecteur DVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Connexion d'un téléviseur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Modification des paramètres d'affichage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 À propos des lecteurs ATA série . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 À propos de votre configuration RAID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 RAID niveau 0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 RAID niveau 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Configuration de votre ordinateur en mode RAID . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Création d'une configuration RAID à l'aide de l'utilitaire Intel(R) Option ROM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Création d'une configuration RAID à l'aide de l'accélérateur d'application Intel(R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Transfert d'informations vers un nouvel ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Copie de CD et de DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Comment copier un CD ou DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Utilisation de CD-R, CD-RW, DVD+R et DVD+RW vierges . . . . . . . . 28 Conseils pratiques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Assistant Installation réseau . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 2 Optimisation des performances Hyper-Threading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Table des matières Surcadençage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Cartes PCI Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 3 Résolution de problèmes Astuces de dépannage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Problèmes de batterie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Problèmes de lecteurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Problèmes de lecteur de CD et de DVD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Problèmes d'unité de disque dur. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Problèmes de messagerie électronique, de modem et d'Internet. . . . . . . 35 Messages d'erreur. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Problèmes du périphérique IEEE 1394. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Problèmes de clavier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Problèmes de blocages et logiciels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 L'ordinateur ne démarre pas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 L'ordinateur ne répond plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Un programme ne répond plus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Un programme se plante sans cesse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Un programme est conçu pour une version antérieure du système d'exploitation Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Un écran bleu uni apparaît. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Autres problèmes logiciels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Problèmes de mémoire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Problèmes liés à la souris . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Problèmes de réseau . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Problèmes d'alimentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Problèmes d'imprimante . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Problèmes de scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Problèmes de son et de haut-parleurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Les haut-parleurs n'émettent aucun son . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Aucun son émis par les écouteurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Table des matières 5 Problèmes vidéo et moniteur. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Si l'écran est noir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Si l'écran est difficile à lire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 4 Dépannage avancé Voyants de diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Dell Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Quand utiliser Dell Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Pilotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Qu'est-ce qu'un pilote ? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Identification des pilotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Réinstallation des pilotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Utilisation de la fonction Restauration du système de Microsoft® Windows® XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Création d'un point de restauration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Restauration de l'ordinateur à un état antérieur. . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Annulation de la dernière restauration du système . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Résolution des incompatibilités logicielles et matérielles. . . . . . . . . . 59 Réinstallation de Microsoft® Windows® XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Avant de commencer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Réinstallation de Windows XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 5 Retrait et installation de pièces Avant de commencer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Outils recommandés . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Mise hors tension de l'ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Vues avant et arrière de l'ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Vue avant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Vue avant (portes ouvertes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Vue arrière . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Ouverture du capot de l'ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Vue interne de votre ordinateur. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 706 Table des matières Composants de la carte système . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Mémoire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Installation de mémoire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Suppression de mémoire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Cartes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Cartes PCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Cartes PCI Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Lecteurs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Consignes générales d'installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Connexion des câbles de lecteurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Disque dur. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Retrait d'un disque dur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Installation d'un disque dur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Ajout d'un second disque dur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Lecteur de disquette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Retrait d'un lecteur de disquette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Installation d'un lecteur de disquette. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Lecteur de CD/DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Retrait d'un lecteur de CD/DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Installation d'un lecteur de CD/DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Carénage de ventilation du processeur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Retrait du carénage de ventilation du processeur. . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Installation du carénage de ventilation du processeur . . . . . . . . . 99 Processeur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Retrait du processeur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Installation du processeur. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Panneau avant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Retrait du panneau avant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Remplacement du panneau avant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Porte des lecteurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Retrait de la porte des lecteurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Remise en place de la porte des lecteurs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Pile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Remplacement de la pile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Table des matières 7 Fermeture du capot de l'ordinateur. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 6 Annexe Caractéristiques. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Configuration du système . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Présentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Accès au programme de configuration du système . . . . . . . . . . 116 Options de configuration du système . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Séquence d'amorçage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Effacement des mots de passe oubliés . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Effacement des paramètres CMOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Politique de support technique de Dell (États-Unis uniquement) . . . . . . 123 Définition des logiciels et périphériques installés par Dell . . . . . . . 123 Définition des logiciels et périphériques de sociétés tierces. . . . . . 124 Contacter Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1418 Table des matièresRecherche d'informations 9 Recherche d'informations Que recherchez-vous ? Cherchez ici • Comment accéder aux didacticiels et autres informations de procédure • Comment obtenir une copie de ma facture • Comment étendre ma garantie • Comment accéder au support Dell sur mon bureau Microsoft® Windows® (États-Unis uniquement) • Suppléments de documentation, outils supplémentaires, informations sur la résolution des problèmes et liens vers des ressources de support en ligne Dell Solution Center Sur votre bureau Windows • Un programme de diagnostic pour mon ordinateur • Pilotes pour mon ordinateur • La documentation de mon ordinateur • Documentation concernant mon appareil CD ResourceCD La documentation et les pilotes sont déjà installés sur votre ordinateur. Vous pouvez utiliser ce CD pour réinstaller les pilotes (reportez-vous à la page 56), exécuter Dell Diagnostics (reportez-vous à la page 52) ou accéder à la documentation. Des fichiers lisez-moi peuvent être inclus sur votre CD ; ces fichiers fournissent des informations sur les modifications techniques de dernière minute apportées à votre système ou des informations de référence destinées aux techniciens ou aux utilisateurs expérimentés.10 Recherche d'informations www.dell.com | support.dell.com • Informations supplémentaires sur l'installation de mon ordinateur • Comment identifier et résoudre des problèmes • Comment retirer et installer des pièces • Caractéristiques techniques • Comment contacter Dell Manuel du propriétaire de Dimension REMARQUE : Ce document est disponible au format PDF à l'adresse support.dell.com. • Informations sur les garanties • Consignes de sécurité • Informations sur les réglementations • Informations relatives à l'ergonomie • Contrat de licence utilisateur final Guide d’information sur le produit Dell™ • Comment configurer mon ordinateur Schéma de configuration Que recherchez-vous ? Cherchez iciRecherche d'informations 11 • Conseils d'utilisation de Microsoft® Windows® • Comment lire des CD et DVD • Comment utiliser les modes Veille et Mise en veille prolongée • Comment changer la résolution d'affichage • Comment nettoyer l'ordinateur Fichier d'aide de Dell Dimension 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Aide et support. 2 Cliquez sur Guides d'utilisation du système, puis sur Guides d'utilisation. 3 Cliquez sur Aide de Dell Dimension. • Numéro de service et code de service express • Étiquette de licence Microsoft Windows Numéro de service et licence Microsoft Windows Ces étiquettes sont collées sur votre ordinateur. •Utilisez le numéro de service pour identifier l'ordinateur lorsque vous visitez le site support.dell.com ou contactez le support technique. • Entrez le code de service express pour orienter votre appel lorsque vous contactez le service de support technique. Le code de service express n'est pas disponible dans certains pays. • Pilotes les plus récents pour mon ordinateur • Réponses aux questions concernant le service et le support technique • Discussions en ligne avec le support technique et d'autres utilisateurs • Documentation sur mon ordinateur Site Web de support de Dell — support.dell.com REMARQUE : Sélectionnez votre région pour afficher le site de support approprié. Le site Web de support technique de Dell fournit plusieurs outils en ligne, notamment : • Solutions — Conseils et astuces de dépannage, articles de techniciens et cours en ligne • Communauté — Discussion en ligne avec d'autres clients Dell • Mises à niveau — Informations sur les mises à niveau des composants, comme la mémoire, le disque dur et le système d'exploitation • Service clientèle — Contacts, commandes, garanties et informations de réparation • Téléchargements — Mises à jour de pilotes, de correctifs et de logiciels • Références — Documentation de l'ordinateur, caractéristiques des produits et documents techniques Que recherchez-vous ? Cherchez ici12 Recherche d'informations www.dell.com | support.dell.com • Comment utiliser Windows XP • Documentation sur mon ordinateur • Documentation pour les périphériques (un modem, par exemple) Centre d'aide et de support de Windows 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Aide et support. 2Tapez un mot ou une expression qui décrit votre problème, puis cliquez sur l'icône en forme de flèche. 3 Cliquez sur la rubrique qui décrit votre problème. 4 Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent. • Comment réinstaller mon système d'exploitation CD Système d'exploitation Le système d'exploitation est déjà installé sur votre ordinateur. Pour réinstaller le système d'exploitation, utilisez le CD Système d'exploitation. Reportez-vous à la section «Réinstallation de Microsoft® Windows® XP» à la page 60. Une fois le système d'exploitation réinstallé, utilisez le CD ResourceCD pour réinstaller les pilotes des périphériques accompagnant votre ordinateur. REMARQUE : La couleur de votre CD dépend du système d'exploitation que vous avez commandé. Que recherchez-vous ? Cherchez iciInstallation et utilisation de votre ordinateur 13 Installation et utilisation de votre ordinateur Ouverture de la porte du lecteur Changement de la couleur du rétroéclairage Utilisez cette fonctionnalité exclusive des ordinateurs Dell™ Dimension™ XPS Gen 3 pour changer la couleur du rétroéclairage du nom Dell et autour du porte-nom situé à l'avant de votre ordinateur, ou bien pour éteindre complètement le rétroéclairage. 14 Installation et utilisation de votre ordinateur www.dell.com | support.dell.com Les couleurs disponibles sont les suivantes : • Rubis • Émeraude • Saphir (couleur par défaut) • Ambre • Améthyste • Topaze • Diamant PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d’information sur le produit. REMARQUE : Le rétroéclairage n'est en aucun cas un outil de diagnostic. 1 Suivez les procédures indiquées dans la section «Avant de commencer» à la page 63. 2 Mettez votre ordinateur sous tension (ou redémarrez-le). 3 Accédez au programme de configuration du système (reportez-vous à la page 116). 4 Faites défiler les options de couleurs à l'aide des touches flèche bas et flèche haut, puis sélectionnez Système et appuyez sur . porte-nom rétroéclairageInstallation et utilisation de votre ordinateur 15 5 Cliquez sur Couleur de la DEL avant et appuyez sur . 6 Utilisez les touches flèche gauche et droite pour faire défiler les options de couleur. La couleur du rétroéclairage change au fur et à mesure que vous faites défiler les options. 7 Sélectionnez une couleur et appuyez sur . 8 Appuyez sur <Échap>, puis sélectionnez Enregistrer et quitter pour enregistrer le nouveau paramètre de couleur du rétroéclairage. Connexion de deux moniteurs PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d’information sur le produit. REMARQUE : Pour connecter deux moniteurs dotés de connecteurs VGA, vous devez utiliser l'adaptateur DVI optionnel. Si vous devez connecter deux moniteurs plats, au moins un des deux doit être équipé d'un connecteur VGA. Si vous voulez connecter un téléviseur, vous ne pouvez connecter qu'un seul moniteur (VGA ou DVI) en plus du téléviseur. REMARQUE : Reportez-vous à la documentation de votre téléviseur pour le configurer et le connecter correctement. Si la carte graphique que vous avez achetée prend en charge deux moniteurs, suivez les instructions ci-après pour connecter et activer vos moniteurs. Ces instructions vous indiquent comment connecter deux moniteurs (dotés tous deux d'un connecteur VGA), un moniteur doté d'un connecteur VGA et un moniteur doté d'un connecteur DVI, ou un téléviseur. Connexion de deux moniteurs dotés de connecteurs VGA 1 Suivez les procédures indiquées dans la section «Avant de commencer» à la page 63. REMARQUE : Si votre ordinateur est équipé d'un connecteur vidéo intégré, ne connectez aucun des moniteurs à ce connecteur. Si le connecteur vidéo intégré est recouvert d'un capuchon, ne retirez pas le capuchon pour connecter le moniteur ou celui-ci ne fonctionnera pas. 2 Connectez l'un des moniteurs au connecteur VGA (bleu) situé à l'arrière de l'ordinateur. 3 Connectez l'autre moniteur à l'adaptateur DVI optionnel et connectez l'adaptateur DVI au connecteur DVI (blanc) situé à l'arrière de l'ordinateur.16 Installation et utilisation de votre ordinateur www.dell.com | support.dell.com Connexion d'un moniteur doté d'un connecteur VGA et d'un moniteur doté d'un connecteur DVI 1 Suivez les procédures indiquées dans la section «Avant de commencer» à la page 63. 2 Connectez le connecteur VGA du moniteur au connecteur VGA (bleu) situé à l'arrière de l'ordinateur. 3 Connectez le connecteur DVI de l'autre moniteur au connecteur DVI (blanc) situé à l'arrière de l'ordinateur. Connexion d'un téléviseur REMARQUE : Pour connecter un téléviseur à votre ordinateur, procurez-vous un câble S-vidéo, disponible dans la plupart des magasins d'électronique grand public. Aucun câble S-vidéo n'est fourni avec votre ordinateur. 1 Suivez les procédures indiquées dans la section «Avant de commencer» à la page 63. 2 Reliez une extrémité du câble S-vidéo au connecteur de sortie Téléviseur situé à l'arrière de l'ordinateur. 3 Reliez l'autre extrémité du câble S-vidéo au connecteur d'entrée S-vidéo du téléviseur. 4 Connectez le moniteur VGA ou DVI comme décrit à la page 16. connecteur VGA (bleu) connecteur DVI (blanc) adaptateur DVI optionnel connecteur de sortie TéléviseurInstallation et utilisation de votre ordinateur 17 Modification des paramètres d'affichage 1 Une fois le(s) moniteur(s) ou le téléviseur connectés, mettez l'ordinateur sous tension. La fenêtre du bureau Microsoft® Windows® s'affiche sur le moniteur principal. 2 Activez le mode de clonage ou le mode bureau étendu dans les paramètres d'affichage. • En mode de clonage, les deux moniteurs affichent la même image. • En mode bureau étendu, il est possible de faire glisser des objets d'un écran à l'autre, ce qui double la quantité d'espace de travail visible. Pour obtenir des informations sur la modification des paramètres d'affichage de votre carte graphique, reportez-vous à son guide d'utilisation que vous trouverez dans le Centre d'aide et de support (cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, sur Aide et support, sur Guides d'utilisation du système, sur Guides des périphériques, puis sur le guide correspondant à votre carte graphique). À propos des lecteurs ATA série Votre ordinateur Dell™ Dimension™ XPS peut prendre en charge jusqu'à trois disques durs ATA série. En transférant des données à l'aide d'une technologie série et de câbles flexibles plus fins et plus longs que les câbles IDE, les lecteurs ATA série fournissent les avantages suivants : • Amélioration du passage des câbles, ce qui facilite la circulation de l'air à l'intérieur du châssis. • Connecteurs de câbles plus compacts, ce qui permet d'économiser de la place sur la carte mère et le disque dur. Combiné avec l'amélioration du passage des câbles, cet avantage permet une utilisation plus efficace de l'espace à l'intérieur du châssis. Reportez-vous à la section «Disque dur» à la page 86 pour plus d'informations sur les connexions des lecteurs ATA série. À propos de votre configuration RAID Cette section fournit une présentation générale de la configuration RAID que vous pouvez avoir sélectionnée lors de l'achat de votre ordinateur. Bien que plusieurs configurations RAID soient disponibles, Dell propose uniquement un RAID niveau 0 et un RAID niveau 1 pour ses ordinateurs Dimension. Une configuration RAID de niveau 0 est recommandée pour les applications de jeu hautes performances alors qu'une configuration RAID de niveau 1 est recommandée pour les applications qui requièrent l'intégrité des données dans le domaine de la photographie et de l'audio numériques. Le contrôleur RAID Intel installé sur votre ordinateur ne peut créer de volume RAID qu'en utilisant deux lecteurs physiques. Si un troisième lecteur est présent, celui-ci ne peut pas faire partie d'un volume RAID lorsque le programme de configuration RAID Intel est utilisé. Il peut quand même être utilisé comme lecteur de rechange dans une configuration RAID 1 (reportezvous à la section «Création d'un disque dur de rechange» à la page 25). Toutefois, si votre 18 Installation et utilisation de votre ordinateur www.dell.com | support.dell.com ordinateur contient quatre lecteurs, chaque paire de lecteurs peut constituer un volume RAID de niveau 0 ou de niveau 1. Les lecteurs doivent avoir la même taille afin de d'assurer que le lecteur de plus grande taille ne contient pas d'espace non attribué (et donc inutilisable). REMARQUE : Les niveaux de RAID ne représentent pas de hiérarchie. Une configuration RAID de niveau 1 n'est pas en soi meilleure ou pire qu'une configuration RAID de niveau 0. RAID niveau 0 Un RAID niveau 0 utilise une technique de stockage appelée «segmentation des données» afin de fournir une fréquence d'accès aux données élevée. La technique de segmentation des données consiste dans l'écriture séquentielle de segments consécutifs, ou de bandes, de données sur les lecteurs physiques afin de créer un disque virtuel volumineux. La segmentation des données permet à l'un des lecteurs de lire des données pendant que l'autre lecteur recherche et lit le prochain bloc. Un autre avantage d'une configuration RAID de niveau 0 est qu'elle utilise toute la capacité des lecteurs. Par exemple, si vous avez installé deux lecteurs de 120 Go, vous disposez d'un espace de stockage des données de 240 Go. AVIS : Étant donné qu'un RAID niveau 0 ne permet pas la redondance des données, si un lecteur tombe en panne, les données présentes sur l'autre lecteur deviennent également inaccessibles. Par conséquent, effectuez régulièrement des sauvegardes lorsque vous utilisez une configuration RAID de niveau 0. RAID niveau 1 Un RAID niveau 1 utilise une technique de stockage avec redondance des données appelée «mise en miroir». Les données sont écrites sur le lecteur principal et ensuite dupliquées, ou mises en miroir, sur l'autre lecteur. Une configuration RAID de niveau 1 sacrifie les fréquences d'accès aux données élevées au profit de la redondance des données. disque dur 1 segment 1 segment 3 segment 5 disque dur 2 segment 2 segment 4 segment 6 RAID série ATA configuré en mode RAID niveau 0Installation et utilisation de votre ordinateur 19 En cas de panne d'un lecteur, les opérations de lecture et d'écriture sont alors redirigées vers le lecteur fonctionnant correctement. Un lecteur de remplacement peut ensuite être reconstruit à partir des données du lecteur qui fonctionne correctement. Les données étant dupliquées sur les deux lecteurs, deux lecteurs de 120 Go en mode RAID niveau 1 n'offrent globalement qu'un espace de stockage maximum de 120 Go. Configuration de votre ordinateur en mode RAID Il se peut que vous souhaitiez configurer votre ordinateur en mode RAID si vous n'avez pas sélectionné une configuration RAID lors de l'achat de votre ordinateur. Pour pouvoir utiliser une configuration RAID, vous devez avoir installé au préalable au moins deux disques durs. Pour obtenir des instructions sur la façon d'installer un disque dur, reportez-vous à la page 87. Il existe deux méthodes pour configurer des volumes de disque dur RAID. La première consiste à utiliser l'utilitaire Intel(R) Option ROM avant d'installer le système d'exploration sur le disque dur. La seconde méthode consiste à utiliser l'accélérateur d'application Intel ou l'utilitaire de stockage Intel après avoir installé le système d'exploitation et l'utilitaire de stockage Intel. Ces deux méthodes exigent l'activation préalable du mode RAID sur l'ordinateur avant l'exécution des procédures de configuration RAID décrites dans ce document. Activation du mode RAID sur votre ordinateur 1 Accédez au programme de configuration du système (reportez-vous à la page 116). 2 Utilisez les touches flèche haut et flèche bas pour mettre en surbrillance Lecteurs et appuyez sur . 3 Utilisez les touches flèche haut et flèche bas pour mettre en surbrillance Contrôleur de lecteurs et appuyez sur . 4 Utilisez les touches flèche gauche et flèche droite pour mettre en surbrillance RAID activé, appuyez sur , puis sur <Échap>. disque dur 1 segment 1 segment 2 segment 3 disque dur 2 segment 4 segment 5 segment 6 segment 1 dupliqué segment 2 dupliqué segment 3 dupliqué segment 4 dupliqué segment 5 dupliqué segment 6 dupliqué RAID série ATA configuré en mode RAID niveau 120 Installation et utilisation de votre ordinateur www.dell.com | support.dell.com 5 Utilisez les touches flèche gauche et flèche droite pour mettre en surbrillance Enregistrer/Quitter et appuyez sur pour quitter le programme de configuration du système et reprendre le processus de démarrage. Création d'une configuration RAID à l'aide de l'utilitaire Intel(R) Option ROM REMARQUE : Bien que des lecteurs de n'importe quelle taille puissent être utilisés pour créer une configuration RAID à l'aide de l'utilitaire Intel Option ROM, il est préférable que les lecteurs soient de taille égale. En configuration RAID de niveau 0, la taille de la matrice correspondra à la taille du plus petit disque multipliée par le nombre de disques (deux) dans la matrice. En configuration RAID de niveau 1, la taille de la matrice correspondra à la taille du plus petit des deux disques utilisés. Création d'une configuration RAID de niveau 0 AVIS : Vous perdez toutes les données présentes sur vos disques durs lorsque vous créez une configuration RAID en suivant la procédure ci-dessous. Sauvegardez toutes les données que vous souhaitez conserver avant d'aller plus loin. REMARQUE : La procédure suivante ne doit être utilisée que si vous réinstallez votre système d'exploitation. Elle ne doit pas être appliquée en cas de migration d'une configuration de stockage existante vers RAID 0. 1 Activez le mode RAID sur votre ordinateur (reportez-vous à la page 19). 2 Appuyez sur lorsque vous êtes invité à accéder à l'utilitaire Intel(R) RAID Option ROM. 3 Utilisez les touches flèche haut et flèche bas pour mettre en surbrillance Créer un volume RAID et appuyez sur . 4 Entrez un nom de volume RAID ou conservez la valeur par défaut, puis appuyez sur . 5 Utilisez les touches flèche haut et flèche bas pour mettre en surbrillance RAID0 (Bloc) et appuyez sur . 6 Si plus de deux disques durs sont disponibles, utilisez les touches flèche haut et flèche bas et la barre d'espace pour sélectionner les deux disques à intégrer à la matrice, puis appuyez sur . REMARQUE : Sélectionnez la taille de bloc la plus proche de la taille du fichier moyen que vous souhaitez stocker sur le volume RAID. Si vous ne connaissez pas la taille du fichier moyen, sélectionnez 128 comme taille de bloc. 7 Utilisez les touches flèche haut et flèche bas pour modifier la taille de bloc et appuyez sur . 8 Sélectionnez la capacité de volume souhaitée et appuyez sur . La valeur par défaut est la taille maximale disponible. 9 Appuyez sur pour créer le volume. 10 Appuyez sur (o) pour confirmer la création du volume RAID. 11 Confirmez que la configuration de volume qui s'affiche dans l'écran principal de l'utilitaire Intel Option ROM est correcte.Installation et utilisation de votre ordinateur 21 12 Utilisez les touches flèche haut et flèche bas pour sélectionner Quitter et appuyez sur . 13 Installez le système d'exploitation (reportez-vous à la section «Réinstallation de Microsoft® Windows® XP» à la page 60). Création d'une configuration RAID de niveau 1 1 Activez le mode RAID sur votre ordinateur (reportez-vous à la page 19). 2 Appuyez sur lorsque vous êtes invité à accéder à Intel RAID Option ROM. 3 Utilisez les touches flèche haut et flèche bas pour mettre en surbrillance Créer un volume RAID et appuyez sur . 4 Entrez un nom de volume RAID ou conservez la valeur par défaut, puis appuyez sur . 5 Utilisez les touches flèche haut et flèche bas pour sélectionner RAID1(Miroir) et appuyez sur . 6 Si plus de deux disques durs sont disponibles, utilisez les touches flèche haut et flèche bas et la barre d'espace pour sélectionner les deux disques à intégrer à la matrice, puis appuyez sur . 7 Sélectionnez la capacité de volume souhaitée et appuyez sur . La valeur par défaut est la taille maximale disponible. 8 Appuyez sur pour créer le volume. 9 Appuyez sur (o) pour confirmer la création du volume RAID. 10 Confirmez que la configuration de volume qui s'affiche dans l'écran principal de l'utilitaire Intel Option ROM est correcte. 11 Utilisez les touches flèche haut et flèche bas pour sélectionner Quitter et appuyez sur . 12 Installez le système d'exploitation (reportez-vous à la section «Réinstallation de Microsoft® Windows® XP» à la page 60). Suppression d'un volume RAID REMARQUE : Lorsque vous effectuez cette opération, toutes les données présentes sur les lecteurs RAID sont perdues. REMARQUE : Si votre ordinateur démarre actuellement en mode RAID et que vous supprimez le volume RAID dans Intel RAID Option ROM, vous ne pourrez plus démarrer votre ordinateur. 1 Appuyez sur lorsque vous êtes invité à accéder à l'utilitaire Intel RAID Option ROM. 2 Utilisez les touches flèche haut et flèche bas pour mettre en surbrillance Supprimer un volume RAID et appuyez sur . 3 Utilisez les touches flèche haut et flèche bas pour mettre en surbrillance le volume RAID à supprimer et appuyez sur . 4 Appuyez sur (o) pour confirmer la suppression du volume RAID.22 Installation et utilisation de votre ordinateur www.dell.com | support.dell.com 5 Appuyez sur <Échap> pour quitter l'utilitaire Intel Option ROM. Création d'une configuration RAID à l'aide de l'accélérateur d'application Intel(R) Si vous disposez déjà d'un disque dur sur lequel le système d'exploitation a été installé et que vous souhaitez ajouter un deuxième disque dur et reconfigurer les deux lecteurs dans un volume RAID sans perdre le système d'exploitation existant ou vos données, vous devez utiliser l'option de migration (reportez-vous à la section «Migration vers un volume RAID 0» à la page 23 ou à «Migration vers un volume RAID 1» à la page 24). Ne créez un volume RAID 0 ou RAID 1 que dans les conditions suivantes : • Vous ajoutez deux nouveaux disques durs à un ordinateur doté d'un seul disque dur (et le système d'exploitation est sur ce disque) et vous souhaitez configurer les deux nouveaux disques pour créer un volume RAID. • Vous avez déjà un ordinateur avec deux disques durs configurés en tant que matrice et vous voulez désigner l'espace disponible de la matrice en tant que deuxième volume RAID. Création d'un volume RAID 0 REMARQUE : Lorsque vous effectuez cette opération, toutes les données présentes sur les lecteurs RAID sont perdues. 1 Activez le mode RAID sur votre ordinateur (reportez-vous à la page 19). 2 Cliquez sur Démarrer et pointez sur Programmes→ Accélérateur d'application Intel(R)→ Accélérateur d'application Intel pour lancer l'utilitaire de stockage Intel(R). REMARQUE : Si l'option de menu Actions n'est pas visible, vous n'avez pas activé le mode RAID sur votre ordinateur (reportez-vous à la page 19). 3 Dans le menu Actions, sélectionnez Créer un volume RAID pour lancer l'Assistant Création d'un volume RAID, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 4 Dans l'écran Sélection de l'emplacement du volume, cliquez sur le premier disque dur à intégrer à votre volume RAID 0, puis cliquez sur la flèche droite. Cliquez sur un deuxième disque dur jusqu'à ce que deux disques apparaissent dans la fenêtre Sélectionné, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 5 Dans la fenêtre Spécification de la taille de volume, cliquez sur la taille de volume souhaitée, puis sur Suivant. 6 Cliquez sur Terminer pour créer le volume ou cliquez sur Précédent pour apporter des modifications. Création d'un volume RAID 1 REMARQUE : Lorsque vous effectuez cette opération, toutes les données présentes sur les disques RAID sont perdues. 1 Activez le mode RAID sur votre ordinateur (reportez-vous à la page 19). 2 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer et pointez sur Programmes→ Accélérateur d'application Intel(R)→ Accélérateur d'application Intel pour lancer l'utilitaire de stockage Intel(R). REMARQUE : Si l'option de menu Actions n'est pas visible, vous n'avez pas activé le mode RAID sur votre ordinateur (reportez-vous à la page 19).Installation et utilisation de votre ordinateur 23 3 Dans le menu Actions, sélectionnez Créer un volume RAID pour lancer l'Assistant Création d'un volume RAID. 4 Cliquez sur Suivant dans le premier écran. 5 Confirmez le nom du volume, sélectionnez RAID 1 comme niveau RAID, puis cliquez sur Suivant pour continuer. 6 Dans l'écran Sélection de l'emplacement du volume, cliquez sur le premier disque dur à utiliser pour créer votre volume RAID 0, puis cliquez sur la flèche droite. Cliquez sur un deuxième disque jusqu'à ce que deux disques durs apparaissent dans la fenêtre Sélectionné, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 7 Dans la fenêtre Spécification de la taille de volume, sélectionnez la taille de volume souhaitée, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 8 Cliquez sur Terminer pour créer le volume ou cliquez sur Précédent pour apporter des modifications. 9 Suivez les procédures Microsoft pour la création d'une partition sur le nouveau volume RAID. Suppression d'un volume RAID REMARQUE : Cette procédure supprime le volume RAID 1, mais elle le divise également en deux disques durs non RAID avec une partition tout en laissant les fichiers de données existants intacts. La suppression d'un volume RAID 0 entraîne par contre la destruction de toutes les données présentes sur le volume. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer et pointez sur Programmes→ Accélérateur d'application Intel(R)→ Accélérateur d'application Intel pour lancer l'utilitaire de stockage Intel(R). 2 Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur l'icône Volume du volume RAID à supprimer, puis sélectionnez Supprimer le volume. 3 Dans l'écran Assistant Suppression d'un volume RAID, cliquez sur Suivant. 4 Mettez en surbrillance le volume RAID à supprimer dans la zone Disponible, cliquez sur le bouton flèche droite pour déplacer le volume RAID en surbrillance dans la zone Sélectionné, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 5 Cliquez sur Terminer pour supprimer le volume. Migration vers un volume RAID 0 1 Activez le mode RAID sur votre ordinateur (reportez-vous à la page 19). 2 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer et pointez sur Tous les programmes→ Accélérateur d'application Intel(R)→ Accélérateur d'application Intel pour lancer l'utilitaire de stockage Intel(R). REMARQUE : Si l'option de menu Actions n'est pas visible, vous n'avez pas activé le mode RAID sur votre ordinateur (reportez-vous à la page 19). 3 Dans le menu Actions, sélectionnez Créer un volume RAID à partir du disque dur existant pourlancer l'Assistant Migration. 4 Cliquez sur Suivant dans le premier écran de l'Assistant Migration. 5 Entrez un nom de volume RAID ou gardez la valeur par défaut.24 Installation et utilisation de votre ordinateur www.dell.com | support.dell.com 6 Dans le menu déroulant, sélectionnez RAID 0 comme niveau RAID. REMARQUE : Sélectionnez la taille de bloc la plus proche de la taille du fichier moyen que vous souhaitez stocker sur le volume RAID. Si vous ne connaissez pas la taille du fichier moyen, sélectionnez 128 comme taille de bloc. 7 Sélectionnez la taille de bloc appropriée dans le menu déroulant, puis cliquez sur Suivant. REMARQUE : Sélectionnez le disque dur à utiliser comme disque dur source (ce doit être le disque dur contenant les données ou le système d'exploitation à sauvegarder dans le volume RAID). 8 Dans l'écran Sélection du disque dur source, double-cliquez sur le disque dur à partir duquel vous souhaitez effectuer la migration, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 9 Dans l'écran Sélection du disque dur membre, double-cliquez sur le disque dur pour sélectionner le disque dur membre à étendre à la matrice de blocs, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 10 Dans l'écran Spécification de la taille de volume, sélectionnez la taille de volume souhaitée, puis cliquez sur Suivant. REMARQUE : À l'étape suivante, vous perdrez toutes les données présentes sur le disque membre. 11 Cliquez sur Terminer pour démarrer la migration ou cliquez sur Précédent pour apporter des modifications. Vous pouvez utiliser votre ordinateur normalement pendant le processus de migration. Migration vers un volume RAID 1 1 Activez le mode RAID sur votre ordinateur (reportez-vous à la page 19). 2 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer et pointez sur Tous les programmes→ Accélérateur d'application Intel(R)→ Accélérateur d'application Intel pour lancer l'utilitaire de stockage Intel(R). REMARQUE : Si l'option de menu Actions n'est pas visible, vous n'avez pas activé le mode RAID sur votre ordinateur (reportez-vous à la page 19). 3 Dans le menu Actions, cliquez sur Créer un volume RAID à partir du disque dur existant pour lancer l'Assistant Migration. 4 Cliquez sur Suivant dans le premier écran de l'Assistant Migration. 5 Entrez un nom de volume RAID ou gardez la valeur par défaut. 6 Dans le menu déroulant, sélectionnez RAID 1 comme niveau RAID. REMARQUE : Sélectionnez le disque dur à utiliser comme disque source (ce doit être le disque contenant les données ou le système d'exploitation à sauvegarder dans le volume RAID). 7 Dans l'écran Sélection du disque dur source, double-cliquez sur le disque à partir duquel vous souhaitez effectuer la migration, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 8 Dans l'écran Sélection du disque dur membre, double-cliquez sur le disque pour sélectionner le disque dur membre qui agira comme un disque miroir dans la matrice, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 9 Dans l'écran Spécification de la taille de volume, sélectionnez la taille de volume souhaitée, puis cliquez sur Suivant. REMARQUE : À l'étape suivante, vous perdrez toutes les données présentes sur le disque membre.Installation et utilisation de votre ordinateur 25 10 Cliquez sur Terminer pour démarrer la migration ou cliquez sur Précédent pour apporter des modifications. Vous pouvez utiliser votre ordinateur normalement pendant le processus de migration. Création d'un disque dur de rechange Il est possible de créer un disque de rechange avec une matrice RAID 1. Le disque dur de rechange ne sera pas reconnu par le système d'exploitation mais vous pourrez le visualiser à partir de Disk Manager ou de l'utilitaire Intel Option ROM. Lorsqu'un membre de la matrice RAID 1 est défectueux, l'ordinateur reconstruit automatiquement la matrice miroir en utilisant le disque dur de rechange comme disque de remplacement du disque membre défectueux. Pour marquer un disque comme disque dur de rechange : 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer et pointez sur Programmes→ Accélérateur d'application Intel(R)→ Accélérateur d'application Intel pour lancer l'utilitaire de stockage Intel(R). 2 Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur le disque à marquer comme disque dur de rechange. 3 Cliquez sur Marquer comme disque de rechange. Pour supprimer le marquage comme disque de rechange appliqué à un disque dur : 1 Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur l'icône du disque de rechange. 2 Cliquez sur Réinitialiser le disque dur sur non-RAID. Reconstruction d'un volume RAID 1 dégradé Si votre ordinateur ne dispose pas de disque de rechange et qu'il a signalé un volume RAID 1 comme dégradé, vous pouvez reconstruire manuellement le miroir redondant de l'ordinateur sur un nouveau disque dur. Pour ce faire, procédez de la façon suivante : 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer et pointez sur Programmes→ Accélérateur d'application Intel(R)→ Accélérateur d'application Intel pour lancer l'utilitaire de stockage Intel(R). 2 Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur le disque dur disponible sur lequel vous souhaitez reconstruire le volume RAID 1, puis cliquez sur Reconstruire sur ce disque. 3 Vous pouvez utiliser votre ordinateur pendant la reconstruction du volume RAID 1. Transfert d'informations vers un nouvel ordinateur Le système d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows® XP fournit un assistant de transfert de fichiers et de paramètres qui permet de transférer des données de l'ordinateur source vers le nouvel ordinateur. Vous pouvez transférer des données, telles que des : • messages électroniques • paramètres de la barre d'outils • tailles de fenêtre • signets Internet Vous pouvez transférer les données au nouvel ordinateur via le réseau ou une connexion série ou les stocker sur un support amovible, tel qu'un CD enregistrable ou une disquette.26 Installation et utilisation de votre ordinateur www.dell.com | support.dell.com Pour préparer le nouvel ordinateur au transfert de fichiers : 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Tous les programmes→ Accessoires→ Outils système, puis cliquez sur Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres. 2 Lorsque l'écran de bienvenue de l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres s'affiche, cliquez sur Suivant. 3 Dans l'écran De quel ordinateur s'agit-il ?, cliquez sur Nouvel ordinateur, puis sur Suivant. 4 Dans l'écran Avez-vous un CD-ROM de Windows XP ?, cliquez sur J'utiliserai l'Assistant du CD-ROM de Windows XP, puis sur Suivant. 5 Lorsque l'écran Allez maintenant à votre ancien ordinateur s'affiche, allez à l'ancien ordinateur ou ordinateur source. Ne cliquez pas sur Suivant à ce moment. Pour copier les données à partir de l'ancien ordinateur : 1 Dans l'ancien ordinateur, insérez le CD Système d'exploitation Windows XP. 2 Dans l'écran Bienvenue dans Microsoft Windows XP, cliquez sur Effectuer des tâches supplémentaires. 3 Sous Que voulez-vous faire ?, cliquez sur Transférer des fichiers et des paramètres. 4 Dans l'écran de bienvenue de l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres, cliquez sur Suivant. 5 Dans l'écran De quel ordinateur s'agit-il ?, cliquez sur Ancien ordinateur, puis sur Suivant. 6 Dans l'écran Sélectionner une méthode de transfert, cliquez sur la méthode de transfert de votre choix. 7 Dans l'écran Que voulez-vous transférer ?, sélectionnez les éléments à transférer, puis cliquez sur Suivant. Une fois les informations copiées, l'écran Fin de la phase de collecte des données apparaît. 8 Cliquez sur Terminer. Pour transférer les données vers le nouvel ordinateur : 1 Dans l'écran Allez maintenant à votre ancien ordinateur du nouvel ordinateur, cliquez sur Suivant. 2 Dans l'écran Où sont les fichiers et les paramètres ?, sélectionnez la méthode de transfert de vos paramètres et fichiers, puis cliquez sur Suivant. L'Assistant lit les paramètres et fichiers collectés, puis les applique au nouvel ordinateur. Lorsque tous les paramètres et fichiers ont été appliqués, l'écran Terminé s'affiche. 3 Cliquez sur Terminé et redémarrez le nouvel ordinateur. Copie de CD et de DVD REMARQUE : Veillez à respecter toutes les lois sur les droits d'auteur relatives à la création de CD ou de DVD.Installation et utilisation de votre ordinateur 27 Les informations de cette section s'appliquent uniquement aux ordinateurs équipés d'un lecteur CD-R, CD-RW, DVD+RW, DVD+R ou lecteur combiné DVD/CD-RW. REMARQUE : Les types de lecteurs de CD ou de DVD proposés par Dell peuvent varier d'un pays à l'autre. Les instructions suivantes décrivent la création d'une copie exacte d'un CD ou DVD. Vous pouvez également utiliser Sonic RecordNow à d'autres fins, notamment pour créer des CD à partir de fichiers audio sur votre ordinateur et pour créer des CD MP3. Pour obtenir des instructions, reportez-vous à la documentation Sonic RecordNow de votre ordinateur. Ouvrez Sonic RecordNow, cliquez sur l'icône en forme de point d'interrogation située dans le coin droit supérieur de la fenêtre, puis sur Aide de RecordNow ou Didacticiel de RecordNow. Comment copier un CD ou DVD REMARQUE : Si vous disposez d'un lecteur composite DVD/CD-RW et que vous rencontrez des problèmes lors de l'enregistrement, recherchez des correctifs logiciels sur le site Web de support de Sonic à l'adresse support.sonic.com. Actuellement, il existe cinq formats de disques DVD inscriptibles : DVD+R, DVD+RW, DVD-R, DVD-RW et DVD-RAM. Les lecteurs de DVD inscriptibles installés sur les ordinateurs Dell™ peuvent écrire et lire sur des supports DVD+R et DVD+RW. Toutefois, les lecteurs de DVD inscriptibles ne peuvent pas écrire sur des supports DVD-RAM et ne peuvent parfois pas lire non plus ce type de support. Par ailleurs, les lecteurs de DVD largement utilisés pour les systèmes cinéma maison ne peuvent parfois pas lire tous ces cinq formats. REMARQUE : La plupart des DVD sur le marché sont protégés par des droits d'auteur et ne peuvent pas être copiés à l'aide de Sonic RecordNow. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Tous les programmes→ Sonic→ RecordNow!→ RecordNow!. 2 Cliquez sur l'onglet Audio ou sur l'onglet Données, selon le type de CD ou de DVD à copier. 3 Cliquez sur Copie exacte. 4 Pour copier le CD ou DVD : • Si vous disposez d'un lecteur de CD ou DVD, assurez-vous que les paramètres sont corrects et cliquez sur Copier. L'ordinateur lit votre CD ou DVD source et copie son contenu dans un dossier temporaire du disque dur de l'ordinateur. Lorsque vous y êtes invité, insérez un CD ou DVD vierge dans le lecteur de CD ou DVD et cliquez sur OK. • Si vous disposez de deux lecteurs de CD ou DVD, sélectionnez le lecteur dans lequel vous avez inséré votre CD ou DVD source et cliquez sur Copier. L'ordinateur copie les données du CD ou DVD sur le CD ou DVD vierge. Une fois la copie du CD ou DVD source terminée, le CD ou DVD créé est éjecté automatiquement.28 Installation et utilisation de votre ordinateur www.dell.com | support.dell.com Utilisation de CD-R, CD-RW, DVD+R et DVD+RW vierges Votre lecteur de CD-RW peut graver deux types différents de disques inscriptibles — CD-R et CD-RW (y compris les CD-RW haute vitesse). Utilisez des CD-R vierges pour enregistrer de la musique ou stocker définitivement des fichiers de données. Après avoir gravé un CD-R, vous ne pouvez plus écrire sur ce disque (reportez-vous à la documentation Sonic pour plus d'informations). Utilisez des CD-RW vierges pour écrire sur des CD ou pour effacer, réécrire ou mettre à jour des données sur des CD. Votre lecteur de DVD inscriptibles peut graver quatre types différents de disques inscriptibles — CD-R, CD-RW (y compris les CD-RW haute vitesse), DVD+R et DVD+RW. Les DVD+R vierges permettent de stocker de grosses quantités d'informations de façon permanente. Après avoir gravé un DVD+R, l'option de récrire ou non sur ce disque dépend de la dernière étape de la création, laquelle «finalise» ou «ferme» le disque. Utilisez un DVD+RW vierge si vous voulez plus tard effacer, récrire ou mettre à jour les données de ce disque. Conseils pratiques • N'utilisez l'Explorateur Microsoft® Windows® pour glisser-déplacer des fichiers sur un CD-R ou CD-RW qu'après avoir lancé Sonic RecordNow et ouvert un projet RecordNow. • Vous devez utiliser des CD-R pour graver des CD audio que vous souhaitez lire sur une chaîne stéréo classique. Les CD-RW ne fonctionnent pas sur la plupart des chaînes stéréo ou de voiture. • Il est impossible de créer des DVD audio à l'aide de Sonic RecordNow. • Les fichiers de musique MP3 ne peuvent s'écouter que sur des lecteurs MP3 ou sur des ordinateurs dotés d'un logiciel MP3. • Évitez de graver sur toute la capacité d'un CD-R ou CD-RW vierge. Par exemple, ne copiez pas un fichier de 650 Mo sur un CD vierge de 650 Mo. Le lecteur CD-RW doit disposer de 1 ou 2 Mo de libre sur le CD pour finaliser l'enregistrement. • Nous vous conseillons d'utiliser un CD-RW jusqu'à ce que les techniques d'enregistrement de CD vous soient familières. En cas d'erreur, vous pouvez effacer le CD-RW, puis recommencer. Vous pouvez aussi utiliser un CD-RW pour tester des projets de fichiers musicaux avant l'enregistrement définitif sur un CD-R vierge. • Pour obtenir d'autres conseils pratiques, rendez-vous sur le site Web de support Sonic à l'adresse support.sonic.com. Assistant Installation réseau L'Assistant Installation réseau du système d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows® XP vous guide dans la procédure de partage des fichiers, des imprimantes ou d'une connexion Internet entre les ordinateurs d'un réseau familial ou d'un réseau de petite entreprise. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Tous les programmes→ Accessoires→ Communications, puis cliquez sur Assistant Installation réseau. 2 Dans l'écran d'accueil, cliquez sur Suivant.Installation et utilisation de votre ordinateur 29 3 Cliquez sur Liste de vérification pour la création d'un réseau. REMARQUE : La sélection de la méthode de connexion Cet ordinateur se connecte directement à Internet entraîne l'activation du pare-feu intégré fourni avec le système d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows® XP SP1. 4 Terminez la liste de vérifications et les préparations requises. Revenez à l'Assistant Installation réseau et suivez les instructions qui s'affichent.30 Installation et utilisation de votre ordinateur www.dell.com | support.dell.comOptimisation des performances 31 Optimisation des performances Hyper-Threading Hyper-Threading est une technologie Intel® qui améliore les performances globales de l'ordinateur en permettant à un processeur de fonctionner comme deux processeurs logiques, capables d'exécuter certaines tâches simultanément. Il est recommandé d'utiliser Microsoft® Windows® XP Service Pack 1 (SP1) ou une version ultérieure du système d'exploitation car Windows XP est optimisé pour tirer parti de la technologie Hyper-Threading. Alors que de nombreux programmes peuvent bénéficier d'Hyper-Threading, certains n'ont pas été optimisés pour cette technologie et peuvent nécessiter une mise à jour de la part du fabricant de logiciel. N'hésitez pas à le contacter pour obtenir des mises à jours et des informations relatives à l'utilisation d'Hyper-Threading avec votre logiciel. Pour déterminer si votre ordinateur utilise la technologie Hyper-Threading : 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, cliquez avec le bouton droit sur Poste de travail, puis cliquez sur Propriétés. 2 Cliquez sur Matériel, puis sur Gestionnaire de périphériques. 3 Dans la fenêtre Gestionnaire de périphériques, cliquez sur le signe plus (+) en regard de Processeurs. Si la technologie Hyper-Threading est activée, le processeur est répertorié deux fois. Vous pouvez activer ou désactiver Hyper-Threading au niveau de la configuration du système. Pour plus d'informations sur l'accès au programme de configuration du système, reportez-vous à la page 115. Pour en savoir plus sur Hyper-Threading, consultez la Base de connaissances sur le site Web de support de Dell à l'adresse support.dell.com. Surcadençage Dell verrouille les options du multiplieur du processeur dans le programme de configuration du système afin d'empêcher le surcadençage (overclocking) du processeur. La première et principale raison de cette interdiction vient du fait que les laboratoires de performance de Dell testent et règlent précisément les ordinateurs Dell au niveau du système pour obtenir les meilleures performances possibles. Toute modification des performances non réalisée au sein de nos laboratoires pourrait provoquer une baisse des performances. Lorsque vous recevez votre ordinateur configuré comme vous l'avez demandé, celui-ci est déjà prêt pour réaliser de grandes performances.32 Optimisation des performances www.dell.com | support.dell.com La deuxième raison vient du fait que généralement, les processeurs surcadencés dégagent une chaleur excessive et créent des champs électriques qui peuvent provoquer des ruptures de fatigue à l'intérieur du processeur, ce qui réduit donc sa durée de vie. Même un léger surcadençage peut rendre votre ordinateur instable et le bloquer. Il existe différents produits de «modification des performances» que vous pouvez obtenir à partir de différentes sources. Toutefois, Dell vous déconseille d'utiliser ces produits sur ses ordinateurs. Cartes PCI Express PCI Express est la technologie de la prochaine génération de cartes graphiques et de cartes PCI. La taille du logement des cartes PCI Express est différente de celle du logement des cartes PCXI et ces cartes ne sont pas interchangeables (vous ne pouvez pas installer de carte PCI dans un logement de carte PCI Express et inversement). Le logement de la carte PCI Express x16 remplace le logement de la carte graphique AGP. Les avantages de la technologie PCI Express sont les suivants : • Plus de bande passante disponible — La bande passante des bus PCI Express est de 250 Mo/s dans chaque direction et en même temps, alors que la bande passante des bus PCI est de 133 Mo/s, dans un seul sens à la fois. • Hiérarchisation du service — Toutes les cartes PCI installés dans un ordinateur partagent un bus commun, mais chaque carte PCI Express peut fonctionner sur son propre canal. Les activités comme la vidéoconférence et les fonctions de webcam peuvent être automatiquement hiérarchisées via le logiciel du périphérique pour réduire le temps de latence.Résolution de problèmes 33 Résolution de problèmes Astuces de dépannage Lorsque vous dépannez votre ordinateur, suivez les conseils ci-dessous : • Si vous avez ajouté ou supprimé une pièce avant que le problème n'apparaisse, reconsultez les procédures d'installation et assurez-vous que la pièce est correctement installée. • Si un périphérique ne fonctionne pas, vérifiez qu'il est correctement connecté. • Si un message d'erreur apparaît à l'écran, prenez note du message exact. Ce message peut aider le personnel du support technique à diagnostiquer et à résoudre le problème. Si un message d'erreur apparaît dans un programme, consultez la documentation du programme. Problèmes de batterie PRÉCAUTION : Une nouvelle batterie mal installée risque d'exploser. Remplacez la batterie uniquement par une batterie de type identique ou équivalent à celui recommandé par le fabricant. Mettez les batteries usagées au rebut selon les instructions du fabricant. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d’information sur le produit. Problèmes de lecteurs PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d’information sur le produit. REMPLACEZ L A BATTERIE. — Si vous devez fréquemment réinitialiser les informations concernant l'heure et la date après avoir allumé l'ordinateur ou si l'heure et la date affichées au démarrage sont incorrectes, remplacez la batterie (reportez-vous à la page 109). Si la batterie ne fonctionne toujours pas correctement, contactez Dell (reportez-vous à la page 124).34 Résolution de problèmes www.dell.com | support.dell.com Problèmes de lecteur de CD et de DVD REMARQUE : Il peut arriver que le lecteur de CD ou de DVD haute vitesse vibre et soit bruyant. Cela n'indique pas le lecteur est défectueux. REMARQUE : En raison des différents formats de disque du monde entier, certains titres DVD ne fonctionnent pas dans tous les lecteurs DVD. VÉRIFIEZ QUE MICROSOFT® WINDOWS® RECONNAÎT L E LECTEUR — Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Poste de travail. Si le lecteur de disquette, de CD ou de DVD ne figure pas dans la liste, effectuez un balayage complet avec votre logiciel antivirus pour détecter et supprimer les virus. Les virus empêchent parfois Windows de reconnaître le lecteur. TESTEZ L E LECTEUR — • Insérez une autre disquette, un autre CD ou un autre DVD pour éliminer la possibilité que le premier support soit défectueux. • Insérez une disquette d'amorçage et redémarrez l'ordinateur. NETTOYEZ L E LECTEUR O U L E DISQUE — Reportez-vous à la section «Fichier d'aide de Dell Dimension» à la page 11. INSPECTEZ L A CONNEXION DES CÂBLES EXÉCUTEZ L E DÉPANNEUR DES CONFLITS MATÉRIELS — Reportez-vous à la page 59. EXÉCUTEZ DELL DIAGNOSTICS — Reportez-vous à la page 52. RÉGLEZ L E VOLUME D E WINDOWS — • Cliquez sur l'icône représentant un haut-parleur, dans le coin inférieur droit de l'écran. • Vérifiez que vous avez monté le volume en cliquant sur la barre coulissante et en la faisant glisser vers le haut. • Vérifiez que le son n'est pas mis en sourdine en cliquant sur les cases cochées. INSPECTEZ LES HAUT-PARLEURS E T L E CAISSON D'EXTRÊMES GRAVES — Reportez-vous à la section «Problèmes de son et de haut-parleurs» à la page 45.Résolution de problèmes 35 Problèmes d'écriture sur un lecteur de CD/DVD-RW Problèmes d'unité de disque dur Problèmes de messagerie électronique, de modem et d'Internet PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d’information sur le produit. REMARQUE : Connectez le modem uniquement à une prise téléphonique analogique. Le modem ne fonctionne pas s'il est connecté à un réseau téléphonique numérique. FERMEZ TOUS LES PROGRAMMES — Le lecteur de CD/DVD-RW doit recevoir un flux régulier de données lors de l'écriture. Si ce flux est interrompu, une erreur se produit. Fermez tous les programmes avant de lancer l'écriture sur le CD/DVD-RW. DÉSACTIVEZ L E MODE VEILLE DANS WINDOWS AVANT D E LANCER L'ÉCRITURE SUR UN CD/DVDRW — Reportez-vous à «Fichier d'aide de Dell Dimension» à la page 11 ou effectuez une recherche sur le mot clé veille dans «Centre d'aide et de support de Windows» à la page 12 pour obtenir des informations sur les modes d'économie d'énergie. LANCEZ L A COMMANDE CHECK DISK — 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Poste de travail. 2 Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur Disque local C:. 3 Cliquez sur Propriétés. 4 Cliquez sur l'onglet Outils. 5 Sous Détection d'erreurs, cliquez sur Vérifier maintenant. 6 Cliquez sur Analyser et tenter la restauration des secteurs défectueux. 7 Cliquez sur Démarrer. VÉRIFIEZ LES PARAMÈTRES D E SÉCURITÉ D E MICROSOFT OUTLOOK® EXPRESS — Si vous ne pouvez pas ouvrir les pièces jointes des messages : 1 Dans Outlook Express, cliquez sur Outils, sur Options, puis sur Sécurité. 2 Cliquez sur Interdire les pièces jointes pour supprimer la coche.36 Résolution de problèmes www.dell.com | support.dell.com Messages d'erreur PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d’information sur le produit. Si le message n'est pas répertorié, reportez-vous à la documentation du système d'exploitation ou du programme qui s'exécutait lorsque le message s'est affiché. VÉRIFIEZ L A CONNEXION D U CORDON TÉLÉPHONIQUE — INSPECTEZ L A PRISE TÉLÉPHONIQUE — CONNECTEZ DIRECTEMENT L E MODEM À LA PRISE TÉLÉPHONIQUE MURALE — UTILISEZ UNE AUTRE LIGNE TÉLÉPHONIQUE — • Vérifiez que le cordon téléphonique est connecté à la prise du modem. (La prise est dotée d'une étiquette verte ou d'une icône en forme de connecteur.) • Insérez le connecteur du cordon téléphonique dans le modem jusqu'à ce que vous entendiez un clic. • Déconnectez le cordon téléphonique du modem et connectez-le à un téléphone. Attendez la tonalité. • Si d'autres appareils téléphoniques partagent cette ligne, par exemple un répondeur, un télécopieur, un parasurtenseur ou un séparateur de ligne, contournez-les et connectez le modem directement à la prise téléphonique murale. Si vous utilisez un cordon de 3 m (10 pieds) ou plus, essayez un cordon plus court. EXÉCUTEZ LES DIAGNOSTICS ASSISTANT D U MODEM — Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez vers Tousles programmes, puis cliquez sur Assistant du modem. Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent pour identifier et résoudre les problèmes de modem. (L'Assistant du modem n'est pas disponible sur certains ordinateurs). VÉRIFIEZ QUE L E MODEM COMMUNIQUE AVEC WINDOWS — 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration. 2 Cliquez sur Imprimantes et autres périphériques. 3 Cliquez sur Options de modem et de téléphonie. 4 Cliquez sur l'onglet Modems. 5 Cliquez sur le port COM de votre modem. 6 Cliquez sur Propriétés, puis sur l'onglet Diagnostics et ensuite sur Interroger le modem pour vérifier que le modem communique avec Windows. Si toutes les commandes reçoivent des réponses, le modem fonctionne correctement. VÉRIFIEZ QUE VOUS ÊTES CONNECTÉ À INTERNET — Assurez-vous que vous êtes bien abonné à un fournisseur d'accès Internet. Une fois le programme de messagerie électronique Outlook Express ouvert, cliquez sur Fichier. Si la case Travailler hors connexion est cochée, décochez-la, puis connectezvous à Internet. Pour obtenir de l'aide, contactez votre fournisseur d'accès Internet.Résolution de problèmes 37 Problèmes du périphérique IEEE 1394 PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d’information sur le produit. UN NOM D E FICHIER N E PEUT CONTENIR AUCUN DES CARACTÈRES SUIVANTS : \ / : * ? “ < > | — N'utilisez pas ces caractères dans les noms de fichiers. UN FICHIER .DLL REQUIS EST INTROUVABLE — Il manque un fichier essentiel au programme que vous essayez d'ouvrir. Pour supprimer, puis réinstaller le programme : 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, sur Panneau de configuration, puis sur Ajout/Suppression de programmes. 2 Sélectionnez le programme à supprimer. 3 Cliquez sur l'icône Modification/Suppression de programmes. 4 Reportez-vous à la documentation du programme pour obtenir les instructions d'installation. lettre de lecteur :\ N'EST PAS ACCESSIBLE. LE PÉRIPHÉRIQUE N'EST PAS PRÊT — Le lecteur ne peut pas lire la disquette. Insérez une disquette dans le lecteur et réessayez. INTRODUISEZ UN SUPPORT AMORÇABLE — Introduisez une disquette ou un CD amorçable. ERREUR DISQUE NON-SYSTÈME — Retirez la disquette du lecteur et redémarrez l'ordinateur. MÉMOIRE O U RESSOURCES INSUFFISANTES. FERMEZ DES PROGRAMMES E T RÉESSAYEZ — Fermez toutes les fenêtres et ouvrez le programme de votre choix. Dans certains cas, il est nécessaire de redémarrer l'ordinateur pour restaurer les ressources disponibles. Le cas échéant, exécutez le programme que vous souhaitez utiliser en premier. SYSTÈME D'EXPLOITATION INTROUVABLE — Contactez Dell (reportez-vous à la page 124). ASSUREZ-VOUS QUE L E CÂBLE D U PÉRIPHÉRIQUE IEEE 1394 EST CORRECTEMENT INSÉRÉ DANS L E PÉRIPHÉRIQUE E T DANS L E CONNECTEUR D E L'ORDINATEUR ASSUREZ-VOUS QUE L E PÉRIPHÉRIQUE IEEE 1394 EST RECONNU PAR WINDOWS — 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration. 2 Cliquez sur Imprimantes et autres périphériques. Si votre périphérique IEEE 1394 est répertorié, Windows le reconnaît.38 Résolution de problèmes www.dell.com | support.dell.com Problèmes de clavier PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d’information sur le produit. Problèmes de blocages et logiciels PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d’information sur le produit. L'ordinateur ne démarre pas SI VOUS RENCONTREZ DES PROBLÈMES AVEC UN PÉRIPHÉRIQUE IEEE 1394 FOURNI PAR DELL — Contactez Dell (reportez-vous à la page 124). SI VOUS RENCONTREZ DES PROBLÈMES AVEC UN PÉRIPHÉRIQUE IEEE 1394 NON FOURNI PAR DELL — Contactez le fabricant du périphérique IEEE 1394. INSPECTEZ L E CÂBLE D U CLAVIER — • Assurez-vous que le câble du clavier est fermement connecté à l'ordinateur. • Arrêtez l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la page 63), reconnectez le câble du clavier comme indiqué sur le schéma de configuration de votre ordinateur, puis redémarrez-le. • Examinez le connecteur de câble pour voir si des broches sont pliées ou brisées et si des fils sont endommagés ou éraillés. Redressez les broches pliées. • Débranchez les câbles d'extension du clavier et connectez le clavier directement à l'ordinateur. TESTEZ L E CLAVIER — Connectez un clavier en bon état de marche à l'ordinateur et essayez de l'utiliser. EXÉCUTEZ L E DÉPANNEUR DES CONFLITS MATÉRIELS — Reportez-vous à la page 59. EXAMINEZ LES VOYANTS D E DIAGNOSTIC — Reportez-vous à la page 49. ASSUREZ-VOUS QUE L E CÂBLE D'ALIMENTATION EST CORRECTEMENT CONNECTÉ À L'ORDINATEUR E T À L A PRISE SECTEUR.Résolution de problèmes 39 L'ordinateur ne répond plus AVIS : Vous pouvez perdre des données si vous n'arrivez pas à arrêter correctement le système d'exploitation. Un programme ne répond plus Un programme se plante sans cesse REMARQUE : Tout logiciel inclut généralement des instructions d'installation dans la documentation ou sur la disquette ou le CD qui l'accompagne. Un programme est conçu pour une version antérieure du système d'exploitation Windows ÉTEIGNEZ L'ORDINATEUR — Si vous n'obtenez aucune réponse lorsque vous appuyez sur une touche du clavier ou lorsque vous déplacez la souris, appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation et maintenez-le enfoncé pendant au moins 8 à 10 secondes jusqu'à ce que l'ordinateur s'éteigne. Redémarrez l'ordinateur. QUITTEZ L E PROGRAMME — 1 Appuyez simultanément sur <Échap>. 2 Cliquez sur Applications. 3 Cliquez sur le programme qui ne répond plus. 4 Cliquez sur Fin de tâche. CONSULTEZ LA DOCUMENTATION D U LOGICIEL — Le cas échéant, supprimez, puis réinstallez le programme. EXÉCUTEZ L'ASSISTANT COMPATIBILITÉ DES PROGRAMMES — L'Assistant Compatibilité des programmes configure un programme pour qu'il fonctionne dans un environnement proche des environnements des systèmes non Windows XP. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Tous les programmes→ Accessoires, puis cliquez sur Assistant Compatibilité des programmes. 2 Dans l'écran d'accueil, cliquez sur Suivant. 3 Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent.40 Résolution de problèmes www.dell.com | support.dell.com Un écran bleu uni apparaît Autres problèmes logiciels ÉTEIGNEZ L'ORDINATEUR — Si vous n'obtenez aucune réponse lorsque vous appuyez sur une touche du clavier ou lorsque vous déplacez la souris, appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation et maintenez-le enfoncé pendant au moins 8 à 10 secondes jusqu'à ce que l'ordinateur s'éteigne. Redémarrez l'ordinateur. CONSULTEZ L A DOCUMENTATION D U LOGICIEL O U CONTACTEZ L E FABRICANT POUR OBTENIR DES INFORMATIONS D E DÉPANNAGE — • Assurez-vous que le programme est compatible avec le système d'exploitation installé sur votre ordinateur. • Assurez-vous que l'ordinateur est conforme aux exigences matérielles requises pour que le logiciel fonctionne. Reportez-vous à la documentation du logiciel pour plus d'informations. • Assurez-vous que le programme est correctement installé et configuré. • Veillez à ce que les pilotes de périphérique n'entrent pas en conflit avec le programme. • Le cas échéant, supprimez, puis réinstallez le programme. SAUVEGARDEZ IMMÉDIATEMENT VOS FICHIERS UTILISEZ UN PROGRAMME D E DÉTECTION DES VIRUS POUR INSPECTER L E DISQUE DUR, LES DISQUETTES O U LES CD. ENREGISTREZ E T FERMEZ TOUS LES FICHIERS O U PROGRAMMES OUVERTS E T ARRÊTEZ VOTRE ORDINATEUR À L'AIDE D U MENU DÉMARRERRésolution de problèmes 41 Problèmes de mémoire PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d’information sur le produit. Problèmes liés à la souris PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d’information sur le produit. SI L E MESSAGE «MÉMOIRE INSUFFISANTE» S'AFFICHE — • Enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers et quittez tous les programmes que vous n'utilisez pas pour voir si cela résout le problème. • Reportez-vous à la documentation du logiciel pour prendre connaissance des besoins en mémoire minimum. Si nécessaire, installez de la mémoire supplémentaire (reportez-vous à la page 111). • Réinstallez les modules de mémoire (reportez-vous à la page 72) pour vous assurer que votre ordinateur communique correctement avec la mémoire. • Exécutez Dell Diagnostics (reportez-vous à la page 52). SI VOUS RENCONTREZ D'AUTRES PROBLÈMES D E MÉMOIRE — • Réinstallez les modules de mémoire (reportez-vous à la page 72) pour vous assurer que votre ordinateur communique correctement avec la mémoire. • Assurez-vous de suivre les consignes d'installation de la mémoire (reportez-vous à la page 73). • Votre ordinateur prend en charge la mémoire DDR2. Pour plus d'informations sur le type de mémoire pris en charge par votre ordinateur, reportez-vous à la section «Mémoire» à la page 111. • Exécutez Dell Diagnostics (reportez-vous à la page 52). INSPECTEZ L E CÂBLE D E L A SOURIS — 1 Examinez le connecteur du câble pour voir si des broches sont pliées ou brisées et si des fils sont endommagés ou éraillés. Redressez les broches pliées. 2 Débranchez les câbles d'extension de la souris, s'ils sont utilisés, et connectez la souris directement à l'ordinateur. 3 Arrêtez l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la page 63), reconnectez le câble de la souris comme indiqué sur le schéma de configuration de votre ordinateur, puis redémarrez-le.42 Résolution de problèmes www.dell.com | support.dell.com Problèmes de réseau PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d’information sur le produit. REDÉMARREZ L'ORDINATEUR — 1 Appuyez simultanément sur <Échap> pour afficher le menu Démarrer. 2Tapez u, appuyez sur les touches de direction du clavier pour mettre en surbrillance Arrêt ou Mise hors tension et appuyez sur . 3 Une fois l'ordinateur hors tension, reconnectez le câble de la souris comme indiqué sur le schéma de configuration de votre ordinateur. 4 Démarrez l'ordinateur. TESTEZ LA SOURIS — Connectez une souris en bon état de marche à l'ordinateur et essayez-la. VÉRIFIEZ LES PARAMÈTRES D E L A SOURIS — 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, sur Panneau de configuration, puis sur Imprimantes et autres périphériques. 2 Cliquez sur Souris. 3Réglez les paramètres. RÉINSTALLEZ L E PILOTE D E L A SOURIS — Reportez-vous à la page 56. EXÉCUTEZ L E DÉPANNEUR DES CONFLITS MATÉRIELS — Reportez-vous à la page 59. INSPECTEZ L E CONNECTEUR D U CÂBLE RÉSEAU — Assurez-vous que le câble réseau est correctement inséré dans le connecteur réseau situé à l'arrière de l'ordinateur et dans la prise réseau. EXAMINEZ LES VOYANTS RÉSEAU À L'ARRIÈRE D E L'ORDINATEUR — Si le voyant d'intégrité de la liaison est éteint, la communication réseau n'est pas établie. Remplacez le câble de réseau. Pour une description des voyants réseau, reportez-vous à la section «Connecteurs» à la page 113. REDÉMARREZ L'ORDINATEUR E T RECONNECTEZ-VOUS A U RÉSEAU VÉRIFIEZ LES PARAMÈTRES D U RÉSEAU — Contactez l'administrateur de réseau pour qu'il vérifie vos paramètres et le fonctionnement du réseau.Résolution de problèmes 43 Problèmes d'alimentation PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d’information sur le produit. EXÉCUTEZ L E DÉPANNEUR DES CONFLITS MATÉRIELS — Reportez-vous à la page 59. SI L E VOYANT D'ALIMENTATION EST VERT E T QUE L'ORDINATEUR N E RÉPOND PAS — Reportez-vous à la section «Voyants de diagnostic» à la page 49. SI L E VOYANT D'ALIMENTATION EST VERT CLIGNOTANT — L'ordinateur est en mode Veille. Pour revenir au fonctionnement normal, appuyez sur une touche du clavier, déplacez la souris ou appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation. SI L E VOYANT D'ALIMENTATION EST ÉTEINT — L'ordinateur n'est pas sous tension ou n'est pas alimenté. • Rebranchez le câble d'alimentation dans le connecteur d'alimentation situé à l'arrière de l'ordinateur et dans la prise secteur. • Si l'ordinateur est connecté à une multiprise, vérifiez qu'elle est branchée au secteur et qu'elle est sous tension. Contournez également les parasurtenseurs, les multiprises et les rallonges d'alimentation pour vérifier que l'ordinateur est bien sous tension. • Assurez-vous que la prise secteur fonctionne en la testant à l'aide d'un autre appareil, une lampe par exemple. • Assurez-vous que le cordon d'alimentation principale et le câble du panneau avant sont solidement connectés à la carte système (reportez-vous à la page 71). SI L E VOYANT D'ALIMENTATION CLIGNOTE — L'ordinateur est alimenté, mais un problème d'alimentation interne s'est produit. • Assurez-vous que le commutateur de sélection de tension est bien réglé sur la tension secteur de votre région (le cas échéant). • Assurez-vous que le câble d'alimentation du processeur est solidement connecté à la carte système (reportez-vous à la page 71). SI L E VOYANT D'ALIMENTATION EST AMBRE E T CONSTANT — Un périphérique peut être défaillant ou mal installé. • Retirez et réinstallez les modules de mémoire (reportez-vous à la page 72). • Retirez et réinstallez toutes les cartes (reportez-vous à la page 75). • Retirez et réinstallez la carte graphique, le cas échéant (reportez-vous à la page 80).44 Résolution de problèmes www.dell.com | support.dell.com Problèmes d'imprimante PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d’information sur le produit. REMARQUE : Si vous avez besoin d'une assistance technique pour votre imprimante, contactez le fabricant. ÉLIMINEZ LES SOURCES D'INTERFÉRENCES — Les éventuelles causes d'interférences sont entre autres : • Les rallonges du clavier, de la souris et de l'alimentation • Un trop grand nombre de périphériques branchés sur une multiprise • Plusieurs multiprises connectées à la même prise secteur CONSULTEZ L A DOCUMENTATION D E L'IMPRIMANTE — Reportez-vous à la documentation de l'imprimante pour obtenir des informations de configuration et de dépannage. VÉRIFIEZ QUE L'IMPRIMANTE EST ALLUMÉE VÉRIFIEZ L A CONNEXION DES CÂBLES D E L'IMPRIMANTE — • Reportez-vous à la documentation de l'imprimante pour obtenir des informations sur la connexion des câbles. • Assurez-vous que les câbles de l'imprimante sont solidement connectés à l'imprimante et à l'ordinateur. TESTEZ LA PRISE SECTEUR — Assurez-vous que la prise secteur fonctionne en la testant à l'aide d'un autre appareil, une lampe par exemple. VÉRIFIEZ QUE L'IMPRIMANTE EST RECONNUE PAR WINDOWS — 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, sur Panneau de configuration, puis sur Imprimantes et autres périphériques. 2 Cliquez sur Afficher les imprimantes ou les télécopieurs installés. Si l'imprimante apparaît dans la liste, cliquez avec le bouton droit sur l'icône la représentant. 3 Cliquez sur Propriétés, puis sur l'onglet Ports. Pour une imprimante parallèle, vérifiez que le port d'impression est défini sur LPT1 (Port de l'imprimante). Pour une imprimante USB, vérifiez que le port d'impression est défini sur USB. RÉINSTALLEZ L E PILOTE D E L'IMPRIMANTE — Pour obtenir des instructions, reportez-vous à la documentation de l'imprimante.Résolution de problèmes 45 Problèmes de scanner PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d’information sur le produit. REMARQUE : Si vous avez besoin d'une assistance technique pour votre scanner, contactez le fabricant. Problèmes de son et de haut-parleurs PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d’information sur le produit. Les haut-parleurs n'émettent aucun son REMARQUE : Le volume de certains lecteurs MP3 annule l'effet du paramètre de volume de Windows. Si vous avez écouté des chansons au format MP3, vérifiez que vous n'avez pas baissé ou augmenté le volume. CONSULTEZ LA DOCUMENTATION D U SCANNER — Reportez-vous à la documentation du scanner pour obtenir des informations de configuration et de dépannage. DÉVERROUILLEZ L E SCANNER — Vérifiez que votre scanner est déverrouillé, s'il comporte un bouton ou une languette de verrouillage. REDÉMARREZ L'ORDINATEUR E T RÉESSAYEZ VÉRIFIEZ LA CONNEXION DES CÂBLES — • Reportez-vous à la documentation du scanner pour obtenir des informations sur la connexion des câbles. • Assurez-vous que les câbles du scanner sont solidement connectés au scanner et à l'ordinateur. ASSUREZ-VOUS QUE L E SCANNER EST RECONNU PAR MICROSOFT WINDOWS — 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, sur Panneau de configuration, puis sur Imprimantes et autres périphériques. 2 Cliquez sur Scanners et appareils-photo. Si votre scanner est répertorié, Windows le reconnaît. RÉINSTALLEZ L E PILOTE D U SCANNER — Reportez-vous à la documentation du scanner pour obtenir des instructions.46 Résolution de problèmes www.dell.com | support.dell.com Aucun son émis par les écouteurs VÉRIFIEZ L A CONNEXION DES CÂBLES DES HAUT-PARLEURS — Vérifiez que les haut-parleurs sont connectés comme indiqué sur le schéma de configuration fourni avec les haut-parleurs. Si vous avez acheté une carte son, assurez-vous que les haut-parleurs sont bien reliés à la carte. ASSUREZ-VOUS QUE L E CAISSON D'EXTRÊMES GRAVES E T LES HAUT-PARLEURS SONT SOUS TENSION — Reportez-vous au schéma de configuration fourni avec les haut-parleurs. Si vos hautparleurs sont dotés de commandes de volume, réglez le volume, les basses ou les aigus pour éliminer les distortions. RÉGLEZ L E VOLUME D E WINDOWS — Cliquez ou double-cliquez sur l'icône haut-parleur dans le coin inférieur droit de l'écran. Assurez-vous d'avoir monté le volume et que le son n'est pas mis en sourdine. DÉCONNECTEZ LES ÉCOUTEURS D U CONNECTEUR D'ÉCOUTEUR — Le son des haut-parleurs est automatiquement désactivé lorsque les écouteurs sont connectés au connecteur d'écouteur du panneau avant de l'ordinateur. TESTEZ LA PRISE SECTEUR — Assurez-vous que la prise secteur fonctionne en la testant à l'aide d'un autre appareil, une lampe par exemple. ÉLIMINEZ LES SOURCES POTENTIELLES D'INTERFÉRENCES — Éteignez les ventilateurs, tubes au néon ou lampes halogènes proches afin de vous assurer qu'ils ne produisent pas d'interférences. EXÉCUTEZ LES DIAGNOSTICS D U HAUT-PARLEUR RÉINSTALLEZ L E PILOTE D E SON — Reportez-vous à la page 55. EXÉCUTEZ L E DÉPANNEUR DES CONFLITS MATÉRIELS — Reportez-vous à la page 59. VÉRIFIEZ L A CONNEXION DES CÂBLES D U MONITEUR — Assurez-vous que le câble du casque à écouteurs est solidement connecté au connecteur du casque (reportez-vous à la page 66). RÉGLEZ L E VOLUME D E WINDOWS — Cliquez ou double-cliquez sur l'icône haut-parleur dans le coin inférieur droit de l'écran. Assurez-vous d'avoir monté le volume et que le son n'est pas mis en sourdine.Résolution de problèmes 47 Problèmes vidéo et moniteur PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d’information sur le produit. Si l'écran est noir REMARQUE : Reportez-vous à la documentation du moniteur pour consulter les procédures de dépannage. Si l'écran est difficile à lire VÉRIFIEZ LA CONNEXION DES CÂBLES D U MONITEUR — • Assurez-vous que le câble de la carte graphique est connecté comme indiqué sur le schéma de configuration de votre ordinateur. • Si vous utilisez un câble d'extension pour la carte graphique et que le fait de l'éliminer résout le problème, le câble est défectueux. • Changez les câbles d'alimentation de l'ordinateur et du moniteur pour déterminer si ces câbles sont défectueux. • Examinez le connecteur pour voir si des broches sont pliées ou brisées. (Certaines broches doivent normalement manquer sur les connecteurs du câble du moniteur.) VÉRIFIEZ L E VOYANT D'ALIMENTATION D U MONITEUR — Si le voyant d'alimentation est éteint, appuyez fermement sur le bouton pour vous assurer que le moniteur est sous tension. Si le voyant d'alimentation est allumé ou s'il clignote, le moniteur est alimenté. Si le voyant d'alimentation clignote, appuyez sur une touche du clavier ou déplacez la souris. TESTEZ L A PRISE SECTEUR — Assurez-vous que la prise secteur fonctionne en la testant à l'aide d'un autre appareil, une lampe par exemple. VÉRIFIEZ LES VOYANTS D E DIAGNOSTIC — Reportez-vous à la page 49. VÉRIFIEZ LES PARAMÈTRES D U MONITEUR — Reportez-vous à la documentation du moniteur pour obtenir les instructions relatives au réglage du contraste et de la luminosité, à la démagnétisation du moniteur et à l'exécution de l'autotest. ÉLOIGNEZ L E CAISSON D'EXTRÊMES GRAVES D U MONITEUR — Si votre système de haut-parleurs inclut un caisson d'extrêmes graves, assurez-vous qu'il se trouve à au moins 60 cm (2 pieds) du moniteur.48 Résolution de problèmes www.dell.com | support.dell.com ÉLOIGNEZ L E MONITEUR DES SOURCES D'ALIMENTATION ÉLECTRIQUE EXTERNE — Les ventilateurs, tubes au néon, lampes halogènes et autres appareils électriques peuvent produire des interférences sur l'image de l'écran. Éteignez les appareils à proximité pour vous assurer qu'ils ne produisent pas d'interférences. FAITES PIVOTER L E MONITEUR AFIN Q U'I L N E SOIT PLUS EXPOSÉ AUX RAYONS D U SOLEIL NI À D'ÉVENTUELLES INTERFÉRENCES RÉGLEZ LES PARAMÈTRES D'AFFICHAGE D E WINDOWS — 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration et sur Apparence et thèmes. 2 Cliquez sur Affichage, puis sur l'onglet Paramètres. 3 Essayez différents paramètres de Résolution de l'écran et Qualité couleur.Dépannage avancé 49 Dépannage avancé Voyants de diagnostic PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d’information sur le produit. Afin de vous aider à résoudre vos problèmes, votre ordinateur est muni de quatre voyants, «A», «B», «C» et «D», situés sur le panneau arrière (reportez-vous à la page 67). Ces voyants peuvent être jaunes ou verts. Si l'ordinateur démarre normalement, les voyants clignotent. Après le démarrage de l'ordinateur, les quatre voyants sont vert constant. Si l'ordinateur ne fonctionne pas correctement, la couleur et la séquence des voyants permettent d'identifier le problème. Couleurs des voyants Description du problème Solution proposée L'ordinateur est en condition d'arrêt normale ou une panne est survenue avant le BIOS. Raccordez l'ordinateur à une prise secteur qui fonctionne et appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation. Une défaillance du processeur semble s'être produite. Réinstallez le processeur (reportez-vous à la page 99) et redémarrez l'ordinateur. ABCD ABCD = jaune = vert = éteint50 Dépannage avancé www.dell.com | support.dell.com Les modules de mémoire sont détectés, mais une panne de mémoire est survenue. • Si deux ou plusieurs modules de mémoire ont été installés, retirez les modules, réinstallez un module (reportez-vous à la page 73), puis redémarrez l'ordinateur. Si l'ordinateur redémarre normalement, réinstallez un autre module. Répétez cette procédure jusqu'à identification du module défectueux ou réinstallation de tous les modules sans erreur. • Si possible, installez une mémoire en bon état de marche du même type dans l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la page 73). • Si le problème persiste, contactez Dell (reportez-vous à la page 124). Une défaillance de la carte graphique semble s'être produite. • Si l'ordinateur est doté d'une carte graphique, retirez-la (reportez-vous à la page 83), réinstallez-la, puis redémarrez l'ordinateur. • Si le problème persiste, installez une carte graphique qui fonctionne et redémarrez l'ordinateur. • Si le problème persiste ou si l'ordinateur est doté d'une carte graphique intégrée, contactez Dell (reportez-vous à la page 124). Panne possible de la souris ou du disque dur. Réinstallez tous les câbles de données et d'alimentation, puis redémarrez l'ordinateur. Panne USB possible. Réinstallez tous les périphériques USB, vérifiez la connexion des câbles, puis redémarrez l'ordinateur. Couleurs des voyants Description du problème Solution proposée = jaune = vert = éteint ABCD ABCD ABCD ABCDDépannage avancé 51 Aucun module de mémoire n'a été détecté. • Si deux ou plusieurs modules de mémoire ont été installés, retirez les modules, réinstallez un module (reportez-vous à la page 73), puis redémarrez l'ordinateur. Si l'ordinateur redémarre normalement, réinstallez un autre module. Répétez cette procédure jusqu'à identification du module défectueux ou réinstallation de tous les modules sans erreur. • Si possible, installez une mémoire en bon état de marche du même type dans l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la page 73). • Si le problème persiste, contactez Dell (reportez-vous à la page 124). Les modules de mémoire sont détectés, mais une erreur de configuration de mémoire ou de compatibilité est survenue. • Vérifiez qu'il n'existe aucune exigence particulière de placement des modules et des connecteurs de mémoire (reportez-vous à la page 72). • Assurez-vous que les modules de mémoire que vous installez sont compatibles avec l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la page 72). • Si le problème persiste, contactez Dell (reportez-vous à la page 124). Panne possible de carte d'extension. 1 Déterminez si un conflit existe en retirant une carte (pas la carte graphique) et en redémarrant l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la page 76). 2 Si le problème persiste, réinstallez la carte que vous venez de retirer, retirez une autre carte, puis redémarrez l'ordinateur. 3Répétez cette procédure pour chaque carte. Si l'ordinateur démarre normalement, dépannez la dernière carte retirée de l'ordinateur pour résoudre les conflits de ressources (reportezvous à la section page 59). 4 Si le problème persiste, contactez Dell (reportez-vous à la page 124). Couleurs des voyants Description du problème Solution proposée = jaune = vert = éteint ABCD ABCD ABCD52 Dépannage avancé www.dell.com | support.dell.com Dell Diagnostics PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d’information sur le produit. Quand utiliser Dell Diagnostics Si vous rencontrez un problème avec votre ordinateur, procédez aux vérifications décrites dans la section «Résolution des problèmes» (voir page 33) et exécutez Dell Diagnostics avant de contacter Dell pour obtenir une assistance technique. AVIS : Dell Diagnostics fonctionne seulement avec les ordinateurs Dell™. Démarrez Dell Diagnostics à partir du disque dur (reportez-vous à la page 52) ou du CD ResourceCD Dell Dimension. Autre panne possible. • Assurez-vous que les câbles partant du disque dur, du lecteur de CD et de DVD sont correctement connectés à la carte système (reportez-vous à la page 71). • Si un message d'erreur signalant un problème avec un périphérique (lecteur de disquette ou disque dur) s'affiche à l'écran, vérifiez que le périphérique fonctionne correctement. • Le système d'exploitation essaie de démarrer à partir d'un périphérique (lecteur de disquette ou disque dur) ; vérifiez dans le programme de configuration du système (reportez-vous à la page 115) que la séquence de démarrage est correcte pour les périphériques installés sur l'ordinateur. • Si le problème persiste, contactez Dell (reportez-vous à la page 124). L'ordinateur fonctionne normalement après le POST. Aucune. Couleurs des voyants Description du problème Solution proposée = jaune = vert = éteint ABCD ABCDDépannage avancé 53 Démarrage Dell Diagnostics à partir du disque dur 1 Mettez votre ordinateur sous tension (ou redémarrez-le). 2 Lorsque le logo DELL™ apparaît, appuyez immédiatement sur . REMARQUE : Si un message indique qu'aucune partition d'utilitaire de diagnostics n'a été détectée, exécutez Dell Diagnostics à partir du CD ResourceCD(reportez-vous à la page 53). Si vous attendez trop longtemps et que le logo du système d'exploitation apparaît, patientez jusqu'à ce que vous voyiez le bureau de Microsoft® Windows®. Éteignez alors l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section page 63) et faites une nouvelle tentative. 3 Lorsque la liste des périphériques d'amorçage s'affiche, sélectionnez Amorcez sur la partition de l'utilitaire et appuyez sur . 4 Lorsque le menu principal Dell Diagnostics apparaît, sélectionnez le test à effectuer (reportez-vous à la page 54). Démarrage de Dell Diagnostics à partir du CD ResourceCD 1 Insérez le CD ResourceCD. 2 Éteignez et redémarrez l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la page 63). Lorsque le logo DELL apparaît, appuyez immédiatement sur . Si vous attendez trop longtemps et que le logo Windows apparaît, attendez encore jusqu'à ce que le bureau Windows s'affiche. Éteignez alors l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section page 63) et faites une nouvelle tentative. REMARQUE : Les étapes suivantes ne modifient la séquence d'amorçage qu'une seule fois. Au démarrage suivant, l'ordinateur démarre en fonction des périphériques définis dans le programme de configuration du système. 3 Lorsque la liste des périphériques d'amorçage s'affiche, sélectionnez Périphérique de CDROM IDE et appuyez sur . 4 Sélectionnez l'option Périphérique de CD-ROM IDE dans le menu d'amorçage du CD. 5 Sélectionnez l'option Amorcer à partir du CD-ROM dans le menu qui s'affiche. 6 Saisissez 1 pour ouvrir le menu de ResourceCD. 7 Saisissez 2 pour démarrer Dell Diagnostics. 8 Sélectionnez Exécuter Dell Diagnostics 32 bits depuis la liste numérotée. Si plusieurs versions sont répertoriées, sélectionnez la version appropriée à votre ordinateur. 9 Lorsque le menu principal Dell Diagnostics apparaît, sélectionnez le test à effectuer (reportez-vous à la page 54).54 Dépannage avancé www.dell.com | support.dell.com Menu principal de Dell Diagnostics 1 Une fois Dell Diagnostics chargé et l'écran du menu principal affiché, cliquez sur le bouton correspondant à l'option souhaitée. 2 Si un problème survient pendant un test, un message indiquant le code d'erreur et une description du problème s'affichent. Notez le code d'erreur et la description du problème et suivez les instructions. Si vous ne pouvez pas résoudre le problème, contactez Dell (reportez-vous à la page 124). REMARQUE : Le numéro de service de votre ordinateur s'affiche dans la partie supérieure de chaque écran de test. Lorsque vous contacterez le service technique de Dell, ce numéro de service vous sera demandé. 3 Si vous effectuez un test à partir de l'option Test personnalisé ou Arborescence des symptômes, cliquez sur l'onglet approprié décrit dans le tableau suivant pour en savoir plus. Option Fonction Express Test (Test rapide) Exécute un test rapide des périphériques. Ce test dure généralement entre 10 et 20 minutes et n'exige pas d'action de votre part. Effectuez un test rapide en premier pour trouver le problème plus rapidement. Extended Test (Test approfondi) Exécute un test approfondi des périphériques. Ce test dure généralement une heure ou plus et vous demande de répondre régulièrement à des questions. Custom Test (Test personnalisé) Teste un périphérique spécifique. Vous pouvez personnaliser les tests à exécuter. Symptom Tree (Arborescence des symptômes) Répertorie les symptômes couramment rencontrés et permet de sélectionner un test en fonction du symptôme du problème. Onglet Fonction Résultats Affiche les résultats du test et les conditions des erreur rencontrées. Erreurs Affiche les conditions des erreur rencontrées, les codes d'erreur et la description du problème. Aide Décrit le test et peut indiquer les conditions requises pour exécuter le test.Dépannage avancé 55 4 Une fois les tests terminés, si vous effectuez Dell Diagnostics à partir du CD ResourceCD, retirez-le. 5 Fermez l'écran test pour revenir à l'écran du menu principal. Pour quitter Dell Diagnostics et redémarrer l'ordinateur, fermez l'écran du menu principal. Pilotes Qu'est-ce qu'un pilote ? Un pilote est un programme qui contrôle un périphérique, tel qu'une imprimante, une souris ou un clavier. Tous les périphériques requièrent un pilote. Un pilote joue le rôle de traducteur entre le périphérique et tous les programmes qui l'utilisent. Chaque périphérique utilise un ensemble de commandes spécialisées que seul son pilote reconnaît. Lorsque Dell livre l'ordinateur, les pilotes requis sont déjà installés — aucune installation ou configuration supplémentaire n'est nécessaire. AVIS : Le CD ResourceCD Dell Dimension peut contenir des pilotes pour des systèmes d'exploitation qui ne sont pas installés sur votre ordinateur. Assurez-vous que vous installez les logiciels appropriés à votre système d'exploitation. De nombreux pilotes, tels que le pilote du clavier, sont fournis par le système d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows®. Il se peut que vous deviez installer des pilotes si : • vous mettez à jour votre système d'exploitation ; • vous réinstallez votre système d'exploitation ; • vous connectez ou installez un nouveau périphérique. Identification des pilotes Si vous rencontrez un problème avec un périphérique, identifiez si le pilote est la source du problème et, si nécessaire, mettez-le à jour. Configuration Affiche la configuration matérielle du périphérique sélectionné. Dell Diagnostics obtient vos informations de configuration de tous les périphériques à partir du programme d'installation du système, de la mémoire et de divers tests internes, et les affiche dans la liste des périphériques située dans le volet gauche de l'écran. La liste des périphériques risque de ne pas afficher les noms de tous les composants installés sur votre ordinateur ou de tous les périphériques reliés à celui-ci. Paramètres Vous permet de personnaliser le test en modifiant ses paramètres. Onglet Fonction56 Dépannage avancé www.dell.com | support.dell.com Windows XP 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration. 2 Sous Choisissez une catégorie, cliquez sur Performances et maintenance. 3 Cliquez sur Système. 4 Dans l'écran Propriétés du système, cliquez sur l'onglet Matériel. 5 Cliquez sur Gestionnaire de périphériques. 6 Faites défiler la liste vers le bas pour vérifier qu'il n'y a aucun point d'exclamation (cercle jaune avec un [!]) devant le périphérique, au niveau de son icône. Si vous voyez un point d'exclamation en regard du nom du périphérique, vous devrez peut- être réinstaller le pilote ou installer un nouveau pilote (reportez-vous à la page 55). Réinstallation des pilotes AVIS : Le site Web de support de Dell à l'adresse support.dell.com et le CDDell Dimension ResourceCD fournissent les pilotes appropriés pour les ordinateurs Dell™. Si vous installez des pilotes que vous avez obtenus par d'autres moyens, votre ordinateur risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement. Utilisation de la fonction Restauration des pilotes de périphériques de Windows XP Si un problème se produit sur votre ordinateur après l'installation ou la mise à jour d'un pilote, utilisez la fonction de Restauration des pilotes de périphériques de Windows XP pour remplacer le pilote par sa version précédente. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration. 2 Sous Choisissez une catégorie, cliquez sur Performances et maintenance. 3 Cliquez sur Système. 4 Dans l'écran Propriétés du système, cliquez sur l'onglet Matériel. 5 Cliquez sur Gestionnaire de périphériques. 6 Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur le périphérique pour lequel le nouveau pilote a été installé et cliquez sur Propriétés. 7 Cliquez sur l'onglet Pilotes. 8 Cliquez sur Restauration des pilotes. Si la fonction Restauration des pilotes de périphériques ne résout pas le problème, utilisez la fonction Restauration du système pour retourner à un état opérationnel de votre système d'exploitation antérieur à l'installation du nouveau pilote de périphérique. Utilisation du CD ResourceCD Si l'utilisation de la fonction Restauration des pilotes de périphériques ou Restauration du système ne permet pas de résoudre le problème, réinstallez le pilote à partir du CD ResourceCD. 1 Lorsque le bureau de Windows s'affiche, insérez le CD ResourceCD.Dépannage avancé 57 Si vous utilisez pour la première fois le CD ResourceCD, passez à l'étape 2. Sinon, passez à l'étape 5. 2 Lorsque le programme d'installation ResourceCD démarre, répondez aux invites qui s'affichent. 3 Lorsque la fenêtre Assistant InstallShield exécuté apparaît, retirez le CD ResourceCD et cliquez sur Terminer pour redémarrer l'ordinateur. 4 Lorsque le bureau de Windows s'affiche, réinsérez le CD ResourceCD. 5 Dans l'écran Bienvenue au propriétaire du système Dell, cliquez sur Suivant. REMARQUE : Le CD ResourceCD affiche uniquement les pilotes du matériel fourni avec votre ordinateur. Si vous avez installé du matériel supplémentaire, les pilotes du nouveau matériel ne sont peut-être pas affichés par ResourceCD. Si ces pilotes ne sont pas présents, quittez le programme ResourceCD. Pour plus d'informations sur ces pilotes, reportez-vous à la documentation des périphériques correspondants. Un message précisant que ResourceCD est en train de détecter le matériel de votre ordinateur s'affiche. Les pilotes utilisés par votre ordinateur sont affichés automatiquement dans la fenêtre Pilotes — ResourceCD a identifié les composants suivants dans votre système. 6 Cliquez sur le pilote que vous souhaitez réinstaller et suivez les instructions à l'écran. Si un pilote spécifique n'est pas répertorié, ce pilote n'est pas requis par votre système d'exploitation. Réinstallation manuelle des pilotes 1 Une fois les fichiers de pilote extraits vers votre disque dur, tel que décrit dans la section précédente, cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis cliquez avec le bouton droit sur Poste de travail. 2 Cliquez sur Propriétés. 3 Cliquez sur l'onglet Matériel, puis sur Gestionnaire de périphériques. 4 Double-cliquez sur le type de périphérique pour lequel vous installez le pilote. 5 Double-cliquez sur le nom du périphérique pour lequel vous installez le pilote. 6 Cliquez sur l'onglet Pilote, puis sur Mettre à jour le pilote. 7 Cliquez sur Installer à partir d'une liste ou d'un emplacement spécifique (Avancé), puis sur Suivant. 8 Cliquez sur Parcourir, et retournez à l'emplacement vers lequel vous avez extrait les fichiers du pilote. 9 Lorsque le nom du pilote approprié apparaît, cliquez sur Suivant. 10 Cliquez sur Terminer et redémarrez l'ordinateur.58 Dépannage avancé www.dell.com | support.dell.com Utilisation de la fonction Restauration du système de Microsoft® Windows® XP Le système d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows® XP inclut la fonction Restauration du système, qui vous permet de restaurer l'ordinateur à un état antérieur (sans affecter les fichiers de données) si les modifications apportées au matériel, aux logiciels ou aux paramètres du système empêchent l'ordinateur de fonctionner correctement. Consultez le Centre d'aide et de support Windows pour plus d'informations sur l'utilisation de la fonction Restauration du système. Pour accéder à l'aide, reportez-vous à la page 12. AVIS : Effectuez des sauvegardes régulières de vos fichiers de données. La fonction Restauration du système ne contrôle pas vos fichiers de données et ne permet pas de les récupérer. Création d'un point de restauration 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Aide et support. 2 Cliquez sur Restauration du système. 3 Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent. Restauration de l'ordinateur à un état antérieur Si des problèmes surviennent après l'installation d'un pilote de périphérique, utilisez la fonction Restauration des pilotes de périphériques (reportez-vous à la page 56) pour résoudre le problème. Si le problème persiste, utilisez la fonction Restauration du système. AVIS : Avant de restaurer l'ordinateur à un état antérieur, enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers et quittez tous les programmes. Évitez de modifier, d'ouvrir ou de supprimer des fichiers ou des programmes tant que la restauration du système n'est pas terminée. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Tous les programmes→ Accessoires→ Outils système, puis cliquez sur Restauration du système. 2 Assurez-vous que l'option Remettre mon ordinateur dans un état antérieur est sélectionnée, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 3 Cliquez sur une date du calendrier à laquelle vous souhaitez restaurer votre ordinateur. L'écran Sélectionner un point de restauration affiche un calendrier vous permettant de sélectionner des points de restauration. Toutes les dates du calendrier comportant des points de restauration apparaissent en gras. 4 Sélectionnez un point de restauration, puis cliquez sur Suivant. Si une date du calendrier contient un seul point de restauration, ce dernier est sélectionné automatiquement. Si plusieurs points de restauration sont disponibles, cliquez sur celui que vous souhaitez utiliser. 5 Cliquez sur Suivant.Dépannage avancé 59 L'écran Restauration complète apparaît une fois que la fonction Restauration du système termine la collecte de données et l'ordinateur redémarre. 6 Une fois l'ordinateur redémarré, cliquez sur OK. Pour changer de point de restauration, répétez les étapes précédentes en utilisant un autre point de restauration ou annulez la restauration. Annulation de la dernière restauration du système AVIS : Avant de procéder à l'annulation de la dernière restauration système, enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers et quittez tous les programmes. Évitez de modifier, d'ouvrir ou de supprimer des fichiers ou des programmes tant que la restauration du système n'est pas terminée. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Tous les programmes→ Accessoires→ Outils système, puis cliquez sur Restauration système. 2 Cliquez sur Annuler ma dernière restauration, puis sur Suivant. 3 Cliquez sur Suivant. L'écran Restauration du système apparaît et l'ordinateur redémarre. 4 Une fois l'ordinateur redémarré, cliquez sur OK. Activation de la Restauration du système Si vous réinstallez Windows XP avec moins de 200 Mo d'espace disponible sur le disque dur, la fonction Restauration du système est automatiquement désactivée. Pour vérifier que la Restauration du système est activée : 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration. 2 Cliquez sur Performances et maintenance. 3 Cliquez sur Système. 4 Cliquez sur l'onglet Restauration du système. 5 Assurez-vous que l'option Désactiver la Restauration du système n'est pas cochée. Résolution des incompatibilités logicielles et matérielles Si un périphérique n'est pas détecté pendant la configuration du système d'exploitation ou est détecté mais n'est pas configuré correctement, utilisez le Dépanneur des conflits matériels pour résoudre cette incompatibilité. Pour résoudre les problèmes d'incompatibilité à l'aide du Dépanneur des conflits matériels : 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Aide et support. 2 Entrez Dépanneur des conflits matériels dans le champ Rechercher, puis cliquez sur la flèche pour lancer la recherche. 3 Cliquez sur Dépanneur des conflits matériels dans la liste Résultats de la recherche. 60 Dépannage avancé www.dell.com | support.dell.com 4 Dans la liste Dépanneur des conflits matériels, cliquez sur Je dois résoudre un conflit matériel sur mon ordinateur, puis sur Suivant. Réinstallation de Microsoft® Windows® XP AVIS : Vous devez utiliser Windows XP Service Pack 1 (SP1) ou version ultérieure lorsque vous réinstallez Windows XP. Avant de commencer Si vous envisagez de réinstaller le système d'exploitation Windows XP afin de corriger un problème causé par un nouveau pilote, essayez d'utiliser d'abord la fonction Restauration des pilotes de périphériques de Windows XP (reportez-vous à la page 56). Si la fonction Restauration des pilotes de périphériques ne résout pas le problème, utilisez la fonction Restauration du système (reportezvous à la page 58) pour remettre votre système d'exploitation dans un état de fonctionnement antérieur à l'installation du nouveau pilote de périphérique. AVIS : Avant d'effectuer l'installation, sauvegardez tous les fichiers de données de votre disque dur principal. Pour les configurations de disque dur conventionnelles, le disque dur principal correspond au premier disque dur détecté par l'ordinateur. Pour réinstaller Windows XP, vous devez disposer des éléments suivants : • CD Système d'exploitation de Dell™ • CD ResourceCD de Dell™ REMARQUE : Le CD ResourceCD contient les pilotes installés lors de l'assemblage de l'ordinateur. Utilisez le CD ResourceCD pour charger les pilotes requis. Réinstallation de Windows XP Pour réinstaller Windows XP, effectuez les étapes des sections suivantes dans l'ordre de leur présentation. Le processus de réinstallation peut prendre 1 à 2 heures. Une fois le système d'exploitation réinstallé, vous devez également réinstaller les pilotes de périphérique, le programme de protection antivirus et les autres logiciels. AVIS : Le CD Système d'exploitation fournit des options de réinstallation du système d'exploitation Windows XP. Ces options peuvent remplacer des fichiers installés et affecter les programmes installés sur le disque dur. C'est pourquoi, il n'est pas conseillé de réinstaller Windows XP, sauf si un représentant du support technique de Dell vous y invite. AVIS : Pour éviter des conflits avec Windows XP, vous devez désactiver tout logiciel de protection antivirus installé sur l'ordinateur avant de réinstaller Windows XP. Pour obtenir des instructions, consultez la documentation fournie avec le logiciel. Démarrage à partir du CD Système d'exploitation 1 Enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers et quittez tous les programmes en cours d'utilisation.Dépannage avancé 61 2 Insérez le CD Système d'exploitation. Cliquez sur Quitter si le message Installer Windows XP apparaît. 3 Redémarrez l'ordinateur. 4 Appuyez sur dès l'apparition du logo DELL™. Si le logo du système d'exploitation s'affiche, attendez l'apparition du bureau Windows, arrêtez l'ordinateur et recommencez. 5 Utilisez les touches de direction pour sélectionner l'option CD-ROM, puis appuyez sur . 6 Lorsque le message Appuyez sur une touche pour démarrer depuis le CD apparaît, appuyez sur une touche. Programme d'installation de Windows XP 1 Lorsque l'écran Installation de Windows XP apparaît, appuyez sur pour sélectionner Pour installer Windows maintenant. 2 Lisez les informations de l'écran Contrat de licence Microsoft Windows, puis appuyez sur la touche pour accepter le contrat de licence. 3 Si Windows XP est déjà installé sur votre ordinateur et que vous souhaitez récupérer vos données Windows XP actuelles, tapez r pour sélectionner l'option de réparation, puis retirez le CD. 4 Si vous souhaitez installer une nouvelle copie de Windows XP, appuyez sur <Échap> pour sélectionner cette option. 5 Appuyez sur pour sélectionner la partition en surbrillance (recommandé), puis suivez les instructions à l'écran. L'écran Installation de Windows XP s'affiche et le système d'exploitation commence à copier les fichiers et à installer les périphériques. L'ordinateur redémarre automatiquement plusieurs fois. REMARQUE : Le temps nécessaire pour exécuter le programme d'installation dépend de la taille du disque dur et de la vitesse de votre ordinateur. AVIS : N'appuyez sur aucune touche lorsque le message suivant s'affiche : Appuyez sur n'importe quelle touche pour amorcer à partir du CD. 6 Lorsque l'écran Options régionales et linguistiques s'affiche, sélectionnez les paramètres de votre région, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 7 Entrez votre nom et le nom de votre organisation (facultatif) dans l'écran Personnalisez votre logiciel, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 8 Si vous réinstallez Windows XP Édition Familiale, entrez un nom pour votre ordinateur lorsque la fenêtre Nom de l'ordinateur apparaît (ou acceptez le nom proposé), puis cliquez sur Suivant.62 Dépannage avancé www.dell.com | support.dell.com Si vous réinstallez Windows XP Professionnel, entrez un nom et un mot de passe pour votre ordinateur lorsque la fenêtre Nom de l'ordinateur et mot de passe Administrateur s'affiche (ou acceptez les noms proposés), puis cliquez sur Suivant. 9 Si l'écran Informations de numérotation pour le modem s'affiche, entrez les informations demandées et cliquez sur Suivant. 10 Entrez la date, l'heure et le fuseau horaire dans la fenêtre Paramètres de la date et de l'heure, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 11 Si l'écran Paramètres de mise en réseau s'affiche, cliquez sur Type, puis sur Suivant. 12 Si vous réinstallez Windows XP Professionnel et que le système vous demande des informations supplémentaires sur votre configuration réseau, entrez vos choix. Si vous n'êtes pas sûr de vos paramètres, acceptez les paramètres par défaut. Windows XP installe les composants du système d'exploitation et configure l'ordinateur. L'ordinateur redémarre automatiquement. AVIS : N'appuyez sur aucune touche lorsque le message suivant s'affiche : Appuyez sur une touche pour amorcer l'ordinateur à partir du CD. 13 Lorsque l'écran Bienvenue dans Microsoft s'affiche, cliquez sur Suivant. 14 Lorsque le message Comment cet ordinateur sera-t-il connecté à Internet ? apparaît, cliquez sur Ignorer. 15 Lorsque le message Prêt à vous enregistrer auprès de Microsoft ? apparaît, sélectionnez Non, pas cette fois-ci et cliquez sur Suivant. 16 Lorsque le message Qui va utiliser cet ordinateur ? apparaît, vous pouvez entrer jusqu'à cinq utilisateurs. 17 Cliquez sur Suivant. 18 Cliquez sur Terminer pour achever l'installation et retirez le CD. 19 Réinstallez les pilotes appropriés à l'aide du CD ResourceCD (reportez-vous à la page 56). 20 Réinstallez votre logiciel de protection antivirus. 21 Réinstallez vos logiciels. REMARQUE : Pour réinstaller et activer vos programmes Microsoft Office ou Microsoft Works Suite, il vous faut le numéro de clé de produit situé à l'arrière de la pochette du CD Microsoft Office ou Microsoft Works Suite.Retrait et installation de pièces 63 Retrait et installation de pièces Avant de commencer Ce chapitre fournit les instructions de retrait et d'installation des composants de votre ordinateur. À moins d'indication contraire, les conditions suivantes doivent être remplies préalablement à chaque procédure : • Vous avez effectué les étapes des sections «Mise hors tension de votre ordinateur» (reportezvous à la page 63) et «Avant toute intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur» (reportezvous à la page 64). • Vous avez lu les consignes de sécurité qui figurent dans le Guide d’information sur le système Dell™. • Un composant peut être remis en place en effectuant la procédure de retrait dans l'ordre inverse. Outils recommandés Les procédures mentionnées dans ce guide nécessitent les outils suivants : • un petit tournevis à lame plate • un tournevis cruciforme • la disquette ou le CD du programme de mise à jour du Flash BIOS Mise hors tension de l'ordinateur AVIS : Afin d'éviter toute perte de données, enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers et quittez tous les programmes avant d'éteindre l'ordinateur. 1 Arrêt du système d'exploitation : a Enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers, quittez tous les programmes, cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Arrêter l'ordinateur. b Dans la fenêtre Arrêter l'ordinateur, cliquez sur Arrêter/Éteindre. L'ordinateur s'éteint une fois le processus d'arrêt terminé. 2 Vérifiez que l'ordinateur et ses périphériques sont hors tension. Si l'ordinateur et ses périphériques ne se sont pas éteints automatiquement lorsque vous avez arrêté le système d'exploitation, appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation et maintenez-le enfoncé pendant 4 secondes.64 Retrait et installation de pièces www.dell.com | support.dell.com Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur Respectez les consignes de sécurité suivantes pour vous aider à protéger votre ordinateur de dommages éventuels et pour garantir votre sécurité personnelle. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d’information sur le produit. PRÉCAUTION : Manipulez les composants et les cartes avec précaution. Ne touchez pas les composants ou les contacts d'une carte. Tenez une carte par les bords ou par la patte de montage métallique. Tenez un composant, tel qu'un processeur par les bords et non par les broches. AVIS : Seul un technicien de service certifié doit effectuer les réparations sur votre ordinateur. Les dommages causés par une personne non agréée par Dell ne sont pas couverts par votre garantie. AVIS : Lorsque vous débranchez un câble, tirez sur le connecteur ou sur la boucle prévue, mais jamais sur le câble lui-même. Certains câbles sont munis d'un connecteur à languettes verrouillables ; si vous déconnectez un câble de ce type, pressez sur les languettes avant de déconnecter le câble. Quand vous séparez les connecteurs en tirant dessus, veillez à les maintenir alignés pour ne pas plier de broches de connecteur. De même, lorsque vous connectez un câble, assurez-vous que les deux connecteurs sont bien orientés et alignés. AVIS : Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur, suivez les étapes ci-dessous pour éviter de l'endommager. 1 Mettez votre ordinateur hors tension (reportez-vous à la page 63). AVIS : Pour déconnecter un câble réseau, débranchez-le d'abord de l'ordinateur puis de la prise réseau murale. 2 Débranchez tous les fils de téléphone ou de télécommunication de l'ordinateur. 3 Déconnectez l'ordinateur et tous ses périphériques de leurs prises secteur, puis appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation pour mettre la carte système à la masse. PRÉCAUTION : Pour éviter tout risque d'électrocution, débranchez toujours l'ordinateur de la prise secteur avant d'ouvrir son capot. 4 Ouvrez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la page 69). AVIS : Avant de toucher un élément à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur, mettez-vous à la terre en touchant une surface métallique non peinte, comme la partie métallique à l'arrière de l'ordinateur. Pendant votre travail à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur, touchez régulièrement une surface métallique non peinte pour dissiper toute électricité statique qui pourrait endommager les composants internes.Retrait et installation de pièces 65 Vues avant et arrière de l'ordinateur Vue avant 2 1 3 4 1 voyant d'activité du disque dur Le voyant de l'unité de disque dur s'allume lorsque l'ordinateur lit ou écrit des données sur le disque dur. Le voyant peut également être allumé lorsqu'un périphérique, comme le lecteur de CD, fonctionne. 2 bouton d'alimentation Appuyez sur ce bouton pour allumer l'ordinateur. AVIS : Pour éviter de perdre des données, n'utilisez pas le bouton d'alimentation pour éteindre l'ordinateur. Procédez plutôt à un arrêt du système d'exploitation. 3 porte des lecteurs Ouvrez la porte des lecteurs pour accéder aux lecteurs de disquette et de CD/DVD. 4 porte du panneau avant Ouvrez cette porte pour utiliser les connecteurs du panneau avant. REMARQUE : La porte avant est amovible ; si vous la retirez ou si vous la sortez accidentellement de ses charnières, elle se remet en place en s'enclenchant. Pour obtenir les instructions de fixation de la porte, reportez-vous à la page 107. 66 Retrait et installation de pièces www.dell.com | support.dell.com Vue avant (portes ouvertes) 2 1 3 4 1 connecteur d'écouteur Utilisez le connecteur d'écouteur pour connecter le casque et les haut-parleurs. 2 connecteur de microphone Utilisez le connecteur de microphone pour raccorder un microphone d'ordinateur personnel destiné à une entrée vocale ou musicale dans un programme sonore ou de téléphonie. 3 connecteurs USB 2.0 (2) Utilisez les connecteurs USB situés à l'avant pour les périphériques qui sont connectés occasionnellement, comme les manettes de jeu ou les appareils photo. Il est recommandé d'utiliser les connecteurs USB situés à l'arrière pour les périphériques qui restent connectés en permanence, comme les imprimantes et les claviers. 4 connecteur IEEE 1394 Reliez à ce connecteur des périphériques multimédia série à grande vitesse, comme les caméras vidéo numériques.Retrait et installation de pièces 67 Vue arrière 7 11 9 2 1 3 13 12 15 16 5 17 19 8 6 14 4 10 18 1 ventilateurs du processeur (2) Pour un refroidissement optimal, deux ventilateurs de processeur sont prévus. Ne bloquez pas les grilles de refroidissement. 2 loquet du capot Pour ouvrir l'ordinateur, couchez-le sur le côté en positionnant le loquet du capot vers le haut, puis poussez ce loquet vers la gauche. Reportez-vous à la section «Ouverture du capot de l'ordinateur» à la page 69. 3 connecteur de carte réseau Pour connecter l'ordinateur à un périphérique réseau ou large bande, branchez l'une des extrémités du câble réseau à une prise réseau, un périphérique réseau ou un périphérique large bande. Connectez l'autre extrémité du câble au connecteur de carte réseau situé sur le panneau arrière de votre ordinateur. Un clic signifie que le câble réseau est correctement fixé. REMARQUE : Ne branchez pas de câble téléphonique au connecteur réseau. Sur les ordinateurs équipés d'une carte réseau, utilisez le connecteur situé sur la carte. Il est recommandé d'utiliser un câblage et des connecteurs de catégorie 5 pour le réseau. Si vous devez utiliser un câblage de catégorie 3, forcez la vitesse du réseau à 10 Mbps pour garantir un fonctionnement fiable. prise du réseau ou de large bande68 Retrait et installation de pièces www.dell.com | support.dell.com 4 connecteur de sortie Téléviseur Permet de relier l'ordinateur à un téléviseur. Pour plus d'informations, reportezvous à la section «Connexion de deux moniteurs» à la page 15. 5 connecteur vidéo DVI Si votre moniteur est doté d'un connecteur DVI, branchez-le sur le connecteur DVI de l'ordinateur. Si votre moniteur est doté d'un connecteur VGA, branchez-le sur le connecteur VGA de l'ordinateur. 6 connecteur vidéo VGA Si votre moniteur est doté d'un connecteur DVI, branchez-le sur le connecteur DVI de l'ordinateur. Si votre moniteur est doté d'un connecteur VGA, branchez-le sur le connecteur VGA de l'ordinateur. 7 fente du câble de sécurité Branchez un câble de sécurité dans cette fente pour sécuriser votre ordinateur. 8 connecteurs de carte son • Connecteur ligne d'entrée — Utilisez le connecteur de ligne d'entrée bleu pour raccorder un appareil d'enregistrement/de lecteur, tel qu'un lecteur de cassette, un lecteur de CD ou un magnétoscope. • Connecteur microphone — Utilisez le connecteur microphone rose pour raccorder un microphone d'ordinateur personnel destiné à une entrée vocale ou musicale dans un programme sonore ou de téléphonie. • Connecteur ligne de sortie — Utilisez le connecteur ligne de sortie vert pour raccorder le casque et la plupart des haut-parleurs dotés d'amplificateurs intégrés. • Connecteur surround — Utilisez le connecteur de son surround noir pour raccorder des haut-parleurs multicanaux. • Connecteur centre/effets de basse fréquence (LFE) — Utilisez le connecteur centre/LFE pour raccorder votre caisson de basse. 9 anneau pour cadenas Insérez un cadenas pour verrouiller le capot de l'ordinateur. 10 connecteur modem optionnel Si vous avez un modem, raccordez un câble téléphonique au connecteur modem (facultatif). REMARQUE : Pour des performances optimales, installez une carte modem uniquement dans les emplacements PCI 2, 3 ou 4. REMARQUE : Ne branchez pas de câble téléphonique au connecteur réseau. 11 connecteur d'alimentation Insérez le câble d'alimentation. 12 connecteur série (COM 1) Connectez un périphérique série, tel qu'un ordinateur de poche, au port série. 13 connecteur parallèle Connectez un périphérique parallèle, tel qu'une imprimante, au connecteur parallèle. Si vous avez une imprimante USB, branchez-la sur un connecteur USB. 14 voyants de diagnostic (4) Servez-vous des voyants pour vous aider à résoudre un problème informatique d'après le code de diagnostic. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section «Voyants de diagnostic» à la page 49. 15 connecteur de clavier Si vous avez un clavier standard, branchez-le sur le connecteur de clavier violet. Si vous avez un clavier USB, branchez-le sur un connecteur USB. 16 connecteur de souris Branchez une souris standard dans le connecteur de souris vert. Éteignez l'ordinateur et les périphériques qui y sont connectés avant de raccorder une souris à l'ordinateur. Si vous avez une souris USB, branchez-la sur un connecteur USB. 17 connecteurs USB 2.0 (6) Utilisez les connecteurs USB situés à l'arrière pour les périphériques qui restent connectés en permanence, comme les imprimantes et les claviers. Il est recommandé d'utiliser les connecteurs USB frontaux pour les périphériques connectés occasionnellement, comme les manettes de jeu ou les appareils photo.Retrait et installation de pièces 69 Ouverture du capot de l'ordinateur PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d’information sur le produit. PRÉCAUTION : Pour éviter d'endommager les composants de l'ordinateur, déchargez votre corps de son électricité statique avant de manipuler les composants électroniques. Pour ce faire, touchez une surface métallique non peinte du châssis de l'ordinateur. 1 Suivez les procédures indiquées dans la section «Avant de commencer» (voir page 63). 2 Couchez l'ordinateur sur le côté de façon à ce que la flèche figurant sous l'ordinateur soit orientée vers le haut. AVIS : Assurez-vous qu'il y a assez de place pour ouvrir le capot — au moins 30 cm (1 pied) de hauteur. 3 Faites glisser le loquet du capot vers le dessus de l'ordinateur. 4 Soulevez le capot et faites-le pivoter vers l'avant de l'ordinateur. 18 logements de carte Connecteurs d'accès pour les cartes PCI installées (quatre logements) et les cartes PCI Express (un logement x16 et un logement x1). 19 ventilateurs du bloc d'alimentation Pour un refroidissement optimal, deux ventilateurs de bloc d'alimentation sont prévus. Ne bloquez pas les grilles de refroidissement. anneau pour cadenas loquet du capot fente du câble de sécurité70 Retrait et installation de pièces www.dell.com | support.dell.com Vue interne de votre ordinateur carénage du disque dur lecteur de disquette lecteur de CD/DVD-ROM carte système carénage de ventilation du processeur bloc d'alimentation ventilateur du processeur ventilateurs du bloc d'alimentation (2) carénage et ventilateur de carte PCIRetrait et installation de pièces 71 Composants de la carte système connecteur pour unité de disque dur (PRI_IDE) support de pile (BATTERY) connecteur DEL SCSI (SCSI LED) connecteur du panneau avant (FRONT PANEL) connecteur du rétroéclairage (LED) connecteur du ventilateur arrière (REAR FAN1) connecteur du processeur et du dissipateur de chaleur connecteur d'alimentation principale (PWR) haut-parleur interne (SPKR) connecteurs série ATA (SATA-0, SATA-1, SATA-2, SATA-3) cavalier du mot de passe (PASS) connecteurs de carte PCI (PCI SLOT 1, PCI SLOT 2, PCI SLOT 3, PCI SLOT 4) connecteur de carte PCI Express x16 connecteurs de module de mémoire (2, 4) cavalier CMOS à l'écart (CMOS) connecteur de carte PCI Express x1 connecteur pour lecteur de disquette (FLOPPY) connecteurs de module de mémoire (1, 3) ventilateur du processeur (CPU FAN) connecteur d'alimentation (12V PWR) connecteur du ventilateur de carte (PCI_FAN) connecteur IEEE 1394 (1394) DEL de l'alimentation auxiliaire (AUX_PWR)72 Retrait et installation de pièces www.dell.com | support.dell.com Mémoire Vous pouvez augmenter la mémoire de votre ordinateur en installant des modules de mémoire sur la carte système. Votre ordinateur prend en charge la mémoire DDR2. Pour plus d'informations sur le type de mémoire pris en charge par votre ordinateur, reportez-vous à la section «Mémoire» à la page 111. Présentation de la mémoire DDR2 • Les modules de mémoire DDR2 doivent être installés par paires avec la même taille, la même vitesse et la même technologie. Si les modules de mémoire DDR2 ne sont pas installés par paires de capacité égale, l'ordinateur continuera de fonctionner mais ses performances seront légèrement réduites. Reportez-vous à l'étiquette située sur le coin supérieur droit du module pour déterminer la capacité du module. REMARQUE : Installez toujours les modules de mémoire DDR2 selon l'ordre indiqué sur la carte système. Les configurations de mémoire recommandées sont les suivantes : – Une paire de modules de mémoire identiques installés dans les connecteurs DIMM 1 et 2 ou – Une paire de modules de mémoire identiques dans les connecteurs DIMM 1 et 2 et une autre paire de modules identiques installés dans les connecteurs DIMM 3 et 4 AVIS : N'installez pas de modules de mémoire ECC. • Si vous installez des paires mixtes de mémoire PC2-3200 (DDR2 400 MHz) et PC2-4200 (DDR2 533 MHz), les modules fonctionnent à la vitesse minimale installée. • Assurez-vous que vous n'installez qu'un seul module de mémoire dans le connecteur DIMM 1, ou le connecteur le plus proche du processeur, avant d'installer des modules dans les autres connecteurs.Retrait et installation de pièces 73 REMARQUE : La mémoire achetée auprès de Dell est couverte par la garantie de votre ordinateur. AVIS : Si vous retirez vos modules de mémoire d'origine au cours d'une mise à niveau de mémoire, tenez-les séparés de tout nouveau module, même acheté auprès de Dell. Si possible, n'associez pas une paire de modules de mémoire d'origine à un nouveau module de mémoire. Votre ordinateur risque de ne pas démarrer correctement. Vous devez installer vos modules de mémoire d'origine en paires soit dans les connecteurs DIMM 1 et 2, soit dans les connecteurs DIMM 3 et 4. Adressage de la mémoire avec des configurations 4 Go Votre ordinateur prend en charge une mémoire maximale de 4 Go lorsque vous utilisez quatre DIMM de 1 Go. Les systèmes d'exploitation actuels, tels que Microsoft® Windows® XP, peuvent uniquement utiliser un maximum de 4 Go d'espace d'adressage ; toutefois, la quantité de mémoire disponible du système d'exploitation est légèrement inférieure à 4 Go. Certains composants de l'ordinateur requièrent une zone d'adressage de 4 Go. Tout espace d'adressage réservé à ces composants ne peut être utilisé par la mémoire de l'ordinateur. Installation de mémoire PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d’information sur le produit. AVIS : Pour éviter d'endommager les composants de l'ordinateur, déchargez votre corps de son électricité statique avant de manipuler les composants électroniques. Pour ce faire, touchez une surface métallique non peinte du châssis de l'ordinateur. 1 Suivez les procédures indiquées dans la section «Avant de commencer» à la page 63. 2 Couchez l'ordinateur sur le côté de façon à ce que la carte mère soit dans la partie inférieure de l'intérieur de l'ordinateur. paire de modules identiques dans les connecteurs DIMM 1 et 2 (pinces de fixation blanches) paire de modules de mémoire identiques dans les connecteurs DIMM 3 et 4 (pinces de fixation noires)74 Retrait et installation de pièces www.dell.com | support.dell.com 3 Poussez vers l'extérieur la pince de fixation située à chaque extrémité du connecteur du module de mémoire. 4 Alignez l'encoche de la partie inférieure du module avec la barre transversale du connecteur. AVIS : Pour éviter d'endommager le module de mémoire, enfoncez le module dans le connecteur en appliquant une force égale à chaque extrémité du module. 5 Insérez le module dans le connecteur jusqu'à ce qu'il s'enclenche avec un déclic. Si le module est correctement inséré, les languettes de fixation s'enclenchent dans les entailles situées à chaque extrémité du module. pinces de fixation (2) connecteur connecteur de mémoire le plus proche du processeur encoche module de mémoire entailles (2) barre transversaleRetrait et installation de pièces 75 6 Fermez le capot de l'ordinateur. AVIS : Pour connecter le câble de réseau, branchez-le d'abord sur la prise réseau murale, puis sur l'ordinateur. 7 Rebranchez l'ordinateur et ses périphériques à leurs prises secteur, puis allumez-les. 8 Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur l'icône Poste de travail, puis cliquez sur Propriétés. 9 Cliquez sur l'onglet Général. 10 Pour vérifier que la mémoire est bien installée, vérifiez la quantité de mémoire (RAM). Suppression de mémoire PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d’information sur le produit. AVIS : Pour éviter d'endommager les composants de l'ordinateur, déchargez votre corps de son électricité statique avant de manipuler les composants électroniques. Pour ce faire, touchez une surface métallique non peinte du châssis de l'ordinateur. 1 Suivez les procédures indiquées dans la section «Avant de commencer» à la page 63. 2 Écartez la languette de sécurité située à chaque extrémité du connecteur de module de mémoire. 3 Saisissez le module et soulevez-le. Si vous avez du mal à retirer le module, poussez-le doucement vers l'avant et l'arrière afin de le dégager du connecteur. Cartes PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d’information sur le produit. AVIS : Pour éviter d'endommager les composants de l'ordinateur, déchargez votre corps de son électricité statique avant de manipuler les composants électroniques. Pour ce faire, touchez une surface métallique non peinte du châssis de l'ordinateur.76 Retrait et installation de pièces www.dell.com | support.dell.com Votre ordinateur Dell™ est doté des logements suivants pour les cartes PCI et PCI Express : • Quatre logements pour carte PCI • Un logement de carte PCI Express x16 • Un logement de carte PCI Express x1 Cartes PCI Si vous installez ou remplacez une carte, suivez les procédures décrites dans la section suivante. Si vous voulez retirer une carte sans la remplacer, reportez-vous à la section «Retrait d'une carte PCI» à la page 78. Si vous remplacez une carte, supprimez le pilote actuel de la carte du système d'exploitation. Si vous installez ou remplacez une carte PCI Express, reportez-vous à la section «Installation d'une carte PCI Express» à la page 80. Installation d'une carte PCI 1 Suivez les procédures indiquées dans la section «Avant de commencer» à la page 63. 2 Appuyez sur le levier du bras de retenue de la carte et soulevez le bras de retenue. carte PCI connecteur de bord connecteur de carte languette métallique bras de retenue levierRetrait et installation de pièces 77 3 Si vous installez une nouvelle carte, retirez la languette métallique pour créer une ouverture au niveau du connecteur de carte. Passez ensuite à l'étape 5. 4 Si vous remplacez une carte déjà installée dans l'ordinateur, retirez-la. Si nécessaire, déconnectez les câbles connectés à la carte. Prenez la carte par ses coins supérieurs et dégagez-la doucement de son connecteur. 5 Préparez la carte en vue de son installation. Reportez-vous à la documentation de la carte pour obtenir des informations sur la configuration de la carte, les connexions internes et les moyens de la personnaliser votre ordinateur. PRÉCAUTION : Certaines cartes réseau démarrent automatiquement l'ordinateur quand elles sont connectées à un réseau. Pour vous protéger contre les risques d'électrocution, assurez-vous que vous avez débranché votre ordinateur avant d’installer des cartes. 6 Introduisez la carte dans le connecteur et appuyez fermement. Assurez-vous que la carte est bien engagée. Si la carte est de pleine longueur, insérez une extrémité dans le support du guide de la carte tout en abaissant la carte vers son connecteur sur la carte système. Insérez la carte fermement dans le connecteur de carte de la carte système. 7 Avant d'abaisser le bras de retenue, assurez-vous que : • Les parties supérieures des cartes et les languettes métalliques sont au même niveau que la barre d'alignement. • L'encoche de la partie supérieure de la carte ou de la languette s'adapte au guide d'alignement. carte correctement installée carte mal installée support à l'extérieur d'un emplacement support dans un emplacement78 Retrait et installation de pièces www.dell.com | support.dell.com 8 Appuyez sur le bras de retenue pour le remettre en place, en fixant la ou les cartes dans l'ordinateur. AVIS : N'acheminez pas les câbles des cartes au-dessus ou derrière les cartes. Les câbles acheminés au-dessus des cartes d'extension peuvent empêcher de fermer correctement le capot de l'ordinateur ou endommager l'équipement. 9 Connectez les câbles devant être reliés à la carte. Reportez-vous à la documentation de la carte pour obtenir des informations sur le branchement des câbles. AVIS : Pour connecter un câble de réseau, branchez-le d'abord à la prise réseau murale, puis à l'ordinateur. 10 Fermez le capot de l'ordinateur, rebranchez l'ordinateur et les périphériques à leur prise secteur, puis allumez-les. 11 Si vous avez installé une carte réseau supplémentaire et que vous souhaitez désactiver la carte réseau intégrée : a Accédez au programme de configuration du système (reportez-vous à la page 115), sélectionnez Périphériques intégrés, puis définissez le paramètre Carte d'interface réseau sur Désactivée. b Connectez le câble réseau sur les connecteurs de la carte réseau supplémentaires. Ne le reliez pas au connecteur intégré du panneau arrière. 12 Installez tous les pilotes requis pour la carte comme décrit dans la documentation de la carte. Retrait d'une carte PCI 1 Suivez les procédures indiquées dans la section «Avant de commencer» à la page 63. 2 Appuyez sur le levier situé sur le bras de retenue de la carte et soulevez le bras de retenue. 3 Si nécessaire, déconnectez les câbles connectés à la carte. barre d'alignement guide d'alignement bras de retenue languette métalliqueRetrait et installation de pièces 79 4 Prenez la carte par ses coins supérieurs et dégagez-la doucement de son connecteur. 5 S'il s'agit d'un retrait permanent, installez une languette métallique par dessus le logement vide du connecteur de carte. Si vous avez besoin d'une languette métallique, contactez Dell (reportez-vous à la page 124). REMARQUE : L’installation de languettes métalliques sur les ouvertures de connecteur de carte vides est nécessaire pour maintenir l'homologation de l'ordinateur par la FCC. De plus, ces languettes protègent votre ordinateur de la poussière et de la saleté. 6 Abaissez le bras de retenue et appuyez dessus pour le mettre en place afin de bloquer la carte dans l'ordinateur. AVIS : Pour connecter le câble de réseau, branchez-le d'abord à la prise réseau murale, puis à l'ordinateur. 7 Fermez le capot de l'ordinateur, rebranchez votre ordinateur et ses périphériques à leurs prises secteur et allumez-les. 8 Supprimez le pilote de la carte du système d'exploitation. 9 Si vous avez retiré un connecteur réseau supplémentaire et que vous souhaitez activer la carte réseau intégrée : a Accédez au programme de configuration du système, sélectionnez Périphériques intégrés et définissez le paramètre Carte d'interface réseau sur Activée. b Connectez le câble réseau au connecteur intégré du panneau arrière de l'ordinateur. Cartes PCI Express Votre ordinateur prend en charge une carte PCI Express x16 et une carte PCI Express x1. Si vous voulez installer ou remplacer une carte PCI Express, suivez les procédures décrites dans la section ci-après. Si vous retirez une carte PCI Express sans la remplacer, reportez-vous à la section «Retrait d'une carte PCI Express» à la page 83. Si vous remplacez une carte, supprimez le pilote actuel de la carte du système d'exploitation. carte PCI Express x16 logement de carte PCI Express x16 carte PCI Express x1 logement de carte PCI Express x180 Retrait et installation de pièces www.dell.com | support.dell.com Si vous installez ou remplacez une carte PCI, reportez-vous à la section «Installation d'une carte PCI» à la page 76. Installation d'une carte PCI Express 1 Suivez les procédures indiquées dans la section «Avant de commencer» à la page 63. 2 Appuyez sur le levier du bras de retenue de la carte et soulevez le bras de retenue. connecteur de bord connecteur de carte languette métallique bras de retenue levier languette de fixation logement de fixation connecteur de bord connecteur de carte partie supérieure du mécanisme de retenue languette carte x16 carte x1Retrait et installation de pièces 81 3 Si vous installez une nouvelle carte, retirez la languette métallique pour créer une ouverture au niveau du connecteur de carte. Passez ensuite à l'étape 5. 4 Si vous remplacez une carte déjà installée dans l'ordinateur, retirez-la. Si nécessaire, déconnectez les câbles connectés à la carte. Si votre carte comprend un mécanisme de retenue, retirez la partie supérieure de ce mécanisme en appuyant sur la languette et en tirant vers le haut. Tirez doucement la languette de fixation, tenez la carte par ses coins supérieurs et dégagez-la de son connecteur. 5 Préparez la carte pour l'installation. Reportez-vous à la documentation de la carte pour obtenir des informations sur la configuration de la carte, les connexions internes et les moyens de personnaliser votre ordinateur. PRÉCAUTION : Certaines cartes réseau démarrent automatiquement l'ordinateur quand elles sont connectées à un réseau. Pour vous protéger contre les risques d'électrocution, assurez-vous d'avoir débranché l'ordinateur avant d’installer des cartes. 6 Si vous installez la carte dans le connecteur de carte x16, positionnez-la de façon à aligner le logement de fixation avec la languette de fixation, puis tirez doucement la languette de fixation. 7 Placez la carte dans le connecteur, puis appuyez dessus fermement. Assurez-vous que la carte est bien engagée. Si la carte est de pleine longueur, insérez une extrémité dans le support du guide de la carte tout en abaissant la carte vers son connecteur sur la carte système. Insérez la carte fermement dans le connecteur de carte de la carte système. carte correctement installée carte mal installée support à l'extérieur d'un emplacement support dans un emplacement82 Retrait et installation de pièces www.dell.com | support.dell.com 8 Si vous remettez une carte qui a déjà été installée dans l'ordinateur et que vous avez retiré la partie supérieure du mécanisme de retenue, vous pouvez la réinstaller. 9 Avant d'abaisser le bras de retenue, vérifiez que : • les parties supérieures des cartes et des languettes métalliques sont au même niveau que la barre d'alignement. • l'encoche de la partie supérieure de la carte ou de la languette s'adapte au guide d'alignement. 10 Appuyez sur le bras de retenue pour le remettre en place, en fixant la ou les cartes dans l'ordinateur. AVIS : N'acheminez pas les câbles des cartes au-dessus ou derrière les cartes. Les câbles acheminés au-dessus des cartes d'extension peuvent empêcher de fermer correctement le capot de l'ordinateur ou endommager l'équipement. 11 Connectez les câbles devant être reliés à la carte. Reportez-vous à la documentation de la carte pour des obtenir des informations sur les connexions des câbles de la carte. AVIS : Pour connecter un câble de réseau, branchez-le d'abord à la prise réseau murale, puis à l'ordinateur. 12 Fermez le capot de l'ordinateur, rebranchez l'ordinateur et les périphériques à leur prise secteur, puis allumez-les. 13 Si vous avez installé une carte réseau supplémentaire et que vous souhaitez désactiver la carte réseau intégrée : barre d'alignement guide d'alignement bras de retenue languette métalliqueRetrait et installation de pièces 83 a Accédez au programme de configuration du système (reportez-vous à la page 115), sélectionnez Contrôleur réseau, puis définissez le paramètre sur Désactivé. b Connectez le câble réseau sur les connecteurs de la carte réseau supplémentaires. Ne le reliez pas au connecteur intégré du panneau arrière. 14 Installez tous les pilotes requis pour la carte comme décrit dans la documentation de la carte. Retrait d'une carte PCI Express 1 Suivez les procédures indiquées dans la section «Avant de commencer» à la page 63. 2 Appuyez sur le levier du bras de retenue de la carte et soulevez le bras de retenue. 3 Si nécessaire, déconnectez les câbles connectés à la carte. 4 Si votre carte comprend un mécanisme de retenue, retirez la partie supérieure de ce mécanisme en appuyant sur la languette et en tirant vers le haut. 5 Tirez doucement vers l'arrière la languette de fixation, tenez la carte par ses coins supérieurs, puis dégagez-la de son connecteur. 6 S'il s'agit d'un retrait permanent, installez une languette métallique par dessus le logement vide du connecteur de carte. Si vous avez besoin d'une languette métallique, contactez Dell (reportez-vous à la page 124). REMARQUE : L’installation de languettes métalliques sur les ouvertures de connecteur de carte vides est nécessaire pour maintenir l'homologation de l'ordinateur par la FCC. De plus, ces languettes protègent votre ordinateur de la poussière et de la saleté. 7 Abaissez le bras de retenue et appuyez dessus pour le mettre en place afin de bloquer la carte dans l'ordinateur. AVIS : Pour connecter un câble de réseau, branchez-le d'abord à la prise réseau murale, puis à l'ordinateur. 8 Fermez le capot de l'ordinateur, rebranchez l'ordinateur et les périphériques à leur prise secteur, puis allumez-les. 9 Retirez le pilote de la carte du système d'exploitation. 10 Si vous avez supprimé un connecteur réseau complémentaire : a Accédez au programme de configuration du système (reportez-vous à la page 116), sélectionnez Contrôleur réseau, puis définissez le paramètre sur Activé. b Connectez le câble réseau au connecteur intégré du panneau arrière de l'ordinateur. 11 Installez tous les pilotes requis pour la carte comme décrit dans la documentation de la carte.84 Retrait et installation de pièces www.dell.com | support.dell.com Lecteurs Votre ordinateur prend en charge la combinaison de périphériques suivante : • Jusqu'à trois disques durs • Un lecteur de disquette • Jusqu'à deux lecteurs CD ou DVD Consignes générales d'installation Connectez les disques durs série ATA aux connecteurs de la carte système étiquetés SATA-0, SATA-1, SATA-2 ou SATA-3. Connectez les lecteurs de CD/DVD au connecteur étiqueté PRI IDE. Lorsque vous connectez deux périphériques IDE à un seul câble d'interface IDE et que vous les configurez en sélection de câble, le périphérique relié au dernier connecteur du câble d'interface correspond au périphérique principal ou au périphérique d'amorçage (lecteur 0) et le périphérique lecteur de disquette lecteur(s) de CD/DVD disque(s) dur(s)Retrait et installation de pièces 85 relié au connecteur intermédiaire du câble d'interface correspond au périphérique secondaire (lecteur 1). Consultez la documentation du lecteur qui se trouve dans votre kit de mise à niveau pour plus d'informations sur la configuration des périphériques en sélection de câble. Connexion des câbles de lecteurs Lorsque vous installez un lecteur, vous connectez deux câbles — un câble d'alimentation CC et un câble de données — entre l'arrière du lecteur et la carte système. Certains lecteurs sont également munis d'un connecteur audio ; l'une des extrémités du câble audio est reliée au connecteur du lecteur et l'autre à la carte système. Connecteurs de l'interface du lecteur La plupart des connecteurs d'interface sont munis d'un détrompeur pour assurer une bonne insertion, c'est-à-dire qu'une encoche ou une broche manquante sur l'un des connecteurs correspond à une languette ou à un trou rempli sur l'autre. Lorsque vous connectez un câble IDE, veillez à aligner la bande de couleur avec le connecteur de la broche 1. Lorsque vous déconnectez un câble IDE, saisissez la languette de retrait de couleur et tirez jusqu'à ce que le connecteur soit libéré. Lorsque vous connectez et déconnectez un câble série ATA, tenez le câble par le connecteur de chaque côté. REMARQUE : Le connecteur série ATA de la carte système peut être doté d'un carénage ou d'un capot. Connecteur ATA série câble d'interface connecteur d'interface86 Retrait et installation de pièces www.dell.com | support.dell.com Connecteur du câble d'alimentation Disque dur PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d’information sur le produit. AVIS : Pour éviter d'endommager l'unité, ne la placez pas sur une surface dure. Mettez-la plutôt sur une surface qui la protégera, comme un tapis de mousse. 1 Si vous remplacez un disque dur contenant des données que vous souhaitez conserver, assurez-vous de faire une sauvegarde de vos fichiers avant de retirer le disque dur. 2 Suivez les procédures indiquées dans la section «Avant de commencer» à la page 63. Retrait d'un disque dur 1 Appuyez sur les languettes du carénage et basculez-le vers l'arrière. 2 Soulevez le carénage du disque dur. connecteur d'arrivée d'alimentation électrique câble d'alimentationRetrait et installation de pièces 87 3 Débranchez les câbles d'alimentation et de disque dur du lecteur et de la carte système. 4 Appuyez sur les languettes de chaque côté du disque dur et faites-le glisser pour l'extraire. Installation d'un disque dur 1 Déballez le disque dur de remplacement et préparez-le pour l'installation. 2 Consultez la documentation de l'unité pour vérifier que cette dernière est bien configurée pour votre ordinateur. 3 Si l'unité de disque dur de remplacement n'est pas équipée de rails de support, retirez les rails de l'ancienne unité en dévissant les deux vis fixant chaque rail à l'unité. Fixez les rails du support au nouveau disque dur en alignant les pas de vis du disque avec les trous des rails, puis vissez les quatre vis (deux vis par rail). unité de disque dur câbles d'unité de disque dur câble d'alimentation languettes (2) connecteur de carte système88 Retrait et installation de pièces www.dell.com | support.dell.com 4 Installez le disque dur dans l'ordinateur en faisant glisser prudemment le lecteur jusqu'à ce que les languettes s'enclenchent avec un déclic. REMARQUE : Si vous installez un disque dur dans la baie inférieure, placez le lecteur dans la baie de telle sorte que le connecteur d'alimentation soit du côté gauche (opposé au-dessus du disque dur). . 5 Connectez un câble d'alimentation à l'unité. 6 Connectez le câble de disque dur à l'unité et à la carte système (reportez-vous à la page 71). 7 Assurez-vous que tous les connecteurs sont correctement câblés et fermement fixés. unité vis (4) rails du support (2) unité de disque dur câbles d'unité de disque dur câble d'alimentation languettes (2) connecteur de carte systèmeRetrait et installation de pièces 89 AVIS : Lorsque vous remplacez le carénage du disque dur, assurez-vous que tous les câbles sont correctement acheminés. 8 Insérez les languettes inférieures du carénage dans les trous du bâti de l'unité et faites pivoter le carénage. 9 Appuyez sur les languettes supérieures et verrouillez-les. 10 Appuyez doucement sur le carénage pour le fixer. 11 Fermez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la page 110). AVIS : Pour connecter le câble de réseau, branchez-le d'abord à la prise réseau murale, puis à l'ordinateur. 12 Rebranchez l'ordinateur et ses périphériques à leurs prises secteur, puis allumez-les. Consultez la documentation de l'unité pour des instructions sur l'installation de tout logiciel requis pour le fonctionnement de l'unité. 13 Si le disque que vous venez d'installer est le disque dur principal, insérez une disquette d'amorçage dans le lecteur A.90 Retrait et installation de pièces www.dell.com | support.dell.com 14 Allumez l'ordinateur. 15 Accédez au programme de configuration du système (reportez-vous à la page 116) et mettez à jour l'option Lecteur appropriée. 16 Quittez le programme de configuration du système et redémarrez l'ordinateur. 17 Partitionnez et formatez logiquement votre disque dur, avant de passer à l’étape suivante. Reportez-vous à la documentation de votre système d'exploitation pour obtenir des instructions. 18 Testez le disque dur en exécutant Dell Diagnostics (reportez-vous à la page 52). 19 Si le disque que vous venez d'installer est le disque dur principal, installez le système d'exploitation dessus. Ajout d'un second disque dur PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d’information sur le produit. PRÉCAUTION : Pour éviter tout risque d'électrocution, débranchez toujours l'ordinateur de la prise secteur avant d'ouvrir son capot. AVIS : Pour éviter d'endommager l'unité, ne la placez pas sur une surface dure. Mettez-la plutôt sur une surface qui la protégera, comme un tapis de mousse. 1 Consultez la documentation de l'unité pour vérifier qu'elle est bien configurée pour votre ordinateur. 2 Suivez les procédures indiquées dans la section «Avant de commencer» à la page 63. 3 Retirez les deux rails en plastique de l'intérieur de la baie de disque dur en les tirant vers le haut et hors de la baie. 4 Fixez les rails au disque dur à l'aide des deux vis fournies avec ces derniers. Vérifiez que les languettes des rails se trouvent à l'arrière du disque dur. AVIS : N'installez pas d'unité dans la baie de disque dur inférieure tant que vous n'avez pas retiré les rails verts de l'intérieur de la baie d'unité. 5 Retirez le premier disque dur de la baie supérieure, puis installez-le dans la baie inférieure. a Déconnectez les câbles d'alimentation et d'unité de l'arrière du premier disque dur. b Appuyez sur les deux languettes des rails, puis tirez sur le premier disque dur pour l'extraire de la baie supérieure. c Faites glisser doucement le premier disque dur dans la baie inférieure jusqu'à ce que vous entendiez un déclic. d Reconnectez les câbles d'alimentation et d'unité à l'arrière du premier disque dur. 6 Faites glisser doucement le nouveau disque dur dans la baie supérieure jusqu'à ce que vous entendiez un déclic.Retrait et installation de pièces 91 7 Connectez un câble d'alimentation à l'unité. 8 Connectez le câble de disque dur à l'unité et à la carte système (reportez-vous à la page 71). 9 Fermez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la page 110). AVIS : Pour connecter le câble de réseau, branchez-le d'abord sur le périphérique réseau, puis sur l'ordinateur. 10 Connectez votre ordinateur et les périphériques à leur source d'alimentation secteur, puis allumez-les. Consultez la documentation de l'unité pour des instructions sur l'installation de tout logiciel requis pour le fonctionnement de l'unité. Lecteur de disquette PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d’information sur le produit. PRÉCAUTION : Pour éviter tout risque d'électrocution, débranchez toujours l'ordinateur de la prise secteur avant d'ouvrir son capot. Suivez la procédure indiquée dans la section «Avant de commencer» à la page 63. REMARQUE : Si vous ajoutez un lecteur de disquette, reportez-vous à la section «Installation d'un lecteur de disquette» à la page 92. Retrait d'un lecteur de disquette 1 Déconnectez les câbles d'alimentation et de données de la partie arrière du lecteur de disquette. 2 Déconnectez l'autre extrémité du câble de données de la carte système. languettes des rails (2) second disque dur dans la baie supérieure baie d'unité de disque dur premier disque dur dans la baie inférieure92 Retrait et installation de pièces www.dell.com | support.dell.com 3 Pressez les deux languettes situées sur les côtés du lecteur, faites glisser le lecteur vers le haut, puis retirez-le de la baie. Installation d'un lecteur de disquette 1 Si vous remplacez un lecteur et le nouveau lecteur ne comporte pas de rails de support, retirez les rails de l'ancien lecteur en enlevant les deux vis qui fixent chaque rail au lecteur. Fixez le support au nouveau lecteur en alignant les pas de vis du lecteur avec les tous des rails, puis vissez les quatre vis (deux vis par rail). câble de données câble d'alimentation languettes (2) lecteur de disquetteRetrait et installation de pièces 93 2 Faites glisser prudemment le lecteur dans la baie jusqu'à ce que les languettes s'enclenchent avec un déclic. lecteur vis (4) rails du support (2) câble de données câble d'alimentation languettes (2) lecteur de disquette94 Retrait et installation de pièces www.dell.com | support.dell.com 3 Connectez les câbles d'alimentation et de données au lecteur de disquette. 4 Connectez l'autre extrémité du câble de données au connecteur portant l'étiquette FLOPPY sur la carte système (reportez-vous à la page 71). 5 Vérifiez toutes les connexions de câbles et repliez les câbles à l'écart pour qu'ils ne gênent pas la circulation d'air du ventilateur et des grilles de refroidissement. 6 Fermez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la page 110). AVIS : Pour connecter un câble de réseau, branchez-le d'abord à la prise réseau murale, puis à l'ordinateur. 7 Rebranchez l'ordinateur et ses périphériques à leurs prises secteur, puis allumez-les. Consultez la documentation de l'unité pour des instructions sur l'installation de tout logiciel requis pour le fonctionnement de l'unité. 8 Accédez au programme de configuration du système (reportez-vous à la page 115) et mettez à jour l'option Lecteur de disquette appropriée. 9 Vérifiez le bon fonctionnement de votre système en exécutant Dell Diagnostics (reportezvous à la page 52). Lecteur de CD/DVD PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d’information sur le produit. PRÉCAUTION : Pour éviter tout risque d'électrocution, débranchez toujours l'ordinateur de la prise secteur avant d'ouvrir son capot. Retrait d'un lecteur de CD/DVD 1 Suivez les procédures indiquées dans la section «Avant de commencer» à la page 63. 2 Déconnectez les câbles d'alimentation et de données de la partie arrière du lecteur.Retrait et installation de pièces 95 3 Pressez les deux languettes situées sur les côtés du lecteur, faites glisser le lecteur vers le haut, puis retirez-le de la baie. Installation d'un lecteur de CD/DVD 1 Si vous installez un nouveau lecteur, déballez le lecteur et préparez-le pour l'installation. Consultez la documentation du lecteur pour vérifier que ce dernier est bien configuré pour votre ordinateur. Si vous installez un lecteur IDE, configurez-le pour la sélection de câble. 2 Connectez le nouveau lecteur aux rails qui se trouve à l'intérieur du capot. Si aucun jeu de rails ne se trouve à l'intérieur du capot de l'ordinateur, contactez Dell (reportez-vous à la page 124). câble d'alimentation câble de données languettes (2) lecteur de CD/DVD-ROM96 Retrait et installation de pièces www.dell.com | support.dell.com 3 Si vous installez un lecteur de remplacement et si le nouveau lecteur ne comporte pas de rails de support, retirez les rails de l'ancien lecteur en enlevant les deux vis qui fixent chaque rail au lecteur. Fixez les rails au nouveau lecteur en alignant les vis du lecteur avec les trous des rails, puis vissez les quatre vis (deux vis par rail). 4 Faites glisser prudemment le lecteur jusqu'à ce que les languettes s'enclenchent avec un déclic. 5 Connectez les câbles d'alimentation et de données au lecteur. Si vous ajoutez un lecteur possédant un câble audio, connectez ce câble au connecteur audio de la carte système. unité vis (4) rails de support (2)Retrait et installation de pièces 97 6 Vérifiez toutes les connexions de câbles et repliez les câbles à l'écart pour qu'ils ne gênent pas la circulation d'air du ventilateur et des grilles de refroidissement. 7 Fermez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la page 110). AVIS : Pour connecter un câble de réseau, branchez-le d'abord à la prise réseau murale, puis à l'ordinateur. 8 Rebranchez l'ordinateur et ses périphériques à leurs prises secteur, puis allumez-les. Consultez la documentation de l'unité pour des instructions sur l'installation de tout logiciel requis pour le fonctionnement de l'unité. 9 Accédez au programme de configuration du système (reportez-vous à la page 71) et sélectionnez l'option Lecteur appropriée. 10 Vérifiez le bon fonctionnement de votre système en exécutant Dell Diagnostics (reportezvous à la page 52). câble d'alimentation câble de données languettes (2) lecteur de CD/DVD-ROM98 Retrait et installation de pièces www.dell.com | support.dell.com Carénage de ventilation du processeur Retrait du carénage de ventilation du processeur PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer cette procédure, lisez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d’information sur le produit. PRÉCAUTION : Pour éviter d'endommager les composants de l'ordinateur, déchargez votre corps de son électricité statique avant de manipuler les composants électroniques. Pour ce faire, touchez une surface métallique non peinte du châssis de l'ordinateur. AVIS : Pour éviter d'endommager les câbles d'alimentation du ventilateur, ne faites pas glisser le carénage trop rapidement. 1 Suivez les procédures indiquées dans la section «Avant de commencer» à la page 63. 2 Appuyez sur le levier de dégagement du carénage vers l'avant de l'ordinateur. 3 Soulevez le carénage pour dégager les languettes de fixation. 4 Une fois les languettes de fixation du carénage dégagées, débranchez les câbles du ventilateur des connecteurs de la carte système. languettes de fixation (3) levier de dégagement du carénageRetrait et installation de pièces 99 Installation du carénage de ventilation du processeur 1 Raccordez les deux câbles d'alimentation des ventilateurs aux connecteurs de la carte système. 2 Alignez les languettes sur les emplacements de fixation. 3 Appuyez doucement sur le carénage jusqu'à l'enclenchement des languettes de fixation. 4 Fermez le capot de l'ordinateur. AVIS : Pour connecter un câble de réseau, branchez-le d'abord à la prise réseau murale, puis à l'ordinateur. 5 Rebranchez l'ordinateur et ses périphériques à leurs prises secteur, puis allumez-les. Processeur Retrait du processeur AVIS : N'effectuez pas les étapes suivantes sans connaître les procédures de retrait et de remplacement du matériel. Vous risquez d'endommager votre carte système. Pour contacter le service technique, reportez-vous à la section «Contacter Dell» à la page 124. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d’information sur le produit. 1 Suivez les procédures indiquées dans la section «Avant de commencer» à la page 63. 2 Déconnectez le câble d'alimentation du ventilateur de refroidissement du connecteur REAR FAN1 de la carte système (reportez-vous à la section «Composants de la carte système» à la page 71). 3 Déconnectez le câble d'alimentation du connecteur 12V PWR de la carte système (reportezvous à la section «Composants de la carte système» à la page 71). 4 Soulevez le carénage de ventilation.100 Retrait et installation de pièces www.dell.com | support.dell.com PRÉCAUTION : Le dissipateur de chaleur peut monter à des températures élevées au cours d'un fonctionnement normal. Laissez-lui suffisamment de temps pour refroidir avant de le toucher. 5 Retirez le dissipateur de chaleur : a Retirez les pinces de retenue du module. Appuyez sur les languettes vers le centre de la pince et soulevez. languettes de fixation (3) levier de dégagement du carénageRetrait et installation de pièces 101 b Localisez la languette opposée au bloc d'alimentation sur la base de retenue. Appuyez sur la languette de la base de retenue jusqu'à ce que le dissipateur de chaleur se soulève légèrement. c Appuyez sur la deuxième languette de retenue tout en soulevant le dissipateur hors de sa base. AVIS : Couchez le dissipateur de chaleur sur le côté. AVIS : Si vous installez un kit de mise à niveau du processeur fourni par Dell, ne réutilisez pas le dissipateur de chaleur d'origine. Si vous n'installez pas un kit de mise à niveau du processeur fourni par Dell, réutilisez le dissipateur et le ventilateur d'origine lorsque vous installez votre nouveau processeur. 6 Appuyez vers le bas et l'extérieur sur le levier de dégagement du support. 7 Ouvrez le capot du processeur. dissipateur de chaleur base de retenue languette de retenue102 Retrait et installation de pièces www.dell.com | support.dell.com 8 Retirez le processeur de son support. Maintenez le levier de dégagement ouvert pour que le support puisse recevoir le nouveau processeur. Installation du processeur AVIS : Déchargez votre corps de son électricité statique en touchant une surface métallique non peinte à l'arrière de l'ordinateur. 1 Déballez le nouveau processeur. AVIS : Assurez-vous que le processeur est correctement positionné dans son support, afin de ne pas endommager de façon irréversible le processeur et l'ordinateur au moment du démarrage. 2 Si le levier de dégagement du support n'est pas entièrement ouvert, corrigez-le. 3 Alignez les coins de broche 1 du processeur et du support. capot du processeur processeur support levier de dégagementRetrait et installation de pièces 103 AVIS : Les broches du support sont fragiles. Pour ne pas les endommager, assurez-vous que le processeur est correctement aligné avec le support et ne forcez pas lorsque vous l'installez. Attention à ne pas toucher ou plier les broches de la carte système. 4 Positionnez le processeur sur le support et vérifiez qu'il est bien en place. Appuyez doucement dessus pour l'engager. 5 Une fois le processeur installé dans son support, fermez le capot. 6 Faites pivoter le levier de dégagement du support en position de fermeture et enclenchezle pour sécuriser le processeur. AVIS : Si vous n'installez pas un kit de mise à niveau du processeur fourni par Dell, réutilisez l'assemblage du dissipateur de chaleur d'origine lorsque vous remplacez le processeur. Si vous avez installé un kit de remplacement du processeur fourni par Dell, renvoyez l'assemblage du dissipateur de chaleur d'origine et le processeur à Dell dans l'emballage du kit de remplacement. indicateur de broche 1 du processeur levier de dégagement processeur support du processeur indicateur de broche 1 du support104 Retrait et installation de pièces www.dell.com | support.dell.com 7 Installez le dissipateur de chaleur : a Faites glisser une extrémité du dissipateur de chaleur sous la languette de retenue. b Tirez sur l'autre languette et abaissez le dissipateur jusqu'à son enclenchement dans la base. AVIS : Assurez-vous que le dissipateur de chaleur est correctement installé et sécurisé. 8 Réinstallez les pinces de retenue du module. 9 Abaissez le carénage de ventilation sur le dissipateur de chaleur. 10 Reconnectez le câble d'alimentation du ventilateur de refroidissement au connecteur REAR FAN1 de la carte système (reportez-vous à la section «Composants de la carte système» à la page 71). 11 Reconnectez le câble d'alimentation au connecteur 12V PWR de la carte système (reportez-vous à la section «Composants de la carte système» à la page 71). 12 Fermez le capot de l'ordinateur. AVIS : Pour connecter un câble de réseau, branchez-le d'abord à la prise réseau murale, puis à l'ordinateur. 13 Rebranchez l'ordinateur et ses périphériques à leurs prises électriques, puis allumez-les. Panneau avant PRÉCAUTION : Pour éviter d'endommager les composants de l'ordinateur, déchargez votre corps de son électricité statique avant de manipuler les composants électroniques. Pour ce faire, touchez une surface métallique non peinte du châssis de l'ordinateur. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d’information sur le produit. Retrait du panneau avant 1 Suivez les procédures indiquées dans la section «Avant de commencer» à la page 63. 2 Déconnectez et retirez tous les lecteurs de disque (pour plus d'informations, reportezvous à la section «Lecteurs» à la page 84). 3 Libérez le panneau avant en appuyant sur chacun des sept languette de retenue du panneau avant.Retrait et installation de pièces 105 4 Fermez à moitié le capot de l'ordinateur et tirez sur le panneau avant hors de l'ordinateur. Remplacement du panneau avant Pour remplacer le panneau avant, effectuez la procédure de retrait à l'envers.106 Retrait et installation de pièces www.dell.com | support.dell.com Porte des lecteurs PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d’information sur le produit. Retrait de la porte des lecteurs 1 Ouvrez la porte des lecteurs.Retrait et installation de pièces 107 2 Désenclenchez la charnière supérieure de la languette et tirez le dessus de la porte des lecteurs vers l'extérieur. 3 Soulevez la charnière inférieure de la languette hors de l'ordinateur. Remise en place de la porte des lecteurs Pour éviter d'endommager l'ordinateur, la porte des lecteurs est conçue pour se détacher lorsqu'elle est trop ouverte. Si la porte des lecteurs se détache de l'ordinateur sans démontage, effectuez la procédure de retrait à l'envers. Si la porte des lecteurs est trop ouverte, elle se démonte en plusieurs petites pièces au lieu de se séparer de l'ordinateur en une seule pièce. Si la porte des lecteurs se démonte : 1 Si nécessaire, rattachez les charnières de la porte à la languette de la porte. Assurez-vous que les languettes de la charnière sont séparées du support de la porte. charnière supérieure de la languette charnière inférieure de la languette108 Retrait et installation de pièces www.dell.com | support.dell.com 2 Réinstallez l'assemblage languette de porte/charnière de porte à la porte, en commençant par le partie inférieure de chaque charnière de porte. 3 Réinstallez la porte des lecteurs sur l'ordinateur, en commençant par la charnière inférieure du support. support de la porte languette de la charnière charnières de la porte (2) partie inférieure de la charnière de la porte porte assemblage support de la porte/charnière de la porteRetrait et installation de pièces 109 Pile Remplacement de la pile PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d’information sur le produit. AVIS : Pour éviter d'endommager les composants de l'ordinateur, déchargez votre corps de son électricité statique avant de manipuler les composants électroniques. Pour ce faire, touchez une surface métallique non peinte du châssis de l'ordinateur. Une pile bouton conserve les informations de configuration, de date et d'heure de l'ordinateur. Cette pile peut durer plusieurs années. Si vous devez réinitialiser à plusieurs reprises les informations de date et d'heure après avoir mis l'ordinateur sous tension, remplacez la pile. PRÉCAUTION : Une pile neuve peut exploser si elle est mal installée. Remplacez la pile uniquement par une pile de type identique ou équivalent à celui recommandé par le fabricant. Suivez les instructions du fabricant pour vous débarrasser des piles usagées. Pour remplacer la pile : 1 Enregistrez tous les écrans du programme de configuration du système (reportez-vous à la page 115) pour restaurer les paramètres corrects à l'étape 8. 2 Suivez les procédures indiquées dans la section «Avant de commencer» à la page 63. 3 Repérez le support de pile (reportez-vous à la page 71). AVIS : Si vous dégagez la pile de son support en utilisant un objet émoussé, faites attention de ne pas toucher la carte système avec cet objet. Assurez-vous que l’objet est inséré entre la pile et le support avant d’essayer de dégager la pile. Sinon, vous risquez d'endommager la carte système en arrachant le support ou en brisant des circuits de la carte système. 4 Retirez la pile en l'extrayant de son support avec les doigts ou avec un objet isolant émoussé comme, par exemple, un tournevis en plastique. 5 Insérez la nouvelle pile dans son support, borne «+» vers le haut et enclenchez-la. 6 Fermez le capot de l'ordinateur. support de la pile pile languette110 Retrait et installation de pièces www.dell.com | support.dell.com AVIS : Pour connecter un câble de réseau, branchez-le d'abord sur le périphérique réseau, puis sur l'ordinateur. 7 Rebranchez l'ordinateur et ses périphériques à leurs prises secteur, puis allumez-les. 8 Accédez au programme de configuration du système (reportez-vous à la page 115) et restaurez les paramètres enregistrés au cours de l'étape 1. 9 Jetez l'ancienne pile en vous conformant aux règles en vigueur. Consultez les instructions de mise au rebut de la pile dans votre Guide d’information sur le produit. Fermeture du capot de l'ordinateur 1 Assurez-vous que les câbles sont bien connectés et qu'ils ne gênent ou n'obstruent rien. 2 Assurez-vous qu'il ne reste aucun outil ou pièce détachée à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur. 3 Rabattez le capot. 4 Appuyez sur le capot pour le fermer. 5 Une fois le capot fermé, faites glisser le loquet vers la droite jusqu'à ce qu'il s'enclenche avec un déclic. 6 Si vous utilisez un verrou pour protéger votre ordinateur, installez-le. AVIS : Pour connecter un câble de réseau, branchez-le d'abord à la prise réseau murale, puis à l'ordinateur. 7 Rebranchez l'ordinateur et ses périphériques à leurs prises secteur, puis allumez-les. anneau du cadenas loquet du capot fente du câble de sécuritéAnnexe 111 Annexe Caractéristiques Processeur Type de processeur Intel® Pentium® 4 avec technologie HT REMARQUE : Certains processeurs Pentium 4 ne prennent pas en charge la technologie Hyper-Threading. Cache de niveau 1 (L1) 16 Ko Cache de niveau 2 (L2) SRAM 1 Mo à écriture différée, associative à huit voies, à transmission par rafales en pipeline Mémoire Type SDRAM DDR2 400 ou 533 MHz sans tampon Connecteurs de mémoire 4 Capacités de mémoire 128, 256, 512 ou 1 Go non ECC Mémoire minimale 256 Mo Mémoire maximale 4 Go REMARQUE : Reportez-vous à la section «Adressage de la mémoire avec des configurations 4 Go» à la page 73 pour vérifier la quantité de mémoire disponible sur le système d'exploitation. Adresse BIOS F0000h Informations sur l'ordinateur Jeu de puces Intel 925X Express Canaux DMA Huit Niveaux d'interruption 24 Puce du BIOS (NVRAM) 4 Mbits NIC Interface réseau intégrée permettant une communication 10/100/1000. Horloge système Débit de données 800 MHz112 Annexe www.dell.com | support.dell.com Vidéo Type PCI Express Bus d'extension Type de bus PCI 2.3 PCI Express x1 et x16 Vitesse du bus PCI : 33 MHz PCI Express : Vitesse bidirectionnelle logement x1 - 500 Mo/s Vitesse bidirectionnelle logement x16 - 8 Go/s PCI Connecteur Quatre Taille du connecteur 120 broches Largeur des données du connecteur (maximale) 32 bits PCI Express Connecteur Un x1 Taille du connecteur 36 broches Largeur des données du connecteur (maximale) 1 voie PCI Express PCI Express Connecteur Un x16 Taille du connecteur 164 broches Largeur des données du connecteur (maximale) 16 voies PCI Express Lecteurs Accessible de l'extérieur : Deux baies de lecteur de 3,5 pouces Deux baies de lecteur de 5,25 poucesAnnexe 113 Périphériques disponibles Lecteur série ATA, lecteur de disquette, périphériques de mémoire, lecteur de CD, lecteur de CD-RW, lecteur de DVD, lecteur de DVDRW et lecteur composite DVD et CD-RW Accessible de l'intérieur : Deux baies pour disques durs de 2,54 cm (1 pouce) de haut Connecteurs Connecteurs externes : Série Connecteur à 9 broches ; compatible 16550C Parallèle Connecteur à 25 trous (bidirectionnel) IEEE 1394 Connecteur série à 6 broches du panneau avant Vidéo Connecteur à 15 trous Carte réseau Connecteur RJ45 Ports PS/2 (clavier et souris) Deux mini-DIN à 6 broches USB Deux connecteurs en face avant et six connecteurs sur le panneau arrière compatibles USB 2.0 Audio Cinq connecteurs pour la ligne d'entrée, la ligne de sortie, le microphone, le son surround et le canal central/effets de basse fréquence (LFE) ; deux connecteurs frontaux pour les écouteurs et les microphones Connecteurs sur la carte système : Lecteur IDE principal Connecteur à 40 broches sur le bus local PCI ATA série Quatre connecteurs à 7 broches Lecteur de disquette Connecteur à 34 broches Ventilateur Connecteur à 5 broches PCI 2.3 Quatre connecteurs à 120 broches PCI Express x1 Connecteur à 36 broches PCI Express x16 Connecteur à 164 broches Téléphonie (TAPI) Connecteur à 4 broches Commandes et voyants Bouton d'alimentation Bouton de commande Lecteurs (Suite)114 Annexe www.dell.com | support.dell.com Voyant d'alimentation Voyant vert — Clignotant vert en mode Veille ; vert continu si le système est allumé. Voyant orange — Clignotant orange indiquant un problème concernant un périphérique installé ; orange continu indiquant un problème d'alimentation interne (reportez-vous à la section «Problèmes d'alimentation» à la page 43). Voyant d'accès à l'unité de disque dur Vert Voyant d'intégrité de liaison (sur la carte réseau intégrée) Vert clair — Bonne connexion entre un réseau 10 Mbps et l'ordinateur. Orange clair — Bonne connexion entre un réseau 100 Mbps et l'ordinateur. Jaune clair — Bonne connexion pour une opération de 1 Go (ou 1000 Mbps). Éteint — L'ordinateur ne détecte pas de connexion physique au réseau. Voyant d'activité (sur la carte réseau intégrée) Voyant jaune clignotant Voyants de diagnostic Quatre voyants sur le panneau arrière (Reportez-vous à la section «Voyants de diagnostic» à la page 49.) Voyant d'alimentation de veille AUX_PWR sur la carte système Rétroéclairage du boîtier Options des couleurs : éteinte (pas de lumière), rubis, émeraude, saphir (par défaut), ambre, améthyste, topaze, diamant (Reportezvous à la section «Changement de la couleur du rétroéclairage» à la page 13.) Alimentation électrique Bloc d'alimentation en CC (courant continu) : Consommation en watts 460 W Dissipation de chaleur 931.2 BTU/hr Tension (Pour obtenir des informations importantes sur les paramètres de tension, lisez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d’information sur le produit) Bloc d'alimentation à tension fixe — 110 V à 50/60 Hz Bloc d'alimentation à sélection manuelle et à détection automatique — de 90 à 135 V à 50/60 Hz ; de 180 à 265 V à 50/60 Hz ; 100 V à 50/60 Hz pour les ordinateurs japonais Batterie de secours : Pile bouton 3 V CR2032 au lithium Caractéristiques physiques Hauteur 49,1 cm (19,3 pouces) Commandes et voyants (Suite)Annexe 115 Configuration du système Présentation Utilisez le programme de configuration du système comme suit : • Pour modifier les informations de configuration du système après l'ajout, la modification ou le retrait de tout matériel de votre ordinateur • Pour définir ou modifier une option sélectionnable par l'utilisateur telle que le mot de passe utilisateur • Pour connaître la quantité de mémoire disponible ou définir le type de disque dur à installer Avant d'utiliser le programme de configuration du système, il est recommandé de noter les informations affichées dans les écrans du programme de configuration, pour s'y référer par la suite. Largeur 22,2 cm (8,7 pouces) Profondeur 48,8 cm (19,2 pouces) Poids 19 kg (42 livres) Caractéristiques environnementales Température : Fonctionnement 10° à 35° C (50° à 95° F) REMARQUE : À 35° C (95° F), l'altitude maximale d'exploitation est de 914 m (3000 pieds). Stockage –40° à 65° C (–40° à 149° F) Humidité relative 20 % à 80 % (sans condensation) Vibrations maximales : Fonctionnement 0,25 G de 3 à 200 Hz à 0,5 octave/min Stockage 0,5 G de 3 à 200 Hz à 1 octave/min Chocs maximaux : Fonctionnement Impulsion semi-sinusoïdale (partie inférieure) avec un changement de vitesse de 50,8 cm/sec (20 pouces/sec) Stockage Onde carrée moyenne de 27 G avec un changement de vitesse de 508 cm/sec (200 pouces/sec) Altitude : Fonctionnement –15,2 à 3048 m (–50 à 10 000 pieds) Stockage –15,2 à 10 668 m (–50 à 35 000 pieds) Caractéristiques physiques116 Annexe www.dell.com | support.dell.com AVIS : Si vous n'êtes pas un expert en informatique, ne modifiez pas les paramètres de ce programme. Certaines modifications peuvent altérer le fonctionnement de votre ordinateur. Accès au programme de configuration du système 1 Mettez votre ordinateur sous tension (ou redémarrez-le). 2 Lorsque le logo bleu DELL™ apparaît, appuyez immédiatement sur . Si vous attendez trop longtemps et que le logo du système d'exploitation apparaît, patientez jusqu'à ce que vous voyiez le bureau de Microsoft® Windows®. Éteignez alors l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section page 63) et faites une nouvelle tentative. Écrans du programme de configuration du système L'écran du programme de configuration du système affiche les informations de configuration en vigueur ou des informations modifiables concernant votre ordinateur. Les informations sur l'écran sont réparties en trois groupes : la liste des options, le champ des options activées et les fonctions des touches. Liste des options — Ce champ apparaît à gauche dans la fenêtre du programme de configuration du système. Il s'agit d'une liste déroulante qui contient les fonctions qui définissent la configuration de votre ordinateur, y compris le matériel installé et les fonctions d'économie d'énergie et de sécurité. Faites défiler la liste vers le haut ou le bas à l'aide des touches flèche haut et flèche bas. Lorsqu'une option est en surbrillance, le Champ Option affiche davantage d'informations sur cette option ainsi que les paramètres actuels et disponibles de cette option. Champ Option — Ce champ contient des informations sur chaque option. Vos paramètres actuels s'affichent dans ce champ et vous pouvez les modifier à partir de ce champ. Utilisez les touches fléchées gauche et droite pour mettre en surbrillance une option. Appuyez sur pour rendre cette sélection active. Fonctions des touches — Ce champ apparaît sous le Champ Option et répertorie les touches et leurs fonctions dans le programme de configuration du système.Annexe 117 Options de configuration du système REMARQUE : En fonction de votre ordinateur et des périphériques installés, les éléments répertoriés dans cette section peuvent ne pas s'afficher ou ne pas s'afficher tels qu'ils sont répertoriés. Système Infos système Répertorie les informations système, telles que le nom de l'ordinateur, le numéro de version et la date du BIOS, les étiquettes système et d'autres informations spécifiques au système. Infos UC Indiquent si le processeur prend en charge la technologie HyperThreading et répertorient la vitesse de bus du processeur, l'ID du processeur, la vitesse d'horloge et la mémoire cache L2. Infos mémoire Indique la quantité de mémoire installée, sa vitesse, le mode de canal (double ou simple) et le type de mémoire installé. Date/heure Affiche les paramètres de date et heure actuels. Séquence d'amorçage L'ordinateur essaie de redémarrer à partir de la séquence de périphériques indiquée dans cette liste. REMARQUE : Si vous insérez un périphérique d'amorçage et vous redémarrez l'ordinateur, cette option apparaît dans le menu du programme de configuration du système. Pour démarrer à partir d'un périphérique de mémoire USB, sélectionnez le périphérique USB et déplacez-le afin de le mettre en première position dans la liste. Unités Lecteur de disquette Identifie et définit l'état du lecteur de disquette connecté au connecteur étiqueté FLOPPY sur la carte système : Éteint, USB, Interne ou Lecture seule. Lecteurs 0 à 5 Identifie les lecteurs connectés aux connecteurs étiquetés SATA ou PRI IDE sur la carte système et répertorie la capacité des disques durs. Contrôleur de lecteur Identifie et définit les paramètres du contrôleur SATA pour RAID. Vous pouvez paramétrer le contrôleur SATA sur Détection auto/AHCI RAID, Détection auto/ATA RAID ou RAID activé. Périphériques intégrés Contrôleur NIC Vous pouvez paramétrer le NIC sur Activé (valeur par défaut), Désactivé ou Activé avec PXE. Lorsque le paramètre Activé avec PXE est actif (disponible uniquement pour les processus d'amorçage suivants), l'utilisateur est invité à appuyer sur . Cette combinaison de touches affiche un menu qui vous permet de sélectionner une méthode d'amorçage à partir d'un serveur de réseau. Si aucune procédure d'amorçage n'est disponible à partir du serveur de réseau, l'ordinateur essaie de démarrer à partir du périphérique suivant dans la liste de séquence d'amorçage. Contrôleur audio Active ou désactive le contrôleur audio intégré.118 Annexe www.dell.com | support.dell.com USB Paramétré sur Activé (valeur par défaut) de sorte que les périphériques USB seront détectés et pris en charge par le système d'exploitation. Port souris Active ou désactive le contrôleur de souris intégré compatible PS/2. Mode Port LPT Identifie et définit les paramètres du port parallèle. Vous pouvez paramétrer le port parallèle sur Désactivé,AT, PS/2, EPP ou ECP. Adresse Port LPT Identifie l'adresse du port parallèle. DMA port LPT Identifie et définit les paramètres DMA du port parallèle. Vous pouvez définir les paramètres DMA du port parallèle sur Désactivé, DMA1 ou DMA3. Port série n°1 Identifie et définit les paramètres du port série. La valeur Auto, paramètre par défaut, permet d'attribuer automatiquement une désignation particulière à un connecteur (COM1 ou COM3). Vidéo Vidéo principale Ce paramètre définit le contrôleur vidéo principal lorsque deux contrôleurs vidéo sont présents sur l'ordinateur. Performances HyperThreading Si le processeur de votre ordinateur prend en charge la technologie Hyper-Threading, cette option apparaît dans la liste des options. Performances • Contourner — L'ordinateur n'effectue aucun test ni aucune modification de la configuration acoustique actuelle. • Silence (valeur par défaut) — Le disque dur fonctionne le plus silencieusement possible. • Recommandé — Le disque dur fonctionne au niveau recommandé par le fabricant. • Performances —Le disque dur fonctionne à sa vitesse maximale. REMARQUE : L'activation du mode Performances peut accroître le niveau sonore du disque dur sans pour autant affecter ses performances. REMARQUE : La modification de la configuration acoustique n'altère pas l'image du disque dur. Sécurité Cette section affiche les options de sécurité du système disponibles. Mot de passe administrateur Cette option limite l'accès au programme de configuration du système de l'ordinateur de la même façon que l'accès au système peut être limité à l'aide de l'option Mot de passe système. Mot de passe système Affiche l'état actuel de la fonction de sécurité par mot de passe du système et permet d'affecter et de vérifier un nouveau mot de passe système. État du mot de passe Cette option verrouille le champ Mot de passe système avec le mot de passe de configuration. Lorsque ce champ est verrouillé, vous ne pouvez plus désactiver la sécurité par mot de passe en appuyant sur au démarrage de l'ordinateur.Annexe 119 Gestion de l'alimentation Récupération de l'alimentation en CA Détermine ce qui se passe lorsque l'ordinateur est à nouveau alimenté en CA. Mise en route automatique Met automatiquement l'ordinateur sous tension. Les choix possibles sont tous les jours ou tous les lundis à vendredis. Le paramètre par défaut est Désactivé. Cette fonction ne marche pas si vous éteignez votre ordinateur en utilisant une multiprise ou un parasurtenseur. Durée de mise sous tension auto Définit la durée nécessaire à la mise sous tension automatique de l'ordinateur. L'heure est sauvegardée au format de 24 heures (heures:minutes). Modifiez l'heure de démarrage en appuyant sur la touche flèche droite ou flèche gauche pour augmenter ou diminuer le chiffre, ou en tapant les chiffres dans les champs de date et d'heure. Cette fonction ne marche pas si vous éteignez votre ordinateur en utilisant une multiprise ou un parasurtenseur. Mode Faible consommation Lorsque l'option Mode Faible consommation est sélectionnée, les événements de réveil distants ne peuvent plus réactiver l'ordinateur à partir du mode Mise en veille prolongée ou Désactivé. Réveil à distance Cette option permet de réactiver l'ordinateur lorsqu'un NIC ou un modem avec réveil à distance reçoit un signal de réveil. Le paramètre par défaut est Activé. L'option Activé avec démarrage à partir d'un NIC permet à l'ordinateur d'essayer de démarrer à partir d'un réseau au lieu d'une séquence d'amorçage. REMARQUE : Normalement, le système peut être réactivé à distance lorsqu'il est en mode Inactif, en mode Mise en veille prolongée ou lorsqu'il est éteint. Lorsque Mode Faible consommation (dans le menu Gestion de l'alimentation) est activé, l'ordinateur ne peut être réactivé à distance que lorsqu'il est en mode Inactif. Mode Inactif Les options possibles sont S1, un état inactif lequel l'ordinateur tourne en mode faible consommation, et S3, un état de mise en veille pendant lequel l'alimentation est réduite ou coupée pour la plupart des composants mais pendant lequel la mémoire du système reste active. Maintenance Valeurs par défaut CMOS Ce paramètre restaure les paramètres par défaut usine de l'ordinateur. Journal des événements Affiche le journal des événements système. Mise à jour du BIOS Une fois la nouvelle version du BIOS téléchargée, utilisez cette option pour identifier et définir l'emplacement du fichier de mise à jour du BIOS. Les options possibles sont Disquette ou Disque.120 Annexe www.dell.com | support.dell.com Séquence d'amorçage Cette fonction permet de modifier la séquence d'amorçage des périphériques. Paramètres de l'option • Lecteur de disquette — L'ordinateur essaie de démarrer à partir du lecteur de disquette. Si le lecteur de disquette n'est pas amorçable, si aucune disquette ne se trouve dans le lecteur ou si aucun lecteur de disquette n'a été installé dans l'ordinateur, celui-ci génère un message d'erreur. • Disque dur — L'ordinateur essaie de démarrer à partir du disque dur principal. Si aucun système d'exploitation ne se trouve sur le disque dur, l'ordinateur génère un message d'erreur. • Lecteur de CD — L'ordinateur tente de démarrer à partir du lecteur de CD. Si le lecteur ne contient aucun CD ou si le CD ne contient aucun système d'exploitation, l'ordinateur génère un message d'erreur. • Périphérique Flash USB — Insérez le périphérique de mémoire dans un port USB et redémarrez l'ordinateur. Lorsque la mention F12 = Menu d'amorçage s'affiche dans le coin supérieur droit de l'écran, appuyez sur . Le BIOS détecte le périphérique et ajoute l'option Flash USB au menu d'amorçage. REMARQUE : Pour démarrer sur un périphérique USB, celui-ci doit être amorçable. Consultez la documentation du périphérique pour vérifier s'il est amorçable ou non. Comportement du POST Démarrage rapide Si cette option est paramétrée sur Activé (valeur par défaut), votre ordinateur démarre plus rapidement car il saute certaines configurations et certains tests. Touche de verrouillage numérique Cette option concerne le groupe de touches le plus à droite sur votre clavier. Lorsqu'elle est paramétrée sur Activé (valeur par défaut), cette option active les fonctions numériques et mathématiques figurant en haut de chaque touche. Lorsqu'elle est paramétrée sur Désactivé, cette option active les fonctions de contrôle du curseur figurant en bas de chaque touche. Installation du système d'exploitation Ce paramètre permet de paramétrer Mode Installation du système d'exploitation sur Activé ou Désactivé (valeur par défaut). Touches de raccourci POST Cette option permet de spécifier les touches de fonctions à afficher à l'écran lorsque l'ordinateur démarre. Erreurs clavier Cette option active ou désactive l'émission de rapports d'erreurs concernant le clavier lorsque l'ordinateur démarre.Annexe 121 Modification de la séquence d'amorçage pour l'amorçage actuel Vous pouvez utiliser cette fonction pour, par exemple, faire démarrer l'ordinateur à partir du lecteur de CD afin de pouvoir exécuter Dell Diagnostics qui se trouve sur le CD Dell Dimension ResourceCD et le faire démarrer à partir du disque dur une fois les tests de diagnostic terminés. Vous pouvez également utiliser cette fonction pour redémarrer votre ordinateur à partir d'un périphérique USB, tel qu'un lecteur de disquette, une clé de mémoire ou un lecteur de CD-RW. REMARQUE : Si vous démarrez à partir d'un lecteur de disquette USB, vous devez d'abord paramétrer le lecteur de disquette sur Éteint dans le programme de configuration du système (reportez-vous à la page 115). 1 Si vous démarrez à partir d'un périphérique USB, connectez le périphérique USB à un connecteur USB (reportez-vous à la page 71). 2 Mettez votre ordinateur sous tension (ou redémarrez-le). 3 Lorsque F2 = Configuration, F12 = Menu d'amorçage s'affiche dans le coin supérieur droit de l'écran, appuyez sur . Si vous attendez trop longtemps et que le logo du système d'exploitation apparaît, patientez jusqu'à ce que le bureau de Microsoft Windows s'affiche. Éteignez alors l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la section page 63) et faites une nouvelle tentative. Le menu Périphérique d'amorçage s'affiche, répertoriant tous les périphériques d'amorçage disponibles. Un numéro est associé à chaque périphérique. 4 Au bas du menu, entrez le numéro du périphérique à utiliser pour l'amorçage actuel uniquement. Par exemple, si vous démarrez à partir d'une clé de mémoire USB, mettez en surbrillance Périphérique Flash USB et appuyez sur . REMARQUE : Pour démarrer sur un périphérique USB, celui-ci doit être amorçable. Consultez la documentation du périphérique pour vérifier s'il est amorçable ou non. Modification de la séquence d'amorçage pour les prochains amorçages 1 Accédez au programme de configuration du système (reportez-vous à la page 116). 2 Utilisez les touches fléchées pour mettre en surbrillance l'option de menu Séquence d'amorçage et appuyez sur pour accéder au menu. REMARQUE : Notez par écrit la séquence de démarrage utilisée au cas où vous auriez besoin de la restaurer. 3 Appuyez sur les touches flèche haut et flèche bas pour faire défiler la liste de périphériques. 4 Appuyez sur la barre d'espacement pour activer ou désactiver un périphérique (les périphériques activés sont cochés). 5 Appuyez sur le signe plus (+) ou moins (–) pour déplacer un périphérique sélectionné vers le haut ou vers le bas de la liste.122 Annexe www.dell.com | support.dell.com Effacement des mots de passe oubliés PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d’information sur le produit. 1 Suivez les procédures indiquées dans la section «Avant de commencer» à la page 63. 2 Localisez le cavalier de mot de passe à 3 broches (PSWD) sur la carte système (reportezvous à la page 71) et reliez la fiche de cavalier aux broches 2 et 3 pour effacer le mot de passe. REMARQUE : Lorsque vous recevez votre ordinateur, la fiche de cavalier est reliée aux broches 1 et 2. 3 Fermez le capot de l'ordinateur. 4 Rebranchez l'ordinateur et le moniteur à leurs prises électriques, puis allumez-les. 5 Lorsque le bureau Microsoft® Windows® apparaît, arrêtez l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la page 63). 6 Éteignez le moniteur et débranchez-le de la prise secteur. 7 Déconnectez le câble d'alimentation de l'ordinateur de la prise secteur, puis appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation pour mettre la carte système à la terre. 8 Ouvrez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la page 69). 9 Localisez le cavalier de mot de passe à 3 broches sur la carte système (reportez-vous à la page 71) et reliez le cavalier aux broches 1 et 2 pour réactiver la fonction Mot de passe. 10 Remettez le capot de l'ordinateur en place (reportez-vous à la page 110). AVIS : Pour connecter le câble de réseau, branchez-le d'abord à la prise réseau murale, puis à l'ordinateur. 11 Rebranchez l'ordinateur et ses périphériques à leurs prises électriques, puis allumez-les. CLR CMOS (page 123) PASSAnnexe 123 Effacement des paramètres CMOS PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, lisez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d’information sur le produit. 1 Suivez les procédures indiquées dans la section «Avant de commencer» à la page 63. 2 Réinitialisez les paramètres CMOS actuels : a Localisez le cavalier CMOS à 3 broches (CLR CMOS) sur la carte système (reportezvous à la page 71). b Retirez la fiche de cavalier des broches 2 et 3. c Placez la fiche de cavalier sur les broches 1 et 2, puis patientez environ 5 secondes. d Remettez la fiche de cavalier sur les broches 2 et 3. 3 Fermez le capot de l'ordinateur (reportez-vous à la page 110). AVIS : Pour connecter un câble de réseau, branchez-le d'abord à la prise réseau murale, puis à l'ordinateur. 4 Rebranchez l'ordinateur et ses périphériques à leurs prises secteur, puis allumez-les. Politique de support technique de Dell (ÉtatsUnis uniquement) Le support technique fourni par les techniciens de Dell nécessite la coopération et la participation du client dans le processus de dépannage et permet de restaurer le système d'exploitation, les logiciels et les pilotes matériels à leur état d'origine, c'est-à-dire, à la configuration par défaut fournie par Dell ; il permet en outre de vérifier le fonctionnement approprié de l'ordinateur et du matériel installé par Dell. En plus du support technique par nos techniciens, vous disposez d'une aide en ligne à l'adresse support.dell.com. Des options payantes de support technique complémentaire sont également disponibles. Dell offre un support technique limité pour l'ordinateur et tous les logiciels et périphériques1 installés par Dell. Le support technique pour les logiciels et les périphériques tiers est assuré par le fabricant lui-même, y compris le support pour tout logiciel ou périphérique acheté et/ou installé par le biais de Dell Software & Peripherals, Readyware et Custom Factory Integration2 . 1 Les services de réparation sont fournis selon les termes et les conditions stipulés par votre garantie limitée et par tout contrat de service de support optionnel acheté avec l'ordinateur. 2 Tous les composants Dell standard inclus dans un projet d'intégration personnalisée en usine (Custom Factory Integration - CFI) sont couverts par la garantie limitée standard de Dell applicable à votre ordinateur. Toutefois, Dell propose un programme de remplacement des pièces pour couvrir tous les composants non standard ou de sociétés tierces intégrés via CFI pendant la durée du contrat de service de l’ordinateur. Définition des logiciels et périphériques installés par Dell Les logiciels installés par Dell englobent le système d'exploitation et certains logiciels installés sur l'ordinateur pendant le processus de fabrication (Microsoft® Office, Norton Antivirus, etc.).124 Annexe www.dell.com | support.dell.com Les périphériques installés par Dell incluent les cartes d'extension, la baie modulaire de marque Dell ou les accessoires de carte PC. Sont inclus également les produits de marque Dell suivants : moniteurs, claviers, souris, haut-parleurs, microphones pour modems à fonction téléphonique, stations d'accueil et réplicateurs de port, produits réseau et le câblage associé. Définition des logiciels et périphériques de sociétés tierces Les logiciels et périphériques tiers incluent tout périphérique, accessoire ou logiciel vendu par Dell mais qui ne porte pas la marque Dell (imprimantes, scanners et appareils photo, jeux, etc.). Le support technique pour tout logiciel ou périphérique tiers est fourni par le fabricant du produit en question. Contacter Dell Vous pouvez contacter Dell par des moyens électroniques via les sites Web suivants : • www.dell.com • support.dell.com (support technique) • premiersupport.dell.com (support technique pour les établissements d'enseignement et gouvernementaux, le domaine de la santé et les grands comptes comprenant les clients Premier, Platinum et Gold) Pour les adresses Internet de votre pays, recherchez la section appropriée du pays dans le tableau ci-dessous. REMARQUE : Les numéros verts sont valables dans le pays pour lequel ils sont renseignés. Si vous devez contacter Dell, utilisez les adresses électroniques, les numéros de téléphone et les indicatifs fournis dans le tableau ci-dessous. Si vous avez besoin d'assistance pour connaître les indicatifs à utiliser, contactez un opérateur local ou international. Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et urbain Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse Messagerie électronique Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros verts Afrique du Sud (Johannesburg) Indicatif international : 09/091 Indicatif national : 27 Indicatif urbain : 11 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Courriel : dell_za_support@dell.com Support technique 011 709 7710 Service clientèle 011 709 7707 Ventes 011 709 7700 Télécopieur 011 706 0495 Standard 011 709 7700Annexe 125 Allemagne (Langen) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 49 Indicatif urbain : 6103 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Courriel : tech_support_central_europe@dell.com Support technique 06103 766-7200 Service clientèle pour le grand public et les PME 0180-5-224400 Service clientèle segment International 06103 766-9570 Service clientèle comptes privilégiés 06103 766-9420 Service clientèle grands comptes 06103 766-9560 Service clientèle comptes publics 06103 766-9555 Standard 06103 766-7000 Amérique Latine Support technique clients (Austin, Texas, ÉtatsUnis) 512 728-4093 Service clientèle (Austin, Texas, États-Unis) 512 728-3619 Télécopieur (Support technique et Service clientèle) (Austin, Texas, États-Unis) 512 728-3883 Ventes (Austin, Texas, États-Unis) 512 728-4397 Télécopieur pour les ventes (Austin, Texas, ÉtatsUnis) 512 728-4600 ou 512 728-3772 Anguilla Support général numéro vert : 800-335-0031 Antigua-et-Barbuda Support général 1-800-805-5924 Antilles Néerlandaises Support général 001-800-882-1519 Argentine (Buenos Aires) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 54 Indicatif urbain : 11 Site Web : www.dell.com.ar Support technique et Service clientèle numéro vert : 0-800-444-0733 Ventes 0-810-444-3355 Télécopieur pour Support technique 11 4515 7139 Télécopieur pour Service clientèle 11 4515 7138 Aruba Support général numéro vert : 800-1578 Australie (Sydney) Indicatif international : 0011 Indicatif national : 61 Indicatif urbain : 2 Courriel (Australie) : au_tech_support@dell.com Courriel (Nouvelle-Zélande) : nz_tech_support@dell.com Grand public et PME 1-300-65-55-33 Gouvernement et entreprises numéro vert : 1-800-633-559 Division des comptes privilégiés numéro vert : 1-800-060-889 Service clientèle numéro vert : 1-800-819-339 Ventes aux grandes entreprises numéro vert : 1-800-808-385 Ventes aux particuliers numéro vert : 1-800-808-312 Télécopieur numéro vert : 1-800-818-341 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et urbain Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse Messagerie électronique Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros verts126 Annexe www.dell.com | support.dell.com Autriche (Vienne) Indicatif international : 900 Indicatif national : 43 Indicatif urbain : 1 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Courriel : tech_support_central_europe@dell.com Ventes aux grand public et PME 0820 240 530 00 Télécopieur pour le grand public et les PME 0820 240 530 49 Service clientèle pour le grand public et les PME 0820 240 530 14 Service clientèle Comptes privilégiés/Entreprises 0820 240 530 16 Support technique pour le grand public et les PME 0820 240 530 14 Support technique Comptes privilégiés/Entreprises 0660 8779 Standard 0820 240 530 00 Bahamas Support général numéro vert : 1-866-278-6818 Belgique (Bruxelles) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 32 Indicatif urbain : 2 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Courriel : tech_be@dell.com Courriel pour les clients francophones : support.euro.dell.com/be/fr/emaildell/ Support technique 02 481 92 88 Service clientèle 02 481 91 19 Ventes aux grandes entreprises 02 481 91 00 Télécopieur 02 481 92 99 Standard 02 481 91 00 Bermudes Support général 1-800-342-0671 Bolivie Support général numéro vert : 800-10-0238 Brésil Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 55 Indicatif urbain : 51 Site Web : www.dell.com/br Service clientèle, Support technique 0800 90 3355 Télécopieur pour Support technique 51 481 5470 Télécopieur pour Service clientèle 51 481 5480 Ventes 0800 90 3390 Brunei Indicatif national : 673 Support technique clients (Penang, Malaisie) 604 633 4966 Service clientèle (Penang, Malaisie) 604 633 4949 Ventes aux particuliers (Penang, Malaisie) 604 633 4955 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et urbain Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse Messagerie électronique Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros vertsAnnexe 127 Canada (North York, Ontario) Indicatif international : 011 État des commandes en ligne : www.dell.ca/ostatus AutoTech (Support technique automatisé) numéro vert : 1-800-247-9362 TechFax numéro vert : 1-800-950-1329 Service clientèle (grand public et PME) numéro vert : 1-800-847-4096 Service clientèle (grands comptes et gouvernement) numéro vert : 1-800-326-9463 Support technique (grand public et PME) numéro vert : 1-800-847-4096 Support technique (grands comptes et gouvernement) numéro vert : 1-800-387-5757 Ventes au grand public et aux PME numéro vert : 1-800-387-52 Ventes (grands comptes et gouvernement) numéro vert : 1-800-387-5755 Vente de pièces et Vente de service étendu 1866 440 3355 Chili (Santiago) Indicatif national : 56 Indicatif urbain : 2 Ventes, Service clientèle, Support technique numéro vert : 1230-020-4823 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et urbain Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse Messagerie électronique Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros verts128 Annexe www.dell.com | support.dell.com Chine (Xiamen) Indicatif national : 86 Indicatif urbain : 592 Site Web pour Support technique : support.dell.com.cn Adresse électronique du Support technique : cn_support@dell.com Télécopieur pour Support technique 818 1350 Support technique (Dimension™ et Inspiron™) numéro vert : 800 858 2969 Support technique (OptiPlex™, Latitude™ et Dell Precision™) numéro vert : 800858 0950 Support technique (serveurs et stockage) numéro vert : 800858 0960 Support technique (projecteurs, PDA, imprimantes, commutateurs, routeurs, etc.) numéro vert : 800 858 2920 Commentaires clients numéro vert : 800 858 2060 Grand public et PME numéro vert : 800 858 2222 Division des comptes privilégiés numéro vert : 800 858 2557 Comptes grandes entreprises - GCP numéro vert : 800 858 2055 Comptes clés des grandes entreprises numéro vert : 800 858 2628 Comptes grandes entreprises - Nord numéro vert : 800 858 2999 Comptes grandes entreprises Administration et enseignement Nord numéro vert : 800 858 2955 Comptes grandes entreprises - Est numéro vert : 800 858 2020 Comptes grandes entreprises Administration et enseignement Est numéro vert : 800 858 2669 Queue Team (file d'attente) Comptes grandes entreprises numéro vert : 800 858 2222 Comptes grandes entreprises - Sud numéro vert : 800 858 2355 Comptes grandes entreprises - Ouest numéro vert : 800 858 2811 Comptes grandes entreprises Pièces détachées numéro vert : 800 858 2621 Colombie Support général 980-9-15-3978 Corée (Séoul) Indicatif international : 001 Indicatif national : 82 Indicatif urbain : 2 Support technique numéro vert : 080-200-3800 Ventes numéro vert : 080-200-3600 Service clientèle (Séoul, Corée) numéro vert : 080-200-3800 Service clientèle (Penang, Malaisie) 604 633 4949 Télécopieur 2194-6202 Standard 2194-6000 Costa Rica Support général 0800-012-0435 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et urbain Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse Messagerie électronique Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros vertsAnnexe 129 Danemark (Copenhague) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 45 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Support par courriel (ordinateurs portables) : den_nbk_support@dell.com Support par courriel (ordinateurs de bureau) : den_support@dell.com Support par courriel (serveurs) : Nordic_server_support@dell.com Support technique 7023 0182 Service clientèle (relations) 7023 0184 Service clientèle pour le grand public et les PME 3287 5505 Standard (relations) 3287 1200 Standard télécopieur (relations) 3287 1201 Standard (grand public et PME) 3287 5000 Télécopieur (grand public et PME) 3287 5001 Dominique Support général numéro vert : 1-866-278-6821 Équateur Support général numéro vert : 999-119 Espagne (Madrid) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 34 Indicatif urbain : 91 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Courriel : support.euro.dell.com/es/es/emaildell/ Grand public et PME Support technique 902 100 130 Service clientèle 902 118 540 Ventes 902 118 541 Standard 902 118 541 Télécopieur 902 118 539 Grandes entreprises Support technique 902 100 130 Service clientèle 902 118 546 Standard 91 722 92 00 Télécopieur 91 722 95 83 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et urbain Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse Messagerie électronique Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros verts130 Annexe www.dell.com | support.dell.com États-Unis (Austin, Texas) Indicatif international : 011 Indicatif national : 1 Service d'état des commandes automatisé numéro vert : 1-800-433-9014 AutoTech (ordinateurs portables et de bureau) numéro vert : 1-800-247-9362 Client (domicile et siège social) Support technique numéro vert : 1-800-624-9896 Service clientèle numéro vert : 1-800-624-9897 Support technique Dellnet™ numéro vert : 1-877-Dellnet (1-877-335-5638) Clients du programme d'achats par les employés (EPP) numéro vert : 1-800-695-8133 Site Web des services financiers : www.dellfinancialservices.com Services financiers (leasing/prêts) numéro vert : 1-877-577-3355 Services financiers (Comptes privilégiés Dell [DPA]) numéro vert : 1-800-283-2210 Secteur privé Service clientèle et Support technique numéro vert : 1-800-822-8965 Clients du programme d'achats par les employés (EPP) numéro vert : 1-800-695-8133 Support technique pour les imprimantes et les projecteurs numéro vert : 1-877-459-7298 Public (gouvernement, domaines Éducation et Santé) Service clientèle et Support technique numéro vert : 1-800-456-3355 Clients du programme d'achats par les employés (EPP) numéro vert : 1-800-234-1490 Ventes Dell numéro vert : 1-800-289-3355 ou numéro vert : 1-800-879- 3355 Points de vente Dell (ordinateurs Dell recyclés) numéro vert : 1-888-798-7561 Ventes de logiciels et de périphériques numéro vert : 1-800-671-3355 Ventes de pièces au détail numéro vert : 1-800-357-3355 Service étendu et ventes sous garantie numéro vert : 1-800-247-4618 Télécopieur numéro vert : 1-800-727-8320 Services Dell pour les sourds, les malentendants ou les personnes ayant des problèmes d'élocution numéro vert : 1-877- DELLTTY (1-877-335-5889) Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et urbain Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse Messagerie électronique Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros vertsAnnexe 131 Finlande (Helsinki) Indicatif international : 990 Indicatif national : 358 Indicatif urbain : 9 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Courriel : fin_support@dell.com Support par courriel (serveurs) : Nordic_support@dell.com Support technique 09 253 313 60 Télécopieur pour Support technique 09 253 313 81 Suivi clientèle 09 253 313 38 Service clientèle pour le grand public et les PME 09 693 791 94 Télécopieur 09 253 313 99 Standard 09 253 313 00 France (Paris) (Montpellier) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 33 Indicatifs de la ville : (1)(4) Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Courriel : support.euro.dell.com/fr/fr/emaildell/ Grand public et PME Support technique 0825 387 270 Service clientèle 0825 823 833 Standard 0825 004 700 Standard (appels extérieurs à la France) 04 99 75 40 00 Ventes 0825 004 700 Télécopieur 0825 004 701 Fax (appels extérieurs à la France) 04 99 75 40 01 Grandes entreprises Support technique 0825 004 719 Service clientèle 0825 338 339 Standard 01 55 94 71 00 Ventes 01 55 94 71 00 Télécopieur 01 55 94 71 01 Grèce Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 30 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Courriel : support.euro.dell.com/gr/en/emaildell/ Support technique 080044149518 Support technique Gold 08844140083 Standard 2108129800 Ventes 2108129800 Télécopieur 2108129812 Grenade Support général numéro vert : 1-866-540-3355 Guatemala Support général 1-800-999-0136 Guyane Support général numéro vert : 1-877-270-4609 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et urbain Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse Messagerie électronique Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros verts132 Annexe www.dell.com | support.dell.com Hong Kong Indicatif international : 001 Indicatif national : 852 Site Web : support.ap.dell.com Courriel : ap_support@dell.com Support technique (Dimension™ et Inspiron™) 2969 3189 Support technique (OptiPlex™, Latitude™ et Dell Precision™) 2969 3191 Support technique (PowerApp™, PowerEdge™, PowerConnect™ et PowerVault™) 2969 3196 Support technique Gold Queue EEC 2969 3187 Protection des droits du client 3416 0910 Comptes des grandes entreprises 3416 0907 Programmes clients internationaux 3416 0908 Division des moyennes entreprises 3416 0912 Division du grand public et des PME 2969 3105 Îles Turks et Caicos Support général numéro vert : 1-866-540-3355 Îles Vierges Britanniques Support général numéro vert : 1-866-278-6820 Îles Vierges (États-Unis) Support général 1-877-673-3355 Inde Support technique 1600 33 8045 Ventes 1600 33 8044 Irlande (Cherrywood) Indicatif international : 16 Indicatif national : 353 Indicatif urbain : 1 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Courriel : dell_direct_support@dell.com Support technique 1850 543 543 Support technique pour le Royaume-Uni (interne au Royaume-Uni uniquement) 0870 908 0800 Service clientèle pour les particuliers 01 204 4014 Service clientèle pour les petites entreprises 01 204 4014 Service clientèle pour le Royaume-Uni (interne au Royaume-Uni uniquement) 0870 906 0010 Service clientèle pour les grandes entreprises 1850 200 982 Service clientèle pour les grandes entreprises (interne au Royaume-Uni uniquement) 0870 907 4499 Ventes pour l'Irlande 01 204 4444 Ventes pour le Royaume-Uni (interne au Royaume-Uni uniquement) 0870 907 4000 Télécopieur/Télécopieur pour les ventes 01 204 0103 Standard 01 204 4444 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et urbain Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse Messagerie électronique Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros vertsAnnexe 133 Italie (Milan) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 39 Indicatif urbain : 02 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Courriel : support.euro.dell.com/it/it/emaildell/ Grand public et PME Support technique 02 577 826 90 Service clientèle 02 696 821 14 Télécopieur 02 696 821 13 Standard 02 696 821 12 Grandes entreprises Support technique 02 577 826 90 Service clientèle 02 577 825 55 Télécopieur 02 575 035 30 Standard 02 577 821 Jamaïque Support général (appel à partir de la Jamaïque uniquement) 1-800-682-3639 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et urbain Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse Messagerie électronique Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros verts134 Annexe www.dell.com | support.dell.com Japon (Kawasaki) Indicatif international : 001 Indicatif national : 81 Indicatif urbain : 44 Site Web : support.jp.dell.com Support technique (serveurs) numéro vert : 0120-198-498 Support technique à l'extérieur du Japon (serveurs) 81-44-556-4162 Support technique (Dimension™ et Inspiron™) numéro vert : 0120-198-226 Support technique à l'extérieur du Japon (Dimension et Inspiron) 81-44-520-1435 Support technique (Dell Precision™, OptiPlex™ et Latitude™) numéro vert : 0120 -198 -433 Support technique à l'extérieur du Japon (Dell Precision, OptiPlex et Latitude) 81-44-556-3894 Support technique (Axim™) numéro vert : 0120-981-690 Support technique à l'extérieur du Japon (Axim) 81-44-556-3468 Service Faxbox 044-556-3490 Service de commandes automatisé 24 h sur 24 044-556-3801 Service clientèle 044-556-4240 Division Ventes aux grandes entreprises (jusqu'à 400 salariés) 044-556-1465 Division Ventes aux comptes privilégiés (plus de 400 salariés) 044-556-3433 Ventes aux comptes grandes entreprises (plus de 3500 salariés) 044-556-3430 Ventes secteur public (agences gouvernementales, établissements d'enseignement et institutions médicales) 044-556-1469 Segment international - Japon 044-556-3469 Utilisateur individuel 044-556-1760 Standard 044-556-4300 La Barbade Support général 1-800-534-3066 Les Îles Caïmans Support général 1-800-805-7541 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et urbain Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse Messagerie électronique Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros vertsAnnexe 135 Luxembourg Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 352 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Courriel : tech_be@dell.com Support technique (Bruxelles, Belgique) 3420808075 Ventes au grand public et aux PME (Bruxelles, Belgique) numéro vert : 080016884 Ventes aux grandes entreprises (Bruxelles, Belgique) 02 481 91 00 Service clientèle (Bruxelles, Belgique) 02 481 91 19 Télécopieur (Bruxelles, Belgique) 02 481 92 99 Standard (Bruxelles, Belgique) 02 481 91 00 Macao Indicatif national : 853 Support technique numéro vert : 0800 582 Service clientèle (Penang, Malaisie) 604 633 4949 Ventes aux particuliers numéro vert : 0800 581 Malaisie (Penang) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 60 Indicatif urbain : 4 Support technique (Dell Precision, OptiPlex et Latitude) numéro vert : 1 800 88 0193 Support technique (Dimension et Inspiron) numéro vert : 1 800 88 1306 Service clientèle 04 633 4949 Ventes aux particuliers numéro vert : 1 800 888 202 Ventes aux grandes entreprises numéro vert : 1 800 888 213 Mexique Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 52 Support technique clients 001-877-384-8979 ou 001-877-269-3383 Ventes 50-81-8800 ou 01-800-888-3355 Service clientèle 001-877-384-8979 ou 001-877-269-3383 Principale 50-81-8800 ou 01-800-888-3355 Montserrat Support général numéro vert : 1-866-278-6822 Nicaragua Support général 001-800-220-1006 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et urbain Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse Messagerie électronique Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros verts136 Annexe www.dell.com | support.dell.com Norvège (Lysaker) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 47 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Support par courriel (ordinateurs portables) : nor_nbk_support@dell.com Support par courriel (ordinateurs de bureau) : nor_support@dell.com Support par courriel (serveurs) : nordic_server_support@dell.com Support technique 671 16882 Suivi clientèle 671 17514 Service clientèle pour le grand public et les PME 23162298 Standard 671 16800 Standard télécopieur 671 16865 Nouvelle-Zélande Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 64 Courriel (Nouvelle-Zélande) : nz_tech_support@dell.com Courriel (Australie) : au_tech_support@dell.com Grand public et PME 0800 446 255 Gouvernement et entreprises 0800 444 617 Ventes 0800 441 567 Télécopieur 0800 441 566 Panama Support général 001-800-507-0962 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et urbain Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse Messagerie électronique Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros vertsAnnexe 137 Pays-Bas (Amsterdam) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 31 Indicatif urbain : 20 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Courriel (Support technique) : (Entreprise) : nl_server_support@dell.com (Latitude) : nl_latitude_support@dell.com (Inspiron) : nl_inspiron_support@dell.com (Dimension) : nl_dimension_support@dell.com (OptiPlex) : nl_optiplex_support@dell.com (Dell Precision) : nl_workstation_support@dell.com Support technique 020 674 45 00 Télécopieur pour Support technique 020 674 47 66 Service clientèle pour le grand public et les PME 020 674 42 00 Suivi clientèle 020 674 4325 Ventes aux grand public et PME 020 674 55 00 Relations ventes 020 674 50 00 Télécopieur Ventes au grand public et aux PME 020 674 47 75 Télécopieur pour les relations ventes 020 674 47 50 Standard 020 674 50 00 Télécopieur du standard 020 674 47 50 Pays du Pacifique et du Sudest Asiatique Support technique clients, Service clientèle et Ventes (Penang, Malaisie) 604 633 4810 Pérou Support général 0800-50-669 Pologne (Varsovie) Indicatif international : 011 Indicatif national : 48 Indicatif urbain : 22 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Courriel : pl_support_tech@dell.com Service clientèle (téléphone) 57 95 700 Service clientèle 57 95 999 Ventes 57 95 999 Service clientèle (télécopieur) 57 95 806 Réception (télécopieur) 57 95 998 Standard 57 95 999 Porto Rico Support général 1-800-805-7545 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et urbain Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse Messagerie électronique Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros verts138 Annexe www.dell.com | support.dell.com Portugal Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 351 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Courriel : support.euro.dell.com/pt/en/emaildell/ Support technique 707200149 Service clientèle 800 300413 Ventes 800 300 410 ou 800 300 411 ou 800 300 412 ou 21 422 07 10 Télécopieur 21 424 01 12 République Dominicaine Support général 1-800-148-0530 République Tchèque (Prague) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 420 Indicatif urbain : 2 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Courriel : czech_dell@dell.com Support technique 02 2186 27 27 Service clientèle 02 2186 27 11 Télécopieur 02 2186 27 14 TechFax 02 2186 27 28 Standard 02 2186 27 11 Royaume-Uni (Bracknell) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 44 Indicatif urbain : 1344 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Site Web du Service clientèle : support.euro.dell.com/uk/en/ECare/Form/Home.asp Courriel : dell_direct_support@dell.com Support technique (Entreprises/Comptes privilégiés/Division Comptes privilégiés [plus de 1000 salariés]) 0870 908 0500 Support technique (direct/Division Comptes privilégiés et général) 0870 908 0800 Service clientèle Comptes internationaux 01344 373 186 Service clientèle pour le grand public et les PME 0870 906 0010 Service clientèle pour les grandes entreprises 01344 373 185 Service clientèle pour les comptes privilégiés (500–5000 employés) 0870 906 0010 Service clientèle Gouvernement central 01344 373 193 Service clientèle Gouvernement local et Enseignement 01344 373 199 Service clientèle (Santé) 01344 373 194 Ventes au grand public et aux PME 0870 907 4000 Ventes aux grandes entreprises/secteur public 01344 860 456 Télécopieur pour le grand public et les PME 0870 907 4006 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et urbain Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse Messagerie électronique Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros vertsAnnexe 139 Salvador Support général 01-899-753-0777 Singapour (Singapour) Indicatif international : 005 Indicatif national : 65 Support technique numéro vert : 800 6011 051 Service clientèle (Penang, Malaisie) 604 633 4949 Ventes aux particuliers numéro vert : 800 6011 054 Ventes aux grandes entreprises numéro vert : 800 6011 053 St Kitts-et-Nevis Support général numéro vert : 1-877-441-4731 St-Lucie Support général 1-800-882-1521 St-Vincent-et-les Grenadines Support général numéro vert : 1-877-270-4609 Suède (Upplands Vasby) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 46 Indicatif urbain : 8 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Courriel : swe_support@dell.com Support par courriel pour Latitude et Inspiron : Swe-nbk_kats@dell.com Support par courriel pour OptiPlex : Swe_kats@dell.com Support par courriel pour les serveurs : Nordic_server_support@dell.com Support technique 08 590 05 199 Suivi clientèle 08 590 05 642 Service clientèle pour le grand public et les PME 08 587 70 527 Support du programme d'achats par les employés (EPP, Employee Purchase Program) 20 140 14 44 Support technique par télécopieur 08 590 05 594 Ventes 08 590 05 185 Suisse (Genève) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 41 Indicatif urbain : 22 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Courriel : Tech_support_central_Europe@dell.com Courriel pour les clients francophones (grand public et PME, et entreprises) : support.euro.dell.com/ch/fr/emaildell/ Support technique (grand public et PME) 0844 811 411 Support technique (entreprises) 0844 822 844 Service clientèle (grand public et PME) 0848 802 202 Service clientèle (entreprises) 0848 821 721 Télécopieur 022 799 01 90 Standard 022 799 01 01 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et urbain Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse Messagerie électronique Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros verts140 Annexe www.dell.com | support.dell.com Taïwan Indicatif international : 002 Indicatif national : 886 Support technique (ordinateurs portables et de bureau) numéro vert : 00801 86 1011 Support technique (serveurs) numéro vert : 0080 60 1256 Ventes aux particuliers numéro vert : 0080 651 228 Ventes aux grandes entreprises numéro vert : 0080 651 227 Thaïlande Indicatif international : 001 Indicatif national : 66 Support technique numéro vert : 0880 060 07 Service clientèle (Penang, Malaisie) 604 633 4949 Ventes numéro vert : 0880 060 09 Trinité/Tobago Support général 1-800-805-8035 Uruguay Support général numéro vert : 000-413-598- 2521 Venezuela Support général 8001-3605 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et urbain Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse Messagerie électronique Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros vertsIndex 141 Index A affichage. Voir moniteur alimentation bouton, 65 connecteur, 68 problèmes, 43 amorçage à partir d'un périphérique USB, 121 Assistant Compatibilité des programmes, 39 Assistant Installation réseau, 28 Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres, 25 assistants Assistant Compatibilité des programmes, 39 Assistant Installation réseau, 28 Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres, 25 audio. Voir son B batterie problèmes, 33 BIOS, 115 bloc d'alimentation ventilateurs, 69 C capot fermeture, 110 loquet du capot, 67 ouverture, 69 caractéristiques alimentation électrique, 114 bus d'extension, 112 commandes et voyants, 113 connecteurs, 113 environnementales, 115 informations sur l'ordinateur, 111 lecteurs, 112 mémoire, 111 physiques, 114 processeur, 111 techniques, 111 vidéo, 112 carte mère. Voir carte système carte système, 71 cartes installation de cartes PCI, 76, 80 logements, 69, 75 logements PCI, 69 logements PCI Express, 69 PCI, 76 PCI Express, 79 retrait de cartes PCI, 78 retrait de cartes PCI Express, 83 types pris en charge, 75 cartes PCI installation, 76 retrait, 78 cartes PCI Express installation, 80 retrait, 83 CD copie, 26 ResourceCD, 9 Système d'exploitation, 12 Centre d'aide et de support, 12 clavier connecteur, 68 problèmes, 38 composants de la carte système, 71 configuration du système, 115 options, 117 connecteurs alimentation, 68 centre/LFE, 68 clavier, 68 DVI, 68 écouteur, 66 IEEE 1394, 66 ligne d'entrée, 68 ligne de sortie, 68 microphone, 68 modem, 68 parallèle, 68 réseau, 67142 Index 142 Index série, 68 son, 68 sortie Téléviseur, 68 souris, 68 surround, 68 USB, 66, 68 VGA, 68 vidéo, 68 connecteurs de son, 68 consignes de sécurité, 10 contrat de licence pour utilisateur final, 10 copie de CD et de DVD, 26 couleur changement, 13 D Dell contacter, 124 Dell Solution Center, 9 fichier d'aide de Dell Dimension, 11 politique de support, 123 site de support, 11 dépannage astuces, 33 Centre d'aide et de support, 12 Dell Diagnostics, 52 Dépanneur des conflits materials, 59 restauration à un état antérieur, 58 voyants de diagnostic, 49 diagnostics Dell, 52 voyants, 49 disque dur installation, 87 installation d'un second disque dur, 90 retrait, 86 voyant d'activité, 65 disques RAID, 17 documentation contrat de licence pour utilisateur final, 10 Dell Solution Center, 9 en ligne, 11 ergonomie, 10 garantie, 10 Guide d’information sur le produit, 10 Recherche d'informations, 9 réglementations, 10 ResourceCD, 9 schéma de configuration, 10 sécurité, 10 DVD copie, 26 DVI connecteur, 68 E écouteur connecteur, 66 écran. Voir moniteur états du voyant d'alimentation, 43 étiquette Microsoft Windows, 11 étiquettes Microsoft Windows, 11 numéro de service, 11 F fichier d'aide Aide de Dell Dimension, 11 Centre d'aide et de support de Windows, 12 G Guide d’information sur le produit, 10 H haut-parleur problèmes, 45 volume, 45 Hyper-Threading, 31 I IEEE 1394 connecteur, 66 problèmes, 37 imprimante problèmes, 44 informations sur l'ergonomie, 10Index 143 informations sur les garanties, 10 informations sur les réglementations, 10 installation de pièces avant de commencer, 63 mise hors tension de l'ordinateur, 63 outils recommandés, 63 Internet problèmes, 35 L lecteur de CD/DVD installation, 95 problèmes, 34 retrait, 94 lecteur de CD-RW problèmes, 35 lecteur de disquette installation, 92 retrait, 91 lecteur de DVD problèmes, 34 lecteurs disque dur, 86 installation d'un disque dur, 87 installation d'un lecteur de CD/DVD, 95 installation d'un lecteur de disquette, 92 portes, 65 problèmes, 33 retrait d'un disque dur, 86 retrait d'un lecteur de CD/DVD, 94 retrait du lecteur de disquette, 91 second disque dur, 90 série ATA, 86 logiciel Hyper-Threading, 31 problèmes, 39-40 logiciels problèmes, 39 M matériel Dell Diagnostics, 52 disques, configuration RAID, 17 mémoire configuration 4 Go, 73 consignes d'installation, 72 installation, 73 présentation de la mémoire DDR2, 72 problèmes, 41 suppression, 75 type pris en charge, 72 messagerie électronique problèmes, 35 messages erreur, 36 messages d'erreur, 36 voyants de diagnostic, 49 microphone connecteur, 68 modem connecteur, 68 problèmes, 35 moniteur connexion à l'ordinateur, 15 connexion de deux moniteurs, 15-16 connexion DVI, 15-16 connexion téléviseur, 16 connexion VGA, 15-16 difficile à lire, 47 mode bureau étendu, 17 mode de clonage, 17 paramètres d'affichage, 17 problèmes, 47 vide, 47 mot de passe cavalier, 122 effacement, 122 N numéro de service, 11 O ordinateur absence de réponse, 38-39 composants internes, 70 plantages, 38-40 restauration à un état antérieur, 58 vue interne, 70 P paramètres configuration du système, 115144 Index 144 Index paramètres CMOS effacement, 123 performance surcadençage, 31 pile, 109 pilotes, 55 à propos de, 55 identification, 55 porte-nom couleur, 13 portes panneau avant, 65 porte des lecteurs, remise en place, 107 porte des lecteurs, retrait, 106 problème plantages d'ordinateur, 38 problèmes alimentation, 43 astuces de dépannage, 33 batterie, 33 clavier, 38 compatibilité des programmes et de Windows, 39 Dell Diagnostics, 52 écran bleu, 40 écran difficile à lire, 47 écran noir, 47 états du voyant d'alimentation, 43 généraux, 38 IEEE 1394, 37 imprimante, 44 Internet, 35 l'ordinateur ne répond plus, 39 lecteur de CD, 34 lecteur de CD-RW, 35 lecteur de DVD, 34 lecteurs, 33 logiciel, 39-40 logiciels, 39 mémoire, 41 messagerie électronique, 35 messages d'erreur, 36 modem, 35 moniteur, 47 moniteur difficile à lire, 47 plantages d'ordinateur, 39-40 plantages de programme, 39 politique de support technique, 123 réglage du volume, 46 réseau, 42 restauration à un état antérieur, 58 scanner, 45 son et haut-parleurs, 45 souris, 41 un programme ne répond plus, 39 unité de disque dur, 35 vidéo et moniteur, 47 voyants de diagnostic, 49 processeur type, 111 ventilateurs, 67 programme de configuration du système accès, 116 écrans, 116 R RAID configuration, 17 Recherche d'informations, 9 réinstallation Windows XP, 60 réseau Assistant Installation réseau, 28 connecteur, 67 problèmes, 42 ResourceCD, 9, 56 Dell Diagnostics, 52 Restauration du système, 58 rétroéclairage du boîtier couleur, 13 S SATA. Voir série ATA scanner problèmes, 45 schéma de configuration, 10 séquence d'amorçage, 120 modification, 121 paramètres de l'option, 120 série connecteurs, 68 série ATA, 86 site Web de support, 11 site Web de support Dell Premier, 10 son problèmes, 45 volume, 45 souris connecteur, 68Index 145 problèmes, 41 support contacter Dell, 124 politique, 123 support technique, 123 surcadençage, 31 système d'exploitation CD, 12 réinstallation, 12 réinstallation de Windows XP, 60 T téléviseur connexion à l'ordinateur, 16, 68 transfert d'informations vers un nouvel ordinateur, 25 U unité de disque dur problèmes, 35 USB amorçage à partir d'un périphérique USB, 121 connecteurs, 66, 68 V ventilateurs bloc d'alimentation, 69 processeur, 67 Vérifier disque, 35 VGA connecteur, 68 vidéo connecteur, 68 problèmes, 47 volume réglage, 46 voyants activité du disque dur, 65 arrière de l'ordinateur, 49 diagnostic, 49 voyants de diagnostic, 49 W Windows XP Assistant Compatibilité des programmes, 39 Assistant Installation réseau, 28 Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres, 25 Centre d'aide et de support, 12 Dépanneur des conflits matériels, 59 Hyper-Threading, 31 réinstallation, 12, 60 restauration des pilotes de périphériques, 56 restauration du système, 58 scanner, 45146 Index 146 Index www.dell.com | support.dell.com Dell™ Dimension™ XPS security cable slot power connector padlock ring modem cover release latch fans diagnostic lights network adapter connector USB 2.0 connectors (6) keyboard connector PCI sound card with IEEE 1394 mouse connector VGA video connector parallel connector serial connector 2 serial connector 1 USB 2.0 connectors (2) headphone connector IEEE 1394 connector card slots DVI video connector G0550bk1.book Page 1 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMNotes, Notices, and Cautions NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your computer. NOTICE: A NOTICE indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death. Abbreviations and Acronyms For a complete list of abbreviations and acronyms, see the Dell™ Dimension™ Help file. To access help files, see page 38. ____________________ Information in this document is subject to change without notice. © 2003 Dell Computer Corporation. All rights reserved. Reproduction in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Computer Corporation is strictly forbidden. Trademarks used in this text: Dell, the DELL logo, DellNet, and Dimension are trademarks of Dell Computer Corporation; Intel, Pentium, and Celeron are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation; Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell Computer Corporation disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own. Model WHL June 2003 P/N G0550 Rev. A01 G0550bk1.book Page 2 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMContents 3 Contents Finding Information for Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 CAUTION: Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 When Using Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 When Working Inside Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Protecting Against Electrostatic Discharge . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Ergonomic Computing Habits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Battery Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 1 Using Your Computer Opening the Drive Door. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Connecting Two Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Configuring Graphics Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Settings and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Removing the Graphics Card Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 About Serial ATA Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 About Your RAID Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 RAID Level 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 RAID Level 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Transferring Information to a New Computer . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Copying CDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Using Easy CD Creator Basic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Using Blank CD-R Discs or Blank CD-RW Discs. . . . . . . . . 28 Helpful Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 How to Copy a CD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 G0550bk1.book Page 3 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM4 Contents Network Setup Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Turning Off Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 2 Optimizing Performance Intel® Performance Acceleration Technology . . . . . . . . . . 32 DDR Memory and Processor Front-Side Bus . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Hyper-Threading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Overclocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 3 Solving Problems Finding Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Finding Help Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Battery Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Drive Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Floppy drive problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 CD drive problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Problems writing to a CD-RW drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 DVD drive problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Hard drive problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 E-Mail, Modem, and Internet Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 General Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 The computer stops responding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 A program stops responding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 A program crashes repeatedly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 A program is designed for an earlier Windows operating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 A solid blue screen appears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 G0550bk1.book Page 4 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMContents 5 Other software problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Other technical problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 General hardware problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 IEEE 1394 Device Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Keyboard Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Mouse Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Network Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Power Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Printer Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Scanner Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Sound and Speaker Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 No sound from speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 No sound from headphones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Video and Monitor Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 If the screen is blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 If the screen is difficult to read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 4 Advanced Troubleshooting Diagnostic Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Dell Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 When to Use the Dell Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Starting the Dell Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Dell Diagnostics Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 What Is a Driver? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Identifying Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Reinstalling Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 G0550bk1.book Page 5 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM6 Contents Using Windows® XP System Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Creating a Restore Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Restoring the Computer to an Earlier Operating State . . . . . 70 Undoing the Last System Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Resolving Software and Hardware Incompatibilities . . . . . . . 71 Reinstalling Microsoft® Windows® XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Before You Reinstall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Reinstalling Windows XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Reinstalling Drivers and Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 5 Removing and Installing Parts Front and Back View of the Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Front View (Doors Open) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Back View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Recommended Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Precautionary Measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Protecting Against Electrostatic Discharge . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Opening the Computer Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Inside View of Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 System Board Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 DDR Memory Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Memory Installation Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Installing Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 PCI Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Installing a PCI Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Removing a PCI Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 G0550bk1.book Page 6 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMContents 7 AGP Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Removing an AGP Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Installing an AGP Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Hard Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Floppy Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 CD/DVD Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Microprocessor Airflow Shroud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Removing the Microprocessor Airflow Shroud . . . . . . . . . 105 Installing the Microprocessor Airflow Shroud . . . . . . . . . 106 Microprocessor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Installing the Microprocessor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Removing the Microprocessor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Removing the Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Replacing the Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Drive Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Removing the Drive Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Replacing the Drive Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Closing the Computer Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 6 Appendix Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Standard Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Viewing Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 System Setup Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Boot Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 G0550bk1.book Page 7 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM8 Contents Clearing Forgotten Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Dell Technical Support Policy (U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Definition of "Dell-Installed" Software and Peripherals . . . . . 129 Definition of "Third-Party" Software and Peripherals . . . . . . 129 Contacting Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Regulatory Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Limited Warranties and Return Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Limited Warranty for Dell-Branded Hardware Products (U.S. Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 "Total Satisfaction" Return Policy (U.S. Only). . . . . . . . . . 136 Limited Warranty Terms for Dell-Branded Hardware Products (Canada Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 "Total Satisfaction" Return Policy (Canada Only) . . . . . . . . 139 Dell Software and Peripherals (Canada Only). . . . . . . . . . 140 1-Year End-User Manufacturer Guarantee (Latin America and the Caribbean Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Intel® Warranty Statement for Pentium® and Celeron® Processors Only (U.S. and Canada Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 G0550bk1.book Page 8 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMFinding Information for Your Computer 9 Finding Information for Your Computer Dell provides the following support options to help you quickly find answers to your questions and problems: • Dell Solution Center — Double-click the Dell Solutions Center icon on your Microsoft® Windows® desktop for documentation, tools, troubleshooting information, and links to online support resources. • Dell Support on your Windows desktop (U.S. only) — From the Dell Solution Center, click Dell Support for additional documentation, tools, and troubleshooting information. • Dell Support on the Internet — The Dell Support website (support.dell.com) provides online tools, including a Knowledge Base, Frequently Asked Questions, Hints and Tips, Software Reinstall Guides, Dell Community Forums, and Dell Customer Care. • Dell Technical Support — E-mail or call technical support personnel for Dell hardware or operating system issues that you cannot resolve using the Dell Support options. Use the following chart to determine where you can find information on a particular topic. What are you looking for? Find It Here • How to access tutorials and other how to information • How to get a copy of my invoice • How to extend my warranty • How to access Dell Support on my Windows desktop (U.S. only) • Additional documentation, tools, troubleshooting information, and links to online support resources Dell Solution Center On your Windows desktop G0550bk1.book Page 9 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM10 Finding Information for Your Computer www.dell.com | support.dell.com • Latest drivers for my computer • Answers to technical service and support questions • Online discussions with other users and technical support • Documentation for my computer Dell Support Website — support.dell.com The Dell Support website provides several online tools, including: • Solutions — Troubleshooting hints and tips, articles from technicians, and online courses • Community Forum — Online discussion with other Dell customers • Upgrades — Upgrade information for components, such as memory, the hard drive, and the operating system • Customer Care — Contact information, order status, warranty, and repair information • Downloads — Drivers, patches, and software updates • Reference — Computer documentation, product specifications, and white papers • How to set up my computer Setup Diagram • Additional information about setting up my computer • How to troubleshoot and solve problems • How to remove and install parts • Technical specifications • How to contact Dell Owner’s Manual What are you looking for? Find It Here G0550bk1.book Page 10 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMFinding Information for Your Computer 11 • Tips on using Windows • How to play CDs and DVDs • How to use standby mode and hibernate mode • How to change my display resolution • How to clean my computer Dell™ Dimension™ Help File 1 Click the Start button and click Help and Support. 2 Click User and system guides and click User’s guides. 3 Click Dell™ Dimension™ Help. • How to use Windows • Documentation for my computer • Documentation for devices (such as a modem) Windows Help and Support Center 1 Click the Start button and click Help and Support. 2Type a word or phrase that describes your problem and click the arrow icon. 3 Click the topic that describes your problem. 4 Follow the instructions on the screen. • A diagnostic program for my computer • Drivers for my computer • My computer documentation • My device documentation ResourceCD Documentation and drivers are already installed on your computer when shipped from Dell. You can use the CD to reinstall drivers (see page 67), run the Dell Diagnostics (see page 64), or access your documentation. Readme files may be included on your CD to provide last-minute updates about technical changes to your computer or advanced technical-reference material for experienced users or technicians. • How to reinstall my operating system Operating System CD Windows XP is already installed on your computer when shipped from Dell. You can use the CD to reinstall the operating system (see page 72). After you reinstall your operating system using the Operating System Reinstallation CD, use the ResourceCD to reinstall drivers for the devices that came with your computer. The product key for your operating system is located on your computer. What are you looking for? Find It Here G0550bk1.book Page 11 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM12 Finding Information for Your Computer www.dell.com | support.dell.com • Service Tag and Express Service Code • Microsoft® Windows® License Label Service Tag and Microsoft Windows Label These labels are located on your computer. •Use the Service Tag to identify your computer when you access Dell Support or when you contact Dell for technical assistance. •Enter the Express Service Code into the automated call-routing system when you contact Dell for technical assistance. Express Service Code service may not be available in some countries. •Use the number on the Windows License Label if you reinstall Windows on your computer. What are you looking for? Find It Here G0550bk1.book Page 12 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMCAUTION: Safety Instructions 13 CAUTION: Safety Instructions Use the following safety guidelines to help ensure your own personal safety and to help protect your computer and working environment from potential damage. General • Do not attempt to service the computer yourself unless you are a trained service technician. Always follow installation instructions closely. • To help prevent electric shock, plug the computer and device power cables into properly grounded electrical outlets. These cables are equipped with 3-prong plugs to help ensure proper grounding. Do not use adapter plugs or remove the grounding prong from a cable. If you must use an extension cable, use a 3-wire cable with properly grounded plugs. • To help avoid the potential hazard of electric shock, do not use your computer during an electrical storm. • To help avoid the potential hazard of electric shock, do not connect or disconnect any cables or perform maintenance or reconfiguration of this product during an electrical storm. • If your computer includes a modem, the cable used with the modem should be manufactured with a minimum wire size of 26 American wire gauge (AWG) and an FCCcompliant RJ-11 modular plug. • Before you clean your computer, disconnect the computer from the electrical outlet. Clean your computer with a soft cloth dampened with water. Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners, which may contain flammable substances. • To help avoid possible damage to the system board, wait 5 seconds after turning off the computer before disconnecting a device from the computer. G0550bk1.book Page 13 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM14 CAUTION: Safety Instructions www.dell.com | support.dell.com • To avoid shorting out your computer when disconnecting a network cable, first unplug the cable from the network adapter on the back of your computer, and then from the network jack. When reconnecting a network cable to your computer, first plug the cable into the network jack, and then into the network adapter. • To help protect your computer from sudden, transient increases and decreases in electrical power, use a surge suppressor, line conditioner, or uninterruptible power supply (UPS). • Ensure that nothing rests on your computer’s cables and that the cables are not located where they can be stepped on or tripped over. • Do not push any objects into the openings of your computer. Doing so can cause fire or electric shock by shorting out interior components. • Keep your computer away from radiators and heat sources. Also, do not block cooling vents. Avoid placing loose papers underneath your computer; do not place your computer in a closed-in wall unit or on a bed, sofa, or rug. CAUTION: Safety Instructions (continued) G0550bk1.book Page 14 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMWhen Using Your Computer 15 When Using Your Computer As you use your computer, observe the following safe-handling guidelines. CAUTION: Do not operate your computer with any cover(s) (including computer covers, bezels, filler brackets, front-panel inserts, and so on) removed. • Your computer is equipped with one of the following: – A fixed-voltage power supply — Computers with a fixed-voltage power supply do not have a voltage selection switch on the back panel and operate at only one voltage (see the regulatory label on the outside of the computer for its operating voltage). – An auto-sensing voltage circuit — Computers with an auto-sensing voltage circuit do not have a voltage selection switch on the back panel and automatically detect the correct operating voltage. – A manual voltage selection switch — Computers with a voltage selection switch on the back panel must be manually set to operate at the correct operating voltage. Set the switch to the position that most closely matches the voltage used in your location. NOTICE: To help avoid damaging a computer with a manual voltage selection switch, set the switch for the voltage that most closely matches the AC power available in your location. For Japan, the voltage selection switch must be set to the 115-V position even though the AC power available in Japan is 100 V. Also, ensure that your monitor and attached devices are electrically rated to operate with the AC power available in your location. • Before working inside the computer, unplug the computer to help prevent electric shock or system board damage. Certain system board components continue to receive power any time the computer is connected to AC power. G0550bk1.book Page 15 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM16 When Using Your Computer www.dell.com | support.dell.com When Working Inside Your Computer Before you open the computer cover, perform the following steps in the sequence indicated. CAUTION: Do not attempt to service the computer yourself, except as explained in your online Dell™ documentation or in instructions otherwise provided to you by Dell. Always follow installation and service instructions closely. NOTICE: To help avoid possible damage to the system board, wait 5 seconds after turning off the computer before removing a component from the system board or disconnecting a device from the computer. 1 Perform an orderly computer shutdown using the operating system menu. 2 Turn off your computer and any devices connected to the computer. 3 Ground yourself by touching an unpainted metal surface on the chassis, such as the metal around the card-slot openings at the back of the computer, before touching anything inside your computer. While you work, periodically touch an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis to dissipate any static electricity that might harm internal components. 4 Disconnect your computer and devices, including the monitor, from their electrical outlets. Also, disconnect any telephone or telecommunication lines from the computer. Doing so reduces the potential for personal injury or shock. In addition, take note of these safety guidelines when appropriate: • When you disconnect a cable, pull on its connector or on its strain-relief loop, not on the cable itself. Some cables have a connector with locking tabs; if you are disconnecting this type of cable, press in on the locking tabs before disconnecting the cable. As you pull connectors apart, keep them evenly aligned to avoid bending any connector pins. Also, before you connect a cable, ensure that both connectors are correctly oriented and aligned. When Using Your Computer (continued) G0550bk1.book Page 16 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMWhen Using Your Computer 17 • Handle components and cards with care. Do not touch the components or contacts on a card. Hold a card by its edges or by its metal mounting bracket. Hold a component such as a microprocessor chip by its edges, not by its pins. CAUTION: There is a danger of a new battery exploding if it is incorrectly installed. Replace the battery only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Do not dispose of the battery along with household waste. Contact your local waste disposal agency for the address of the nearest battery deposit site. Protecting Against Electrostatic Discharge Static electricity can harm delicate components inside your computer. To prevent static damage, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computer’s electronic components, such as the microprocessor. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis. As you continue to work inside the computer, periodically touch an unpainted metal surface to remove any static charge your body may have accumulated. You can also take the following steps to prevent damage from electrostatic discharge (ESD): • Do not remove components from their antistatic packing material until you are ready to install the component in your computer. Just before unwrapping the antistatic packaging, discharge static electricity from your body. • When transporting an electrostatic sensitive component, first place it in an antistatic container or packaging. • Handle all electrostatic sensitive components in a static-safe area. If possible, use antistatic floor pads and workbench pads. Ergonomic Computing Habits CAUTION: Improper or prolonged keyboard use may result in injury. CAUTION: Viewing the monitor screen for extended periods of time may result in eye strain. For comfort and efficiency, observe the ergonomic guidelines in the Dell™ Dimension™ Help file when setting up and using your computer. To access the help file, see page 38. When Using Your Computer (continued) G0550bk1.book Page 17 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM18 When Using Your Computer www.dell.com | support.dell.com Battery Disposal Your computer uses a lithium coin-cell battery. The lithium coin-cell battery is a long-life battery, and it is very possible that you will never need to replace it. However, should you need to replace it, see page 115. Do not dispose of the battery along with household waste. Contact your local waste disposal agency for the address of the nearest battery deposit site. When Using Your Computer (continued) G0550bk1.book Page 18 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM1 SECTION 1 Using Your Computer Opening the Drive Door Connecting Two Monitors Configuring Graphics Cards About Serial ATA Drives About Your RAID Configuration Transferring Information to a New Computer Copying CDs Network Setup Wizard Turning Off Your Computer G0550bk1.book Page 19 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM20 Using Your Computer www.dell.com | support.dell.com Opening the Drive Door Connecting Two Monitors NOTE: If you are connecting two monitors that have VGA connectors, you must have the optional VGA adapter. If you are connecting two flat-panel monitors, at least one of them must have a VGA connector. If you are connecting a television, you may connect only one monitor (VGA or DVI) in addition to the television. If you purchased a video card that supports dual monitors, follow these instructions to connect and enable your monitors. The instructions tell you how to connect either two monitors (each with a VGA connector), one monitor with a VGA connector and one monitor with a DVI connector, or a television. 1 Save any open files, close any open programs, and then shut down your computer through the Start menu (see page 30). 2 Connect the monitor cables to the connectors on the back of the computer. G0550bk1.book Page 20 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMUsing Your Computer 21 NOTE: If your computer has integrated video, do not connect either monitor to the integrated video connector. If both monitors have VGA connectors: a Connect one of the monitors to the VGA (blue) connector on the computer. b Connect the other monitor to the optional VGA adapter and connect the VGA adapter to the DVI (white) connector on the computer. If one monitor has a VGA connector and the other one has a DVI connector: a Connect the VGA connector on the monitor to the VGA (blue) connector on the computer. b Connect the DVI connector on the other monitor to the DVI (white) connector on the computer. NOTE: To connect a television to your computer, you must purchase an S-video cable, which is available at most consumer electronics stores. An S-video cable is not included with your computer. VGA (blue) connector DVI (white) connector optional VGA adapter TV OUT connector G0550bk1.book Page 21 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM22 Using Your Computer www.dell.com | support.dell.com If one of the monitors is a television: a Connect one end of the S-video cable to the TV-OUT connector on the computer. b Connect the other end of the S-video cable to the S-video input connector on your television. a Connect the VGA or DVI monitor as described on page 21. 3 Turn on the computer. The Microsoft® Windows® desktop displays on the primary monitor. 4 Enable clone mode or extended desktop mode in the display settings. • In clone mode, both monitors display the same image. • In extended desktop mode, you can drag objects from one screen to the other, effectively doubling the amount of viewable work space. For information on changing the display settings for your video card, see the user’s guide in the Help and Support Center (click the Start button, click Help and Support, click User and system guides, click Device guides, and then click the guide for your video card). Configuring Graphics Cards Settings and Functions Dell configured your graphics card for optimal performance with most games and other video programs. However, some game manufacturers may recommend that you either change a setting or enable or disable a certain function for a game to properly run. You may also want to readjust settings to better fit your gaming style. Some settings, such as Direct3D or OpenGL, enable you to adjust the card for higher performance or for higher image quality. Other settings, such as contrast or color level, are cosmetic adjustments. Certain high-end graphics cards are available with TV-Out support, which enables you to connect a television to your computer, in addition to the monitor. A TV-Out configuration is ideal for watching movies using an optional DVD player or for giving presentations. For information on connecting a television to your computer, see page 20. G0550bk1.book Page 22 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMUsing Your Computer 23 For information and instructions on adjusting your graphics card’s operating mode, settings, and functions: 1 Click the Start button and click Help and Support. 2 Click User and system guides. 3 Locate and click the guide for your graphics card. Removing the Graphics Card Driver If you want to install a different graphics card in your computer, you must first remove the driver for the graphics card that is currently installed. To remove a graphics card driver: 1 Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2 Double-click Add or Remove Programs. 3 Click the name of the graphics card in the Currently installed programs list. 4 Click Change/Remove and follow the instructions on the screen. After the driver is removed, install the new card (see "AGP Cards" on page 93), and then install the new card’s driver according to the documentation that came with the card. NOTE: If you reinstall the graphics card that came with your computer, the card’s drivers are located on the Dell Dimension ResourceCD (see "Drivers" on page 67 for more information). About Serial ATA Drives Your Dimension™ XPS computer is compatible with both IDE and serial ATA hard drives. Serial ATA drives provide the following benefits by transferring data using serial technology and flexible cables that are thinner and longer than IDE cables: • Improved cable routing facilitates more efficient airflow inside the chassis. • Compact cable connectors save space on the system board and on the hard drive. Combined with the improved cable routing, this allows a more efficient utilization of space inside the chassis. See "Hard Drive" on page 96 for information on serial ATA drive connections. G0550bk1.book Page 23 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM24 Using Your Computer www.dell.com | support.dell.com About Your RAID Configuration If you purchased the optional serial ATA RAID PCI card and RAID configuration, your computer is already set up and ready for operation. This section provides an overview of the RAID configuration that you selected when you purchased your computer. Although there are several RAID configurations available in the computer industry for different types of uses, Dell offers either RAID level 0 or RAID level 1 on the Dimension XPS computer. A RAID level 0 configuration is recommended for high-performance gaming, and a RAID level 1 configuration is recommended for the data integrity requirements for digital photography and audio. NOTE: RAID levels do not represent a hierarchy. A RAID level 1 configuration is not inherently better or worse than a RAID level 0 configuration. RAID Level 0 RAID level 0 uses a storage technique known as "data striping" to provide a high data access rate. Data striping is a method of writing consecutive segments, or stripes, of data sequentially across the physical drives to create a large virtual drive. Data striping allows one of the drives to read data while the other drive is searching for and reading the next block. Another advantage of a RAID level 0 configuration is that it utilizes the full capacities of the drives. If you have two 120-GB drives installed, you have 240 GB on which to store data. NOTICE: Because RAID level 0 provides no data redundancy, if one drive fails, then the data on the other drive is also inaccessible. Therefore, ensure that you perform regular backups when you use a RAID level 0 configuration. serial ATA RAID PCI card configured for RAID level 0 hard drive segment 1 segment 3 segment 5 hard drive segment 2 segment 4 segment 6 G0550bk1.book Page 24 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMUsing Your Computer 25 RAID Level 1 RAID level 1 uses a data-redundancy storage technique known as "mirroring." When data is written to the primary drive, it is then duplicated, or mirrored, on the other drive. A RAID level 1 configuration sacrifices high data access rates for its data redundancy advantages. If a drive failure occurs, subsequent read and write operations are directed to the surviving drive. A replacement drive can then be rebuilt using the data from the surviving drive. Also, because data is duplicated on both drives, two 120-GB RAID level 1 drives collectively have a maximum of 120-GB on which to store data. Transferring Information to a New Computer The Microsoft® Windows® XP operating system provides a Files and Settings Transfer wizard to move data from the source computer to the new computer. You can move data such as: • E-mails • Toolbar settings • Window sizes • Internet bookmarks serial ATA RAID PCI card configured for RAID level 1 hard drive segment 1 segment 2 segment 3 hard drive segment 4 segment 5 segment 6 segment 1 duplicated segment 2 duplicated segment 3 duplicated segment 4 duplicated segment 5 duplicated segment 6 duplicated G0550bk1.book Page 25 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM26 Using Your Computer www.dell.com | support.dell.com You can transfer the data to the new computer over a network or serial connection, or you can store it on a removable medium, such as a writable CD or floppy disk. To prepare the new computer for the file transfer: 1 Click the Start button, point to All Programs→ Accessories→ System Tools, and then click Files and Settings Transfer Wizard. 2 When the Files and Settings Transfer Wizard welcome screen appears, click Next. 3 On the Which computer is this? screen, click New Computer and click Next. 4 On the Do you have a Windows XP CD? screen, click I will use the wizard from the Windows XP CD and click Next. 5 When the Now go to your old computer screen appears, go to your old or source computer. Do not click Next at this time. To copy data from the old computer: 1 On the old computer, insert the Windows XP Operating System CD. 2 On the Welcome to Microsoft Windows XP screen, click Perform additional tasks. 3 Under What do you want to do?, click Transfer files and settings. 4 On the Files and Settings Transfer Wizard welcome screen, click Next. 5 On the Which computer is this? screen, click Old Computer and click Next. 6 On the Select a transfer method screen, click the transfer method you prefer. 7 On the What do you want to transfer? screen, select the items you want to transfer and click Next. After the information has been copied, the Completing the Collection Phase screen appears. 8 Click Finish. To transfer data to the new computer: 1 On the Now go to your old computer screen on the new computer, click Next. 2 On the Where are the files and settings? screen, select the method you chose for transferring your settings and files and click Next. The wizard reads the collected files and settings and applies them to your new computer. When all of the settings and files have been applied, the Finished screen appears. 3 Click Finished and restart the new computer. G0550bk1.book Page 26 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMUsing Your Computer 27 Copying CDs NOTE: Ensure that you follow all copyright laws when you create CDs. This section applies only to computers that have a CD- or DVD-recording device. The information in this section is based on the Roxio Easy CD Creator Basic documentation that came with your computer. See the following section, "Using Easy CD Creator Basic," for instructions on how to locate that documentation. NOTE: The information in this section also applies to using Easy CD Creator Basic with a DVD+RW or a DVD+R drive. To burn CDs, you need to use CD-burner software. Roxio Easy CD Creator Basic is your computer's CD-burner software. The software includes the following project programs that enable you to record specialty CDs for different types of uses: • DirectCD allows you to format a blank CD-R or CD-RW disc so that you can use Microsoft® Windows® Explorer to drag and drop data files to the CD-RW drive. You can use a DirectCD-formatted CD-RW disc like another hard drive on your computer because CD-RW discs are fully rewritable (CD-R discs can be used with DirectCD, but that media type has overwriting limitations—see "Using Blank CD-R Discs or Blank CD-RW Discs" for recording media differences). • MusicCD allows you to burn custom music CDs. • DataCD allows you to copy a variety of your documents, such as spreadsheet or accounting files, to a CD for permanent storage. NOTE: Some music and game CDs are copy-protected. If you have a CD that cannot be copied, you must use the original CD for everyday use. • Disc Copier allows you to make a backup copy of almost any type of CD. This program allows you to make a copy of a CD for everyday use so that you can archive and save the original copy. (Disc Copier is titled "CD Copier" in some versions of Roxio CD Creator Basic.) All four project programs are available on the Easy CD Creator Basic Select a Project menu screen. To view the Select a Project menu screen, click the Start button, point to All Programs→ Roxio Easy CD Creator, and then click Project Selector. G0550bk1.book Page 27 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM28 Using Your Computer www.dell.com | support.dell.com Using Easy CD Creator Basic See the Easy CD Creator Basic documentation for instructions on how to use the program, information about different recording techniques, and CD media limitations. The Easy CD Creator Basic documentation is located in the Microsoft® Windows® XP Help and Support Center (see "Finding Help Information" on page 38). The documentation is also provided on the Dell Dimension ResourceCD, which is included with your computer. Each Easy CD Creator Basic project program also has thorough online help files. Using Blank CD-R Discs or Blank CD-RW Discs Your CD-RW drive writes to two different types of recording media—CD-R and CD-RW discs. Use blank CD-R (CD-Recordable) disks to record music or permanently store data files. After creating a CD-R disc, you cannot write to that disc again without changing your method of recording (see the Roxio documentation for more information). Use blank CDRW (CD-ReWritable) discs when you want to write, erase, rewrite, and update your files onto CDs. Helpful Tips • You must use the Easy CD Creator Basic project programs to copy and record all music and data CDs. You can use Windows Explorer to drag and drop files to a CD-R or CDRW disc only after you first use DirectCD to format the disc. • You must use CD-R discs to burn music CDs that you want to play in regular stereos. CD-RW discs do not play in most home or car stereos. • If you want to copy files from the Internet or files from a floppy or Zip drive, copy those files to your hard drive first, and then burn your CD. Your CD-RW drive requires a steady stream of data to properly record. Direct Internet downloads, floppy drives, and Zip drives may not be able to provide a steady data stream to your CD-RW drive. • Music MP3 files can be played only on MP3 players or on computers that have MP3 software installed. • Ensure that you set the sampling rate to at least 128 Kbps when you burn MP3 files to a CD. Otherwise, recording errors may occur. • Do not burn a blank CD-R or CD-RW disc to its maximum capacity; for example, do not copy a 650-MB file to a 650-MB blank CD. The CD-RW drive needs 1 or 2 MB of the blank CD to finalize the recording. G0550bk1.book Page 28 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMUsing Your Computer 29 • Use a blank CD-RW disc to practice CD recording until you are familiar with CD recording techniques. If you make a mistake, you can erase the CD-RW disc and try again. You can also use blank CD-RW discs to test music file projects before you record the project permanently to a blank CD-R disc. • See the Roxio support website at support.roxio.com for additional helpful tips. How to Copy a CD NOTE: If you have a DVD/CD-RW combo drive and you experience recording problems, first check for available software patches at the Dell Support website at support.dell.com and if necessary, the Roxio support website at support.roxio.com. The procedure assumes that your computer is equipped with a single CD-RW drive (without an additional CD drive). If your computer is equipped with both types of drives, see the Roxio documentation for instructions on how to copy CDs from a CD drive to a CD-RW drive. 1 Click the Start button, point to All Programs→ Roxio Easy CD Creator, and then click Project Selector. The Select a Project window appears. 2 Click Disc Copier. (Disc Copier is titled "CD Copier" in some versions of Easy CD Creator Basic.) The Disc Copier window appears and displays your CD-RW drive in the Copy from and the Record to lists. 3 Insert the source CD that you want to copy into the CD-RW drive. The Disc Copier project program briefly checks the source CD in the CD-RW drive to ensure that it is a readable CD. 4 Click Copy. Depending on the size of the files that are being copied, the copy process may take a few minutes. 5 After the source CD is copied, remove the source CD from the CD-RW drive tray. The CD-RW drive tray opens automatically after the source CD is copied. NOTE: You must use CD-R discs to burn music CDs that you want to play in regular stereos. CD-RW discs do not play in most home or car stereos. G0550bk1.book Page 29 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM30 Using Your Computer www.dell.com | support.dell.com 6 Insert a blank CD into the CD-RW drive and close the tray. The recording starts automatically. 7 After the recording completes, click OK. Network Setup Wizard The Microsoft® Windows® XP operating system provides a Network Setup Wizard to guide you through the process of sharing files, printers, or an Internet connection between computers in a home or small office. 1 Click the Start button, point to All Programs→ Accessories→ Communications, and then click Network Setup Wizard. 2 On the welcome screen, click Next. 3 Click Checklist for creating a network. NOTE: Selecting the connection method This computer connects directly to the Internet enables the integrated firewall provided with Windows XP. 4 Complete the checklist and required preparations. 5 Return to the Network Setup Wizard and follow the instructions on the screen. Turning Off Your Computer NOTICE: To avoid losing data, turn off your computer by performing a Microsoft® Windows® operating system shutdown, as described next, rather than by pressing the power button. 1 Save and close any open files, exit any open programs, click the Start button, and then click Turn Off Computer. 2 In the Turn off computer window, click Turn off. The computer turns off after the shutdown process finishes. G0550bk1.book Page 30 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM2 SECTION 2 Optimizing Performance Intel® Performance Acceleration Technology DDR Memory and Processor Front-Side Bus Hyper-Threading Overclocking G0550bk1.book Page 31 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM32 Optimizing Performance www.dell.com | support.dell.com Intel® Performance Acceleration Technology Your Dimension™ XPS computer is equipped with the Intel® 875P chipset, which utilizes Performance Acceleration Technology (PAT). PAT is designed to optimize performance by reducing the latency between DDR 400 memory and 800 front-side bus processors, and helps provide high performance to meet the requirements for today’s demanding software. DDR Memory and Processor Front-Side Bus The performance of your computer’s DDR memory depends on the type of memory installed and the clock speed of your processor. The following table indicates the memory performance resulting from different combinations of memory and front-side bus: For information on installing memory, see page 86. For information on the type of memory supported by your computer, see "Memory" on page 120. Hyper-Threading NOTE: Hyper-Threading is supported only on computers that have 3.06-GHz (or higher) microprocessors installed. Hyper-Threading is an Intel® technology that can enhance overall computer performance by allowing one physical microprocessor to function as two logical microprocessors, capable of performing certain tasks simultaneously. It is recommended that you use the Microsoft® Windows® XP operating system because Windows XP is optimized to take advantage of Hyper-Threading technology. While many programs can benefit from Hyper-Threading, some programs have not been optimized for Hyper-Threading and may require an update from the software manufacturer. Contact the software manufacturer for updates and information about using Hyper-Threading with your software. Memory type 800 front-side bus processor 533 front-side bus processor DDR 400 (PC3200) performs at 400 MHz performs at 333 MHz DDR 333 (PC2700) performs at 320 MHz performs at 333 MHz G0550bk1.book Page 32 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMOptimizing Performance 33 To determine if your computer is using Hyper-Threading technology: 1 Click the Start button, right-click My Computer, and then click Properties. 2 Click Hardware and click Device Manager. 3 In the Device Manager window, click the plus (+) sign next to the processor type. If Hyper-Threading is enabled, the processor is listed twice. You can enable or disable Hyper-Threading through the system setup program. For more information on accessing the system setup program, see page 124. For more information on Hyper-Threading, search the Knowledge Base on the Dell Support website at support.dell.com. Overclocking Dell locks the microprocessor multiplier options in the system setup program to prevent processor overclocking. The first and most important reason for preventing overclocking is that Dell’s performance labs vigorously test and fine-tune Dell computers at the system level in an attempt to attain the best possible overall performance. Any performance modification that is not implemented in the labs could cause performance degradation. When you receive your computer in the configuration that you ordered, it is already primed for high performance. The second reason is that an overclocked processor, in general, creates excessive heat and electrical fields that can cause heat fatigue failures within the processor, thus possibly shortening its expected life span. Even slight overclocking can cause a computer to become unstable and lock up. There are several after-market "performance-modification" products available through various sources, but Dell discourages and does not support the use of those products on its computers. G0550bk1.book Page 33 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM34 Optimizing Performance www.dell.com | support.dell.com G0550bk1.book Page 34 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM3 SECTION 3 Solving Problems Finding Solutions Finding Help Information Battery Problems Drive Problems E-Mail, Modem, and Internet Problems Error Messages General Problems IEEE 1394 Device Problems Keyboard Problems Mouse Problems Network Problems Power Problems Printer Problems Scanner Problems Sound and Speaker Problems Video and Monitor Problems G0550bk1.book Page 35 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM36 Solving Problems www.dell.com | support.dell.com Finding Solutions Sometimes it’s difficult to figure out where to go for answers. Use this chart to help you quickly find the answers to your questions. See page 51. See page 44. Get technical assistance from Dell. See page 129. Press a key or move the mouse. See the Dell™ Dimension™ Help file for information on standby mode. G0550bk1.book Page 36 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMSolving Problems 37 See page 57. See page 55. See page 42. See page 49. See page 49. See page 39. See page 51. See page 45. See page 54. See page 44. See page 42. See page 42. See page 45 G0550bk1.book Page 37 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM38 Solving Problems www.dell.com | support.dell.com Finding Help Information Battery Problems CAUTION: There is a danger of a new battery exploding if it is incorrectly installed. Replace the battery only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Discard used batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions on page 13. TO ACCESS THE DELL™ DIMENSION™ HELP FILE — 1 Click the Start button and click Help and Support. 2 Click User and system guides and click User’s guides. 3 Click Dell™ Dimension™ Help. TO ACCESS WINDOWS HELP — 1 Click the Start button and click Help and Support. 2Type a word or phrase that describes your problem and click the arrow icon. 3 Click the topic that describes your problem. 4 Follow the instructions shown on the screen. TO LOCATE ADDITIONAL INFORMATION FOR YOUR COMPUTER — See page 9. REPLACE THE BATTERY — If you have to repeatedly reset time and date information after turning on the computer, or if an incorrect time or date displays during start-up, replace the battery (see page 115). If the battery still does not work properly, contact Dell (see page 129). G0550bk1.book Page 38 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMSolving Problems 39 Drive Problems Floppy drive problems NOTICE: Do not attempt to clean drive heads with a swab. You may accidentally misalign the heads, which can render the drive inoperable. ENSURE THAT WINDOWS® RECOGNIZES THE DRIVE — Click the Start button and click My Computer. If the floppy drive is not listed, perform a full scan with your antivirus software to check for and remove viruses. Viruses can sometimes prevent Windows from recognizing the drive. TEST THE DRIVE — • Insert another disk to eliminate the possibility that the original floppy disk is defective. • Insert a bootable floppy disk and reboot the computer. ENSURE THAT THE DISK IS NOT FULL OR WRITE-PROTECTED — Ensure that the disk has available space and that it is not write-protected (locked). See the following figure. CLEAN THE DRIVE — Use a commercially available cleaning kit. not writeprotected back of floppy disk write-protected G0550bk1.book Page 39 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM40 Solving Problems www.dell.com | support.dell.com CD drive problems NOTE: High-speed CD drive vibration is normal and may cause noise, which does not indicate a defect in the drive or the CD. Problems writing to a CD-RW drive ADJUST THE WINDOWS VOLUME CONTROL — Click the speaker icon in the lower-right corner of your screen. • Ensure that the volume is turned up by clicking the slidebar and dragging it up. • Ensure that the sound is not muted by clicking any boxes that are checked. TEST THE DRIVE WITH ANOTHER CD — Insert another CD to eliminate the possibility that the original CD is defective. CHECK THE SPEAKERS AND SUBWOOFER — See "Sound and Speaker Problems" on page 55. ENSURE THAT WINDOWS RECOGNIZES THE DRIVE — Click the Start button and click My Computer. If the CD drive is not listed, perform a full scan with your antivirus software to check for and remove viruses. Viruses can sometimes prevent Windows from recognizing the drive. CLEAN THE DISC — See the Dell™ Dimension™ Help file for instructions on cleaning your CDs. To access help files, see page 4. CLOSE OTHER PROGRAMS — The CD-RW drive must receive a steady stream of data when writing. If the stream is interrupted, an error occurs. Try closing all programs before writing to the CD-RW. TURN OFF STANDBY MODE IN WINDOWS BEFORE WRITING TO A CDRW DISC — For information on power conservation modes, see the Dell™ Dimension™ Help file or search for the keyword standby in Windows Help. To access help files, see page 4. G0550bk1.book Page 40 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMSolving Problems 41 DVD drive problems NOTE: Because of different regions worldwide and different disc formats, not all DVD titles work in all DVD drives. Hard drive problems TEST THE DRIVE WITH ANOTHER DVD — Insert another DVD to eliminate the possibility that the original DVD is defective. ENSURE THAT WINDOWS RECOGNIZES THE DRIVE — Click the Start button and click My Computer. If the DVD drive is not listed, perform a full scan with your antivirus software to check for and remove viruses. Viruses can sometimes prevent Windows from recognizing the drive. CLEAN THE DISC — See the Dell™ Dimension™ Help file for instructions on cleaning your DVDs. To access help files, see page 4. CHECK FOR INTERRUPT REQUEST CONFLICTS — See page 71. RUN CHECK DISK — 1 Click the Start button and click My Computer. 2Right-click the drive letter (local disk) that you want to scan for errors, and then click Properties. 3 Click the Tools tab. 4 Under Error-checking, click Check Now. 5 Click Start. G0550bk1.book Page 41 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM42 Solving Problems www.dell.com | support.dell.com E-Mail, Modem, and Internet Problems NOTE: Connect the modem to an analog telephone jack only. The modem does not operate while it is connected to a digital telephone network. NOTE: For optimum performance, install a modem card only in PCI slot 2, 3, or 4. CHECK THE TELEPHONE LINE CONNECTION — Verify that the telephone line is connected to the jack on the modem. (The jack has either a green label or a connector-shaped icon next to it.) Ensure that you hear a click when you insert the telephone line connector into the modem. CHECK THE TELEPHONE JACK — Disconnect the telephone line from the modem and connect it to a telephone. Listen for a dial tone. CONNECT THE MODEM DIRECTLY TO THE TELEPHONE WALL JACK — If you have other telephone devices sharing the line, such as an answering machine, fax machine, surge protector, or line splitter, then bypass them and use the telephone to connect the modem directly to the telephone wall jack. USE A DIFFERENT TELEPHONE LINE — If you are using a line that is 3 m (10 ft) or more in length, try a shorter one. RUN THE MODEM HELPER DIAGNOSTICS — Click the Start button, point to All Programs, and then click Modem Helper. Follow the instructions on the screen to identify and resolve modem problems. (Modem Helper is not available on all computers.) VERIFY THAT THE MODEM IS COMMUNICATING WITH WINDOWS® — 1 Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2 Click Printers and Other Hardware. 3 Click Phone and Modem Options. 4 Click the Modems tab. 5 Click the COM port for your modem. 6 Click Properties, click the Diagnostics tab, and then click Query Modem to verify that the modem is communicating with Windows. If all commands receive responses, the modem is operating properly. G0550bk1.book Page 42 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMSolving Problems 43 TURN OFF CALL WAITING (CATCH-PHONE) — See your telephone directory for instructions on deactivating this feature. Then adjust the dial-up networking connection properties. 1 Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2 Click Printers and Other Hardware, and then click Phone and Modem Options. 3 Click your connection type to highlight it. 4 Click the Dialing Rules tab and click Edit. 5 Click the To Disable Call Waiting box to place a checkmark in it. 6 Select the disable code from the drop-down menu (for example, *70). 7 Click Apply and click OK. ENSURE THAT YOU ARE CONNECTED TO THE INTERNET — With the Outlook Express e-mail program open, click File. If Work Offline has a checkmark next to it, click the checkmark to remove it and connect to the Internet. ENSURE THAT YOU HAVE SUBSCRIBED TO AN INTERNET SERVICE PROVIDER — Contact an Internet service provider to subscribe. CONTACT YOUR INTERNET SERVICE PROVIDER — Contact your Internet service provider for assistance. G0550bk1.book Page 43 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM44 Solving Problems www.dell.com | support.dell.com Error Messages If the message is not listed, see the documentation for the operating system or the program that was running when the message appeared. A FILENAME CANNOT CONTAIN ANY OF THE FOLLOWING CHARACTERS: \ / : * ? “ < > | — Do not use these characters in filenames. A REQUIRED .DLL FILE WAS NOT FOUND — The program that you are trying to open is missing an essential file. To remove and then reinstall the program: 1 Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2 Click Add or Remove Programs. 3 Select the program you want to remove. 4 Click the Change or Remove Program icon. 5 See the program documentation for installation instructions. INSERT BOOTABLE MEDIA — The operating system is trying to boot to a nonbootable floppy disk or CD. Insert a bootable floppy disk or CD. NON-SYSTEM DISK ERROR — A floppy disk is in the floppy drive. Remove the floppy disk and restart the computer. NOT ENOUGH MEMORY OR RESOURCES. CLOSE SOME PROGRAMS AND TRY AGAIN — You have too many programs open. Close all windows and open the program that you want to use. In some cases, you might have to restart your computer to restore computer resources. If so, run the program that you want to use first. OPERATING SYSTEM NOT FOUND — Contact Dell (see page 129). THE FILE BEING COPIED IS TOO LARGE FOR THE DESTINATION DRIVE — The file that you are trying to copy is too large to fit on the disk. Try copying the file to a blank disk or using a larger-capacity disk. x:\ IS NOT ACCESSIBLE. THE DEVICE IS NOT READY — The floppy drive cannot read the disk. Insert a floppy disk into the drive and try again. G0550bk1.book Page 44 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMSolving Problems 45 General Problems The computer stops responding A program stops responding A program crashes repeatedly NOTE: Software usually includes installation instructions in its documentation or on a floppy disk or CD. TURN THE COMPUTER OFF — If your computer locks up and you are unable to get a response by pressing a key on your keyboard or moving your mouse, press and hold the power button for at least 8 to 10 seconds until the computer turns off. Then press the power button again to turn on the computer. You might lose data if you are unable to perform an operating system shutdown. END THE PROGRAM — 1 Press simultaneously. 2 Click Applications. 3 Click the program that is no longer responding. 4 Click End Task. CHECK THE SOFTWARE DOCUMENTATION — Many software manufacturers maintain websites with information that may help you solve the problem. Ensure that you properly installed and configured the program. If necessary, uninstall and then reinstall the program. G0550bk1.book Page 45 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM46 Solving Problems www.dell.com | support.dell.com A program is designed for an earlier Windows operating system A solid blue screen appears Other software problems RUN THE PROGRAM COMPATIBILITY WIZARD — Windows XP provides a Program Compatibility Wizard that configures a program so it runs in an environment similar to non-Windows XP operating system environments. 1 Click the Start button, point to All Programs→ Accessories, and then click Program Compatibility Wizard. 2 In the welcome screen, click Next. 3 Follow the instructions on the screen. TURN THE COMPUTER OFF — If the computer does not respond to a keystroke or a proper shutdown, press the power button for at least 8 to 10 seconds until the computer turns off. Press the power button again to restart the computer. The chkdsk program automatically runs during the start-up process. Follow the instructions on the screen. CHECK THE SOFTWARE DOCUMENTATION OR CONTACT THE SOFTWARE MANUFACTURER FOR TROUBLESHOOTING INFORMATION BACK UP YOUR FILES IMMEDIATELY — If your computer has a CD-RW drive installed, see the drive’s documentation for instructions. ENSURE THAT YOU HAVE NOT MADE AN ERROR WHILE ENTERING DATA — See the program documentation to ensure that the values or characters you are entering are valid. CHECK FOR VIRUSES — Use a virus-scanning program to check the hard drive, floppy disks, or CDs. RESTART THE COMPUTER — Save and close any open files, exit any open programs, and then shut down your computer through the Start menu instead of by pressing the power button. Otherwise, you may lose data. G0550bk1.book Page 46 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMSolving Problems 47 Other technical problems General hardware problems If your computer exhibits one or more of the following symptoms, a device conflict may exist: • Your computer locks up, particularly while using a specific device. • A recently added device does not work. • A sound card emits noise or demonstrates other problems. • Unintelligible characters print from the printer. • The mouse pointer does not move or "stutters" when it moves. CHECK FOR COMPATIBILITY — • Ensure that the program is compatible with the operating system installed on your computer and that your computer meets the minimum hardware requirements needed to run the software. See the software documentation for information. • If necessary, uninstall and then reinstall the program. ENSURE THAT YOU PROPERLY INSTALLED AND CONFIGURED THE PROGRAM — See the software documentation for information. If necessary, uninstall and then reinstall the program. GO TO THE DELL SUPPORT WEBSITE — Go to support.dell.com for help with general usage, installation, and troubleshooting questions.The support website offers several different tools to help you, such as Dell Forum—a chat room where you can communicate with other Dell customers about their computers and gain access to technical support through e-mail. See "Dell Support Website" on page 10 for more information about the website. See "Dell Technical Support Policy (U.S. Only)" on page 128 for a description of the hardware and software support provided by Dell. CALL DELL — If you cannot solve your problem using the Dell Support website or e-mail service, call Dell for technical assistance (see page 129). See "Dell Technical Support Policy (U.S. Only)" on page 128 for a description of the hardware and software support provided by Dell. G0550bk1.book Page 47 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM48 Solving Problems www.dell.com | support.dell.com • Messages appear stating that the computer is not operating at maximum performance. • Errors occur and programs crash for no apparent reason. • Nothing displays on the monitor. IEEE 1394 Device Problems NOTE: Check Windows Explorer to see if your device is listed as a drive. REMOVE ANY RECENTLY ADDED HARDWARE TO SEE IF IT RESOLVES THE CONFLICT — If removing the hardware resolves the conflict, see the hardware documentation for configuration and troubleshooting instructions. If the problem persists, contact the hardware manufacturer for technical assistance. CHECK YOUR OPERATING SYSTEM DOCUMENTATION FOR ADDITIONAL TROUBLESHOOTING INFORMATION CHECK FOR INTERRUPT REQUEST CONFLICTS — See page 71. CHECK THE IEEE 1394 DEVICE — Ensure that the IEEE 1394 device is properly inserted into the connector. ENSURE THAT THE IEEE 1394 DEVICE IS RECOGNIZED BY WINDOWS® — 1 Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2 Click Printers and Other Hardware. If your IEEE 1394 device is listed, Windows recognizes the device. IF YOU HAVE PROBLEMS WITH A DELL-PROVIDED IEEE 1394 DEVICE — Contact Dell (see page 129). IF YOU HAVE PROBLEMS WITH AN IEEE 1394 DEVICE NOT PROVIDED BY DELL — Contact the IEEE 1394 device manufacturer. G0550bk1.book Page 48 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMSolving Problems 49 Keyboard Problems Mouse Problems RESTART THE COMPUTER — • If the mouse is functioning, shut down the computer through the Start menu (see page 30). After the computer shuts down, press the power button to restart the computer. • If the computer does not respond to a keystroke or the mouse, press the power button for at least 8 to 10 seconds until the computer turns off. Press the power button again to restart the computer. CHECK THE KEYBOARD CABLE — • Ensure that the keyboard cable is firmly connected to the computer. • Shut down the computer (see page 30), reconnect the keyboard cable as shown on the setup diagram for your computer, and then restart the computer. • Check the cable connector for bent or broken pins and for damaged or frayed cables. Straighten bent pins. • Remove keyboard extension cables and connect the keyboard directly to the computer. TEST THE KEYBOARD — Connect a properly working keyboard to the computer, and try using the keyboard. If the new keyboard works, the original keyboard is faulty. CHECK FOR INTERRUPT REQUEST CONFLICTS — See page 71. RESTART THE COMPUTER — 1 Simultaneously press to display the Start menu. 2Type u, press the keyboard arrow keys to highlight Shut down or Turn Off, and then press . 3After the computer turns off, press the power button to restart the computer. G0550bk1.book Page 49 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM50 Solving Problems www.dell.com | support.dell.com IF YOU CONNECTED THE MOUSE BEFORE TURNING ON THE COMPUTER, RECONNECT THE MOUSE CABLE — 1 Simultaneously press to display the Start menu. 2Type u, press the keyboard arrow keys to highlight Shut down or Turn Off, and then press . 3After the computer turns off, reconnect the mouse cable as shown on the setup diagram for your computer. 4 Start the computer. IF YOU CONNECTED THE MOUSE AFTER TURNING ON THE COMPUTER, REMOVE THE POWER CABLE, AND THEN RECONNECT THE MOUSE CABLE — If the mouse is connected after the power is turned on, the mouse appears to be nonfunctional. To make the mouse function properly: 1While your computer is on, remove the power cable from the back of the computer. 2 Connect the mouse to the computer. 3Reconnect the power cable. 4Turn on your computer. Pressing the power button does not clear the computer’s settings and does not restore mouse functionality. CHECK THE MOUSE CABLE — • Check the cable connector for bent or broken pins and for damaged or frayed cables. Straighten bent pins. • Ensure that the cable is firmly connected to the computer. TEST THE MOUSE — Connect a properly working mouse to the computer, and try using the mouse. If the new mouse works, the original mouse was faulty. CHECK THE MOUSE SETTINGS — 1 Click the Start button, click Control Panel, and then click Printers and Other Hardware. 2 Click Mouse. 3Try adjusting the settings. REINSTALL THE MOUSE DRIVER — See page 67. CHECK FOR INTERRUPT REQUEST CONFLICTS — See page 71. G0550bk1.book Page 50 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMSolving Problems 51 Network Problems Power Problems CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions on page 13. CHECK THE NETWORK CABLE CONNECTOR — Ensure that the network cable is connected as shown on the setup diagram (see page 10). CHECK THE NETWORK LIGHTS ON THE BACK OF THE COMPUTER — No light indicates that no network communication exists. Replace the network cable. RESTART THE COMPUTER AND TRY TO LOG ON TO THE NETWORK AGAIN CHECK YOUR NETWORK SETTINGS — Contact your network administrator or the person who set up your network to verify that your network settings are correct and that the network is functioning. CHECK FOR INTERRUPT REQUEST CONFLICTS — See page 71. ADJUST THE POWER PROPERTIES — Your computer may be in standby or hibernate mode. For information on power conservation modes, see the Dell™ Dimension™ Help file, or search for the keyword standby or hibernate in Windows® Help. To access help files, see page 4. network integrity/speed light activity light G0550bk1.book Page 51 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM52 Solving Problems www.dell.com | support.dell.com IF THE POWER LIGHT IS BLINKING GREEN — The computer is in standby mode. Press a key on the keyboard or move the mouse to resume normal operation. IF THE POWER LIGHT IS OFF — The computer is either turned off or is not receiving power. • Reseat the power cable into both the power connector on the back of the computer and the electrical outlet. • If the computer is plugged into a power strip, ensure that the power strip is plugged into an electrical outlet and that the power strip is turned on. • Ensure that the electrical outlet is working by testing it with another device, such as a lamp. • Bypass power protection devices, power strips, and power extension cables to verify that the computer turns on. • Ensure that the main power cable is securely connected to the system board (see page 85). • Ensure that the front panel cable is securely connected to the system board (see page 85). • If the problem persists, contact Dell (see page 129). IF THE POWER LIGHT IS AMBER AND GREEN — The computer is receiving electrical power, but an internal power problem might exist. • Ensure that the microprocessor power cable is securely connected to the system board (see page 85). • If the problem persists, contact Dell (see page 129). IF THE POWER LIGHT IS STEADY AMBER — The computer is receiving electrical power, but an internal power problem might exist. • Ensure that the microprocessor power cable is securely connected to the system board (see page 85). • If the problem persists, contact Dell (see page 129). IF THE POWER LIGHT IS BLINKING AMBER — A device might be malfunctioning or incorrectly installed. • Remove and then reinstall the memory modules (see page 86). • Remove and then reinstall any cards (see page 89). • Remove and then reinstall the video card, if applicable (see page 89). • If the problem persists, contact Dell (see page 129). G0550bk1.book Page 52 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMSolving Problems 53 Printer Problems NOTE: Dell does not cover the printer’s warranty. If you need technical assistance for your printer, call the printer’s manufacturer. See the printer documentation for the correct phone number. ELIMINATE INTERFERENCE — Electrical appliances on the same circuit or operating near the computer can cause interference. Other causes of interference are: • Power extension cables • Keyboard and mouse extension cables • Too many devices on a power strip • Multiple power strips connected to the same electrical outlet CHECK THE PRINTER DOCUMENTATION — See the printer documentation for setup and troubleshooting information. ENSURE THAT THE PRINTER IS TURNED ON — See the printer documentation for power button information. VERIFY THE PRINTER CABLE CONNECTIONS — • See the printer documentation for cable connection information. • Ensure that the printer cables are securely connected to the printer and the computer. TEST THE ELECTRICAL OUTLET — Ensure that the electrical outlet is working by testing it with another device, such as a lamp. G0550bk1.book Page 53 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM54 Solving Problems www.dell.com | support.dell.com Scanner Problems NOTE: Dell does not cover the scanner’s warranty. If you need technical assistance for your scanner, call the scanner’s manufacturer. See the scanner documentation for the correct phone number. VERIFY THAT THE PRINTER IS RECOGNIZED BY WINDOWS® — 1Click the Start button. 2 Click Control Panel. 3 Click Printers and Other Hardware. 4 Click View installed printers or fax printers. If the printer is listed, right-click the printer icon. 5 Click Properties, and then select the Ports tab. For a parallel printer, ensure that the Print to the following port(s): setting is LPT1 (Printer Port). For a USB printer, ensure that the Print to the following port(s): setting is USB. REINSTALL THE PRINTER DRIVER — See the printer documentation for instructions. CHECK THE SCANNER DOCUMENTATION — See the scanner documentation for setup and troubleshooting information. UNLOCK THE SCANNER — Ensure that your scanner is unlocked if it has a locking tab or button. RESTART THE COMPUTER AND TRY THE SCANNER AGAIN CHECK THE CABLE CONNECTIONS — • If your scanner has a power cable, ensure that the power cable is firmly connected to a working electrical outlet and that the scanner is turned on. • Ensure that the scanner cable is firmly connected to the computer and to the scanner. G0550bk1.book Page 54 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMSolving Problems 55 Sound and Speaker Problems NOTE: For optimum performance, install a PCI sound card only in PCI slot 3 or 4. No sound from speakers NOTE: The volume control in some MP3 players overrides the Windows® volume setting. If you have been listening to MP3 songs, ensure that you did not turn the player volume down or off. VERIFY THAT THE SCANNER IS RECOGNIZED BY MICROSOFT® WINDOWS® — 1 Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2 Click Printers and Other Hardware. 3 Click Scanners and Cameras. If your scanner is listed, Windows recognizes the scanner. REINSTALL THE SCANNER DRIVER — See the scanner documentation for instructions. CHECK THE SPEAKER CABLE CONNECTIONS — Ensure that the speakers are connected as shown on the setup diagram supplied with the speakers. If you purchased a sound card, ensure that the speakers are connected to the card. ENSURE THAT THE SUBWOOFER AND THE SPEAKERS ARE TURNED ON — See the setup diagram supplied with the speakers. If your speakers have volume controls, adjust the volume, bass, or treble to eliminate distortion. ADJUST THE WINDOWS VOLUME CONTROL — Click or double-click the speaker icon in the lower-right corner of your screen. Ensure that the volume is turned up and that the sound is not muted. DISCONNECT HEADPHONES FROM THE HEADPHONE CONNECTOR — Sound from the speakers is automatically disabled when headphones are connected to the computer’s front-panel headphone connector. G0550bk1.book Page 55 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM56 Solving Problems www.dell.com | support.dell.com No sound from headphones TEST THE ELECTRICAL OUTLET — Ensure that the electrical outlet is working by testing it with another device, such as a lamp. ENABLE DIGITAL MODE — Your speakers do not work if the CD drive is operating in analog mode. To enable digital mode: 1 Click the Start button, click Control Panel, and then click Sounds, Speech, and Audio Devices. 2 Click Sounds and Audio Devices. 3 Click the Hardware tab. 4 Double-click the name of your CD drive. 5 Click the Properties tab. 6 Check the Enable digital CD audio for this CD-ROM device box. ELIMINATE POSSIBLE INTERFERENCE — Turn off nearby fans, fluorescent lights, or halogen lamps to check for interference. RUN THE SPEAKER DIAGNOSTICS — Some speaker systems have self- diagnostics. See the speaker documentation for diagnostics instructions. REINSTALL THE AUDIO (SOUND) DRIVER — See page 67. CHECK FOR INTERRUPT REQUEST CONFLICTS — See page 71. CHECK THE HEADPHONE CABLE CONNECTION — Ensure that the headphone cable is securely inserted into the headphone connector (see page 76). G0550bk1.book Page 56 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMSolving Problems 57 Video and Monitor Problems If the screen is blank NOTE: See the monitor documentation for troubleshooting procedures. DISABLE DIGITAL MODE — Your headphones do not work if the CD drive is operating in digital mode. To disable digital mode: 1 Click the Start button, click Control Panel, and then click Sounds, Speech, and Audio Devices. 2 Click Sounds and Audio Devices. 3 Click the Hardware tab. 4 Double-click the name of your CD drive. 5 Click the Properties tab. 6 Uncheck the Enable digital CD audio for this CD-ROM device box. ADJUST THE WINDOWS VOLUME CONTROL — Click or double-click the speaker icon in the lower-right corner of your screen. Ensure that the volume is turned up and that the sound is not muted. CHECK THE MONITOR POWER LIGHT — If the power light is off, firmly press the button to ensure that the monitor is turned on. If the power light is lit or blinking, the monitor has power. If the power light is blinking, press a key on the keyboard or move the mouse. CHECK THE MONITOR CABLE CONNECTION — Check the connector for bent or broken pins. (It is normal for monitor cable connectors to have missing pins.) Ensure that the video cable is connected as shown on the setup diagram for your computer. TEST THE ELECTRICAL OUTLET — Ensure that the electrical outlet is working by testing it with another device, such as a lamp. SWAP THE POWER CABLES — Swap the computer and monitor power cables to determine if the power cable is defective. G0550bk1.book Page 57 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM58 Solving Problems www.dell.com | support.dell.com If the screen is difficult to read TEST THE VIDEO EXTENSION CABLE (IF USED) — If you are using a video extension cable and removing the cable solves the problem, the cable is defective. TEST ANOTHER MONITOR — If another monitor is available, connect it to the computer. CHECK THE DIAGNOSTIC LIGHTS — See page 60. CHECK THE MONITOR SETTINGS — See the monitor documentation for instructions on adjusting the contrast and brightness, demagnetizing (degaussing) the monitor, and running the monitor self-test. MOVE THE SUBWOOFER AWAY FROM THE MONITOR — If your speaker system includes a subwoofer, ensure that the subwoofer is at least 60 cm (2 ft) away from the monitor. MOVE THE MONITOR AWAY FROM EXTERNAL POWER SOURCES — Fans, fluorescent lights, halogen lamps, and other electrical devices can cause the screen image to appear "shaky." Turn off nearby devices to check for interference. ROTATE THE MONITOR TO FACE A DIFFERENT DIRECTION — Eliminate sunlight glare, which can cause poor picture quality. ADJUST THE WINDOWS® DISPLAY SETTINGS — 1 Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2 Click Appearance and Themes. 3 Click Display and click the Settings tab. 4Try different settings for Screen resolution and Color quality. G0550bk1.book Page 58 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM4 SECTION 4 Advanced Troubleshooting Diagnostic Lights Dell Diagnostics Drivers Using Windows® XP System Restore Resolving Software and Hardware Incompatibilities Reinstalling Microsoft® Windows® XP G0550bk1.book Page 59 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM60 Advanced Troubleshooting www.dell.com | support.dell.com Diagnostic Lights To help you troubleshoot a problem, your computer has four lights labeled "A," "B," "C," and "D" (see page 78) on the back panel. The lights can be yellow or green. When the computer starts normally, the lights flash. After the computer starts, all four lights display solid green. If the computer malfunctions, the color and sequence of the lights identify the problem. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions on page 13. Light Pattern Problem Description Suggested Resolution The computer is in a normal off condition or a possible pre-BIOS failure has occurred. Verify that the computer is plugged into a working electrical outlet and that you have pressed the power button. A possible microprocessor failure has occurred. Reinstall the microprocessor (see page 107) and restart the computer. Memory modules are detected, but a memory failure has occurred. 1Reinstall all memory modules (see page 86). 2 Ensure that all the connector tabs are locked. 3Restart the computer. 4 If the problem persists, contact Dell (see page 129). ABCD ABCD ABCD = yellow = green = off G0550bk1.book Page 60 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMAdvanced Troubleshooting 61 A possible expansion card failure has occurred. 1 Determine if a conflict exists by removing a card (not a video card) (see page 89) and then restarting the computer. 2 If the problem persists, reinstall the card that you removed, remove a different card, and then restart the computer. 3Repeat this process for each card. If the computer starts normally, troubleshoot the last card removed from the computer for resource conflicts (see "Resolving Software and Hardware Incompatibilities" on page 71). 4 If the problem persists, contact Dell (see page 129). A possible video card failure has occurred. • If the computer has a video card, remove the card, reinstall it (see page 89), and then restart the computer. • If the problem still exists, install a video card that you know works and restart the computer. • If the problem persists or the computer has integrated video, contact Dell (see page 129). A possible floppy or hard drive failure has occurred. Reseat all power and data cables and restart the computer. A possible USB failure has occurred. Reinstall all USB devices, check cable connections, and then restart the computer. Light Pattern Problem Description Suggested Resolution = yellow = green = off ABCD ABCD ABCD ABCD G0550bk1.book Page 61 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM62 Advanced Troubleshooting www.dell.com | support.dell.com No memory modules are detected. 1Reinstall all memory modules (see page 86). 2 Ensure that all the connector tabs are locked. 3Restart the computer. 4 If the problem persists, contact Dell (see page 129). Memory modules are detected, but a memory configuration or compatibility error exists. • Ensure that no special memory module/memory connector placement requirements exist (see page 86). • Verify that the memory modules that you are installing are compatible with your computer (see page 86). • If the problem persists, contact Dell (see page 129). A possible system board resource and/or hardware failure has occurred. See "Resolving Software and Hardware Incompatibilities" on page 71. If the problem persists, contact Dell (see page 129). Light Pattern Problem Description Suggested Resolution = yellow = green = off ABCD ABCD ABCD G0550bk1.book Page 62 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMAdvanced Troubleshooting 63 A possible expansion card failure has occurred. 1 Determine if a conflict exists by removing a card (not a video card) (see page 89) and restarting the computer. 2 If the problem persists, reinstall the card that you removed, remove a different card, and then restart the computer. 3Repeat this process for each card. If the computer starts normally, troubleshoot the last card removed from the computer for resource conflicts (see "Resolving Software and Hardware Incompatibilities" on page 71). 4 If the problem persists, contact Dell (see page 129). Another failure has occurred. • Ensure that the cables are properly connected to the system board (see page 85) from the hard drive, CD drive, and DVD drive. • If the problem persists, contact Dell (see page 129). The computer is in a normal operating condition after POST. None. Light Pattern Problem Description Suggested Resolution = yellow = green = off ABCD ABCD ABCD G0550bk1.book Page 63 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM64 Advanced Troubleshooting www.dell.com | support.dell.com Dell Diagnostics When to Use the Dell Diagnostics If you experience a problem with your computer, perform the checks in "Solving Problems" (see page 35) and run the Dell Diagnostics before you contact Dell for technical assistance. Running the Dell Diagnostics may help you resolve the problem without contacting Dell. If you do contact Dell, the test results can provide important information for Dell's service and support personnel. The Dell Diagnostics allows you to: • Perform tests on one or all devices. • Select tests based on a symptom of the problem you are having. • Choose how many times a test is run. • Suspend testing if an error is detected. • Access help information that describes the tests and devices. • Receive status messages that tell you whether tests completed successfully. • Receive error messages if problems are detected. Starting the Dell Diagnostics NOTICE: Use the Dell Diagnostics to test your Dell™ computer only. Using this program with other computers can result in error messages. Start the Dell Diagnostics from either your hard drive (see page 64) or from the Dell Dimension ResourceCD (see page 65). Starting the Dell Diagnostics From Your Hard Drive 1 Shut down (see page 30) and restart the computer. 2 When the DELL™ logo appears, press immediately. NOTE: If you see a message stating that no diagnostics utility partition has been found, run the Dell Diagnostics from your ResourceCD (see page 65). If you wait too long and the Microsoft® Windows® logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Windows desktop. Then shut down your computer through the Start menu and try again. G0550bk1.book Page 64 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMAdvanced Troubleshooting 65 3 When the boot device list appears, highlight Boot to Utility Partition and press . 4 When the Dell Diagnostics Main Menu appears, select the test you want to run (see page 66). Starting the Dell Diagnostics From the ResourceCD 1 Insert the ResourceCD. 2 Shut down (see page 30) and restart the computer. When the DELL logo appears, press immediately. If you wait too long and the Windows logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Windows desktop. Then shut down your computer through the Start menu and try again. NOTE: This feature changes the boot sequence for one time only. On the next start-up, the computer boots according to the devices specified in the system setup program. 3 When the boot device list appears, highlight IDE CD-ROM Device and press . 4 Select the IDE CD-ROM Device option from the CD boot menu. 5 Select the Boot from CD-ROM option from the menu that appears. 6 Type 1 to start the ResourceCD menu. 7 Type 2 to start the Dell Diagnostics. 8 Select Run the 32 Bit Dell Diagnostics from the numbered list. If multiple versions are listed, select the version appropriate for your computer. 9 When the Dell Diagnostics Main Menu appears, select the test you want to run (see page 66). G0550bk1.book Page 65 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM66 Advanced Troubleshooting www.dell.com | support.dell.com Dell Diagnostics Main Menu 1 After the Dell Diagnostics loads and the Main Menu screen appears, click the button for the option you want. 2 If a problem is encountered during a test, a message appears with an error code and a description of the problem. Write down the error code and problem description and follow the instructions on the screen. If you cannot resolve the error condition, contact Dell (see page 129). NOTE: The Service Tag for your computer is located at the top of each test screen. If you contact Dell, technical support will ask for your Service Tag number. 3 If you run a test from the Custom Test or Symptom Tree option, click the applicable tab described in the following table for more information. Option Function Express Test Performs a quick test of devices. This test typically takes 10 to 20 minutes and requires no interaction on your part. Run Express Test first to increase the possibility of tracing the problem quickly. Extended Test Performs a thorough check of devices. This test typically takes an hour or more and requires you to answer questions periodically. Custom Test Tests a specific device. You can customize the tests you want to run. Symptom Tree Lists the most common symptoms encountered and allows you to select a test based on the symptom of the problem you are having. Tab Function Results Displays the results of the test and any error conditions encountered. Errors Displays error conditions encountered, error codes, and the problem description. Help Describes the test and may indicate requirements for running the test. G0550bk1.book Page 66 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMAdvanced Troubleshooting 67 4 When the tests are completed, if you are running the Dell Diagnostics from the ResourceCD, remove the CD. 5 Close the test screen to return to the MainMenu screen. To exit the Dell Diagnostics and restart the computer, close the Main Menu screen. Drivers What Is a Driver? A driver is a program that controls a device such as a printer, mouse, or keyboard. All devices require a driver program. A driver acts like a translator between the device and any other programs that use the device. Each device has its own set of specialized commands that only its driver recognizes. Dell ships your computer to you with required drivers already installed—no further installation or configuration is needed. NOTICE: The Dell Dimension ResourceCD may contain drivers for operating systems that are not on your computer. Ensure that you are installing software appropriate for your operating system. Many drivers, such as the keyboard driver, come with your Microsoft® Windows® operating system. You may need to install drivers if you: • Upgrade your operating system. • Reinstall your operating system. • Connect or install a new device. Configuration Displays your hardware configuration for the selected device. The Dell Diagnostics obtains configuration information for all devices from the system setup program, memory, and various internal tests, and it displays the information in the device list in the left pane of the screen. The device list may not display the names of all the components installed on your computer or all devices attached to your computer. Parameters Allows you to customize the test by changing the test settings. Tab Function (continued) G0550bk1.book Page 67 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM68 Advanced Troubleshooting www.dell.com | support.dell.com Identifying Drivers If you experience a problem with any device, identify whether the driver is the source of your problem and, if necessary, update the driver. 1 Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2 Under Pick a Category, click Performance and Maintenance. 3 Click System. 4 In the System Properties window, click the Hardware tab. 5 Click Device Manager. 6 Scroll down the list to see if any device has an exclamation point (a yellow circle with a [!]) on the device icon. If an exclamation point is next to the device name, you may need to reinstall the driver or install a new driver (see page 68). Reinstalling Drivers NOTICE: The Dell Support website at support.dell.com and your Dell Dimension ResourceCD provide approved drivers for Dell™ computers. If you install drivers obtained from other sources, your computer might not work correctly. Using Windows XP Device Driver Rollback If a problem occurs on your computer after you install or update a driver, use Windows XP Device Driver Rollback to replace the driver with the previously installed version. 1 Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2 Under Pick a Category, click Performance and Maintenance. 3 Click System. 4 In the System Properties window, click the Hardware tab. 5 Click Device Manager. 6 Right-click the device for which the new driver was installed and click Properties. 7 Click the Drivers tab. 8 Click Roll Back Driver. If Device Driver Rollback does not resolve the problem, then use System Restore (see page 69) to return your computer to the operating state that existed before you installed the new driver. G0550bk1.book Page 68 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMAdvanced Troubleshooting 69 Using the ResourceCD If using Device Driver Rollback or System Restore (see page 69) does not resolve the problem, then reinstall the driver from the ResourceCD. 1 With the Windows desktop displayed, insert the ResourceCD. If this is your first time to use the ResourceCD, go to step 2. If not, go to step 5. 2 When the ResourceCD installation program starts, follow the prompts on the screen. 3 When the InstallShield Wizard Complete window appears, remove the ResourceCD and click Finish to restart the computer. 4 When you see the Windows desktop, reinsert the ResourceCD. 5 At the Welcome Dell System Owner screen, click Next. NOTE: The ResourceCD displays drivers only for hardware that came installed in your computer. If you installed additional hardware, the drivers for the new hardware might not be displayed by the ResourceCD. If those drivers are not displayed, exit the ResourceCD program. For drivers information, see the documentation that came with the device. A message stating that the ResourceCD is detecting hardware in your computer appears. The drivers that are used by your computer are automatically displayed in the My Drivers—The ResourceCD has identified these components in your system window. 6 Click the driver that you want to reinstall and follow the instructions on the screen. If a particular driver is not listed, then that driver is not required by your operating system. Using Windows® XP System Restore The Microsoft® Windows XP operating system provides System Restore to allow you to return your computer to an earlier operating state (without affecting data files) if changes to the hardware, software, or other system settings have left the computer in an undesirable operating state. See the Windows Help and Support Center for information on using System Restore. To access help, see page 38. NOTICE: Make regular backups of your data files. System Restore does not monitor your data files or recover them. Creating a Restore Point 1 Click the Start button and click Help and Support. 2 Click System Restore. 3 Follow the instructions on the screen. G0550bk1.book Page 69 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM70 Advanced Troubleshooting www.dell.com | support.dell.com Restoring the Computer to an Earlier Operating State If problems occur after you install a device driver, use Device Driver Rollback (see page 68) to resolve the problem. If that is unsuccessful, then use System Restore. NOTICE: Before you restore the computer to an earlier operating state, save and close any open files and exit any open programs. Do not alter, open, or delete any files or programs until the system restoration is complete. 1 Click the Start button, point to All Programs→Accessories→System Tools, and then click System Restore. 2 Ensure that Restore my computer to an earlier time is selected and click Next. 3 Click a calendar date to which you want to restore your computer. The Select a Restore Point screen provides a calendar that allows you to see and select restore points. All calendar dates with available restore points appear in boldface type. 4 Select a restore point and click Next. If a calendar date has only one restore point, then that restore point is automatically selected. If two or more restore points are available, click the restore point that you prefer. 5 Click Next. The Restoration Complete screen appears after System Restore finishes collecting data and then the computer restarts. 6 After the computer restarts, click OK. To change the restore point, you can either repeat the steps using a different restore point, or you can undo the restoration. Undoing the Last System Restore NOTICE: Before you undo the last system restore, save and close all open files and exit any open programs. Do not alter, open, or delete any files or programs until the system restoration is complete. 1 Click the Start button, point to All Programs→ Accessories→ System Tools, and then click System Restore. 2 Click Undo my last restoration and click Next. 3 Click Next. The System Restore screen appears and the computer restarts. 4 After the computer restarts, click OK. G0550bk1.book Page 70 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMAdvanced Troubleshooting 71 Enabling System Restore If you reinstall Windows XP with less than 200 MB of free hard-disk space available, System Restore is automatically disabled. To see if System Restore is enabled: 1 Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2 Click Performance and Maintenance. 3 Click System. 4 Click the System Restore tab. 5 Ensure that Turn off System Restore is unchecked. Resolving Software and Hardware Incompatibilities Windows XP IRQ conflicts occur if a device either is not detected during the operating system setup or is detected but incorrectly configured. To check for conflicts on a computer running Windows XP: 1 Click the Start button and click Control Panel. 2 Click Performance and Maintenance and click System. 3 Click the Hardware tab and click Device Manager. 4 In the Device Manager list, check for conflicts with the other devices. Conflicts are indicated by a yellow exclamation point (!) beside the conflicting device or a red X if the device has been disabled. 5 Double-click any conflict to display the Properties window. If an IRQ conflict exists, the Device status area in the Properties window reports the cards or devices that share the device's IRQ. 6 Resolve conflicts by reconfiguring the devices or removing the devices from the Device Manager. To use the Windows XP Hardware Troubleshooter: 1 Click the Start button and click Help and Support. 2 Type hardware troubleshooter in the Search field and click the arrow to start the search. G0550bk1.book Page 71 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM72 Advanced Troubleshooting www.dell.com | support.dell.com 3 Click Hardware Troubleshooter in the Search Results list. 4 In the Hardware Troubleshooter list, click I need to resolve a hardware conflict on my computer, and click Next. Reinstalling Microsoft® Windows® XP Before You Reinstall If you are considering reinstalling the Windows XP operating system to correct a problem with a newly installed driver, first try using Windows XP Device Driver Rollback (see page 68). If Device Driver Rollback does not resolve the problem, then use System Restore (see page 69) to return your operating system to the operating state it was in before you installed the new device driver. Reinstalling Windows XP To reinstall Windows XP, perform all the steps in the following sections in the order in which they are listed. The reinstallation process can take 1 to 2 hours to complete. After you reinstall the operating system, you must also reinstall the device drivers, virus protection program, and other software. NOTICE: The Operating System CD provides options for reinstalling Windows XP. The options can overwrite files and possibly affect programs installed on your hard drive. Therefore, do not reinstall Windows XP unless instructed to do so by a Dell technical support representative. NOTICE: To prevent conflicts with Windows XP, disable any virus protection software installed on your computer before you reinstall Windows XP. See the documentation that came with the software for instructions. Booting From the Operating System CD 1 Save and close any open files and exit any open programs. 2 Insert the Operating System CD. If any program starts automatically, exit the program before proceeding. 3 Shut down the computer through the Start menu (see page 30) and restart the computer. 4 Press immediately after the DELL™ logo appears. If the operating system logo appears, wait until you see the Windows desktop, and then shut down the computer and try again. G0550bk1.book Page 72 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMAdvanced Troubleshooting 73 5 Press the arrow keys to select CD-ROM, and then press . 6 When the Press any key to boot from CD message appears, press any key. Windows XP Setup 1 When the Windows XP Setup screen appears, press to select To set up Windows now. 2 Read the information on the Microsoft Windows Licensing Agreement screen, and press to accept the license agreement. 3 If your computer already has Windows XP installed and you want to recover your current Windows XP data, type r to select the repair option, and then remove the CD from the drive. 4 If you want to install a new copy of Windows XP, press to select that option. 5 Press to select the highlighted partition (recommended), and then follow the instructions on the screen. NOTE: The time required to complete the setup depends on the size of the hard drive and the speed of your computer. The Windows XP Setup screen appears, and the operating system begins to copy files and install the devices. The computer automatically restarts multiple times. NOTICE: Do not press any key when the following message appears: Press any key to boot from the CD. 6 When the Regional and Language Options screen appears, select the settings for your location, and then click Next. 7 Enter your name and organization (optional) in the Personalize Your Software screen and click Next. 8 If you are reinstalling Windows XP Home Edition, at the What's your computer's name window, enter a name for your computer (or accept the name provided) and click Next. If you are reinstalling Windows XP Professional, at the Computer Name and Administrator Password window, enter a name for your computer (or accept the one provided) and a password, and then click Next. 9 If the Modem Dialing Information screen appears, enter the requested information and click Next. 10 Enter the date, time, and time zone in the Date and Time Settings window and click Next. G0550bk1.book Page 73 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM74 Advanced Troubleshooting www.dell.com | support.dell.com 11 If the Networking Settings screen appears, click Typical and click Next. 12 If you are reinstalling Windows XP Professional and you are prompted to provide further information regarding your network configuration, enter your selections. If you are unsure of your settings, accept the default selections. Windows XP installs the operating system components and configures the computer. The computer automatically restarts. NOTICE: Do not press any key when the following message appears: Press any key to boot from the CD. 13 When the Welcome to Microsoft screen appears, click Next. 14 When the How will this computer connect to the Internet? message appears, click Skip. 15 When the Ready to register with Microsoft? screen appears, select No, not at this time and click Next. 16 When the Who will use this computer? screen appears, you can enter up to five users. Click Next. 17 Click Finish to complete the setup, and remove the CD from the drive. Reinstalling Drivers and Software 1 Reinstall the appropriate drivers (see page 67). 2 Reinstall your virus protection software. See the documentation that came with the software for instructions. 3 Reinstall your other software programs. See the documentation that came with the software for instructions. G0550bk1.book Page 74 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM5 SECTION 5 Removing and Installing Parts Front and Back View of the Computer Before You Begin Opening the Computer Cover Inside View of Your Computer System Board Components Memory PCI Cards AGP Cards Drives Microprocessor Airflow Shroud Microprocessor Front Panel Drive Door Battery Closing the Computer Cover G0550bk1.book Page 75 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM76 Removing and Installing Parts www.dell.com | support.dell.com Front and Back View of the Computer Front View 2 1 3 4 1 hard-drive activity light The hard-drive light is on when the computer reads data from or writes data to the hard drive. The light might also be on when a device such as your CD player is operating. 2 power button Press this button to turn on the computer. NOTICE: To avoid losing data, do not use the power button to turn off the computer. Instead, perform a Microsoft® Windows® shutdown. 3 drive door Open the drive door to access the floppy and CD/DVD drives. 4 front panel door Open the door to use the front panel connectors. G0550bk1.book Page 76 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMRemoving and Installing Parts 77 Front View (Doors Open) 2 1 3 1 headphone connector Use the headphone connector to attach headphones and most kinds of speakers for listening to all sounds in your computer, including your CD player and system sounds such as beeps. 2 USB 2.0 connectors (2) Use the front USB connectors for devices that you connect occasionally, such as joysticks or cameras. It is recommended that you use the back USB connectors for devices that typically remain connected, such as printers and keyboards. 3 IEEE 1394 connector Attach high-speed serial multimedia devices, such as a digital video camera. G0550bk1.book Page 77 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM78 Removing and Installing Parts www.dell.com | support.dell.com Back View 4 6 5 8 2 1 16 12 17 18 15 14 3 13 7 9 10 11 1 microprocessor fans (2) For optimal cooling, two microprocessor fans are provided. Do not block the vents. 2 cover release latch To open the computer, lay the computer on its side with the cover release latch at the top and then push the latch to the left. See "Opening the Computer Cover" on page 82. 3 VGA video connector If your monitor has a DVI connector, plug it into the DVI connector on the computer. If your monitor has a VGA connector, plug it into the VGA connector on the computer. 4 security cable slot Use a security cable with the slot to help secure your computer. 5 padlock ring Insert a padlock to lock the computer cover. 6 power connector Insert the power cable. 7 power supply fans For optimal cooling, two power supply fans are provided. Do not block the vents. G0550bk1.book Page 78 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMRemoving and Installing Parts 79 8 card slots Access connectors for any installed PCI (4 slots) and AGP cards (1 slot). 9 PCI sound card with IEEE 1394 • Line-in connector — Use the blue line-in connector to attach a record/playback device such as a cassette player, CD player, or VCR. • Microphone connector — Use the pink microphone connector to attach a personal computer microphone for voice or musical input into a sound or telephony program. • Line-out connector — Use the green line-out connector to attach headphones and most speakers with integrated amplifiers. • Surround connector — Use the black surround connector to attach multichannel-capable speakers. • Center/LFE connector — Use the yellow center/Low-Frequency Effects (LFE) connector to attach your subwoofer. • IEEE 1394 connector — Attach high-speed serial multimedia devices, such as a digital video camera. NOTE: For optimum performance, install a PCI sound card only in PCI slot 3 or 4. 10 modem connector If you have a modem, connect a telephone cable to the modem connector (optional). NOTE: For optimum performance, install a modem card only in PCI slot 2, 3, or 4. 11 DVI video connector If your monitor has a DVI connector, plug it into the DVI connector on the computer. If your monitor has a VGA connector, plug it into the VGA connector on the computer. 12 network adapter connector To attach your computer to a network or broadband device, connect one end of a network cable to either a network jack or to your network or broadband device. Connect the other end of the network cable to the network adapter connector on the back panel of your computer. A click indicates that the network cable has been securely attached. On computers with a network connector card, use the connector on the card. It is recommended that you use Category 5 wiring and connectors for your network. If you must use Category 3 wiring, force the network speed to 10 Mbps to ensure reliable operation. network or broadband jack G0550bk1.book Page 79 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM80 Removing and Installing Parts www.dell.com | support.dell.com Before You Begin This section provides procedures for removing and replacing the components. Unless otherwise noted, each procedure assumes that the following conditions exist: • You have performed the steps in "Precautionary Measures" (see page 81). • You have read the safety information on page 13. • You have opened the computer cover. Recommended Tools Your computer is primarily a tool-less one, but certain procedures (such as removing the heat-sink blower or the control panel) require the use of one or more of the following tools: • Small flat-blade screwdriver • #1 and #2 Phillips-head screwdriver • An 8-inch, #2 Phillips-head screwdriver It is recommended that you use a wrist grounding strap as explained in "Precautionary Measures" (see page 81). 13 USB 2.0 connectors (6) Use the back USB connectors for devices that typically remain connected, such as printers and keyboards. It is recommended that you use the front USB connectors for devices that you connect occasionally, such as joysticks or cameras. 14 keyboard connector If you have a standard keyboard, plug it into the purple keyboard connector. If you have a USB keyboard, plug it into a USB connector. 15 mouse connector Plug a standard mouse into the green mouse connector. Turn off the computer and any attached devices before you connect a mouse to the computer. If you have a USB mouse, plug it into a USB connector. 16 serial connector (COM 2) Connect a serial device, such as a handheld device, to the serial port. 17 parallel connector Connect a parallel device, such as a printer, to the parallel connector. If you have a USB printer, plug it into a USB connector. 18 serial connector (COM 1) Connect a serial device, such as a handheld device, to the serial port. G0550bk1.book Page 80 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMRemoving and Installing Parts 81 Precautionary Measures Use the following safety guidelines to help protect your computer from potential damage and to ensure your own personal safety. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions on page 13. CAUTION: Do not attempt to service the computer yourself, except as explained in your online Dell™ documentation or in instructions otherwise provided to you by Dell. Always follow installation and service instructions closely. NOTICE: To help avoid possible damage to the system board, wait 5 seconds (or wait until the standby light is extinguished) after turning off the computer and unplugging the power cable before removing a component from the system board or disconnecting a device from the computer. Before you start to work on the computer, perform the following steps in the sequence listed: 1 Shut down the computer through the Start menu. 2 Ensure that your computer and attached devices are turned off. If your computer and attached devices did not automatically turn off when you shut down your computer, turn them off now. NOTICE: To disconnect a network cable, first unplug the cable from your computer and then unplug it from the network wall jack. 3 Disconnect any telephone or telecommunication lines from the computer. 4 Disconnect your computer and all attached devices from electrical outlets, and then press the power button to ground the system board. NOTICE: Before touching anything inside your computer, ground yourself by touching an unpainted metal surface, such as the metal at the back of the computer. While you work, periodically touch an unpainted metal surface to dissipate any static electricity that could harm internal components. In addition, take note of these safety guidelines when appropriate: • When you disconnect a cable, pull on its connector or on its strain-relief loop, not on the cable itself. Some cables have a connector with locking tabs; if you are disconnecting this type of cable, press in on the locking tabs before disconnecting the cable. As you pull connectors apart, keep them evenly aligned to avoid bending any connector pins. Also, before you connect a cable, ensure that both connectors are correctly oriented and aligned. G0550bk1.book Page 81 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM82 Removing and Installing Parts www.dell.com | support.dell.com • Handle components and cards with care. Do not touch the components or contacts on a card. Hold a card by its edges or by its metal mounting bracket. Hold a component such as a microprocessor chip by its edges, not by its pins. Protecting Against Electrostatic Discharge Static electricity can harm delicate components inside your computer. To prevent static damage, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computer’s electronic components, such as the microprocessor. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis. As you continue to work inside the computer, periodically touch an unpainted metal surface to remove any static charge your body may have accumulated. You can also take the following steps to prevent damage from electrostatic discharge (ESD): • When unpacking a static-sensitive component from its shipping carton, do not remove the component from the antistatic packing material until you are ready to install the component in your computer. Just before unwrapping the antistatic packaging, be sure to discharge static electricity from your body. • When transporting a sensitive component, first place it in an antistatic container or packaging. • Handle all sensitive components in a static-safe area. If possible, use antistatic floor pads and workbench pads. Opening the Computer Cover CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions on page 13. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before opening the cover. 1 Follow the instructions in "Before You Begin" on page 80. 2 If you have installed a padlock through the padlock ring on the back panel, remove the padlock. NOTICE: Ensure that sufficient space exists to accommodate the open cover—at least 30 cm (1 ft) of desk top space. NOTICE: Be careful when opening the computer cover to ensure that you do not accidentally disconnect cables from the system board. G0550bk1.book Page 82 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMRemoving and Installing Parts 83 3 Lay the computer on its side with the cover release latch on the top as shown in the following figure. 4 Open the computer cover: a Slide the cover release latch toward the top of the computer. b Raise the cover, and pivot it toward the front of the computer. padlock ring cover release latch security cable slot G0550bk1.book Page 83 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM84 Removing and Installing Parts www.dell.com | support.dell.com Inside View of Your Computer hard drive floppy drive CD/DVD drive system board microprocessor airflow shroud power supply microprocessor fans (2) power supply fans (2) card fan G0550bk1.book Page 84 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMRemoving and Installing Parts 85 System Board Components secondary drive connector (SEC_IDE) floppy-drive connector (FDD) hard-drive connector (IDE1) battery socket (BATTERY) SCSI_LED header (SCSI_LED) front-panel connector (FRONT_PANEL) standby power light (PWR_LED) rear fan connector (REAR_FAN1) microprocessor fan connector (CPU_FAN) memory module connectors (1, 3) microprocessor and heat-sink connector (CPU_0 PIN_#A1) power connector (PWR) internal speaker (SPKR) power connector (12V_PWR) rear fan connector (REAR_FAN2) serial ATA connector (SATA_1) password jumper (PASSWORD) PCI card connectors (PCI1, PCI2, PCI3, PCI4) AGP card connector (AGP) serial ATA connector (SATA_0) memory module connectors (2, 4) front fan (FRONT_FAN) clear CMOS jumper (CMOS) G0550bk1.book Page 85 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM86 Removing and Installing Parts www.dell.com | support.dell.com Memory You can increase your computer memory by installing memory modules on the system board. For information on the type of memory supported by your computer, see "Memory" on page 120. NOTE: DDR 333 memory operates at 320-MHz when used with an 800-MHz front-side bus processor. DDR Memory Overview DDR memory modules should be installed in pairs of matched memory size. This means that if you purchased your computer with 256 MB of memory installed and you want to add another 256 MB of memory, you must install it in the appropriate connector. If the DDR memory modules are not installed in matched pairs, the computer will continue to operate, but with a slight reduction in performance. NOTE: Always install DDR memory modules in the order indicated on the system board. The recommended memory configurations are: • A pair of matched memory modules installed in connectors DIMM1 and DIMM2 or • A pair of matched memory modules installed in connectors DIMM1 and DIMM2 and another matched pair installed in connectors DIMM3 and DIMM4 Additional memory recommendations include: • Do not install ECC memory modules. • If you install mixed pairs PC2700 (DDR 333-MHz) and PC3200 (DDR 400-MHz) of memory modules, they function at the slowest speed of the modules you install. • Be sure to install a single memory module in DIMM 1 or the connector closest to the processor before you install modules in the other connectors. G0550bk1.book Page 86 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMRemoving and Installing Parts 87 Memory Installation Guidelines NOTICE: If you remove your original memory modules from the computer during a memory upgrade, keep them separate from any new modules that you may have, even if you purchased the new modules from Dell. You should install your original memory modules in pairs either in connectors DIMM1 and DIMM2 or connectors DIMM3 and DIMM4. If possible, do not pair an original memory module with a new memory module. Otherwise, your computer may not function at optimal performance. NOTE: Memory purchased from Dell is covered under your computer warranty. Installing Memory CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions on page 13. 1 Follow the instructions in "Before You Begin" on page 80. 2 Open the computer cover (see page 82). 3 Lay the computer on its side so that the system board is on the bottom of the inside of the computer. 4 If necessary, remove a memory module: a Press out the securing clip at each end of the memory module connector. b Grasp the module and pull up. If the module is difficult to remove, gently ease the module back and forth to remove it from the connector. matched pair of memory modules in connectors DIMM3 and DIMM4 matched pair of memory modules in connectors DIMM1 and DIMM2 G0550bk1.book Page 87 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM88 Removing and Installing Parts www.dell.com | support.dell.com 5 To insert a module, press out the securing clip at each end of the memory module connector. 6 Align the notch on the bottom of the module with the crossbar in the connector. NOTICE: To avoid breaking the memory module, do not press near the middle of the module. 7 Insert the module straight down into the connector, ensuring that it fits into the vertical guides at each end of the connector. Press firmly on the ends of the module until it snaps into place. If you insert the module correctly, the securing clips snap into the cutouts at each end of the module. securing clips (2) connector memory connector closest to microprocessor notch memory module cutouts (2) crossbar G0550bk1.book Page 88 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMRemoving and Installing Parts 89 8 Close the computer cover (see page 117). NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network wall jack and then plug it into the computer. 9 Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and then turn them on. 10 Click the Start button, right-click My Computer, and then click Properties. 11 Click the General tab. 12 To verify that the memory is installed correctly, check the amount of memory (RAM) listed. PCI Cards CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions on page 13. Your Dell™ computer provides slots for up to four 32-bit, 33-MHz cards. For more information, see "Specifications" on page 120. NOTE: For optimum performance, install a PCI sound card only in PCI slot 3 or 4 and a modem card only in PCI slot 2, 3, or 4. Installing a PCI Card 1 If you are replacing a card, remove the current driver for the card from the operating system. 2 Follow the instructions in "Before You Begin" on page 80. 3 Open the computer cover (see page 82). 4 Press the lever on the card retention arm and raise the retention arm. G0550bk1.book Page 89 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM90 Removing and Installing Parts www.dell.com | support.dell.com 5 If you are installing a new card, remove the filler bracket to create a card-slot opening. Then continue with step 7. 6 If you are replacing a card that is already installed in the computer, remove the card (see page 92). If necessary, disconnect any cables connected to the card. Grasp the card by its top corners, and ease it out of its connector. 7 Prepare the card for installation. See the documentation that came with the card for information on configuring the card, making internal connections, or otherwise customizing it for your computer. CAUTION: Some network adapters automatically start the computer when they are connected to a network. To guard against electrical shock, be sure to unplug your computer from its electrical outlet before installing any cards. 8 Place the card in the connector and press down firmly. Ensure that the card is fully seated in the slot. If the card is full-length, insert the end of the card into the card guide bracket as you lower the card toward its connector on the system board. Insert the card firmly into the card connector on the system board. card edge connector card connector retention arm lever filler bracket G0550bk1.book Page 90 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMRemoving and Installing Parts 91 9 Before you lower the retention arm, ensure that: • The tops of all cards and filler brackets are flush with the alignment bar. • The notch in the top of the card or filler bracket fits around the alignment guide. 10 Press the retention arm into place, securing the card(s) in the computer. fully seated card not fully seated card bracket caught outside of slot bracket within slot G0550bk1.book Page 91 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM92 Removing and Installing Parts www.dell.com | support.dell.com NOTICE: Do not route card cables over or behind the cards. Cables routed over the cards can prevent the computer cover from closing properly or cause damage to the equipment. 11 Connect any cables that should be attached to the card. See the documentation for the card for information about the card’s cable connections. 12 Close the computer cover (see page 117). NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network wall jack and then plug it into the computer. 13 Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and then turn them on. 14 Install any drivers required for the card as described in the card documentation. Removing a PCI Card 1 Follow the instructions in "Before You Begin" on page 80. 2 Open the computer cover (see page 82). 3 Press the lever on the card retention arm and raise the retention arm. 4 If necessary, disconnect any cables connected to the card. 5 Grasp the card by its top corners, and ease it out of its connector. filler bracket alignment bar alignment guide retention arm G0550bk1.book Page 92 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMRemoving and Installing Parts 93 6 If you are removing the card permanently, install a filler bracket in the empty card-slot opening. If you need a filler bracket, contact Dell (see page 129). NOTE: You must install filler brackets over empty card-slot openings to maintain FCC certification of the computer. The brackets also keep dust and dirt out of your computer. 7 Lower the retention arm and press it into place, securing the card(s) in the computer. 8 Close the computer cover (see page 117). NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network wall jack and then plug it into the computer. 9 Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and then turn them on. 10 Remove the card’s driver from the operating system. AGP Cards CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions on page 13. Your Dell™ computer provides a connector for an AGP card. Removing an AGP Card 1 Follow the instructions in "Before You Begin" on page 80. 2 Open the computer cover (see page 82). 3 Press the lever on the card retention arm and raise the retention arm. G0550bk1.book Page 93 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM94 Removing and Installing Parts www.dell.com | support.dell.com 4 Pull the card up and out of the card clip. Installing an AGP Card 1 Follow the instructions in "Before You Begin" on page 80. 2 Open the computer cover (see page 82). 3 Press the lever on the card retention arm and raise the retention arm. PCI connector AGP connector AGP card edge connector retention arm lever G0550bk1.book Page 94 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMRemoving and Installing Parts 95 4 Gently press the card into the AGP connector until it clicks into place, ensuring that the tab fits into the notch on the front end of the card. 5 Lower the retention arm and press it into place, securing the card(s) in the computer. 6 Close the computer cover (see page 117). 7 Connect the monitor cable to the card’s video connector. NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network wall jack and then plug it into the computer. 8 Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. Drives Overview Your computer supports one floppy drive and a maximum combination of up to four of any of the following drives. NOTE: Install only IDE hard drives or serial ATA hard drives in your computer. You cannot install both types of drives. • Two hard drives (IDE, Serial ATA) • Two CD or DVD drives PCI connector AGP connector AGP card edge connector retention arm lever G0550bk1.book Page 95 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM96 Removing and Installing Parts www.dell.com | support.dell.com Hard Drive CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions page 13. Removing a Hard Drive 1 Follow the instructions in "Before You Begin" on page 80. 2 Open the computer cover (see page 82). 3 Disconnect the power and hard-drive cables from the drive. floppy drive CD/DVD drives hard drives G0550bk1.book Page 96 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMRemoving and Installing Parts 97 4 Press in on the tabs on each side of the drive and slide the drive up and out. Installing a Hard Drive 1 Unpack the replacement hard drive, and prepare it for installation. 2 Check the documentation for the drive to verify that it is configured for your computer. 3 Follow the instructions in "Before You Begin" on page 80. 4 Open the computer cover (see page 82). tabs (2) IDE harddrive cable power cable IDE hard drive IDE hard drive example serial ATA hard drive example serial ATA hard drive serial ATA harddrive cable power cable tabs (2) system board connector system board connector G0550bk1.book Page 97 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM98 Removing and Installing Parts www.dell.com | support.dell.com 5 If your replacement hard drive does not have the bracket rails attached, remove the rails from the old drive by removing the two screws that secure each rail to the drive. Attach the bracket rails to the new drive by aligning the screw holes on the drive with the screw holes on the bracket rails and then inserting and tightening all four screws (two screws on each rail). 6 Install the hard drive into the computer by gently sliding the drive into place until you hear it click securely. drive screws (4) bracket rails (2) G0550bk1.book Page 98 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMRemoving and Installing Parts 99 7 Connect the power and hard-drive cables to the drive. 8 Check all connectors to be certain that they are properly cabled and firmly seated. 9 Close the computer cover (see page 82). NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network wall jack and then plug it into the computer. 10 Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. See the documentation that came with the drive for instructions on installing any software required for drive operation. tabs (2) IDE harddrive cable power cable IDE hard drive IDE hard drive example serial ATA hard drive example serial ATA hard drive serial ATA harddrive cable power cable tabs (2) system board connector system board connector G0550bk1.book Page 99 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM100 Removing and Installing Parts www.dell.com | support.dell.com Floppy Drive CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions page 13. Removing a Floppy Drive 1 Follow the instructions in "Before You Begin" on page 80. 2 Open the computer cover (see page 82). 3 Disconnect the power and floppy-drive cables from the back of the floppy drive. 4 Press inward on the two tabs on the sides of the drive, slide the drive upward, and remove it from the floppy-drive bay. floppy-drive cable power cable tabs (2) floppy drive G0550bk1.book Page 100 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMRemoving and Installing Parts 101 Installing a Floppy Drive 1 Follow the instructions in "Before You Begin" on page 80. 2 Open the computer cover (see page 82). 3 If you are replacing a drive and the the new drive does not have the bracket rails attached, remove the rails from the old drive by removing the two screws that secure each rail to the drive. Attach the bracket to the new drive by aligning the screw holes on the drive with the screw holes on the bracket rails and then inserting and tightening all four screws (two screws on each rail). See the diagram on page 98. 4 Gently slide the drive into place until the tabs securely click into position. 5 Attach the power and floppy-drive cables to the floppy drive. floppy-drive cable power cable tabs (2) floppy drive G0550bk1.book Page 101 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM102 Removing and Installing Parts www.dell.com | support.dell.com 6 If you are installing a new floppy drive rather than replacing a drive, remove the frontpanel inserts. From inside the drive bay, gently press on each side of the insert until it pops out. 7 Check all cable connections, and fold cables out of the way to provide airflow for the fan and cooling vents. 8 Close the computer cover (see page 117). NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network wall jack and then plug it into the computer. 9 Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. See the documentation that came with the drive for instructions on installing any software required for drive operation. CD/DVD Drive CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions on page 13. Removing a CD/DVD Drive 1 Follow the instructions in "Before You Begin" on page 80. 2 Open the computer cover (see page 82). 3 Disconnect the power and CD/DVD drive cables from the back of the drive. G0550bk1.book Page 102 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMRemoving and Installing Parts 103 4 Press inward on the two tabs on the sides of the drive, and then slide the drive upward and remove it from the drive bay. Installing a CD/DVD Drive 1 Follow the instructions in "Before You Begin" on page 80. 2 Open the computer cover (see page 82). 3 If you are installing a new drive, unpack the drive and prepare it for installation. Check the documentation that accompanied the drive to verify that the drive is configured for your computer. If you are installing an IDE drive, configure the drive for the cable select setting. power cable CD/DVD drive cable tabs (2) CD/DVD drive audio cable* * Some drives do not have this cable. G0550bk1.book Page 103 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM104 Removing and Installing Parts www.dell.com | support.dell.com 4 Connect the new drive to the set of rails that are attached to the inside of the cover. If a set of rails is not attached inside the computer cover, contact Dell (see page 129). 5 If you are installing a replacement drive and the new drive does not have the bracket rails attached, remove the rails from the old drive by removing the two screws that secure each rail to the drive. Attach the bracket to the new drive by aligning the screw holes on the drive with the screw holes on the bracket rails and then inserting and tightening all four screws (two screws on each rail). See the diagram on page 98). 6 Gently slide the drive into place until the tabs securely click into position. 7 Connect the power and CD/DVD drive cables to the drive. If you are adding a drive that has an audio cable, connect the audio cable to the audio connector on the audio card. power cable CD/DVD drive cable tabs (2) CD/DVD drive audio cable* * Some drives do not have this cable. G0550bk1.book Page 104 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMRemoving and Installing Parts 105 8 If you are installing a new CD/DVD drive rather than replacing a drive, remove the front-panel inserts. From inside the drive bay, gently press on each side of the insert until it pops out. 9 If you are installing a drive that has its own controller card, install the controller card in an expansion slot. See the documentation that accompanied the drive and controller card to verify that the configuration is correct for your computer.. 10 Check all cable connections, and fold cables out of the way to provide airflow for the fan and cooling vents. 11 Close the computer cover (see page 117). NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network wall jack and then plug it into the computer. 12 Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. See the documentation that came with the drive for instructions on installing any software required for drive operation. Microprocessor Airflow Shroud CAUTION: Before you perform this procedure, follow the safety instructions on page 13. Removing the Microprocessor Airflow Shroud 1 Follow the instructions in "Before You Begin" on page 80. 2 Open the computer cover (see page 82). 3 Press down and back on the indentations at the top corners of the shroud. The top anchor tabs disengage from the anchor slots. 4 Lift the airflow shroud out of the chassis. G0550bk1.book Page 105 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM106 Removing and Installing Parts www.dell.com | support.dell.com Installing the Microprocessor Airflow Shroud 1 Follow the instructions in "Before You Begin" on page 80. 2 Open the computer cover (see page 82). 3 Insert the bottom anchor tabs into the anchor slots. 4 Align and insert the side anchor tabs into the anchor slots. 5 Press the indentations until the top anchor tabs on the shroud snap securely into place. 6 Close the computer cover (see page 117). NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network wall jack and then plug it into the computer. 7 Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. top anchor tabs (2) bottom anchor tabs (2) side anchor tabs (2) airflow shroud indentations G0550bk1.book Page 106 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMRemoving and Installing Parts 107 Microprocessor CAUTION: Before you perform this procedure, follow the safety instructions on page 13. Installing the Microprocessor NOTE: It is recommended that only a technically knowledgeable person perform this procedure. CAUTION: The processor can get very hot during normal operation. Ensure that the processor has had sufficient time to cool before you touch it. 1 Follow the instructions in "Before You Begin" on page 80. 2 Open the computer cover (see page 82). 3 Remove the microprocessor airflow shroud (see page 105). If you are replacing a microprocessor, follow steps 4, 5, and 6 in "Removing the Microprocessor" on page 109. NOTICE: You must position the microprocessor correctly in the socket to avoid permanent damage to the microprocessor and the computer. 4 If the release lever is not extended to the release position, move it to that position. 5 Align pin-1 (the imprinted corner) of the microprocessor and pin-1 of the socket. NOTICE: Microprocessor pins are delicate. To avoid damage, ensure that the microprocessor aligns properly with the socket, and do not use excessive force when you install the processor. 6 Carefully set the microprocessor in the socket and press it down lightly to seat it. 7 Rotate the release lever back toward the system board until it snaps into place, securing the microprocessor. G0550bk1.book Page 107 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM108 Removing and Installing Parts www.dell.com | support.dell.com 8 Install the heat sink: a Insert the notched end of the heat sink onto the end of the retention base that is opposite the hinge. b Lower the heat sink until it fits securely in the base. c When the heat sink is secured, pivot the rentention module clip back until the tab snaps into place to secure the heat sink. 9 If you installed a microprocessor replacement kit from Dell, return the original heat sink assembly and microprocessor to Dell in the same package in which your replacement kit was sent. 10 Replace the airflow shroud (see page 106). 11 Close the computer cover (see page 117). NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network wall jack and then plug it into the computer. 12 Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. pin-1 corners of microprocessor and socket aligned microprocessor microprocessor socket socket lever G0550bk1.book Page 108 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMRemoving and Installing Parts 109 Removing the Microprocessor NOTE: It is recommended that only a technically knowledgeable person perform this procedure. CAUTION: The processor can get very hot during normal operation. Ensure that the processor has had sufficient time to cool before you touch it. 1 Follow the instructions in "Before You Begin" on page 80. 2 Open the computer cover (see page 82). 3 Remove the microprocessor airflow shroud (see page 105). 4 Remove the microprocessor heat sink: a Remove the retention module clip by pressing in on the tab and lifting the retention module clip up. b Pull the release lever out until the heat sink is released. c Lift the heat sink away from the microprocessor. NOTICE: Lay the heat sink down with the thermal grease facing upward. NOTICE: If you are installing a microprocessor upgrade kit from Dell, discard the original heat sink. If you are not installing a microprocessor upgrade kit from Dell, reuse the original heat sink when you install your new microprocessor. 5 Pull the release lever straight up until the microprocessor is released. heat sink microprocessor socket release tab retention module clip retention module G0550bk1.book Page 109 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM110 Removing and Installing Parts www.dell.com | support.dell.com NOTICE: Be careful not to bend any of the pins when you remove the microprocessor from the socket. Bending the pins can permanently damage the microprocessor. 6 Remove the microprocessor from the socket. If you are replacing the microprocessor, leave the release lever extended in the release position so that the socket is ready for the new microprocessor and go to "Installing the Microprocessor" on page 107. 7 Replace the airflow shroud (see page 106). 8 Close the computer cover (see page 117). NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network wall jack and then plug it into the computer. 9 Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. Front Panel CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions on page 13. Removing the Front Panel 1 Follow the instructions in "Before You Begin" on page 80. 2 Open the computer cover (see page 82). microprocessor release lever socket G0550bk1.book Page 110 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMRemoving and Installing Parts 111 3 Disconnect and remove all disk drives (see "Drives" on page 95). 4 Release the front panel by pressing each of the front-panel release tabs. There are seven release tabs. 5 Close the computer cover halfway and pull the front panel away from the computer. Replacing the Front Panel To replace the front panel, perform the removal procedure in reverse. G0550bk1.book Page 111 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM112 Removing and Installing Parts www.dell.com | support.dell.com Drive Door CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions on page 13. Removing the Drive Door 1 Open the drive door. G0550bk1.book Page 112 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMRemoving and Installing Parts 113 2 Unsnap the top bracket hinge and pull the top of the drive door outward, away from the computer. 3 Lift the bottom bracket hinge away from the computer. top bracket hinge bottom bracket hinge G0550bk1.book Page 113 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM114 Removing and Installing Parts www.dell.com | support.dell.com Replacing the Drive Door To prevent damage to your computer, the drive door is designed to "break away" from the computer if it is opened too far. If the drive door detaches from the computer without disassembling, perform the removal procedure in reverse. If the drive door is open and it is opened too far, instead of breaking away from the computer in one piece, the drive door may disassemble into several smaller pieces. If the drive door disassembles: 1 If necessary, reattach the door hinges to the door bracket. Ensure that the hinge tabs are away from the door bracket. door bracket hinge tab door hinges (2) G0550bk1.book Page 114 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMRemoving and Installing Parts 115 2 Attach the door bracket/door hinge assembly to the door, starting with the lower part of each door hinge. 3 Attach the drive door to the computer, starting with the bottom bracket hinge. Battery CAUTION: Before you begin this procedure, follow the safety instructions on page 13. A coin-cell battery maintains computer configuration, date, and time information. The battery can last several years. If you have to repeatedly reset time and date information after turning on the computer, replace the battery. CAUTION: A new battery can explode if it is incorrectly installed. Replace the battery only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Discard used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions. lower part of the door hinge door door bracket/door hinge assembly G0550bk1.book Page 115 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM116 Removing and Installing Parts www.dell.com | support.dell.com To replace the battery: 1 Record all the screens in the system setup program (see page 124) so that you can restore the correct settings in step 9. 2 Follow the instructions in "Before You Begin" on page 80. 3 Open the computer cover (see page 82). 4 Locate the battery socket (see page 85). NOTICE: If you pry the battery out of its socket with a blunt object, be careful not to touch the system board with the object. Ensure that the object is inserted between the battery and the socket before you attempt to pry out the battery. Otherwise, you may damage the system board by prying off the socket or by breaking circuit traces on the system board. 5 Remove the battery by carefully prying it out of its socket with your fingers or with a blunt, nonconducting object such as a plastic screwdriver. 6 Insert the new battery into the socket with the side labeled "+" facing up, and snap the battery into place. 7 Close the computer cover. NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network wall jack and then plug it into the computer. 8 Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. battery socket (BATTERY) battery G0550bk1.book Page 116 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMRemoving and Installing Parts 117 9 Enter the system setup program (see page 124) and restore the settings you recorded in step 1. 10 Properly dispose of the old battery (see page 18). Closing the Computer Cover 1 Ensure that all cables are connected, and fold cables out of the way. 2 Ensure that no tools or extra parts are left inside the computer. 3 Close the computer cover: a Pivot the cover down and into position. b Press down on the cover to close it. c Once the cover is closed, slide the cover release latch to the right until the latch clicks into place. padlock ring cover release latch security cable slot G0550bk1.book Page 117 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM118 Removing and Installing Parts www.dell.com | support.dell.com 4 If you are using a padlock to secure your computer, install the padlock. NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network wall jack and then plug it into the computer. 5 Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. G0550bk1.book Page 118 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM6 SECTION 6 Appendix Specifications Standard Settings Clearing Forgotten Passwords Dell Technical Support Policy (U.S. Only) Contacting Dell Regulatory Notices Limited Warranties and Return Policy G0550bk1.book Page 119 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM120 Appendix www.dell.com | support.dell.com Specifications Microprocessor Microprocessor type Intel® Pentium® 4 Level 1 (L1) cache 8 KB Level 2 (L2) cache 512-KB Memory Type 400- and 333-MHz DDR SDRAM Memory connectors four Memory capacities 128-, 256-, or 512- non–ECC Minimum memory 256 MB Maximum memory 2 GB BIOS address F0000h Computer Information Chip set Intel 875P DMA channels eight Interrupt levels 24 BIOS chip 4-Mb NIC integrated PCI network interface System clock 533- or 800-MHz data rate Video Type AGP 8X G0550bk1.book Page 120 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMAppendix 121 Expansion Bus Bus type PCI and AGP Bus speed PCI: 33-MHz AGP: 133-MHz AGP: connector one connector size 172 pins connector data width (maximum) 32 bits bus protocols 8x/4x/2x modes at 1.5 V PCI: connector four connector size 120 pins connector data width (maximum) 32 bits Drives Externally accessible one 3.5-inch drive bay three 5.25-inch drive bays Available devices ATA-100 Ultra DMA hard drive, serial ATA drive, CD drive, DVD drive, RAID Internally accessible three 3.5-inch drive bays G0550bk1.book Page 121 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM122 Appendix www.dell.com | support.dell.com Connectors External connectors: Serial two 9-pin connectors; 16550Ccompatible Parallel 25-hole connector (bidirectional) Network adapter 10/100/1000 Ethernet connector PS/2 (keyboard and mouse) 6-pin mini-DIN USB two front-panel and six back-panel USB 2.0–compliant connectors headphones one front-panel connector System board connectors: Primary IDE drive 40-pin connector Secondary IDE drive 40-pin connector Floppy drive 34-pin connector Fans (3) 3-pin connector I/O Panel 34-pin connector Serial ATA (2) 7-pin connector Controls and Lights Power control push button Power light green light on power button—blinking green in sleep state; solid green for power-on state Hard-drive access light green Link integrity light (on integrated network adapter) green light for 10-Mb operation; orange light for 100-Mb operation Activity light (on integrated network adapter) yellow blinking light Diagnostic lights four lights on the back panel G0550bk1.book Page 122 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMAppendix 123 Power DC power supply: Wattage 460 W Heat dissipation 1000 BTU/hr Voltage (see page 15 for important voltage setting information) fixed-voltage power supply—110 V at 50/60 Hz manual selection and auto-sensing power supplies—90 to 135 V at 50/60 Hz; 180 to 265 V at 50/60 Hz; 100 V at 50/60 Hz for Japanese computers Backup battery 3-V CR2032 lithium coin cell Physical Height 49.1 cm (19.3 inches) Width 22.2 cm (8.7 inches) Depth 48.8 cm (19.2 inches) Weight 19 kg (42 lbs) Environmental Temperature: Operating 10° to 35°C (50° to 95°F) NOTE: At 35°C (95°F), the maximum operating altitude is 914 m (3000 ft). Storage –40° to 65°C (–40° to 149°F) Relative humidity 20% to 80% (noncondensing) Maximum vibration: Operating 0.25 G at 3 to 200 Hz at 0.5 octave/min Storage 0.5 G at 3 to 200 Hz at 1 octave/min Maximum shock: Operating bottom half-sine pulse with a change in velocity of 20 inches/sec (50.8 cm/sec) G0550bk1.book Page 123 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM124 Appendix www.dell.com | support.dell.com Standard Settings The system setup program contains the standard settings for your computer. NOTICE: Unless you are an expert computer user, do not change the settings for this program. Certain changes might make your computer work incorrectly. See the following figure for an example of the main program screen. Storage nonoperating (half-sine pulse) 105 G, 2 ms nonoperating (faired-square wave) 27 G with a velocity change of 508 cm/sec (200 inches/sec) Altitude: Operating –15.2 to 3048 m (–50 to 10,000 ft) Storage –15.2 to 10,668 m (–50 to 35,000 ft) Environmental G0550bk1.book Page 124 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMAppendix 125 Viewing Settings 1 Turn on (or restart) your computer. 2 When the blue DELL™ logo appears, press immediately. If you wait too long and the operating system logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Microsoft® Windows® desktop. Then shut down your computer and try again. G0550bk1.book Page 125 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM126 Appendix www.dell.com | support.dell.com System Setup Screens The system setup program screens display the current configuration information for your computer. Information on the screen is divided into five areas: • Title — The box at the top of all screens that lists the computer name. • Computer data — Two boxes below the title box that display your computer processor, L2 cache, service tag, and the version number of the BIOS. • Options — A scrollable box listing options that define the configuration of your computer, including installed hardware, power conservation, and security features. Fields to the right of the option titles contain settings or values. The fields that you can change appear bright on the screen. The fields that you cannot change (because they are set by the computer) appear less bright. When appears to the right of an option title, press to access a popup menu of additional options. • Key functions — A line of boxes across the bottom of all screens that lists keys and their functions within the system setup program. • Help — Press for information on the option that is selected (highlighted). Boot Sequence This feature allows you to change the boot sequence for devices. Changing Boot Sequence for the Current Boot You can use this feature, for example, to tell the computer to boot from the CD drive so that you can run the Dell Diagnostics on the Drivers and Utilities CD, but you must set the computer to boot from the hard drive when the diagnostic tests are complete. 1 Turn on (or restart) your computer. 2 When the blue DELL logo appears, press immediately. If you wait too long and the operating system logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Microsoft Windows desktop. Then shut down your computer (see page 30) and try again. The Boot Device Menu appears, listing all available boot devices. Each device has a number next to it. 3 At the bottom of the menu, enter the number of the device that is to be used for the current boot only. G0550bk1.book Page 126 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMAppendix 127 Changing Boot Sequence for Future Boots 1 Enter the system setup program (see page 125). 2 Use the arrow keys to highlight the Boot Sequence menu option and press to access the pop-up menu. NOTE: Write down your current boot sequence in case you want to restore it. 3 Press the up- and down-arrow keys to move through the list of devices. 4 Press the spacebar to enable or disable a device (enabled devices have a checkmark). 5 Press plus (+) or minus (–) to move a selected device up or down the list. Clearing Forgotten Passwords CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions on page 13. If you forget your user or setup password, you cannot operate your computer or change settings in the system setup program until you clear the forgotten password(s). NOTICE: This process erases both the system and setup passwords. 1 Shut down the computer (see page 30). NOTICE: To disconnect a network cable, first unplug the cable from your computer, and then unplug it from the network wall jack. 2 Turn off any attached devices and disconnect them from their electrical outlets. 3 Disconnect the computer power cable from the wall outlet, and then press the power button to ground the system board. 4 Open the computer cover (see page 82). 5 Locate jumper PASSWORD on the system board (see page 85) and remove the jumper plug. 6 Close the computer cover (see page 117), plug your computer into an electrical outlet, and turn on the computer. The existing password(s) will be erased. 7 Shut down the computer (see page 30). NOTICE: To disconnect a network cable, first unplug the cable from your computer, and then unplug it from the network wall jack. 8 Turn off any attached devices and disconnect them from their electrical outlets. G0550bk1.book Page 127 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM128 Appendix www.dell.com | support.dell.com 9 Disconnect the computer power cable from the wall outlet, and then press the power button to ground the system board. 10 Open the computer cover (see page 82). 11 Reconnect the jumper plug to jumper PASSWORD (see page 85). 12 Close the computer cover (see page 117). NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network wall jack, and then plug it into the computer. 13 Connect your computer and devices to their electrical outlets, and turn them on. Turning on your computer with the PASSWORD jumper installed reenables the password feature. Dell Technical Support Policy (U.S. Only) Technician-assisted technical support requires the cooperation and participation of the customer in the troubleshooting process and provides for restoration of the operating system, software programs, and hardware drivers to the original default configuration as shipped from Dell, as well as the verification of appropriate functionality of the computer and all Dell-installed hardware. In addition to this technician-assisted technical support, online technical support is available at support.dell.com. Additional technical support options may be available for purchase. Dell provides limited technical support for the computer and any "Dell-installed" software and peripherals1 . Support for third-party software and peripherals is provided by the original manufacturer, including those purchased and/or installed through Dell Software and Peripherals, Readyware, and Custom Factory Integration2 . 1 Repair services are provided pursuant to the terms and conditions of your limited warranty and any optional support service contract purchased with the computer. 2 All Dell-standard components included in a Custom Factory Integration (CFI) project are covered by the standard Dell limited warranty for your computer. However, Dell also extends a parts replacement program to cover all nonstandard, third-party hardware components integrated through CFI for the duration of the computer’s service contract. G0550bk1.book Page 128 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMAppendix 129 Definition of "Dell-Installed" Software and Peripherals Dell-installed software includes the operating system and some of the software programs that are installed on the computer during the manufacturing process (Microsoft® Office, Norton Antivirus, and so on). Dell-installed peripherals include any internal expansion cards, or Dell-branded module bay or PC Card accessories. In addition, any Dell-branded monitors, keyboards, mice, speakers, microphones for telephonic modems, docking stations/port replicators, networking products, and all associated cabling are included. Definition of "Third-Party" Software and Peripherals Third-party software and peripherals include any peripheral, accessory, or software program sold by Dell not under the Dell brand (printers, scanners, cameras, games, and so on). Support for all third-party software and peripherals is provided by the original manufacturer of the product. Contacting Dell To contact Dell electronically, you can access the following websites: • www.dell.com • support.dell.com (technical support) • premiersupport.dell.com (technical support for educational, government, healthcare, and medium/large business customers, including Premier, Platinum, and Gold customers) For specific web addresses for your country, find the appropriate country section in the table below. NOTE: Toll-free numbers are for use within the country for which they are listed. When you need to contact Dell, use the electronic addresses, telephone numbers, and codes provided in the following table. If you need assistance in determining which codes to use, contact a local or an international operator. G0550bk1.book Page 129 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM130 Appendix www.dell.com | support.dell.com Country (City) International Access Code Country Code City Code Department Name or Service Area, Website and E-Mail Address Area Codes, Local Numbers, and Toll-Free Numbers Canada (North York, Ontario) International Access Code: 011 Online Order Status: www.dell.ca/ostatus AutoTech (automated technical support) toll-free: 1-800-247-9362 TechFax toll-free: 1-800-950-1329 Customer Care (Home Sales/Small Business) toll-free: 1-800-847-4096 Customer Care (med./large business, government) toll-free: 1-800-326-9463 Technical Support (Home Sales/Small Business) toll-free: 1-800-847-4096 Technical Support (med./large bus., government) toll-free: 1-800-387-5757 Sales (Home Sales/Small Business) toll-free: 1-800-387-5752 Sales (med./large bus., government) toll-free: 1-800-387-5755 Spare Parts Sales & Extended Service Sales 1 866 440 3355 G0550bk1.book Page 130 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMAppendix 131 U.S.A. (Austin, Texas) International Access Code: 011 Country Code: 1 Automated Order-Status Service toll-free: 1-800-433-9014 AutoTech (portable and desktop computers) toll-free: 1-800-247-9362 Consumer (Home and Home Office) Technical Support toll-free: 1-800-624-9896 Customer Service toll-free: 1-800-624-9897 DellNet™ Service and Support toll-free: 1-877-Dellnet (1-877-335-5638) Employee Purchase Program (EPP) Customers toll-free: 1-800-695-8133 Financial Services website: www.dellfinancialservices.com Financial Services (lease/loans) toll-free: 1-877-577-3355 Financial Services (Dell Preferred Accounts [DPA]) toll-free: 1-800-283-2210 Business Customer Service and Technical Support toll-free: 1-800-822-8965 Employee Purchase Program (EPP) Customers toll-free: 1-800-695-8133 Projectors Technical Support toll-free: 1-877-459-7298 Public (government, education, and healthcare) Customer Service and Technical Support toll-free: 1-800-456-3355 Employee Purchase Program (EPP) Customers toll-free: 1-800-234-1490 Dell Sales toll-free: 1-800-289-3355 or toll-free: 1-800-879-3355 Dell Outlet Store (Dell refurbished computers) toll-free: 1-888-798-7561 Software and Peripherals Sales toll-free: 1-800-671-3355 Spare Parts Sales toll-free: 1-800-357-3355 Extended Service and Warranty Sales toll-free: 1-800-247-4618 Fax toll-free: 1-800-727-8320 Dell Services for the Deaf, Hard-of-Hearing, or Speech-Impaired toll-free: 1-877-DELLTTY (1-877-335-5889) Country (City) International Access Code Country Code City Code Department Name or Service Area, Website and E-Mail Address Area Codes, Local Numbers, and Toll-Free Numbers G0550bk1.book Page 131 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM132 Appendix www.dell.com | support.dell.com Regulatory Notices Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) is any signal or emission, radiated in free space or conducted along power or signal leads, that endangers the functioning of a radio navigation or other safety service or seriously degrades, obstructs, or repeatedly interrupts a licensed radio communications service. Radio communications services include but are not limited to AM/FM commercial broadcast, television, cellular services, radar, air-traffic control, pager, and Personal Communication Services (PCS). These licensed services, along with unintentional radiators such as digital devices, including computer systems, contribute to the electromagnetic environment. Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) is the ability of items of electronic equipment to function properly together in the electronic environment. While this computer system has been designed and determined to be compliant with regulatory agency limits for EMI, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause interference with radio communications services, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, you are encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: • Reorient the receiving antenna. • Relocate the computer with respect to the receiver. • Move the computer away from the receiver. • Plug the computer into a different outlet so that the computer and the receiver are on different branch circuits. If necessary, consult a Dell Technical Support representative or an experienced radio/television technician for additional suggestions. Limited Warranties and Return Policy Dell-branded hardware products purchased in the U.S. or Canada come with either a 90-day, 1-year, 2-year, 3-year, or 4-year limited warranty. To determine which warranty came with your hardware product(s), see your packing slip or invoice. The following sections describe the limited warranties and return policy for the U.S., the limited warranties and return policy for Canada, the manufacturer guarantee for Latin America and the Caribbean, and the Intel® Pentium® and Celeron® warranty for the U.S. and Canada. G0550bk1.book Page 132 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMAppendix 133 Limited Warranty for Dell-Branded Hardware Products (U.S. Only) What is covered by this limited warranty? This limited warranty covers defects in materials and workmanship in your—our end-user customer's—Dellbranded hardware products, including Dell-branded peripheral products. What is not covered by this limited warranty? This limited warranty does not cover: • Software, including the operating system and software added to the Dell-branded hardware products through our factory-integration system, third-party software, or the reloading of software • Non-Dell-branded and Solution Provider Direct products and accessories • Problems that result from: – External causes such as accident, abuse, misuse, or problems with electrical power – Servicing not authorized by Dell – Usage that is not in accordance with product instructions – Failure to follow the product instructions or failure to perform preventive maintenance – Problems caused by using accessories, parts, or components not supplied by Dell • Products with missing or altered Service Tags or serial numbers • Products for which Dell has not received payment THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH VARY FROM STATE TO STATE (OR JURISDICTION TO JURISDICTION). DELL'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR MALFUNCTIONS AND DEFECTS IN HARDWARE IS LIMITED TO REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT AS SET FORTH IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT. ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES FOR THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED IN TIME TO THE TERM OF THE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD REFLECTED ON YOUR PACKING SLIP OR INVOICE. NO WARRANTIES, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WILL APPLY AFTER THE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD HAS EXPIRED. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO THIS LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. WE DO NOT ACCEPT LIABILITY BEYOND THE REMEDIES PROVIDED FOR IN THIS LIMITED WARRANTY OR FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY LIABILITY FOR THIRD-PARTY CLAIMS AGAINST YOU FOR DAMAGES, FOR PRODUCTS NOT BEING AVAILABLE FOR USE, OR FOR LOST DATA OR LOST SOFTWARE. OUR LIABILITY WILL BE NO MORE THAN THE AMOUNT YOU PAID FOR THE PRODUCT THAT IS THE SUBJECT OF A CLAIM. THIS IS THE MAXIMUM AMOUNT FOR WHICH WE ARE RESPONSIBLE. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. G0550bk1.book Page 133 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM134 Appendix www.dell.com | support.dell.com How long does this limited warranty last? This limited warranty lasts for the time period indicated on your packing slip or invoice, except for the following Dell-branded hardware: • Portable computer batteries carry a 1-year limited warranty. • Projector lamps carry a 90-day limited warranty. • Memory carries a lifetime limited warranty. • Monitors carry the longer of either a 3-year limited warranty or the remainder of the warranty for the Dell computer to which the monitor will be connected. • Other add-on hardware carries the longer of either a 1-year limited warranty for new parts and a 90-day limited warranty for reconditioned parts or, for both new and reconditioned parts, the reminder of the warranty for the Dell computer on which such parts are installed. The limited warranty on all Dell-branded products begins on the date of the packing slip or invoice. The warranty period is not extended if we repair or replace a warranted product or any parts. Dell may change the availability of limited warranties, at its discretion, but any changes will not be retroactive. What do I do if I need warranty service? Before the warranty expires, please call us at the relevant number listed in the following table. Please also have your Dell Service Tag or order number available. What will Dell do? During the 90 days of the 90-day limited warranty and the first year of all other limited warranties: During the 90 days of the 90-day limited warranty and the first year of all other limited warranties, we will repair any Dellbranded hardware products returned to us that prove to be defective in materials or workmanship. If we are not able to repair the product, we will replace it with a comparable product that is new or refurbished. Individual Home Consumers: U.S. Only Technical Support 1-800-624-9896 Customer Service 1-800-624-9897 Individual Home Consumers who purchased through an Employee Purchase Program: Technical Support and Customer Service 1-800-822-8965 Home and Small Business Commercial Customers: Technical Support and Customer Service 1-800-456-3355 Medium, Large, or Global Commercial Customers, Healthcare Customers, and Value-Added Resellers (VARs): Technical Support and Customer Service 1-800-822-8965 Government and Education Customers: Technical Support and Customer Service 1-800-234-1490 Dell-Branded Memory 1-888-363-5150 G0550bk1.book Page 134 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMAppendix 135 When you contact us, we will issue a Return Material Authorization Number for you to include with your return. You must return the products to us in their original or equivalent packaging, prepay shipping charges, and insure the shipment or accept the risk if the product is lost or damaged in shipment. We will return the repaired or replacement products to you. We will pay to ship the repaired or replaced products to you if you use an address in the United States (excluding Puerto Rico and U.S. possessions and territories). Otherwise, we will ship the product to you freight collect. If we determine that the product is not covered under this warranty, we will notify you and inform you of service alternatives that are available to you on a fee basis. NOTE: Before you ship the product(s) to us, make sure to back up the data on the hard drive(s) and any other storage device(s) in the product(s). Remove any confidential, proprietary, or personal information and removable media such as floppy disks, CDs, or PC Cards. We are not responsible for any of your confidential, proprietary, or personal information; lost or corrupted data; or damaged or lost removable media. During the remaining years: For the remaining period of the limited warranty, we will replace any defective part with new or refurbished parts, if we agree that it needs to be replaced. When you contact us, we will require a valid credit card number at the time you request a replacement part, but we will not charge you for the replacement part as long as you return the original part to us within 30 days after we ship the replacement part to you. If we do not receive the original part within 30 days, we will charge to your credit card the then-current standard price for that part. We will pay to ship the part to you if you use an address in the United States (excluding Puerto Rico and U.S. possessions and territories). Otherwise, we will ship the part freight collect. We will also include a prepaid shipping container with each replacement part for your use in returning the replaced part to us. NOTE: Before you replace parts, make sure to back up the data on the hard drive(s) and any other storage device(s) in the product(s). We are not responsible for lost or corrupted data. What if I purchased a service contract? If your service contract is with Dell, service will be provided to you under the terms of the service agreement. Please refer to that contract for details on how to obtain service. If you purchased through us a service contract with one of our third-party service providers, please refer to that contract for details on how to obtain service. How will you fix my product? We use new and refurbished parts made by various manufacturers in performing warranty repairs and in building replacement parts and systems. Refurbished parts and systems are parts or systems that have been returned to Dell, some of which were never used by a customer. All parts and systems are inspected and tested for quality. Replacement parts and systems are covered for the remaining period of the limited warranty for the product you bought. Dell owns all parts removed from repaired products. May I transfer the limited warranty? Limited warranties on systems may be transferred if the current owner transfers ownership of the system and records the transfer with us. The limited warranty on Dell-branded memory may not be transferred. You may record your transfer by going to Dell's website: • If you are an Individual Home Consumer, go to www.dell.com/us/en/dhs/topics/sbtopic_015_ccare.htm • If you are a Home Office, Small, Medium, Large, or Global Commercial Customer, go to www.dell.com/us/en/biz/topics/sbtopic_ccare_nav_015_ccare.htm G0550bk1.book Page 135 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM136 Appendix www.dell.com | support.dell.com • If you are a Government, Education, or Healthcare Customer, or an Individual Home Consumer who purchased through an Employee Purchase Program, go to www.dell.com/us/en/pub/topics/sbtopic_015_ccare.htm If you do not have Internet access, call your customer care representative or call 1-800-624-9897. "Total Satisfaction" Return Policy (U.S. Only) We value our relationship with you and want to make sure that you're satisfied with your purchases. That's why we offer a "Total Satisfaction" return policy for most products that you—the end-user customer—purchase directly from Dell. Under this policy, you may return to Dell products that you purchased directly from Dell for a credit or a refund of the purchase price paid, less shipping and handling and applicable restocking fees as follows: • New Hardware Products and Accessories — All new hardware, accessories, parts, and unopened software still in its sealed package, excluding the products listed below, may be returned within 30 days from the date on the packing slip or invoice. To return applications software or an operating system that has been installed by Dell, you must return the entire computer. A different return policy applies to nondefective products purchased through Dell's Software and Peripherals division by customers of our Small and Medium Business divisions. Those products may be returned within 30 days from the date on the packing slip or invoice, but a fifteen percent (15%) restocking fee will be deducted from any refund or credit. The "Total Satisfaction" Return Policy and Software and Peripherals division return policy are not available for Dell | EMC storage products, EMC-branded products, or enterprise software. • Reconditioned or Refurbished Dell-Branded Hardware Products and Parts — All reconditioned or refurbished Dell-branded server and storage products may be returned within 30 days from the date on the packing slip or invoice. All other reconditioned or refurbished Dell-branded hardware products and parts may be returned within 14 days of the date on the packing slip or invoice. To return products, e-mail or call Dell customer service to receive a Credit Return Authorization Number within the return policy period applicable to the product you want to return. You must obtain a Credit Return Authorization Number in order to return the product. See "Contacting Dell" or "Getting Help" in your customer documentation (or www.dell.com/us/en/gen/contact.htm) to find the appropriate contact information for obtaining customer assistance. You must ship the products to Dell within 5 days of the date that Dell issues the Credit Return Authorization Number. You must also return the products to Dell in their original packaging, in as-new condition along with any media, documentation, and all other items that were included in the original shipment, prepay shipping charges, and insure the shipment or accept the risk of loss or damage during shipment. Limited Warranty Terms for Dell-Branded Hardware Products (Canada Only) What is covered by this limited warranty? This limited warranty covers defects in materials and workmanship in your—our end-user customer's—Dellbranded hardware products, including Dell-branded peripheral products. What is not covered by this limited warranty? This limited warranty does not cover: • Software, including the operating system and software added to the Dell-branded hardware products through our factory-integration system, or the reloading of the software • Non-Dell branded and Solution Provider Direct products and accessories G0550bk1.book Page 136 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMAppendix 137 • Problems that result from: – External causes such as accident, abuse, misuse, or problems with electrical power – Servicing not authorized by Dell – Usage that is not in accordance with product instructions – Failure to follow the product instructions or failure to perform preventive maintenance – Problems caused by using accessories, parts, or components not supplied by Dell • Products with missing or altered Service Tags or serial numbers • Products for which Dell has not received payment THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH VARY FROM PROVINCE TO PROVINCE. DELL'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR MALFUNCTIONS AND DEFECTS IN PRODUCT IS LIMITED TO REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT AS SET FORTH IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT, FOR THE TERM OF THE WARRANTY PERIOD REFLECTED ON YOUR PACKING SLIP OR INVOICE. EXCEPT FOR THE EXPRESS WARRANTIES CONTAINED IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT, DELL DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE. SOME PROVINCES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF CERTAIN IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS, OR LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY OR CONDITION LASTS. THEREFORE, THE FOREGOING EXCLUSIONS AND LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. WE DO NOT ACCEPT LIABILITY BEYOND THE REMEDIES PROVIDED FOR IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT OR FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY LIABILITY FOR THIRD-PARTY CLAIMS AGAINST YOU FOR DAMAGES, FOR PRODUCTS NOT BEING AVAILABLE FOR USE, OR FOR LOST DATA OR LOST SOFTWARE. OUR LIABILITY WILL BE NO MORE THAN THE AMOUNT YOU PAID FOR THE PRODUCT THAT IS THE SUBJECT OF A CLAIM. THIS IS THE MAXIMUM AMOUNT FOR WHICH WE ARE RESPONSIBLE. SOME PROVINCES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. How long does this limited warranty last? This limited warranty lasts for the time period indicated on your packing slip or invoice, except that the limited warranty on Dell-branded batteries lasts only 1 year and the limited warranty on the lamps for Dell-branded projectors lasts only 90 days. The limited warranty begins on the date of the packing slip or invoice. The warranty period is not extended if we repair or replace a warranted product or any parts. Dell may change the terms and availability of limited warranties, at its discretion, but any changes will not be retroactive (that is, the warranty terms in place at the time of purchase will apply to your purchase). G0550bk1.book Page 137 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM138 Appendix www.dell.com | support.dell.com What do I do if I need warranty service? Before the warranty expires, please call us at the relevant number listed in the following table. Please also have your Dell Service Tag or order number available. What will Dell do? During the 90 days of the 90-day limited warranty and the first year of all other limited warranties: During the 90 days of the 90-day limited warranty and the first year of all other limited warranties, we will repair any Dellbranded hardware products returned to us that prove to be defective in materials or workmanship. If we are not able to repair the product, we will replace it with a comparable product that is new or refurbished. When you contact us, we will issue a Return Material Authorization Number for you to include with your return. You must return the products to us in their original or equivalent packaging, prepay shipping charges, and insure the shipment or accept the risk if the product is lost or damaged in shipment. We will return the repaired or replacement products to you. We will pay to ship the repaired or replaced products to you if you use an address in Canada. Otherwise, we will ship the product to you freight collect. If we determine that the problem is not covered under this warranty, we will notify you and inform you of service alternatives that are available to you on a fee basis. NOTE: Before you ship the product(s) to us, make sure to back up the data on the hard drive(s) and any other storage device(s) in the product(s). Remove any confidential, proprietary or personal information, removable media, such as floppy disks, CDs, or PC Cards. We are not responsible for any of your confidential, proprietary or personal information; lost or corrupted data; or damaged or lost removable media. During the remaining years following the first year of all limited warranties: We will replace any defective part with new or refurbished parts, if we agree that it needs to be replaced. When you contact us, we will require a valid credit card number at the time you request a replacement part, but we will not charge you for the replacement part as long as you return the original part to us within 30 days after we ship the replacement part to you. If we do not receive the original part within 30 days, we will charge to your credit card the then-current standard price for that part. Individual Home Consumers; Home Office and Small Business Customers: Canada Only Technical Support and Customer Service 1-800-847-4096 Medium, Large, and Global Commercial Customers; Government, Education, and Healthcare Customers; and Value-Added Resellers (VARs): Technical Support 1-800-387-5757 Customer Service 1-800-326-9463 Government or Education Customers, or Individual Home Consumers who purchased through an Employee Purchase Program: Technical Support 1-800-387-5757 Customer Service 1-800-326-9463 (Extension 8221 for Individual Consumers) Dell-Branded Memory 1-888-363-5150 G0550bk1.book Page 138 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMAppendix 139 We will pay to ship the part to you if you use an address in Canada. Otherwise, we will ship the part freight collect. We will also include a prepaid shipping container with each replacement part for your use in returning the replaced part to us. NOTE: Before you replace parts, make sure to back up the data on the hard drive(s) and any other storage device(s) in the product(s). We are not responsible for lost or corrupted data. What if I purchased a service contract? If your service contract is with Dell, service will be provided to you under the terms of the service contract. Please refer to that contract for details on how to obtain service. Dell's service contracts can be found online at www.dell.ca or by calling Customer Care at 1-800-847-4096. If you purchased through us a service contract with one of our third-party service providers, please refer to that contract (mailed to you with your packing slip or invoice) for details on how to obtain service. How will you fix my product? We use new and refurbished parts made by various manufacturers in performing warranty repairs and in building replacement parts and systems. Refurbished parts and systems are parts or systems that have been returned to Dell, some of which were never used by a customer. All parts and systems are inspected and tested for quality. Replacement parts and systems are covered for the remaining period of the limited warranty for the product you bought. Dell owns all parts removed from repaired products. May I transfer the limited warranty? Limited warranties on systems may be transferred if the current owner transfers ownership of the system and records the transfer with us. The limited warranty on Dell-branded memory may not be transferred. You may record your transfer by going to Dell’s website: • For Canada-purchased computers (in-country transfers) and to transfer from one customer to another, go to www.dell.ca/ca/en/gen/topics/segtopic_ccare_nav_013_ccare.htm • For out-of-country transfers (outside of the original country of purchase), go to www.dell.com/us/en/biz/topics/sbtopic_ccare_nav_016_ccare.htm If you do not have Internet access, call Dell at 1-800-847-4096 (Home Consumer customers) or 1-800-326-9463 (Corporate Commercial or Government customers). "Total Satisfaction" Return Policy (Canada Only) If you are an end-user customer who bought new products directly from Dell, you may return them to Dell up to 30 days after you receive them for a refund or credit of the product purchase price. If you are an end-user customer who bought reconditioned or refurbished products from Dell, you may return them to Dell within 14 days after the date on the packing slip or invoice for a refund or credit of the product purchase price. In either case, the refund or credit will not include any shipping and handling charges shown on your packing slip or invoice and will be subject to a fifteen percent (15%) restocking fee, unless otherwise prohibited by law. If you are an organization that bought the products under a written agreement with Dell, the agreement may contain different terms for the return of products than specified by this policy. G0550bk1.book Page 139 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM140 Appendix www.dell.com | support.dell.com To return products, you must call Dell Customer Service at 1-800-847-4096 to receive a Credit Return Authorization Number. To expedite the process of your refund or credit, Dell expects you to return the products to Dell in their original packaging within 5 days of the date that Dell issues the Credit Return Authorization Number. You must also prepay shipping charges and insure the shipment or accept the risk of loss or damage during shipment. You may return software for a refund or credit only if the sealed package containing the floppy disk(s) or CD(s) is unopened. Returned products must be in as-new condition, and all of the manuals, floppy disk(s), CD(s), power cables, and other items included with a product must be returned with it. For customers who want to return, for refund or credit only, either application or operating system software that has been installed by Dell, the whole system must be returned, along with any media and documentation that may have been included in the original shipment. The "Total Satisfaction" Return Policy does not apply to Dell | EMC storage products. It also does not apply to products purchased through Dell's Software and Peripherals division. For those products, please instead refer to Dell's Software and Peripheral's then-current return policy (see the following section, "Dell Software and Peripherals (Canada Only)"). Dell Software and Peripherals (Canada Only) Third-Party Software and Peripherals Products Similar to other resellers of software and peripherals, Dell does not warrant third-party products. Third-party software and peripheral products are covered by the warranties provided by the original manufacturer or publisher only. Third-party manufacturer warranties vary from product to product. Consult your product documentation for specific warranty information. More information may also be available from the manufacturer or publisher. While Dell offers a wide selection of software and peripheral products, we do not specifically test or guarantee that all of the products we offer work with any or all of the various models of Dell computers, nor do we test or guarantee all of the products we sell on the hundreds of different brands of computers available today. If you have questions about compatibility, we recommend and encourage you to contact the third-party software and peripheral product manufacturer or publisher directly. Dell-Branded Peripheral Products Dell does provide a limited warranty for new Dell-branded peripheral products (products for which Dell is listed as the manufacturer) such as monitors, batteries, memory, docking stations, and projectors. To determine which limited warranty applies to the product you purchased, see the Dell packing slip or invoice and/or the product documentation that accompanied your product. Descriptions of Dell's limited warranties are described in preceding sections. Return Policy If you are an end-user customer who bought Dell Software and Peripherals products directly from a Dell company, you may return Dell Software and Peripherals products that are in as-new condition to Dell up to 30 days from the date on the packing slip or invoice for a refund of the product purchase price if already paid. This refund will not include any shipping and handling charges shown on your packing slip or invoice; you are responsible for those. To return products, you must call Dell Customer Service at 1-800-387-5759 to receive a Credit Return Authorization Number. You must ship the Dell Software and Peripherals products back to Dell in their original manufacturer's packaging (which must be in as-new condition), prepay shipping charges, and insure the shipment or accept the risk of loss or damage during shipment. G0550bk1.book Page 140 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMAppendix 141 To qualify for refund or replacement, returned products must be in as-new condition, software products must be unopened, and all of the manuals, floppy disk(s), CD(s), power cables, and other items included with a product must be returned with it. 1-Year End-User Manufacturer Guarantee (Latin America and the Caribbean Only) Guarantee Dell Computer Corporation ("Dell") warrants to the end user in accordance with the following provisions that its branded hardware products, purchased by the end user from a Dell company or an authorized Dell distributor in Latin America or the Caribbean, will be free from defects in materials, workmanship, and design affecting normal use, for a period of 1 year from the original purchase date. Products for which proper claims are made will, at Dell’s option, be repaired or replaced at Dell’s expense. Dell owns all parts removed from repaired products. Dell uses new and reconditioned parts made by various manufacturers in performing repairs and building replacement products. Exclusions This Guarantee does not apply to defects resulting from: improper or inadequate installation, use, or maintenance; actions or modifications by unauthorized third parties or the end user; accidental or willful damage; or normal wear and tear. Making a Claim Claims must be made in Latin America or the Caribbean by contacting the Dell point of sale within the guarantee period. The end user must always supply proof of purchase, indicating name and address of the seller, date of purchase, model and serial number, name and address of the customer, and details of symptoms and configuration at the time of malfunction, including peripherals and software used. Otherwise, Dell may refuse the guarantee claim. Upon diagnosis of a warranted defect, Dell will make arrangements and pay for ground freight and insurance to and from Dell’s repair/replacement center. The end user must ensure that the defective product is available for collection properly packed in original or equally protective packaging together with the details listed above and the return number provided to the end user by Dell. Limitation and Statutory Rights Dell makes no other warranty, guarantee or like statement other than as explicitly stated above, and this Guarantee is given in place of all other guarantees whatsoever, to the fullest extent permitted by law. In the absence of applicable legislation, this Guarantee will be the end user’s sole and exclusive remedy against Dell or any of its affiliates, and neither Dell nor any of its affiliates shall be liable for loss of profit or contracts, or any other indirect or consequential loss arising from negligence, breach of contract, or howsoever. This Guarantee does not impair or affect mandatory statutory rights of the end user against and/or any rights resulting from other contracts concluded by the end user with Dell and/or any other seller. Dell World Trade LP One Dell Way, Round Rock, TX 78682, USA Dell Computadores do Brasil Ltda (CNPJ No. 72.381.189/0001-10) Avenida Industrial Belgraf, 400 92990-000 - Eldorado do Sul – RS - Brasil G0550bk1.book Page 141 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM142 Appendix www.dell.com | support.dell.com Dell Computer de Chile Ltda Coyancura 2283, Piso 3- Of.302, Providencia, Santiago - Chile Dell Computer de Colombia Corporation Carrera 7 #115-33 Oficina 603 Bogota, Colombia Dell Computer de Mexico SA de CV Paseo de la Reforma 2620 - 11° Piso Col. Lomas Altas 11950 México, D.F. G0550bk1.book Page 142 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMAppendix 143 Intel® Warranty Statement for Pentium® and Celeron® Processors Only (U.S. and Canada Only) Intel’s Three Year Limited Warranty Limited Warranty Intel warrants that its family of Pentium® and Celeron® processors, if properly used and installed, will be free from defects in materials and workmanship and will substantially conform to Intel’s publicly available specifications for a period of three (3) years after the date the Pentium or Celeron processor was purchased (whether purchased separately or as part of a computer system). If the Pentium or Celeron processor, which is the subject of this Limited Warranty, fails during the warranty period for reasons covered by this Limited Warranty, Intel, at its option, will: • REPAIR the Pentium or Celeron processor by means of hardware and/or software; OR • REPLACE the Pentium or Celeron processor with another Pentium or Celeron processor; OR if Intel is unable to repair or replace the particular Pentium or Celeron processor, • REFUND the then-current value of the Pentium or Celeron processor. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY, AND ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES THAT MAY EXIST UNDER STATE LAW, APPLY ONLY TO THE ORIGINAL PURCHASER OF THE PENTIUM OR CELERON PROCESSOR, OR PENTIUM OR CELERON PROCESSOR-BASED COMPUTER AND LAST ONLY FOR AS LONG AS SUCH PURCHASER CONTINUES TO OWN THE PROCESSOR. Extent of Limited Warranty Intel does not warrant that your Pentium or Celeron processor will be free from design defects or errors known as "errata." Current characterized errata are available upon request. This limited warranty is for purchasers in the United States and Canada only. The limited warranty does not cover any costs relating to removal or replacement of any Pentium or Celeron processors that are soldered or otherwise permanently affixed to your system’s motherboard. This limited warranty does not cover damages due to external causes, including accident, problems with electrical power, usage not in accordance with product instructions, misuse, neglect, alteration, repair, improper installation, or improper testing. How to Obtain Warranty Service To obtain warranty service for your Pentium or Celeron processor, you may contact your computer system manufacturer in accordance with its instructions, or you may contact Intel. To request warranty service from Intel, you should call Intel at 1-800-628-8686 during the warranty period during normal business hours (Pacific Time), excluding holidays. Please be prepared to provide: (1) your name, address, and telephone numbers; (2) proof of purchase; (3) this Intel warranty card; (4) a description of the computer system including the brand and model; and (5) an explanation of the problem. [Note: The Customer Service Representative may need additional information from you depending on the nature of the problem.] The replacement processor is warranted under this written warranty and is subject to the same limitations and exclusions for the remainder of the original warranty period or one (1) year, whichever is longer. WARRANTY LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS THESE WARRANTIES REPLACE ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. INTEL MAKES NO EXPRESS WARRANTIES BEYOND THOSE STATED HERE. INTEL DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. SOME LAWS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES SO THIS LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IF THESE LAWS APPLY, THEN ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD. NO WARRANTIES APPLY AFTER THAT PERIOD. SOME LAWS DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO THIS LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY INTEL’S RESPONSIBILITY UNDER THIS, OR ANY OTHER WARRANTY, IMPLIED OR EXPRESS, IS LIMITED TO REPAIR, REPLACEMENT OR REFUND, AS SET FORTH ABOVE. THESE REMEDIES ARE THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES FOR ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY. INTEL IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY OR UNDER ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOST PROFITS, DOWNTIME, GOODWILL, DAMAGE TO OR REPLACEMENT OF EQUIPMENT AND PROPERTY, AND ANY COSTS OF RECOVERING, REPROGRAMMING, OR REPRODUCING ANY PROGRAM OR DATA STORED IN OR USED WITH A SYSTEM CONTAINING YOUR PENTIUM PROCESSOR. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. THE LIMITED WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS THAT VARY FROM JURISDICTION TO JURISDICTION. G0550bk1.book Page 143 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM144 Appendix www.dell.com | support.dell.com Intel Pentium® and Celeron® Processors are backed by a three-year limited warranty. Please refer to the reverse side of this card for complete warranty details. Intel’s Commitment to Quality Intel is committed to producing the highest quality processors available. That’s why we have hundreds of people dedicated to continuously improve our design, manufacturing, and testing technology. We put every one of our Pentium® and Celeron® processors through a rigorous battery of tests during the design and manufacturing processes. To verify that the new chip will correctly run the software written for Intel Architecture processors, a team of Intel engineers is dedicated to compatibility testing. In a state-of-art lab, this group runs an extensive set of operating systems, applications, network tests and stress tests repeatedly to ensure that the processor is compatible with representative software. Just as importantly, we work with hardware and software companies in the computer industry to ensure that our processors are compatible with their products. Additionally, a sampling of Intel processors are subjected to a rigorous "burn-in" test whereby the chip is operated at higher-than-normal temperatures and voltages. During this burn-in period, the processor experiences the equivalent of weeks of normal usage. These units are monitored for failures as part of our ongoing quality assurance process. As a result, today’s microprocessors from Intel are among the most reliable components in computers. What are "Errata"? Exhaustive product testing can highlight differences between the actual behavior of the microprocessor and its specifications. Sometimes the discrepancies are caused by a design defect or error, which we call errata. Rigorous validation identifies most errata during the development of the processor, but we do detect additional errata during the life cycle of a microprocessor. When an erratum is identified, our engineers work to characterize it and find a solution. We work with system designers and software developers to ensure that the discrepancy does not affect their products. If necessary, special software or hardware solutions (sometimes known as "work arounds") are implemented in the system design to prevent computer users from encountering the problem. Errata may then be corrected in future revisions of the microprocessor. No microprocessor is perfect, and Intel recognizes that some consumers want to know about any errata, whether or not the errata affect them. Intel makes documentation of all characterized Pentium and Celeron processor errata publicly available through our Technical Documentation Service. At Intel, our goal is to make every computer user satisfied with his or her Pentium or Celeron processor. Should you have any questions, comments or concerns about your Intel microprocessor, please call us at 1-800-628-8686. ©1997, 1998 Intel Corporation. All rights reserved. G0550bk1.book Page 144 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMIndex 145 Index A AGP cards, 93 installing, 94 removing, 93 audio. See sound B battery problems, 38 replacing, 115 BIOS clearing passwords, 127 settings, 124 C cards AGP, 93 PCI, 89 slots, 79 CD drive installing, 103 problems, 40 removing, 102 CD-RW drive problems, 40 Check Disk, 41 computer crashes, 45-46 restore to previous state, 69 stops responding, 45 conflicts software and hardware incompatibilities, 71 connectors headphone, 77 IEEE 1394, 77 keyboard, 80 mouse, 80 network, 79 parallel, 80 power, 78 serial, 80 sound, 79 USB, 77, 80 video, 78-79 copying CDs general information, 27 helpful tips, 28 how to copy a CD, 29 cover closing, 117 cover release latch, 78 opening, 82 D Dell support policy, 128 support website, 10, 47 Dell Diagnostics, 64 Dell Dimension Help file accessing, 38 diagnostic lights, 60 diagnostics Dell, 64 lights, 60 display. See monitor documentation, 9 Dell Dimension Help file, 11 finding, 9 online, 10 Owner’s Manual, 10 setup diagram, 10 doors drive door, removing, 112 drive door, replacing, 114 front panel, 76 opening, 20 drive door removing, 112 replacing, 114 drivers, 67 about, 67 identifying, 68 G0550bk1.book Page 145 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM146 Index 146 Index drives CD drive, installing, 103 CD drive, removing, 102 doors, 76 DVD drive, installing, 103 DVD drive, removing, 102 floppy drive, installing, 101 floppy drive, removing, 100 hard drive, installing, 97 hard drive, removing, 96 overview, 95 problems, 39 DVD drive installing, 103 problems, 41 removing, 102 E electrostatic discharge See ESD, 17 e-mail problems, 42 error messages, 44 diagnostic lights, 60 ESD protecting computer from, 17 F Files and Settings Transfer Wizard, 25 floppy drive installing, 101 problems, 39 removing, 100 front panel removing, 110 replacing, 111 H hard drive activity light, 76 installing, 97 problems, 41 removing, 96 hardware conflicts, 71 Dell Diagnostics, 64 problems, 47 Hardware Troubleshooter, 71 headphone connector, 77 Help and Support Center, 11 help file, 11 accessing, 38 Hyper-Threading, 32 I IEEE 1394 connector, 77 problems, 48 Internet problems, 42 IRQ conflicts, 71 K keyboard connector, 80 problems, 49 L labels Microsoft Windows, 12 service tag, 12 lights back of computer, 60 diagnostic, 60 hard-drive activity, 76 M memory installation guidelines, 87 installing, 87 overview, 86 messages error, 44 microprocessor installing, 107 removing, 109 microprocessor airflow shroud installing, 106 removing, 105 Microsoft Windows label, 12 modem problems, 42 G0550bk1.book Page 146 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PMIndex 147 monitor blank, 57 connecting a television, 20 connecting two, 20 hard to read, 58 problems, 57 mouse connector, 80 N network connector, 79 Network Setup Wizard, 30 problems, 51 Network Setup Wizard, 30 O Operating System CD, 11 operating system reinstalling Windows XP, 72 overclocking, 33 P padlock ring, 78 passwords clearing, 127 PCI cards, 89 installing, 89 removing, 92 performance chipset, 32 Hyper-Threading, 32 Intel® Performance Acceleration Technology, 32 memory and front side bus, 32 overclocking, 33 Performance Acceleration Technology, 32 power button, 76 connector, 78 problems, 51 turning off your computer, 30 power light conditions, 51 printer problems, 53 problems battery, 38 blue screen, 46 CD drive, 40 CD-RW drive, 40 computer crashes, 45-46 computer stops responding, 45 conflicts, 71 Dell Diagnostics, 64 diagnostic lights, 60 drives, 39 DVD drive, 41 e-mail, 42 error messages, 44 finding solutions, 36 floppy drive, 39 general, 45 hard drive, 41 hardware, 47 problems (continued) IEEE 1394, 48 Internet, 42 keyboard, 49 modem, 42 monitor hard to read, 58 monitor is blank, 57 network, 51 other, 47 power, 51 power light conditions, 51 printer, 53 program crashes, 45 program stops responding, 45 programs and Windows compatibility, 46 restore to previous state, 69 scanner, 54 screen hard to read, 58 screen is blank, 57 software, 45-46 sound and speakers, 55 troubleshooting chart, 36 video and monitor, 57 volume adjusting, 55 Program Compatibility Wizard, 46 R regulatory notices, 132 reinstalling Windows XP, 72 ResourceCD, 69 Dell Diagnostics, 64 Roxio copying CDs, 27 G0550bk1.book Page 147 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM148 Index 148 Index S safety instructions, 13 scanner problems, 54 screen. See monitor security cable slot, 78 serial connectors, 80 service tag, 12 settings BIOS, 124 setup diagram, 10 shutting down your computer, 30 software conflicts, 71 Hyper-Threading, 32 problems, 45-46 sound connectors, 79 problems, 55 volume, 55 speaker problems, 55 volume, 55 specifications, 120 support Dell, 129 phone numbers, 129 policy, 128 resources, 9 websites, 129 system board components, 85 System Restore, 69 system setup program, 124 clearing passwords, 127 T technical specifications, 120 technical support policy, 128 television connecting to your computer, 20 transferring information to a new computer, 25 troubleshooting conflicts, 71 Dell Diagnostics, 64 diagnostic lights, 60 Hardware Troubleshooter, 71 Help and Support Center, 11 restore to previous state, 69 Solving Problems, 35 turning off your computer, 30 U USB connectors, 77, 80 V video connector, 78-79 problems, 57 volume adjusting, 55 W warranty, 132 Windows XP Device Driver Rollback, 68 Files and Settings Transfer Wizard, 25 Hardware Troubleshooter, 71 Help and Support Center, 11 help, accessing, 38 Hyper-Threading, 32 Network Setup Wizard, 30 Program Compatibility Wizard, 46 reinstalling, 72 scanner, 55 System Restore, 69 wizards Files and Settings Transfer Wizard, 25 Network Setup Wizard, 30 Program Compatibility Wizard, 46 G0550bk1.book Page 148 Thursday, July 10, 2003 1:55 PM Connect one monitor. If your monitor has a DVI connector, plug it into the DVI connector (white) on the computer. If your monitor has a VGA connector, plug it into the VGA connector (blue) on the computer. If your monitor has both a DVI and a VGA connector, plug only the DVI connector into the computer. Connectez un moniteur. Si votre moniteur est équipé d'un connecteur DVI, reliez-le au connecteur DVI de l'ordinateur. Si votre moniteur est équipé d'un connecteur VGA, reliez-le au connecteur VGA de l'ordinateur. Si votre moniteur est équipé à la fois d'un connecteur DVI et d'un connecteur VGA, reliez uniquement le connecteur DVI à l'ordinateur. Schließen Sie einen Monitor an. Wenn Ihr Monitor über einen DVI-Anschluss verfügt, verbinden Sie diesen mit dem (weißen) DVI-Anschluss des Computers. Wenn Ihr Monitor über einen VGA-Anschluss verfügt, verbinden Sie ihn mit dem (blauen) VGA-Anschluss des Computers. Verfügt Ihr Monitor sowohl über einen DVI- als auch über einen VGA-Anschluss verfügt, verbinden Sie nur den DVI-Anschluss mit dem Computer. Connect the computer and monitor to electrical outlets. Raccordez l'ordinateur et le moniteur à des prises électriques. Schließen Sie den Computer und den Monitor an Steckdosen an. Turn on the computer and monitor. Allumez l'ordinateur et le moniteur. Schalten Sie den Computer und den Monitor ein. www.dell.com | support.dell.com 1 3 4 5 6 If you have a network device, connect a network cable (not included) to the network connector. Si vous disposez d'un périphérique réseau, raccordez un câble réseau (non fourni) au connecteur réseau. Wenn Sie über ein Netzwerkgerät verfügen, verbinden Sie das Netzwerkkabel (nicht im Lieferumfang enthalten) mit dem Netzwerkanschluss. If you have a modem, connect a telephone cable to either of the modem connectors. Do not connect the telephone cable to the network connector. Si vous disposez d'un modem, raccordez le câble téléphonique à l'un des connecteurs du modem. Ne raccordez pas le câble téléphonique au connecteur réseau. Wenn Sie ein Modem besitzen, schließen Sie an einem der Modemanschlüsse ein Telefonkabel an. Verbinden Sie das Telefonkabel nicht mit dem Netzwerkanschluss. NOTE: Not all modems have two connectors. REMARQUE : Tous les modems ne sont pas équipés de deux connecteurs. HINWEIS: Nicht alle Modems haben zwei Anschlüsse. Set Up Your Computer First A - Configurer l'ordinateur | Den Computer zuerst einrichten CAUTION: Before you set up and operate your Dell™ computer, read and follow the safety instructions in your Product Information Guide. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de configurer et d'utiliser votre ordinateur Dell™, lisez attentivement les instructions dans le Guide d'information sur le produit. WARNUNG: Bevor Sie den Computer von Dell™ einrichten und in Betrieb nehmen, lesen und befolgen Sie unbedingt die Sicherheitshinweise im Produktinformationshandbuch. 2 NOTE: If you purchased a Dell TV and would like to use it as your monitor, see the setup instructions that came with the TV. REMARQUE : Si vous avez acheté un téléviseur Dell et souhaitez l'utiliser en tant que moniteur, reportez-vous aux instructions d'installation fournies avec votre téléviseur. HINWEIS: Wenn Sie ein Fernsehgerät von Dell erworben haben und es als Monitor verwenden möchten, finden Sie entsprechende Informationen in den mit dem Fernsehgerät gelieferten Setup-Anweisungen. NOTE: If you ordered the Microsoft® Windows® XP Media Center Edition operating system, connect the components as described in the Media Center setup instructions that came with your computer. REMARQUE : Si vous avez commandé le système d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows® XP Édition Media Center, connectez les composants conformément aux instructions d'installation Media Center accompagnant votre ordinateur. HINWEIS: Wenn Sie das Betriebssystem Microsoft® Windows® XP Media Center Edition bestellt haben, schließen Sie die Komponenten wie in den Media CenterSetup-Anweisungen beschrieben an, die im Lieferumfang des Computers enthalten sind. Connect a keyboard and a mouse. Connectez un clavier et une souris. Schließen Sie eine Tastatur und eine Maus an. PS/2 USBInformation in this document is subject to change without notice. © 2005 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. Reproduction in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden. Dell and the DELL logo are trademarks of Dell Inc.; Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Dell disclaims proprietary interest in the marks and names of others. March 2005 Les informations contenues dans ce document sont sujettes à modification sans préavis. © 2005 Dell Inc. Tous droits réservés. Toute reproduction sous quelque forme que ce soit sans l'autorisation écrite de Dell Inc. est strictement interdite. Dell et le logo DELL sont des marques de Dell Inc. ; Microsoft et Windows sont des marques déposées de Microsoft Corporation. Dell dénie tout intérêt propriétaire aux marques et aux noms commerciaux autres que les siens. Mars 2005 Irrtümer und technische Änderungen vorbehalten. © 2005 Dell Inc. Alle Rechte vorbehalten. Nachdrucke jeglicher Art ohne die vorherige schriftliche Genehmigung von Dell Inc. sind strengstens untersagt. Dell und das DELL-Logo sind Marken von Dell Inc.; Microsoft und Windows sind eingetragene Marken der Microsoft Corporation. Dell verzichtet auf alle Besitzrechte an Marken und Handelsbezeichnungen, die nicht ihr Eigentum sind. März 2005 See your Owner’s Manual for additional setup instructions, including how to connect a printer. Support and educational tools are available on the Dell Support website at support.dell.com. For additional information about your computer, click the Start button and click Help and Support. For help with the Windows operating system, click Microsoft Windows XP Tips. Reportez-vous au Manuel du propriétaire pour obtenir plus d'instructions sur l'installation, notamment pour savoir comment connecter une imprimante. Des outils de formations et d'assistance sont disponibles sur le site de support technique de Dell à l'adresse support.dell.com. Pour plus d'informations sur votre ordinateur, cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Help and Support (Aide et support). Pour obtenir de l'aide sur le système d'exploitation Windows, cliquez sur Microsoft Windows XP Tips (Conseils sur Microsoft Windows XP). Weitere Setup-Anweisungen, z. B. für das Anschließen eines Druckers, finden Sie im Benutzerhandbuch. Supportinformationen und Lernprogramme stehen auf der Support-Website von Dell unter support.dell.com zur Verfügung. Weitere Informationen zum Computer erhalten Sie, wenn Sie auf die Schaltfläche Start und anschließend aufHelp and Support (Hilfe und Support) klicken. Um Hilfe zum Windows-Betriebssystem zu erhalten, klicken Sie auf Microsoft Windows XP Tips (Microsoft Windows XP-Tipps). Help and Support Aide et support | Hilfe und Support Connect other devices according to their documentation. Branchez les autres périphériques en suivant les instructions fournies dans leur documentation. Schließen Sie andere Geräte laut ihrer Dokumentation an. microphone connector connecteur de microphone Mikrofonanschluss speaker connectors connecteurs de haut-parleurs Lautsprecheranschlüsse IEEE 1394 connector connecteur IEEE 1394 IEEE 1394-Anschluss Set Up Other Devices Last B - Configurer les autres périphériques | Andere Geräte zuletzt einrichten USB 2.0 connectors (2) connecteurs USB 2.0 (2) USB 2.0-Anschlüsse (2) headphone connector connecteur du casque Kopfhöreranschluss USB 2.0 connectors (5) connecteurs USB 2.0 (5) USB 2.0-Anschlüsse (5) Printed in Ireland. Imprimé en Irlande. Gedruckt in Irland. Upgrading Your Dell™ PowerVault™ MD3000i From Simplex to Duplex Mode The Dell PowerVault MD3000i RAID enclosure supports both duplex (dual-controller) and simplex (single-controller) configurations. A duplex configuration allows for full redundancy between RAID controller modules, non-I/O components, virtual disk paths, and physical disk paths. A simplex configuration offers no redundancy between RAID controller modules or physical disk paths. Figure 1 illustrates both types of configuration. Figure 1. Simplex vs. Duplex MD3000i RAID Storage Array (With Expansion) This document describes the steps used to upgrade your storage array from a simplex configuration to a duplex configuration without taking the existing storage array offline. slot 0 Duplex MD3000i Storage Array slot 1 slot 0 slot 1 Simplex MD3000i Storage Array expansion enclosures (2) July 2007Adding a RAID Controller Module to a Simplex Configuration To upgrade your existing simplex storage array to a duplex storage array, perform the following steps: 1 Start MD Storage Manager. 2 Choose the storage array you are upgrading and click the Support tab. 3 Select Download Firmware. • If both the RAID controller module firmware and NVSRAM need to be applied, select Download RAID Controller Module Firmware. Select the Transfer NVSRAM file with RAID controller module firmware box and use Select File to navigate to the most recent version of the duplex NVSRAM firmware you downloaded from support.dell.com. • If only the RAID controller module NVSRAM needs to be applied, select Download RAID Controller Module NVSRAM and use Select File to navigate to the most recent version of the duplex NVSRAM file you downloaded from support.dell.com. 4 From the command line of the management station you use to manage the storage array, change the array mode from simplex to duplex (where IP_address is the management port address of RAID controller 0): NOTE: The SMcli command is installed under the client directory of the path you selected during installation of management station software for MD Storage Manager. SMcli IP_address -c “set storageArray redundancyMode=duplex;” NOTE: When the SMcli command completes, the array status changes to Needs Attention and the enclosure status LED lights amber. Disregard these indicators and proceed with the next step. 5 Insert the second (new or replacement) RAID controller module in the empty slot (slot 1) of the RAID enclosure. For proper insertion procedures and slot labeling, see the Dell™ PowerVault™ MD 3000i Hardware Owner’s Manual.6 Connect the expansion enclosures (if present) to the RAID controller module you added in slot 1, as shown in Figure 2. NOTE: Wait for the enclosure status LED to turn blue before proceeding to the next step. 7 In MD Storage Manager, click the Tools tab (for the storage array you are upgrading). 8 Select Configure Ethernet Management Ports, then select Controller 1, Port 1 in the Ethernet port menu. 9 Select Specify configuration. 10 Set the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway for Controller 1, Port 1. 11 Click New to add a new storage array. 12 In the Add New Storage Array window, select Manual and then click OK. The Add New Storage Array – Manual window opens. 13 Select Out-of-band management. 14 In the RAID Controller Module (host name or IP address) fields, enter the IP addresses of both the RAID controllers now in your storage enclosure. Click Add. When asked if you would like to add another storage array, click No. 15 Adjust the virtual disk caching options (in each example below, the IP_address is the management port address of RAID controller 0): a Display a list of all virtual disks: SMcli IP_address -c “show allVirtualDisks;” b For each virtual disk name shown, run the following command: SMcli IP_address -c “set virtualDisk[virtual_disk_name] mirrorCacheEnabled=true writeCacheEnabled=true readCacheEnabled=true;”Figure 2. Newly Upgraded MD3000i with Second RAID Controller Added (With Expansion) NOTE: Refer to the documentation on the MD3000i Resource CD for information on virtual disk load balancing and completing the iSCSI configuration. ____________________ Information in this document is subject to change without notice. © 2007 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in the U.S.A. Reproduction in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden. Trademarks used in this text: Dell, the DELL logo, and PowerVault are trademarks of Dell Inc. Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own. MD3000i Storage Array (upgraded to duplex configuration) expansion enclosures (2)将 Dell™ PowerVault™ MD3000i 从单工模式升级到双工模式 Dell PowerVault MD3000i RAID 硬盘柜支持双工(双控制器)和单工 (单控制器)两种配置。 双工 配置允许 RAID 控制器模块、非 I/O 组件、虚拟磁盘路径和物理磁盘路 径之间的完全冗余. 单工配置不提供 RAID 控制器模块或物理磁盘路径之间 的冗余。 图 1 说明了两种类型的配置。 图 1. 单工与双工 MD3000i RAID 存储阵列 (带扩充) 本说明文件说明用于将存储阵列从单工配置升级到双工配置而无需让现有存 储阵列脱机的步骤。 插槽 0 双工 MD3000i 存储阵列 插槽 1 插槽 0 插槽 1 单工 MD3000i 存储阵列 扩充硬盘柜 (2) 2007 年 7 月将 RAID 控制器模块添加到单工配置 要将现有单工存储阵列升级到双工存储阵列,请执行以下步骤: 1 启动 MD Storage Manager。 2 选择要升级的存储阵列并单击 Support (支持)选项卡。 3 选择 Download Firmware (下载固件)。 • 如果需要应用 RAID 控制器模块固件和 NVSRAM,则选择 Download RAID Controller Module Firmware(下载 RAID 控制器 模块固件)。选中Transfer NVSRAM file with RAID controller module firmware(使用 RAID 控制器模块固件传输 NVSRAM 文件)方框并使用 Select File (选择文件)导航到从 support.dell.com 下载的最新版本的双工 NVSRAM 固件。 • 如果只需要应用 RAID 控制器模块 NVSRAM,则选择 Download RAID Controller Module NVSRAM(下载 RAID 控制器模块 NVSRAM)并使用 Select File (选择文件)导航到从 support.dell.com 下载的最新版本的双工 NVSRAM 文件。 4 从用于管理存储阵列的管理站的命令行,将阵列模式从单工更改为双工 (其中 IP_address是 RAID 控制器 0 的管理端口地址): 注:SMcli命令安装在安装 MD Storage Manager 的管理站软件过程中选 择的客户机目录路径下。 SMcli IP_address -c “set storageArray redundancyMode=duplex;” 注:当SMcli命令完成后,阵列状态更改为Needs Attention (需要注意)并且硬盘柜状态 LED 亮起为琥珀色。不必理会这 些指示灯,继续进行下一步。 5 在 RAID 硬盘柜的空插槽(插槽 1)中插入另一个(新的或更换的) RAID 控制器模块.有关正确的插入步骤和插槽标记,请参阅 Dell™ PowerVault™ MD 3000i Hardware Owner’s Manual (Dell PowerVault MD 3000i 硬件用户手册)。 6 将扩充硬盘柜 (如果有)与您在插槽 1 中添加的 RAID 控制器模块相 连,如 中所示 图 2 。 注:等待硬盘柜状态 LED 变为蓝色后继续下一步。 7 在 MD Storage Manager 中,单击 (要升级的存储阵列的) Tools (工具)选项卡。8 选择 Configure Ethernet Management Ports (配置以太网管理端口), 然后在 Ethernet port (以太网端口)菜单中选择Controller 1, Port 1 (控制器 1、端口 1)。 9 选择 Specify configuration (指定配置)。 10 设置控制器 1、端口 1 的 IP 地址、子网掩码和网关。 11 单击 New(新建)添加一个新的存储阵列。 12 在 Add New Storage Array (添加新存储阵列)窗口,选择 Manual (手动)然后单击 OK(确定)。 此时会打开 Add New Storage Array - Manual (添加新存储阵列– 手动)窗口。 13 选择 Out-of-band management (带外管理)。 14 在 RAID Controller Module (host name or IP address) (RAID 控制器模 块 [主机名或 IP 地址] )字段,输入存储设备中现有的两个 RAID 控制 器的 IP 地址。 单击 Add (添加)。 当询问您是否想要添加另一个存储阵列时,单击 No (否)。 15 调整虚拟磁盘高速缓存选项 (在下面的每个示例中, IP_address 是 RAID 控制器 0 的管理端口地址): a 显示所有虚拟磁盘的列表: SMcli IP_address -c “show allVirtualDisks;” b 对于显示的每个虚拟磁盘名称,运行以下命令: SMcli IP_address -c “set virtualDisk[virtual_disk_name] mirrorCacheEnabled=true writeCacheEnabled=true readCacheEnabled=true;”图 2. 添加第二个 RAID 控制器的新升级的 MD3000i (带扩充) 注:请参阅位于 MD3000i Resource CD 上的说明文件,了解有关虚拟磁 盘负载平衡和完成 iSCSI 配置的信息。 ____________________ 本说明文件中的信息如有更改,恕不另行通知。 © 2007 Dell Inc. 版权所有,翻印必究。美国印制。 未经 Dell Inc. 书面许可,严禁以任何形式进行复制。 本文中使用的商标:Dell、 DELL 徽标和 PowerVault是 Dell Inc. 的商标。 本说明文件中述及的其它商标和产品名称是指拥有相应商标和产品名称的公司或其制造的产品。 Dell Inc. 对本公司的商标和产品名称之外的其它商标和产品名称不拥有任何专有权。 MD3000i 存储阵列 (升级到双工配置) 扩充硬盘柜 (2)Mise à niveau d'un système Dell™ PowerVault™ MD3000i en mode simplex vers le mode duplex Le châssis RAID Dell PowerVault MD3000i prend en charge les configurations en duplex (deux contrôleurs) et en simplex (un seul contrôleur). Une configuration en duplex permet de bénéficier d'une redondance totale entre les modules contrôleurs RAID, les composants non impliqués dans les E/S, les chemins des disques virtuels et ceux des disques physiques. Une configuration en simplex n'offre aucune redondance entre les modules contrôleurs RAID ou les chemins des disques physiques. La figure 1 illustre ces deux types de configuration. Figure 1. Baie de stockage RAID MD3000i (avec extension) - Comparaison d'une configuration en simplex et d'une configuration en duplex Ce document décrit les étapes permettant de mettre la baie de stockage à niveau pour passer d'une configuration en simplex à une configuration en duplex, et ce sans mettre la baie de stockage hors ligne. Emplacement 0 Baie de stockage MD3000i en mode duplex Emplacement 1 Emplacement 0 Emplacement 1 Baie de stockage MD3000i en mode simplex Châssis d'extension (2) Juillet 2007Ajout d'un module contrôleur RAID à une configuration en simplex Pour passer d'une configuration en simplex à une configuration en duplex, procédez comme suit : 1 Démarrez MD Storage Manager. 2 Choisissez la baie de stockage à mettre à niveau et cliquez sur l'onglet Support. 3 Sélectionnez Download Firmware (Télécharger le micrologiciel). • Si vous devez mettre à jour à la fois le micrologiciel et la NVSRAM du module contrôleur RAID, sélectionnez Download RAID Controller Module Firmware (Télécharger le micrologiciel du module contrôleur RAID). Cochez la case Transfer NVSRAM file with RAID controller module firmware (Transférer le fichier de NVSRAM en même temps que le micrologiciel du module contrôleur RAID). Utilisez l'option Select File (Sélectionner un fichier) pour naviguer jusqu'à la version la plus récente du micrologiciel de la NVSRAM correspondant au mode duplex, que vous avez téléchargée à partir du site support.dell.com. • Pour télécharger uniquement la NVSRAM du module contrôleur RAID, sélectionnez Download RAID Controller Module NVSRAM (Télécharger la NVSRAM du module contrôleur RAID). Utilisez l'option Select File (Sélectionner un fichier) pour naviguer jusqu'à la version la plus récente du fichier de NVSRAM correspondant au mode duplex, que vous avez téléchargée à partir du site support.dell.com. 4 À partir de la ligne de commande de la station de gestion que vous utilisez pour gérer la baie de stockage, modifiez le mode de fonctionnement de la baie pour passer de la configuration en simplex à la configuration en duplex (adresse_IP est l'adresse du port de gestion du contrôleur RAID 0) : REMARQUE : La commande SMcli est installée dans le répertoire client correspondant au chemin sélectionné lors de l'installation de MD Storage Manager sur la station de gestion. SMcli adresse_IP -c “set storageArray redundancyMode=duplex;” REMARQUE : Une fois l'exécution de la commande SMcli terminée, l'état de la baie passe à Needs Attention (Intervention requise) et le voyant d'état du châssis s'allume en orange. Ne tenez pas compte de ces voyants et passez à l'étape suivante.5 Insérez le second module contrôleur RAID dans l'emplacement 1 (vide) du châssis RAID. Il peut s'agir d'un nouveau module contrôleur RAID ou d'un module de remplacement. Pour obtenir des informations sur les procédures d'insertion appropriées et les numéros d'emplacement, reportez-vous au document Dell™ PowerVault™ MD 3000i Hardware Owner’s Manual (Dell PowerVault MD 3000i - Manuel du propriétaire). 6 Le cas échéant, connectez les châssis d'extension au module contrôleur RAID installé dans le logement 1, comme indiqué figure 2. REMARQUE : Attendez que le voyant d'état du châssis devienne bleu avant de passer à l'étape suivante. 7 Dans MD Storage Manager, cliquez sur l'onglet Tools (Outils) correspondant à la baie de stockage que vous mettez à niveau. 8 Sélectionnez Configure Ethernet Management Ports (Configurer les ports de gestion Ethernet), puis sélectionnez Controller 1, Port 1 (Contrôleur 1, Port 1) dans le menu Ethernet port (Port Ethernet). 9 Sélectionnez Specify configuration (Définir la configuration). 10 Définissez l'adresse IP, le masque de sous-réseau et la passerelle pour le port 1 du contrôleur 1. 11 Cliquez sur New (Nouveau) pour ajouter une nouvelle baie de stockage. 12 Dans la fenêtre Add New Storage Array (Ajouter une nouvelle baie de stockage), sélectionnez Manual (Manuel) et cliquez sur OK. La fenêtre Add New Storage Array - Manual (Ajouter une nouvelle baie de stockage - Mode manuel) s'affiche. 13 Sélectionnez Out-of-band management (Gestion hors bande). 14 Dans les champs RAID Controller Module (host name or IP address) (Module contrôleur RAID [nom d'hôte ou adresse IP]), entrez l'adresse IP de chaque contrôleur RAID maintenant installé dans le châssis de stockage. Cliquez sur Add (Ajouter). Lorsque le système vous demande si vous souhaitez ajouter une autre baie de stockage, cliquez sur No (Non).15 Définissez les options de mise en mémoire cache des disques virtuels. Dans chaque exemple ci-dessous, adresse_IP correspond à l'adresse du port de gestion du contrôleur RAID 0 : a Pour afficher la liste de tous les disques virtuels : SMcli adresse_IP -c “show allVirtualDisks;” b Exécutez la commande suivante pour chaque nom de disque virtuel affiché : SMcli adresse_IP -c “set virtualDisk[nom_disque_virtuel] mirrorCacheEnabled=true writeCacheEnabled=true readCacheEnabled=true;” Figure 2. Système MD3000i mis à niveau via l'ajout d'un second contrôleur RAID (avec extension) REMARQUE : Reportez-vous à la documentation fournie sur le disque “MD3000i Resource CD” pour obtenir des informations sur l'équilibrage de charge des disques virtuels et la finalisation de la configuration iSCSI. ____________________ Les informations contenues dans ce document peuvent être modifiées sans préavis. © 2007 Dell Inc. Tous droits réservés. Imprimé aux U.S.A. La reproduction de ce document de quelque manière que ce soit sans l'autorisation écrite de Dell Inc. est strictement interdite. Marques utilisées dans ce document : Dell, le logo DELL et PowerVault sont des marques de Dell Inc. D'autres marques et noms de marques peuvent être utilisés dans ce document pour faire référence aux entités se réclamant de ces marques et de ces noms ou à leurs produits. Dell Inc. dénie tout intérêt propriétaire vis-à-vis des marques et des noms de marque autres que les siens. Baie de stockage MD3000i (mise à niveau vers une configuration en duplex) Châssis d'extension (2)Erweitern des Speicherarrays Dell™ PowerVault™ MD3000i vom Simplex- auf den Duplexbetrieb Das Dell PowerVault MD3000i RAID-Gehäuse unterstützt sowohl Duplexkonfigurationen (mit zwei Controllern) als auch Simplexkonfigurationen (mit einem Controller). Duplex-Konfigurationen ermöglichen vollständige Redundanz zwischen den RAID-Controllermodulen, den Nicht-E/A-Komponenten sowie den Pfaden für virtuelle Laufwerke und physische Datenträger. Simplex-Konfigurationen ermöglichen keine Redundanz zwischen den RAID-Controllermodulen oder Pfaden für physische Datenträger. Abbildung 1 zeigt beide Konfigurationstypen. Abbildung 1. MD3000i RAID Speicherarray in Simplex- und Duplexkonfiguration (mit Erweiterungsgehäusen) Dieses Dokument beschreibt die Schritte zur Erweiterung des Speicherarrays von der Simplex- zur Duplexkonfiguration. Der Speicherarray braucht bei dieser Vorgehensweise nicht in den Offline-Status versetzt zu werden. Steckplatz 0 Speicherarray MD3000i in Duplexkonfiguration Steckplatz 1 Steckplatz 0 Steckplatz 1 Speicherarray MD3000i in Simplexkonfiguration Erweiterungsgehäuse (2) Juli 2007Hinzufügen eines RAID-Controllermoduls zu einer Simplexkonfiguration So erweitern Sie einen vorhandenen Simplex-Speicherarray zu einem DuplexSpeicherarray: 1 Starten Sie MD Storage Manager. 2 Wählen Sie den zu erweiternden Speicherarray aus, und klicken Sie auf die Registerkarte Support. 3 Wählen Sie die Option Download Firmware (Firmware herunterladen). • Wenn sowohl die Firmware des RAID-Controllermoduls als auch NVSRAM benötigt werden, wählen Sie die Option Download RAID Controller Module Firmware (Firmware für RAID-Controllermodul herunterladen). Markieren Sie das Kontrollkästchen Transfer NVSRAM file with RAID controller module firmware (NVSRAMDatei mit RAID-Controllermodul-Firmware übertragen), und navigieren Sie mit der Funktion Select File (Datei auswählen) zur aktuellen Version der Duplex-NVSRAM/Firmware, die Sie von support.dell.com heruntergeladen haben. • Wird nur das NVSRAM des RAID-Controllermoduls benötigt, so wählen Sie die Option Download RAID Controller Module NVSRAM (NVSRAM des RAID-Controllermoduls herunterladen). Navigieren Sie anschließend mit der Funktion Select File (Datei auswählen) zur aktuellen Version der Duplex-NVSRAM-Datei, die Sie von support.dell.com heruntergeladen haben. 4 Ändern Sie an der Befehlszeile der Speicherarray-Verwaltungsstation den Arraymodus von Simplex zu Duplex (dabei gilt: IP_Adresse = die Verwaltungsschnittstelle von RAID-Controllermodul 0): ANMERKUNG: Der Befehl SMcli ist im Clientverzeichnis des Pfads installiert, den Sie bei der Installation der Verwaltungsstations-Software für MD Storage Manager installiert haben. SMcli IP_Adresse -c “set storageArray redundancyMode=duplex;” ANMERKUNG: Nachdem der Befehl SMcli ausgeführt wurde, ändert sich der Status des Arrays zu Needs Attention (Eingriff erforderlich), und die LEDAnzeige für den Gehäusestatus blinkt gelb. Ignorieren Sie diese Hinweise, und fahren Sie mit dem nächsten Schritt fort.5 Setzen Sie das zweite (neue oder auszutauschende) RAID-Controllermodul in den leeren Steckplatz (Steckplatz 1) des RAID-Gehäuses ein. Informationen zum richtigen Einsetzen der Module und zu den Steckplatzbezeichnungen finden Sie im Hardware-Benutzerhandbuch für Dell™ PowerVault™ MD 3000i. 6 Schließen Sie ggf. vorhandene Erweiterungsgehäuse an das neu hinzugefügte RAID-Controllermodul in Steckplatz 1 an (siehe Abbildung 2). ANMERKUNG: Fahren Sie erst dann mit dem nächsten Schritt fort, wenn die LED-Anzeige für den Gehäusestatus blau aufleuchtet. 7 Klicken Sie in MD Storage Manager auf die Registerkarte Tools (Extras) (für den Speicherarray, der erweitert wird). 8 Wählen Sie Configure Ethernet Management Ports (EthernetVerwaltungsschnittstellen konfigurieren) und anschließend die Option Controller 1, Port 1 im Menü Ethernet Port (Ethernet-Schnittstelle). 9 Wählen Sie die Option Specify configuration (Konfiguration festlegen). 10 Legen Sie IP-Adresse, Subnetzmaske und Gateway für Controller 1, Schnittstelle 1 fest. 11 Klicken Sie auf New (Neu), um einen neuen Speicherarray hinzuzufügen. 12 Wählen Sie im Fenster Add New Storage Array (Neuen Speicherarray hinzufügen) die Option Manual (Manuell), und klicken Sie dann auf OK. Das Fenster Add New Storage Array – Manual (Neuen Speicherarray hinzufügen – Manuell) wird geöffnet. 13 Wählen Sie den Außenband-Verwaltungsanschluss. 14 Geben Sie in den Feldern RAID Controller Module (host name or IP address) (RAID-Controllermodul – Hostname oder IP-Adresse) die IPAdressen beider RAID-Controllermodule ein, die sich jetzt in Ihrem Speichergehäuse befinden. Klicken Sie auf Hinzufügen. Wenn Sie gefragt werden, ob Sie einen weiteren Speicherarray hinzufügen möchten, klicken Sie auf No (Nein).15 Passen Sie die Cachespeicher-Optionen für virtuelle Laufwerke an (in den nachstehenden Beispielen ist für IP_Adresse immer die Adresse der Verwaltungsschnittstelle des RAID-Controllermoduls 0 anzugeben): a Zeigen Sie eine Liste aller virtuellen Laufwerke an: SMcli IP_Adresse -c “show allVirtualDisks;” b Führen Sie für jeden angezeigten virtuellen Laufwerknamen den folgenden Befehl aus: SMcli IP_Adresse -c “set virtualDisk[virtual_disk_name] mirrorCacheEnabled=true writeCacheEnabled=true readCacheEnabled=true;” Abbildung 2. Erweiterter Speicherarray MD3000i mit neu hinzugefügtem zweitem RAID-Controllermodul (mit Erweiterungsgehäusen) ANMERKUNG: Informationen zum Lastausgleich für virtuelle Laufwerke und zum Fertigstellen der iSCSI-Konfiguration finden Sie in der Dokumentation auf der MD300i-Resource-CD. ____________________ Irrtümer und technische Änderungen vorbehalten. © 2006 Dell Inc. Alle Rechte vorbehalten. Gedruckt in den USA. Nachdrucke jeglicher Art ohne die vorherige schriftliche Genehmigung von Dell Inc. sind strengstens untersagt. Die im Text enthaltenen Marken Dell, das DELL-Logo und PowerVault sind Marken der Dell Computer Corporation. Alle anderen in dieser Dokumentation genannten Marken und Handelsbezeichnungen sind Eigentum der entsprechenden Hersteller und Firmen. Dell Inc. verzichtet auf alle Besitzrechte an Marken und Handelsbezeichnungen, die nicht ihr Eigentum sind. Speicherarray MD3000i (erweitert auf Duplexkonfiguration) Erweiterungsgehäuse (2)Dell™ PowerVault™ MD3000i を一重モードから二重モードに アップグレードする方法 Dell PowerVault MD3000i RAID エンクロージャは、二重構成(デュアルコ ントローラ)と一重構成(シングルコントローラ)の両方をサポートして います。 二重構成を使用すると、RAID コントローラモジュール、非 I/O コンポーネ ント、仮想ディスクのパス、および物理ディスクのパスの間に完全な冗長 性を設定することができます。一重構成では、RAID コントローラモジュー ルまたは物理ディスクパスの間に冗長性はありません。 両方のタイプの構成を図 1 に示します。 図 1 一重と二重の MD3000i RAID ストレージアレイ(拡張構成) 本書では、既存のストレージアレイをオンラインにしたままでストレージ アレイを一重構成から二重構成にアップグレードする手順について説明し ます。 スロット 0 二重の MD3000i ストレージアレイ スロット 1 スロット 0 スロット 1 一重の MD3000i ストレージアレイ 拡張エンクロージャ(2) 2007 年 7 月RAID コントローラモジュールを一重構成に 追加する方法 既存の一重ストレージアレイを二重ストレージアレイにアップグレードす るには、以下の手順を実行します。 1 MD Storage Manager を起動します。 2 アップグレードするストレージアレイを選択し、サポート タブをク リックします。 3 Download Firmware(ファームウェアのダウンロード)を選択します。 • RAID コントローラモジュールのファームウェアと NVSRAM の両方を適用する必要がある場合は、Download RAID Controller Module Firmware(RAID コントローラモジュール ファームウェアのダウンロード)を選択します。Transfer NVSRAM file with RAID controller module firmware (RAID コントローラモジュールのファームウェアと共に NVSRAM ファイルを転送する)ボックスを選択し、Select File(ファイル の選択)を使用して、support.dell.com からダウンロードした 二重 NVSRAM ファームウェアの最新バージョンに移動します。 • RAID コントローラモジュールの NVSRAM のみを適用すればよい 場合は、Download RAID Controller Module NVSRAM (RAID コントローラモジュール NVSRAM のダウンロード) を選択し、Select File(ファイルの選択)を使用して、 support.dell.com からダウンロードした二重 NVSRAM ファイル の最新バージョンに移動します。 4 ストレージアレイの管理に使用する Management Station のコマンド ラインで次のように入力して、アレイモードを一重から二重に変更し ます(IP アドレス は、RAID コントローラ 0 の管理ポートアドレスです)。 メモ:SMcli コマンドは、MD Storage Manager 用の Management Station ソフトウェアのインストール中に選択したパスのクライアン トディレクトリの下にインストールされています。 SMcli IP アドレス -c "set storageArray redundancyMode=duplex;" メモ:SMcli コマンドが完了すると、アレイのステータスはNeeds Attention(要注意)に変わり、エンクロージャステータス LED が黄 色に点灯します。これらのインジケータを無視して次の手順に進み ます。5 RAID エンクロージャの空きスロット(スロット 1)に 2 台目の (新しいまたは交換用の)RAID コントローラモジュールを挿入します。 正しい挿入の手順とスロットのラベル表示については、Dell™ PowerVault™ MD 3000i の『ハードウェアオーナーズマニュアル』 を参照してください。 6 拡張エンクロージャがある場合は、スロット 1 に追加した RAID コン トローラモジュールに接続します( を参照)図 2。 メモ:エンクロージャステータス LED が青色に変わるのを確認し たら、次の手順に進みます。 7 MD Storage Manager で、(アップグレードするストレージアレイの) Tools(ツール)タブをクリックします。 8 Configure Ethernet Management Ports(イーサネット管理ポー トの設定)を選択し、Ethernet port(イーサネットポート)メ ニューで Controller 1, Port 1を選択します。 9 Specify configuration(構成の指定)を選択します。 10 コントローラ 1、ポート 1 の IP アドレス、サブネットマスク、 およびゲートウェイを設定します。 11 New(新規)をクリックして新しいストレージアレイを追加します。 12 Add New Storage Array(新しいストレージアレイの追加)ウィン ドウで、Manual(手動)を選択し、OK をクリックします。 Add New Storage Array – Manual(新しいストレージアレイの 追加 - 手動)ウィンドウが開きます。 13 Out-of-band management(帯域外管理)を選択します。 14 RAID Controller Module(RAID コントローラモジュール)のホス ト名または IP アドレスのフィールドに、ストレージエンクロージャに 組み込まれた両方の RAID コントローラの IP アドレスを入力します。 Add(追加)をクリックします。 さらに別のストレージアレイを追加するかどうかを尋ねるメッセー ジが表示されたら、No(いいえ)をクリックします。15 次の手順で、仮想ディスクのキャッシュオプションを調整します (下記の各例で、IP アドレス は RAID コントローラ 0 の管理ポートア ドレスです)。 a すべての仮想ディスクのリストを表示します。 SMcli IP アドレス -c "show allVirtualDisks;" b 表示される各仮想ディスク名について、次のコマンドを実行します。 SMcli IP アドレス -c "gset virtualDisk [ 仮想ディスク名 ] mirrorCacheEnabled=true writeCacheEnabled=true readCacheEnabled=true;" 図 2 2 個目の RAID コントローラを追加してアップグレードした MD3000i (拡張構成) メモ:仮想ディスクの負荷分散と iSCSI 構成の完成については、 『MD3000i Resource CD』 に収録されているマニュアルを参照して ください。 ____________________ 本書の内容は予告なく変更されることがあります。 © 2007 すべての著作権は Dell Inc. にあります。Printed in the U.S.A. Dell Inc. の書面による許可のない複製は、いかなる形態においても厳重に禁じられています。 本書に使用されている商標:Dell、DELL ロゴ、および PowerVault は Dell Inc. の商標です。 本書では、必要に応じて上記以外の商標や会社名が使用されている場合がありますが、 それらの商標や会社名は、一切 Dell Inc. に帰属するものではありません。 二重構成にアップグレードした MD3000i ストレージアレイ 拡張エンクロージャ(2)단일모드에서이중모드로 Dell™ PowerVault™ MD3000i 업그레이드 Dell PowerVault MD3000i RAID 인클로저는 이중(듀얼컨트롤러) 및 단일 (단일 컨트롤러) 구성을 모두 지원합니다. 이중구성은 RAID 컨트롤러모듈, 비I/O 구성요소, 가상디스크경로및물리 적 디스크경로 간의 전체 중복을허용합니다. 단일구성은 RAID 컨트롤러 모듈 또는 물리적 디스크경로 간의 중복을 제공하지 않습니다. 그림 1은 구성 종류를 둘 다보여줍니다. 그림 1. 단일대이중 MD3000i RAID 스토리지배열( 확장 ) 본 설명서에서는기존의 스토리지배열을 오프라인으로전환하지 않고 스토 리지 배열을 단일 구성에서이중 구성으로업그레이드하는 데 사용되는 단 계에 대해 설명하고 있습니다. 슬롯 0 이중 MD3000i 스토리지배열 슬롯 1 슬롯 0 슬롯 1 단일 MD3000i 스토리지배열 확장인클로저 (2) 2007 년 7 월단일구성에 RAID 컨트롤러모듈추가 기존의단일스토리지배열을이중스토리지배열로업그레이드하려면다음 단계를수행하십시오. 1 MD 스토리지관리자를시작합니다 . 2 업그레이드할 스토리지 배열을 선택하고Support(지원 ) 탭을 클릭 합니다 . 3 Download Firmware(펌웨어 다운로드 ) 를선택합니다 . • RAID 컨트롤러모듈 펌웨어와 NVSRAM을모두 설치해야할경우 Download RAID Controller Module Firmware (RAID 컨트롤러모 듈 펌웨어다운로드 )를 선택합니다 . Transfer NVSRAM file with RAID controller module firmware (RAID 컨트롤러 모듈 펌웨어로 NVSRAM 파일 송신 ) 상자를선택하고 Select File( 파일 선택)을 사용하여 support.dell.com 에서다운로드한 최신 버전의 이중 NVSRAM 펌웨어로 이동합니다 . • RAID 컨트롤러 모듈 NVSRAM만 설치해야 할 경우 Download RAID Controller Module NVSRAM (RAID 컨트롤러 모듈 NVSRAM 다운로드 )를 선택하고 Select File( 파일 선택)을 사용 하여support.dell.com에서다운로드한최신버전의이중 NVSRAM 파일로이동합니다 . 4 스토리지 배열관리에 사용하는 관리 스테이션의 명령줄에서 배열 모 드를 단일에서 이중으로 변경하십시오(여기서 IP_address는 RAID 컨 트롤러 0 의 관리포트 주소 ). 주 : SMcli명령은 MD스토리지관리자용관리스테이션소프트웨어를 설치하는동안선택한경로의클라이언트디렉토리아래에설치됩 니다 . SMcli IP_address -c "set storageArray redundancyMode=duplex;" 주 : SMcli명령이완료되면배열상태가Needs Attention (주의요망 )으 로변경되고인클로저상태 LED가황색으로깜박입니다. 이표시등을 무시하고다음단계로계속진행합니다 . 5 RAID 인클로저의빈슬롯(슬롯 1) 에두번째(새모듈또는교체모듈) RAID 컨트롤러모듈을 삽입합니다. 올바른 삽입절차및슬롯 표지는 Dell™ PowerVault™ MD 3000i 하드웨어소유자 설명서를참조하십시오 .6 그림 2에 표시된 대로 슬롯 1 에 추가한 RAID 컨트롤러 모듈에 확장인 클로저 (있는 경우 ) 를연결합니다 . 주 : 다음단계로진행하기전에인클로저상태 LED가청색으로바뀔때 까지기다립니다 . 7 MD 스토리지관리자에서Tools(도구) 탭(업그레이드할스토리지배열) 을 클릭합니다 . 8 Configure Ethernet Management Ports (Ethernet 관리 포트 구성) 을 선택한 다음 Controller 1, Port 1(컨트롤러 1, 포트 1)(Ethernet port (Ethernet 포트) 메뉴에 위치)을 선택합니다 . 9 Specify configuration(구성 지정 ) 을선택합니다 . 10 컨트롤러 1, 포트 1에대한 IP 주소 , 서브넷 마스크및 게이트웨이를 설정합니다 . 11 New(새로 만들기 )를 클릭하여새 스토리지 배열을 추가합니다 . 12 Add New Storage Array(새스토리지배열추가) 창에서Manual(수동 ) 을 선택한 다음 OK(확인 )를 클릭합니다. Add New Storage Array – Manual(새 스토리지 배열추가 - 수동) 창이 열립니다 . 13 Out-of-band management( 대역외관리 )를 선택합니다 . 14 RAID Controller Module (host name or IP address)[RAID 컨트롤러모듈 (호스트이름또는 IP 주소)] 필드에서스토리지인클로저의 RAID 컨트 롤러에대한 IP 주소를모두입력합니다. Add(추가 )를 클릭합니다 . 다른 스토리지 배열 추가 여부를 묻는메시지가 나타나면No(아니오 ) 를 클릭합니다 .15 가상디스크캐쉬옵션을조정합니다(아래의예에서IP_address는 RAID 컨트롤러 0 의 관리 포트 주소 ). a 모든가상 디스크의 목록을표시합니다 . SMcli IP_address -c "show allVirtualDisks;" b 표시되는 가상디스크이름마다 다음 명령을 실행합니다 . SMcli IP_address -c "set virtualDisk[virtual_disk_name] mirrorCacheEnabled=true writeCacheEnabled=true readCacheEnabled=true;" 그림 2. 두번째 RAID 컨트롤러가추가되어새로업그레이드된 MD3000i(확장 ) 주 : 가상디스크로드밸런싱및 iSCSI 구성완료에대한내용은 MD3000i Resource CD의설명서를참조하십시오 . ____________________ 이 문서의 정보는 사전 통보없이 변경될 수 있습니다. © 2007 Dell Inc. 저작권 본사 소유. 미국에서 인쇄. Dell Inc.의 서면 승인 없이 어떠한경우에도 무단 복제하는 것을 엄격히 금합니다. 본 설명서에사용된 상표: Dell, DELL 로고 및 PowerVault는 Dell Inc.의 상표입니다. 본 설명서에서특정회사의 표시나제품 이름을 지칭하기 위해기타상표나 상호를사용할 수도있습니다. Dell Inc.는자사가소유하고있는것이외에기타모든등록상표및상표명에 대한어떠한 소유권도 없습니다. MD3000i 스토리지배열 (이중구성으로업그레이드 ) 확장인클로저 (2)Actualización de Dell™ PowerVault™ MD3000i del modo símplex al modo dúplex El alojamiento RAID Dell PowerVault MD3000i admite configuraciones dúplex (dos controladoras) y símplex (una controladora). Una configuración dúplex permite la redundancia completa entre módulos de controladora RAID, componentes que no son de E/S, rutas de discos virtuales y rutas de discos físicos. Una configuración símplex no ofrece redundancia entre módulos de controladora RAID o rutas de discos físicos. En la figura 1 se muestran los dos tipos de configuración. Figura 1. Matriz de almacenamiento RAID MD3000i símplex frente a dúplex (con expansión) En este documento se describen los pasos necesarios para actualizar la matriz de almacenamiento de una configuración símplex a una dúplex sin tener que desconectar la matriz de almacenamiento existente. Ranura 0 Matriz de almacenamiento MD3000i dúplex Ranura 1 Ranura 0 Ranura 1 Matriz de almacenamiento MD3000i símplex Alojamientos de expansión (2) Julio de 2007Adición de un módulo de controladora RAID a una configuración símplex Para actualizar la matriz de almacenamiento símplex existente a una matriz de almacenamiento dúplex, realice los pasos siguientes: 1 Inicie MD Storage Manager. 2 Seleccione la matriz de almacenamiento que quiere actualizar y haga clic en la ficha Support (Configuración). 3 Seleccione Download Firmware (Descargar firmware). • Si se debe aplicar la NVSRAM y el firmware del módulo de controladora RAID, seleccione Download RAID Controller Module Firmware (Descargar firmware del módulo de controladora RAID). Seleccione la casilla Transfer NVSRAM file with RAID controller module firmware (Transferir archivo de NVSRAM con firmware del módulo de controladora RAID) y utilice Select File (Seleccionar archivo) para ir a la versión más reciente del firmware de NVSRAM dúplex que ha descargado desde support.dell.com. • Si sólo se debe aplicar la NVSRAM del módulo de controladora RAID, seleccione Download RAID Controller Module NVSRAM (Descargar NVSRAM de módulo de controladora RAID) y utilice Select File (Seleccionar archivo) para ir a la versión más reciente del archivo de NVSRAM dúplex que ha descargado desde support.dell.com. 4 Desde la línea de comandos de la estación de administración utilizada para administrar la matriz de almacenamiento, cambie el modo de matriz de símplex a dúplex (donde dirección_IP es la dirección del puerto de administración de la controladora RAID 0): NOTA: el comando SMcli se instala en el directorio de cliente de la ruta seleccionada durante la instalación del software de la estación de administración para MD Storage Manager. SMcli dirección_IP -c “set storageArray redundancyMode=duplex;” NOTA: cuando se completa el comando SMcli, el estado de la matriz cambia a Needs Attention (Requiere atención) y el LED de estado del alojamiento se ilumina en ámbar. Pase por alto estos indicadores y continúe con el paso siguiente.5 Inserte el segundo módulo de controladora RAID (nuevo o de repuesto) en la ranura vacía (ranura 1) del alojamiento RAID. Para obtener información sobre el procedimiento correcto de inserción y el etiquetado de ranuras, consulte Dell™ PowerVault™ MD 3000i - Manual del propietario del hardware. 6 Conecte los alojamientos de expansión (si los hay) al módulo de controladora RAID que ha añadido en la ranura 1, tal como se muestra en la figura 2. NOTA: espere a que el LED de estado del alojamiento se ilumine con una luz azul antes de continuar con el paso siguiente. 7 En MD Storage Manager, haga clic en la ficha Tools (Herramientas) para la matriz de almacenamiento que está actualizando. 8 Seleccione Configure Ethernet Management Ports (Configurar puertos de administración Ethernet) y, a continuación, Controller 1, Port 1 (Controladora 1, puerto 1) en el menú Ethernet port (Puerto Ethernet). 9 Seleccione Specify configuration (Especificar configuración). 10 Establezca la dirección IP, la máscara de subred y la puerta de enlace de la controladora 1, puerto 1. 11 Haga clic en New (Nueva) para añadir una nueva matriz de almacenamiento. 12 En la ventana Add New Storage Array (Añadir nueva matriz de almacenamiento), seleccione Manual y, a continuación, haga clic en OK (Aceptar). Se abre la ventana Add New Storage Array – Manual (Añadir nueva matriz de almacenamiento - Manual). 13 Seleccione Out-of-band management (Administración fuera de banda). 14 En los campos RAID Controller Module (host name or IP address) (Módulo de controladora RAID [nombre de host o dirección IP]), introduzca las direcciones IP de las controladoras RAID que se encuentran en el alojamiento para almacenamiento. Haga clic en Add (Añadir). Cuando se le pregunte si desea añadir otra matriz de almacenamiento, haga clic en No.15 Ajuste las opciones de almacenamiento en caché de los discos virtuales (en los ejemplos siguientes, dirección_IP es la dirección del puerto de administración de la controladora RAID 0): a Visualice una lista de todos los discos virtuales: SMcli IP_dirección -c “show allVirtualDisks;” b Para cada nombre de disco virtual mostrado, ejecute el comando siguiente: SMcli IP_dirección -c “set virtualDisk[nombre_disco_virtual] mirrorCacheEnabled=true writeCacheEnabled=true readCacheEnabled=true;” Figura 2. MD3000i recién actualizada con una segunda controladora RAID añadida (con expansión) NOTA: consulte la documentación incluida en el CD de recursos de MD3000i para obtener información sobre el equilibrio de carga de discos virtuales y la finalización de la configuración de iSCSI. ____________________ La información contenida en este documento puede modificarse sin previo aviso. © 2007 Dell Inc. Todos los derechos reservados. Impreso en los EE. UU. Queda estrictamente prohibida la reproducción de este documento en cualquier forma sin la autorización por escrito de Dell Inc. Marcas comerciales utilizadas en este texto: Dell, el logotipo de DELL y PowerVault son marcas comerciales de Dell Inc. Otras marcas y otros nombres comerciales pueden utilizarse en este documento para hacer referencia a las entidades que los poseen o a sus productos. Dell Inc. renuncia a cualquier interés sobre la propiedad de marcas y nombres comerciales que no sean los suyos. Matriz de almacenamiento MD3000i (actualizada a la configuración dúplex) Alojamientos de expansión (2) www.dell.com | support.dell.com Dell™ Inspiron™ 9400/E1705 Manuel du propriétaire Modèle PP05XBRemarques, avis et précautions REMARQUE : Une REMARQUE fournit des informations importantes qui vous aident à mieux utiliser votre ordinateur. AVIS : Un AVIS vous avertit d’un risque de dommage matériel ou de perte de données et vous indique comment éviter le problème. PRÉCAUTION : Une PRÉCAUTION indique un risque potentiel d'endommagement du matériel, de blessure corporelle ou de mort. Abréviations et sigles Pour une liste complète des abréviations et des sigles, reportez-vous à la section «Glossaire» à la page 173. Si vous avez acheté un ordinateur Dell™ Série n, les références du présent document concernant les systèmes d'application Microsoft® Windows® ne sont pas applicables. ____________________ Les informations contenues dans ce document sont sujettes à modification sans préavis. © 2006–2005 Dell Inc. Tous droits réservés. La reproduction de ce document, de quelque manière que ce soit, sans l'autorisation écrite de Dell Inc. est strictement interdite. Marques utilisées dans ce document : Dell, le logo DELL, Inspiron, Dell Precision, Dimension, OptiPlex, Latitude, PowerEdge, PowerConnect, PowerVault, PowerApp, Dell TravelLite, ExpressCharge, Dell MediaDirect, XPS et Strike Zone sont des marques de Dell Inc. ; Intel, Celeron et Pentium sont des marques déposées d'Intel Corporation ; Microsoft, Outlook et Windows sont des marques déposées de Microsoft Corporation ; Bluetooth est une marque déposée appartenant à Bluetooth SIG, Inc. et est utilisée par Dell sous licence ; Mobility est une marque et Radeon est une marque déposée de ATI Technologies Inc. aux États-Unis et dans d'autres pays et est utilisée par Dell sous licence ; EMC est une marque déposée d'EMC Corporation ; ENERGY STAR est une marque déposée de l'Agence pour la protection de l'environnement aux États-Unis. D'autres marques et noms commerciaux peuvent être utilisés dans ce document pour faire référence aux entités se réclamant de ces marques et de ces noms ou à leurs produits. Dell Inc. rejette tout intérêt propriétaire dans les marques et les noms commerciaux autres que les siens. Modèle PP05XB Avril 2006 Réf. ND758 Rév. A01Table des matières 3 Table des matières Recherche d'informations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 1 Présentation de votre ordinateur. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Connaître la configuration de votre ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Vue frontale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Vue du côté gauche . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Vue du côté droit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Vue arrière . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Vue de dessous. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 2 Configuration de votre ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Connexion à Internet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Configuration de votre connexion Internet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Transfert d'informations vers un nouvel ordinateur. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Exécution de l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres avec le CD Operating System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Exécution de l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres sans le CD Operating System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Configuration d'une imprimante. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Câble de l'imprimante. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Connexion d'une imprimante USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Périphériques de protection contre les surtensions électriques. . . . . . . . 34 Parasurtenseurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Filtres de ligne . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Onduleurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Table des matières 3 Utilisation de l'écran . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Réglage de la luminosité . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Basculement de l'image vidéo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Réglage de la résolution d'affichage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 4 Utilisation du clavier et de la tablette tactile. . . . . . . . . . . 39 Pavé numérique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Combinaisons de touches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Fonctions système . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Batterie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Plateau du lecteur de CD ou DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Fonctions d'affichage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Fonction réseau sans fil et technologie sans fil Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . 40 Gestion de l'alimentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Fonctions des haut-parleurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Fonctions de la touche du logo Microsoft® Windows® . . . . . . . . . . 41 Tablette tactile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Personnalisation de la tablette tactile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 5 Utilisation d'une batterie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Performances de la batterie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Vérification de la charge de la batterie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Jauge de batterie Dell™ QuickSet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Jauge de Microsoft® Windows®. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Indicateur de charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Alerte de batterie faible. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Préservation de l'alimentation de la batterie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Modes d'économie d'énergie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Mode Veille . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Configuration des paramètres de gestion de l'alimentation . . . . . . . . . . 47 Chargement de la batterie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Table des matières 5 Remplacement de la batterie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Stockage de la batterie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 6 Fonctions Dell™ QuickSet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 7 Utilisation de CD, DVD et autres supports multimédia . . . . 51 Lecture de CD ou DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Réglage du volume. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Réglage de l'image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Copie de CD et de DVD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Procédure de copie d'un CD ou d'un DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Utilisation de CD et DVD vierges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Conseils pratiques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Utilisation de Dell Media Experience et Dell MediaDirect™ . . . . . . . . . 56 Si l'ordinateur est activé ou en mode Veille . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Si l'ordinateur est hors tension ou en mode Mise en veille prolongée . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Aide de Dell MediaDirect et Dell Media Experience. . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Connexion de votre ordinateur à un téléviseur ou un périphérique audio . . . 57 S-vidéo et audio standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 S-vidéo et audio numérique S/PDIF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Vidéo composite et audio standard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Vidéo composite et audio numérique S/PDIF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Vidéo composante et audio standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Vidéo composante et audio numérique S/PDIF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Configuration du casque Cyberlink (CL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Activation des paramètres d'affichage pour téléviseur sous Microsoft® Windows® XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 8 Utilisation des cartes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Cartes ExpressCard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Caches pour carte ExpressCard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Installation d'une carte ExpressCard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Retrait d'une carte ExpressCard ou d'un cache . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 736 Table des matières Cartes mémoire multimédia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Installation d'une carte mémoire multimédia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Retrait d'une carte mémoire multimédia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 9 Configuration d'un réseau domestique et d'un réseau d'entreprise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Connexion physique à un réseau ou à un modem large bande . . . . . . . . . 77 Assistant Configuration réseau . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Réseau local sans fil (WLAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Éléments requis pour établir une connexion WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Contrôle de votre carte réseau sans fil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Configuration d'un nouveau WLAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Connexion à un réseau local sans fil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Détermination du Gestionnaire de périphériques réseau sans fil . . . . . 81 Fin de la connexion au réseau WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Activation/désactivation de la carte réseau sans fil . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Surveillance de l'état de la carte réseau sans fil via Dell™ QuickSet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Réseau large bande mobile ou étendu sans fil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Éléments nécessaires pour établir une connexion réseau large bande mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Vérification de votre carte large bande mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Connexion à un réseau large bande mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Pare-feu de connexion Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 10 Sécurisation de votre ordinateur. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Verrou du câble de sécurité . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Mots de passe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Logiciel de suivi de l'ordinateur. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 En cas de perte ou de vol de votre ordinateur. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86Table des matières 7 11 Dépannage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Service Dell Technical Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Dell Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Quand utiliser Dell Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Démarrage de Dell Diagnostics à partir du disque dur. . . . . . . . . . . 87 Démarrage de Dell Diagnostics à partir du CD Drivers and Utilities . . . . 88 Menu principal de Dell Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Utilitaire de support de Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Accès à l'utilitaire de support de Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Clic sur l'icône de support de Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Double-clic sur l'icône de support de Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Problèmes liés aux lecteurs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Problèmes liés au lecteur de CD et de DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Si vous ne parvenez pas à éjecter le plateau du lecteur de CD, de CD-RW, de DVD ou de DVD+RW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Si vous entendez un bruit grinçant ou un raclement inhabituel . . . . . . 92 Problèmes liés au disque dur. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Problèmes liés à la messagerie électronique, au modem ou à Internet . . . . 93 Messages d'erreur. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Problèmes liés au périphérique IEEE 1394 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Problèmes liés au clavier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Problèmes liés au clavier externe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Caractères imprévus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Blocages et problèmes logiciels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 L'ordinateur ne démarre pas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 L'ordinateur ne répond plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Un programme ne répond plus ou se bloque régulièrement. . . . . . . 100 Un programme est conçu pour un système d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows® antérieur . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Un écran bleu uni apparaît . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Problèmes liés à Dell MediaDirect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Autres problèmes logiciels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Problèmes liés à la mémoire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Problèmes liés au réseau . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Généralités . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Réseau large bande mobile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1038 Table des matières Problèmes liés aux cartes ExpressCard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Problèmes liés à l'alimentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Garantir une alimentation suffisante à votre ordinateur . . . . . . . . . 105 Problèmes liés à l'imprimante. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Problèmes liés au scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Problèmes liés au son et aux haut-parleurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Aucun son ne sort des haut-parleurs intégrés . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Aucun son ne sort des haut-parleurs externes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Aucun son émis par le casque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Problèmes liés à la tablette tactile ou à la souris . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Problèmes liés à la vidéo et à l'affichage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Si l'écran est vide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Si l'écran est difficile à lire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Si seule une partie de l'écran est lisible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Pilotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Qu'est-ce qu'un pilote ? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Identification des pilotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Réinstallation des pilotes et utilitaires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Résolution des incompatibilités logicielles et matérielles. . . . . . . . . . 112 Restauration du système d'exploitation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Utilisation de la Restauration du système MicrosoftWindows XP. . . . 112 Utilisation de Dell PC Restore de Symantec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Utilisation du CD Operating system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 12 Ajout et remplacement de pièces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Avant de commencer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Outils recommandés . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Mise hors tension de votre ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Disque dur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Retour de votre disque dur à Dell. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Mémoire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Table des matières 9 Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Carte Mini . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Cache de la charnière . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Clavier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Pile bouton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Lecteur optique. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Carte interne dotée de la technologie sans fil Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . 135 13 Voyager avec votre ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Identification de l'ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Emballage de l'ordinateur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Conseils de voyage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Transport aérien . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 14 Caractéristiques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 15 Obtention d'aide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Obtention d'assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Services en ligne . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Service AutoTech . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Service d'état des commandes automatisé . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Service de support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Problèmes liés à votre commande . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Informations sur le produit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Renvoi d'articles pour une réparation sous garantie ou un remboursement sous forme de crédit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Avant d'appeler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14910 Table des matières 16 Annexe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Utilisation du programme de configuration du système . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Visualisation des écrans du programme de configuration du système . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Écran de configuration du système. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Options fréquemment utilisées . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Nettoyage de votre ordinateur. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Ordinateur, clavier et écran. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Tablette tactile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 CD et DVD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Réglementation FCC (États-Unis uniquement) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Classe B de la FCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Caractéristiques Macrovision. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Règle de support technique de Dell (États-Unis uniquement) . . . . . . . . 155 Définition des logiciels et des périphériques installés par Dell . . . . . 156 Définition des logiciels et des périphériques tiers . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 17 Contacter Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Glossaire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185Recherche d'informations 11 Recherche d'informations REMARQUE : Il se peut que certaines fonctionnalités et certains supports soient en option et ne soient pas livrés avec votre ordinateur. Certaines fonctionnalités ne sont pas nécessairement disponibles dans tous les pays. REMARQUE : Il est possible que des informations supplémentaires soient livrées avec votre ordinateur. Que recherchez-vous ? Cherchez ici • Programme de diagnostic pour mon ordinateur • Pilotes pour mon ordinateur • Documentation concernant mon appareil • NSS (Notebook System Software) CD Drivers and Utilities (également appelé CD ResourceCD) REMARQUE : Il se peut que le CD Drivers and Utilities (Pilotes et utilitaires) soit en option et qu'il ne soit pas livré avec votre ordinateur. La documentation et les pilotes sont déjà installés sur l'ordinateur. Vous pouvez utiliser le CD pour installer les pilotes (reportez-vous à la section «Réinstallation manuelle des pilotes» à la page 111) ou pour exécuter Dell Diagnostics (reportez-vous à la section «Dell Diagnostics» à la page 87). Des fichiers Lisez-moi, éventuellement inclus sur votre CD, fournissent des informations sur les modifications techniques apportées en dernière minute à votre système ou des informations de référence destinées aux techniciens ou aux utilisateurs expérimentés. REMARQUE : Les dernières mises à jour des pilotes et de la documentation se trouvent à l'adresse support.dell.com. • Informations sur les garanties • Termes et Conditions (États-Unis uniquement) • Consignes de sécurité • Informations sur les réglementations • Informations relatives à l'ergonomie • Contrat de licence pour utilisateur final Guide d'information sur le produit Dell™12 Recherche d'informations • Comment configurer mon ordinateur Schéma de configuration • Numéro de service et code de service express • Étiquette de licence Microsoft Windows Numéro de service et licence Microsoft® Windows® Ces étiquettes sont situées sur le dessous de votre ordinateur. • Utilisez le numéro de service pour identifier votre ordinateur lorsque vous accédez au site Web support.dell.com ou lorsque vous appelez le service de support technique. • Entrez le code de service express pour orienter votre appel lorsque vous contactez le service de support technique. Que recherchez-vous ? Cherchez iciRecherche d'informations 13 • Solutions — Conseils et astuces de dépannage, articles de techniciens, cours en ligne et questions fréquemment posées • Forum clients — Discussion en ligne avec d'autres clients Dell • Mises à niveau — Informations sur les mises à niveau des composants, comme la mémoire, l'unité de disque dur et le système d'exploitation • Service clientèle — Coordonnées, appels de service et état des commandes, garantie et informations sur les réparations • Service et support — État des appels de service et historique du support, contrat de service, discussions en ligne avec le support technique • Référence — Documentation de l'ordinateur, détails sur la configuration de l'ordinateur, caractéristiques de produit et livres blancs • Téléchargements — Pilotes, correctifs et mises à jour logicielles agréés Site Web de support de Dell — support.dell.com REMARQUE : Sélectionnez votre région pour afficher le site de support approprié. • NSS (Notebook System Software - Logiciel système de portable) — Si vous réinstallez le système d'exploitation de votre ordinateur, vous devez également réinstaller l'utilitaire NSS. NSS fournit des mises à jour essentielles pour le système d'exploitation et la prise en charge des processeurs Intel®, des lecteurs de disquette USB Dell™ de 3,5 pouces, des lecteurs optiques et des périphériques USB. NSS est requis pour le bon fonctionnement de votre ordinateur Dell. Ce logiciel détecte automatiquement votre ordinateur et son système d'exploitation, et installe les mises à jour appropriées à votre configuration. Pour télécharger NSS : 1Rendez-vous sur le site support.dell.com, sélectionnez votre région ou secteur d'activité, puis saisissez votre numéro de service. 2 Sélectionnez Drivers & Downloads (Pilotes et téléchargements), puis cliquez sur Go/OK. 3 Sélectionnez le système d'exploitation, puis recherchez les mots clés Notebook System Software (NSS). REMARQUE : L'aspect de l'interface utilisateur support.dell.com peut varier selon vos sélections. • Mises à niveau du logiciel et conseils de dépannage • Questions les plus fréquemment posées, principales rubriques et état général de votre environnement informatique Utilitaire de support de Dell L'utilitaire de support de Dell est un système de mise à niveau et de notification automatique installé sur votre ordinateur. Il permet de réaliser des balayages en temps réel de l'état de votre environnement informatique et des mises à jour logicielles et fournit des informations de support automatique appropriées. Accédez à l'utilitaire de support de Dell à l'aide de l'icône située dans la barre des tâches. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section «Utilitaire de support de Dell» à la page 90. • Comment utiliser Windows XP • Comment utiliser des programmes et des fichiers • Comment personnaliser mon bureau Centre d'aide et de support de Windows 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Aide et support. 2Tapez un mot ou une expression qui décrit votre problème, puis cliquez sur l'icône en forme de flèche. 3 Cliquez sur la rubrique qui décrit votre problème. 4 Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran. Que recherchez-vous ? Cherchez ici14 Recherche d'informations • Informations sur l'activité réseau, l'Assistant Gestion de l'alimentation, les touches de raccourci et les éléments contrôlés par Dell QuickSet Aide de Dell QuickSet Pour afficher l'aide de Dell QuickSet, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône , dans la barre des tâches de Microsoft® Windows®. Pour plus d'informations sur Dell QuickSet, reportez-vous à la section «Fonctions Dell™ QuickSet» à la page 49. • Comment réinstaller mon système d'exploitation CD Operating System REMARQUE : Le CD Operating System (Système d'exploitation) est en option et n'est pas obligatoirement expédié avec tous les ordinateurs. Le système d'exploitation est déjà installé sur votre ordinateur. Pour réinstaller votre système d'exploitation, procédez de l'une des manières suivantes : • Restauration du système de Microsoft Windows — La Restauration du système de Microsoft Windows restaure un état de fonctionnement antérieur de votre ordinateur sans affecter les fichiers de données. • Dell PC Restore — Dell PC Restore restaure l'état de fonctionnement initial de votre ordinateur. Dell PC Restore peut ne pas être fourni avec tous les ordinateurs. • CD Operating System — Si vous avez reçu le CD Operating System avec votre ordinateur, vous pouvez l'utiliser pour restaurer votre système d'exploitation. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section «Restauration du système d'exploitation» à la page 112. Après la réinstallation de votre système d'exploitation, utilisez le CD Drivers and Utilities (ResourceCD) pour réinstaller les pilotes des périphériques fournis avec l'ordinateur. REMARQUE : Il se peut que le CD Drivers and Utilities (Pilotes et utilitaires) soit en option et qu'il ne soit pas livré avec votre ordinateur. REMARQUE : La couleur de votre CD dépend du système d'exploitation que vous avez commandé. Que recherchez-vous ? Cherchez iciPrésentation de votre ordinateur 15 Présentation de votre ordinateur Connaître la configuration de votre ordinateur Selon vos sélections lors de son achat, votre ordinateur est doté d'une des différentes configurations de contrôleur vidéo. Pour connaître la configuration du contrôleur vidéo de votre ordinateur : 1 Accédez au Centre d'aide et de support de Windows. Pour cela, reportez-vous à la section «Centre d'aide et de support de Windows» à la page 13. 2 Sous Choisissez une tâche, cliquez sur Utiliser les outils pour afficher des informations sur votre ordinateur et diagnostiquer les problèmes. 3 Sous My Computer Information (Informations sur le poste de travail), sélectionnez Hardware (Matériel). L'écran My Computer Information - Hardware (Informations sur le poste de travail - Matériel) contient des informations sur le type de contrôleur vidéo installé sur votre ordinateur, ainsi que sur les autres types de composants matériels. 16 Présentation de votre ordinateur Vue frontale LOQUETS D E L'ÉCRAN — Permet de maintenir l'écran fermé. LOQUET D E FERMETURE D E L'ÉCRAN — Faites-le glisser pour déverrouiller les loquets et ouvrir l'écran. ÉCRAN — Pour plus d'informations sur l'écran, reportez-vous à la section «Utilisation de l'écran» à la page 37. BOUTON D'ALIMENTATION — Appuyez pour mettre l'ordinateur sous tension ou entrer en mode d'économie d'énergie ou en sortir. Pour plus d'informations sur les modes d'économie d'énergie, reportez-vous à la section «Modes d'économie d'énergie» à la page 46. 1 loquets de l'écran (2) 5 voyants d'état de l'appareil 9 boutons de la tablette tactile 2 loquet de fermeture de l'écran 6 tablette tactile 10 clavier 3 écran 7 boutons de commande multimédia 11 bouton Dell MediaDirect 4 bouton d'alimentation 8 haut-parleurs 12 voyants d'état du clavier et du sans fil 2 10 3 6 9 4 8 12 5 7 1 11Présentation de votre ordinateur 17 VOYANTS D'ÉTAT D E L'APPAREIL Si l'ordinateur est branché à une prise secteur, le voyant fonctionne comme suit : • Vert fixe : la batterie est en cours de charge. • Vert clignotant : la batterie est presque complètement chargée. Si l'ordinateur fonctionne sur batterie, le voyant fonctionne comme suit : • Éteint : la batterie est suffisamment chargée (ou l'ordinateur est éteint). • Orange clignotant : le niveau de charge de la batterie est faible. • Orange fixe : le niveau de charge de la batterie est critique. S'allume lorsque vous mettez l'ordinateur sous tension et clignote lorsque l'ordinateur est en mode d'économie d'énergie. S'allume lorsque l'ordinateur lit ou écrit des données. AVIS : Pour éviter de perdre des données, n'éteignez jamais l'ordinateur lorsque le voyant clignote. Reste allumé ou clignote pour indiquer l'état de charge de la batterie.18 Présentation de votre ordinateur TABLETTE TACTILE — Assure les mêmes fonctions que la souris. ZONE D E DÉFILEMENT D E L A TABLETTE TACTILE — Elle offre les mêmes fonctionnalités que le bouton de défilement de la souris. La zone de défilement vertical se trouve sur la partie droite de la tablette tactile. La zone de défilement horizontal se trouve sur la partie inférieure de la tablette tactile. BOUTONS D E COMMANDE MULTIMÉDIA — Contrôlent la lecture des CD, DVD et lecteurs multimédia. HAUT-PARLEURS — Pour régler le volume des haut-parleurs intégrés, appuyez sur les boutons de commande multimédia ou les raccourcis clavier du volume des haut-parleurs. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section «Fonctions des haut-parleurs» à la page 41. BOUTONS D E L A TABLETTE TACTILE — Utilisez la tablette tactile et ses boutons comme s'il s'agissait d'une souris. CLAVIER — Le clavier comporte un pavé numérique et la touche du logo Microsoft Windows. Pour plus d'informations sur les raccourcis clavier pris en charge, reportez-vous à la section «Combinaisons de touches» à la page 40. BOUTON DELL™ MEDIADIRECT™ — Appuyez sur ce bouton pour lancer Dell MediaDirect ou Microsoft® Windows® Media Center Edition. Reportez-vous à la section «Utilisation de Dell Media Experience et Dell MediaDirect™» à la page 56. Met le son en sourdine. Diminue le son. Augmente le son. Lecture ou Pause. Revient à la plage précédente. Passe à la plage suivante. Arrêt. Présentation de votre ordinateur 19 VOYANTS D'ÉTAT D U CLAVIER E T D U SANS FIL Les voyants situés au-dessus du clavier indiquent ce qui suit : S'allume lorsque le pavé numérique est activé. S'allume lorsque la fonction Majuscules est activée. S'allume lorsque la fonction Arrêt défil est activée. S'allume lorsque le réseau sans fil est activé. Pour activer ou désactiver rapidement le réseau sans fil, appuyez sur . S'allume lorsqu'une carte dotée de la technologie sans fil Bluetooth® est activée. REMARQUE : La carte dotée de la technologie sans fil Bluetooth est une fonctionnalité optionnelle, le voyant ne s'allume donc que lorsque vous avez commandé la carte avec votre ordinateur. Pour des informations supplémentaires, reportez-vous à la documentation livrée avec votre carte. Pour ne désactiver que la fonctionnalité sans fil Bluetooth, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône située dans la barre des tâches Windows (coin inférieur droit de l'écran), puis cliquez sur Désactiver radio Bluetooth. Pour activer ou désactiver rapidement tous les périphériques sans fil, appuyez sur . 9 A20 Présentation de votre ordinateur Vue du côté gauche EMPLACEMENT POUR CÂBLE D E SÉCURITÉ — Permet de rattacher à l'ordinateur un dispositif antivol disponible dans le commerce. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section «Verrou du câble de sécurité» à la page 85. Reportez-vous également aux instructions fournies avec l'appareil. AVIS : Avant d'acheter un dispositif antivol, assurez-vous qu'il correspond au type d'emplacement pour câble de sécurité de votre ordinateur. ENTRÉE D'AIR — Un ou plusieurs ventilateurs internes font circuler de l'air à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur, évitant ainsi la surchauffe des composants. PRÉCAUTION : Ne bloquez pas les entrées d'air de l'ordinateur et n'insérez pas d'objets dedans ; évitez également toute accumulation de poussière. Ne placez pas l'ordinateur dans un environnement peu aéré, tel qu'une mallette fermée, lorsque celui-ci fonctionne. Le manque de ventilation risquerait de causer un incendie ou d'endommager l'ordinateur. CONNECTEURS USB — Permettent de connecter des périphériques USB, tels qu'une souris, un clavier ou une imprimante. Vous pouvez également relier le lecteur de disquette optionnel directement à un connecteur USB à l'aide du câble pour lecteur de disquette optionnel. LECTEUR OPTIQUE — Vous pouvez installer des périphériques tels qu'un lecteur de DVD ou un autre lecteur optique dans la baie du lecteur optique. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section «Lecteur optique» à la page 135. BOUTON D'ÉJECTION D U PLATEAU D U LECTEUR OPTIQUE — Appuyez sur ce bouton pour éjecter un CD ou un DVD du lecteur optique. Ce bouton ne fonctionne que lorsque l'ordinateur est sous tension. 1 emplacement pour câble de sécurité 3 connecteurs USB (2) 5 bouton d'éjection du plateau du lecteur optique 2 entrée d'air 4 lecteur optique 1 2 34 5Présentation de votre ordinateur 21 Vue du côté droit UNITÉ D E DISQUE DUR — Stocke les logiciels et les données. LOGEMENT D E CARTE EXPRESSCARD — Accepte une carte ExpressCard, comme un modem ou une carte réseau. Votre ordinateur est livré avec un cache en plastique dans le logement. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section «Cartes ExpressCard» à la page 71. REMARQUE : Le logement de carte ExpressCard ne prend pas en charge les cartes PC. CONNECTEUR IEEE 1394 — Permet de relier des périphériques qui prennent en charge des vitesses de transfert ultra rapides IEEE 1394, par exemple des caméras vidéo numériques. LECTEUR D E CARTE MÉMOIRE MULTIMÉDIA 5 EN 1— Permet de consulter et de partager rapidement et facilement des photos numériques, de la musique et des vidéos enregistrées sur une carte mémoire multimédia. Le lecteur de carte mémoire multimédia 5 en 1 lit les cartes mémoire multimédia numériques suivantes : • Carte Secure Digital (SD)/SDIO • MultiMediaCard (MMC) • Memory Stick • Memory Stick PRO • Carte xD-Picture 1 unité de disque dur 3 connecteur IEEE 1394 5 connecteurs audio (2) 2 logement de la carte ExpressCard 4 lecteur de carte mémoire multimédia 5 en 1 6 entrée d'air 1 2 3 45 622 Présentation de votre ordinateur CONNECTEURS AUDIO ENTRÉE D'AIR — Un ou plusieurs ventilateurs internes font circuler de l'air à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur, évitant ainsi la surchauffe des composants. PRÉCAUTION : Ne bloquez pas les entrées d'air de l'ordinateur et n'insérez pas d'objets dedans ; évitez également toute accumulation de poussière. Ne placez pas l'ordinateur dans un environnement peu aéré, tel qu'une mallette fermée, lorsque celui-ci fonctionne. Le manque de ventilation risquerait de causer un incendie ou d'endommager l'ordinateur. Raccordez un casque ou des haut-parleurs au connecteur . Raccordez un microphone au connecteur .Présentation de votre ordinateur 23 Vue arrière ENTRÉE D'AIR — Un ou plusieurs ventilateurs internes font circuler de l'air à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur, évitant ainsi la surchauffe des composants. PRÉCAUTION : Ne bloquez pas les entrées d'air de l'ordinateur et n'insérez pas d'objets dedans ; évitez également toute accumulation de poussière. Ne placez pas l'ordinateur dans un environnement peu aéré, tel qu'une mallette fermée, lorsque celui-ci fonctionne. Le manque de ventilation risquerait de causer un incendie ou d'endommager l'ordinateur. CONNECTEUR D E SORTIE TV S-VIDÉO 1 entrée d'air 5 connecteurs USB (2) 9 connecteur d'adaptateur secteur 2 connecteur de sortie TV S-vidéo 6 connecteurs USB (2) 10 entrée d'air 3 connecteur réseau (RJ-45) 7 connecteur d'interface vidéo numérique (DVI) 4 connecteur modem (RJ-11) 8 connecteur vidéo (VGA) Permet de relier l'ordinateur à un téléviseur. Permet également de relier des périphériques audio numériques à l'aide d'un câble d'adaptateur audio numérique/TV. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1024 Présentation de votre ordinateur CONNECTEUR RÉSEAU (RJ-45) AVIS : Le connecteur réseau est légèrement plus grand que le connecteur modem. Pour éviter d'endommager l'ordinateur, ne connectez pas de ligne téléphonique au connecteur réseau. CONNECTEUR MODEM (RJ-11) CONNECTEURS USB Permet de relier l'ordinateur à un réseau. Les deux voyants situés en haut du connecteur indiquent l'état de liaison et l'activité des réseaux filaires. Le voyant fixe du connecteur fournit des informations sur l'état de la liaison. Un voyant éteint signifie une absence de liaison, un voyant vert signifie qu'une liaison à 10-Mb/seconde a été détectée, orange indique une liaison à 100-Mb/seconde. Le voyant jaune clignotant du connecteur indique de l'activité sur le réseau filaire. Pour plus d'informations sur l'utilisation de la carte réseau, consultez la documentation fournie avec votre ordinateur, dans le Centre d'aide et de support de Windows. Pour accéder au Centre d'aide et de support, reportez-vous à la section «Centre d'aide et de support de Windows» à la page 13. Pour utiliser le modem interne, connectez la ligne téléphonique au connecteur modem. Pour plus d'informations sur l'utilisation du modem, consultez la documentation fournie avec votre ordinateur, dans le Centre d'aide et de support de Windows. Pour accéder au Centre d'aide et de support, reportez-vous à la section «Centre d'aide et de support de Windows» à la page 13. Permettent de connecter des périphériques USB, tels qu'une souris, un clavier ou une imprimante. Présentation de votre ordinateur 25 CONNECTEUR D'INTERFACE VIDÉO NUMÉRIQUE (DVI) CONNECTEUR VIDÉO CONNECTEUR D'ADAPTATEUR SECTEUR — Sert à relier l'adaptateur secteur à l'ordinateur. Cet adaptateur convertit l'alimentation CA en alimentation CC qui est celle requise par l'ordinateur. Vous pouvez connecter l'adaptateur secteur à votre ordinateur, que ce dernier soit allumé ou éteint. Permet de connecter un moniteur externe compatible DVI, comme un moniteur à écran plat. Vous pouvez également utiliser un câble d'adaptateur pour relier un moniteur externe compatible VGA au connecteur DVI. Permet de relier un moniteur externe compatible VGA. 26 Présentation de votre ordinateur L'adaptateur secteur est disponible en configuration à 2 câbles et à 3 câbles. Utilisez un adaptateur secteur compatible avec les connecteurs d'alimentation de votre pays. PRÉCAUTION : L'adaptateur secteur fonctionne avec les tensions secteur disponibles dans le monde entier. Cependant, les connecteurs et les rampes d'alimentation varient selon les pays. L'utilisation d'un câble non compatible ou le branchement incorrect du câble sur la rampe d'alimentation ou la prise secteur peut provoquer un incendie ou endommager l'équipement. AVIS : Lorsque vous déconnectez l'adaptateur secteur de l'ordinateur, tenez le connecteur du câble de l'adaptateur, pas le câble lui-même, et tirez dessus fermement mais sans forcer, afin d'éviter de l'endommager. REMARQUE : Pour optimiser les performances du système, utilisez l'adaptateur secteur fourni avec votre ordinateur. L'utilisation d'adaptateurs secteur de puissance inférieure peut provoquer l'affichage d'un message d'WARNING (AVERTISSEMENT) et peut également entraîner une dégradation des performances de votre ordinateur.Présentation de votre ordinateur 27 Vue de dessous CAISSON D E BASSE — Produit une plus grande variété de sons graves que ceux produits par les haut-parleurs. INDICATEUR D E CHARGE D E L A BATTERIE — Donne des informations sur le niveau de charge de la batterie. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section «Vérification de la charge de la batterie» à la page 44. LOQUET D E FERMETURE D E L A BAIE D E BATTERIE — Permet de retirer la batterie de la baie de batterie. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section «Remplacement de la batterie» à la page 48. BATTERIE — Quand une batterie est installée, vous pouvez utiliser l'ordinateur sans le brancher au secteur. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section «Utilisation d'une batterie» à la page 43. CACHE D E LA CARTE INTERNE OPTIONNELLE DOTÉE D E LA TECHNOLOGIE SANS FIL BLUETOOTH® — Pour des informations supplémentaires, reportez-vous à la documentation livrée avec votre carte. Pour activer ou désactiver rapidement tous les périphériques sans fil, appuyez sur . 1 caisson de basse 5 cache de la carte interne optionnelle dotée de la technologie sans fil Bluetooth® 9 cache du module de mémoire 2 indicateur de charge de la batterie 6 unité de disque dur 10 entrée d'air 3 loquet de fermeture de la baie de batterie 7 entrée d'air 11 vis de verrouillage du lecteur optique 4 batterie 8 cache du compartiment pour carte Mini/modem 12 3 4 5 6 7 9 8 10 1128 Présentation de votre ordinateur DISQUE DUR — Stocke les logiciels et les données. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section «Disque dur» à la page 121. La taille de votre disque dur affichée dans l'Explorateur Windows est la capacité du lecteur avant l'installation de tout système d'exploitation ou tous programmes. ENTRÉE D'AIR — Un ou plusieurs ventilateurs internes font circuler de l'air à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur, évitant ainsi la surchauffe des composants. PRÉCAUTION : Ne bloquez pas les entrées d'air de l'ordinateur et n'insérez pas d'objets dedans ; évitez également toute accumulation de poussière. Ne placez pas l'ordinateur dans un environnement peu aéré, tel qu'une mallette fermée, lorsque celui-ci fonctionne. Le manque de ventilation risquerait de causer un incendie ou d'endommager l'ordinateur. CACHE D U COMPARTIMENT POUR CARTE MINI/MODEM — Recouvre le compartiment de la carte Mini PCI et modem. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section «Modem» à la page 126. CACHE D U MODULE D E MÉMOIRE — Recouvre le compartiment des modules de mémoire. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section «Mémoire» à la page 123. VIS D E VERROUILLAGE D U LECTEUR OPTIQUE — Sert à fixer le lecteur optique dans la baie du lecteur optique. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section «Lecteur optique» à la page 135. Configuration de votre ordinateur 29 Configuration de votre ordinateur Connexion à Internet REMARQUE : Les fournisseurs d'accès Internet (FAI) et leurs offres varient selon les pays. Pour vous connecter à Internet, vous devez disposer d'un modem ou d'une connexion réseau et d'un fournisseur d'accès Internet (FAI). Votre fournisseur d'accès Internet vous proposera une ou plusieurs des options de connexion Internet suivantes : • Connexions d'accès à distance qui offrent un accès à Internet par l'intermédiaire d'une ligne téléphonique. Ces connexions sont beaucoup plus lentes que les connexions DSL ou modem par câble. • Connexions DSL qui offrent un accès à Internet à haute vitesse par l'intermédiaire d'une ligne téléphonique existante. Avec une connexion DSL, vous pouvez accéder à Internet et utiliser votre téléphone sur la même ligne simultanément. • Connexions modem par câble qui offrent un accès à Internet à haute vitesse par l'intermédiaire de la ligne Téléviseur câblée locale. Si vous utilisez une connexion d'accès à distance, connectez une ligne téléphonique au connecteur du modem sur votre ordinateur et à la prise téléphonique murale avant de configurer la connexion Internet. Si vous utilisez une connexion DSL ou modem par câble, contactez votre fournisseur d'accès Internet pour obtenir les instructions de configuration. Configuration de votre connexion Internet Pour configurer une connexion Internet à l'aide du raccourci de bureau d'un fournisseur d'accès Internet fourni : 1 Enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers et quittez tous les programmes. 2 Double-cliquez sur l'icône d'un fournisseur d'accès Internet sur le bureau Microsoft® Windows®. 3 Pour effectuer la configuration, suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran. Si vous ne disposez pas de l'icône d'un fournisseur d'accès Internet sur votre bureau ou si vous souhaitez configurer une connexion Internet avec un autre fournisseur d'accès Internet : 1 Enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers et quittez tous les programmes. 2 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Internet Explorer. L'Assistant Nouvelle connexion s'affiche. 3 Cliquez sur Connecter à Internet.30 Configuration de votre ordinateur 4 Dans la fenêtre suivante, cliquez sur l'option appropriée : • Si vous ne disposez pas de fournisseur d'accès Internet et souhaitez en sélectionner un, cliquez sur Choisir dans une liste de fournisseurs de services Internet. • Si vous avez déjà reçu les informations de configuration de votre fournisseur de services Internet, mais pas le CD de configuration, cliquez sur Configurer ma connexion manuellement. • Si vous disposez d'un CD, cliquez sur Utiliser le CD fourni par mon fournisseur de services Internet. 5 Cliquez sur Suivant. Si vous sélectionnez Configurer ma connexion manuellement, passez à l'étape 6. Sinon, suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran pour terminer la configuration. REMARQUE : Si vous ne savez pas quel type de connexion sélectionner, contactez votre fournisseur d'accès Internet. 6 Cliquez sur l'option appropriée sous Comment souhaitez-vous vous connecter à Internet ?, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 7 Utilisez les informations fournies par votre fournisseur d'accès Internet pour terminer la configuration. Si vous rencontrez des problèmes de connexion à Internet, reportez-vous à la section «Problèmes liés à la messagerie électronique, au modem ou à Internet» à la page 93. Si vous ne pouvez pas vous connecter à Internet alors que vous l'avez déjà fait auparavant, il est possible que le fournisseur d'accès Internet subisse une interruption de services. Contactez-le pour vérifier l'état des services ou essayez de vous connecter ultérieurement. Transfert d'informations vers un nouvel ordinateur Le système d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows® XP dispose d'un Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres qui permet de déplacer des données d'un ordinateur à un autre. Vous pouvez transférer des données telles que : • messages e-mail • paramètres de la barre d'outils • signets Internet Vous pouvez transférer les données vers le nouvel ordinateur par le biais d'une connexion réseau ou les enregistrer sur des supports amovibles, comme un CD inscriptible en vue de leur transfert sur un nouvel ordinateur. Pour transférer des informations vers un nouvel ordinateur, vous devez lancer l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres. Pour ce faire, vous pouvez utiliser le CD Operating System en option ou créer un disque Assistant à l'aide de l'utilitaire Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres. Exécution de l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres avec le CD Operating System REMARQUE : Le CD Operating system est obligatoire. Toutefois, ce CD est en option et n'est pas obligatoirement expédié avec tous les ordinateurs.Configuration de votre ordinateur 31 Préparez le nouvel ordinateur pour le transfert de fichiers 1 Cliquez sur Démarrer→Tous les programmes→Accessoires→Outils système→Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres. 2 Démarrez l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres. 3 Lorsque l'écran d'accueil de l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres s'affiche, cliquez sur Suivant. 4 Dans l'écran De quel ordinateur s'agit-il ?, cliquez sur Nouvel ordinateur, puis sur Suivant. 5 Dans l'écran Avez-vous un CD-ROM de Windows XP ?, cliquez sur J'utiliserai l'assistant du CD-ROM de Windows XP, puis sur Suivant. 6 Lorsque l'écran Allez maintenant à votre ancien ordinateur s'affiche, allez à l'ancien ordinateur ou ordinateur source. Ne cliquez pas sur Suivant à ce moment. Copie de données à partir de l'ancien ordinateur 1 Dans l'ancien ordinateur, insérez le CD Operating System de Windows XP. 2 Dans l'écran Bienvenue dans Microsoft Windows XP, cliquez sur Effectuer des tâches supplémentaires. 3 Sous Que voulez-vous faire ?, cliquez sur Transférer des fichiers et des paramètres. 4 Dans l'écran d'accueil de l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres, cliquez sur Suivant. 5 Dans l'écran De quel ordinateur s'agit-il ?, cliquez sur Ancien ordinateur, puis sur Suivant. 6 Dans l'écran Sélectionner une méthode de transfert, cliquez sur la méthode de transfert de votre choix. 7 Dans l'écran Que voulez-vous transférer ?, sélectionnez les éléments à transférer, puis cliquez sur Suivant. Une fois les informations copiées, l'écran Fin de la phase de collecte des données apparaît. 8 Cliquez sur Terminer. Transfert des données vers le nouvel ordinateur 1 Dans l'écran Allez maintenant à votre ancien ordinateur sur le nouvel ordinateur, cliquez sur Suivant. 2 Dans l'écran Où sont les fichiers et les paramètres ?, sélectionnez la méthode de transfert de vos paramètres et fichiers, puis cliquez sur Suivant. L'Assistant lit les paramètres et fichiers recueillis, puis les applique à votre nouvel ordinateur. Lorsque tous les paramètres et fichiers ont été appliqués, l'écran Terminé s'affiche. 3 Cliquez sur Terminé et redémarrez le nouvel ordinateur.32 Configuration de votre ordinateur Exécution de l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres sans le CD Operating System Pour exécuter l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres sans le CD Operating System, vous devez créer un disque Assistant qui vous permette de créer une sauvegarde de vos fichiers de données. Créez le disque Assistant sur le support amovible, de sorte que vous puissiez le déplacer du nouvel ordinateur vers l'ancien ordinateur. Création d'un disque Assistant Pour créer un disque Assistant, servez-vous de votre nouvel ordinateur doté de Windows XP et suivez les étapes suivantes : 1 Cliquez sur Démarrer→Tous les programmes→Accessoires→Outils système→Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres. 2 Lorsque l'écran d'accueil de l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres s'affiche, cliquez sur Suivant. 3 Dans l'écran De quel ordinateur s'agit-il ?, cliquez sur Nouvel ordinateur, puis sur Suivant. 4 Dans l'écran Avez-vous un CD-ROM de Windows XP ?, cliquez sur I want to create a Wizard Disk in the following drive: (Je souhaite créer un disque Assistant dans le lecteur suivant :), puis cliquez sur Suivant. 5 Insérez le support amovible, tel qu'un CD inscriptible, puis cliquez sur OK. 6 Lorsque la création du disque est terminée et que le message Now go to your old computer (Allez maintenant à votre ancien ordinateur) apparaît, ne cliquez pas sur Suivant. 7 Allez à votre ancien ordinateur. Copie de données à partir de l'ancien ordinateur 1 Insérez le disque Assistant sur l'ancien ordinateur. 2 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Exécuter. 3 Dans le champ Ouvrir de la fenêtre Exécuter, recherchez le chemin fastwiz (pour le support amovible approprié) et cliquez sur OK. 4 Dans l'écran d'accueil de l'Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres, cliquez sur Suivant. 5 Dans l'écran De quel ordinateur s'agit-il ?, cliquez sur Ancien ordinateur, puis sur Suivant. 6 Dans l'écran Sélectionner une méthode de transfert, cliquez sur la méthode de transfert de votre choix. 7 Dans l'écran Que voulez-vous transférer ?, sélectionnez les éléments à transférer, puis cliquez sur Suivant. Une fois les informations copiées, l'écran Fin de la phase de collecte des données apparaît. 8 Cliquez sur Terminer.Configuration de votre ordinateur 33 Transfert des données vers le nouvel ordinateur 1 Dans l'écran Allez maintenant à votre ancien ordinateur sur le nouvel ordinateur, cliquez sur Suivant. 2 Dans l'écran Où sont les fichiers et les paramètres ?, sélectionnez la méthode de transfert de vos paramètres et fichiers, puis cliquez sur Suivant. Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran. L'Assistant lit les paramètres et fichiers recueillis, puis les applique à votre nouvel ordinateur. Lorsque tous les paramètres et fichiers ont été appliqués, l'écran Terminé s'affiche. 3 Cliquez sur Terminé et redémarrez le nouvel ordinateur. REMARQUE : Pour plus d'informations sur cette procédure, accédez au Centre d'aide et de support de Windows (reportez-vous à la section «Centre d'aide et de support de Windows» à la page 13) et recherchez Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres. Pour de plus amples informations, rendez-vous sur le site Web support.dell.com pour accéder au document n° PA1089586 (How Do I Transfer Files From My Old Computer to My New Dell Computer Using the Microsoft® Windows® XP Operating System CD? [Comment transférer des fichiers à partir de mon ancien ordinateur vers mon nouvel ordinateur Dell™ à l'aide du CD Operating System de Microsoft® Windows®]). REMARQUE : Certains pays peuvent ne pas avoir accès au document de la base de connaissances Dell. Configuration d'une imprimante AVIS : Effectuez la configuration du système d'exploitation avant de connecter une imprimante à l'ordinateur. Reportez-vous à la documentation fournie avec l'imprimante pour obtenir des informations sur la configuration, notamment : • Obtenir et installer les pilotes mis à jour. • Connecter l'imprimante à l'ordinateur. • Charger le papier et installer la cartouche de toner ou d'encre. Consultez le Manuel du propriétaire de l'imprimante pour obtenir une assistance technique ou contactez le fabricant de l'imprimante. Câble de l'imprimante L'imprimante se connecte à l'ordinateur avec un câble USB ou un câble parallèle. Il est possible que l'imprimante soit livrée sans câble. Par conséquent, si vous achetez un câble séparément, assurez-vous qu'il est compatible avec votre imprimante et votre ordinateur. Si vous avez acheté un câble d'imprimante en même temps que l'ordinateur, il est possible qu'il vous soit livré avec ce dernier. Connexion d'une imprimante USB REMARQUE : Vous pouvez connecter des périphériques USB pendant que l'ordinateur est sous tension. 1 Effectuez la configuration du système d'exploitation, si vous ne l'avez pas déjà fait. 2 Raccordez le câble USB de l'imprimante aux connecteurs USB de l'ordinateur et de l'imprimante. Les connecteurs USB ne s'insèrent que dans un seul sens.34 Configuration de votre ordinateur 3 Allumez l'imprimante, puis l'ordinateur. Si la fenêtre Assistant Ajout de matériel apparaît, cliquez sur Annuler. 4 Le cas échéant, installez le pilote d'imprimante. Consultez la documentation de l'imprimante. Périphériques de protection contre les surtensions électriques Plusieurs périphériques peuvent vous protéger contre les fluctuations de la tension et les pannes d'alimentation : • Parasurtenseurs • Filtres de ligne • Onduleurs Parasurtenseurs Les parasurtenseurs et les rampes d'alimentation équipées d'une protection contre la surtension réduisent les risques d'endommagement de votre ordinateur provoqués par les pointes de tension pouvant survenir au cours d'un orage électrique ou suite à une coupure de courant. Certains fabricants offrent également une garantie contre certains types de dégâts. Lisez attentivement la garantie du parasurtenseur que vous achetez. Un protecteur doté d'une valeur nominale en joules plus élevée offre une meilleure protection. Comparez les valeurs nominales, en joules, afin de déterminer l'efficacité relative des différents dispositifs. 1 connecteur USB de l'ordinateur 2 câble USB de l'imprimante 3 connecteur sur l'imprimante 2 1 3Configuration de votre ordinateur 35 AVIS : La plupart des parasurtenseurs ne protègent pas contre les fluctuations de tension ou les coupures de courant. Lorsqu'un orage est proche, débranchez la ligne téléphonique de la prise murale et déconnectez votre ordinateur de la prise de courant. De nombreux parasurtenseurs sont équipés d'une prise téléphonique pour assurer la protection du modem. Consultez la documentation du parasurtenseur pour obtenir des instructions sur la connexion du modem. AVIS : Certains parasurtenseurs n'offrent pas de protection pour les cartes réseau. Déconnectez le câble de réseau de la prise réseau murale pendant les orages. Filtres de ligne AVIS : Les filtres de ligne n'offrent pas de protection contre les coupures de courant. Ils sont conçus pour maintenir la tension CA à un niveau relativement constant. Onduleurs AVIS : Une baisse de tension pendant l'enregistrement des données sur le disque dur peut provoquer une perte de données ou la corruption du fichier. REMARQUE : Pour optimiser le temps de fonctionnement de la batterie, connectez uniquement votre ordinateur à un onduleur. Connectez les autres périphériques, tels que l'imprimante, à une rampe d'alimentation différente équipée d'un parasurtenseur. Les onduleurs protègent contre les fluctuations de tension et les coupures de courant. Ils incluent une batterie qui alimente temporairement les périphériques connectés lorsque l'alimentation secteur est coupée. La batterie se charge lorsque l'alimentation secteur est disponible. Consultez la documentation fournie par le fabricant de l'onduleur afin d'obtenir des informations sur la durée de fonctionnement de la batterie et vous assurer que le dispositif est approuvé par Underwriters Laboratories (UL).36 Configuration de votre ordinateurUtilisation de l'écran 37 Utilisation de l'écran Réglage de la luminosité Lorsque l'ordinateur Dell™ fonctionne avec une batterie, vous pouvez économiser de l'énergie en réglant le paramètre de luminosité au minimum acceptable à l'aide de et la flèche haut ou bas du clavier. L'indicateur de luminosité Dell QuickSet affiche le paramètre de luminosité actuel de l'affichage. Pour activer ou désactiver l'indicateur de luminosité à l'écran, cliquez sur l'icône située dans la barre des tâches, puis sélectionnez ou désélectionnez Disable On Screen Brightness Meter (Désactiver l'indicateur de luminosité à l'écran). REMARQUE : Par défaut, l'indicateur de luminosité apparaît dans le coin inférieur droit de l'écran lorsque vous ajustez la luminosité à l'aide des raccourcis clavier. Vous pouvez faire un cliquer-déplacer de l'indicateur vers un emplacement qui vous convient. REMARQUE : Les combinaisons de touches pour la luminosité n'ont de répercussions que sur l'affichage de l'ordinateur portable ; elles n'ont aucune répercussion sur les moniteurs ou projecteurs que vous connectez au portable. Si l'ordinateur est connecté à un moniteur externe et que vous tentez de modifier le niveau de luminosité, l'indicateur de luminosité s'affiche, mais le niveau de luminosité du moniteur ne change pas. Appuyez sur les touches suivantes pour régler la luminosité de l'écran : • Appuyez sur et sur la flèche haut pour augmenter la luminosité de l'écran intégré uniquement (pas sur un moniteur externe). • Appuyez sur et sur la flèche bas pour réduire la luminosité sur l'écran intégré uniquement (pas sur un moniteur externe). Pour plus d'informations sur QuickSet, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône dans la barre des tâches, puis cliquez sur Aide. Basculement de l'image vidéo Lorsqu'au démarrage de l'ordinateur un périphérique externe (tel qu'un moniteur externe ou un projecteur) est connecté et sous tension, l'image peut s'afficher sur l'écran intégré ou sur le périphérique externe, en fonction de vos paramètres. Appuyez sur pour basculer entre les options d'affichage suivantes pour l'image vidéo : écran seul, périphérique externe seul ou écran et périphérique externe simultanément.38 Utilisation de l'écran Réglage de la résolution d'affichage Pour qu'un programme s'affiche à une résolution spécifique, le contrôleur vidéo et l'écran doivent prendre tous deux en charge le programme sélectionné et les pilotes vidéo requis doivent être installés. REMARQUE : Si vous modifiez les paramètres actuellement sélectionnés pour la résolution d'affichage, l'image peut apparaître floue ou le texte peut être difficile à lire. Avant de modifier un paramètre d'affichage, prenez note des paramètres actuellement sélectionnés et gardez-les pour référence ultérieure. Si vous sélectionnez une résolution ou une palette de couleurs plus élevée que celle prise en charge par l'écran, les paramètres se règlent automatiquement sur la configuration prise en charge la plus proche. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration. 2 Sous Choisissez une catégorie, cliquez sur Apparence et thèmes. 3 Sous Choisissez une tâche…, cliquez sur la zone à modifier, ou sous ou une icône du Panneau de configuration, cliquez sur Affichage. 4 Essayez différents paramètres de Qualité couleur et Résolution d'écran. REMARQUE : Lorsque vous augmentez la résolution de l'écran, les icônes et le texte apparaissent plus petits.Utilisation du clavier et de la tablette tactile 39 Utilisation du clavier et de la tablette tactile Pavé numérique Le pavé numérique fonctionne comme celui d'un clavier externe. Chaque touche du pavé numérique a plusieurs fonctions. Les chiffres et les symboles du pavé numérique figurent en bleu à droite de ces touches. Pour taper un chiffre ou un symbole, appuyez sur et sur la touche désirée après activation du pavé. • Pour activer le pavé numérique, appuyez sur . Le voyant indique que le pavé numérique est activé. • Pour désactiver le pavé numérique, appuyez de nouveau sur . 940 Utilisation du clavier et de la tablette tactile Combinaisons de touches Fonctions système Batterie Plateau du lecteur de CD ou DVD Fonctions d'affichage Fonction réseau sans fil et technologie sans fil Bluetooth® <Échap> Ouvre la fenêtre Gestionnaire des tâches. Affiche la jauge de batterie Dell™ QuickSet. Pour plus d'informations sur la jauge de batterie, reportez-vous à la section «Jauge de batterie Dell™ QuickSet» à la page 44. Éjecte le plateau du lecteur (si Dell QuickSet est installé). Pour plus d'informations sur Dell QuickSet, reportez-vous à la section «Fonctions Dell™ QuickSet» à la page 49. Affiche une liste d'icônes représentant toutes les options d'affichage actuellement disponibles (par exemple, affichage seul, moniteur ou projecteur externe seul, écran et projecteur, etc.). Mettez en surbrillance l'icône qui représente l'état souhaité, dans lequel basculer cette option. et la touche flèche haut Augmente la luminosité sur l'écran intégré uniquement (non pas sur un moniteur externe). et la touche flèche bas Diminue la luminosité sur l'écran intégré uniquement (non pas sur un moniteur externe). Active et désactive le réseau sans fil et la carte dotée de la technologie sans fil Bluetooth.Utilisation du clavier et de la tablette tactile 41 Gestion de l'alimentation Fonctions des haut-parleurs Fonctions de la touche du logo Microsoft® Windows® Pour régler les options du clavier, telles que la vitesse de répétition des caractères, ouvrez le panneau de configuration, cliquez sur Imprimantes et autres périphériques, puis sur Clavier. Pour plus d'informations sur le panneau de configuration, contactez le Centre d'aide et de support de Windows. Pour accéder au Centre d'aide et de support, reportez-vous à la section «Centre d'aide et de support de Windows» à la page 13. <Échap> Active un mode d'économie d'énergie. Vous pouvez reprogrammer ce raccourci clavier pour activer un autre mode d'économie d'énergie sous l'onglet Avancé de la fenêtre Propriétés des options d'alimentation. Reportez-vous à la section «Modes d'économie d'énergie» à la page 46. Met le système en mode Mise en veille prolongée (si Dell QuickSet est installé). Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section «Fonctions Dell™ QuickSet» à la page 49. Augmente le volume des haut-parleurs intégrés et des hautparleurs externes, si des haut-parleurs externes sont branchés. Diminue le volume des haut-parleurs intégrés et des hautparleurs externes, si des haut-parleurs externes sont branchés. Active et désactive les haut-parleurs intégrés et les haut-parleurs externes, si des haut-parleurs externes sont branchés. Touche du logo Windows et Réduit toutes les fenêtres ouvertes. Touche du logo Windows et Restaure toutes les fenêtres réduites. Cette commande permet de faire permuter pour restaurer toutes les fenêtres réduites après l'utilisation de la combinaison de touches, touche du logo Windows et . Touche du logo Windows et Exécute l'Explorateur Windows. Touche du logo Windows et Ouvre la boîte de dialogue Exécuter. Touche du logo Windows et Ouvre la boîte de dialogue Search Results (Résultats de la recherche). Touche du logo Windows et Ouvre la boîte de dialogue Search Results-Computer(Résultats de la recherche - Ordinateur) (si l'ordinateur est connecté à un réseau). Touche du logo Windows et Ouvre la boîte de dialogue System Properties (Propriétés système).42 Utilisation du clavier et de la tablette tactile Tablette tactile La tablette tactile détecte la pression et le mouvement de vos doigts pour vous permettre de déplacer le curseur à l'écran. Utilisez la tablette tactile et ses boutons de la même façon que vous utilisez la souris. • Posez et déplacez votre doigt sur la surface de la tablette tactile pour déplacer le curseur. • Pour sélectionner un objet, placez le curseur sur l'objet et appuyez doucement une fois sur la tablette tactile ou appuyez sur le bouton gauche à l'aide de votre pouce. • Pour sélectionner et déplacer (ou faire glisser) un objet, placez le curseur sur l'objet et tapez deux fois sur la tablette. Laissez votre doigt sur la tablette tactile la deuxième fois et déplacez l'objet sélectionné en faisant glisser votre doigt sur la surface. • Pour double-cliquer sur un objet, placez le curseur sur l'objet et appuyez doucement deux fois sur la tablette tactile ou appuyez deux fois sur le bouton gauche à l'aide de votre pouce. La tablette tactile a une sérigraphie sur le côté droit et en bas pour indiquer les fonctions de défilement. Par défaut, le défilement est disponible. Pour désactiver cette fonction, modifiez les propriétés de la souris dans le panneau de configuration. REMARQUE : Les zones de défilement peuvent ne pas fonctionner avec toutes les applications. Pour qu'elles fonctionnent correctement, l'application en cours d'utilisation doit tirer parti de la fonction de défilement de la tablette tactile. Personnalisation de la tablette tactile Vous pouvez désactiver la tablette tactile ou régler ses paramètres au moyen de la fenêtre de propriétés Souris. 1 Ouvrez le panneau de configuration et cliquez sur Souris. Pour plus d'informations sur le panneau de configuration, contactez le Centre d'aide et de support de Windows. Pour accéder au Centre d'aide et de support, reportez-vous à la section «Centre d'aide et de support de Windows» à la page 13. 2 Dans la fenêtre Propriétés de la souris, cliquez sur l'onglet Device Select (Sélection de périphérique) pour désactiver la tablette tactile ou cliquez sur l'onglet Tablette tactile pour régler les paramètres de la tablette tactile. 3 Cliquez sur OK pour enregistrer les paramètres et fermer la fenêtre.Utilisation d'une batterie 43 Utilisation d'une batterie Performances de la batterie REMARQUE : Pour obtenir des informations sur la garantie Dell de votre ordinateur, reportez-vous au Guide d'information sur le produit ou au document de garantie livré avec votre ordinateur. Pour un fonctionnement optimal et afin de préserver les paramètres du BIOS, laissez la batterie principale installée en permanence dans votre ordinateur portable Dell™. Votre ordinateur est livré avec une batterie, installée dans la baie. REMARQUE : Lors de la première utilisation de votre ordinateur, la batterie n'étant pas obligatoirement complètement chargée, utilisez l'adaptateur secteur pour raccorder votre nouvel ordinateur à une prise secteur. Pour de meilleurs résultats, utilisez l'adaptateur secteur tant que la batterie n'est pas complètement chargée. Pour afficher le niveau de charge de la batterie, cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Panneau de configuration→ Options d'alimentation, puis cliquez sur l'onglet Jauge d'alimentation. REMARQUE : L'autonomie de la batterie (la période durant laquelle la batterie peut faire fonctionner l'ordinateur) diminue avec le temps. Selon la fréquence d'utilisation et les conditions de fonctionnement de la batterie, il est possible que vous deviez en acheter une autre au cours de la durée de vie de votre ordinateur. L'autonomie de la batterie varie en fonction des conditions de fonctionnement. Cette durée est considérablement réduite par l'exécution de certaines opérations, notamment, sans que cela soit limitatif : • Utilisation de lecteurs optiques • Utilisation de périphériques de communications sans fil, de cartes ExpressCard, de cartes mémoire multimédia ou de périphériques USB • Utilisation de paramètres élevés d'affichage et de luminosité, d'économiseurs d'écran en 3D ou d'autres programmes gourmands en ressources, tels que des applications graphiques en 3D complexes • Fonctionnement de l'ordinateur en mode de performances optimales (reportez-vous à la section «Modes d'économie d'énergie» à la page 46.) REMARQUE : Il est recommandé de connecter l'ordinateur à une prise électrique lorsque vous gravez un CD ou DVD. Vous pouvez vérifier le niveau de charge de la batterie avant de l'insérer dans l'ordinateur. Vous pouvez également définir des options de gestion de l'alimentation afin que l'ordinateur vous alerte lorsque le niveau de charge de la batterie est faible. PRÉCAUTION : L'utilisation d'une batterie non compatible peut accroître le risque d'incendie ou d'explosion. Ne remplacez la batterie que par une batterie compatible achetée auprès de Dell. La batterie est conçue pour fonctionner avec votre ordinateur Dell. N'utilisez pas la batterie d'un autre ordinateur. 44 Utilisation d'une batterie PRÉCAUTION : Ne jetez pas les batteries avec les ordures ménagères. Lorsque votre batterie ne tient plus sa charge, contactez votre service municipal de traitement des déchets pour savoir comment vous en débarrasser. Reportez-vous à la section «Mise au rebut de la batterie» du Guide d'information sur le produit. PRÉCAUTION : Une utilisation inadéquate de la batterie peut augmenter le risque d'incendie ou de brûlure chimique. Prenez soin de ne pas la percer, l'incinérer, la démonter ou l'exposer à une température supérieure à 65° C (149° F). Conservez la batterie hors de portée des enfants. Manipulez les batteries endommagées ou percées avec d'extrêmes précautions. Les batteries endommagées peuvent fuir et causer des dommages personnels ou matériels. Vérification de la charge de la batterie La Jauge de batterie de Dell QuickSet, la fenêtre Jauge d'alimentation de Microsoft Windows, l'icône , l'indicateur de charge de la batterie, la jauge d'état et l'alerte de batterie faible fournissent des informations sur le niveau de charge de la batterie. REMARQUE : Dell QuickSet peut ne pas être disponible sur votre ordinateur. Jauge de batterie Dell™ QuickSet Si Dell QuickSet est installé, appuyez sur pour afficher la fenêtre Jauge de batterie de QuickSet. La fenêtre Jauge de batterie affiche l'état, l'état de fonctionnement de la batterie, le niveau de charge et la durée nécessaire au chargement de la batterie de votre ordinateur. Jauge de Microsoft® Windows® La jauge de Windows indique la charge de batterie restante. Pour consulter la jauge, double-cliquez sur l'icône de la barre des tâches. Si l'ordinateur est branché sur le secteur, une icône apparaît. Indicateur de charge En appuyant une fois sur le bouton d'état de l'indicateur de charge de la batterie ou en appuyant et en maintenant enfoncé ce bouton, vous pouvez vérifier les éléments suivants : • Le niveau de charge de la batterie (appuyez sur le bouton d'état et relâchez-le) • L'état de fonctionnement de la batterie (appuyez sur le bouton d'état et maintenez-le enfoncé) L'autonomie de la batterie est déterminée en grande partie par le nombre de charges qu'elle reçoit. Après des centaines de cycles de charge et de décharge, la capacité de charge des batteries diminue et l'état des batteries se dégrade. C'est pourquoi, une batterie peut afficher l'état «chargé» tout en maintenant un niveau de charge réduit (état). Vérification du niveau de charge de la batterie Pour vérifier le niveau de charge de la batterie, appuyez sur le bouton d'état, situé sur l'indicateur de charge de la batterie, et relâchez-le pour allumer les voyants de niveau de charge. Chaque voyant représente environ 20 pour-cent de la charge totale de la batterie. S'il reste, par exemple, 80 pour-cent de la charge de la batterie, quatre des voyants sont allumés. Si aucun voyant n'est allumé, la batterie est complètement déchargée.Utilisation d'une batterie 45 Vérification de l'état de fonctionnement de la batterie REMARQUE : Vous pouvez vérifier l'état de fonctionnement de la batterie de l'une des deux manières suivantes : en utilisant l'indicateur de charge de la batterie comme décrit ci-dessous et en utilisant la jauge de batterie de Dell QuickSet. Pour des informations sur QuickSet, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône de la barre des tâches, puis cliquez sur Aide. Pour vérifier l'état de la batterie, appuyez sur le bouton d'état, situé sur l'indicateur de charge de la batterie, et maintenez-le enfoncé pendant au moins 3 secondes. Si aucun voyant ne s'allume, la batterie est en bon état et elle dispose encore de plus de 80 pour-cent de sa capacité de charge d'origine. Chaque voyant représente une dégradation incrémentielle. Si cinq voyants s'allument, la batterie dispose de moins de 60 pour-cent de sa capacité de charge et vous devez envisager son remplacement. Pour plus d'informations sur l'autonomie de la batterie, reportez-vous à la section «Caractéristiques» à la page 139. Alerte de batterie faible AVIS : Pour éviter la perte ou la corruption de vos données, enregistrez votre travail immédiatement après avoir reçu une alerte de niveau de batterie faible. Connectez ensuite l'ordinateur à une prise secteur. Si la batterie est complètement déchargée, l'ordinateur passe automatiquement en mode Mise en veille prolongée. Par défaut, une fenêtre contextuelle vous avertit lorsque la batterie est déchargée à environ 90 pour-cent. Vous pouvez modifier les paramètres d'alerte de la batterie dans QuickSet ou dans la fenêtre Propriétés des options d'alimentation. Pour des informations sur l'accès à Quickset ou à la fenêtre Propriétés des options d'alimentation, reportez-vous à la section «Configuration des paramètres de gestion de l'alimentation» à la page 47. Préservation de l'alimentation de la batterie Procédez comme suit pour économiser l'alimentation de la batterie : • Connectez l'ordinateur à une prise secteur aussi souvent que possible car la durée de vie de la batterie est largement déterminée par le nombre d'utilisations et de recharges. • Mettez l'ordinateur en mode Veille ou en mode Mise en veille prolongée lorsque vous le laissez allumé sans l'utiliser pendant de longs laps de temps. Pour plus d'informations sur les modes Veille et Mise en veille prolongée, reportez-vous à la section «Modes d'économie d'énergie» à la page 46. • Vous pouvez sélectionner des options à l'aide de l'Assistant Gestion de l'alimentation afin d'optimiser l'utilisation de l'énergie de votre ordinateur. Vous pouvez également configurer ces options pour changer lorsque vous appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation, fermez l'écran ou appuyez sur <Échap>. REMARQUE : Pour plus d'informations sur la préservation de l'énergie de la batterie, reportez-vous à la section «Modes d'économie d'énergie» à la page 46.46 Utilisation d'une batterie Modes d'économie d'énergie Mode Veille Le mode Veille permet d'économiser l'énergie en désactivant l'affichage et le disque dur au terme d'une période d'inactivité prédéterminée (délai d'attente). Lorsque l'ordinateur quitte le mode Veille, il retourne à son état précédent. AVIS : Si l'alimentation secteur ou sur batterie est coupée alors que l'ordinateur est en mode Veille, vous risquez de perdre des données. Pour passer en mode Veille : • Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, sur Arrêter l'ordinateur, puis sur Stand By (Veille). ou • Selon les options de gestion de l'alimentation configurées dans la fenêtre Propriétés des options d'alimentation ou dans l'Assistant Gestion de l'alimentation QuickSet, utilisez l'une des méthodes suivantes : – Appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation. – Fermez l'écran. – Appuyez sur <Échap>. En fonction de la configuration des options de gestion de l'alimentation, appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation ou ouvrez l'écran pour quitter le mode Veille. Vous ne pouvez pas quitter le mode Veille au moyen d'une touche ou de la tablette tactile. Mode Mise en veille prolongée Le mode Mise en veille prolongée économise l'énergie en copiant les données système dans une zone réservée du disque dur avant d'éteindre complètement l'ordinateur. Lorsque l'ordinateur quitte le mode Mise en veille prolongée, il retourne à son état précédent. AVIS : Vous ne pouvez pas retirer des périphériques pendant que votre ordinateur est en mode Mise en veille prolongée. Votre ordinateur passe en mode Mise en veille prolongée quand le niveau de charge de la batterie devient insuffisant. Pour passer en mode Mise en veille prolongée manuellement : • Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, sur Arrêter l'ordinateur, appuyez sur et maintenez cette touche enfoncée, puis cliquez sur Mettre en veille prolongée. ou • Selon les options de gestion de l'alimentation configurées dans la fenêtre Propriétés des options d'alimentation ou dans l'Assistant Gestion de l'alimentation QuickSet, utilisez l'une des méthodes suivantes pour passer en mode Mise en veille prolongée : – Appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation. – Fermez l'écran. – Appuyez sur <Échap>.Utilisation d'une batterie 47 REMARQUE : Certaines cartes ExpressCard peuvent ne pas fonctionner correctement lorsque l'ordinateur sort du mode Mise en veille prolongée. Il est possible que vous deviez retirer et réinsérer la carte (reportez-vous à la section «Retrait d'une carte ExpressCard ou d'un cache» à la page 73) ou tout simplement redémarrer (réinitialiser) l'ordinateur. Pour quitter le mode Mise en veille prolongée, appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation. L'ordinateur peut mettre quelques instants à quitter le mode Mise en veille prolongée. Vous ne pouvez pas quitter le mode Mise en veille prolongée au moyen d'une touche ou de la tablette tactile. Pour plus d'informations sur le mode Mise en veille prolongée, consultez la documentation livrée avec votre système d'exploitation. Configuration des paramètres de gestion de l'alimentation Vous pouvez utiliser l'Assistant Gestion de l'alimentation de QuickSet ou les propriétés des options d'alimentation de Windows pour configurer les paramètres de gestion de l'alimentation sur votre ordinateur. • Pour accéder à l'Assistant Gestion de l'alimentation QuickSet, double-cliquez sur l'icône dans la barre des tâches. Pour plus d'informations sur QuickSet, cliquez sur le bouton Aide dans l'Assistant Gestion de l'alimentation. • Pour accéder à la fenêtre Propriétés des options d'alimentation, cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer→ Panneau de configuration→Options d'alimentation. Pour des informations sur les champs de la fenêtre Propriétés des options d'alimentation, cliquez sur l'icône Point d'interrogation dans la barre de titre, puis sur la zone sur laquelle vous souhaitez obtenir des informations. Chargement de la batterie REMARQUE : À l'aide de Dell™ ExpressCharge™, l'adaptateur secteur charge une batterie complètement déchargée à 80 pour-cent en environ 1 heure et à 100 pour-cent en environ 2 heures, lorsque l'ordinateur est hors tension. La durée de chargement est plus longue lorsque l'ordinateur est sous tension. Vous pouvez laisser la batterie dans l'ordinateur aussi longtemps que vous le souhaitez. Les circuits internes de la batterie préviennent toute surcharge. Lorsque vous branchez l'ordinateur sur une prise secteur ou que vous installez une batterie pendant que l'ordinateur est branché sur une prise secteur, l'ordinateur vérifie le niveau de charge et la température de la batterie. Au besoin, l'adaptateur secteur charge alors la batterie et maintient le niveau de charge. Si la batterie est chaude parce qu'elle se trouvait dans l'ordinateur ou en raison de la température extérieure, il est probable qu'elle ne se charge pas lorsque vous branchez l'ordinateur sur une prise secteur.Si le voyant clignote alternativement vert et orange, la batterie est trop chaude pour être chargée. Débranchez l'ordinateur de la prise secteur et laissez refroidir l'ordinateur et la batterie jusqu'à ce qu'ils atteignent la température ambiante. Branchez alors l'ordinateur sur une prise secteur et continuez à charger la batterie. Pour plus d'informations sur la résolution des problèmes liés à la batterie, reportez-vous à la section «Problèmes liés à l'alimentation» à la page 104.48 Utilisation d'une batterie Remplacement de la batterie PRÉCAUTION : Avant d'exécuter ces procédures, éteignez votre ordinateur, débranchez l'adaptateur secteur de la prise secteur et de l'ordinateur, débranchez le modem de la prise murale et de l'ordinateur et retirez les autres câbles externes de l'ordinateur. AVIS : Vous devez retirer tous les câbles externes de l'ordinateur pour éviter d'endommager les connecteurs. PRÉCAUTION : L'utilisation d'une batterie non compatible peut accroître le risque d'incendie ou d'explosion. Ne remplacez la batterie que par une batterie compatible achetée auprès de Dell. La batterie est conçue pour fonctionner avec votre ordinateur Dell™. N'utilisez pas la batterie d'un autre ordinateur. Pour retirer la batterie : 1 Assurez-vous que l'ordinateur est éteint. 2 Faites glisser et maintenez le loquet de fermeture de la baie de batterie, situé sur le dessous de l'ordinateur, puis retirez la batterie de la baie. Pour remettre la batterie en place, enfoncez-la dans la baie jusqu'à ce que le loquet de fermeture de la baie de batterie s'enclenche. Stockage de la batterie Retirez la batterie de l'ordinateur lorsque vous rangez ce dernier pendant une période prolongée. Sinon, la batterie finira par se décharger. Après une longue période de stockage, rechargez complètement la batterie avant de l'utiliser. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section «Chargement de la batterie» à la page 47. 1 loquet de fermeture de la baie de batterie 2 batterie 1 2Fonctions Dell™ QuickSet 49 Fonctions Dell™ QuickSet REMARQUE : Cette fonction peut ne pas être disponible sur votre ordinateur. Dell™ QuickSet vous permet de configurer et d'afficher facilement les paramètres suivants : • Connectivité réseau • Gestion de l'alimentation • Écran • Informations système En fonction de ce que vous souhaitez faire dans Dell™ QuickSet, vous pouvez lancer l'application en cliquant, double-cliquant ou cliquant avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône QuickSet dans la barre des tâches de Microsoft® Windows®. La barre des tâches se trouve dans le coin inférieur droit de votre écran. Pour plus d'informations sur QuickSet, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône QuickSet et sélectionnez Aide.50 Fonctions Dell™ QuickSetUtilisation de CD, DVD et autres supports multimédia 51 Utilisation de CD, DVD et autres supports multimédia Lecture de CD ou DVD AVIS : N'appuyez pas sur le plateau du lecteur de CD ou de DVD lorsque vous l'ouvrez ou le fermez. Laissez le plateau fermé lorsque vous n'utilisez pas le lecteur. AVIS : Ne déplacez pas l'ordinateur lors de la lecture de CD ou de DVD. 1 Appuyez sur le bouton d'éjection situé à l'avant du lecteur. 2 Tirez sur le plateau. 3 Placez le disque, étiquette vers le haut, au centre du plateau et enclenchez-le sur l'axe. REMARQUE : Si vous utilisez un lecteur de CD/DVD livré avec un autre ordinateur, vous devez installer les pilotes et les logiciels nécessaires à la lecture de CD ou de DVD ou à la gravure de données. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous au CD Drivers and Utilities (ce CD est en option et n'est pas obligatoirement disponible pour votre ordinateur ou dans certains pays). 4 Poussez le plateau du lecteur pour le refermer. 1 plateau du lecteur de CD/DVD 152 Utilisation de CD, DVD et autres supports multimédia Pour formater les CD afin de stocker des données, créer des CD de musique ou copier des CD, reportezvous au logiciel du CD livré avec votre ordinateur. REMARQUE : Assurez-vous d'être en règle avec les lois relatives aux droits d'auteur lorsque vous créez des CD. Réglage du volume REMARQUE : Lorsque les haut-parleurs sont mis en sourdine, vous ne pouvez pas entendre le son du CD ou du DVD. Pour régler le volume des haut-parleurs pendant la lecture d'un CD ou d'un DVD, utilisez les boutons de commande multimédia qui se trouvent sur l'avant de l'ordinateur. Met le son en sourdine. Diminue le son. Augmente le son. Lecture ou Pause. Revient à la plage précédente. Passe à la plage suivante. Arrêt. Utilisation de CD, DVD et autres supports multimédia 53 Vous pouvez également régler le volume à l'aide de l'option Contrôle du volume via le menu Démarrer. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Tous les programmes (ou Programmes)→ Accessoires→ Divertissement (ou Multimédia), puis cliquez sur Contrôle du volume. 2 Dans la fenêtre Contrôle du volume, cliquez et faites glisser la barre située dans la colonne Contrôle du volume, puis déplacez-la vers le haut ou le bas pour augmenter ou diminuer le volume. Pour plus d'informations sur les options de contrôle du volume, cliquez sur Aide dans la fenêtre Contrôle du volume. L'indicateur de volume affiche le niveau du volume actuel, même lorsque le son est mis en sourdine, sur votre ordinateur. Vous pouvez cliquer sur l'icône dans la barre des tâches et sélectionner ou désélectionner Disable On Screen Volume Meter (Désactiver l'indicateur de volume à l'écran) ou appuyer sur les boutons de contrôle du volume pour activer ou désactiver l'indicateur de volume à l'écran. Lorsque l'indicateur de volume est activé, réglez le volume à l'aide des boutons de contrôle du volume ou en appuyant sur les combinaisons de touches suivantes : • Appuyez sur pour augmenter le volume. • Appuyez sur pour réduire le volume. • Appuyez sur pour couper le volume. Pour plus d'informations sur QuickSet, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône dans la barre des tâches, puis cliquez sur Aide. Réglage de l'image Si un message d'erreur vous informe que la résolution et la profondeur de couleur en cours utilisent trop de mémoire et empêchent la lecture du DVD, réglez les propriétés d'affichage. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration. 2 Sous Choisissez une catégorie, cliquez sur Apparence et thèmes. 3 Sous Choisissez une tâche..., cliquez sur Modifier la résolution de l'écran. 1 icône du volume 2 indicateur de volume 3 icône de mise en sourdine 1 3 254 Utilisation de CD, DVD et autres supports multimédia 4 Dans la fenêtre Propriétés de l'affichage, cliquez sur la barre de Résolution de l'écran pour réduire le paramètre de résolution de l'écran. 5 Cliquez sur le menu déroulant sous Qualité couleur, puis cliquez sur Moyenne 16 bits. 6 Cliquez sur OK pour enregistrer les paramètres et fermer la fenêtre. Copie de CD et de DVD REMARQUE : Assurez-vous de respecter toutes les lois sur les droits d'auteur relatives à la création de CD ou de DVD. Les informations de cette section s'appliquent uniquement aux ordinateurs équipés d'un lecteur de CD-RW, DVD+/-RW ou (combiné) de CD-RW/DVD. REMARQUE : Les types de lecteurs de CD ou DVD proposés par Dell peuvent varier d'un pays à l'autre. Les instructions ci-après décrivent comment effectuer une copie exacte d'un CD ou d'un DVD. Vous pouvez également utiliser Sonic DigitalMedia à d'autres fins, comme la création de CD musicaux à partir de fichiers audio enregistrés sur votre ordinateur ou la sauvegarde de données importantes. Pour plus d'informations, ouvrez Sonic DigitalMedia, puis cliquez sur l'icône comprenant un point d'interrogation, située dans le coin supérieur droit de la fenêtre. Procédure de copie d'un CD ou d'un DVD REMARQUE : Les lecteurs combinés de CD-RW/DVD ne peuvent pas graver de supports DVD. Si vous disposez d'un lecteur combiné de CD-RW/DVD et que vous rencontrez des problèmes lors de l'enregistrement, recherchez des correctifs logiciels sur le site Web de support de Sonic à l'adresse www.sonic.com. Les lecteurs de DVD inscriptibles installés sur les ordinateurs Dell™ peuvent graver des disques DVD+/-R ou DVD+/-RW et DVD+R DL (bicouche), mais ils ne peuvent pas graver des disques DVD-RAM et DVD-R DL ou, parfois, lire ces disques. REMARQUE : La plupart des DVD sur le marché sont protégés par des droits d'auteur et ne peuvent pas être copiés à l'aide de Sonic DigitalMedia. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Tous les programmes→ Sonic→ DigitalMedia Projects (Projets DigitalMedia), puis cliquez sur Copy (Copier). 2 Sous l'onglet Copier, cliquez sur Copier le disque. 3 Pour copier le CD ou DVD : • Si vous disposez d'un lecteur de CD ou DVD, assurez-vous que les paramètres sont corrects et cliquez sur le bouton Copier le disque. L'ordinateur lit votre CD ou DVD source et copie les données dans un dossier temporaire sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur. Lorsque vous y êtes invité, insérez un CD ou DVD vierge dans le lecteur et cliquez sur OK. • Si vous disposez de deux lecteurs de CD ou DVD, sélectionnez celui dans lequel vous avez inséré votre CD ou DVD source et cliquez sur le bouton Copierle disque. L'ordinateur copie les données du CD ou DVD source sur le CD ou DVD vierge. Une fois la copie du CD ou du DVD source terminée, le CD ou le DVD gravé s'éjecte automatiquement.Utilisation de CD, DVD et autres supports multimédia 55 Utilisation de CD et DVD vierges Les lecteurs de CD-RW ne permettent de graver que des CD (y compris des CD-RW haut débit) tandis que des lecteurs de DVD inscriptibles peuvent graver des CD et des DVD. Utilisez des supports CD-R pour enregistrer de la musique ou pour stocker de façon permanente des fichiers de données. Après avoir gravé un CD-R, vous ne pouvez plus écrire sur ce support (reportez-vous à la documentation Sonic pour plus d'informations). Utilisez des CD-RW vierges pour écrire, écraser, réécrire ou effectuer une mise à jour sur CD. Les DVD+/-R vierges peuvent être utilisés pour stocker de façon permanente de grandes quantités d'informations. Une fois le DVD+/-R gravé, vous ne pourrez peut-être plus l'utiliser pour graver si le disque est «finalisé» ou «fermé» pendant l'étape finale du processus de gravure. Si vous envisagez de mettre à jour les informations gravées, de les effacer, et plus généralement de réutiliser vos disques pour la gravure, utilisez des DVD+/-RW vierges. Lecteurs de CD inscriptibles Lecteurs de DVD inscriptibles Conseils pratiques • N'utilisez l'Explorateur Microsoft® Windows® pour glisser-déplacer des fichiers sur un CD-R ou CD-RW qu'après avoir lancé Sonic DigitalMedia et ouvert un projet DigitalMedia. • Utilisez des CD-R pour graver les CD audio que vous souhaitez lire sur une chaîne stéréo classique. Les CD-RW ne fonctionnent pas sur la plupart des chaînes stéréo ou de voiture. • Il est impossible de créer des DVD audio à l'aide de Sonic DigitalMedia. • Les fichiers de musique MP3 ne peuvent s'écouter que sur des lecteurs MP3 ou sur des ordinateurs dotés d'un logiciel MP3. Type de support Lecture Écriture Réinscriptible CD-R Oui Oui Non CD-RW Oui Oui Oui Type de support Lecture Écriture Réinscriptible CD-R Oui Oui Non CD-RW Oui Oui Oui DVD+R Oui Oui Non DVD-R Oui Oui Non DVD+RW Oui Oui Oui DVD-RW Oui Oui Oui DVD+R DL Oui Oui Non DVD-R DL Peut-être Non Non DVD-RAM Peut-être Non Non56 Utilisation de CD, DVD et autres supports multimédia • Les lecteurs de DVD disponibles dans le commerce pour les systèmes de home-cinéma ne lisent pas nécessairement les cinq formats existants. Pour obtenir la liste des formats pris en charge par votre lecteur de DVD, consultez la documentation l'accompagnant ou contactez le fabricant. • Évitez de graver sur toute la capacité d'un CD-R ou CD-RW vierge. Par exemple, ne copiez pas un fichier de 650 Mo sur un CD vierge de 650 Mo. Le lecteur CD-RW doit disposer de 1 à 2 Mo d'espace disponible pour finaliser l'enregistrement. • Nous vous conseillons d'utiliser un CD-RW jusqu'à ce que les techniques d'enregistrement de CD vous soient familières. Si vous faites une erreur, vous pouvez effacer les données du CD-RW et recommencer. Vous pouvez aussi utiliser un CD-RW pour tester des projets de fichiers musicaux avant l'enregistrement définitif sur un CD-R vierge. • Pour obtenir d'autres conseils pratiques, rendez-vous sur le site Web de Sonic à l'adresse www.sonic.com. Utilisation de Dell Media Experience et Dell MediaDirect™ Selon les paramètres de configuration et les options que vous avez choisis à la commande de votre ordinateur, celui-ci prend en charge : • Dell Media Experience, qui est une interface utilisateur multimédia permettant d'accéder à des supports numériques, tels que de la musique et des vidéos, et de lire ces types de support. • Dell MediaDirect, qui est un mode de lecture multimédia instantané adapté aux supports numériques REMARQUE : Dell QuickSet est requis pour le bon fonctionnement de Dell MediaDirect. La modification ou la désactivation des paramètres par défaut de QuickSet peuvent limiter les fonctionnalités de Dell MediaDirect. Pour plus d'informations sur Dell QuickSet, reportez-vous à la section «Fonctions Dell™ QuickSet» à la page 49. Appuyez sur le bouton Dell MediaDirect, situé dans le cache de la charnière, pour lancer Dell Media Experience ou Dell MediaDirect. Si l'ordinateur est activé ou en mode Veille Si vous appuyez sur le bouton Dell MediaDirect tandis que l'ordinateur est sous tension ou en mode Veille, Windows XP Media Center Manager ou Dell Media Experience s'exécute, en fonction de la configuration de votre système. Si les deux applications sont disponibles, Windows XP Media Center Manager est lancé. REMARQUE : Si Windows XP Media Center et Dell Media Experience sont installés sur votre ordinateur, vous devez lancer Dell Media Experience via la fonction Démarrer→ Tous les programmes ou cliquer sur l'icône Media Experience sur le bureau. Si l'ordinateur est hors tension ou en mode Mise en veille prolongée Lorsque votre ordinateur est hors tension ou en mode Mise en veille prolongée, vous pouvez appuyer sur le bouton Dell MediaDirect pour le démarrer et lancer automatiquement l'application Dell MediaDirect. AVIS : Vous ne pouvez pas réinstaller la fonction Dell Media Experience ou Dell MediaDirect si vous reformatez involontairement le disque dur. Le logiciel d'installation est requis pour réinstaller ces applications multimédia. Contactez Dell pour obtenir une assistance (reportez-vous à la section «Contacter Dell» à la page 157). Utilisation de CD, DVD et autres supports multimédia 57 Aide de Dell MediaDirect et Dell Media Experience L'application multimédia de Dell sur votre ordinateur contient des informations d'aide. Lorsque vous lancez l'application multimédia, cliquez sur l'icône du bureau pour obtenir une aide supplémentaire. Connexion de votre ordinateur à un téléviseur ou un périphérique audio REMARQUE : Votre ordinateur peut ne pas être livré avec tous les câbles audio et vidéo nécessaires pour le relier à un téléviseur ou à un autre périphérique audio. Il est possible d'acheter des câbles et des câbles d'adaptateur TV/audio numérique auprès de Dell. Votre ordinateur dispose d'un connecteur de sortie TV S-vidéo qui, associé à un câble S-vidéo standard (disponible auprès de Dell), vous permet de relier l'ordinateur à un téléviseur. Votre téléviseur est doté d'un connecteur d'entrée S-vidéo, d'un connecteur d'entrée vidéo composite ou d'un connecteur d'entrée vidéo composante. En fonction du type de connecteur disponible sur votre téléviseur, vous pouvez utiliser un câble S-vidéo, vidéo composite ou vidéo composante disponible dans le commerce pour relier l'ordinateur au téléviseur. 1 bouton Dell MediaDirect 1 connecteur de sortie TV S-vidéo 2 connecteur S-vidéo 1 1 258 Utilisation de CD, DVD et autres supports multimédia Si vous souhaitez relier votre ordinateur à un téléviseur ou un périphérique audio, nous vous recommandons de raccorder les câbles vidéo et audio à votre ordinateur en utilisant l'une des combinaisons suivantes. REMARQUE : Reportez-vous aux schémas situés au début de chaque sous-section pour déterminer la méthode de connexion la plus appropriée. • S-vidéo et audio standard • Vidéo composite et audio standard • Audio standard et sortie vidéo composite Lorsque vous avez terminé de connecter les câbles vidéo et audio entre l'ordinateur et le téléviseur, vous devez activer votre ordinateur pour qu'il fonctionne avec le téléviseur. Pour vous assurer que l'ordinateur reconnaît le téléviseur et fonctionne correctement avec lui, reportez-vous à la section «Activation des paramètres d'affichage pour téléviseur sous Microsoft® Windows® XP» à la page 70. En outre, si vous utilisez l'audio numérique S/PDIF, reportez-vous à la section «Activation de l'audio numérique S/PDIF» à la page 69. 1 connecteur de sortie TV S-vidéo 2 adaptateur vidéo composite 3 connecteur audio numérique S/PDIF 4 connecteur de sortie vidéo composite 5 connecteur S-vidéo 1 connecteur de sortie TV S-vidéo 2 adaptateur vidéo composite 3 connecteur audio numérique S/PDIF 4 connecteur de sortie vidéo composite Pr (rouge) 5 connecteur de sortie vidéo composite Pb (bleu) 6 connecteur de sortie vidéo composite Y (vert) 5 4 3 1 2 5 4 3 1 2 6Utilisation de CD, DVD et autres supports multimédia 59 S-vidéo et audio standard 1 Éteignez l'ordinateur et le téléviseur et/ou le périphérique audio que vous souhaitez connecter. REMARQUE : Vous pouvez brancher un câble S-vidéo directement sur le connecteur de sortie TV S-vidéo situé sur l'ordinateur (sans passer par le câble d'adaptateur audio numérique/TV) si votre téléviseur ou périphérique audio prend en charge la technologie S-vidéo mais pas l'audio numérique S/PDIF. 2 Branchez une extrémité du câble S-vidéo dans le connecteur de sortie S-vidéo de l'ordinateur. 3 Reliez l'autre extrémité du câble S-vidéo au connecteur d'entrée S-vidéo sur le téléviseur. 4 Branchez l'extrémité à un seul connecteur du câble audio dans la prise casque de l'ordinateur. 5 Branchez les deux connecteurs RCA situés à l'autre extrémité du câble audio dans les connecteurs d'entrée audio situés sur le téléviseur ou sur un autre périphérique audio. 6 Allumez le téléviseur et tous les périphériques audio connectés (le cas échéant), puis l'ordinateur. 7 Pour vous assurer que l'ordinateur reconnaît le téléviseur et fonctionne correctement avec lui, reportezvous à la section «Activation des paramètres d'affichage pour téléviseur sous Microsoft® Windows® XP» à la page 70. 1 connecteur audio 2 connecteur de sortie TV S-vidéo 1 câble S-vidéo standard 2 câble audio standard 1 2 1 260 Utilisation de CD, DVD et autres supports multimédia S-vidéo et audio numérique S/PDIF 1 Éteignez l'ordinateur et le téléviseur et/ou le périphérique audio que vous souhaitez connecter. 2 Connectez l'adaptateur vidéo composite au connecteur de sortie TV S-vidéo situé sur l'ordinateur. 3 Branchez une extrémité du câble S-vidéo dans le connecteur de sortie S-vidéo de l'adaptateur vidéo composite. 1 connecteur de sortie TV S-vidéo 2 adaptateur vidéo composite 1 adaptateur vidéo composite 2 câble S-vidéo 3 câble audio numérique S/PDIF 1 2 1 2 3Utilisation de CD, DVD et autres supports multimédia 61 4 Reliez l'autre extrémité du câble S-vidéo au connecteur d'entrée S-vidéo situé sur le téléviseur. 5 Reliez une extrémité du câble audio numérique S/PDIF au connecteur audio numérique sur le câble d'adaptateur vidéo composite. 6 Branchez l'autre extrémité du câble audio numérique S/PDIF sur le connecteur d'entrée audio situé sur le téléviseur ou le périphérique audio. 7 Allumez le téléviseur et tous les périphériques audio connectés (le cas échéant), puis l'ordinateur. 8 Pour vous assurer que l'ordinateur reconnaît le téléviseur et fonctionne correctement avec lui, reportezvous à la section «Activation des paramètres d'affichage pour téléviseur sous Microsoft® Windows® XP» à la page 70. 1 adaptateur vidéo composite 2 câble S-vidéo 1 adaptateur vidéo composite 2 câble audio numérique S/PDIF 1 2 1 262 Utilisation de CD, DVD et autres supports multimédia Vidéo composite et audio standard 1 Éteignez l'ordinateur et le téléviseur et/ou le périphérique audio que vous souhaitez connecter. 2 Connectez l'adaptateur vidéo composite au connecteur de sortie TV S-vidéo situé sur l'ordinateur. 3 Branchez une extrémité du câble vidéo composite sur le connecteur de sortie vidéo composite situé sur l'adaptateur vidéo composite. 1 connecteur d'entrée audio 2 connecteur de sortie TV S-vidéo 3 adaptateur vidéo composite 1 adaptateur vidéo composite 2 câble vidéo composite 3 câble audio standard 2 1 3 1 2 3Utilisation de CD, DVD et autres supports multimédia 63 4 Reliez l'autre extrémité du câble vidéo composite au connecteur d'entrée vidéo composite du téléviseur. 5 Branchez l'extrémité à un seul connecteur du câble audio dans la prise casque de l'ordinateur. 6 Branchez les deux connecteurs RCA situés à l'autre extrémité du câble audio dans les connecteurs d'entrée audio situés sur le téléviseur ou sur un autre périphérique audio. 7 Allumez le téléviseur et tous les périphériques audio connectés (le cas échéant), puis l'ordinateur. 8 Pour vous assurer que l'ordinateur reconnaît le téléviseur et fonctionne correctement avec lui, reportezvous à la section «Activation des paramètres d'affichage pour téléviseur sous Microsoft® Windows® XP» à la page 70. Vidéo composite et audio numérique S/PDIF 1 adaptateur vidéo composite 2 câble vidéo composite 1 connecteur de sortie TV S-vidéo 2 adaptateur vidéo composite 2 1 1 264 Utilisation de CD, DVD et autres supports multimédia 1 Éteignez l'ordinateur et le téléviseur et/ou le périphérique audio que vous souhaitez connecter. 2 Connectez l'adaptateur vidéo composite au connecteur de sortie TV S-vidéo situé sur l'ordinateur. 3 Branchez une extrémité du câble vidéo composite dans le connecteur d'entrée vidéo composite situé sur l'adaptateur vidéo composite. 4 Reliez l'autre extrémité du câble vidéo composite au connecteur d'entrée vidéo composite du téléviseur. 5 Reliez une extrémité du câble audio numérique S/PDIF au connecteur audio S/PDIF sur l'adaptateur vidéo composite. 1 adaptateur vidéo composite 2 câble vidéo composite 3 câble audio numérique S/PDIF 1 adaptateur vidéo composite 2 câble vidéo composite 1 adaptateur vidéo composite 2 câble audio numérique S/PDIF 1 2 3 2 1 1 2Utilisation de CD, DVD et autres supports multimédia 65 6 Branchez l'autre extrémité du câble audio numérique sur le connecteur d'entrée S/PDIF situé sur le téléviseur ou l'autre périphérique audio. 7 Allumez le téléviseur et tous les périphériques audio connectés (le cas échéant), puis l'ordinateur. 8 Pour vous assurer que l'ordinateur reconnaît le téléviseur et fonctionne correctement avec lui, reportezvous à la section «Activation des paramètres d'affichage pour téléviseur sous Microsoft® Windows® XP» à la page 70. Vidéo composante et audio standard 1 connecteur de sortie TV S-vidéo 2 adaptateur vidéo composite 1 adaptateur vidéo composite 2 câble vidéo composante 3 câble audio standard 2 3 1 1 2 366 Utilisation de CD, DVD et autres supports multimédia 1 Éteignez l'ordinateur et le téléviseur et/ou le périphérique audio que vous souhaitez connecter. 2 Connectez l'adaptateur vidéo composante au connecteur de sortie TV S-vidéo situé sur l'ordinateur. 3 Branchez les trois extrémités du câble vidéo composante sur les connecteurs de sortie vidéo composante situés sur l'adaptateur vidéo composante. Veillez à ce que les couleurs rouge, verte et bleu du câble correspondent aux ports d'adaptateur appropriés. 4 Branchez les trois connecteurs de l'autre extrémité du câble vidéo composante sur les connecteurs d'entrée vidéo composante situés sur le téléviseur. Veillez à ce que les couleurs rouge, verte et bleu du câble correspondent aux connecteurs d'entrée du téléviseur. 5 Branchez l'extrémité à un seul connecteur du câble audio dans la prise casque de l'ordinateur. 6 Branchez les deux connecteurs RCA situés à l'autre extrémité du câble audio dans les connecteurs d'entrée audio situés sur le téléviseur ou le périphérique audio. 7 Allumez le téléviseur et tous les périphériques audio connectés (le cas échéant), puis l'ordinateur. 8 Pour vous assurer que l'ordinateur reconnaît le téléviseur et fonctionne correctement avec lui, reportezvous à la section «Activation des paramètres d'affichage pour téléviseur sous Microsoft® Windows® XP» à la page 70. 1 adaptateur vidéo composite 2 câble vidéo composante 1 2Utilisation de CD, DVD et autres supports multimédia 67 Vidéo composante et audio numérique S/PDIF 1 Éteignez l'ordinateur et le téléviseur et/ou le périphérique audio que vous souhaitez connecter. 2 Connectez l'adaptateur vidéo composante au connecteur de sortie TV S-vidéo situé sur l'ordinateur. 1 connecteur de sortie TV S-vidéo 2 adaptateur vidéo composite 1 adaptateur vidéo composite 2 câble vidéo composante 3 câble audio numérique S/PDIF 1 2 1 2 368 Utilisation de CD, DVD et autres supports multimédia 3 Branchez les trois extrémités du câble vidéo composante sur les connecteurs de sortie vidéo composante situés sur l'adaptateur vidéo composante. Veillez à ce que les couleurs rouge, verte et bleu du câble correspondent aux ports d'adaptateur appropriés. 4 Branchez les trois connecteurs de l'autre extrémité du câble vidéo composante sur les connecteurs d'entrée vidéo composante situés sur le téléviseur. Veillez à ce que les couleurs rouge, verte et bleu du câble correspondent aux connecteurs d'entrée du téléviseur. 5 Reliez une extrémité du câble audio numérique S/PDIF au connecteur audio S/PDIF situé sur l'adaptateur vidéo composante. 6 Branchez l'autre extrémité du câble audio numérique sur le connecteur d'entrée S/PDIF situé sur le téléviseur ou l'autre périphérique audio. 7 Allumez le téléviseur et tous les périphériques audio connectés (le cas échéant), puis l'ordinateur. 8 Pour vous assurer que l'ordinateur reconnaît le téléviseur et fonctionne correctement avec lui, reportezvous à la section «Activation des paramètres d'affichage pour téléviseur sous Microsoft® Windows® XP» à la page 70. 1 adaptateur vidéo composite 2 connecteurs de sortie vidéo composante 3 câble vidéo composante 1 adaptateur vidéo composite 2 câble audio numérique S/PDIF 1 3 2 2 1Utilisation de CD, DVD et autres supports multimédia 69 Activation de l'audio numérique S/PDIF Si votre ordinateur est équipé d'un lecteur de DVD, vous pouvez activer le son numérique pour la lecture des DVD. 1 Cliquez sur Démarrer, pointez sur Tousles programmes, puis cliquez sur PowerDVD pour lancer l'application Cyberlink PowerDVD. 2 Insérez un DVD dans le lecteur de DVD. Si la lecture du DVD démarre, cliquez sur le bouton d'arrêt. 3 Cliquez sur l'option Paramètres. 4 Cliquez sur l'option DVD. 5 Cliquez sur l'icône Paramétrage audio du DVD. 6 Cliquez sur les flèches en regard du paramètre Configuration des haut-parleurs pour faire défiler les options et sélectionner l'option SPDIF. 7 Cliquez une première fois sur le bouton Précédent, puis une seconde fois pour revenir à l'écran du menu principal. Activation de S/PDIF dans le pilote audio Windows 1 Double-cliquez sur l'icône représentant un haut-parleur dans la zone de notification de Windows. 2 Cliquez sur le menu Options, puis sur Contrôles avancés. 3 Cliquez sur Avancé. 4 Cliquez sur Interface S/PDIF. 5 Cliquez sur Fermer. 6 Cliquez sur OK. Configuration du casque Cyberlink (CL) REMARQUE : La fonction casque CL n'est disponible que si votre ordinateur est équipé d'un lecteur de DVD. Si votre ordinateur est équipé d'un lecteur de DVD, vous pouvez activer le son numérique pour la lecture des DVD. 1 Cliquez sur Démarrer, pointez sur Tous les programmes, puis cliquez sur PowerDVD pour lancer le programme Cyberlink PowerDVD. 2 Insérez un DVD dans le lecteur de DVD. Si la lecture du DVD démarre, cliquez sur le bouton d'arrêt. 3 Cliquez sur l'option Paramètres. 4 Cliquez sur l'option DVD. 5 Cliquez sur l'icône Paramétrage audio du DVD.70 Utilisation de CD, DVD et autres supports multimédia 6 Cliquez sur les flèches en regard du paramètre Configuration des haut-parleurs pour faire défiler les options et sélectionner l'option Casque. 7 Cliquez sur les flèches en regard du paramètre Audio listening mode (Mode d'écoute audio) pour faire défiler les options et sélectionner l'option CL Headphone (Casque CL). 8 Cliquez sur les flèches en regard de l'option Dynamic range compression (Compression de la plage dynamique) pour sélectionner l'option la plus adaptée. 9 Cliquez une première fois sur le bouton Précédent, puis une seconde fois pour revenir à l'écran du menu principal. Activation des paramètres d'affichage pour téléviseur sous Microsoft® Windows® XP Contrôleur vidéo REMARQUE : Pour vous assurer que les options d'affichage apparaissent correctement, connectez le téléviseur à votre ordinateur avant d'activer les paramètres d'affichage. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Paramètres, puis cliquez sur Panneau de configuration. 2 Double-cliquez sur Affichage, puis cliquez sur l'onglet Paramètres. 3 Cliquez sur Avancé. 4 Cliquez sur l'onglet de votre carte vidéo. REMARQUE : Pour déterminer le type de carte vidéo installée sur votre ordinateur, consultez le Centre d'aide et de support de Windows. Pour accéder au Centre d'aide et de support, cliquez sur Démarrer→Aide et support. Sous Choisissez une tâche, cliquez sur Utiliser les outils pour afficher des informations sur votre ordinateur et diagnostiquer les problèmes. Sous Informations sur le poste de travail, sélectionnez Matériel. 5 Dans la section des périphériques d'affichage, sélectionnez l'option appropriée en fonction de l'utilisation d'un affichage simple ou multiple tout en vous assurant que les paramètres d'affichage sont corrects pour votre sélection.Utilisation des cartes 71 Utilisation des cartes Cartes ExpressCard Les cartes ExpressCard exploitent la technologie des cartes PC et vous permettent en plus d'enrichir votre ordinateur, rapidement et en toute facilité, de fonctions de mémoire, de communications réseau câblées et sans fil (notamment les communications de réseau étendu sans fil [WWAN]), multimédia et de sécurité. Pour plus d'informations sur les cartes ExpressCard prises en charge, reportez-vous à la section «Caractéristiques» à la page 139. REMARQUE : Une carte ExpressCard n'est pas un périphérique amorçable. REMARQUE : Les cartes ExpressCard peuvent ne pas être disponibles dans toutes les régions. Caches pour carte ExpressCard Votre ordinateur est livré avec un cache en plastique dans le logement de carte ExpressCard. Les caches protègent les logements non utilisés contre la poussière et les particules en suspens. Conservez le cache pour l'utiliser lorsqu'il n'y a pas de carte installée dans le logement. Les caches provenant d'autres ordinateurs ne sont pas adaptés à votre ordinateur. Pour retirer le cache, reportez-vous à la section «Retrait d'une carte ExpressCard ou d'un cache» à la page 73. Installation d'une carte ExpressCard Vous pouvez installer une carte ExpressCard pendant que l'ordinateur fonctionne. Celui-ci détecte automatiquement la carte. Les cartes ExpressCard sont généralement marquées d'un symbole (un triangle ou une flèche, par exemple) ou portent une étiquette pour indiquer l'extrémité à insérer dans le logement. Les cartes sont conçues pour éviter une mauvaise insertion. Si l'orientation de la carte n'est pas claire, consultez la documentation livrée avec la carte. 72 Utilisation des cartes Comparaison entre les cartes prises en charge et les cartes non prises en charge Le logement de carte ExpressCard est conçu pour ne prendre en charge que les cartes ExpressCard. AVIS : Votre ordinateur ne prend pas en charge les cartes PC. Pour éviter d'endommager les broches ou la carte, n'essayez pas d'insérer une carte non prise en charge dans le logement de carte ExpressCard. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. Pour installer une carte ExpressCard : 1 Tenez la carte face vers le haut. Le loquet devra peut-être être en position ouverte avant l'insertion de la carte. 2 Faites glisser la carte dans le logement jusqu'à ce qu'elle soit complètement engagée dans le connecteur. 1 cartes prises en charge 2 cartes non prises en charge 1 2Utilisation des cartes 73 Si vous sentez une trop grande résistance, ne forcez pas. Vérifiez l'orientation de la carte, puis faites une nouvelle tentative. L'ordinateur reconnaît la plupart des cartes ExpressCard et charge automatiquement le pilote de périphérique approprié. Si le programme de configuration vous demande de charger les pilotes du fabricant, utilisez le CD accompagnant la carte ExpressCard. Retrait d'une carte ExpressCard ou d'un cache AVIS : Utilisez l'utilitaire de configuration de carte ExpressCard (cliquez sur l'icône de la barre des tâches) pour sélectionner et désactiver une carte avant de la retirer de l'ordinateur. Si vous ne désactivez pas la carte à l'aide de l'utilitaire de configuration, vous risquez de perdre des données. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. Appuyez sur le loquet et retirez la carte ou le cache. Appuyez deux fois sur le loquet : une fois pour faire ressortir le loquet et une deuxième fois pour faire sortir la carte. Conservez le cache afin de l'utiliser lorsqu'un logement de carte ExpressCard est vide. Les caches protègent les logements non utilisés contre la poussière et les particules en suspens. 1 carte ExpressCard 174 Utilisation des cartes Cartes mémoire multimédia Le lecteur de carte mémoire multimédia 5 en 1 permet de consulter et de partager rapidement et facilement des photos numériques, de la musique et des vidéos enregistrées sur une carte mémoire multimédia. REMARQUE : Une carte mémoire multimédia n'est pas un périphérique amorçable. Le lecteur de carte mémoire multimédia 5 en 1 lit les cartes mémoire multimédia suivantes : • Carte Secure Digital (SD)/SDIO • MultiMediaCard (MMC) • Memory Stick • Memory Stick PRO • Carte xD-Picture Installation d'une carte mémoire multimédia Vous pouvez installer une carte mémoire multimédia dans l'ordinateur alors qu'il fonctionne. Celui-ci détecte automatiquement la carte. Les cartes mémoire multimédia sont généralement marquées d'un symbole (un triangle ou une flèche, par exemple) ou d'une étiquette pour indiquer l'extrémité à insérer dans le logement. Les cartes sont conçues pour éviter une mauvaise insertion. Si l'orientation de la carte n'est pas claire, consultez la documentation livrée avec la carte. 1 bouton d'éjection 2 carte ExpressCard 1 2Utilisation des cartes 75 PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. Pour installer une carte mémoire multimédia : 1 Tenez la carte face vers le haut. 2 Faites glisser la carte dans le logement jusqu'à ce qu'elle soit complètement engagée dans le connecteur. Si vous sentez une trop grande résistance, ne forcez pas. Vérifiez l'orientation de la carte, puis faites une nouvelle tentative. L'ordinateur reconnaît la carte mémoire multimédia et charge automatiquement le pilote de périphérique adapté. Si le programme de configuration vous indique de charger les pilotes du fabricant, utilisez le CD accompagnant la carte mémoire multimédia, le cas échéant. Retrait d'une carte mémoire multimédia AVIS : Utilisez l'utilitaire de configuration de carte mémoire multimédia (cliquez sur l'icône de la barre des tâches) pour sélectionner et désactiver une carte avant de la retirer de l'ordinateur. Si vous ne désactivez pas la carte à l'aide de l'utilitaire de configuration, vous risquez de perdre des données. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. Appuyez sur la carte pour la libérer et la retirer. 1 logement de carte mémoire multimédia 5 en 1 2 carte mémoire multimédia 1 276 Utilisation des cartesConfiguration d'un réseau domestique et d'un réseau d'entreprise 77 Configuration d'un réseau domestique et d'un réseau d'entreprise Connexion physique à un réseau ou à un modem large bande Pour connecter l'ordinateur à un réseau, une carte réseau doit être installée et un câble de réseau connecté à l'ordinateur. Pour connecter un câble de réseau : 1 Raccordez le câble de réseau au connecteur de carte réseau à l'arrière de l'ordinateur. REMARQUE : Insérez le connecteur du câble jusqu'à ce qu'il s'enclenche et tirez doucement sur le câble pour vous assurer qu'il est correctement fixé. 2 Connectez l'autre extrémité du câble à un périphérique de connexion réseau ou à une prise murale de réseau. REMARQUE : Ne connectez pas de câble de réseau à une prise téléphonique murale.78 Configuration d'un réseau domestique et d'un réseau d'entreprise Assistant Configuration réseau L'Assistant Configuration réseau du système d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows® XP vous guide dans la procédure de partage des fichiers, des imprimantes ou d'une connexion Internet entre les ordinateurs d'un réseau domestique ou d'un réseau de petite entreprise. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Tous les programmes→ Accessoires→ Communications, puis cliquez sur Assistant Configuration réseau. 2 Dans l'écran d'accueil, cliquez sur Suivant. 3 Cliquez sur Liste de vérification pour la création d'un réseau. REMARQUE : La sélection de la méthode de connexion Cet ordinateur se connecte directement à l'Internet active le pare-feu intégré fourni avec le Service Pack 2 (SP2) de Windows XP. 4 Exécutez la liste de vérification. 5 Revenez à l'Assistant Configuration réseau et suivez les instructions qui s'affichent. Réseau local sans fil (WLAN) Un WLAN est un ensemble d'ordinateurs interconnectés qui communiquent entre eux par les ondes aériennes plutôt que par le biais d'un câble de réseau relié à chaque ordinateur. Dans un WLAN, un périphérique de radiocommunications appelé point d'accès ou routeur sans fil connecte des ordinateurs réseau et offre un accès Internet ou réseau. Le point d'accès ou le routeur sans fil et la carte réseau sans fil installée dans l'ordinateur communiquent en diffusant des données par ondes aériennes via leur antenne. Éléments requis pour établir une connexion WLAN Pour créer un WLAN, vous avez besoin des éléments suivants : • L'accès Internet haut débit (large bande) (comme un câble ou une connexion DSL) • Un modem large bande qui est connecté et en état de marche • Un routeur sans fil ou un point d'accès • Une carte réseau sans fil par ordinateur à connecter au WLAN • Un câble de réseau avec le connecteur (RJ-45) réseau Contrôle de votre carte réseau sans fil Selon vos sélections lors de son achat, votre ordinateur est doté de différentes configurations. Pour vérifier que votre ordinateur intègre une carte réseau sans fil et déterminer le type de carte, procédez de l'une des manières suivantes : • Bouton Démarrer et option Connexions • Configuration de la commande de votre ordinateurConfiguration d'un réseau domestique et d'un réseau d'entreprise 79 Bouton Démarrer et option Connexions 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer. 2 Pointez sur Connexions, puis cliquez sur Afficher toutes les connexions. Si Connexion réseau sans fil n'apparaît pas sous Réseau local ou Internet à haute vitesse, il est possible que vous n'ayez pas de carte réseau sans fil. Si Connexion réseau sans fil apparaît, vous disposez d'une carte réseau sans fil. Pour afficher les informations détaillées relatives à la carte réseau sans fil, procédez comme suit : 1 Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur Connexion réseau sans fil. 2 Cliquez sur Propriétés. La fenêtre Propriétés de la connexion réseau sans fil apparaît. Le nom et le numéro de modèle de la carte réseau sans fil sont répertoriés dans l'onglet Général. REMARQUE : Si votre ordinateur est configuré sur l'option de menu Démarrer classique, vous pouvez afficher les connexions réseau en cliquant sur le bouton Démarrer, en pointant sur Paramètres et en sélectionnant Connexions réseau. Si Connexion réseau sans fil n'apparaît pas, il est possible que vous n'ayez pas de carte réseau sans fil. Configuration de la commande de votre ordinateur La confirmation de la commande, que vous avez reçue au moment de votre commande, répertorie le matériel et les logiciels fournis avec votre ordinateur. Configuration d'un nouveau WLAN Connexion d'un routeur sans fil et d'un modem large bande 1 Contactez votre fournisseur d'accès Internet (FAI) pour obtenir des informations précises sur les exigences relatives à la connexion de votre modem large bande. 2 Assurez-vous d'avoir un accès Internet câblé par le biais de votre modem large bande avant d'essayer de configurer une connexion Internet sans fil. Reportez-vous à la section «Connexion physique à un réseau ou à un modem large bande» à la page 77. 3 Installez les logiciels requis pour votre routeur sans fil. Un CD d'installation vous a été fourni avec le routeur sans fil. En règle générale, ce type de CD contient des informations sur l'installation et le dépannage. Installez le logiciel requis conformément aux instructions du fabricant. 4 Arrêtez votre ordinateur et tout autre ordinateur fonctionnant sans fil à proximité par le biais du menu Démarrer. 5 Débranchez le câble d'alimentation de votre modem large bande de la prise secteur. 6 Débranchez le câble de réseau de l'ordinateur et du modem. REMARQUE : Patientez au moins 5 minutes, une fois votre modem large bande déconnecté avant de continuer de configurer le réseau. 7 Débranchez le câble d'adaptateur CA de votre routeur sans fil, afin d'avoir l'assurance que le routeur n'est plus alimenté. 8 Branchez un câble de réseau sur le connecteur réseau (RJ-45) du modem large bande non alimenté80 Configuration d'un réseau domestique et d'un réseau d'entreprise 9 Connectez l'autre extrémité du câble de réseau sur le connecteur réseau (RJ-45) Internet du routeur sans fil non alimenté. 10 Veillez à ce qu'aucun câble de réseau ou USB (hormis le câble de réseau reliant le modem et le routeur sans fil) n'est relié au modem large bande. REMARQUE : Redémarrez les périphériques sans fil dans l'ordre décrit ci-dessous pour empêcher toute défaillance de connexion potentielle. 11 Mettez UNIQUEMENT le modem large bande sous tension et attendez au moins 2 minutes qu'il se stabilise. Au bout de 2 minutes, passez à l'étape 12. 12 Mettez le routeur sans fil sous tension et attendez au moins 2 minutes qu'il se stabilise. Au bout de 2 minutes, passez à l'étape 13. 13 Démarrez l'ordinateur et attendez que la procédure d'amorçage soit terminée. 14 Consultez la documentation accompagnant le routeur sans fil pour exécuter les actions suivantes et configurer le routeur sans fil : • Établir la communication entre l'ordinateur et le routeur sans fil. • Configurer le routeur sans fil pour communiquer avec le routeur large bande. • Recherchez le nom de diffusion du routeur sans fil. Il est également fait référence à ce nom sous les termes techniques Identifiant d'ensemble de service (SSID) ou nom du réseau. 15 Au besoin, configurez votre carte réseau sans fil pour la connecter au réseau sans fil. Reportez-vous à la section «Connexion à un réseau local sans fil» à la page 80. Connexion à un réseau local sans fil REMARQUE : Avant de vous connecter à un WLAN, vérifiez que vous avez observé les instructions qui figurent dans la section «Réseau local sans fil (WLAN)» à la page 78. REMARQUE : Les instructions de mise en réseau suivantes ne s'appliquent pas aux cartes internes dotées de la technologie sans fil Bluetooth® ni aux périphériques portables. Cette section propose des procédures générales de connexion à un réseau via la technologie sans fil. Les noms de réseau spécifiques et les détails relatifs à la configuration varient. Reportez-vous à la section «Réseau local sans fil (WLAN)» à la page 78 pour plus d'informations sur la manière de préparer la connexion d'un ordinateur à un réseau WLAN. Votre carte réseau sans fil doit être dotée du logiciel et des pilotes appropriés pour se connecter à un réseau. Le logiciel est déjà installé. REMARQUE : S'il a été supprimé ou endommagé, suivez les instructions fournies dans la documentation utilisateur de votre carte réseau sans fil. Vérifiez le type de carte réseau sans fil installée sur votre ordinateur, puis recherchez son nom sur le site Web de support de Dell à l'adresse suivante : support.dell.com. Pour plus d'informations sur le type de carte réseau sans fil installée sur votre ordinateur, reportez-vous à la section «Contrôle de votre carte réseau sans fil» à la page 78.Configuration d'un réseau domestique et d'un réseau d'entreprise 81 Détermination du Gestionnaire de périphériques réseau sans fil En fonction du logiciel installé sur votre ordinateur, différents utilitaires de configuration sans fil peuvent prendre en charge les périphériques réseau : • L'utilitaire client de la carte réseau sans fil • Le système d'exploitation de Windows XP Pour déterminer l'utilitaire de configuration sans fil qui gère la carte réseau sans fil, procédez comme suit : 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Paramètres, puis cliquez sur Panneau de configuration. 2 Double-cliquez sur Connexions réseau. 3 Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône Connexion réseau sans fil, puis cliquez sur Afficher les réseaux sans fil disponibles. Si la fenêtre Choose a wireless network (Choisir un réseau sans fil) indique Windows cannot configure this connection, (Windows ne peut pas configurer cette connexion), l'utilitaire client de la carte réseau sans fil gère la carte réseau sans fil. Si la fenêtre Choose a wireless network (Choisir un réseau sans fil) indique Click an item in the list below to connect to a wireless network in range or to get more information (Cliquer sur un élément de la liste ci-dessous pour se connecter à un réseau sans fil dans la zone ou obtenir plus d'informations), le système d'exploitation Windows XP gère la carte réseau sans fil. Pour plus d'informations sur l'utilitaire de configuration sans fil installé sur votre ordinateur, consultez la documentation réseau sans fil dans le Centre d'aide et de support de Windows. Pour accéder au Centre d'aide et de support : 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Aide et support. 2 Sous Choisir une rubrique d'aide, cliquez sur Dell User and System Guides (Guides d'utilisation du système de Dell). 3 Sous Guides des périphériques, sélectionnez la documentation de votre carte réseau sans fil. Fin de la connexion au réseau WLAN Lorsque vous mettez votre ordinateur sous tension et qu'un réseau est détecté dans la zone pour laquelle votre ordinateur n'est pas configuré, un message contextuel apparaît à côté de l'icône réseau de la barre d'état système (située dans le coin inférieur droit du bureau Windows). Observez les instructions fournies dans les invites de l'utilitaire qui s'affichent à l'écran. Après avoir configuré votre ordinateur pour le réseau sans fil sélectionné, un autre message contextuel vous indique que l'ordinateur est connecté à ce réseau. Dès lors, lorsque vous vous connectez à votre ordinateur dans la zone du réseau sans fil sélectionné, le même message contextuel vous indique la connexion au réseau sans fil. REMARQUE : Si vous sélectionnez un réseau sécurisé, vous devez saisir une clé WEP ou WPA à l'invite. Les paramètres de sécurité du réseau sont uniques à votre réseau. Dell ne peut pas vous fournir ces informations. REMARQUE : La connexion au réseau peut prendre 1 minute. 82 Configuration d'un réseau domestique et d'un réseau d'entreprise Activation/désactivation de la carte réseau sans fil REMARQUE : Si vous ne parvenez pas à vous connecter à un réseau sans fil, vérifiez que vous disposez de tous les éléments nécessaires à la création d'un réseau WLAN (reportez-vous à la section «Éléments requis pour établir une connexion WLAN» à la page 78), puis vérifiez que votre carte réseau sans fil est bien activée en appuyant sur . Vous pouvez activer/désactiver la fonction de mise en réseau sans fil de votre ordinateur en appuyant sur la combinaison de touches . Si la fonction de mise en réseau sans fil est activée, appuyez sur pour la désactiver. Si la fonction de mise en réseau sans fil est désactivée, appuyez sur pour l'activer. Surveillance de l'état de la carte réseau sans fil via Dell™ QuickSet L'indicateur d'activité sans fil facilite la surveillance de l'état des périphériques sans fil de votre ordinateur. Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône Dell QuickSet de la barre des tâches pour sélectionner ou désélectionner Indicateur d'activité sans fil pour activer ou désactiver cet indicateur. L'indicateur d'activité sans fil indique si les périphériques sans fil intégrés à l'ordinateur sont activés ou désactivés. Lorsque vous activez ou désactivez la fonction de mise en réseau sans fil, l'indicateur d'activité sans fil affiche le nouvel état. Pour plus d'informations sur l'indicateur d'activité sans fil, consultez le fichier d'aide sur Dell QuickSet. Pour des informations sur QuickSet et la manière d'accéder au fichier d'aide de Dell QuickSet, reportezvous à la section «Fonctions Dell™ QuickSet» à la page 49. Réseau large bande mobile ou étendu sans fil De même qu'un WLAN, un réseau large bande mobile (ou WWAN) regroupe des ordinateurs interconnectés qui communiquent entre eux par le biais d'une technologie sans fil. Toutefois, un réseau large bande mobile utilise la technologie cellulaire et offre par conséquent un accès Internet dans toutes les zones de desserte du service de téléphonie cellulaire. Votre ordinateur peut maintenir la connexion réseau large bande mobile quelle que soit sa localisation physique, tant qu'il demeure dans la zone de desserte de votre fournisseur de services cellulaires. Éléments nécessaires pour établir une connexion réseau large bande mobile Pour établir une connexion réseau large bande mobile, vous avez besoin des éléments suivants : • Une carte large bande mobile ExpressCard REMARQUE : Pour des informations sur l'utilisation des cartes ExpressCard, reportez-vous à la section «Cartes ExpressCard» à la page 71. Reportez-vous également au Guide de démarrage rapide fourni avec votre carte ExpressCard. • Une carte large bande mobile ExpressCard activée ou le module d'identité d'abonné (SIM) activé de votre fournisseur de servicesConfiguration d'un réseau domestique et d'un réseau d'entreprise 83 • L'utilitaire Dell Mobile Broadband Card Utility (cet utilitaire est déjà installé sur votre ordinateur si vous avez acheté la carte en même temps que votre ordinateur ou se trouve sur le CD fourni avec la carte si vous avez acheté celle-ci séparément) Si l'utilitaire est endommagé ou supprimé de votre ordinateur, reportez-vous au guide d'utilisation de l'utilitaire Dell Mobile Broadband Card Utility pour obtenir des instructions. Ce guide d'utilisation est accessible par le Centre d'aide et de support de Windows (il se trouve également sur CD fourni avec votre carte si vous avez acheté celle-ci séparément). Pour accéder au Centre d'aide et de support, reportez-vous à la section «Centre d'aide et de support de Windows» à la page 13. Vérification de votre carte large bande mobile Selon vos sélections lors de son achat, votre ordinateur est doté de différentes configurations. Pour déterminer la configuration de votre ordinateur, reportez-vous aux éléments ci-dessous : • La confirmation de votre commande • Centre d'aide et de support Microsoft® Windows® Pour vérifier votre carte large bande mobile dans le Centre d'aide et de support : 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Aide et support. 2 Sous Choisissez une tâche, cliquez sur Utiliser les Outils pour afficher des informations sur votre ordinateur et diagnostiquer les problèmes. 3 Sous Outils, cliquez sur Informations sur le poste de travail, puis sur Rechercher des informations concernant le matériel installé sur cet ordinateur. L'écran Informations sur le poste de travail - Matériel présente le type de carte large bande mobile installée sur votre ordinateur, de même que d'autres composants matériels. REMARQUE : La carte large bande mobile est répertoriée sous Modems. Connexion à un réseau large bande mobile REMARQUE : Ces instructions s'appliquent uniquement aux cartes large bande mobile ExpressCard. Elles ne s'appliquent pas aux cartes internes dotées d'une technologie sans fil. REMARQUE : Avant de vous connecter à Internet, vous devez désactiver le service large bande mobile par le biais de votre prestataire de services cellulaires. Pour obtenir des instructions et de plus amples informations sur l'utilisation de l'utilitaire Dell Mobile Broadband Card Utility, reportez-vous au guide d'utilisation accessible à partir du Centre d'aide et de support de Windows. Pour accéder au Centre d'aide et de support, reportez-vous à la section «Centre d'aide et de support de Windows» à la page 13. Le guide d'utilisation est également disponible sur le site Web de support de Dell à l'adresse support.dell.com et sur le CD fourni avec votre carte large bande mobile si vous avez acheté la carte séparément de l'ordinateur. Votre carte large mobile ExpressCard requiert l'utilitaire Dell Mobile Broadband Card Utility pour la connexion au réseau de votre fournisseur de services. Cet utilitaire est déjà installé si vous avez commandé votre carte large bande mobile ExpressCard en même temps que votre ordinateur. Pour des informations sur cet utilitaire, reportez-vous au Guide d'utilisation de l'utilitaire Dell Mobile Broadband Card Utility, accessible à partir du Centre d'aide et de support de Windows ou via le CD fourni avec votre carte.84 Configuration d'un réseau domestique et d'un réseau d'entreprise L'utilitaire des cartes large bande mobile Dell permet d'établir et de gérer une connexion réseau large bande mobile à Internet : 1 Cliquez sur l'icône de l'utilitaire Dell Mobile Broadband Card Utility, , située sur le bureau Windows, pour exécuter l'utilitaire. 2 Cliquez sur Connecter. REMARQUE : Le bouton Connecter se transforme en bouton Déconnecter. 3 Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent pour gérer la connexion réseau avec l'utilitaire. OU 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Tous les programmes→ Sans fil Dell. 2 Cliquez sur Large bande sans fil Dell et suivez les instructions qui s'affichent. REMARQUE : Si vous ne pouvez pas vous connecter au réseau large bande mobile, vérifiez que vous disposez de tous les composants nécessaires à une connexion large bande mobile. Reportez-vous à la section «Éléments nécessaires pour établir une connexion réseau large bande mobile» à la page 82. REMARQUE : Pour obtenir une aide supplémentaire, reportez-vous au Guide d'utilisation de l'utilitaire Dell Mobile Broadband Card Utility, accessible à partir du Centre d'aide et de support de Windows ou via le CD fourni avec votre carte. Pare-feu de connexion Internet Le pare-feu de connexion Internet assure une protection de base contre tout accès non autorisé à l'ordinateur lorsque celui-ci est connecté à Internet. Le pare-feu est automatiquement activé lorsque vous exécutez l'Assistant Configuration réseau. Lorsque le pare-feu est activé pour une connexion réseau, son icône apparaît avec un arrière-plan rouge dans la section Connexions réseau du panneau de configuration. Notez que l'activation du pare-feu de connexion Internet ne dispense pas du besoin d'avoir un logiciel de protection antivirus. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous au Centre d'aide et de support du système d'exploitation Microsoft® Window® XP. Pour accéder au Centre d'aide et de support, reportez-vous à la section «Centre d'aide et de support de Windows» à la page 13.Sécurisation de votre ordinateur 85 Sécurisation de votre ordinateur Verrou du câble de sécurité REMARQUE : Votre ordinateur n'est pas livré avec un verrou de câble de sécurité. Un verrou de câble de sécurité est un dispositif antivol disponible dans le commerce. Pour utiliser le verrou, fixez-le à l'emplacement pour câble de sécurité de votre ordinateur Dell™. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous aux instructions fournies avec le dispositif. AVIS : Avant d'acheter un dispositif antivol, vérifiez qu'il est compatible avec l'emplacement pour câble de sécurité de votre ordinateur. Mots de passe Les mots de passe évitent tout accès non autorisé à votre ordinateur. Dès que vous démarrez votre ordinateur, vous devez affecter un mot de passe principal à l'invite. Si aucun mot de passe n'est entré dans les deux minutes qui suivent, l'ordinateur revient à l'état de fonctionnement précédent. En cas d'utilisation de mots de passe, respectez les consignes suivantes : • Choisissez un mot de passe dont vous vous souviendrez mais qui ne soit pas facile à deviner. Par exemple, n'utilisez pas les noms des membres de votre famille ni les noms d'animaux dans vos mots de passe.86 Sécurisation de votre ordinateur • Évitez de noter votre mot de passe sur un papier. Si vous notez vos mots de passe sur un papier, assurez-vous qu'il sont stockés dans un lieu sûr. • Ne partagez pas votre mot de passe avec quelqu'un. • Assurez-vous que personne ne vous regarde lorsque vous saisissez votre mot de passe. AVIS : Les mots de passe affectent un haut niveau de sécurité aux données de votre ordinateur ou de votre disque dur. Cependant, votre système n'est pas à l'abri de personnes mal intentionnées. Si vous avez besoin d'une sécurité plus accrue, achetez et utilisez d'autres systèmes de protection, comme des cartes à puce, des programmes de cryptage de données ou des cartes PC comportant des fonctions de cryptage. Pour ajouter ou modifier des mots de passe, allez dans Panneau de configuration, puis Comptes d'utilisateurs. Si vous avez oublié l'un de vos mots de passe, contactez Dell (reportez-vous à la section «Contacter Dell» à la page 157. Pour votre protection, l'équipe du support technique de Dell vous demandera de prouver votre identité pour que seules les personnes autorisées puissent utiliser votre ordinateur. Logiciel de suivi de l'ordinateur Un logiciel de suivi informatique peut vous permettre de localiser votre ordinateur s'il est perdu ou volé. Le logiciel est disponible en option et peut être acquis lors de l'achat de votre ordinateur Dell™. Vous pouvez également contacter votre commercial Dell pour plus d'informations sur cette fonction de sécurité. REMARQUE : Il se peut que le logiciel de suivi ne soit pas disponible dans tous les pays. REMARQUE : Si vous disposez de ce logiciel, vous devez contacter l'entreprise en charge du service de suivi pour signaler la disparition de votre ordinateur en cas de perte ou de vol de ce dernier. En cas de perte ou de vol de votre ordinateur • Appelez les autorités compétentes pour signaler la perte ou le vol. Incluez le numéro de service dans votre description de l'ordinateur. Demandez à ce qu'un numéro soit affecté à cette affaire et relevez ce numéro avec le nom, l'adresse et le numéro de téléphone du bureau de police. Si possible, obtenez le nom de l'agent chargé de l'affaire. REMARQUE : Si vous savez où a eu lieu le vol ou la perte de l'ordinateur, contactez les autorités compétentes de la région. Si vous ne connaissez pas cet endroit, appelez un bureau de police de votre lieu de résidence. • Si l'ordinateur appartient à une société, avertissez le bureau de sécurité de la société. • Contactez le service clientèle de Dell pour signaler la perte de l'ordinateur. Fournissez le numéro de service de l'ordinateur, le numéro de dossier et le nom, l'adresse et le numéro de téléphone du bureau de police auquel vous avez signalé le vol. Si possible, donnez le nom de l'agent chargé de l'affaire. Le représentant du service clientèle de Dell enregistrera votre rapport sous le numéro de service de l'ordinateur et enregistrera l'ordinateur comme manquant ou volé. Si quelqu'un appelle Dell pour obtenir de l'assistance technique et donne votre numéro de service, l'ordinateur sera automatiquement identifié comme le vôtre. Le représentant essaiera d'obtenir le numéro de téléphone et l'adresse de son correspondant. Dell contactera alors le bureau de police où vous avez signalé la disparition de l'ordinateur.Dépannage 87 Dépannage Service Dell Technical Update Le service Dell Technical Update fournit une notification proactive par courrier électronique des mises à jour matérielles et logicielles pour votre ordinateur. Ce service est gratuit. En outre, vous pouvez personnaliser son contenu, son format et la fréquence à laquelle vous recevez des notifications. Pour vous abonner au service Dell Technical Update, visitez le site Web suivant : support.dell.com/technicalupdate. Dell Diagnostics PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. Quand utiliser Dell Diagnostics Si des problèmes surviennent lors de l'utilisation de votre ordinateur, effectuez les vérifications indiquées dans la section «Blocages et problèmes logiciels» à la page 100 et exécutez Dell Diagnostics avant de contacter Dell pour obtenir une assistance technique. AVIS : Dell Diagnostics ne fonctionne que sur les ordinateurs Dell™. REMARQUE : Le CD Drivers and Utilities est en option et n'est pas obligatoirement expédié avec tous les ordinateurs. Démarrez Dell Diagnostics à partir de votre disque dur ou du CD Drivers and Utilities (également appelé CD ResourceCD). Démarrage de Dell Diagnostics à partir du disque dur Dell Diagnostics se trouve dans une partition cachée (utilitaire de diagnostics) de votre disque dur. REMARQUE : Si aucune image ne s'affiche sur l'écran, contactez Dell (reportez-vous à la section «Contacter Dell» à la page 157). Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur, lisez les consignes de sécurité figurant dans le Guide d'information sur le produit. 1 Éteignez l'ordinateur. 2 Si l'ordinateur est actuellement connecté (amarré) à une station d'accueil, déconnectez-le. Pour obtenir des instructions, consultez la documentation qui accompagne la station d'accueil. 3 Connectez l'ordinateur à une prise secteur.88 Dépannage 4 Il existe deux manières de lancer Diagnostics : a Allumez l'ordinateur. Lorsque le logo DELL™ apparaît, appuyez immédiatement sur . Sélectionnez Diagnostics à partir du menu de démarrage et appuyez sur . REMARQUE : Si vous attendez trop longtemps et que le logo du système d'exploitation apparaît, patientez jusqu'à ce que le bureau de Microsoft® Windows® s'affiche. Éteignez alors votre ordinateur et faites une nouvelle tentative. b Appuyez sur la touche et maintenez-la enfoncée lors de la mise sous tension du système. REMARQUE : Si un message indique qu'aucune partition de diagnostic n'a été trouvée, exécutez Dell Diagnostics à partir du CD Drivers and Utilities. L'ordinateur lance l'évaluation du système de préamorçage avec une série de diagnostics intégrés qui effectue un test préalable de la carte système, du clavier, du disque dur et de l'écran. • Répondez à toutes les questions qui s'affichent pendant l'évaluation. • Si une défaillance de composant est détectée, l'ordinateur s'arrête et émet un signal sonore. Pour arrêter l'évaluation et redémarrer l'ordinateur, appuyez sur <Échap> ; pour passer au test suivant, appuyez sur ; pour retester le composant défectueux, appuyez sur . • Si des défaillances sont détectées lors de l'évaluation de préamorçage du système, notez les codes d'erreur et contactez Dell (reportez-vous à la section «Contacter Dell» à la page 157). Si l'évaluation de préamorçage du système se déroule sans problème, vous recevez le message Booting Dell Diagnostic Utility Partition. Press any key to continue (Amorçage de la partition de l'utilitaire Dell Diagnostics. Appuyez sur une touche pour continuer). 5 Appuyez sur une touche pour démarrer Dell Diagnostics à partir de la partition de diagnostics du disque dur. Démarrage de Dell Diagnostics à partir du CD Drivers and Utilities 1 Insérez le CD Drivers and Utilities. 2 Arrêtez, puis redémarrez l'ordinateur. Lorsque le logo DELL apparaît, appuyez immédiatement sur . Si vous attendez trop longtemps et que le logo Windows apparaît, attendez encore jusqu'à ce que le bureau Windows s'affiche. Éteignez alors votre ordinateur et faites une nouvelle tentative. REMARQUE : Les étapes suivantes modifient la séquence d'amorçage pour une seule exécution. Au démarrage suivant, l'ordinateur démarre en fonction des périphériques définis dans le programme de configuration du système. 3 Lorsque la liste des périphériques d'amorçage s'affiche, sélectionnez Lecteur de CD/DVD/CD-RW et appuyez sur . 4 Sélectionnez l'option Boot from CD-ROM (Amorcer à partir du CD-ROM) dans le menu qui s'affiche, puis appuyez sur . 5 Tapez 1 pour démarrer le menu, puis appuyez sur pour continuer.Dépannage 89 6 Sélectionnez Run Dell 32-bit Diagnostics (Exécuter Dell Diagnostics 32 bits) dans la liste numérotée. Si plusieurs versions sont répertoriées, sélectionnez la version appropriée à votre ordinateur. 7 Lorsque le menu principal de Dell Diagnostics s'affiche, sélectionnez le test à effectuer. Menu principal de Dell Diagnostics 1 Une fois Dell Diagnostics chargé et lorsque l'écran du menu principal s'affiche, cliquez sur le bouton de l'option que vous souhaitez. 2 Si un problème survient pendant un test, un message indiquant le code d'erreur et une description du problème s'affiche. Notez le code d'erreur et la description du problème et suivez les instructions à l'écran. Si vous ne pouvez pas résoudre le problème, contactez Dell. Reportez-vous à la section «Contacter Dell» à la page 157. REMARQUE : Le numéro de service de votre ordinateur est situé en haut de chaque écran de test. Lorsque vous contacterez le support technique de Dell, ce numéro de service vous sera demandé. 3 Si vous exécutez un test à partir de l'option Test personnalisé ou Arborescence des symptômes, cliquez sur l'onglet approprié décrit dans le tableau suivant pour obtenir plus d'informations. Option Fonction Express Test (Test rapide) Exécute un test rapide des périphériques. Ce test dure généralement entre 10 et 20 minutes et n'exige pas d'action de votre part. Effectuez tout d'abord un Test rapide pour trouver le problème plus rapidement. Extended Test (Test approfondi) Exécute un test approfondi des périphériques. En règle générale, ce test prend une heure ou plus et nécessite que vous répondiez régulièrement à des questions. Custom Test (Test personnalisé) Teste un périphérique spécifique. Vous pouvez personnaliser les tests à exécuter. Symptom Tree (Arborescence des symptômes) Répertorie les symptômes couramment rencontrés et permet de sélectionner un test en fonction du symptôme du problème. Onglet Fonction Résultats Affiche les résultats du test et les conditions d'erreur rencontrées. Erreurs Affiche les conditions d'erreur rencontrées, les codes d'erreur et la description du problème. Aide Décrit le test et peut indiquer les conditions requises pour exécuter le test.90 Dépannage 4 Une fois les tests effectués, si vous exécutez Dell Diagnostics à partir du CD Drivers and Utilities, retirez le CD. 5 Une fois les tests terminés, fermez l'écran de test pour revenir à l'écran de menu principal. Pour quitter Dell Diagnostics et redémarrer l'ordinateur, fermez l'écran de menu principal. Utilitaire de support de Dell L'utilitaire de support de Dell est installé sur votre ordinateur et accessible en cliquant sur l'icône de support de Dell dans la barre des tâches ou à partir du bouton Démarrer. Cet utilitaire vous permet d'exécuter les actions suivantes : obtenir des informations de support automatique, effectuer des mises à jour et des balayages de votre environnement informatique pour en vérifier l'état. Accès à l'utilitaire de support de Dell Accédez à l'utilitaire de support de Dell à partir de l'icône de support de Dell dans la barre des tâches ou à partir du menu Démarrer. Si l'icône de support de Dell n'apparaît pas dans la barre des tâches, procédez comme suit : 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer et pointez sur Programmes. 2 Cliquez sur Support de Dell, puis pointez sur Paramètres du support de Dell. 3 Assurez-vous que l'option Afficher l'icône dans la barre des tâches est sélectionnée. REMARQUE : Si l'utilitaire de support de Dell n'est pas disponible depuis le menu Démarrer, accédez au site support.dell.com et téléchargez le logiciel. L'utilitaire de support de Dell est personnalisé pour votre environnement informatique. L'icône de support de Dell figurant dans la barre des tâches offre un fonctionnement différent lorsque vous cliquez, double-cliquez ou cliquez dessus avec le bouton droit. Configuration Affiche la configuration matérielle du périphérique sélectionné. Dell Diagnostics obtient vos informations de configuration de tous les périphériques à partir du programme de configuration du système, de la mémoire et de divers tests internes, et les affiche dans la liste des périphériques située dans le volet gauche de l'écran. La liste des périphériques risque de ne pas afficher les noms de tous les composants installés sur votre ordinateur ou de tous les périphériques reliés à celui-ci. Paramètres Vous permet de personnaliser le test en modifiant ses paramètres. Onglet FonctionDépannage 91 Clic sur l'icône de support de Dell Cliquez ou cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône pour exécuter les tâches suivantes : • Vérifier votre environnement informatique. • Afficher les paramètres de l'utilitaire de support de Dell. • Accéder au fichier d'aide de l'utilitaire de support de Dell. • Afficher les questions les plus fréquemment posées. • En savoir plus sur l'utilitaire de support de Dell. • Désactiver l'utilitaire de support de Dell. Double-clic sur l'icône de support de Dell Double-cliquez sur l'icône pour contrôler manuellement votre environnement informatique, afficher les questions fréquemment posées, accéder aux fichiers d'aide de l'utilitaire de support de Dell et afficher les paramètres de support de Dell. Pour plus d'informations sur l'utilitaire de support de Dell, cliquez sur le point d'interrogation (?) situé en haut de l'écran Dell Support (Support de Dell). Problèmes liés aux lecteurs PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. VÉRIFIEZ QUE MICROSOFT® WINDOWS® RECONNAÎT L E LECTEUR — Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Poste de travail. Si le lecteur de disquette, de CD ou de DVD ne figure pas dans la liste, effectuez un balayage complet avec votre logiciel antivirus à la recherche de virus et pour les supprimer. Les virus empêchent parfois Windows de reconnaître le lecteur. TESTEZ L E LECTEUR — • Insérez une autre disquette, un autre CD ou un autre DVD pour éliminer la possibilité que le premier support soit défectueux. • Insérez une disquette ou un CD amorçable et redémarrez votre ordinateur. NETTOYEZ L E LECTEUR O U L E DISQUE — Reportez-vous à la section «Nettoyage de votre ordinateur» à la page 153. ASSUREZ-VOUS QUE L E CD EST CORRECTEMENT POSITIONNÉ SUR L'AXE VÉRIFIEZ LES CONNEXIONS DES CÂBLES VÉRIFIEZ LES INCOMPATIBILITÉS MATÉRIELLES — Reportez-vous à la section «Résolution des incompatibilités logicielles et matérielles» à la page 112. EXÉCUTEZ DELL DIAGNOSTICS — Reportez-vous à la section «Dell Diagnostics» à la page 87.92 Dépannage Problèmes liés au lecteur de CD et de DVD REMARQUE : Il peut arriver que le lecteur de CD ou de DVD haute vitesse vibre et produise du bruit. Cela ne signifie en aucun cas que le lecteur ou le CD/DVD est défectueux. REMARQUE : En raison des différentes régions du monde entier et des différents formats de disque, certains titres DVD ne fonctionnent pas dans certains lecteurs DVD. Problèmes d'écriture sur un lecteur de CD/DVD-RW FERMEZ TOUS LES PROGRAMMES — Le lecteur de CD/DVD-RW doit recevoir un flux régulier de données lors de l'écriture. Si ce flux est interrompu, une erreur se produit. Fermez tous les programmes avant de lancer l'écriture sur le CD/DVD-RW. DÉSACTIVEZ L E MODE VEILLE DANS WINDOWS AVANT D E LANCER L'ÉCRITURE SUR UN CD/DVD-RW — Reportez-vous à la section «Mode Veille» à la page 46 ou recherchez le mot-clé veille dans le Centre d'aide et de support de Windows pour des informations sur les modes d'économie d'énergie. RÉDUISEZ LA VITESSE D E GRAVURE — Consultez les fichiers d'aide de votre logiciel de création de CD ou de DVD. Si vous ne parvenez pas à éjecter le plateau du lecteur de CD, de CD-RW, de DVD ou de DVD+RW 1 Vérifiez que l'ordinateur est éteint. 2 Redressez un trombone et insérez l'une de ses extrémités dans le trou d'éjection situé à l'avant du lecteur ; poussez ensuite fermement jusqu'à ce que le plateau soit partiellement éjecté. 3 Retirez le plateau avec précaution jusqu'à ce qu'il s'arrête. Si vous entendez un bruit grinçant ou un raclement inhabituel • Assurez-vous que ce son n'est pas émis par un programme en cours d'exécution. • Assurez-vous que le disque est correctement inséré. Problèmes liés au disque dur LAISSEZ L'ORDINATEUR REFROIDIR AVANT D E L'ALLUMER — Un disque dur trop chaud peut empêcher le fonctionnement du système d'exploitation. Laissez l'ordinateur s'acclimater à la température ambiante avant de l'allumer. LANCEZ LA COMMANDE CHECK DISK (VÉRIFIER DISQUE) — 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Poste de travail. 2 Avec le bouton droit, cliquez sur Disque local C:. 3 Cliquez sur Propriétés. 4 Cliquez sur l'onglet Outils. 5 Sous Détection d'erreurs, cliquez sur Vérifier maintenant. 6 Cliquez sur Rechercher et tenter une récupération des secteurs défectueux. 7 Cliquez sur Démarrer.Dépannage 93 Problèmes liés à la messagerie électronique, au modem ou à Internet PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. REMARQUE : Connectez le modem uniquement à une prise téléphonique analogique. Le modem ne fonctionne pas s'il est connecté à un réseau téléphonique numérique. VÉRIFIEZ LES PARAMÈTRES D E SÉCURITÉ D E MICROSOFT OUTLOOK® EXPRESS — Si vous n'arrivez pas à ouvrir les pièces jointes à vos messages électroniques : 1 Dans Outlook Express, cliquez sur Outils, sur Options, puis sur Sécurité. 2 Cliquez sur Interdire les pièces jointes pour supprimer la coche. VÉRIFIEZ L A CONNEXION D U CORDON TÉLÉPHONIQUE INSPECTEZ L A PRISE TÉLÉPHONIQUE CONNEXION DIRECTE D U MODEM À UNE PRISE TÉLÉPHONIQUE MURALE UTILISEZ UNE AUTRE LIGNE TÉLÉPHONIQUE— • Assurez-vous que la ligne téléphonique est connectée à la prise jack du modem. (La prise jack comporte une étiquette verte ou bien une icône en forme de connecteur apparaît à côté de cette prise.) • Insérez le connecteur de ligne téléphonique dans le modem jusqu'à ce que vous entendiez un déclic. • Déconnectez la ligne téléphonique du modem et connectez-la à un téléphone. Attendez la tonalité. • Si d'autres appareils téléphoniques partagent cette ligne, par exemple un répondeur téléphonique, un télécopieur, un parasurtenseur ou un séparateur de ligne, contournez-les et connectez le modem directement à la prise jack téléphonique murale. Si vous utilisez une ligne qui mesure au moins 3 m (10 pieds), essayez une ligne plus courte. EXÉCUTEZ LES DIAGNOSTICS ASSISTANT D U MODEM — Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Tous les programmes, puis cliquez sur Assistant du modem. Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran pour identifier et résoudre les problèmes de modem. (L'Assistant du modem n'est pas disponible sur certains ordinateurs.) VÉRIFIEZ QUE L E MODEM COMMUNIQUE AVEC WINDOWS — 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration. 2 Cliquez sur Imprimantes et autres périphériques. 3 Cliquez sur Options de modem et de téléphonie. 4 Cliquez sur l'onglet Modems. 5 Cliquez sur le port COM de votre modem. 6 Cliquez sur Propriétés, sur l'onglet Diagnostics, puis sur Interroger le modem pour vérifier que le modem communique avec Windows. Si toutes les commandes reçoivent des réponses, le modem fonctionne correctement.94 Dépannage VÉRIFIEZ QUE VOUS ÊTES CONNECTÉ À INTERNET — Assurez-vous que vous êtes bien abonné à un fournisseur d'accès Internet. Une fois le programme de messagerie électronique Outlook Express ouvert, cliquez sur Fichier. Si la case Travailler hors connexion est cochée, décochez-la, puis connectez-vous à Internet. Pour obtenir de l'aide, contactez votre fournisseur d'accès Internet. ANALYSEZ L'ORDINATEUR À L A RECHERCHE D E LOGICIELS ESPIONS — Si vous observez un ralentissement des performances de votre ordinateur, si des fenêtres publicitaires s'affichent fréquemment sur votre écran ou si vous avez des problèmes pour vous connecter sur Internet, votre ordinateur est peut-être infecté par un logiciel espion. Utilisez un programme antivirus qui inclut une protection contre les logiciels espions (une mise à niveau de votre programme sera peut-être nécessaire) afin d'analyser votre ordinateur et de supprimer les logiciels espions. Pour plus d'informations, allez sur le site support.dell.com et lancez une recherche à l'aide du mot-clé spyware (espion). Messages d'erreur PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. Si le message n'est pas répertorié, consultez la documentation du système d'exploitation ou du programme qui s'exécutait lorsque le message s'est affiché. AUXILIARY DEVICE FAILURE (ÉCHEC D'UN PÉRIPHÉRIQUE AUXILIAIRE) — La tablette tactile, la manette ou la souris externe présente peut-être une défaillance. Dans le cas d'une souris externe, vérifiez la connexion du câble. Activez l'option Dispositif de pointage dans le programme de configuration du système. Si le problème persiste, contactez Dell. Reportez-vous à la section «Contacter Dell» à la page 157. BA D COMMAND O R FILE NAME (COMMANDE O U NOM D E FICHIER INCORRECT) — Vérifiez que vous avez bien orthographié la commande, mis des espaces à bon escient et utilisé le chemin d'accès correct. CACHE DISABLED DUE T O FAILURE (CACHE DÉSACTIVÉ EN RAISON D'UNE PANNE) — Le cache interne principal du microprocesseur présente un dysfonctionnement. Contactez Dell. Reportez-vous à la section «Contacter Dell» à la page 157. CD DRIVE CONTROLLER FAILURE (ÉCHEC D U CONTRÔLEUR D U LECTEUR D E CD) — Le lecteur de CD ne répond pas aux commandes de l'ordinateur. Reportez-vous à la section «Utilitaire de support de Dell» à la page 90. DATA ERROR (ERREUR D E DONNÉES) — Le disque dur ne peut pas lire les données. Reportez-vous à la section «Utilitaire de support de Dell» à la page 90. DECREASING AVAILABLE MEMORY (MÉMOIRE DISPONIBLE RÉDUITE) — Un ou plusieurs modules de mémoire peuvent être défaillants ou mal fixés. Réinstallez les modules de mémoire et remplacez-les au besoin. Reportez-vous à la section «Mémoire» à la page 123. DISK C: FAILED INITIALIZATION (ÉCHEC D E L'INITIALISATION D U DISQUE C:) — L'initialisation du disque dur a échoué. Exécutez le groupe de tests des unités de disque dur dans Dell Diagnostics. Reportez-vous à la section «Dell Diagnostics» à la page 87. DRIVE NOT READY (LE LECTEUR N'EST PAS PRÊT) — Le fonctionnement requiert la présence d'un disque dur dans la baie pour pouvoir continuer. Installez une unité de disque dur dans la baie d'unité de disque dur. Reportez-vous à la section «Disque dur» à la page 121.Dépannage 95 ERREUR LORS D E L A LECTURE D E L A CARTE EXPRESSCARD — L'ordinateur ne peut pas identifier la carte ExpressCard. Remettez la carte en place ou essayez une carte ExpressCard. Reportez-vous à la section «Utilisation des cartes» à la page 71. EXTENDED MEMORY SIZE HAS CHANGED (LA TAILLE D E LA MÉMOIRE ÉTENDUE A CHANGÉ) — La quantité de mémoire enregistrée dans la mémoire vive rémanente (NVRAM) ne correspond pas à la mémoire installée sur l'ordinateur. Redémarrez l'ordinateur. Si l'erreur apparaît de nouveau, contactez Dell. Reportez-vous à la section «Contacter Dell» à la page 157. TH E FILE BEING COPIED I S TOO LARGE FOR THE DESTINATION DRIVE (LE FICHIER EN COURS D E COPIE EST TROP VOLUMINEUX POUR L E LECTEUR D E DESTINATION) — Le fichier que vous essayez de copier est trop volumineux pour le disque ou le disque est plein. Essayez de copier le fichier sur un autre disque ou utilisez un disque de capacité plus élevée. A FILENAME CANNOT CONTAIN ANY O F THE FOLLOWING CHARACTERS: (UN NOM D E FICHIER N E PEUT CONTENIR AUCUN DES CARACTÈRES SUIVANTS :) \ / : * ? “ < > | — N'utilisez pas ces caractères lorsque vous nommez un fichier. GATE A20 FAILURE (ÉCHEC D E L A PORTE A20) — Un module de mémoire est peut-être mal fixé. Réinstallez les modules de mémoire et remplacez-les au besoin. Reportez-vous à la section «Mémoire» à la page 123. GENERAL FAILURE (ERREUR GÉNÉRALE) — Le système d'exploitation ne peut pas exécuter la commande. Ce message est généralement suivi d'informations spécifiques—par exemple, Printer out of paper (L'imprimante manque de papier). Effectuez l'action corrective appropriée. HARD-DISK DRIVE CONFIGURATION ERROR (ERREUR D E CONFIGURATION D E L'UNITÉ D E DISQUE DUR) — L'ordinateur ne peut pas identifier le type d'unité. Éteignez l'ordinateur, retirez le disque dur (reportezvous à la section «Disque dur» à la page 121) et amorcez l'ordinateur depuis un CD. Éteignez ensuite l'ordinateur, réinstallez l'unité de disque dur et redémarrez. Exécutez les tests Hard-Disk Drive (Lecteur de disque dur) de Dell Diagnostics. Reportez-vous à la section «Dell Diagnostics» à la page 87. HARD-DISK DRIVE CONTROLLER FAILURE 0 (ÉCHEC D U CONTRÔLEUR D E DISQUE DUR 0) — L'unité de disque dur ne répond pas aux commandes de l'ordinateur. Éteignez l'ordinateur, retirez le disque dur (reportezvous à la section «Disque dur» à la page 121) et amorcez l'ordinateur depuis un CD. Éteignez ensuite l'ordinateur, réinstallez l'unité de disque dur et redémarrez. Si le problème persiste, faites une tentative avec une autre unité. Exécutez les tests Hard-Disk Drive (Lecteur de disque dur) de Dell Diagnostics. Reportez-vous à la section «Dell Diagnostics» à la page 87. HARD-DISK DRIVE FAILURE (ÉCHEC D E L'UNITÉ D E DISQUE DUR) — L'unité de disque dur ne répond pas aux commandes de l'ordinateur. Éteignez l'ordinateur, retirez le disque dur (reportez-vous à la section «Disque dur» à la page 121) et amorcez l'ordinateur depuis un CD. Éteignez ensuite l'ordinateur, réinstallez l'unité de disque dur et redémarrez. Si le problème persiste, faites une tentative avec une autre unité. Exécutez les tests Hard-Disk Drive (Lecteur de disque dur) de Dell Diagnostics. Reportez-vous à la section «Dell Diagnostics» à la page 87. HARD-DISK DRIVE READ FAILURE (ÉCHEC D E LECTURE D E L'UNITÉ D E DISQUE DUR) — L'unité de disque dur est peut-être défectueuse. Éteignez l'ordinateur, retirez le disque dur (reportez-vous à la section «Disque dur» à la page 121) et amorcez l'ordinateur depuis un CD. Éteignez ensuite l'ordinateur, réinstallez l'unité de disque dur et redémarrez. Si le problème persiste, faites une tentative avec une autre unité. Exécutez les tests Hard-Disk Drive (Lecteur de disque dur) de Dell Diagnostics. Reportez-vous à la section «Dell Diagnostics» à la page 87.96 Dépannage INSERT BOOTABLE MEDIA (INTRODUISEZ UN SUPPORT AMORÇABLE) — Le système d'exploitation tente de s'amorcer sur un CD non amorçable. Introduisez un CD amorçable. INVALID CONFIGURATION INFORMATION-PLEASE RUN SYSTEM SETUP PROGRAM (INFORMATIONS D E CONFIGURATION NON VALIDES, EXÉCUTEZ L E PROGRAMME D E CONFIGURATION D U SYSTÈME) — Les informations de configuration du système ne correspondent pas à la configuration matérielle. C'est après l'installation d'un module de mémoire que ce message est le plus susceptible d'apparaître. Corrigez les options appropriées dans le programme de configuration du système. Reportez-vous à la section «Utilisation du programme de configuration du système» à la page 151. KEYBOARD CLOCK LINE FAILURE (ÉCHEC D E LA LIGNE D E L'HORLOGE CLAVIER) — Pour les claviers externes, vérifiez la connexion du câble. Exécutez le test Keyboard Controller(Contrôleur du clavier) de Dell Diagnostics. Reportez-vous à la section «Dell Diagnostics» à la page 87. KEYBOARD CONTROLLER FAILURE (ÉCHEC D U CONTRÔLEUR D U CLAVIER) — Pour les claviers externes, vérifiez la connexion du câble. Redémarrez l'ordinateur et évitez de toucher le clavier ou la souris durant la procédure d'amorçage. Exécutez le test Keyboard Controller (Contrôleur du clavier) de Dell Diagnostics. Reportez-vous à la section «Dell Diagnostics» à la page 87. KEYBOARD DATA LINE FAILURE (ÉCHEC D E LA LIGNE D E DONNÉES D U CLAVIER) — Pour les claviers externes, vérifiez la connexion du câble. Exécutez le test Keyboard Controller (Contrôleur du clavier) de Dell Diagnostics. Reportez-vous à la section «Dell Diagnostics» à la page 87. KEYBOARD STUCK KEY FAILURE (TOUCHE D U CLAVIER BLOQUÉE) — Pour les pavés numériques et les claviers externes, vérifiez la connexion du câble. Redémarrez l'ordinateur et évitez de toucher le clavier ou les touches durant la procédure d'amorçage. Exécutez le test Stuck Key (Touche coincée) de Dell Diagnostics. Reportez-vous à la section «Dell Diagnostics» à la page 87. LICENSED CONTENT I S NOT ACCESSIBLE IN MEDIADIRECT (LE CONTENU SOUS LICENCE N'EST PAS ACCESSIBLE DANS MEDIADIRECT) — Dell MediaDirect™ ne peut pas vérifier les restrictions Digital Rights Management (DRM - Gestion des droits numériques) sur le fichier, le fichier ne peut par conséquent pas être lu. Reportez-vous à la section «Problèmes liés à Dell MediaDirect» à la page 101. MEMORY ADDRESS LINE FAILURE A T ADDRESS, READ VALUE EXPECTING VALUE (ÉCHEC D E LA LIGNE D'ADRESSE MÉMOIRE À CETTE ADRESSE, VALEUR LUE VALEUR ATTENDUE) — Un module de mémoire est peut-être défectueux ou mal fixé. Réinstallez les modules de mémoire et remplacez-les au besoin. Reportez-vous à la section «Mémoire» à la page 123. MEMORY ALLOCATION ERROR (ERREUR D'ALLOCATION D E MÉMOIRE) — Le logiciel que vous voulez utiliser est en conflit avec le système d'exploitation ou un autre programme ou utilitaire. Éteignez l'ordinateur, patientez 30 secondes, puis redémarrez-le. Essayez d’utiliser le programme de nouveau. Si le message d'erreur réapparaît, consultez la documentation du logiciel. MEMORY DATA LINE FAILURE A T ADDRESS, READ VALUE EXPECTING VALUE (ÉCHEC D E L A LIGNE D E DONNÉES À CETTE ADRESSE, VALEUR LUE VALEUR ATTENDUE) — Un module de mémoire est peut-être défectueux ou mal fixé. Réinstallez les modules de mémoire (reportez-vous à la section «Mémoire» à la page 123) et remplacez-les si nécessaire. MEMORY DOUBLE WORD LOGIC FAILURE A T ADDRESS, READ VALUE EXPECTING VALUE (ÉCHEC D E L A LOGIQUE DOUBLE MOT À CETTE ADRESSE, VALEUR LUE VALEUR ATTENDUE) — Un module de mémoire est peut-être défectueux ou mal fixé. Réinstallez les modules de mémoire (reportez-vous à la section «Mémoire» à la page 123) et remplacez-les si nécessaire.Dépannage 97 MEMORY ODD/EVEN LOGIC FAILURE A T ADDRESS, READ VALUE EXPECTING VALUE (ÉCHEC D E L A LOGIQUE PAIR/IMPAIR À CETTE ADRESSE, VALEUR LUE VALEUR ATTENDUE) — Un module de mémoire est peut-être défectueux ou mal fixé. Réinstallez les modules de mémoire (reportez-vous à la section «Mémoire» à la page 123) et remplacez-les si nécessaire. MEMORY WRITE/READ FAILURE A T ADDRESS, READ VALUE EXPECTING VALUE (ÉCHEC D E LECTURE/ÉCRITURE À CETTE ADRESSE, VALEUR LUE VALEUR ATTENDUE) — Un module de mémoire est peut-être défectueux ou mal fixé. Réinstallez les modules de mémoire (reportez-vous à la section «Mémoire» à la page 123) et remplacez-les si nécessaire. NO BOOT DEVICE AVAILABLE (AUCUN PÉRIPHÉRIQUE D'AMORÇAGE N'EST DISPONIBLE) — L'ordinateur ne peut pas trouver le disque dur. Si l'unité de disque dur est votre périphérique d'amorçage, assurez-vous qu'elle est installée, bien en place et partitionnée comme périphérique d'amorçage. NO BOOT SECTOR ON HARD DRIVE (AUCUN SECTEUR D'AMORÇAGE SUR L'UNITÉ D E DISQUE DUR) — Le système d'exploitation est peut-être endommagé. Contactez Dell. Reportez-vous à la section «Contacter Dell» à la page 157. NO TIMER TICK INTERRUPT (AUCUNE INTERRUPTION D E TIC D'HORLOGE) — Une puce de la carte système présente peut-être un dysfonctionnement. Exécutez le groupe de tests System Set (Ensemble du système) de Dell Diagnostics. Reportez-vous à la section «Dell Diagnostics» à la page 87. NO T ENOUGH MEMORY O R RESOURCES. EXIT SOME PROGRAMS AND TRY AGAIN (MÉMOIRE O U RESSOURCES INSUFFISANTES. FERMEZ DES PROGRAMMES E T RÉESSAYEZ) — Trop d'applications sont ouvertes. Fermez toutes les fenêtres et ouvrez le programme de votre choix. OPERATING SYSTEM NOT FOUND (SYSTÈME D'EXPLOITATION INTROUVABLE) — Réinstallez le disque dur (reportez-vous à la section «Disque dur» à la page 121). Si le problème persiste, contactez Dell. Reportez-vous à la section «Contacter Dell» à la page 157. OPTIONAL ROM BAD CHECKSUM (MAUVAIS TOTAL D E CONTRÔLE D E LA ROM FACULTATIVE) — La mémoire ROM optionnelle présente peut-être un dysfonctionnement. Contactez Dell. Reportez-vous à la section «Contacter Dell» à la page 157. A REQUIRED .DLL FILE WAS NOT FOUND (UN FICHIER .DLL REQUIS EST INTROUVABLE) — Il manque un fichier essentiel au programme que vous essayez d'ouvrir. Supprimez, puis réinstallez le programme. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration. 2 Cliquez sur Ajout/Suppression de programmes. 3 Sélectionnez le programme à supprimer. 4 Cliquez sur Supprimer ou Modifier/Supprimer et suivez les invites. 5 Reportez-vous à la documentation du programme pour obtenir les instructions d'installation. SECTOR NOT FOUND (SECTEUR INTROUVABLE) — Le système d'exploitation ne parvient pas à trouver un secteur sur le disque dur. Votre disque dur contient probablement un secteur défectueux ou une table d'allocation de fichiers (FAT) endommagée. Exécutez l'utilitaire de vérification des erreurs Windows pour vérifier la structure des fichiers du disque dur. Reportez-vous au Centre d'aide et de support pour obtenir des instructions. Si un grand nombre de secteurs sont défectueux, sauvegardez les données (si vous le pouvez), puis reformatez le disque dur. SEEK ERROR (ERREUR D E RECHERCHE) — Le système d'exploitation ne parvient pas à trouver une piste particulière sur le disque dur. 98 Dépannage SHUTDOWN FAILURE (ÉCHEC D E L'ARRÊT) — Une puce de la carte système présente peut-être un dysfonctionnement. Exécutez le groupe de tests System Set (Ensemble du système) de Dell Diagnostics. Reportez-vous à la section «Dell Diagnostics» à la page 87. TIME-O F-DAY CLOCK LOST POWER (PERTE D'ALIMENTATION D E L'HORLOGE MACHINE) — Les paramètres de configuration du système sont corrompus. Branchez votre ordinateur sur une prise secteur pour charger la batterie. Si le problème persiste, essayez de restaurer les données en accédant au programme de configuration du système (reportez-vous à la section «Utilisation du programme de configuration du système» à la page 151). Puis quittez immédiatement le programme. Si le message réapparaît, contactez Dell. Reportez-vous à la section «Contacter Dell» à la page 157. TIME-O F-DAY CLOCK STOPPED (ARRÊT D E L'HORLOGE MACHINE) — La batterie de réserve qui alimente les paramètres de configuration du système nécessite peut-être d'être remplacée. Contactez Dell. Reportezvous à la section «Contacter Dell» à la page 157. TIME-O F-DAY NOT SET-PLEASE RUN THE SYSTEM SETUP PROGRAM (L'HEURE N'EST PAS CONFIGURÉE, EXÉCUTEZ L E PROGRAMME D E CONFIGURATION D U SYSTÈME) — L'heure ou la date du programme de configuration du système ne correspond pas à l'horloge du système. Corrigez les paramètres des options Date et Heure. Reportez-vous à la section «Utilisation du programme de configuration du système» à la page 151. TIMER CHIP COUNTER 2 FAILED (ÉCHEC D U COMPTEUR 2 D E LA PUCE D'HORLOGE) — Une puce de la carte système présente peut-être un dysfonctionnement. Exécutez le groupe de tests System Set (Ensemble du système) de Dell Diagnostics. Reportez-vous à la section «Dell Diagnostics» à la page 87. UNEXPECTED INTERRUPT IN PROTECTED MODE (INTERRUPTION INATTENDUE EN MODE PROTÉGÉ) — Le contrôleur du clavier présente peut-être un dysfonctionnement ou un module de mémoire est mal fixé. Exécutez les tests System Memory (Mémoire système) et Keyboard Controller (Contrôleur de clavier) de Dell Diagnostics. Reportez-vous à la section «Dell Diagnostics» à la page 87. X:\ I S NOT ACCESSIBLE. TH E DEVICE I S NOT READY (X:\ N'EST PAS ACCESSIBLE. LE PÉRIPHÉRIQUE N'EST PAS PRÊT) — Insérez une disquette dans le lecteur et réessayez. WARNING: BATTERY I S CRITICALLY LOW (AVERTISSEMENT : LE NIVEAU D E CHARGE D E LA BATTERIE EST CRITIQUE) — La batterie est pratiquement déchargée. Remplacez la batterie ou branchez l'ordinateur sur une prise secteur. Sinon, activez le mode Mise en veille prolongée ou éteignez l'ordinateur. Problèmes liés au périphérique IEEE 1394 PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. ASSUREZ-VOUS QUE L E PÉRIPHÉRIQUE IEEE 1394 EST RECONNU PAR WINDOWS — 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration. 2 Cliquez sur Imprimantes et autres périphériques. Si votre périphérique IEEE 1394 est répertorié, Windows le reconnaît. SI VOUS RENCONTREZ DES PROBLÈMES AVEC UN PÉRIPHÉRIQUE IEEE 1394 FOURNI PAR DELL — Contactez Dell (reportez-vous à la section «Contacter Dell» à la page 157).Dépannage 99 SI VOUS RENCONTREZ DES PROBLÈMES AVEC UN PÉRIPHÉRIQUE IEEE 1394 NON FOURNI PAR DELL — Contactez le fabricant du périphérique IEEE 1394. ASSUREZ-VOUS QUE L E PÉRIPHÉRIQUE IEEE 1394 EST CORRECTEMENT INSÉRÉ DANS L E CONNECTEUR. Problèmes liés au clavier PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. REMARQUE : Utilisez le clavier intégré lorsque vous exécutez Dell Diagnostics ou le programme de configuration du système. Lorsque vous connectez un clavier externe, le clavier intégré reste entièrement opérationnel. Problèmes liés au clavier externe REMARQUE : Lorsque vous connectez un clavier externe, le clavier intégré reste entièrement opérationnel. VÉRIFIEZ L E CÂBLE D U CLAVIER — Éteignez l'ordinateur. Déconnectez le câble du clavier, assurez-vous qu'il n'est pas endommagé et reconnectez-le fermement. Si vous utilisez un câble d'extension pour clavier, déconnectez-le et branchez le clavier directement à l'ordinateur. VÉRIFIEZ L E CLAVIER EXTERNE — 1 Éteignez l'ordinateur, patientez une minute, puis rallumez-le. 2 Vérifiez que les voyants des touches Verr num, Verr maj et Arrêt défil du clavier clignotent pendant le processus d'amorçage. 3 Sur le bureau Windows, cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Programmes, sur Accessoires, puis cliquez sur Bloc-notes. 4 Entrez quelques caractères à l'aide du clavier externe et vérifiez qu'ils s'affichent correctement. Si vous ne parvenez pas à effectuer ces vérifications, votre clavier externe est probablement défectueux. POUR VOUS ASSURER QUE L E PROBLÈME VIENT BIEN D U CLAVIER EXTERNE, VÉRIFIEZ L E CLAVIER INTÉGRÉ — 1 Éteignez l'ordinateur. 2 Déconnectez le clavier externe. 3 Allumez l'ordinateur. 4 Sur le bureau Windows, cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Programmes, sur Accessoires, puis cliquez sur Bloc-notes. 5 Entrez quelques caractères à l'aide du clavier interne et vérifiez qu'ils s'affichent correctement. Si les caractères s'affichent maintenant tandis qu'ils ne s'affichaient pas avec le clavier externe, ce dernier est probablement défectueux. Contactez Dell. Reportez-vous à la section «Contacter Dell» à la page 157. EXÉCUTEZ LES TESTS D E DIAGNOSTIC D U CLAVIER — Exécutez les tests PC-AT Compatible Keyboards (Claviers compatibles PC-AT) de Dell Diagnostics. Reportez-vous à la section «Dell Diagnostics» à la page 87. Si les tests indiquent que le clavier externe est défectueux, contactez Dell. Reportez-vous à la section «Contacter Dell» à la page 157.100 Dépannage Caractères imprévus DÉSACTIVEZ L E PAVÉ NUMÉRIQUE — Appuyez sur pour désactiver le pavé numérique s'il affiche des chiffres au lieu de lettres. Assurez-vous que le voyant de verrouillage numérique n'est pas allumé. Blocages et problèmes logiciels PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. L'ordinateur ne démarre pas ASSUREZ-VOUS QUE L'ADAPTATEUR SECTEUR EST SOLIDEMENT BRANCHÉ SUR L'ORDINATEUR E T SUR L A PRISE SECTEUR L'ordinateur ne répond plus AVIS : Vous pouvez perdre des données si vous n'arrivez pas à arrêter correctement le système d'exploitation. ÉTEIGNEZ L'ORDINATEUR — Si vous n'obtenez aucune réponse lorsque vous appuyez sur une touche du clavier ou lorsque vous déplacez la souris, appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation et maintenez-le enfoncé pendant au moins 8 à 10 secondes jusqu'à ce que l'ordinateur s'éteigne. Redémarrez l'ordinateur. Un programme ne répond plus ou se bloque régulièrement REMARQUE : La documentation de tout logiciel, la disquette ou le CD qui l'accompagne incluent généralement des instructions d'installation. FIN D U PROGRAMME — 1 Appuyez simultanément sur <Échap>. 2 Cliquez sur Applications. 3 Cliquez sur le programme qui ne répond plus. 4 Cliquez sur Fin de tâche. CONSULTEZ L A DOCUMENTATION D U LOGICIEL — Si nécessaire, supprimez, puis réinstallez le programme. Un programme est conçu pour un système d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows® antérieur EXÉCUTEZ L'ASSISTANT COMPATIBILITÉ DES PROGRAMMES — L'Assistant Compatibilité des programmes configure un programme pour qu'il fonctionne dans un environnement proche des environnements des systèmes d'exploitation non Windows XP. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Tous les programmes→ Accessoires, puis cliquez sur Assistant Compatibilité des programmes. 2 Dans l'écran d'accueil, cliquez sur Suivant. 3 Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran.Dépannage 101 Un écran bleu uni apparaît ÉTEIGNEZ L'ORDINATEUR — Si vous n'obtenez aucune réponse lorsque vous appuyez sur une touche du clavier ou lorsque vous déplacez la souris, appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation et maintenez-le enfoncé pendant au moins 8 à 10 secondes jusqu'à ce que l'ordinateur s'éteigne. Redémarrez l'ordinateur. Problèmes liés à Dell MediaDirect POUR PLUS D'INFORMATIONS, REPORTEZ-VOUS A U FICHIER D'AIDE DELL MEDIADIRECT — Cliquez sur l'icône ? en bas de l'écran Dell MediaDirect pour accéder à l'aide. POUR LIRE DES FILMS AVEC DELL MEDIADIRECT, VOUS DEVEZ AVOIR UN LECTEUR D E DVD E T L E LOGICIEL DELL DVD PLAYER — Si vous avez acheté un ordinateur équipé d'un lecteur de DVD, ce logiciel doit déjà être installé. PROBLÈMES LIÉS À LA QUALITÉ VIDÉO — Désactivez l'option Use Hardware Acceleration (Utiliser l'accélération matérielle). Cette fonctionnalité utilise le traitement spécial dans certains graphiques pour réduire les exigences du processeur lors de la lecture de DVD et de certains types de fichiers vidéo. IMPOSSIBILITÉ D E LIRE CERTAINS FICHIERS MÉDIA — Étant donné que Dell MediaDirect offre un accès aux fichiers média hors de l'environnement du système d'exploitation Windows XP, l'accès au contenu sous licence est restreint. Le contenu sous licence est du contenu numérique auquel s'applique le Digital Rights Management (DRM). L'environnement Dell MediaDirect ne peut pas vérifier les restrictions DRM, les fichiers sous licence ne peuvent par conséquent pas être lus. Les fichiers musicaux et vidéo sous licence sont indiqués par une icône verrou. Vous pouvez accéder aux fichiers sous licence dans l'environnement du système d'exploitation Windows XP. RÉGLAGE DES PARAMÈTRES D E COULEUR POUR LES FILMS CONTENANT DES SCÈNES TROP SOMBRES O U TROP CLAIRES — Cliquez sur EagleVision pour utiliser une technologie d'amélioration vidéo qui détecte le contenu vidéo et règle la luminosité/le contraste/la saturation de manière dynamique. AVIS : Vous ne pouvez pas réinstaller la fonctionnalité Dell MediaDirect si vous reformatez le disque dur. Contactez Dell pour obtenir une assistance. Reportez-vous à la section «Contacter Dell» à la page 157. Autres problèmes logiciels CONSULTEZ L A DOCUMENTATION D U LOGICIEL O U CONTACTEZ L E FABRICANT POUR OBTENIR DES INFORMATIONS D E DÉPANNAGE — • Assurez-vous que le programme est compatible avec le système d'exploitation installé sur votre ordinateur. • Assurez-vous que l'ordinateur est conforme aux exigences matérielles requises pour que le logiciel fonctionne. Consultez la documentation du logiciel pour de plus amples informations. • Assurez-vous que le programme est correctement installé et configuré. • Assurez-vous que les pilotes de périphérique n'entrent pas en conflit avec le programme. • Le cas échéant, supprimez, puis réinstallez le programme. SAUVEGARDEZ IMMÉDIATEMENT VOS FICHIERS UTILISEZ UN PROGRAMME D E RECHERCHE DES VIRUS POUR VÉRIFIER L E DISQUE DUR, LES DISQUETTES OU LES CD ENREGISTREZ LES FICHIERS OUVERTS E T QUITTEZ TOUS LES PROGRAMMES, PUIS ÉTEIGNEZ L'ORDINATEUR VIA L E MENU Démarrer102 Dépannage ANALYSEZ L'ORDINATEUR À L A RECHERCHE D E LOGICIELS ESPIONS — Si vous observez un ralentissement des performances de votre ordinateur, si des fenêtres publicitaires s'affichent fréquemment sur votre écran ou si vous avez des problèmes pour vous connecter sur Internet, votre ordinateur est peut-être infecté par un logiciel espion. Utilisez un programme antivirus qui inclut une protection contre les logiciels espions (une mise à niveau de votre programme sera peut-être nécessaire) afin d'analyser votre ordinateur et de supprimer les logiciels espions. Pour plus d'informations, allez sur le site support.dell.com et lancez une recherche à l'aide du mot-clé spyware (espion). EXÉCUTEZ DELL DIAGNOSTICS — Reportez-vous à la section «Dell Diagnostics» à la page 87. Si tous les tests s'exécutent correctement, la condition d'erreur est liée à un problème logiciel. Problèmes liés à la mémoire PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. SI L E MESSAGE D E MÉMOIRE INSUFFISANTE S'AFFICHE — • Enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers ouverts et quittez tous les programmes en cours d'exécution que vous n'utilisez pas pour voir si cela permet de résoudre le problème. • Consultez la documentation du logiciel pour prendre connaissance des besoins en mémoire minimaux. Le cas échéant, ajoutez de la mémoire. Reportez-vous à la section «Mémoire» à la page 123. • Réinsérez les modules de mémoire pour vous assurer que l'ordinateur communique bien avec la mémoire. Reportez-vous à la section «Mémoire» à la page 123. • Exécutez Dell Diagnostics. Reportez-vous à la section «Dell Diagnostics» à la page 87. SI VOUS RENCONTREZ D'AUTRES PROBLÈMES D E MÉMOIRE — • Réinstallez les modules de mémoire (reportez-vous à la section «Mémoire» à la page 123) pour vous assurer que votre ordinateur communique correctement avec la mémoire. • Veillez à bien suivre les consignes d'installation de la mémoire. Reportez-vous à la section «Mémoire» à la page 123. • Exécutez Dell Diagnostics. Reportez-vous à la section «Dell Diagnostics» à la page 87. Problèmes liés au réseau PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. Généralités VÉRIFIEZ L E CONNECTEUR D U CÂBLE RÉSEAU — Assurez-vous que le câble de réseau est bien branché au connecteur réseau situé à l'arrière de l'ordinateur et à la prise réseau. VÉRIFIEZ LES VOYANTS D U RÉSEAU SUR L E CONNECTEUR RÉSEAU — Si aucun voyant ne s'allume, cela signifie qu'il n'y a pas de communication avec le réseau. Remplacez le câble de réseau. REDÉMARREZ L'ORDINATEUR E T RECONNECTEZ-VOUS A U RÉSEAU VÉRIFIEZ LES PARAMÈTRES D U RÉSEAU — Contactez l'administrateur de réseau pour qu'il vérifie vos paramètres et le fonctionnement du réseau. Dépannage 103 Réseau large bande mobile REMARQUE : Le Guide d'utilisation de l'utilitaire Dell Mobile Broadband Card Utility est disponible sur le Centre d'aide et de support Windows. Pour accéder au Centre d'aide et de support, reportez-vous à la section «Centre d'aide et de support de Windows» à la page 13. Le Guide d'utilisation est également téléchargeable à partir du site Web de support de Dell à l'adresse support.dell.com. REMARQUE : L'icône apparaît sur le bureau Windows si l'ordinateur est doté d'une carte large bande mobile de Dell. Double-cliquez sur cette icône pour lancer l'utilitaire. Une fois l'utilitaire lancé, l'icône apparaît dans la barre des tâches. CONNEXION IMPOSSIBLE — La carte large bande mobile de Dell doit être active sur le réseau préalablement à la connexion. Une fois l'utilitaire Dell Mobile Broadband Card Utility lancé, placez la souris sur l'icône dans la barre des tâches pour lire l'état de la connexion. Si la carte large bande mobile est désactivée, reportez-vous à la section «Activez votre carte large bande mobile» à la page 103 pour plus d'informations. Si le problème persiste, contactez votre prestataire de service large bande mobile pour plus d'informations. VÉRIFIEZ VOTRE SERVICE RÉSEAU LARGE BANDE MOBILE — Contactez votre prestataire de service réseau large bande mobile pour vérifier la couverture et les services pris en charge. VÉRIFIEZ L'ÉTAT D E L'UTILITAIRE DELL MOBILE BROADBAND CARD UTILITY — Cliquez sur l'icône située sur le bureau Windows pour lancer l'utilitaire. Vérifiez l'état dans la fenêtre principale : • No card detected (Aucune carte détectée) – Redémarrez l'ordinateur et relancez l'utilitaire. • Radio Off (Radio désactivée) – Assurez-vous que la carte large bande mobile est activée en vérifiant son état dans l'utilitaire Dell Mobile Broadband Card Utility. Si la carte est désactivée, activez-la en cliquant sur le bouton Turn Radio On (Activer la radio) situé sur l'écran principal de l'utilitaire Dell Mobile Broadband Card Utility. • Searching (Recherche) – L'utilitaire Dell Mobile Broadband Card Utility n'a pas encore localisé de réseau large bande mobile. Si l'état de recherche persiste, assurez-vous que l'intensité du signal est adéquate. • No service (Aucun service) – L'utilitaire Dell Mobile Broadband Card Utility n'a pas localisé de réseau large bande mobile. Assurez-vous que l'intensité du signal est appropriée. Relancez l'utilitaire Dell Mobile Broadband Card Utility ou contactez votre prestataire de service réseau large bande mobile. • Check your Mobile Broadband Network Service(Vérifiez le service réseau large bande mobile) – Contactez votre prestataire de service réseau large bande mobile pour vérifier la couverture et les services pris en charge. ACTIVEZ VOTRE CARTE LARGE BANDE MOBILE — Avant de vous connecter à Internet, vous devez activer le service large bande mobile auprès de votre fournisseur de services cellulaires. Pour des instructions et d'autres informations sur l'utilisation de l'utilitaire Dell Mobile Broadband Card Utility, reportez-vous au guide d'utilisation disponible dans le Centre d'aide et de support de Windows. Pour accéder au Centre d'aide et de support, reportez-vous à la section «Centre d'aide et de support de Windows» à la page 13. Le guide d'utilisation est également disponible sur le site Web de support de Dell à l'adresse support.dell.com et sur le CD fourni avec votre carte large bande mobile, si vous avez acheté la carte séparément de l'ordinateur.104 Dépannage Problèmes liés aux cartes ExpressCard PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. REMARQUE : Le logement de carte ExpressCard ne prend pas en charge les cartes PC. VÉRIFIEZ L A CARTE — Assurez-vous que la carte est correctement insérée dans le connecteur. VÉRIFIEZ QUE L A CARTE EST RECONNUE PAR WINDOWS — Double-cliquez sur l'icône Safely Remove Hardware (Supprimer le périphérique en toute sécurité) dans la barre des tâches Windows. Assurez-vous que la carte est répertoriée. SI VOUS RENCONTREZ DES PROBLÈMES AVEC UNE CARTE FOURNIE PAR DELL — Contactez Dell. Reportezvous à la section «Contacter Dell» à la page 157. SI VOUS RENCONTREZ DES PROBLÈMES AVEC UNE CARTE NON FOURNIE PAR DELL — Contactez le fabricant de la carte ExpressCard. Problèmes liés à l'alimentation PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. VÉRIFIEZ L E VOYANT D'ALIMENTATION — Lorsque le voyant d'alimentation est allumé ou lorsqu'il clignote, l'ordinateur est sous tension. Si le voyant clignote, l'ordinateur est en mode Veille—appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation pour quitter le mode Veille. Si le voyant est éteint, appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation pour allumer l'ordinateur. CHARGEZ LA BATTERIE — Il se peut que la batterie soit déchargée. 1 Réinstallez la batterie. 2 Utilisez l'adaptateur secteur pour connecter votre ordinateur à une prise secteur. 3 Allumez l'ordinateur. REMARQUE : L'autonomie de la batterie (la période durant laquelle la batterie peut faire fonctionner l'ordinateur) diminue avec le temps. Selon la fréquence d'utilisation et les conditions de fonctionnement de la batterie, il est possible que vous deviez en acheter une autre au cours de la durée de vie de votre ordinateur. VÉRIFIEZ L E VOYANT D'ÉTAT D E LA BATTERIE — Si le voyant d'état de la batterie clignote en orange ou est orange et fixe, la batterie est peu chargée ou complètement déchargée. Connectez l'ordinateur à une prise secteur. Si le voyant d'état de la batterie clignote alternativement en vert et orange, la batterie est trop chaude pour lancer le processus de recharge. Éteignez l'ordinateur, déconnectez-le de la prise secteur, ainsi que la batterie, pour qu'ils reviennent à la température ambiante. Si le voyant d'état de la batterie est vert et clignote rapidement, il se peut que la batterie soit défectueuse. Contactez Dell. Reportez-vous à la section «Contacter Dell» à la page 157. VÉRIFIEZ L A TEMPÉRATURE D E LA BATTERIE — Si la température de la batterie est inférieure à 0 °C (32 °F), l'ordinateur ne démarrera pas. TESTEZ L A PRISE SECTEUR — Assurez-vous que la prise secteur fonctionne en la testant à l'aide d'un autre appareil, une lampe par exemple.Dépannage 105 VÉRIFIEZ L'ADAPTATEUR SECTEUR — Vérifiez les connexions du câble de l'adaptateur secteur. Si l'adaptateur secteur est muni d'un voyant, assurez-vous que ce dernier est allumé. CONNECTEZ L'ORDINATEUR DIRECTEMENT À UNE PRISE SECTEUR — Contournez les parasurtenseurs, les rampes d'alimentation et les rallonges de câble pour vérifier que l'ordinateur est sous tension. ÉLIMINEZ LES SOURCES POTENTIELLES D'INTERFÉRENCES — Éteignez les ventilateurs, les lampes fluorescentes ou halogènes ou tout autre appareil se trouvant à proximité. RÉGLEZ LES PROPRIÉTÉS D E L'ALIMENTATION — Reportez-vous à la section «Configuration des paramètres de gestion de l'alimentation» à la page 47. REMETTEZ EN PLACE LES MODULES D E MÉMOIRE — Si le voyant d'alimentation de l'ordinateur est allumé mais que l'écran reste vide, réinstallez les modules de mémoire. Reportez-vous à la section «Mémoire» à la page 123. Garantir une alimentation suffisante à votre ordinateur Votre ordinateur est conçu pour utiliser l'adaptateur secteur 90 W. Pour optimiser les performances du système, vous devez toujours utiliser cet adaptateur. Les adaptateurs secteur de 65 W d'autres ordinateurs portables Dell sont utilisables avec votre ordinateur, mais les performances de votre ordinateur peuvent en être affectées. L'utilisation d'adaptateurs secteur de puissance inférieure peut provoquer l'affichage d'un message d' WARNING (AVERTISSEMENT). Problèmes liés à l'imprimante PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. REMARQUE : Si vous avez besoin d'une assistance technique pour votre imprimante, contactez le fabricant. ASSUREZ-VOUS QUE L'IMPRIMANTE EST ALLUMÉE. VÉRIFIEZ LES CONNEXIONS DES CÂBLES D E L'IMPRIMANTE • Consultez la documentation de l'imprimante pour obtenir des informations sur la connexion des câbles. • Assurez-vous que les câbles de l'imprimante sont solidement connectés à l'imprimante et à l'ordinateur. TESTEZ L A PRISE SECTEUR — Assurez-vous que la prise secteur fonctionne en la testant à l'aide d'un autre appareil, une lampe par exemple. VÉRIFIEZ QUE L'IMPRIMANTE EST RECONNUE PAR WINDOWS — 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration et ensuite sur Imprimantes et autres périphériques. 2 Cliquez sur Afficher les imprimantes ou les télécopieurs installés. Si l'imprimante apparaît dans la liste, cliquez avec le bouton droit sur l'icône la représentant. 3 Cliquez sur Propriétés, puis sur l'onglet Ports. Pour une imprimante parallèle, assurez-vous que le port d'impression est défini sur LPT1 (Port de l'imprimante). Pour une imprimante USB, assurez-vous que le port d'impression est défini sur USB.106 Dépannage RÉINSTALLATION D U PILOTE D E L'IMPRIMANTE — Reportez-vous à la documentation de l'imprimante pour obtenir des instructions. Problèmes liés au scanner PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. REMARQUE : Si vous avez besoin d'une assistance technique pour votre scanner, contactez le fabricant. CONSULTEZ L A DOCUMENTATION D U SCANNER — Reportez-vous à la documentation du scanner pour obtenir des informations de configuration et de dépannage. DÉVERROUILLEZ L E SCANNER — Vérifiez que votre scanner est déverrouillé s'il comporte un bouton ou une languette de verrouillage. REDÉMARREZ L'ORDINATEUR E T RÉESSAYEZ VÉRIFIEZ LES CONNEXIONS DES CÂBLES — • Consultez la documentation du scanner pour obtenir des informations sur la connexion des câbles. • Assurez-vous que les câbles du scanner sont solidement connectés au scanner et à l'ordinateur. VÉRIFIEZ QUE L E SCANNER EST RECONNU PAR MICROSOFT WINDOWS — 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration et ensuite sur Imprimantes et autres périphériques. 2 Cliquez sur Scanners et appareils-photo. Si votre scanner est répertorié, Windows le reconnaît. RÉINSTALLEZ L E PILOTE D U SCANNER — Consultez la documentation du scanner pour obtenir des instructions. Problèmes liés au son et aux haut-parleurs PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. Aucun son ne sort des haut-parleurs intégrés RÉGLEZ L E CONTRÔLE D E VOLUME D E WINDOWS — Double-cliquez sur l'icône en forme de haut-parleur, dans le coin inférieur droit de l'écran. Assurez-vous d'avoir monté le volume et que le son n'est pas mis en sourdine. Réglez le volume, les aigus ou les basses pour supprimer toute distorsion. RÉGLEZ L E VOLUME À L'AIDE DES RACCOURCIS CLAVIER — Pour désactiver (mettre en sourdine) les hautparleurs intégrés, appuyez sur . RÉINSTALLEZ L E PILOTE AUDIO — Reportez-vous à la section «Réinstallation des pilotes et utilitaires» à la page 110.Dépannage 107 Aucun son ne sort des haut-parleurs externes ASSUREZ-VOUS QUE L E CAISSON D E BASSE E T LES HAUT-PARLEURS SONT SOUS TENSION — Reportez-vous au schéma d'installation fourni avec les haut-parleurs. Si vos haut-parleurs sont dotés de commandes du volume, réglez le volume, les basses ou les aigus pour éliminer les distorsions. RÉGLEZ L E VOLUME D E WINDOWS — Cliquez ou double-cliquez sur l'icône haut-parleur dans le coin inférieur droit de l'écran. Assurez-vous d'avoir monté le volume et que le son n'est pas mis en sourdine. DÉCONNECTEZ L E CASQUE D U CONNECTEUR D E CASQUE — Le son des haut-parleurs est automatiquement désactivé lorsque le casque est connecté au connecteur de casque du panneau avant de l'ordinateur. TESTEZ L A PRISE SECTEUR — Assurez-vous que la prise secteur fonctionne en la testant à l'aide d'un autre appareil, une lampe par exemple. ÉLIMINEZ LES SOURCES POTENTIELLES D'INTERFÉRENCES — Éteignez les ventilateurs, tubes au néon ou lampes halogènes proches afin de vérifier s'ils produisent des interférences. RÉINSTALLEZ L E PILOTE AUDIO — Reportez-vous à la section «Réinstallation des pilotes et utilitaires» à la page 110. EXÉCUTEZ DELL DIAGNOSTICS — Reportez-vous à la section «Dell Diagnostics» à la page 87. REMARQUE : Le réglage du volume de certains lecteurs MP3 annule l'effet du paramètre de volume de Windows. Si vous avez écouté des chansons au format MP3, assurez-vous que vous n'avez pas baissé ou augmenté le volume. Aucun son émis par le casque VÉRIFIEZ L A CONNEXION DES CÂBLES D U CASQUE — Assurez-vous que le câble du casque est correctement inséré dans le connecteur de casque. RÉGLEZ L E CONTRÔLE D E VOLUME D E WINDOWS — Cliquez ou double-cliquez sur l'icône haut-parleur dans le coin inférieur droit de l'écran. Assurez-vous d'avoir monté le volume et que le son n'est pas mis en sourdine. Problèmes liés à la tablette tactile ou à la souris VÉRIFIEZ LES PARAMÈTRES D E LA TABLETTE TACTILE — 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration et ensuite sur Imprimantes et autres périphériques. 2 Cliquez sur Souris. 3 Réglez les paramètres. VÉRIFIEZ L E CÂBLE D E LA SOURIS — Éteignez l'ordinateur. Déconnectez le câble de la souris, vérifiez s'il n'est pas endommagé et reconnectez-le fermement. Si vous utilisez un câble d'extension pour la souris, déconnectez-le et branchez la souris directement à l'ordinateur. POUR VOUS ASSURER QUE L E PROBLÈME VIENT D E LA SOURIS, TESTEZ L A TABLETTE TACTILE — 1 Éteignez l'ordinateur. 2 Déconnectez la souris.108 Dépannage 3 Allumez l'ordinateur. 4 Lorsque le bureauWindows apparaît, utilisez la tablette tactile pour déplacer le curseur, sélectionner une icône et l'ouvrir. Si la tablette tactile fonctionne correctement, la souris est probablement défectueuse. RÉINSTALLEZ L E PILOTE D E L A TABLETTE TACTILE — Reportez-vous à la section «Réinstallation des pilotes et utilitaires» à la page 110. Problèmes liés à la vidéo et à l'affichage PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. Si l'écran est vide REMARQUE : Si vous utilisez un programme qui exige une résolution supérieure à celle dont vous disposez, Dell vous conseille de brancher un écran externe à votre ordinateur. VÉRIFIEZ L A BATTERIE — Si vous utilisez une batterie pour alimenter l'ordinateur, la batterie peut être déchargée. Branchez l'ordinateur sur une prise secteur à l'aide de l'adaptateur secteur, puis allumez l'ordinateur. TESTEZ L A PRISE SECTEUR — Assurez-vous que la prise secteur fonctionne en la testant à l'aide d'un autre appareil, une lampe par exemple. VÉRIFIEZ L'ADAPTATEUR SECTEUR — Vérifiez les connexions du câble de l'adaptateur secteur. Si l'adaptateur secteur est muni d'un voyant, assurez-vous que ce dernier est allumé. CONNECTEZ L'ORDINATEUR DIRECTEMENT À UNE PRISE SECTEUR — Contournez les parasurtenseurs, les rampes d'alimentation et les rallonges de câble pour vérifier que l'ordinateur est sous tension. RÉGLEZ LES PROPRIÉTÉS D E L'ALIMENTATION — Lancez une recherche à l'aide du mot-clé veille dans le Centre d'aide et de support de Windows. BASCULEZ L'IMAGE VIDÉO — Si votre ordinateur est connecté à un moniteur externe, appuyez sur pour basculer l'affichage de l'image vidéo vers l'écran. Si l'écran est difficile à lire RÉGLEZ L A LUMINOSITÉ — Appuyez sur et sur la touche fléchée vers le haut ou vers le bas. ÉLOIGNEZ L E CAISSON D E BASSE EXTERNE D E L'ORDINATEUR O U D E L'ÉCRAN — Si vos haut-parleurs externes comportent un caisson de basse, vérifiez que ce dernier se trouve à au moins 60 cm (2 pieds) de l'ordinateur ou du moniteur externe. ÉLIMINEZ LES SOURCES POTENTIELLES D'INTERFÉRENCES — Éteignez les ventilateurs, les lampes fluorescentes ou halogènes ou tout autre appareil se trouvant à proximité. ORIENTEZ L'ORDINATEUR DANS UNE DIRECTION DIFFÉRENTE — Éliminez les reflets du soleil pouvant altérer la qualité de l'image. RÉGLEZ LES PARAMÈTRES D'AFFICHAGE D E WINDOWS —Dépannage 109 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration. 2 Cliquez sur Apparence et thèmes. 3 Cliquez sur la zone que vous souhaitez modifier ou cliquez sur l'icône Affichage. 4 Essayez différents paramètres de Qualité couleur et Résolution d'écran. VOIR «MESSAGES D'ERREUR» — Si un message d'erreur apparaît, reportez-vous à la section «Messages d'erreur» à la page 94. Si seule une partie de l'écran est lisible CONNECTEZ UN MONITEUR EXTERNE — 1 Éteignez votre ordinateur et connectez un moniteur externe à ce dernier. 2 Allumez l'ordinateur et le moniteur, puis réglez la luminosité et le contraste. Si le moniteur externe fonctionne correctement, le moniteur ou le contrôleur vidéo de l'ordinateur peut être défectueux. Contactez Dell. Reportez-vous à la section «Contacter Dell» à la page 157. Pilotes Qu'est-ce qu'un pilote ? Un pilote est un programme qui contrôle un périphérique, une imprimante, une souris ou un clavier par exemple. Tous les périphériques nécessitent un pilote. Un pilote sert d'interprète entre le périphérique et tout autre programme qui l'utilise. Chaque périphérique dispose de son propre jeu de commandes spécialisées que seul son pilote reconnaît. Lorsque Dell livre l'ordinateur, les pilotes requis sont déjà installés—aucune installation ou configuration supplémentaire n'est nécessaire. AVIS : Le CD Drivers and Utilities peut contenir des pilotes pour des systèmes d'exploitation qui ne sont pas installés sur votre ordinateur. Assurez-vous que vous installez les logiciels appropriés à votre système d'exploitation. De nombreux pilotes, tels que le pilote du clavier, sont fournis avec votre système d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows®. Vous devez installer des pilotes si vous : • Mettez à jour votre système d'exploitation ; • Réinstallez votre système d'exploitation ; • Connectez ou installez un nouveau périphérique. Identification des pilotes Si vous rencontrez des difficultés avec un périphérique, identifiez le pilote à l'origine du problème et mettez-le à niveau si nécessaire. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration. 2 Sous Choisissez une catégorie, cliquez sur Performances et maintenance. 3 Cliquez sur Système.110 Dépannage 4 Dans la fenêtre Propriétés système, cliquez sur l'onglet Matériel. 5 Cliquez sur Gestionnaire de périphériques. 6 Faites défiler la liste pour rechercher des périphériques comportant un point d'exclamation (un cercle jaune et un [!]) sur l'icône du périphérique. Lorsqu'un point d'exclamation se trouve à côté du nom du périphérique, vous devez réinstaller le pilote ou en installer un nouveau. Reportez-vous à la section «Réinstallation des pilotes et utilitaires» à la page 110. Réinstallation des pilotes et utilitaires AVIS : Le site Web de support de Dell à l'adresse support.dell.com et le CD Drivers and Utilities fournissent les pilotes appropriés pour les ordinateurs Dell™. Si vous installez des pilotes que vous avez obtenus par d'autres moyens, votre ordinateur risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement. REMARQUE : Le CD Drivers and Utilities est en option et n'est pas obligatoirement expédié avec tous les ordinateurs. Utilisation de la fonction Device Driver Rollback (Restauration des pilotes de périphériques) de Windows XP Si un problème apparaît sur votre ordinateur après avoir installé ou mis à jour le pilote, utilisez la fonction Restauration des pilotes de périphériques de Windows XP pour remplacer le pilote avec la version précédemment installée. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration. 2 Sous Choisissez une catégorie, cliquez sur Performances et maintenance. 3 Cliquez sur Système. 4 Dans la fenêtre Propriétés système, cliquez sur l'onglet Matériel. 5 Cliquez sur Gestionnaire de périphériques. 6 Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur le périphérique pour lequel le nouveau pilote a été installé et cliquez sur Propriétés. 7 Cliquez sur l'onglet Pilotes. 8 Cliquez sur Restauration des pilotes. Si le problème persiste, utilisez la fonction Restauration du système (reportez-vous à la section «Utilisation de la Restauration du système Microsoft Windows XP» à la page 112) pour retourner à un état de fonctionnement de votre système d'exploitation antérieur à l'installation du nouveau pilote de périphérique. Utilisation du CD Drivers and Utilities REMARQUE : Le CD Drivers and Utilities est en option et n'est pas obligatoirement expédié avec tous les ordinateurs. Si l'utilisation de la fonctionRestauration des pilotes de périphériques ou Restauration du système ne résout pas le problème, réinstallez le pilote à partir du CD Drivers and Utilities. 1 Enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers et quittez tous les programmes. 2 Insérez le CD Drivers and Utilities.Dépannage 111 Dans la plupart des cas, le CD démarre automatiquement. Dans le cas contraire, lancez l'Explorateur Windows, cliquez sur le répertoire du lecteur de CD pour afficher le contenu du CD, puis doublecliquez sur le fichier autocd.exe. La première fois que vous exécutez le CD, il se peut qu'il vous invite à installer des fichiers de configuration. Cliquez sur OK et suivez les instructions qui s'affichent pour continuer. 3 Dans le menu déroulant Langue de la barre d'outils, sélectionnez une langue pour le pilote ou l'utilitaire (si disponible). Un écran d'accueil s'affiche. 4 Cliquez sur Suivant. Le CD analyse automatiquement votre matériel et détecte les pilotes et les utilitaires employés par votre ordinateur. 5 Une fois l'analyse du matériel terminée, vous pouvez détecter d'autres pilotes et utilitaires. Sous Critères de recherche, sélectionnez les catégories appropriées dans les menus déroulants Modèle de système, Système d'exploitation et Rubrique. Un ou plusieurs liens apparaissent pour le pilote et l'utilitaire particuliers utilisés par votre ordinateur. 6 Cliquez sur le lien d'un pilote ou d'un utilitaire spécifique afin d'afficher les informations correspondantes. 7 Cliquez sur le bouton Installer (s'il est disponible) pour lancer l'installation du pilote ou de l'utilitaire. À l'écran d'accueil, suivez les invites pour terminer l'installation. Si vous ne trouvez pas de bouton Installer, l'installation automatique n'est pas possible. Pour obtenir des instructions d'installation, reportez-vous aux instructions appropriées dans les sous-sections suivantes ou cliquez sur le bouton Extraire, suivez les instructions d'extraction et lisez le fichier Lisez-moi. S'il vous est demandé de trouver les fichiers de pilote, cliquez sur le répertoire du CD dans la fenêtre d'information sur le pilote pour afficher les fichiers associés à ce pilote. Réinstallation manuelle des pilotes 1 Une fois les fichiers de pilote extraits vers votre disque dur, tel que décrit dans la section précédente, cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur Poste de travail. 2 Cliquez sur Propriétés. 3 Cliquez sur l'onglet Matériel, puis sur Gestionnaire de périphériques. 4 Double-cliquez sur le type de périphérique pour lequel vous installez le pilote (par exemple, Modems ou périphériques infrarouges). 5 Double-cliquez sur le nom du périphérique pour lequel vous installez le pilote. 6 Cliquez sur l'onglet Pilote, puis sur Mettre à jour le pilote. 7 Cliquez sur Installer à partir d'une liste ou d'un emplacement spécifié (utilisateurs expérimentés), puis sur Suivant. 8 Cliquez sur Parcourir et placez-vous à l'endroit où vous avez copié précédemment les fichiers de pilote. 9 Lorsque le nom du pilote approprié apparaît, cliquez sur Suivant. 10 Cliquez sur Terminer et redémarrez l'ordinateur.112 Dépannage Résolution des incompatibilités logicielles et matérielles Si un périphérique n'est pas détecté pendant la configuration du système d'exploitation ou est détecté mais n'est pas configuré correctement, utilisez le Dépanneur des conflits matériels pour résoudre cette incompatibilité. Pour démarrer le Dépanneur des conflits matériels : 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Aide et Support. 2 Tapez hardware troubleshooter (dépanneur des conflits matériels) dans le champ Rechercher, puis cliquez sur la flèche pour lancer la recherche. 3 Cliquez sur Dépanneur de conflits matériels dans la liste Résultats de la recherche. 4 Dans la liste Dépanneur de conflits matériels, cliquez sur Je dois résoudre un conflit matériel sur mon ordinateur, puis sur Suivant. Restauration du système d'exploitation Plusieurs méthodes de restauration du système d'exploitation sont disponibles : • La fonction Restauration du système de Microsoft® Windows® XP ramène votre ordinateur à un état de fonctionnement antérieur, sans affecter les fichiers de données. Commencez par utiliser la fonction Restauration du système pour restaurer votre système d'exploitation et préserver vos fichiers de données. Pour obtenir des instructions, reportez-vous à la section «Utilisation de la Restauration du système Microsoft Windows XP» à la page 112. • L'utilitaire Dell PC Restore de Symantec restaure votre disque dur à l'état de fonctionnement dans lequel il était lorsque vous avez acheté l'ordinateur. Dell PC Restore supprime de façon permanente toutes les données qui figurent sur le disque dur et supprime toutes les applications installées après réception de l'ordinateur. N'utilisez PC Restore que si la restauration du système n'a pas résolu le problème rencontré par votre système d'exploitation. Pour cela, reportez-vous à la section «Utilisation de Dell PC Restore de Symantec» à la page 114. • Si un CD Operating system vous a été livré avec votre ordinateur, vous pouvez l'utiliser pour restaurer votre système d'exploitation. Toutefois, l'utilisation de ce CD entraîne la suppression de toutes les données présentes sur le disque dur. N'utilisez ce CD que si la restauration du système n'a pas permis de résoudre le problème rencontré par votre système d'exploitation. Pour cela, reportez-vous à la section «Utilisation du CD Operating system» à la page 116. Utilisation de la Restauration du système MicrosoftWindows XP Le système d'exploitation Microsoft Windows XP comporte la fonction Restauration du système, qui vous permet de restaurer l'ordinateur à un état antérieur (sans affecter les fichiers de données) si les modifications apportées au matériel, aux logiciels ou aux paramètres du système empêchent l'ordinateur de fonctionner correctement. Reportez-vous au Centre d'aide et de support de Windows pour des informations supplémentaires sur l'utilisation de la fonction Restauration du système. Pour accéder à l'aide, reportez-vous à la section «Centre d'aide et de support de Windows» à la page 13. AVIS : Sauvegardez régulièrement vos fichiers de données. La fonction Restauration du système ne contrôle pas vos fichiers de données et ne permet pas de les récupérer.Dépannage 113 REMARQUE : Les procédures présentées dans ce document concernent l'affichage par défaut de Windows. Par conséquent, elles risquent de ne pas fonctionner si votre ordinateur Dell™ est réglé sur le mode d'affichage classique de Windows. Création d'un point de restauration 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Aide et support. 2 Cliquez sur la tâche Restauration du système. 3 Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran. Restauration de l'ordinateur à un état antérieur Si des problèmes surviennent après l'installation d'un pilote de périphérique, utilisez la fonction Restauration des pilotes de périphériques (reportez-vous à la section «Utilisation de la fonction Device Driver Rollback (Restauration des pilotes de périphériques) de Windows XP» à la page 110) pour résoudre le problème. Si le problème persiste, utilisez la fonction Restauration du système. AVIS : Avant de restaurer l'ordinateur à un état antérieur, enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers ouverts et quittez tous les programmes en cours d'exécution. Ne modifiez, n'ouvrez ou ne supprimez en aucun cas des fichiers ou des programmes tant que la restauration du système n'est pas terminée. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Programmes→Accessoires→Outils système, puis cliquez sur Restauration du système. 2 Assurez-vous que l'option Restaurer mon ordinateur à un état antérieur est sélectionnée, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 3 Cliquez sur une date du calendrier à laquelle vous souhaitez restaurer votre ordinateur. L'écran Sélectionner un point de restauration affiche un calendrier vous permettant de sélectionner des points de restauration. Toutes les dates du calendrier comportant des points de restauration apparaissent en gras. 4 Sélectionnez un point de restauration, puis cliquez sur Suivant. Si une date du calendrier contient un seul point de restauration, ce dernier est sélectionné automatiquement. Si plusieurs points de restauration sont disponibles, cliquez sur celui que vous souhaitez utiliser. 5 Cliquez sur Suivant. L'écran Restauration terminée s'affiche une fois que la collecte des données par la fonction Restauration du système est terminée. L'ordinateur redémarre. 6 Une fois l'ordinateur redémarré, cliquez sur OK. Pour changer de point de restauration, répétez les étapes précédentes en utilisant un autre point de restauration ou annulez la restauration. Annulation de la dernière restauration du système AVIS : Avant d'annuler la dernière restauration du système, enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers ouverts et quittez tous les programmes en cours d'exécution. Ne modifiez, n'ouvrez ou ne supprimez en aucun cas des fichiers ou des programmes tant que la restauration du système n'est pas terminée.114 Dépannage 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, pointez sur Programmes→ Accessoires→ Outils système, puis cliquez sur Restauration du système. 2 Cliquez sur Undo my last restoration (Annuler ma dernière restauration), puis sur Suivant. Activation de la fonctionnalité Restauration du système Si vous réinstallez Windows XP avec moins de 200 Mo d'espace disponible sur le disque dur, la fonction Restauration du système est automatiquement désactivée. Pour vérifier si la fonction Restauration du système est activée : 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Panneau de configuration. 2 Cliquez sur Performances et maintenance. 3 Cliquez sur Système. 4 Cliquez sur l'onglet Restauration du système. 5 Assurez-vous que l'option Désactiver la Restauration du système est bien désactivée. Utilisation de Dell PC Restore de Symantec AVIS : Dell PC Restore supprime définitivement toutes les données qui figurent sur le disque dur et supprime tous les programmes d'application et tous les pilotes installés après que vous avez reçu l'ordinateur. Si possible, sauvegardez toutes les données avant de lancer PC Restore. N'utilisez PC Restore que si la restauration du système (reportez-vous à la section «Utilisation de la Restauration du système Microsoft Windows XP» à la page 112) n'a pas résolu le problème rencontré par votre système d'exploitation. REMARQUE : Dell PC Restore de Symantec n'est pas obligatoirement disponible dans certains pays ou sur certains ordinateurs. N'utilisez Dell PC Restore de Symantec qu'en dernier ressort pour restaurer votre système d'exploitation. PC Restore restaure votre disque dur à l'état de fonctionnement dans lequel il était lorsque vous avez acheté l'ordinateur. Tous les programmes ou fichiers ajoutés depuis que vous avez reçu votre ordinateur, notamment les fichiers de données, sont définitivement supprimés du disque dur. Les documents, feuilles de calcul, messages électroniques, photos numériques et fichiers de musique constituent les fichiers de données. Si possible, sauvegardez toutes les données avant de lancer PC Restore. Pour utiliser PC Restore : 1 Allumez l'ordinateur. Au cours du processus d'amorçage, une barre bleue portant la mention www.dell.com apparaît dans la partie supérieure de l'écran. 2 Dès que cette barre bleue s'affiche, appuyez sur . Si vous n'appuyez pas sur à temps, laissez l'ordinateur finir de démarrer, puis redémarrez-le de nouveau. AVIS : Si vous ne voulez pas poursuivre l'utilisation de PC Restore, cliquez sur Reboot (Redémarrer) à l'étape suivante. 3 Dans l'écran qui apparaît ensuite, cliquez sur Restaurer.Dépannage 115 4 Dans l'écran suivant, cliquez sur Confirmer. La restauration prend de 6 à 10 minutes environ. 5 Lorsque vous y êtes invité, cliquez sur Terminer pour redémarrer l'ordinateur. REMARQUE : N'éteignez pas manuellement l'ordinateur. Cliquez sur Terminer et laissez l'ordinateur terminer le redémarrage. 6 Lorsque vous y êtes invité, cliquez sur Oui. L'ordinateur redémarre. Étant donné que l'ordinateur est restauré à son état de fonctionnement d'origine, les écrans qui apparaissent, tels que le Contrat de licence pour utilisateur final sont identiques à ceux qui s'étaient affichés au premier démarrage de l'ordinateur. 7 Cliquez sur Suivant. L'écran Restauration du système apparaît et l'ordinateur redémarre. 8 Une fois l'ordinateur redémarré, cliquez sur OK. Suppression de Dell PC Restore AVIS : La suppression de Dell PC Restore du disque dur supprime de manière permanente l'utilitaire PC Restore de votre ordinateur. Une fois Dell PC Restore supprimé, vous ne pourrez plus l'utiliser pour restaurer le système d'exploitation de votre ordinateur. L'utilitaire Dell PC Restore restaure votre disque dur à l'état de fonctionnement dans lequel il était lorsque vous avez acheté l'ordinateur. Nous vous recommandons de ne pas supprimer PC Restore de votre ordinateur, même s'il se révèle nécessaire de libérer de l'espace sur le disque dur. Une fois PC Restore supprimé du disque dur, il est impossible de le rappeler et vous ne pourrez jamais utiliser PC Restore pour restaurer le système d'exploitation de votre ordinateur à son état de fonctionnement d'origine. Pour supprimer PC Restore : 1 Connectez-vous à l'ordinateur en tant qu'administrateur local. 2 Dans l'Explorateur Windows, rendez-vous à l'adresse c:\dell\utilities\DSR. 3 Double-cliquez sur le nom de fichier DSRIRRemv2.exe. REMARQUE : Si vous ne vous êtes pas connecté en tant qu'administrateur local, le message qui s'affiche vous invite à le faire. Cliquez sur Quitter et connectez-vous en tant qu'administrateur local. REMARQUE : Si la partition de PC Restore n'existe pas sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur, un message indiquant qu'elle n'a pas été trouvée apparaît. Cliquez sur Quitter ; il n'existe aucune partition à supprimer. 4 Cliquez sur OK pour supprimer la partition PC Restore sur le disque dur. 5 Lorsqu'un message de confirmation s'affiche, cliquez sur Oui. La partition PC Restore est supprimée et l'espace disque ainsi libéré est ajouté à l'espace disque disponible sur le disque dur. 116 Dépannage 6 Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur Disque local (C) dans l'Explorateur Windows, cliquez sur Propriétés, puis vérifiez que l'espace disque supplémentaire est disponible tel qu'indiqué par la valeur plus élevée sous Espace libre. 7 Cliquez sur Terminer pour fermer la fenêtre PC Restore Removal (Retrait de PC Restore). 8 Redémarrez l'ordinateur. Utilisation du CD Operating system Avant de commencer Si vous souhaitez réinstaller le système d'exploitation Windows XP pour corriger un problème avec un nouveau pilote, utilisez tout d'abord la fonction Restauration des pilotes de périphériques (reportez-vous à la section «Utilisation de la fonction Device Driver Rollback (Restauration des pilotes de périphériques) de Windows XP» à la page 110). Si la Restauration des pilotes de périphériques ne résout pas le problème, utilisez Restauration du système pour ramener l'ordinateur à l'état de fonctionnement précédant l'installation du pilote. Reportez-vous à la section «Utilisation de la Restauration du système Microsoft Windows XP» à la page 112.Dépannage 117 Pour réinstaller Windows XP, vous devez disposer des éléments suivants : • CD Operating system Dell™ • CD Drivers and Utilities de Dell REMARQUE : Le CD Drivers and Utilities contient les pilotes installés à l'assemblage de l'ordinateur. Utilisez le CD Drivers and Utilities pour charger les pilotes requis. Selon la région dans laquelle vous avez commandé votre ordinateur et selon que vous avez demandé ou non les CD, le CD Drivers and Utilities et le CD Operating System ne sont pas forcément livrés avec l'ordinateur. Réinstallation de Windows XP Le processus de réinstallation peut prendre de 1 à 2 heures. Après avoir réinstallé le système d'exploitation, vous devez également réinstaller les pilotes de périphériques, le programme antivirus et d'autres logiciels. AVIS : Le CD Operating System fournit des options de réinstallation du système Windows XP. Ces options peuvent remplacer des fichiers installés et avoir des répercussions sur les programmes installés sur votre disque dur. Par conséquent, ne réinstallez pas votre Windows XP à moins qu'un membre de l'équipe du support technique de Dell ne vous le demande. AVIS : Pour éviter des conflits avec Windows XP, vous devez désactiver tout logiciel de protection antivirus installé sur l'ordinateur avant de réinstaller le système d'exploitation. Pour plus d'informations, consultez la documentation qui accompagne le logiciel. 1 Enregistrez et fermez tout fichier ouvert et quittez tous les programmes d'application en cours d'utilisation. 2 Insérez le CD Operating system. Cliquez sur Quitter si le message Install Windows XP (Installer Windows XP) apparaît. 3 Redémarrez l'ordinateur. 4 Appuyez sur dès l'apparition du logo DELL™. Si le logo du système d'exploitation apparaît, patientez jusqu'à l'affichage du bureau Windows, éteignez de nouveau l'ordinateur et faites une nouvelle tentative. 5 Utilisez les touches de direction pour sélectionner l'option CD-ROM, puis appuyez sur . 6 Appuyez sur une touche lorsque le message Press any key to boot from CD (Appuyez sur une touche pour démarrer depuis le CD-ROM) apparaît à l'écran. 7 Lorsque l'écran Configuration de Windows XP apparaît, appuyez sur . 8 Respectez les instructions pour terminer la réinstallation. 9 Une fois la réinstallation terminée, réinstallez les pilotes et les programmes d'application, le cas échéant. Reportez-vous à la section «Réinstallation des pilotes et utilitaires» à la page 110.118 DépannageAjout et remplacement de pièces 119 Ajout et remplacement de pièces Avant de commencer Ce chapitre fournit les instructions de retrait et d'installation des composants de votre ordinateur. À moins d'indication contraire, les conditions suivantes doivent exister préalablement à chaque procédure : • Vous avez exécuté les procédures décrites dans les sections «Mise hors tension de votre ordinateur» (reportez-vous à la page correspondante) et «Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur» à la page 120. • Vous avez lu les consignes de sécurité qui figurent dans le Guide d'information sur le produit Dell™. • Pour remplacer un composant ou pour l'installer, s'il a été acheté séparément, effectuez la procédure de retrait en ordre inverse. Outils recommandés Les procédures mentionnées dans ce document nécessitent les outils suivants : • un petit tournevis à lame plate • un tournevis cruciforme • une petite pointe en plastique • le programme de mise à jour Flash BIOS (visitez le site Web de support technique de Dell à l'adresse support.dell.com) Mise hors tension de votre ordinateur AVIS : Pour éviter de perdre des données, enregistrez tous les fichiers ouverts, fermez-les et quittez toutes les applications avant de procéder à l'arrêt du système. 1 Arrêtez le système d'exploitation : a Enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers ouverts, quittez tous les programmes, cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, puis sur Arrêter l'ordinateur. b Dans la fenêtre Arrêter l'ordinateur, cliquez sur Arrêter/Éteindre. L'ordinateur s'éteint une fois le système d'exploitation arrêté.120 Ajout et remplacement de pièces 2 Assurez-vous que l'ordinateur et les périphériques connectés sont éteints. Si votre ordinateur et les périphériques qui y sont connectés ne se sont pas éteints automatiquement lorsque vous avez éteint votre ordinateur, appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation et maintenez-le enfoncé pendant au moins 8 à 10 secondes jusqu'à ce que l'ordinateur s'éteigne. Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur Respectez les consignes de sécurité suivantes pour vous aider à protéger votre ordinateur contre les dommages éventuels et pour garantir votre sécurité personnelle. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, suivez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. PRÉCAUTION : Manipulez les composants et les cartes avec précaution. Ne touchez pas les pièces ou les contacts d'une carte. Tenez une carte par les bords ou par la languette de montage métallique. Tenez les pièces, telles qu'un processeur, par les bords et non par les broches. AVIS : Les dommages causés par une personne non autorisée par Dell ne sont pas couverts par votre garantie. AVIS : Lorsque vous débranchez un câble, tirez sur son connecteur, mais jamais sur le câble lui-même. Certains câbles sont munis d'un connecteur aux languettes de verrouillage ; si vous déconnectez ce type de câble, appuyez sur les languettes de verrouillage vers l'intérieur avant de déconnecter le câble. Quand vous séparez les connecteurs en tirant dessus, veillez à les maintenir alignés pour ne pas plier de broches de connecteur. De même, lorsque vous connectez un câble, assurez-vous que les deux connecteurs sont bien orientés et alignés. AVIS : Pour éviter une décharge électrostatique, raccordez-vous à la masse à l'aide d'un bracelet antistatique ou en touchant périodiquement une surface métallique non peinte (par exemple un connecteur sur le panneau arrière de l'ordinateur). AVIS : Avant de commencer à travailler sur l'ordinateur, suivez les étapes suivantes pour éviter de l'endommager. 1 Assurez-vous que la surface de travail est plane et propre afin d'éviter de rayer le capot de l'ordinateur. 2 Éteignez l'ordinateur. Reportez-vous à la page 119. AVIS : Pour déconnecter un câble de réseau, débranchez d'abord le câble de votre ordinateur, puis de la prise réseau murale. 3 Débranchez également de l'ordinateur tous les câbles de téléphone ou de réseau. AVIS : Pour éviter d'endommager la carte système, veillez à retirer la batterie avant de réparer l'ordinateur. 4 Éteignez l'ordinateur, déconnectez tous les périphériques qui y sont reliés, puis débranchez-les de leur source d'alimentation. 5 Retirez la batterie. SFaites glisser et maintenez le loquet de fermeture de la baie de batterie, situé sur le dessous de l'ordinateur, puis retirez la batterie de la baie.Ajout et remplacement de pièces 121 6 Appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation pour mettre à la terre la carte système. 7 Retirez la carte ExpressCard du logement correspondant. Disque dur PRÉCAUTION : Si vous enlevez le disque dur lorsqu'il est chaud, ne touchez pas son habitacle en métal. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de la section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. AVIS : Pour éviter toute perte de données, éteignez votre ordinateur (reportez-vous à la page 119) avant de retirer le disque dur. Ne retirez jamais l'unité de disque dur lorsque l'ordinateur est allumé, en mode Veille ou en mode Mise en veille prolongée. AVIS : Les disques durs sont très fragiles ; même un léger choc peut les endommager. AVIS : Pour éviter une décharge électrostatique, raccordez-vous à la masse à l'aide d'un bracelet antistatique ou en touchant périodiquement une surface métallique non peinte (par exemple un connecteur sur le panneau arrière de l'ordinateur). AVIS : Pour éviter d'endommager la carte système, vous devez retirer la batterie avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur. REMARQUE : Dell ne garantit ni la compatibilité ni la prise en charge des unités de disque dur provenant de sources autres que Dell. REMARQUE : Si vous installez un disque dur provenant d'une source autre que Dell, vous devez installer un système d'exploitation, des pilotes et des utilitaires sur le nouveau disque dur. Reportez-vous aux sections «Restauration du système d'exploitation» à la page 112 et «Réinstallation des pilotes et utilitaires» à la page 110. 1 loquet de fermeture de la baie de batterie 2 batterie 1 2122 Ajout et remplacement de pièces Pour remplacer le disque dur : 1 Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section «Avant de commencer» à la page 119. 2 Retournez votre ordinateur et retirez les vis du disque dur. AVIS : Lorsque le disque dur n'est pas dans l'ordinateur, placez-le dans son emballage protecteur antistatique. Reportez-vous à la section «Protection contre les décharges électrostatiques» du Guide d'information sur le produit. 3 Sortez l'unité de disque dur de l'ordinateur. 4 Enlevez le nouveau disque de son emballage. Conservez cet emballage d'origine pour l'utiliser à nouveau lors du stockage ou de l'expédition du disque dur. AVIS : Faites glisser le disque dans son logement en exerçant une pression ferme et uniforme. Si vous exercez une pression trop forte sur le disque pour le mettre en place, vous risquez d'endommager le connecteur. 5 Faites glisser l'unité de disque dur dans la baie jusqu'à ce qu'elle soit complètement engagée. 6 Remettez et serrez les vis. 7 Si le nouveau disque dur n'est pas déjà pré-imagé, installez le système d'exploitation, les pilotes et les utilitaires appropriés à votre ordinateur. Reportez-vous aux sections «Restauration du système d'exploitation» à la page 112 et «Réinstallation des pilotes et utilitaires» à la page 110. 1 vis de l'unité de disque dur (2) 2 unité de disque dur 2 1Ajout et remplacement de pièces 123 Retour de votre disque dur à Dell Pour retourner votre ancien disque dur à Dell, placez-le dans son emballage d'origine ou dans un emballage similaire. Faute de quoi il risque d'être endommagé en transit. Mémoire Vous pouvez augmenter la mémoire de votre ordinateur en installant des modules de mémoire sur la carte système. Pour plus d'informations sur la mémoire prise en charge par votre ordinateur, reportezvous à la section «Caractéristiques» à la page 139. Installez uniquement des modules conçus spécifiquement pour votre ordinateur. REMARQUE : Pour bénéficier de la capacité de bande passante pour mémoire bicanal, deux modules de mémoire de même capacité doivent être installés dans les connecteurs de modules de mémoire. REMARQUE : Les modules de mémoire achetés chez Dell sont couverts par la garantie de votre ordinateur. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, suivez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. AVIS : Pour éviter une décharge électrostatique, raccordez-vous à la masse à l'aide d'un bracelet antistatique ou en touchant périodiquement une surface métallique non peinte (par exemple un connecteur sur le panneau arrière de l'ordinateur). AVIS : Pour éviter d'endommager la carte système, vous devez retirer la batterie avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur. 1 Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section «Avant de commencer» à la page 119. 2 Raccordez-vous à la masse en touchant l'un des connecteurs en métal à l'arrière de l'ordinateur. REMARQUE : Si vous quittez les lieux, remettez-vous à la terre au moment où vous revenez vers l'ordinateur. 1 emballage en polystyrène 2 unité de disque dur 2 1124 Ajout et remplacement de pièces 3 Retournez l'ordinateur, desserrez les vis imperdables du cache du module de mémoire, puis retirez le cache. AVIS : Pour éviter d'endommager le connecteur du module de mémoire, n'utilisez pas d'outil pour écarter les clips de fixation du module de mémoire. 4 Si vous remplacez un module de mémoire, retirez le module existant : a Du bout des doigts, écartez avec précaution les clips de fixation situés à chaque extrémité du connecteur du module de mémoire jusqu'à ce que le module sorte. b Retirez le module du connecteur. REMARQUE : Si le module de mémoire n'est pas installé correctement, l'ordinateur ne démarre pas. Aucun message d'erreur ne vous avertit de cet échec. 1 module de mémoire 2 clips de fixation (2 par connecteur) 3 connecteur de module de mémoire 1 2 3Ajout et remplacement de pièces 125 5 Raccordez-vous à la masse et installez le nouveau module de mémoire : a Alignez l'encoche du bord du module sur la languette située dans l'emplacement du connecteur. b Faites glisser fermement le module dans l'emplacement en suivant un angle de 45 degrés, puis faites-le pivoter vers le bas jusqu'à ce que vous entendiez un déclic. S'il ne s'enclenche pas, retirez le module et réinstallez-le. 6 Remettez le cache du module de mémoire en place. AVIS : Si vous rencontrez des difficultés pour fermer le cache, retirez le module et réinstallez-le. Ne forcez pas la fermeture du cache, car vous risqueriez d'endommager l'ordinateur. 7 Insérez la batterie dans sa baie ou connectez l'adaptateur secteur à votre ordinateur et à une prise secteur. 8 Allumez l'ordinateur. Au démarrage, l'ordinateur détecte la mémoire supplémentaire et met automatiquement à jour les informations de configuration du système. Si vous y êtes invité, appuyez sur pour continuer. Pour vérifier la quantité de mémoire installée, cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer, sur Aide et support, puis sur Informations sur l'ordinateur.126 Ajout et remplacement de pièces Modem PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, suivez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. AVIS : Pour éviter une décharge électrostatique, raccordez-vous à la masse à l'aide d'un bracelet antistatique ou en touchant périodiquement une surface métallique non peinte (par exemple un connecteur sur le panneau arrière de l'ordinateur). AVIS : Pour éviter d'endommager la carte système, vous devez retirer la batterie avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur. 1 Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section «Avant de commencer» à la page 119. 2 Retournez l'ordinateur et desserrez les vis imperdables du cache du compartiment pour carte Mini/modem. 3 Placez votre doigt sous le cache au niveau du renfoncement, puis soulevez et retirez le cache. 4 Retirez le modem installé : a Retirez la vis permettant de fixer le modem sur la carte système et mettez-la de côté. b Soulevez la languette de retrait afin de retirer le modem du connecteur, sur la carte système, puis déconnectez le câble du modem.Ajout et remplacement de pièces 127 5 Installez le modem de remplacement : a Connectez le câble du modem au modem. AVIS : Les connecteurs sont prévus pour une insertion correcte. Si vous sentez une résistance, vérifiez les connecteurs et réalignez la carte. b Alignez le modem sur les trous des vis et appuyez sur le modem pour l'insérer dans le connecteur de la carte système. c Remettez en place la vis qui fixe le modem à la carte système. 6 Remettez en place le cache du compartiment pour carte Mini/modem. Carte Mini Si vous avez commandé une carte Mini avec votre ordinateur, la carte est déjà installée. PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, suivez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. AVIS : Pour éviter une décharge électrostatique, raccordez-vous à la masse à l'aide d'un bracelet antistatique ou en touchant périodiquement une surface métallique non peinte (par exemple un connecteur sur le panneau arrière de l'ordinateur). 1 modem 3 câble du modem 5 connecteur modem sur la carte système 2 languette de retrait du modem 4 vis du modem 1 5 2 4 3128 Ajout et remplacement de pièces AVIS : Pour éviter d'endommager la carte système, vous devez retirer la batterie avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur. 1 Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section «Avant de commencer» à la page 119. 2 Retournez l'ordinateur et desserrez les vis imperdables du cache du compartiment pour carte Mini/modem. 3 Placez votre doigt sous le cache au niveau du renfoncement, puis soulevez et retirez le cache. 4 Si aucune carte Mini n'est installée, passez à l'étape 5. Si vous remplacez une carte Mini, retirez la carte existante : a Déconnectez les câbles d'antenne de la carte Mini.Ajout et remplacement de pièces 129 b Retirez la carte Mini en poussant les clips de fixation métalliques vers l'arrière de l'ordinateur jusqu'à ce que la carte soit doucement éjectée. c Retirez la carte Mini de son connecteur. 1 câbles d'antenne (2) 2 carte Mini 3 connecteur de carte Mini 1 clips de fixation 2 carte Mini 1 3 2 2 1130 Ajout et remplacement de pièces AVIS : Les connecteurs sont prévus pour une insertion correcte. Si vous sentez une résistance, vérifiez les connecteurs et réalignez la carte. 5 Installez la carte Mini de remplacement : a Alignez la carte Mini sur le connecteur suivant un angle de 45 degrés et appuyez sur la carte pour l'insérer dans les clips de fixation jusqu'à ce que vous entendiez un déclic. AVIS : Pour éviter d'endommager la carte Mini, ne placez jamais de câbles au-dessous de la carte. b Raccordez les câbles d'antenne aux connecteurs d'antenne de la carte Mini en faisant correspondre la couleur du câble avec la couleur du triangle au-dessus du connecteur. Raccordez le câble d'antenne principal (blanc) au connecteur d'antenne avec le triangle blanc. Raccordez le câble d'antenne auxiliaire (noir) au connecteur d'antenne avec le triangle noir. REMARQUE : Si votre ordinateur dispose d'un câble gris, raccordez celui-ci au connecteur avec le triangle gris, si ce connecteur est disponible sur votre carte. 1 clips de fixation 2 connecteurs d'antenne (2) 3 connecteur de carte Mini 2 3 1Ajout et remplacement de pièces 131 6 Remettez en place le cache du compartiment pour carte Mini/modem. Cache de la charnière PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, suivez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. AVIS : Pour éviter une décharge électrostatique, raccordez-vous à la masse à l'aide d'un bracelet antistatique ou en touchant périodiquement une surface métallique non peinte (par exemple un connecteur sur le panneau arrière de l'ordinateur). AVIS : Pour éviter d'endommager la carte système, vous devez retirer la batterie avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur. 1 Suivez les procédures de la section «Avant de commencer» à la page 119. 2 Retirez le cache de la charnière. a Ouvrez complètement l'écran (180 degrés) de façon à ce qu'il repose à plat sur votre surface de travail. AVIS : Pour éviter d'endommager le cache de la charnière, ne soulevez pas le cache des deux côtés simultanément. b Insérez une pointe en plastique dans l'encoche pour soulever le cache de la charnière du côté droit. c Faites glisser le cache de la charnière de droite à gauche, vers le haut et retirez-le. 132 Ajout et remplacement de pièces Pour remettre en place le cache de la charnière, insérez tout d'abord son côté gauche, puis appuyez de gauche à droite jusqu'à ce que le cache s'enclenche. 1 cache de la charnière 1Ajout et remplacement de pièces 133 Clavier PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, suivez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. AVIS : Pour éviter une décharge électrostatique, raccordez-vous à la masse à l'aide d'un bracelet antistatique ou en touchant périodiquement une surface métallique non peinte (par exemple un connecteur sur le panneau arrière de l'ordinateur). AVIS : Pour éviter d'endommager la carte système, vous devez retirer la batterie avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur. 1 Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section «Avant de commencer» à la page 119. 2 Ouvrez l'écran et retirez le cache de la charnière. Reportez-vous à la section «Cache de la charnière» à la page 131. 3 Retirez le clavier : a Retirez les deux vis qui maintiennent la partie supérieure du clavier. AVIS : Les dessus de touches du clavier sont fragiles, facilement délogés et leur remise en place exige beaucoup de temps. Faites plus particulièrement attention au cours du retrait et de la manipulation du clavier. b Soulevez le clavier et maintenez-le soulevé et légèrement vers l'avant pour accéder au connecteur du clavier. c Pour débrancher le câble du clavier du connecteur correspondant sur la carte système, tournez le loquet du connecteur de clavier vers l'avant de l'ordinateur. d Retirez le câble du clavier de connecteur correspondant sur la carte système. AVIS : Pour éviter de rayer le repose-mains lors de la remise en place du clavier, enclenchez les cinq onglets situés à l'avant du clavier dans le repose-mains, puis fixez le clavier. 1 clavier 3 câble du clavier 5 languettes du clavier 2 vis du clavier (2) 4 loquet du connecteur de clavier 4 5 3 1 2134 Ajout et remplacement de pièces Pile bouton PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, suivez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. AVIS : Pour éviter une décharge électrostatique, raccordez-vous à la masse à l'aide d'un bracelet antistatique ou en touchant périodiquement une surface métallique non peinte (par exemple un connecteur sur le panneau arrière de l'ordinateur). AVIS : Pour éviter d'endommager la carte système, vous devez retirer la batterie avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur. 1 Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section «Avant de commencer» à la page 119. 2 Retirez le cache de la charnière. Reportez-vous à la section «Cache de la charnière» à la page 131. 3 Retirez le clavier. Reportez-vous à la section «Clavier» à la page 133. 4 Retirez la pile bouton existante : a Tirez sur le connecteur pour débrancher le câble de la pile de la carte système. b Appuyez sur le loquet situé près du compartiment de la pile bouton et retirez la pile. 5 Installez la pile de remplacement : a Insérez la pile suivant un angle de 30 degrés sous le loquet avec le côté positif vers le haut, puis enfoncez-la jusqu'à ce qu'elle soit bien en place. b Connectez le câble de la pile au connecteur de la carte système. 6 Remettez le clavier en place. 7 Remettez en place le cache de la charnière. 1 pile bouton 2 loquet 3 connecteur du câble de la pile 1 2 3Ajout et remplacement de pièces 135 Lecteur optique PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, suivez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. 1 Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section «Avant de commencer» à la page 119. 2 Retournez l'ordinateur. 3 Retirez la vis de fixation du lecteur optique. 4 Insérez une pointe en plastique dans l'encoche et poussez-la vers le côté pour libérer le lecteur de la baie. 5 Retirez le lecteur de la baie. Pour réinstaller le lecteur optique, faites glisser le lecteur dans la baie d'unité et enclenchez-le. Remettez ensuite la vis de fixation du lecteur optique en place. Carte interne dotée de la technologie sans fil Bluetooth® PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, suivez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. AVIS : Pour éviter une décharge électrostatique, raccordez-vous à la masse à l'aide d'un bracelet antistatique ou en touchant périodiquement une surface métallique non peinte (par exemple un connecteur sur le panneau arrière de l'ordinateur). AVIS : Pour éviter d'endommager la carte système, vous devez retirer la batterie avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur. 1 lecteur optique 2 vis de fixation du lecteur optique 3 encoche 2 1 3136 Ajout et remplacement de pièces La carte dotée de la technologie sans fil Bluetooth est déjà installée sur votre système si vous l'avez commandée avec votre ordinateur. 1 Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section «Avant de commencer» à la page 119. 2 Retirez la batterie. Reportez-vous à la section «Remplacement de la batterie» à la page 48. 3 Desserrez la vis imperdable et retirez le cache de la carte de l'ordinateur. 4 Retirez la carte du compartiment afin de la déconnecter de son câble et la retirer de l'ordinateur. 5 Pour remettre la carte en place, connectez-la au câble et insérez-la avec précaution dans le compartiment. 6 Remettez le cache et serrez la vis imperdable. 7 Remettez la batterie en place. 1 connecteur de câble 2 carte 3 cache de carte 3 2 1Voyager avec votre ordinateur 137 Voyager avec votre ordinateur Identification de l'ordinateur • Attachez une étiquette avec votre nom ou votre carte de visite à votre ordinateur. • Notez votre numéro de service et gardez-le en lieu sûr, dans un endroit autre que près de l'ordinateur ou de la sacoche de transport. • Utilisez votre numéro de service si vous devez reporter la perte ou le vol de votre ordinateur à la police et à Dell. • Créez un fichier sur le bureau Microsoft® Windows® et nommez-le if_found. Placez dans ce fichier des informations, telles que vos nom, adresse et numéro de téléphone. • Contactez votre compagnie de carte de crédit et demandez-lui si elle offre des étiquettes avec identification codée. Emballage de l'ordinateur • Retirez tous les périphériques externes connectés à l'ordinateur et stockez-les en lieu sûr. Déconnectez tous les câbles reliés à des cartes PC installées et retirez toutes les cartes PC étendues («Utilisation des cartes» à la page 71). • Chargez complètement la batterie principale et toutes les batteries de secours que vous pensez emporter. • Éteignez l'ordinateur. • Débranchez l'adaptateur secteur. AVIS : Lorsque vous fermez l'écran, les objets laissés sur le clavier ou le repose-mains risquent d'endommager l'écran. • Retirez tous objets du clavier et du repose-mains, comme les trombones, les stylos et les papiers, puis fermez l'écran. • Utilisez la sacoche de transport Dell™ (en option) pour emballer l'ordinateur et ses accessoires en toute sécurité. • Évitez d'emballer l'ordinateur avec des articles tels que crème à raser, eau de Cologne, parfum ou nourriture. AVIS : Si l'ordinateur a été exposé à des températures extrêmes, laissez-le s'acclimater pendant une heure à la température ambiante avant de l'allumer.138 Voyager avec votre ordinateur • Protégez l'ordinateur, les batteries et le disque dur contre des risques tels que les températures extrêmes, la surexposition à la lumière, la saleté, la poussière ou les liquides. • Calez bien l'ordinateur afin d'éviter qu'il ne se déplace dans le coffre de votre voiture ou dans un compartiment à bagages situé en hauteur. Conseils de voyage AVIS : Pour éviter de perdre des données, ne déplacez pas l'ordinateur lorsque vous utilisez le lecteur optique. AVIS : N'enregistrez pas votre ordinateur avec vos bagages. • Pensez à désactiver l'activité réseau sans fil sur votre ordinateur afin d'optimiser l'autonomie de la batterie. Pour désactiver l'activité sans fil, appuyez sur . • Pensez à modifier vos options de gestion de l'alimentation (reportez-vous à la section «Configuration des paramètres de gestion de l'alimentation» à la page 47) afin d'optimiser l'autonomie de la batterie. • Si vous voyagez à l'étranger, emmenez une preuve de propriété ou de votre droit à utiliser l'ordinateur s'il appartient à votre société pour accélérer le passage de la douane. Cherchez des informations auprès des autorités douanières des pays que vous pensez visiter et envisagez d'acquérir un carnet international (appelé également passeport de marchandises) auprès de votre gouvernement. • Renseignez-vous sur le type de prises secteur utilisées dans les pays où vous vous rendez et munissezvous des adaptateurs appropriés. • Les détenteurs de cartes de crédit doivent se renseigner auprès de leur compagnie de crédit au sujet de l'assistance en cas d'urgence à l'étranger proposée aux utilisateurs d'ordinateurs portables. Transport aérien AVIS : Ne faites jamais passer votre ordinateur dans un détecteur de métal. Vous pouvez faire passer l'ordinateur dans un détecteur à rayons X ou le faire inspecter manuellement. • Assurez-vous d'avoir une batterie chargée sous la main au cas où l'on vous demanderait d'allumer l'ordinateur. • Avant de pénétrer dans l'avion, assurez-vous que l'utilisation d'un ordinateur est permise. Certaines compagnies aériennes interdisent l'usage d'appareils électroniques pendant le vol. Toutes les compagnies aériennes interdisent l'usage de tels dispositifs pendant les phases de décollage et d'atterrissage.Caractéristiques 139 Caractéristiques REMARQUE : Votre ordinateur est disponible en différentes configurations. Pour connaître la configuration de votre ordinateur, reportez-vous à la section «Connaître la configuration de votre ordinateur» à la page 15. Processeur Type de processeur processeur Intel® Core™ Solo processeur Intel® Core™ Duo Mémoire cache L1 64 Ko Mémoire cache L2 2 Mo Fréquence du bus externe (bus frontal) 533 MHz ou 667 MHz Informations sur le système Jeu de puces du système Mobile Intel 945PM Express ou Mobile Intel 945 GM Express Largeur du bus de données 64 bits Largeur du bus de la mémoire DRAM Bus bicanal Largeur du bus d'adresses du processeur 32 bits Flash EPROM 1 Mo Bus PCI (PCI-Express utilisé pour les contrôleurs vidéo) 32 bits x16 Carte ExpressCard REMARQUE : Le logement de carte ExpressCard est conçu uniquement pour les cartes ExpressCard. Il ne prend PAS en charge les cartes PC. REMARQUE : Les cartes ExpressCard peuvent ne pas être disponibles dans toutes les régions. Connecteur de la carte ExpressCard Un logement ExpressCard (54 mm) 1,5 et 3,3 V Cartes prises en charge Carte ExpressCard/34 (34 mm) et carte ExpressCard/54 (54 mm) Taille du connecteur de la carte ExpressCard 26 broches140 Caractéristiques Mémoire Connecteur du module de mémoire Deux connecteurs SODIMM accessibles à l'utilisateur Capacités du module de mémoire 256 Mo, 512 Mo, 1 Go et 2 Go Type de mémoire 1,8 V SODIMM DDR II Prend en charge la DDR II jusqu'à 667 MHz Mémoire minimale 256 Mo Mémoire maximale 4 Go REMARQUE : Pour bénéficier de la capacité de bande passante pour mémoire bicanal, deux modules de mémoire de même capacité doivent être installés dans les emplacements de mémoire. REMARQUE : La mémoire disponible affichée ne reflète pas la capacité totale de mémoire installée car une partie de la mémoire est dédiée aux fichiers système. Lecteur de carte mémoire multimédia 5 en 1 Contrôleur de la carte mémoire multimédia 5 en 1 Ricoh R5C832 Connecteur de la carte mémoire multimédia 5 en 1 Connecteur de la carte combinée 5 en 1 Cartes prises en charge MS MS Pro SD/SDIO MMC xD CD Type I/II & IBM Microdrive par adaptateur ExpressCard Ports et connecteurs Audio Connecteur de microphone (entrée), connecteur de casque/de haut-parleurs stéréo IEEE 1394a Mini connecteur non alimenté à 4 broches Modem Port RJ-11 Carte réseau Port RJ-45 Connecteur de sortie TV S-vidéo Connecteur mini-DIN 7 broches (câble d'adaptateur S-vidéo/vidéo composite en option ; câble d'adaptateur S-vidéo/vidéo composante en option) USB Six connecteurs à 4 broches conformes à la norme USB 2.0 Vidéo Connecteur mâle à 15 broches DVI-D (interface vidéo numérique) Connecteur à 24 brochesCaractéristiques 141 Communications Modem : Type v.92 56K MDC Contrôleur Softmodem Interface Bus HDA (High Definition Audio) interne Carte réseau LAN Ethernet 10/100 sur la carte système Sans fil prise en charge de WLAN carte Mini PCI-e ; carte interne dotée de la technologie sans fil Bluetooth® Vidéo REMARQUE : Votre ordinateur est disponible en différentes configurations avec différentes cartes de contrôleur vidéo. Pour connaître la configuration de votre ordinateur, reportez-vous à la section «Connaître la configuration de votre ordinateur» à la page 15. Contrôleur vidéo (discret) NVIDIA GeForce Go 7800 Type de vidéo 256 bits, accélérée par matériel Bus de données PCIe Express x16 Mémoire vidéo 256 Mo Contrôleur vidéo (discret) NVIDIA GeForce Go 7900 GS Type de vidéo 256 bits, accélérée par matériel Bus de données PCIe Express x16 Mémoire vidéo 256 Mo Contrôleur vidéo (discret) HyperMemory ATI Mobility™ Radeon® X1400 Type de vidéo 256 bits, accélérée par matériel Bus de données PCIe Express x16 Mémoire vidéo 256 Mo Contrôleur vidéo (intégré) Intel Graphics Media Accelerator 950 (accélérateur de support graphique) Type de vidéo intégrée à la carte mère, 256 bit accélérée par matériel Bus de données Vidéo intégrée Mémoire vidéo Jusqu'à 128 Mo de mémoire partagée (lorsque la mémoire système installée fait moins de 512 Mo) Jusqu'à 224 Mo de mémoire partagée (lorsque la mémoire système installée fait plus de 512 Mo) Interface LCD LVDS Prise en charge TV NTSC ou PAL en modes S-vidéo et composite ou vidéo composante142 Caractéristiques Audio Type d'audio Codec HDA (High Definition Audio) Conversion stéréo 24 bits (analogique-numérique et numériqueanalogique) Interfaces : Interne Bus HDA Externe Connecteur de microphone (entrée), connecteur de casque/de haut-parleurs stéréo Haut-parleur Haut-parleurs principaux stéréo 2 W et caisson de basse 5 W avec port réflexe de basse Amplificateur de haut-parleur interne 2 W par amplificateur principal de canal et amplificateur caisson de basse de classe D 5 W Contrôle du volume Raccourcis clavier, menus de programme, boutons de commande multimédia Contrôleur audio Codec Sigmatel STAC92XX Écran Type (matrice active TFT) WXGA+ ; WUXGA Dimensions : Hauteur 245,0 mm (9,64 pouces) Largeur 383,0 mm (15 pouces) Diagonale 431,8 mm (17 pouces) Résolutions maximales : WXGA+ 1440 x 900 avec 16,7 millions de couleurs WUXGA 1920 x 1200 avec 16,7 millions de couleurs Taux de rafraîchissement 60 Hz Angle de fonctionnement 0° (fermé) à 180° Angle de vue (typique) : Horizontal ±40° (WXGA+) ±60° (WUXGA) Vertical +15°/–30° (WXGA+) ±45° (WUXGA) Taille du pixel : WXGA+ 0,255 mm (écran 17 pouces)Caractéristiques 143 WUXGA 0,191 mm (écran 17 pouces) Consommation électrique (panneau avec rétro-éclairage) (typique) : 7,54 W Boutons de réglage Possibilité de réglage de la luminosité à l'aide de raccourcis clavier Clavier Nombre de touches 87 (États-Unis et Canada) ; 88 (Europe) ; 91 (Japon) Disposition QWERTY/AZERTY/Kanji Tablette tactile Résolution X/Y (mode Tablette graphique) 240 cpi Taille : Largeur Zone sensible de 73,0 mm (2,88 pouces) Hauteur Rectangle de 42,9 mm (1,69 pouce) Batterie Type «SMART» au lithium-ion, 9 cellules «SMART» au lithium-ion, 6 cellules Dimensions : Profondeur 88,5 mm (3,48 pouces) Hauteur 21,5 mm (0,83 pouce) Largeur 139,0 mm (5,47 pouces) Poids 0,40 kg (0,88 livre) (9 cellules) 0,26 kg (0,57 livre) (6 cellules) Tension 10,8 VCC Durée approximative de la charge : Ordinateur éteint 2 heures (à 100 % en 2 heures) 1 heure (à 80 % en 1 heure) Écran (Suite)144 Caractéristiques Durée de fonctionnement L'autonomie de la batterie varie en fonction de l'utilisation et peut être considérablement réduite en cas d'utilisation intensive. Reportez-vous à la section «Problèmes liés à l'alimentation» à la page 104. Reportez-vous à la section «Utilisation d'une batterie» à la page 43 pour plus d'informations sur la durée de vie de la batterie. Durée de service approximative 300 cycles de décharge/charge Plage de températures : Fonctionnement 0° à 35° C (32° à 95° F) Stockage –40° à 65° C (–40° à 149° F) Adaptateur secteur Tension d'entrée 90 à 264 VCA Courant d'entrée (maximal) 1,5 A Fréquence d'entrée 47 à 63 Hz Courant de sortie 5,62 A (maximum à impulsion 4 secondes) ; 4,62 A (continu) Alimentation de sortie 90 W Tension de sortie nominale 19,5 VCC Dimensions : Hauteur 34,2 mm (1,35 pouce) Largeur 60,8 mm (2,39 pouces) Profondeur 153,4 mm (6,04 pouces) Poids (avec les câbles) 0,54 kg (1,19 livre) Plage de températures : Fonctionnement 0° à 35° C (32° à 95° F) Stockage –40° à 65° C (–40° à 149° F) Caractéristiques physiques Hauteur 41,5 mm (1,6 pouce) Largeur 394 mm (15,5 pouces) Profondeur 287 mm (11,3 pouces) Poids Batterie (Suite)Caractéristiques 145 Le poids varie selon la configuration des composants du système (batterie à 9 cellules ou 6 cellules, lecteur optique, ventilateurs) À partir de 3,45 kg (7,61 livres) Environnement de fonctionnement Plage de températures : Fonctionnement 0° à 35° C (32° à 95° F) Stockage –40° à 65° C (–40° à 149° F) Humidité relative : Fonctionnement 10 à 90 % (sans condensation) Stockage 5 à 95 % (sans condensation) Vibration maximale (avec un spectre de vibration aléatoire simulant l'environnement utilisateur) : Fonctionnement 0,66 GRMS Stockage 1,3 GRMS Chocs maximaux (mesurés avec une demi-impulsion sinusoïdale de 2 ms) : Fonctionnement 143 G Stockage 163 G Altitude (maximale) : Fonctionnement –15,2 à 3048 m (–50 à 10 000 pieds) Stockage –15,2 à 10 668 m (–50 à 35 000 pieds) Caractéristiques physiques (Suite)146 CaractéristiquesObtention d'aide 147 Obtention d'aide Obtention d'assistance PRÉCAUTION : Si vous devez retirer les caches de l'ordinateur, déconnectez d'abord de leurs prises les câbles d'alimentation de l'ordinateur et du modem. 1 Exécutez les procédures décrites à la section «Dépannage» à la page 87. 2 Exécutez Dell Diagnostics (reportez-vous à la section «Dell Diagnostics» à la page 87). 3 Effectuez une copie de la «Liste de vérification des diagnostics» à la page 150 et renseignez-la. 4 Utilisez la gamme complète de services en ligne de Dell disponibles sur le site Web Dell Support (support.dell.com) pour obtenir de l'aide sur les procédures d'installation et de dépannage. 5 Si les étapes précédentes ne vous ont pas permis de résoudre le problème, contactez Dell (reportez-vous à la section «Contacter Dell» à la page 157. REMARQUE : Appelez le support technique à partir d'un téléphone situé à proximité de l'ordinateur afin que le technicien vous guide pendant la procédure de dépannage. REMARQUE : Il se peut que le code de service express des systèmes Dell ne soit pas disponible dans votre pays. Lorsque le système téléphonique automatisé de Dell vous le demande, entrez votre code de service express pour que votre appel soit directement acheminé vers l'équipe de support technique appropriée. Si vous ne disposez pas de code de service express, ouvrez le dossier Dell Accessories (Accessoires Dell), double-cliquez sur l'icône Express Service Code (Code de service express) et suivez les instructions. Pour obtenir des instructions sur l'utilisation du service de support, reportez-vous à la section «Service de support» à la page 148. REMARQUE : Certains des services suivants ne sont pas toujours disponibles en dehors des États-Unis. Veuillez contacter votre représentant Dell local pour obtenir des informations sur leur disponibilité. Services en ligne Vous pouvez accéder au site du service de support de Dell à l'adresse support.dell.com. Sélectionnez votre région sur la page WELCOME TO DELL SUPPORT (Bienvenue dans le service de support de Dell) et donnez les détails requis pour accéder aux outils d'aide et aux informations. Vous pouvez contacter Dell par voie électronique aux adresses suivantes : • World Wide Web www.dell.com/ www.dell.com/ap/ (région Asie/Pacifique uniquement)148 Obtention d'aide www.dell.com/jp (Japon uniquement) www.euro.dell.com (Europe uniquement) www.dell.com/la/ (pays d'Amérique Latine) www.dell.ca (Canada uniquement) • Par FTP anonyme ftp.dell.com/ Connectez-vous en tant qu'utilisateur : anonyme, puis utilisez votre adresse électronique comme mot de passe. • Service électronique de support mobile_support@us.dell.com support@us.dell.com apsupport@dell.com (pays d'Asie et du Pacifique uniquement) support.jp.dell.com (Japon uniquement) support.euro.dell.com (Europe uniquement) • Service électronique de devis apmarketing@dell.com (pays d'Asie et du Pacifique uniquement) sales_canada@dell.com (Canada uniquement) Service AutoTech Le service de support automatisé de Dell, AutoTech, fournit des réponses enregistrées aux questions les plus fréquemment posées par les clients de Dell au sujet des ordinateurs portables et de bureau. Lorsque vous appelez AutoTech, utilisez votre téléphone à clavier pour sélectionner les sujets correspondant à vos questions. Le service AutoTech est disponible 24 heures sur 24, 7 jours sur 7. Vous pouvez aussi accéder à ce service par l'intermédiaire du service de support. Pour obtenir le numéro de téléphone, consultez la liste des numéros d'appel de votre région. Service d'état des commandes automatisé Pour vérifier l'état de vos commandes de produits Dell™, visitez le site Web support.dell.com ou appeler le service d'état des commandes automatisé. Un enregistrement vous demande les informations nécessaires pour repérer votre commande et en faire un rapport. Pour obtenir le numéro de téléphone, consultez la liste des numéros d'appel de votre région. Service de support Le service de support technique de Dell est disponible 24 heures sur 24 et 7 jours sur 7, pour répondre à vos questions concernant le matériel Dell. Nos employés de support utilisent des diagnostics sur ordinateur pour fournir rapidement des réponses exactes. Pour contacter le service de support de Dell, reportez-vous à la section Obtention d'assistance, puis composez le numéro correspondant à votre pays comme indiqué dans la section «Contacter Dell» à la page 157.Obtention d'aide 149 Problèmes liés à votre commande Si vous avez un problème lié à votre commande, comme des pièces manquantes ou non adaptées, ou une facturation erronée, contactez le Service clientèle de Dell. Gardez votre facture ou votre bordereau de marchandises à portée de main lorsque vous appelez. Pour obtenir le numéro de téléphone, consultez la liste des numéros d'appel de votre région. Informations sur le produit Si vous avez besoin d'informations à propos d'autres produits disponibles chez Dell, ou si vous désirez passer une commande, consultez le site Web de Dell à l'adresse www.dell.com. Pour obtenir le numéro à composer afin de consulter un spécialiste des ventes, reportez-vous à la liste des numéros d'appel de votre région. Renvoi d'articles pour une réparation sous garantie ou un remboursement sous forme de crédit Préparez tous les articles à retourner, pour réparation ou mise en crédit, comme indiqué ci-après : 1 Contactez Dell pour obtenir un numéro d'autorisation de retour de matériel et écrivez-le clairement et bien visiblement sur l'extérieur de la boîte. Pour obtenir le numéro de téléphone, consultez la liste des numéros d'appel de votre région. 2 Joignez une copie de la facture et une lettre décrivant la raison du renvoi. 3 Fournissez une copie de la Liste de vérification des diagnostics indiquant les tests que vous avez exécutés et les messages d'erreur affichés par Dell Diagnostics. 4 Joignez tous les accessoires qui doivent accompagner le ou les articles renvoyés (câbles d'alimentation, disquettes de logiciels, guides, etc.) si le retour est à porter en crédit. 5 Empaquetez l'équipement à renvoyer dans son emballage d'origine (ou équivalent). L'assurance des articles retournés vous incombe et vous acceptez le risque de leur perte au cours de leur acheminement vers Dell. Les envois en contre-remboursement ne sont pas acceptés. Les retours ne comportant pas les éléments décrits ci-dessus seront refusés à notre quai de réception et vous seront retournés. Avant d'appeler REMARQUE : Ayez votre code de service express à portée de main quand vous appelez. Ce code permet au système d'assistance téléphonique automatisé de Dell de diriger votre appel plus efficacement. N'oubliez pas de remplir la Liste de vérification des diagnostics. Si possible, allumez votre ordinateur avant de contacter Dell pour obtenir une assistance technique, et appelez d'un téléphone qui se trouve à proximité de votre ordinateur. On pourra vous demander de taper certaines commandes au clavier, de donner des informations détaillées sur le fonctionnement de l'ordinateur ou d'essayer d'autres méthodes de dépannage uniquement possibles sur ce dernier. Assurez-vous que la documentation de l'ordinateur est disponible. 150 Obtention d'aide PRÉCAUTION : Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de l'ordinateur, lisez les instructions de la section concernant la sécurité de votre Guide d'information sur le produit Liste de vérification des diagnostics Nom : Date : Adresse : Numéro de téléphone : Code de maintenance (code barre à l'arrière de l'ordinateur) : Code de service express : Numéro d'autorisation de retour du matériel (s'il vous a été fourni par le support technique de Dell) : Système d'exploitation et version : Périphériques : Cartes d'extension : Êtes-vous connecté à un réseau ? Oui Non Réseau, version et carte réseau : Programmes et versions : Reportez-vous à la documentation de votre système d'exploitation pour déterminer le contenu des fichiers de démarrage du système. Si l'ordinateur est relié à une imprimante, imprimez chaque fichier. Sinon, notez le contenu de chaque fichier avant d'appeler Dell. Message d'erreur, code sonore ou code de diagnostic : Description du problème et procédures de dépannage que vous avez réalisées :Annexe 151 Annexe Utilisation du programme de configuration du système REMARQUE : Il se peut que votre système d'exploitation configure automatiquement la plupart des options disponibles dans le programme de configuration ; les options que vous avez configurées à l'aide de ce programme sont alors ignorées. Seule exception, l'option External Hot Key (Touche rapide externe), que vous pouvez désactiver ou activer via le programme de configuration du système uniquement. Pour plus d'informations sur la configuration des fonctions de votre système d'exploitation, reportez-vous au Centre d'aide et de support Windows. Pour accéder au Centre d'aide et de support, reportez-vous à la section «Centre d'aide et de support de Windows» à la page 13. Les écrans de configuration du système affichent les informations sur la configuration courante et les paramètres de votre ordinateur, par exemple : • Configuration du système • Paramètres de configuration de base des périphériques • Paramètres de sécurité du système et mot de passe de disque dur • Paramètres de gestion de l'alimentation • Paramètres de configuration d'amorçage (démarrage) et d'affichage • Paramètres de contrôle sans fil AVIS : Ne modifiez les paramètres du programme de configuration du système que si vous êtes un utilisateur expérimenté en informatique ou si vous êtes assisté par un représentant du support technique de Dell. Certaines modifications risquent de provoquer un mauvais fonctionnement de l'ordinateur. Visualisation des écrans du programme de configuration du système 1 Mettez votre ordinateur sous tension (ou redémarrez-le). 2 Lorsque le logo DELL™ apparaît, appuyez immédiatement sur . Si vous attendez trop longtemps et que le logo Windows apparaît, attendez encore jusqu'à ce que le bureau Windows s'affiche. Ensuite, arrêtez votre ordinateur et faites une nouvelle tentative. Écran de configuration du système L'écran de configuration du système se compose de trois fenêtres d'information. La fenêtre de gauche contient une hiérarchie développable des catégories de contrôle. Si vous sélectionnez (mettez en surbrillance) une catégorie (comme Système, Périphériques intégrés ou Vidéo) et que vous appuyez sur , vous pouvez afficher ou masquer les sous-catégories connexes. La fenêtre de droite contient des informations sur la catégorie ou sous-catégorie sélectionnée dans la fenêtre de gauche. 152 Annexe La fenêtre du bas indique comment contrôler la configuration du système à l'aide des fonctions des touches. Utilisez ces touches pour sélectionner une catégorie, modifier les paramètres ou quitter la configuration du système. Options fréquemment utilisées Certaines options nécessitent le redémarrage de l'ordinateur pour que les nouveaux paramètres entrent en vigueur. Modification de la séquence d'amorçage La séquence d'amorçage, ou ordre de démarrage, indique à l'ordinateur où chercher pour trouver le logiciel requis pour démarrer le système d'exploitation. Vous pouvez contrôler la séquence d'amorçage et activer/désactiver les périphériques à l'aide de la page Boot Order (Séquence d'amorçage) du programme de configuration du système. REMARQUE : Pour ne modifier la séquence d'amorçage qu'une seule fois, reportez-vous à la section «Exécution d'un amorçage ponctuel» à la page 153. Cette page affiche la liste générale des périphériques amorçables pouvant être installés sur l'ordinateur, notamment les suivants : • Lecteur de disquette • Unité de disque dur interne • Périphérique de stockage USB • Lecteur de CD/DVD/CD-RW • Disque dur de la baie modulaire REMARQUE : Seuls sont amorçables les périphériques précédés d'un numéro. Pendant la procédure d'amorçage, l'ordinateur commence par le début de la liste, puis analyse chacun des périphériques activés à la recherche des fichiers de démarrage du système d'exploitation. Une fois les fichiers trouvés, l'ordinateur arrête la recherche et fait démarrer le système d'exploitation. Pour définir les périphériques d'amorçage, sélectionnez (mettez en surbrillance) un périphérique en appuyant sur les touches fléchées haut ou bas, puis activez ou désactivez le périphérique ou modifiez son ordre dans la liste. • Pour activer ou désactiver un périphérique, sélectionnez-le et appuyez sur la barre d'espacement. Les éléments activés sont précédés d'un numéro ; ceux qui ne le sont pas ne sont pas précédés d'un numéro. • Pour modifier l'ordre d'un périphérique dans la liste, sélectionnez-le et appuyez sur pour déplacer le périphérique vers le haut (h) ou sur pour déplacer le périphérique vers le bas (b). Les modifications que vous apportez à la séquence d'amorçage entrent en vigueur dès que vous les enregistrez et que vous quittez le programme de configuration du système.Annexe 153 Exécution d'un amorçage ponctuel Vous pouvez définir une séquence d'amorçage ponctuelle sans passer par le programme de configuration du système. (Vous pouvez également utiliser cette procédure pour initialiser Dell Diagnostics sur la partition de l'utilitaire de diagnostics de votre disque dur.) 1 Arrêtez l'ordinateur à l'aide du menu Démarrer. 2 Connectez l'ordinateur à une prise secteur. 3 Allumez l'ordinateur. Lorsque le logo DELL apparaît, appuyez immédiatement sur . Si vous attendez trop longtemps et que le logo Windows apparaît, attendez encore jusqu'à ce que le bureau Windows s'affiche. Éteignez alors votre ordinateur et faites une nouvelle tentative. 4 Lorsque la liste des périphériques d'amorçage apparaît, sélectionnez celui que vous voulez utiliser pour l'amorçage, puis appuyez sur . L'ordinateur démarre à partir du périphérique sélectionné. Au prochain redémarrage de l'ordinateur, l'ordre d'amorçage précédent sera restauré. Nettoyage de votre ordinateur PRÉCAUTION : Avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, consultez et respectez les consignes de sécurité du Guide d'information sur le produit. Ordinateur, clavier et écran PRÉCAUTION : Débranchez l'ordinateur de la prise électrique avant de le nettoyer. Retirez toute batterie installée. Nettoyez votre ordinateur avec un chiffon doux humecté d'eau. N'utilisez pas de liquide ni d'aérosol nettoyants, ceux-ci peuvent contenir des substances inflammables. • Utilisez une bouteille d'air comprimé pour retirer la poussière entre les touches du clavier, ainsi que les dépôts de poussière sur l'écran. AVIS : Pour éviter d'endommager l'ordinateur ou l'écran, ne vaporisez pas de liquide de nettoyage directement sur l'écran. Utilisez uniquement les produits conçus particulièrement pour le nettoyage d'écrans et suivez les instructions fournies avec le produit. • Utilisez un chiffon doux, non pelucheux, humecté d'eau ou d'un nettoyant d'écran. N'utilisez pas d'alcool ni de nettoyant à base d'ammoniac. Essuyez l'écran doucement du centre vers les bords jusqu'à ce qu'il soit propre et exempt de traces de doigt. Veillez à ne pas trop appuyer sur l'écran. • Humectez un chiffon doux, non pelucheux, d'eau et essuyez l'ordinateur et le clavier. Veillez à ne pas laisser l'eau du chiffon s'infiltrer entre la tablette tactile et le repose-mains qui l'entoure. Tablette tactile 1 Arrêtez l'ordinateur et mettez-le hors tension. Reportez-vous à la section «Mise hors tension de votre ordinateur» à la page 119. 2 Débranchez les périphériques de l'ordinateur et des prises secteur. 3 Retirez toute batterie installée. Reportez-vous à la section «Remplacement de la batterie» à la page 48. 154 Annexe 4 Humectez un chiffon doux, non pelucheux, d'eau et passez-le doucement sur la surface de la tablette tactile. Veillez à ne pas laisser l'eau du chiffon s'infiltrer entre la tablette tactile et le repose-mains qui l'entoure. CD et DVD AVIS : Utilisez toujours de l'air comprimé pour nettoyer la lentille du lecteur et suivez les instructions fournies avec l'air comprimé. Ne touchez jamais la lentille qui se trouve à l'intérieur du lecteur. Si vous avez des problèmes pendant la lecture de vos CD ou DVD (des sauts pendant la lecture par exemple), nettoyez les disques. 1 Tenez le disque par son bord extérieur. Vous pouvez également toucher le bord intérieur de l'orifice central. AVIS : Pour éviter d'endommager la surface, ne nettoyez pas le disque avec des mouvements circulaires. 2 Avec un chiffon doux et non pelucheux, nettoyez doucement la partie inférieure du disque (côté sans étiquette) en suivant une ligne droite depuis le centre jusqu'au bord extérieur. Si la poussière ne part pas, utilisez de l'eau ou une solution diluée d'eau et de savon doux. Certains produits vendus dans le commerce nettoient les disques et les protègent contre la poussière, les empreintes et les rayures. Les produits de nettoyage pour CD peuvent également être utilisés sur les DVD sans aucun risque. Réglementation FCC (États-Unis uniquement) Classe B de la FCC Cet équipement crée, utilise et peut émettre de l'énergie de fréquence radio et peut, s'il n'est pas installé et utilisé conformément aux instructions du guide du fabricant, être la cause de perturbations des réceptions radio et télévision. Cet équipement a été testé et déclaré conforme aux limites des appareils numériques de classe B définies à l'alinéa 15 du règlement de la FCC. Ce périphérique est conforme à l'alinéa 15 du règlement de la FCC. Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes : 1 Cet appareil ne doit pas émettre d'interférences nuisibles. 2 Cet appareil doit accepter toutes les interférences qu'il reçoit, y compris celles qui peuvent perturber son fonctionnement. AVIS : Les réglementations de la FCC prévoient que les changements ou modifications non explicitement approuvés par Dell Inc. peuvent annuler vos droits à utiliser cet équipement. Ces limites ont été conçues pour fournir une protection raisonnable contre les interférences nuisibles dans un milieu résidentiel. Cependant, la possibilité d'interférence d'une installation particulière n'est pas entièrement exclue. Si cet équipement crée effectivement des interférences nuisibles avec la réception radio et télévision, ce qui peut être déterminé en allumant et en éteignant l'équipement, vous êtes encouragé à essayer de corriger les interférences en prenant une ou plusieurs des mesures suivantes : • Changer l'orientation de l'antenne de réception. • Repositionner le système en fonction du récepteur.Annexe 155 • Éloigner le système du récepteur. • Brancher le système sur une autre prise, pour faire en sorte que le système et le récepteur se trouvent sur différents circuits de dérivation. Si nécessaire, consultez un représentant de Dell Inc. ou un technicien radio/télévision expérimenté pour des suggestions supplémentaires. Les informations suivantes sont fournies sur le ou les appareil(s) couvert(s) dans ce document conformément aux réglementations de la FCC : • Nom du produit : Dell™ Inspiron™ 9400/E1705 • Numéro de modèle : PP05XB Nom de la société : Dell Inc. Worldwide Regulatory Compliance & Environmental Affairs One Dell Way Round Rock, TX 78682 USA 512-338-4400 Caractéristiques Macrovision Ce produit intègre une technologie de protection des droits d'auteur qui est protégée par des brevets américains et d'autres droits de propriété intellectuelle. L'utilisation de cette technologie de protection des droits d'auteur est soumise à l'autorisation de Macrovision ; elle est destinée exclusivement à une utilisation domestique et à des opérations limitées de visualisation, sauf autorisation particulière de Macrovision. L'ingénierie inverse et le désassemblage sont interdits. Règle de support technique de Dell (États-Unis uniquement) Le support technique fourni par les techniciens de Dell nécessite la coopération et la participation du client dans le processus de dépannage et permet de restaurer le système d'exploitation, les logiciels et les pilotes matériels à leur configuration par défaut telle que livrée par Dell ; il permet en outre de vérifier le fonctionnement approprié de l'ordinateur et de tout le matériel installé par Dell. En plus du support technique par nos techniciens, vous disposez d'une aide en ligne à l'adresse support.dell.com. Des options payantes de support technique complémentaire sont également disponibles. Dell offre un support technique limité pour l'ordinateur et tous les logiciels et périphériques1 installés par Dell. Le support technique pour les logiciels et les périphériques tiers est assuré par le fabricant luimême, y compris le support pour tout logiciel ou périphérique acheté et/ou installé par le biais de Dell Software & Peripherals, Readyware et Custom Factory Integration2 . 1 Les services de réparation sont fournis selon les termes et les conditions stipulés par votre garantie limitée et par tout contrat de service de support optionnel acheté avec l'ordinateur. 2 Tous les composants Dell standard inclus dans un projet d'intégration personnalisée en usine (Custom Factory Integration - CFI) sont couverts par la garantie limitée standard de Dell applicable à votre ordinateur. Toutefois, Dell propose un programme de remplacement des pièces pour couvrir tous les composants non standard ou de sociétés tierces intégrés via CFI pendant la durée du contrat de service de l’ordinateur.156 Annexe Définition des logiciels et des périphériques installés par Dell Les logiciels installés par Dell englobent le système d'exploitation et certains logiciels installés sur l'ordinateur pendant le processus de fabrication (Microsoft® Office, Norton Antivirus et ainsi de suite). L'expression «périphériques installés par Dell» recouvre toute carte d'extension interne, ou baie modulaire de marque Dell ou encore tous les accessoires ExpressCard. Sont inclus également les produits de marque Dell suivants : moniteurs, claviers, souris, haut-parleurs, microphones pour modems à fonction téléphonique, stations d'accueil et réplicateurs de port, produits réseau et le câblage associé. Définition des logiciels et des périphériques tiers Les logiciels et périphériques tiers incluent tout périphérique, accessoire ou logiciel vendu par Dell mais qui ne porte pas la marque Dell (imprimantes, scanners et appareils photo, jeux et ainsi de suite). Le support technique pour tout logiciel ou périphérique tiers est fourni par le fabricant du produit en question.Contacter Dell 157 Contacter Dell Vous pouvez contacter Dell par voie électronique, par l'intermédiaire des sites Web suivants : • www.dell.com • support.dell.com (support) Pour les adresses Internet de votre pays, recherchez la section appropriée du pays dans le tableau ci-dessous. REMARQUE : Les numéros verts sont valables dans le pays pour lequel ils sont renseignés. REMARQUE : Dans certains pays, le support spécifique aux ordinateurs portables Dell XPS™ est disponible via un numéro de téléphone différent, répertorié pour les pays participants. Si vous ne trouvez pas de numéro de téléphone répertorié spécifique aux ordinateurs portables XPS, contactez le service de support de Dell, au numéro indiqué, et l'on fera suivre votre appel de manière appropriée. Si vous devez contacter Dell, utilisez les adresses électroniques, les numéros de téléphone et les indicatifs fournis dans le tableau ci-dessous. Si vous avez besoin d'assistance pour connaître les indicatifs à utiliser, contactez un opérateur local ou international. Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse e-mail Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros verts Afrique du Sud (Johannesburg) Indicatif international : 09/091 Indicatif national : 27 Indicatif de la ville : 11 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com E-mail : dell_za_support@dell.com File d'attente Gold 011 709 7713 Support technique 011 709 7710 Service clientèle 011 709 7707 Ventes 011 709 7700 Fax 011 706 0495 Standard 011 709 7700158 Contacter Dell Allemagne (Langen) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 49 Indicatif de la ville : 6103 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com E-mail : tech_support_central_europe@dell.com Support technique spécifique aux ordinateurs portables XPS 06103 766-7222 Support technique pour tous les autres ordinateurs Dell 06103 766-7200 Service clientèle pour le grand public et les PME 0180-5-224400 Service clientèle segment International 06103 766-9570 Service clientèle comptes privilégiés 06103 766-9420 Service clientèle grands comptes 06103 766-9560 Service clientèle comptes publics 06103 766-9555 Standard 06103 766-7000 Amérique Latine Support technique clients (Austin, Texas, ÉtatsUnis) 512 728-4093 Service clientèle (Austin, Texas, États-Unis) 512 728-3619 Fax (Support technique et Service clientèle) (Austin, Texas, États-Unis) 512 728-3883 Ventes (Austin, Texas, États-Unis) 512 728-4397 Fax pour les ventes (Austin, Texas, États-Unis) 512 728-4600 ou 512 728-3772 Anguilla Support technique général numéro vert : 800-335-0031 Antigua-et-Barbuda Support technique général 1-800-805-5924 Antilles Néerlandaises Support technique général 001-800-882-1519 Argentine (Buenos Aires) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 54 Indicatif de la ville : 11 Site Web : www.dell.com.ar E-mail : us_latin_services@dell.com E-mail pour ordinateurs de bureau et portables : la-techsupport@dell.com E-mail pour serveurs et produits de stockage EMC® : la_enterprise@dell.com Service clientèle numéro vert : 0-800-444-0730 Support technique numéro vert : 0-800-444-0733 Services de support technique numéro vert : 0-800-444-0724 Ventes 0-810-444-3355 Aruba Support technique général numéro vert : 800-1578 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse e-mail Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros vertsContacter Dell 159 Australie (Sydney) Indicatif international : 0011 Indicatif national : 61 Indicatif de la ville : 2 Site Web : support.ap.dell.com E-mail : support.ap.dell.com/contactus Support technique général 13DELL-133355 Autriche (Vienne) Indicatif international : 900 Indicatif national : 43 Indicatif de la ville : 1 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com E-mail : tech_support_central_europe@dell.com Ventes aux grand public et PME 0820 240 530 00 Fax pour le grand public et les PME 0820 240 530 49 Service clientèle pour le grand public et les PME 0820 240 530 14 Service clientèle Comptes privilégiés/Entreprises 0820 240 530 16 Support spécifique aux ordinateurs portables XPS 0820 240 530 81 Support aux grand public et PME pour tous les autres ordinateurs Dell 0820 240 530 14 Support Comptes privilégiés/Entreprises 0660 8779 Standard 0820 240 530 00 Bahamas Support technique général numéro vert : 1-866-278-6818 Belgique (Bruxelles) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 32 Indicatif de la ville : 2 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Support technique spécifique aux ordinateurs portables XPS 02 481 92 96 Support technique pour tous les autres ordinateurs Dell 02 481 92 88 Télécopieur pour support technique 02 481 92 95 Service clientèle 02 713 15 65 Ventes aux grandes entreprises 02 481 91 00 Fax 02 481 92 99 Standard 02 481 91 00 Bermudes Support technique général 1-800-342-0671 Bolivie Support technique général numéro vert : 800-10-0238 Brésil Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 55 Indicatif de la ville : 51 Site Web : www.dell.com/br Support clients, support technique 0800 90 3355 Fax du support technique 51 481 5470 Fax du Service clientèle 51 481 5480 Ventes 0800 90 3390 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse e-mail Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros verts160 Contacter Dell Brunei Indicatif national : 673 Support technique (Penang, Malaisie) 604 633 4966 Service clientèle (Penang, Malaisie) 604 633 4888 Ventes aux particuliers (Penang, Malaisie) 604 633 4955 Canada (North York, Ontario) Indicatif international : 011 État des commandes en ligne : www.dell.ca/ostatus AutoTech (Support matériel et garantie automatisé) numéro vert : 1-800-247-9362 Service clientèle (grand public et PME) numéro vert : 1-800-847-4096 Service clientèle (grands comptes et gouvernement) numéro vert : 1-800-326-9463 Service clientèle (imprimantes, projecteurs, téléviseurs, ordinateurs de poche, jukebox numériques et ordinateurs sans fil) numéro vert : 1-800-847-4096 Support garantie de matériel (ventes au grand public/PME) numéro vert : 1-800-906-3355 Support garantie de matériel (grands comptes et gouvernement) numéro vert : 1-800-387-5757 Support garantie de matériel (imprimantes, projecteurs, téléviseurs, ordinateurs de poche, jukebox numériques et ordinateurs sans fil) 1-877-335-5767 Ventes aux grand public et PME numéro vert : 1-800-387-5752 Ventes (grands comptes et gouvernement) numéro vert : 1-800-387-5755 Vente de pièces et Vente de service étendu 1866 440 3355 Chili (Santiago) Indicatif national : 56 Indicatif de la ville : 2 Ventes et support clients numéro vert : 1230-020-4823 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse e-mail Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros vertsContacter Dell 161 Chine (Xiamen) Indicatif national : 86 Indicatif de la ville : 592 Site Web du Support technique : support.dell.com.cn E-mail (Support technique) : cn_support@dell.com E-mail du Service clientèle : customer_cn@dell.com Fax du support technique 592 818 1350 Support technique (Dell™ Dimension™ et Inspiron) numéro vert : 800 858 2968 Support technique (OptiPlex™, Latitude™ et Dell Precision™) numéro vert : 800 858 0950 Support technique (serveurs et stockage) numéro vert : 800 858 0960 Support technique (projecteurs, PDA, commutateurs, routeurs, etc.) numéro vert : 800 858 2920 Support technique (imprimantes) numéro vert : 800 858 2311 Service clientèle numéro vert : 800 858 2060 Fax du Service clientèle 592 818 1308 Grand public et PME numéro vert : 800 858 2222 Division des comptes privilégiés numéro vert : 800 858 2557 Comptes grandes entreprises - GCP numéro vert : 800 858 2055 Comptes clés des grandes entreprises numéro vert : 800 858 2628 Comptes grandes entreprises - Nord numéro vert : 800 858 2999 Comptes grandes entreprises Administration et éducation - Nord numéro vert : 800 858 2955 Comptes grandes entreprises - Est numéro vert : 800 858 2020 Comptes grandes entreprises Administration et éducation - Est numéro vert : 800 858 2669 Équipe File d'attente des comptes grandes entreprises numéro vert : 800 858 2572 Comptes grandes entreprises - Sud numéro vert : 800 858 2355 Comptes grandes entreprises - Ouest numéro vert : 800 858 2811 Comptes grandes entreprises Pièces détachées numéro vert : 800 858 2621 Colombie Support technique général 980-9-15-3978 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse e-mail Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros verts162 Contacter Dell Corée (Séoul) Indicatif international : 001 Indicatif national : 82 Indicatif de la ville : 2 E-mail : krsupport@dell.com Support technique numéro vert : 080-200-3800 Support (Dimension, PDA, Électronique et accessoires) numéro vert : 080-200-3801 Ventes numéro vert : 080-200-3600 Fax 2194-6202 Standard 2194-6000 Costa Rica Support technique général 0800-012-0435 Danemark (Copenhague) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 45 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Support technique spécifique aux ordinateurs portables XPS 7010 0074 Support technique pour tous les autres ordinateurs Dell 7023 0182 Service clientèle (relations) 7023 0184 Service clientèle pour le grand public et les PME 3287 5505 Standard (relations) 3287 1200 Standard Fax (relations) 3287 1201 Standard (grand public et PME) 3287 5000 Fax (grand public et PME) 3287 5001 Dominique Support technique général numéro vert : 1-866-278-6821 Équateur Support technique général numéro vert : 999-119 Espagne (Madrid) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 34 Indicatif de la ville : 91 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Grand public et PME Support technique 902 100 130 Service clientèle 902 118 540 Ventes 902 118 541 Standard 902 118 541 Fax 902 118 539 Grandes entreprises Support technique 902 100 130 Service clientèle 902 115 236 Standard 91 722 92 00 Fax 91 722 95 83 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse e-mail Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros vertsContacter Dell 163 États-Unis (Austin, Texas) Indicatif international : 011 Indicatif national : 1 Service d'état des commandes automatisé numéro vert : 1-800-433-9014 AutoTech (ordinateurs portables et de bureau) numéro vert : 1-800-247-9362 Support matériel et garantie (téléviseurs, imprimantes et projecteurs Dell) pour la clientèle relationnelle numéro vert 1-877-459-7298 Support consommateur (Activités à domicile et activités professionnelles à domicile) pour tous les autres produits Dell numéro vert : 1-800-624-9896 Service clientèle numéro vert : 1-800-624-9897 Clients du programme d'achats par les employés (EPP) numéro vert : 1-800-695-8133 Site Web des services financiers : www.dellfinancialservices.com Services financiers (leasing/prêts) numéro vert : 1-877-577-3355 Services financiers (Comptes privilégiés Dell [DPA]) numéro vert : 1-800-283-2210 Secteur privé Support et Service clientèle numéro vert : 1-800-456-3355 Clients du programme d'achats par les employés (EPP) numéro vert : 1-800-695-8133 Support pour les imprimantes et les projecteurs numéro vert : 1-877-459-7298 Public (gouvernement, enseignement et services de la santé) Support et Service clientèle numéro vert : 1-800-456-3355 Clients du programme d'achats par les employés (EPP) numéro vert : 1-800-695-8133 Ventes Dell numéro vert : 1-800-289-3355 ou numéro vert : 1-800-879-3355 Points de vente Dell (ordinateurs Dell recyclés) numéro vert : 1-888-798-7561 Ventes de logiciels et de périphériques numéro vert : 1-800-671-3355 Ventes de pièces au détail numéro vert : 1-800-357-3355 Service étendu et ventes sous garantie numéro vert : 1-800-247-4618 Fax numéro vert : 1-800-727-8320 Services Dell pour les sourds, les malentendants ou les personnes ayant des problèmes d'élocution numéro vert : 1-877-DELLTTY (1-877-335-5889) Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse e-mail Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros verts164 Contacter Dell Finlande (Helsinki) Indicatif international : 990 Indicatif national : 358 Indicatif de la ville : 9 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Support technique 09 253 313 60 Service clientèle 09 253 313 38 Fax 09 253 313 99 Standard 09 253 313 00 France (Paris) (Montpellier) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 33 Indicatifs de la ville : (1)(4) Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Grand public et PME Support technique spécifique aux ordinateurs portables XPS 0825387129 Support technique pour tous les autres ordinateurs Dell 0825 387 270 Service clientèle 0825 823 833 Standard 0825 004 700 Standard (appels extérieurs à la France) 04 99 75 40 00 Ventes 0825 004 700 Fax 0825 004 701 Fax (appels extérieurs à la France) 04 99 75 40 01 Grandes entreprises Support technique 0825 004 719 Service clientèle 0825 338 339 Standard 01 55 94 71 00 Ventes 01 55 94 71 00 Fax 01 55 94 71 01 Grèce Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 30 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Support technique 00800-44 14 95 18 Support technique Gold Service 00800-44 14 00 83 Standard 2108129810 Standard Gold Service 2108129811 Ventes 2108129800 Fax 2108129812 Grenade Support technique général numéro vert : 1-866-540-3355 Guatemala Support technique général 1-800-999-0136 Guyane Support technique général numéro vert : 1-877-270-4609 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse e-mail Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros vertsContacter Dell 165 Hong Kong Indicatif international : 001 Indicatif national : 852 Site Web : support.ap.dell.com E-mail (Support technique) : HK_support@Dell.com Support technique (Dimension et Inspiron) 2969 3188 Support technique (OptiPlex, Latitude et Dell Precision) 2969 3191 Support technique (PowerApp™, PowerEdge™, PowerConnect™ et PowerVault™) 2969 3196 Service clientèle 3416 0910 Comptes grandes entreprises 3416 0907 Programmes clients internationaux 3416 0908 Division des moyennes entreprises 3416 0912 Division du grand public et des PME 2969 3105 Îles Caïmans Support technique général 1-800-805-7541 Îles Turks et Caicos Support technique général numéro vert : 1-866-540-3355 Îles Vierges Britanniques Support technique général numéro vert : 1-866-278-6820 Îles Vierges (États-Unis) Support technique général 1-877-673-3355 Inde E-mail : india_support_desktop@dell.com india_support_notebook@dell.com india_support_Server@dell.com Support technique 1600338045 et 1600448046 Ventes (Comptes grandes entreprises) 1600 33 8044 Ventes (Grand public et PME) 1600 33 8046 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse e-mail Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros verts166 Contacter Dell Irlande (Cherrywood) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 353 Indicatif de la ville : 1 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com E-mail : dell_direct_support@dell.com Support technique spécifique aux ordinateurs portables XPS 1850 200 722 Support technique pour tous les autres ordinateurs Dell 1850 543 543 Support technique pour le Royaume-Uni (interne au Royaume-Uni uniquement) 0870 908 0800 Service clientèle pour les particuliers 01 204 4014 Service clientèle pour les petites entreprises 01 204 4014 Service clientèle pour le Royaume-Uni (interne au Royaume-Uni uniquement) 0870 906 0010 Service clientèle pour les entreprises 1850 200 982 Service clientèle pour les entreprises (interne au Royaume-Uni uniquement) 0870 907 4499 Ventes pour l'Irlande 01 204 4444 Ventes pour le Royaume-Uni (interne au RoyaumeUni uniquement) 0870 907 4000 Fax des relations ventes 01 204 0103 Standard 01 204 4444 Italie (Milan) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 39 Indicatif de la ville : 02 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Grand public et PME Support technique 02 577 826 90 Service clientèle 02 696 821 14 Fax 02 696 821 13 Standard 02 696 821 12 Grandes entreprises Support technique 02 577 826 90 Service clientèle 02 577 825 55 Fax 02 575 035 30 Standard 02 577 821 Jamaïque Support technique général (appel à partir de la Jamaïque uniquement) 1-800-682-3639 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse e-mail Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros vertsContacter Dell 167 Japon (Kawasaki) Indicatif international : 001 Indicatif national : 81 Indicatif de la ville : 44 Site Web : support.jp.dell.com Support technique (serveurs) numéro vert : 0120-198-498 Support technique à l'extérieur du Japon (serveurs) 81-44-556-4162 Support technique (Dimension et Inspiron) numéro vert : 0120-198-226 Support technique à l'extérieur du Japon (Dimension et Inspiron) 81-44-520-1435 Support technique (Dell Precision, OptiPlex et Latitude) numéro vert : 0120-198-433 Support technique à l'extérieur du Japon (Dell Precision, OptiPlex et Latitude) 81-44-556-3894 Support technique (PDA, projecteurs, imprimantes, routeurs) numéro vert : 0120-981-690 Support technique en dehors du Japon (PDA, projecteurs, imprimantes, routeurs) 81-44-556-3468 Service Faxbox 044-556-3490 Service de commandes automatisé 24 heures sur 24 044-556-3801 Service clientèle 044-556-4240 Division Ventes aux entreprises (jusqu'à 400 employés) 044-556-1465 Division Ventes aux Comptes privilégiés (plus de 400 employés) 044-556-3433 Ventes aux Comptes grandes entreprises (plus de 3500 employés) 044-556-3430 Ventes secteur public (agences gouvernementales, établissements d'enseignement et institutions médicales) 044-556-1469 Segment International - Japon 044-556-3469 Utilisateur individuel 044-556-1760 Standard 044-556-4300 La Barbade Support technique général 1-800-534-3066 Luxembourg Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 352 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Support technique 342 08 08 075 Ventes aux grand public et PME +32 (0)2 713 15 96 Ventes aux grandes entreprises 26 25 77 81 Service clientèle +32 (0)2 481 91 19 Fax 26 25 77 82 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse e-mail Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros verts168 Contacter Dell Macao Indicatif national : 853 Support technique numéro vert : 0800 105 Service clientèle (Xiamen, Chine) 34 160 910 Ventes aux particuliers (Xiamen, Chine) 29 693 115 Malaisie (Penang) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 60 Indicatif de la ville : 4 Site Web : support.ap.dell.com Support technique (Dell Precision, OptiPlex et Latitude) numéro vert : 1 800 880 193 Support technique (Dimension, Inspiron et Électronique et accessoires) numéro vert : 1 800 881 306 Support technique (PowerApp, PowerEdge, PowerConnect et PowerVault) numéro vert : 1800 881 386 Service clientèle numéro vert : 1800 881 306 (option 6) Ventes aux particuliers numéro vert : 1 800 888 202 Ventes aux grandes entreprises numéro vert : 1 800 888 213 Mexique Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 52 Support technique clients 001-877-384-8979 ou 001-877-269-3383 Ventes 50-81-8800 ou 01-800-888-3355 Service clientèle 001-877-384-8979 ou 001-877-269-3383 Groupe principal 50-81-8800 ou 01-800-888-3355 Montserrat Support technique général numéro vert : 1-866-278-6822 Nicaragua Support technique général 001-800-220-1006 Norvège (Lysaker) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 47 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Support technique spécifique aux ordinateurs portables XPS 815 35 043 Support technique pour tous les autres ordinateurs Dell 671 16882 Suivi clientèle 671 17575 Service clientèle pour le grand public et les PME 23162298 Standard 671 16800 Standard Fax 671 16865 Nouvelle-Zélande Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 64 Site Web : support.ap.dell.com E-mail : support.ap.dell.com/contactus Support technique général 0800 441 567 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse e-mail Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros vertsContacter Dell 169 Panama Support technique général 001-800-507-0962 Pays-Bas (Amsterdam) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 31 Indicatif de la ville : 20 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Support technique spécifique aux ordinateurs portables XPS 020 674 45 94 Support technique pour tous les autres ordinateurs Dell 020 674 45 00 Fax du support technique 020 674 47 66 Service clientèle pour le grand public et les PME 020 674 42 00 Suivi clientèle 020 674 43 25 Ventes aux grand public et PME 020 674 55 00 Relations ventes 020 674 50 00 Fax des ventes aux grand public et PME 020 674 47 75 Fax des relations ventes 020 674 47 50 Standard 020 674 50 00 Fax du standard 020 674 47 50 Pays du Pacifique et du Sud-est Asiatique Support technique, service clientèle et ventes (Penang, Malaisie) 604 633 4810 Pérou Support technique général 0800-50-669 Pologne (Varsovie) Indicatif international : 011 Indicatif national : 48 Indicatif de la ville : 22 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com E-mail : pl_support_tech@dell.com Service clientèle (téléphone) 57 95 700 Service clientèle 57 95 999 Ventes 57 95 999 Service clientèle (Fax) 57 95 806 Réception (Fax) 57 95 998 Standard 57 95 999 Porto Rico Support technique général 1 800 805-7545 Portugal Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 351 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Support technique 707200149 Service clientèle 800 300 413 Ventes 800 300 410 ou 800 300 411 ou 800 300 412 ou 21 422 07 10 Fax 21 424 01 12 République Dominicaine Support technique général 1-800-148-0530 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse e-mail Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros verts170 Contacter Dell République Tchèque (Prague) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 420 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com E-mail : czech_dell@dell.com Support technique 22537 2727 Service clientèle 22537 2707 Fax 22537 2714 Télécopieur pour support technique 22537 2728 Standard 22537 2711 Royaume-Uni (Bracknell) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 44 Indicatif de la ville : 1344 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Site Web du Service clientèle : support.euro.dell.com/uk/en/ECare/Form/Home.asp E-mail : dell_direct_support@dell.com Support technique (Entreprises/Comptes privilégiés/Division Comptes privilégiés [plus de 1000 employés]) 0870 908 0500 Support technique spécifique aux ordinateurs portables XPS 0870 366 4180 Support technique (direct et général) pour tous les autres produits Dell 0870 908 0800 Service clientèle Comptes internationaux 01344 373 186 Service clientèle pour le grand public et les PME 0870 906 0010 Service clientèle pour les entreprises 01344 373 185 Service clientèle pour les comptes privilégiés (500–5000 employés) 0870 906 0010 Service clientèle Gouvernement central 01344 373 193 Service clientèle Administration locale et Enseignement 01344 373 199 Service clientèle (Santé) 01344 373 194 Ventes aux grand public et PME 0870 907 4000 Ventes aux grandes entreprises/secteur public 01344 860 456 Fax pour le grand public et les PME 0870 907 4006 Salvador Support technique général 01-899-753-0777 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse e-mail Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros vertsContacter Dell 171 Singapour (Singapour) Indicatif international : 005 Indicatif national : 65 Site Web : support.ap.dell.com Support technique (Dimension, Inspiron et Électronique et accessoires) numéro vert : 1800 394 7430 Support technique (OptiPlex, Latitude et Dell Precision) numéro vert : 1800 394 7488 Support technique (PowerApp, PowerEdge, PowerConnect et PowerVault) numéro vert : 1800 394 7478 Service clientèle numéro vert : 1 800 394 7430 (option 6) Ventes aux particuliers numéro vert : 1 800 394 7412 Ventes aux grandes entreprises numéro vert : 1 800 394 7419 Slovaquie (Prague) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 421 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com E-mail : czech_dell@dell.com Support technique 02 5441 5727 Service clientèle 420 22537 2707 Fax 02 5441 8328 Fax du Support technique 02 5441 8328 Standard (Ventes) 02 5441 7585 St- Kitts-et-Nevis Support technique général numéro vert : 1-877-441-4731 St- Vincent-et-les Grenadines Support technique général numéro vert : 1-877-270-4609 Ste- Lucie Support technique général 1-800-882-1521 Suède (Upplands Vasby) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 46 Indicatif de la ville : 8 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com Support technique spécifique aux ordinateurs portables XPS 0771 340 340 Support technique pour tous les autres ordinateurs Dell 08 590 05 199 Suivi clientèle 08 590 05 642 Service clientèle pour le grand public et les PME 08 587 70 527 Support du programme d'achats par les employés (EPP, Employee Purchase Program) 20 140 14 44 Fax du support technique 08 590 05 594 Ventes 08 590 05 185 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse e-mail Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros verts172 Contacter Dell Suisse (Genève) Indicatif international : 00 Indicatif national : 41 Indicatif de la ville : 22 Site Web : support.euro.dell.com E-mail : Tech_support_central_Europe@dell.com Support technique spécifique aux ordinateurs portables XPS 0848 33 88 57 Support technique (grand public et PME) pour tous les autres produits Dell 0844 811 411 Support technique (entreprises) 0844 822 844 Service clientèle (grand public et PME) 0848 802 202 Service clientèle (entreprises) 0848 821 721 Fax 022 799 01 90 Standard 022 799 01 01 Taïwan Indicatif international : 002 Indicatif national : 886 Site Web : support.ap.dell.com E-mail : ap_support@dell.com Support technique (OptiPlex, Latitude, Inspiron, Dimension et Électronique et accessoires) numéro vert : 00801 86 1011 Support technique (PowerApp, PowerEdge, PowerConnect et PowerVault) numéro vert : 00801 60 1256 Service clientèle numéro vert : 00801 60 1250 (option 5) Ventes aux particuliers numéro vert : 00801 65 1228 Ventes aux grandes entreprises numéro vert : 00801 651 227 Thaïlande Indicatif international : 001 Indicatif national : 66 Site Web : support.ap.dell.com Support technique (OptiPlex, Latitude et Dell Precision) numéro vert : 1800 0060 07 Support technique (PowerApp, PowerEdge, PowerConnect et PowerVault) numéro vert : 1800 0600 09 Service clientèle numéro vert : 1800 006 007 (option 7) Ventes aux grandes entreprises numéro vert : 1800 006 009 Ventes aux particuliers numéro vert : 1800 006 006 Trinité/Tobago Support technique général 1-800-805-8035 Uruguay Support technique général numéro vert : 000-413-598-2521 Venezuela Support technique général 8001-3605 Pays (Ville) Indicatifs d'accès international, national et de la ville Nom de département ou zone de service, site Web et adresse e-mail Indicatifs de zone, numéros locaux et numéros vertsGlossaire 173 Glossaire Les termes répertoriés dans ce glossaire ne sont fournis qu'à titre informatif et ne décrivent pas obligatoirement les fonctions incluses avec votre ordinateur particulier. A ACPI — Advanced Configuration and Power Interface — Spécification de gestion de l'alimentation qui permet aux systèmes d'exploitation Microsoft® Windows® de placer l'ordinateur en mode Veille ou Mise en veille prolongée afin de conserver l'énergie électrique attribuée à chaque périphérique connecté à l'ordinateur. adressage de mémoire — Processus permettant à l'ordinateur d'attribuer des adresses mémoire à des emplacements physiques au démarrage. Les périphériques et les logiciels peuvent ensuite déterminer les informations auxquelles le microprocesseur peut accéder. adresse E/S — Adresse RAM associée à un périphérique spécifique (un connecteur série, un connecteur parallèle ou une baie d'extension) et qui permet au microprocesseur de communiquer avec ce périphérique. adresse mémoire — Emplacement spécifique où les données sont stockées temporairement dans la mémoire RAM. AGP — Accelerated Graphics Port — Port graphique dédié allouant de la mémoire système à utiliser pour les tâches liées à la vidéo. Le port AGP permet d'obtenir une image vidéo de haute qualité avec des couleurs fidèles grâce à une interface très rapide entre le circuit vidéo et la mémoire de l'ordinateur. AHCI — Advanced Host Controller Interface — Interface du contrôleur hôte d'un disque dur SATA qui permet au pilote de stockage d'activer des technologies telles que Native Command Queuing (NCQ) et l'enfichage à chaud. ALS — capteur d'éclairage ambiant. ASF — Alert Standards Format — Standard permettant de définir un mécanisme de sorte à signaler les alertes matérielles et logicielles à une console de gestion. La norme ASF est conçue pour être indépendante des platesformes et des systèmes d'exploitation. autonomie de la batterie — Nombre de minutes ou d'heures durant lesquelles la batterie d'un ordinateur portable peut alimenter l'ordinateur. B baie de média — Logement qui prend en charge des périphériques, tels qu'un lecteur optique, une seconde batterie ou un module TravelLite™ de Dell. baie modulaire — Voir baie de média. BIOS — Basic Input/Output System — Programme (ou utilitaire) qui joue le rôle d'interface entre le matériel informatique et le système d'exploitation. Ne modifiez les paramètres de ce programme que si vous connaissez avec exactitude les effets de chacun d'eux sur l'ordinateur. Appelé également programme de configuration du système. bit — Unité de donnée la plus petite pouvant être interprétée par l'ordinateur. bps — Bits per second (bits par seconde) — Unité standard de mesure de la vitesse de transmission de données. BTU — British Thermal Unit (unité thermique britannique) — Mesure de sortie de chaleur. bus — Passerelle pour les communications entre les composants de votre ordinateur. bus local — Bus de données permettant une transmission rapide des données entre les périphériques et le microprocesseur. C C — Celsius — Système de mesure des températures où 0° est le point de congélation et 100° le point d'ébullition de l'eau.174 Glossaire CA— Courant alternatif — Forme d'électricité qui alimente votre ordinateur lorsque vous branchez le câble d'alimentation de l'adaptateur secteur sur une prise électrique. capteur infrarouge — Port permettant de transférer des données entre l'ordinateur et des périphériques compatibles infrarouge sans utiliser de connexion câblée. carnet — Document international des douanes qui facilite les importations temporaires dans les pays étrangers. Appelé également passeport de marchandises. carte à puce — Carte qui incorpore un microprocesseur et une puce mémoire. Les cartes à puce permettent d'identifier un utilisateur sur des ordinateurs équipés de telles cartes. carte d'extension — Carte installée dans un logement d'extension sur la carte système de certains ordinateurs et qui permet d'augmenter les capacités de l'ordinateur. Il peut s'agir d'une carte vidéo, modem ou son. carte ExpressCard — Carte d'E/S amovible conforme à la norme PCMCIA. Les cartes modem et les cartes réseau sont des cartes ExpressCard courantes. Les cartes ExpressCard prennent en charge les standards PCI Express et USB 2.0. carte PC — Carte d'E/S amovible conforme à la norme PCMCIA. Les cartes modem et les cartes réseau sont des cartes PC courantes. carte PC étendue — Carte PC qui dépasse du logement de carte PC lorsqu'elle est installée. carte réseau — Puce qui offre des fonctions réseau. Un ordinateur peut comprendre une carte réseau sur sa carte système ou il peut contenir une carte PC sur laquelle se trouve un adaptateur intégré. Une carte réseau est aussi appelée NIC (Network Interface Controller [contrôleur d'interface réseau]). carte système — Carte à circuit imprimé principale de votre ordinateur. Appelée également carte mère. CD amorçable — CD pouvant être utilisé pour démarrer votre ordinateur. Au cas où votre disque dur serait endommagé ou votre ordinateur infecté par un virus, assurez-vous d'avoir toujours à disposition un CD ou une disquette amorçable. Le CD Drivers and Utilities ou le CD ResourceCD sont des CD amorçables. CD-R — CD Recordable — Version enregistrable d'un CD. Des données ne peuvent être enregistrées qu'une seule fois sur un CD enregistrable. Une fois enregistrées, les données ne peuvent être ni effacées ni écrasées. CD-RW — CD ReWritable — Version réinscriptible d'un CD. Vous pouvez enregistrer des données sur un CD-RW, puis les effacer et les réécrire. COA — Certificate of Authenticity (certificat d'authenticité) — Code alphanumérique Windows inscrit sur une étiquette sur votre ordinateur. Appelé également Product Key (Clé de produit) ou Product ID (Identification produit). code de service express — Code numérique inscrit sur une étiquette sur votre ordinateur Dell™. Utilisez le code de service express lorsque vous contactez Dell pour obtenir une assistance technique. Le code de service express n'est pas nécessairement disponible dans tous les pays. combinaison de touches — Commande nécessitant une pression simultanée sur plusieurs touches. connecteur DIN — Connecteur rond à 6 broches conforme aux normes DIN (Deutsche Industrie-Norm), généralement utilisé pour connecter des connecteurs de câbles de souris ou de clavier PS/2. connecteur parallèle — Port d'E/S souvent utilisé pour connecter une imprimante parallèle à l'ordinateur. Appelé également port LPT. connecteur série — Port d'E/S souvent utilisé pour connecter des périphériques comme des organiseurs ou des appareils photo numériques sur votre ordinateur. contrôleur — Puce qui contrôle le transfert de données entre le microprocesseur et la mémoire ou entre le microprocesseur et les périphériques. contrôleur vidéo — Circuits de la carte vidéo ou de la carte système (sur les ordinateurs dotés d'un contrôleur vidéo intégré) qui fournissent, en association avec l'écran ou un moniteur externe, les fonctions vidéo, de votre ordinateur. CRIMM — Continuity Rambus In-line Memory Module — Module ne disposant pas de puces de mémoire, utilisé pour remplir les emplacements RIMM inutilisés.Glossaire 175 curseur — Marqueur sur l'écran qui indique l'emplacement de la prochaine action du clavier, de la tablette tactile ou de la souris. Il s'agit généralement d'une ligne clignotante, d'un caractère de soulignement ou d'une petite flèche. D DIMM — dual in-line memory module — Carte à circuits imprimés dotée de puces de mémoire qui se connecte au module de mémoire sur la carte mère. disquette amorçable — Disquette pouvant être utilisée pour démarrer votre ordinateur. Au cas où votre disque dur serait endommagé ou votre ordinateur infecté par un virus, assurez-vous d'avoir toujours à disposition un CD ou une disquette amorçable. dissipateur de chaleur — Plaque en métal sur certains microprocesseurs qui permet de dissiper la chaleur. DMA — Direct Memory Access (accès direct à la mémoire) — Canal permettant à certains types de transferts de données entre la mémoire RAM et un périphérique d'éviter de passer par le microprocesseur. DMTF — Distributed Management Task Force — Consortium de compagnies représentant des fournisseurs de matériel et de logiciel développant des normes de gestion pour les environnements réseau, Internet, de bureau et d'entreprise distribués. domaine — Groupe d'ordinateurs, de programmes et de périphériques sur un réseau administrés en tant qu'unité avec des règles et des procédures communes afin d'être utilisés par un groupe d'utilisateurs donné. Les utilisateurs doivent se connecter au domaine pour avoir accès aux ressources. dossier — Terme utilisé pour décrire l'espace sur une disquette ou un disque dur sur lequel des fichiers sont organisés et regroupés. Les fichiers d'un dossier peuvent être affichés et classés de différentes façons, par exemple par ordre alphabétique, par date ou par taille. double cœur — Technologie Intel® où deux unités informatiques physiques se trouvent au sein d'un seul processeur, augmentant ainsi la puissance de calcul et la capacité multitâche. DRAM — Dynamic Random Access Memory (mémoire dynamique à accès aléatoire) — Mémoire qui stocke des informations dans les circuits intégrés contenant des condensateurs. DSL — Digital Subscriber Line — Technologie offrant une connexion Internet constante et à haute vitesse par l'intermédiaire d'une ligne téléphonique analogique. durée de vie d'une batterie — Nombre d'années durant lesquelles la batterie d'un ordinateur portable peut être rechargée. DVD-R — DVD recordable (DVD enregistrable) — Version enregistrable d'un DVD. Des données ne peuvent être enregistrées qu'une seule fois sur un DVD enregistrable. Une fois enregistrées, les données ne peuvent être ni effacées ni écrasées. DVD+RW — DVD réinscriptible — Version réinscriptible d'un DVD. Vous pouvez enregistrer des données sur un DVD+RW, puis les effacer et les réécrire. (La technologie DVD+RW diffère de la technologie DVD-RW.) DVI — digital video interface (interface vidéo numérique) — Norme de transmission numérique entre un ordinateur et un écran vidéo numérique. E ECC — Error Checking and Correction (code de vérification et de correction d'erreur) — Type de mémoire qui inclut des circuits spéciaux pour tester l'exactitude des données lorsqu'elles passent par la mémoire. ECP — Extended Capabilities Port — Connecteur parallèle permettant de transmettre des données de manière bidirectionnelle. Similaire à EPP, le port ECP utilise l'accès direct à la mémoire pour transférer des données et améliore généralement les performances. éditeur de texte — Programme utilisé pour créer et modifier les fichiers contenant uniquement du texte ; par exemple, le Bloc-notes de Windows utilise un éditeur de texte. En général, les éditeurs de texte n'offrent pas les fonctions de renvoi à la ligne automatique ou de mise en forme (option permettant de souligner, de changer les polices, etc.). EIDE — Enhanced Integrated Device Electronics (électronique de périphérique intégré améliorée) — Version améliorée de l'interface IDE pour les disques durs et les lecteurs de CD. EMI — Electromagnetic Interference (interférence électromagnétique) — Interférences électriques causées par radiation électromagnétique.176 Glossaire ENERGY STAR® — Exigences de l'agence EPA (Environmental Protection Agency) permettant de diminuer la consommation globale d'électricité. EPP — Enhanced Parallel Port — Connecteur parallèle permettant de transmettre des données de manière bidirectionnelle. E/S — Entrée/Sortie — Opération ou périphérique entrant et extrayant des données de votre ordinateur. Les claviers et les imprimantes sont des périphériques d'E/S. ESD — ElectroStatic Discharge (décharge électrostatique) — Brève décharge d'électricité statique. Ce type de décharge peut endommager les circuits intégrés du matériel informatique et de communication. F Fahrenheit — Système de mesure des températures où 32° correspond au point de congélation et 212° au point d'ébullition de l'eau. FBD — fully-buffered DIMM — DIMM munie de puces DRAM DDR2 et d'une mémoire tampon avancée (Advanced Memory Buffer [AMB]) permettant d'accélérer la communication entre les puces SDRAM DDR2 et le système. FCC — Federal Communications Commission (Commission fédérale des communications, aux ÉtatsUnis) — Bureau américain responsable de l'application de réglementations relatives aux communications qui évalue la quantité de radiations pouvant être émise par les ordinateurs et autres équipements électroniques. fichier «Lisez-moi» — Fichier texte livré avec un logiciel ou du matériel. En général, les fichiers «Lisez-moi» fournissent des informations sur l'installation et décrivent les améliorations ou corrections apportées au produit qui n'ont pas encore été documentées. formatage — Processus qui prépare un disque pour le stockage des fichiers. Lorsqu'un lecteur ou disque est formaté, les informations existantes sur ce lecteur ou disque sont perdues. FSB — Front Side Bus (bus frontal) — Canal de données et interface physique entre le microprocesseur et la mémoire RAM. FTP — File Transfer Protocol (protocole de transfert de fichiers) — Protocole Internet standard utilisé pour échanger des fichiers entre des ordinateurs connectés à Internet. G G — Gravité — Mesure de poids et de force. GHz — Gigahertz — Unité de mesure de fréquence égale à un milliard de Hz ou à mille MHz. La vitesse des microprocesseurs, des bus et des interfaces des ordinateurs est généralement mesurée en GHz. Go — Giga-octet — Unité de stockage de données égale à 1024 Mo (1 073 741 824 octets). Ce terme est souvent arrondi à 1 000 000 000 octets lorsqu'il fait référence à la capacité de stockage d'un disque dur. GUI — Graphical User Interface (interface graphique utilisateur) — Logiciel interagissant avec l'utilisateur à l'aide de menus, de fenêtres et d'icônes. La plupart des programmes fonctionnant avec les systèmes d'exploitation Microsoft Windows ont des interfaces graphiques utilisateur. H HTTP — Hypertext Transfer Protocol — Protocole d'échange de fichiers entre des ordinateurs connectés à Internet. Hyper-Threading — L'Hyper-Threading est une technologie Intel qui améliore les performances globales de l'ordinateur en permettant à un même processeur de fonctionner comme deux processeurs logiques, capables d'exécuter certaines tâches simultanément. Hz — Hertz — Unité de mesure de fréquence égale à 1 cycle par seconde. La vitesse de fonctionnement des ordinateurs et des périphériques électroniques est souvent mesurée en kilohertz (kHz), mégahertz (MHz), gigahertz (GHz) ou térahertz (THz). I IC — circuit intégré — Semi-conducteur ou puce sur lesquels sont fabriqués des milliers ou des millions de minuscules composants électroniques destinés aux équipements informatiques, audio et vidéo. IDE — Integrated Drive Electronics (électronique d'unité intégrée) — Interface pour les périphériques de stockage en masse dans laquelle le contrôleur est intégré à l'unité de disque dur ou au lecteur de CD.Glossaire 177 IEEE 1394 — Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. — Bus série à hautes performances utilisé pour connecter des périphériques compatibles IEEE 1394 tels que les appareils numériques et les lecteurs DVD à l'ordinateur. intégré — Fait généralement référence aux composants physiquement situés sur la carte système de l'ordinateur. Synonyme d'incorporé. IrDA — Infrared Data Association — Organisme en charge de la création de normes internationales pour les communications infrarouge. IRQ — Interrupt Request (requête d'interruption) — Passerelle électronique associée à un périphérique spécifique et qui permet à ce dernier de communiquer avec le microprocesseur. Une IRQ doit être attribuée à chaque périphérique. Bien que deux périphériques puissent partager la même affectation d'IRQ, ils ne peuvent pas fonctionner simultanément. ISP — Internet service provider (fournisseur d'accès Internet) — Société qui vous permet d'accéder à son serveur hôte afin de vous connecter directement à Internet, d'envoyer et de recevoir des messages électroniques et d'accéder à des sites Web. Le fournisseur d'accès Internet (FAI) vous attribue un progiciel, un nom d'utilisateur et des numéros de téléphone d'accès contre un paiement. K Kb — Kilobit — Unité de données égale à 1024 bits. Mesure de la capacité des circuits intégrés de mémoire. kHz — Kilohertz — Unité de mesure de fréquence égale à 1000 Hz. Ko — Kilo-octet — Unité de données égale à 1024 octets mais souvent considérée comme étant égale à 1000 octets. L LAN — Local Area Network (réseau local) — Réseau informatique couvrant une petite zone. Un réseau local est généralement limité à un seul bâtiment ou à plusieurs bâtiments avoisinants. Un LAN peut être connecté à un autre réseau local sur n'importe quelle distance par des lignes téléphoniques et des ondes radioélectriques pour constituer un réseau étendu (WAN, Wide Area Network). LCD — Liquid Crystal Display (affichage à cristaux liquides) — Technologie utilisée pour les écrans plats et ceux des ordinateurs portables. lecteur de CD-RW — Lecteur qui peut lire les CD et écrire sur des disques réinscriptibles (CD-RW) et des disques enregistrables (CD-R). On peut écrire plusieurs fois sur des CD-RW, tandis que les CD-R ne permettent qu'une seule inscription. lecteur de CD-RW/DVD — Lecteur, parfois appelé lecteur combiné, permettant de lire des CD et des DVD, ainsi que d'écrire sur des disques réinscriptibles (CD-RW) et des disques enregistrables (CD-R). On peut écrire plusieurs fois sur des CD-RW, tandis que les CD-R ne permettent qu'une seule inscription. lecteur de DVD+RW — Lecteur permettant de lire les DVD et la plupart des supports CD et d'écrire sur des disques DVD+RW (DVD réinscriptibles). lecteur d'empreintes digitales — Capteur qui utilise les empreintes digitales comme moyen d'authentification de votre identité utilisateur, afin de sécuriser l'ordinateur. lecteur optique — Lecteur qui utilise la technologie optique pour lire ou écrire des données sur des CD, des DVD ou des DVD+RW. Les lecteurs de CD, de DVD, de CD-RW et les lecteurs combinés de CD-RW/DVD sont des exemples de lecteurs optiques. lecteur Zip — Lecteur de disquette à grande capacité développé par Iomega Corporation qui utilise des disquettes amovibles de 3,5 pouces appelées disquettes Zip. Les disquettes Zip sont légèrement plus grandes que les disquettes normales, à peu près deux fois plus épaisses et peuvent contenir jusqu'à 100 Mo de données. lecture seule — Données et/ou fichiers que vous pouvez afficher, mais pas modifier ou supprimer. Un fichier peut être en lecture seule si : • Il se trouve sur une disquette physiquement protégée en écriture, un CD ou un DVD. • Il est situé sur un réseau dans un répertoire sur lequel l'administrateur système n'a affecté des droits qu'à certains individus. LED — Light-Emitting Diode (diode électroluminescente) — Composant électronique émettant de la lumière pour indiquer l'état de l'ordinateur. logement d'extension — Connecteur de la carte système (sur certains ordinateurs) dans lequel vous insérez une carte d'extension pour la connecter au bus système.178 Glossaire logiciel antivirus — Programme spécialement conçu pour identifier, isoler et/ou supprimer des virus de votre ordinateur. LPT — Line Print Terminal — Désignation d'une connexion parallèle à une imprimante ou à un autre périphérique parallèle. M Mb — Mégabit — Mesure de la capacité de la puce de mémoire égale à 1024 Ko. Mb/s — Mégabits par seconde — 1 million de bits par seconde. Cette mesure est en règle générale utilisée pour les vitesses de transmission des réseaux et des modems. mémoire — Zone de stockage de données temporaire dans l'ordinateur. Dans la mesure où les données en mémoire ne sont pas permanentes, il vous est recommandé d'enregistrer fréquemment vos fichiers lorsque vous travaillez ainsi qu'avant d'éteindre l'ordinateur. Un ordinateur peut avoir plusieurs formes de mémoire : la mémoire RAM, la mémoire ROM et la mémoire vidéo. Le terme mémoire est souvent synonyme de mémoire RAM. mémoire cache — Mécanisme spécial de stockage à grande vitesse. Il peut s'agir d'une section réservée de la mémoire principale ou d'un périphérique de stockage rapide indépendant. La mémoire cache permet d'améliorer l'efficacité de nombreuses opérations du microprocesseur. mémoire cache L1 — Mémoire cache principale se trouvant dans le microprocesseur. mémoire cache L2 — Mémoire cache secondaire pouvant être externe au microprocesseur ou intégrée à l'architecture de celui-ci. mémoire vidéo — Mémoire composée de puces mémoire dédiées aux fonctions vidéo. La mémoire vidéo est en général plus rapide que la mémoire système. La quantité de mémoire vidéo installée a principalement des effets sur le nombre de couleurs qu'un programme peut afficher. MHz — Mégahertz — Mesure de fréquence égale à 1 million de cycles par seconde. La vitesse des microprocesseurs, des bus et des interfaces d'ordinateurs est généralement mesurée en MHz. microprocesseur — Puce d'ordinateur qui interprète et exécute les instructions des programmes. Le microprocesseur est parfois appelé processeur ou unité centrale (UC). Mo — Méga-octet — Unité de stockage de données égale à 1 048 576 octets. 1 Mo est égal à 1024 Ko. Lorsque l'on fait référence à la capacité de stockage d'un disque dur, le terme est souvent arrondi à 1 000 000 octets. Mo/s — Méga-octets par seconde — 1 million d'octets par seconde. Cette mesure est souvent utilisée pour les taux de transfert de données. mode de bureau étendu — Paramètre d'affichage permettant d'utiliser un second moniteur. Appelé également mode Double affichage. mode Double affichage — Paramètre d'affichage qui permet d'utiliser un second moniteur. Appelé également mode de bureau étendu. mode graphique — Mode vidéo qui peut être défini par le nombre de pixels horizontaux x, le nombre de pixels verticaux y et le nombre de couleurs z. Les modes graphiques peuvent afficher un nombre illimité de formes et de polices. mode Mise en veille prolongée — Mode de gestion de l'alimentation électrique qui enregistre le contenu de la mémoire dans un espace réservé du disque dur, puis arrête l'ordinateur. Quand vous redémarrez l'ordinateur, les informations de la mémoire qui ont été enregistrées sur le disque dur sont automatiquement restaurées. mode Veille — Mode d'économie d'énergie qui arrête toutes les opérations inutiles de l'ordinateur pour économiser de l'énergie. mode vidéo — Mode qui décrit la façon dont le texte et les graphiques sont affichés sur un moniteur. Les logiciels à affichage graphique, tels que les systèmes d'exploitation Windows, s'affichent en modes vidéo définis par le nombre de pixels horizontaux x, le nombre de pixels verticaux y et le nombre de couleurs z. Les logiciels à base de caractères, comme les éditeurs de texte, s'affichent en modes vidéo qui se définissent par le nombre de colonnes x et par le nombre de rangées y.Glossaire 179 modem — Dispositif permettant à votre ordinateur de communiquer avec d'autres ordinateurs par l'intermédiaire de lignes téléphoniques analogiques. Il existe trois types de modems : externe, carte PC et interne. Généralement, vous utilisez un modem pour vous connecter à Internet et échanger des messages électroniques. module de mémoire — Petite carte à circuits imprimés, contenant des puces de mémoire, qui se connecte à la carte système. module de voyage — Périphérique en plastique conçu pour être inséré dans la baie modulaire de l'ordinateur portable pour réduire le poids de ce dernier. ms — milliseconde — Mesure de temps égale à un millième de seconde. Le temps d'accès des périphériques de stockage est souvent mesuré en ms. N NIC — Voir carte réseau. ns — nanoseconde — Mesure de temps égale à un milliardième de seconde. numéro de service — Étiquette de code barre apposée sur l'ordinateur permettant d'identifier ce dernier lorsque vous accédez au support de Dell à l'adresse support.dell.com ou lorsque vous appelez le service clientèle ou le support technique de Dell. NVRAM — Nonvolatile Random Access Memory (mémoire rémanente à accès direct) — Type de mémoire qui conserve des données lors de la mise hors tension de l'ordinateur ou en cas de coupure d'alimentation électrique. La mémoire NVRAM permet de conserver les informations de configuration, comme la date, l'heure et d'autres options de configuration du système que vous pouvez définir. O octet — Unité de stockage de données de base utilisée par votre ordinateur. Un octet équivaut généralement à 8 bits. onduleur — UPS, Uninterruptible Power Supply — Source d'alimentation de secours utilisée lorsque l'alimentation électrique est coupée ou descend à un niveau de tension inacceptable. Un onduleur permet à l'ordinateur de fonctionner pendant un temps limité en cas de panne d'électricité. Les onduleurs sont en général équipés d'un parasurtenseur et peuvent également offrir des régulations de tension. Les petits systèmes UPS proposent une alimentation par batterie de quelques minutes pour vous permettre d'éteindre l'ordinateur correctement. P Panneau de configuration — Utilitaire Windows permettant de modifier les paramètres du système d'exploitation et du matériel : les paramètres d'affichage, par exemple. papier peint — Motif ou image d'arrière-plan du bureau Windows. Vous pouvez changer de papier peint en utilisant le panneau de configuration Windows. Vous pouvez également numériser votre photo préférée et en faire un papier peint. parasurtenseur — Dispositif qui empêche les sautes de tension, pouvant survenir au cours d'orages, par exemple, de pénétrer dans l'ordinateur par l'intermédiaire de la prise secteur. Les parasurtenseurs ne protègent pas de la foudre ou des baisses de tension qui se produisent lorsque la tension descend à plus de 20 pour-cent au-dessous du niveau normal de tension de ligne à courant alternatif. Les connexions réseau ne peuvent pas être protégées par les parasurtenseurs. Vous devez toujours déconnecter le câble de réseau du connecteur réseau pendant les orages. partition — Zone de stockage physique sur un disque dur affectée à une ou plusieurs zones de stockage logique appelées unités logiques. Chaque partition peut contenir plusieurs lecteurs logiques. PCI — Peripheral Component Interconnect — Bus local prenant en charge les chemins de données de 32 et 64 octets et fournissant un chemin de données haute vitesse entre le microprocesseur et les périphériques (vidéo, lecteur, réseau).180 Glossaire PCI Express — Type d'interface PCI qui accélère le taux de transfert des données entre le processeur et ses périphériques. Avec PCI Express, le taux de transfert des données se situe entre 250 Mo/s et 4 Go/s. Si le jeu de puces PCI Express et le périphérique tournent à des vitesses différentes, ils fonctionnent à la vitesse la plus basse. PCMCIA — Personal Computer Memory Card International Association — Organisme chargé d'établir des normes pour les cartes PC. périphérique — Matériel, tel qu'un lecteur de disque, une imprimante ou un clavier, installé sur votre ordinateur ou connecté à celui-ci. pilote — Logiciel permettant au système d'exploitation de contrôler un périphérique comme une imprimante. La plupart des périphériques ne fonctionnent pas correctement si le pilote approprié n'est pas installé sur l'ordinateur. pilote de périphérique — Voir pilote. PIO — Programmed Input/Output (Entrée/Sortie programmée) — Méthode de transfert des données entre deux périphériques en utilisant le microprocesseur comme partie du chemin de données. pixel — Point unique sur un écran. Les pixels sont disposés en rangs et en colonnes pour créer une image. Une résolution vidéo, par exemple 800 sur 600, s'exprime en nombre de pixels en largeur sur le nombre de pixels en hauteur. Plug-and-Play — Possibilité pour l'ordinateur de configurer automatiquement les périphériques. La norme Plug-and-Play permet d'installer et de configurer automatiquement un périphérique et assure la compatibilité avec le matériel existant si le BIOS, le système d'exploitation et tous les périphériques sont compatibles Plug-and-Play. POST — Power-On Self-Test (autotest de démarrage) — Programmes de diagnostic, chargés automatiquement par le BIOS, qui effectuent des tests de base sur la plupart des composants de l'ordinateur, comme la mémoire, les unités de disque dur, etc. Si aucun problème n'est détecté au cours de l'autotest de démarrage, l'ordinateur continue son démarrage. programme de configuration — Programme utilisé pour installer et configurer du matériel et des logiciels. Le programme setup.exe ou install.exe est généralement livré avec la plupart des progiciels Windows. Il ne faut pas confondre programme de configuration et programme de configuration du système. programme de configuration du système — Utilitaire qui joue le rôle d'interface entre le matériel informatique et le système d'exploitation. Le programme de configuration du système vous permet de configurer les options sélectionnables par l'utilisateur dans le BIOS, comme la date et l'heure ou le mot de passe système. Ne modifiez les paramètres de ce programme que si vous connaissez avec exactitude les effets de chacun des paramètres sur l'ordinateur. protection en écriture — Caractéristique des fichiers ou supports ne pouvant pas être modifiés. Utilisez la protection en écriture lorsque vous voulez empêcher la modification ou la destruction des données. Pour protéger contre l'écriture une disquette de 3,5 pouces, faites glisser la languette de protection en écriture en position ouverte. PS/2 — Personal System/2 — Type de connecteur permettant de relier un clavier, une souris ou un pavé numérique compatible PS/2. PXE — Pre-boot execution Environment — Norme WfM (Wired for Management) permettant la configuration et le démarrage à distance d'ordinateurs en réseau sans système d'exploitation. R raccourci —Icône permettant d'accéder rapidement à un programme, fichier, dossier ou lecteur fréquemment utilisé. En double-cliquant sur un raccourci placé sur votre bureau Windows, vous pouvez ouvrir le dossier ou le fichier correspondant sans avoir à le rechercher au préalable. Les raccourcis ne modifient pas l'emplacement des fichiers. Si vous supprimez un raccourci, le fichier original n'est pas affecté. Vous pouvez également renommer un raccourci. RAID — Ensemble redondant de disques indépendants — Méthode assurant la redondance des données. Parmi les implémentations courantes de RAID : RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, RAID 10 et RAID 50.Glossaire 181 RAM — Random-Access Memory — Zone principale de stockage temporaire pour les instructions et les données des programmes. Toute information stockée dans la RAM est définitivement perdue lorsque vous éteignez l'ordinateur. résolution — Netteté et clarté d'une image produite par une imprimante ou affichée sur un moniteur. Plus la résolution est élevée, plus l'image est nette. résolution vidéo — Voir résolution. RFI — Radio Frequency Interference (interférence de fréquence radio) — Interférence générée à des fréquences radio caractéristiques, entre 10 kHz et 100 000 MHz. Les fréquences radio se trouvent à l'extrémité inférieure du spectre de fréquences électromagnétiques et sont plus susceptibles de présenter des perturbations que les radiations de plus haute fréquence, telles que les infrarouges et la lumière. ROM — Read-Only Memory (mémoire morte) — Mémoire qui stocke des données et programmes que l'ordinateur ne peut pas supprimer ou dans laquelle il ne peut pas écrire. À la différence de la mémoire RAM, la mémoire ROM conserve son contenu même après l'arrêt de l'ordinateur. Certains programmes essentiels au fonctionnement de l'ordinateur se trouvent dans la mémoire morte. RPM — Revolutions Per Minute (tours par minute) — Mesure le nombre de rotations effectuées par minute. La vitesse des disques durs est souvent mesurée en RPM. RTC — Real Time Clock (horloge temps réel) — Horloge alimentée par pile, située sur la carte système, qui conserve la date et l'heure après l'arrêt de l'ordinateur. RTCRST — Real Time Clock Reset — Cavalier sur la carte système de certains ordinateurs pouvant souvent être utilisé pour résoudre les problèmes. S SAS — serial attached SCSI — Version plus rapide et en série d'une interface SCSI (par opposition à l'architecture parallèle SCSI d'origine). SATA — serial ATA (ATA série) — Version plus rapide et en série de l'interface ATA (IDE). ScanDisk — Utilitaire Microsoft qui recherche les erreurs présentes dans les fichiers et les dossiers, ainsi que sur la surface du disque dur. ScanDisk s'exécute souvent lorsque vous redémarrez l'ordinateur après un blocage. SCSI — small computer system interface (interface système petit ordinateur) — Interface haut débit qui sert à connecter des périphériques à l'ordinateur, tels qu'un disque dur, un lecteur CD, une imprimante et un scanner. L'interface SCSI peut connecter plusieurs périphériques à l'aide d'un seul contrôleur. On accède à chaque périphérique à l'aide d'un numéro d'identification individuel du bus du contrôleur SCSI. SDRAM — Synchronous Dynamic Random-Access Memory — Type de mémoire vive dynamique (DRAM) synchronisée avec la vitesse d'horloge optimale du microprocesseur. SDRAM DDR — SDRAM à double débit de données — Type de SDRAM doublant les cycles de données en rafale et améliorant les performances du système. SDRAM DDR2 — SDRAM à double débit de données 2 — Type de SDRAM DDR qui utilise une pré- extraction de 4 bits et d'autres modifications architecturales pour passer la vitesse de la mémoire à plus de 400 MHz. segmentation des données — Technique de répartition des données sur plusieurs lecteurs de disque. La segmentation des données peut accélérer les opérations de récupération des données sur les disques. Les ordinateurs utilisant la segmentation des données permettent généralement à l'utilisateur de sélectionner la taille des unités de données ou la taille des blocs. séquence d'amorçage — Précise l'ordre des périphériques à partir desquels l'ordinateur tente de s'amorcer. SIM — Module d'identité d'abonné. Une carte SIM contient une micropuce qui crypte les transmissions vocales et de données. Les cartes SIM peuvent être utilisées avec des téléphones ou des ordinateurs portables. sortie TV S-vidéo — Connecteur permettant de relier des périphériques audio numériques ou un téléviseur à l'ordinateur. S/PDIF — Sony/Philips Digital Interface — Format de fichier de transfert audio permettant de transférer des données audio entre deux fichiers sans conversion préalable au format analogique, ce qui pourrait dégrader la qualité du fichier.182 Glossaire station d'accueil — Voir APR. Strike Zone™ — Zone renforcée de la base de la plateforme qui offre une protection au disque dur en servant d'amortisseur en cas de choc résonnant ou de chute de l'ordinateur (allumé ou éteint). SVGA — Super-Video Graphics Array — Norme utilisée pour les cartes et les contrôleurs vidéo. Les résolutions SVGA types sont de 800 sur 600 et 1024 sur 768. Le nombre de couleurs et la résolution affichés par un programme dépendent des capacités du moniteur, du contrôleur vidéo et de ses pilotes, ainsi que de la quantité de mémoire vidéo installée dans l'ordinateur. SXGA — Super-extended Graphics Array — Norme utilisée pour les cartes et les contrôleurs vidéo qui prend en charge les résolutions allant jusqu'à 1280 sur 1024. SXGA+ — Super-extended Graphics Array plus — Norme utilisée pour les cartes et les contrôleurs vidéo qui prend en charge les résolutions allant jusqu'à 1400 sur 1050. T TAPI — Telephony Application Programming Interface — Permet aux programmes Microsoft Windows de fonctionner avec de nombreux périphériques de téléphonie (voix, données, télécopie et vidéo). taux de rafraîchissement — Fréquence, mesurée en Hz, à laquelle les lignes horizontales de l'écran sont rechargées (on parle parfois aussi de fréquence verticale). Plus le taux de rafraîchissement est élevé, moins le scintillement vidéo est perceptible à l'œil nu. technologie sans fil Bluetooth® — Norme technologique sans fil pour les périphériques de mise en réseau de courte portée (9 m [29 pieds]) permettant aux périphériques activés de se reconnaître automatiquement. TPM — trusted platform module — Fonction de sécurité matérielle qui, associée à un logiciel de sécurité, améliore la sécurité de l'ordinateur et du réseau en activant des fonctions telles que la protection des fichiers et des e-mails. U UMA — allocation de mémoire unifiée — Mémoire système allouée de manière dynamique à la mémoire vidéo. unité de disque dur — Lecteur permettant de lire et d'écrire des données sur un disque dur. Les termes lecteur de disque dur et disque dur sont souvent utilisés indifféremment. USB — Universal Serial Bus — Interface matérielle pour les périphériques lents comme un clavier, une souris, une manette de jeu, un scanner, des haut-parleurs, une imprimante, des périphériques large bande (DSL et modems par câble), des périphériques d'imagerie ou de stockage compatibles USB. Les périphériques sont branchés directement à un support à 4 broches de votre ordinateur, ou à un concentrateur à plusieurs ports qui se raccorde à votre ordinateur. Les périphériques USB peuvent être connectés et déconnectés lorsque l'ordinateur est sous tension et peuvent également être connectés en guirlande. UTP — Unshielded Twisted Pair (paire torsadée non blindée) — Type de câble utilisé dans la plupart des réseaux téléphoniques et dans certains réseaux informatiques. Les paires de câbles non blindés sont torsadées afin de les protéger contre les interférences électromagnétiques et sont utilisées à la place des câbles comportant une gaine métallique autour de chaque paire de fils. UXGA — Ultra-extended Graphics Array — Norme utilisée pour les cartes et les contrôleurs vidéo qui prend en charge les résolutions allant jusqu'à 1600 sur 1200. V V — Volt — Unité de mesure de la puissance électrique ou de la force électromotrice. Un V est mesuré sur une résistance de 1 ohm lorsqu'elle est traversée par un courant de 1 ampère. virus — Programme conçu pour nuire ou détruire les données stockées sur votre ordinateur. Un virus se déplace d'un ordinateur à un autre par l'intermédiaire d'une disquette infectée, d'un logiciel téléchargé à partir d'Internet ou de pièces jointes à des messages électroniques. Lorsque vous démarrez un programme infecté, le virus intégré démarre lui aussi.Glossaire 183 Un type courant de virus est le virus d'amorçage, qui est stocké dans les secteurs d'amorçage d'une disquette. Si vous laissez la disquette dans le lecteur lorsque vous éteignez puis rallumez l'ordinateur, celui-ci est infecté lors de la lecture des secteurs d'amorçage de la disquette, à la recherche du système d'exploitation. Si l'ordinateur est infecté, le virus d'amorçage peut se reproduire sur toutes les disquettes lues ou écrites sur cet ordinateur jusqu'à son éradication. vitesse de bus — Vitesse, en MHz, qui indique la rapidité avec laquelle un bus peut transférer des informations. vitesse d'horloge — Vitesse, en MHz, qui indique la rapidité avec laquelle les composants de l'ordinateur connectés au bus système fonctionnent. W W — Watt — Mesure du courant électrique. Un watt est 1 ampère de courant dont le débit est de 1 volt. Wh — Wattheure — Unité de mesure utilisée couramment pour indiquer la capacité approximative d'une batterie. Par exemple, une batterie de 66 Wh peut fournir 66 W de courant pendant 1 heure ou 33 W pendant 2 heures. WLAN — réseau local sans fil. Ensemble d'ordinateurs interconnectés qui communiquent entre eux par les ondes aériennes et qui utilisent des points d'accès ou des routeurs pour fournir un accès Internet. WWAN — réseau étendu sans fil. Réseau de données haut débit sans fil utilisant la technologie cellulaire et couvrant une zone géographique plus grande que celle couverte par le WLAN. WXGA — wide-aspect extended graphics array — Norme utilisée pour les cartes et les contrôleurs vidéo qui prend en charge les résolutions allant jusqu'à 1280 sur 800. X XGA — Extended Graphics Array —Norme utilisée pour les cartes et les contrôleurs vidéo qui prend en charge les résolutions allant jusqu'à 1024 sur 768. Z ZIF — Zero Insertion Force — Type de connecteur ou de support permettant l'installation ou le retrait d'une puce sans forcer sur la puce ou le support. Zip — Format courant de compression des données. Les fichiers compressés au format Zip sont appelés fichiers Zip et portent en général l'extension .zip. Un type spécial de fichier zippé/compressé est un fichier à extraction automatique, dont l'extension est .exe. Pour décompresser un fichier à extraction automatique, double-cliquez dessus. zone de notification — La zone de notification du bureau Windows contient des icônes permettant d'accéder rapidement aux programmes et aux fonctions de l'ordinateur, notamment à l'horloge, au contrôle du volume et à l'état de l'imprimante. Appelée également barre d'état système.184 GlossaireIndex 185 Index A alimentation filtres de ligne, 34 mode Mise en veille prolongée, 46 mode Veille, 46 parasurtenseurs, 34 périphériques de protection, 34 problèmes, 104 UPS, 34 alimentation sans interruption. Voir UPS Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres, 30 assistants Assistant Compatibilité des programmes, 100 Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres, 30 audio numérique S/PDIF activation, 69 audio. Voir son B barre des tâches icône QuickSet, 49 réglage de la taille, 49 batterie chargement, 47 description, 27 indicateur de charge, 27 jauge d'alimentation, 44 performances, 43 remplacement, 48 stockage, 48 vérification de la charge, 44 bouton d'éjection du plateau du lecteur optique description, 20 boutons de commande multimédia bouton Dell MediaDirect, 56 description, 18 C cache de la carte Mini description, 28 cache de la charnière description, 131 retrait, 131 caches cartes ExpressCard, 71 retrait, 73 caisson de basse description, 27 caractéristiques, 139 carnet, 138 carte Mini installation, 127 Cartes ExpressCard caches, 71 cartes ExpressCard caches, 73 installation, 71 retrait, 73 cartes mémoire multimédia installation, 74 logements, 74 retrait, 75 technologie bus de carte, 74 types, 74 casque Dolby, configuration, 69 CD à propos, 54 lecture, 51 système d'exploitation, 14 CD Drivers and Utilities, 110 CD ResourceCD Dell Diagnostics, 87 Centre d'aide et de support, 13-14 clavier clavier numérique, 39 description, 18 numérique, 39 problèmes, 99 raccourcis, 40 retrait, 133 clavier numérique, 39186 Index 186 Index conflits incompatibilités logicielles et matérielles, 112 conflits d'interruption, 112 connecteur de sortie TV Svidéo description, 23 raccordement à une télévision, 23 connecteur IEEE 1394 description, 21 problèmes, 98 connecteur modem description, 24 connecteur moniteur DVI description, 25 connecteur réseau description, 24 connecteur vidéo description, 25 connecteurs audio description, 22 connecteurs USB description, 24 connexion périphérique audio, 57 réseau large bande mobile, 82 téléviseur, 57 connexion à Internet, 29 consignes de sécurité, 11 contrat de licence pour utilisateur final, 11 copie de CD conseils pratiques, 55 informations générales, 54 procédure, 54 copie de DVD conseils pratiques, 55 informations générales, 54 procédure, 54 D Dell contacter, 147, 156-157 site de support, 13 Dell Diagnostics à propos de, 87 démarrage à partir du CD Drivers and Utilities, 87 démarrage à partir du disque dur, 87 Dell MediaDirect à propos, 56 à propos de, 18 problèmes, 101 dépannage Centre d'aide et de support, 13-14 conflits, 112 Dell Diagnostics, 87 Dépanneur des conflits matériels, 112 problèmes de clavier externe, 99 restaurer à un état antérieur, 112 restaurer l'ordinateur à un état antérieur, 112 Dépanneur des conflits matériels, 112 diagnostics Dell, 87 disque dur description, 27-28 problèmes, 92 remplacement, 121 retour à Dell, 123 documentation contrat de licence pour utilisateur final, 11 en ligne, 13 ergonomie, 11 garantie, 11 guide d'information sur le produit, 11 réglementaire, 11 sécurité, 11 DVD à propos, 54 lecture, 51 E écran basculement de l'image vidéo, 37 description, 16 réglage de la luminosité, 37 résolution, 38 Voir également moniteur écran. Voir moniteur, affichage emplacement pour câble de sécurité description, 20Index 187 étiquette Microsoft Windows, 12 étiquettes Microsoft Windows, 12 numéro de service, 12 G gestion de l'alimentation QuickSet, 49 réglage des paramètres, 49 guide d'information sur le produit, 11 H haut-parleurs description, 18 problèmes, 106 volume, 106 I icônes réglage de la taille, 49 imprimante câble, 33 connexion, 33 installation, 33 problèmes, 105 USB, 33 informations réglementaires, 11 informations relatives à l'ergonomie, 11 informations sur la garantie, 11 interface vidéo numérique. Voir DVI L large bande mobile connexions réseau, 82 lecteur de carte mémoire multimédia 5 en 1, 74 lecteur de CD problèmes, 92 lecteur de CD-RW problèmes, 92 lecteur de disquette branchement sur un connecteur USB, 20 lecteur de DVD problèmes, 92 lecteur optique description, 20 lecteurs problèmes, 91 Voir disque dur lecture de CD, 51 lecture de DVD, 51 logiciel confl, 112 problèmes, 101 logiciel espion, 94, 102 logiciels problèmes, 100 loquet de l'écran description, 16 luminosité réglage, 37 M matériel conflits, 112 Dell Diagnostics, 87 mémoire installation, 123 retrait, 124 messages erreur, 94 messages d'erreur, 94 mise hors tension de votre ordinateur, 119 mode Mise en veille prolongée, 46 mode Veille à propos de, 46 modem installation, 126 moniteur basculement de l'image vidéo, 37 problèmes, 108 mots de passe oubli, 86188 Index 188 Index N nettoyage tablette tactile, 153 numéro de service, 12 O ordinateur absence de réponse, 100 blocages, 100-101 caractéristiques, 139 faibles performances, 94, 102 restaurer à un état antérieur, 112 ordinateur perdu, 86 ordinateur volé, 86 P paramètres d'affichage pour téléviseur activation sous Windows XP, 70 pare-feu Windows XP, 84 pare-feu de connexion Internet, 84 PC Restore, 114 périphérique audio activation, 69 connexion, 57 pile bouton remplacement, 134 pilotes à propos de, 109 identification, 109 réinstallation, 110 problème scanner, 106 problèmes alimentation, 104 blocages, 100 blocages d'ordinateur, 100 blocages de l'ordinateur, 101 clavier, 99 compatibilité des programmes et de Windows, 100 connecteur IEEE 1394, 98 Dell Diagnostics, 87 Dell MediaDirect, 101 disque dur, 92 écran bleu, 101 états du voyant d'alimentation, 104 faibles performances de l'ordinateur, 94, 102 haut-parleurs, 106 imprimante, 105 l'ordinateur ne démarre pas, 100 l'ordinateur ne répond plus, 100 lecteur de CD, 92 lecteur de CD-RW, 92 lecteur de DVD, 92 lecteurs, 91 logiciel, 100-101 logiciel espion, 94, 102 logiciels, 100 messages d'erreur, 94 réseau, 102 restaurer à un état antérieur, 112 son et haut-parleurs, 106 un programme se bloque, 100 vidéo et moniteur, 108 programme de configuration du système, 152 Q QuickSet, 40-41, 49, 56 R RAM. Voir mémoire réinstallation Windows XP, 112 réseau pare-feu, 84 problèmes, 102 résolution paramètre, 38 Restauration du système, 112 S sans fil marche/arrêt, 49 scanner problèmes, 106 séquence d'amorçage, 152 site Web de support, 13Index 189 son problèmes, 106 volume, 106 support contacter Dell, 147, 156-157 système d'exploitation CD, 14 réinstallation, 14, 112 T tablette tactile description, 18 nettoyage, 153 personnalisation, 42 utilisation, 42 technologie bus de carte cartes mémoire multimédia, 74 technologie sans fil Bluetooth installation, 135 voyant d'état de l'appareil, 19 téléviseur activation des paramètres d'affichage, 70 connexion, 57 transfert d'informations vers un nouvel ordinateur, 30 U UPS, 34 V ventilateur description, 20, 22-23, 28 vidéo problèmes, 108 vis de verrouillage du lecteur optique description, 28 volume réglage, 107 voyager avec l'ordinateur avion, 138 conseils, 138 emballage, 137 étiquette d'identification, 137 voyant d'alimentation états, 104 voyants d'état de l'appareil description, 17 voyants d'état du clavier description, 19 W Windows XP activation des paramètres d'affichage pour téléviseur, 70 Assistant Compatibilité des programmes, 100 Assistant Transfert de fichiers et de paramètres, 30 Centre d'aide et de support, 13-14 Dépanneur des conflits matériels, 112 mode Mise en veille prolongée, 46 mode Veille, 46 pare-feu de connexion Internet, 84 réinstallation, 14, 112 Restauration des pilotes de périphériques, 110 Restauration du système, 112190 Index 190 Index Rack Installation Guide Guide d'installation du rack Rack-Installationsanleitung ラック取り付けガイド Guía de instalación del rackwww.dell.com | support.dell.com Rack Installation GuideNotes, Notices, and Cautions NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your computer. NOTICE: A NOTICE indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death. ____________________ Information in this document is subject to change without notice. © 2005 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. Reproduction in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden. Trademarks used in this text: Dell, the DELL logo, RapidRails, and VersaRails are trademarks of Dell Inc. Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own November 2005 P/N YC588 Rev. A00Contents 3 Contents 1 Four-Post Rack Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 SAFETY: Rack Mounting of Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 General Installation Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Important Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Rack Requirements for VersaRails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Rack Stabilizer Feet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Recommended Tools and Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Sliding Rails Rack Kit Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Static Rails Rack Kit Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Installation Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Removing the Rack Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Marking the Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Configuring the Sliding Rail Assemblies (Sliding Rail Kits Only). . . . . . . . 13 Installing Chassis Static Rail Modules (Static Rail Kits Only) . . . . . . . . . 14 Installing the Mounting Rails in the Rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Installing the System in the Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Installing a System With Sliding Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Installing a System With Static Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Replacing the Rack Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Installing the Tray and Cable-Management Arm (Sliding Rail Kits Only) . . . 22 Installing the Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Installing the Cable-Management Arm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Routing Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Removing the System From the Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Removing a System With Sliding Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Removing a System With Static Rails. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Contents 2 Two-Post Rack Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 SAFETY: Rack Mounting of Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Before You Begin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Important Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Recommended Tools and Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Rack Kit Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Installation Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Marking the Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Universal-Hole Spacing Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Wide-Hole Spacing Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Installing the Mounting Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Center-Mount Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Flush-Mount Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Installing Chassis Static Rail Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Installing the System in the Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Removing the System From the Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Four-Post Rack Installation 5 Four-Post Rack Installation Safety Instructions Use the following safety guidelines to ensure your own personal safety and to help protect your system and working environment from potential damage. For complete safety and regulatory information, see the Product Information Guide that shipped with your system. Warranty information might be included in this document or as a separate document. SAFETY: Rack Mounting of Systems Observe the following precautions for rack stability and safety. Also refer to the rack installation documentation accompanying the system and the rack for specific caution statements and procedures. Systems are considered to be components in a rack. Thus, "component" refers to any system as well as to various peripherals or supporting hardware. CAUTION: Before installing systems in a rack, install front and side stabilizers on stand-alone racks or the front stabilizer on racks joined to other racks. Failure to install stabilizers accordingly before installing systems in a rack could cause the rack to tip over, potentially resulting in bodily injury under certain circumstances. Therefore, always install the stabilizer(s) before installing components in the rack. After installing system/components in a rack, never pull more than one component out of the rack on its slide assemblies at one time. The weight of more than one extended component could cause the rack to tip over and may result in serious injury. NOTE: Your system is safety-certified as a free-standing unit and as a component for use in a Dell rack cabinet using the customer rack kit. The installation of your system and rack kit in any other rack cabinet has not been approved by any safety agencies. It is your responsibility to ensure that the final combination of system and rack complies with all applicable safety standards and local electric code requirements. Dell disclaims all liability and warranties in connection with such combinations. • System rack kits are intended to be installed in a rack by trained service technicians. If you install the kit in any other rack, be sure that the rack meets the specifications of a Dell rack. CAUTION: Do not move racks by yourself. Due to the height and weight of the rack, a minimum of two people should accomplish this task. • Before working on the rack, make sure that the stabilizers are secured to the rack, extended to the floor, and that the full weight of the rack rests on the floor. Install front and side stabilizers on a single rack or front stabilizers for joined multiple racks before working on the rack. • Always load the rack from the bottom up, and load the heaviest item in the rack first.6 Four-Post Rack Installation • Make sure that the rack is level and stable before extending a component from the rack. • Use caution when pressing the component rail release latches and sliding a component into or out of a rack; the slide rails can pinch your fingers. • Do not overload the AC supply branch circuit that provides power to the rack. The total rack load should not exceed 80 percent of the branch circuit rating. • Ensure that proper airflow is provided to components in the rack. • Do not step on or stand on any component when servicing other components in a rack. General Installation Instructions This installation guide provides instructions for trained service technicians installing one or more systems in a rack cabinet. The RapidRails™ rack kit can be installed in all the system manufacturer's rack cabinets without tools, and the VersaRails™ rack kit can be installed in most industry-standard rack cabinets. The procedures for installing both RapidRails and VersaRails rack kits are similar. One rack kit is required for each system to be installed in the rack cabinet. This section includes procedures for the following four-post rack kits: • Sliding rails rack kit • Static rails rack kit (RapidRails and VersaRails versions) (See "Two-Post Rack Installation" on page 27 for instructions on installing a static rails kit in a two-post rack.) Before You Begin Before you begin installing your system in the rack, carefully read "Safety Instructions," found earlier in this guide, as well as the safety instructions found in your Product Information Guide for additional information. CAUTION: When installing multiple systems in a rack, complete all of the procedures for the current system before attempting to install the next system. CAUTION: Rack cabinets can be extremely heavy and move easily on their casters. They do not have brakes. Use extreme caution while moving the rack cabinet. Retract the leveling feet when relocating the rack cabinet. Avoid long or steep inclines or ramps where loss of cabinet control may occur. Extend the leveling feet for support and to prevent the cabinet from rolling. NOTE: For instructions on installing the system itself, see ""Installing the System in the Rack" on page 18.Four-Post Rack Installation 7 Important Safety Information Observe the safety precautions in the following subsections when installing your system in the rack. CAUTION: You must strictly follow the procedures in this document to protect yourself as well as others who may be involved. Your system may be very large and heavy and proper preparation and planning are important to prevent injury to yourself and to others. This precaution becomes increasingly important when systems are installed high up in the rack. CAUTION: Do not install rack kit components designed for another system. Use only the rack kit for your system. Using the rack kit for another system may result in damage to the system and personal injury to yourself and to others. Rack Requirements for VersaRails NOTICE: The VersaRails rack kit is intended to be installed by trained service technicians in a rack that meets the specifications of American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/Electronic Industries Association (EIA) standard ANSI/EIA-310-D-92, International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) 297, and Deutsche Industrie Norm (DIN) 41494. One rack kit is required for each system that is installed in a rack. Rack Stabilizer Feet CAUTION: Before installing systems in a rack, install front and side stabilizers on stand-alone racks or the front stabilizer on racks joined to other racks. Failure to install stabilizers accordingly before installing systems in a rack could cause the rack to tip over, potentially resulting in bodily injury under certain circumstances. Therefore, always install the stabilizer(s) before installing components in the rack. The stabilizer feet help prevent the rack from tipping over. See the documentation provided with the rack cabinet for instructions on installing and anchoring the stabilizer feet. Recommended Tools and Supplies You may need the following items to install the system in a four-post rack cabinet: • #2 Phillips screwdriver • Masking tape or a felt-tip pen, for use in marking the mounting holes to be used8 Four-Post Rack Installation Sliding Rails Rack Kit Contents • One pair of slide assemblies (convertible to RapidRails or VersaRails configuration) • One cable-management arm • One tray • One status indicator cable (if applicable) • Tie wraps to secure the cables to the cable management arm • Eight 10-32 x 0.5-inch flange-head Phillips screws (used in VersaRails configuration only) NOTE: The nonmetric screws described in illustrations and in procedural steps are identified by size and number of threads per inch. For example, a #10 Phillips-head screw with 32 threads per inch is identified as a 10-32 screw. Figure 1-1. Sliding Rails Rack Kit Contents 1 tray 2 slide assemblies (2) 3 10-32 x 0.5-inch flange-head Phillips screws (8) (VersaRails configuration only) 4 tie wraps 5 status indicator cable (if applicable) 6 cable-management arm 1 2 3 5 6 4Four-Post Rack Installation 9 Static Rails Rack Kit Contents • One pair of static mounting rails with either VersaRails brackets or RapidRails brackets. • One pair of chassis static rail modules • 10-32 x 0.5-inch flange-head Phillips screws (8) (VersaRails kits only) • Releasable tie wraps (2) (not shown in Figure 1-2) NOTE: The nonmetric screws described in illustrations and in procedural steps are identified by size and number of threads per inch. For example, a #10 Phillips-head screw with 32 threads per inch is identified as a 10-32 screw. Figure 1-2. Static Rails Rack Kit Contents 1 10-32 x 0.5-inch flange-head Phillips screws (8) (VersaRails kits only) 2 static mounting rails (2) 3 chassis static rail modules (2) FRONT L 1 3 210 Four-Post Rack Installation Installation Tasks Installing a rack kit involves performing the following tasks (described in detail in subsequent sections) in their numbered order: 1 Removing the rack doors 2 Marking the rack 3 Configuring the sliding rail assemblies (sliding rail kits only) 4 Installing chassis static rail modules (static rail kits only) 5 Installing the mounting rails in the rack 6 Installing the system in the rack 7 Installing the tray and cable-management arm (sliding rail kits only) 8 Routing cables 9 Replacing the rack doors Removing the Rack Doors See the procedures for removing doors in the documentation provided with your rack cabinet. CAUTION: Because of the size and weight of the rack cabinet doors, never attempt to remove or install them by yourself. CAUTION: Store the two doors where they will not injure someone if the doors accidently fall over. Marking the Rack For a 1-U system, you must allow 1 U (44 mm, or 1.75 inches) of vertical space for each system you install in the rack. Rack cabinets that meet EIA-310 standards have an alternating pattern of three holes per rack unit with center-to-center hole spacing (beginning at the top hole of a 1-U space) of 15.9 mm, 15.9 mm, and 12.7 mm (0.625 inch, 0.625 inch, and 0.5 inch) for the front and back vertical rails (see Figure 1-3). Rack cabinets may have round or square holes. NOTE: The vertical rails may be marked by horizontal lines and numbers in 1-U increments. If you want, you can make a note of the number marking on the rack’s vertical rail. It is not necessary to mark or place tape on the rack. Four-Post Rack Installation 11 Figure 1-3. One Rack Unit CAUTION: If you are installing more than one system, install the mounting rails so that the first system is installed in the lowest available position in the rack. To mark the rack, perform the following steps: 1 Place a mark (or tape) on the rack's front vertical rails where you want to locate the bottom of the system you are installing in the rack. The bottom of each 1-U space is at the middle of the narrowest metal area between holes (marked with a horizontal line on some rack cabinets—see Figure 1-4). 2 Place a mark 44 mm (1.75 inches) above the original mark you made (or count up three holes in a rack that meets EIA-310 standards) and mark the rack's front vertical rails with a felt-tipped pen or masking tape (if you counted holes, place a mark just above the top hole). This mark or piece of tape indicates where the system's upper edge will be located on the vertical rails (see Figure 1-4). 1 U (44 mm or 1.75 inches) 12.7 mm (0.5 inch) 15.9 mm (0.625 inch) 15.9 mm (0.625 inch) 12.7 mm (0.5 inch) 12 Four-Post Rack Installation Figure 1-4. Marking the Vertical Rails 1 marks on vertical rail (2) 1Four-Post Rack Installation 13 Configuring the Sliding Rail Assemblies (Sliding Rail Kits Only) The sliding rail assembly has a rotating mounting bracket at each end of the rail. The position of the bracket determines whether the rail assembly is used as a RapidRail or a VersaRail. The RapidRail side of the bracket has a hook and a latch that secure it to the vertical rail. The VersaRail side of the bracket has three holes and uses screws to attach it to the vertical rail. NOTE: The rack kit ships with the sliding rail assemblies in the RapidRails configuration. To rotate the mounting bracket and change the mounting rails from RapidRails to VersaRails (see Figure 1-5): 1 Lift the release lever on the rotating mounting bracket. 2 Rotate the bracket and slide it up off the two shoulder standoffs. 3 Continue to rotate the bracket 180 degrees until you can set the notches back over the shoulder standoffs. 4 Rotate the bracket back in the opposite direction on the shoulder standoffs until the bracket clicks into place. Figure 1-5. Changing the Position of the Rotating Mounting Bracket 1 rotating bracket 2 release lever 3 shoulder standoffs (2) 4 notches (2) 5 mounting bracket flange (RapidRails configuration shown) 1 2 4 3 514 Four-Post Rack Installation Installing Chassis Static Rail Modules (Static Rail Kits Only) NOTE: You do not need to remove the optional front bezel to install or remove the chassis static rail modules from the chassis. 1 To install a rail module, locate the three keyhole slots on the rail module and the corresponding shoulder screws on the side of the system (see Figure 1-6). 2 Place the rail module against the side of the system so that the shoulder screws fit through the round portion of the keyhole slots, then slide the module towards the back of the system. 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to install the other rail module. To remove a rail module from the chassis, pull up on the release latch, then slide the rail forward and remove the rail module from the chassis. Figure 1-6. Installing and Removing Static Rail Chassis Modules 1 keyhole slots (6) 2 shoulder screws (6) 3 release latch 4 rail modules (2) 5 system 4 2 3 1 5Four-Post Rack Installation 15 Installing the Mounting Rails in the Rack NOTE: The following instructions apply to both sliding mounting rails and static mounting rails. Installing RapidRails Mounting Rails 1 At the front of the rack cabinet, position one of the mounting rails so that its mounting-bracket flange fits between the marks or tape you placed (or numbered locations) on the vertical rails in "Marking the Rack" (see Figure 1-7). The top mounting hook on the front mounting-bracket flange should enter the top hole between the marks you made on the vertical rails. Figure 1-7. Installing RapidRails Mounting Rails 1 mounting hooks (2) 2 push buttons (2) 3 mounting rails (2) front of rack 1 2 316 Four-Post Rack Installation 2 Push the mounting rail forward until the mounting hook enters the square hole, and then push down on the mounting-bracket flange until the mounting hook seats and the push button extends through the lower square hole (see Figure 1-7). 3 At the back of the cabinet, pull back on the mounting-bracket flange until the mounting hook enters the upper square hole, and then push down on the flange until the mounting hook seats and the push button extends through the lower square hole. 4 Repeat step 1 through step 3 for the mounting rail on the other side of the rack. 5 Confirm that the mounting rails are mounted at the same vertical position on both sides of the rack. Installing the VersaRails Mounting Rails 1 At the front of the rack cabinet, position one of the mounting rails so that its mounting-bracket flange fits between the marks you placed (or numbered locations) on the vertical rails in "Marking the Rack" (see Figure 1-8). The three holes on the front of the mounting-bracket flange should align with the holes between the marks you made on the front vertical rail. 2 Install two 10-32 x 0.5-inch flange-head Phillips screws in the upper and lower holes in the mountingbracket flange to secure the mounting rail to the front vertical rail. 3 At the back of the cabinet, pull back on the mounting-bracket flange until the mounting holes align with their respective holes on the back vertical rail. 4 Install two 10-32 x 0.5-inch flange-head Phillips screws in the upper and lower holes in the mountingbracket flange to secure the mounting rail to the back vertical rail. 5 Repeat step 1 through step 4 for the mounting rail on the other side of the rack. 6 Ensure that the mounting rails are mounted at the same position on the vertical rails on each side of the rack.Four-Post Rack Installation 17 Figure 1-8. Installing VersaRails Mounting Rails 1 mounting-bracket flange 2 10-32 x 0.5-inch flange-head Phillips screws (4 per mounting rail) 3 mounting rails (2) front of rack 1 2 318 Four-Post Rack Installation Installing the System in the Rack CAUTION: If you are installing more than one system, install the first system in the lowest available position in the rack. CAUTION: Because of the size and weight of the system, never attempt to install the system in the mounting rails by yourself. Installing a System With Sliding Rails 1 Pull the two inner slide rails out of the rack until they lock in the fully extended position (see Figure 1-9). 2 Lift the system into position above the extended slides. The three shoulder screws on each side of the system fit into the corresponding J-slots on the inner slide assemblies (see Figure 1-9). 3 Lower the back of the system while aligning the back shoulder screws on the sides of the system with the back J-slots on the slide assemblies. 4 Engage the back shoulder screws into their respective J-slots. 5 Lower the front of the system and fit the middle and front shoulder screws into the J-slots in the slide assemblies. The system release latch at the front of the inner slide rail will snap back as the shoulder screw passes into the front slot. Use this system release latch when you wish to remove the system from the slide assemblies. 6 Press the slide-release latch on the outside of each inner slide, then push the system into the rack. 7 Install the cable-management arm. See "Installing the Tray and Cable-Management Arm (Sliding Rail Kits Only)" on page 22. 8 Tighten the thumbscrews on the rack front panel to secure the slide assemblies to the rack.Four-Post Rack Installation 19 Figure 1-9. Installing a System With Sliding Rails 1 shoulder screws (6) 2 slide-release latch 3 J slots (6) 4 front release latch 5 inner slide rails (2) 1 2 4 3 520 Four-Post Rack Installation Installing a System With Static Rails To install the system on the rack, perform the following procedure: 1 From the front of the system, lift the chassis into position so that the chassis rail modules are aligned with the mounting rails on the rack. 2 Push the chassis back into the mounting rails until the system stops (see Figure 1-10). 3 Secure both thumbscrews on the front panel of the chassis. 4 Install the optional front bezel (if applicable). See the procedures for installing the bezel in the documentation provided with your system. Figure 1-10. Installing a System With Static Rails 1 mounting rails (2) 2 chassis rail modules (2) 3 thumbscrews (2) 4 release latches (2) 1 3 4 2Four-Post Rack Installation 21 5 Locate the releasable tie wrap attachment points located on the two back mounting-bracket flanges (see Figure 1-11). These tie wraps are used to secure the system’s cables to the mounting rails. Figure 1-11. Installing the Releasable Tie Wraps 6 Push the tie wrap’s fastener through the attachment point. 7 Push the tie wrap’s plunger until it snaps to secure the tie wrap to the mounting rail. 8 Using the releasable tie wrap, secure your system’s cables to the mounting rail. 1 mounting rails (2) 2 releasable tie wraps (2) 1 222 Four-Post Rack Installation Replacing the Rack Doors See the procedures for replacing doors in the documentation provided with your rack. CAUTION: Because of the size and weight of the rack cabinet doors, never attempt to remove or install them by yourself. Installing the Tray and Cable-Management Arm (Sliding Rail Kits Only) NOTE: This procedure does not apply to the static rail kit. Installing the Tray 1 At the back of the system, fit the ends of the tray between the ends of the mounting rails and slide the tray forward until it latches (see Figure 1-12). 2 In preparation for installing the cable-management arm, press the catch at the center of the cablemanagement arm retention latch and rotate the latch downward (see Figure 1-12). Figure 1-12. Installing the Tray 1 mounting rails (2) 2 tray 3 cable-management arm retention latch 1 3 back of system 2Four-Post Rack Installation 23 Installing the Cable-Management Arm NOTE: You can attach the cable-management arm to either the right or left mounting rail, depending on how you intend to route cables from the system. 1 If necessary, press the catch at the center of the cable-management arm retention latch on the tray, and rotate the latch downwards (see Figure 1-12). 2 At the back of the system, fit the latch on the front end of the cable-management arm onto the innermost bracket on the slide assembly, until the latch engages (see Figure 1-13). 3 Fit the latch on the unattached end of the cable-management arm onto the outermost bracket on the slide assembly, until the latch engages (see Figure 1-13). Figure 1-13. Installing the Cable-Management Arm 1 mounting rails (2) 2 brackets (2) 3 latches (2) 4 cable-management arm back of system 1 2 4 324 Four-Post Rack Installation Routing Cables 1 Open the wire cable basket lid on the top of the cable-management arm, to enable cables to be routed within the arms (see Figure 1-14). Figure 1-14. Routing Cables on the Cable-Management Arm 2 If applicable, connect the system status-indicator cable to its connector on the system back panel. Route the system status-indicator cable through the cable-management arm and insert the LED end into the slot on the end of the cable-management arm. 3 Attach the I/O cable connectors and power cable connectors to their respective connectors on the system back panel. For details on cable connections, see your system’s Getting Started Guide or Hardware Owner’s Manual. NOTE: Use the strain-relief loops on the back of the power supplies to provide strain relief for the power cables. 4 Using the tie-wraps provided in the rack kit, bundle the cables together so that they do not interfere with adjacent systems in the rack. 1 cable-management arm 2 preinstalled tie wraps 3 cable-management arm retention latch 4 basket lid 5 system status-indicator cable connector 6 Velcro strap 7 preinstalled tie wraps 4 5 2 3 6 back of system 1 7Four-Post Rack Installation 25 5 Route the cables through the cable-management arm baskets. 6 Adjust the cable slack as needed at the hinge position and secure the bundled cables with the vertical Velcro strap (see Figure 1-14). 7 Use the preinstalled tie wraps at the inner end and hinge point of the cable-management arm to secure the bundled cables in the cable-management arm channel (see Figure 1-14). 8 Close the cable basket lid. 9 Unscrew the thumbscrews that secure the front of the system to the front vertical rail. 10 Slide the system in and out of the rack to verify that the cables are routed correctly and do not bind, stretch, or interfere with the movement of the cable-management arm. Adjust the cable positioning inside the cable management arm as needed. NOTE: If you pull the system out to its furthest extension, the slide assemblies lock in the extended position. To release the lock, press the slide release latch on the side of the slide and then slide the system into the rack. 11 When you are satisfied that the cables are routed correctly, push the system fully into the rack. 12 Lift the cable-management arm retention latch on the tray to secure the arm (see Figure 1-14). Removing the System From the Rack Removing a System With Sliding Rails To remove the system from the rack, perform the following procedure: 1 Turn off the system and attached peripherals, and disconnect the system from the electrical outlet. 2 Remove the I/O cable connectors and power cable connectors from their respective connectors on the system back panel. 3 Loosen the thumbscrews on each side of the front chassis panel that secures the system to the rack. 4 Pull the system out of the rack until it locks with the rails in the extended position. 5 Pull up on the front release latch on each rail (see Figure 1-9) and slide the system forward. 6 Pull the system completely out of the rack. Removing a System With Static Rails To remove the system from the rack, perform the following procedure: 1 Turn off the system and attached peripherals, and disconnect the system from the electrical outlet. 2 Loosen the thumbscrews on each side of the front chassis panel that secures the system to the rack. 3 Disconnect all cables from the system. 4 Pull the system out of the rack until it stops because of the release latches. 5 Push down on the release latches on each side of the system (see Figure 1-10). 6 Pull the system completely out of the rack.26 Four-Post Rack InstallationTwo-Post Rack Installation 27 Two-Post Rack Installation The two-post rack kit is used to install a system in a two-post, open-frame relay rack, such as those found in telecommunications equipment facilities. Both 7.62-cm or 15.24-cm (3-inch and 6-inch) wide two-post racks with universal hole spacing or wide hole spacing are accommodated. You can install this kit in a center-mount or a flush-mount configuration. You must properly secure the two-post relay rack to the floor, the ceiling, or upper wall, and where applicable, to adjacent racks, using floor and wall fasteners and bracing specified or approved by the rack manufacturer or by industry standards. See the two-post rack manufacturer's documentation for warnings before attempting this installation. CAUTION: Do not attempt to install the system into a two-post, open-frame relay rack that has not been securely anchored in place. Damage to the system and personal injury to yourself and to others may result. Safety Instructions Use the following safety guidelines to ensure your own personal safety and to help protect your system and working environment from potential damage. For complete safety information, see the Product Information Guide. SAFETY: Rack Mounting of Systems Observe the following precautions for rack stability and safety. Also refer to the rack installation documentation accompanying the system and the rack for specific caution statements and procedures. Systems are considered to be components in a rack. Thus, "component" refers to any system as well as to various peripherals or supporting hardware. CAUTION: After installing system/components in a rack, never pull more than one component out of the rack on its slide assemblies at one time. The weight of more than one extended component could cause the rack to tip over and may result in serious injury. NOTE: Your system is safety-certified as a free-standing unit and as a component for use in a Dell rack cabinet using the customer rack kit. The installation of your system and rack kit in any other rack cabinet has not been approved by any safety agencies. It is your responsibility to ensure that the final combination of system and rack complies with all applicable safety standards and local electric code requirements. Dell disclaims all liability and warranties in connection with such combinations. 28 Two-Post Rack Installation • System rack kits are intended to be installed in a rack by trained service technicians. If you install the kit in any other rack, be sure that the rack meets the specifications of a Dell rack. CAUTION: Do not move racks by yourself. Due to the height and weight of the rack, a minimum of two people should accomplish this task. • Always load the rack from the bottom up, and load the heaviest item in the rack first. • Make sure that the rack is level and stable before extending a component from the rack. • Use caution when pressing the component rail release latches and sliding a component into or out of a rack; the slide rails can pinch your fingers. • Do not overload the AC supply branch circuit that provides power to the rack. The total rack load should not exceed 80 percent of the branch circuit rating. • Ensure that proper airflow is provided to components in the rack. • Do not step on or stand on any component when servicing other components in a rack. Before You Begin Before you begin installing your system in the rack, carefully read "Safety Instructions," found earlier in this guide, as well as the safety instructions found in your Product Information Guide for additional information. CAUTION: When installing multiple systems in a rack, complete all of the procedures for the current system before attempting to install the next system. NOTE: For instructions on installing the system itself, see ""Installing the System in the Rack" on page 37." Important Safety Information Observe the safety precautions in the following subsections when installing your system in the rack. CAUTION: You must strictly follow the procedures in this document to protect yourself as well as others who may be involved. Your system may be very large and heavy and proper preparation and planning are important to prevent injury to yourself and to others. This precaution becomes increasingly important when systems are installed high up in the rack. CAUTION: Do not install rack kit components designed for another system. Use only the rack kit for your system. Using the rack kit for another system may result in damage to the system and personal injury to yourself and to others. Recommended Tools and Supplies • #2 Phillips screwdriver • 3/8-inch wrench or nut driver (if changing bracket to flush-mount configuration) • Masking tape or felt-tip pen to mark the mounting holesTwo-Post Rack Installation 29 Rack Kit Contents The two-post rack kit includes (see Figure 2-1): • One pair of mounting rails • 12-24 x 0.5-inch pan-head Phillips screws (8) • Releasable tie wraps (2) (not shown in Figure 2-1) Figure 2-1. Two-Post Rack Kit Components 1 12-24 x 0.5-inch pan-head Phillips screws (8) 2 15.24-cm (6-inch) wide, center-mount, threaded studs 3 7.62-cm (3-inch) wide, centermount, threaded studs 4 adjustable mounting flange 5 center-mount mounting flange 6 15.24-cm (6-inch) wide, flushmount, threaded studs 7 7.62-cm (3-inch) wide, flushmount, threaded studs 8 flush-mount mounting flange 9 mounting rails (2) 9 1 7 8 6 5 3 2 430 Two-Post Rack Installation Installation Tasks Installing a two-post rack kit includes performing the following tasks in order: 1 Marking the rack • Universal-hole spacing rack • Wide-hole spacing rack 2 Installing the mounting rails in the rack • Center-mount installation • Flush-mount installation 3 Installing the system in the rack 4 Routing cables Marking the Rack You must allow 1 U (44 mm, or 1.75 inch) of vertical space for each system that you install in the two-post rack. Universal-Hole Spacing Racks Racks with universal-hole spacing have an alternating pattern of three holes per rack unit with center-tocenter hole spacing (beginning at the top hole of a 1-U space) of 15.9 mm, 15.9 mm, and 12.7 mm (0.625 inch, 0.625 inch, and 0.5 inch) for the front and back vertical column of holes (see Figure 2-2). Figure 2-2. Two-Post, Open-Frame Relay Rack Universal-Hole Spacing 12.7 mm (0.5 inch) 15.9 mm (0.625 inch) 15.9 mm (0.625 inch) 1 U (44 mm or 1.75 inches)Two-Post Rack Installation 31 Wide-Hole Spacing Racks Racks with wide-hole spacing have an alternating pattern of two holes per rack unit with center-to-center hole spacing (beginning at the top hole of a 1-U space) of 31.7 mm and 12.7 mm (1.25 inches and 0.5 inch) for the front and back vertical columns of holes (see Figure 2-3). Figure 2-3. Two-Post, Open-Frame Relay Rack Wide-Hole Spacing To mark the rack, perform the following steps: 1 Place a mark on the rack's front vertical rails where you want to locate the bottom of the system you are installing in the two-post rack. The bottom of each 1-U space is at the middle of the narrowest metal area between holes. NOTE: If your rack has wide-hole spacing, go to step 3. 2 Place a mark 44 mm (1.75 inches) above the original mark you made (or count up three holes in a rack with universal-hole spacing) (see Figure 2-2). Each 1 U (44 mm, or 1.75 inches) of vertical space on a rack with universal-hole spacing has three holes with center-to-center spacing between holes (beginning at the top of a 1-U space) of 15.9 mm, 15.9 mm, and 12.7 mm (0.625 inch, 0.625 inch, and 0.5 inch) (see Figure 2-2). NOTE: If your rack has universal-hole spacing, you have completed the procedure for marking the rack. 3 Place a mark 44 mm (1.75 inches) above the original mark you made (or count up to the next hole in the rack with wide-hole spacing (see Figure 2-3). Each 1 U (44 mm, or 1.75 inches) of vertical space on a rack with wide-hole spacing has two holes with center-to-center spacing between holes (beginning at the top of a 1-U space) of 31.7 mm (1.25 inches) (see Figure 2-3). 1 U (44 mm or 1.75 inches) 12.7 mm (0.5 inch) 31.7 mm (1.25 inches)32 Two-Post Rack Installation Installing the Mounting Rails You can install the mounting rails in a two-post, open-frame rack having either universal-hole spacing (see Figure 2-2) or wide-hole spacing (see Figure 2-3). You can install the mounting rails in either a flush-mount or center-mount configuration. CAUTION: Do not install another system using this rack kit. Use only the rack kit intended for your system. Using the rack kit for another system may result in damage to the system and personal injury to yourself and to others. Center-Mount Installation The two-post rack kit is shipped with the brackets configured for a 7.62-cm (3-inch) wide center-mount installation. See Figure 2-1 for mounting rail components. To complete the installation, perform the following steps: 1 Locate the right mounting rail and push the adjustable mounting bracket toward the back of the mounting rail (see Figure 2-4). 2 Position the right mounting rail in the two-post rack at the location you marked, push the centermount adjustable mounting bracket forward against the vertical two-post rack, and secure the mounting flange and adjustable mounting bracket to the rack with four 12-24 x 0.5-inch pan-head Phillips screws (see Figure 2-4). 3 Repeat step 1 and step 2 to install the left mounting rail in the rack.Two-Post Rack Installation 33 Figure 2-4. Installing the Mounting Rails for Center-Mount Configuration Flush-Mount Installation The two-post rack kit is shipped with the brackets configured for a 7.62-cm (3-inch) wide center-mount installation. See Figure 2-1 for mounting rail components. To prepare the mounting rails for flush-mount installation in the two-post rack, perform the following steps: 1 Locate the two mounting rails and place them side by side on a smooth work surface, with the front ends of the mounting rails toward you (see Figure 2-5). 2 Using a 3/8-inch wrench or nut driver, remove two nuts from the adjustable mounting bracket (see Figure 2-5). 1 two-post open-frame rack 2 12-24 x 0.5-inch pan-head Phillips screws (4 per rail) 3 center-mount mounting flange 2 mounting rails (2) 4 system rails (2) 6 release latch 2 1 4 6 3 534 Two-Post Rack Installation 3 Remove the bracket and then place the bracket on either the 7.62-cm or 15.24-cm (3-inch or 6-inch) wide flush-mount threaded studs (see Figure 2-5). 4 Using the two nuts that you removed in step 2, tighten the nuts finger tight to secure the adjustable mounting bracket (see Figure 2-5). 5 Repeat step 2 through step 4 to configure the other mounting rail. Figure 2-5. Configuring the Adjustable Mounting Bracket for Flush-Mount Installation 6 Holding the left mounting rail at the location you marked, position the flush-mount mounting flange against the front of the vertical two-post rack and secure it to the two-post rail with two 12-24 x 0.5-inch pan-head Phillips screws (see Figure 2-6). 1 nuts (2 per bracket) 2 adjustable mounting bracket 3 7.62-cm (3-inch) wide, flushmount, threaded studs 4 flush-mount mounting flange 1 4 3 2Two-Post Rack Installation 35 7 Slide the adjustable-mounting bracket so that it is against the back of vertical two-post rack and secure it to the two-post rail with two 12-24 x 0.5-inch pan-head Phillips screws (see Figure 2-6). 8 Repeat step 6 and step 7 to install the right mounting rail in the rack. 9 Using a 3/8-inch wrench or nut driver, tighten the nuts on the adjustable mounting brackets on both mounting rails. Figure 2-6. Installing the Mounting Rails for Flush-Mount Configuration 1 two-post open-frame rack 2 12-24 x 0.5-inch pan-head Phillips screws (4 per rail) 3 mounting rails (2) 2 1 336 Two-Post Rack Installation Installing Chassis Static Rail Modules NOTE: You do not need to remove the optional front bezel to install or remove the chassis static rail modules from the chassis. 1 To install a rail module, locate the three keyhole slots on the rail module and the corresponding shoulder screws on the side of the system (see Figure 2-7). 2 Place the rail module against the side of the system so that the shoulder screws fit through the round portion of the keyhole slots, then slide the module towards the back of the system. 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to install the other rail module. To remove a rail module from the chassis, pull up on the release latch, then slide the rail forward and remove the rail module from the chassis. Figure 2-7. Installing and Removing Static Rail Chassis Modules 1 keyhole slots (6) 2 shoulder screws (6) 3 release latch 4 rail modules (2) 5 system 4 2 3 1 5Two-Post Rack Installation 37 Installing the System in the Rack CAUTION: If you are installing more than one system, install the first system in the lowest available position in the rack. 1 Place one hand on the front-bottom of the system and the other hand on the back-bottom of the system. 2 Lift the system into position so that the side rails at the back of the system are aligned with the mounting rails in the rack. CAUTION: Because of the size and weight of the system, never attempt to install the system in the mounting rails by yourself. 3 Push the system into the mounting rails until the system stops. 4 Push in and turn the thumbscrews on each side of the front chassis panel to secure the system to the rack. Removing the System From the Rack To remove the system from the rack, perform the following procedure: 1 Turn off the system and attached peripherals, and disconnect the system from the electrical outlet. 2 Loosen the thumbscrews on each side of the front chassis panel that secures the system to the rack. 3 Disconnect all cables from the system. 4 Pull the system out of the rack until it stops because of the release latches. 5 Push down on the release latches on each side of the system (see Figure 1-10). 6 Pull the system completely out of the rack.38 Two-Post Rack InstallationIndex 39 Index C cable routing, 24 cable tray, installing, 22 cable-management arm installing, 22 routing cables, 25 cables, 25 center-mount configuration, 32 contents listed two-post rack kit, 29 VersaRails kit, 8-9 D doors removing, 10 replacing, 22 F flush-mount configuration, 33 four-post rack removing system, 25, 37 four-post rack kit tools and supplies, 7 VersaRails kit contents, 8-9 I installing cable tray, 22 cable-management arm, 22 four-post rack kit, 15 RapidRails mounting rails, 15 static rail modules, 14, 36 system in four-post rack, 18, 37 two-post rack kit, 27 two-post rack mounting rails, 32-33 VersaRails mounting rails, 14, 17, 19, 36 K kit contents two-post rack, 29 VersaRails, 8-9, 21 M marking rack four-post rack kit, 10 two-post rack kit, 30-31 R rack mount precautions, 6, 28 rack requirements for VersaRails, 7 rack stabilizer feet, 7 rack unit, 11 removing system four-post rack, 25, 37 replacing rack doors, 22 routing cables, 24 S safety instructions, 5, 27 stabilizer feet, 7 T tools and supplies four-post rack kit, 7 two-post rack kit, 28 two-post rack kit installing mounting rails, 32 kit contents, 29 marking rack, 30 tools and supplies, 28 V VersaRails installing, 14, 17, 19, 36 kit contents, 8-9, 21 vertical rails marking, 10 one rack unit, 1140 Index 40 Indexwww.dell.com | support.dell.com Guide d'installation du rackRemarques, avis et précautions REMARQUE : une REMARQUE indique des informations importantes qui peuvent vous aider à mieux utiliser votre ordinateur. AVIS : un AVIS vous avertit d'un risque de dommage matériel ou de perte de données et vous indique comment éviter le problème. PRÉCAUTION : une PRÉCAUTION indique un risque potentiel d'endommagement du matériel, de blessure corporelle ou de mort. ____________________ Les informations contenues dans ce document peuvent être modifiées sans préavis. © 2005 Dell Inc. Tous droits réservés. La reproduction de ce document de quelque manière que ce soit sans l'autorisation écrite de Dell Inc. est strictement interdite. Marques utilisées dans ce document : Dell, le logo DELL, RapidRails et VersaRails sont des marques de Dell Inc. Tous les autres noms de marques et marques commerciales utilisés dans ce document se rapportent aux sociétés propriétaires des marques et des noms de ces produits. Dell Inc. décline tout intérêt dans l'utilisation des marques déposées et des noms de marques ne lui appartenant pas. Novembre 2005 P/N YC588 Rev. A00Sommaire 43 Sommaire 1 Installation dans un rack à quatre montants. . . . . . . . . . . 45 Consignes de sécurité . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 SÉCURITÉ : Montage en rack des systèmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Consignes générales d'installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Avant de commencer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Informations importantes concernant la sécurité . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Spécifications de rack requises pour les rails VersaRails . . . . . . . . . 47 Pieds stabilisateurs du rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Outils et fournitures recommandés. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Contenu du kit pour rack avec rails coulissants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Contenu du kit pour rack avec rails statiques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Tâches d'installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Retrait des portes du rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Marquage du rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Configuration des assemblages à glissière (kits avec rails coulissants uniquement) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Installation des modules de rails statiques pour le châssis (kits avec rails statiques uniquement) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Installation des rails de montage dans le rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Installation du système dans l'armoire rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Installation d'un système avec des rails coulissants. . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Installation d'un système avec des rails statiques . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Remise en place des portes du rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Installation du chemin de câbles et du passe-câbles (kits avec rails coulissants uniquement) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Installation du chemin de câbles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Installation du passe-câbles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Acheminement des câbles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Retrait du système de l'armoire rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Retrait d'un système avec rails coulissants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Retrait d'un système avec rails statiques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6644 Sommaire 2 Installation dans un rack à deux montants . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Consignes de sécurité . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 SÉCURITÉ : Montage en rack des systèmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Avant de commencer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Informations importantes concernant la sécurité . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Outils et fournitures recommandés. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Contenu du kit de rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Tâches d'installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Marquage du rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Rack doté de trous à espacement universel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Rack doté de trous à espacement large . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Installation des rails de montage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Montage central . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Montage encastré . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Installation des modules de rails statiques pour le châssis . . . . . . . . . . 76 Installation du système dans l'armoire rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Retrait du système de l'armoire rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79Installation dans un rack à quatre montants 45 Installation dans un rack à quatre montants Consignes de sécurité Respectez les consignes de sécurité de ce guide pour assurer votre sécurité personnelle et pour contribuer à protéger votre système et votre environnement de travail de dommages potentiels. Pour obtenir toutes les informations concernant la sécurité et les réglementations, consultez le Guide d'informationssur le produit fourni avec le système. Vous pouvez trouver des informations sur la garantie soit dans ce document, soit dans un document à part. SÉCURITÉ : Montage en rack des systèmes Pour la stabilité du rack et pour votre sécurité, respectez les précautions suivantes. Reportez-vous également à la documentation accompagnant le système et le rack pour connaître les mises en garde et les procédures spécifiques. Les systèmes sont considérés comme étant les composants d'un rack. Le terme “composant” fait donc référence à un système mais aussi aux différents périphériques ou matériels associés. PRÉCAUTION : avant d'installer des systèmes dans un rack autonome, installez d'abord les pieds stabilisateurs avant et latéraux. Pour plusieurs racks associés, installez d'abord les pieds stabilisateurs avant. L'installation de systèmes dans un rack non équipé de pieds stabilisateurs peut provoquer son basculement et entraîner des blessures. Installez toujours les pieds stabilisateurs du rack avant d'ajouter des composants dans celui-ci. Après avoir installé un système ou des composants dans un rack, ne faites jamais coulisser hors du rack plus d'un composant à la fois. Le poids de plusieurs composants sortis du rack risquerait de le faire basculer et de blesser quelqu'un gravement. REMARQUE : le système est certifié sur le plan de la sécurité en tant qu'unité autonome et en tant que composant destiné à être utilisé dans une armoire rack Dell, à l'aide du kit de rack client. L'installation du système et du kit d'installation en rack dans une autre armoire n'a reçu aucune homologation des organismes de certification de la sécurité. Il vous incombe de veiller à ce que la combinaison finale système et rack soit conforme à toutes les normes de sécurité en vigueur, ainsi qu'aux normes électriques locales. Dell décline toute responsabilité et toutes garanties liées à ce type de combinaisons. • Les kits de rack doivent être installés par des techniciens de maintenance qualifiés. Si vous installez ce kit dans un autre rack, assurez-vous que ce dernier possède les mêmes spécifications qu'un rack Dell. PRÉCAUTION : ne déplacez pas de rack sans aide. En raison de la hauteur et du poids du rack, cette tâche doit être réalisée par deux personnes au minimum.46 Installation dans un rack à quatre montants • Avant de travailler sur le rack, vérifiez que les pieds stabilisateurs sont fixés au rack, qu'ils touchent le sol et que tout le poids du rack repose sur le sol. Avant d'intervenir sur un rack isolé, installez d'abord les pieds stabilisateurs avant et latéraux. Pour plusieurs racks associés, installez d'abord les pieds stabilisateurs avant. • Chargez le rack du bas vers le haut, en plaçant toujours l'élément le plus lourd en premier. • Assurez-vous que le rack est d'aplomb et stable avant de tirer un composant hors de son compartiment. • Agissez avec précaution lorsque vous appuyez sur les loquets de dégagement des rails pour insérer ou retirer un composant. Veillez notamment à ne pas coincer vos doigts dans les rails coulissants. • Ne surchargez pas le circuit d'alimentation secteur du rack. La consommation totale du rack ne doit pas dépasser 80 % de la capacité du circuit. • Assurez-vous que les éléments installés dans le rack sont suffisamment ventilés. • Ne montez pas sur un composant lorsque vous intervenez sur d'autres composants du rack. Consignes générales d'installation Ce guide d'installation s'adresse à des techniciens de maintenance qualifiés. Il contient les instructions relatives à l'installation d'un ou de plusieurs systèmes dans une armoire rack. Le kit RapidRails™ peut être installé sans outils dans toutes les armoires rack du fabricant du système ; le kit VersaRails™ peut être installé dans la plupart des armoires rack standard. La procédure d'installation des kits RapidRails et VersaRails est similaire. Un kit d'installation est nécessaire pour chaque système. Cette section contient les procédures d'installation des kits suivants pour racks à quatre montants : • Kit pour rack avec rails coulissants • Kit pour rack avec rails statiques (versions RapidRails et VersaRails) Voir “Installation dans un rack à deux montants”, à la page 67 pour obtenir les instructions d'installation d'un kit de rails statiques dans un rack à deux montants. Avant de commencer Avant de commencer à installer le système dans le rack, lisez attentivement la section “Consignes de sécurité”, ainsi que les consignes de sécurité figurant dans le Guide d'informations sur le produit pour plus d'informations. PRÉCAUTION : si vous installez plusieurs systèmes dans un rack, terminez toutes les opérations requises sur le système en cours d'installation avant de passer au suivant. PRÉCAUTION : les racks peuvent être extrêmement lourds, mais se déplacent assez facilement sur leurs roulettes. Cependant, les armoires ne possèdent pas de système de freinage. Procédez avec la plus grande prudence pour déplacer une armoire rack. Rentrez ses pieds réglables lorsque vous la changez d'emplacement. Évitez de déplacer le rack le long de rampes ou de plans inclinés trop longs ou trop abrupts, sur lesquels l'armoire pourrait vous échapper. Ressortez les pieds réglables lorsque l'armoire doit être soutenue ou pour lui éviter de glisser sur ses roulettes. REMARQUE : pour plus d'informations sur l'installation du système proprement dit, voir “Installation du système dans l'armoire rack”, à la page 58.Installation dans un rack à quatre montants 47 Informations importantes concernant la sécurité Respectez les précautions décrites dans les sous-sections suivantes lors de l'installation du système dans le rack. PRÉCAUTION : vous devez respecter à la lettre les procédures de ce document afin de garantir votre propre protection ainsi que celle d'autrui. Le système peut être très lourd et volumineux. Une préparation et une planification adéquates sont donc importantes afin d'éviter tout risque de blessure pour vous-même ou autrui. Ces précautions sont d'autant plus importantes lorsque les systèmes sont installés en hauteur. PRÉCAUTION : n'installez pas de kits prévus pour un autre système. Sinon, vous risquez d'endommager le système et de vous blesser ou de blesser une autre personne. Spécifications de rack requises pour les rails VersaRails AVIS : le kit VersaRails est prévu pour être installé par des techniciens de maintenance qualifiés dans un rack conforme aux spécifications des organismes suivants : American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/Electronic Industries Association (EIA) standard ANSI/EIA-310-D-92, International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) 297 et Deutsche Industrie Norm (DIN) 41494. Un kit est nécessaire pour chaque système installé dans un rack. Pieds stabilisateurs du rack PRÉCAUTION : avant d'installer des systèmes dans un rack autonome, installez d'abord les pieds stabilisateurs avant et latéraux. Pour plusieurs racks associés, installez d'abord les pieds stabilisateurs avant. L'installation de systèmes dans un rack non équipé de pieds stabilisateurs peut provoquer son basculement et entraîner des blessures. Installez toujours les pieds stabilisateurs du rack avant d'ajouter des composants dans celui-ci. Les pieds stabilisateurs évitent au rack de basculer. Consultez la documentation fournie avec l'armoire rack pour savoir comment installer et fixer les pieds stabilisateurs. Outils et fournitures recommandés Les outils et fournitures suivants peuvent être nécessaires pour installer le système dans un rack à quatre montants : • Tournevis cruciforme n°2 • Une bande adhésive ou un stylo feutre, pour marquer les trous de montage à utiliser Contenu du kit pour rack avec rails coulissants • Une paire d'assemblages à glissière (convertible en configuration RapidRails ou VersaRails) • Un passe-câbles • Un chemin de câbles • Un câble de voyant d'état (le cas échéant) • Des fixe-câbles pour attacher les cordons sur le passe-câbles • Huit vis cruciformes à tête plate 10-32 x 0,5 pouce (utilisées dans la configuration VersaRails uniquement) REMARQUE : les vis au pas non métrique décrites dans les illustrations et dans les procédures sont identifiées par la taille et le nombre de filets par pouce. Par exemple, une vis à tête cruciforme n° 10 avec 32 filets par pouce est désignée par l'appellation vis 10-32.48 Installation dans un rack à quatre montants Figure 1-1. Contenu du kit pour rack avec rails coulissants 1 Chemin de câbles 2 Assemblages à glissière (2) 3 Vis cruciformes à tête plate 10-32 x 0,5 pouce (8) (configuration VersaRails uniquement) 4 Fixe-câbles 5 Câble du voyant d'état (le cas échéant) 6 Passe-câbles 1 2 3 5 6 4Installation dans un rack à quatre montants 49 Contenu du kit pour rack avec rails statiques • Une paire de rails de montage statiques avec supports VersaRails ou RapidRails • Une paire de modules de rails statiques pour le châssis • Huit vis cruciformes à tête plate 10-32 x 0,5 pouce (kits VersaRails uniquement) • Fixe-câbles détachables (2) (non représentés figure 1-2) REMARQUE : les vis au pas non métrique décrites dans les illustrations et dans les procédures sont identifiées par la taille et le nombre de filets par pouce. Par exemple, une vis à tête cruciforme n° 10 avec 32 filets par pouce est désignée par l'appellation vis 10-32. Figure 1-2. Contenu du kit pour rack avec rails statiques 1 Vis cruciformes à tête plate 10-32 x 0,5 pouce (8) (kits VersaRails uniquement) 2 Rails de montage statiques (2) 3 Modules de rails statiques pour le châssis (2) FRONT L 1 3 250 Installation dans un rack à quatre montants Tâches d'installation Pour installer un kit, vous devez effectuer dans l'ordre indiqué les tâches suivantes, décrites plus loin dans ce guide : 1 Retrait des portes du rack 2 Marquage du rack 3 Configuration des assemblages de rails coulissants (kits avec rails coulissants uniquement) 4 Installation des modules de rails statiques pour le châssis (kits avec rails statiques uniquement) 5 Installation des rails de montage dans le rack 6 Installation du système dans l'armoire rack 7 Installation du chemin de câbles et du passe-câbles (kits avec rails coulissants uniquement) 8 Acheminement des câbles 9 Remise en place des portes du rack Retrait des portes du rack Consultez les procédures de retrait des portes dans la documentation fournie avec votre armoire rack. PRÉCAUTION : compte tenu de leur poids et de leur taille, ne retirez ou n'installez jamais les portes sans l'assistance d'une autre personne. PRÉCAUTION : placez les deux portes dans un endroit sûr où elles ne risquent pas de tomber accidentellement et de blesser quelqu'un. Marquage du rack Pour un système de 1 U, vous devez compter un espace vertical de 44 mm (soit 1,75 pouces) pour chaque système installé dans le rack. Les racks conformes aux normes EIA-310 comportent des séries alternées de trois trous par unité. L'espacement entre les trous, mesuré de centre à centre (en commençant par le trou supérieur) est respectivement de 15,9 mm, 15,9 mm et 12,7 mm (0,625 pouce, 0,625 pouce et 0,5 pouce) pour les rails verticaux avant et arrière (voir la figure 1-3). Les armoires rack peuvent comporter des trous ronds ou carrés. REMARQUE : les rails verticaux peuvent être marqués par des lignes horizontales et des chiffres progressant par incréments de 1 U. Si vous le souhaitez, vous pouvez noter le numéro figurant sur le rail vertical du rack. Dans ce cas, il n'est pas nécessaire de marquer le rack ou d'y apposer un morceau de bande adhésive. Installation dans un rack à quatre montants 51 Figure 1-3. Unité de rack PRÉCAUTION : si vous installez plusieurs systèmes, placez les rails de montage de façon que le premier système soit disposé le plus bas possible dans le rack. Pour marquer le rack, procédez comme suit : 1 Placez une marque (ou de la bande adhésive) sur les rails verticaux avant du rack, à l'endroit correspondant au bas du système à installer. Le bas de chaque espace de 1 U se trouve au milieu de la zone métallique la plus étroite entre les trous (repérée par une ligne horizontale sur certaines armoires rack ; voir la figure 1-4). 2 Placez une marque à environ 44 mm (1,75 pouces) au-dessus de la marque que vous avez faite au départ (ou remontez de 3 trous dans les racks de type EIA-310), puis marquez les rails verticaux du rack avec un stylo feutre ou de la bande adhésive (si vous avez compté les trous, placez une marque juste au-dessus du trou supérieur). Cette marque ou ce morceau de bande adhésive indique l'emplacement du rebord supérieur du système sur les rails verticaux (voir la figure 1-4). 1 U (44 mm ou 1,75 pouces) 12,7 mm (0,5 pouce) 15,9 mm (0,625 pouce) 15,9 mm (0,625 pouce) 12,7 mm (0,5 pouce)52 Installation dans un rack à quatre montants Figure 1-4. Marquage des rails verticaux 1 Marques sur le rail vertical (2) 1Installation dans un rack à quatre montants 53 Configuration des assemblages à glissière (kits avec rails coulissants uniquement) Les rails coulissants disposent d'un support de montage rotatif situé à chacune de leurs extrémités. La position de ce support détermine si le rail est utilisé en configuration RapidRails ou VersaRails. Le côté RapidRails du support est équipé d'un crochet et d'un loquet qui le fixe au rail vertical. Le côté VersaRails du support comporte trois trous. Le support est alors fixé au rail vertical par des vis. REMARQUE : les assemblages à glissière fournies avec le kit sont configurées en RapidRails. Pour faire pivoter le support de montage et passer en configuration VersaRails (voir la figure 1-5), procédez comme suit : 1 Relevez le levier d'éjection du support de montage rotatif. 2 Faites pivoter le support puis faites-le glisser vers le haut pour le dégager des deux picots. 3 Continuez de faire pivoter le support à 180 degrés jusqu'à ce que les picots s'insèrent dans les encoches. 4 Faites pivoter le support dans la direction opposée pour l'emboîter dans les picots. Figure 1-5. Changement de la position du support de montage rotatif 1 Support rotatif 2 Levier d'éjection 3 Picots (2) 4 Encoches (2) 5 Collerette du support de montage (configuration RapidRails) 1 2 4 3 554 Installation dans un rack à quatre montants Installation des modules de rails statiques pour le châssis (kits avec rails statiques uniquement) REMARQUE : il n'est pas nécessaire de retirer le cadre avant fourni en option pour installer ou retirer les modules de rails statiques du châssis. 1 Pour installer un module de rails, repérez les trois orifices en trou de serrure sur le module, ainsi que les vis à épaulement correspondantes sur le côté du système (voir la figure 1-6). 2 Placez le module de rail contre le côté du système de façon que les vis à épaulement s'emboîtent dans la partie ronde des trous de serrure. Faites ensuite glisser le module vers l'arrière du système. 3 Recommencez les étapes 1 et 2 pour installer l'autre module de rail. Pour retirer un module de rail du châssis, relevez le loquet de dégagement et tirez le rail vers l'avant. Figure 1-6. Installation et retrait des modules de rails statiques pour le châssis 1 Orifices en trou de serrure (6) 2 Vis à épaulement (6) 3 Loquet de dégagement 4 Modules de rails (2) 5 Système 4 2 3 1 5Installation dans un rack à quatre montants 55 Installation des rails de montage dans le rack REMARQUE : les instructions suivantes s'appliquent à la fois aux rails de montage statiques et aux rails coulissants. Installation des rails de montage RapidRails 1 À l'avant du rack, positionnez l'un des rails de façon que la collerette du support de montage s'insère entre les marques, les morceaux de bande adhésive ou les emplacements numérotés sur les rails verticaux (section Marquage du rack). Voir la figure 1-7. Le crochet de fixation supérieur de la collerette avant du support de montage doit pénétrer dans le trou supérieur, situé entre les marques faites sur les rails verticaux. Figure 1-7. Installation des rails de montage RapidRails 1 Crochets de fixation (2) 2 Boutons-poussoirs (2) 3 Rails de montage (2) Avant du rack 1 2 356 Installation dans un rack à quatre montants 2 Poussez le rail vers l'avant jusqu'à ce que le crochet de fixation soit positionné dans le trou carré, puis appuyez sur la collerette du support de montage jusqu'à ce que le crochet se mette en place et que le bouton-poussoir ressorte dans le trou carré inférieur (voir la figure 1-7). 3 À l'arrière de l'armoire, tirez la collerette du support de montage vers l'arrière jusqu'à ce que le crochet soit positionné dans le trou carré du haut, puis appuyez sur la collerette jusqu'à ce que le crochet se mette en place et que le bouton-poussoir ressorte dans le trou carré inférieur. 4 Recommencez la procédure, de l'étape 1 à l'étape 3, pour le rail de montage situé de l'autre côté du rack. 5 Vérifiez que les rails de montage sont montés à la même position verticale de chaque côté du rack. Installation des rails de montage VersaRails 1 À l'avant du rack, positionnez l'un des rails de façon que la collerette du support de montage s'insère entre les marques, les morceaux de bande adhésive ou les emplacements numérotés sur les rails verticaux (section Marquage du rack). Voir la figure 1-8. Les trois trous situés à l'avant de la collerette du support de montage doivent s'aligner avec ceux qui se trouvent entre les marques que vous avez faites sur le rail vertical avant. 2 Insérez deux vis cruciformes 10-32 x 0,5 pouce dans les trous supérieur et inférieur de la collerette du support de montage pour fixer le rail de montage sur le rail vertical avant. 3 À l'arrière de l'armoire, tirez sur la collerette du support de montage jusqu'à ce que les trous de montage s'alignent avec les trous correspondants du rail vertical arrière. 4 Insérez deux vis cruciformes 10-32 x 0,5 pouce dans les trous supérieur et inférieur de la collerette du support de montage pour fixer le rail de montage sur le rail vertical arrière. 5 Recommencez la procédure de l'étape 1 à l'étape 4, pour le rail de montage situé de l'autre côté du rack. 6 Vérifiez que les rails sont montés à la même hauteur sur les rails verticaux de chaque côté du rack.Installation dans un rack à quatre montants 57 Figure 1-8. Installation des rails de montage VersaRails 1 Collerette du support de montage 2 Vis cruciformes à tête plate 10-32 x 0,5 pouce (4 par rail de montage) 3 Rails de montage (2) Avant du rack 1 2 358 Installation dans un rack à quatre montants Installation du système dans l'armoire rack PRÉCAUTION : si vous installez plusieurs systèmes, installez le premier le plus bas possible dans le rack. PRÉCAUTION : en raison de la taille et du poids du système, ne tentez jamais de l'installer seul dans les rails de montage. Installation d'un système avec des rails coulissants 1 Tirez les deux rails coulissants intérieurs hors du rack jusqu'à ce qu'ils bloquent sur la butée (voir la figure 1-9). 2 Soulevez le système pour le placer au dessus des rails coulissants. Les trois vis à épaulement situées de chaque côté du système s'emboîtent dans les fentes en forme de J qui se trouvent sur les assemblages à glissière internes (voir la figure 1-9). 3 Inclinez le système vers l'arrière tout en alignant les vis à épaulement arrière situées sur les côtés du système avec les fentes en J situées à l'arrière des assemblages à glissière. 4 Emboîtez les vis à épaulement arrière dans les fentes correspondantes. 5 Abaissez l'avant du système jusqu'à ce que les vis à épaulement avant et centrale s'emboîtent dans les fentes en J. Le loquet de dégagement du système situé à l'avant du rail coulissant intérieur s'enclenche lorsque la vis à épaulement s'insère dans la fente avant. Utilisez ce loquet pour retirer le système des assemblages à glissière. 6 Appuyez sur le loquet de dégagement situé à l'extérieur de chaque rail coulissant interne, puis poussez le système dans le rack. 7 Installez le passe-câbles. Voir “Installation du chemin de câbles et du passe-câbles (kits avec rails coulissants uniquement)”, à la page 62. 8 Serrez les vis moletées sur le panneau avant du rack pour fixer les assemblages à glissière sur le rack.Installation dans un rack à quatre montants 59 Figure 1-9. Installation d'un système avec des rails coulissants Installation d'un système avec des rails statiques Pour installer le système dans le rack, procédez comme suit : 1 À l'avant du système, soulevez le châssis et positionnez-le de façon que les modules de rail du châssis soient alignés avec les rails de montage du rack. 2 Poussez le châssis dans les rails de montage jusqu'à la butée (voir la figure 1-10). 3 Serrez les deux vis moletées situées sur le panneau avant du châssis. 4 Installez le cadre avant (facultatif). Vous trouverez les instructions correspondantes dans la documentation fournie avec le système. 1 Vis à épaulement (6) 2 Loquet de dégagement du rail 3 Emplacements en forme de J (6) 4 Loquet de dégagement frontal 5 Rails intérieurs (2) 1 2 4 3 560 Installation dans un rack à quatre montants Figure 1-10. Installation d'un système avec des rails statiques 5 Repérez les points d'attache des fixe-câbles situés sur les deux collerettes des supports de montage arrière (voir la figure 1-11). Ces fixe-câbles sont utilisés pour fixer les cordons du système sur les rails de montage. 1 Rails de montage (2) 2 Modules de rails du châssis (2) 3 Vis moletées (2) 4 Loquets de dégagement (2) 1 3 4 2Installation dans un rack à quatre montants 61 Figure 1-11. Installation des fixe-câbles détachables 6 Faites passer le plot du fixe-câbles dans le point d'attache. 7 Enfoncez le plot de manière à emboîter le fixe-câbles dans le rail de montage. 8 Utilisez le fixe-câbles pour fixer les cordons du système sur le rail de montage. 1 Rails de montage (2) 2 Fixe-câbles détachables (2) 1 262 Installation dans un rack à quatre montants Remise en place des portes du rack Consultez les procédures de réinstallation des portes dans la documentation fournie avec vos armoires rack. PRÉCAUTION : compte tenu de leur poids et de leur taille, ne retirez ou n'installez jamais les portes sans l'assistance d'une autre personne. Installation du chemin de câbles et du passe-câbles (kits avec rails coulissants uniquement) REMARQUE : cette procédure ne s'applique pas au kit de rails statiques. Installation du chemin de câbles 1 À l'arrière du système, placez le chemin de câbles entre les rails de montage et poussez-le jusqu'à ce qu'il se mette en place (voir la figure 1-12). 2 Pour préparer l'installation du passe-câbles, ouvrez le loquet de fixation en appuyant sur le cliquet central (voir la figure 1-12). Figure 1-12. Installation du chemin de câbles 1 Rails de montage (2) 2 Chemin de câbles 3 Loquet de fixation du passe-câbles 1 3 Arrière du système 2Installation dans un rack à quatre montants 63 Installation du passe-câbles REMARQUE : vous pouvez placer le passe-câbles sur le rail de montage gauche ou droit, selon la façon dont vous souhaitez disposer les câbles du système. 1 Si nécessaire, ouvrez le loquet de fixation du passe-câbles en appuyant sur le cliquet central (voir la figure 1-12). 2 À l'arrière du système, emboîtez le loquet situé à l'avant du passe-câbles sur le support interne de l'assemblage à glissière (voir la figure 1-13). 3 Emboîtez l'autre loquet du passe-câbles sur le support externe de l'assemblage à glissière (voir la figure 1-13). Figure 1-13. Installation du passe-câbles 1 Rails de montage (2) 2 Supports (2) 3 Loquets (2) 4 Passe-câbles Arrière du système 1 2 4 364 Installation dans un rack à quatre montants Acheminement des câbles 1 Ouvrez le conduit situé en haut du passe-câbles pour permettre le passage des câbles (voir la figure 1-14). Figure 1-14. Acheminement des câbles dans le passe-câbles 2 Le cas échéant, connectez le câble du voyant d'état dans le connecteur approprié, sur le panneau arrière du système. Faites passer ce câble dans le passe-câbles et emboîtez l'extrémité dotée du voyant dans l'emplacement situé à l'extrémité du passe-câbles. 3 Branchez les câbles d'E/S et les cordons d'alimentation sur les connecteurs correspondants, à l'arrière du système. Pour plus de détails sur le branchement des câbles, consultez le Guide de mise en route ou le Manuel du propriétaire. REMARQUE : pour éviter une tension excessive des câbles d'alimentation, faites-les passer dans les boucles situées à l'arrière des blocs d'alimentation. 4 Utilisez les fixe-câbles fournis pour regrouper les câbles et les dégager des systèmes adjacents installés dans le rack. 1 Passe-câbles 2 Fixe-câbles préinstallés 3 Loquet de fixation du passe-câbles 4 Couvercle du conduit de câbles 5 Connecteur du câble du voyant d'état du système 6 Bande Velcro 7 Fixe-câbles préinstallés 4 5 2 3 6 Arrière du système 1 7Installation dans un rack à quatre montants 65 5 Disposez les câbles dans les conduits du passe-câbles. 6 Réglez la tension des câbles autour de la charnière et fixez-les à l'aide de la bande Velcro verticale (voir la figure 1-14). 7 Utilisez les fixe-câbles préinstallés à l'extrémité interne du passe-câbles et à l'emplacement de la charnière pour maintenir les câbles (voir la figure 1-14). 8 Refermez le conduit de câbles. 9 Desserrez les vis moletées fixant l'avant du système au rail vertical avant. 10 Poussez le système dans le rack puis ressortez-le, pour vérifier que les câbles sont installés correctement et ne se bloquent pas, ne se tendent pas et ne se coincent pas lors du déplacement du passe-câbles. Si nécessaire, repositionnez les câbles dans le passe-câbles. REMARQUE : si vous tirez le système au maximum, les assemblages à glissière se verrouillent dans cette position. Pour les déverrouiller, appuyez sur le loquet de dégagement situé sur le côté de la glissière, puis faites coulisser le système dans le rack. 11 Une fois les câbles correctement positionnés, enfoncez le système dans le rack. 12 Refermez le loquet de fixation du passe-câbles (voir la figure 1-14). Retrait du système de l'armoire rack Retrait d'un système avec rails coulissants Pour retirer le système du rack, procédez comme suit : 1 Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez-le de la prise de courant. 2 Débranchez les câbles d'E-S et les cordons d'alimentation des connecteurs correspondants, à l'arrière du système. 3 Desserrez les vis moletées situées de chaque côté du panneau avant du châssis (qui fixe le système au rack). 4 Tirez le système hors du rack jusqu'à ce qu'il bloque sur la butée. 5 Soulevez le loquet de dégagement avant de chaque rail (voir la figure 1-9), puis tirez le système vers l'avant. 6 Retirez complètement le système du rack.66 Installation dans un rack à quatre montants Retrait d'un système avec rails statiques Pour retirer le système du rack, procédez comme suit : 1 Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez-le de la prise de courant. 2 Desserrez les vis moletées situées de chaque côté du panneau avant du châssis (qui fixe le système au rack). 3 Déconnectez tous les câbles du système. 4 Tirez le système hors du rack jusqu'à ce qu'il soit arrêté par la butée de sécurité. 5 Appuyez sur les loquets de dégagement, de chaque côté du système (voir la figure 1-10). 6 Retirez complètement le système du rack.Installation dans un rack à deux montants 67 Installation dans un rack à deux montants Le kit pour rack à deux montants permet d'installer un système dans un rack à châssis ouvert tel que ceux qui sont utilisés dans les équipements de télécommunications. Des racks à deux montants d'une largeur de 7,62 cm ou 15,24 cm (soit 3 et 6 pouces) avec un espacement des trous universel ou large peuvent être utilisés. Vous pouvez installer ce kit dans une configuration à montage central ou encastré. Le rack à deux montants doit être fixé au sol, au plafond ou en haut d'un mur et si nécessaire, aux racks adjacents à l'aide d'attaches murales ou de dispositifs de fixation au sol et de calage indiqués ou approuvés par le fabricant du rack ou conformes aux normes industrielles. Lisez attentivement les avertissements et consignes figurant dans la documentation du rack avant de commencer l'installation. PRÉCAUTION : ne tentez pas d'installer le système dans un rack à châssis ouvert si celui-ci n'est pas fixé. Vous risqueriez d'endommager le système et de vous blesser au de blesser d'autres personnes. Consignes de sécurité Respectez les consignes de sécurité de ce guide pour assurer votre sécurité personnelle et pour contribuer à protéger votre système et votre environnement de travail de dommages potentiels. Pour obtenir des informations complètes sur la sécurité, reportez-vous au Guide d'informations sur le produit. SÉCURITÉ : Montage en rack des systèmes Pour la stabilité du rack et pour votre sécurité, respectez les précautions suivantes. Reportez-vous également à la documentation accompagnant le système et le rack pour connaître les mises en garde et les procédures spécifiques. Les systèmes sont considérés comme étant les composants d'un rack. Le terme “composant” fait donc référence à un système mais aussi aux différents périphériques ou matériels associés. PRÉCAUTION : après avoir installé le système/les composants dans un rack, ne sortez jamais plusieurs composants à la fois à l'aide des assemblages à glissière. Le poids de plusieurs composants sortis du rack risquerait de le faire basculer et de blesser quelqu'un gravement. REMARQUE : le système est certifié sur le plan de la sécurité en tant qu'unité autonome et en tant que composant destiné à être utilisé dans une armoire rack Dell, à l'aide du kit de rack client. L'installation du système et du kit d'installation en rack dans une autre armoire n'a reçu aucune homologation des organismes de certification de la sécurité. Il vous incombe de veiller à ce que la combinaison finale système et rack soit conforme à toutes les normes de sécurité en vigueur, ainsi qu'aux normes électriques locales. Dell décline toute responsabilité et toutes garanties liées à ce type de combinaisons. 68 Installation dans un rack à deux montants • Les kits de rack doivent être installés par des techniciens de maintenance qualifiés. Si vous installez ce kit dans un autre rack, assurez-vous que ce dernier possède les mêmes spécifications qu'un rack Dell. PRÉCAUTION : ne déplacez pas de rack sans aide. En raison de la hauteur et du poids du rack, cette tâche doit être réalisée par deux personnes au minimum. • Chargez le rack du bas vers le haut, en plaçant toujours l'élément le plus lourd en premier. • Assurez-vous que le rack est d'aplomb et stable avant de tirer un composant hors de son compartiment. • Agissez avec précaution lorsque vous appuyez sur les loquets de dégagement des rails pour insérer ou retirer un composant. Veillez notamment à ne pas coincer vos doigts dans les rails coulissants. • Ne surchargez pas le circuit d'alimentation secteur du rack. La consommation totale du rack ne doit pas dépasser 80 % de la capacité du circuit. • Assurez-vous que les éléments installés dans le rack sont suffisamment ventilés. • Ne montez pas sur un composant lorsque vous intervenez sur d'autres composants du rack. Avant de commencer Avant de commencer à installer le système dans le rack, lisez attentivement la section “Consignes de sécurité”, ainsi que les consignes de sécurité figurant dans le Guide d'informations sur le produit pour plus d'informations. PRÉCAUTION : si vous installez plusieurs systèmes dans un rack, terminez toutes les opérations requises sur le système en cours d'installation avant de passer au suivant. REMARQUE : pour plus d'informations sur l'installation du système proprement dit, voir “Installation du système dans l'armoire rack”, à la page 77“. Informations importantes concernant la sécurité Respectez les précautions décrites dans les sous-sections suivantes lors de l'installation du système dans le rack. PRÉCAUTION : vous devez respecter à la lettre les procédures de ce document afin de garantir votre propre protection ainsi que celle d'autrui. Le système peut être très lourd et volumineux. Une préparation et une planification adéquates sont donc importantes afin d'éviter tout risque de blessure pour vous-même ou autrui. Ces précautions sont d'autant plus importantes lorsque les systèmes sont installés en hauteur. PRÉCAUTION : n'installez pas de kits prévus pour un autre système. Sinon, vous risquez d'endommager le système et de vous blesser ou de blesser une autre personne. Outils et fournitures recommandés • Tournevis cruciforme n°2 • Clé 3/8 ou tournevis à douille (pour passer au montage encastré) • Bande adhésive ou stylo feutre pour marquer les trous de montage à utiliserInstallation dans un rack à deux montants 69 Contenu du kit de rack Le kit pour rack à deux montants contient les éléments suivants (voir la figure 2-1) : • Une paire de rails de montage • Huit vis cruciformes à tête plate 12-24 x 0,5 pouce • Fixe-câbles détachables (2) (non représentés figure 2-1) Figure 2-1. Composants d'un kit pour rack à deux montants 1 Huit vis cruciformes à tête plate 12-24 x 0,5 pouce 2 Goujons filetés de 15,24 cm (6 pouces) pour montage central 3 Goujons filetés de 7,62 cm (3 pouces) pour montage central 4 Collerette de montage réglable 5 Collerette pour le montage central 6 Goujons filetés de 15,24 cm (6 pouces) pour le montage encastré 7 Goujons filetés de 7,62 cm (3 pouces) pour le montage encastré 8 Collerette pour le montage encastré 9 Rails de montage (2) 9 1 7 8 6 5 3 2 470 Installation dans un rack à deux montants Tâches d'installation Pour installer un kit de rack à deux montants, vous devez effectuer les opérations suivantes dans l'ordre indiqué : 1 Marquage du rack • Rack doté de trous à espacement universel • Rack doté de trous à espacement large 2 Installation des rails de montage dans le rack • Montage central • Montage encastré 3 Installation du système dans l'armoire rack 4 Acheminement des câbles Marquage du rack Vous devez compter un espace vertical de 1 U (44 mm, soit 1,75 pouces) pour chaque système installé dans le rack. Rack doté de trous à espacement universel Les racks dotés de trous à espacement universel comportent des séries alternées de trois trous par unité. L'espacement entre les trous, mesuré de centre à centre (en commençant par le trou supérieur) est respectivement de 15,9 mm, 15,9 mm et 12,7 mm (0,625 pouce, 0,625 pouce et 0,5 pouce) pour les colonnes avant et arrière (voir la figure 2-2). Figure 2-2. Espacement universel sur un rack à deux montants avec châssis ouvert 12,7 mm (0,5 pouce) 15,9 mm (0,625 pouce) 15,9 mm (0,625 pouce) 1 U (44 mm ou 1,75 pouces)Installation dans un rack à deux montants 71 Rack doté de trous à espacement large Les racks dotés de trous à espacement large comportent des séries alternées de deux trous par unité. L'espacement entre les trous, mesuré de centre à centre (en commençant par le trou supérieur) est respectivement de 31,7 mm et 12,7 mm (1,25 pouces et et 0,5 pouce) pour les colonnes avant et arrière (voir la figure 2-3). Figure 2-3. Espacement large sur un rack à deux montants avec châssis ouvert Pour marquer le rack, procédez comme suit : 1 Placez une marque sur les rails verticaux avant du rack, à l'endroit correspondant au bas du système à installer dans le rack. Le bas de chaque espace de 1 U se trouve au milieu de la zone métallique la plus étroite entre les trous. REMARQUE : si vous utilisez un rack doté de trous à espacement large, passez à l'étape 3. 2 Placez une marque à environ 44 mm (1,75 pouces) au-dessus de la marque que vous avez faite au départ (ou remontez de 3 trous pour un rack avec trous à espacement universel). Voir la figure 2-2. Chaque unité de 1 U (44 mm, soit 1,75 pouces) d'espace vertical dans un rack doté de trous à espacement universel comporte trois trous. Leur espacement, mesuré de centre à centre (en commençant par le haut) est respectivement de 15,9 mm, 15,9 mm et 12,7 mm (0,625 pouce, 0,625 pouce et 0,5 pouce). Voir la figure 2-2. REMARQUE : si vous utilisez un rack avec trous à espacement universel, la procédure de marquage est terminée. 3 Placez une marque à environ 44 mm (1,75 pouces) au-dessus de la marque que vous avez faite au départ (ou remontez au trou suivant si vous utilisez un rack avec trous à espacement large). Voir la figure 2-3. Chaque unité de 1 U (44 mm, soit 1,75 pouces) d'espace vertical dans un rack doté de trous à espacement large comporte deux trous. Leur espacement, mesuré de centre à centre (en commençant par le haut) est de 31,7 mm (1,25 pouces). Voir la figure 2-3. 1 U (44 mm ou 1,75 pouces) 12,7 mm (0,5 pouce) 31,7 mm (1,25 pouces)72 Installation dans un rack à deux montants Installation des rails de montage Vous pouvez installer les rails de montage dans un rack à deux montants avec châssis ouvert doté de trous à espacement universel (voir la figure 2-2) ou large (voir la figure 2-3), en procédant à un montage central ou encastré. PRÉCAUTION : n'utilisez pas ce kit pour installer un système pour lequel il n'a pas été prévu. Sinon, vous risquez d'endommager le système et de vous blesser ou de blesser une autre personne. Montage central Le kit pour rack à deux montants est fourni avec des supports configurés pour une installation de 7,62 cm (3 pouces) de large avec montage central. Les composants des rails de montage sont présentés figure 2-1. Pour effectuer l'installation, procédez comme suit : 1 Repérez le rail de montage de droite et poussez le support de montage réglable vers l'arrière du rail (voir la figure 2-4). 2 Positionnez le rail de montage de droite dans le rack à l'emplacement marqué, poussez le support de montage central vers le rack et fixez la collerette de montage et le support de montage réglable sur le rack. Utilisez quatre vis cruciformes à tête plate de 12-24 x 0,5-pouce (voir la figure 2-4). 3 Recommencez l'étape 1 et l'étape 2 pour installer le rail de montage gauche dans le rack.Installation dans un rack à deux montants 73 Figure 2-4. Installation des rails pour un montage central Montage encastré Le kit pour rack à deux montants est fourni avec des supports configurés pour une installation de 7,62 cm (3 pouces) de large avec montage central. Les composants des rails de montage sont présentés figure 2-1. Pour préparer les rails à un montage encastré dans le rack à deux montants, procédez comme suit : 1 Identifiez les deux rails de montage et déposez-les côte à côte sur un plan de travail lisse, en plaçant l'avant des rails vers vous (voir la figure 2-5). 1 Rack à deux montants avec châssis ouvert 2 Huit vis cruciformes à tête plate 12-24 x 0,5 pouce (4 par rail) 3 Collerette pour le montage central 2 Rails de montage (2) 4 Rails du système (2) 6 Loquet de dégagement 2 1 4 6 3 574 Installation dans un rack à deux montants 2 À l'aide d'une clé 3/8 ou d'un tournevis à douille, retirez les deux écrous du support de montage réglable (voir la figure 2-5). 3 Retirez le support et placez-le sur les goujons filetés de 7,62 cm ou 15,24 cm (3 ou 6 pouces) pour montage encastré (voir la figure 2-5). 4 Réinstallez le support de montage réglable en resserrant les deux écrous retirés à l'étape 2 (voir la figure 2-5). 5 Recommencez la procédure, de l'étape 2 à l'étape 4, pour l'autre rail de montage. Figure 2-5. Installation du support de montage réglable pour un montage encastré 1 Écrous (2 par support) 2 Support de montage réglable 3 Goujons filetés de 7,62 cm (3 pouces) 4 Collerette pour le montage encastré 1 4 3 2Installation dans un rack à deux montants 75 6 Tout en maintenant le rail de montage gauche à l'emplacement marqué, placez la collerette pour montage encastré contre l'avant du rack et fixez-la sur le rail à l'aide de deux vis cruciformes à tête plate 12-24 x 0,5 pouce (voir la figure 2-6). 7 Faites glisser le support de montage réglable contre l'arrière du rack et fixez-le au rail à l'aide de deux vis cruciformes à tête plate 12-24 x 0,5 pouce (voir la figure 2-6). 8 Recommencez l'étape 6 et l'étape 7 pour installer le rail de montage droit dans le rack. 9 À l'aide d'une clé 3/8 ou d'un tournevis à douille, resserrez les écrous sur les supports de montage réglables des deux rails de montage. Figure 2-6. Installation des rails pour un montage encastré 1 Rack à deux montants avec châssis ouvert 2 Huit vis cruciformes à tête plate 12-24 x 0,5 pouce (4 par rail) 3 Rails de montage (2) 2 1 376 Installation dans un rack à deux montants Installation des modules de rails statiques pour le châssis REMARQUE : il n'est pas nécessaire de retirer le cadre avant fourni en option pour installer ou retirer les modules de rails statiques du châssis. 1 Pour installer un module de rails, repérez les trois orifices en trou de serrure sur le module, ainsi que les vis à épaulement correspondantes sur le côté du système (voir la figure 2-7). 2 Placez le module de rail contre le côté du système de façon que les vis à épaulement s'emboîtent dans la partie ronde des trous de serrure. Faites ensuite glisser le module vers l'arrière du système. 3 Recommencez les étapes 1 et 2 pour installer l'autre module de rail. Pour retirer un module de rail du châssis, relevez le loquet de dégagement et tirez le rail vers l'avant. Figure 2-7. Installation et retrait des modules de rails statiques 1 Orifices en trou de serrure (6) 2 Vis à épaulement (6) 3 Loquet de dégagement 4 Modules de rails (2) 5 Système 4 2 3 1 5Installation dans un rack à deux montants 77 Installation du système dans l'armoire rack PRÉCAUTION : si vous installez plusieurs systèmes, installez le premier le plus bas possible dans le rack. 1 Placez une main sous l'avant du système et l'autre sous l'arrière du système. 2 Soulevez le système, positionnez-le de façon que les rails situés à l'arrière s'alignent sur les rails de montage du rack. PRÉCAUTION : en raison de la taille et du poids du système, ne tentez jamais de l'installer seul dans les rails de montage. 3 Poussez le système dans les rails de montage jusqu'à la butée. 4 Installez et serrez les vis moletées situées de chaque côté du panneau avant du châssis, de manière à fixer le système sur le rack. Retrait du système de l'armoire rack Pour retirer le système du rack, procédez comme suit : 1 Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez-le de la prise de courant. 2 Desserrez les vis moletées situées de chaque côté du panneau avant du châssis (qui fixe le système au rack). 3 Déconnectez tous les câbles du système. 4 Tirez le système hors du rack jusqu'à ce qu'il soit arrêté par la butée de sécurité. 5 Appuyez sur les loquets de dégagement, de chaque côté du système (voir la figure 1-10). 6 Retirez complètement le système du rack.78 Installation dans un rack à deux montantsIndex 79 Index A Acheminement des câbles, 64 Armoire à quatre montants retrait du système, 65, 77 C Câbles, 65 acheminement, 64 Chemin de câbles, installation, 62 Consignes de sécurité, 45, 67 Contenu du kit kit pour rack à deux montants, 69 kit VersaRails, 47, 49 VersaRails, 48-49, 61 I Installation chemin de câbles, 62 kit pour rack à deux montants, 67, 72-73 kit pour rack à quatre montants, 55 système dans un rack à quatre montants, 58, 77 Installation (suite) modules de rails statiques, 54, 76 passe-câbles, 62 rails de montage RapidRails, 55 rails de montage VersaRails, 54, 57, 59, 76 K Kit pour rack à deux montants contenu du kit, 69 installation des rails de montage, 72 marquage du rack, 70 outils et fournitures, 68 Kit pour rack à quatre montants contenu du kit VersaRails, 47, 49 M Marquage du rack kit pour rack à deux montants, 70-71 kit pour rack à quatre montants, 50 Montage central, 72 Montage encastré, 73 O Outils et fournitures kit pour rack à deux montants, 68 rack à quatre montants, 47 P Passe-câbles acheminement des câbles, 65 installation, 62 Pieds stabilisateurs, 47 Portes remise en place, 62 retrait, 50 Précautions relatives au montage en rack, 46, 68 R Rack à quatre montants outils et fournitures, 47 Rack, pieds stabilisateurs, 4780 Index 80 Index Rails verticaux marquage, 50 unité, 51 Remise en place des portes du rack, 62 Retrait du système armoire à quatre montants, 65, 77 S Spécifications de rack requises pour les rails VersaRails, 47 U Unité de rack, 51 V VersaRails contenu du kit, 47-49, 61 installation, 54, 57, 59, 76www.dell.com | support.dell.com Rack-InstallationsanleitungAnmerkungen, Hinweise und Warnungen ANMERKUNG: Eine ANMERKUNG macht auf wichtige Informationen aufmerksam, die die Arbeit mit dem Computer erleichtern. HINWEIS: Ein HINWEIS warnt vor möglichen Beschädigungen der Hardware oder vor Datenverlust und zeigt auf, wie derartige Probleme vermieden werden können. VORSICHT: Hiermit werden Sie auf eine potentiell gefährliche Situation hingewiesen, die zu Sachschäden, Verletzungen oder zum Tod führen könnte. ____________________ Irrtümer und technische Änderungen vorbehalten. © 2005 Dell Inc. Alle Rechte vorbehalten. Die Reproduktion dieses Dokuments in jeglicher Form ist ohne schriftliche Genehmigung von Dell Inc. streng verboten. Marken in diesem Text: Dell, das DELL Logo, RapidRails und VersaRails sind Marken von Dell Inc. Alle anderen in dieser Dokumentation genannten Marken und Handelsbezeichnungen beziehen Sie auf die entsprechenden Hersteller bzw. deren Produkte. Dell Inc. erhebt keinen Anspruch auf Marken und Handelsbezeichnungen mit Ausnahme der eigenen. November 2005 P/N YC588 Rev. A00Inhalt 83 Inhalt 1 Montage in einem Rack mit vier Stützen . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Sicherheitshinweise. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 SICHERHEIT: Montieren von Systemen im Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Allgemeine Installationsanleitung . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Vorbereitungen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Wichtige Sicherheitshinweise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Rack-Anforderungen für VersaRails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Rack-Stabilisatoren. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Empfohlene Werkzeuge und Zubehör . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Inhalt des Rack-Kits für Gleitschienen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Inhalt des Rack-Kits für feste Schienen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Ablauf der Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Abnehmen der Rack-Türen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Markieren des Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Konfiguration der Gleitschienensätze (nur bei Kits mit Gleitschienen) . . . . 93 Installation der festen Schienenmodule am Gehäuse (nur bei Kits mit festen Schienen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Installation der Montageschienen im Rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Installation des Systems im Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Installation eines Systems mit Gleitschienen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Installation eines Systems mit festen Schienen . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Wiederanbringen der Rack-Türen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Installation der Ablage und des Kabelführungsarms (nur bei Kits mit Gleitschienen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Installation der Ablage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Installation des Kabelführungsarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Verlegen der Kabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Entfernen des Systems aus dem Rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Entfernen eines Systems mit Gleitschienen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Entfernen eines Systems mit festen Schienen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10684 Inhalt 2 Montage in einem Zwei-Stützen-Rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Sicherheitshinweise. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 SICHERHEIT: Montieren von Systemen im Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Vorbereitungen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Wichtige Sicherheitshinweise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Empfohlene Werkzeuge und Zubehör . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Inhalt des Rack-Kits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Ablauf der Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Markieren des Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Racks mit universellem Lochabstand. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Racks mit weitem Lochabstand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Installation der Montageschienen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Mittenmontage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Installation mit bündiger Montage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Installation von festen Schienenmodulen am Gehäuse. . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Installation des Systems im Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Entfernen des Systems aus dem Rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Montage in einem Rack mit vier Stützen 85 Montage in einem Rack mit vier Stützen Sicherheitshinweise Beachten Sie die nachfolgenden Sicherheitshinweise, um Ihre eigene Sicherheit zu gewährleisten und eine Beschädigung des Systems und der Arbeitsumgebung zu vermeiden. Vollständige Informationen über die Sicherheitsanforderungen und Betriebsvorschriften finden Sie im Product Information Guide (Produktinformationshandbuch) zum System. Die Garantieinformationen befinden sich entweder dort oder in einem gesonderten Dokument. SICHERHEIT: Montieren von Systemen im Rack Beachten Sie die folgenden Vorsichtsmaßnahmen für die Stabilität und Sicherheit des Racks. Spezielle Warnungen und/oder Sicherheitshinweise und Prozeduren finden Sie auch in der zum System gehörenden Dokumentation zur Rack-Installation. Systeme gelten als Komponenten in einem Rack. Der Begriff „Komponente“ bezieht sich also auf ein beliebiges System oder auch Peripheriegeräte und Zusatzhardware. VORSICHT: Bevor Sie Systeme in einem Rack einbauen, installieren Sie bei frei stehenden Racks die vorderen und seitlichen Stabilisatoren und bei Racks, die mit anderen Racks verbunden sind, die vorderen Stabilisatoren. Wenn vor dem Einsetzen von Systemen in einem Rack keine Stabilisatoren angebracht werden, kann das Rack unter Umständen umkippen und Verletzungen verursachen. Befestigen Sie daher immer zuerst die Stabilisatoren, bevor Sie Komponenten im Rack installieren. Ziehen Sie nach dem Einbau von Systemen bzw. Komponenten in einem Rack niemals mehr als eine Komponente gleichzeitig auf den Gleitschienen aus dem Rack. Durch das Gewicht von mehr als einer Komponente kann das Rack umkippen und Verletzungen verursachen. ANMERKUNG: Das System ist als frei stehende Einheit und für die Verwendung als Komponente in einem Dell-Rack unter Verwendung des kundenseitigen Rack-Kits sicherheitszertifiziert. Die Installation des Systems und des Rack-Kits in anderen Racks ist von keiner Prüfbehörde abgenommen. Sie sind selbst dafür verantwortlich, dass die endgültige Kombination von System und Rack alle geltenden Sicherheitsstandards und die lokalen elektrischen Richtlinien erfüllt. Dell übernimmt keinerlei Haftung und Gewährleistung für derartige Kombinationen. • System-Rack-Kits sollten von geschulten Servicetechnikern in einem Rack installiert werden. Wenn Sie das Kit in einem anderen Rack installieren, vergewissern Sie sich, dass das Rack die Spezifikationen eines Dell-Racks erfüllt. VORSICHT: Große Racks dürfen nicht von einer Person allein bewegt werden. Wegen der Höhe und des Gewichts des Racks sollte diese Arbeit mit mindestens zwei Personen durchgeführt werden.86 Montage in einem Rack mit vier Stützen • Bevor Sie an einem Rack arbeiten, vergewissern Sie sich, dass die Stabilisatoren sicher am Rack befestigt sind, fest auf dem Boden aufliegen und dass das gesamte Gewicht des Racks auf dem Boden lastet. Montieren Sie an einem einzelnen Rack die vorderen und seitliche Stabilisatoren, an mehreren miteinander verbundenen Racks die vordere Stabilisatoren, bevor Sie Arbeiten am Rack durchführen. • Bestücken Sie das Rack immer von unten nach oben, und setzen Sie die schwerste Komponente zuerst ein. • Vergewissern Sie sich, dass das Rack gerade und stabil steht, bevor Sie eine Komponente aus dem Rack ziehen. • Es besteht Quetschgefahr für die Finger, wenn Sie auf die Schienenverriegelung der Komponente drücken und eine Komponente in das Rack schieben oder herausziehen. • Überlasten Sie nicht den Wechselstromkreis, über den das Rack mit Strom versorgt wird. Die Gesamtlast des Racks sollte 80 Prozent der Nennbelastbarkeit des Stromkreises nicht überschreiten. • Überprüfen Sie, ob eine ausreichende Luftzufuhr zu den Komponenten im Rack gewährleistet ist. • Treten Sie nicht auf Komponenten und stellen Sie sich nicht darauf, wenn Sie an anderen Komponenten in einem Rack Arbeiten durchführen. Allgemeine Installationsanleitung Diese Installationsanleitung enthält Anweisungen zur Installation eines oder mehrerer Systeme in einem Rack durch geschulte Servicetechniker. Das RapidRails™ Rack-Kit kann ohne Werkzeuge in allen Gestellschränken des Systemherstellers montiert werden und das VersaRails™ Rack-Kit in den meisten Standardgestellschränken. Die Montage der RapidRails- und VersaRails-Rack-Kits verläuft ähnlich. Für jedes im Rack installierte System wird ein Rack-Kit benötigt. Dieser Abschnitt enthält Anweisungen für die folgenden Rack-Kits mit vier Stützen: • Rack-Kit mit Gleitschienen • Rack-Kit mit festen Schienen (RapidRails- und VersaRails-Version) (Installationsanweisungen für ein Kit mit festen Schienen in einem Rack mit zwei Stützen erhalten Sie unter „Montage in einem Zwei-Stützen-Rack“ auf Seite 107.) Vorbereitungen Lesen Sie vor dem Einbau des Systems im Rack sorgfältig die „Sicherheitshinweise“ am Anfang dieser Anleitung sowie die Sicherheitshinweise im Product Information Guide (Produktinformationshandbuch). VORSICHT: Wenn Sie mehrere Systeme in einem Rack installieren, schließen Sie alle Maßnahmen für ein System ab, bevor Sie das nächste System installieren. VORSICHT: Racks können sehr schwer sein und leicht wegrollen. Sie sind nicht mit Bremsen ausgestattet. Bewegen Sie ein Rack nur mit größter Vorsicht. Fahren Sie die höhenverstellbaren Füße ein, bevor Sie ein Rack bewegen. Vermeiden Sie lange bzw. steile Neigungen oder Rampen, auf denen Sie die Kontrolle über das Rack verlieren könnten. Fahren Sie die höhenverstellbaren Füße aus, damit das Rack abgestützt wird und nicht wegrollen kann. ANMERKUNG: Wie das System als solches installiert wird, erfahren Sie unter „Installation des Systems im Rack“ auf Seite 98.Montage in einem Rack mit vier Stützen 87 Wichtige Sicherheitshinweise Beachten Sie beim Einbau des Systems im Rack die Sicherheitsmaßnahmen in den folgenden Unterabschnitten. VORSICHT: Befolgen Sie die in diesem Dokument angegebenen Vorgehensweisen genau, um sich selbst und andere Personen nicht zu gefährden. Das System ist möglicherweise sehr groß und schwer. Sie sollten die Installation sorgfältig vorbereiten und planen, um Verletzungen vorzubeugen. Diese Vorkehrungen gelten umso mehr, wenn Systeme oben im Rack installiert werden. VORSICHT: Installieren Sie keine Rack-Kit-Komponenten, die für andere Systeme vorgesehen sind. Verwenden Sie ausschließlich das für das System vorgesehene Rack-Kit. Wenn Sie das Rack-Kit für ein anderes System verwenden, könnte das System beschädigt und Sie selbst oder andere Personen verletzt werden. Rack-Anforderungen für VersaRails HINWEIS: Das VersaRails-Rack-Kit ist zur Installation durch geschulte Servicetechniker in einem Rack vorgesehen, das den Spezifikationen ANSI/EIA-310-D-92 (American National Standards Institute bzw. Electronic Industries Association), IEC 297 (International Electrotechnical Commission) und der DIN 41494 (Deutsches Institut für Normung) entspricht. Für jedes in einem Rack montierte System wird ein Rack-Kit benötigt. Rack-Stabilisatoren VORSICHT: Bevor Sie Systeme in einem Rack einbauen, installieren Sie bei frei stehenden Racks die vorderen und seitlichen Stabilisatoren und bei Racks, die mit anderen Racks verbunden sind, die vorderen Stabilisatoren. Wenn vor dem Einsetzen von Systemen in einem Rack keine Stabilisatoren angebracht werden, kann das Rack unter Umständen umkippen und Verletzungen verursachen. Befestigen Sie daher immer zuerst die Stabilisatoren, bevor Sie Komponenten im Rack installieren. Die Stabilisatoren verhindern das Umkippen des Racks. Anleitungen zur Installation und Befestigung der Stabilisatoren finden Sie in der mit dem Gestellschrank gelieferten Dokumentation. Empfohlene Werkzeuge und Zubehör Sie benötigen eventuell folgende Hilfsmittel zur Installation des Systems in einem Rack mit vier Stützen: • Kreuzschlitzschraubendreher der Größe 2 • Kreppband oder einen Filzstift zur Markierung der verwendeten Montagelöcher88 Montage in einem Rack mit vier Stützen Inhalt des Rack-Kits für Gleitschienen • Ein Paar Gleitschienensätze (umwandelbar in RapidRails- oder VersaRails-Konfiguration) • Ein Kabelführungsarm • Eine Ablage • Ein Statusanzeigekabel (falls zutreffend) • Kabelbinder zum Befestigen der Kabel am Kabelführungsarm • Acht 10-32 x 0,5 Zoll-Kreuzschlitzbundschrauben (nur für VersaRails-Konfiguration verwendet) ANMERKUNG: Die in den Abbildungen und Anweisungen genannten nichtmetrischen Schrauben werden nach ihrer Größe und der Anzahl der Windungen pro Zoll bezeichnet. So wird z. B. eine Kreuzschlitzschraube Nr. 10 mit 32 Windungen pro Zoll als 10-32-Schraube bezeichnet. Abbildung 1-1. Inhalt des Rack-Kits für Gleitschienen 1 Ablage 2 Schienensätze (2) 3 10-32 x 0,5 Zoll-Kreuzschlitzbundschrauben (8) (nur für VersaRailsKonfiguration) 4 Kabelbinder 5 Statusanzeigekabel (falls zutreffend) 6 Kabelführungsarm 1 2 3 5 6 4Montage in einem Rack mit vier Stützen 89 Inhalt des Rack-Kits für feste Schienen • Ein paar feste Montageschienen, entweder mit VersaRails- oder RapidRails-Halterungen. • Ein Paar Festschienenmodule für das Gehäuse • 10-32 x 0,5 Zoll-Kreuzschlitzbundschrauben (8) (nur bei VersaRails-Kits) • Lösbare Kabelbinder (2) (nicht dargestellt in Abbildung 1-2) ANMERKUNG: Die in den Abbildungen und Anweisungen genannten nichtmetrischen Schrauben werden nach ihrer Größe und der Anzahl der Windungen pro Zoll bezeichnet. So wird z. B. eine Kreuzschlitzschraube Nr. 10 mit 32 Windungen pro Zoll als 10-32-Schraube bezeichnet. Abbildung 1-2. Inhalt des Rack-Kits für feste Schienen 1 10-32 x 0,5 Zoll-Kreuzschlitzbundschrauben (8) (nur bei VersaRails-Kits) 2 Feste Montageschienen (2) 3 Feste Schienenmodule für das Gehäuse (2) FRONT L 1 3 290 Montage in einem Rack mit vier Stützen Ablauf der Installation Bei der Montage eines Rack-Kits sind die folgenden Arbeitsschritte (ausführlich in den nächsten Abschnitten beschrieben) nacheinander auszuführen: 1 Abnehmen der Rack-Türen 2 Markieren des Racks 3 Konfiguration der Gleitschienensätze (nur bei Kits mit Gleitschienen) 4 Installation der festen Schienenmodule am Gehäuse (nur bei Kits mit festen Schienen) 5 Installation der Montageschienen im Rack 6 Installation des Systems im Rack 7 Installation der Ablage und des Kabelführungsarms (nur bei Kits mit Gleitschienen) 8 Verlegen der Kabel 9 Wiederanbringen der Rack-Türen Abnehmen der Rack-Türen Siehe Vorgehensweise zum Entfernen der Türen in der Dokumentation zum Gestellschrank. VORSICHT: Da die Rack-Türen sehr groß und schwer sind, versuchen Sie niemals, die Türen ohne fremde Hilfe abzunehmen oder einzubauen. VORSICHT: Verstauen Sie die Türen so, dass niemand verletzt wird, falls sie versehentlich umfallen. Markieren des Racks Bei einem 1-U-System benötigen Sie für jedes System, das Sie im Rack installieren, einen vertikalen Abstand von 1 U (44 mm bzw. 1,75 Zoll). Gestellschränke, die den EIA-310-Standards entsprechen, weisen ein sich wiederholendes Muster aus drei Löchern pro Rack-Einheit auf, deren Mittenabstand zueinander (beginnend mit dem oberen Loch einer 1-U-Einheit) 15,9 mm, 15,9 mm und 12,7 mm (0,625, 0,625 und 0,5 Zoll) an den vorderen und hinteren vertikalen Schienen beträgt (siehe Abbildung 1-3). Gestellschränke können mit runden oder rechteckigen Löchern ausgestattet sein. ANMERKUNG: Die vertikalen Schienen sind eventuell in Abständen von 1 U mit horizontalen Linien und Zahlen markiert. Notieren Sie sich die Nummer der Markierung auf der vertikalen Schiene. So brauchen Sie keine zusätzlichen Markierungen oder Klebeband am Rack anzubringen. Montage in einem Rack mit vier Stützen 91 Abbildung 1-3. Eine Rack-Einheit VORSICHT: Wenn Sie mehr als ein System einsetzen wollen, installieren Sie die Montageschienen so, dass sich das erste System möglichst weit unten im Rack befindet. Gehen Sie zum Markieren des Racks wie folgt vor: 1 Bringen Sie auf den vorderen vertikalen Schienen des Racks eine Markierung (mit Stift oder Klebeband) an der Stelle an, an der sich die Unterseite des Systems befinden soll, das Sie in den Rack einbauen möchten. Die Unterkante jeder 1-U-Einheit befindet sich in der Mitte des schmalsten Metallstücks zwischen den Löchern (bei einigen Racks mit einer horizontalen Linie gekennzeichnet, siehe Abbildung 1-4). 2 Bringen Sie 44 mm (1,75 Zoll) über der Originalmarkierung eine Markierung an (oder zählen Sie in einem Rack nach EIA-310-Standard drei Löcher nach oben). Markieren Sie die vorderen vertikalen Schienen mit einem Filzstift oder einem Stück Kreppband (falls Sie die Löcher gezählt haben, bringen Sie direkt über dem oberen Loch eine Markierung an). Die Markierung bzw. das Kreppband zeigt die spätere Position der Oberkante des Systems an den vertikalen Schienen (siehe Abbildung 1-4). 1 U (44 mm) 12,7 mm 15,9 mm 15,9 mm 12,7 mm92 Montage in einem Rack mit vier Stützen Abbildung 1-4. Vertikale Schienen markieren 1 Markierungen auf vertikalen Schienen (2) 1Montage in einem Rack mit vier Stützen 93 Konfiguration der Gleitschienensätze (nur bei Kits mit Gleitschienen) Der Gleitschienensatz ist an den Enden jeweils mit einer drehbaren Montagehalterung ausgestattet. Die Position der Halterung bestimmt, ob der Schienensatz als RapidRails oder VersaRails eingesetzt wird. Auf der RapidRails-Seite der Halterung befinden sich ein Haken und eine Verriegelung zur Befestigung an der vertikalen Schiene. Auf der VersaRails-Seite der Halterung befinden sich drei Löcher, und zur Befestigung an der vertikalen Schiene kommen Schrauben zum Einsatz. ANMERKUNG: Bei Auslieferung befinden sich die Gleitschienensätze des Rack-Kits in der RapidRailsKonfiguration. So drehen Sie die Montagehalterung und ändern die Konfiguration der Montageschienen von RapidRails auf VersaRails (siehe Abbildung 1-5): 1 Heben Sie den Freigabehebel an der drehbaren Montagehalterung an. 2 Drehen Sie die Halterung und schieben Sie sie von den zwei Abstandshaltern nach oben weg. 3 Drehen Sie die Halterung weiter bis auf 180 Grad, bis die Abstandshalter wieder in die Aussparungen eingreifen. 4 Drehen Sie die Halterung auf den Abstandshaltern in der Gegenrichtung, bis sie einrastet. Abbildung 1-5. Position der drehbaren Montagehalterung ändern 1 Drehbare Halterung 2 Freigabehebel 3 Abstandshalter (2) 4 Aussparungen (2) 5 Montagehalterungsflansch (RapidRails-Konfiguration dargestellt) 1 2 4 3 594 Montage in einem Rack mit vier Stützen Installation der festen Schienenmodule am Gehäuse (nur bei Kits mit festen Schienen) ANMERKUNG: Um die festen Schienenmodule zu installieren oder zu entfernen, brauchen Sie die optionale Frontverkleidung nicht abzunehmen. 1 Um ein Schienenmodul zu installieren, verwenden Sie die drei Befestigungslöcher am Schienenmodul und die entsprechenden Ansatzschrauben auf der Seite des Systems (siehe Abbildung 1-6). 2 Setzen Sie das Schienenmodul an der Seite des Systems so an, dass die Ansatzschrauben durch die weiten Aussparungen der Befestigungslöcher greifen, und schieben Sie dann das Modul zur Systemrückseite hin. 3 Wiederholen Sie die Schritte 1 und 2 für das andere Schienenmodul. Um ein Schienenmodul vom Gehäuse zu entfernen, ziehen Sie die Sperrklinke nach oben, schieben Sie dann die Schiene nach vorn, und entfernen Sie das Schienenmodul vom Gehäuse. Abbildung 1-6. Festschienenmodule installieren und entfernen 1 Befestigungslöcher (6) 2 Ansatzschrauben (6) 3 Sperrklinke 4 Schienenmodule (2) 5 System 4 2 3 1 5Montage in einem Rack mit vier Stützen 95 Installation der Montageschienen im Rack ANMERKUNG: Die folgenden Anweisungen gelten sowohl für Gleitschienen als auch für feste Schienen. Installation der RapidRails-Montageschienen 1 Setzen Sie eine der Montageschienen so an der Vorderseite des Gestellschranks an, dass sich der Montagehalterungsflansch zwischen den Markierungen (oder an der Markierung mit der richtigen Zahl) aus dem Schritt „Markieren des Racks“ an den vertikalen Schienen befindet (siehe Abbildung 1-7). Der obere Montagehaken am vorderen Montagehalterungsflansch sollte in das obere Loch zwischen den Markierungen auf den vertikalen Schienen eingreifen. Abbildung 1-7. Installation der RapidRails-Montageschienen 1 Montagehaken (2) 2 Drucktasten (2) 3 Montageschienen (2) Rack-Vorderseite 1 2 396 Montage in einem Rack mit vier Stützen 2 Schieben Sie die Montageschiene nach vorn, bis der Montagehaken in das Rechteckloch eingreift, und drücken Sie dann den Montagehalterungsflansch nach unten, bis der Montagehaken sitzt und die Drucktaste im unteren Rechteckloch einrastet (siehe Abbildung 1-7). 3 Ziehen Sie auf der Rückseite des Gestellschranks den Flansch der Montagehalterung nach hinten, bis der Montagehaken in das obere Rechteckloch eingreift. Drücken Sie dann den Flansch nach unten, bis der Montagehaken sitzt und die Drucktaste im unteren Rechteckloch einrastet. 4 Wiederholen Sie Schritt 1 bis Schritt 3 für die Montageschiene auf der anderen Seite des Racks. 5 Achten Sie darauf, dass die Montageschienen auf beiden Rack-Seiten in der gleichen Höhe an den vertikalen Schienen befestigt werden. Installation der RapidRails-Montageschienen 1 Setzen Sie eine der Montageschienen so an der Vorderseite des Gestellschranks an, dass sich der zugehörige Montagehalterungsflansch zwischen den Markierungen (oder an der Markierung mit der richtigen Zahl) aus dem Schritt „Markieren des Racks“ an den vertikalen Schienen befindet (siehe Abbildung 1-8). Die drei Löcher an der Vorderseite des Montagehalterungsflansches sollten mit den Löchern zwischen Ihren Markierungen an der vorderen vertikalen Schiene übereinstimmen. 2 Befestigen Sie die Montageschiene durch je eine 10-32 x 0,5 Zoll-Kreuzschlitzbundschraube im oberen und unteren Loch des Montageflanschs an der vorderen vertikalen Schiene. 3 Ziehen Sie den Montagehalterungsflansch auf der Rack-Rückseite nach hinten, bis seine Montagelöcher mit den rechteckigen Löchern auf der hinteren vertikalen Schiene übereinstimmen. 4 Befestigen Sie die Montageschiene mit je einer 10-32 x 0,5 Zoll-Kreuzschlitzbundschraube im oberen und unteren Loch des Montageflanschs an der hinteren vertikalen Schiene. 5 Wiederholen Sie Schritt 1 bis Schritt 4 für die Montageschiene auf der anderen Seite des Racks. 6 Achten Sie darauf, dass die Montageschienen auf jeder Rack-Seite jeweils an der gleichen Stelle an den vertikalen Schienen montiert werden.Montage in einem Rack mit vier Stützen 97 Abbildung 1-8. VersaRails-Montageschienen installieren 1 Montagehalterungsflansch 2 10-32 x 0,5 Zoll-Kreuzschlitzbundschrauben (4 pro Montageschiene) 3 Montageschienen (2) Rack-Vorderseite 1 2 398 Montage in einem Rack mit vier Stützen Installation des Systems im Rack VORSICHT: Wenn Sie mehr als ein System installieren, installieren Sie das erste System in der untersten möglichen Position im Rack. VORSICHT: Wegen der Größe und des Gewichts des Systems sollten Sie niemals versuchen, das System ohne fremde Hilfe in den Montageschienen zu installieren. Installation eines Systems mit Gleitschienen 1 Ziehen Sie die zwei inneren Gleitschienen aus dem Rack, bis sie in der vollständig ausgezogenen Position einrasten (siehe Abbildung 1-9). 2 Heben Sie das System über den herausgezogenen Gleitschienen in Position. Die jeweils drei Ansatzschrauben an den Seiten des Systems greifen in die entsprechenden J-förmigen Aussparungen in den inneren Schienensätzen (siehe Abbildung 1-9). 3 Senken Sie die Rückseite des Systems ab, und richten Sie dabei die hinteren Ansatzschrauben auf den Seiten des Systems mit den J-förmigen Aussparungen in den Schienensätzen aus. 4 Lassen Sie die hinteren Ansatzschrauben in die jeweiligen J-förmigen Aussparungen eingreifen. 5 Senken Sie die Systemvorderseite ab, und führen Sie die mittleren und vorderen Ansatzschrauben in die jeweiligen J-förmigen Aussparungen in den Schienensätzen ein. Die Systemsperrklinke auf der Vorderseite der inneren Gleitschiene schnappt zurück, wenn die Ansatzschraube in die vordere Aussparung gelangt. Mit dieser Sperrklinke können Sie das System aus den Gleitschienen entfernen. 6 Drücken Sie auf die Sperrklinken an den Außenseiten der inneren Gleitschienen und schieben Sie das System vollständig in das Rack. 7 Installieren Sie den Kabelführungsarm. Siehe „Installation der Ablage und des Kabelführungsarms (nur bei Kits mit Gleitschienen)“ auf Seite 102. 8 Ziehen Sie die Rändelschrauben auf der Rack-Vorderseite fest, um die Schienensätze am Rack zu sichern.Montage in einem Rack mit vier Stützen 99 Abbildung 1-9. Installation eines Systems mit Gleitschienen 1 Ansatzschrauben (6) 2 Sperrklinke der Gleitschiene 3 J-förmige Aussparungen (6) 4 Vordere Sperrklinke 5 Innere Gleitschienen (2) 1 2 4 3 5100 Montage in einem Rack mit vier Stützen Installation eines Systems mit festen Schienen Um das System im Rack zu installieren, gehen Sie wie folgt vor: 1 Heben Sie das Gehäuse von der Vorderseite des Systems aus in Position, sodass die festen Schienenmodule am Gehäuse mit den Montageschienen am Rack ausgerichtet sind. 2 Schieben Sie das Gehäuse bis zum Anschlag in die Montageschienen (siehe Abbildung 1-10). 3 Sichern Sie das Gehäuse mit den beiden Rändelschrauben auf der Vorderseite. 4 Installieren Sie gegebenenfalls die optionale Frontverkleidung. Siehe Vorgehensweise zum Anbringen der Fronverkleidung in der Dokumentation des Systems. Abbildung 1-10. Installation eines Systems mit festen Schienen 1 Montageschienen (2) 2 Schienenmodule am Gehäuse (2) 3 Rändelschrauben (2) 4 Sperrklinken (2) 1 3 4 2Montage in einem Rack mit vier Stützen 101 5 Suchen Sie die Befestigungspunkte für die lösbaren Kabelbinder an den zwei hinteren Montagehalterungsflanschen (siehe Abbildung 1-11). Mit diesen Kabelbindern werden die Systemkabel an den Montageschienen gesichert. Abbildung 1-11. Lösbare Kabelbinder befestigen 6 Schieben Sie das Verbindungsstück des Kabelbinders durch den Befestigungspunkt. 7 Drücken Sie den Kabelbinder bis zum Einrasten in die Montageschiene. 8 Sichern Sie die Systemkabel mit den lösbaren Kabelbindern an den Montageschienen. 1 Montageschienen (2) 2 Lösbare Kabelbinder (2) 1 2102 Montage in einem Rack mit vier Stützen Wiederanbringen der Rack-Türen Siehe Vorgehensweise zum Einsetzen der Türen in der Rack-Dokumentation. VORSICHT: Da die Rack-Türen sehr groß und schwer sind, versuchen Sie niemals, die Türen ohne fremde Hilfe abzunehmen oder einzubauen. Installation der Ablage und des Kabelführungsarms (nur bei Kits mit Gleitschienen) ANMERKUNG: Dieser Vorgang gilt nicht für das Kit mit festen Schienen. Installation der Ablage 1 Führen Sie auf der Systemrückseite die Enden der Ablage zwischen die Enden der Montageschienen, und schieben Sie die Ablage bis zum Einrasten nach vorn (siehe Abbildung 1-12). 2 Um die Installation des Kabelführungsarms vorzubereiten, drücken Sie auf die Sperrklinke in der Mitte des Kabelführungsarmhalters, und kippen Sie den Halter nach unten (siehe Abbildung 1-12). Abbildung 1-12. Installation der Ablage 1 Montageschienen (2) 2 Ablage 3 Kabelführungsarmhalter 1 3 Systemrückseite 2Montage in einem Rack mit vier Stützen 103 Installation des Kabelführungsarms ANMERKUNG: Sie können den Kabelführungsarm an der rechten oder der linken Montageschiene befestigen, je nachdem, wie Sie die Systemkabel verlegen wollen. 1 Drücken Sie auf der Ablage gegebenenfalls auf die Sperrklinke in der Mitte des Kabelführungsarmhalters, und kippen Sie den Halter nach unten (siehe Abbildung 1-12). 2 Befestigen Sie auf der Systemrückseite die Sperrklinke am vorderen Ende des Kabelführungsarms an der inneren Halterung des Schienensatzes, bis die Verbindung einrastet (siehe Abbildung 1-13). 3 Befestigen Sie die Sperrklinke am losen Ende des Kabelführungsarms an der äußeren Halterung des Schienensatzes, bis die Verbindung einrastet (siehe Abbildung 1-13). Abbildung 1-13. Installation des Kabelführungsarms 1 Montageschienen (2) 2 Halterungen (2) 3 Sperrklinken (2) 4 Kabelführungsarm Systemrückseite 1 2 4 3104 Montage in einem Rack mit vier Stützen Verlegen der Kabel 1 Öffnen Sie die Kabeltunnelabdeckung auf der Oberseite des Kabelführungsarms, um die Kabel im Arm verlegen zu können (siehe Abbildung 1-14). Abbildung 1-14. Kabel im Kabelführungsarm verlegen 2 Verbinden Sie gegebenenfalls den Stecker des Statusanzeigekabels mit dem zugehörigen Anschluss auf der Systemrückseite. Verlegen Sie das Kabel der Systemstatusanzeige entlang des Kabelführungsarms, und befestigen Sie das LED-Ende am Steckplatz am Ende des Kabelführungsarms. 3 Verbinden Sie die Daten- und Netzstromkabel mit den entsprechenden Anschlüssen auf der Rückseite des Systems. Ausführliche Informationen zu Kabelverbindungen finden Sie in der Getting Started Guide (Anleitung „Erste Schritte“) oder im Hardware Owner’s Manual (Hardware-Benutzerhandbuch) zum System. ANMERKUNG: Verwenden Sie die Zugentlastungsschlaufen auf der Rückseite der Netzteile, um die Netzstromkabel zu entlasten. 4 Bündeln Sie die Kabel mit den Kabelbindern aus dem Rack-Kit, sodass sie bei angrenzenden Systemen im Rack nicht stören. 1 Kabelführungsarm 2 Vorinstallierte Kabelbinder 3 Kabelführungsarmhalter 4 Abdeckung 5 Steckplatz für Systemstatusanzeige 6 Klettverschluss 7 Vorinstallierte Kabelbinder 4 5 2 3 6 Systemrückseite 1 7Montage in einem Rack mit vier Stützen 105 5 Verlegen Sie die Kabel in den Kabeltunneln des Kabelführungsarms. 6 Sorgen Sie gegebenenfalls für Kabelzuschlag im Scharnierbereich, und sichern Sie die Kabel mit dem vertikalen Klettverschluss (siehe Abbildung 1-14). 7 Verwenden Sie die vorinstallierten Kabelbinder am inneren Ende und Scharnierpunkt des Kabelführungsarms, um die gebündelten Kabel im Kabelführungsarm zu sichern (siehe Abbildung 1-14). 8 Schließen Sie die Kabeltunnelabdeckung. 9 Lösen Sie die Rändelschrauben, mit denen die Systemvorderseite an der vorderen vertikalen Schiene gesichert wird. 10 Bewegen Sie das System im Rack vor und zurück, um zu überprüfen, ob die Kabel korrekt verlegt sind und nicht eingeklemmt oder gedehnt werden bzw. die Bewegung des Kabelführungsarms beeinträchtigen. Passen Sie gegebenenfalls die Lage der Kabel im Kabelführungsarm an. ANMERKUNG: Wenn Sie das System vollständig herausziehen, werden die Schiebeeinheiten in der ausgezogenen Position verriegelt. Um die Sperre zu entriegeln, drücken Sie die Sperrklinke auf der Seite der Gleitschiene, und schieben Sie dann das System in das Rack. 11 Wenn Sie mit der Kabelführung zufrieden sind, schieben Sie das System vollständig in das Rack. 12 Heben Sie den Kabelführungsarmhalter an der Ablage an, um den Arm zu sichern (siehe Abbildung 1-14). Entfernen des Systems aus dem Rack Entfernen eines Systems mit Gleitschienen Gehen Sie wie folgt vor, um das System aus dem Rack zu entfernen: 1 Schalten Sie das System sowie die angeschlossenen Peripheriegeräte aus und unterbrechen Sie die Stromzufuhr. 2 Entfernen Sie die Daten- und Netzstromkabel von den entsprechenden Anschlüssen auf der Rückseite des Systems. 3 Lösen Sie die Rändelschrauben auf beiden Seiten der Gehäusefrontplatte, die das System am Rack sichern. 4 Ziehen Sie das System aus dem Rack, bis die Schienen in der ausgezogenen Position einrasten. 5 Ziehen Sie an beiden Schienen die vordere Sperrklinke nach oben (siehe Abbildung 1-9), und schieben Sie das System nach vorn. 6 Ziehen Sie das System vollständig aus dem Rack.106 Montage in einem Rack mit vier Stützen Entfernen eines Systems mit festen Schienen Gehen Sie wie folgt vor, um das System aus dem Rack zu entfernen: 1 Schalten Sie das System sowie die angeschlossenen Peripheriegeräte aus und unterbrechen Sie die Stromzufuhr. 2 Lösen Sie die Rändelschrauben auf beiden Seiten der Gehäusefrontplatte, die das System am Rack sichern. 3 Trennen Sie alle Kabel vom System. 4 Ziehen Sie das System bis zur Sicherungsraste aus dem Rack. 5 Drücken Sie auf die Sperrklinken auf den Seiten des Systems (siehe Abbildung 1-10). 6 Ziehen Sie das System vollständig aus dem Rack.Montage in einem Zwei-Stützen-Rack 107 Montage in einem Zwei-Stützen-Rack Das Zwei-Stützen-Rack-Kit wird für die Montage eines Systems in einem offenen Relaisgestell mit zwei Stützen verwendet, wie man es zum Beispiel bei Telekommunikationsanlagen findet. Es können sowohl 7,62 cm (3 Zoll) als auch 15,24 cm (6 Zoll) breite Racks mit zwei Stützen und universellem Lochabstand oder weitem Lochabstand installiert werden. Sie können dieses Kit entweder für die Mittenmontage oder für die bündige Montage verwenden. Sie müssen das offene Zwei-Stützen-Relaisgestell ordnungsgemäß auf dem Boden, an der Decke oder oben an der Wand befestigen und gegebenenfalls mit benachbarten Gestellschränken verbinden. Verwenden Sie hierzu Boden- und Wandbefestigungen sowie Stützen, die vom Rack-Hersteller spezifiziert oder zugelassen sind bzw. dem Industriestandard entsprechen. Lesen Sie zuerst die Warnungen in der Dokumentation des Zwei-Stützen-Racks, bevor Sie mit dem Einbau beginnen. VORSICHT: Montieren Sie niemals Systeme in einem offenen Zwei-Stützen-Relaisgestell, das nicht sicher verankert ist. Andernfalls kann das System beschädigt oder Sie bzw. andere Personen verletzt werden. Sicherheitshinweise Beachten Sie die nachfolgenden Sicherheitshinweise, um Ihre eigene Sicherheit zu gewährleisten und eine Beschädigung des Systems und der Arbeitsumgebung zu vermeiden. Vollständige Informationen über die Sicherheitsanforderungen finden Sie im Produktinformationshandbuch. SICHERHEIT: Montieren von Systemen im Rack Beachten Sie die folgenden Vorsichtsmaßnahmen für die Stabilität und Sicherheit des Racks. Spezielle Warnungen und/oder Sicherheitshinweise und Prozeduren finden Sie auch in der zum System gehörenden Dokumentation zur Rack-Installation. Systeme gelten als Komponenten in einem Rack. Der Begriff „Komponente“ bezieht sich also auf ein beliebiges System oder auch Peripheriegeräte und Zusatzhardware. VORSICHT: Ziehen Sie nach dem Einbau von Systemen bzw. Komponenten in einem Rack niemals mehr als eine Komponente gleichzeitig auf den Gleitschienen aus dem Rack. Durch das Gewicht von mehr als einer Komponente kann das Rack umkippen und Verletzungen verursachen. ANMERKUNG: Das System ist als frei stehende Einheit und für die Verwendung als Komponente in einem Dell-Rack unter Verwendung des kundenseitigen Rack-Kits sicherheitszertifiziert. Die Installation des Systems und des Rack-Kits in anderen Racks ist von keiner Prüfbehörde abgenommen. Sie sind selbst dafür verantwortlich, dass die endgültige Kombination von System und Rack alle geltenden Sicherheitsstandards und die lokalen elektrischen Richtlinien erfüllt. Dell übernimmt keinerlei Haftung und Gewährleistung für derartige Kombinationen. 108 Montage in einem Zwei-Stützen-Rack • System-Rack-Kits sollten von geschulten Servicetechnikern in einem Rack installiert werden. Wenn Sie das Kit in einem anderen Rack installieren, vergewissern Sie sich, dass das Rack die Spezifikationen eines Dell-Racks erfüllt. VORSICHT: Große Racks dürfen nicht von einer Person allein bewegt werden. Wegen der Höhe und des Gewichts des Racks sollte diese Arbeit mit mindestens zwei Personen durchgeführt werden. • Bestücken Sie das Rack immer von unten nach oben, und setzen Sie die schwerste Komponente zuerst ein. • Vergewissern Sie sich, dass das Rack gerade und stabil steht, bevor Sie eine Komponente aus dem Rack ziehen. • Es besteht Quetschgefahr für die Finger, wenn Sie auf die Schienenverriegelung der Komponente drücken und eine Komponente in das Rack schieben oder herausziehen. • Überlasten Sie nicht den Wechselstromkreis, über den das Rack mit Strom versorgt wird. Die Gesamtlast des Racks sollte 80 Prozent der Nennbelastbarkeit des Stromkreises nicht überschreiten. • Überprüfen Sie, ob eine ausreichende Luftzufuhr zu den Komponenten im Rack gewährleistet ist. • Treten Sie nicht auf Komponenten oder stellen sich darauf, wenn Sie an anderen Komponenten in einem Rack Arbeiten durchführen. Vorbereitungen Lesen Sie vor dem Einbau des Systems im Rack sorgfältig den Abschnitt „Sicherheitshinweise“ am Anfang dieser Anleitung sowie die Sicherheitshinweise im Product Information Guide (Produktinformationshandbuch). VORSICHT: Wenn Sie mehrere Systeme in einem Rack installieren, schließen Sie alle Maßnahmen für ein System ab, bevor Sie das nächste System installieren. ANMERKUNG: Wie das System als solches installiert wird, erfahren Sie unter „Installation des Systems im Rack“ auf Seite 118. Wichtige Sicherheitshinweise Beachten Sie beim Einbau des Systems im Rack die Sicherheitsmaßnahmen in den folgenden Unterabschnitten. VORSICHT: Befolgen Sie die in diesem Dokument angegebene Vorgehensweise genau, um sich selbst und andere Personen nicht zu gefährden. Das System ist möglicherweise sehr groß und schwer. Sie sollten die Installation sorgfältig vorbereiten und planen, um Verletzungen vorzubeugen. Diese Vorkehrungen gelten umso mehr, wenn Systeme oben im Rack installiert werden. VORSICHT: Installieren Sie keine Rack-Kit-Komponenten, die für andere Systeme vorgesehen sind. Verwenden Sie ausschließlich das für das System vorgesehene Rack-Kit. Wenn Sie das Rack-Kit für ein anderes System verwenden, könnte das System beschädigt und Sie selbst oder andere Personen verletzt werden.Montage in einem Zwei-Stützen-Rack 109 Empfohlene Werkzeuge und Zubehör • Kreuzschlitzschraubendreher der Größe 2 • 3/8-Zoll Schraubenschlüssel oder Steckschlüssel (bei Wechsel der Halterung für bündige Montage) • Kreppband oder Filzstift zur Markierung der korrekten Montagelöcher Inhalt des Rack-Kits Das Rack-Kit für zwei Stützen enthält folgende Komponenten (siehe Abbildung 2-1): • Ein Paar Montageschienen • 12-24 x 0,5 Zoll-Flachkopfkreuzschlitzschrauben (8) • Lösbare Kabelbinder (2) (nicht dargestellt in Abbildung 2-1) Abbildung 2-1. Komponenten des Rack-Kits für zwei Stützen 1 12-24 x 0,5 ZollFlachkopfkreuzschlitzschrauben (8) 2 Gewindebolzen im Abstand 15,24 cm (6 Zoll) für Mittenmontage 3 Gewindebolzen im Abstand 7,62 cm (3 Zoll) für Mittenmontage 4 Einstellbarer Montageflansch 5 Montageflansch für Mittenmontage 6 Gewindebolzen im Abstand 15,24 cm (6 Zoll) für bündige Montage 7 Gewindebolzen im Abstand 7,62 cm (3 Zoll) für bündige Montage 8 Montageflansch für bündige Montage 9 Montageschienen (2) 9 1 7 8 6 5 3 2 4110 Montage in einem Zwei-Stützen-Rack Ablauf der Installation Bei der Montage eines Zwei-Stützen-Rack-Kits sind die folgenden Arbeitsschritte in der angegebenen Reihenfolge auszuführen: 1 Markieren des Racks • Rack mit universellem Lochabstand • Rack mit weitem Lochabstand 2 Installation der Montageschienen im Rack • Befestigung in Mittenmontage • Befestigung in bündiger Montage 3 Installation des Systems im Rack 4 Verlegen der Kabel Markieren des Racks Für jedes System, das Sie im Rack mit zwei Stützen installieren, benötigen Sie 1 Einheit (1 U = 44 mm bzw. 1,75 Zoll) vertikalen Abstand. Racks mit universellem Lochabstand Racks mit universellem Lochabstand besitzen ein sich wiederholendes Muster aus drei Löchern pro RackEinheit, deren Mittenabstand (beginnend in der Mitte des oberen Lochs einer 1-U-Einheit) 15,9 mm, 15,9 mm und 12,7 mm (0,625 Zoll, 0,625 Zoll und 0,5 Zoll) für die vordere und hintere vertikale Lochreihe beträgt (siehe Abbildung 2-2). Abbildung 2-2. Universeller Lochabstand beim offenen Relaisgestell mit zwei Stützen 12,7 mm 15,9 mm 15,9 mm 1 U (44 mm)Montage in einem Zwei-Stützen-Rack 111 Racks mit weitem Lochabstand Racks mit weitem Lochabstand besitzen ein sich wiederholendes Muster aus zwei Löchern pro RackEinheit, deren Mittenabstand (beginnend mit dem oberen Loch einer 1-U-Einheit) 31,7 mm und 12,7 mm (1,25 Zoll bzw. 0,5 Zoll) für die vordere und hintere vertikale Lochreihe beträgt (siehe Abbildung 2-3). Abbildung 2-3. Weiter Lochabstand beim offenen Relaisgestell mit zwei Stützen Gehen Sie zum Markieren des Racks wie folgt vor: 1 Bringen Sie auf den vorderen vertikalen Schienen des Racks eine Markierung an der Stelle an, an der sich die Unterseite des Systems befinden soll, das Sie in das Zwei-Stützen-Rack einbauen. Die Unterkante jeder 1-U-Einheit befindet sich in der Mitte des schmalsten Metallstücks zwischen den Löchern. ANMERKUNG: Wenn das Rack einen weiten Lochabstand hat, gehen Sie zu Schritt 3. 2 Setzen Sie eine Markierung 44 mm (1,75 Zoll) über die ursprüngliche Markierung (oder zählen Sie in einem Rack mit universellem Lochabstand drei Löcher nach oben, siehe Abbildung 2-2). Jede vertikale 1-U-Einheit (44 mm oder 1,75 Zoll) in einem Rack mit universellem Lochabstand verfügt über drei Löcher, deren Mittenabstand zueinander (beginnend mit dem oberen Loch einer 1-U-Einheit) 15,9 mm, 15,9 mm und 12,7 mm (0,625 Zoll, 0,625 Zoll und 0,5 Zoll) beträgt (siehe Abbildung 2-2). ANMERKUNG: Wenn das Rack einen universellen Lochabstand hat, ist das Markieren des Racks damit abgeschlossen. 3 Setzen Sie eine Markierung 44 mm (1,75 Zoll) über die ursprüngliche Markierung (oder zählen Sie in einem Rack mit weitem Lochabstand bis zum nächsten Loch nach oben, siehe Abbildung 2-3). Jede vertikale 1-U-Einheit (44 mm oder 1,75 Zoll) in einem Rack mit universellem Lochabstand hat zwei Löcher, deren Mittenabstand zueinander (beginnend mit dem oberen Loch einer 1-U-Einheit) 31,7 mm (1,25 Zoll) beträgt (siehe Abbildung 2-3). 1 U (44 mm) 12,7 mm 31,7 mm112 Montage in einem Zwei-Stützen-Rack Installation der Montageschienen Sie können die Montageschienen in einem offenen Zwei-Stützen-Rack mit entweder universellem Lochabstand (siehe Abbildung 2-2) oder weitem Lochabstand (siehe Abbildung 2-3) installieren. Die Montageschienen lassen sich mit bündiger Montage oder Mittenmontage einbauen. VORSICHT: Installieren Sie mit diesem Rack-Kit keine anderen Systeme. Verwenden Sie ausschließlich das für Ihr System konzipierte Rack-Kit. Wenn Sie das Rack-Kit für ein anderes System verwenden, könnte das System beschädigt und Sie selbst oder andere Personen verletzt werden. Mittenmontage Im Lieferumfang des Zwei-Stützen-Rack-Kits sind Haltungen für Mittenmontage mit 7,62 cm Breite (3 Zoll) enthalten. Zum Anbringen der Schienenkomponenten siehe Abbildung 2-1. Um die Montage abzuschließen, führen Sie folgende Schritte aus: 1 Schieben Sie auf der rechten Montageschiene die einstellbare Montagehalterung nach hinten (siehe Abbildung 2-4). 2 Setzen Sie die rechte Montageschiene an der markierten Stelle in das Rack mit zwei Stützen ein, schieben Sie die einstellbare Halterung für Mittenmontage nach vorne gegen das vertikale ZweiStützen-Rack, und sichern Sie den Montageflansch und die einstellbare Montagehalterung am Rack mit zwei 12-24 x 0,5 Zoll-Flachkopfkreuzschlitzschrauben (siehe Abbildung 2-4). 3 Wiederholen Sie Schritt 1 und Schritt 2 für den Einbau der linken Montageschiene im Rack.Montage in einem Zwei-Stützen-Rack 113 Abbildung 2-4. Einbau der Montageschienen bei Mittenmontage 1 Offenes Rack mit zwei Stützen 2 12-24 x 0,5 ZollFlachkopfkreuzschlitzschrauben (4 pro Schiene) 3 Montageflansch für Mittenmontage 2 Montageschienen (2) 4 Systemschienen (2) 6 Sperrklinke 2 1 4 6 3 5114 Montage in einem Zwei-Stützen-Rack Installation mit bündiger Montage Im Lieferumfang des Zwei-Stützen-Rack-Kits sind Haltungen für Mittenmontage mit 7,62 cm Breite (3 Zoll) enthalten. Zum Anbringen der Schienenkomponenten siehe Abbildung 2-1. Gehen Sie zum Vorbereiten der Montageschienen für die bündige Montage im Zwei-Stützen-Rack wie folgt vor: 1 Legen Sie die beiden Montageschienen nebeneinander auf eine ebene Arbeitsfläche, wobei die vorderen Enden der Montageschienen zu Ihnen zeigen (siehe Abbildung 2-5). 2 Entfernen Sie mit einem 3/8-Zoll-Schlüssel oder -Steckschlüssel zwei Muttern aus der einstellbaren Montagehalterung (siehe Abbildung 2-5). 3 Nehmen Sie die Halterung ab, und setzen Sie die Halterung dann auf die Gewindebolzen für bündige Montage mit 7,62 cm (3 Zoll) oder 15,24 cm (6 Zoll) Abstand (siehe Abbildung 2-5). 4 Verwenden Sie die in Schritt 2 entfernten Muttern, um die einstellbare Montagehalterung zu sichern; ziehen Sie die Muttern zunächst fingerfest an (siehe Abbildung 2-5). 5 Wiederholen Sie Schritt 2 bis Schritt 4 zur Vorbereitung der anderen Montageschiene.Montage in einem Zwei-Stützen-Rack 115 Abbildung 2-5. Einstellbare Montagehalterung für bündige Montage konfigurieren 6 Halten Sie die linke Montageschiene an die markierte Stelle, positionieren Sie den Montageflansch für bündige Montage gegen die Vorderseite des vertikalen Zwei-Stützen-Racks, und sichern Sie ihn mit zwei 12-24 x 0,5 Zoll-Flachkopfkreuzschlitzschrauben an der Schiene (siehe Abbildung 2-6). 7 Verschieben Sie die einstellbare Montagehalterung so, dass sie an der Rückseite des Zwei-StützenRacks anliegt, und sichern Sie sie an der Schiene mit 12-24 x 0,5 Zoll-Flachkopfkreuzschlitzschrauben (siehe Abbildung 2-6). 8 Wiederholen Sie Schritt 6 und Schritt 7 für den Einbau der rechten Montageschiene im Rack. 9 Ziehen Sie mit einem 3/8-Zoll-Schlüssel oder -Steckschlüssel die Muttern an den einstellbaren Montagehalterungen auf beiden Montageschienen fest. 1 Muttern (2 pro Halterung) 2 Einstellbare Montagehalterung 3 Gewindebolzen im Abstand 7,62 cm (3 Zoll) für bündige Montage 4 Montageflansch für bündige Montage 1 4 3 2116 Montage in einem Zwei-Stützen-Rack Abbildung 2-6. Montageschienen für bündige Konfiguration installieren 1 Offenes Rack mit zwei Stützen 2 12-24 x 0,5 ZollFlachkopfkreuzschlitzschrauben (4 pro Schiene) 3 Montageschienen (2) 2 1 3Montage in einem Zwei-Stützen-Rack 117 Installation von festen Schienenmodulen am Gehäuse ANMERKUNG: Um die festen Schienenmodule zu installieren oder zu entfernen, brauchen Sie die optionale Frontverkleidung nicht abzunehmen. 1 Um ein Schienenmodul zu installieren, verwenden Sie die drei Befestigungslöcher am Schienenmodul und die entsprechenden Ansatzschrauben auf der Seite des Systems (siehe Abbildung 2-7). 2 Setzen Sie das Schienenmodul an der Seite des Systems so an, dass die Ansatzschrauben durch die weiten Aussparungen der Befestigungslöcher greifen, und schieben Sie dann das Modul zur Systemrückseite hin. 3 Wiederholen Sie die Schritte 1 und 2 für das andere Schienenmodul. Um ein Schienenmodul vom Gehäuse zu entfernen, ziehen Sie die Sperrklinke nach oben, schieben Sie dann die Schiene nach vorn, und entfernen Sie das Schienenmodul vom Gehäuse. Abbildung 2-7. Feste Schienenmodule am Gehäuse installieren und entfernen 1 Befestigungslöcher (6) 2 Ansatzschrauben (6) 3 Sperrklinke 4 Schienenmodule (2) 5 System 4 2 3 1 5118 Montage in einem Zwei-Stützen-Rack Installation des Systems im Rack VORSICHT: Wenn Sie mehr als ein System installieren, installieren Sie das erste System in der untersten möglichen Position im Rack. 1 Fassen Sie das System mit der einen Hand unter der Vorderseite und mit der anderen Hand unter der Rückseite an. 2 Heben Sie das System in Position, sodass die Seitenschienen auf der Rückseite des Systems mit den Montageschienen im Rack ausgerichtet sind. VORSICHT: Wegen der Größe und des Gewichts des Systems sollten Sie niemals versuchen, das System ohne fremde Hilfe in den Montageschienen zu installieren. 3 Schieben Sie das System bis zum Anschlag in die Montageschienen. 4 Drücken Sie die Rändelschrauben an den Seiten des Systemgehäuses hinein und drehen Sie sie fest, um das System am Rack zu sichern. Entfernen des Systems aus dem Rack Gehen Sie wie folgt vor, um das System aus dem Rack zu entfernen: 1 Schalten Sie das System sowie die angeschlossenen Peripheriegeräte aus und unterbrechen Sie die Stromzufuhr. 2 Lösen Sie die Rändelschrauben auf beiden Seiten der Gehäusefrontplatte, die das System am Rack sichern. 3 Trennen Sie alle Kabel vom System. 4 Ziehen Sie das System bis zur Sicherungsraste aus dem Rack. 5 Drücken Sie auf die Sperrklinken auf den Seiten des Systems (siehe Abbildung 1-10). 6 Ziehen Sie das System vollständig aus dem Rack.Index 119 Index E Einsetzen der RackTüren, 102 I Inhaltsliste VersaRails-Kit, 88-89 Zwei-Stützen-Rack-Kit, 109 Installation Feste Schienenmodule, 94, 117 Kabelablage, 102 Kabelführungsarm, 102 Montageschienen beim Zwei-StützenRack, 112, 114 Rack-Kit für vier Stützen, 95 RapidRailsMontageschienen, 95 System im Rack mit vier Stützen, 98, 118 VersaRails-Montageschienen, 94, 97, 99, 117 Installieren Zwei-Stützen-Rack-Kit, 107 K Kabel, 105 Kabel verlegen, 104 Kabelablage, 104 installieren, 102 Kabelführungsarm Installation, 102 Kabel verlegen, 105 Kit-Inhalt VersaRails, 88-89, 101 Zwei-Stützen-Rack, 109 Konfiguration mit bündiger Montage, 114 Mittenmontage, 112 M Markieren des Racks Rack-Kit für vier Stützen, 90 Zwei-StützenRack-Kit, 110-111 R Rack mit vier Stützen System entfernen, 105, 118 Rack-Anforderungen für VersaRails, 87 Rack-Einheit, 91 Rack-Kit für vier Stützen Inhalt des VersaRailsKits, 88-89 Werkzeuge und Zubehör, 87 Rack-Stabilisatoren, 87 S Sicherheitshinweise, 85, 107 Stabilisatoren, 87 System entfernen Rack mit vier Stützen, 105, 118 T Türen Einsetzen, 102 Entfernen, 90 V VersaRails Installation, 94, 97, 99, 117 Kit-Inhalt, 88-89, 101120 Index 120 Index Vertikale Schienen Eine Rack-Einheit, 91 Markieren, 90 Vorsichtsmaßnahmen bei der RackMontage, 86, 108 W Werkzeuge und Zubehör Rack-Kit für vier Stützen, 87 Zwei-Stützen-Rack-Kit, 109 Z Zwei-Stützen-Rack-Kit Kit-Inhalt, 109 Markieren des Racks, 110 Montageschienen installieren, 112 Werkzeuge und Zubehör, 109www.dell.com | support.dell.com ラック取り付けガイドメモ、注意、警告 メモ:コンピュータを使いやすくするための重要な情報を説明しています。 注意:ハードウェアの損傷やデータの損失の可能性を示し、その危険を回避するための方法を説明してい ます。 警告:物的損害、けが、または死亡の原因となる可能性があることを示します。 ____________________ 本書の内容は予告なく変更されることがあります。 © 2005 すべての著作権は Dell Inc. にあります。 Dell Inc. の書面による許可のない複製は、いかなる形態においても厳重に禁じられています。 本書で使用されている商標について:Dell、DELL ロゴ、RapidRails、および VersaRails は Dell Inc. の商標です。 本書では、必要に応じて上記以外の商標や会社名が使用されている場合がありますが、これらの商標や会社名は、 一切 Dell Inc. に所属するものではありません。 2005 年 11 月 P/N YC588 Rev. A00目次 123 目次 1 4 柱型ラックの取り付け 安全にお使いいただくために . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 安全について:システムのラックへの取り付け . . . . . . . . . 125 取り付けに関する一般的なガイド. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 作業を開始する前に . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 安全に関する重要な注意 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 VersaRails のラック要件. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 ラックスタビライザ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 推奨する工具および備品 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 スライドレールラックキットの内容 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 スタティックレールラックキットの内容. . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 取り付け手順 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 ラック扉の取り外し . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 ラックへの印付け . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 スライドレールアセンブリの構成(スライドレールキットのみ) . . 133 シャーシスタティックレールモジュールの取り付け (スタティックレールキットのみ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 ラックへのマウントレールの取り付け . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 ラックへのシステムの取り付け . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 スライドレールを使用するシステムの取り付け . . . . . . . . . 138 スタティックレールを使用するシステムの取り付け . . . . . . 140 ラック扉の取り付け . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 トレイとケーブルマネージメントアームの取り付け (スライドレールキットのみ). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 トレイの取り付け. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 ケーブルマネージメントアームの取り付け . . . . . . . . . . . 143 ケーブルの配線 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 ラックからのシステムの取り外し. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 スライドレールを使用するシステムの取り外し . . . . . . . . . 145 スタティックレールを使用するシステムの取り外し . . . . . . 146124 目次 2 2 柱型ラックの取り付け 安全にお使いいただくために . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 安全について:システムのラックへの取り付け . . . . . . . . . 147 作業を開始する前に . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 安全に関する重要な注意 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 推奨する工具および備品 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 ラックキットの内容 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 取り付け手順 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 ラックへの印付け . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 ユニバーサル間隔で穴があるラック . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 ワイド間隔で穴があるラック. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 マウントレールの取り付け . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 センターマウント構成での取り付け . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 フラッシュマウント構成での取り付け. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 シャーシのスタティックレールモジュールの取り付け. . . . . . . . 156 ラックへのシステムの取り付け . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 ラックからのシステムの取り外し. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 索引 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1594 柱型ラックの取り付け 125 4 柱型ラックの取り付け 安全にお使いいただくために ご自身の身体の安全を守り、システムおよび作業環境を保護するために、以下の安全に関する ガイドラインに従ってください。安全および規制の詳細については、システムに付属の『製品 情報ガイド』を参照してください。保証に関する情報は、『サービス&サポートのご案内』を参 照してください。 安全について:システムのラックへの取り付け ラックの安定性や安全性に関して、以下の点にご注意ください。また、特定の注意文および手 順については、システムおよびラック付属のラック取り付けマニュアルを参照してください。 システムはラックの一部とみなします。したがって、「コンポーネント」には、さまざまな周辺 機器やサポートハードウェアと同様に、システムも含まれます。 警告:単体ラックでは正面と側面のスタビライザ、連結ラックでは正面のスタビライザを取り付 けてからラックにシステムを取り付けてください。スタビライザを正しく取り付けずにシステム をラックに取り付けると、ラックが転倒し、けがをするおそれがあります。必ずスタビライザを 取り付けてから、ラックにコンポーネントを取り付けてください。 ラックにシステム / コンポーネントを取り付けた後は、一度に複数のコンポーネントをラックの スライドアセンブリを使って引き出さないでください。重みでラックが転倒し、大けがをするお それがあります。 メモ:ご使用のシステムは、独立型のユニットとして、また、カスタマーラックキットで構成さ れる Dell ラックキャビネットに取り付けるコンポーネントとして、その安全性が保証されていま す。それ以外のラックキャビネットにシステムおよびラックキットを取り付ける場合は、安全性 が保証されません。最終的に組み合わせたシステムおよびラックについては、ユーザーの責任に おいて、適用される安全基準および地域の電気規約の要件に適合することを確認してください。 デルでは、このような組み合わせに関連するいかなる保証責任も負いません。 • システムラックキットは、トレーニングを受けたサービス技術者がラックに取り付けま す。キットを別のラックに取り付ける場合は、そのラックがデルのラック仕様に適合して いることを確認してください。 警告:大型ラックを 1 人で移動しないでください。ラックの高さと重さを考慮して、少なくとも 2 人以上でラックを移動することをお勧めします。126 4 柱型ラックの取り付け • ラックで作業をする前に、スタビライザがラックに固定されて床面に伸び、ラックの全重量が 床面にかかっていることを確認してください。ラックで作業をする前に、ラックが 1 つの場合 は正面と側面のスタビライザ、複数のラックを連結する場合は正面のスタビライザを取り付け ます。 • ラックには必ず下から上へと、最も重いものから順に設置してください。 • コンポーネントをラックから引き出す前に、ラックが水平で安定していることを確認してくだ さい。 • レールリリースラッチを押してコンポーネントをラックから出し入れするときは、スライド レールに指をはさまれないように注意してください。 • ラックに電力を送る AC 分岐回路に過重電流を流さないでください。ラックの総負荷が分岐回 路定格の 80% を超えないようにしてください。 • ラック内のコンポーネントが十分に通気されることを確認してください。 • ラックに取り付けたコンポーネントの作業中に、他のコンポーネントの上に乗ったり、足をか けたりしないでください。 取り付けに関する一般的なガイド 本書は、ラックキャビネットに 1 つまたは複数のシステムを取り付ける作業を行う、トレーニング を受けたサービス技術者向けの手順書です。RapidRails™ ラックキットは、工具を使わずにすべて のシステムメーカーのラックキャビネットに取り付けることができます。VersaRails™ ラックキッ トは、業界規格に適合しているほとんどのラックキャビネットに取り付けることができます。 RapidRails ラックキットと VersaRails ラックキットの取り付け手順はほとんど同じです。ラック キットは、ラックキャビネットに取り付けるシステム 1 台ごとに 1 セットずつ必要です。 本項には、以下の 4 柱型ラックキットを取り付ける手順が説明されています。 • スライドレールラックキット • スタティックレールラックキット(RapidRails バージョンおよび VersaRails バージョン) スタティックレールキットを 2 柱型ラックに取り付ける手順については、「2 柱型ラックの取 り付け」(147 ページ)を参照してください。 作業を開始する前に システムのラックへの取り付けを開始する前に、本書の「安全にお使いいただくために」およびご 使用のシステムの『製品情報ガイド』の安全にお使いいただくための注意事項を参照し、補足情報 を確認してください。 警告:複数のシステムをラックに取り付ける場合は、1 台のシステムの取り付け手順を完了してから、 次のシステムの取り付けに進んでください。4 柱型ラックの取り付け 127 警告:ラックキャビネットはサイズが非常に大きく重量もありますが、キャスターで簡単に移動でき るようになっています。このキャスターにはブレーキがないため、ラックキャビネットを移動すると きは十分な注意が必要です。ラックキャビネットを別の場所に移動するときは、水平調節用の脚を収 納してください。長い傾斜面、急勾配のある場所、スロープなど、バランスが取りにくい場所には キャビネットを設置しないでください。水平調節用の脚を伸ばしてキャビネットを支え、キャビネッ トが動かないようにしてください。 メモ:システム自体の設置方法については、「「ラックへのシステムの取り付け」(138ページ)」を参 照してください。 安全に関する重要な注意 システムをラックに取り付けるときは、次の各項の安全に関する注意を遵守してください。 警告:作業者は、自分自身と周囲の人々を保護するために、本書の手順に必ず従ってください。本シ ステムは非常に重量があり大きいため、ご自身や周囲の人々のけがを防ぐために準備と計画を適切に 行うことが重要です。これは、特にシステムをラックの高い位置に取り付ける場合に重要になります。 警告:別のシステム用に設計されたラックキットのコンポーネントは取り付けないでください。ご使 用のシステム用のラックキットのみをお使いください。別のシステム用のラックキットを使用すると、 システムが損傷し、ご自身や周囲の人々がけがをするおそれがあります。 VersaRails のラック要件 注意:VersaRails ラックキットは、米国規格協会(ANSI)/ 米国電子工業会(EIA)規格 ANSI/EIA-310- D-92、国際電気標準会議(IEC)297、ドイツ工業規格(DIN)41494 の仕様を満たすラックについてト レーニングを受けたサービス技術者が取り付けるように設計されています。ラックキットは、ラック に取り付けるシステム 1 台につき 1 セット必要です。 ラックスタビライザ 警告:単体ラックでは正面と側面のスタビライザ、連結ラックでは正面のスタビライザを取り付けて からラックにシステムを取り付けてください。スタビライザを正しく取り付けずにシステムをラック に取り付けると、ラックが転倒し、けがをするおそれがあります。必ずスタビライザを取り付けてか ら、ラックにコンポーネントを取り付けてください。 スタビライザはラックの転倒を防ぎます。スタビライザを取り付けて床に固定する手順については、 ラックキャビネットに付属のマニュアルを参照してください。 推奨する工具および備品 システムを 4 柱型ラックキャビネットに取り付ける際、以下の工具および備品が必要な場合があり ます。 • #2 プラスドライバ • マスキングテープまたはフェルトペン(取り付け穴に印を付けるときに使用)128 4 柱型ラックの取り付け スライドレールラックキットの内容 • スライドアセンブリ 1 組(RapidRails または VersaRails の構成に変換可能) • ケーブルマネージメントアーム 1 本 • トレイ 1 個 • ステータスインジケータケーブル 1 本(必要な場合) • ケーブルをケーブルマネージメントアームに固定するタイラップ • 10-32 x 0.5 インチフランジヘッドプラスネジ 8 本(VersaRails 構成でのみ使用) メモ:図と手順の説明に示すメートル法規格以外のネジは、サイズとインチ当たりのネジ山数で表記 されています。たとえば 1 インチに 32 本のネジ山がある #10 プラスネジは、10-32 ネジと表記します。 図 1-1 スライドレールラックキットの内容 1 トレイ 2 スライドアセンブリ(2) 3 10-32 x 0.5 インチフランジヘッド プラスネジ(8) (VersaRails 構成のみ) 4 タイラップ 5 ステータスインジケータケーブル (必要な場合) 6 ケーブルマネージメントアーム 1 2 3 5 6 44 柱型ラックの取り付け 129 スタティックレールラックキットの内容 • VersaRails ブラケットまたは RapidRails ブラケット を使う 1 組のスタティックマウン トレール • シャーシスタティックレールモジュール 1 組 • 10-32 x 0.5 インチフランジヘッドプラスネジ(8)(VersaRails キットのみ) • 取り外し可能タイラップ(2)(図 1-2 には記載なし) メモ:図と手順の説明に示すメートル法規格以外のネジは、サイズとインチ当たりのネジ山数で表記 されています。たとえば 1 インチに 32 本のネジ山がある #10 プラスネジは、10-32 ネジと表記します。 図 1-2 スタティックレールラックキットの内容 1 10-32 x 0.5 インチフランジ ヘッドプラスネジ(8) (VersaRails キットのみ) 2 スタティックマウントレール(2) 3 シャーシスタティックレール モジュール(2) FRONT L 1 3 2130 4 柱型ラックの取り付け 取り付け手順 ラックキットを取り付けるには、次の手順(以降の各項で詳細を説明)を番号順に実行します。 1 ラック扉の取り外し 2 ラックへの印付け 3 スライドレールアセンブリの構成(スライドレールキットのみ) 4 シャーシスタティックレールモジュールの取り付け(スタティックレールキットのみ) 5 ラックへのマウントレールの取り付け 6 ラックへのシステムの取り付け 7 トレイとケーブルマネージメントアームの取り付け(スライドレールキットのみ) 8 ケーブルの配線 9 ラック扉の取り付け ラック扉の取り外し ラックキャビネットに付属のマニュアルに記載されている扉の取り外し手順を参照してください。 警告:ラックキャビネットの扉の大きさと重さを考慮して、取り付けおよび取り外しは 1 人では行わ ないでください。 警告:取り外した扉は、不意に倒れてけがをしないような場所に保管してください。 ラックへの印付け 1 ラックユニット(1 U)システムでは、ラックに取り付ける各システムの上下に、1 U(44mm) の空間を空ける必要があります。 EIA-310 規格を満たすラックキャビネットには、1 ラックユニット(1 U)ごとに 3 つの穴が交互に 並んでいます。穴の中心から中心までの距離は、前面および背面垂直レールの 1 U スペースの一番 上の穴から計測して 15.9 mm、15.9 mm、12.7 mm となっています( 図 1-3 を参照)。ラックキャ ビネットの穴には丸型または角型があります。 メモ:垂直レールには、1 U 間隔の水平の線と数字で印が付いていることがあります。ラックの垂直 レールについている印の番号を控える方法もあるので、ラックに印を付けたりテープを貼る作業は必 須ではありません。4 柱型ラックの取り付け 131 図 1-3 1 ラックユニット(1 U) 警告:2 台以上のシステムを取り付ける場合は、ラックの使用可能な最下段に 1 台目のシステムを取 り付けられるようにマウントレールをセットしてください。 ラックに印を付けるには、次の手順を実行します。 1 ラック前面の垂直レール上で、ラックキャビネットに取り付けるシステムの底部の位置を決 め、フェルトペンまたはテープを使って印を付けます。 底部にあたる各 1 U スペースの位置は、穴と穴の間が狭い方の金属部分の中央です (横線で印が付いているラックキャビネットもあります。図 1-4 を参照)。 2 最初に印を付けた場所から 44 mm 上(あるいは EIA-310 規格に適合したラックであれば、 ラックの穴を上に 3 つ数えた場所)を決め、フェルトペンまたはマスキングテープを使って ラック前面の垂直レールに印を付けます(穴を数えた場合は一番上の穴の真上に印を付ける)。 このマークまたはテープが、垂直レール上でシステムの上端が来る位置になります (図 1-4 を参照)。 1 U(44 mm) 12.7 mm 15.9 mm 15.9 mm 12.7 mm132 4 柱型ラックの取り付け 図 1-4 垂直レールの印付け 1 垂直レールの印(2) 14 柱型ラックの取り付け 133 スライドレールアセンブリの構成(スライドレールキットのみ) スライドレールアセンブリには、レールの両端に回転取り付けブラケットがあります。レールアセ ンブリが RapidRail または VersaRail のどちらとして使われるかは、ブラケットの位置によって決 まります。ブラケットの RapidRail 側には、ブラケットを垂直レールに固定するフックとラッチが あります。ブラケットの VersaRail 側には 3 つの穴があり、ネジを使って垂直レールに取り付ける ようになっています。 メモ:ラックキットは、RapidRails 構成のスライドレールアセンブリに付属しています。 取り付けブラケットを回転させて、マウントレールを RapidRails から VersaRails に変更するには、 以下の手順を実行します(図 1-5 を参照)。 1 回転取り付けブラケットのリリースレバーを押し上げます。 2 ブラケットを回転させ、スライドさせて 2 つの肩付き突起から取り外します。 3 肩付き突起が切り込みに再び入るまで、ブラケットをさらに 180 度回転させます。 4 所定の位置にカチッとはまるまで、ブラケットを反対方向に回転させて肩付き突起上に 戻します。 図 1-5 回転取り付けブラケットの位置の変更 1 回転ブラケット 2 リリースレバー 3 肩付き突起(2) 4 切り込み(2) 5 取り付けブラケットフランジ (図は RapidRails 構成) 1 2 4 3 5134 4 柱型ラックの取り付け シャーシスタティックレールモジュールの取り付け (スタティックレールキットのみ) メモ:シャーシにスタティックレールモジュールを取り付けたり取り外したりするのに、 オプションの前面ベゼルを取り外す必要はありません。 1 レールモジュールを取り付けるには、レールモジュール上の 3 つの鍵穴スロットと、 それに対応するシステム側面の肩付きネジの位置を確認します(図 1-6 を参照)。 2 肩付きネジが鍵穴スロットの丸い部分に入るようにレールモジュールをシステム側面に合わ せ、モジュールをシステムの背面方向にスライドさせます。 3 手順 1 と 2 を繰り返して、もう 1 つのレールモジュールを取り付けます。 シャーシからレールモジュールを取り外すには、リリースラッチを押し上げ、レールを前方にスラ イドさせて、レールモジュールをシャーシから外します。 図 1-6 スタティックレールシャーシモジュールの取り付けと取り外し 1 鍵穴スロット(6) 2 肩付きネジ(6) 3 リリースラッチ 4 レールモジュール(2) 5 システム 4 2 3 1 54 柱型ラックの取り付け 135 ラックへのマウントレールの取り付け メモ:以下の説明は、スライドマウントレールとスタティックマウントレールの両方に適用されます。 RapidRails マウントレールの取り付け 1 ラックキャビネットの前面で、取り付けブラケットのフランジが、「ラックへの印付け」 の垂直レールに付けた印やテープの間のスペースに収まるように(または穴の数を数えて)、 1 つ目のマウントレールの位置を合わせます(図 1-7 を参照)。 マウントレールの前面取り付けブラケットフランジの上部取り付けフックを、垂直レールに付 けた印の間にある一番上の穴に差し込みます。 図 1-7 RapidRails マウントレールの取り付け 1 取り付けフック(2) 2 押しボタン(2) 3 マウントレール(2) ラック正面 1 2 3136 4 柱型ラックの取り付け 2 マウントレールを正面に向かって押して、取り付けフックを角型の穴に差し込み、取り付けブ ラケットフランジを下に押して取り付けフックを穴に固定します。完全に固定されると押しボ タンが下側の角型の穴から飛び出します(図 1-7 を参照)。 3 キャビネットの背面で、取り付けブラケットのフランジを後ろに引いて、上部取り付けフック を対応する角型の穴に差し込み、フランジを下に押して取り付けフックを穴に固定します。 完全に固定されると押しボタンが下側の角型の穴から飛び出します。 4 ラックの反対側のマウントレールで、手順 1 ~手順 3 を繰り返します。 5 左右の垂直レールで、マウントレールが同じ高さに取り付けられていることを確認します。 VersaRails マウントレールの取り付け 1 ラックキャビネットの前面で、取り付けブラケットのフランジが、「ラックへの印付け」の垂 直レールに付けた印の間のスペースに収まるように(または穴の数を数えて)、1 つ目のマウン トレールの位置を合わせます(図 1-8 を参照)。 取り付けブラケットフランジの前面にある 3 個の穴を、前面垂直レールに付けた印の間の穴に 合わせます。 2 2 本の 10-32 x 0.5 インチフランジヘッドプラスネジを取り付けブラケットフランジの上下の穴 に差し込んで、マウントレールを前面垂直レールに固定します。 3 キャビネットの背面から、取り付けブラケットフランジを後ろに引いて、取り付け穴を背面垂 直レールのそれぞれ対応する穴に合わせます。 4 2 本の 10-32 x 0.5 インチフランジヘッドプラスネジを取り付けブラケットフランジの上下の穴 に差し込んで、マウントレールを背面垂直レールに固定します。 5 ラックの反対側のマウントレールで、手順 1 ~手順 4 を繰り返します。 6 左右の垂直レールで、マウントレールが同じ高さに取り付けられていることを確認します。4 柱型ラックの取り付け 137 図 1-8 VersaRails マウントレールの取り付け 1 取り付けブラケットフランジ 2 10-32 x 0.5 インチフランジヘッド プラスネジ(マウントレール 1 本につき 4 本) 3 マウントレール(2) ラック正面 1 2 3138 4 柱型ラックの取り付け ラックへのシステムの取り付け 警告:複数のシステムを取り付ける場合は、1 台目のシステムをラックの使用可能な最下段に取り付 けてください。 警告:システムの大きさと重さを考慮して、マウントレールへのシステムの取り付けは 1 人では行わ ないでください。 スライドレールを使用するシステムの取り付け 1 2 つの内部スライドレールをラックから引き出し、一番外側の位置でロックします (図 1-9 を参照)。 2 スライドアセンブリに載せられる高さまでシステムを持ち上げます。 システムの両側に 3 本ずつある肩付きネジを内部スライドアセンブリの対応する J スロットに 差し込みます(図 1-9 を参照)。 3 システムの側面にある後部肩付きネジを、スライドアセンブリの背面 J スロットに合わせなが ら、システム背面を下げます。 4 後部肩付きネジをそれぞれの J スロットにはめ込みます。 5 システム前面を下げて、中央と前部の肩付きネジをスライドアセンブリの J スロットに差し込 みます。 肩付きネジを前面スロットに差し込むと、内部スライドレールの前面にあるシステムリリース ラッチが元の位置に戻ってカチッと固定されます。システムをスライドアセンブリから取り外 すときは、このシステムリリースラッチを使用します。 6 各内部スライドの外側にあるスライドリリースラッチを押し、システムをラックに押し 込みます。 7 ケーブルマネージメントアームの取り付け「トレイとケーブルマネージメントアームの取り付 け (スライドレールキットのみ)」(142 ページ)を参照してください。 8 ラックの正面パネルにある蝶ネジを締めてスライドアセンブリをラックに固定します。4 柱型ラックの取り付け 139 図 1-9 スライドレールを使用するシステムの取り付け 1 肩付きネジ(6) 2 スライドリリースラッチ 3 J スロット(6) 4 フロントリリースラッチ 5 内部スライドレール(2) 1 2 4 3 5140 4 柱型ラックの取り付け スタティックレールを使用するシステムの取り付け システムをラックに取り付けるには、次の手順を実行します。 1 システムの正面からシャーシを持ち上げて、シャーシレールがラックのマウントレールにはま るように位置を合わせます。 2 シャーシをマウントレールの一番奥まで押し込みます(図 1-10 を参照)。 3 シャーシ正面パネルの両方の蝶ネジを締めます。 4 必要に応じて、オプションの前面ベゼルを取り付けます。システムに同梱のマニュアルに記載 されているベゼルの取り付け手順を参照してください。 図 1-10 スタティックレールを使用するシステムの取り付け 1 マウントレール(2) 2 シャーシレールモジュール(2) 3 蝶ネジ(2) 4 リリースラッチ(2) 1 3 4 24 柱型ラックの取り付け 141 5 後部取り付けブラケットのフランジに設けられた 2 つの取り外し可能タイラップ取り付け穴を 見つけます(図 1-11 を参照)。 タイラップは、システムケーブルをマウントレールに固定するために使います。 図 1-11 取り外し可能タイラップの取り付け 6 タイラップの留め具を取り付け穴に挿入します。 7 タイラップのプランジャを押すと、カチッと音がしてタイラップがマウントレールに固定され ます。 8 取り外し可能タイラップを使用して、システムケーブルをマウントレールに固定します。 1 マウントレール(2) 2 取り外し可能タイラップ(2) 1 2142 4 柱型ラックの取り付け ラック扉の取り付け ラックに付属のマニュアルに記載されている扉の取り付け手順を参照してください。 警告:ラックキャビネットの扉の大きさと重さを考慮して、取り付けおよび取り外しは 1 人では行わ ないでください。 トレイとケーブルマネージメントアームの取り付け (スライドレールキットのみ) メモ:この手順はスタティックレールキットには適用されません。 トレイの取り付け 1 システムの背面で、トレイの両端をマウントレールの両端の間に合わせ、固定されるまでトレ イを前方へスライドさせます(図 1-12 を参照)。 2 ケーブルマネージメントアームの取り付けに備えて、ケーブルマネージメントアーム保持ラッ チの中央にあるキャッチを押し、ラッチを下方向に回転させます(図 1-12 を参照)。 図 1-12 トレイの取り付け 1 マウントレール(2) 2 トレイ 3 ケーブルマネージメントアーム保持ラッチ 1 3 システム背面 24 柱型ラックの取り付け 143 ケーブルマネージメントアームの取り付け メモ:ケーブルマネージメントアームは、左右のマウントレールのどちらにでも取り付けることがで きます。左右のどちらに取り付けるかは、システムからのケーブルをどう配線するかによります。 1 必要に応じて、トレイ上のケーブルマネージメントアーム保持ラッチの中央にあるキャッチを 押し、ラッチを下方向に回転させます(図 1-12 を参照)。 2 システムの背面で、ケーブルマネージメントアーム前端部のラッチをスライドアセンブリ最深 部のブラケットにはめ込み、固定されるまで押し込みます(図 1-13 を参照)。 3 ケーブルマネージメントアームのまだ取り付けていない一端のラッチをスライドアセンブリの 最も外側のブラケットにはめ込み、固定されるまで押し込みます(図 1-13 を参照)。 図 1-13 ケーブルマネージメントアームの取り付け 1 マウントレール(2) 2 ブラケット(2) 3 ラッチ(2) 4 ケーブルマネージメントアーム システム背面 1 2 4 3144 4 柱型ラックの取り付け ケーブルの配線 1 アーム内にケーブルを配線できるようにするために、ケーブルマネージメントアーム上部のワ イヤーケーブルバスケットリッドを開きます(図 1-14 を参照)。 図 1-14 ケーブルマネージメントアームでのケーブルの配線 2 必要に応じて、システムステータスインジケータケーブルをシステム背面パネルのコネクタに 接続します。 システムステータスインジケータケーブルをケーブルマネージメントアームに通し、 LED が付いた端をケーブルマネージメントアームの端のスロットに挿入します。 3 I/O ケーブルコネクタと電源ケーブルコネクタを、システム背面パネルの各コネクタに接続し ます。 ケーブル接続の詳細については、ご使用のシステムの『はじめに』、または『ハードウェア オーナーズマニュアル』を参照してください。 メモ:電源装置の背面にあるストレインリリーフループを使用して、電源ケーブルのストレイン リリーフに役立てます。 4 ラックキットに付属のタイラップを使用して、ラック内の隣接するシステムの邪魔にならない ようにケーブルを束ねます。 1 ケーブルマネージメントアーム 2 取り付け済みのタイラップ 3 ケーブルマネージメントアー ム保持ラッチ 4 バスケットリッド 5 システムステータスインジ ケータケーブルのコネクタ 6 ベルクロストラップ 7 取り付け済みのタイラップ 4 5 2 3 6 システム背面 1 74 柱型ラックの取り付け 145 5 ケーブルをケーブルマネージメントアームのバスケットに通します。 6 ヒンジの動きを妨げないように、必要に応じてケーブルのたるみを調節し、束ねたケーブルを 縦方向のベルクロストラップで固定します(図 1-14 を参照)。 7 内部の端とケーブルマネージメントアームのヒンジ部分にある取り付け済みのタイラップを使 用して、ケーブルマネージメントアームチャネル内の束ねたケーブルを固定します (図 1-14 を参照)。 8 ケーブルバスケットリッドを閉じます。 9 システムの前面を前面垂直レールに固定している蝶ネジを外します。 10 システムをラックから引き出したりラックに押し戻したりして、ケーブルが正しく取り付け られているか、ケーブルマネージメントアームの動きでケーブルが絡まったり、引きつった りしないか、またはアームの動きが妨げられていないか確認します。必要に応じて、ケーブ ルマネージメントアームのバスケット内のケーブルの位置を調整します。 メモ:システムを引き出せる限度まで引き出すと、伸びきった位置でスライドアセンブリにロッ クがかかります。ロックを解除するには、スライドの側面にあるスライドリリースラッチを押し ながら、システムをラックに押し込みます。 11 ケーブルが正しく配線できたら、システムをラックに完全に押し込みます。 12 トレイ上のケーブルマネージメントアーム保持ラッチを押し上げてアームを固定します (図 1-14 を参照)。 ラックからのシステムの取り外し スライドレールを使用するシステムの取り外し システムをラックから取り外すには、次の手順を実行します。 1 システムおよび接続されている周辺機器の電源を切り、システムを電源コンセントから外 します。 2 I/O ケーブルコネクタと電源ケーブルコネクタを、システム背面パネルの各コネクタから取り 外します。 3 正面シャーシパネルの両側でシステムのシャーシをラックに固定している蝶ネジを緩めます。 4 レールが引き出された位置でロックするまで、システムをラックから引き出します。 5 各レールのフロントリリースラッチを引き上げて(図 1-9 を参照)、システムを前に引き出し ます。 6 システムをラックから完全に引き出します。146 4 柱型ラックの取り付け スタティックレールを使用するシステムの取り外し システムをラックから取り外すには、次の手順を実行します。 1 システムおよび接続されている周辺機器の電源を切り、システムを電源コンセントから 外します。 2 正面シャーシパネルの両側でシステムのシャーシをラックに固定している蝶ネジを緩めます。 3 システムからすべてのケーブルを外します。 4 リリースラッチが掛かって止まるところまで、システムをラックから引き出します。 5 システム両側のリリースラッチを押し下げます(図 1-10 を参照)。 6 システムをラックから完全に引き出します。2 柱型ラックの取り付け 147 2 柱型ラックの取り付け 2 柱型ラックキットは、電気通信機器設備などで使用される 2 柱型オープンフレームリレー ラックにシステムを取り付けるために使用します。7.62 cm および 15.24 cm 幅 2 柱型ラック (取り付け穴の間隔はユニバーサルまたはワイド)に対応しています。このキットは、センター マウントまたはフラッシュマウントのどちらの構成にも取り付けられます。 2 柱型リレーラックは、ラックメーカーや業界規格によって規定または認可された床面または 壁面用の留め具や支柱を使用して、床面、天井、上部壁面、あるいは適切であれば隣接する ラックなどに正しく固定する必要があります。取り付けを開始する前に、2 柱型ラックメー カーのマニュアルを参照して、警告事項を確認してください。 警告:正しい位置にしっかりと固定されていない 2 柱型オープンフレームリレーラックには、 システムを取り付けないでください。システムの損傷や作業者および周囲の人々のけがを招 くおそれがあります。 安全にお使いいただくために ご自身の身体の安全を守り、システムおよび作業環境を保護するために、以下の安全に関する ガイドラインに従ってください。安全に関する詳細な情報については、『製品情報ガイド』を参 照してください。 安全について:システムのラックへの取り付け ラックの安定性や安全性に関して、以下の点にご注意ください。また、特定の注意文および手 順については、システムおよびラック付属のラック取り付けマニュアルを参照してください。 システムはラックの一部とみなします。したがって、「コンポーネント」には、さまざまな周辺 機器やサポートハードウェアと同様に、システムも含まれます。 警告:ラックにシステム / コンポーネントを取り付けた後は、一度に 2 台以上のコンポーネントをスライド アセンブリのラックから引き出さないでください。重みでラックが転倒し、大けがをするおそれがあります。 メモ:ご使用のシステムは、独立型のユニットとして、また、カスタマーラックキットで構成さ れる Dell ラックキャビネットに取り付けるコンポーネントとして、その安全性が保証されていま す。それ以外のラックキャビネットにシステムおよびラックキットを取り付ける場合は、安全性 が保証されません。最終的に組み合わせたシステムおよびラックについては、ユーザーの責任に おいて、適用される安全基準および地域の電気規約の要件に適合することを確認してください。 デルでは、このような組み合わせに関連するいかなる保証責任も負いません。148 2 柱型ラックの取り付け • システムラックキットは、トレーニングを受けたサービス技術者がラックに取り付けます。 キットを別のラックに取り付ける場合は、そのラックがデルのラック仕様に適合していること を確認してください。 警告:大型ラックを 1 人で移動しないでください。ラックの高さと重さを考慮して、少なくとも 2 人 以上でラックを移動することをお勧めします。 • ラックには必ず下から上へと、最も重いものから順に設置してください。 • コンポーネントをラックから引き出す前に、ラックが水平で安定していることを確認してくだ さい。 • レールリリースラッチを押してコンポーネントをラックから出し入れするときは、スライド レールに指をはさまれないように注意してください。 • ラックに電力を送る AC 分岐回路に過重電流を流さないでください。ラックの総負荷が分岐回 路定格の 80% を超えないようにしてください。 • ラック内のコンポーネントが十分に通気されることを確認してください。 • ラックに取り付けたコンポーネントの作業中に、他のコンポーネントの上に乗ったり、足をか けたりしないでください。 作業を開始する前に システムのラックへの取り付けを開始する前に、本書の「安全にお使いいただくために」およびご 使用のシステムの『製品情報ガイド』の安全にお使いいただくための注意事項を参照し、補足情報 を確認してください。 警告:複数のシステムをラックに取り付ける場合は、1 台のシステムの取り付け手順を完了してから、 次のシステムの取り付けに進んでください。 メモ:システム自体の設置方法については、「「ラックへのシステムの取り付け」(157ページ)」を参 照してください。 安全に関する重要な注意 システムをラックに取り付けるときは、次の各項の安全に関する注意を遵守してください。 警告:作業者は、自分自身と周囲の人々を保護するために、本書の手順に必ず従ってください。本シ ステムは非常に重量があり大きいため、ご自身や周囲の人々のけがを防ぐために準備と計画を適切に 行うことが重要です。これは、特にシステムをラックの高い位置に取り付ける場合に重要になります。 警告:別のシステム用に設計されたラックキットのコンポーネントは取り付けないでください。ご使 用のシステム用のラックキットのみをお使いください。別のシステム用のラックキットを使用すると、 システムが損傷し、ご自身や周囲の人々がけがをするおそれがあります。2 柱型ラックの取り付け 149 推奨する工具および備品 • #2 プラスドライバ • 3/8 インチレンチまたはナットドライバ(ブラケットをフラッシュマウント構成に変更す る場合) • 取り付け穴に印を付けるために使用するマスキングテープまたはフェルトペン ラックキットの内容 2 柱型ラックキットの付属品は次のとおりです(図 2-1 参照)。 • マウントレール 1 組 • 12-24 x 0.5 インチプラスなべネジ(8) • 取り外し可能タイラップ(2)(図 2-1 には記載なし) 図 2-1 2 柱型ラックキットの部品 1 12-24 x 0.5 インチプラスなべネジ(8) 2 15.24 cm 幅、センターマウン ト、ネジ付きスタッド 3 7.62 cm 幅、センターマウン ト、ネジ付きスタッド 4 調整可能な取り付けフランジ 5 センターマウント取り付けフ ランジ 6 15.24 cm 幅、フラッシュマウ ント、ネジ付きスタッド 7 7.62 cm 幅、フラッシュマウント、 ネジ付きスタッド 8 フラッシュマウント取り付け フランジ 9 マウントレール(2) 9 1 7 8 6 5 3 2 4150 2 柱型ラックの取り付け 取り付け手順 2 柱型ラックキットを取り付けるには、次の手順を番号順に実行します。 1 ラックへの印付け • ユニバーサル間隔で穴があるラック • ワイド間隔で穴があるラック 2 ラックへのマウントレールの取り付け • センターマウント • フラッシュマウント 3 ラックへのシステムの取り付け 4 ケーブルの配線 ラックへの印付け 2 柱型ラックに取り付ける各システムの上下には、1 U(44mm)の空間を空ける必要があります。 ユニバーサル間隔で穴があるラック ユニバーサル間隔で穴があるラックには、1 ラックユニット(1 U)ごとに 3 つの穴が交互に並んで います。穴の中心から中心まで距離は、前面および背面垂直レールの 1 U スペースの一番上の穴か ら計測して 15.9 mm、15.9 mm、12.7 mm となっています(図 2-2 を参照)。 図 2-2 2 柱型オープンフレームリレーラックのユニバーサル間隔の穴 12.7 mm 15.9 mm 15.9 mm 1 U(44 mm)2 柱型ラックの取り付け 151 ワイド間隔で穴があるラック ワイド間隔で穴があるラックには、ラックユニットごとに 2 つの穴が交互に並んでいます。穴の中 心から中心までの距離は、前面および背面の垂直支柱の 1 U スペースの一番上の穴から計測して 31.7 mm、12.7 mm となっています(図 2-3 を参照)。 図 2-3 2 柱型オープンフレームリレーラックのワイド間隔の穴 ラックに印を付けるには、次の手順を実行します。 1 前面垂直レール上で、2 柱型ラックに取り付けるシステムの底部の位置を決め、印を付けます。 各 1 U スペースの底部は、レールの穴の一番間隔が狭い金属部分の中央になります。 メモ:ワイド間隔で穴があるラックの場合は、手順 3 に進みます。 2 最初に印を付けた場所から 44 mm 上(あるいはユニバーサル間隔で穴があるラックでは、 ラックの穴を上に 3 つ数えた場所)に印を付けます(図 2-2 を参照)。 ユニバーサル間隔で穴があるラックの垂直方向の各 1 U スペースには(一番上の穴から計測し て)穴の中心間距離が 15.9 mm、15.9 mm、12.7 mm の間隔で 3 つの穴があります (図 2-2 を参照)。 メモ:ユニバーサル間隔で穴があるラックの場合、ラックの印付け手順はこれで完了です。 3 最初に印を付けた場所から 44 mm 上(あるいはワイド規格のラックでは次の上の穴の場所) に印を付けます(図 2-3 を参照)。 ワイド間隔で穴があるラックの垂直方向の各 1 U(44 mm)のスペースには、(一番上の穴か ら計測して)穴の中心間距離が 31.7 mm の間隔で 2 つの穴があります(図 2-3 を参照)。 1 U(44 mm) 12.7 mm 31.7 mm152 2 柱型ラックの取り付け マウントレールの取り付け マウントレールは、ユニバーサル間隔(図 2-2 参照)またはワイド間隔(図 2-3 参照)のどちらの 穴がある 2 柱型オープンフレームラックにも取り付けることができます。また、マウントレール は、フラッシュマウント構成またはセンターマウント構成のどちらでも取り付けることができます。 警告:このラックキットを使用して他のシステムを取り付けないでください。ご使用のシステム用の ラックキットのみをお使いください。別のシステム用のラックキットを使用すると、システムが損傷し、 ご自身や周囲の人々がけがをするおそれがあります。 センターマウント構成での取り付け 2 柱型ラックキットは、7.62 cm 幅センターマウント用のブラケット構成で出荷されています。 マウントレールの付属部品については、図 2-1 を参照してください。取り付けを完了するには、 次の手順を実行します。 1 右側のマウントレールを見つけてください。調整可能な取り付けブラケットを押し、 マウントレールの後方へ移動します(図 2-4 を参照)。 2 右側のマウントレールを、2 柱型ラックの印を付けた場所に合わせ、センターマウントの調整 可能な取り付けブラケットを前方へ押して 2 柱型ラックの支柱に押しつけ、4 本の 12-24 x 0.5 インチプラスなべネジを使用して取り付けフランジと取り付けブラケットを固定します (図 2-4 を参照)。 3 手順 1 と 手順 2 を繰り返して、左側のマウントレールをラックに取り付けます。2 柱型ラックの取り付け 153 図 2-4 センターマウント構成でのマウントレールの取り付け フラッシュマウント構成での取り付け 2 柱型ラックキットは、7.62 cm 幅センターマウント用のブラケット構成で出荷されています。 マウントレールの付属部品については、図 2-1 を参照してください。2 柱型ラックでフラッシュマ ウント構成にするためには、次の手順でマウントレールを準備します。 1 滑らかな作業面に、レールの前端を手前にして 2 本のマウントレールを並べます (図 2-5 を参照)。 2 3/8 インチレンチまたはナットドライバを使って、調整可能な取り付けブラケッ トから 2 個のナットを取り外します(図 2-5 を参照)。 1 2 柱型オープンフレームラック 2 12-24 x 0.5 インチプラスなべネジ (レール 1 本につき 4 本) 3 センターマウント取り付 けフランジ 2 マウントレール(2) 4 システムレール(2) 6 リリースラッチ 2 1 4 6 3 5154 2 柱型ラックの取り付け 3 ブラケットを取り外し、7.62 cm または 15.24 cm 幅のどちらかの取り付け用ネジ付きスタッ ドに取り付けます(図 2-5 を参照)。 4 手順 2 で取り外した 2 個のナットを調整可能な取り付けブラケットに取り付け、手締めで固定 します(図 2-5 を参照)。 5 手順 2~手順 4 を繰り返して、反対側のマウントレールも同様に準備します。 図 2-5 フラッシュマウント構成での調整可能な取り付けブラケットの準備 6 左側のマウントレールを印を付けた位置に合わせ、フラッシュマウント取り付けフランジ を 2 柱型ラックの支柱の前面にぴったり合わせて置き、2 本の 12-24 x 0.5 インチプラスなべネ ジを使って支柱に固定します(図 2-6 を参照)。 1 ナット(ブラケット 1 個に つき 2 個) 2 調整可能な取り付けブラケット 3 7.62 cm 幅、フラッシュマウント、 ネジ付きスタッド 4 フラッシュマウント取り 付けフランジ 1 4 3 22 柱型ラックの取り付け 155 7 調整可能な取り付けブラケットを 2 柱型ラックの支柱の背面まで押し込み、 2 本の 12-24 x 0.5 インチプラスなべネジを使って支柱に固定します( 図 2-6 を参照)。 8 手順 6 と 手順 7 を繰り返して、右側のマウントレールをラックに取り付けます。 9 3/8 インチレンチまたはナットドライバで、両方のマウントレールのブラケットに取り付けた ナットをすべて締め付けます。 図 2-6 フラッシュマウント構成でのマウントレールの取り付け 1 2 柱型オープンフレームラック 2 12-24 x 0.5 インチプラスなべネジ (レール 1 本につき 4 本) 3 マウントレール(2) 2 1 3156 2 柱型ラックの取り付け シャーシのスタティックレールモジュールの取り付け メモ:シャーシにスタティックレールモジュールを取り付けたり取り外したりするのに、オプション の前面ベゼルを取り外す必要はありません。 1 レールモジュールを取り付けるには、レールモジュール上の 3 つの鍵穴スロットと、それに対 応するシステム側面の肩付きネジの位置を確認します(図 2-7 を参照)。 2 肩付きネジが鍵穴スロットの丸い部分に入るようにレールモジュールをシステム側面に合わ せ、モジュールをシステムの背面方向にスライドさせます。 3 手順 1 と 2 を繰り返して、もう 1 つのレールモジュールを取り付けます。 シャーシからレールモジュールを取り外すには、リリースラッチを押し上げ、レールを前方にスラ イドさせて、レールモジュールをシャーシから外します。 図 2-7 スタティックレールシャーシモジュールの取り付けと取り外し 1 鍵穴スロット(6) 2 肩付きネジ(6) 3 リリースラッチ 4 レールモジュール(2) 5 システム 4 2 3 1 52 柱型ラックの取り付け 157 ラックへのシステムの取り付け 警告:複数のシステムを取り付ける場合は、1 台目のシステムをラックの使用可能な最下段に取り付 けてください。 1 片方の手をシステム前面の下に、もう片方の手をシステム背面の下に置きます。 2 システムを持ち上げて、システム側面のレールがシステム後方でラックのマウントレールには まるように位置を合わせます。 警告:システムの大きさと重さを考慮して、マウントレールへのシステムの取り付けは 1 人では行わ ないでください。 3 システムをマウントレールの一番奥まで押し込みます。 4 正面パネルの両側にある蝶ネジを差し込んで締め付け、システムのシャーシをラックに固定し ます。 ラックからのシステムの取り外し システムをラックから取り外すには、次の手順を実行します。 1 システムおよび接続されている周辺機器の電源を切り、システムを電源コンセントから外しま す。 2 正面シャーシパネルの両側でシステムのシャーシをラックに固定している蝶ネジを緩めます。 3 システムからすべてのケーブルを外します。 4 リリースラッチが掛かって止まるところまで、システムをラックから引き出します。 5 システム両側のリリースラッチを押し下げます(図 1-10 を参照)。 6 システムをラックから完全に引き出します。158 2 柱型ラックの取り付け索引 159 索引 2 柱型ラックキット キットの内容 , 149 工具と備品 , 149 マウントレール , 152 ラックへの印付け , 150 4 柱型ラック システムの取り外し , 145, 157 4 柱型ラックキット VersaRails キットの 内容 , 128-129 工具と備品 , 127 V VersaRails キットの内容 , 128-129, 141 取り付け , 134, 137, 139, 156 VersaRails のラック 要件 , 127 あ 安全にお使いいただく ために , 125, 147 き キットの内容 2 柱型ラック , 149 VersaRails, 128-129, 141 け ケーブル , 145 ケーブルマネージメント アーム , 142, 144-145 こ 工具と備品 2 柱型ラックキット , 149 4 柱型ラックキット , 127 し システムの取り外し 4 柱型ラック , 145, 157 す 垂直レール , 131-130 スタビライザ , 127 せ センターマウント構成 , 152 と 扉 取り外し , 130 取り付け , 142 取り付け 2 柱型ラックキット , 147 2 柱型ラックへのマウント レール , 152-153 4 柱型ラックキット , 135 4 柱型ラックへのシステムの 取り付け , 138, 157 RapidRails マウント ール , 135 VersaRails マウント レール , 134, 137, 139, 156 ケーブルマネージメント アーム , 142 スタティックレール モジュール , 134, 156160 索引 160 索引 な 内容のリスト 2 柱型ラックキット , 149 VersaRails キット , 128-129 ふ フラッシュマウント 構成 , 153 ら ラックスタビライザ , 127 ラック扉の取り付け , 142 ラック取り付け時の 注意事項 , 126, 148 ラックへの印付け 2 柱型ラックキット , 150-151 4 柱型ラックキット , 130 ラックユニット , 131www.dell.com | support.dell.com Guía de instalación del rackNotas, avisos y precauciones NOTA: una NOTA proporciona información importante que le ayudará a utilizar mejor el ordenador. AVISO: un AVISO indica la posibilidad de daños en el hardware o la pérdida de datos, e informa de cómo evitar el problema. PRECAUCIÓN: un mensaje de PRECAUCIÓN indica el riesgo de daños materiales, lesiones o incluso la muerte. ____________________ La información contenida en este documento puede modificarse sin previo aviso. © 2005 Dell Inc. Reservados todos los derechos. Queda estrictamente prohibida la reproducción de este documento en cualquier forma sin la autorización por escrito de Dell Inc. Marcas comerciales utilizadas en este texto: Dell, el logotipo de DELL, RapidRails y VersaRails son marcas comerciales de Dell Inc. Otras marcas y otros nombres comerciales pueden utilizarse en este documento para hacer referencia a las entidades que los poseen o a sus productos. Dell Inc. renuncia a cualquier interés sobre la propiedad de marcas y nombres comerciales que no sean los suyos. Noviembre de 2005 P/N YC588 Rev. A00Contenido 163 Contenido 1 Instalación del rack de cuatro postes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Instrucciones de seguridad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 SEGURIDAD: Montaje de sistemas en rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Instrucciones generales de instalación. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Antes de comenzar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Información importante sobre seguridad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Requisitos del rack para VersaRails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Pies estabilizadores del rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Herramientas y material recomendados . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Contenido del kit de rack de rieles deslizantes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Contenido del kit de rack de rieles estáticos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Tareas de instalación . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Extracción de las puertas del rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Marcado del rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Configuración de los ensamblajes de rieles deslizantes (únicamente en los kits de rieles deslizantes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Instalación de los módulos de rieles estáticos del chasis (únicamente en los kits de rieles estáticos) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Instalación de los rieles de montaje en el rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Instalación del sistema en el rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Instalación de un sistema con rieles deslizantes . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Instalación de un sistema con rieles estáticos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Colocación de las puertas del rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Instalación de la bandeja y el brazo para tendido de cables (únicamente en los kits de rieles deslizantes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Instalación de la bandeja. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Instalación del brazo para tendido de cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Cableado . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Extracción del sistema del rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Extracción de un sistema con rieles deslizantes. . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Extracción de un sistema con rieles estáticos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186164 Contenido 2 Instalación del rack de dos postes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Instrucciones de seguridad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 SEGURIDAD: Montaje de sistemas en rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Antes de comenzar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Información importante sobre seguridad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Herramientas y material recomendados . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Contenido del kit de rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Tareas de instalación . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Marcado del rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Racks con separación universal entre orificios . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Racks con separación ancha entre orificios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Instalación de los rieles de montaje . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Montaje centrado. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Montaje a ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Instalación de los módulos de rieles estáticos del chasis . . . . . . . . . . 197 Instalación del sistema en el rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Extracción del sistema del rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Índice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199Instalación del rack de cuatro postes 165 Instalación del rack de cuatro postes Instrucciones de seguridad Siga estas pautas de seguridad para garantizar su propia seguridad y proteger el sistema y el entorno de trabajo frente a posibles daños. Para obtener información completa sobre seguridad y normativas, consulte la Guía de información del producto que se entrega con el sistema. La información de la garantía puede incluirse en este documento o en un documento aparte. SEGURIDAD: Montaje de sistemas en rack Tenga en cuenta las precauciones siguientes para garantizar la estabilidad y la seguridad del rack. Consulte también la documentación de instalación del rack incluida con el sistema y el rack para ver las instrucciones y los procedimientos específicos de precaución. Los sistemas se consideran componentes de un rack. Por lo tanto, “componente” se refiere a cualquier sistema, así como a los distintos periféricos o al hardware de soporte. PRECAUCIÓN: antes de instalar sistemas en un rack, instale los estabilizadores frontales y laterales para racks individuales, o bien los estabilizadores frontales para varios racks unidos. Si no se instalan estabilizadores antes de realizar el montaje de los sistemas, el rack puede volcarse, y ello puede producir lesiones personales. Por lo tanto, instale siempre los estabilizadores antes de instalar los componentes en el rack. Una vez que haya instalado el sistema o los componentes en el rack, no extraiga nunca del rack más de un componente a la vez sobre sus ensamblajes deslizantes. El peso de más de un componente extendido puede provocar que el rack se vuelque y ello puede producir lesiones graves. NOTA: este sistema tiene el certificado de seguridad de una unidad independiente y como un componente para uso en un armario rack Dell con el kit de rack para clientes. La instalación del sistema y del kit de rack en otros armarios rack no ha sido aprobada por ninguna agencia de seguridad. Es su responsabilidad asegurarse de que la combinación final de sistema y rack cumpla los estándares de seguridad correspondientes y los requisitos de códigos de electricidad locales. Dell declina todas las responsabilidades y garantías con relación a tales combinaciones. • Los kits de rack del sistema están diseñados para ser instalados en un rack por técnicos de servicio cualificados. Si instala el kit en cualquier otro rack, cerciórese de que éste cumpla las especificaciones de un rack Dell. PRECAUCIÓN: no mueva los racks sin la ayuda de otra persona. Debido a la altura y el peso del rack, se recomienda un mínimo de dos personas para realizar dicha tarea. • Antes de manipular el rack, asegúrese de que los estabilizadores estén fijados al rack, de que lleguen hasta el suelo y de que todo el peso del rack descanse sobre el suelo. Antes de trabajar en el rack, instale los estabilizadores frontales y laterales en caso de un único rack, o bien los estabilizadores frontales en caso de varios racks unidos.166 Instalación del rack de cuatro postes • Cargue siempre el rack desde la parte inferior hacia arriba, colocando en primer lugar el elemento más pesado. • El rack debe estar nivelado y estable antes de extender un componente. • Tenga cuidado al presionar los pestillos de liberación de los rieles de componentes y al extraer o introducir un componente del rack, puesto que sus dedos pueden quedar aprisionados en los rieles deslizantes. • No sobrecargue el circuito de alimentación de CA que suministra alimentación al rack. La carga total del rack no debe ser superior al 80 % de la corriente nominal del circuito. • Los componentes del rack deben disponer de una ventilación suficiente. • No suba sobre ningún componente ni lo utilice como escalón para realizar operaciones en los componentes de un rack. Instrucciones generales de instalación En esta guía de instalación se proporcionan instrucciones para técnicos de servicio especializados que instalen uno o más sistemas en un armario rack. El kit de rack RapidRails™ se puede montar en todos los armarios rack del fabricante sin herramientas, y el kit de rack VersaRails™ se puede montar en la mayoría de los armarios rack estándar del sector. Los procedimientos para instalar los kits de rack RapidRails y VersaRails son similares. Para cada sistema que se montará en el armario rack se precisa un kit de rack. Esta sección contiene procedimientos para los kits de rack de cuatro postes siguientes: • Kit de rack de rieles deslizantes • Kit de rack de rieles estáticos (versiones RapidRails y VersaRails) Consulte la sección “Instalación del rack de dos postes” en la página 187 para obtener instrucciones sobre cómo instalar un kit de rieles estáticos en un rack de dos postes. Antes de comenzar Antes de montar el sistema en el rack, lea detenidamente la sección “Instrucciones de seguridad” de esta guía, así como las instrucciones de seguridad que se incluyen en la Guía de información del producto para obtener información adicional. PRECAUCIÓN: cuando instale varios sistemas en un rack, realice todos los procedimientos para un sistema antes de instalar el siguiente sistema. PRECAUCIÓN: los armarios rack pueden ser muy pesados, pero se mueven con facilidad gracias a las ruedas. No disponen de frenos. Preste extremo cuidado cuando mueva un armario rack. Si traslada el armario rack, pliegue primero los pies niveladores. Evite rampas o inclinaciones largas o pronunciadas para evitar perder el control del armario. Extienda los pies niveladores para sostener el armario y evitar que se desplace. NOTA: para obtener instrucciones sobre la instalación del sistema, consulte “Instalación del sistema en el rack” en la página 178.Instalación del rack de cuatro postes 167 Información importante sobre seguridad Tenga en cuenta las precauciones de seguridad descritas en los apartados siguientes al instalar el sistema en el rack. PRECAUCIÓN: debe seguir estrictamente los procedimientos que se explican en este documento para protegerse a sí mismo y a otras personas que puedan verse involucradas. El sistema puede tener una envergadura y un peso considerables, por lo que son importantes una preparación y una planificación adecuadas para evitar lesiones personales. Esta precaución es aún más importante cuando se montan sistemas en la parte alta del rack. PRECAUCIÓN: no instale componentes de kit de rack que estén diseñados para otro sistema. Utilice únicamente el kit de rack correspondiente a su sistema. Si utiliza un kit de rack para otro sistema, pueden producirse daños en el sistema y lesiones personales. Requisitos del rack para VersaRails AVISO: el kit de rack VersaRails lo deben montar únicamente técnicos de servicio cualificados en un rack que cumpla las especificaciones siguientes: ANSI/EIA-310-D-92, IEC 297 y DIN 41494. Se precisa un kit de rack para cada sistema que se instale en el rack. Pies estabilizadores del rack PRECAUCIÓN: antes de instalar sistemas en un rack, instale los estabilizadores frontales y laterales para racks individuales, o bien los estabilizadores frontales para varios racks unidos. Si no se instalan estabilizadores antes de realizar el montaje de los sistemas, el rack puede volcarse, y ello puede producir lesiones personales. Por lo tanto, instale siempre los estabilizadores antes de instalar los componentes en el rack. Los pies estabilizadores ayudan a evitar que el rack vuelque. Consulte la documentación que se facilita con el armario rack para obtener instrucciones sobre la instalación y la fijación de los pies estabilizadores. Herramientas y material recomendados Para montar el sistema en un armario rack de cuatro postes, necesita los elementos siguientes: • Destornillador Phillips del nº 2 • Cinta adhesiva o rotulador de punta de fieltro para marcar los orificios de montaje que se utilizarán168 Instalación del rack de cuatro postes Contenido del kit de rack de rieles deslizantes • Un par de ensamblajes deslizantes (convertibles a la configuración RapidRails o VersaRails) • Un brazo para tendido de cables • Una bandeja • Un cable de indicador de estado (si procede) • Abrazaderas para fijar los cables al brazo para tendido de cables • Ocho tornillos Phillips con arandela 10-32 x 0,5 pulgadas (utilizados únicamente en la configuración VersaRails) NOTA: los tornillos no métricos que se describen en las ilustraciones y en los procedimientos se identifican por el tamaño y el número de roscas por pulgada. Por ejemplo, un tornillo Phillips del nº 10 con 32 roscas por pulgada se identifica como un tornillo 10-32. Figura 1-1. Contenido del kit de rack de rieles deslizantes 1 Bandeja 2 Ensamblajes deslizantes (2) 3 8 tornillos Phillips con arandela 10-32 x 0,5 pulgadas (únicamente en la configuración VersaRails) 4 Abrazaderas 5 Cable de indicador de estado (si procede) 6 Brazo para tendido de cables 1 2 3 5 6 4Instalación del rack de cuatro postes 169 Contenido del kit de rack de rieles estáticos • Un par de rieles de montaje estáticos con soportes VersaRails o RapidRails • Un par de módulos de rieles estáticos de chasis • 8 tornillos Phillips con arandela 10-32 x 0,5 pulgadas (sólo en los kits VersaRails) • 2 abrazaderas desmontables (no se muestran en la figura 1-2) NOTA: los tornillos no métricos que se describen en las ilustraciones y en los procedimientos se identifican por el tamaño y el número de roscas por pulgada. Por ejemplo, un tornillo Phillips del nº 10 con 32 roscas por pulgada se identifica como un tornillo 10-32. Figura 1-2. Contenido del kit de rack de rieles estáticos 1 8 tornillos Phillips con arandela 10-32 x 0,5 pulgadas (únicamente en los kits VersaRails) 2 Rieles de montaje estáticos (2) 3 Módulos de rieles estáticos de chasis (2) FRONT L 1 3 2170 Instalación del rack de cuatro postes Tareas de instalación La instalación del kit de rack implica realizar las tareas siguientes (que se describen en detalle en las secciones siguientes) en el orden indicado: 1 Extracción de las puertas del rack 2 Marcado del rack 3 Configuración de los ensamblajes de rieles deslizantes (únicamente en los kits de rieles deslizantes) 4 Instalación de los módulos de rieles estáticos del chasis (únicamente en los kits de rieles estáticos) 5 Instalación de los rieles de montaje en el rack 6 Instalación del sistema en el rack 7 Instalación de la bandeja y el brazo para tendido de cables (únicamente en los kits de rieles deslizantes) 8 Cableado 9 Colocación de las puertas del rack Extracción de las puertas del rack Para extraer las puertas, consulte los procedimientos correspondientes en la documentación suministrada con el armario rack. PRECAUCIÓN: debido al tamaño y el peso de las puertas del armario rack, nunca debe intentar montarlas ni desmontarlas una sola persona. PRECAUCIÓN: guarde las dos puertas en un lugar donde, en caso de caer accidentalmente, no puedan lesionar a nadie. Marcado del rack Para un sistema 1 U, debe asignar 1 U (44 mm) de espacio vertical para cada sistema que instale en el rack. Los armarios rack que cumplen los estándares EIA-310 tienen un patrón alterno de tres orificios por unidad de rack con un espacio entre orificios de centro a centro (empezando por el orificio superior de un espacio 1 U) de 15,9 mm, 15,9 mm y 12,7 mm para los rieles verticales frontal y posterior (vea la figura 1-3). Los armarios rack pueden tener orificios redondos o cuadrados. NOTA: los rieles verticales se pueden marcar con líneas horizontales y números en incrementos de 1 U. Si lo desea, puede anotar en un papel las marcas numéricas del riel vertical del rack. No es necesario marcar el rack con rotulador ni con cinta adhesiva. Instalación del rack de cuatro postes 171 Figura 1-3. Una unidad de rack PRECAUCIÓN: si va a instalar más de un sistema, instale los rieles de montaje de modo que el primer sistema quede instalado en la posición más baja disponible en el rack. Para marcar el rack, realice los pasos siguientes: 1 Coloque una marca (o una cinta) en los rieles verticales frontales del rack en los que desee colocar la parte inferior del sistema que está instalando en el rack. La parte inferior de cada espacio 1 U se encuentra en el centro de la zona metálica más estrecha entre orificios (marcados con una línea horizontal en algunos armarios rack; vea la figura 1-4). 2 Coloque una marca a 44 mm por encima de la marca original que ha realizado (o cuente tres orificios en un rack que cumpla los estándares EIA-310) y marque los rieles verticales frontales del rack con un rotulador de punta de fieltro o con cinta adhesiva (si ha contado los orificios, coloque una marca justo encima del orificio superior). Esta marca o trozo de cinta indica dónde se va a situar el borde superior del sistema en los rieles verticales (vea la figura 1-4). 1 U (44 mm) 12,7 mm 15,9 mm 15,9 mm 12,7 mm172 Instalación del rack de cuatro postes Figura 1-4. Marcado de los rieles verticales 1 Marcas en el riel vertical (2) 1Instalación del rack de cuatro postes 173 Configuración de los ensamblajes de rieles deslizantes (únicamente en los kits de rieles deslizantes) El ensamblaje de rieles deslizantes presenta un soporte de montaje giratorio en cada extremo del riel. La posición del soporte determina si el ensamblaje de rieles se utiliza como RapidRail o como VersaRail. El lado RapidRail del soporte tiene un gancho y un pestillo que lo fijan al riel vertical. El lado VersaRail del soporte tiene tres orificios y se fija al riel vertical mediante tornillos. NOTA: el kit de rack se suministra con los ensamblajes de rieles deslizantes en la configuración RapidRails. Para girar el soporte de montaje y cambiar los rieles de montaje de RapidRails a VersaRails (vea la figura 1-5): 1 Levante la palanca de liberación del soporte de montaje giratorio. 2 Gire el soporte y levántelo para sacarlo de los dos topes. 3 Continúe girando el soporte 180 grados hasta que pueda volver a colocar las muescas sobre los topes. 4 Gire el soporte en la dirección contraria sobre los topes hasta que el soporte encaje en su sitio. Figura 1-5. Cambio de la posición del soporte de montaje giratorio 1 Soporte giratorio 2 Palanca de liberación 3 Topes (2) 4 Muescas (2) 5 Superficie de montaje del soporte (configuración RapidRails) 1 2 4 3 5174 Instalación del rack de cuatro postes Instalación de los módulos de rieles estáticos del chasis (únicamente en los kits de rieles estáticos) NOTA: no es necesario extraer el embellecedor frontal opcional para instalar o extraer los módulos de rieles estáticos del chasis. 1 Para instalar un módulo de rieles, localice las tres ranuras en forma de cerradura del módulo de rieles y los tornillos de pivote correspondientes en el lateral del sistema (vea la figura 1-6). 2 Coloque el módulo de rieles al lado del sistema de modo que los tornillos de pivote se ajusten a la parte redonda de las ranuras y, a continuación, inserte el módulo hacia la parte posterior del sistema. 3 Repita los pasos 1 y 2 para instalar el otro módulo de rieles. Para extraer un módulo de rieles del chasis, tire del pestillo de liberación, deslice el riel hacia adelante y extraiga el módulo de rieles del chasis. Figura 1-6. Instalación y extracción de los módulos de rieles estáticos del chasis 1 Ranuras en forma de cerradura (6) 2 Tornillos de pivote (6) 3 Pestillo de liberación 4 Módulos de rieles (2) 5 Sistema 4 2 3 1 5Instalación del rack de cuatro postes 175 Instalación de los rieles de montaje en el rack NOTA: las instrucciones siguientes corresponden tanto a los rieles de montaje deslizantes como a los estáticos. Instalación de los rieles de montaje RapidRails 1 En la parte frontal del armario rack, coloque uno de los rieles de montaje de forma que la superficie de montaje del soporte quede situada entre las marcas o la cinta que ha colocado (o las posiciones numeradas) en los rieles verticales de la sección “Marcado del rack” (vea la figura 1-7). El gancho de montaje superior de la superficie de montaje de soporte frontal debe entrar en el orificio superior entre las marcas realizadas en los rieles verticales. Figura 1-7. Instalación de los rieles de montaje RapidRails 1 Ganchos de montaje (2) 2 Pulsadores (2) 3 Rieles de montaje (2) Parte frontal del rack 1 2 3176 Instalación del rack de cuatro postes 2 Empuje el riel de montaje hasta que el gancho de montaje entre en el orificio cuadrado correspondiente. A continuación, presione hacia abajo la superficie de montaje del soporte hasta que el gancho de montaje quede encajado y el botón de presión salga por el orificio cuadrado inferior (vea la figura 1-7). 3 En la parte posterior del armario, tire hacia atrás de la superficie de montaje hasta que el gancho de montaje encaje en el orificio cuadrado superior y, a continuación, empuje hacia abajo la superficie hasta que el gancho de montaje quede encajado y el botón de presión salga por el orificio cuadrado inferior. 4 Repita del paso 1 al paso 3 para el riel de montaje del otro lado del rack. 5 Asegúrese de que los rieles de montaje estén montados en la misma posición vertical en ambos lados del rack. Instalación de los rieles de montaje VersaRails 1 En la parte frontal del armario rack, coloque uno de los rieles de montaje de forma que la superficie de montaje del soporte quede situada entre las marcas que ha colocado (o las posiciones numeradas) en los rieles verticales en la sección “Marcado del rack” (vea la figura 1-8). Los tres orificios de la parte frontal de la superficie de montaje deben alinearse con los orificios situados entre las marcas realizadas en el riel vertical frontal. 2 Coloque dos tornillos Phillips con arandela 10-32 x 0,5 pulgadas en los orificios superior e inferior de la superficie de montaje del soporte para fijar el riel de montaje al riel vertical frontal. 3 En la parte posterior del armario, tire hacia atrás de la superficie de montaje del soporte hasta que los orificios de montaje queden alineados con los orificios correspondientes del riel vertical posterior. 4 Coloque dos tornillos Phillips con arandela 10-32 x 0,5 pulgadas en los orificios superior e inferior de la superficie de montaje del soporte para fijar el riel de montaje al riel vertical posterior. 5 Repita del paso 1 al paso 4 para el riel de montaje del otro lado del rack. 6 Asegúrese de que los rieles de montaje estén montados en la misma posición en los rieles verticales de ambos lados del rack.Instalación del rack de cuatro postes 177 Figura 1-8. Instalación de los rieles de montaje VersaRails 1 Superficie de montaje del soporte 2 Tornillos Phillips con arandela 10-32 x 0,5 pulgadas (4 por riel de montaje) 3 Rieles de montaje (2) Parte frontal del rack 1 2 3178 Instalación del rack de cuatro postes Instalación del sistema en el rack PRECAUCIÓN: si va a instalar más de un sistema, instale el primero en la posición más baja disponible en el rack. PRECAUCIÓN: debido al tamaño y el peso del sistema, no intente nunca instalarlo en los rieles de montaje usted solo. Instalación de un sistema con rieles deslizantes 1 Tire de los dos rieles deslizantes internos hacia fuera del rack hasta que queden totalmente extendidos (vea la figura 1-9). 2 Levante el sistema hasta colocarlo por encima de los rieles deslizantes extendidos. Los tres tornillos de pivote de cada lado del sistema encajan en las ranuras J correspondientes de los ensamblajes deslizantes internos (vea la figura 1-9). 3 Baje la parte posterior del sistema alineando los tornillos de pivote posteriores situados en los lados del sistema con las ranuras J posteriores de los ensamblajes deslizantes. 4 Coloque los tornillos de pivote posteriores en sus respectivas ranuras J. 5 Baje la parte frontal del sistema y encaje los tornillos de pivote centrales y frontales en sus respectivas ranuras J de los ensamblajes deslizantes. El pestillo de liberación del sistema de la parte frontal del riel deslizante interno encajará en su sitio cuando el tornillo de pivote encaje en la ranura frontal. Utilice este pestillo de liberación del sistema cuando desee extraer el sistema de los ensamblajes deslizantes. 6 Presione el pestillo de liberación deslizante de la parte exterior de cada riel deslizante interno y, a continuación, inserte el sistema en el rack. 7 Instale el brazo para tendido de cables. Consulte “Instalación de la bandeja y el brazo para tendido de cables (únicamente en los kits de rieles deslizantes)” en la página 182. 8 Apriete los tornillos mariposa del panel frontal del rack para fijar los ensamblajes deslizantes al rack.Instalación del rack de cuatro postes 179 Figura 1-9. Instalación de un sistema con rieles deslizantes 1 Tornillos de pivote (6) 2 Pestillo de liberación deslizante 3 Ranuras J (6) 4 Pestillo de liberación frontal 5 Rieles deslizantes internos (2) 1 2 4 3 5180 Instalación del rack de cuatro postes Instalación de un sistema con rieles estáticos Para instalar el sistema en el rack, realice el procedimiento siguiente: 1 En la parte frontal del sistema, coloque el chasis en una posición en la que los módulos de rieles del chasis queden alineados con los rieles de montaje del rack. 2 Vuelva a insertar el chasis en los rieles de montaje hasta que el sistema se detenga (vea la figura 1-10). 3 Fije ambos tornillos mariposa en el panel frontal del chasis. 4 Instale el embellecedor frontal opcional (si procede). Para instalarlo, consulte los procedimientos en la documentación suministrada con el sistema. Figura 1-10. Instalación de un sistema con rieles estáticos 1 Rieles de montaje (2) 2 Módulos de rieles del chasis (2) 3 Tornillos mariposa (2) 4 Pestillos de liberación (2) 1 3 4 2Instalación del rack de cuatro postes 181 5 Localice los puntos de fijación de las abrazaderas desmontables ubicados en las dos superficies de montaje del soporte posterior (vea la figura 1-11). Estas abrazaderas sirven para fijar los cables del sistema a los rieles de montaje. Figura 1-11. Instalación de las abrazaderas desmontables 6 Empuje el dispositivo de sujeción de la abrazadera por el punto de fijación. 7 Empuje el fiador de la abrazadera hasta que encaje para fijar la abrazadera al riel de montaje. 8 Mediante la abrazadera desmontable, sujete los cables del sistema al riel de montaje. 1 Rieles de montaje (2) 2 Abrazaderas desmontables (2) 1 2182 Instalación del rack de cuatro postes Colocación de las puertas del rack Para colocar las puertas, consulte los procedimientos en la documentación suministrada con el rack. PRECAUCIÓN: debido al tamaño y el peso de las puertas del armario rack, nunca debe intentar montarlas ni desmontarlas una sola persona. Instalación de la bandeja y el brazo para tendido de cables (únicamente en los kits de rieles deslizantes) NOTA: este procedimiento no se aplica al kit de rieles estáticos. Instalación de la bandeja 1 En la parte posterior del sistema, ajuste los extremos de la bandeja entre los extremos de los rieles de montaje y deslícela hacia adelante hasta que quede encajada en su sitio (vea la figura 1-12). 2 Para preparar la instalación del brazo para tendido de cables, libere el retén del centro del seguro de retención del brazo para tendido de cables y gire el seguro hacia abajo (vea la figura 1-12). Figura 1-12. Instalación de la bandeja 1 Rieles de montaje (2) 2 Bandeja 3 Seguro de retención del brazo para tendido de cables 1 3 Parte posterior del sistema 2Instalación del rack de cuatro postes 183 Instalación del brazo para tendido de cables NOTA: el brazo para tendido de cables se puede colocar tanto en el riel de montaje de la derecha como en el de la izquierda, según cómo desee dirigir los cables desde el sistema. 1 Si es necesario, libere el retén del centro del seguro de retención del brazo para tendido de cables en la bandeja y gire el seguro hacia abajo (vea la figura 1-12). 2 En la parte posterior del sistema, encaje el pestillo del extremo frontal del brazo para tendido de cables en el soporte más interno del ensamblaje deslizante hasta que el pestillo encaje en su sitio (vea la figura 1-13). 3 Encaje el pestillo del extremo sin fijar del brazo para tendido de cables en el soporte más externo del ensamblaje deslizante hasta que el pestillo encaje en su sitio (vea la figura 1-13). Figura 1-13. Instalación del brazo para tendido de cables 1 Rieles de montaje (2) 2 Soportes (2) 3 Pestillos (2) 4 Brazo para tendido de cables Parte posterior del sistema 1 2 4 3184 Instalación del rack de cuatro postes Cableado 1 Abra la tapa del soporte para cables de la parte superior del brazo para tendido de cables para poder colocar los cables en los brazos (vea la figura 1-14). Figura 1-14. Cableado en el brazo para tendido de cables 2 Si procede, conecte el cable de indicador de estado del sistema en su conector del panel posterior del sistema. Pase el cable de indicador de estado del sistema por el brazo para tendido de cables e inserte el extremo del LED en la ranura del extremo del brazo para tendido de cables. 3 Enchufe los conectores de cable de E/S y de cable de alimentación en sus conectores respectivos del panel posterior del sistema. Para obtener más información sobre las conexiones de los cables, consulte la Guía de introducción del sistema o el Manual del propietario del hardware. NOTA: coloque los lazos liberadores de tensión en la parte posterior de las fuentes de alimentación para liberar la tensión de los cables de alimentación. 1 Brazo para tendido de cables 2 Abrazaderas preinstaladas 3 Seguro de retención del brazo para tendido de cables 4 Tapa del soporte 5 Conector del cable de indicador de estado del sistema 6 Tira de velcro 7 Abrazaderas preinstaladas 4 5 2 3 6 Parte posterior del sistema 1 7Instalación del rack de cuatro postes 185 4 Utilice las abrazaderas incluidas en el kit de rack para agrupar los cables de modo que no interfieran en los sistemas adyacentes al rack. 5 Pase los cables a través de los soportes del brazo para tendido de cables. 6 Realice los ajustes de holgura necesarios en los cables en las posiciones de las bisagras y fije los cables agrupados con la tira de velcro vertical (vea la figura 1-14). 7 Utilice las abrazaderas preinstaladas en el extremo interno y el punto de bisagra del brazo para tendido de cables para fijar los cables agrupados en el canal del brazo (vea la figura 1-14). 8 Cierre la tapa del soporte para cables. 9 Desatornille los tornillos mariposa que fijan la parte frontal del sistema al riel vertical frontal. 10 Deslice el sistema dentro y fuera del rack para comprobar que los cables estén colocados correctamente y que no queden doblados o estirados ni interfieran con el movimiento del brazo para tendido de cables. Ajuste los cables en el interior del brazo para tendido de cables según sea necesario. NOTA: si extrae el sistema hasta la posición máxima, los ensamblajes deslizantes quedarán bloqueados en la posición extendida. Para desbloquearlos, presione el seguro de liberación deslizante del lateral del ensamblaje deslizante y, a continuación, inserte el sistema en el rack. 11 Cuando haya comprobado que los cables están colocados correctamente, inserte el sistema totalmente en el rack. 12 Levante el seguro de retención del brazo para tendido de cables de la bandeja para fijar el brazo (vea la figura 1-14). Extracción del sistema del rack Extracción de un sistema con rieles deslizantes Para extraer el sistema del rack, realice el procedimiento siguiente: 1 Apague el sistema y los periféricos conectados, y desconecte el sistema de la toma eléctrica. 2 Desenchufe los conectores de cable de E/S y de cable de alimentación de sus conectores respectivos en el panel posterior del sistema. 3 Afloje los tornillos mariposa situados en ambos lados del panel frontal del chasis que fijan el sistema al rack. 4 Tire del sistema para extraerlo del rack hasta que se detenga con los rieles totalmente extendidos. 5 Tire del pestillo de liberación frontal de cada riel (vea la figura 1-9) y deslice el sistema hacia delante. 6 Tire del sistema hasta extraerlo completamente del rack.186 Instalación del rack de cuatro postes Extracción de un sistema con rieles estáticos Para extraer el sistema del rack, realice el procedimiento siguiente: 1 Apague el sistema y los periféricos conectados, y desconecte el sistema de la toma eléctrica. 2 Afloje los tornillos mariposa situados en ambos lados del panel frontal del chasis que fijan el sistema al rack. 3 Desconecte todos los cables del sistema. 4 Tire del sistema para extraerlo del rack hasta que se detenga debido a los pestillos de liberación. 5 Presione hacia abajo los pestillos de liberación de ambos lados del sistema (vea la figura 1-10). 6 Tire del sistema hasta extraerlo completamente del rack.Instalación del rack de dos postes 187 Instalación del rack de dos postes El kit de rack de dos postes se utiliza para instalar un sistema en un rack abierto de dos postes, como los que se encuentran en las instalaciones de equipos de telecomunicaciones. Admite racks de dos postes de 7,62 cm o 15,24 cm de anchura, con separación universal o ancha entre orificios. Puede instalar este kit en una configuración de montaje centrado o a ras. Debe fijar correctamente el rack de telecomunicaciones en el suelo, el techo o la pared y, cuando proceda, a los racks adyacentes, mediante los dispositivos de sujeción y las abrazaderas de suelo y pared especificados o aprobados por el fabricante del rack o las normas industriales al respecto. Antes de iniciar la instalación, consulte la documentación de racks de dos postes del fabricante para consultar las advertencias de seguridad. PRECAUCIÓN: no intente instalar el sistema en un rack abierto de dos postes que no se haya fijado en su ubicación de forma segura. Si no sigue esta precaución, el sistema puede resultar dañado y usted u otras personas podrían lesionarse. Instrucciones de seguridad Siga estas pautas de seguridad para garantizar su propia seguridad y proteger el sistema y el entorno de trabajo frente a posibles daños. Para obtener información completa acerca de la seguridad, consulte la Guía de información del producto. SEGURIDAD: Montaje de sistemas en rack Tenga en cuenta las precauciones siguientes para garantizar la estabilidad y la seguridad del rack. Consulte también la documentación de instalación del rack incluida con el sistema y el rack para ver las instrucciones y los procedimientos específicos de precaución. Los sistemas se consideran componentes de un rack. Por lo tanto, “componente” se refiere a cualquier sistema, así como a los distintos periféricos o al hardware de soporte. PRECAUCIÓN: después de instalar los sistemas o componentes en un rack, no extraiga más de un componente sobre sus ensamblajes deslizantes a la vez. El peso de más de un componente extendido puede provocar que el rack se vuelque y ello puede producir lesiones graves. NOTA: este sistema tiene el certificado de seguridad de una unidad independiente y como un componente para uso en un armario rack Dell con el kit de rack para clientes. La instalación del sistema y del kit de rack en otros armarios rack no ha sido aprobada por ninguna agencia de seguridad. Es su responsabilidad asegurarse de que la combinación final de sistema y rack cumpla los estándares de seguridad correspondientes y los requisitos de códigos de electricidad locales. Dell declina todas las responsabilidades y garantías con relación a tales combinaciones. 188 Instalación del rack de dos postes • Los kits de rack del sistema están diseñados para ser instalados en un rack por técnicos de servicio cualificados. Si instala el kit en cualquier otro rack, cerciórese de que éste cumpla las especificaciones de un rack Dell. PRECAUCIÓN: no mueva los racks sin la ayuda de otra persona. Debido a la altura y el peso del rack, se recomienda un mínimo de dos personas para realizar dicha tarea. • Cargue siempre el rack desde la parte inferior hacia arriba, colocando en primer lugar el elemento más pesado. • El rack debe estar nivelado y estable antes de extender un componente. • Tenga cuidado al presionar los pestillos de liberación de los rieles de componentes y al extraer o introducir un componente del rack, puesto que sus dedos pueden quedar aprisionados en los rieles deslizantes. • No sobrecargue el circuito de alimentación de CA que suministra alimentación al rack. La carga total del rack no debe ser superior al 80 % de la corriente nominal del circuito. • Los componentes del rack deben disponer de una ventilación suficiente. • No suba sobre ningún componente ni lo utilice como escalón para realizar operaciones en los componentes de un rack. Antes de comenzar Antes de montar el sistema en el rack, lea detenidamente la sección “Instrucciones de seguridad” de esta guía, así como las instrucciones de seguridad que se incluyen en la Guía de información del producto para obtener información adicional. PRECAUCIÓN: cuando instale varios sistemas en un rack, realice todos los procedimientos para un sistema antes de instalar el siguiente sistema. NOTA: para obtener instrucciones sobre la instalación del sistema, consulte “Instalación del sistema en el rack” en la página 198. Información importante sobre seguridad Tenga en cuenta las precauciones de seguridad descritas en los apartados siguientes al instalar el sistema en el rack. PRECAUCIÓN: debe seguir estrictamente los procedimientos que se explican en este documento para protegerse a sí mismo y a otras personas que puedan verse involucradas. El sistema puede tener una envergadura y un peso considerables, por lo que son importantes una preparación y una planificación adecuadas para evitar lesiones personales. Esta precaución es aún más importante cuando se montan sistemas en la parte alta del rack. PRECAUCIÓN: no instale componentes de kit de rack que estén diseñados para otro sistema. Utilice únicamente el kit de rack correspondiente a su sistema. Si utiliza un kit de rack para otro sistema, pueden producirse daños en el sistema y lesiones personales.Instalación del rack de dos postes 189 Herramientas y material recomendados • Destornillador Phillips del nº 2 • Llave o destornillador para tuercas hexagonales de 3/8 pulgadas (si se cambia del montaje en soporte al montaje a ras) • Cinta adhesiva o rotulador de punta de fieltro para marcar los orificios de montaje Contenido del kit de rack El kit de rack de dos postes incluye (vea la figura 2-1): • Un par de rieles de montaje • 8 tornillos Phillips de cabeza cónica 12-24 x 0,5 pulgadas • 2 abrazaderas desmontables (no se muestran en la figura 2-1) Figura 2-1. Componentes del kit de rack de dos postes 1 8 tornillos Phillips de cabeza cónica 12-24 x 0,5 pulgadas 2 Espárragos de montaje centrado de 15,24 cm 3 Espárragos de montaje centrado de 7,62 cm 4 Superficie de montaje ajustable 5 Superficie de montaje centrado 6 Espárragos de montaje a ras de 15,24 cm 7 Espárragos de montaje a ras de 7,62 cm 8 Superficie de montaje a ras 9 Rieles de montaje (2) 9 1 7 8 6 5 3 2 4190 Instalación del rack de dos postes Tareas de instalación Para instalar un kit de rack de dos postes se deben realizar las tareas siguientes en el orden indicado: 1 Marcado del rack • Rack con separación universal entre orificios • Rack con separación ancha entre orificios 2 Instalación de los rieles de montaje en el rack • Montaje centrado • Montaje a ras 3 Instalación del sistema en el rack 4 Cableado Marcado del rack Debe dejar 1 U (44 mm) de espacio vertical para cada sistema que monte en el rack de dos postes. Racks con separación universal entre orificios Los racks con separación universal entre orificios tienen un patrón alterno de tres orificios por unidad de rack con una separación entre orificios de centro a centro (empezando por el orificio superior de un espacio 1 U) de 15,9 mm, 15,9 mm y 12,7 mm para las columnas de orificios verticales frontal y posterior (vea la figura 2-2). Figura 2-2. Separación universal entre los orificios en un rack abierto de dos postes 12,7 mm 15,9 mm 15,9 mm 1 U (44 mm)Instalación del rack de dos postes 191 Racks con separación ancha entre orificios Los racks con separación ancha entre orificios tienen un patrón alterno de dos orificios por unidad de rack con una separación entre orificios de centro a centro (empezando por el orificio superior de un espacio 1 U) de 31,7 mm y 12,7 mm para las columnas de orificios verticales frontal y posterior (vea la figura 2-3). Figura 2-3. Separación ancha entre los orificios en un rack abierto de dos postes Para marcar el rack, realice los pasos siguientes: 1 Marque los rieles verticales frontales en los que desee colocar la parte inferior del sistema que está instalando en el rack de dos postes. La parte inferior de cada espacio 1 U se encuentra en el centro de la zona metálica más estrecha entre los orificios. NOTA: si el rack tiene una separación ancha entre orificios, vaya al paso 3. 2 Coloque una marca a 44 mm por encima de la marca original que ha realizado o cuente tres orificios en un rack con separación universal entre orificios (vea la figura 2-2). Cada 1 U (44 mm) de espacio vertical en un rack con separación universal entre orificios tiene tres orificios con una separación de centro a centro entre orificios (empezando por la parte superior de un espacio 1 U) de 15,9 mm, 15,9 mm y 12,7 mm (vea la figura 2-2). NOTA: si el rack tiene una separación universal entre orificios, el procedimiento de marcado del rack habrá finalizado. 3 Coloque una marca a 44 mm por encima de la marca original que ha realizado o cuente hasta el siguiente orificio del rack si éste tiene una separación ancha entre orificios (vea la figura 2-3). Cada 1 U (44 mm) de espacio vertical en un rack con separación ancha entre orificios tiene dos orificios con una separación de centro a centro entre orificios (empezando por la parte superior de un espacio 1 U) de 31,7 mm (vea la figura 2-3). 1 U (44 mm) 12,7 mm 31,7 mm192 Instalación del rack de dos postes Instalación de los rieles de montaje Puede instalar los rieles de montaje en un rack abierto de dos postes que tenga separación universal entre orificios (vea la figura 2-2) o separación ancha entre orificios (vea la figura 2-3). Puede instalar los rieles de montaje en una configuración de montaje centrado o a ras. PRECAUCIÓN: no monte otro sistema utilizando este kit de rack. Utilice únicamente el kit de rack diseñado para su sistema. Si utiliza un kit de rack para otro sistema, pueden producirse daños en el sistema y lesiones personales. Montaje centrado El kit de rack de dos postes se entrega con los soportes configurados para un montaje centrado de 7,62 cm de ancho. La figura 2-1 muestra los componentes del riel de montaje. Para completar la instalación, realice los pasos siguientes: 1 Localice el riel de montaje derecho y empuje el soporte de montaje ajustable hacia la parte posterior del riel de montaje (vea la figura 2-4). 2 Coloque el riel de montaje derecho en el rack de dos postes en la posición que haya marcado, empuje el soporte de montaje ajustable de montaje centrado hacia el rack de dos postes vertical y, por último, fije la superficie de montaje y el soporte de montaje ajustable al rack mediante cuatro tornillos Phillips de cabeza cónica 12-24 x 0,5 pulgadas (vea la figura 2-4). 3 Repita el paso 1 y el paso 2 para instalar el riel de montaje izquierdo en el rack.Instalación del rack de dos postes 193 Figura 2-4. Instalación de los rieles de montaje para una configuración de montaje centrado 1 Rack abierto de dos postes 2 Tornillos Phillips de cabeza cónica 12-24 x 0,5 pulgadas (4 por riel) 3 Superficie de montaje centrado 2 Rieles de montaje (2) 4 Rieles del sistema (2) 6 Pestillo de liberación 2 1 4 6 3 5194 Instalación del rack de dos postes Montaje a ras El kit de rack de dos postes se entrega con los soportes configurados para un montaje centrado de 7,62 cm de ancho. La figura 2-1 muestra los componentes del riel de montaje. Para preparar los rieles de montaje para la instalación a ras en el rack de dos postes, siga estos pasos: 1 Localice los dos rieles de montaje y colóquelos uno al lado del otro en una superficie lisa, con los extremos frontales de los rieles de montaje orientados hacia usted (vea la figura 2-5). 2 Mediante una llave o un destornillador para tuercas hexagonales de 3/8 pulgadas, extraiga las dos tuercas del soporte de montaje ajustable (vea la figura 2-5). 3 Extraiga el soporte y colóquelo en los espárragos de montaje a ras de 7,62 cm o 15,24 cm (vea la figura 2-5). 4 Apriete las dos tuercas que ha extraído en el paso 2 para fijar el soporte de montaje ajustable (vea la figura 2-5). 5 Repita del paso 2 al paso 4 para montar el otro riel de montaje.Instalación del rack de dos postes 195 Figura 2-5. Configuración del soporte de montaje ajustable para el montaje a ras 6 Coloque el riel de montaje izquierdo en la ubicación que ha marcado, coloque firmemente la superficie de montaje a ras contra la parte frontal del rack de dos postes vertical y fíjela al riel de dos postes con dos tornillos Phillips de cabeza cónica 12-24 x 0,5 pulgadas (vea la figura 2-6). 7 Deslice el soporte de montaje ajustable de modo que quede colocado contra la parte posterior del rack de dos postes vertical y fíjelo al riel de dos postes mediante dos tornillos Phillips de cabeza cónica 12-24 x 0,5 pulgadas (vea la figura 2-6). 8 Repita el paso 6 y el paso 7 para instalar el riel de montaje derecho en el rack. 9 Mediante una llave o un destornillador para tuercas hexagonales de 3/8 pulgadas, apriete las tuercas de los soportes de montaje ajustables de los dos rieles de montaje. 1 Tuercas (2 por soporte) 2 Soporte de montaje ajustable 3 Espárragos de montaje a ras de 7,62 cm 4 Superficie de montaje a ras 1 4 3 2196 Instalación del rack de dos postes Figura 2-6. Instalación de los rieles de montaje para una configuración de montaje a ras 1 Rack abierto de dos postes 2 Tornillos Phillips de cabeza cónica 12-24 x 0,5 pulgadas (4 por riel) 3 Rieles de montaje (2) 2 1 3Instalación del rack de dos postes 197 Instalación de los módulos de rieles estáticos del chasis NOTA: no es necesario extraer el embellecedor frontal opcional para instalar o extraer los módulos de rieles estáticos del chasis. 1 Para instalar un módulo de rieles, localice las tres ranuras en forma de cerradura del módulo de rieles y los tornillos de pivote correspondientes en el lateral del sistema (vea la figura 2-7). 2 Coloque el módulo de rieles al lado del sistema de modo que los tornillos de pivote se ajusten a la parte redonda de las ranuras y, a continuación, inserte el módulo hacia la parte posterior del sistema. 3 Repita los pasos 1 y 2 para instalar el otro módulo de rieles. Para extraer un módulo de rieles del chasis, tire del pestillo de liberación, deslice el riel hacia adelante y extraiga el módulo de rieles del chasis. Figura 2-7. Instalación y extracción de los módulos de rieles estáticos del chasis 1 Ranuras en forma de cerradura (6) 2 Tornillos de pivote (6) 3 Pestillo de liberación 4 Módulos de rieles (2) 5 Sistema 4 2 3 1 5198 Instalación del rack de dos postes Instalación del sistema en el rack PRECAUCIÓN: si va a instalar más de un sistema, instale el primero en la posición más baja disponible en el rack. 1 Coloque una mano en la parte inferior frontal del sistema y la otra en la parte inferior posterior. 2 Levante el sistema hasta colocarlo en una posición en la que los rieles laterales de la parte posterior del sistema queden alineados con los rieles de montaje del rack. PRECAUCIÓN: debido al tamaño y el peso del sistema, no intente nunca instalarlo en los rieles de montaje usted solo. 3 Inserte el sistema en los rieles de montaje hasta que se detenga. 4 Inserte y apriete los tornillos mariposa de ambos lados del panel frontal del chasis para fijar el sistema en el rack. Extracción del sistema del rack Para extraer el sistema del rack, realice el procedimiento siguiente: 1 Apague el sistema y los periféricos conectados, y desconecte el sistema de la toma eléctrica. 2 Afloje los tornillos mariposa situados en ambos lados del panel frontal del chasis que fijan el sistema al rack. 3 Desconecte todos los cables del sistema. 4 Tire del sistema para extraerlo del rack hasta que se detenga debido a los pestillos de liberación. 5 Presione hacia abajo los pestillos de liberación de ambos lados del sistema (vea la figura 1-10). 6 Tire del sistema hasta extraerlo completamente del rack.Índice 199 Índice B bandeja para cables, instalar, 182 brazo para tendido de cables cablear, 185 instalar, 182 C cablear, 184 cables, 185 colocar las puertas del rack, 182 configuración de montaje a ras, 194 centrado, 192 contenido del kit rack de dos postes, 189 VersaRails, 168-169, 181 contenido enumerado kit de rack de dos postes, 189 kit VersaRails, 168-169 E extraer sistema rack de cuatro postes, 185, 198 H herramientas y material kit de rack de cuatro postes, 167 kit de rack de dos postes, 189 I instalar bandeja para cables, 182 brazo para tendido de cables, 182 kit de rack de cuatro postes, 175 kit de rack de dos postes, 187 módulos de rieles estáticos, 174, 197 rieles de montaje en rack de dos postes, 192, 194 rieles de montaje RapidRails, 175 rieles de montaje VersaRails, 174, 177, 179, 197 sistema en rack de cuatro postes, 178, 198 instrucciones de seguridad, 165, 187 K kit de rack de cuatro postes contenido del kit VersaRails, 168-169 herramientas y material, 167 kit de rack de dos postes contenido del kit, 189 herramientas y material, 189 instalar rieles de montaje, 192 marcar rack, 190 M marcar rack kit de rack de cuatro postes, 170 kit de rack de dos postes, 190-191 P pies estabilizadores, 167 precauciones para el montaje del rack, 166, 188 puertas colocar, 182 extraer, 170200 Índice 200 Índice R rack de cuatro postes extraer sistema, 185, 198 rack, pies estabilizadores, 167 requisitos del rack para VersaRails, 167 rieles verticales marcar, 170 una unidad de rack, 171 T tendido de cables, 184 U unidad de rack, 171 V VersaRails contenido del kit, 168-169, 181 instalar, 174, 177, 179, 197 LVDIMM 1600 MHz sur les plateformes AMD — Mise à jour des informations Ce document fournit des informations sur le comportement des LVDIMM 1600 MHz sur les systèmes Dell PowerEdge suivants : • R415 • R515 • R815 • R715 • M915 Les options de tension de fonctionnement qui figurent dans le BIOS sont Auto, 1,5 V et 1,35 V. Le tableau suivant répertorie la fréquence et la tension de fonctionnement de la mémoire auxquelles le LVDIMM 1600 MHz fonctionne. Pour assurer le maintien de la fréquence de 1600 MHz du LVDIMM 1600 MHz, définissez sur 1,5 V la Memory Operating Voltage (Tension de fonctionnement de la mémoire) dans le BIOS. Option BIOS Fréquence Tension de fonctionnement de la mémoire (Option par défaut : Auto) 1 333 MHz 1,35 V 1,35 V 1 333 MHz 1,35 V 1,5 V 1600 MHz 1,5 V 2012 - 12 Rév. A00Pour ce faire : 1 Allumez ou redémarrez le système. 2 Appuyez sur pour accéder à la configuration du BIOS système. REMARQUE : le système ne répond pas tant que le clavier USB n'est pas actif. Si le système d'exploitation commence à se charger alors que vous n'avez pas encore appuyé sur , attendez qu'il finisse de démarrer, puis redémarrez-le et réessayez. 3 Dans l'écran Memory Settings (Paramètres de mémoire), définissez la valeur de tension de fonctionnement sur 1,5 V à l'aide des touches de navigation de configuration du système. 4 Enregistrez et quittez la configuration du BIOS. ___________________ © 2012 Dell Inc. Marques utilisées dans ce document : Dell™ et le logo DELL sont des marques de Dell Inc. AMD® est une marque déposée d'Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. AMD™ Processor Update HT Assist AMD Opteron™ 24XX and 84XX processors enabled with HT Assist feature allow faster HyperTransport™ (HT) transfers. However, when enabled, HT Assist reduces the L3 cache size from 6 MB to 5 MB. System reboot after enabling HT Assist reports the reduced L3 cache size and continues to do so until disabled. The HT Assist feature can be enabled or disabled using your system's BIOS settings. For information on accessing BIOS settings, see your system's Hardware Owner's Manual on the Dell Support website at www.support.dell.com/manuals. HyperTransport Technology Depending on your system capability, you can set your system’s HyperTransport mode to HT3. Your system and/or processors may or may not be HT3 capable, depending on when it was shipped. HT3 technology was added to selected Dell systems in early 2009 and HT3 processors became available in May 2009. During system startup, the system BIOS checks the system board revision number and the HT capability of all installed processors. If the system is capable of running at HT3 frequency, the HyperTransport Technology field in the BIOS settings is set to HT3 by default. You can then set the field to either HT1 or HT3, depending on which setting gives you the best performance for your particular application. If your system is not HT3 capable, this field is set to HT1 and read only. July 2009____________________ Information in this document is subject to change without notice. © 2009 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. Reproduction of these materials in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden. Trademarks used in this text: Dell and the DELL logo are trademarks of Dell Inc.; AMD, AMD Opteron, and HyperTransport are trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own.AMD™处理器更新 HT Assist 启用 AMD Opteron™ 24XX 和 84XX 处理器的 HT Assist 功能使 HyperTransport™ (HT) 的转换更快。但是启用后, HT Assist 会使高 速缓存 L3 的大小从 6 MB 降到 5 MB。 HT Assist 启用后,系统将重新引导,随后将报告 L3 高速缓存大小降低, 并继续此类报告直到 HT Assist 被禁用。使用系统的 BIOS 设置时, HT Assist 功能可启用或禁用。 有关访问 BIOS 设置的信息,请参阅 Dell Support 网站 www.support.dell.com/manuals 上的 Hardware Owner's Manual (硬件用户手册)。 HyperTransport 技术 根据您系统的功能,您可以将系统的 HyperTransport 模式设置为 HT3。 您的系统和 / 或处理器可能支持,也可能不支持 HT3,这与它们的出厂时间 有关。HT3 技术于 2009 年初应用于某些选定的 Dell 系统,而 HT3 处理器于 2009 年 5 月才得以正式应用。 系统启动时,系统 BIOS 会检查系统板版本号和所有已安装处理器的 HT 功能。如果系统支持在 HT3 频率下运行,则 BIOS 设置中的 HyperTransport 技术字段会默认设置为 HT3。您随后可以自行将该字段设置为 HT1 或 HT3,具体取决于哪种设置可使您的特定应用程序发挥最佳性能。 如果您的系统不支持 HT3,则该字段将设置为 HT1,且为只读。 2009 年 7 月____________________ 本说明文件中的信息如有更改,恕不另行通知。 © 2009 Dell Inc. 版权所有,翻印必究。 未经 Dell Inc. 书面许可,严禁以任何形式复制这些材料。 此文中使用的商标:Dell 和 DELL 徽标是 Dell Inc.的商标; AMD、 AMD Opteron 和 HyperTransport是 Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. 的商标。 本说明文件中述及的其它商标和产品名称是指拥有相应商标和产品名称的公司或其制造的产品。 Dell Inc. 对本公司的商标和产品名称之外的其它商标和产品名称不拥有任何专有权。Mise à jour concernant le processeur AMD™ HT Assist La fonction HT Assist permet aux processeurs AMD Opteron™ 24XX et 84XX qui en sont dotés d'accélérer les transferts HyperTransport™ (HT). Cependant, lorsque cette fonction est activée, la taille du cache L3 est réduite de 6 Mo à 5 Mo. Après l'activation de la fonction HT Assist, cette réduction est signalée par le système lors de son redémarrage et de tous les redémarrages suivants tant que la fonction n'est pas désactivée. La fonction HT Assist peut être activée ou désactivée par l'intermédiaire des paramètres du BIOS du système. Pour savoir comment accéder à ces paramètres, voir le Manuel du propriétaire du système disponible sur le site web du support de Dell, www.support.dell.com/manuals. Technologie HyperTransport Selon votre système, vous pourrez peut-être définir le mode HyperTransport sur HT3. Selon la date à laquelle il a été livré, votre système (et/ou les processeurs) peut ne pas prendre en charge ce mode. La technologie HT3 a été intégrée à certains systèmes Dell début 2009. Les processeurs HT3 sont disponibles depuis mai 2009. Au cours du démarrage, le BIOS du système détecte le numéro de révision de la carte système et vérifie si les processeurs installés prennent en charge la technologie HT. Si le système prend en charge la fréquence HT3, le champ HyperTransport Technology du BIOS est défini sur HT3 par défaut. Vous pouvez par la suite définir ce champ sur HT1 ou HT3 afin d'utiliser le mode offrant les performances les mieux adaptées à l'usage auquel votre système est destiné. Si le système ne prend pas en charge la fréquence HT3, ce champ est défini sur HT1 et est en lecture seule. Juillet 2009____________________ Les informations contenues dans ce document sont sujettes à modification sans préavis. © 2009 Dell Inc. Tous droits réservés. La reproduction de ce document de quelque manière que ce soit sans l'autorisation écrite de Dell Inc. est strictement interdite. Marques mentionnées dans ce document : Dell et le logo DELL sont des marques de Dell Inc. ; AMD, AMD Opteron et HyperTransport sont des marques d'Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. D'autres marques commerciales et noms de marque peuvent être mentionnés dans ce document pour faire référence aux entités se réclamant de ces marques et de ces noms ou de leurs produits. Dell Inc. dénie tout intérêt propriétaire vis-à-vis des marques commerciales et des noms de marque autres que les siens.AMD™ Prozessor-Aktualisierung HT Assist AMD Opteron™ 24XX und 84XX Prozessoren erlauben bei aktiviertem HT Assist einen schnelleren HyperTransport™ (HT)-Transfer. Wenn HT Assist aktiviert ist, reduziert sich die Größe des L3-Cachespeichers allerdings von 6 MB auf 5 MB. Beim Systemneustart nach Aktivierung von HT Assist wird die verminderte Größe des L3-Caches gemeldet. Dies ändert sich erst wieder, nachdem HT Assist deaktiviert wurde. Das Merkmal HT Assist wird über die BIOSEinstellungen Ihres Systems aktiviert oder deaktiviert. Eine Anleitung für den Zugriff auf die BIOS-Einstellungen finden Sie im Hardware-Benutzerhandbuch auf der Dell Support-Website unter www.support.dell.com/manuals. HyperTransport-Technologie Wenn Ihr System entsprechend ausgerüstet ist, können Sie den HyperTransportModus HT3 einstellen. Ob Ihr System und/oder Ihre Prozessoren HT3-fähig sind hängt davon ab, wann das System geliefert wurde. Die HT3-Technologie wurde seit Anfang 2009 in ausgewählte Dell Systeme integriert. HT3-fähige Prozessoren sind seit Mai 2009 verfügbar. Beim Hochfahren überprüft das System-BIOS die Versionsnummer der Systemplatine und die HT-Fähigkeit aller installierten Prozessoren. Wenn das System mit HT3-Taktfrequenz betrieben werden kann, wird das Feld HyperTransport Technology in den BIOS-Einstellungen auf HT3 voreingestellt. Anschließend können Sie das Feld auf HT1 oder HT3 setzen, je nachdem, mit welcher Einstellung Sie die beste Leistung für Ihre jeweilige Anwendung erzielen. Wenn Ihr System nicht HT3-fähig ist, wird dieses Feld auf HT1 gesetzt und der Schreibschutz aktiviert. Juli 2009____________________ Irrtümer und technische Änderungen vorbehalten. © 2009 Dell Inc. Alle Rechte vorbehalten. Die Vervielfältigung oder Wiedergabe dieser Materialien in jeglicher Weise ohne vorherige schriftliche Genehmigung von Dell Inc. sind strengstens untersagt. Marken in diesem Text: Dell und das DELL Logo sind Marken von Dell Inc.; AMD, AMD Opteron und HyperTransport sind Marken von Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. Alle anderen in dieser Dokumentation genannten Marken und Handelsbezeichnungen sind Eigentum der entsprechenden Hersteller und Firmen. Dell Inc. erhebt keinen Anspruch auf Markenzeichen und Handelsbezeichnungen mit Ausnahme der eigenen.AMD™ プロセッサのアップデート HT Assist HT Assist 機能を備えた AMD Opteron™ 24XX および 84XX プロセッサに より、HyperTransport™(HT)転送の高速化が実現しています。ただし、 HT Assist が有効の場合、L3 キャッシュのサイズは 6 MB から 5 MB に縮小し ます。 HT Assist を有効にした後のシステム再起動で、縮小された L3 キャッシュの サイズが報告され、この状況は HT Assist を無効にするまで変わりません。 HT Assist 機能は、システムの BIOS 設定で有効 / 無効を切り替えることがで きます。 BIOS 設定を表示 / 変更する方法については、デルサポートサイト www.support.dell.com/manuals でお使いのシステムの『ハードウェア オーナーズマニュアル』を参照してください。 HyperTransport テクノロジ システムの能力によっては、HyperTransport モードを HT3 に設定すること も可能です。 出荷の時期によっては、システムおよび / またはプロセッサが HT3 に対応し ていない場合があります。HT3 テクノロジが特定の Dell システムに追加され たのは 2009 年初期で、HT3 プロセッサが出回るようになったのは 2009 年 5 月です。 システム起動時に、システム BIOS はシステム基板リビジョン番号および取 り付けられているすべてのプロセッサの HT 機能をチェックします。HT3 の 周波数に対応しているシステムの場合、BIOS 設定の HyperTransport Technology フィールドがデフォルトで HT3 に設定されています。その場合 は、用途に応じて HT1 または HT3 のいずれかパフォーマンスの良い方を選 択できます。 システムが HT3 に対応していない場合、このフィールドは HT1 に設定され ており、読み取り専用です。 2009 年 7 月____________________ 本書の内容は予告なく変更されることがあります。 © 2009 すべての著作権は Dell Inc. にあります。 Dell Inc. の書面による許可のない複製は、いかなる形態においても厳重に禁じられています。 本書に使用されている商標:Dell および DELL ロゴは Dell Inc. の商標です。AMD、 AMD Opteron および HyperTransport は Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. の商標です。 商標または製品の権利を主張する事業体を表すためにその他の商標および社名が使用されて いることがあります。Dell Inc. はデル以外の商標や社名に対する所有権を一切否認します。AMD™프로세서업데이트 HT Assist HT Assist 기능이 활성화된 AMD Opteron™ 24XX 및 84XX 프로세서는 보다 빠른 HyperTransport™ (HT) 전송을 가능하게 합니다 . 하지만 활성화될 경우 HT Assist 기능에 의해 L3 캐쉬 크기가 6MB 에서 5MB로 감소됩니다 . HT Assist 를활성화한후시스템을재부팅하면감소된 L3 캐시크기로보고되 며 비활성화될 때까지 유지됩니다 . HT Assist 기능은 시스템 BIOS 설정을 사 용하여 활성화 또는 비활성화할 수 있습니다 . BIOS 설정 액세스에 관한 정보는 Dell 지원 웹사이트인 www.support.dell.com/manuals 의 하드웨어 소유자 매뉴얼을 참조하십시오 . HyperTransport 기술 시스템처리능력에따라 HyperTransport 모드를 HT3로설정할수있습니다. 시스템및 / 또는프로세서는제품출시시기에따라 HT3 를지원할수도있고 지원하지 않을 수도 있습니다 . HT3 기술은 2009년 초반에 일부 Dell 시스템 에만 추가되었으며 2009 년 5 월부터 HT3 프로세서가 공급되었습니다 . 시스템 시작 시 시스템 BIOS 에서 시스템 보드 개정 번호와 설치된 모든 프로 세서의 HT 기능을 확인합니다 . 시스템이 HT 주파수에서 실행 가능한 경우 BIOS 설정의 HyperTransport Technology필드가 HT3 로 기본 설정됩니다 . 특정응용프로그램의 성능을최적화하는설정이 무엇인가에따라 이필드를 H1 또는 H3로 설정할 수 있습니다 . 시스템에서 HT3를지원하지않는경우이필드는 HT1으로만설정되며읽기 전용이 됩니다 . 2009년 7월____________________ 본문서에수록된정보는사전통보없이변경될수있습니다. © 2009 Dell Inc. 저작권본사소유. Dell Inc.의서면승인 없이 어떠한 경우에도 무단복제하는 것을엄격히 금합니다. 본설명서에 사용된상표인Dell및 DELL로고는Dell Inc.의상표이며, AMD, AMD Opteron및HyperTransport는 Advanced Micro Devices, Inc.의상표입니다 . 본문서에서특정회사의표시나제품이름을지칭하기위해기타상표나상호를사용할수도있습니 다. Dell Inc. 는자사가 소유하고있는것이외에 기타 모든상표및 상호에대한어떠한소유권도없 습니다.Actualización del procesador AMD™ HT Assist Los procesadores AMD Opteron™ 24XX y 84XX compatibles con la función HT Assist permiten transferencias HyperTransport™ (HT) más rápidas. Sin embargo, cuando se habilita HT Assist, el tamaño de la caché L3 se reduce de 6 MB a 5 MB. Esta reducción del tamaño de la caché L3 se notifica a cada reinicio del sistema mientras HT Assist está habilitado. La función HT Assist se habilita y se deshabilita en la configuración del BIOS del sistema. Para obtener información sobre cómo acceder a la configuración del BIOS, consulte el Manual del propietario del hardware correspondiente a su sistema en la página web de asistencia de Dell en www.support.dell.com/manuals. Tecnología HyperTransport Según la capacidad del sistema, es posible establecer el modo de HyperTransport en HT3. Su sistema o sus procesadores serán o no compatibles con HT3 en función del momento de la adquisición. La tecnología HT3 se incorporó en algunos sistemas Dell a principios de 2009, y los procesadores HT3 se comercializaron en mayo de 2009. Durante el inicio del sistema, el BIOS comprueba el número de revisión de la placa base y la compatibilidad con HT de todos los procesadores instalados. Si su sistema es capaz de funcionar con la frecuencia HT3, el campo HyperTransport Technology (Tecnología HyperTransport) de la configuración del BIOS toma el valor HT3 de forma predeterminada. A continuación, puede establecer el campo en el valor HT1 o HT3, según cuál de ellos le proporcione el mejor rendimiento para su aplicación en particular. Si su sistema no es compatible con HT3, este campo toma el valor HT1 y es de sólo lectura. Julio de 2009____________________ La información contenida en este documento puede modificarse sin previo aviso. © 2009 Dell Inc. Todos los derechos reservados. Queda estrictamente prohibida la reproducción de este material en cualquier forma sin la autorización por escrito de Dell Inc. Marcas comerciales utilizadas en este texto: Dell y el logotipo de DELL son marcas registradas de Dell Inc.; AMD, AMD Opteron y HyperTransport son marcas comerciales de Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. Otras marcas y otros nombres comerciales pueden utilizarse en este documento para hacer referencia a las entidades que los poseen o a sus productos. Dell Inc. renuncia a cualquier interés sobre la propiedad de marcas y nombres comerciales que no sean los suyos. 53-1002576-02 ® December 2012 Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference ManualCopyright © 2012 Brocade Communications Systems, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Brocade, Brocade Assurance, the B-wing symbol, BigIron, DCX, Fabric OS, FastIron, MLX, NetIron, SAN Health, ServerIron, TurboIron, VCS, and VDX are registered trademarks, and AnyIO, Brocade One, CloudPlex, Effortless Networking, ICX, NET Health, OpenScript, and The Effortless Network are trademarks of Brocade Communications Systems, Inc., in the United States and/or in other countries. Other brands, products, or service names mentioned may be trademarks of their respective owners. Notice: This document is for informational purposes only and does not set forth any warranty, expressed or implied, concerning any equipment, equipment feature, or service offered or to be offered by Brocade. Brocade reserves the right to make changes to this document at any time, without notice, and assumes no responsibility for its use. This informational document describes features that may not be currently available. Contact a Brocade sales office for information on feature and product availability. Export of technical data contained in this document may require an export license from the United States government. The authors and Brocade Communications Systems, Inc. shall have no liability or responsibility to any person or entity with respect to any loss, cost, liability, or damages arising from the information contained in this book or the computer programs that accompany it. The product described by this document may contain “open source” software covered by the GNU General Public License or other open source license agreements. To find out which open source software is included in Brocade products, view the licensing terms applicable to the open source software, and obtain a copy of the programming source code, please visit http://www.brocade.com/support/oscd. Brocade Communications Systems, Incorporated Corporate and Latin American Headquarters Brocade Communications Systems, Inc. 130 Holger Way San Jose, CA 95134 Tel: 1-408-333-8000 Fax: 1-408-333-8101 E-mail: info@brocade.com Asia-Pacific Headquarters Brocade Communications Systems China HK, Ltd. No. 1 Guanghua Road Chao Yang District Units 2718 and 2818 Beijing 100020, China Tel: +8610 6588 8888 Fax: +8610 6588 9999 E-mail: china-info@brocade.com European Headquarters Brocade Communications Switzerland Sàrl Centre Swissair Tour B - 4ème étage 29, Route de l'Aéroport Case Postale 105 CH-1215 Genève 15 Switzerland Tel: +41 22 799 5640 Fax: +41 22 799 5641 E-mail: emea-info@brocade.com Asia-Pacific Headquarters Brocade Communications Systems Co., Ltd. (Shenzhen WFOE) Citic Plaza No. 233 Tian He Road North Unit 1308 – 13th Floor Guangzhou, China Tel: +8620 3891 2000 Fax: +8620 3891 2111 E-mail: china-info@brocade.com Document History Title Publication number Summary of changes Date Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual 53-1002576-01 New document December 2012 Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual 53-1002576-02 Update Data Transmission Ranges table December 2012Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual iii 53-1002576-02 Contents About This Document In this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii How this document is organized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii Document conventions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii Text formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii Command syntax conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii Notes, cautions, and warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ix Key terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ix Notice to the reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix Additional information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x Brocade resources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x Other industry resources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x Product support documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x Getting technical help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi Document feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii Chapter 1 Brocade M6505 Product Overview In this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 SAN I/O Module overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Operating system support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Hardware features and functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Software features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Optional features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Ports on Demand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 ISL trunking groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Access Gateway and Native Fabric modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Access Gateway mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Native Fabric mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Optional Brocade licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Hardware description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 SAN I/O Module front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 SAN I/O Module side view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 SFP+ transceivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10iv Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual 53-1002576-02 Chapter 2 Installing the SAN I/O Module Unpacking the SAN I/O Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Items included with the SAN I/O Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 System reliability guidelines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Handling static-sensitive devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Preparing the Blade Server Enclosure for the SAN I/O Module. . . .12 Inserting the SAN I/O Module in the Blade Server Enclosure . . . . .13 Handling SFP+ transceivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Inserting an SFP+ transceiver in the SAN I/O Module port . . . . . . .15 Cabling guidelines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Data transmission ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Chapter 3 Configuring the SAN I/O Module In this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Items required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Modifying the SAN I/O Module IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Using the CMC GUI to set the IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Using the CMC CLI to set the IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Using the SAN I/O Module CLI to set the IP address. . . . . . . . .22 Connecting the SAN I/O Module to the Ethernet network . . . . . . . . 24 Connecting to the SAN I/O Module using Web Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Connecting the SAN I/O Module to the fabric. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Chapter 4 Operating the SAN I/O Module In this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Interoperability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Activating Ports on Demand. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Activating ports with a POD license . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Changing from Access Gateway mode to Native Fabric mode. . . . . 31 Disabling Access Gateway mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Changing from Native Fabric mode to Access Gateway mode. . . . .33 Access Gateway mode default port mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Accessing the SAN I/O Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Interpreting POST results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Interpreting SAN I/O Module LED activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Power-on self-test LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Normal-operation LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Removing and replacing SAN I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Removing and replacing SFP+ transceivers and cables . . . . . . . . .39Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual v 53-1002576-02 Switch management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Viewing the configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Upgrading or downgrading firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Changing the default account password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Changing the default account password at login . . . . . . . . . . .42 Backing up the configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 Locating the serial number information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 Appendix A SAN I/O Module Specifications In this appendix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Processor and memory specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Weight and physical dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Environmental specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 Electrical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 Architectural specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 Supported HBAs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Fibre Channel standards compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Regulatory compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 FCC warning (US only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 BSMI statement (Taiwan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 KC statement (Republic of Korea) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 VCCI statement (Japan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 CE statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Canadian requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 Laser compliance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 RTC battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 Regulatory compliance standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 Environmental regulation compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 Environmental Protection Use Period (EPUP) Disclaimer . . . . .50 China RoHS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 Indexvi Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual 53-1002576-02Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual vii 53-1002576-02 About This Document In this chapter •How this document is organized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii •Document conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii •Notice to the reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix •Additional information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x •Getting technical help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi •Document feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii How this document is organized This document is organized to help you find information that you want as quickly and easily as possible. The document contains the following components: • Chapter 1, “Brocade M6505 Product Overview,”describes the Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module and explains its basic concepts and features. This chapter also provides instructions for unpacking the SAN I/O Module from its shipping container, references to the appropriate publication for installing the SAN I/O Module into the Dell M1000e Blade Server Enclosure, and Fibre Channel port cabling guidelines. • Chapter 2, “Installing the SAN I/O Module,” describes the procedures needed to unpack and install the Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module for the Dell M1000e Blade Server Enclosure. • Chapter 3, “Configuring the SAN I/O Module,” describes how to change the IP address of the Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module, connect the module to the Ethernet network and fabric, and connect to the Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module using Web Tools. • Chapter 4, “Operating the SAN I/O Module,” is a reference for understanding the power-on diagnostics and LEDs supporting the Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module. Also provided are details for operating and replacing the Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module, removing and replacing SFP+ transceivers and cables, changing between Access Gateway mode and Native Fabric mode, activating Ports on Demand (POD), backing up the system, maintaining firmware, changing passwords, locating serial number information, and viewing configurations. • Appendix A, “SAN I/O Module Specifications,” provides product specifications and regulatory compliance information.viii Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual 53-1002576-02 Document conventions This section describes text formatting conventions and important notice formats used in this document. Text formatting The narrative-text formatting conventions that are used are as follows: bold text Identifies command names Identifies the names of user-manipulated GUI elements Identifies keywords and operands Identifies text to enter at the GUI or CLI italic text Provides emphasis Identifies variables Identifies paths and Internet addresses Identifies document titles code text Identifies CLI output Identifies command syntax examples For readability, command names in the narrative portions of this guide are presented in mixed lettercase: for example, switchShow. In actual examples, command lettercase is all lowercase. Command syntax conventions Command syntax in this manual follows these conventions: command Commands are printed in bold. --option, option Command options are printed in bold. -argument, arg Arguments. [ ] Optional elements appear in brackets. variable Variables are printed in italics. In the help pages, values are underlined or enclosed in angled brackets < >. ... Repeat the previous element, for example “member[;member...]” value Fixed values following arguments are printed in plain font. For example, --show WWN | Boolean. Elements are exclusive. Example: --show -mode egress | ingressBrocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual ix 53-1002576-02 Notes, cautions, and warnings The following notices and statements are used in this manual. They are listed below in order of increasing severity of potential hazards. NOTE A note provides a tip, guidance, or advice, emphasizes important information, or provides a reference to related information. ATTENTION An Attention statement indicates potential damage to hardware or data. CAUTION A Caution statement alerts you to situations that can be potentially hazardous to you or cause damage to hardware, firmware, software, or data. DANGER A Danger statement indicates conditions or situations that can be potentially lethal or extremely hazardous to you. Safety labels are also attached directly to products to warn of these conditions or situations. Key terms For definitions specific to Brocade and Fibre Channel, see the technical glossaries on MyBrocade. See “Brocade resources” on page x for instructions on accessing MyBrocade. For definitions of SAN-specific terms, visit the Storage Networking Industry Association online dictionary at: http://www.snia.org/education/dictionary Notice to the reader This document may contain references to the trademarks of the following corporations. These trademarks are the properties of their respective companies and corporations. These references are made for informational purposes only. Corporation Referenced trademarks and products Cisco Systems Cisco Dell, Inc. PowerEdge Microsoft Corporation Windows, Windows 2003, Windows 2008, Windows XP Red Hat Inc. Red Hat Enterprise Linux (RHEL)x Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual 53-1002576-02 Additional information This section lists additional Brocade and industry-specific documentation that you might find helpful. Brocade resources To get up-to-the-minute information, go to http://my.brocade.com to register at no cost for a user ID and password. White papers, online demonstrations, and data sheets are available through the Brocade web site at: http://www.brocade.com/products-solutions/products/index.page For additional Brocade documentation, visit the Brocade web site: http://www.brocade.com Release notes are available on the Brocade Connect Web site and are also bundled with the Fabric OS firmware. Other industry resources For additional resource information, visit the Technical Committee T11 web site. This web site provides interface standards for high-performance and mass storage applications for Fibre Channel, storage management, as well as other applications: http://www.t11.org For information about the Fibre Channel industry, visit the Fibre Channel Industry Association web site: http://www.fibrechannel.org Product support documents The following documentation is available from Dell. • Dell PowerEdge M1000e Enclosure Owner’s Manual • Dell Chassis Management Controller Firmware Version 4.x User Guide The following support documentation is provided on the Brocade web site. • Fabric OS Administrator’s Guide • Fabric OS Command Reference The Open Group UNIX VMware SUSE Linux Enterprise Server (SLES) XenServer XEN 6.0 Corporation Referenced trademarks and productsBrocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual xi 53-1002576-02 • Fabric OS MIB Reference • Fabric OS Message Reference • Access Gateway Administrator’s Guide • SAN TECH NOTE - Preparing to Install the Brocade Access Gateway • Web Tools Administrator’s Guide • Fabric Watch Administrator’s Guide • Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module QuickStart Guide • Release notes for the Fabric OS version running on the SAN I/O Module • Release notes specific to the SAN I/O Module NOTE Refer to the latest documentation version for the most up-to-date product information. Getting technical help Contact your switch support supplier for hardware, firmware, and software support, including product repairs and part ordering. To expedite your call, have the following information available: 1. General Information • Dell service tag (listed by the CMC) • Switch model • Switch operating system version • Software name and software version, if applicable • Error numbers and messages received • supportSave command output • Detailed description of the problem, including the switch or fabric behavior immediately following the problem, and specific questions • Description of any troubleshooting steps already performed and the results • Serial console and Telnet session logs • Syslog message logs 2. Switch serial number The switch serial number and corresponding bar code are provided on the serial number label, for example: FT00X0054E9 FT00X0054E9 3. World Wide Name (WWN). Use the wwn or switchShow commands to display the WWN. 4. Software licenses. Use the licenseIdShow command to display the list of licenses and corresponding license IDs available on the unit.xii Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual 53-1002576-02 Document feedback Quality is our first concern at Brocade and we have made every effort to ensure the accuracy and completeness of this document. However, if you find an error or an omission, or you think that a topic needs further development, we want to hear from you. Forward your feedback to: documentation@brocade.com Provide the title and version number of the document, and as much detail as possible about your comment, including the topic heading and page number and your suggestions for improvement.Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual 1 53-1002576-02 Chapter Brocade M6505 Product Overview 1 In this chapter •SAN I/O Module overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 •Operating system support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 •Hardware features and functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 •Software features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 •Ports on Demand. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 •ISL trunking groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 •Access Gateway and Native Fabric modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 •Optional Brocade licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 •Hardware description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 •SFP+ transceivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 SAN I/O Module overview The Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module is a nonblocking, embedded switch with up to 8 external-facing Fibre Channel ports and up to 16 internal-facing Fibre Channel ports that is custom built for the Dell PowerEdge M1000e Blade Server Enclosure. Although the product may ship with a specific number of ports enabled, it can be upgraded to 24 ports through a Ports on Demand (POD) license. NOTE The Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module is also referred to as the SAN I/O Module throughout this document. The eight external ports of the Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module support hot-pluggable Small Form Factor Pluggable plus (SFP+) optical transceivers. Only Brocade-branded optical transceivers are supported. Each external port is independently capable of supporting speeds of 16, 8, and 4 Gbps using auto-sensing. Internal ports support speeds of 16 and 8 Gbps. The switch module operates in either Brocade Access Gateway (AG) or Native Fabric (full-fabric switch) mode. The default mode is AG, which utilizes NPIV for direct connectivity to Brocade, Cisco and/or McData SANs.2 Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual 53-1002576-02 1 Operating system support Operating system support Brocade Fabric OS has no specific host operating system (OS) dependencies. The Fabric OS in the switches allows for any Fibre Channel-compliant device to attach to switches as long as it conforms to the standards for device login, name service, and related Fibre Channel features. The operating systems listed in Table 1 are for the host machine running Brocade management applications outside the Fabric OS, such as Brocade Network Advisor (BNA). For the latest information on operating system support for these applications, refer to the latest released versions of BNA documentation. Hardware features and functionality The SAN I/O Module ships in Access Gateway mode. It provides support for the following hardware features and functionality: • Twelve to 24 auto-negotiating Fibre Channel (FC) ports • Diagnostic ports • Up to eight small form-factor pluggable plus (SFP+) optical transceivers supporting speeds of 16 Gbps, 8 Gbps and 4 Gbps • System LEDs noting system power, switch status, and management health status • One RJ-45 connector for serial console management • Hot pluggable—Up to 4 hot-pluggable SAN I/O Modules per Dell M1000e Blade Server Enclosure chassis • Runtime elements that include health monitoring, uptime, memory information, CPU usage, user information, power, and licenses • Two internal 100 Mbps full-duplex Ethernet ports to connect to the redundant Dell M1000e Chassis Management Controllers (CMCs) • One serial console port on the front panel. TABLE 1 Supported operating systems for management server Operating system Description Microsoft • Windows 2003 SP1, 64-bit (Standard, Enterprise and Web) • Windows 2008 64-bit (Standard, Enterprise and Web) • Windows Server 2008 Hyper-V R2 Linux • Red Hat Enterprise Linux (EL) 5.5 32/64-bit (Standard and Advanced platform) • SUSE Linux ES 11 (SP1 32/64-bit) VMWare VMWare ESX 4.0 (U2) XenServer XEN 6.0Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual 3 53-1002576-02 Software features 1

Adresses complètes sur CD ROM,  téléphone, Fax, emails, nom du dirigeant, etc. Exports illimités ! CLIQUEZ ICI